HomeMy WebLinkAboutContract 54675-PM1FORT WORTH
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
THE CONSTRUCTION OF
Altamesa Boulevard Extension
For 46 Ranch Addition
IPRC Record No. 20-0023
City Project No.102575
FID No. 30114-0200431-102575-E07685
File No. W-2694
Betsy Price
Mayor
X File No. X-26394
Chris Harder
Director, Water Department
David Cooke
City Manager
��l· -=-�'.·· � '•.,IJ' 11 ;;'*/ � .... � !!.."'!.: ........................ :i..t':. � William Johnson, P.E. � DANIEL W. WARFIELD� Director, Transportation and Public Works Department � .. '\"'"'"'9"594'j°'""1'"''H
Prepared for
The City of Fort Worth
Transportation and Public Works Department
••• ••• •••
October 2020
HALFF
3803 Parkwood Blvd., STE 800
Frisco, TX 75034-8640
TBPE Firm No. F-312
'l�... /�:: ',,I 0�···.{�CE'N$�5?.,•' �l,i; $ ,, �ss ......... ,\.f"3" .:;-lt1\ ION AL 't. ,..c\\t\.\'\"\,..'-��
/t)-/5 -ZtYZO
CSC No. 54675-PM1
00 00 00
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Page 1 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS CPN-102575
Revised March 20, 2020
SECTION 00 00 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Division 00 - General Conditions Last Revised
00 11 13 Invitation to Bidders 03/20/2020
00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 03/20/2020
00 41 00 Bid Form 04/02/2014
00 42 43 Proposal Form Unit Price 05/22/2019
00 43 13 Bid Bond 04/02/2014
00 45 11 Bidders Prequalification’s 04/02/2014
00 45 12 Prequalification Statement 09/01/2015
00 45 13 Bidder Prequalification Application 03/09/2020
00 45 26 Contractor Compliance with Workers' Compensation Law 04/02/2014
00 45 40 Minority Business Enterprise Goal 08/21/2018
00 52 43 Agreement 06/16/2016
00 61 25 Certificate of Insurance 07/01/2011
00 62 13 Performance Bond 01/31/2012
00 62 14 Payment Bond 01/31/2012
00 62 19 Maintenance Bond 01/31/2012
00 72 00 General Conditions 11/15/2017
00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions 07/01/2011
00 73 10 Standard City Conditions of the Construction Contract for Developer
Awarded Projects 01/10/2013
Division 01 - General Requirements Last Revised
01 11 00 Summary of Work 12/20/2012
01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 08/30/2013
01 31 19 Preconstruction Meeting 08/30/2013
01 31 20 Project Meetings 07/01/2011
01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule 07/01/2011
01 32 33 Preconstruction Video 08/30/2013
01 33 00 Submittals 08/30/2013
01 35 13 Special Project Procedures 08/30/2013
01 45 23 Testing and Inspection Services 03/20/2020
01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 07/01/2011
01 55 26 Street Use Permit and Modifications to Traffic Control 07/01/2011
01 57 13 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan 07/01/2011
01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage 04/07/2014
01 60 00 Product Requirements 03/20/2020
01 66 00 Product Storage and Handling Requirements 04/07/2014
01 70 00 Mobilization and Remobilization 04/07/2014
01 71 23 Construction Staking 04/07/2014
01 74 23 Cleaning 04/07/2014
01 77 19 Closeout Requirements 04/07/2014
01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 04/07/2014
01 78 39 Project Record Documents 04/07/2014
00 00 00
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Page 2 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS CPN-102575
Revised March 20, 2020
Technical Specifications listed below are included for this Project by reference and can be
viewed/downloaded from the City’s website at:
http://fortworthtexas.gov/tpw/contractors/
or
https://apps.fortworthtexas.gov/ProjectResources/
Division 02 - Existing Conditions Last Revised
02 41 13 Selective Site Demolition 12/20/2012
02 41 14 Utility Removal/Abandonment 12/20/2012
02 41 15 Paving Removal 02/02/2016
Division 03 - Concrete
03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 12/20/2012
03 34 13 Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) 12/20/2012
03 34 16 Concrete Base Material for Trench Repair 12/20/2012
03 80 00 Modifications to Existing Concrete Structures 12/20/2012
Division 26 - Electrical
26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 11/22/2013
26 05 10 Demolition for Electrical Systems 12/20/2012
26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 12/20/2012
26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 07/01/2011
26 05 50 Communications Multi-Duct Conduit 02/26/2016
Division 31 - Earthwork
31 10 00 Site Clearing 12/20/2012
31 23 16 Unclassified Excavation 01/28/2013
31 23 23 Borrow 01/28/2013
31 24 00 Embankments 01/28/2013
31 25 00 Erosion and Sediment Control 12/20/2012
31 36 00 Gabions 12/20/2012
31 37 00 Riprap 12/20/2012
Division 32 - Exterior Improvements
32 01 17 Permanent Asphalt Paving Repair 12/20/2012
32 01 18 Temporary Asphalt Paving Repair 12/20/2012
32 01 29 Concrete Paving Repair 12/20/2012
32 11 23 Flexible Base Courses 12/20/2012
32 11 29 Lime Treated Base Courses 12/20/2012
32 11 33 Cement Treated Base Courses 12/20/2012
32 11 37 Liquid Treated Soil Stabilizer 08/21/2015
32 12 16 Asphalt Paving 12/20/2012
32 12 73 Asphalt Paving Crack Sealants 12/20/2012
32 13 13 Concrete Paving 12/20/2012
32 13 20 Concrete Sidewalks, Driveways and Barrier Free Ramps 06/05/2018
32 13 73 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 12/20/2012
32 14 16 Brick Unit Paving 12/20/2012
32 16 13 Concrete Curb and Gutters and Valley Gutters 10/05/2016
00 00 00
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Page 3 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS CPN-102575
Revised March 20, 2020
32 17 23 Pavement Markings 11/22/2013
32 17 25 Curb Address Painting 11/04/2013
32 31 13 Chain Fences and Gates 12/20/2012
32 31 26 Wire Fences and Gates 12/20/2012
32 31 29 Wood Fences and Gates 12/20/2012
32 32 13 Cast-in-Place Concrete Retaining Walls 06/05/2018
32 91 19 Topsoil Placement and Finishing of Parkways 12/20/2012
32 92 13 Hydro-Mulching, Seeding, and Sodding 12/20/2012
32 93 43 Trees and Shrubs 12/20/2012
Division 33 - Utilities
33 01 30 Sewer and Manhole Testing 12/20/2012
33 01 31 Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection 03/03/2016
33 03 10 Bypass Pumping of Existing Sewer Systems 12/20/2012
33 04 10 Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation 12/20/2012
33 04 11 Corrosion Control Test Stations 12/20/2012
33 04 12 Magnesium Anode Cathodic Protection System 12/20/2012
33 04 30 Temporary Water Services 07/01/2011
33 04 40 Cleaning and Acceptance Testing of Water Mains 02/06/2013
33 04 50 Cleaning of Sewer Mains 12/20/2012
33 05 10 Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment, and Backfill 12/12/2016
33 05 12 Water Line Lowering 12/20/2012
33 05 13 Frame, Cover and Grade Rings – Cast Iron 01/22/2016
33 05 13.10 Frame, Cover and Grade Rings – Composite 01/22/2016
33 05 14 Adjusting Manholes, Inlets, Valve Boxes, and Other Structures to
Grade 12/20/2012
33 05 16 Concrete Water Vaults 12/20/2012
33 05 17 Concrete Collars 12/20/2012
33 05 20 Auger Boring 12/20/2012
33 05 21 Tunnel Liner Plate 12/20/2012
33 05 22 Steel Casing Pipe 12/20/2012
33 05 23 Hand Tunneling 12/20/2012
33 05 24 Installation of Carrier Pipe in Casing or Tunnel Liner Plate 06/19/2013
33 05 26 Utility Markers/Locators 12/20/2012
33 05 30 Location of Existing Utilities 12/20/2012
33 11 05 Bolts, Nuts, and Gaskets 12/20/2012
33 11 10 Ductile Iron Pipe 12/20/2012
33 11 11 Ductile Iron Fittings 12/20/2012
33 11 12 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe 11/16/2018
33 11 13 Concrete Pressure Pipe, Bar-Wrapped, Steel Cylinder Type 12/20/2012
33 11 14 Buried Steel Pipe and Fittings 12/20/2012
33 12 10 Water Services 1-inch to 2-inch 02/14/2017
33 12 11 Large Water Meters 12/20/2012
33 12 20 Resilient Seated Gate Valve 12/20/2012
33 12 21 AWWA Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves 12/20/2012
33 12 25 Connection to Existing Water Mains 02/06/2013
33 12 30 Combination Air Valve Assemblies for Potable Water Systems 12/20/2012
33 12 40 Fire Hydrants 01/03/2014
33 12 50 Water Sample Stations 12/20/2012
00 00 00
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Page 4 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS CPN-102575
Revised March 20, 2020
33 12 60 Standard Blow-off Valve Assembly 06/19/2013
33 31 12 Cured in Place Pipe (CIPP) 12/20/2012
33 31 13 Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe for Gravity Sanitary Sewers 12/20/2012
33 31 15 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe for Sanitary Sewer 12/20/2012
33 31 20 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Gravity Sanitary Sewer Pipe 06/19/2013
33 31 21 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Closed Profile Gravity Sanitary Sewer
Pipe 12/20/2012
33 31 22 Sanitary Sewer Slip Lining 12/20/2012
33 31 23 Sanitary Sewer Pipe Enlargement 12/20/2012
33 31 50 Sanitary Sewer Service Connections and Service Line 04/26/2013
33 31 70 Combination Air Valve for Sanitary Sewer Force Mains 12/20/2012
33 39 10 Cast-in-Place Concrete Manholes 12/20/2012
33 39 20 Precast Concrete Manholes 12/20/2012
33 39 30 Fiberglass Manholes 12/20/2012
33 39 40 Wastewater Access Chamber (WAC) 12/20/2012
33 39 60 Epoxy Liners for Sanitary Sewer Structures 12/20/2012
33 41 10 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe/Culverts 07/01/2011
33 41 11 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe for Storm Drain 12/20/2012
33 41 12 Reinforced Polyethlene (SRPE) Pipe 11/13/2015
33 46 00 Subdrainage 12/20/2012
33 46 01 Slotted Storm Drains 07/01/2011
33 46 02 Trench Drains 07/01/2011
33 49 10 Cast-in-Place Manholes and Junction Boxes 12/20/2012
33 49 20 Curb and Drop Inlets 12/20/2012
33 49 40 Storm Drainage Headwalls and Wingwalls 07/01/2011
Division 34 - Transportation
34 41 10 Traffic Signals 10/12/2015
34 41 10.01 Attachment A – Controller Cabinet 12/18/2015
34 41 10.02 Attachment B – Controller Specification 02/2012
34 41 10.03 Attachment C – Software Specification 01/2012
34 41 11 Temporary Traffic Signals 11/22/2013
34 41 13 Removing Traffic Signals 12/20/2012
34 41 15 Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon 11/22/2013
34 41 16 Pedestrian Hybrid Signal 11/22/2013
34 41 20 Roadway Illumination Assemblies 12/20/2012
34 41 20.01 Arterial LED Roadway Luminaires 06/15/2015
34 41 20.02 Freeway LED Roadway Luminaires 06/15/2015
34 41 20.03 Residential LED Roadway Luminaires 06/15/2015
34 41 30 Aluminum Signs 11/12/2013
34 41 50 Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable 02/26/2016
34 71 13 Traffic Control 11/22/2013
00 00 00
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Page 5 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS CPN-102575
Revised March 20, 2020
Appendix
GC-4.01 Availability of Lands
GC-4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions
GC-4.04 Underground Facilities
GC-4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site
GC-6.06.D Minority and Women Owned Business Enterprise Compliance
GC-6.07 Wage Rates
GC-6.09 Permits and Utilities
GC-6.24 Nondiscrimination
GR-01 60 00 Product Requirements
END OF SECTION
6b J? i}
DM R[f1P0.t1Pt1tiAL
Pape I of 1
SECTION 00 42 43
Devaloper Awarded Projacls • PRpPOSAL FORiiA
UNIT PRICE BID - AlTAMESA BOULEVARD EXTENSION
IPpC20-0o23
Bidder's Application
FOR 46 RANCH ADD�TION
Projeclllem InlarmeUon Biddere P�oposal
Bi�isl Ilem Na. �axuption Specification Section No. UniloF lubawre Bid WanOry Unft Price 8id Velua
E TI I:
1 Oti70.0100 �obilization 017000 LS i 1 5109.Es7.4s
2 3i250101 SWPPP 2lacra 312500 LS i s36•Z46.00
3 3471 0001 TraHie CoMrol 34 71 13 AAO 7 2 . 4 520.000.00
L E TI N I: ENERAL 5155,783.U8
E TI N 11: WATEA IMP Y
1 0241.1 f 18 4'-12' Pressure Plug 02 41 14 EA 9 5940.�0 58,460.00
2 3305A409 French Sa[ety 33 05 10 LF 4474 �QQ $4,47A.00
3 3305.0110 UtAityMarke�s 330528 LS 1 1 7 3�,83�.00
4 33p5.0113 Trench Wa[er Stops 3305 15 LS 1 58.210.00 56,210.00
5 3371.0001 DoeWe Iron Water Filtings vw' Raslraint 33 i 1 i 1 TON 1 14 1. 514,335.D0
6 3311 0041 4' Watar Pipe 33 S 1 10, 33 7 7 12 LF 15 525.00 5420.00
7 33! 1.0141 8' W6�19r PipB 33 f 1 10, 33 11 12 LF 7 �$,,QQ 5203.00
B 3311.0241 8' WsterPipe 33 i1 10, 33 11 12 LF 331 531.00 $10,265.65
9 3311 0441 12' Wa[er Pipe 33 t 1 10, 33 11 12 LF 3909 £¢],,QQ 5160,289.00
t0 3372.0177 Gonnection W EKisting 4'-12' Water Main 33 t2 25 EA 1 1 7 . $1,757,00
11 3312.0113 Connec[bn !o Eidsting 54' Waler Ma4i 33 12 25 EA 1 52�.400.00 a24,400.00
12 33122203 2' Wefer Service 3312 1Q �A 7 �1,§n•00 513,139.00
13 3312.2802 4'WeterMeterandVaull 331211 EA 1 514.$63.00 514,663.00
10 3312.3002 8' Gate Valva 33 12 20 EA 7
�,,Q�.$�QQ Sf,Q59.00
15 3312.3003 8' Gate Vahe 33 12 20 EA 6 31•318•00 59.096.00
16 3312 3065 12' Gate Vahre 33 12 20 EA 12 52.57�.00 530.876.00
77 9999.0007 Con[rouetl Low Strenglh Materia� 99 99 U7 LF 2B8 s'58.00 518.728.00
T I• M Yfl ENT 5317,587.85
T Ih IT Y EWE tMP VEMENT
1 0241.1118 4'-12' Preaaure Plug Q2 41 i4 EA 4 5213•00 SB52.00
2 0330 0001 Concrele Encase 5ewer Pipe D3 30 00 LF 65 SBs•00 54,225.04
3 3301.0002 PosFCGN Inspecdon 33 03 31 LF 4268 �],Q¢ $4,268.pQ
4 3301.9101 Manhole Vatuum Testing 33 67 3p EA 53 s2Z0•00 $2,BS0.00
5 3305.0109 Trench Safely 33 05 10 LF 4268 �,QQ 54,288 00
B 330.5.0114 UGlity MSAceB 33 OS 28 LS 1 E2.383•00 52.383.00
7 3331.4115 8' Sewer Pipe 33 11 70. 3331 12, 33 31 24 LF 115 �,QQ 53.910.00
8 3331.4208 12' Sewer Pipe 33 11 10, 33 3i 12, 33 31 24 LF 4176 �87.00 5279,792 00
9 3331.3401 Ductile Iron Sewer Fittings 33 11 11 TON i t4Sg•00 y45b.pp
10 3339.OpQ1 EppxyManhdaLiner 333960 VF 64 �]3.Q0 520,032.00
11 3339.5001 4' Manhde 33 39 10. 33 39 20 EA 13 54.791.00 $82,283.00
12 9999.0008 CanUdled Low Slrength Mataria! 99 99 07 LF 289 SS8•00 515.064.U0
NIT 111: lWITARY EWER IMP V 5400,375.00
�m c� mar w��en3
ST.WlMA�4Y��R�J['{�{{HSPF:CIFKA77[1NIX%VLIFlA3 bEVF1IWFRAR'TRUpYPR[UEfIS
f Yx�im M�y 1:-'.019 p} 1; �t �
WJ�1?
I/AP B!F) PR1/Pf1tiAL
flfe?a[1
SECTION 00 42 43
Osvelapar Axarded Projeds - PAOPOSAL FORM
UNIT PRICE BID - A�TAMESA BOULEVARD EXTENSlON
IpRC20-0023
Bidder's Application
FOR 46 RANCH ADDITION
Piojecl Ilam Inlorma6on Bidders Proposal
Bidtial hom No. Deetriplion Specifica6on Section Na Unn ol Measure Bid Ouanhry UNI Price Bid Valua
ME
i 0241.1 t08 21' Pressure Plug Q2 41 14 EA 2 SS00•00 51.600.00
2 0241.1410 30' Pressure Plug 02 41 14 EA 1 � $B39.D0
3 0241.440t Remove HeadwalYSET 02 41 14 EA 1 33.872.00 53,672.00
4 3301.0012 PpShCCN Inspettipn oF Stortn Prdln 33 01 31 LF 3296 S1,Q0 53,298.OD
S 3301.0701 ManholeVaeuumTes6ng 334t 30 EA 5 5220•00 57.100.00
6 3305.0109 TrenchSafety 330510 LF 3296 51•00 53,296.00
7 3305.0110 U61iry MarkeB 33 O5 28 LS 1 1 8. 51,578.00
8 3341.0103 18' RCP, Cless III 33 41 l0 LF 54 SS1.00 �2,754.D0
9 3341.0201 27' RCP, Class III 33 41 f0 LF 732 555.00 540,260.00
10 3341.0205 24' RCP, Class III 33 41 10 LF 1410 565•00 565,650.00
11 3341.0302 30' RCP. Class III 33 41 10 lF 544
�$Q,QQ, 543,520.00
12 3341.0309 36' ACP, Cless III 33 41 10 lF 387 1
S 65•00 540,635.00
13 3341.0409 48' RCP, Class III 33 41 10 LF 132 ft 57.00 520,724.00
14 3341.7501 8y48oxCulverl 334110 LF 332 Y/f1.00 5138,452.00
15 3341.1502 8x5 9ox Cukert 33 41 10 LF 105 5408•0� 548,830.00
16 3349.0001 A' Storm Junctlon Box 33 49 10 �A 4 35•014,00 520,056.00
17 3349.a103 18' SET, l pipe 33 49 40 EA 2 ts •e28•00 53,fi46.00
18 3349.4105 24' SET, i plpg 33 49 40 EA 4 ;2'3Bi'00- $9,588.00
19 3349.5001 10' Curb Inlet 3319 2p EA 9 34.801.00 $45,409.00
20 3349.5002 15' Cur6 Inlet 33 49 20 EA 5 ss•�as•oo 528.975.00
29 9999.0616 11.5"x7k7' Sto+m Junc[Ion Box 99 99 10 EA 1 f10,S58.00 510.558.00
22 9999.0011 HeatlwaA, 24' RCP 99 99 11 EA 2 �4,�,�,,¢Q 58,496.06
23 9999.0012 HeadwaA, 8' x 5' Box CulveR 99 99 12 EA 1 f13•25g.00 573,259.00
24 9g99.p0�3 Headwao, (2j B' x a• Box CuNert 99 99 t 3 EA 1 523.989.00 523.9d9.OD
25 9999.0014 Std.'Y inlet 999914 EA 4 55•�55•00 a21,820.OQ
26 9999.0015 Connect to Ex. Slorm Line 99 991 S EA 1 � 55,235.00
MP VEMENT 5599,213.00
NR Y: PAVIN IMPR VEMENT
1 Q241.4500 Aemove Fence 02 45 13 LF 3451 �1 •00 $3,451.Op
2 0241.t000 Aemove Conc Pvmi 02 ati t5 SY 519 S10•18 55,283.42
3 02A1.5300 flemova Conc CurhBGutter 02 4i 15 LF 5125 }�QQ 516,125.00
4 3�i0A�0� SiteGlearinp 311000 LS 1 S7•650•00 5�.650.00
5 3110.4102 6'-12' Tree Rampvel 31 10 00 EA 86
�4Q $t2,900.00
6 3710.0103 12'-1 B' Tree Remaral 31 14 00 EA 40
�Q¢ $S4.00O.DO
7 3710.0104 1B'-24' Tree Removal 31 1000 @A 12 STSO•00 S9,p00,p0
8 3923.0101 Undasslfied Excavalion by Pian {Cui: 37898, Fill; 25001 j 31 23 18 CY 62899 �248 5154,731.54
9 3137.0102 Large Stone Riprap, tlry 37 37 p0 SY BBt 566.00 y43,626.00
10 3211.0501 6' Lime TreaVnenl 21 11 29 SY 720 515.00 510,800.00
l i 3211.p502 B' Lime T�eatmenl 32 11 29 SY 1fiB80 ;S•86 E95.088.00
72 3213.0103 B'Cont?vmt 321313 SY 15223 �},],,§� 5633,581.26
13 3213.0104 9' Conc Pvmt 32 13 13 SV fi2T �55.20 S34,Bt0.40
ta 3213.0301 a• Conc SidewaAc 32 13 20 SF 53840 SS•89 E3�1,993.20
15 3213.0544 Bartier Frea Ramp 32 13 24 EA 19 1 1. 538,388.00
78 3216.0101 6' Cone Curb antl Gutler 32 iB �3 LF 7700 52.10 $16,170.00
17 3217.0001 4' SLD Pvm! Marking HAS (W} 32 17 23 LF 1092 #1.Z2 51,332.24
18 3217.0002 4' SLO Pvmt MarM�ng HAS (Yj 32 17 23 LF 4782 1.22 55,834.04
79 3217.0004 4' BRI( Pvmt MSAcing HAS (1� 32 77 23 LF a782 50•52 a2.48fi.64
24 3217.0201 B' SLO Pvmt Marking HAS (W) 32 17 23 LF 306 �2.�„2 5696.00
2t 32t7.03pt t2' SLD Pvmt Markinp HAE {W) 32 77 23 LF 368 54.64 51,600.32
22 3217.0601 24' SLO Pvml Maiking HAE {W j 32 17 23 LF 30 �$¢ 5208.80
23 3217.1002 Lane Legentl Arrow 32 17 23 EA 10 L150.60 $1,SOB.00
24 3217.7003 Lane Le{�end �BL Arrow 32 17 23 EA B 5/g5•60 51,113.60
25 3217.1004 Lane Lepend On3y 32 17 23 EA 7 5150.80 $1,055.80
26 32172002 F;aisetl MaAcer TY Y 3217 23 EA 150 54.64 5586.00
27 3217.4402 Aemove Lane Legend Arcow 32 17 23 EA 3 �141.40 531320
28 3217.4404 Remove Lane LegenO Only 32 17 23 ER 3 5104.40 $31320
• PAVI tMPA VEMENT 57,4p6,733.48
c'rtY flF AqeT p'�NeS1l
STANbAkb([1N57R[L1k1N SPF[1FlCAl70N Ix1R11�1EE(13 []E1'EI.f1PFJ1 AN'MI/F11 PAn11Yl)
F Ye��io� M� «.:�i9 f2 ih Ji �
J6 .0:006.W.al+a
0o aa +s
nnr amrwnnuu
Pa�r 1 N i
SECTION 40 42 43
Developer Awartletl Projeds - PROPO5AL FORM
UNIT PRICE BID - ALTAMESA BOULEVARD EXTENS14N
IPRC20-D023
Bidder's Application
FOR 46 RANCH AbDIT10N
Projx[ Itam Infarma6an 6iddefs Proposal
Bidisl llam No. Oeecription 5pecificaGon SacGon No. Ifnil ol Maesure Bid QuanAty Unil Price Bid Vel�e
NIT YI: TR
1 2605.0112 Inslall Elee Sery Pedeslal 26 0.5 00 EA 1 57.500.00 S7.SOp.Op
2 2605.3415 2' CON�T PVC SCH B8 (T) 26 05 33 LF 6550 115.00 $88,250.00
3 3447.t502 Ground 8ox Type B, wl Apron 34 41 10 EA 2 5900•00 51.800.00
4 3441.3003 Rtlwy Illum AssmlNy TY 1B,1BA,19. and D�40 34 41 20 EA 19 52.111.00 540.7D9.p0
5 3041.3201 LED Lighting Fixture 34 4� 2p EA 19 5 53•DO $14,307.00
8 34at.3302 Rtlwy Illum Fountla6on TY 3,5,6, and 8 34 41 20 @A t 9 S1.5HD•00 530,020.00
7 3441.1Ip5 No. 2 Insulatad Elec Conduit 34 �i 10 LF 165 E2•55 5420.75
8 3441.1409 No. B Insulatetl Elet Contluit 34 41 1p LF 19485 st.ss �30,20i.75
9 3441.3501 Sfllvaqe Street ligM PWe 34 41 20 EA 1 1 B . $1,950.00
10 344t.3502 Relocala Street Llgh[ Pole 34 �1 20 EA 1 54.180.00 54,iB0.00
fl LIGHTIN IMPH Y M 522B,73B.50
NIT VII: TRAFfl Y M
1 2805.0111 FumislVMstall Elec Sery Padestal 28 05 00 EA 2 58.500.00 513,006.00
2 2605.0131 Salvage Electrical Equipment 2fi 05 1 D EA 1 � $2,SOO.OD
3 28p5.3015 2' CON�T PVC SCH Bp {n 28 OS 33 LF 225 519.OD 53,375.06
4 2805.30t6 2' CONDT PVC SGH BO (Bj 28 05 33 LF 909 528.06 528,3Bt.p0
5 2605.3025 3' CON�TPVC SCH BO (F� 280533 LF 330 31B•00 $5,940.OU
8 2605.3026 3' CONDT pYC SCH BO {Bj 26 OS 33 LF 61 p 537.06 522.570.00
7 3441.1001 3-Sect Signal Head Pssm6ly 34 41 10 EA 12 51,650•00 E72,60p.p0
8 3441.1002 4Sect Slpnal Head Aasm6ly 34 41 10 EA 6 51.250.00 �7,500.00
9 3a41.1003 5-5ect 5lpnal Heatl Assmbly 34 41 10 EA 2 31.850.00 53,300.00
10 3441.1011 Ped Sdgnal Haad Assmply 30 41 10 EA 5 SESO•00 54,25D.00
11 3441.7031 Aotlide Petlestrian Pushiwflon StaUon 34 47 10 EA 5 � 58,425.0p
12 3441.1209 FumisFYlnstall BBV System E%T Mountetl 34 41 10 EA 2 37.7Z0.00 515,440.00
13 3447.1220 Fumishlfnstall Modei 711 Preemp6on detec[or 34 41 10 EA 2 51•824•00 53,848.00
14 344L1224 FumishllnsfatlPreempSonCaWa 34a110 LF 869 52.00 57,73B.U0
15 34A 1.1230 FumisFVlnstall Radar Presence Oeleclion Devite 34 41 1 p EA B 58.100.00 a64,B0U.00
18 3a4t,t 237 FumAnNinslNl Ratlar Advance Deleclion Device 34 41 10 EA 5 �.100.00 540,500.00
17 3441.1234 Fumtahllnstall Radar Cahla 34 41 10 LF 2,816
53.50 59.856.00
18 3441.1311 51C 14 AWG Multi-Contluctor Cah[e 3a 41 10 LF 920 51.75 51,810.00
79 3441.1312 71C 14 AWG Mu1G-ConductorCahle 34 41 10 �F 715 �2•DO $7,430.00
20 3401.1315 2WC 14 AW G Mu1d-Condudor Cablg 34 41 10 LF 1,281 SB•00 57.686.00
21 3441.1322 31C 14 AWG Mufti-Contluctor Ca61e 3a al 10 LF 1,324 s1.ss 52.p5220
22 3441.1409 NO 8 Insulatad Elec Condr 34 41 10 LF 2,288 51.SS a3,546.40
23 3441.1543 Ground BoM Type D, wlRpron 34 a7 70 EA 7 51.100.00 57,700.00
24 3441.1601 FumishJlns� 5' Pedeshien Push 8utton Pole 34 41 1U EA 3 SB00•00 g2,70p,D0
25 3445.1603 FumisMnsla� 10' • 14' Petl Pole Assmby 34 41 1p Ep 1 51.250.00 51,250.00
26 3aa1.t611 FumisMnslaAType4lSipnalPole 344110 EA 2 t8.407.00 512,814.00
27 344i.1615 Pumishllnslall Type 45 Slgnal Pole 34 A1 10 EA 3 59.2'26.00 527,678.00
28 344t.1825 FumisMnslaX Masl Nm 52' - fi0' 34 41 10 EA 1 u.e5Z,4¢, S4,g52.00
29 344f.1701 TY 1 Signal Foundation 34 41 10 EA 4 1 1 . ¢i,400.00
30 344i.1703 lY3SignalFpundation 344110 EA 2 S4.B00.00 E9,000.00
31 3441.1705 TY 5 Signal Foundation 34 41 70 EA 3 se•�oo•o0 519,500.00
32 3441.1715 Signal Cabinei Foundation • 3521 & 68U 34 4t 10 EA 2 ss.200•00 �10,400.00
33 34at.t725 Fumislvinsta�lATC5ignalController 3aa710 EA 2 Ss,485•06 510,930.00
34 3441.174i FumishMste113521ControtlerCa6inelAssambly 3441 i4 EA 2 S18.SOQ.00 537.Op0.p0
35 3441.305t FumisMnstall LED Ligi�6ng Fixture j137 watt ATH2 Co6ra Head) 34 41 10 EA 4 5753•00 $3,012.00
36 34a1.app5 Install Alum Sipn Masl Aim Mount 34 41 30 EA B �7�0.00 SB.000.00
37 9999.p015 SaNaga Sipnal Pde and Maat Arm 99 99 15 EA i 59.OD0.00 $3,Op0,p0
3B 9999.001& F�mishllns[a!I P1Z Camere 99 9916 EA 2
�,,QQ 59.iB0.00
39 9999.0017 FumisMnstall PlZ Camera CaCle 99 99 17 LF 125
SS•00 3625.00
T T ALlMPROVEMEHT $430,168.60
f[TY [M� iY)RT W�Ntlll
STANDARb411NSZRIR'[1fINSPE(TFl[,�7111NE%Ill/MFMS. UEYF1.fIPF]t AWM�E7IPRNF['IS
F'a�e Vmm f�p} ::. 3�I9 m J] 11 6J 1),aP ib Q,4LL71
P�apou�_ _ A-^uu6ta.�L�
�.,.�
IIM R[DPRf]PfKil.
p� f o(+
SECTION 00 42 43
8evelaper Awarded Projects - PROPOSAL FORM
tPRC2D-0023
UNIT PRICE BID - AlTAMESA BOULEVARD EXTENSION Bidder's Application
FOR 46 RANCFE ADDITION
Projecl Ilem Information Bidd9Ya Proppeal
Bidlist Item 1Jp, D�ecription Specificetion SecOan Na. Unit ol Mea�ure 8id OuenGly lJni! Prica Bid Velue
2 13291.Ot00
32 92 13
s�a
SEC710N II: WA7ER IMPROVEMEMTS 5377.587
UNR III: SANRARY SEWER IMPROVEMENTS $400,375
UNiTIV: DRAINAGE IMPROVEMENTS 5594,2�3
UNff V: PAVING IMPROVEWFENTS $1,406,733
Ui+fR VI: STREET LIGHTING IMPROVEMENTS $228,738
UNIT Yll: TqAFFIC SlGNAL IMPROYEMENT5 S43D,168
UNR VIII: LAND5CAPE IMPAOVMENTS S92.B35
This Bid is submilted br lhe mlilr named belnw:
RIUIfER:
Ridprm�mt I.nmmenk:�l [ ��n.�ructFr
li=p 14 11'ulnul 11111 I �n�
1 n YnR. I\ 750.ix
t oMyctor aRree. iu rnrnpkee SYcHtK fM FINAI. Al'I,NP'i'A�1'll? xilhln i wc wml�knr duy: aller i6e d.ir w6rn ehr
C'[I!iTpA[.T rnmmenav to run .s pro,ided in �he I:eaenl (.ondfiL�n•.
6'NU oF' cE[Y�IuY
rnv nc r�mr ax�ent
ST.WUAkn[011ti1A[R'l1fIN5PE[1F1LA1N1NIMM'11MFSfTS UlYF�.[]Pp1AWAR]]FDPp11fE1'IS
Fvs Y.+uoq M�i ...'.�19 6h 1� 11 9�
00 45 12
DAP PREQUALIFICATION STATEMENT
Page 1 of 1
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION PREQUALIFICATION STATEMENT – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS 00 45 12_Prequal Statement 2015_DAP Revised 10212020.docx
Form Version September 1, 2015
SECTION 00 45 12
DAP – PREQUALIFICATION STATEMENT
Each Bidder is required to complete the information below by identifying the prequalified contractors
and/or subcontractors whom they intend to utilize for the major work type(s) listed. In the “Major Work
Type” box provide the complete major work type and actual description as provided by the Water
Department for water and sewer and TPW for paving.
Major Work Type Contractor/Subcontractor Company Name Prequalification
Expiration Date
Water Mains (all sizes) for New
Development using Open Cut
construction methods
Wright Construction Company, Inc.
4/30/2021
Wastewater Mains (all sizes) for
New Development using Open
Cut construction methods
Wright Construction Company, Inc.
4/30/2021
Concrete Paving
Construction/Reconstruction
(Unlimited SY)
McMahon Contracting, L.P.
7/1/2022
Roadway and pedestrian lighting
Hurst Electric
3/9/2022
The undersigned hereby certifies that the contractors and/or subcontractors described in the table above
are currently prequalified for the work types listed.
BIDDER:
Ridgemont Commercial Construction BY:
1520 W. Walnut Hill Lane
Irving, TX, 75038 _________________________________________
(Signature)
TITLE:
DATE:
END OF SECTION
Sr. Project Manager
8/28/2020
bd 45 26 -1
CONTRAC70R COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW
Page 1 of 2
1
2
3
�j ��l � L�I i I�I+Z 4-f��
CONTRACTOR CQMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW
4 Pursuant to Texas Labor Code Section 406.096(a), as amended, Contractor certi�es that �t
5 provides worker's compensation insurance correrage for all of its employees employed on City
6 Project No. Ip2575. Contractor further certifies that, pursuant to Texas Labar Code, Section
7 �406.096(bj, as amended, it will pro�ide to City its subcontractor's certificates af campliance with
8 worker's compensation co�erage.
9
14 CONTRACTOR:
11
12 Rid�emont Commerical Construction
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
z3
24
25
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
By: � �
Company rintj
1520 W. Walnut Hill Lane Signature:
Address
Irving, TX 75038 Title: ..►C. f�ior._ �
City/State/Zip (P ase Print)
THE STATE OF TEXAS
COUN7Y OF TARRANT
§
§
�EFO�M�, t�ie undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared
, �1� ��, known to me to be the person whose name is
subscri�ed to the foregoing instrument, and acknowledged ta me that he/she executed the
same as the act and deed of for the purposes and
consideration therein expressed and in the capacity therein stated.
GI EN ND R MY HAND AND SfAL OF OFFICE this Z �� day of
20�
CI7Y �F FORT WORTH Altamesa 9oulevard fxtension for 46 Rnnch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION QOCUMENTS CPN-101575
Revised April 2, 2D14
004526-2
CQNTRACTORCOMPUANCf WITH WORKER'SCOMPENSATION LAW
, c�.r.�� MAUREEN MCDO�INE�L
1 *' ; HQTARY PUBLIC - 5TA'iE OF TFXAS
XA
+,�: NO7ARYlD#12973278-9
2 �'a.��'' My Comm. Exp. March 3, 2D22
Page 2 of 2
Notary Publ in and for the Sta e of Texas
4 END O� S�CTIdN
CITY OF FOAT WORTH Altamesa 8oulevard fxtension for 4S Ranch AddiiJan
STANDARD CQNSTRUCTION SPECIFICA710N DOCUMENTS CPN-101575
Revised April 2, 2014
9/23/2020working180SB 10/21/2020
005243-2
Developer Awarded Project Agreement
Page 2 of 6
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
3T
38
39
Paragraph 3.2 above, plus any eactension thereof allowed in accordance with Article 10
of the Standard City Conditions of the Construction Contract for Developer Awarded
Projects. The Contractor also recognizes the delays, expense and difficulties invoived in
proving in a legal proceeding the actual loss suffered by the Developer if the Work is not
campleted an time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof , Cantractor agrees
that as fiquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty), Contractor shatl pay
Developer Three million six hundred and fortv-one rhousand. four hundred and thirtv-
five Dallars and thirteen Cents tS3,641,435.13) for each day that expires after the time
specified in Paragraph 3.2 for Final Acceptance until the City issues the Final Letter of
Acceptance.
QO Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE
41 Developer agrees to pay Contractor for performance af the Work in accordance with the
42 Contract Documents an amount in current funds of Three miilion, six hundred and fortv-one
43 thousand four hundred and thirtv-five Dollars and thirteen Cents t�3,641.435.131.
44
45
46
47
48
Article 5. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
5.1 CONTENTS:
A. The Contract Documents which comprise the entire agreement between peveiaper
and Contractor concerning the Work consist of the following:
1. This Agreement.
q9 2. Attachments to this Agreement:
50 a. 8id Form (As provided by Developer)
51 1j Proposal Form (DAP Version)
52 2j Prequalification Statement
53 3) State and Federaf documents (projecCspecificJ
54
55
56
57
58
59
b. Insurance ACORD Form(s)
c. Payment Bond (DAP Version�
d. Performance Bond {DAP Version)
e. Maintenance Bond (DAP Version)
f. Power of Attorney for the Bonds
g. Worker's Compensation Affidavit
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Nanch Additfon
STANDARD CONSiRUCT10N SPECIFICA71pN OOCUMENTS— DEVEIOPER AWARbED PROJECTS CPN-102575
Revised June 16, 2016
00 52 43 3
Developer Awarded Project Agreement
Page 3 of 6
60 h. MBE and/or SBE Commitment Form (If required)
b1 3. Standard City Generat Conditians of the Construction Contract for Developer
62 Awarded Projects.
63 4. Supplementary Conditions.
64 5. Specifications specifically made a part of the Contract Dacuments by attachment
65 or, if not attached, as incorporated by reference and described in the Table of
66 Contents of the Praject's Contract Documents.
67 6. Drawings.
68 7. Addenda,
69 8. Documentation submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award.
70 9. The foilowing which may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the
71 Agreement and, if issued, became an incorporated part of the Contract
72 Documents:
73 a. Notice to Proceed.
74 b. Field Orders.
75 c. Change Orders.
76 d. Letter of Finat Acceptance.
77
78
CITY OF FORT WORTH Aitamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ra�ch Addition
STANOARO CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICA710N OOCUMENTS —OEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS CPN-102575
Revised June 16, 2016
00 52 43 4
Oeveloper Awarded Pro)ect Agreement
Page 4 of 6
79 Article 6. INDEMNIFICATION
SO 6.1 Contractor covenants and agrees to indernnify, hald harmisss and defend, at its own
81 expense, the city, its officers, servants and ernpfoyees, from and against any and all
82 claims arising out of, ar aileged to arise out of, the work and se�vi�es to be performed by
83 the contractor, its officers, agents, employees, subcontrattors, licenses or invitees under
84 this contract, This indernnification provision is specifically intended to os�erate and be
85 effective even if it is alisged or qroven that all or same of the dama�es bein� sou�ht
86 were caused, in whole or in part, bv anv act. omission or ne�ligence of the citv. This
87 indemnity provtsion is intended to include, without limitation, indemnity for costs,
88 expenses and legal fees incurred by the city in defending against such ciaims and causes
89 of actions.
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
6.2 Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless, at its own expense,
the city, its afficers, senrants and employees, from and against any and all Ioss, damage
ar destruction of property of the city, arising out of, or alleged to arise out of, the work
and services to be performed by the contractor, its officers, agents, employees,
subcontractors, licensees ar invitees under this contract. This indemnification provision
is specificaliv intended to operate and be effective even if it is alie�ed ar proven that a11
ar some of the damages bein� sou�ht were caused, in whole or in part, bv anv act,
omissian or ne�li�ence of the citv.
100 Article 7. MISCELlANEOUS
101 7.1 ierms.
102 Terms used in this Agreement are defined in Article 1 of the Standard City Conditions of
103 the Construction Contract for Developer Awarded Projects.
1Q4 7.2 Assignment of Contract.
105 This Agreement, including all of the Contract Documents may not be assigned by the
106 Contractor without the ad�anced express written consent of the Developer.
10? 7.3 Successors and Assigns.
108 Developer and Contractor each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal
109 representatives to the other party hereto, in respect to all covenants, agreements and
110 obligations contained in ihe Contract Documents,
CITY OF FORT WORTN Altamesa Boutevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
STANOARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS— DEVELOPER AWARUED PROJECTS CPN-102575
Revlsed lune 16, 2016
005]93-5
Developer Rward¢d Proftci ngreement
Vage 5 of 6
111 7.4 Severabllity.
112 Any provfsion or part of the Contrect Documents held to be unconstltutlonal, vofd or
113 unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdictlon shall be deemed stricken, and all
114 remalning provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon DEVELOPER and
115 CONTRACTOR.
116 7.5 GoverningLawandVenue.
117 This Agreement, Including all of the Contract Documents is performable in the State of
118 Texas. Venue shall be 7arrant Counry, Texas, or the United States Distdct Court for the
119 Northern Dlstrict of Texas, Fort Worth Divlsion.
120
121 7.6 Authority to Sign.
122 Contractor shall attach evidence of authority to sign Agreement, if other than duly
123 authorized slgnatory of the Contractor.
124
125
126
127
128
129
IN WITNE55 WHEREOF, Developer and Contractor have executed [his Agreement In multiple
counterparts.
7his Agreement is effective as of the last date signed by the Parties ("Effective Date"�.
Developer:
BY:
_ �._—
� (Signature)
Contractor:
By��
(Signature)
CIiY OF iORT WORTH / Itamesa Boulevard Exhnslon For 46 Pan�h Atldlllan
STANDAPO [ONSTPUCTION SPECIFIC4TION ODNMENIS—OEVELOPE0. AWAPDEO PPOlfRS CPN 3035J5
PlNsed lune 16,3016
_��.��Lt� G�i^�
�Printed Name)
IlI7I�l
005143-6
peveloper Rwarded P�Ofett Agreemen�
�. I Page 6 of 6
au �ana�
(Prin ed Name)
Title:
Company Name: Jackson-Shaw/46 � Company name: Ridgemont Commercial
Ranch, LLC. ConstrucUon
Address:4890 Alpha Road, Suite 100
Ciry/Sta[e/Zip: Dallas, TX 75244
�'ZO-2�
Date
130
Address: 152D W. Walnut Hill Lane
City/State/2ip: Irving, TX 75038
__`���
Date
CITY OF FOHT WOPTH Altamesa Boulewrtl Eaten�lon Far46 Am<h Additbn
STANDAftD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFI[ATION DOCI1MENi5—DEVELOVER AWPRDFD PM1OlERS CPN-1015]5
Rnlsetl lune 16, 3016
06 G2 l9 -1
MAIN'I'ENAPlCE HOND
Page 1 of 3
2
3
4
5
6
7
THE STATE OF TEXAS
� M_ � ,__� : ; �11
SECTION Ot16219
MAINT�NANCE BOND
8
9
10
1i
12
13
14
15
I6
l7
18
19
24
21
22
23
24
25
zs
2'l
28
29
3Q
31
32
33
34
B�ND # PRF9355422
§
§ Krrow aY.L sY �sE rxEsErrrs:
§
, ' ,_,Co�structian , lrnoW� as "Principa!"
a# �uve Ricigemont Commerc�l „__, _
herein and Colonisl Atne�r,an Casual a�d Snre Com an a c€�rparate surety (sareties, if
more than nne) duly a�thoriz.ed #o do basiness in the State oi Texas, krEc�wn as "Surety" herein
(whether one or more), are held and firmly bounci unta the Developer, Jscksan-Shaw1�46 Rsu�c�
LLC) , authorized tc� do i�usiness in Texas ("Der�elaper"} and #�e CitX of Fort Warth, a Texas
tnunici�al corparation ("City"}, in fhe sutn oi Three millio�t, srx hrrndred and,forlv-�one
thousand fbur hundred and thirtv�-iiv„e,Dollmrs und„thirtee►t Cen�s (�3,641.435.1�3), lawful
�oney of the United States, to be paid in For� Worth, Tarrant County, Texas, for payment of
which sum weli ar�d truly be made jointiy unta the De�eloper and the City as dual ob�igees and
their successors, we bind ours�l�es, our hairs, executors, administrators, successo�rs and assigns,
jnintty and severally, firt�[y by these preser�ts.
WHEREAS, De�eloper and City �a�e e�tered into art Agreement for the construction of
comme�nity facilities in the City af Fort Worth by and thrrough a Community Facilities
Agreement, C�'A Nu�ber IO2S7S: anc�
WHEREAS, the Principa� has entered into a certain written contract with the D�veloper
awarded the 14th day of A� us 242� which Contract is hersby referred t� and a made part
her�f�or all puiposes as if ful[y set forkh herein, to furnish a11 mate�iais, equipment ia6or and
other aeeessories as defined by law, in the pmseeution of the Wnrk, ineluciing any Wa�Ic resulting
from a duly autlaorized Change Order (collectively he�rein, the "Work"} as pro�ic�ed far in said
Contrxet and designated as Altamesa BauCevard Exte�rsion For 46 Ranclt Addrtion.; and
WHEREAS, Prineipal binds itself to use such materials and to so construet the Worlc in
accordance with the p1a�s, specificat�ans and Contract Daouments that the Work is and will
rennain free from defects in materials or r�vorlsmanship for and during t�e periad of two (�3 vears
after the date of Fina� Acceptance of the Worlc by the City ("Main�enance Period"}; and
CITY OF FORT W�RTH Ailamesa Boulevard ExEension FaT 46 Rar�ch Additivn
STANDARD Cl1'Y COhIDITIOt�iS—DEVELOPEii AWA[iDED pROJEC7'S CPN-1(i2575
Revised January 31, 2812
oa�a ��-z
Iv[AINTENANCE BOI+ID
Page 2 of 3
1 WHEREA�, Principal binds itselito repair or reconsiruct the Work in whole or in par�
2 upon receiving notice fi-om the Developer and/or City of the need thereof at any time wit�ip the
3 Maintenance Period.
4
5 N�W TI3EREFORE, the condition o�this obligation is such tha� if PrincipaI shail
b remedy any defective Work, �or which timely notice was provzded by Develaper or City, to a
7 completion satisfactory to the City, tla�n this obligation shalt becoane nuli and void; otherwise ta
8 remain in fulI force and effect.
�
10 PROVIDED, HOWEVER, if PrincipaI shall fail so to repair or recons�i-uct any tirneIy
1 I noticed defective Work, it is agreed that the Developer or City may cause any and all such
12 defective Work to be repaired and/or reconstructed with aIl associated cosis thereof being borne
13 by the Principal and the Surety under this Maintenance Bond; and
�4
15
i6
17
18
19
20
2I
22
23
PROVIDED FURTHER, that i�any legal action be fled on this Bond, venue shalI Iie in
Tarrant County, Texas or the United States Distriot Court for the Northern Distz�ict of Texas, Port
Worth Division; and
PROVLDED FURTHER, that this obligation shall be continuous in nature and
successi�e recoveries may be had hereon for successi�e breaches.
C]TY OF FORT WORTI-I A[tamesa Boulevard Extension Por 46 Ranch Addjtion
STANDARD C1TY CONDITIOI�fS — D�VELQPER A�VARDED PR07�CTS CPN-10�y575
Revised 3anuary 31, 20i2
00 62 L9 - 3
MAIN'fENANCE BOND
Page 3 of 3
]
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
I6
17
18
]9
20
21
22
2;
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
IN WITNESS WH�REOF, the Principal and the Surety have each SIGNED and SEALED tltis
instrument by duly authorized agenYs and officers on this the 18th day of Seatember, 2020
ATTEST: / r'
/ '
�i'�/L✓wL`
(Princi al) Secretary
Address: 1520 W. Walnut Hill Lane
Irvin2, TX 75038
Wifiess as Yo Principal
SURETY:
Colonial American CasualYv
and Suretv Companv
_. ._.__.
BY: � .1�sL_� � • � - �
Signature
Debra Lee Moon, Attornev-in-Fact
ATTEST: Name and TiTle
��� Address: 1299 Zurich Wav, 5"' Floor
Schaumbure, IL 60196
(Sur ecretary —
��, � ,�-��r-
Wifiess as to e'ty Telephone Number: B47) 605-6000
*Note: Tf signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract
from the by-laws showing that this person lias authority to sign such obligation. If
Surety's physical address is different from its mailing address, both must be provided.
The date of tl�e bond shall not be prior to the date Yhe Contract is awarded.
CITY OC FORT WORTH
STANllARD C]'f`Y CONUITIONS — DEVP,LOPER AWAADBD PROJECTS
Revised Je�ivary 3l, 2012
Altamesa Boulevard Ex[ension F'or 4G R:mch Addjtion
CPN-10.�575
PRINCIPAL:
ZURICH A14iERTCAIV INSURAI�CE C'QMPANY
COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUAL'�'Y AND SURETYCOMI'ANY
TIll�L[TY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND
POWER OF ATTORNEY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the ZURICH AMEItiCAN II�SURANC� COMPANY, a corporation of the Stat� o£
New Yor[c, the COLONiAL AMERICAN CASUALTY ANT� SURETl' COMPANY, a corporation of the Sfate of Illinois, ant[ the FID�LITX
AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND a corporation oftl�e State of Illinois (herein collecti�ely called the "Companies"), by Ro6ert
D. Murray, Vice President, in pursuance of authority granted by Article V, Section $, of the By-Laws of said Companies, whiali are set fprth
on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in fu]I %rc� and effect on the date hereof do here6y nominate, constitute, and appoint
John William NEWBY, Troy Russell KEY, Debra Lec MOON, Andrea Rose CItAWFORD, Sflndra Lee RONEY, Linda Mici�clle
STALDER, Suzanne Elizabeth NEEnZWI�DZ, Sheric Mie�Zcile GR�ENOUGH, Cheri Lynn IRBY and Joshua D. TRITT, aII of
Addzson, Texas, its frue and iawful agent and Attorney-in-�'act, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for, and on its behalf as surety, and as its act
and deed: any and all honds and undertakings, and the execufion of such bonds or underYaE�ings in pursuance ofthese presents, shall be as binding
upon said Companias, as f�lly and ainply, #o al[ inTents and purposes, as iithey had been duly executed and acEcnowledged by the eegularly
e[ected officers af the ZURICT3 AMEiZICAN TNSURANCE COMPAt�f1' at its office in New York, New York., the regularly elected officers of
the COLOMAi. AMERICAN CASUALTY AN17 S[JRETY COMPANY at its office in Owings Mills, Maryland, and the regularEy elected
oi�3cers of the FIDELITY AN� DEPOSIT COMPANY O�' MARYLAND at its office in Owings MilIs, Maryland, in their own proper persons.
The said Vice PresidenE cloes hereby cerCify #l�at the e3ctract set forth on the re�erse side hereof is a true copy af Article V, Section 8, of
the By-Laws of said Companies and is naw in force.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, #he said Vice-President has hereunto subscri�ed his/her narnes and affixed Yhe Corparate Seais of the said
ZiTRICH AM�RICAN INSiIRANCE COMPANX, COLONIAL AM�RICAN CASUA�TY AND SURETY COMPANY, and
FIDELITY AND DCPOSIT COMPANY OT+ MARYLA,NA, this Sth day of March, A.D. 2024.
•`'�pS�,;H54R tiy .�
'v'�i3t'4"'a'4e'PR�s �"��a,•�,�y� �4�
� �; _ • � °�°
...._ t�`
__�° 1or —' ; $�AL
:,��,,,ies�s ��� in. � �
•�r °�,'� '4 ��'
w,..�„,N,,,,
a�r�r�sr:
ZUIiICH AMCRICAN INSURAIVCE COMPANI'
C4LONIAL AMERICAIV CASTiALTY A,ND STJR�TY COINPANY
r1D�LIT1( A1VD D�POSIT COMPANY OF MA�'YLA]YD
��
By: Robert D. Murray
Yice President
� ����tr,t. � ��2��>t.��
By: Daivn C Brown
Secretary
Statc ofMarylhr�d
County ofBaltimore
On this 5�' day of March, A.D. 2020, before the subscriber, a Notary Public ofihe State of IvIaryland, duly commissioned and s�aalified, RobertD. Murray,
Vicc i'resident and nawn E. �3rown, Secretary of the Companies, to me personally known Eo be the individuals and officers described in and who executed
the preceding insfrument, and acknowledged the execution ofsame, and being by me duly swom, deposeth and saith, that he/she is tlte said of'�cer ofthe Compar�y
aforesaid, and that Ehe seals afiixed to the precedin� instrument are the Corporace Seals of said Companies, and Ehat the said Corporate Seals arad the signacc�re
as sucli of�cer were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by t��e authority and direction nf tlie said Gorporations.
1N TESTiMONY WH6REOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my OF€icial Seal thc day and year f�st above written.
������ .Ru�r'����� ;. �,�`�f
� \i1Y �'•. � K�' _ Q. , �%'�f��
� ,eii� � ' "•
:,`i ] �in : .
: .7: � 7 Z .,
:�o: / ��i�"
;•,�•.,,.,ie3`'.;�`� ConstanceA.Dunn,NotaryPublic
%'�%ir....."�>�'� M CommissionEx ires:7ul 9,2023
�''�+„� �su�`' Y P Y
EXTF'tACT FROM BY-LAWS OF TWE COMPANlES
"Articie V, Section $, At#ornevs-in-F�ct, 'Ttae Chief �xecutive Officer, the President, or any Executive Vice President or Vice President
may, by written instrumenE under the attested mrporate seal, appoint atEorneys-in-fact with authority ta execuYe bonds, policies,
recognizances, stipulations, undertalcings, or other li�e instruments on behalf of the Company, and may authorize any officer or any sych
attorney-in-Fact to af#ix the corporate seal thereto; and may with or without capse modify of revoke any such appoinhnen# or authority at �ny
time."
C�RTI�ICATE
I, the undersigned, Vice President of the ZURICH AMERICf1N INSi1RANCE COMI'ANY, the COLOMFIL, AMERICAN
CASUALTY AND SiT12ETY COMPANY, and the FIT�ELiTY ANi� DEPOSTT COMPANY OF MARY�.AND, do E�ereby certify tj�at
ti�e foregoing Power oP Attorney is stitl in ft�11 force and effect on the date of this cer�ificaYe; and I do further certify that Article V, Section
8, of the By- Laws oFthe Companies is still in force.
This Pow�r af At#orney and Certificate may k�e signed i�y facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution oi the Board of
Directors of the ZUItICH AMERICAN 1NSIJ1tANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly cailed and held on the I5Eh day of D�cember 1998.
RESOLVED: "Thaf the signature of the President pr a Vice PresidenT and the attesting signature of a SecreEary or an Assistant Secret�ry
and the Seal of the Company may be af�ixed by facsimiEe on any Power of Attorney...Any such Power or any cerEificate thereof hearing sych
facsiEr,ile signature and seai shat] be valid and binding on theCompany."
TE�is Power of Attorney and Certificare may be signed by facsimi]e under and by authority of the following reso[ution of the Board aF
Directars of the CQLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SUI2ETY COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of
May, 1994, and the following resolutian of the Boazd of Directors af the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT CQMP,A,NY OF M�IRYLAND at a
meeting duly calEed and held on the l Oth clay of May,1990.
12ESOLVED: "That the facsizr►ile or mechanically reproduced seal ofthe company and facsimi[e or mec�anica]Ey reproduced signa#ure of
any Vice-Presidenf, Secretary, or Assistant Secrefary of the Company, wh�ther made heretofore or hereafter, wherever appearing upon a
certi�ed evpy oi ar�y pawer of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon #he Company with The sarne force antE eifect
as though manually affixed.
IN TES`T'I]VIpNY UVHEREOF, I ha�e hereanto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the saicE Companies,
this �S�h day of Sepiember zozo
�,•�3 SNSVMq''%1�Lyq �
F[���yS � � �/4�%+i��O �%�m: ��riw L�
: �..n.. i yV�s i�� �ra�l�a �
i '� • p� q��M1 ���� � �MM ��
S,�
4wn� �ti��..*iw"�A /J�
�~ yC�C L ����--.��
/ ]
�.11
By: Brian M, IIodges
Viee President
TO REPORT A C�,AIM WITH REGARD TO A SURETY BQND, PL�ASE SUBMIT A COMPLET� DESCRIPTYON
OF THE CLAIM INCLUDiNG THE PRINCIPAL ON THE BOND, THE BOND NUMSER, AND YOUR CONTACT
INFORMATION TO:
Zurich Surety Claims
1299 Zurich Way
Schaumburg, IL 60196-1056
www.re ortsfolai3ns urichna.com
800-626-4577
0
l 8
Texas Impor�ant No�ice
IMPOR7ANT NOTICE
Ta ob#ain informatian or make a complaint:
You may ca[I Zurich North America's toli-free telephone
number for informatian or to make a eomplaint at:
7 -800-382-2'f 50
You may con#act #he Texas Depar#meni of Insurance io
obtain informatior� an corrtpanies, co�erag�s, rights, or
complaints at:
1-$fl0-252-3439
You may write the T�xas Departrr�er�t of
fnsurance:
P.O. 8ox 149'i 04
Austin, 7X 78714-9104
Fax: (592) 490-1007
Web: www.tdi.texas.go�
E-maif: ConsumerPrat�ction@tdi.texas.go�
PR�MIUM QR CLAiM DISpUTES:
Shauld you ha�e a disput� concerning your prerrtium or
abaut a claim, you shauld cvntaci the company first. If
the disput� is nat resolved, you may cor�taet fh� Texas
�epariment of lnsurance.
A7TACH THtS NOTICE TO YOUR pO�.ICY:
This notice is for information only and does nat becnme
a part or conditian of the attach�tf document.
AVISO IMPORTANI"E
N
ZURICN
Para obt�ner intorrrtacion a para pres�n#ar una queja;
Usted puede Ilamar al numera de telefono gratuito de
Zurich Nor#h America's para obtener informacion o para
presentar una queja al:
1-SDO-382-2150
Us#ed puede cornunicarse con el Deparkamento de Se-
guros de Texas para obtener informacion sobr� cor�-
panias, coberturas, derecf�os, o quejas al:
1-$p0-252-3439
Usted puecle escribir aE Departamento
de Seguros de Texas a:
P.O. Box 149'104
Aus#in, TX 78794-9104
�ax: (5'!2) 490-1007
Sitio web: www.�cfi.texas.go�
�-maii: ConsumerProtection@tcfi.texas.gov
DISPUTAS POR PRIMAS DE SEGUROS O
RECLAMAC�QNES:
Si tiene una disputa relacionada con su prima de seguro
o con una reclamacion, usted dehe c4mur�icarse cor� la
cornpania primero. 5i la disputa no es resuelta, ust�d
puede comunicarse con el f]epartamenfo de Seguros de
Texas.
ADJUN7� ESTE AVISO A SU P4L.IZA: Este aviso es
salamente para propositos informativos y no se con�-
�ierte en parte o en condicion dal doc�amenio adjun�o.
U-GU-296-E �Ofi/15)
Pag� 1 0€1
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS
OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
FOR DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS OF THE
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
FOR DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology .......................................................................................................... 1
1.01 Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.02 Terminology .................................................................................................................................. 5
Article 2 – Preliminary Matters ......................................................................................................................... 6
2.01 Before Starting Construction ........................................................................................................ 6
2.02 Preconstruction Conference .......................................................................................................... 6
2.03 Public Meeting .............................................................................................................................. 6
Article 3 – Contract Documents and Amending ............................................................................................... 6
3.01 Reference Standards ..................................................................................................................... 6
3.02 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents .................................................................. 6
Article 4 – Bonds and Insurance ....................................................................................................................... 7
4.01 Licensed Sureties and Insurers ..................................................................................................... 7
4.02 Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds ........................................................................ 7
4.03 Certificates of Insurance ............................................................................................................... 7
4.04 Contractor’s Insurance .................................................................................................................. 9
4.05 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace ........................................................... 12
Article 5 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ........................................................................................................ 12
5.01 Supervision and Superintendent ................................................................................................. 12
5.02 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................ 13
5.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ........................................................................................... 13
5.04 Project Schedule .......................................................................................................................... 14
5.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” ....................................................................................................... 14
5.06 Pre-Qualification of Bidders (Prime Contractors and Subcontractors) ..................................... 16
5.07 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ................................................................... 16
5.08 Wage Rates.................................................................................................................................. 18
5.09 Patent Fees and Royalties ........................................................................................................... 19
5.10 Laws and Regulations ................................................................................................................. 19
5.11 Use of Site and Other Areas ....................................................................................................... 19
5.12 Record Documents ...................................................................................................................... 20
5.13 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................. 21
5.14 Safety Representative ................................................................................................................. 21
5.15 Hazard Communication Programs ............................................................................................. 22
5.16 Submittals .................................................................................................................................... 22
5.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee .......................................................................... 23
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
5.18 Indemnification ........................................................................................................................... 24
5.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services .............................................................................. 24
5.20 Right to Audit: ............................................................................................................................ 25
5.21 Nondiscrimination....................................................................................................................... 25
Article 6 – Other Work at the Site ................................................................................................................... 26
6.01 Related Work at Site ................................................................................................................... 26
Article 7 – City’s Responsibilities................................................................................................................... 26
7.01 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals .............................................................................................. 26
7.02 Limitations on City’s Responsibilities ....................................................................................... 26
7.03 Compliance with Safety Program ............................................................................................... 27
Article 8 – City’s Observation Status During Construction ........................................................................... 27
8.01 City’s Project Representative ..................................................................................................... 27
8.02 Authorized Variations in Work .................................................................................................. 27
8.03 Rejecting Defective Work .......................................................................................................... 27
8.04 Determinations for Work Performed .......................................................................................... 28
Article 9 – Changes in the Work ..................................................................................................................... 28
9.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................................... 28
9.02 Notification to Surety .................................................................................................................. 28
Article 10 – Change of Contract Price; Change of Contract Time ................................................................ 28
10.01 Change of Contract Price ............................................................................................................ 28
10.02 Change of Contract Time............................................................................................................ 28
10.03 Delays .......................................................................................................................................... 28
Article 11 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work ...................... 29
11.01 Notice of Defects ........................................................................................................................ 29
11.02 Access to Work ........................................................................................................................... 29
11.03 Tests and Inspections .................................................................................................................. 29
11.04 Uncovering Work ....................................................................................................................... 30
11.05 City May Stop the Work ............................................................................................................. 30
11.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ................................................................................ 30
11.07 Correction Period ........................................................................................................................ 30
11.08 City May Correct Defective Work ............................................................................................. 31
Article 12 – Completion .................................................................................................................................. 32
12.01 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ................................................................................................... 32
12.02 Partial Utilization ........................................................................................................................ 32
12.03 Final Inspection ........................................................................................................................... 32
12.04 Final Acceptance ......................................................................................................................... 33
Article 13 – Suspension of Work .................................................................................................................... 33
13.01 City May Suspend Work ............................................................................................................ 33
Article 14 – Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................................. 34
14.01 Giving Notice .............................................................................................................................. 34
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
14.02 Computation of Times ................................................................................................................ 34
14.03 Cumulative Remedies ................................................................................................................. 34
14.04 Survival of Obligations ............................................................................................................... 35
14.05 Headings ...................................................................................................................................... 35
00 73 10- 1
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 1 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
1.01 Defined Terms
A. Wherever used in these General Conditions or in other Contract Documents, the terms listed
below have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof,
and words denoting gender shall include the masculine, feminine and neuter. Said terms are
generally capitalized or written in italics, but not always. When used in a context consistent with
the definition of a listed-defined term, the term shall have a meaning as defined below whether
capitalized or italicized or otherwise. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial
capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs,
and the titles of other documents or forms.
1. Agreement - The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between Developer
and Contractor covering the Work
2. Asbestos—Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is
releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United
States Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
3. Business Day – A business day is defined as a day that the City conducts normal business,
generally Monday through Friday, except for federal or state holidays observed by the City.
4. Buzzsaw – City’s on-line, electronic document management and collaboration system.
5. Calendar Day – A day consisting of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
6. City— The City of Fort Worth, Texas, a Texas home-rule municipal corporation, acting by,
its governing body through its City Manager, his designee, or agents authorized pursuant to
its duly authorized charter on his behalf.
7. Community Facilities Agreement (CFA) -–A Contract between the Developer and the City
for the Construction of one or more following public facilities within the City public right-of-
way or easement: Water, Sanitary Sewer, Street, Storm Drain, Street Light, and Street Signs.
A CFA may include private facilities within the right-of-way dedicated as private right-of-
way or easement on a recorded plat.
8. Contract—The entire and integrated written document incorporating the Contract
Documents between the Developer, Contractor, and/or City concerning the Work. The
Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or
oral.
9. Contract Documents—Those items that make up the contract and which must include the
Agreement, and it’s attachments such as standard construction specifications, standard City
Conditions, other general conditions of the Developer, including:
a. An Agreement
00 73 10- 2
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 2 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
b. Attachments to the Agreement
i. Bid Form
ii. Vendor Compliance with State Law Non-Resident Bidder
iii. Prequalification Statement
c. Current Prevailing Wage Rates Table (if required by City)
d. Insurance Accord Form
e. Payment Bond
f. Performance Bond
g. Maintenance Bond
h. Power of Attorney for Bonds
i. Workers Compensation Affidavit
j. MWBE Commitment Form( If required by City)
k. General Conditions
l. Supplementary Conditions
m. The Standard City Conditions
n. Specifications specifically made part of the Contract Documents by attachment, if
not attached, as incorporated by reference and described in the Table of Contents of
the Project’s Contract Documents
o. Drawings
p. Documentation submitted by contractor prior to Notice of Award.
q. The following which may be delivered or issued after the effective date if the
Agreement and, if issued become an incorporated part of the Contract Documents
i. Notice to Proceed
ii. Field Orders
iii. Change Orders
iv. Letters of Final Acceptance
r. Approved Submittals, other Contractor submittals, and the reports and drawings of
subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents.
10. Contractor—The individual or entity with whom Developer has entered into the Agreement.
11. Day or day – A day, unless otherwise defined, shall mean a Calendar Day.
12. Developer – An individual or entity that desires to make certain improvements within the
City of Fort Worth
13. Drawings—That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which
graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by
Contractor. Submittals are not Drawings as so defined.
14. Engineer—The licensed professional engineer or engineering firm registered in the State of
Texas performing professional services for the Developer.
15. Final Acceptance – The written notice given by the City to the Developer and/or Contractor
that the Work specified in the Contract Documents has been completed to the satisfaction of
the City.
00 73 10- 3
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 3 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
16. Final Inspection – Inspection carried out by the City to verify that the Contractor has
completed the Work, and each and every part or appurtenance thereof, fully, entirely, and in
conformance with the Contract Documents.
17. General Requirements—A part of the Contract Documents between the Developer and a
Contractor.
18. Laws and Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes,
and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having
jurisdiction.
19. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or
personal property.
20. Milestone—A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an
intermediate Contract Time prior to Final Acceptance of the Work.
21. Non-Participating Change Order—A document, which is prepared for and reviewed by the
City, which is signed by Contractor, and Developer, and authorizes an addition, deletion, or
revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued on
or after the Effective Date of the Agreement.
22. Participating Change Order—A document, which is prepared for and approved by the City,
which is signed by Contractor, Developer, and City and authorizes an addition, deletion, or
revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued on
or after the Effective Date of the Agreement.
23. Plans – See definition of Drawings.
24. Project Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, in accordance with
the General Requirements, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising
the Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Time.
25. Project—The Work to be performed under the Contract Documents.
26. Project Representative—The authorized representative of the City who will be assigned to
the Site.
27. Public Meeting – An announced meeting conducted by the Developer to facilitate public
participation and to assist the public in gaining an informed view of the Project.
28. Regular Working Hours – Hours beginning at 7:00 a.m. and ending at 6:00 p.m., Monday
thru Friday (excluding legal holidays).
29. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are
representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such
portion of the Work will be judged.
00 73 10- 4
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 4 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
30. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required
submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related
construction activities.
31. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by City or
Developer upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way, permits, and
easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by City or Developer which are
designated for the use of Contractor.
32. Specifications—That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for
materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and
certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto.
Specifications may be specifically made a part of the Contract Documents by attachment or,
if not attached, may be incorporated by reference as indicated in the Table of Contents
(Division 00 00 00) of each Project.
33. Standard City Conditions – That part of the Contract Documents setting forth requirements
of the City.
34. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any
other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site.
35. Submittals—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information
which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by
Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work.
36. Superintendent – The representative of the Contractor who is available at all times and able
to receive instructions from the City and/or Developer and to act for the Contractor.
37. Supplementary Conditions—That part of the Contract Documents which amends or
supplements the General Conditions.
38. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having
a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or
equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or Subcontractor.
39. Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires,
manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any
encasements containing such facilities, including but not limited to, those that convey
electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications,
cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or
other control systems.
40. Weekend Working Hours – Hours beginning at 9:00 a.m. and ending at 5:00 p.m., Saturday,
Sunday or legal holiday, as approved in advance by the City.
00 73 10- 5
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 5 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
41. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required
to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing
or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction
including any Participating Change Order, Non-Participating Change Order, or Field
Order, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such
construction, all as required by the Contract Documents.
42. Working Day – A working day is defined as a day, not including Saturdays, Sundays, or
legal holidays authorized by the City for contract purposes, in which weather or other
conditions not under the control of the Contractor will permit the performance of the
principal unit of work underway for a continuous period of not less than 7 hours between 7
a.m. and 6 p.m.
1.02 Terminology
A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraph 1.02.B through D are not defined but, when used in
the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.
B. Defective:
1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is
unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:
a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or
b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or
approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or
c. has been damaged prior to City’s written acceptance.
C. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide:
1. The word “Furnish” or the word “Install” or the word “Perform” or the word “Provide” or
the word “Supply,” or any combination or similar directive or usage thereof, shall mean
furnishing and incorporating in the Work including all necessary labor, materials, equipment,
and everything necessary to perform the Work indicated, unless specifically limited in the
context used.
D. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known
technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in
accordance with such recognized meaning.
00 73 10- 6
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 6 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.01 Before Starting Construction
Baseline Schedules: Submit to City in accordance with the Contract Documents, and prior to starting
the Work. New schedules will be submitted to City when Participating Change Orders or Non-
Participating Change Orders occur.
2.02 Preconstruction Conference
Before any Work at the Site is started, the Contractor shall attend a Preconstruction Conference as
specified in the Contract Documents.
2.03 Public Meeting
Contractor may not mobilize any equipment, materials or resources to the Site prior to Contractor
attending the Public Meeting as scheduled by the City.
ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND AMENDING
3.01 Reference Standards
A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations
1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society,
organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or
by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations
in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there
were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.
2. No provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to City, or any of its officers,
directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or
authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to
undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents.
3.02 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents
A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in
the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by a Participating Change Order or a
Non-Participating Change Order.
B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and
deviations in the Work not involving a change in Contract Price or Contract Time, may be
authorized, by one or more of the following ways:
1. A Field Order;
00 73 10- 7
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 7 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
1. City’s or Engineer’s review of a Submittal (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 5.16.C); or
2. City’s written interpretation or clarification.
ARTICLE 4 – BONDS AND INSURANCE
4.01 Licensed Sureties and Insurers
All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by
Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized
in the State of Texas to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverage so required.
Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications
as may be provided Section 4.04.
4.02 Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds
A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds in the name of Developer and City, in
accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253 or successor statute, each in an amount
equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of
Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents.
B. Contractor shall furnish maintenance bonds in the name of Developer and City in an amount
equal to the Contract Price as security to protect the City against any defects in any portion of the
Work described in the Contract Documents. Maintenance bonds shall remain in effect for two
(2) years after the date of Final Acceptance by the City.
C. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided
otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the list
of “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and
as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial
Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed
by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a sealed and dated power of attorney
which shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed each bond.
D. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or
its right to do business is terminated in the State of Texas or it ceases to meet the requirements of
Paragraph 4.02.C, Contractor shall promptly notify City and shall, within 30 days after the event
giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply
with the requirements of Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.02.C.
4.03 Certificates of Insurance
Contractor shall deliver to Developer and City, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee
identified in these Standard City Conditions certificates of insurance (and other evidence of
insurance requested by City or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to
purchase and maintain.
00 73 10- 8
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 8 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
1. The certificate of insurance shall document the City, an as “Additional Insured” on all
liability policies.
2. The Contractor’s general liability insurance shall include a, “per project” or “per location”,
endorsement, which shall be identified in the certificate of insurance provided to the City.
3. The certificate shall be signed by an agent authorized to bind coverage on behalf of the
insured, be complete in its entirety, and show complete insurance carrier names as listed in
the current A.M. Best Property & Casualty Guide
4. The insurers for all policies must be licensed and/or approved to do business in the State of
Texas. Except for workers’ compensation, all insurers must have a minimum rating of A-:
VII in the current A. M. Best Key Rating Guide or have reasonably equivalent financial
strength and solvency to the satisfaction of Risk Management. If the rating is below that
required, written approval of City is required.
5. All applicable policies shall include a Waiver of Subrogation (Rights of Recovery) in favor
of the City. In addition, the Contractor agrees to waive all rights of subrogation against the
Engineer (if applicable), and each additional insured identified in these Standard City
Conditions. Failure of the City to demand such certificates or other evidence of full
compliance with the insurance requirements or failure of the City to identify a deficiency
from evidence that is provided shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor’s obligation
to maintain such lines of insurance coverage.
6. If insurance policies are not written for specified coverage limits, an Umbrella or Excess
Liability insurance for any differences is required. Excess Liability shall follow form of the
primary coverage.
7. Unless otherwise stated, all required insurance shall be written on the “occurrence basis”. If
coverage is underwritten on a claims-made basis, the retroactive date shall be coincident with
or prior to the date of the effective date of the agreement and the certificate of insurance shall
state that the coverage is claims-made and the retroactive date. The insurance coverage shall
be maintained for the duration of the Contract and for three (3) years following Final
Acceptance provided under the Contract Documents or for the warranty period, whichever is
longer. An annual certificate of insurance submitted to the City shall evidence such
insurance coverage.
8. Policies shall have no exclusions by endorsements, which, neither nullify or amend, the
required lines of coverage, nor decrease the limits of said coverage unless such endorsements
are approved in writing by the City. In the event a Contract has been bid or executed and the
exclusions are determined to be unacceptable or the City desires additional insurance
coverage, and the City desires the contractor/engineer to obtain such coverage, the contract
price shall be adjusted by the cost of the premium for such additional coverage plus 10%.
9. Any self-insured retention (SIR), in excess of $25,000.00, affecting required insurance
coverage shall be approved by the City in regards to asset value and stockholders' equity. In
00 73 10- 9
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 9 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
lieu of traditional insurance, alternative coverage maintained through insurance pools or risk
retention groups, must also be approved by City.
10. Any deductible in excess of $5,000.00, for any policy that does not provide coverage on a
first-dollar basis, must be acceptable to and approved by the City.
11. City, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to review the insurance requirements and to
make reasonable adjustments to insurance coverage’s and their limits when deemed
necessary and prudent by the City based upon changes in statutory law, court decision or the
claims history of the industry as well as of the contracting party to the City. The City shall
be required to provide prior notice of 90 days, and the insurance adjustments shall be
incorporated into the Work by Change Order.
12. City shall be entitled, upon written request and without expense, to receive copies of policies
and endorsements thereto and may make any reasonable requests for deletion or revision or
modifications of particular policy terms, conditions, limitations, or exclusions necessary to
conform the policy and endorsements to the requirements of the Contract. Deletions,
revisions, or modifications shall not be required where policy provisions are established by
law or regulations binding upon either party or the underwriter on any such policies.
13. City shall not be responsible for the direct payment of insurance premium costs for
Contractor’s insurance.
4.04 Contractor’s Insurance
A. Workers Compensation and Employers’ Liability. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such
insurance coverage with limits consistent with statutory benefits outlined in the Texas Workers’
Compensation Act (Texas Labor Code, Ch. 406, as amended), and minimum limits for
Employers’ Liability as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide
protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor’s
performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents,
whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly
or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts
any of them may be liable:
1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit
acts;
2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of
Contractor’s employees.
3. The limits of liability for the insurance shall provide the following coverages for not less
than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations
a. Statutory limits
b. Employer's liability
00 73 10- 10
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 10 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
1) $100,000 each accident/occurrence
2) $100,000 Disease - each employee
3) $500,000 Disease - policy limit
B. Commercial General Liability. Coverage shall include but not be limited to covering liability
(bodily injury or property damage) arising from: premises/operations, independent contractors,
products/completed operations, personal injury, and liability under an insured contract. Insurance
shall be provided on an occurrence basis, and as comprehensive as the current Insurance
Services Office (ISO) policy. This insurance shall apply as primary insurance with respect to
any other insurance or self-insurance programs afforded to the City. The Commercial General
Liability policy, shall have no exclusions by endorsements that would alter of nullify
premises/operations, products/completed operations, contractual, personal injury, or advertising
injury, which are normally contained with the policy, unless the City approves such exclusions
in writing.
1. For construction projects that present a substantial completed operation exposure, the City
may require the contractor to maintain completed operations coverage for a minimum of no
less than three (3) years following the completion of the project
2. Contractor's Liability Insurance under this Section which shall be on a per project basis
covering the Contractor with minimum limits of:
a. $1,000,000 each occurrence
b. $2,000,000 aggregate limit
3. The policy must have an endorsement (Amendment – Aggregate Limits of Insurance)
making the General Aggregate Limits apply separately to each job site.
4. The Commercial General Liability Insurance policies shall provide “X”, “C”, and “U”
coverage’s. Verification of such coverage must be shown in the Remarks Article of the
Certificate of Insurance.
C. Automobile Liability. A commercial business auto policy shall provide coverage on “any auto”,
defined as autos owned, hired and non-owned and provide indemnity for claims for damages
because bodily injury or death of any person and or property damage arising out of the work,
maintenance or use of any motor vehicle by the Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone
for whose acts any of them may be liable.
1. Automobile Liability, Contractor’s Liability Insurance under this Section, which shall be in
an amount not less than the following amounts:
a. Automobile Liability - a commercial business policy shall provide coverage on "Any
Auto", defined as autos owned, hired and non-owned.
00 73 10- 11
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 11 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
1) $1,000,000 each accident on a combined single limit basis. Split limits are
acceptable if limits are at least:
2) $250,000 Bodily Injury per person
3) $500,000 Bodily Injury per accident /
4) $100,000 Property Damage
D. Railroad Protective Liability. If any of the work or any warranty work is within the limits of
railroad right-of-way, the Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
1. The Contractor’s construction activities will require its employees, agents, subcontractors,
equipment, and material deliveries to cross railroad properties and tracks owned and
operated by: ____________________________________________________________
Write the name of the railroad company. (If none, then write none)
2. The Contractor shall conduct its operations on railroad properties in such a manner as not to
interfere with, hinder, or obstruct the railroad company in any manner whatsoever in the use
or operation of its/their trains or other property. Such operations on railroad properties may
require that Contractor to execute a “Right of Entry Agreement” with the particular railroad
company or companies involved, and to this end the Contractor should satisfy itself as to the
requirements of each railroad company and be prepared to execute the right-of-entry (if any)
required by a railroad company. The requirements specified herein likewise relate to the
Contractor’s use of private and/or construction access roads crossing said railroad company’s
properties.
3. The Contractual Liability coverage required by Paragraph 5.04D of the General Conditions
shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts, issued by companies
satisfactory to the City and to the Railroad Company for a term that continues for so long as
the Contractor’s operations and work cross, occupy, or touch railroad property:
a. General Aggregate: _____________________________________
Enter limits provided by Railroad Company (If none, write none)
b. Each Occurrence: : _____________________________________
Enter limits provided by Railroad Company (If none, write none)
4. With respect to the above outlined insurance requirements, the following shall govern:
a. Where a single railroad company is involved, the Contractor shall provide one insurance
policy in the name of the railroad company. However, if more than one grade separation
or at-grade crossing is affected by the Project at entirely separate locations on the line or
lines of the same railroad company, separate coverage may be required, each in the
amount stated above.
b. Where more than one railroad company is operating on the same right-of-way or where
several railroad companies are involved and operated on their own separate rights-of-
Union Pacific Railroad Company
N/A, if required $4,000,000
NA/, if required $2,000,000
00 73 10- 12
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 12 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
way, the Contractor may be required to provide separate insurance policies in the name
of each railroad company.
c. If, in addition to a grade separation or an at-grade crossing, other work or activity is
proposed on a railroad company’s right-of-way at a location entirely separate from the
grade separation or at-grade crossing, insurance coverage for this work must be included
in the policy covering the grade separation.
d. If no grade separation is involved but other work is proposed on a railroad company’s
right-of-way, all such other work may be covered in a single policy for that railroad, even
though the work may be at two or more separate locations.
5. No work or activities on a railroad company’s property to be performed by the Contractor
shall be commenced until the Contractor has furnished the City with an original policy or
policies of the insurance for each railroad company named, as required above. All such
insurance must be approved by the City and each affected Railroad Company prior to the
Contractor’s beginning work.
6. The insurance specified above must be carried until all Work to be performed on the railroad
right-of-way has been completed and the grade crossing, if any, is no longer used by the
Contractor. In addition, insurance must be carried during all maintenance and/or repair work
performed in the railroad right-of-way. Such insurance must name the railroad company as
the insured, together with any tenant or lessee of the railroad company operating over tracks
involved in the Project.
E. Notification of Policy Cancellation: Contractor shall immediately notify City upon cancellation
or other loss of insurance coverage. Contractor shall stop work until replacement insurance has
been procured. There shall be no time credit for days not worked pursuant to this section.
4.05 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace
If City has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the bonds or insurance
required to be purchased and maintained by the Contractor in accordance with Article 5 on the basis
of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the Developer and City shall so notify the
Contractor in writing within 10 Business Days after receipt of the certificates (or other evidence
requested). Contractor shall provide to the City such additional information in respect of insurance
provided as the Developer or City may reasonably request. If Contractor does not purchase or
maintain all of the bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Developer or City
shall notify the Contractor in writing of such failure prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure
to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage.
ARTICLE 5 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
5.01 Supervision and Superintendent
A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the
00 73 10- 13
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 13 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction.
B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent, English-
speaking, Superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to City. The
Superintendent will be Contractor’s representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on
behalf of Contractor. All communication given to or received from the Superintendent shall be
binding on Contractor.
C. Contractor shall notify the City 24 hours prior to moving areas during the sequence of
construction.
5.02 Labor; Working Hours
A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to perform construction as
required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and
order at the Site.
B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at
the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work
at the Site shall be performed during Regular Working Hours. Contractor will not permit the
performance of Work beyond Regular Working Hours or for Weekend Working Hours without
City’s written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld). Written request (by letter or
electronic communication) to perform Work:
1. for beyond Regular Working Hours request must be made by noon at least two (2) Business
Days prior
2. for Weekend Working Hours request must be made by noon of the preceding Thursday
3. for legal holidays request must be made by noon two Business Days prior to the legal
holiday.
5.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment
A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full
responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction
equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary
facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the
performance, Contractor required testing, start-up, and completion of the Work.
B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified,
shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All
special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit
of City. If required by City, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of
required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment.
00 73 10- 14
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 14 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be stored, applied, installed,
connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of
the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.
5.04 Project Schedule
A. Contractor shall adhere to the Project Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.01
and the General Requirements as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.
1. Contractor shall submit to City for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.01 and
the General Requirements) proposed adjustments in the Project Schedule.
2. Proposed adjustments in the Project Schedule that will change the Contract Time shall be
submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 9. Adjustments in Contract Time
for projects with City participation shall be made by participating change orders.
5.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals”
A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or
description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless
the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent,
or “or-equal” item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment of other
Suppliers may be submitted to City for review under the circumstances described below.
1. “Or-Equal” Items: If in City’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by
Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in
related Work will be required, it may be considered by City as an “or-equal” item, in which
case review and approval of the proposed item may, in City’s sole discretion, be
accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of
proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph 5.05.A.1, a proposed item of
material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if:
a. City determines that:
1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance,
strength, and design characteristics;
2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results
imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; and
3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and
b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:
1) there will be no increase in cost to the City or increase in Contract Time; and
00 73 10- 15
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 15 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the
Contract Documents.
2. Substitute Items:
a. If in City’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does
not qualify as an “or-equal” item under Paragraph 5.05.A.1, it may be submitted as a
proposed substitute item.
b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow City to
determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that
named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute
items of material or equipment will not be accepted by City from anyone other than
Contractor.
c. Contractor shall make written application to City for review of a proposed substitute item
of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application shall
comply with Section 01 25 00 and:
1) shall certify that the proposed substitute item will:
i. perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general
design;
ii. be similar in substance to that specified;
iii. be suited to the same use as that specified; and
2) will state:
i. the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will prejudice
Contractor’s achievement of final completion on time;
ii. whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in
any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract
with City for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed
substitute item;
iii. whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with
the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty; and
3) will identify:
i. all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified;
ii. available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services; and
00 73 10- 16
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 16 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
4) shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or
indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and Damage
Claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change.
B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique,
sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents,
Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure
of construction approved by City. Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow City, in
City’s sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly
called for by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall make written application to City for
review in the same manner as those provided in Paragraph 5.05.A.2.
C. City’s Evaluation: City will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each
proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 5.05.A and 5.05.B. City may require
Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute. City will be the sole judge of
acceptability. No “or-equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until City’s review
is complete, which will be evidenced by a Change Order in the case of a substitute and an
accepted Submittal for an “or-equal.” City will advise Contractor in writing of its determination.
D. Special Guarantee: City may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special
performance guarantee, warranty, or other surety with respect to any substitute. Contractor shall
indemnify and hold harmless City and anyone directly or indirectly employed by them from and
against any and all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including attorneys fees) arising out
of the use of substituted materials or equipment.
E. City’s Cost Reimbursement: City will record City’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or
submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 5.05.A.2 and 5.05.B. Whether or not City
approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor may be required to
reimburse City for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor may also be required to
reimburse City for the charges for making changes in the Contract Documents.
F. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or
“or-equal” at Contractor’s expense.
G. Substitute Reimbursement: Costs (savings or charges) attributable to acceptance of a substitute
shall be incorporated to the Contract by Participating Change Order.
5.06 Pre-Qualification of Bidders (Prime Contractors and Subcontractors)
A. The Contractor and any subcontractors are required to be prequalified for the work types
requiring pre-qualification
5.07 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others
A. Minority and Women Owned Business Enterprise Compliance:
00 73 10- 17
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 17 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
Required for this Contract.
(Check this box if there is any City Participation)
Not Required for this Contract.
It is City policy to ensure the full and equitable participation by Minority and Women Business
Enterprises (MWBE) in the procurement of goods and services on a contractual basis. If the
Contract Documents provide for a MWBE goal, Contractor is required to comply with the intent
of the City’s MWBE Ordinance (as amended) by the following:
1. Contractor shall, upon request by City, provide complete and accurate information regarding
actual work performed by a MWBE on the Contract and payment therefor.
2. Contractor will not make additions, deletions, or substitutions of accepted MWBE without
written consent of the City. Any unjustified change or deletion shall be a material breach of
Contract and may result in debarment in accordance with the procedures outlined in the
Ordinance.
3. Contractor shall, upon request by City, allow an audit and/or examination of any books,
records, or files in the possession of the Contractor that will substantiate the actual work
performed by an MWBE. Material misrepresentation of any nature will be grounds for
termination of the Contract. Any such misrepresentation may be grounds for disqualification
of Contractor to bid on future contracts with the City for a period of not less than three years.
B. Contractor shall be fully responsible to City for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors,
Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as
Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract
Documents:
1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity
any contractual relationship between City and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other
individual or entity; nor
2. shall create any obligation on the part of City to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys
due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise
be required by Laws and Regulations.
C. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the
Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor.
D. All Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing
any of the Work shall communicate with City through Contractor.
E. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically
binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of these Contract
00 73 10- 18
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 18 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
Documents, Contractor shall provide City contract numbers and reference numbers to the
Subcontractors and/or Suppliers.
5.08 Wage Rates
Required for this Contract.
Not Required for this Contract.
A. Duty to pay Prevailing Wage Rates. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of
Chapter 2258, Texas Government Code (as amended), including the payment of not less than the
rates determined by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth to be the prevailing wage rates in
accordance with Chapter 2258. Such prevailing wage rates are included in these Contract
Documents.
B. Penalty for Violation. A Contractor or any Subcontractor who does not pay the prevailing wage
shall, upon demand made by the City, pay to the City $60 for each worker employed for each
calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the prevailing wage rates
stipulated in these contract documents. This penalty shall be retained by the City to offset its
administrative costs, pursuant to Texas Government Code 2258.023.
C. Complaints of Violations and City Determination of Good Cause. On receipt of information,
including a complaint by a worker, concerning an alleged violation of 2258.023, Texas
Government Code, by a Contractor or Subcontractor, the City shall make an initial
determination, before the 31st day after the date the City receives the information, as to whether
good cause exists to believe that the violation occurred. The City shall notify in writing the
Contractor or Subcontractor and any affected worker of its initial determination. Upon the
City’s determination that there is good cause to believe the Contractor or Subcontractor has
violated Chapter 2258, the City shall retain the full amounts claimed by the claimant or
claimants as the difference between wages paid and wages due under the prevailing wage rates,
such amounts being subtracted from successive progress payments pending a final determination
of the violation.
D. Arbitration Required if Violation Not Resolved. An issue relating to an alleged violation of
Section 2258.023, Texas Government Code, including a penalty owed to the City or an affected
worker, shall be submitted to binding arbitration in accordance with the Texas General
Arbitration Act (Article 224 et seq., Revised Statutes) if the Contractor or Subcontractor and any
affected worker does not resolve the issue by agreement before the 15th day after the date the
City makes its initial determination pursuant to Paragraph C above. If the persons required to
arbitrate under this section do not agree on an arbitrator before the 11th day after the date that
arbitration is required, a district court shall appoint an arbitrator on the petition of any of the
persons. The City is not a party in the arbitration. The decision and award of the arbitrator is
final and binding on all parties and may be enforced in any court of competent jurisdiction.
E. Records to be Maintained. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall, for a period of three (3)
years following the date of acceptance of the work, maintain records that show (i) the name and
00 73 10- 19
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 19 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor in the construction of the Work provided
for in this Contract; and (ii) the actual per diem wages paid to each worker. The records shall be
open at all reasonable hours for inspection by the City. The provisions of Paragraph 6.23, Right
to Audit, shall pertain to this inspection.
F. Progress Payments. With each progress payment or payroll period, whichever is less, the
Contractor shall submit an affidavit stating that the Contractor has complied with the
requirements of Chapter 2258, Texas Government Code.
G. Posting of Wage Rates. The Contractor shall post prevailing wage rates in a conspicuous place at
all times.
H. Subcontractor Compliance. The Contractor shall include in its subcontracts and/or shall
otherwise require all of its Subcontractors to comply with Paragraphs A through G above.
5.09 Patent Fees and Royalties
A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless City, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited
to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court
or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of
patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from
the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified
in the Contract Documents.
5.10 Laws and Regulations
A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations
applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, the City shall not be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s
compliance with any Laws or Regulations.
B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws
or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not
limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all
court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work.
However, it shall not be Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and
Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of
Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.01.
5.11 Use of Site and Other Areas
A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas:
1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and
the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and
shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or
00 73 10- 20
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 20 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to
any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas
resulting from the performance of the Work.
2. At any time when, in the judgment of the City, the Contractor has obstructed or closed or is
carrying on operations in a portion of a street, right-of-way, or easement greater than is
necessary for proper execution of the Work, the City may require the Contractor to finish the
section on which operations are in progress before work is commenced on any additional
area of the Site.
3. Should any Damage Claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the
performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly attempt to resolve the Damage Claim.
4. Pursuant to Paragraph 5.18, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless City, from and
against all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to any claim or
action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against City.
B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work
Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials,
rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other
debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. Site Maintenance Cleaning: 24 hours after written notice is given to the Contractor that the
clean-up on the job site is proceeding in a manner unsatisfactory to the City or Developer, if the
Contractor fails to correct the unsatisfactory procedure, the City may take such direct action as
the City deems appropriate to correct the clean-up deficiencies cited to the Contractor in the
written notice (by letter or electronic communication), and shall be entitled to recover its cost in
doing so. The City may withhold Final Acceptance until clean-up is complete and cost are
recovered.
D. Final Site Cleaning: Prior to Final Acceptance of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and
the Work and make it ready for utilization by City or adjacent property owner. At the completion
of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment
and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition or better all property
disturbed by the Work.
E. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded
in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work
or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it.
5.12 Record Documents
A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site or in a place designated by the Contractor
and approved by the City, one (1) record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change
Orders, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated
to show changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved
00 73 10- 21
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 21 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
Samples and a counterpart of all accepted Submittals will be available to City for reference.
Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, any operation and maintenance manuals,
and Submittals will be delivered to City prior to Final Inspection. Contractor shall include
accurate locations for buried and imbedded items.
5.13 Safety and Protection
A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve
Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of
their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall
take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to
prevent damage, injury or loss to:
1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;
2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on
or off the Site; and
3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for
removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.
B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of
persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and
shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall
notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when
prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection,
removal, relocation, and replacement of their property.
C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of City’s safety programs, if any.
D. Contractor shall inform City of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program, if any,
with which City’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site.
E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 5.13.A.2 or 5.13.A.3 caused,
directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any
other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the
Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor.
F. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue
until such time as all the Work is completed and City has accepted the Work.
5.14 Safety Representative
Contractor shall inform City in writing of Contractor’s designated safety representative at the Site.
00 73 10- 22
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 22 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
5.15 Hazard Communication Programs
Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other
hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or
among employers in accordance with Laws or Regulations.
5.16 Submittals
A. Contractor shall submit required Submittals to City for review and acceptance. Each submittal
will be identified as required by City.
1. Submit number of copies specified in the General Requirements.
2. Data shown on the Submittals will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions,
specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show City the
services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable City to
review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 5.16.C.
3. Submittals submitted as herein provided by Contractor and reviewed by City for
conformance with the design concept shall be executed in conformity with the Contract
Documents unless otherwise required by City.
4. When Submittals are submitted for the purpose of showing the installation in greater detail,
their review shall not excuse Contractor from requirements shown on the Drawings and
Specifications.
5. For-Information-Only submittals upon which the City is not expected to conduct review or
take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents.
6. Submit required number of Samples specified in the Specifications.
7. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers,
the use for which intended and other data as City may require to enable City to review the
submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 5.16.C.
B. Where a Submittal is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any
related Work performed prior to City’s review and acceptance of the pertinent submittal will be
at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor.
C. City’s Review:
1. City will provide timely review of required Submittals in accordance with the Schedule of
Submittals acceptable to City. City’s review and acceptance will be only to determine if the
items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform
to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design
concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract
Documents.
00 73 10- 23
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 23 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
2. City’s review and acceptance will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or
procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence,
or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract
Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and
acceptance of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the
item functions.
3. City’s review and acceptance shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any
variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied
with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 and City has given written acceptance of each
such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the
Submittal. City’s review and acceptance shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for
complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
5.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to City that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract
Documents and will not be defective. City and its officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on representation of
Contractor’s warranty and guarantee.
B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:
1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor,
Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is
responsible; or
2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.
C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is
not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to
perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents:
1. observations by City;
2. recommendation or payment by City or Developer of any progress or final payment;
3. the issuance of a certificate of Final Acceptance by City or any payment related thereto by
City;
4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by City;
5. any review and acceptance of a Submittal by City;
6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or
00 73 10- 24
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 24 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
7. any correction of defective Work by City.
D. The Contractor shall remedy any defects or damages in the Work and pay for any damage to
other work or property resulting therefrom which shall appear within a period of two (2) years
from the date of Final Acceptance of the Work unless a longer period is specified and shall
furnish a good and sufficient maintenance bond, complying with the requirements of Article
4.02.B. The City will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness.
5.18 Indemnification
A. Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and defend, at its own expense, the
City, its officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all claims arising out of, or
alleged to arise out of, the work and services to be performed by the Contractor, its officers,
agents, employees, subcontractors, licenses or invitees under this Contract. THIS
INDEMNIFICATION PROVISION IS SPECIFICALLY INTENDED TO OPERATE
AND BE EFFECTIVE EVEN IF IT IS ALLEGED OR PROVEN THAT ALL OR SOME
OF THE DAMAGES BEING SOUGHT WERE CAUSED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, BY
ANY ACT, OMISSION OR NEGLIGENCE OF THE CITY. This indemnity provision is
intended to include, without limitation, indemnity for costs, expenses and legal fees incurred by
the City in defending against such claims and causes of actions.
B. Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless, at its own expense, the City, its
officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all loss, damage or destruction of
property of the City, arising out of, or alleged to arise out of, the work and services to be
performed by the Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, subcontractors, licensees or invitees
under this Contract. THIS INDEMNIFICATION PROVISION IS SPECIFICALLY
INTENDED TO OPERATE AND BE EFFECTIVE EVEN IF IT IS ALLEGED OR
PROVEN THAT ALL OR SOME OF THE DAMAGES BEING SOUGHT WERE
CAUSED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, BY ANY ACT, OMISSION OR NEGLIGENCE OF
THE CITY.
5.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services
A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are
specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such
services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences and procedures.
B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,
materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, City
will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall
cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose
signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and
Submittals prepared by such professional. Submittals related to the Work designed or certified
by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when
submitted to City.
00 73 10- 25
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 25 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
C. City shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services,
certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided City has specified
to Contractor performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.
D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 5.19, City’s review and acceptance of design calculations and design
drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance
and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. City’s
review and acceptance of Submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be
only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 5.16.C.
5.20 Right to Audit:
A. The City reserves the right to audit all projects utilizing City funds
B. The Contractor agrees that the City shall, until the expiration of three (3) years after final
payment under this Contract, have access to and the right to examine and photocopy any directly
pertinent books, documents, papers, and records of the Contractor involving transactions relating
to this Contract. Contractor agrees that the City shall have access during Regular Working Hours
to all necessary Contractor facilities and shall be provided adequate and appropriate work space
in order to conduct audits in compliance with the provisions of this Paragraph. The City shall
give Contractor reasonable advance notice of intended audits.
C. Contractor further agrees to include in all its subcontracts hereunder a provision to the effect that
the subcontractor agrees that the City shall, until the expiration of three (3) years after final
payment under this Contract, have access to and the right to examine and photocopy any directly
pertinent books, documents, papers, and records of such Subcontractor, involving transactions to
the subcontract, and further, that City shall have access during Regular Working Hours to all
Subcontractor facilities, and shall be provided adequate and appropriate work space in order to
conduct audits in compliance with the provisions of this Paragraph. The City shall give
Subcontractor reasonable advance notice of intended audits.
D. Contractor and Subcontractor agree to photocopy such documents as may be requested by the
City. The City agrees to reimburse Contractor for the cost of the copies as follows at the rate
published in the Texas Administrative Code in effect as of the time copying is performed.
5.21 Nondiscrimination
A. The City is responsible for operating Public Transportation Programs and implementing transit-
related projects, which are funded in part with Federal financial assistance awarded by the U.S.
Department of Transportation and the Federal Transit Administration (FTA), without
discriminating against any person in the United States on the basis of race, color, or national
origin.
B. Title VI, Civil Rights Act of 1964 as amended: Contractor shall comply with the requirements of
the Act and the Regulations as further defined in the Supplementary Conditions for any project
receiving Federal assistance.
00 73 10- 26
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 26 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
ARTICLE 6 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
6.01 Related Work at Site
A. City may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with City’s employees, or other
City contractors, or through other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by
utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then written notice
thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and
B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility
owner, and City, if City is performing other work with City’s employees or other City
contractors, proper and safe access to the Site, provide a reasonable opportunity for the
introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work, and
properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of
the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come
together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of
others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that
Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of City and the others whose
work will be affected.
C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work
performed by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly
report to City in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it
unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s
failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for
integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects in the work provided by others.
ARTICLE 7 – CITY’S RESPONSIBILITIES
7.01 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals
City’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph
11.03.
7.02 Limitations on City’s Responsibilities
A. The City shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. City will not be responsible for
Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. City will notify the Contractor of applicable safety plans pursuant to Paragraph 5.13.
00 73 10- 27
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 27 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
7.03 Compliance with Safety Program
While at the Site, City’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable
requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which City has been informed pursuant to
Paragraph 5.13.
ARTICLE 8 – CITY’S OBSERVATION STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
8.01 City’s Project Representative
City will provide one or more Project Representative(s) during the construction period. The duties
and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of City’s representative during construction are
set forth in the Contract Documents.
A. City’s Project Representative will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various
stages of construction as City deems necessary in order to observe the progress that has been
made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on
information obtained during such visits and observations, City’s Project Representative will
determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents.
City’s Project Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections
on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. City’s Project Representative’s efforts
will be directed toward providing City a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work
will conform generally to the Contract Documents.
B. City’s Project Representative’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on
authority and responsibility in the Contract Documents.
8.02 Authorized Variations in Work
City’s Project Representative may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of
the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as
indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be
binding on City Developer, and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work involved promptly.
8.03 Rejecting Defective Work
City will have authority to reject Work which City’s Project Representative believes to be defective,
or will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will
prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as
indicated by the Contract Documents. City will have authority to conduct special inspection or
testing of the Work as provided in Article 11, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or
completed.
00 73 10- 28
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 28 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
8.04 Determinations for Work Performed
Contractor will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Work performed. City’s Project
Representative will review with Contractor the preliminary determinations on such matters before
rendering a written recommendation. City’s written decision will be final (except as modified to
reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data).
ARTICLE 9 – CHANGES IN THE WORK
9.01 Authorized Changes in the Work
A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, City may, at any time or
from time to time, order Extra Work. Upon notice of such Extra Work, Contractor shall
promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable
conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). Extra Work
shall be memorialized by a Participating Change Order which may or may not precede an order
of Extra work.
B. For minor changes of Work not requiring changes to Contract Time or Contract Price on a
project with City participation, a Field Order may be issued by the City.
9.02 Notification to Surety
If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the
general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited
to, Contract Price or Contract Time), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s
responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted by the Contractor to reflect the
effect of any such change.
ARTICLE 10 – CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME
10.01 Change of Contract Price
A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Participating Change Order for projects with City
participation.
10.02 Change of Contract Time
A. The Contract Time may only be changed by a Participating Change Order for projects with City
participation.
10.03 Delays
A. If Contractor is delayed, City shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or
damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and
other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by
Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.
00 73 10- 29
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 29 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
ARTICLE 11 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF
DEFECTIVE WORK
11.01 Notice of Defects
Notice of all defective Work of which City has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor.
Defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13.
11.02 Access to Work
City, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will
have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and
testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of
Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable.
11.03 Tests and Inspections
A. Contractor shall give City timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections,
tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required
inspections or tests.
B. If Contract Documents, Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any
of the Work (or part thereof) to be inspected, tested, or approved, Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for arranging and obtaining such independent inspections, tests, retests or
approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish City the required certificates of
inspection or approval; excepting, however, those fees specifically identified in the
Supplementary Conditions or any Texas Department of Licensure and Regulation (TDLR)
inspections, which shall be paid as described in the Supplementary Conditions.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection
with any inspections, tests, re-tests, or approvals required for City’s acceptance of materials or
equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment
submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work.
Such inspections, tests, re-tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations approved by
City.
D. City may arrange for the services of an independent testing laboratory (“Testing Lab”) to
perform any inspections or tests (“Testing”) for any part of the Work, as determined solely by
City.
1. City will coordinate such Testing to the extent possible, with Contractor;
2. Should any Testing under this Section 11.03 D result in a “fail”, “did not pass” or other
similar negative result, the Contractor shall be responsible for paying for any and all retests.
Contractor’s cancellation without cause of City initiated Testing shall be deemed a negative
result and require a retest.
00 73 10- 30
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 30 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
3. Any amounts owed for any retest under this Section 11.03 D shall be paid directly to the
Testing Lab by Contractor. City will forward all invoices for retests to
Developer/Contractor.
4. If Contractor fails to pay the Testing Lab, City will not issue a letter of Final Acceptance
until the Testing Lab is Paid
E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of City, Contractor shall, if requested by City, uncover
such Work for observation.
11.04 Uncovering Work
A. If any Work is covered contrary to the Contract Documents or specific instructions by the City, it
must, if requested by City, be uncovered for City’s observation and replaced at Contractor’s
expense.
11.05 City May Stop the Work
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials
or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to
the Contract Documents, City may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until
the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of City to stop the Work shall not
give rise to any duty on the part of City to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent
of any of them.
11.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work
A. Promptly after receipt of written notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work pursuant to
an acceptable schedule, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has
been rejected by City, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, additional testing, losses, and damages (including but not
limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all
court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction
or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others).
Failure to require the removal of any defective Work shall not constitute acceptance of such
Work.
B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 11.06 or Paragraph 11.07,
Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair City’s special warranty and
guarantee, if any, on said Work.
11.07 Correction Period
A. If within two (2) years after the date of Final Acceptance (or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract
00 73 10- 31
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 31 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
Documents), any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or
areas made available for Contractor’s use by City or permitted by Laws and Regulations as
contemplated in Paragraph 5.10.A is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without
cost to City and in accordance with City’s written instructions:
1. repair such defective land or areas; or
2. correct such defective Work; or
3. if the defective Work has been rejected by City, remove it from the Project and replace it
with Work that is not defective, and
4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work
of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom.
B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of City’s written instructions, or in an
emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, City may have the defective
Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. All claims,
costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs)
arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including
but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor.
C. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or
removed and replaced under this Paragraph 11.07, the correction period hereunder with respect
to such Work may be required to be extended for an additional period of one year after the end
of the initial correction period. City shall provide 30 days written notice to Contractor and
Developer should such additional warranty coverage be required. Contractor’s obligations under
this Paragraph 11.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this
Paragraph 11.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any
applicable statute of limitation or repose.
11.08 City May Correct Defective Work
A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from City to correct defective
Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by City in accordance with Paragraph
11.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,
or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, City may,
after seven (7) days written notice to Contractor and the Developer, correct, or remedy any such
deficiency.
B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 11.09, City shall proceed
expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, City may exclude
Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend
Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment
incorporated in the Work, stored at the Site or for which City has paid Contractor but which are
00 73 10- 32
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 32 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow City, City’s representatives, agents, consultants,
employees, and City’s other contractors, access to the Site to enable City to exercise the rights
and remedies under this Paragraph.
C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution
costs) incurred or sustained by City in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph
13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the
necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and City shall be
entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price.
D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time because of any delay in the
performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of City’s rights and remedies under this
Paragraph 11.09.
ARTICLE 12 – COMPLETION
12.01 Contractor’s Warranty of Title
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any
Application for Payment will pass to City no later than the time of Final Acceptance and shall be
free and clear of all Liens.
12.02 Partial Utilization
A. Prior to Final Acceptance of all the Work, City may use or occupy any substantially completed
part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which
City, determines constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be
used by City for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s
performance of the remainder of the Work. City at any time may notify Contractor in writing to
permit City to use or occupy any such part of the Work which City determines to be ready for its
intended use, subject to the following conditions:
1. Contractor at any time may notify City in writing that Contractor considers any such part of
the Work ready for its intended use.
2. Within a reasonable time after notification as enumerated in Paragraph 14.05.A.1, City and
Contractor shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of
completion. If City does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, City
will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor.
3. Partial Utilization will not constitute Final Acceptance by City.
12.03 Final Inspection
A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work is complete in accordance with the
Contract Documents:
00 73 10- 33
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 33 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
1. within 10 days, City will schedule a Final Inspection with Contractor.
2. City will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that
the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are
necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
12.04 Final Acceptance
A. Upon completion by Contractor to City’s satisfaction, of any additional Work identified in the
Final Inspection, City will issue to Contractor a letter of Final Acceptance upon the satisfaction
of the following:
1. All documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the
evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.03;
2. consent of the surety, if any, to Final Acceptance;
3. a list of all pending or released Damage Claims against City that Contractor believes are
unsettled; and
4. affidavits of payments and complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to
City) of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work.
5. after all Damage Claims have been resolved:
a. directly by the Contractor or;
b. Contractor provides evidence that the Damage Claim has been reported to Contractor’s
insurance provider for resolution.
6. Issuing Final Acceptance by the City shall not relieve the Contractor of any guarantees or
other requirements of the Contract Documents which specifically continue thereafter.
ARTICLE 13 – SUSPENSION OF WORK
13.01 City May Suspend Work
A. At any time and without cause, City may suspend the Work or any portion thereof by written
notice to Contractor and which may fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor
shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. During temporary suspension of the Work covered
by these Contract Documents, for any reason, the City will stop contract time on City
participation projects.
B. Should the Contractor not be able to complete a portion of the Project due to causes beyond the
control of and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and should it be determined by
mutual consent of the Contractor and City that a solution to allow construction to proceed is not
00 73 10- 34
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 34 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
available within a reasonable period of time, Contractor may request an extension in Contract
Time, directly attributable to any such suspension.
C. If it should become necessary to suspend the Work for an indefinite period, the Contractor shall
store all materials in such a manner that they will not obstruct or impede the public unnecessarily
nor become damaged in any way, and he shall take every precaution to prevent damage or
deterioration of the work performed; he shall provide suitable drainage about the work, and erect
temporary structures where necessary.
ARTICLE 14 – MISCELLANEOUS
14.01 Giving Notice
A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will
be deemed to have been validly given if:
1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the
corporation for whom it is intended; or
2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business
address known to the giver of the notice.
B. Business address changes must be promptly made in writing to the other party.
C. Whenever the Contract Documents specifies giving notice by electronic means such electronic
notice shall be deemed sufficient upon confirmation of receipt by the receiving party.
14.02 Computation of Times
When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to
exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a
Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday the next Working Day shall become the last
day of the period.
14.03 Cumulative Remedies
The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies
available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as
a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed
or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the
Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically
in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to
which they apply.
00 73 10- 35
Standard City Conditions Of The Construction Contract For Developer Awarded Projects
Page 35 of 35
CITY OF FORT WORTH
STANDARD CITY CONDITIONS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS
Revised: January 10, 2013
14.04 Survival of Obligations
All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in
accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the
Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or
termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.
14.05 Headings
Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these
General Conditions.
01 11 00 - 1
DAP SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 1 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – Developer Awarded Projects [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 01 11 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Summary of Work to be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 - General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various items bid.
No separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Work Covered by Contract Documents
1. Work is to include furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment, and performing
all Work necessary for this construction project as detailed in the Drawings and
Specifications.
B. Subsidiary Work
1. Any and all Work specifically governed by documentary requirements for the
project, such as conditions imposed by the Drawings or Contract Documents in
which no specific item for bid has been provided for in the Proposal and the item is
not a typical unit bid item included on the standard bid item list, then the item shall
be considered as a subsidiary item of Work, the cost of which shall be included in
the price bid in the Proposal for various bid items.
C. Use of Premises
1. Coordinate uses of premises under direction of the City.
2. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of materials and
equipment stored on the Site.
3. Use and occupy only portions of the public streets and alleys, or other public places
or other rights-of-way as provided for in the ordinances of the City, as shown in the
Contract Documents, or as may be specifically authorized in writing by the City.
a. A reasonable amount of tools, materials, and equipment for construction
purposes may be stored in such space, but no more than is necessary to avoid
delay in the construction operations.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 11 00 - 2
DAP SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 2 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – Developer Awarded Projects [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b. Excavated and waste materials shall be stored in such a way as not to interfere
with the use of spaces that may be designated to be left free and unobstructed
and so as not to inconvenience occupants of adjacent property.
c. If the street is occupied by railroad tracks, the Work shall be carried on in such
manner as not to interfere with the operation of the railroad.
1) All Work shall be in accordance with railroad requirements set forth in
Division 0 as well as the railroad permit.
D. Work within Easements
1. Do not enter upon private property for any purpose without having previously
obtained permission from the owner of such property.
2. Do not store equipment or material on private property unless and until the
specified approval of the property owner has been secured in writing by the
Contractor and a copy furnished to the City.
3. Unless specifically provided otherwise, clear all rights-of-way or easements of
obstructions which must be removed to make possible proper prosecution of the
Work as a part of the project construction operations.
4. Preserve and use every precaution to prevent damage to, all trees, shrubbery, plants,
lawns, fences, culverts, curbing, and all other types of structures or improvements,
to all water, sewer, and gas lines, to all conduits, overhead pole lines, or
appurtenances thereof, including the construction of temporary fences and to all
other public or private property adjacent to the Work.
5. Notify the proper representatives of the owners or occupants of the public or private
lands of interest in lands which might be affected by the Work.
a. Such notice shall be made at least 48 hours in advance of the beginning of the
Work.
b. Notices shall be applicable to both public and private utility companies and any
corporation, company, individual, or other, either as owners or occupants,
whose land or interest in land might be affected by the Work.
c. Be responsible for all damage or injury to property of any character resulting
from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the manner or method or
execution of the Work, or at any time due to defective work, material, or
equipment.
6. Fence
a. Restore all fences encountered and removed during construction of the Project
to the original or a better than original condition.
b. Erect temporary fencing in place of the fencing removed whenever the Work is
not in progress and when the site is vacated overnight, and/or at all times to
provide site security.
c. The cost for all fence work within easements, including removal, temporary
closures and replacement, shall be subsidiary to the various items bid in the
project proposal, unless a bid item is specifically provided in the proposal.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 11 00 - 3
DAP SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 3 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – Developer Awarded Projects [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 25 00 - 1
DAP SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
Page 1 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
SECTION 01 25 00
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. The procedure for requesting the approval of substitution of a product that is not
equivalent to a product which is specified by descriptive or performance criteria or
defined by reference to 1 or more of the following:
a. Name of manufacturer
b. Name of vendor
c. Trade name
d. Catalog number
2. Substitutions are not "or-equals".
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various items bid. No
separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Request for Substitution - General
1. Within 30 days after award of Contract (unless noted otherwise), the City will
consider formal requests from Contractor for substitution of products in place of
those specified.
2. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in Specifications by
means of references to names of manufacturers and vendors, trade names, or catalog
numbers.
a. When this method of specifying is used, it is not intended to exclude from
consideration other products bearing other manufacturer's or vendor's names,
trade names, or catalog numbers, provided said products are "or-equals," as
determined by City.
3. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable substitutions
under the following conditions:
a. Or-equals are unavailable due to strike, discontinued production of products
meeting specified requirements, or other factors beyond control of Contractor;
or,
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 25 00 - 2
DAP SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
Page 2 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
b. Contractor proposes a cost and/or time reduction incentive to the City.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Request for Substitution Form (attached)
B. Procedure for Requesting Substitution
1. Substitution shall be considered only:
a. After award of Contract
b. Under the conditions stated herein
2. Submit 3 copies of each written request for substitution, including:
a. Documentation
1) Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with
Contract Documents
2) Data relating to changes in construction schedule, when a reduction is
proposed
3) Data relating to changes in cost
b. For products
1) Product identification
a) Manufacturer's name
b) Telephone number and representative contact name
c) Specification Section or Drawing reference of originally specified
product, including discrete name or tag number assigned to original
product in the Contract Documents
2) Manufacturer's literature clearly marked to show compliance of proposed
product with Contract Documents
3) Itemized comparison of original and proposed product addressing product
characteristics including, but not necessarily limited to:
a) Size
b) Composition or materials of construction
c) Weight
d) Electrical or mechanical requirements
4) Product experience
a) Location of past projects utilizing product
b) Name and telephone number of persons associated with referenced
projects knowledgeable concerning proposed product
c) Available field data and reports associated with proposed product
5) Samples
a) Provide at request of City.
b) Samples become the property of the City.
c. For construction methods:
1) Detailed description of proposed method
2) Illustration drawings
C. Approval or Rejection
1. Written approval or rejection of substitution given by the City
2. City reserves the right to require proposed product to comply with color and pattern
of specified product if necessary to secure design intent.
3. In the event the substitution is approved, if a reduction in cost or time results, it will
be documented by Change Order.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 25 00 - 3
DAP SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
Page 3 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
4. Substitution will be rejected if:
a. Submittal is not through the Contractor with his stamp of approval
b. Request is not made in accordance with this Specification Section
c. In the Developer’s opinion, acceptance will require substantial revision of the
original design
d. In the City’s or Developer’s opinion, substitution will not perform adequately
the function consistent with the design intent
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In making request for substitution or in using an approved product, the Contractor
represents that the Contractor:
1. Has investigated proposed product, and has determined that it is adequate or
superior in all respects to that specified, and that it will perform function for which it
is intended
2. Will provide same guarantee for substitute item as for product specified
3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, to include building
modifications if necessary, making such changes as may be required for Work to be
complete in all respects
4. Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which subsequently
arise
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 25 00 - 4
DAP SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
Page 4 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
EXHIBIT A
REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION FORM:
TO:
PROJECT: DATE:
We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for
the above project:
SECTION PARAGRAPH SPECIFIED ITEM
Proposed Substitution:
Reason for Substitution:
Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed
substitution will require for its proper installation.
Fill in Blanks Below:
A. Will the undersigned contractor pay for changes to the building design, including engineering
and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution?
B. What effect does substitution have on other trades?
C. Differences between proposed substitution and specified item?
D. Differences in product cost or product delivery time?
E. Manufacturer's guarantees of the proposed and specified items are:
Equal Better (explain on attachment)
The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the
specified item.
Submitted By: For Use by City
Signature Recommended Recommended
as noted
Firm Not recommended Received late
Address By
Date
Date Remarks
Telephone
For Use by City:
Approved Rejected
City Date
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 31 19 - 1
DAP PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
Page 1 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
SECTION 01 31 19
PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provisions for the preconstruction meeting to be held prior to the start of Work to
clarify construction contract administration procedures
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. No construction schedule required unless requested by the City.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various items bid.
No separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. Attend preconstruction meeting.
2. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings
shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
3. Meeting administered by City may be tape recorded.
a. If recorded, tapes will be used to prepare minutes and retained by City for
future reference.
B. Preconstruction Meeting
1. A preconstruction meeting will be held within 14 days after the delivery of the
distribution package to the City.
a. The meeting will be scheduled and administered by the City.
2. The Project Representative will preside at the meeting, prepare the notes of the
meeting and distribute copies of same to all participants who so request by fully
completing the attendance form to be circulated at the beginning of the meeting.
3. Attendance shall include:
a. Developer and Consultant
b. Contractor's project manager
c. Contractor's superintendent
d. Any subcontractor or supplier representatives whom the Contractor may desire
to invite or the City may request
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 31 19 - 2
DAP PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
Page 2 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
e. Other City representatives
f. Others as appropriate
4. Preliminary Agenda may include:
a. Introduction of Project Personnel
b. General Description of Project
c. Status of right-of-way, utility clearances, easements or other pertinent permits
d. Contractor’s work plan and schedule
e. Contract Time
f. Notice to Proceed
g. Construction Staking
h. Progress Payments
i. Extra Work and Change Order Procedures
j. Field Orders
k. Disposal Site Letter for Waste Material
l. Insurance Renewals
m. Payroll Certification
n. Material Certifications and Quality Control Testing
o. Public Safety and Convenience
p. Documentation of Pre-Construction Conditions
q. Weekend Work Notification
r. Legal Holidays
s. Trench Safety Plans
t. Confined Space Entry Standards
u. Coordination with the City’s representative for operations of existing water
systems
v. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan
w. Coordination with other Contractors
x. Early Warning System
y. Contractor Evaluation
z. Special Conditions applicable to the project
aa. Damages Claims
bb. Submittal Procedures
cc. Substitution Procedures
dd. Correspondence Routing
ee. Record Drawings
ff. Temporary construction facilities
gg. MBE/SBE procedures
hh. Final Acceptance
ii. Final Payment
jj. Questions or Comments
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 31 19 - 3
DAP PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
Page 3 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 31 20 - 1
DAP PROJECT MEETINGS
Page 1 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
SECTION 01 31 20
PROJECT MEETINGS
[Specifier: This Specification is intended for use on projects designated as Tier 3 or Tier 4.]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provisions for project meetings throughout the construction period to enable orderly
review of the progress of the Work and to provide for systematic discussion of
potential problems
B. Deviations this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various items bid.
No separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. Schedule, attend and administer as specified, periodic progress meetings, and
specially called meetings throughout progress of the Work.
2. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings
shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
3. Meetings administered by City may be tape recorded.
a. If recorded, tapes will be used to prepare minutes and retained by City for
future reference.
4. Meetings, in addition to those specified in this Section, may be held when requested
by the City, Engineer or Contractor.
B. Pre-Construction Neighborhood Meeting
1. After the execution of the Agreement, but before construction is allowed to begin,
attend 1 Public Meeting with affected residents to:
a. Present projected schedule, including construction start date
b. Answer any construction related questions
2. Meeting Location
a. Location of meeting to be determined by the City.
3. Attendees
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 31 20 - 2
DAP PROJECT MEETINGS
Page 2 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
a. Contractor
b. Project Representative
c. Other City representatives
4. Meeting Schedule
a. In general, the neighborhood meeting will occur within the 2 weeks following
the pre-construction conference.
b. In no case will construction be allowed to begin until this meeting is held.
C. Progress Meetings
1. Formal project coordination meetings will be held periodically. Meetings will be
scheduled and administered by Project Representative.
2. Additional progress meetings to discuss specific topics will be conducted on an as-
needed basis. Such additional meetings shall include, but not be limited to:
a. Coordinating shutdowns
b. Installation of piping and equipment
c. Coordination between other construction projects
d. Resolution of construction issues
e. Equipment approval
3. The Project Representative will preside at progress meetings, prepare the notes of
the meeting and distribute copies of the same to all participants who so request by
fully completing the attendance form to be circulated at the beginning of each
meeting.
4. Attendance shall include:
a. Contractor's project manager
b. Contractor's superintendent
c. Any subcontractor or supplier representatives whom the Contractor may desire
to invite or the City may request
d. Engineer's representatives
e. City’s representatives
f. Others, as requested by the Project Representative
5. Preliminary Agenda may include:
a. Review of Work progress since previous meeting
b. Field observations, problems, conflicts
c. Items which impede construction schedule
d. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules
e. Review of construction interfacing and sequencing requirements with other
construction contracts
f. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule
g. Revisions to construction schedule
h. Progress, schedule, during succeeding Work period
i. Coordination of schedules
j. Review submittal schedules
k. Maintenance of quality standards
l. Pending changes and substitutions
m. Review proposed changes for:
1) Effect on construction schedule and on completion date
2) Effect on other contracts of the Project
n. Review Record Documents
o. Review monthly pay request
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 31 20 - 3
DAP PROJECT MEETINGS
Page 3 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
p. Review status of Requests for Information
6. Meeting Schedule
a. Progress meetings will be held periodically as determined by the Project
Representative.
1) Additional meetings may be held at the request of the:
a) City
b) Engineer
c) Contractor
7. Meeting Location
a. The City will establish a meeting location.
1) To the extent practicable, meetings will be held at the Site.
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 32 16 - 1
DAP CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
Page 1 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
SECTION 01 32 16
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. General requirements for the preparation, submittal, updating, status reporting and
management of the Construction Progress Schedule
2. Specific requirements are presented in the City of Fort Worth Schedule Guidance
Document
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various items bid.
No separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Definitions
1. Schedule Tiers
a. Tier 1 - No schedule submittal required by contract. Small, brief duration
projects
b. Tier 2 - No schedule submittal required by contract, but will require some
milestone dates. Small, brief duration projects
c. Tier 3 - Schedule submittal required by contract as described in the
Specification and herein. Majority of City projects, including all bond program
projects
d. Tier 4 - Schedule submittal required by contract as described in the
Specification and herein. Large and/or complex projects with long durations
1) Examples: large water pump station project and associated pipeline with
interconnection to another governmental entity
e. Tier 5 - Schedule submittal required by contract as described in the
Specification and herein. Large and/or very complex projects with long
durations, high public visibility
1) Examples might include a water or wastewater treatment plant
2. Baseline Schedule - Initial schedule submitted before work begins that will serve
as the baseline for measuring progress and departures from the schedule.
3. Progress Schedule - Monthly submittal of a progress schedule documenting
progress on the project and any changes anticipated.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 32 16 - 2
DAP CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
Page 2 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
4. Schedule Narrative - Concise narrative of the schedule including schedule
changes, expected delays, key schedule issues, critical path items, etc
B. Reference Standards
1. City of Fort Worth Schedule Guidance Document
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Baseline Schedule
1. General
a. Prepare a cost-loaded baseline Schedule using approved software and the
Critical Path Method (CPM) as required in the City of Fort Worth Schedule
Guidance Document.
b. Review the draft cost-loaded baseline Schedule with the City to demonstrate
understanding of the work to be performed and known issues and constraints
related to the schedule.
c. Designate an authorized representative (Project Scheduler) responsible for
developing and updating the schedule and preparing reports.
B. Progress Schedule
1. Update the progress Schedule monthly as required in the City of Fort Worth
Schedule Guidance Document.
2. Prepare the Schedule Narrative to accompany the monthly progress Schedule.
3. Change Orders
a. Incorporate approved change orders, resulting in a change of contract time, in
the baseline Schedule in accordance with City of Fort Worth Schedule
Guidance Document.
C. Responsibility for Schedule Compliance
1. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current progress Schedule and CPM Status
Report that delays to the critical path have resulted and the Contract completion
date will not be met, or when so directed by the City, make some or all of the
following actions at no additional cost to the City
a. Submit a Recovery Plan to the City for approval revised baseline Schedule
outlining:
1) A written statement of the steps intended to take to remove or arrest the
delay to the critical path in the approved schedule
2) Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will
substantially eliminate the backlog of work and return current Schedule to
meet projected baseline completion dates
3) Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per day, working
days per week, the amount of construction equipment, or any combination
of the foregoing, sufficiently to substantially eliminate the backlog of work
4) Reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrency of
accomplishment of activities, and comply with the revised schedule
2. If no written statement of the steps intended to take is submitted when so requested
by the City, the City may direct the Contractor to increase the level of effort in
manpower (trades), equipment and work schedule (overtime, weekend and holiday
work, etc.) to be employed by the Contractor in order to remove or arrest the delay
to the critical path in the approved schedule.
a. No additional cost for such work will be considered.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 32 16 - 3
DAP CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
Page 3 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
D. The Contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this
Contract.
a. Requests for an extension of any Contract completion date must be
supplemented with the following:
1) Furnish justification and supporting evidence as the City may deem
necessary to determine whether the requested extension of time is entitled
under the provisions of this Contract.
a) The City will, after receipt of such justification and supporting
evidence, make findings of fact and will advise the Contractor, in
writing thereof.
2) If the City finds that the requested extension of time is entitled, the City's
determination as to the total number of days allowed for the extensions
shall be based upon the approved total baseline schedule and on all data
relevant to the extension.
a) Such data shall be included in the next updating of the Progress
schedule.
b) Actual delays in activities which, according to the Baseline schedule,
do not affect any Contract completion date shown by the critical path in
the network will not be the basis for a change therein.
2. Submit each request for change in Contract completion date to the City within 30
days after the beginning of the delay for which a time extension is requested but
before the date of final payment under this Contract.
a. No time extension will be granted for requests which are not submitted within
the foregoing time limit.
b. From time to time, it may be necessary for the Contract schedule or completion
time to be adjusted by the City to reflect the effects of job conditions, weather,
technical difficulties, strikes, unavoidable delays on the part of the City or its
representatives, and other unforeseeable conditions which may indicate
schedule adjustments or completion time extensions.
1) Under such conditions, the City will direct the Contractor to reschedule the
work or Contract completion time to reflect the changed conditions and the
Contractor shall revise his schedule accordingly.
a) No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for such
schedule changes except for unavoidable overall contract time
extensions beyond the actual completion of unaffected work, in which
case the Contractor shall take all possible action to minimize any time
extension and any additional cost to the City.
b) Available float time in the Baseline schedule may be used by the City
as well as by the Contractor.
3. Float or slack time is defined as the amount of time between the earliest start date
and the latest start date or between the earliest finish date and the latest finish date
of a chain of activities on the Baseline Schedule.
a. Float or slack time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the
Contractor or the City.
b. Proceed with work according to early start dates, and the City shall have the
right to reserve and apportion float time according to the needs of the project.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 32 16 - 4
DAP CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
Page 4 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
c. Acknowledge and agree that actual delays, affecting paths of activities
containing float time, will not have any effect upon contract completion times,
providing that the actual delay does not exceed the float time associated with
those activities.
E. Coordinating Schedule with Other Contract Schedules
1. Where work is to be performed under this Contract concurrently with or contingent
upon work performed on the same facilities or area under other contracts, the
Baseline Schedule shall be coordinated with the schedules of the other contracts.
a. Obtain the schedules of the other appropriate contracts from the City for the
preparation and updating of Baseline schedule and make the required changes
in his schedule when indicated by changes in corresponding schedules.
2. In case of interference between the operations of different contractors, the City will
determine the work priority of each contractor and the sequence of work necessary
to expedite the completion of the entire Project.
a. In such cases, the decision of the City shall be accepted as final.
b. The temporary delay of any work due to such circumstances shall not be
considered as justification for claims for additional compensation.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Baseline Schedule
1. Submit Schedule in native file format and pdf format as required in the City of Fort
Worth Schedule Guidance Document.
a. Native file format includes:
1) Primavera (P6 or Primavera Contractor)
2. Submit draft baseline Schedule to City prior to the pre-construction meeting and
bring in hard copy to the meeting for review and discussion.
B. Progress Schedule
1. Submit progress Schedule in native file format and pdf format as required in the
City of Fort Worth Schedule Guidance Document.
2. Submit progress Schedule monthly no later than the last day of the month.
C. Schedule Narrative
1. Submit the schedule narrative in pdf format as required in the City of Fort Worth
Schedule Guidance Document.
2. Submit schedule narrative monthly no later than the last day of the month.
D. Submittal Process
1. The City administers and manages schedules through Buzzsaw.
2. Contractor shall submit documents as required in the City of Fort Worth Schedule
Guidance Document.
3. Once the project has been completed and Final Acceptance has been issued by the
City, no further progress schedules are required.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 32 16 - 5
DAP CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
Page 5 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The person preparing and revising the construction Progress Schedule shall be
experienced in the preparation of schedules of similar complexity.
B. Schedule and supporting documents addressed in this Specification shall be prepared,
updated and revised to accurately reflect the performance of the construction.
C. Contractor is responsible for the quality of all submittals in this section meeting the
standard of care for the construction industry for similar projects.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 32 33 - 1
DAP PRECONSTRUCTION VIDEO
Page 1 of 2
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
SECTION 01 32 33
PRECONSTRUCTION VIDEO
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Administrative and procedural requirements for:
a. Preconstruction Videos
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. Though not mandatory, it is highly recommended on infill developer projects.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various items bid.
No separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preconstruction Video
1. Produce a preconstruction video of the site/alignment, including all areas in the
vicinity of and to be affected by construction.
a. Provide digital copy of video upon request by the City.
2. Retain a copy of the preconstruction video until the end of the maintenance surety
period.
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 32 33 - 2
DAP PRECONSTRUCTION VIDEO
Page 2 of 2
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 33 00 - 1
DAP SUBMITTALS
Page 1 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
SECTION 01 33 00
DAP SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. General methods and requirements of submissions applicable to the following
Work-related submittals:
a. Shop Drawings
b. Product Data (including Standard Product List submittals)
c. Samples
d. Mock Ups
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various items bid.
No separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. Notify the City in writing, at the time of submittal, of any deviations in the
submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
2. Coordination of Submittal Times
a. Prepare, prioritize and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of
performing the related Work or other applicable activities, or within the time
specified in the individual Work Sections, of the Specifications.
b. Contractor is responsible such that the installation will not be delayed by
processing times including, but not limited to:
a) Disapproval and resubmittal (if required)
b) Coordination with other submittals
c) Testing
d) Purchasing
e) Fabrication
f) Delivery
g) Similar sequenced activities
c. No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor's failure to
transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 33 00 - 2
DAP SUBMITTALS
Page 2 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
d. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such
sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other
contractor.
B. Submittal Numbering
1. When submitting shop drawings or samples, utilize a 9-character submittal cross-
reference identification numbering system in the following manner:
a. Use the first 6 digits of the applicable Specification Section Number.
b. For the next 2 digits number use numbers 01-99 to sequentially number each
initial separate item or drawing submitted under each specific Section number.
c. Last use a letter, A-Z, indicating the resubmission of the same drawing (i.e.
A=2nd submission, B=3rd submission, C=4th submission, etc.). A typical
submittal number would be as follows:
03 30 00-08-B
1) 03 30 00 is the Specification Section for Concrete
2) 08 is the eighth initial submittal under this Specification Section
3) B is the third submission (second resubmission) of that particular shop
drawing
C. Contractor Certification
1. Review shop drawings, product data and samples, including those by
subcontractors, prior to submission to determine and verify the following:
a. Field measurements
b. Field construction criteria
c. Catalog numbers and similar data
d. Conformance with the Contract Documents
2. Provide each shop drawing, sample and product data submitted by the Contractor
with a Certification Statement affixed including:
a. The Contractor's Company name
b. Signature of submittal reviewer
c. Certification Statement
1) “By this submittal, I hereby represent that I have determined and verified
field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions,
catalog numbers and similar data and I have checked and coordinated each
item with other applicable approved shop drawings."
D. Submittal Format
1. Fold shop drawings larger than 8 ½ inches x 11 inches to 8 ½ inches x 11inches.
2. Bind shop drawings and product data sheets together.
3. Order
a. Cover Sheet
1) Description of Packet
2) Contractor Certification
b. List of items / Table of Contents
c. Product Data /Shop Drawings/Samples /Calculations
E. Submittal Content
1. The date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 33 00 - 3
DAP SUBMITTALS
Page 3 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
2. The Project title and number
3. Contractor identification
4. The names of:
a. Contractor
b. Supplier
c. Manufacturer
5. Identification of the product, with the Specification Section number, page and
paragraph(s)
6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such
7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the Work or materials
8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers
9. Identification by highlighting of deviations from Contract Documents
10. Identification by highlighting of revisions on resubmittals
11. An 8-inch x 3-inch blank space for Contractor and City stamps
F. Shop Drawings
1. As specified in individual Work Sections includes, but is not necessarily limited to:
a. Custom-prepared data such as fabrication and erection/installation (working)
drawings
b. Scheduled information
c. Setting diagrams
d. Actual shopwork manufacturing instructions
e. Custom templates
f. Special wiring diagrams
g. Coordination drawings
h. Individual system or equipment inspection and test reports including:
1) Performance curves and certifications
i. As applicable to the Work
2. Details
a. Relation of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure
b. Where correct fabrication of the Work depends upon field measurements
1) Provide such measurements and note on the drawings prior to submitting
for approval.
G. Product Data
1. For submittals of product data for products included on the City’s Standard Product
List, clearly identify each item selected for use on the Project.
2. For submittals of product data for products not included on the City’s Standard
Product List, submittal data may include, but is not necessarily limited to:
a. Standard prepared data for manufactured products (sometimes referred to as
catalog data)
1) Such as the manufacturer's product specification and installation
instructions
2) Availability of colors and patterns
3) Manufacturer's printed statements of compliances and applicability
4) Roughing-in diagrams and templates
5) Catalog cuts
6) Product photographs
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 33 00 - 4
DAP SUBMITTALS
Page 4 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
7) Standard wiring diagrams
8) Printed performance curves and operational-range diagrams
9) Production or quality control inspection and test reports and certifications
10) Mill reports
11) Product operating and maintenance instructions and recommended
spare-parts listing and printed product warranties
12) As applicable to the Work
H. Samples
1. As specified in individual Sections, include, but are not necessarily limited to:
a. Physical examples of the Work such as:
1) Sections of manufactured or fabricated Work
2) Small cuts or containers of materials
3) Complete units of repetitively used products color/texture/pattern swatches
and range sets
4) Specimens for coordination of visual effect
5) Graphic symbols and units of Work to be used by the City for independent
inspection and testing, as applicable to the Work
I. Do not start Work requiring a shop drawing, sample or product data nor any material to
be fabricated or installed prior to the approval or qualified approval of such item.
1. Fabrication performed, materials purchased or on-site construction accomplished
which does not conform to approved shop drawings and data is at the Contractor's
risk.
2. The City will not be liable for any expense or delay due to corrections or remedies
required to accomplish conformity.
3. Complete project Work, materials, fabrication, and installations in conformance
with approved shop drawings, applicable samples, and product data.
J. Submittal Distribution
1. Electronic Distribution
a. Confirm development of Project directory for electronic submittals to be
uploaded to City’s Buzzsaw site, or another external FTP site approved by the
City.
b. Shop Drawings
1) Upload submittal to designated project directory and notify appropriate
City representatives via email of submittal posting.
2) Hard Copies
a) 3 copies for all submittals
b) If Contractor requires more than 1 hard copy of Shop Drawings
returned, Contractor shall submit more than the number of copies listed
above.
c. Product Data
1) Upload submittal to designated project directory and notify appropriate
City representatives via email of submittal posting.
2) Hard Copies
a) 3 copies for all submittals
d. Samples
1) Distributed to the Project Representative
2. Hard Copy Distribution (if required in lieu of electronic distribution)
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 33 00 - 5
DAP SUBMITTALS
Page 5 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
a. Shop Drawings
1) Distributed to the City
2) Copies
a) 8 copies for mechanical submittals
b) 7 copies for all other submittals
c) If Contractor requires more than 3 copies of Shop Drawings returned,
Contractor shall submit more than the number of copies listed above.
b. Product Data
1) Distributed to the City
2) Copies
a) 4 copies
c. Samples
1) Distributed to the Project Representative
2) Copies
a) Submit the number stated in the respective Specification Sections.
3. Distribute reproductions of approved shop drawings and copies of approved
product data and samples, where required, to the job site file and elsewhere as
directed by the City.
a. Provide number of copies as directed by the City but not exceeding the number
previously specified.
K. Submittal Review
1. The review of shop drawings, data and samples will be for general conformance
with the design concept and Contract Documents. This is not to be construed as:
a. Permitting any departure from the Contract requirements
b. Relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including details,
dimensions, and materials
c. Approving departures from details furnished by the City, except as otherwise
provided herein
2. The review and approval of shop drawings, samples or product data by the City
does not relieve the Contractor from his/her responsibility with regard to the
fulfillment of the terms of the Contract.
a. All risks of error and omission are assumed by the Contractor, and the City will
have no responsibility therefore.
3. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for coordinating the
Work with all other associated work and trades, for selecting fabrication processes,
for techniques of assembly and for performing Work in a safe manner.
4. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations and show a
departure from the Contract requirements which City finds to be in the interest of
the City and to be so minor as not to involve a change in Contract Price or time for
performance, the City may return the reviewed drawings without noting an
exception.
5. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor under 1 of the following codes:
a. Code 1
1) "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" is assigned when there are no notations or
comments on the submittal.
a) When returned under this code the Contractor may release the
equipment and/or material for manufacture.
b. Code 2
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 33 00 - 6
DAP SUBMITTALS
Page 6 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
1) "EXCEPTIONS NOTED". This code is assigned when a confirmation of
the notations and comments IS NOT required by the Contractor.
a) The Contractor may release the equipment or material for manufacture;
however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the
final product.
c. Code 3
1) "EXCEPTIONS NOTED/RESUBMIT". This combination of codes is
assigned when notations and comments are extensive enough to require a
resubmittal of the package.
a) The Contractor may release the equipment or material for manufacture;
however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the
final product.
b) This resubmittal is to address all comments, omissions and
non-conforming items that were noted.
c) Resubmittal is to be received by the City within 15 Calendar Days of
the date of the City's transmittal requiring the resubmittal.
d. Code 4
1) "NOT APPROVED" is assigned when the submittal does not meet the
intent of the Contract Documents.
a) The Contractor must resubmit the entire package revised to bring the
submittal into conformance.
b) It may be necessary to resubmit using a different manufacturer/vendor
to meet the Contract Documents.
6. Resubmittals
a. Handled in the same manner as first submittals
1) Corrections other than requested by the City
2) Marked with revision triangle or other similar method
a) At Contractor’s risk if not marked
b. Submittals for each item will be reviewed no more than twice at the City’s
expense.
1) All subsequent reviews will be performed at times convenient to the City
and at the Contractor's expense, based on the City's or City
Representative’s then prevailing rates.
2) Provide Contractor reimbursement to the City within 30 Calendar Days for
all such fees invoiced by the City.
c. The need for more than 1 resubmission or any other delay in obtaining City's
review of submittals, will not entitle the Contractor to an extension of Contract
Time.
7. Partial Submittals
a. City reserves the right to not review submittals deemed partial, at the City’s
discretion.
b. Submittals deemed by the City to be not complete will be returned to the
Contractor, and will be considered "Not Approved" until resubmitted.
c. The City may at its option provide a list or mark the submittal directing the
Contractor to the areas that are incomplete.
8. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to
constitute a change to the Contract Documents, then written notice must be
provided thereof to the Developer at least 7 Calendar Days prior to release for
manufacture.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 33 00 - 7
DAP SUBMITTALS
Page 7 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
9. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the City, the
Contractor may carry out the construction in accordance therewith and no further
changes therein except upon written instructions from the City.
10. Each submittal, appropriately coded, will be returned within 30 Calendar Days
following receipt of submittal by the City.
L. Mock ups
1. Mock Up units as specified in individual Sections, include, but are not necessarily
limited to, complete units of the standard of acceptance for that type of Work to be
used on the Project. Remove at the completion of the Work or when directed.
M. Qualifications
1. If specifically required in other Sections of these Specifications, submit a P.E.
Certification for each item required.
N. Request for Information (RFI)
1. Contractor Request for additional information
a. Clarification or interpretation of the contract documents
b. When the Contractor believes there is a conflict between Contract Documents
c. When the Contractor believes there is a conflict between the Drawings and
Specifications
1) Identify the conflict and request clarification
2. Sufficient information shall be attached to permit a written response without further
information.
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 33 00 - 8
DAP SUBMITTALS
Page 8 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised August 30, 2013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 1.4.K.8. Working Days modified to Calendar Days
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 35 13 - 1
DAP SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
Page 1 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS CPN-102575
Revised August, 30, 2013
SECTION 01 35 13 1
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes: 5
1. The procedures for special project circumstances that includes, but is not limited to: 6
a. Coordination with the Texas Department of Transportation 7
b. Work near High Voltage Lines 8
c. Confined Space Entry Program 9
d. Air Pollution Watch Days 10
e. Use of Explosives, Drop Weight, Etc. 11
f. Water Department Notification 12
g. Public Notification Prior to Beginning Construction 13
h. Coordination with United States Army Corps of Engineers 14
i. Coordination within Railroad permits areas 15
j. Dust Control 16
k. Employee Parking 17
l. {Coordination with North Central Texas Council of Governments Clean 18
Construction Specification [remove if not required]} 19
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 20
1. None. 21
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 22
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 23
2. Division 1 – General Requirements 24
3. Section 33 12 25 – Connection to Existing Water Mains 25
26
1.2 REFERENCES 27
A. Reference Standards 28
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference 29
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this 30
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 31
2. Health and Safety Code, Title 9. Safety, Subtitle A. Public Safety, Chapter 752. 32
High Voltage Overhead Lines. 33
3. North Central Texas Council of Governments (NCTCOG) – Clean Construction 34
Specification 35
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 36
A. Coordination with the Texas Department of Transportation 37
1. When work in the right-of-way which is under the jurisdiction of the Texas 38
Department of Transportation (TxDOT): 39
01 35 13 - 2
DAP SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
Page 2 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS CPN-102575
Revised August, 30, 2013
a. Notify the Texas Department of Transportation prior to commencing any work 1
therein in accordance with the provisions of the permit 2
b. All work performed in the TxDOT right-of-way shall be performed in 3
compliance with and subject to approval from the Texas Department of 4
Transportation 5
B. Work near High Voltage Lines 6
1. Regulatory Requirements 7
a. All Work near High Voltage Lines (more than 600 volts measured between 8
conductors or between a conductor and the ground) shall be in accordance with 9
Health and Safety Code, Title 9, Subtitle A, Chapter 752. 10
2. Warning sign 11
a. Provide sign of sufficient size meeting all OSHA requirements. 12
3. Equipment operating within 10 feet of high voltage lines will require the following 13
safety features 14
a. Insulating cage-type of guard about the boom or arm 15
b. Insulator links on the lift hook connections for back hoes or dippers 16
c. Equipment must meet the safety requirements as set forth by OSHA and the 17
safety requirements of the owner of the high voltage lines 18
4. Work within 6 feet of high voltage electric lines 19
a. Notification shall be given to: 20
1) The power company (example: ONCOR) 21
a) Maintain an accurate log of all such calls to power company and record 22
action taken in each case. 23
b. Coordination with power company 24
1) After notification coordinate with the power company to: 25
a) Erect temporary mechanical barriers, de-energize the lines, or raise or 26
lower the lines 27
c. No personnel may work within 6 feet of a high voltage line before the above 28
requirements have been met. 29
C. Confined Space Entry Program 30
1. Provide and follow approved Confined Space Entry Program in accordance with 31
OSHA requirements. 32
2. Confined Spaces include: 33
a. Manholes 34
b. All other confined spaces in accordance with OSHA’s Permit Required for 35
Confined Spaces 36
D. Use of Explosives, Drop Weight, Etc. 37
1. When Contract Documents permit on the project the following will apply: 38
a. Public Notification 39
1) Submit notice to City and proof of adequate insurance coverage, 24 hours 40
prior to commencing. 41
2) Minimum 24 hour public notification in accordance with Section 01 31 13 42
E. Water Department Coordination 43
01 35 13 - 3
DAP SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
Page 3 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS CPN-102575
Revised August, 30, 2013
1. During the construction of this project, it will be necessary to deactivate, for a 1
period of time, existing lines. The Contractor shall be required to coordinate with 2
the Water Department to determine the best times for deactivating and activating 3
those lines. 4
2. Coordinate any event that will require connecting to or the operation of an existing 5
City water line system with the City’s representative. 6
a. Coordination shall be in accordance with Section 33 12 25. 7
b. If needed, obtain a hydrant water meter from the Water Department for use 8
during the life of named project. 9
c. In the event that a water valve on an existing live system be turned off and on 10
to accommodate the construction of the project is required, coordinate this 11
activity through the appropriate City representative. 12
1) Do not operate water line valves of existing water system. 13
a) Failure to comply will render the Contractor in violation of Texas Penal 14
Code Title 7, Chapter 28.03 (Criminal Mischief) and the Contractor 15
will be prosecuted to the full extent of the law. 16
b) In addition, the Contractor will assume all liabilities and 17
responsibilities as a result of these actions. 18
F. Public Notification Prior to Beginning Construction 19
1. Prior to beginning construction on any block in the project, on a block by block 20
basis, prepare and deliver a notice or flyer of the pending construction to the front 21
door of each residence or business that will be impacted by construction. The notice 22
shall be prepared as follows: 23
a. Post notice or flyer 7 days prior to beginning any construction activity on each 24
block in the project area. 25
1) Prepare flyer on the Contractor’s letterhead and include the following 26
information: 27
a) Name of Project 28
b) City Project No (CPN) 29
c) Scope of Project (i.e. type of construction activity) 30
d) Actual construction duration within the block 31
e) Name of the contractor’s foreman and phone number 32
f) Name of the City’s inspector and phone number 33
g) City’s after-hours phone number 34
2) A sample of the ‘pre-construction notification’ flyer is attached as Exhibit 35
A. 36
3) Submit schedule showing the construction start and finish time for each 37
block of the project to the inspector. 38
4) Deliver flyer to the City Inspector for review prior to distribution. 39
b. No construction will be allowed to begin on any block until the flyer is 40
delivered to all residents of the block. 41
G. Public Notification of Temporary Water Service Interruption during Construction 42
1. In the event it becomes necessary to temporarily shut down water service to 43
residents or businesses during construction, prepare and deliver a notice or flyer of 44
the pending interruption to the front door of each affected resident. 45
2. Prepared notice as follows: 46
a. The notification or flyer shall be posted 24 hours prior to the temporary 47
interruption. 48
01 35 13 - 4
DAP SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
Page 4 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS CPN-102575
Revised August, 30, 2013
b. Prepare flyer on the contractor’s letterhead and include the following 1
information: 2
1) Name of the project 3
2) City Project Number 4
3) Date of the interruption of service 5
4) Period the interruption will take place 6
5) Name of the contractor’s foreman and phone number 7
6) Name of the City’s inspector and phone number 8
c. A sample of the temporary water service interruption notification is attached as 9
Exhibit B. 10
d. Deliver a copy of the temporary interruption notification to the City inspector 11
for review prior to being distributed. 12
e. No interruption of water service can occur until the flyer has been delivered to 13
all affected residents and businesses. 14
f. Electronic versions of the sample flyers can be obtained from the Project 15
Construction Inspector. 16
H. Coordination with United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) 17
1. At locations in the Project where construction activities occur in areas where 18
USACE permits are required, meet all requirements set forth in each designated 19
permit. 20
I. Coordination within Railroad Permit Areas 21
1. At locations in the project where construction activities occur in areas where 22
railroad permits are required, meet all requirements set forth in each designated 23
railroad permit. This includes, but is not limited to, provisions for: 24
a. Flagmen 25
b. Inspectors 26
c. Safety training 27
d. Additional insurance 28
e. Insurance certificates 29
f. Other employees required to protect the right-of-way and property of the 30
Railroad Company from damage arising out of and/or from the construction of 31
the project. Proper utility clearance procedures shall be used in accordance 32
with the permit guidelines. 33
2. Obtain any supplemental information needed to comply with the railroad’s 34
requirements. 35
J. Dust Control 36
1. Use acceptable measures to control dust at the Site. 37
a. If water is used to control dust, capture and properly dispose of waste water. 38
b. If wet saw cutting is performed, capture and properly dispose of slurry. 39
K. Employee Parking 40
1. Provide parking for employees at locations approved by the City. 41
L. {Coordination with North Central Texas Council of Governments (NCTCOG) Clean 42
Construction Specification [if required for the project] 43
1. Comply with equipment, operational, reporting and enforcement requirements set 44
forth in NCTCOG’s Clean Construction Specification.} 45
01 35 13 - 5
DAP SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
Page 5 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS CPN-102575
Revised August, 30, 2013
1.4 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 2
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 3
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 4
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 5
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 6
1.10 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 7
1.11 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 8
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 10
END OF SECTION 11
12
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
8/31/2012 D. Johnson
1.3.B – Added requirement of compliance with Health and Safety Code, Title 9.
Safety, Subtitle A. Public Safety, Chapter 752. High Voltage Overhead Lines.
13
01 35 13 - 6
DAP SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
Page 6 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS CPN-102575
Revised August, 30, 2013
EXHIBIT A 1
(To be printed on Contractor’s Letterhead) 2
3
4
5
Date: 6
7
CPN No.: 8
Project Name: 9
Mapsco Location: 10
Limits of Construction: 11
12
13
14
15
16
THIS IS TO INFORM YOU THAT UNDER A CONTRACT WITH THE CITY OF FORT 17
WORTH, OUR COMPANY WILL WORK ON UTILITY LINES ON OR AROUND YOUR 18
PROPERTY. 19
20
CONSTRUCTION WILL BEGIN APPROXIMATELY SEVEN DAYS FROM THE DATE 21
OF THIS NOTICE. 22
23
IF YOU HAVE QUESTIONS ABOUT ACCESS, SECURITY, SAFETY OR ANY OTHER 24
ISSUE, PLEASE CALL: 25
26
27
Mr. <CONTRACTOR’S SUPERINTENDENT> AT <TELEPHONE NO.> 28
29
OR 30
31
Mr. <CITY INSPECTOR> AT < TELEPHONE NO.> 32
33
AFTER 4:30 PM OR ON WEEKENDS, PLEASE CALL (817) 392 8306 34
35
PLEASE KEEP THIS FLYER HANDY WHEN YOU CALL 36
37
01 35 13 - 7
DAP SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
Page 7 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS CPN-102575
Revised August, 30, 2013
EXHIBIT B 1
2
3
4
01 45 23
DAP TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
Page 1 of 2
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised March 20, 2020
SECTION 01 45 23
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Testing and inspection services procedures and coordination
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various Items bid.
No separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
a. Contractor is responsible for performing, coordinating, and payment of all
Quality Control testing.
b. City is responsible for performing and payment for first set of Quality
Assurance testing.
1) If the first Quality Assurance test performed by the City fails, the
Contractor is responsible for payment of subsequent Quality Assurance
testing until a passing test occurs.
a) Final acceptance will not be issued by City until all required payments
for testing by Contractor have been paid in full.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Testing
1. Complete testing in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2. Coordination
a. When testing is required to be performed by the City, notify City, sufficiently
in advance, when testing is needed.
b. When testing is required to be completed by the Contractor, notify City,
sufficiently in advance, that testing will be performed.
3. Distribution of Testing Reports
a. Electronic Distribution
1) Confirm development of Project directory for electronic submittals to be
uploaded to the City’s document management system, or another form of
distribution approved by the City.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 45 23
DAP TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
Page 2 of 2
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised March 20, 2020
2) Upload test reports to designated project directory and notify appropriate
City representatives via email of submittal posting.
3) Hard Copies
a) 1 copy for all submittals submitted to the Project Representative
b. Hard Copy Distribution (if required in lieu of electronic distribution)
1) Tests performed by City
a) Distribute 1 hard copy to the Contractor
2) Tests performed by the Contractor
a) Distribute 3 hard copies to City’s Project Representative
4. Provide City’s Project Representative with trip tickets for each delivered load of
Concrete or Lime material including the following information:
a. Name of pit
b. Date of delivery
c. Material delivered
B. Inspection
1. Inspection or lack of inspection does not relieve the Contractor from obligation to
perform work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
03/20/2020 D.V. Magaña Removed reference to Buzzsaw and noted that electronic submittals be uploaded
through the City’s document management system.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 50 00 - 1
DAP TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Page 1 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised JULY 1, 2011
SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide temporary facilities and controls needed for the Work including, but not
necessarily limited to:
a. Temporary utilities
b. Sanitary facilities
c. Storage Sheds and Buildings
d. Dust control
e. Temporary fencing of the construction site
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various Items bid.
No separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Temporary Utilities
1. Obtaining Temporary Service
a. Make arrangements with utility service companies for temporary services.
b. Abide by rules and regulations of utility service companies or authorities
having jurisdiction.
c. Be responsible for utility service costs until Work is approved for Final
Acceptance.
1) Included are fuel, power, light, heat and other utility services necessary for
execution, completion, testing and initial operation of Work.
2. Water
a. Contractor to provide water required for and in connection with Work to be
performed and for specified tests of piping, equipment, devices or other use as
required for the completion of the Work.
b. Provide and maintain adequate supply of potable water for domestic
consumption by Contractor personnel and City’s Project Representatives.
c. Coordination
1) Contact City 1 week before water for construction is desired
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 50 00 - 2
DAP TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Page 2 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised JULY 1, 2011
d. Contractor Payment for Construction Water
1) Obtain construction water meter from City for payment as billed by City’s
established rates.
3. Electricity and Lighting
a. Provide and pay for electric powered service as required for Work, including
testing of Work.
1) Provide power for lighting, operation of equipment, or other use.
b. Electric power service includes temporary power service or generator to
maintain operations during scheduled shutdown.
4. Telephone
a. Provide emergency telephone service at Site for use by Contractor personnel
and others performing work or furnishing services at Site.
5. Temporary Heat and Ventilation
a. Provide temporary heat as necessary for protection or completion of Work.
b. Provide temporary heat and ventilation to assure safe working conditions.
B. Sanitary Facilities
1. Provide and maintain sanitary facilities for persons on Site.
a. Comply with regulations of State and local departments of health.
2. Enforce use of sanitary facilities by construction personnel at job site.
a. Enclose and anchor sanitary facilities.
b. No discharge will be allowed from these facilities.
c. Collect and store sewage and waste so as not to cause nuisance or health
problem.
d. Haul sewage and waste off-site at no less than weekly intervals and properly
dispose in accordance with applicable regulation.
3. Locate facilities near Work Site and keep clean and maintained throughout Project.
4. Remove facilities at completion of Project
C. Storage Sheds and Buildings
1. Provide adequately ventilated, watertight, weatherproof storage facilities with floor
above ground level for materials and equipment susceptible to weather damage.
2. Storage of materials not susceptible to weather damage may be on blocks off
ground.
3. Store materials in a neat and orderly manner.
a. Place materials and equipment to permit easy access for identification,
inspection and inventory.
4. Equip building with lockable doors and lighting, and provide electrical service for
equipment space heaters and heating or ventilation as necessary to provide storage
environments acceptable to specified manufacturers.
5. Fill and grade site for temporary structures to provide drainage away from
temporary and existing buildings.
6. Remove building from site prior to Final Acceptance.
D. Temporary Fencing
1. Provide and maintain for the duration or construction when required in contract
documents
E. Dust Control
01 50 00 - 3
DAP TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Page 3 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised JULY 1, 2011
1. Contractor is responsible for maintaining dust control through the duration of the
project.
a. Contractor remains on-call at all times
b. Must respond in a timely manner
F. Temporary Protection of Construction
1. Contractor or subcontractors are responsible for protecting Work from damage due
to weather.
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Facilities
1. Maintain all temporary facilities for duration of construction activities as needed.
3.5 [REPAIR] / [RESTORATION]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Temporary Facilities
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 50 00 - 4
DAP TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Page 4 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised JULY 1, 2011
1. Remove all temporary facilities and restore area after completion of the Work, to a
condition equal to or better than prior to start of Work.
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 55 26 - 1
DAP STREET USE PERMIT AND MODIFICATIONS TO TRAFFIC CONTROL
Page 1 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
SECTION 01 55 26
STREET USE PERMIT AND MODIFICATIONS TO TRAFFIC CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Administrative procedures for:
a. Street Use Permit
b. Modification of approved traffic control
c. Removal of Street Signs
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 34 71 13 – Traffic Control
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various Items bid.
No separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard
published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD).
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Traffic Control
1. General
a. When traffic control plans are included in the Drawings, provide Traffic
Control in accordance with Drawings and Section 34 71 13.
b. When traffic control plans are not included in the Drawings, prepare traffic
control plans in accordance with Section 34 71 13 and submit to City for
review.
1) Allow minimum 10 working days for review of proposed Traffic Control.
B. Street Use Permit
1. Prior to installation of Traffic Control, a City Street Use Permit is required.
a. To obtain Street Use Permit, submit Traffic Control Plans to City
Transportation and Public Works Department.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 55 26 - 2
DAP STREET USE PERMIT AND MODIFICATIONS TO TRAFFIC CONTROL
Page 2 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
1) Allow a minimum of 5 working days for permit review.
2) Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate review of Traffic Control plans for
Street Use Permit, such that construction is not delayed.
C. Modification to Approved Traffic Control
1. Prior to installation traffic control:
a. Submit revised traffic control plans to City Department Transportation and
Public Works Department.
1) Revise Traffic Control plans in accordance with Section 34 71 13.
2) Allow minimum 5 working days for review of revised Traffic Control.
3) It is the Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate review of Traffic Control
plans for Street Use Permit, such that construction is not delayed.
D. Removal of Street Sign
1. If it is determined that a street sign must be removed for construction, then contact
City Transportation and Public Works Department, Signs and Markings Division to
remove the sign.
E. Temporary Signage
1. In the case of regulatory signs, replace permanent sign with temporary sign meeting
requirements of the latest edition of the Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices (MUTCD).
2. Install temporary sign before the removal of permanent sign.
3. When construction is complete, to the extent that the permanent sign can be
reinstalled, contact the City Transportation and Public Works Department, Signs
and Markings Division, to reinstall the permanent sign.
F. Traffic Control Standards
1. Traffic Control Standards can be found on the City’s Buzzsaw website.
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 55 26 - 3
DAP STREET USE PERMIT AND MODIFICATIONS TO TRAFFIC CONTROL
Page 3 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 57 13 - 1
DAP STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION
Page 1 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
SECTION 01 57 13
STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Procedures for Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sediment Control
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Construction Activities resulting in less than 1 acre of disturbance
a. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various Items
bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
2. Construction Activities resulting in greater than 1 acre of disturbance
a. Measurement and Payment shall be in accordance with Section 31 25 00.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms
1. Notice of Intent: NOI
2. Notice of Termination: NOT
3. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan: SWPPP
4. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality: TCEQ
5. Notice of Change: NOC
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. Integrated Storm Management (iSWM) Technical Manual for Construction
Controls
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Contractor is responsible for resolution and payment of any fines issued associated
with compliance to Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 57 13 - 2
DAP STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION
Page 2 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
B. Construction Activities resulting in:
1. Less than 1 acre of disturbance
a. Provide erosion and sediment control in accordance with Section 31 25 00 and
Drawings.
2. 1 to less than 5 acres of disturbance
a. Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Construction
Permit is required
b. Complete SWPPP in accordance with TCEQ requirements
1) TCEQ Small Construction Site Notice Required under general permit
TXR150000
a) Sign and post at job site
b) Prior to Preconstruction Meeting, send 1 copy to City Department of
Transportation and Public Works, Environmental Division, (817) 392-
6088.
2) Provide erosion and sediment control in accordance with:
a) Section 31 25 00
b) The Drawings
c) TXR150000 General Permit
d) SWPPP
e) TCEQ requirements
3. 5 acres or more of Disturbance
a. Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Construction
Permit is required
b. Complete SWPPP in accordance with TCEQ requirements
1) Prepare a TCEQ NOI form and submit to TCEQ along with required fee
a) Sign and post at job site
b) Send copy to City Department of Transportation and Public Works,
Environmental Division, (817) 392-6088.
2) TCEQ Notice of Change required if making changes or updates to NOI
3) Provide erosion and sediment control in accordance with:
a) Section 31 25 00
b) The Drawings
c) TXR150000 General Permit
d) SWPPP
e) TCEQ requirements
4) Once the project has been completed and all the closeout requirements of
TCEQ have been met a TCEQ Notice of Termination can be submitted.
a) Send copy to City Department of Transportation and Public Works,
Environmental Division, (817) 392-6088.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. SWPPP
1. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00, except as stated herein.
a. Prior to the Preconstruction Meeting, submit a draft copy of SWPPP to the City
as follows:
1) 1 copy to the City Project Manager
a) City Project Manager will forward to the City Department of
Transportation and Public Works, Environmental Division for review
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 57 13 - 3
DAP STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION
Page 3 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
B. Modified SWPPP
1. If the SWPPP is revised during construction, resubmit modified SWPPP to the City
in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 58 13 - 1
DAP TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE
Page 1 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
SECTION 01 58 13
TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Temporary Project Signage Requirements
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various Items bid.
No separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, AND MATERIALS
A. Design Criteria
1. Provide free standing Project Designation Sign in accordance with City’s Standard
Details for project signs.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 58 13 - 2
DAP TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE
Page 2 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
B. Materials
1. Sign
a. Constructed of ¾-inch fir plywood, grade A-C (exterior) or better
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Provide vertical installation at extents of project.
2. Relocate sign as needed, upon request of the City.
B. Mounting options
a. Skids
b. Posts
c. Barricade
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE
A. General
1. Maintenance will include painting and repairs as needed or directed by the City.
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 58 13 - 3
DAP TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE
Page 3 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
4/7/2014 M. Domenech Revised for DAP application
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 60 00
DAP PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 2
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised March 20, 2020
SECTION 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. References for Product Requirements and City Standard Products List
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES [NOT USED]
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A list of City approved products for use is available through the City’s website at:
https://apps.fortworthtexas.gov/ProjectResources/ and following the directory
path: 02 - Construction Documents\Standard Products List
A. Only products specifically included on City’s Standard Product List in these Contract
Documents shall be allowed for use on the Project.
1. Any subsequently approved products will only be allowed for use upon specific
approval by the City.
B. Any specific product requirements in the Contract Documents supersede similar
products included on the City’s Standard Product List.
1. The City reserves the right to not allow products to be used for certain projects even
though the product is listed on the City’s Standard Product List.
C. Although a specific product is included on City’s Standard Product List, not all
products from that manufacturer are approved for use, including but not limited to, that
manufacturer’s standard product.
D. See Section 01 33 00 for submittal requirements of Product Data included on City’s
Standard Product List.
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 60 00
DAP PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 2
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised March 20, 2020
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
10/12/12 D. Johnson Modified Location of City’s Standard Product List
4/7/2014 M.Domenech Revised for DAP application
03/20/2020 D.V. Magaña Removed reference to Buzzsaw and noted that the City approved products list is
accessible through the City’s website.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 66 00 - 1
DAP PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
SECTION 01 66 00
PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Scheduling of product delivery
2. Packaging of products for delivery
3. Protection of products against damage from:
a. Handling
b. Exposure to elements or harsh environments
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various Items bid.
No separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY AND HANDLING
A. Delivery Requirements
1. Schedule delivery of products or equipment as required to allow timely installation
and to avoid prolonged storage.
2. Provide appropriate personnel and equipment to receive deliveries.
3. Delivery trucks will not be permitted to wait extended periods of time on the Site
for personnel or equipment to receive the delivery.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 66 00 - 2
DAP PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
4. Deliver products or equipment in manufacturer's original unbroken cartons or other
containers designed and constructed to protect the contents from physical or
environmental damage.
5. Clearly and fully mark and identify as to manufacturer, item and installation
location.
6. Provide manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling.
B. Handling Requirements
1. Handle products or equipment in accordance with these Contract Documents and
manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions.
C. Storage Requirements
1. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and
requirements of these Specifications.
2. Make necessary provisions for safe storage of materials and equipment.
a. Place loose soil materials and materials to be incorporated into Work to prevent
damage to any part of Work or existing facilities and to maintain free access at
all times to all parts of Work and to utility service company installations in
vicinity of Work.
3. Keep materials and equipment neatly and compactly stored in locations that will
cause minimum inconvenience to other contractors, public travel, adjoining owners,
tenants and occupants.
a. Arrange storage to provide easy access for inspection.
4. Restrict storage to areas available on construction site for storage of material and
equipment as shown on Drawings, or approved by City’s Project Representative.
5. Provide off-site storage and protection when on-site storage is not adequate.
a. Provide addresses of and access to off-site storage locations for inspection by
City’s Project Representative.
6. Do not use lawns, grass plots or other private property for storage purposes without
written permission of owner or other person in possession or control of premises.
7. Store in manufacturers’ unopened containers.
8. Neatly, safely and compactly stack materials delivered and stored along line of
Work to avoid inconvenience and damage to property owners and general public
and maintain at least 3 feet from fire hydrant.
9. Keep public and private driveways and street crossings open.
10. Repair or replace damaged lawns, sidewalks, streets or other improvements to
satisfaction of City’s Project Representative.
a. Total length which materials may be distributed along route of construction at
one time is 1,000 linear feet, unless otherwise approved in writing by City’s
Project Representative.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 66 00 - 3
DAP PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
Page 3 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 ERECTION [NOT USED]
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections
1. Inspect all products or equipment delivered to the site prior to unloading.
B. Non-Conforming Work
1. Reject all products or equipment that are damaged, used or in any other way
unsatisfactory for use on the project.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION
A. Protect all products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written directions.
B. Store products or equipment in location to avoid physical damage to items while in
storage.
C. Protect equipment from exposure to elements and keep thoroughly dry if required by
the manufacturer.
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 66 00 - 4
DAP PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
Page 4 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
4/7/2014 M.Domenech Revised for DAP application
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 70 00 - 1
DAP MOBILIZATION AND REMOBILIZATION
Page 1 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
SECTION 01 70 00
MOBILIZATION AND REMOBILIZATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Mobilization and Demobilization
a. Mobilization
1) Transportation of Contractor’s personnel, equipment, and operating supplies
to the Site
2) Establishment of necessary general facilities for the Contractor’s operation
at the Site
3) Premiums paid for performance and payment bonds
4) Transportation of Contractor’s personnel, equipment, and operating supplies
to another location within the designated Site
5) Relocation of necessary general facilities for the Contractor’s operation
from 1 location to another location on the Site.
b. Demobilization
1) Transportation of Contractor’s personnel, equipment, and operating supplies
away from the Site including disassembly
2) Site Clean-up
3) Removal of all buildings and/or other facilities assembled at the Site for this
Contract
c. Mobilization and Demobilization do not include activities for specific items of
work that are for which payment is provided elsewhere in the contract.
2. Remobilization
a. Remobilization for Suspension of Work specifically required in the Contract
Documents or as required by City includes:
1) Demobilization
a) Transportation of Contractor’s personnel, equipment, and operating
supplies from the Site including disassembly or temporarily securing
equipment, supplies, and other facilities as designated by the Contract
Documents necessary to suspend the Work.
b) Site Clean-up as designated in the Contract Documents
2) Remobilization
a) Transportation of Contractor’s personnel, equipment, and operating
supplies to the Site necessary to resume the Work.
b) Establishment of necessary general facilities for the Contractor’s
operation at the Site necessary to resume the Work.
3) No Payments will be made for:
a) Mobilization and Demobilization from one location to another on the
Site in the normal progress of performing the Work.
b) Stand-by or idle time
c) Lost profits
3. Mobilizations and Demobilization for Miscellaneous Projects
a. Mobilization and Demobilization
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 70 00 - 2
DAP MOBILIZATION AND REMOBILIZATION
Page 2 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
1) Mobilization shall consist of the activities and cost on a Work Order basis
necessary for:
a) Transportation of Contractor’s personnel, equipment, and operating
supplies to the Site for the issued Work Order.
b) Establishment of necessary general facilities for the Contractor’s
operation at the Site for the issued Work Order
2) Demobilization shall consist of the activities and cost necessary for:
a) Transportation of Contractor’s personnel, equipment, and operating
supplies from the Site including disassembly for each issued Work
Order
b) Site Clean-up for each issued Work Order
c) Removal of all buildings or other facilities assembled at the Site for
each Work Oder
b. Mobilization and Demobilization do not include activities for specific items of
work for which payment is provided elsewhere in the contract.
4. Emergency Mobilizations and Demobilization for Miscellaneous Projects
a. A Mobilization for Miscellaneous Projects when directed by the City and the
mobilization occurs within 24 hours of the issuance of the Work Order.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Mobilization and Demobilization
a. Measure
1) This Item is considered subsidiary to the various Items bid.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
are subsidiary to the various Items bid and no other compensation will be
allowed.
2. Remobilization for suspension of Work as specifically required in the Contract
Documents
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each remobilization performed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price per each “Specified Remobilization” in accordance with Contract
Documents.
c. The price shall include:
1) Demobilization as described in Section 1.1.A.2.a.1)
2) Remobilization as described in Section 1.1.A.2.a.2)
d. No payments will be made for standby, idle time, or lost profits associated this
Item.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
a lump sum and subsidiary to the various Items bid.
01 70 00 - 3
DAP MOBILIZATION AND REMOBILIZATION
Page 3 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
3. Remobilization for suspension of Work as required by City
a. Measurement and Payment
1) This shall be submitted as a Contract Claim in accordance with Article 10
of Section 00 72 00.
2) No payments will be made for standby, idle time, or lost profits associated
with this Item.
4. Mobilizations and Demobilizations for Miscellaneous Projects
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be for each Mobilization and
Demobilization required by the Contract Documents
b. Payment
1) The Work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price per each “Work Order Mobilization” in accordance with Contract
Documents. Demobilization shall be considered subsidiary to mobilization
and shall not be paid for separately.
c. The price shall include:
1) Mobilization as described in Section 1.1.A.3.a.1)
2) Demobilization as described in Section 1.1.A.3.a.2)
d. No payments will be made for standby, idle time, or lost profits associated this
Item.
5. Emergency Mobilizations and Demobilizations for Miscellaneous Projects
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be for each Mobilization and
Demobilization required by the Contract Documents
b. Payment
1) The Work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price per each “Work Order Emergency Mobilization” in accordance with
Contract Documents. Demobilization shall be considered subsidiary to
mobilization and shall not be paid for separately.
c. The price shall include
1) Mobilization as described in Section 1.1.A.4.a)
2) Demobilization as described in Section 1.1.A.3.a.2)
d. No payments will be made for standby, idle time, or lost profits associated this
Item.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 70 00 - 4
DAP MOBILIZATION AND REMOBILIZATION
Page 4 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
4/7/2014 M.Domenech Revised for DAP application
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 71 23 - 1
DAP CONSTRUCTION STAKING AND SURVEY
Page 1 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
SECTION 01 71 23
CONSTRUCTION STAKING AND SURVEY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Requirements for construction staking and construction survey
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Construction Staking
a. Measurement
1) This Item is considered subsidiary to the various Items bid.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item are subsidiary to the various Items bid and no other compensation will
be allowed.
2. Construction Survey
a. Measurement
1) This Item is considered subsidiary to the various Items bid.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item are subsidiary to the various Items bid and no other compensation will
be allowed.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals, if required, shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates
1. Provide certificate certifying that elevations and locations of improvements are in
conformance or non-conformance with requirements of the Contract Documents.
a. Certificate must be sealed by a registered professional land surveyor in the
State of Texas.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 71 23 - 2
DAP CONSTRUCTION STAKING AND SURVEY
Page 2 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
B. Field Quality Control Submittals
1. Documentation verifying accuracy of field engineering work.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Construction Staking
1. Construction staking will be performed by the City.
2. Coordination
a. Contact City’s Project Representative at least 2 weeks in advance for
scheduling of Construction Staking.
b. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate staking such that construction
activities are not delayed or negatively impacted.
3. General
a. Contractor is responsible for preserving and maintaining stakes furnished by
City.
b. If in the opinion of the City, a sufficient number of stakes or markings have
been lost, destroyed or disturbed, by Contractor’s neglect, such that the
contracted Work cannot take place, then the Contractor will be required to pay
the City for new staking with a 25 percent markup. The cost for staking will be
deducted from the payment due to the Contractor for the Project.
B. Construction Survey
1. Construction Survey will be performed by the City.
2. Coordination
a. Contractor to verify that control data established in the design survey remains
intact.
b. Coordinate with the City prior to field investigation to determine which
horizontal and vertical control data will be required for construction survey.
c. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate Construction Survey such that
construction activities are not delayed or negatively impacted.
d. Notify City if any control data needs to be restored or replaced due to damage
caused during construction operations.
1) City shall perform replacements and/or restorations.
3. General
a. Construction survey will be performed in order to maintain complete and
accurate logs of control and survey work as it progresses for Project Records.
b. The Contractor will need to ensure coordination is maintained with the City to
perform construction survey to obtain construction features, including but not
limited to the following:
1) All Utility Lines
a) Rim and flowline elevations and coordinates for each manhole or
junction structure
2) Water Lines
a) Top of pipe elevations and coordinates for waterlines at the following
locations:
(1) Every 250 linear feet
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 71 23 - 3
DAP CONSTRUCTION STAKING AND SURVEY
Page 3 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
(2) Horizontal and vertical points of inflection, curvature, etc. (All
Fittings)
(3) Cathodic protection test stations
(4) Sampling stations
(5) Meter boxes/vaults (All sizes)
(6) Fire lines
(7) Fire hydrants
(8) Gate valves
(9) Plugs, stubouts, dead-end lines
(10) Air Release valves (Manhole rim and vent pipe)
(11) Blow off valves (Manhole rim and valve lid)
(12) Pressure plane valves
(13) Cleaning wyes
(14) Casing pipe (each end)
b) Storm Sewer
(1) Top of pipe elevations and coordinates at the following locations:
(a) Every 250 linear feet
(b) Horizontal and vertical points of inflection, curvature, etc.
c) Sanitary Sewer
(1) Top of pipe elevations and coordinates for sanitary sewer lines at
the following locations:
(a) Every 250 linear feet
(b) Horizontal and vertical points of inflection, curvature, etc.
(c) Cleanouts
c. Construction survey will be performed in order to maintain complete and
accurate logs of control and survey work associated with meeting or exceeding
the line and grade required by these Specifications.
d. The Contractor will need to ensure coordination is maintained with the City to
perform construction survey and to verify control data, including but not
limited to the following:
1) Established benchmarks and control points provided for the Contractor’s
use are accurate
2) Benchmarks were used to furnish and maintain all reference lines and
grades for tunneling
3) Lines and grades were used to establish the location of the pipe
4) Submit to the City copies of field notes used to establish all lines and
grades and allow the City to check guidance system setup prior to
beginning each tunneling drive.
5) Provide access for the City to verify the guidance system and the line and
grade of the carrier pipe on a daily basis.
6) The Contractor remains fully responsible for the accuracy of the work and
the correction of it, as required.
7) Monitor line and grade continuously during construction.
8) Record deviation with respect to design line and grade once at each pipe
joint and submit daily records to City.
9) If the installation does not meet the specified tolerances, immediately notify
the City and correct the installation in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 71 23 - 4
DAP CONSTRUCTION STAKING AND SURVEY
Page 4 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 APPLICATION
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to maintain all stakes and control data placed by the
City in accordance with this Specification.
B. Do not change or relocate stakes or control data without approval from the City.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
4/7/2014 M.Domenech Revised for DAP application
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 74 23 - 1
DAP CLEANING
Page 1 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
SECTION 01 74 23
CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Intermediate and final cleaning for Work not including special cleaning of closed
systems specified elsewhere
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 32 92 13 – Hydro-Mulching, Seeding and Sodding
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various Items bid.
No separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Scheduling
1. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants disturbed by
cleaning process will not fall on newly painted surfaces.
2. Schedule final cleaning upon completion of Work and immediately prior to final
inspection.
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Store cleaning products and cleaning wastes in containers specifically designed for
those materials.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 74 23 - 2
DAP CLEANING
Page 2 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents
1. Compatible with surface being cleaned
2. New and uncontaminated
3. For manufactured surfaces
a. Material recommended by manufacturer
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 APPLICATION [NOT USED]
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING
A. General
1. Prevent accumulation of wastes that create hazardous conditions.
2. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with laws and safety orders of
governing authorities.
3. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner in
storm or sanitary drains or sewers.
4. Dispose of degradable debris at an approved solid waste disposal site.
5. Dispose of nondegradable debris at an approved solid waste disposal site or in an
alternate manner approved by City and regulatory agencies.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 74 23 - 3
DAP CLEANING
Page 3 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
6. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible.
7. Thoroughly clean, sweep, wash and polish all Work and equipment associated with
this project.
8. Remove all signs of temporary construction and activities incidental to construction
of required permanent Work.
9. If project is not cleaned to the satisfaction of the City, the City reserves the right to
have the cleaning completed at the expense of the Contractor.
10. Do not burn on-site.
B. Intermediate Cleaning during Construction
1. Keep Work areas clean so as not to hinder health, safety or convenience of
personnel in existing facility operations.
2. At maximum weekly intervals, dispose of waste materials, debris and rubbish.
3. Confine construction debris daily in strategically located container(s):
a. Cover to prevent blowing by wind
b. Store debris away from construction or operational activities
c. Haul from site at a minimum of once per week
4. Vacuum clean interior areas when ready to receive finish painting.
a. Continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis, until Final Acceptance.
5. Prior to storm events, thoroughly clean site of all loose or unsecured items, which
may become airborne or transported by flowing water during the storm.
C. Exterior (Site or Right of Way) Final Cleaning
1. Remove trash and debris containers from site.
a. Re-seed areas disturbed by location of trash and debris containers in accordance
with Section 32 92 13.
2. Sweep roadway to remove all rocks, pieces of asphalt, concrete or any other object
that may hinder or disrupt the flow of traffic along the roadway.
3. Clean any interior areas including, but not limited to, vaults, manholes, structures,
junction boxes and inlets.
4. If no longer required for maintenance of erosion facilities, and upon approval by
City, remove erosion control from site.
5. Clean signs, lights, signals, etc.
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 74 23 - 4
DAP CLEANING
Page 4 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
4/7/2014 M.Domenech Revised for DAP application
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 77 19 - 1
DAP CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
SECTION 01 77 19
CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. The procedure for closing out a contract
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various Items bid.
No separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Guarantees, Bonds and Affidavits
1. No application for final payment will be accepted until all guarantees, bonds,
certificates, licenses and affidavits required for Work or equipment as specified are
satisfactorily filed with the City.
B. Release of Liens or Claims
1. No application for final payment will be accepted until satisfactory evidence of
release of liens has been submitted to the City.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit all required documentation to City’s Project Representative.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 77 19 - 2
DAP CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE
A. Prior to requesting Final Inspection, submit:
1. Project Record Documents in accordance with Section 01 78 39
2. Operation and Maintenance Data, if required, in accordance with Section 01 78 23
B. Prior to requesting Final Inspection, perform final cleaning in accordance with Section
01 74 23.
C. Final Inspection
1. After final cleaning, provide notice to the City Project Representative that the Work
is completed.
a. The City will make an initial Final Inspection with the Contractor present.
b. Upon completion of this inspection, the City will notify the Contractor, in
writing within 10 business days, of any particulars in which this inspection
reveals that the Work is defective or incomplete.
2. Upon receiving written notice from the City, immediately undertake the Work
required to remedy deficiencies and complete the Work to the satisfaction of the
City.
3. Upon completion of Work associated with the items listed in the City's written
notice, inform the City, that the required Work has been completed. Upon receipt
of this notice, the City, in the presence of the Contractor, will make a subsequent
Final Inspection of the project.
4. Provide all special accessories required to place each item of equipment in full
operation. These special accessory items include, but are not limited to:
a. Specified spare parts
b. Adequate oil and grease as required for the first lubrication of the equipment
c. Initial fill up of all chemical tanks and fuel tanks
d. Light bulbs
e. Fuses
f. Vault keys
g. Handwheels
h. Other expendable items as required for initial start-up and operation of all
equipment
D. Notice of Project Completion
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 77 19 - 3
DAP CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
Page 3 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
1. Once the City Project Representative finds the Work subsequent to Final Inspection
to be satisfactory, the City will issue a Notice of Project Completion (Green Sheet).
E. Supporting Documentation
1. Coordinate with the City Project Representative to complete the following
additional forms:
a. Final Payment Request
b. Statement of Contract Time
c. Affidavit of Payment and Release of Liens
d. Consent of Surety to Final Payment
e. Pipe Report (if required)
f. Contractor’s Evaluation of City
g. Performance Evaluation of Contractor
F. Letter of Final Acceptance
1. Upon review and acceptance of Notice of Project Completion and Supporting
Documentation, in accordance with General Conditions, City will issue Letter of
Final Acceptance and release the Final Payment Request for payment.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
4/7/2014 M.Domenech Revised for DAP application
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 78 23 - 1
DAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Page 1 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
SECTION 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Product data and related information appropriate for City's maintenance and
operation of products furnished under Contract
2. Such products may include, but are not limited to:
a. Traffic Controllers
b. Irrigation Controllers (to be operated by the City)
c. Butterfly Valves
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various Items bid.
No separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Schedule
1. Submit manuals in final form to the City within 30 calendar days of product
shipment to the project site.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. All submittals shall be
approved by the City prior to delivery.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Form
1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by City personnel.
2. Format
a. Size: 8 ½ inches x 11 inches
b. Paper
1) 40 pound minimum, white, for typed pages
2) Holes reinforced with plastic, cloth or metal
c. Text: Manufacturer’s printed data, or neatly typewritten
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 78 23 - 2
DAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Page 2 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
d. Drawings
1) Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text
2) Reduce larger drawings and fold to size of text pages.
e. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating
equipment.
1) Provide typed description of product, and major component parts of
equipment.
2) Provide indexed tabs.
f. Cover
1) Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS".
2) List:
a) Title of Project
b) Identity of separate structure as applicable
c) Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual
3. Binders
a. Commercial quality 3-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers
b. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent
groupings.
4. If available, provide an electronic form of the O&M Manual.
B. Manual Content
1. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order
a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number
b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume
c. List, with each product:
1) The name, address and telephone number of the subcontractor or installer
2) A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the
volume
3) Identify area of responsibility of each
4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement
d. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set
forth in Contract Documents.
2. Product Data
a. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
b. Annotate each sheet to:
1) Clearly identify specific product or part installed
2) Clearly identify data applicable to installation
3) Delete references to inapplicable information
3. Drawings
a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:
1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems
2) Control and flow diagrams
b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure
correct illustration of completed installation.
c. Do not use Project Record Drawings as maintenance drawings.
4. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
b. Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 78 23 - 3
DAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Page 3 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
5. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued
a. Provide information sheet for City personnel giving:
1) Proper procedures in event of failure
2) Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds
C. Manual for Materials and Finishes
1. Submit 5 copies of complete manual in final form.
2. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes:
a. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products
1) Catalog number, size, composition
2) Color and texture designations
3) Information required for reordering special manufactured products
b. Instructions for care and maintenance
1) Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods
2) Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to
product
3) Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance
3. Content, for moisture protection and weather exposure products:
a. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products
1) Applicable standards
2) Chemical composition
3) Details of installation
b. Instructions for inspection, maintenance and repair
D. Manual for Equipment and Systems
1. Submit 5 copies of complete manual in final form.
2. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:
a. Description of unit and component parts
1) Function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions
2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests
3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts
b. Operating procedures
1) Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions
2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions
3) Summer and winter operating instructions
4) Special operating instructions
c. Maintenance procedures
1) Routine operations
2) Guide to "trouble shooting"
3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly
4) Alignment, adjusting and checking
d. Servicing and lubrication schedule
1) List of lubricants required
e. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions
f. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer
1) Predicted life of parts subject to wear
2) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts
g. As installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer
h. Each contractor's coordination drawings
1) As installed color coded piping diagrams
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 78 23 - 4
DAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Page 4 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
i. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve
j. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and
recommended quantities to be maintained in storage
k. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications
3. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate:
a. Description of system and component parts
1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions
2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests
3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts
b. Circuit directories of panelboards
1) Electrical service
2) Controls
3) Communications
c. As installed color coded wiring diagrams
d. Operating procedures
1) Routine and normal operating instructions
2) Sequences required
3) Special operating instructions
e. Maintenance procedures
1) Routine operations
2) Guide to "trouble shooting"
3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly
4) Adjustment and checking
f. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions
g. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and
recommended quantities to be maintained in storage
h. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications
4. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent
during instruction of City's personnel.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide operation and maintenance data by personnel with the following criteria:
1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products
2. Skilled as technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data
3. Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required drawings
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 78 23 - 5
DAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Page 5 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
8/31/2012 D. Johnson 1.5.A.1 – title of section removed
4/7/2014 M.Domenech Revised for DAP Application
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 78 39 - 1
DAP PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Page 1 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
SECTION 01 78 39
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Work associated with the documenting the project and recording changes to project
documents, including:
a. Record Drawings
b. Water Meter Service Reports
c. Sanitary Sewer Service Reports
d. Large Water Meter Reports
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various Items bid.
No separate payment will be allowed for this Item.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to submitting a request for Final Inspection, deliver Project Record Documents to
City’s Project Representative.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Accuracy of Records
1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate
and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and
other Documents where such entry is required to show the change properly.
2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future search for items shown in the Contract
Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project
Record Documents.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 78 39 - 2
DAP PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Page 2 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
3. To facilitate accuracy of records, make entries within 24 hours after receipt of
information that the change has occurred.
4. Provide factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and
visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and
expensive site measurement, investigation and examination.
1.10 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Maintain the job set of Record Documents completely protected from deterioration
and from loss and damage until completion of the Work and transfer of all recorded
data to the final Project Record Documents.
2. In the event of loss of recorded data, use means necessary to again secure the data
to the City's approval.
a. In such case, provide replacements to the standards originally required by the
Contract Documents.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Job set
1. Promptly following receipt of the Notice to Proceed, secure from the City, at no
charge to the Contractor, 1 complete set of all Documents comprising the Contract.
B. Final Record Documents
1. At a time nearing the completion of the Work and prior to Final Inspection, provide
the City 1 complete set of all Final Record Drawings in the Contract.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS
A. Maintenance of Job Set
1. Immediately upon receipt of the job set, identify each of the Documents with the
title, "RECORD DOCUMENTS - JOB SET".
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 78 39 - 3
DAP PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Page 3 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
2. Preservation
a. Considering the Contract completion time, the probable number of occasions
upon which the job set must be taken out for new entries and for examination,
and the conditions under which these activities will be performed, devise a
suitable method for protecting the job set.
b. Do not use the job set for any purpose except entry of new data and for review
by the City, until start of transfer of data to final Project Record Documents.
c. Maintain the job set at the site of work.
3. Coordination with Construction Survey
a. At a minimum clearly mark any deviations from Contract Documents
associated with installation of the infrastructure.
4. Making entries on Drawings
a. Record any deviations from Contract Documents.
b. Use an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the
change by graphic line and note as required.
c. Date all entries.
d. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area or areas affected.
e. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping
changes.
5. Conversion of schematic layouts
a. In some cases on the Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping,
ducts, and similar items, are shown schematically and are not intended to
portray precise physical layout.
1) Final physical arrangement is determined by the Contractor, subject to the
City's approval.
2) However, design of future modifications of the facility may require
accurate information as to the final physical layout of items which are
shown only schematically on the Drawings.
b. Show on the job set of Record Drawings, by dimension accurate to within 1
inch, the centerline of each run of items.
1) Final physical arrangement is determined by the Contractor, subject to the
City's approval.
2) Show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the Item ("under slab", "in
ceiling plenum", "exposed", and the like).
3) Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related
reliably to the Specifications.
c. The City may waive the requirements for conversion of schematic layouts
where, in the City's judgment, conversion serves no useful purpose. However,
do not rely upon waivers being issued except as specifically issued in writing
by the City.
B. Final Project Record Documents
1. Transfer of data to Drawings
a. Carefully transfer change data shown on the job set of Record Drawings to the
corresponding final documents, coordinating the changes as required.
b. Clearly indicate at each affected detail and other Drawing a full description of
changes made during construction, and the actual location of items.
c. Call attention to each entry by drawing a "cloud" around the area or areas
affected.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
01 78 39 - 4
DAP PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Page 4 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS – DEVELOPER AWARDED PROJECTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised April 7, 2014
d. Make changes neatly, consistently and with the proper media to assure
longevity and clear reproduction.
2. Transfer of data to other Documents
a. If the Documents, other than Drawings, have been kept clean during progress of
the Work, and if entries thereon have been orderly to the approval of the City,
the job set of those Documents, other than Drawings, will be accepted as final
Record Documents.
b. If any such Document is not so approved by the City, secure a new copy of that
Document from the City at the City's usual charge for reproduction and
handling, and carefully transfer the change data to the new copy to the approval
of the City.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
4/7/2014 M.Domenech Revised for DAP Application
Altamesa Boulevard Extension For 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 13 - 1
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
Page 1 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 02 41 13
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Removing sidewalks and steps
2. Removing ADA ramps and landings
3. Removing driveways
4. Removing fences
5. Removing guardrail
6. Removing retaining walls (less than 4 feet tall)
7. Removing mailboxes
8. Removing rip rap
9. Removing miscellaneous concrete structures including porches and foundations
10. Disposal of removed materials
B. Deviations this from City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 31 23 23 – Borrow
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Remove Sidewalk: Measure by square foot.
b. Remove Steps: measure by the square foot as seen in the plan view only.
c. Remove ADA Ramp: measure by each.
d. Remove Driveway: measure by the square foot by type.
e. Remove Fence: measure by the linear foot.
f. Remove Guardrail: measure by the linear foot along the face of the rail in place
including metal beam guard fence transitions and single guard rail terminal
sections from the center of end posts.
g. Remove Retaining Wall (less than 4 feet tall): measure by the linear foot
h. Remove Mailbox: measure by each.
i. Remove Rip Rap: measure by the square foot.
j. Remove Miscellaneous Concrete Structure: measure by the lump sum.
2. Payment
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 13 - 2
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
Page 2 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a. Remove Sidewalk: full compensation for saw cutting, removal, hauling,
disposal, tools, equipment, labor and incidentals needed to execute work.
Sidewalk adjacent to or attached to retaining wall (including sidewalk that acts
as a wall footing) shall be paid as sidewalk removal. For utility projects, this
Item shall be considered subsidiary to the trench and no other compensation
will be allowed.
b. Remove Steps: full compensation for saw cutting, removal, hauling, disposal,
tools, equipment, labor and incidentals needed to execute work. For utility
projects, this Item shall be considered subsidiary to the trench and no other
compensation will be allowed.
c. Remove ADA Ramp and landing: full compensation for saw cutting, removal,
hauling, disposal, tools, equipment, labor and incidentals needed to execute
work. Work includes ramp landing removal. For utility projects, this Item shall
be considered subsidiary to the trench and no other compensation will be
allowed.
d. Remove Driveway: full compensation for saw cutting, removal, hauling,
disposal, tools, equipment, labor and incidentals needed to remove improved
driveway by type. For utility projects, this Item shall be considered subsidiary
to the trench and no other compensation will be allowed.
e. Remove Fence: full compensation for removal, hauling, disposal, tools,
equipment, labor and incidentals needed to remove fence. For utility projects,
this Item shall be considered subsidiary to the trench and no other
compensation will be allowed.
f. Remove Guardrail: full compensation for removing materials, loading, hauling,
unloading, and storing or disposal; furnishing backfill material; backfilling the
postholes; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. For utility projects, this
Item shall be considered subsidiary to the trench and no other compensation
will be allowed.
g. Remove Retaining Wall (less than 4 feet tall): full compensation for saw
cutting, removal, hauling, disposal, tools, equipment, labor and incidentals
needed to execute work. Sidewalk adjacent to or attached to retaining wall
(including sidewalk that acts as a wall footing) shall be paid as sidewalk
removal. For utility projects, this Item shall be considered subsidiary to the
trench and no other compensation will be allowed.
h. Remove Mailbox: full compensation for removal, hauling, disposal, tools,
equipment, labor and incidentals needed to execute work. For utility projects,
this Item shall be considered subsidiary to the trench and no other
compensation will be allowed.
i. Remove Rip Rap: full compensation for saw cutting, removal, hauling,
disposal, tools, equipment, labor and incidentals needed to execute work. For
utility projects, this Item shall be considered subsidiary to the trench and no
other compensation will be allowed.
j. Remove Miscellaneous Concrete Structure: full compensation for saw cutting,
removal, hauling, disposal, tools, equipment, labor and incidentals needed to
execute work. For utility projects, this Item shall be considered subsidiary to
the trench and no other compensation will be allowed.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Definitions
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 13 - 3
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
Page 3 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Improved Driveway: Driveway constructed of concrete, asphalt paving or brick unit
pavers.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Fill Material: See Section 31 23 23.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 REMOVAL
A. Remove Sidewalk
1. Remove sidewalk to nearest existing dummy, expansion or construction joint.
2. Sawcut when removing to nearest joint is not practical. See 3.4.K.
B. Remove Steps
1. Remove step to nearest existing dummy, expansion or construction joint.
2. Sawcut when removing to nearest joint is not practical. See 3.4.K.
C. Remove ADA Ramp
1. Sawcut existing curb and gutter and pavement prior to wheel chair ramp removal.
See 3.4.K.
2. Remove ramp to nearest existing dummy, expansion or construction joint on
existing sidewalk.
D. Remove Driveway
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 13 - 4
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
Page 4 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Sawcut existing drive, curb and gutter and pavement prior to drive removal. See
3.4.K.
2. Remove drive to nearest existing dummy, expansion or construction joint.
3. Sawcut when removing to nearest joint is not practical. See 3.4.K.
4. Remove adjacent sidewalk to nearest existing dummy, expansion or construction
joint on existing sidewalk.
E. Remove Fence
1. Remove all fence components above and below ground and backfill with acceptable
fill material.
2. Use caution in removing and salvaging fence materials.
3. Salvaged materials may be used to reconstruct fence as approved by City or as
shown on Drawings.
4. Contractor responsible for keeping animals (livestock, pets, etc.) within the fenced
areas during construction operation and while removing fences.
F. Remove Guardrail
1. Remove rail elements in original lengths.
2. Remove fittings from the posts and the metal rail and then pull the posts.
3. Do not mar or damage salvageable materials during removal.
4. Completely remove posts and any concrete surrounding the posts.
5. Furnish backfill material and backfill the hole with material equal in composition
and density to the surrounding soil unless otherwise directed.
6. Cut off or bend down eyebolts anchored to the dead man to an elevation at least 1-
foot below the new subgrade elevation and leave in place along with the dead man.
G. Remove Retaining Wall (less than 4 feet tall)
1. Remove wall to nearest existing joint.
2. Sawcut when removing to nearest joint is not practical. See 3.4.K.
3. Removal includes all components of the retaining wall including footings.
4. Sidewalk adjacent to or attached to retaining wall: See 3.4.A
H. Remove Mailbox
1. Salvage existing materials for reuse. Mailbox materials may need to be used for
reconstruction.
I. Remove Rip Rap
1. Remove rip rap to nearest existing dummy, expansion or construction joint.
2. Sawcut when removing to nearest joint is not practical. See 3.4.K.
J. Remove Miscellaneous Concrete Structure
1. Remove portions of miscellaneous concrete structures including foundations and
slabs that do not interfere with proposed construction to 2 feet below the finished
ground line.
2. Cut reinforcement close to the portion of the concrete to remain in place.
3. Break or perforate the bottom of structures to remain to prevent the entrapment of
water.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 13 - 5
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
Page 5 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
K. Sawcut
1. Sawing Equipment
a. Power-driven
b. Manufactured for the purpose of sawing pavement
c. In good operating condition
d. Shall not spall or fracture the pavement to the removal area
2. Sawcut perpendicular to the surface completely through existing pavement.
3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 1.2.A.2. Modified Payment - Items will be subsidiary to trench on utility projects
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 14 - 1
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
Page 1 of 16
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
0SECTION 02 41 14
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Direction for the removal, abandonment or salvaging of the following utilities:
a. Cathodic Protection Test Stations
b. Water Lines
c. Gate Valves
d. Water Valves
e. Fire Hydrants
f. Water Meters and Meter Box
g. Water Sampling Station
h. Concrete Water Vaults
i. Sanitary Sewer Lines
j. Sanitary Sewer Manholes
k. Sanitary Sewer Junction Boxes
l. Storm Sewer Lines
m. Storm Sewer Manhole Risers
n. Storm Sewer Junction Boxes
o. Storm Sewer Inlets
p. Box Culverts
q. Headwalls and Safety End Treatments
r. Trench Drains
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 03 34 13 – Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)
4. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
5. Section 33 05 24 – Installation of Carrier Pipe in Casing or Tunnel Liner Plate
6. Section 33 11 11 – Ductile Iron Fittings
7. Section 33 11 13 – Concrete Pressure Pipe, Bar-wrapped, Steel Cylinder Type
8. Section 33 11 14 – Buried Steel Pipe and Fittings
9. Section 33 12 25 – Connection to Existing Water Mains
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Utility Lines
1. Abandonment of Utility Line by Grouting
a. Measurement
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 14 - 2
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
Page 2 of 16
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per cubic yard of existing utility line to
be grouted. Measure by tickets showing cubic yards of grout applied.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price per cubic yard of “Line Grouting” for:
a) Various types of utility line
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Low density cellular grout or CLSM
2) Water
3) Pavement removal
4) Excavation
5) Hauling
6) Disposal of excess materials
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
8) Clean-up
2. Utility Line Removal, Separate Trench
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of existing utility line to
be removed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per linear foot of “Remove Line” for:
a) Various types of existing utility line
b) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and disposal of existing utility pipe
2) Pavement removal
3) Excavation
4) Hauling
5) Disposal of excess materials
6) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
7) Clean-up
3. Utility Line Removal, Same Trench
a. Measurement
1) This Item is considered subsidiary the proposed utility line being installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
are subsidiary to the installation of proposed utility pipe and shall be
subsidiary to the unit price bid per linear foot of pipe complete in place, and
no other compensation will be allowed.
4. Manhole Abandonment
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each manhole to be abandoned.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per each “Abandon Manhole” for:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 14 - 3
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
Page 3 of 16
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a) Various diameters
b) Various types
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and disposal of manhole cone
2) Removal, salvage and delivery of frame and cover to City, if applicable
3) Cutting and plugging of existing sewer lines
4) Concrete
5) Acceptable material for backfilling manhole void
6) Pavement removal
7) Excavation
8) Hauling
9) Disposal of excess materials
10) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
11) Surface restoration
12) Clean-up
5. Cathodic Test Station Abandonment
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each cathodic test station to be
abandoned.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per each “Abandon Cathodic Test Station”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Abandon cathodic test station
2) CLSM
3) Pavement removal
4) Excavation
5) Hauling
6) Disposal of excess materials
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
8) Clean-up
B. Water Lines and Appurtenances
1. Installation of a Water Line Pressure Plug
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each pressure plug to be installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid for each “Pressure Plug” installed for:
a) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing pressure plug
2) Pavement removal
3) Excavation
4) Hauling
5) Disposal of excess material
6) Gaskets
7) Bolts and Nuts
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 14 - 4
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
Page 4 of 16
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
8) Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment
9) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
10) Disinfection
11) Testing
12) Clean-up
2. Abandonment of Water Line by Cut and installation of Abandonment Plug
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each cut and abandonment plug
installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid for each “Water Abandonment Plug” installed for:
a) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing abandonment plug
2) Pavement removal
3) Excavation
4) Hauling
5) CLSM
6) Disposal of excess material
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
8) Clean-up
3. Water Valve Removal
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each water valve to be removed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per each “Remove Water Valve” for:
a) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and disposal of valve
2) CLSM
3) Pavement removal
4) Excavation
5) Hauling
6) Disposal of excess materials
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
8) Clean-up
4. Water Valve Removal and Salvage
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each water valve to be removed and
salvaged.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per each “Salvage Water Valve” for:
a) Various sizes
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 14 - 5
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
Page 5 of 16
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and Salvage of valve
2) CLSM
3) Delivery to City
4) Pavement removal
5) Excavation
6) Hauling
7) Disposal of excess materials
8) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
9) Clean-up
5. Water Valve Abandonment
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each water valve to be abandoned.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per each “Abandon Water Valve” for:
a) Various Sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Abandonment of valve
2) CLSM
3) Pavement removal
4) Excavation
5) Hauling
6) Disposal of excess materials
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
8) Clean-up
6. Fire Hydrant Removal and Salvage
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each fire hydrant to be removed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per each “Salvage Fire Hydrant”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and salvage of fire hydrant
2) Delivery to City
3) Pavement removal
4) Excavation
5) Hauling
6) Disposal of excess materials
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
8) Clean-up
7. Water Meter Removal and Salvage
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each water meter to be removed and
salvaged.
b. Payment
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 14 - 6
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
Page 6 of 16
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per each “Salvage Water Meter” for:
a) Various sizes
2) If a “Water Meter Service Relocate” is performed in accordance with
Section 33 12 10, removal and salvage or disposal of the existing (2-inch or
smaller) water meter shall be subsidiary to the cost of the “Water Meter
Service Relocate”, no other compensation will be allowed.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and salvage of water meter
2) Delivery to City
3) Pavement removal
4) Excavation
5) Hauling
6) Disposal of excess materials
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
8) Clean-up
8. Water Sampling Station Removal and Salvage
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each water sampling station to be
removed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per each “Salvage Water Sampling Station”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and salvage of water sampling station
2) Delivery to City
3) Pavement removal
4) Excavation
5) Hauling
6) Disposal of excess materials
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
8) Clean-up
9. Concrete Water Vault Removal
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each concrete water vault to be
removed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per each “Remove Concrete Water Vault”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and disposal of concrete water vault
2) Removal, salvage and delivery of frame and cover to City, if applicable
3) Removal, salvage and delivery of any valves to City, if applicable
4) Removal, salvage and delivery of any water meters to City, if applicable
5) Pavement removal
6) Excavation
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 14 - 7
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
Page 7 of 16
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
7) Hauling
8) Disposal of excess materials
9) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
10) Clean-up
C. Sanitary Sewer Lines and Appurtenances
1. Abandonment of Sanitary Sewer Line by Cut and installation of Abandonment Plug
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each cut and abandonment plug
installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid for each “Sewer Abandonment Plug” for:
a) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing abandonment plug
2) Pavement removal
3) Excavation
4) Hauling
5) CLSM
6) Disposal of excess material
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
8) Clean-up
2. Sanitary Sewer Manhole Removal
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each sanitary sewer manhole to be
removed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per each “Remove Sewer Manhole” for:
a) Various diameters
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and disposal of manhole
2) Removal, salvage and delivery of frame and cover to City, if applicable
3) Cutting and plugging of existing sewer lines
4) Pavement removal
5) Excavation
6) Hauling
7) Disposal of excess materials
8) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
9) Clean-up
3. Sanitary Sewer Junction Structure Removal
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each sanitary sewer junction
structure being removed.
b. Payment
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 14 - 8
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
Page 8 of 16
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
lump sum bid per each “Remove Sewer Junction Box” location.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and disposal of junction box
2) Removal, salvage and delivery of frame and cover to City.
3) Pavement removal
4) Excavation
5) Hauling
6) Disposal of excess materials
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
8) Clean-up
D. Storm Sewer Lines and Appurtenances
1. Abandonment of Storm Sewer Line by Cut and installation of Abandonment Plug
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each cut and abandonment plug to
be installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid for each “Storm Abandonment Plug” installed for:
a) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing abandonment plug
2) Pavement removal
3) Excavation
4) Hauling
5) CLSM
6) Disposal of excess material
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
8) Clean-up
2. Storm Sewer Manhole Removal
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each storm sewer manhole to be
removed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per each “Remove Manhole Riser” for:
a) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and disposal of manhole
2) Removal, salvage and delivery of frame and cover to City, if applicable
3) Pavement removal
4) Excavation
5) Hauling
6) Disposal of excess materials
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
8) Clean-up
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 14 - 9
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
Page 9 of 16
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3. Storm Sewer Junction Box Removal
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each storm sewer junction structure
to be removed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per each “Remove Storm Junction Box” for:
a) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and disposal of junction box
2) Removal, salvage and delivery of frame and cover to City, if applicable
3) Pavement removal
4) Excavation
5) Hauling
6) Disposal of excess materials
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
8) Clean-up
4. Storm Sewer Junction Structure Removal
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each storm sewer junction structure
being removed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
lump sum bid per each “Remove Storm Junction Structure” location.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and disposal of junction structure
2) Removal, salvage and delivery of frame and cover to City, if applicable
3) Pavement removal
4) Excavation
5) Hauling
6) Disposal of excess materials
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
8) Clean-up
5. Storm Sewer Inlet Removal
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each storm sewer inlet to be
removed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per each “Remove Storm Inlet” for:
a) Various types
b) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and disposal of inlet
2) Pavement removal
3) Excavation
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 14 - 10
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
Page 10 of 16
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
4) Hauling
5) Disposal of excess materials
6) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
7) Clean-up
6. Storm Sewer Junction Box Removal
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of existing storm sewer
box to be removed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per linear foot of “Remove Storm Junction Box” for all sizes.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and disposal of Storm Sewer Box
2) Pavement removal
3) Excavation
4) Hauling
5) Disposal of excess materials
6) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
7) Clean-up
7. Headwall/SET Removal
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each headwall or safety end
treatment (SET) to be removed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per each “Remove Headwall/SET”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and disposal of Headwall/SET
2) Pavement removal
3) Excavation
4) Hauling
5) Disposal of excess materials
6) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
7) Clean-up
8. Trench Drain Removal
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of storm sewer trench
drain to be removed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per linear foot of “Remove Trench Drain” for:
a) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and disposal of storm sewer line
2) Pavement removal
3) Excavation
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 14 - 11
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
Page 11 of 16
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
4) Hauling
5) Disposal of excess materials
6) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
7) Clean-up
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. Contact Inspector and the Water Department Field Operation Storage Yard for
coordination of salvage material return.
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Protect and salvage all materials such that no damage occurs during delivery to the
City.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 REMOVAL, SALVAGE, AND ABANDONMENT
A. General
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 14 - 12
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
Page 12 of 16
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Manhole Abandonment
a. All manholes that are to be taken out of service are to be removed unless
specifically requested and/or approved by City.
b. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
c. Remove and salvage manhole frame and cover as coordinated with City.
d. Deliver salvaged material to the City.
e. Cut and plug sewer lines to be abandoned.
f. Backfill manhole void in accordance with City Standard Details.
B. Water Lines and Appurtenances
1. Water Line Pressure Plugs
a. Ductile Iron Water Lines
1) Excavate, embed, and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
2) Plug with an MJ Plug with mechanical restraint and blocking in accordance
with Section 33 11 11.
3) Perform Cut and Plug in accordance with Section 33 12 25.
b. PVC C900 and C905 Water Lines
1) Excavate, embed, and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
2) Plug with an MJ Plug with mechanical restraint and blocking in accordance
with Section 33 11 11.
3) Perform Cut and Plug in accordance with Section 33 12 25.
c. Concrete Pressure Pipe, Bar Wrapped, Steel Cylinder Type Water Lines
1) Excavate, embed, and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10
2) Plug using:
a) A fabricated plug restrained by welding or by a Snap Ring in
accordance with Section 33 11 13; or
b) A blind flange in accordance with Section 33 11 13
3) Perform Cut and Plug in accordance with Section 33 12 25.
d. Buried Steel Water Lines
1) Excavate, embed, and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
2) Plug using:
a) A fabricated plug restrained by welding in accordance with Section 33
11 14; or
b) A blind flange in accordance with Section 33 11 14
3) Perform Cut and Plug in accordance with Section 33 12 25.
2. Water Line Abandonment Plug
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Plug with CLSM in accordance with Section 03 34 13.
3. Water Line Abandonment by Grouting
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Dewater from existing line to be grouted.
c. Fill line with Low Density Cellular Grout in accordance with Section 33 05 24
or CLSM in accordance with 03 34 13.
d. Dispose of any excess material.
4. Water Line Removal
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Cut existing line from the utility system prior to removal.
c. Cut any services prior to removal.
d. Remove existing pipe line and properly dispose as approved by City.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 14 - 13
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
Page 13 of 16
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
5. Water Valve Removal
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Remove and dispose of valve bonnet, wedge and stem.
c. Fill valve body with CLSM in accordance with Section 03 34 13.
6. Water Valve Removal and Salvage
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Remove valve bonnet, wedge and stem.
c. Deliver salvaged material to the Water Department Field Operation Storage
Yard.
d. Protect salvaged materials from damage.
e. Fill valve body with CLSM in accordance with Section 03 34 13.
7. Water Valve Abandonment
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Remove the top 2 feet of the valve stack and any valve extensions.
c. Fill the remaining valve stack with CLSM in accordance with Section 03 34 13.
8. Fire Hydrant Removal and Salvage
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Remove Fire Hydrant.
c. Place abandonment plug on fire hydrant lead line.
d. Deliver salvaged fire hydrant to the Water Department Field Operation Storage
Yard.
e. Protect salvaged materials from damage.
9. Water Meter Removal and Salvage
a. Remove and salvage water meter.
b. Return salvaged meter to Project Representative.
c. City will provide replacement meter for installation.
d. Meter Box and Lid
1) Remove and salvage cast iron meter box lid.
2) Remove and dispose of any non-cast iron meter box lid.
3) Return salvaged material to the Water Department Field Operation Storage
Yard.
4) Remove and dispose of meter box.
10. Water Sample Station Removal and Salvage
a. Remove and salvage existing water sample station.
b. Deliver salvaged material to the Water Department Field Operation Storage
Yard.
11. Concrete Water Vault Removal
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Remove and salvage vault lid.
c. Remove and salvage valves.
d. Remove and salvage meters.
e. Deliver salvaged material to the Water Department Field Operation Storage
Yard.
f. Remove and dispose of any piping or other appurtenances.
g. Demolish and remove entire concrete vault.
h. Dispose of all excess materials.
12. Cathodic Test Station Abandonment
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 14 - 14
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
Page 14 of 16
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b. Remove the top 2 feet of the cathodic test station stack and contents.
c. Fill any remaining voids with CLSM in accordance with Section 03 34 13.
C. Sanitary Sewer Lines and Appurtenances
1. Sanitary Sewer Line Abandonment Plug
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Remove and dispose of any sewage.
c. Plug with CLSM in accordance with Section 03 34 13.
2. Sanitary Sewer Line Abandonment by Grouting
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Dewater and dispose of any sewage from the existing line to be grouted.
c. Fill line with Low Density Cellular Grout in accordance with Section 33 05 24
or CLSM in accordance with 03 34 13.
d. Dispose of any excess material.
3. Sanitary Sewer Line Removal
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Cut existing line from the utility system prior to removal.
c. Cut any services prior to removal.
d. Remove existing pipe line and properly dispose as approved by City.
4. Sanitary Sewer Manholes Removal
a. All sanitary sewer manholes that are to be taken out of service are to be
removed unless specifically requested and/or approved by City.
b. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
c. Remove and salvage manhole frame and cover.
d. Deliver salvaged material to the Water Department Field Operation Storage.
e. Demolish and remove entire concrete manhole.
f. Cut and plug sewer lines to be abandoned.
5. Sanitary Sewer Junction Structure Removal
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Remove and salvage manhole frame and cover.
c. Deliver salvaged material to the Water Department Field Operation Storage.
d. Demolish and remove entire concrete manhole.
e. Cut and plug sewer lines to be abandoned.
D. Storm Sewer Lines and Appurtenances
1. Storm Sewer Abandonment Plug
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Dewater line.
c. Plug with CLSM in accordance with Section 03 34 13.
2. Storm Sewer Line Abandonment by Grouting
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Dewater the existing line to be grouted.
c. Fill line with Low Density Cellular Grout in accordance with Section 33 05 24
or CLSM in accordance with 03 34 13.
d. Dispose of any excess material.
3. Storm Sewer Line Removal
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Remove existing pipe line and properly dispose as approved by City.
4. Storm Sewer Manhole Removal
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 14 - 15
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
Page 15 of 16
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a. All storm sewer manholes that are to be taken out of service are to be removed
unless specifically requested and/or approved by City.
b. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
c. Demolish and remove entire concrete manhole.
d. Cut and plug storm sewer lines to be abandoned.
5. Storm Sewer Junction Box and/or Junction Structure Removal
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Demolish and remove entire concrete structure.
c. Cut and plug storm sewer lines to be abandoned.
6. Storm Sewer Inlet Removal
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Demolish and remove entire concrete inlet.
c. Cut and plug storm sewer lines to be abandoned.
7. Storm Sewer Box Removal
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Cut existing line from the utility system prior to removal.
c. Cut any services prior to removal.
d. Remove existing pipe line and properly dispose as approved by City.
8. Headwall/SET Removal
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Demolish and remove entire concrete inlet.
c. Cut and plug storm sewer lines to be abandoned.
9. Storm Sewer Trench Drain Removal
a. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Remove existing pipe line and dispose as approved by City.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 14 - 16
UTILITY REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT
Page 16 of 16
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/12 D. Johnson
1.2.C.3.c. – Include Frame and Cover in Payment description
Throughout – added abandonment of storm and sewer manholes when requested
and/or approved by City
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 15 - 1
PAVING REMOVAL
Page 1 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 2, 2016
SECTION 02 41 15
PAVING REMOVAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Removing concrete paving, asphalt paving and brick paving
2. Removing concrete curb and gutter
3. Removing concrete valley gutter
4. Milling roadway paving
5. Pulverization of existing pavement
6. Disposal of removed materials
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 - General Requirements
3. Section 32 11 33 - Cement Treated Base Courses
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Remove Concrete Paving: measure by the square yard from back-to-back of
curbs.
b. Remove Asphalt Paving: measure by the square yard between the lips of
gutters.
c. Remove Brick Paving: measure by the square yard.
d. Remove Concrete Curb and Gutter: measure by the linear foot.
e. Remove Concrete Valley Gutter: measure by the square yard
f. Wedge Milling: measure by the square yard for varying thickness.
g. Surface Milling: measure by the square yard for varying thickness.
h. Butt Milling: measured by the linear foot.
i. Pavement Pulverization: measure by the square yard.
j. Remove Speed Cushion: measure by each.
2. Payment
a. Remove Concrete Paving: full compensation for saw cutting, removal, hauling,
disposal, tools, equipment, labor and incidentals needed to execute work. For
utility projects, this Item shall be considered subsidiary to the trench and no
other compensation will be allowed.
b. Remove Asphalt Paving: full compensation for saw cutting, removal, hauling,
disposal, tools, equipment, labor and incidentals needed to execute work. For
utility projects, this Item shall be considered subsidiary to the trench and no
other compensation will be allowed.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 15 - 2
PAVING REMOVAL
Page 2 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 2, 2016
c. Remove Brick Paving: full compensation for saw cutting, removal, salvaging,
cleaning, hauling, disposal, tools, equipment, labor and incidentals needed to
execute work. For utility projects, this Item shall be considered subsidiary to
the trench and no other compensation will be allowed.
d. Remove Concrete Curb and Gutter: full compensation for saw cutting, removal,
hauling, disposal, tools, equipment, labor and incidentals needed to execute
work. For utility projects, this Item shall be considered subsidiary to the trench
and no other compensation will be allowed.
e. Remove Concrete Valley Gutter: full compensation for saw cutting, removal,
hauling, disposal, tools, equipment, labor and incidentals needed to execute
work.
f. Wedge Milling: full compensation for all milling, hauling milled material to
salvage stockpile or disposal, tools, labor, equipment and incidentals necessary
to execute the work.
g. Surface Milling: full compensation for all milling, hauling milled material to
salvage stockpile or disposal, tools, labor, equipment and incidentals necessary
to execute the work.
h. Butt Milling: full compensation for all milling, hauling milled material to
salvage stockpile or disposal, tools, labor, equipment and incidentals necessary
to execute the work.
i. Pavement Pulverization: full compensation for all labor, material, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to pulverize, remove and store the pulverized
material, undercut the base, mixing, compaction, haul off, sweep, and dispose
of the undercut material.
j. Remove speed cushion: full compensation for removal, hauling, disposal,
tools, equipment, labor, and incidentals needed to execute the work. For utility
projects, this Item shall be considered subsidiary to the trench and no other
compensation will be allowed.
k. No payment for saw cutting of pavement or curbs and gutters will be made
under this section. Include cost of such work in unit prices for items listed in
bid form requiring saw cutting.
l. No payment will be made for work outside maximum payment limits indicated
on plans, or for pavements or structures removed for CONTRACTOR's
convenience.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 15 - 3
PAVING REMOVAL
Page 3 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 2, 2016
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT [NOT USED]
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.2 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Mark paving removal limits for City approval prior to beginning removal.
2. Identify known utilities below grade - Stake and flag locations.
3.4 PAVEMENT REMOVAL
A. General.
1. Exercise caution to minimize damage to underground utilities.
2. Minimize amount of earth removed.
3. Remove paving to neatly sawed joints.
4. Use care to prevent fracturing adjacent, existing pavement.
B. Sawing
1. Sawing Equipment.
a. Power-driven.
b. Manufactured for the purpose of sawing pavement.
c. In good operating condition.
d. Shall not spall or fracture the pavement structure adjacent to the removal area.
2. Sawcut perpendicular to the surface to full pavement depth, parallel and
perpendicular to existing joint.
3. Sawcut parallel to the original sawcut in square or rectangular fashion.
4. If a sawcut falls within 5 feet of an en existing dummy joint, construction joint, saw
joint, cold joint, expansion joint, edge of paving or gutter lip, remove paving to that
joint, edge or lip.
5. If a pavement edge of a cut is damaged subsequent to saw cutting, saw to a new,
neat, straight line for the purpose of removing the damaged area.
C. Remove Concrete Paving and Concrete Valley Gutter
1. Sawcut: See 3.4.B.
2. Remove concrete to the nearest expansion joint or vertical saw cut.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 15 - 4
PAVING REMOVAL
Page 4 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 2, 2016
D. Remove Concrete Curb and Gutter
1. Sawcut: See 3.4.B.
2. Minimum limits of removal: 30 inches in length.
E. Remove Asphalt Paving
1. Sawcut: See 3.4.B.
2. Remove pavement without disturbing the base material.
3. When shown on the plans or as directed, stockpile materials designated as
salvageable at designated sites.
4. Prepare stockpile area by removing vegetation and trash and by providing for
proper drainage.
F. Milling
1. General
a. Mill surfaces to the depth shown in the plans or as directed.
b. Do not damage or disfigure adjacent work or existing surface improvements.
c. If milling exposes smooth underlying pavement surfaces, mill the smooth
surface to make rough.
d. Provide safe temporary transition where vehicles or pedestrians must pass over
the milled edges.
e. Remove excess material and clean milled surfaces.
f. Stockpiling of planed material will not be permitted within the right of way
unless approved by the City.
g. If the existing base is brick and cannot be milled, remove a 5 foot width of the
existing brick base. See 3.3.G. for brick paving removal.
2. Milling Equipment
a. Power operated milling machine capable of removing, in one pass or two
passes, the necessary pavement thickness in a five-foot minimum width.
b. Self-propelled with sufficient power, traction and stability to maintain accurate
depth of cut and slope.
c. Equipped with an integral loading and reclaiming means to immediately
remove material cut from the surface of the roadway and discharge the cuttings
into a truck, all in one operation.
d. Equipped with means to control dust created by the cutting action.
e. Equipped with a manual system providing for uniformly varying the depth of
cut while the machine is in motion making it possible to cut flush to all inlets,
manholes, or other obstructions within the paved area.
f. Variable Speed in order to leave the specified grid pattern.
g. Equipped to minimize air pollution.
3. Wedge Milling and Surface Milling
a. Wedge Mill existing asphalt, concrete or brick pavement from the lip of gutter
at a depth of 2 inches and transitioning to match the existing pavement (0-inch
cut) at a minimum width of 5 feet.
b. Surface Mill existing asphalt pavement to the depth specified,
c. Provide a milled surface that provides a uniform surface free from gouges,
ridges, oil film, and other imperfections of workmanship with a uniform
textured appearance.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 15 - 5
PAVING REMOVAL
Page 5 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 2, 2016
d. In all situations where the existing H.M.A.C. surface contacts the curb face, the
wedge milling includes the removal of the existing asphalt covering the gutter
up to and along the face of curb.
e. Perform wedge or surface milling operation in a continuous manner along both
sides of the street or as directed.
4. Butt Joint Milling
a. Mill butt joints into the existing surface, in association with the wedge milling
operation.
b. Butt joint will provide a full width transition section and a constant depth at the
point where the new overlay is terminated.
c. Typical locations for butt joints are at all beginning and ending points of streets
where paving material is removed. Prior to the milling of the butt joints,
consult with the City for proper location and limits of these joints.
d. Butt Milled joints are required on both sides of all railroad tracks and concrete
valley gutters, bridge decks and culverts and all other items which transverse
the street and end the continuity of the asphalt surface.
e. Make each butt joint 20 feet long and milled out across the full width of the
street section to a tapered depth of 2 inch.
f. Taper the milled area within the 20-feet to a depth from 0-inch to 2-inch at a
line adjacent to the beginning and ending points or intermediate transverse
items.
g. Provide a temporary wedge of asphalt at all butt joints to provide a smooth ride
over the bump.
G. Remove Brick Paving
1. Remove masonry paving units to the limits specified in the plans or as directed by
the City.
2. Salvage existing bricks for re-use, clean, palletize, and deliver to the City Stock pile
yard at 3300 Yuma Street or as directed.
H. Pavement Pulverization
1. Pulverization
a. Pulverize the existing pavement to depth of 8 inches. See Section 32 11 33.
b. Temporarily remove and store the 8-inch deep pulverized material, then cut the
base 2 inches.
c. Start 2-inch base cut at a depth of 8 inches from the existing pulverized surface.
2. Cement Application
a. Use 3.5% Portland cement.
b. See Section 32 11 33.
3. Mixing: see Section 32 11 33.
4. Compaction: see Section 32 11 33.
5. Finishing: see Section 32 11 33.
6. Curing: see Section 32 11 33.
7. If the existing pavement has a combination of 10 inches of H.M.A.C. and crushed
stone/gravel:
a. Undercut not required
b. Pulverize 10 inches deep.
c. Remove 2-inch the total pulverized amount.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
02 41 15 - 6
PAVING REMOVAL
Page 6 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 2, 2016
I. Remove speed cushion
1. Scrape or sawcut speed cushion from existing pavement without damaging existing
pavement.
3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 1.2.A – modified payment requirements on utility projects
2/2/2016 F. Griffin 1.2.A.2.b. – Removed duplicate last sentence.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 1
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 1 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design, placement procedures and finishes, for the following:
a. Piers
b. Footings
c. Slabs-on-grade
d. Foundation walls
e. Retaining walls (non TxDOT)
f. Suspended slabs
g. Blocking
h. Cast-in-place manholes
i. Concrete vaults for meters and valves
j. Concrete encasement of utility lines
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Cast-in-Place Concrete
1. Measurement
a. This Item is considered subsidiary to the structure or Items being placed.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item
are subsidiary to the structure or Items being placed and no other compensation
will be allowed.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Definitions
1. Cementitious Materials
a. Portland cement alone or in combination with 1 or more of the following:
1) Blended hydraulic cement
2) Fly ash
3) Other pozzolans
4) Ground granulated blast-furnace slag
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 2
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 2 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
5) Silica fume
b. Subject to compliance with the requirements of this specification
B. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation (AASHTO):
a. M182, Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf.
3. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. ACI 117 Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
b. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete
c. ACI 305.1 Specification for Hot Weather Concreting
d. ACI 306.1 Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting
e. ACI 308.1 Standard Specification for Curing Concrete
f. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
g. ACI 347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete
4. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
a. 303, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
5. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
c. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
Materials for High-Temperature Service and Other Special Purpose
Applications.
d. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
e. A706, Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
f. C31, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field.
g. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
h. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
i. C42, Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
Beams of Concrete.
j. C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
k. C109, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (Using 2-inch or {50-milimeter] Cube Specimens)
l. C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.
m. C171, Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
n. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
o. C172, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
p. C219, Standard Terminology Relating to Hydraulic Cement.
q. C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 3
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 3 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
r. C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
s. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete.
t. C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
u. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.
v. C881, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete.
w. C989, Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for
Use in Concrete and Mortars.
x. C1017, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing
Flowing Concrete.
y. C1059, Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened
Concrete.
z. C1064, Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-
Cement Concrete.
aa. C1240, Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures.
bb. E1155, Standard Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor
Levelness Numbers.
cc. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.
6. American Welding Society (AWS).
a. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
b. D1.4, Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.
7. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)
a. Manual of Standard Practice
8. Texas Department of Transportation
a. Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets
and Bridges
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Work Included
1. Design, fabrication, erection and stripping of formwork for cast-in-place concrete
including shoring, reshoring, falsework, bracing, proprietary forming systems,
prefabricated forms, void forms, permanent metal forms, bulkheads, keys,
blockouts, sleeves, pockets and accessories.
a. Erection shall include installation in formwork of items furnished by other
trades.
2. Furnish all labor and materials required to fabricate, deliver and install
reinforcement and embedded metal assemblies for cast-in-place concrete, including
steel bars, welded steel wire fabric, ties, supports and sleeves.
3. Furnish all labor and materials required to perform the following:
a. Cast-in-place concrete
b. Concrete mix designs
c. Grouting
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 4
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 4 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for
specials.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Required for each type of product indicated
B. Design Mixtures
1. For each concrete mixture submit proposed mix designs in accordance with ACI
318, chapter 5.
2. Submit each proposed mix design with a record of past performance.
3. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project condi-
tions, weather, test results or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
4. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
a. Include this quantity on delivery ticket.
C. Steel Reinforcement Submittals for Information
1. Mill test certificates of supplied concrete reinforcing, indicating physical and chem-
ical analysis.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications
1. A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that com-
plies with ASTM C94 requirements for production facilities and equipment
2. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed
Concrete Production Facilities”
B. Source Limitations
1. Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same
manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from 1 source and obtain admixtures through
1 source from a single manufacturer.
C. ACI Publications
1. Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Docu-
ments:
a. ACI 301 Sections 1 through 5
b. ACI 117
D. Concrete Testing Service
1. Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 5
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 5 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Steel Reinforcement
1. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
2. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.
B. Waterstops
1. Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil and other
contaminants.
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED OR OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products
specified.
b. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
B. Form-Facing Materials
1. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete
a. Plywood, lumber, metal or another approved material
b. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and 1 side for tight fit.
2. Chamfer Strips
a. Wood, metal, PVC or rubber strips
b. ¾-inch x ¾-inch, minimum
3. Rustication Strips
a. Wood, metal, PVC or rubber strips
b. Kerfed for ease of form removal
4. Form-Release Agent
a. Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain or
adversely affect concrete surfaces
b. Shall not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces
c. For steel form-facing materials, formulate with rust inhibitor.
5. Form Ties
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 6
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 6 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a. Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced
plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms
and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.
b. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane
of exposed concrete surface.
c. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in
diameter in concrete surface.
d. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive
dampproofing or waterproofing.
C. Steel Reinforcement
1. Reinforcing Bars
a. ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed
D. Reinforcement Accessories
1. Smooth Dowel Bars
a. ASTM A615, Grade 60, steel bars (smooth)
b. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.
2. Bar Supports
a. Bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place
b. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic or precast concrete according
to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than
concrete and as follows:
1) For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports
contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI
Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
2) For slabs-on-grade, provide sand plates, horizontal runners or precast
concrete blocks on bottom where base material will not support chair legs
or where vapor barrier has been specified.
E. Embedded Metal Assemblies
1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36
2. Headed Studs: Heads welded by full-fusion process, as furnished by TRW Nelson
Stud Welding Division or approved equal
F. Expansion Anchors
1. Available Products
a. Wej-it Bolt, Wej-it Corporation, Tulsa, Oklahoma
b. Kwik Bolt II, Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, Oklahoma
c. Trubolt, Ramset Fastening Systems, Paris, Kentucky
G. Adhesive Anchors and Dowels
1. Adhesive anchors shall consist of threaded rods anchored with an adhesive system
into hardened concrete or grout-filled masonry.
a. The adhesive system shall use a 2-component adhesive mix and shall be
injected with a static mixing nozzle following manufacturer’s instructions.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 7
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 7 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b. The embedment depth of the rod shall provide a minimum allowable bond
strength that is equal to the allowable yield capacity of the rod, unless otherwise
specified.
2. Available Products
a. Hilti HIT HY 150 Max
b. Simpson Acrylic-Tie
c. Powers Fasteners AC 100+ Gold
3. Threaded Rods: ASTM A193
a. Nuts: ASTM A563 hex carbon steel
b. Washers: ASTM F436 hardened carbon steel
c. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A153, Class C
H. Inserts
1. Provide metal inserts required for anchorage of materials or equipment to concrete
construction where not supplied by other trades:
a. In vertical concrete surfaces for transfer of direct shear loads only, provide
adjustable wedge inserts of malleable cast iron complete with bolts, nuts and
washers.
1) Provide ¾-inch bolt size, unless otherwise indicated.
b. In horizontal concrete surfaces and whenever inserts are subject to tension
forces, provide threaded inserts of malleable cast iron furnished with full depth
bolts.
1) Provide ¾-inch bolt size, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Concrete Materials
1. Cementitious Material
a. Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source,
throughout Project:
1) Portland Cement
a) ASTM C150, Type I/II, gray
b) Supplement with the following:
(1) Fly Ash
(a) ASTM C618, Class C or F
(2) Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag
(a) ASTM C989, Grade 100 or 120.
2) Silica Fume
a) ASTM C1240, amorphous silica
3) Normal-Weight Aggregates
a) ASTM C33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded
b) Provide aggregates from a single source.
4) Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size
a) ¾-inch nominal
5) Fine Aggregate
a) Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement
6) Water
a) ASTM C94 and potable
J. Admixtures
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 8
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 8 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Air-Entraining Admixture
a. ASTM C260
2. Chemical Admixtures
a. Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other ad-
mixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding
those permitted in hardened concrete.
b. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
c. Water-Reducing Admixture
1) ASTM C494, Type A
d. Retarding Admixture
1) ASTM C494, Type B
e. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture
1) ASTM C494, Type D
f. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture
1) ASTM C494, Type F
g. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture
1) ASTM C494, Type G
h. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture
1) ASTM C1017, Type II
K. Waterstops
1. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops
a. Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium
bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, ¾-
inch x 1-inch.
b. Available Products
1) Colloid Environmental Technologies Company; Volclay Waterstop-RX
2) Concrete Sealants Inc.; Conseal CS-231
3) Greenstreak; Swellstop
4) Henry Company, Sealants Division; Hydro-Flex
5) JP Specialties, Inc.; Earthshield Type 20
6) Progress Unlimited, Inc.; Superstop
7) TCMiraDRI; Mirastop
L. Curing Materials
1. Absorptive Cover
a. AASHTO M182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 ounces/square yard when dry
2. Moisture-Retaining Cover
a. ASTM C171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet
3. Water
a. Potable
4. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound
a. ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating
b. Available Products
1) Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB
2) Burke by Edoco; Aqua Resin Cure
3) ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 9
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 9 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
4) Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior
Company; W.B. Resin Cure
5) Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W)
6) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez DR VOX
7) Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420
8) Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure-Clear
9) L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R
10) Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear
11) Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Resin Cure E
12) Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Resi-Chem Clear Cure
13) Tamms Industries, Inc.; Horncure WB 30
14) Unitex; Hydro Cure 309
15) US Mix Products Company; US Spec Maxcure Resin Clear
16) Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100
M. Related Materials
1. Bonding Agent
a. ASTM C1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene
2. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive
a. ASTM C881, 2-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding
to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to
suit requirements, and as follows:
1) Types I and II, non-load bearing
2) IV and V, load bearing, for bonding
3) Hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete
3. Reglets
a. Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch thick, galvanized steel sheet
b. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete
or debris.
4. Sleeves and Blockouts
a. Formed with galvanized metal, galvanized pipe, polyvinyl chloride pipe, fiber
tubes or wood
5. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages
a. Sized as required
b. Shall be of strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing
concrete
N. Repair Materials
1. Repair Underlayment
a. Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in
thicknesses of 1/8 inch or greater
1) Do not feather.
b. Cement Binder
1) ASTM C150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as
defined in ASTM C219
c. Primer
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 10
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 10 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, condi-
tions, and application
d. Aggregate
1) Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer
e. Compressive Strength
1) Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C109/C109M
2. Repair Overlayment
a. Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in
thicknesses of 1/8 inch or greater
1) Do not feather.
b. Cement Binder
1) ASTM C150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as
defined in ASTM C219
c. Primer
1) Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application
d. Aggregate
1) Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommend-
ed by topping manufacturer
e. Compressive Strength
1) Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C109
O. Concrete Mixtures, General
1. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the
basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
a. Required average strength above specified strength
1) Based on a record of past performance
a) Determination of required average strength above specified strength
shall be based on the standard deviation record of the results of at least
30 consecutive strength tests in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5.3
by the larger amount defined by formulas 5-1 and 5-2.
2) Based on laboratory trial mixtures
a) Proportions shall be selected on the basis of laboratory trial batches
prepared in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5.3.3.2 to produce an
average strength greater than the specified strength f'c by the amount
defined in table 5.3.2.2.
3) Proportions of ingredients for concrete mixes shall be determined by an in-
dependent testing laboratory or qualified concrete supplier.
4) For each proposed mixture, at least 3 compressive test cylinders shall be
made and tested for strength at the specified age.
a) Additional cylinders may be made for testing for information at earlier
ages.
2. Cementitious Materials
a. Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland ce-
ment in concrete as follows, unless specified otherwise:
1) Fly Ash: 25 percent
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 11
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 11 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2) Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent
3) Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent
4) Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace
Slag: 50 percent
5) Portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 per-
cent
6) Silica Fume: 10 percent
7) Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or
pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 per-
cent
8) Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag,
and Silica Fume: 50 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25
percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent
3. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to:
a. 0.30 percent by weight of cement if concrete will have no exposure to chlorides
(typical)
b. 0.15 percent by weight if concrete will be exposed to chlorides
c. 1.0 percent by weight if concrete will have no exposure to chlorides and will be
continually dry and protected.
4. Admixtures
a. Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
b. Do not use admixtures which have not been incorporated and tested in accepted
mixes.
c. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in
concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
d. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high
temperatures, low humidity or other adverse placement conditions.
e. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use
industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight,
and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
f. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.
P. Concrete Mixtures
1. Refer to TxDOT “Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of
Highways, Streets, and Bridges” for:
a. Culverts
b. Headwalls
c. Wingwalls
2. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
a. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3,000 psi at 28 days
b. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50
c. Slump Limit: 5 inches or 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4
inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing
admixture, plus or minus 1 inch
d. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-
inch nominal maximum aggregate size
Q. Fabricating Reinforcement
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 12
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 12 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
R. Fabrication of Embedded Metal Assemblies
1. Fabricate metal assemblies in the shop. Holes shall be made by drilling or
punching. Holes shall not be made by or enlarged by burning. Welding shall be in
accordance with AWS D1.1.
2. Metal assemblies exposed to earth, weather or moisture shall be hot dip galvanized.
All other metal assemblies shall be either hot dip galvanized or painted with an
epoxy paint. Repair galvanizing after welding with a Cold Galvanizing compound
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Repair painted
assemblies after welding with same type of paint.
S. Concrete Mixing
1. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C94, and furnish batch ticket information.
a. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit, reduce mixing
and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is
above 90 degrees Fahrenheit, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
2. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete
according to ASTM C94/C94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type
batch machine mixer.
a. For mixer capacity of 1 cubic yard or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2
minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any
part of batch is released.
b. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cubic yard, increase mixing time by 15
seconds for each additional 1 cubic yard.
c. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating
Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time,
quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final
deposit in structure.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Formwork
1. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to
support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might
be applied, until structure can support such loads.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 13
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 13 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape,
alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
a. Vertical alignment
1) Lines, surfaces and arises less than 100 feet in height - 1 inch.
2) Outside corner of exposed corner columns and control joints in concrete
exposed to view less than 100 feet in height - 1/2 inch.
3) Lines, surfaces and arises greater than 100 feet in height - 1/1000 times the
height but not more than 6 inches.
4) Outside corner of exposed corner columns and control joints in concrete
exposed to view greater than 100 feet in height - 1/2000 times the height
but not more than 3 inches.
b. Lateral alignment
1) Members - 1 inch.
2) Centerline of openings 12 inches or smaller and edge location of larger
openings in slabs - 1/2 inch.
3) Sawcuts, joints, and weakened plane embedments in slabs - 3/4 inch.
c. Level alignment
1) Elevation of slabs-on-grade - 3/4 inch.
2) Elevation of top surfaces of formed slabs before removal of shores - 3/4
inch.
3) Elevation of formed surfaces before removal of shores - 3/4 inch.
d. Cross-sectional dimensions: Overall dimensions of beams, joists, and columns
and thickness of walls and slabs.
1) 12 inch dimension or less - plus 1/2 inch to minus 1/4 inch.
2) Greater than 12 inch to 3 foot dimension - plus 1/2 inch to minus 3/8 inch.
3) Greater than 3 foot dimension - plus 1 inch to minus 3/4 inch.
e. Relative alignment
1) Stairs
a) Difference in height between adjacent risers - 1/8 inch.
b) Difference in width between adjacent treads - 1/4 inch.
c) Maximum difference in height between risers in a flight of stairs - 3/8
inch.
d) Maximum difference in width between treads in a flight of stairs - 3/8
inch.
2) Grooves
a) Specified width 2 inches or less - 1/8 inch.
b) Specified width between 2 inches and 12 inches - 1/4 inch.
3) Vertical alignment of outside corner of exposed corner columns and control
joint grooves in concrete exposed to view - 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
4) All other conditions - 3/8 inch in 10 feet.
3. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual,
as follows:
a. Class B, 1/4 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
b. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.
4. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 14
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 14 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
5. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete
surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast
concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5
horizontal to 1 vertical.
a. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
b. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
6. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve
required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure
units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
7. Construct formwork to cambers shown or specified on the Drawings to allow for
structural deflection of the hardened concrete. Provide additional elevation or
camber in formwork as required for anticipated formwork deflections due to weight
and pressures of concrete and construction loads.
8. Foundation Elements: Form the sides of all below grade portions of beams, pier
caps, walls, and columns straight and to the lines and grades specified. Do no earth
form foundation elements unless specifically indicated on the Drawings.
9. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area
of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and
securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in
forms at inconspicuous locations.
10. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
11. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and
bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades
providing such items.
12. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood,
sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
13. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar
leaks and maintain proper alignment.
14. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's
written instructions, before placing reinforcement, anchoring devices, and
embedded items.
a. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are scheduled to
receive subsequent finishes which may be affected by agent. Soak contact
surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces wet prior to
placing concrete.
B. Embedded Items
1. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
a. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying
with tolerances in AISC 303, Section 7.5.
1) Spacing within a bolt group: 1/8 inch
2) Location of bolt group (center): ½ inch
3) Rotation of bolt group: 5 degrees
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 15
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 15 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
4) Angle off vertical: 5 degrees
5) Bolt projection: ± 3/8 inch
b. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in
outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels,
shelf angles, and other conditions.
C. Removing and Reusing Forms
1. Do not backfill prior to concrete attaining 70 percent of its 28-day design
compressive strength.
2. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the
Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively
curing at not less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit for 24 hours after placing concrete, if
concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing
and protection operations are maintained.
a. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements
that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70
percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.
b. Do not remove formwork supporting conventionally reinforced concrete until
concrete has attained 70 percent of its specified 28 day compressive strength as
established by tests of field cured cylinders. In the absence of cylinder tests,
supporting formwork shall remain in place until the concrete has cured at a
temperature of at least 50 degrees Fahrenheit for the minimum cumulative time
periods given in ACI 347, Section 3.7.2.3. Add the period of time when the
surrounding air temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit, to the minimum
listed time period. Formwork for 2-way conventionally reinforced slabs shall
remain in place for at least the minimum cumulative time periods specified for
1-way slabs of the same maximum span.
c. Immediately reshore 2-way conventionally reinforced slabs after formwork
removal. Reshores shall remain until the concrete has attained the specified 28
day compressive strength.
d. Minimum cumulative curing times may be reduced by the use of high-early
strength cement or forming systems which allow form removal without
disturbing shores, but only after the Contractor has demonstrated to the
satisfaction of the Engineer that the early removal of forms will not cause
excessive sag, distortion or damage to the concrete elements.
e. Completely remove wood forms. Provide temporary openings if required.
f. Provide adequate methods of curing and thermal protection of exposed concrete
if forms are removed prior to completion of specified curing time.
g. Reshore areas required to support construction loads in excess of 20 pounds per
square foot to properly distribute construction loading. Construction loads up
to the rated live load capacity may be placed on unshored construction provided
the concrete has attained the specified 28 day compressive strength.
h. Obtaining concrete compressive strength tests for the purposes of form removal
is the responsibility of the Contractor.
i. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms
without loosening or disturbing shores.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 16
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 16 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed,
delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for
exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.
4. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to
close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for
exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Engineer.
D. Shores and Reshores
1. The Contractor is solely responsible for proper shoring and reshoring.
2. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring
and reshoring.
a. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is
complete.
3. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete.
Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive
stress or deflection.
E. Steel Reinforcement
1. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing
reinforcement.
a. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder
before placing concrete.
2. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign
materials that would reduce bond to concrete.
3. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.
Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete
cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
a. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated. Only steel
conforming to ASTM A706 may be welded.
4. Installation tolerances
a. Top and bottom bars in slabs, girders, beams and joists:
1) Members 8 inches deep or less: ±3/8 inch
2) Members more than 8 inches deep: ±1/2 inch
b. Concrete Cover to Formed or Finished Surfaces: ±3/8 inches for members 8
inches deep or less; ±1/2 inches for members over 8 inches deep, except that
tolerance for cover shall not exceed 1/3 of the specified cover.
5. Concrete Cover
a. Reinforcing in structural elements deposited against the ground: 3 inches
b. Reinforcing in formed beams, columns and girders: 1-1/2 inches
c. Grade beams and exterior face of formed walls and columns exposed to
weather or in contact with the ground: 2 inches
d. Interior faces of walls: 1 inches
e. Slabs: 3/4 inches
6. Splices: Provide standard reinforcement splices by lapping and tying ends. Comply
with ACI 318 for minimum lap of spliced bars where not specified on the
documents. Do not lap splice no. 14 and 18 bars.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 17
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 17 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
7. Field Welding of Embedded Metal Assemblies
a. Remove all paint and galvanizing in areas to receive field welds.
b. Field Prepare all areas where paint or galvanizing has been removed with the
specified paint or cold galvanizing compound, respectively.
F. Joints
1. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
concrete.
2. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not
impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
a. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement
across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue
reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
b. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
c. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans.
Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width fr om a
beam-girder intersection.
d. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs,
beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
e. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral
with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
f. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
3. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where
indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat 1-1/2 of dowel length to prevent concrete
bonding to 1 side of joint.
G. Waterstops
1. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to
form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and
protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in
waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other
locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive
bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest
lengths practicable.
H. Adhesive Anchors
1. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions on the hole diameter and
depth required to fully develop the tensile strength of the adhesive anchor or
reinforcing bar.
2. Properly clean out the hole utilizing a wire brush and compressed air to remove all
loose material from the hole, prior to installing adhesive material.
I. Concrete Placement
1. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and
embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 18
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 18 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement
unless approved by Engineer.
3. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site,
subject to limitations of ACI 301.
a. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing
admixtures to mixture.
b. Do not exceed the maximum specified water/cement ratio for the mix.
4. Deposit concrete continuously in 1 layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness
that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause
seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide
construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
a. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design
pressures, 15 feet maximum and in a manner to avoid inclined construction
joints.
b. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to
ACI 301.
c. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed
layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into
lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion,
limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and
complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without
causing mixture constituents to segregate.
d. Do not permit concrete to drop freely any distance greater than 10 feet for
concrete containing a high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer) or
5 feet for other concrete. Provide chute or tremie to place concrete where longer
drops are necessary. Do not place concrete into excavations with standing
water. If place of deposit cannot be pumped dry, pour concrete through a tremie
with its outlet near the bottom of the place of deposit.
e. Discard pump priming grout and do not use in the structure.
5. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation,
within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is
complete.
a. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly
worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
b. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
c. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
d. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
e. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-
textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not
further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
6. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect
concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by
frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
a. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40
degrees Fahrenheit for 3 successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture
temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 19
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 19 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
c. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze
agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in
mixture designs.
7. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 305.1 and as follows:
a. Maintain concrete temperature below 95 degrees Fahrenheit at time of
placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control
temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of
mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
b. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing
concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or
dry areas.
J. Finishing Formed Surfaces
1. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material
with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections
that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
a. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
2. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar
unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a
texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of
formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated.
K. Miscellaneous Concrete Items
1. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise
indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as
specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous
concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.
2. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while
concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with
corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
3. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and
foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment
at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer
furnishing machines and equipment.
a. Housekeeping pads: Normal weight concrete (3000 psi), reinforced with
#3@16 inches on center set at middepth of pad. Trowel concrete to a dense,
smooth finish. Set anchor bolts for securing mechanical or electrical equipment
during pouring of concrete fill.
4. Protective slabs ("Mud slabs"): Normal weight concrete (2500 psi minimum) with a
minimum thickness of 3-1/2 inches. Finish slab to a wood float finish.
L. Concrete Protecting and Curing
1. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold
or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and
ACI 305.1 for hot-weather protection during curing.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 20
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 20 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams,
supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period,
moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period,
continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.
3. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure
unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other
surfaces.
4. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by 1 or a combination of the following
methods:
a. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days
with the following materials:
1) Water
2) Continuous water-fog spray
3) Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover
concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive
covers
b. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-
retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with
sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or
adhesive. Cure for not less than 7 days. Immediately repair any holes or tears
during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
1) Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to
receive floor coverings.
2) Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to
receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.
3) Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-
retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will
not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.
c. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray
or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas
subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain
continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.5 REPAIR
A. Concrete Surface Repairs
1. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer.
Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer’s
approval.
2. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland
cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough
water for handling and placing.
3. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture
irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other
projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be
removed by cleaning.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 21
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 21 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a. Immediately after form removal, cut-out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids
more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch
in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen
with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and
compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie
voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
b. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement
and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match
surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify
mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in
place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
c. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability
and structural performance as determined by Engineer.
4. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs,
for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and
high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use
a sloped template.
a. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, pop
outs, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide
or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections
regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.
b. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
c. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface
finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching
mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
d. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective
areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-
inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching
concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials
and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place,
compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same
manner as adjacent concrete.
e. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off
dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply
bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.
Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched
area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
5. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer’s approval, using epoxy
adhesive and patching mortar.
6. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to
Engineer’s approval.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 22
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 22 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: City will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and
inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Inspections
1. Steel reinforcement placement
2. Headed bolts and studs
3. Verification of use of required design mixture
4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing
5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature
6. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams
and slabs
C. Concrete Tests: Perform testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained
according to ASTM C172 according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain 1 composite sample for each day's pour of each
concrete mixture exceeding 5 cubic yard, but less than 25 cubic yard, plus 1 set for
each additional 50 cubic yard or fraction thereof.
2. Slump: ASTM C143; 1 test at point of placement for each composite sample, but
not less than 1 test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional
tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; 1 test for
each composite sample, but not less than 1 test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064; 1 test hourly when air temperature is 40
degrees Fahrenheit and below and when 80 degrees Fahrenheit and above, and 1
test for each composite sample.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31.
a. Cast and laboratory cure 4 cylinders for each composite sample.
1) Do not transport field cast cylinders until they have cured for a
minimum of 24 hours.
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39;
a. Test 1 cylinder at 7 days.
b. Test 2 cylinders at 28 days.
c. Hold 1 cylinder for testing at 56 days as needed.
7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion
laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any 3
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive
strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 500 psi.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 23
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 23 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
9. Report test results in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor
within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of
concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design
compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials,
compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of
concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive
strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer.
Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete
by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42 or by other methods as directed by
Engineer.
a. When the strength level of the concrete for any portion of the structure, as
indicated by cylinder tests, falls below the specified requirements, provide
improved curing conditions and/or adjustments to the mix design as required to
obtain the required strength. If the average strength of the laboratory control
cylinders falls so low as to be deemed unacceptable, follow the core test
procedure set forth in ACI 301, Chapter 17. Locations of core tests shall be
approved by the Engineer. Core sampling and testing shall be at Contractors
expense.
b. If the results of the core tests indicate that the strength of the structure is
inadequate, any replacement, load testing, or strengthening as may be ordered
by the Engineer shall be provided by the Contractor without cost to the City.
11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not
comply with the Contract Documents.
D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E1155 within 48
hours of finishing.
E. Concrete Finish Measurement and Tolerances
1. All floors are subject to measurement for flatness and levelness and comply with
the following:
a. Slabs shall be flat within a tolerance of 5/16 inches in 10 feet when tested with
a 10 foot long straightedge. Apply straightedge to the slab at 3 foot intervals in
both directions, lapping straightedge 3 feet on areas previously checked. Low
spots shall not exceed the above dimension anywhere along the straightedge.
Flatness shall be checked the next work day after finishing.
b. Slabs shall be level within a tolerance of ± 1/4 inch in 10 feet, not to exceed 3/4
inches total variation, anywhere on the floor, from elevations indicated on the
Drawings. Levelness shall be checked on a 10 foot grid using a level after
removal of forms.
c. Measurement Standard: All floors are subject to measurement for flatness and
levelness, according to ASTM E1155.
2. 2 Tiered Measurement Standard
a. Each floor test section and the overall floor area shall conform to the 2-tiered
measurement standard as specified herein.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 24
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 24 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) Minimum Local Value: The minimum local FF/FL values represent the ab-
solute minimum surface profile that will be acceptable for any 1 test sample
(line of measurements) anywhere within the test area.
2) Specified Overall Value: The specified overall FF/FL values represent the
minimum values acceptable for individual floor sections as well as the floor
as a whole.
3. Floor Test Sections
a. A floor test section is defined as the smaller of the following areas:
1) The area bounded by column and/or wall lines
2) The area bounded by construction and/or control joint lines
3) Any combination of column lines and/or control joint lines
b. Test sample measurement lines within each test section shall be
multidirectional along 2 orthogonal lines, as defined by ASTM E1155, at a
spacing to be determined by the City's testing agency.
c. The precise layout of each test section shall be determined by the City's testing
agency.
4. Concrete Floor Finish Tolerance
a. The following values apply before removal of shores. Levelness values (FL) do
not apply to intentionally sloped or cambered areas, nor to slabs poured on
metal deck or precast concrete.
1) Slabs
Overall Value FF45/FL30
Minimum Local Value FF30/FL20
5. Floor Elevation Tolerance Envelope
a. The acceptable tolerance envelope for absolute elevation of any point on the
slab surface, with respect to the elevation shown on the Drawings, is as follows:
1) Slab-on-Grade Construction: ± ¾ inch
2) Top surfaces of formed slabs measured prior to removal of supporting
shores: ± ¾ inch
3) Top surfaces of all other slabs: ± ¾ inch
4) Slabs specified to slope shall have a tolerance from the specified slope of
3/8 inch in 10 feet at any point, up to ¾ inch from theoretical elevation at
any point.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING
A. Defective Work
1. Imperfect or damaged work or any material damaged or determined to be defective
before final completion and acceptance of the entire job shall be satisfactorily re-
placed at the Contractor's expense, and in conformity with all of the requirements of
the Drawings and Specifications.
2. Perform removal and replacement of concrete work in such manner as not to impair
the appearance or strength of the structure in any way.
B. Cleaning
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 30 00 - 25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 25 of 25
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Upon completion of the work remove from the site all forms, equipment, protective
coverings and any rubbish resulting therefrom.
2. After sweeping floors, wash floors with clean water.
3. Leave finished concrete surfaces in a clean condition, satisfactory to the City.
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson
2.2.O.3 – Removed Blue Text/Added Descriptions for water-soluble,
chloride-ion content
3.4.C.1 – Changed 75% to 70%
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 34 13 - 1
CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)
Page 1 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 03 34 13
CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Controlled low strength material (CLSM) for use in the following:
a. Flowable backfill
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. This Item is considered subsidiary to the structure or Items being placed.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item
are subsidiary to the structure or Items being placed and no other compensation
will be allowed.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field.
2. C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
3. C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
4. C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
5. C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method.
6. C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 34 13 - 2
CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)
Page 2 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
7. C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for
specials.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product data
B. Sieve analysis
1. Submit sieve analyses of fine and coarse aggregates being used.
a. Resubmit at any time there is a significant change in grading of materials.
2. Mix
a. Submit full details, including mix design calculations for mix proposed for use.
C. Trial batch test data
1. Submit data for each test cylinder.
2. Submit data that identifies mix and slump for each test cylinder.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED OR OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS
A. Materials
1. Portland cement: Type II low alkali portland cement as specified in Section 03 30
00.
2. Fly ash: Class F fly ash in accordance with ASTM C618.
3. Water: As specified in Section 03 30 00.
4. Admixture: Air entraining admixture in accordance with ASTM C260.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 34 13 - 3
CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)
Page 3 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
5. Fine aggregate: Concrete sand (does not need to be in accordance with
ASTM C33). No more than 12 percent of fine aggregate shall pass a No. 200 sieve,
and no plastic fines shall be present.
6. Coarse aggregate: Pea gravel no larger than 3/8 inch.
B. Mixes
1. Performance requirements
a. Total calculated air content
1) Not less than 8.0 percent or greater than 12.0 percent.
b. Minimum unconfined compressive strength
1) Not less than 50 psi measured at 28 days.
c. Maximum unconfined compressive strength
1) Not greater than 150 psi measured at 28 days.
2) Limit the long-term strength (90 days) to 200 psi such that material could
be re-excavated with conventional excavation equipment in the future if
necessary.
d. Wet density
1) No greater than 132 pounds per cubic foot.
e. Color
1) No coloration required unless noted.
2) Submit dye or other coloration means for approval.
2. Suggested design mix
Material Weight Specific Gravity
Absolute Volume
Cubic Foot
Cement 30 pounds 3.15 0.15
Fly Ash 300 pounds 2.30 2.09
Water 283 pounds 1.00 4.54
Coarse Aggregate 1,465 pounds 2.68 8.76
Fine Aggregate 1,465 pounds 2.68 8.76
Admixture 4-6 ounces - 2.70
TOTAL 3,543 pounds - 27.00
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Trial batch
1. After mix design has been accepted by Engineer, have trial batch of the accepted
mix design prepared by testing laboratory acceptable to Engineer.
2. Prepare trial batches using specified cementitious materials and aggregates
proposed to be used for the Work.
3. Prepare trial batch with sufficient quantity to determine slump, workability,
consistency, and to provide sufficient test cylinders.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 34 13 - 4
CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)
Page 4 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
B. Test cylinders:
1. Prepare test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C31 with the following
exceptions:
a. Fill the concrete test cylinders to overflowing and tap sides lightly to settle the
mix.
b. Do not rod the concrete mix.
c. Strike off the excess material.
2. Place test cylinders in a moist curing room. Exercise caution in moving and
transporting the cylinders since they are fragile and will withstand only minimal
bumping, banging, or jolting without damage.
3. Do not remove the test cylinder from mold until the cylinder is to be capped and
tested.
4. The test cylinders may be capped with standard sulfur compound or neoprene pads:
a. Perform the capping carefully to prevent premature fractures.
b. Use neoprene pads a minimum of 1/2 inch thick, and 1/2 inch larger in diameter
than the test cylinders.
c. Do not perform initial compression test until the cylinders reach a minimum
age of 3 days.
C. Compression test 8 test cylinders: Test 4 test cylinders at 3 days and 4 at 28 days in
accordance with ASTM C39 except as modified herein:
1. The compression strength of the 4 test cylinders tested at 28 days shall be equal to
or greater than the minimum required compression strength, but not exceed
maximum compression strength.
D. If the trial batch tests do not meet the Specifications for strength or density, revise and
resubmit the mix design, and prepare additional trial batch and tests. Repeat until an
acceptable trial batch is produced that meets the Specifications.
1. All the trial batches and acceptability of materials shall be paid by the
CONTRACTOR.
2. After acceptance, do not change the mix design without submitting a new mix
design, trial batches, and test information.
E. Determine slump in accordance with ASTM C143 with the following exceptions:
1. Do not rod the concrete material.
2. Place material in slump cone in 1 semi-continuous filling operation, slightly
overfill, tap lightly, strike off, and then measure and record slump.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 34 13 - 5
CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)
Page 5 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Place CLSM by any method which preserves the quality of the material in terms of
compressive strength and density:
1. Limit lift heights of CLSM placed against structures and other facilities that could
be damaged due to the pressure from the CLSM, to the lesser of 4 feet or the lift
height indicated on the Drawings. Do not place another lift of CLSM until the last
lift of CLSM has set and gained sufficient strength to prevent lateral load due to the
weight of the next lift of CLSM.
2. The basic requirement for placement equipment and placement methods is the
maintenance of its fluid properties.
3. Transport and place material so that it flows easily around, beneath, or through
walls, pipes, conduits, or other structures.
4. Use a slump of the placed material greater than 9 inches, and sufficient to allow the
material to flow freely during placement:
a. After trial batch testing and acceptance, maintain slump developed during
testing during construction at all times within ± 1 inch.
5. Use a slump, consistency, workability, flow characteristics, and pumpability (where
required) such that when placed, the material is self-compacting, self-densifying,
and has sufficient plasticity that compaction or mechanical vibration is not required.
6. When using as embedment for pipe take appropriate measures to ensure line and
grade of pipe.
3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General
1. Make provisions for and furnish all material for the test specimens, and provide
manual assistance to assist the Engineer in preparing said specimens.
2. Be responsible for the care of and providing curing condition for the test specimens.
B. Tests by the City
1. During the progress of construction, the City will have tests made to determine
whether the CLSM, as being produced, complies with the requirements specified
hereinbefore. Test cylinders will be made and delivered to the laboratory by the
Engineer and the testing expense will be borne by the City.
2. Test cylinders
a. Prepare test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C31 with the following
exceptions:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 34 13 - 6
CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)
Page 6 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) Fill the concrete test cylinders to overflowing and tap sides lightly to settle
the mix.
2) Do not rod the concrete mix.
3) Strike off the excess material.
b. Place the cylinders in a safe location away from the construction activities.
Keep the cylinders moist by covering with wet burlap, or equivalent. Do not
sprinkle water directly on the cylinders.
c. After 2 days, place the cylinders in a protective container for transport to the
laboratory for testing. The concrete test cylinders are fragile and shall be
handled carefully. The container may be a box with a Styrofoam or similar
lining that will limit the jarring and bumping of the cylinders.
d. Place test cylinders in a moist curing room. Exercise caution in moving and
transporting the cylinders since they are fragile and will withstand only
minimal bumping, banging, or jolting without damage.
e. Do not remove the test cylinder from mold until the cylinder is to be capped
and tested.
f. The test cylinders may be capped with standard sulfur compound or neoprene
pads:
1) Perform the capping carefully to prevent premature fractures.
2) Use neoprene pads a minimum of 1/2 inch thick, and 1/2 inch larger in
diameter than the test cylinders.
3) Do not perform initial compression test until the cylinders reach a
minimum age of 3 days.
3. The number of cylinder specimens taken each day shall be determined by the
Inspector.
a. Test 1 cylinder at 3 days and 2 at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C39
except as modified herein.
b. The compression strength of the cylinders tested at 28 days shall be equal to or
greater than the minimum required compression strength, but not exceed
maximum compression strength.
4. The City will test the air content of the CLSM. Test will be made immediately after
discharge from the mixer in accordance with ASTM C231.
5. Test the slump of CLSM using a slump cone in accordance with ASTM C143 with
the following exceptions:
a. Do not rod the concrete material.
b. Place material in slump cone in 1 semi-continuous filling operation, slightly
overfill, tap lightly, strike off, and then measure and record slump.
6. If compressive strength of test cylinders does not meet requirements, make
corrections to the mix design to meet the requirements of this specification.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 34 13 - 7
CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)
Page 7 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 34 16 - 1
CONCRETE BASE MATERIAL FOR TRENCH REPAIR
Page 1 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 03 34 16
CONCRETE BASE MATERIAL FOR TRENCH REPAIR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Concrete base material for trench repair
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. This Item is considered subsidiary to the structure or Items being placed.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item
are subsidiary to the structure or Items being placed and no other compensation
will be allowed.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. C31, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field.
2. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
3. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
4. C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.
5. C172, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
6. C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method.
7. C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
8. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.
9. C1064, Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-
Cement Concrete.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 34 16 - 2
CONCRETE BASE MATERIAL FOR TRENCH REPAIR
Page 2 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for
specials.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Submit proposed mix design for Engineer’s review a minimum of 2 weeks prior to start
of low density concrete backfill work.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED OR OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS
A. Mix Design
1. Performance requirements
a. Concrete Base Material for Trench Repair
1) 28-day compressive strength of not less than 750 psi and not more than
1,200 psi.
B. Materials
1. Portland cement
a. Type II low alkali portland cement as specified in Section 03 30 00.
2. Fly ash
a. Class F fly ash in accordance with ASTM C618.
3. Water
a. As specified in Section 03 30 00.
4. Admixture
a. Air entraining admixture in accordance with ASTM C260.
5. Fine aggregate
a. Concrete sand (does not need to be in accordance with ASTM C33).
b. No more than 12 percent of fine aggregate shall pass a No. 200 sieve, and no
plastic fines shall be present.
6. Coarse aggregate
a. Pea gravel no larger than 3/8 inch.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 34 16 - 3
CONCRETE BASE MATERIAL FOR TRENCH REPAIR
Page 3 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Place concrete base material by any method which preserves the quality of the material
in terms of compressive strength and density.
1. The basic requirement for placement equipment and placement methods is the
maintenance of its fluid properties.
2. Transport and place material so that it flows easily around, beneath, or through
walls, pipes, conduits, or other structures.
3. Use a slump, consistency, workability, flow characteristics, and pumpability (where
required) such that when placed, the material is self-compacting, self-densifying,
and has sufficient plasticity that compaction or mechanical vibration is not required.
3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General
1. Make provisions for and furnish all material for the test specimens, and provide
manual assistance to assist the Engineer in preparing said specimens.
2. Be responsible for the care of and providing curing condition for the test specimens.
B. Concrete Tests: Perform testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained
according to ASTM C172 according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain 1 composite sample for each day's pour of each
concrete mixture up to 25 cubic yards, plus 1 set for each additional 50 cubic yards
or fraction thereof.
2. Slump: ASTM C143; 1 test at point of placement for each composite sample, but
not less than 1 test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional
tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; 1 test for
each composite sample, but not less than 1 test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064; 1 test hourly when air temperature is 40
degrees Fahrenheit and below and when 80 degrees Fahrenheit and above, and 1
test for each composite sample.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31.
a. Cast and laboratory cure 4 cylinders for each composite sample.
1) Do not transport field cast cylinders until they have cured for a minimum of
24 hours.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 34 16 - 4
CONCRETE BASE MATERIAL FOR TRENCH REPAIR
Page 4 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39
a. Test 1 cylinder at 7 days.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 80 00 - 1
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING CONCRETE
Page 1 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 03 80 00
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Modifications to existing concrete structures, including:
a. Manholes
b. Junction boxes
c. Vaults
d. Retaining walls
e. Wing and head walls
f. Culverts
2. This section does not include modifications to Reinforced Concrete Pipe.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. This Item is considered subsidiary to the structure or Items being placed.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item
are subsidiary to the structure or Items being placed and no other compensation
will be allowed.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A615, Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
b. C881, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete.
c. C882, Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used
with Concrete by Slant Sheer.
d. D570, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
e. D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 80 00 - 2
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING CONCRETE
Page 2 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
f. D695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.
g. D732, Standard Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by Punch Tool.
h. D790, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
B. Where reference is made to 1 of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of
bid opening applies.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for
specials.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Submit manufacturer's Product Data on all product brands proposed for use to the
Engineer for review.
2. Include the manufacturer's installation and/or application instructions.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making openings
in existing structures, take precautions and all erect all necessary barriers, shoring and
bracing, and other protective devices to prevent damage to the structures beyond the
limits necessary for the new work, protect personnel, control dust, and to prevent
damage to the structures or contents by falling or flying debris.
B. Core sanitary sewer manhole penetrations.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's
name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers.
B. Store and condition the specified product as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED OR OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 80 00 - 3
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING CONCRETE
Page 3 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
a. Available Products
1) Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products
specified.
b. Available Manufacturers
1) Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
B. Materials
1. General
a. Comply with this Section and any state or local regulations.
C. Steel Reinforcement
1. Reinforcing Bars
a. ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed.
D. Epoxy Bonding Agent
1. A 2-component, solvent-free, asbestos-free, moisture-insensitive epoxy resin
material used to bond plastic concrete to hardened concrete complying with the
requirements of ASTM C881, Type V, and the additional requirements specified
herein.
2. Properties of the cured material
a. Compressive Strength (ASTM D695)
1) 8,500 psi minimum at 28 days
b. Tensile Strength (ASTM D638)
1) 4,000 psi minimum at 14 days
c. Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture)
1) 6,300 psi minimum at 14 days
d. Shear Strength (ASTM D732)
1) 5,000 psi minimum at 14 days
e. Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil)
1) 1 percent maximum at 14 days
f. Bond Strength (ASTM C882) Hardened to Plastic
1) 1,500 psi minimum at 14 days moist cure
g. Color
1) Gray
h. Available Manufacturers:
1) Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, New Jersey - Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod
2) BASF, Cleveland, Ohio - Concresive 1438
E. Epoxy Paste
1. A 2-component, solvent-free, asbestos free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin
material used to bond dissimilar materials to concrete such as setting railing posts,
dowels, anchor bolts, and all-threads into hardened concrete and complying with
the requirements of ASTM C881, Type I, Grade 3, and the additional requirements
specified herein.
2. Properties of the cured material
a. Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi minimum at 28 days
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 80 00 - 4
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING CONCRETE
Page 4 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b. Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 3,000 psi minimum at 14 days. Elongation at
Break - 0.3 percent minimum
c. Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 3,700 psi minimum at
14 days
d. Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 2,800 psi minimum at 14 days
e. Water Absorption (ASTM D570): 1.0 percent maximum at 7 days
f. Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,000 psi at 14 days moist cure
g. Color: Concrete grey
h. Available Manufacturers
1) Overhead Applications
a) Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, New Jersey - Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod LV
b) BASF - Concresive 1438
2) All Other Applications
a) Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, New Jersey - Sikadur Hi-mod LV 31
b) BASF - Concresive 1401
F. Repair Mortars
1. Provide an asbestos free, moisture insensitive, polymer-modified, Portland cement-
based cementitious trowel grade mortar for repairs on horizontal or vertical
surfaces.
a. Available Manufacturers
1) Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst New Jersey - SikaTop 122
2) BASF – Emaco Nanocrete R3
G. Pipe Penetration Sealants
1. 1 component polyurethane, extrudable swelling bentonite-free waterstop that is
chemically resistant, not soluble in water and capable of withstanding wet/dry
cycling.
a. Available Manufacturers
1) Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst New Jersey – SikaSwell S-2
2) Approved equal
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General
1. Cut, repair, reuse, demolish, excavate or otherwise modify parts of the existing
structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, or
necessary to permit completion of the Work. Finishes, joints, reinforcements,
sealants, etc., are specified in respective Sections. Comply with other requirements
of this of Section and as shown on the Drawings.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 80 00 - 5
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING CONCRETE
Page 5 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. Store, mix, and apply all commercial products specified in this Section in strict
compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Make repairs in all cases where concrete is repaired in the vicinity of an expansion
joint or control joint to preserve the isolation between components on either side of
the joint.
4. When drilling holes for dowels/bolts at new or existing concrete, stop drilling if
rebar is encountered and relocate the hole to avoid rebar as approved by the
Engineer. Do not cut rebar without prior approval by the Engineer.
B. Concrete Removal
1. Remove concrete designated to be removed to specific limits as shown on the
Drawings or directed by the Engineer, by chipping, jack-hammering, or saw-cutting
as appropriate in areas where concrete is to be taken out. Do not jackhammer
sanitary sewer manhole penetrations. Remove concrete in such a manner that
surrounding concrete or existing reinforcing to be left in place and existing in place
equipment is not damaged.
2. Where existing reinforcing is exposed due to saw cutting/core drilling and no new
material is to be placed on the sawcut surface, apply a coating or surface treatment
of epoxy paste to the entire cut surface to a thickness of 1/4 inch.
3. In all cases where the joint between new concrete or grout and existing concrete
will be exposed in the finished work, except as otherwise shown or specified,
provide a 1-inch deep saw cut on each exposed surface of the existing concrete at
the edge of concrete removal.
4. Repair concrete specified to be left in place that is damaged using approved means
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5. The Engineer may from time to time direct additional repairs to existing concrete.
Make these repairs as specified or by such other methods as may be appropriate.
C. Connection Surface Preparation
1. Prepare connection surfaces as specified below for concrete areas requiring
patching, repairs or modifications as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, or as
directed by the Engineer.
2. Remove all deteriorated materials, dirt, oil, grease, and all other bond inhibiting
materials from the surface by dry mechanical means, i.e., sandblasting, grinding,
etc., as approved by the Engineer. Be sure the areas are not less than 1/2-inch in
depth. Irregular voids or surface stones need not be removed if they are sound, free
of laitance, and firmly embedded into parent concrete, subject to the Engineer's
final inspection.
3. If reinforcing steel is exposed, it must be cleaned by wire brush or other similar
means to remove all contaminants, rust, etc., as approved by the Engineer. If 1/2 of
the diameter of the reinforcing steel is exposed, chip out behind the steel. Chip a
minimum of 1 inch behind the steel. Do not Damage reinforcing to be saved during
the demolition operation.
4. Clean reinforcing from existing demolished concrete that is shown to be
incorporated in new concrete by wire brush or other similar means to remove all
loose material and products of corrosion before proceeding with the repair. Cut,
bend, or lap to new reinforcing as shown on the Drawings and provided with 1-inch
minimum cover all around.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 80 00 - 6
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING CONCRETE
Page 6 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
5. The following are specific concrete surface preparation "methods" to be used where
called for on the Drawings, specified herein, or as directed by the Engineer.
a. Method A
1) After the existing concrete surface at connection has been roughened and
cleaned, thoroughly moisten the existing surface with water.
2) Brush on a 1/16-inch layer of cement and water mixed to the consistency of
a heavy paste.
3) Immediately after application of cement paste, place new concrete or grout
mixture as detailed on the Drawings.
b. Method B
1) After the existing concrete surface has been roughened and cleaned, apply
epoxy bonding agent at connection surface.
2) Comply strictly with the manufacturer's recommendations for the field
preparation and application of the epoxy bonding agent.
3) Place new concrete or grout mixture to limits shown on the Drawings
within time constraints recommended by the manufacturer to ensure bond.
c. Method C
1) Drill a hole 1/4 inch larger than the diameter of the dowel.
2) Blow the hole clear of loose particles and dust just prior to installing epoxy.
First fill the drilled hole with epoxy paste, then butter the dowels/bolts with
paste then insert by tapping.
3) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, drill and set deformed bars to a
depth of 10 bar diameters and smooth bars to a depth of 15 bar diameters.
4) If not noted on the Drawings, the Engineer will provide details regarding
the size and spacing of dowels.
d. Method D
1) Combination of Method B and C.
3.4 INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
03 80 00 - 7
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING CONCRETE
Page 7 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 00 - 1
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 1 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
SECTION 26 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. All labor, materials and equipment required to install, test and provide an
operational, electrical system as specified and as shown on the Drawings
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Electrical Facilities
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by lump sum.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the lump sum price bid for “Electrical Facilities”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing a complete electrical system
2) Wire
3) Cable
4) Conduit and related hardware
5) Supports
6) Excavation
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
8) Hauling
9) Clean-up
2. Furnish and Install Electrical Service
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for electrical service shall be per each type and size furnished
and installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid for “Furnish/Install Electrical
Service” shall be made at the price bid per each type and size installed.
c. The price bid shall include all aspects of completing the installation of electrical
service including, but not limited to:
1) Conduit
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 00 - 2
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 2 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
2) Pole risers
3) Meter base
4) Breaker box
5) Breakers
6) Coordination with Electrical Service Provider
3. Install Electrical Service
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for electrical service shall be per each type and size installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid for “Install Electrical Service”
shall be made at the price bid per each type and size installed.
c. The price bid shall include all aspects of completing the installation of electrical
service including, but not limited to:
1) Conduit
2) Pole risers
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. Where references are made to the Related Work paragraph in each Specification
Section, referring to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the
Contractor shall provide such information or Work as may be required in those
references, and include such information or Work as may be specified.
2. Division 26 requirements apply to electrical work provided under any division of
the Specifications
B. Service and Metering
1. Obtain service from the electric service provider at 120/240 Volts, Single Phase,
Three Wire, 60 Hz from transformer equipment furnished and installed by the
power company.
2. Power company responsibilities
a. Furnishing and installing the primary overhead conductors and pole line
b. Furnishing and installing the transformer or riser pole, primary cutouts,
lightning arresters and grounding
c. Furnishing and installing primary conduits and cables
d. Furnishing and installing the transformer pad and grounding (if pad-mounted
transformer)
e. Furnishing and installing transformer
f. Terminating underground primary cables
g. Furnishing metering current transformers (CT's), meter and meter wiring
h. Terminating secondary cables to the service transformer
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 00 - 3
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 3 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
i. Furnishing meter base and enclosure
3. Contractor responsibilities
a. Furnishing and installing secondary conduits and cables
b. Furnishing and installing power company approved metering current
transformer enclosure (if required by power company)
c. Installing meter base
d. Furnishing and installing an empty conduit with pull line from the metering
current transformer enclosure to the meter enclosure. Conduit size and type
approved by the power company
e. Coordinating electrical service installation with power company
4. City responsibilities
a. Negotiating with power company for the costs of new or revised services
b. Making payment directly to power company for such costs
C. Codes, Inspections and Fees
1. Obtain all necessary permits and pay all fees required for permits and inspections.
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials and Equipment
1. New, except where specifically identified on the Drawings to be reused.
2. UL listed, where such listing exists.
3. Electrical service
a. Service type shall be as shown on the Drawings.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty
1. Manufacturer’s warranties are specified in each of the Specification Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Interpretation of Drawings
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 00 - 4
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 4 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
1. Coordinate the conduit installation with other trades and the actual supplied
equipment.
2. Where circuits are shown as home runs: Provide fittings and boxes for complete
raceway installation.
3. Verify exact locations and mounting heights of lighting fixtures, switches and
receptacles prior to installation.
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Phase Balancing
1. Connect circuits on motor control centers and panelboards to result in evenly
balanced loads across all phases.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Tests and Settings
1. Test systems and equipment furnished under Division 26.
2. Repair or replace all defective work.
3. Make adjustments to the systems as specified and/or required.
4. Prior to energizing electrical equipment, make all tests required by the individual
Specification sections.
a. Submit a sample test form or procedure.
b. Submit the required test reports and data within 30 days after the test.
c. Include names of all test personnel.
d. Initial each test.
5. Check wire and cable terminations for tightness.
6. Verify all terminations at transformers, equipment, capacitor connections, panels,
and enclosures by producing a 1 2 3 rotation on a phase sequence motor when
connected to A, B, and C phases.
7. Inspect, set, and test mechanical operation for circuit breakers, disconnect switches,
motor starters, and control equipment.
8. Check interlocking, control and instrument wiring for each system and/or part of a
system to prove that the system will function properly as indicated by schematic
and wiring diagrams.
9. Schedule and coordinate testing with the City at least 2 weeks in advance.
10. Provide qualified test personnel, instruments and test equipment.
11. Refer to the individual equipment Sections for additional specific testing
requirements.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 00 - 5
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 5 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
11/22/13 S. Arnold Added installation only pay item for electrical services
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 10 - 1
DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 1 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 26 05 10
DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Furnish, install and test all equipment, wiring and appurtenances as may be required
to perform the electrical demolition shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for this Item shall be by lump sum.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the lump sum price bid for “Salvage Electrical Equipment”.
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Removing and salvaging electrical equipment including, but not limited to:
1) Wire and cable
2) Encasement
3) Conduit
4) Supports
b. Excavation
c. Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
d. Hauling
e. Clean-up
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC)
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 10 - 2
DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 2 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Coordinate with the City or their designee 48 hours in advance of removals.
2. Coordinate with other Trades for removal of electrical services in conjunction with
the removal of the associated equipment.
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements
1. All salvage materials will be delivered by the Contractor to the City at a location
designated by the Inspector. The Inspector, assisted by authorized representatives,
will serve as the receiving agent for salvage material.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements.
B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
C. Report Drawing discrepancies to City before disturbing the existing installation.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors and ceilings scheduled for removal .
B. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company to minimize length and number
of outages.
C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service
during construction.
D. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel
experienced in such operations.
E. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is
complete and ready for service.
F. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 10 - 3
DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 3 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
G. Obtain permission from City at least 1 week in advance, before partially or completely
disabling system.
3.4 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Remove, relocate and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible
ceiling finishes.
1. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors and patch surfaces.
D. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices.
1. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit serving them is abandoned and removed.
2. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed.
E. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.
F. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment that has been removed.
G. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension
work.
H. Maintain access to existing installations which remain active. Modify installation or
provide access to panels as appropriate.
I. Where the demolition or revision of any portion of a raceway or box in the raceway
system, in an area, causes the raceway system of the area to no longer comply with the
classification or Specification requirements of the area, provide and install such boxes,
fittings, etc. as may be necessary to return the raceway system to compliance with
Specifications.
J. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified for new Work.
K. Minimize noise, dust, and vibration and conduct the work so as to avoid any damage to
the surroundings.
L. Salvaged Equipment and Materials
1. The City shall have the right to retain any or all electrical and instrumentation
equipment shown or specified to be removed from the site.
2. Deliver the City’s equipment to a site designated by the City.
3. If the City refuses the salvage, the Contractor must claim ownership of the
materials and dispose of them properly.
4. Prior to starting demolition, the Contractor and City shall jointly visit the areas of
demolition and the City will designate those items that are to remain the property of
the City.
5. Take necessary precautions in removing City designated property to prevent
damage during the demolition process.
a. Remove steel structural members by unbolting, cutting welds, or cutting rivet
heads and punching shanks through holes.
b. Do not use a cutting torch to separate the City’s equipment or material.
6. Remove items in 1 piece or in a manner that does not impact their reuse.
a. Loose components may be removed separately.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 10 - 4
DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 4 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b. Controls and electrical equipment may be removed from the equipment and
handled separately.
c. Large units may be handled separately.
d. Salvaged piping shall be taken apart at flanges or fittings and removed in
sections.
M. Material removed from the construction site during demolition, and any equipment not
otherwise designated to remain the property of the City in accordance with the pre-
demolition identification process shall become the property of the Contractor, and shall
be promptly removed from the construction site.
N. Refurbish and replace any existing facility, to be left in place, which is damaged by the
demolition operations.
1. The repair of such damage shall leave the parts in a condition at least equal to that
found at the start of the work.
3.5 RESTORATION
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.
B. Panelboards
1. Clean exposed surfaces.
2. Check tightness of electrical connections.
3. Replace damaged circuit breakers.
4. Provide closure plates for vacant positions.
5. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 33 - 1
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 1 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Furnish and install complete raceway systems as shown on the Drawings and as
specified herein.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 26 05 43 – Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Conduits and Related Hardware, when a bid item for Electrical Facilities exists
a. Measurement
1) This Item is considered subsidiary to Electrical Facilities.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item are subsidiary to Electrical Facilities and shall be subsidiary to the
lump sum price bid for Electrical Facilities, and no other compensation will
be allowed.
2. Conduits and Related Hardware, when no bid item for Electrical Facilities exists
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for conduit shall be per linear foot of the size, installation
method, and type of conduit installed.
2) Limits of measurement for conduit are from center to center between
ground boxes or poles, a combination of the two or to the termination point.
b. Payment
1) Payment for conduit shall be made at the price bid per linear foot of the
size, installation method, and type of conduit installed.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Installation of Conduit and Related Hardware including, but not limited to:
a) Elbows
b) Couplings
c) Weatherheads
3. Conduit Boxes, when a bid item for Electrical Facilities exists
a. Measurement
1) This Item is considered subsidiary to Electrical Facilities.
b. Payment
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 33 - 2
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 2 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item are subsidiary to Electrical Facilities and shall be subsidiary to the
lump sum price bid for Electrical Facilities, and no other compensation will
be allowed.
4. Conduit Boxes, when no bid item for Electrical Facilities exists
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Conduit Box installed per
location of installation.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid for “Conduit Box” installed.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing the Conduit Box
2) Excavation
3) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
4) Clean-up
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI).
a. ANSI C80.5, American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum
Conduit (ERAC).
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volt Maximum).
b. C80.1, Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit.
c. TC-2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit.
d. TC-3, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and
Tubing.
e. TC-7, Smooth-Walled Coilable Electrical Polyethylene Conduit.
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a. 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC).
1) Article 350, Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Type LFMC.
2) Chapter 9, Tables.
5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
a. 6, Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit – Steel.
b. 514B, Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings.
c. 651, Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.
B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the
Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of UL.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 33 - 3
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 3 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
A. Product Data
1. Submit to the City, in accordance with Division 1, the manufacturers' names and
product designation or catalog numbers of all materials specified.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Manufacturers
a. Refer to Specification Section 01 60 00 for listing of approved manufacturers
for all materials.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Handling: In accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Storage
a. In accordance with manufacturer's instructions
b. Not exposed to sunlight
c. Completely covered
3. Materials showing signs of previous or jobsite exposure will be rejected.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY
A. No separate warranty on conduit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 CONDUIT
A. Liquidtight Steel Flexible Metal Conduit
1. Interlocked steel core
2. PVC jacket rated for 80 degrees Celsius
3. Complies with NEC Article 350
4. Fittings
5. Extruded from 6063 T-1 alloy
6. Maximum 0.1 percent copper content
7. Conform to:
a. ANSI C80.5
b. UL-6
B. Rigid Steel Conduit
1. Hot dip galvanized
2. Threads: Hot galvanized after cutting
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 33 - 4
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 4 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3. Conforms to:
a. NEMA C80.1
C. Rigid PVC Schedule 80 Conduit
1. Designed for use above ground and underground as described in the NEC
2. Resistant to sunlight
3. UL Labeled
4. Conforms to:
a. NEMA TC-2
b. UL 651
5. Fittings conform to:
a. NEMA TC-3
b. UL 514B
D. Rigid PVC Schedule 40 Conduit
1. Designed for use underground as described in the NEC
2. Resistant to sunlight
3. UL Labeled.
4. Conforms to:
a. NEMA TC-2
b. UL 651
5. Fittings conform to:
a. NEMA TC-3
b. UL 514B
E. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit
1. Designed for use underground as described in the NEC
2. Resistant to sunlight
3. UL Labeled
4. Conforms to:
a. UL 651A
b. UL 651B
c. NEMA TC-7
F. Raceway Boxes
1. Use: Exposed raceway systems only
2. Boxes for underground systems: Refer to Section 26 05 43.
3. Box size
a. Distance between each raceway entry inside the box and the opposite wall: Not
be less than 6 times the trade size of the largest raceway in a row.
b. Distance shall be increased for additional entries by the amount of the sum of
the diameters of all other raceway entries in the same row on the same wall of
the box.
c. Each row calculated individually, and the single row that provides the
maximum distance used to size box.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Conduit Outlet Bodies
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 33 - 5
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 5 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Up to and including 2-1/2 inches
a. Conduit outlet bodies and covers: Galvanized steel
b. Captive screw-clamp cover
c. Neoprene gasket
d. Stainless steel screws and clamps
2. Larger than 2-1/2 inches
a. Use junction boxes.
B. Conduit Hubs
1. Watertight
2. Threaded galvanized steel
3. Insulated throat
4. Stainless steel grounding screw
C. Grounding Bushings
1. Insulated lay-in lug grounding bushings
2. Tin-plated copper grounding path
3. Integrally molded noncombustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated 150 degrees
Celsius
4. Plastic insert cap each bushing
5. Lug size: Sufficient to accommodate maximum ground wire size required by the
NEC for the application
D. Raceway Sealant
1. Use for sealing of raceway hubs, entering or terminating in boxes or enclosures
where shown or specified
E. Conduit Penetration Seals
1. Use for conduit wall and floor seals
F. Conduit and related hardware
1. All polyvinyl chloride conduits, including elbows and couplings shall be schedule
40 PVC conduit, conforming to Federal Specification W-C-1094 and Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc. Standard UL-651. All conduit sizes shall be as indicated on the
Drawings.
2. Rigid metal conduit shall be steel, hot-dipped galvanized inside and outside.
3. Weather heads shall be made of aluminum and may be the threaded or the clamp on
type.
G. Expansion/Deflection Fittings
1. Use
a. Embedded in concrete
b. Exposed
2. Description
a. Internal grounding
b. 4 inch movement
c. Stainless steel/cast iron
H. Expansion Fittings
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 33 - 6
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 6 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Galvanized steel
2. 8 inch movement
3. Internal grounding
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Interface with Other Work
1. Coordinate the placement of conduit and related components with other trades and
existing installations.
B. Unless shown on the Drawings or specified otherwise, the conduit type installed with
respect to the location shall be as follows:
1. Underground, 18 inches or more cover: Rigid PVC Schedule 40 or HDPE
2. Underground, less than 18 inches cover: Rigid PVC Schedule 80 or HDPE
3. Exposed: Rigid galvanized steel
4. Final connection to equipment subject to vibration: Liquidtight Steel Flexible Metal
Conduit
C. Box Applications
1. Furnish raceway junction, pull and terminal boxes with NEMA ratings for the
location in which they are installed.
2. Exposed switch, receptacle and lighting outlet boxes and conduit fittings:
Galvanized steel
3. Furnish boxes with factory mounting lugs. Drilling through the back of any box or
enclosure is prohibited
D. Conduit Outlet Bodies Applications
1. Conduits up to and including 2-1/2 inches: Conduit outlet bodies may be used,
except where junction boxes are shown or otherwise specified
2. Conduits larger than 2-1/2 inches: Use junction boxes
E. Conduit Hub Applications
1. Unless specifically stated herein or described on the Drawings, all raceways shall
terminate at an outlet with a conduit hub. Locknut or double locknut terminations
will not be permitted.
F. Insulated Grounding Bushing Applications
1. Use: Terminate raceways at bottom entry to pad-mounted electrical equipment or
switchgear, if there is no wall or floor pan on which to anchor or terminate the
raceway.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 33 - 7
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 7 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. Other raceways: Terminate on enclosures with a conduit hub.
3. Grounding bushing caps: Remain on the bushing until the wire is ready to be
pulled.
G. Conduit Fittings Applications
1. Combination expansion deflection fittings: Install where conduits cross structure
expansion joints, on conduit transitions from underground to above ground, and
where installed in exposed conduit runs such that the distance between expansion-
deflection fittings does not exceed 150 feet of conduit run.
2. Expansion fittings: Install in lieu of a combination expansion-deflection fitting, on
the exposed side of conduit transitions from underground to above ground, where
the earth has been disturbed to a depth of more than 10 feet.
H. Conduit Penetration Seals Applications
1. Conduit wall seals: Use where underground conduits penetrate walls or at other
locations shown on the Drawings
2. Conduit sealing bushings: Use to seal conduit ends exposed to the weather and at
other locations shown on the Drawings
I. Conduit Tag Applications
1. Tag all conduits within 1 foot of the entry of equipment, and wall and floor
penetrations.
2. Tag all underground conduits and ducts at all locations, exiting and entering from
underground, including manholes and handholes.
J. Raceway Installation
1. No conduit smaller than 1¼ inch electrical trade size.
2. No more than the equivalent of 3 - 90 degree bends in any 1 run.
3. Do not pull wire until the conduit system is complete in all details.
4. Install all underground raceways in accordance with Section 26 05 43.
5. Where raceways enter or leave the raceway system, where the raceway origin or
termination, could be subjected to the entry of moisture, rain or liquid of any type,
particularly where the termination of such raceways terminate in any equipment,
new or existing at a lower elevation, such raceways shall be tightly sealed, using
watertight sealant (Duxseal or equal), at the higher elevation, both before and after
the installation of cables, such that there shall be no entry of water or moisture to
the Raceway System at any time. Any damage to new or existing equipment, due to
the entrance of moisture from unsealed raceways, shall be corrected by complete
replacement of such equipment, at no cost to the City. Cleaning or drying of such
damaged equipment will not be acceptable.
6. Conduit supports, for other than for underground raceways: Space at intervals of 8
feet or less as required to obtain rigid construction.
7. Single conduits: Support with 1 hole pipe clamps in combination with 1 screw back
plates, to raise conduits from the surface.
8. Multiple runs of conduits: Supported on trapeze type hangers with horizontal
members and threaded hanger rods not less than 3/8 inch in diameter.
9. Surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, and conduit: Supported by strut to
provide a minimum of 1/2 inch clearance between wall and equipment.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 33 - 8
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 8 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
10. Conduit hangers: Attach to structural steel by means of beam or channel clamps.
Use concrete inserts of the spot type where attached to concrete surfaces.
11. Conduits on exposed work
a. Install at right angles to and parallel with the surrounding wall.
b. Conform to the form of the ceiling.
c. No diagonal runs.
d. Provide concentric bends in parallel conduit runs.
e. Install conduit perfectly straight and true.
12. Conduits terminated into enclosures: Install perpendicular to the walls where
flexible liquidtight or rigid conduits are required.
a. Do not use short sealtight elbow fittings for such terminations, except for
connections to instrumentation transmitters where multiple penetrations are
required.
13. Use insulated throat grounding bushings for conduits containing equipment
grounding conductors and terminating in boxes. Connect grounding conductors to
the box.
14. Install conduits using threaded fittings. Do not use running threads.
15. PVC conduit: Use glued type conduit fittings.
16. HDPE conduit: Use fittings by same manufacturer as conduit.
17. Liquidtight flexible steel conduit
a. Primary and secondary of transformers
b. Generator terminations
c. Other equipment where vibration is present
d. Connections to instrumentation transmitters, where multiple penetrations are
required
e. Do not use in other locations.
f. Maximum length: Not greater than that of a factory manufactured long radius
elbow of the conduit size being used
g. Maximum bending radius: Not less than that shown in the NEC Chapter 9,
Table 2, “Other Bends”.
h. Do not use BX or AC type prefabricated cables.
18. Conduits passing through openings in walls or floor slabs: Seal remaining openings
against the passage of flame and smoke.
19. Conduit ends exposed to the weather or corrosive gases: Seal with conduit sealing
bushings.
20. Raceways terminating in Control Panels or boxes containing electrical equipment
a. Do not install to enter from the top of the panel or box.
b. Seal with a watertight sealant: Duxseal or equal
21. Conduit
a. The Contractor will be required to coordinate with all local utility companies,
long distance communication companies, City utilities, railroad companies, and
Dig Tess if applicable, to ascertain exact locations of conflicting underground
services.
b. The location of conduits and ground boxes are diagrammatic only and may be
shifted by the Inspector to accommodate field conditions.
c. The maximum allowable overcut shall be 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter for bores.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 33 - 9
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 9 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
d. The vertical and horizontal tolerances shall not exceed 18 inches (457 mm) as
measured from the intended target point for bores.
e. The use of a pneumatically driven device for punching holes beneath the
pavement (commonly known as a "missile") will not be permitted.
f. Conduit installed for future use shall have a non-metallic, nylon type pull string
and shall be capped using standard weather tight conduit caps, as approved by
the Inspector.
g. The Contractor shall place duct seal or foam at the ends of all conduit where
conductors and/or cables are present.
h. New Conduit
1) All underground conduit shall be schedule 40 PVC conduit.
2) All conduit or raceways above ground shall be rigid metal.
3) All conduit and fittings shall be of the sizes and types shown on the
Drawings.
4) Each section of conduit shall bear evidence of approval by Underwriter's
Laboratories.
5) Conduit terminating in posts or pedestal bases shall not extend vertically
more than 3 inches above the concrete foundation.
6) Field bends in conduit shall have a minimum radius of 12 diameters of the
nominal size of the conduit.
7) Exposed vertical conduit shall be galvanized rigid metal, and reamed and
couplings made tight. PVC conduit shall be joined by the solvent--weld
method in accordance with the conduit manufacturer's recommendations.
8) No reducer couplings shall be used unless specifically indicated on the
Drawings.
9) Conduit and fittings shall have burrs and rough places smoothed and shall
be clean and free of obstructions before the cable is installed.
10) Field cuts shall be made with a hacksaw only, and shall be square and true
so that the ends will butt or come together for the full diameter thereof.
a) In no case shall a cutting torch be used to cut or join conduit.
11) Slip joints or running threads will not be permitted for coupling conduit
unless approved by the Inspector.
12) When a standard coupling cannot be used, an approved union coupling
shall be used and shall provide a water-tight coupling between the conduit.
13) Couplings shall be properly installed to bring their ends of connected
conduit together to produce a good rigid connection throughout the entire
length of the conduit run.
14) Where the coating on a rigid metal conduit run has been damaged in
handling or installation, such damaged parts shall be thoroughly painted
with rust preventive paint.
15) Ends of conduits shall be capped or plugged until installation of the wire is
complete.
16) Upon request by the Inspector, the Contractor shall draw a full-size metal
wire brush, attached by swivel joint to a pull tape, through the metal
conduit to insure that the conduit is clean and free from obstructions.
17) Conduits shall be placed in an open trench at a minimum 24 inches (612
mm) depth below the curb grade in the sidewalk areas, or 18 inches (450
mm) below the finished street grade in the street area.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 33 - 10
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 10 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
18) Conduit placed for concrete encasement shall be secured and supported in
such a manner that the alignment will not be disturbed during placement of
the concrete.
a) No concrete shall be placed until all of the conduit ends have been
capped and all box openings closed.
19) PVC conduit, which is to be placed under existing pavement, sidewalks,
and driveways, shall be placed by first providing a void through which the
PVC conduit shall be inserted.
a) The void may be made by boring.
b) Use of water or other fluids in connection with the boring operation
will be permitted only to lubricate cuttings.
c) Water jetting will not be permitted.
20) If it is determined by the Inspector that it is impractical to place the conduit
by boring as outlined above due to unforeseen obstructions, written
permission may be granted by the Traffic Services Manager or designee for
the Contractor to cut the existing pavement.
21) Pits for boring shall not be closer than 2 feet (612 mm) to the back of the
curb or the outside edge of the shoulder.
a) The boring method used shall not interfere with the operation of streets,
highways, or other facilities, and shall not weaken or damage any
embankment structure, or pavement.
22) Backfill - Compaction & Density Test for All Ditchlines
a) All ditchlines within paving areas of existing and proposed streets and
within 2 feet (600 mm) back of curb are to be mechanically tamped.
b) All tamping is to be density controlled to 90 percent standard proctor
density at optimum moisture content and no greater than 5 percent
optimum or less than 2 percent below optimum.
c) All backfill material is to be select native material, 6 inches (150 mm)
diameter clods and smaller.
d) It is permissible to put backfill in 6 inches to 8 inches (150 mm to 400
mm) lifts with densities being taken for each 1feet (300 mm) of
compacted material on offsetting stations of 50 feet (15.9 M).
23) Provide adequately bent conduit and properly excavate so as to prevent
damage to the conduit or conductor by a bend radius which is too short.
24) All conduit runs shall be continuous and of the same material (metal only
or PVC only).
25) Where tying into existing conduit, the Contractor must continue with the
same material (metal to metal or PVC to PVC).
26) Each length of galvanized rigid metal conduit, where used, shall be reamed
and threaded on each end and couplings shall be made up tight.
27) White-lead paint or equal shall be used on threads of all joints.
28) Metal conduit and fittings shall have the burrs and rough places smoothed.
29) Where the coating on a metal conduit run has been damaged in handling or
installation, such damaged parts shall be thoroughly painted with rust
preventive paint.
i. Existing Conduit
1) Prior to pulling cable in existing underground conduit, the conduit shall be
cleaned with a mandrel or cylindrical wire brush and blown out with
compressed air.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 33 - 11
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 11 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2) If conduit appears to be blocked, the Contractor shall make an attempt to
clear the conduit by rodding (The Contractor will not receive extra
compensation for rodding).
3) If the existing conduit cannot be used, the Contractor may be required to
repair and/or replace this conduit as directed by the Engineer.
a) Repair of this conduit will be paid for as "extra work" on a Change
Order.
4) The Inspector shall be notified prior to disconnection or removal of any
existing cable.
22. Conduits from external sources entering or leaving a multiple compartment
enclosure: Stub up into the bottom horizontal wireway or other manufacturer
designated area, directly below the vertical section in which the conductors are to
be terminated.
23. Conduits entering from cable tray: Stub into the upper section.
24. Install conduit sealing and drain fittings in areas designated as NEMA 4X or
NEMA 7.
25. Conduit identification platens
a. Install on all power, instrumentation, alarm and control conduits at each end of
the run and at intermediate junction boxes and manholes.
b. Install conduit plates before conductors are pulled into conduits.
c. Coordinate exact identification plate location with the City at the time of
installation to provide uniformity of placement and ease of reading.
26. Pull mandrels through all existing conduits that will be reused and through all new
conduits 2 inches in diameter and larger prior to installing conductors.
27. Install 3/16 inch polypropylene pull lines in all new conduits noted as spares or
designated for future equipment.
28. Install conduit to drain away from the equipment served. If conduit drainage is not
possible, use conduit seals to plug the conduits at the point of attachment to the
equipment
29. Route conduits to avoid crossing pipe shafts, access hatches or vent duct openings,
present or future, in floor or ceiling construction.
30. Do not use running threads.
31. Conduits passing from heated to unheated spaces, exterior spaces, refrigerated
spaces, or cold air plenums: Sealed with watertight sealant: Duxseal or equal
32. Locate conduits a minimum of 3 inches from steam or hot water piping.
a. Where crossings are unavoidable, locate conduit at least 1 inch from the
covering of the pipe crossed.
33. Conduits terminating at a cable tray
a. Support independently from the cable tray.
b. Provide conduit support within 1-feet of the cable tray.
c. Weight of the conduit not supported by cable tray
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 33 - 12
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 12 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 43 - 1
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 1 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
SECTION 26 05 43
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Furnish and install a complete underground system of raceways, manholes and
handholes
2. Raceways for use in structural concrete are specified in Section 26 05 33, Raceways
and Boxes for Electrical Systems
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
4. Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
5. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. This Item is considered subsidiary to the Electrical Facilities being installed.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item
are subsidiary to the electrical facilities specified on the Drawings and shall be
subsidiary to the lump sum price bid for Electrical Facilities, and no other
compensation will be allowed.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
a. M306 – Standard Specification for Drainage Structure Castings.
3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 43 - 2
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 2 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Plastic duct spacers
B. Shop Drawings
1. Manholes, handholes and associated hardware
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Manufacturers
a. Precast manholes: Manufactured in a NPCA (National Precast Concrete
Association) Certified Plant
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Handle and store material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Store materials completely covered; do not expose materials to sunlight.
3. Materials showing signs of previous or jobsite exposure will be rejected.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS
1.12 WARRANTY
A. No separate warranty for this equipment
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Manufacturer List
a. Refer to Section 01 60 00.
B. Conduit
1. PVC Schedule 40 or HDPE
2. Refer to Section 26 05 33
3. Terminators: Same size and type as the raceway
C. Concrete cap for raceways and duct banks
1. Refer to Section 03 30 00.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 43 - 3
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 3 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
2. Red dye
a. 40 pounds per 10 cubic yards of concrete
D. Manholes and Handholes
1. Precast concrete
2. Designed for a AASHTO Class H20 load.
3. Sizes shown on Drawings
4. Manhole tops
a. Field removable
b. Stainless steel lifting eyes
5. Duct bank entries into the manhole or handhole
a. Centered on the entering wall
b. Contain the number and size of duct terminators to match the corresponding
duct bank
6. Concrete sump
a. Minimum dimensions: 12 inches x 12 inches x 2 inches deep
b. Located in the middle of the floor of the manhole or handhole, or as shown on
the Drawings
E. Manhole Covers
1. Heavy duty
2. 36 inch diameter
3. Machined gray iron
4. AASHTO M306 CL35B minimum
5. 40,000-pound proof load value (AASHTO Class H20 X 2.5)
6. Including frame
7. “Electric” or “Communication” raised lettering recessed flush on the cover
8. Drop handles
F. Castings
1. Made In the USA
2. Cast with the foundry’s name and production date (example: mm/dd/yy)
3. True to pattern in form and dimension
4. Free from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes, or other defects in
positions affecting strength and value
5. Angles: Filleted
6. Arises: Sharp and true
G. Hardware
1. Cable racks
a. Heavy duty
b. Non-metallic
c. Arm lengths of 8 inches, 14 inches and 20 inches, each supporting a load of not
less than 250 pounds at the outer end
d. Molded in 1 piece of U.L. listed glass reinforced nylon
e. Secured to the manhole and walls using drilled epoxy anchoring system, with
316 stainless steel bolts
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 43 - 4
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 4 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
f. Arms vertically spaced not greater than 24 inches on center
2. Pulling irons
a. Copolymer polypropylene coated 1/2 inch diameter cable
b. Rated pulling strength: 7500 lbs
c. Polyethylene pulling iron pocket
d. Manholes: Recessed in wall opposite each duct entry
e. Handholes: Located near center of handhole floor
3. Ladders
a. Fiberglass reinforced plastic
b. Safety yellow
c. 18 inch rung width
d. 12 inch rung spacing
e. Furnish 2 ladders, length 4 feet greater than the deepest manhole in the
underground system
H. Polyethylene Warning Tape
1. Red polyethylene film
2. 2 inches minimum width
3. Embedded metallic wire for location tracing
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions
1. Field verify the routing of all underground duct banks before placement
2. Modify the routing to avoid underground utilities or above ground objects
3. Provide any alternate routing of the duct banks to the City for approval before
installation
3.3 TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. Provide suitable room for installing manholes, handholes, ducts and appurtenances
B. Furnish and place all sheeting, bracing and supports.
C. Excavate material of every description and of whatever substance encountered.
D. Pavement: Cut with saw, wheel or pneumatic chisel along straight lines before
excavating
E. Refer to Section 33 05 10.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Trench Excavation
1. Provide suitable room for installing manholes, handholes, ducts and appurtenances.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 43 - 5
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 5 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
2. Furnish and place all sheeting, bracing and supports.
3. Excavate material of every description and of whatever substance encountered in
conformance with Section 33 05 10.
4. Pavement
a. Cut with saw, wheel or pneumatic chisel along straight lines before excavating.
5. Trenching and Compaction shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
B. Special Techniques
1. Changes of direction
a. Less than 20 degrees
1) Use hotbox, strictly in conformance with the conduit manufacturer’s
instructions
b. Greater than 20 degrees
1) Use long radius bends
2. Minimum raceway size between manholes or handholes shall be 2 inches
C. Slopes
1. Install raceways to drain away from buildings.
2. Install raceways between manholes or handholes to drain toward the manholes or
handholes.
3. Slopes
a. At least 3 inches per 100 feet
D. Lay raceway lines in trenches on sand bedding.
E. Plastic spacers
1. Not more than 4 feet apart
2. Provide not less than 2 inch clearance between raceways.
F. Raceway banks cover: 24 inches
G. Raceway terminations at manholes: Terminator for PVC conduit
H. Blank duct plugs
1. Use to seal the ends of all unused ducts in the duct system
2. Installed where ducts enter manholes or handholes, and at entrances and exits to the
underground system
I. Raceways entering or exiting the underground system, rising to higher elevation
1. Seal at higher elevation before and after the installation of cables
2. No entry of water or moisture to the Underground System at any time
J. Complete duct system before pulling any wire.
K. Swab all raceways clean before installing cable.
L. Cables in manholes and handholes
1. Train, support and restrain on cable racks.
2. Route cables passing duct entrances above all duct entrances.
3. Do not route cable in front of or below duct bank entrances.
4. Install polyethylene warning tape trench above each raceway or duct bank.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 43 - 6
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 6 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
M. Tag all underground conduits at all locations exiting and entering from underground,
including manholes and handholes
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION
A. Remove and replace sub grade soils which become soft, loose or otherwise
unsatisfactory as a result of inadequate excavation, dewatering or other trenching
methods, using gravel fill.
B. Existing pavement
1. Saw cut and repair existing pavements above new and modified existing duct
banks.
2. Cut along straight lines.
3. Replace pavement with the same type and quality of the existing paving.
C. Grassy areas
1. Remove and replace sod, or
2. Loam and reseed surface
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION
A. Backfilling
1. Remove materials unsuitable for backfilling.
2. Trench fill
a. Common fill material
b. Void of rock or other non-porous material
c. Layers not to exceed 8-inches in loose measure
d. Compact to 90 percent standard Proctor density at optimum moisture content of
± 4 percent
e. Mounded 6-inches above existing grade
3. Existing grass, loam or gravel surface
a. Remove surface material
b. Conserve
c. Replace to the full original depth
4. Paved areas or designated future paved areas
a. Backfill with select fill material
b. Layers not to exceed 8-inches loose measure
c. Compact to 95 percent standard Proctor density at optimum moisture content of
± 3 percent
5. Compaction
a. Hand or pneumatic tamping with tools weighing at least 20 pounds
b. Place material being spread and compacted in layers not over 8-in loose thick.
c. Sprinkle in conjunction with rolling or ramming, if needed to achieve required
compaction
6. Do not place bituminous paving in backfill.
7. Do not use water jetting as a means of consolidating or compacting backfill.
8. Road surfaces
a. Broom and hose-clean immediately after backfilling
b. Employ dust control measures at all times.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 43 - 7
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 7 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
3.7 CLEANING
A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the underground system.
B. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of manholes,
handholes and structures, using brushes, vacuum cleaner or clean, lint free rags.
C. Do not use compressed air.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 50 - 1
COMMUNICATIONS MULTI-DUCT CONDUIT
Page 1 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
SECTION 26 05 50
COMMUNICATIONS MULTI-DUCT CONDUIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Furnish, install and test a Multi-Duct Conduit (MDC)
2. MDC shall be suitable for installation in and outdoor underground environment
including constant immersion in water, and/or hung from a bridge.
B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section
1. None
C. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section
1. None
D. Deviations from City of Fort Worth Standards
1. None
E. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 1 - General Requirements.
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of the size and installation
method of multi-duct conduit furnished and installed and tested.
b. Limits of measurement for multi-duct conduit are from center to center between
ground boxes or poles, a combination of the two, or to the termination point.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for as the unit price
bid for “Multi-duct Conduit” of the size and installation method specified.
b. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing MDC
2) Excavation
3) Boring
4) Aerial installation
5) Furnishing and placing backfill
6) Installing all fittings, sweeps, bends, repair, couplings, adaptors, ground
box termination kits
7) Pre-assembled split repair costs
8) Lubrication access fittings
9) Hangers
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 50 - 2
COMMUNICATIONS MULTI-DUCT CONDUIT
Page 2 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
10) Brackets
11) Expansion joints
12) Concrete
13) Detectable underground metalized Mylar warning tape
14) Locator wire
15) All labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms
1. MDC - Multi-Duct conduit
2. PVC – Polyvinyl chloride conduit
3. PE – Polyethylene
4. OD – Outer diameter
5. ID – Inner diameter
B. Definitions
1. None
C. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard
published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. Traffic Control Plan
a. Texas Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD)
3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
4. National Electrical Manufactures Association (NEMA)
5. National Electrical Code (NEC)
6. Underground MDC System
a. Telcordia GR-356, issue No. 2, June 2009 – Generic Requirements for Optical
Cable Innerduct, Associated Conduit, and Accessories.
b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard D1785-12,
Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules
40, 80, and 120
c. ASTM Standard D2122-98(2010), Standard Test Method for Determining
Dimensions of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings
d. ASTM Standard D2412-11, Standard Test Method for Determination of
External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading
7. Outer Underground Duct – Heavy walled EPC-80 (Schedule 80) PVC
a. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standard TC-2:2003,
Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit
b. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 651, Schedule 40, 80 Type EB and A Rigid
PVC Conduit and Fittings
c. National Electrical Code
8. Inner Ducts
a. Bellcore GR-2884-CORE, Issue 1, July 1995 – Generic Requirements for
Multi-Bore Conduit
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 50 - 3
COMMUNICATIONS MULTI-DUCT CONDUIT
Page 3 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
b. ASTM D 1599 – 99(2011) – Standard Test Method for Resistance to Short-
Time Hydraulic Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
9. Aerial MDC System
a. ASTM Standard D2996 – 01(2007) e1, Standard Specification for Filament-
Wound “Fiberglass” (Glass Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
b. ASTM Standard D2310-06(2012), Standard Classification for Machine-Made
“Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
c. ASTM Standard D2517-06(2011), Standard Specification for Reinforced
Epoxy Resin Gas Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
10. Coupling Body Certified Testing
a. Test shall be in accordance with ASTM, NEMA Standard TC-2, UL.651, and
Bellcore standards.
1.4 ADMINISRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Traffic Control Plan
1. Traffic Control Plan shall be approved by the Engineer before work begins.
2. Traffic Control Plan shall comply with the TMUTCD.
B. References
1. The MDC supplier shall submit three (3) references where the suppliers MDC
system has functioned successfully for a period of no less than a year.
2. References shall include current name and address of organization, and current
name and telephone number of the individual from the organization who can be
contacted to verify system installation.
3. Provide reference information prior to documentation submittal.
4. Failure to furnish references will be sufficient reason for rejection of the supplier’s
equipment.
C. Testing of Product Certified Test Reports
1. Contractor shall provide certified test reports by an independent testing laboratory
for coupling body and inner duct.
2. Coupling Body
a. Test the coupling body to ensure it seals the inner duct by applying 100 p.s.i.g.
to an inner duct and verify that the inner duct is capable of maintaining a
minimum of 15 p.s.i.g. for 24 hours.
b. Test shall be in accordance with ASTM, NEMA Standard TC-2, UL.651, and
Bellcore standards as referenced to this Item.
3. Inner Duct
a. Test the burn through resistance of inner duct as per the following procedure:
1) Wrap a length of inner duct around and secure to a rigid form with a radius
of 24 in.
2) Thread an appropriate length of pre-lubricated flat tape with a minimum
tensile strength of 1500 lb. through the inner duct and sew the ends
together to create a continuous loop.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 50 - 4
COMMUNICATIONS MULTI-DUCT CONDUIT
Page 4 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
3) Wrap the tape around a powered capstan that can be drawn away from the
duct sample to provide a continuous tension of 450 lb.
4) Draw the tape continuously through the sample with the powered capstan
at a rate of 100 ft. per minute.
5) Ensure that the duct does not burn through within 150 minutes.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS / SYSTEM
A. Description
1. Regulatory Requirements
a. Provide new materials that confirm to the details as shown on plans, the
requirements of this Item, are UL listed and meet NEMA and NEC
requirements.
2. MDC Systems
a. Furnish and place a MDC of type and size shown on the plans or as directed by
the Engineer.
b. Provide a MDC that is suitable for installation in an outdoor underground
environment including constant immersion in water, and/or hung from a bridge
without any degradation in the MDC.
c. MDC is a pre-assembled conduit section manufactured from a 4 in. round outer
duct containing 4 factory installed 1.25 in. round inner ducts.
d. Inner ducts are held together in square configuration by a system of spacers.
e. Spacers hold the individual inner ducts in formation, locking them tightly to
prevent free twisting.
f. Plans indentify MDC system as “4-WAY MULTI-DUCT SYSTEM”.
g. The MDC, including respective bends, couplings, adapters and other accessory
fittings shall contain a coupling body for sealing the outer and inner ducts of
adjacent MDC sections in an end-to-end relationship.
h. Factory assembled lengths and associated bends shall be manufactured without
adhesives, to allow inner duct movement relieving internal stresses experienced
during field handlings and due to variations in coefficient of thermal expansion.
i. The MDC system shall include a complete line of accessory items, including,
but not limited to:
1) Alternate outer ducts,
2) Sweeps and bends,
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 50 - 5
COMMUNICATIONS MULTI-DUCT CONDUIT
Page 5 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
3) Repair couplings,
4) Ground box termination kits, and
5) Pre-assembled split repair kits.
j. MDC pre-assembled sections, factory bends, and fittings shall be shipped with
protective caps.
k. All components of the MDC system shall be provided by the same
manufacturer.
l. Provide all required sweeps, bends, repair couplings, ground box termination
kits, alternative outer ducts, adapters, pre-assembled split repair kits, lubrication
access fittings, tug-plugs, slit-inner duct plugs, hangers, brackets, expansion
joints, and accessories to complete the MDC system as subsidiary to the MDC
system.
m. Provide all materials necessary for installation and testing subsidiary to the
MDC system.
n. Provide expansion joints and conduit that is similar to connecting conduit.
o. Shall conform to the following requirements:
1) A percent ovality of less than 5 percent,
2) An underground system that performs in an ambient temperature of -30°F
to 130°F without degradation of material properties,
3) An aerial system that performs in an ambient temperature range of -104°F
to 200°F without degradation of material properties,
4) Resistant to most harsh chemicals,
5) Protected against degradation due to oxidation or general corrosion,
6) Capable of being direct buried by trenching or boring with no special
consideration to using selective backfill,
7) Has a low coefficient of thermal expansion, such that expansion and
contraction is minimal,
8) Free of visible cracks, holes or other physical defects that would degrade
its performance,
9) Uniform as practical in respect to overall dimensions, color, density,
thickness, etc.
10) Contains a UV light stabilizer which will protect it, for a minimum of 12
months, in direct sunlight, and
11) Durable identification showing the name and trademark of the
manufacturer, conduit size, date of manufacture.
3. Outer Duct
a. Shall be marked with a longitudinal print line with the wording “Install This
Side Up” to assure proper inner duct orientation and alignment.
b. Male ends of the outer ducts shall be a circumferential insertion depth mark to
assure proper insertion is achieved.
c. The length of the integral coupling shall be at least 5 inches in length to
accommodate the coupling body.
d. Underground MDC System
1) Provide a 4 in. round outer duct that is heavy walled EPC-80 (Schedule 80)
PVC.
2) Ensure that the outer duct meets the requirements of schedule 80 PVC
conduit and conforms to all requirements and references identified in 1.3.3
of the Item.
e. Aerial MDC System
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 50 - 6
COMMUNICATIONS MULTI-DUCT CONDUIT
Page 6 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
1) Provide a 4 in. round Fiberglass Multi-Duct system that is bullet resistant,
heavy walled, pure, high grade, filament wound fiberglass reinforced
epoxy conduit.
2) Ensure that all conduit, elbows and fittings are manufactured from the
same resin/hardener/glass systems and the same filament wound system.
3) All Fiberglass MDC aerial elbows, conduit, fittings and hangers shall be
grey in color.
4) Provide aerial MDC that performs in an ambient temperature range -40°F
to 200°F without degradation of material properties.
5) Provide aerial MDC that is resistant to most harsh chemicals, is protected
against degradation due to oxidation or general corrosion, and has a low
coefficient of thermal expansion so that expansion and contraction is
minimal.
4. Inner Ducts
a. Provide 1.25 in. inner ducts constructed of an extruded Virgin High Density
Polyethylene (PE) compound specifically blended for inner ducts used in Multi-
duct systems.
b. Characteristics of this blend add rigidity to the extruded PE inner ducts,
minimize the differences between the expansion and contraction rates of PVC
and the PE inner ducts, create a burn resistant PE inner duct to minimize the
chance of damaging the inner duct during the cable placing operation, and
provide a silicone impregnated wall of the inner duct.
1) Provide inner ducts that are uniquely identified by the extrusion of a
different color for each of the inner ducts, using orange, yellow, red and
white.
2) Place white inner duct directly in-line with the manufacturer’s
identification on the outer duct for ease of identification and installation.
c. Provide inner ducts with a minimum burst strength of 125 psi.
d. Provide inner ducts that are extruded in a controlled outer diameter (OD)
fashion.
e. Provided inner ducts with:
1) Minimum ID of 1.25 in.
2) Maximum OD of 1.413 in
3) Minimum wall thickness 0.075 in.
f. Provide inner ducts that are the same type within the bends and within the
straight sections.
g. All inner ducts shall meet requirements identified in 1.3.4 of this Item.
5. Coupling Body
a. The MDC system, including bends, couplings, and other fittings shall contain a
coupling body for sealing the outer and inner ducts of adjacent multiduct
conduit sections end to end.
b. Coupling bodies for installation by trenching
1) Provide a factory installed primary coupling body which incorporates
integral molded sealing devices to facilitate field assemble and prevent
water and foreign material leakage from outside the MDC and to prevent
air leakage from inside the inner ducts.
2) Ensure that the gasket or sealing member(s) are of an anti-reversing design
to ensure that the lengths of the conduit stay joined together.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 50 - 7
COMMUNICATIONS MULTI-DUCT CONDUIT
Page 7 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
3) Provide MDC system that can be assembled by hand without special tools
and does not require lubricant for field lubricant for field assembly.
4) Provide a coupling body with a plurality of bores containing principal seals
which are molded as an integral part of the coupling body.
5) Ensure that the field connection end of the internal coupling body
incorporates shaped target areas to accommodate self-aligned of the inner
ducts with bore openings during field assembly.
6) Ensure that one of the bore openings on the filed assembly side the
coupling body is uniquely identified to facilitate proper continuous inner
duct alignment during field assembly.
c. Coupling bodies for installation by boring
1) Coupling bodies for installation by boring shall meet the requirements of
coupling bodies of trenched MDC.
2) Outer duct shall be equipped with locking rings and matching grooves,
especially designed for bored installations.
3) The conduit and joints shall withstand axial loads of 8,700 lbs. while being
pulled around a bend with a 65-ft. radius, with no leaks or deformation of
the ducts.
6. Inner Duct Plugs
a. Plugs for sealing inner ducts shall be durable, fabricated from no metallic parts
and shall be easily removable and reusable.
b. Plugs shall be capable of being installed and removed by hand without any
tools and shall provide water- and air-tight seal of 21 psi.
c. Plugs that seal empty inner ducts shall contain a rope tie on the inside end for
connection of the pull rope/tape.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections
1. Performance testing for all materials not previously tested and approved may be
required.
2. If technical data is not considered adequate for approval, the City may require
material testing by an independent testing laboratory.
3. The contract period will not be extended for time lost or delays caused by testing
prior to final approval of any items.
B. Non-Conforming Work
1. Failure to conform to the requirements of any test will be counted as a defect and
the materials will be rejected.
2. Rejected materials may be offered again for retest provided all non-compliances
have been corrected and retested by an independent testing laboratory.
C. Examination of Product
1. Carefully examine each MDC system component to verify that the materials,
design, construction, markings, and workmanship comply with the requirements of
its specification.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 50 - 8
COMMUNICATIONS MULTI-DUCT CONDUIT
Page 8 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Protection of In-Place Conditions
1. Conduct work with minimum disturbance of existing utilities, and coordinate work
in or near utilities with the utility owners.
2. Inform utility owners sufficiently before work begins to allow time to identify
located, reroute, or make other adjustments to utility lines.
3. Field verify routing avoids cutting or damaging underground utility lines that are to
remain in place.
B. Surface Preparation
1. None
C. Demolition / Removal
1. Perform trench excavation and backfilling as shown on the plans or as directed by
Engineer and in accordance to this Item.
2. Obstructions
a. Remove obstructions to the proposed construction, including trees and other
vegetation, debris, and structures over the width of the excavation to a depth of
1 ft. below the bottom of excavation.
b. If abandoned storm drains, sewers, or other drainage systems are encountered,
remove as required to clear the excavation area, and plug in a manner approved
by the Engineer.
c. After removing obstructions, restore the bottom of the excavation to grade by
backfilling in accordance to this Item.
3. Excavate to the lines and grades shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
a. Provide slopes, benching, sheeting, bracing, pumping, and bailing as necessary
to maintain the stability and safety of excavation.
b. Use satisfactory excavated material as backfill.
c. Dispose of material not incorporated into the final project off the right-of-way
in accordance with federal, state and local regulations.
d. When excavating across private property or beyond the project limits:
1) Keep any topsoil removed separate,
2) Replace it as nearly as feasible in its original position, and
3) Restore the area to acceptable condition.
4. Excavation in Streets
a. When structures are installed in streets, highways, or other paced areas, cut
pavement and base with neat lines.
b. Restore pavement structure after completion of excavation and backfilling.
c. Maintain approved traffic control plan.
5. Dispose of surplus material in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations.
6. If active sanitary sewer line is damaged during excavation, provide temporary
fumes across the excavation while open, and restore the lines when backfilling has
progressed to the original bedding lines of the cut sewer.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 50 - 9
COMMUNICATIONS MULTI-DUCT CONDUIT
Page 9 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
7. If damage to existing utilities occurs, promptly notify utility company.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Place MDC system in accordance with line, grades, details, and dimensions shown
on the plans or as directed by Engineer.
2. Place MDC system at the depth shown on the plans or as otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
3. Typical installation shall be at a depth of 30 inches.
4. Minimum depth shall never be less than 18 inches below finished grade.
B. De-Watering
1. Do not place MDC in presence of water unless approved by Engineer.
2. Place MDC on a dry, firm surface.
3. Remove any water by bailing, pumping, well–point installation, deep wells,
underdrains, or other approved method.
C. Bedding
1. Provide a minimum of 4 inches of fine granular material on the base of excavation.
D. Boring
1. Jack and bore as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer, and in
accordance with this Item.
2. General
a. Excavate suitable shafts or trenches for conducting the jacking or boring
operations and for placing end joints of pipe if the grade at the jacking or
boring end is below the ground surface.
b. Protect excavations with slopes, benching, sheeting, bracing, temporary
shoring, pumping and bailing as necessary to maintain the stability and safety
of excavation.
c. Install MDC so there is no interference with operation of street, highway,
railroad, or other facility and no embankment or structure is weakened or
damaged.
d. Repair any MDC damaged in jacking or boring operation.
e. Remove and replace any MDC damaged beyond repair at the Contractor’s
expense.
f. Immediately after installation of MDC, backfill shafts or t renches excavated
used to facilitate jacking and boring.
3. Boring
a. Bore from a shaft in an approved location provided for the boring equipment
and workmen.
b. Dispose of excavated material using a method approved by the Engineer.
c. Use water or other fluids in connection with the boring operation only as
necessary to lubricate cuttings.
d. Do not use jetting.
e. In unconsolidated soil formation, use a gel-forming colloidal drilling fluid
consisting of high-grade, carefully processed bentonite to consolidate cuttings
of the bit, seal the walls of the hole, and furnish lubrication for subsequent
removal of cuttings and immediate installation of conduit.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 50 - 10
COMMUNICATIONS MULTI-DUCT CONDUIT
Page 10 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
f. Allowable variations from line and grade are specified in Section 476.3A.
“Jacking.”
g. Pressure-grout any excavation of more than 1 in.
h. Use pilot hole or auger method for boring
1) Pilot Hole Method – Bore a 2 in. pilot hole the entire length of the
crossing, and check it for line and grade on the opposite end of the bore
from the work shaft. This pilot hole will serve as centerline for the larger
diameter hole to be bored.
2) Auger Method – Use a steel encasement pipe of the appropriate diameter
equipped with a cutter head to mechanically perform the excavation. Use
augers of sufficient diameter to convey the excavated mater to the work
shaft.
E. Aerial
1. Fasten all MDC attached to bridges or other structures with MDC straps, hangers,
or as directed by Engineer.
2. Submit details for attachment.
3. Submit details of method of installing MDC inside bridge decks (if MDC cannot be
attached to outside of bridge) to Engineer for approval.
4. Fit MDC ends with bushings or bell ends.
F. Locator Wire
1. Install a 1 conductor, No. 12 AWG solid copper locator wire in all MDC system
runs to facilitate locating underground optical fiber optic cables.
2. The wire is to be pulled into duct along with the optical fiber cable
3. Locator wire shall not occupy a duct by itself unless there is not any other cable
being installed in the multiduct.
4. The cable shall be continuous between ground boxes.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION
A. Final Surface
1. Repair removed existing surface by backfilling with material equal in composition
and density to the surrounding areas.
2. Replace any removed surfacing, such as asphalt pavement or concrete riprap, with
like material to equivalent condition.
3. Mark MDC as directed by Engineer.
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION
A. Backfilling
1. As soon as practical, backfill the excavation after placement of the conduit.
2. Backfill Material shall be free from:
a. Stones large enough to interfere with compaction,
b. Large or frozen lumps that will not break down readily under compaction, and
c. Wood or other extraneous material.
3. Obtain backfill material from excavation or other sources.
4. In areas not supporting a completed roadbed, retaining wall, or embankment, place
back fill in layers at most 8 in. deep (loose measurement).
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
26 05 50 - 11
COMMUNICATIONS MULTI-DUCT CONDUIT
Page 11 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
5. In areas supporting a portion of roadbed, retaining wall, or embankment:
a. Place backfill in uniform layers at most 6 in. deep (loose measurement), and
b. Compact each layer to meet the density requirements of the roadbed, retaining
wall, embankment material or as shown on plans.
6. Bring each layer of backfill material to the moisture content needed to obtain the
required density.
7. Use mechanical tamps or rammers to compact the backfill.
8. Rollers may be used to compact backfill if feasible.
9. Cohesion less material such as sand may be used for backfilling.
10. Compact cohesion less material using vibratory equipment, water-ponding, or a
combination of both.
B. Warning Tape
1. Prior to final backfill of trench place an underground Mylar marking tape, as
approved by the Engineer, over the MDC and located 6 in. below final grade, unless
shown otherwise on plans.
2. Cover entire length of the trench with the marking tape.
3. Use warning tape continuously imprinted with “CAUTION – CITY OF FORT
WORTH OPTICAL FIBER LINE BELOW.”
3.7 SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Test Inspections
1. Verify conduit is free from obstruction by pulling a spherical template having a
diameter of at least 75% of the inside diameter of the conduit through the conduit.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 10 00 - 1
SITE CLEARING
Page 1 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 31 10 00
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Preparation of right-of-way and other designated areas for construction operations
by removing and disposing of all obstructions including clearing and grubbing and
trees, when removal of such obstructions is not specifically shown on the Drawings
to be paid by other Sections. The City of Fort Worth’s Urban Forestry Ordinance
governs all tree removals.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 02 41 13 – Selective Site Demolition
4. Section 02 41 14 – Utility Removal/Abandonment
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Site Clearing
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by lump sum.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the lump sum price bid for “Site Clearing”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Pruning of designated trees and shrubs
2) Removal and disposal of trees, structures and obstructions
3) Backfilling of holes
4) Clean-up
2. Tree Removal (typically included in “Site Clearing”, but should be used if “Site
Clearing” is not a bid item)
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Tree Removal” for:
a) Various caliper ranges
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Pruning of designated trees and shrubs
2) Removal and disposal of structures and obstructions
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 10 00 - 2
SITE CLEARING
Page 2 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3) Grading and backfilling of holes
4) Excavation
5) Fertilization
6) Clean-up
3. Tree Removal and Transplantation
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Tree Transplant” for:
a) Various caliper ranges
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Pruning of designated trees and shrubs
2) Removal and disposal of structures and obstructions
3) Moving tree with truck mounted tree spade
4) Grading and backfilling of holes
5) Replanting tree at temporary location (determined by Contractor)
6) Maintaining tree until Work is completed
7) Replanting tree into original or designated location
8) Excavation
9) Fertilization
10) Clean-up
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Permits
1. Contractor shall obtain Tree Removal Permits and Urban Forestry Permits as
required by the City’s Tree Ordinance. (www.FortWorthTexas.gov)
B. Preinstallation Meetings
1. Hold a preliminary site clearing meeting and include the Contractor, City Arborist,
City Inspector, and the Project Manager for the purpose of reviewing the
Contractor’s tree removal plan. Clearly mark all trees to remain on the project site
prior to the meeting.
2. The Contractor will provide the City with a Disposal Letter in accordance to
Division 01.
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 10 00 - 3
SITE CLEARING
Page 3 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
A. All trees identified to be protected and/or preserved should be clearly flagged with
survey tape.
B. Following taping and prior to any removals or site clearing, the Contractor shall meet
with the City, the Engineer and the Landowner, if necessary, to confirm trees to be
saved.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Protection of Trees
1. Protect designated trees and prune trees and shrubs as shown on the Drawings.
Refer to the Drawings for tree protection details.
2. If the Drawings do not provide tree protection details, protected trees shall be
fenced by placing 6-foot tall metal T-posts in a square around the tree trunk with
the corners located on the canopy drip line, unless instructed otherwise.
3. When site conditions do not allow for the T-posts to be installed at the drip line, the
T-posts may be installed no less than 8 feet from the tree trunk. 4-foot high 12 ½
gauge stock fencing or orange plastic snow fence shall be attached to the T-posts to
form the enclosure.
4. Do not park equipment, service equipment, store materials, or disturb the root area
under the branches of trees designated for preservation.
5. When shown on the Drawings, treat cuts on trees with an approved tree wound
dressing within 20 minutes of making a pruning cut or otherwise causing damage to
the tree.
6. Trees and brush shall be mulched on-site.
a. Burning as a method of disposal is not allowed.
B. Hazardous Materials
1. The Contractor will notify the Engineer immediately if any hazardous or
questionable materials not shown on the Drawings are encountered. This includes;
but not limited to:
a. Floor tiles
b. Roof tiles
c. Shingles
d. Siding
e. Utility piping
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 10 00 - 4
SITE CLEARING
Page 4 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. The testing, removal, and disposal of hazardous materials will be in accordance
with Division 1.
C. Site Clearing
1. Clear areas shown on the Drawings of all obstructions, except those landscape
features that are to be preserved. Such obstructions include, but are not limited to:
a. Remains of buildings and other structures
b. Foundations
c. Floor slabs
d. Concrete
e. Brick
f. Lumber
g. Plaster
h. Septic tank drain fields
i. Abandoned utility pipes or conduits
j. Equipment
k. Trees
l. Fences
m. Retaining walls
n. Other items as specified on the Drawings
2. Remove vegetation and other landscape features not designated for preservation,
whether above or below ground, including, but not limited to:
a. Curb and gutter
b. Driveways
c. Paved parking areas
d. Miscellaneous stone
e. Sidewalks
f. Drainage structures
g. Manholes
h. Inlets
i. Abandoned railroad tracks
j. Scrap iron
k. Other debris
3. Remove culverts, storm sewers, manholes, and inlets in proper sequence to
maintain traffic and drainage in accordance with Section 02 41 14.
4. In areas receiving embankment, remove obstructions not designated for
preservation to 2 feet below natural ground.
5. In areas to be excavated, remove obstructions to 2 feet below the excavation level.
6. In all other areas, remove obstructions to 1 foot below natural ground.
7. When allowed by the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, cut trees and stumps
off to ground level.
a. Removal of existing structures shall be as per Section 02 41 13.
D. Disposal
1. Dispose of all trees within 24 hours of removal.
2. All materials and debris removed becomes the property of the Contractor, unless
otherwise stated on the Drawings.
3. The Contractor will dispose of material and debris off-site in accordance with local,
state, and federal laws and regulations.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 10 00 - 5
SITE CLEARING
Page 5 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 1.4.A Permits: Removed ordinance number and added City’s website address
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 23 16 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION
Page 1 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
SECTION 31 23 16 1
UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION 2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL 4
1.1 SUMMARY 5
A. Section Includes: 6
1. Excavate areas as shown on the Drawings or as directed. Removal of materials 7
encountered to the lines, grades, and typical sections shown on the Drawings and 8
removal from site. Excavations may include construction of 9
a. Roadways 10
b. Drainage Channels 11
c. Site Excavation 12
d. Excavation for Structures 13
e. Or any other operation involving the excavation of on-site materials 14
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 15
1. None. 16
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 17
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 18
2. Division 1 – General Requirements 19
3. Section 31 23 23 – Borrow 20
4. Section 31 24 00 – Embankments 21
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 22
A. Measurement and Payment 23
1. Excavation by Plan Quantity 24
a. Measurement 25
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the cubic yard in its final position 26
using the average end area method. Limits of measurement are shown on 27
the Drawings. 28
2) When measured by the cubic yard in its final position, this is a plans 29
quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown 30
in the proposal, unless modified by Article 11.04 of the General 31
Conditions. Additional measurements or calculations will be made if 32
adjustments of quantities are required. 33
b. Payment 34
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 35
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit 36
price bid per cubic yard of “Unclassified Excavation by Plan”. No 37
additional compensation will be allowed for rock or shrinkage/swell 38
factors, as these are the Contractor’s responsibility. 39
c. The price bid shall include: 40
1) Excavation 41
2) Excavation Safety 42
31 23 16 - 2
UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION
Page 2 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
3) Drying 1
4) Dust Control 2
5) Reworking or replacing the over excavated material in rock cuts 3
6) Hauling 4
7) Disposal of excess material not used elsewhere onsite 5
8) Scarification 6
9) Clean-up 7
2. Excavation by Surveyed Quantity 8
a. Measurement 9
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the cubic yard in its final position 10
calculated using the average end area or composite method. 11
a) The City will perform a reference survey once the Site has been cleared 12
to obtain existing ground conditions. 13
b) The City will perform a final post-construction survey. 14
c) The Contractor will be paid for the cubic yardage of Excavated material 15
calculated as the difference between the two surveys. 16
d) Partial payments will be based on estimated plan quantity 17
measurements calculated by the Engineer. 18
b. Payment 19
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 20
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit 21
price bid per cubic yard of “Unclassified Excavation by Survey”. 22
c. The price bid shall include: 23
1) Excavation 24
2) Excavation Safety 25
3) Drying 26
4) Dust Control 27
5) Reworking or replacing the over excavated material in rock cuts 28
6) Hauling 29
7) Disposal of excess material not used elsewhere onsite 30
8) Scarification 31
9) Clean-up 32
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 33
A. Definitions 34
1. Unclassified Excavation – Without regard to materials, all excavations shall be 35
considered unclassified and shall include all materials excavated. Any reference to 36
Rock or other materials on the Drawings or in the specifications is solely for the 37
City and the Contractor’s information and is not to be taken as a classification of 38
the excavation. 39
1.4 ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 40
A. The Contractor will provide the City with a Disposal Letter in accordance to Division 41
01. 42
31 23 16 - 3
UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION
Page 3 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 2
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 3
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 4
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE 5
A. Excavation Safety 6
1. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for making all excavations in a safe 7
manner. 8
2. All excavation and related sheeting and bracing shall comply with the requirements 9
of OSHA excavation safety standards 29 CFR part 1926 and state requirements. 10
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 11
A. Storage 12
1. Within Existing Rights-of-Way (ROW) 13
a. Soil may be stored within existing ROW, easements or temporary construction 14
easements, unless specifically disallowed in the Contract Documents. 15
b. Do not block drainage ways, inlets or driveways. 16
c. Provide erosion control in accordance with Section 31 25 00. 17
d. When the Work is performed in active traffic areas, store materials only in 18
areas barricaded as provided in the traffic control plans. 19
e. In non-paved areas, do not store material on the root zone of any trees or in 20
landscaped areas. 21
2. Designated Storage Areas 22
a. If the Contract Documents do not allow the storage of spoils within the ROW, 23
easement or temporary construction easement, then secure and maintain an 24
adequate storage location. 25
b. Provide an affidavit that rights have been secured to store the materials on 26
private property. 27
c. Provide erosion control in accordance with Section 31 25 00. 28
d. Do not block drainage ways. 29
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS 30
A. Existing Conditions 31
1. Any data which has been or may be provided on subsurface conditions is not 32
intended as a representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity between soils. It 33
is expressly understood that neither the City nor the Engineer will be responsible 34
for interpretations or conclusions drawn there from by the Contractor. 35
2. Data is made available for the convenience of the Contractor. 36
31 23 16 - 4
UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION
Page 4 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [NOT USED] 3
2.2 PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS 4
A. Materials 5
1. Unacceptable Fill Material 6
a. In-situ soils classified as ML, MH, PT, OL or OH in accordance with ASTM 7
D2487 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION 9
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 10
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 11
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 12
3.4 CONSTRUCTION 13
A. Accept ownership of unsuitable or excess material and dispose of material off-site 14
accordance with local, state, and federal regulations at locations. 15
B. Excavations shall be performed in the dry, and kept free from water, snow and ice 16
during construction with eh exception of water that is applied for dust control. 17
C. Separate Unacceptable Fill Material from other materials, remove from the Site and 18
properly dispose according to disposal plan. 19
D. Maintain drainage in the excavated area to avoid damage to the roadway sections and 20
proposed or existing structures. 21
E. Correct any damage to the subgrade caused by weather, at no additional cost to the 22
City. 23
F. Shape slopes to avoid loosening material below or outside the proposed grades. 24
Remove and dispose of slides as directed. 25
G. Rock Cuts 26
1. Excavate to finish grades. 27
2. In the event of over excavation due to contractor error below the lines and grades 28
established in the Drawings, use approved embankment material compacted in 29
accordance with Section 31 24 00 to replace the over excavated at no additional 30
cost to City. 31
H. Earth Cuts 32
1. Excavate to finish subgrade 33
31 23 16 - 5
UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION
Page 5 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
2. In the event of over excavation due to contractor error below the lines and grades 1
established in the Drawings, use approved embankment material compacted in 2
accordance with Section 31 24 00 to replace the over excavated at no additional 3
cost to City. 4
3. Manipulate and compact subgrade in accordance with Section 31 24 00. 5
3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED] 6
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 7
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 8
A. Subgrade Tolerances 9
1. Excavate to within 0.1 foot in all directions. 10
2. In areas of over excavation, Contractor provides fill material approved by the City 11
at no expense to the City. 12
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 13
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 14
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 15
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 16
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 17
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 18
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 19
END OF SECTION 20
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 1.2 - Measurement and Payment Section modified; Blue Text added for clarification
1/28/13 D. Johnson 1.2 – Modified Bid Item names in payment section to differentiate between Payment
Methods on bid list.
21
31 23 23 - 1
BORROW
Page 1 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
SECTION 31 23 23 1
BORROW 2
3
PART 1 - GENERAL 4
1.1 SUMMARY 5
A. Section Includes: 6
1. Furnish, place and compact Borrow material for grading. 7
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 8
1. None. 9
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 10
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 11
2. Division 1 – General Requirements 12
3. Section 31 23 16 – Unclassified Excavation 13
4. Section 31 24 00 – Embankments 14
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 15
A. Measurement and Payment 16
1. Borrow by Plan Quantity 17
a. Measurement 18
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the cubic yard in its final position 19
using the average end area method. Limits of measurement are shown on 20
the Drawings. 21
2) When measured by the cubic yard in its final position, this is a plans 22
quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown 23
in the proposal, unless modified by Article 11.04 of the General 24
Conditions. Additional measurements or calculations will be made if 25
adjustments of quantities are required. 26
b. Payment 27
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 28
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit 29
price bid per cubic yard of “Borrow by Plan” for the various borrow 30
materials. No additional compensation will be allowed for rock or 31
shrinkage/swell factors, as these are the Contractor’s responsibility. 32
c. The price bid shall include: 33
1) Transporting or hauling material 34
2) Furnishing, placing, compacting and finishing Borrow 35
3) Construction Water 36
4) Dust Control 37
5) Clean-up 38
6) Proof Rolling 39
7) Disposal of excess or waste material 40
8) Reworking or replacement of undercut material 41
31 23 23 - 2
BORROW
Page 2 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
2. Borrow by Surveyed Quantity 1
a. Measurement 2
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the cubic yard in its final position 3
calculated using the average end area or composite method. 4
a) The City will perform a reference survey once the Site has been cleared 5
to obtain existing ground conditions. 6
b) The City will perform a final post-construction survey. 7
c) The Contractor will be paid for the cubic yardage of Borrow material 8
calculated as the difference between the two surveys. 9
d) Partial payments will be based on estimated plan quantity 10
measurements calculated by the Engineer. 11
b. Payment 12
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 13
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit 14
price bid per cubic yard of “Borrow by Survey” for: 15
a) Various Borrow materials 16
c. The price bid shall include: 17
1) Transporting or hauling material 18
2) Furnishing, placing, compacting and finishing Borrow 19
3) Construction Water 20
4) Clean-up 21
5) Dust Control 22
6) Proof Rolling 23
7) Disposal of excess or waste material 24
8) Reworking or replacement of undercut material 25
3. Borrow by Delivered Quantity 26
a. Measurement 27
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the cubic yard of loose Borrow 28
material as delivered to the Site and recorded by truck ticket provided to the 29
City. 30
b. Payment 31
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 32
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit 33
price bid per cubic yard of “Borrow by Delivery” delivered to the Site and 34
recorded by truck ticket for: 35
a) Various Borrow materials 36
c. The price bid shall include: 37
1) Transporting or hauling material 38
2) Furnishing, placing, compacting and finishing Borrow 39
3) Construction Water 40
4) Clean-up 41
5) Dust Control 42
6) Proof Rolling 43
7) Disposal of excess or waste material 44
8) Reworking or replacement of undercut material 45
1.3 REFERENCES 46
A. Reference Standards 47
31 23 23 - 3
BORROW
Page 3 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference 1
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this 2
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 3
2. ASTM Standards 4
a. ASTM D2487, Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering 5
Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) 6
b. ASTM D4318-10, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and 7
Plasticity Index of Soils 8
c. ASTM D6913, Standard Test Methods for Particle-Size Distribution 9
(Gradation) of Soils Using Sieve Analysis 10
d. ASTM D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction 11
Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3) 12
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 13
1.5 SUBMITTALS 14
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 15
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to construction. 16
C. Submit laboratory tests reports for each soil borrow source used to supply general 17
borrow and select fill materials. 18
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 19
A. Shop Drawings 20
1. Stockpiled Borrow material 21
a. Provide a description of the storage of the delivered Borrow material only if the 22
Contract Documents do not allow storage of materials in the right-of-way of the 23
easement. 24
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 25
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 26
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE 27
A. Borrow material shall be tested prior to delivery to the Site. 28
1. Provide Proctor Test results, Gradation and Atterberg Limits for Borrow material 29
from each source. 30
a. All testing listed above shall be performed in terms of ASTM D698, ASTM 31
D6913 and ASTM D4318-10 respectively. 32
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 33
A. Delivery 34
1. Coordinate all deliveries and haul-off. 35
B. Storage 36
1. Within Existing Rights-of-Way (ROW) 37
a. Borrow materials may be stored within existing ROW, easements or temporary 38
construction easements, unless specifically disallowed in the Contract 39
Documents. 40
31 23 23 - 4
BORROW
Page 4 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
b. Do not block drainage ways, inlets or driveways. 1
c. Provide erosion control in accordance with Section 31 25 00. 2
d. Store materials only in areas barricaded as provided in the traffic control plans. 3
e. In non-paved areas, do not store material on the root zone of any trees or in 4
landscaped areas. 5
2. Designated Storage Areas 6
a. If the Contract Documents do not allow the storage of Borrow materials within 7
the ROW, easement or temporary construction easement, then secure and 8
maintain an adequate storage location. 9
b. Provide an affidavit that rights have been secured to store the materials on 10
private property. 11
c. Provide erosion control in accordance with Section 31 25 00. 12
d. Do not block drainage ways. 13
e. Only materials used for 1 working day will be allowed to be stored in the work 14
zone. 15
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 16
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 17
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 18
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [NOT USED] 19
2.2 PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS 20
A. Borrow 21
1. Additional soil beneath pavements, roadways, foundations and other structures 22
required to achieve the elevations shown on the Drawings. 23
2. Acceptable Fill Material 24
a. In-situ or imported soils classified as CL, CH, SC or GC in accordance with 25
ASTM D2487 26
b. Free from deleterious materials, boulders over 6 inches in size and organics 27
c. Can be placed free from voids 28
d. Must have 20 percent passing the number 200 sieve 29
3. Blended Fill Material 30
a. In-situ soils classified as SP, SM, GP or GM in accordance with ASTM D2487 31
b. Blended with in-situ or imported Acceptable Fill material to meet the 32
requirements of an Acceptable Fill Material 33
c. Free from deleterious materials, boulders over 6 inches in size and organics 34
d. Must have 20 percent passing the number 200 sieve 35
4. Select Fill 36
a. Classified as SC or CL in accordance with ASTM D2487 37
b. Liquid limit less than 35 38
c. Plasticity index between 8 and 20 39
5. Cement Stabilized Sand (CSS) 40
a. Sand or silty sand 41
b. Free of clay or plastic material 42
c. Minimum of 4 percent cement content of Type I/II portland cement 43
31 23 23 - 5
BORROW
Page 5 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
d. 100 to 150 psi compressive strength at 2 days in accordance with ASTM 1
D1633, Method A 2
e. 200 to 250 psi compressive strength at 23 days in accordance with ASTM 3
D1633, Method A 4
f. Mix in a stationary pug mill, weigh-batch or continuous mixing plant 5
2.3 ASSEMBLY OR FABRICATION TOLERANCES [NOT USED] 6
2.4 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 7
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION 9
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 10
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 11
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 12
3.4 INSTALLATION 13
A. All Borrow placement shall be performed in accordance to Section 31 24 00. 14
3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED] 15
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 16
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 17
A. Field quality control will be performed in accordance to Section 31 24 00. 18
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 19
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 20
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 21
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 22
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 23
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 24
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 25
END OF SECTION 26
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 1.2 - Measurement and Payment Section modified; Blue Text added for clarification
1/28/13 D. Johnson 1.2 – Modified Bid Item names in payment section to differentiate between Payment
Methods on bid list.
31 23 23 - 6
BORROW
Page 6 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
1
31 24 00 - 1
EMBANKMENTS
Page 1 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
SECTION 31 24 00 1
EMBANKMENTS 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes: 5
1. Transporting and placement of Acceptable Fill Material within the boundaries of 6
the Site for construction of: 7
a. Roadways 8
b. Embankments 9
c. Drainage Channels 10
d. Site Grading 11
e. Any other operation involving the placement of on-site materials 12
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 13
1. None. 14
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 15
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 16
2. Division 1 – General Requirements 17
3. Section 31 23 16 – Unclassified Excavation 18
4. Section 31 23 23 – Borrow 19
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 20
A. Measurement and Payment 21
1. Embankments by Plan Quantity 22
a. Measurement 23
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the cubic yard in its final position 24
using the average end area method. Limits of measurement are shown on 25
the Drawings. 26
2) When measured by the cubic yard in its final position, this is a plans 27
quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown 28
in the proposal, unless modified by Article 11.04 of the General 29
Conditions. Additional measurements or calculations will be made if 30
adjustments of quantities are required. 31
b. Payment 32
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 33
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit 34
price bid per cubic yard of “Embankment by Plan”. No additional 35
compensation will be allowed for rock or shrinkage/swell factors, as these 36
are the Contractor’s responsibility. 37
c. The price bid shall include: 38
1) Transporting or hauling material 39
2) Placing, compacting, and finishing Embankment 40
3) Construction Water 41
4) Dust Control 42
31 24 00 - 2
EMBANKMENTS
Page 2 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
5) Clean-up 1
6) Proof Rolling 2
7) Disposal of excess materials 3
8) Reworking or replacement of undercut material 4
2. Embankments by Surveyed Quantity 5
a. Measurement 6
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the cubic yard in its final position 7
calculated using the average end area or composite method. 8
a) The City will perform a reference survey once the Site has been cleared 9
to obtain existing ground conditions. 10
b) The City will perform a final post-construction survey. 11
c) The Contractor will be paid for the cubic yardage of Embankment 12
calculated as the difference between the two surveys. 13
d) Partial payments will be based on estimated plan quantity 14
measurements calculated by the Engineer. 15
b. Payment 16
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 17
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit 18
price bid per cubic yard of “Embankment by Survey”. 19
c. The price bid shall include: 20
1) Transporting or hauling material 21
2) Placing, compacting, and finishing Embankment 22
3) Construction Water 23
4) Dust Control 24
5) Clean-up 25
6) Proof Rolling 26
7) Disposal of excess materials 27
8) Reworking or replacement of undercut material 28
1.3 REFERENCES 29
A. Reference Standards 30
1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard 31
published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this 32
specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 33
2. ASTM Standards 34
a. ASTM D4318-10, Test Procedure for Determining Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, 35
and Plasticity Index of Soils 36
b. ASTM D4943-08, Standard Test Method for Shrinkage Factors of Soils by the 37
Wax Method 38
c. ASTM D698-07e1, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction 39
Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort 40
d. ASTM D1557-09, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction 41
Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort 42
e. ASTM D7382-08, Standard Test for Determination of Maximum Dry Unit 43
Weight and Water Content Range for Effective Compaction of Granular Soils 44
Using a Vibrating Hammer 45
f. ASTM D1556-07, Standard Test for Density and Unit Weight of Soil In-Place 46
by the Sand Cone Method 47
31 24 00 - 3
EMBANKMENTS
Page 3 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
1.4 ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1
A. Sequencing 2
1. Sequence work such that calls of proctors are complete in accordance with ASTM 3
D698 prior to commencement of construction activities. 4
1.5 SUBMITTALS 5
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 6
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to construction 7
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 8
A. Shop Drawings 9
1. Stockpiled material 10
a. Provide a description of the storage of the excavated material only if the 11
Contract Documents do not allow storage of materials in the right-of-way or the 12
easement 13
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 14
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 15
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 16
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 17
A. Storage 18
1. Within Existing Rights-of-Way (ROW) 19
a. Soil may be stored within existing ROW, easements or temporary construction 20
easements, unless specifically disallowed in the Contract Documents. 21
b. Do not block drainage ways, inlets or driveways. 22
c. Provide erosion control in accordance with Section 31 25 00. 23
d. When the Work is performed in active traffic areas, store materials only in 24
areas barricaded as provided in the traffic control plans. 25
e. In non-paved areas, do not store material on the root zone of any trees or in 26
landscaped areas. 27
2. Designated Storage Areas 28
a. If the Contract Documents do not allow the storage within the ROW, easement 29
or temporary construction easement, then secure and maintain an adequate 30
storage location. 31
b. Provide an affidavit that rights have been secured to store the materials on 32
private property. 33
c. Provide erosion control in accordance with Section 31 25 00. 34
d. Do not block drainage ways. 35
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS 36
A. Existing Conditions 37
1. Any data which has been or may be provided on subsurface conditions is not 38
intended as a representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity between soils. It 39
is expressly understood that neither the City nor the Engineer will be responsible 40
for interpretations or conclusions drawn there from by the Contractor. 41
31 24 00 - 4
EMBANKMENTS
Page 4 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
2. Data is made available for the convenience of the Contractor. 1
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [NOT USED] 4
2.2 PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS 5
A. Materials 6
1. Acceptable Fill Material 7
a. In-situ or imported soils classified as CL, CH, SC or GC in accordance with 8
ASTM D2487 9
b. Free from deleterious materials, boulders over 6 inches in size and organics 10
c. Can be placed free from voids 11
d. Must have 20 percent passing the number 200 sieve 12
2. Blended Fill Material 13
a. In-situ soils classified as GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, or SM in accordance with 14
ASTM D2487 15
b. Blended with in-situ or imported acceptable backfill material to meet the 16
requirements of an Acceptable Backfill Material 17
c. Free from deleterious materials, boulders over 6 inches in size and organics 18
d. Must have 20 percent passing the number 200 sieve 19
3. Unacceptable Fill Material 20
a. In-situ soils classified as ML, MH, PT, OL or OH in accordance with ASTM 21
D2487 22
4. Select Fill 23
a. Classified as SC or CL in accordance with ASTM D2487 24
b. Liquid limit less than 35 25
c. Plasticity index between 8 and 20 26
2.3 ASSEMBLY OR FABRICATION TOLERANCES [NOT USED] 27
2.4 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 28
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 29
PART 3 - EXECUTION 30
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 31
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 32
3.3 PREPARATION 33
A. Protection of In-Place Conditions 34
1. Pavement 35
a. Conduct activities in such a way that does not damage existing pavement that is 36
designated to remain. 37
31 24 00 - 5
EMBANKMENTS
Page 5 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
b. Repair or replace any pavement damaged due to the negligence of the 1
contractor outside the limits designated for pavement removal at no additional 2
cost 3
2. Trees 4
a. When operating outside of existing ROW, stake permanent and temporary 5
construction easements. 6
b. Restrict all construction activities to the designated easements and ROW. 7
c. Flag and protect all trees designated to remain in accordance with Section 31 10 8
00. 9
d. Conduct embankments in a manner such that there is no damage to the tree 10
canopy. 11
e. Prune or trim tree limbs as specifically allowed by the Drawings or as 12
specifically allowed by the City. 13
1) Pruning or trimming may only be accomplished with equipment 14
specifically designed for tree pruning or trimming. 15
3. Above ground Structures 16
a. Protect all above ground structures adjacent to the construction. 17
4. Traffic 18
a. Maintain existing traffic, except as modified by the traffic control plan, and in 19
accordance with Section 34 71 13. 20
b. Do not block access to driveways or alleys for extended periods of time unless: 21
1) Alternative access has been provided 22
2) Proper notification has been provided to the property owner or resident 23
3) It is specifically allowed in the traffic control plan 24
3.4 INSTALLATION 25
A. Embankments General 26
1. Placing and Compacting Embankment Material 27
a. Perform fill operation in an orderly and systematic manner using equipment in 28
proper sequence to meet the compaction requirements 29
b. Scarify and loosen the unpaved surface areas, except rock, to a depth of at least 30
6 inches, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings 31
c. Place fill on surfaces free from trees, stumps, roots, vegetation, or other 32
deleterious materials 33
d. Bench slopes before placing material. 34
e. Begin filling in the lowest section or the toe of the work area 35
f. When fill is placed directly or upon older fill, remove debris and any loose 36
material and proof roll existing surface. 37
g. After spreading the loose lifts to the required thickness and adjusting its 38
moisture content as necessary, simultaneously recompact scarified material 39
with the placed embankment material. 40
h. Roll with sufficient number passes to achieve the minimum required 41
compaction. 42
i. Provide water sprinkled as necessary to achieve required moisture levels for 43
specified compaction 44
j. Do not add additional lifts until the entire previous lift is properly compacted. 45
2. Surface Water Control 46
a. Grade surface horizontally but provide with sufficient longitudinal and 47
transverse slope to allow for runoff of surface water from every point. 48
31 24 00 - 6
EMBANKMENTS
Page 6 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
b. Conduct fills so that no obstruction to drainage from any other sections of fill is 1
created. 2
c. Install temporary dewatering sumps in low areas during filling where excess 3
amounts of runoff collect. 4
d. Compact uniformly throughout. Keep surfaces of fill reasonably smooth and 5
free from humps and hollows that would prevent proper uniform compaction. 6
e. Do not place fill during or shortly after rain events which prevent proper work 7
placement of the material and compaction 8
f. Prior to resuming compaction operations, remove muddy material off the 9
surface to expose firm and compacted materials 10
B. Embankments for Roads 11
1. Only Acceptable Fill Material will be allowed for roadways 12
2. Embankments for roadbeds shall be constructed in layers approximately parallel to 13
the finished grade of the street 14
3. Construct generally to conform to the cross section of the subgrade section as 15
shown in the Drawings. 16
4. Establish grade and shape to the typical sections shown on the Drawings 17
5. Maintain finished sections of embankment to the grade and compaction 18
requirements until the project is accepted. 19
C. Earth Embankments 20
1. Earth embankment is mainly composed of material other than rock. Construct 21
embankments in successive layers, evenly distributing materials in lengths suited 22
for sprinkling and rolling. 23
2. Rock or Concrete 24
a. Obtain approval from the City prior to incorporating rock and broken concrete 25
produced by the construction project in the lower layers of the embankment. 26
b. No Rock or Concrete will be permitted in embankments in any location where 27
future utilities are anticipated. 28
c. When the size of approved rock or broken concrete exceeds the layer thickness 29
place the rock and concrete outside the limits of the proposed structure or 30
pavement. Cut and remove all exposed reinforcing steel from the broken 31
concrete. 32
3. Move the material dumped in piles or windrows by blading or by similar methods 33
and incorporate it into uniform layers. 34
4. Featheredge or mix abutting layers of dissimilar material for at least 100 feet to 35
ensure there are no abrupt changes in the material. 36
5. Break down clods or lumps of material and mix embankment until a uniform 37
material is attained. 38
D. Rock Embankments 39
1. Rock embankment is mainly composed of rock. 40
2. Rock Embankments for roadways are only allowed when specifically designated on 41
the Drawings. 42
3. Construct rock embankments in successive layers for the full width of the roadway 43
cross-section with a depth of 18-inches or less. 44
31 24 00 - 7
EMBANKMENTS
Page 7 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
4. The layer depth for large rock sizes shall not exceed a depth of 18-inches in any 1
case. Fill voids created by the large stone matrix with smaller stones during the 2
placement and filling operations. 3
5. Ensure the depth of the embankment layer is greater than the maximum dimension 4
of any rock. 5
6. Do not place rock greater than 18-inches in its maximum dimension. 6
7. Construct the final layer with graded material so that the density and uniformity is 7
in accordance compaction requirements. 8
8. The upper or final layer of rock embankments shall contain no material larger than 9
4 inches in their maximum dimension. 10
E. Density 11
1. Compact each layer until the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698 12
is achieved. 13
a. Not Under Roadway or Structure: 14
1) areas to be compacted in the open, not beneath any structure, pavement, 15
flatwork, or is a minimum of 1foot outside of the edge of any structure, 16
edge of pavement, or back of curb. 17
a) Compact each layer to a minimum of 90 percent Standard Proctor 18
Density. 19
b. Embankments under future paving: 20
1) Compact each layer to a minimum of 95 percent standard proctor density 21
with a moisture content not to exceed +4 percent or -2 percent of optimum 22
moisture or as indicated on the Drawings 23
c. Embankments under structures: 24
1) Compacted each layer as indicated on the Drawings 25
F. Maintenance of Moisture and Reworking 26
1. Maintain the density and moisture content once all requirements are met. 27
2. For soils with a PI greater than 15, maintain the moisture content no lower than 4 28
percentage points below optimum. 29
3. Rework the material to obtain the specified compaction when the material loses the 30
required stability, density, moisture, or finish. 31
4. Alter the compaction methods and procedures on subsequent work to obtain 32
specified density as directed by the City. 33
3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED] 34
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 35
3.7 FIELD QUAILITY CONTROL 36
A. Field Tests and Inspections 37
1. Proctors 38
a. The City will perform Proctors in accordance with ASTM D698. 39
b. Test results will generally be available to within 4 calendar days and distributed 40
to: 41
1) Contractor 42
2) City Project Manager 43
3) City Inspector 44
31 24 00 - 8
EMBANKMENTS
Page 8 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
4) Engineer 1
c. Notify the City if the characteristic of the soil changes. 2
d. City will perform new proctors for varying soils: 3
1) When indicated in the geotechnical investigation in the Appendix 4
2) If notified by the Contractor 5
3) At the convenience of the City 6
e. Embankments where different soil types are present and are blended, the 7
proctors shall be based on the mixture of those soils. 8
2. Proof Rolling 9
a. Embankments under Future Pavement 10
1) City Project Representative must be on-site during proof rolling operations. 11
2) Use equipment that will apply sufficient load to identify soft spots that rut 12
or pump. 13
a) Acceptable equipment includes fully loaded single-axle water truck 14
with a 1500 gallon capacity. 15
3) Make at least 2 passes with the proof roller (down and back = 1 pass). 16
4) Offset each trip by at most 1 tire width. 17
5) If an unstable or non-uniform area is found, correct the area. 18
6) Correct 19
a) Soft spots that rut or pump greater than 3/4 inch. 20
b) Areas that are unstable or non-uniform 21
7) If a non-uniform area is found then correct the area. 22
b. Embankments Not Under Future Paving 23
1) No Proof Rolling is required. 24
3. Density Testing of Embankments 25
a. Density Test shall be in conformance with ASTM D2922. 26
b. For Embankments under future pavement: 27
1) The City will perform density testing twice per working day when 28
compaction operations are being conducted. 29
2) The testing lab shall take a minimum of 3 density tests, but the number of 30
test shall be appropriate for the area being compacted. 31
3) Testing shall be representative of the current lift being compacted. 32
4) Special attention should be placed on edge conditions. 33
c. For Embankments not under future pavement or structures: 34
1) The City will perform density testing once working day when compaction 35
operations are being conducted. 36
2) The testing lab shall take a minimum of 3 density tests. 37
3) Testing shall be representative of the current lift being compacted. 38
d. Make the area where the embankment is being placed available for testing. 39
e. The City will determine the location of the test. 40
f. The City testing lab will provide results to Contractor and the City’s Inspector 41
upon completion of the testing. 42
g. A formal report will be posted to the City’s Buzzsaw site within 48 hours. 43
h. Test reports shall include: 44
1) Location of test by station number 45
2) Time and date of test 46
3) Depth of testing 47
4) Field moisture 48
5) Dry density 49
31 24 00 - 9
EMBANKMENTS
Page 9 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised January 28, 2013
6) Proctor identifier 1
7) Percent Proctor Density 2
B. Non-Conforming Work 3
1. All non-conforming work shall be removed and replaced. 4
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 5
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 6
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 7
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 8
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 9
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 10
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 11
END OF SECTION 12
13
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson
1.2 – Added possible measurement and payment procedures and Blue
text for instructions on how the methods should be applied
2.2.2.a added GW and SW material classifications
1/28/13 D. Johnson 1.2 – Modified Bid Item names in payment section to differentiate
between Payment Methods on bid list.
14
31 25 00 - 1
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
Page 1 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 31 25 00
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Implementation of the project’s Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)
and installation, maintenance and removal of erosion and sediment control devices
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan <1 acre
a. Measurement
1) This Item is considered subsidiary to the various Items bid.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item are subsidiary to the structure or Items being bid and no other
compensation will be allowed.
2. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan ≥ 1 acre
a. Measurement for this Item shall be by lump sum.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the lump sum price bid for “SWPPP ≥ 1 acre”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Preparation of SWPPP
2) Implementation
3) Permitting fees
4) Installation
5) Maintenance
6) Removal
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM Standard:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
lump sum and subsidiary to the various Items bid.
31 25 00 - 2
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
Page 2 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a. ASTM D3786, Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of Textile
Fabrics—Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method
b. ASTM D4632, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation
of Geotextiles
c. ASTM D4751, Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size
of a Geotextile
d. ASTM D4833, Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of
Geomembranes and Related Products
3. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) TPDES General Permit No.
TXR150000
4. TxDOT Departmental Material Specifications (DMS)
a. DMS-6230 “Temporary Sediment Control Fence Fabric”
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)
B. TCEQ Notice of Intent (NOI) for Storm Water Discharges Associated with
Construction Activity under the TPDES General Permit
C. Construction Site Notice
D. TCEQ Notice of Termination (NOT) for Storm Water Discharges Associated with
Construction Activity under the TPDES General Permit
E. Notice of Change (if applicable)
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS
A. Rock Filter Dams
1. Aggregate
a. Furnish aggregate with hardness, durability, cleanliness and resistance to
crumbling, flaking and eroding acceptable to the Engineer.
b. Provide the following:
1) Types 1, 2 and 4 Rock Filter Dams
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 25 00 - 3
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
Page 3 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a) Use 3 to 6 inch aggregate.
2) Type 3 Rock Filter Dams
a) Use 4 to 8 inch aggregate.
2. Wire
a. Provide minimum 20 gauge galvanized wire for the steel wire mesh and tie
wires for Types 2 and 3 rock filter dams
b. Type 4 dams require:
1) Double-twisted, hexagonal weave with a nominal mesh opening of 2½
inches x 3 ¼ inches
2) Minimum 0.0866 inch steel wire for netting
3) Minimum 0.1063 inch steel wire for selvages and corners
4) Minimum 0.0866 inch for binding or tie wire
B. Geotextile Fabric
1. Place the aggregate over geotextile fabric meeting the following criteria:
a. Tensile Strength of 250 pounds, per ASTM D4632
b. Puncture Strength of 135 pounds, per ASTM D4833
c. Mullen Burst Rate of 420 psi, per ASTM D3786
d. Apparent Opening Size of No. 20 (max), per ASTM D4751
C. Sandbag Material
1. Furnish sandbags meeting Section 2.5 except that any gradation of aggregate may
be used to fill the sandbags.
D. Stabilized Construction Entrances
1. Provide materials that meet the details shown on the Drawings and this Section.
a. Provide crushed aggregate for long and short-term construction exits.
b. Furnish aggregates that are clean, hard, durable and free from adherent coatings
such as salt, alkali, dirt, clay, loam, shale, soft or flaky materials and organic
and injurious matter.
c. Use 3 to 5 inch coarse aggregate with a minimum thickness of 12 inches.
d. The aggregate shall be placed over a geotextile fabric meeting the following
criteria:
1) Tensile Strength of 300 pounds, per ASTM D4632
2) Puncture Strength of 120 pounds, per ASTM D4833
3) Mullen Burst Rate of 600 psi, per ASTM D3786
4) Apparent Opening Size of No. 40 (max), per ASTM D4751
E. Embankment for Erosion Control
1. Provide rock, loam, clay, topsoil or other earth materials that will form a stable
embankment to meet the intended use.
F. Sandbags
1. Provide sandbag material of polypropylene, polyethylene or polyamide woven
fabric with a minimum unit weight of 4 ounces per square yard, a Mullen burst-
strength exceeding 300 psi, and an ultraviolet stability exceeding 70 percent.
2. Use natural coarse sand or manufactured sand meeting the gradation given in Table
1 to fill sandbags.
3. Filled sandbags must be 24 to 30 inches long, 16 to 18 inches wide, and 6 to 8
inches thick.
Table 1
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 25 00 - 4
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
Page 4 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
Sand Gradation
Sieve # Maximum Retained (% by Weight)
4 3 percent
100 80 percent
200 95 percent
G. Temporary Sediment Control Fence
1. Provide a net-reinforced fence using woven geo-textile fabric.
2. Logos visible to the traveling public will not be allowed.
a. Fabric
1) Provide fabric materials in accordance with DMS-6230, “Temporary
Sediment Control Fence Fabric.”
b. Posts
1) Provide essentially straight wood or steel posts with a minimum length of
48 inches, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
2) Soft wood posts must be at least 3 inches in diameter or nominal 2 x 4 inch
3) Hardwood posts must have a minimum cross-section of 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inch
4) T- or L-shaped steel posts must have a minimum weight of 1.3 pounds per
foot.
c. Net Reinforcement
1) Provide net reinforcement of at least 12-1/2 gauge galvanized welded wire
mesh, with a maximum opening size of 2 x 4 inch, at least 24 inches wide,
unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
d. Staples
1) Provide staples with a crown at least 3/4 inch wide and legs 1/2 inch long.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan
1. Develop and implement the project’s Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan
(SWPPP) in accordance with the TPDES Construction General Permit TXR150000
requirements. Prevent water pollution from storm water runoff by using and
maintaining appropriate structural and nonstructural BMPs to reduce pollutants
discharges to the MS4 from the construction site.
B. Control Measures
1. Implement control measures in the area to be disturbed before beginning
construction, or as directed. Limit the disturbance to the area shown on the
Drawings or as directed.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 25 00 - 5
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
Page 5 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. Control site waste such as discarded building materials, concrete truck washout
water, chemicals, litter and sanitary waste at the construction site.
3. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor cannot control soil erosion and
sedimentation resulting from construction operations, the Engineer will limit the
disturbed area to that which the Contractor is able to control. Minimize disturbance
to vegetation.
4. Immediately correct ineffective control measures. Implement additional controls as
directed. Remove excavated material within the time requirements specified in the
applicable storm water permit.
5. Upon acceptance of vegetative cover by the City, remove and dispose of all
temporary control measures, temporary embankments, bridges, matting, falsework,
piling, debris, or other obstructions placed during construction that are not a part of
the finished work, or as directed.
C. Do not locate disposal areas, stockpiles, or haul roads in any wetland, water body, or
streambed.
D. Do not install temporary construction crossings in or across any water body without the
prior approval of the appropriate resource agency and the Engineer.
E. Provide protected storage area for paints, chemicals, solvents, and fertilizers at an
approved location. Keep paints, chemicals, solvents, and fertilizers off bare ground and
provide shelter for stored chemicals.
F. Installation and Maintenance
1. Perform work in accordance with the TPDES Construction General Permit
TXR150000.
2. When approved, sediments may be disposed of within embankments, or in areas
where the material will not contribute to further siltation.
3. Dispose of removed material in accordance with federal, state, and local
regulations.
4. Remove devices upon approval or when directed.
a. Upon removal, finish-grade and dress the area.
b. Stabilize disturbed areas in accordance with the permit, and as shown on the
Drawings or directed.
5. The Contractor retains ownership of stockpiled material and must remove it from
the project when new installations or replacements are no longer required.
G. Rock Filter Dams for Erosion Control
1. Remove trees, brush, stumps and other objectionable material that may interfere
with the construction of rock filter dams.
2. Place sandbags as a foundation when required or at the Contractor’s option.
3. For Types 1, 2, 3, and 5, place the aggregate to the lines, height, and slopes
specified, without undue voids.
4. For Types 2 and 3, place the aggregate on the mesh and then fold the mesh at the
upstream side over the aggregate and secure it to itself on the downstream side with
wire ties, or hog rings, or as directed.
5. Place rock filter dams perpendicular to the flow of the stream or channel unless
otherwise directed.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 25 00 - 6
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
Page 6 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
6. Construct filter dams according to the following criteria, unless otherwise shown on
the Drawings:
a. Type 1 (Non-reinforced)
1) Height - At least 18 inches measured vertically from existing ground to top
of filter dam
2) Top Width - At least 2 feet
3) Slopes - At most 2:1
b. Type 2 (Reinforced)
1) Height - At least 18 inches measured vertically from existing ground to top
of filter dam
2) Top Width - At least 2 feet
3) Slopes - At most 2:1
c. Type 3 (Reinforced)
1) Height - At least 36 inches measured vertically from existing ground to top
of filter dam
2) Top Width - At least 2 feet
3) Slopes - At most 2:1
d. Type 4 (Sack Gabions)
1) Unfold sack gabions and smooth out kinks and bends.
2) For vertical filling, connect the sides by lacing in a single loop–double loop
pattern on 4- to 5-inches spacing. At 1 end, pull the end lacing rod until
tight, wrap around the end, and twist 4 times. At the filling end, fill with
stone, pull the rod tight, cut the wire with approximately 6 inches
remaining, and twist wires 4 times.
3) For horizontal filling, place sack flat in a filling trough, fill with stone, and
connect sides and secure ends as described above.
4) Lift and place without damaging the gabion.
5) Shape sack gabions to existing contours.
e. Type 5
1) Provide rock filter dams as shown on the Drawings.
H. Construction Entrances
1. When tracking conditions exist, prevent traffic from crossing or exiting the
construction site or moving directly onto a public roadway, alley, sidewalk, parking
area, or other right of way areas other than at the location of construction entrances.
2. Place the exit over a foundation course, if necessary.
a. Grade the foundation course or compacted subgrade to direct runoff from the
construction exits to a sediment trap as shown on the Drawings or as directed.
3. At drive approaches, make sure the construction entrance is the full width of the
drive and meets the length shown on the Drawings.
a. The width shall be at least 14 feet for 1-way and 24 feet for 2-way traffic for all
other points of ingress or egress or as directed by the Engineer.
I. Earthwork for Erosion Control
1. Perform excavation and embankment operations to minimize erosion and to remove
collected sediments from other erosion control devices.
a. Excavation and Embankment for Erosion Control Measures
1) Place earth dikes, swales or combinations of both along the low crown of
daily lift placement, or as directed, to prevent runoff spillover.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 25 00 - 7
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
Page 7 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2) Place swales and dikes at other locations as shown on the Drawings or as
directed to prevent runoff spillover or to divert runoff.
3) Construct cuts with the low end blocked with undisturbed earth to prevent
erosion of hillsides.
4) Construct sediment traps at drainage structures in conjunction with other
erosion control measures as shown on the Drawings or as directed.
5) Where required, create a sediment basin providing 3,600 cubic feet of
storage per acre drained, or equivalent control measures for drainage
locations that serve an area with 10 or more disturbed acres at 1 time, not
including offsite areas.
b. Excavation of Sediment and Debris
1) Remove sediment and debris when accumulation affects the performance of
the devices, after a rain, and when directed.
J. Sandbags for Erosion Control
1. Construct a berm or dam of sandbags that will intercept sediment-laden storm water
runoff from disturbed areas, create a retention pond, detain sediment and release
water in sheet flow.
2. Fill each bag with sand so that at least the top 6 inches of the bag is unfilled to
allow for proper tying of the open end.
3. Place the sandbags with their tied ends in the same direction.
4. Offset subsequent rows of sandbags 1/2 the length of the preceding row.
5. Place a single layer of sandbags downstream as a secondary debris trap.
6. Place additional sandbags as necessary or as directed for supplementary support to
berms or dams of sandbags or earth.
K. Temporary Sediment-Control Fence
1. Provide temporary sediment-control fence near the downstream perimeter of a
disturbed area to intercept sediment from sheet flow.
2. Incorporate the fence into erosion-control measures used to control sediment in
areas of higher flow. Install the fence as shown on the Drawings, as specified in this
Section, or as directed.
a. Post Installation
1) Embed posts at least 18 inches deep, or adequately anchor, if in rock, with a
spacing of 6 to 8 feet and install on a slight angle toward the run-off source.
b. Fabric Anchoring
1) Dig trenches along the uphill side of the fence to anchor 6 to 8 inches of
fabric.
2) Provide a minimum trench cross-section of 6 x 6 inches
3) Place the fabric against the side of the trench and align approximately 2
inches of fabric along the bottom in the upstream direction.
4) Backfill the trench, then hand-tamp.
c. Fabric and Net Reinforcement Attachment
1) Unless otherwise shown under the Drawings, attach the reinforcement to
wooden posts with staples, or to steel posts with T-clips, in at least 4 places
equally spaced.
2) Sewn vertical pockets may be used to attach reinforcement to end posts.
3) Fasten the fabric to the top strand of reinforcement by hog rings or cord
every 15 inches or less.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 25 00 - 8
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
Page 8 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
d. Fabric and Net Splices
1) Locate splices at a fence post with a minimum lap of 6 inches attached in at
least 6 places equally spaced, unless otherwise shown under the Drawings.
a) Do not locate splices in concentrated flow areas.
2) Requirements for installation of used temporary sediment-control fence
include the following:
a) Fabric with minimal or no visible signs of biodegradation (weak fibers)
b) Fabric without excessive patching (more than 1 patch every 15 to 20
feet)
c) Posts without bends
d) Backing without holes
3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING
A. Waste Management
1. Remove sediment, debris and litter as needed.
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Erosion control measures remain in place and are maintained until all soil disturbing
activities at the project site have been completed.
B. Establish a uniform vegetative cover with a density of 70 percent on all unpaved areas,
on areas not covered by permanent structures, or in areas where permanent erosion
control measures (i.e. riprap, gabions, or geotextiles) have been employed.
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE
A. Install and maintain the integrity of temporary erosion and sedimentation control
devices to accumulate silt and debris until earthwork construction and permanent
erosion control features are in place or the disturbed area has been adequately stabilized
as determined by the Engineer.
B. If a device ceases to function as intended, repair or replace the device or portions
thereof as necessary.
C. Perform inspections of the construction site as prescribed in the Construction General
Permit TXR150000.
D. Records of inspections and modifications based on the results of inspections must be
maintained and available in accordance with the permit.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 25 00 - 9
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
Page 9 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 37 00 - 1
RIPRAP
Page 1 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 31 37 00
RIPRAP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Furnishing and installing concrete, stone, cement-stabilized, or special riprap.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In -Place Concrete
4. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sediment Control
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for this Item shall be by the face square yard to the depth
specified of material complete in place. Volume will be computed on the basis
of the measured area and type, verified by field measurements.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price
bid per square yard of “Riprap” installed for:
1) Various types
2) Various thicknesses
3) Various void-filling techniques
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Furnishing, hauling, and placing riprap
b. Filter fabric
c. Expansion joint material
d. Concrete and reinforcing steel
e. Excavation of toe wall trenches, as applicable
f. Excavation below natural ground or bottom of excavated channel, as applicable
g. Shaping of slopes, as applicable
h. Bedding
i. Grout and mortar
j. Scales
k. Test weights
l. Clean-up
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 37 00 - 2
RIPRAP
Page 2 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM Standards
a. ASTM C136-06, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
b. ASTM D7370-09, Standard Test Method for Determination of Relative Density
and Absorption of Fine, Coarse, and Blended Aggregate Using Combined
Vacuum Saturation and Rapid Submersion
c. ASTM C5240-04, Standard Test Method for, Testing Rock Slabs to Evaluate
the Soundness of Riprap by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate
d. ASTM D4632-08, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and
Elongation of Geotextiles
e. ASTM D4533-04, Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of
Geotextiles
f. ASTM D751-06, Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics
g. ASTM D4751-04, Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening
Size of a Geotextile
h. ASTM D4491-99a, Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of
Geotextiles by Permittivity
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [NOT USED]
2.2 PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS
A. Concrete Riprap
1. Use concrete with a compressive strength of 4,000 psi at 28-days, according to
Section 03 30 00, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
B. Stone Riprap
1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, use durable natural stone with a
minimum bulk specific gravity of 2. Provide stone that has a maximum weight loss
of 18 percent after 5 cycles of magnesium sulfate solution and 14 percent after 5
cycles of sodium sulfate solution.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 37 00 - 3
RIPRAP
Page 3 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. For all types of stone riprap perform a size verification test on the first 5,000 square
yards of finished riprap stone at a location determined by the Engineer. Weigh each
stone in a square test area with the length of each side of the square equal to 3 times
the specified riprap thickness. The weight of the stones, excluding spalls, should be
as specified below. Additional tests may be required. Do not place additional riprap
until the initial 5,000 square yards of riprap has been approved.
3. When specified, provide grout and mortar as defined as 1 part Portland cement to 3
parts sand and mixed with water until it achieves a consistency that will flow into
and completely fill all voids.
4. Provide filter fabric in accordance with Section 31 25 00. For slab riprap, provide
the filter fabric type shown on the Drawings
a. Large
1) Use stones between 50 and 250 pounds with a minimum of 50 percent of
the stones heavier than 100 pounds
b. Medium
1) Use stones between 50 and 250 pounds with a minimum of 40 percent of
the stones heavier than 100 pounds Use stones with at least 1 broad flat
surface.
c. Block
1) Use stones between 50 and 250 pounds. Use stones that are at least 3 inches
in their least dimension. Use stones that are at least twice as wide as they
are thick. When shown on the Drawings or approved, material may consist
of broken concrete removed under the Contract or from other approved
sources. Before placement of each piece of broken concrete, cut exposed
reinforcement flush with all surfaces.
d. Slab
1) Use boulders or quarried rock that meets the gradation requirements of
Table 1. Both the width and the thickness of each piece of riprap must be a
least 1/3 of the length. When shown on the Drawings or as approved,
material may consist of broken concrete removed under the Contract or
from other approved sources. Before placement of each piece of broken
concrete, cut exposed reinforcement flush with all surfaces.
2) Provide bedding stone that in-place meets the gradation requirements
shown in Table 2 or as otherwise shown on the Drawings.
Table 1
Riprap Gradation Requirements
Thickness Maximum Size
(lb.)
90 percent Size1
(lb.)
50& Size1
(lb.)
8 percent Size,
Minimum (lb.)
12 in. 200 80-180 30-75 3
15in. 320 170-300 60-165 20
18in. 530 290-475 105-220 22
21in. 800 460-720 175-300 25
24in. 1,000 550-850 200-325 30
30in. 2,600 1,150-2.50 400-900 40
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 37 00 - 4
RIPRAP
Page 4 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
Table 2
Bedding Stone Gradation
Sieve Size (Square Mesh) Percent by Weight Passing
3 inches 100
1-1/2 inches 50-80
3/4 inches 20-60
No. 4 0-15
No. 10 0-5
C. Special Riprap
1. Furnish materials for special riprap according to the Drawings.
2.3 ASSEMBLY OR FABRICATION TOLERANCES [NOT USED]
2.4 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Dress slopes and protected areas to the line and grade shown on the Drawings before
the placement of riprap. Place riprap and toe walls according to details and dimensions
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
B. Concrete Riprap
1. Reinforce concrete riprap with No. 3 reinforcing bars spaced at a maximum of 18
inches in each direction unless otherwise shown. Provide a minimum 6-inch lap at
all splices. At the edge of the riprap, provide a minimum horizontal cover of 1 inch
and a maximum cover of 3 inches. Place the first parallel bar at most 6 inches from
the edge of concrete. Use approved supports to hold the reinforcement
approximately equidistant from the top and bottom surface of the slab. Adjust
reinforcement during concrete placement to maintain correct position.
2. As directed, sprinkle or sprinkle and consolidate the subgrade before the concrete is
placed. All surfaces must be moist when concrete is placed.
3. Compact each layer to a minimum of 95 percent standard proctor density with a
moisture content not to exceed +4 percent or -2 percent of optimum moisture or as
indicated on the Drawings.
4. After placing the concrete, compact and shape it to conform to the dimensions
shown on Drawings. After it has set sufficiently to avoid slumping, finish the
surface with a wood float to secure a smooth surface or broom finish as approved.
5. Immediately after the finishing operation, cure the riprap according to Section 03
30 00.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 37 00 - 5
RIPRAP
Page 5 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
C. Stone Riprap
1. Provide the following types of stone riprap when shown on the Drawings.
a. Dry Riprap
1) Dry riprap is stone riprap with voids filled with only spalls or small stones.
b. Grouted Riprap
1) Grouted riprap is Type Large, Medium, or Block stone riprap with voids
grouted after all the stones are in place.
c. Mortared Riprap
1) Mortared riprap is Medium stone riprap laid and mortared as each stone is
placed.
2. Use spalls and small stones lighter than 25 pounds to fill open joints and voids in
stone riprap, and place to a tight fit.
3. Do not place mortar or grout when the air temperature is below 35 degrees
Fahrenheit.
4. Protect work from rapid drying for at least 3 days after placement. Unless otherwise
approved, place filter fabric with the length running up and down the slope. Ensure
fabric has a minimum overlap of 2 feet.
5. Secure fabric with nails or pins. Use nails at least 2 inches long with washers or U-
shaped pins with legs at least 9 inches long. Space nails or pins at a maximum of 10
feet in each direction and 5 feet along the seams. Alternative anchorage and spacing
may be used when approved.
6. Large
a. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 1 and as shown on the Drawings. Place
stones in a single layer with close joints so that most of their weight is carried
by the earth and not by the adjacent stones.
b. Place the upright axis of the stones at an angle of approximately 90 degrees to
the embankment slope.
c. Place each course from the bottom of the embankment upward with the larger
stones in the lower courses.
d. Fill open joints between stones with spalls.
e. Place stones to create a uniform finished top surface. Do not exceed a 6-inch
variation between the tops of adjacent stones. Replace, embed deeper, or chip
away stones that project more than the allowable amount above the finished
surface.
f. When the Drawings require Large stone riprap to be grouted, prevent earth,
sand, or foreign material from filling the spaces between the stones. After the
stones are in place, thoroughly wet the stones, fill the spaces between the stones
with grout, and pack. Sweep the surface of the riprap with a stiff broom after
grouting.
7. Medium
a. Dry Placement
1) Construct riprap as shown in Figure 2. Set the flat surface on a prepared
horizontal earth bed, and overlap the underlying course to secure a lapped
surface.
2) Place the large stones first, roughly arranged in close contact. Fill the
spaces between the large stones with suitably sized stones placed to leave
the surface evenly stepped and conforming to the contour required.
3) Place stone to drain water down the face of the slope.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 37 00 - 6
RIPRAP
Page 6 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b. Grouting
1) Construct riprap as shown in Figure 3. Size, shape, and lay large flat-
surfaced stones to produce an even surface with minimal voids.
2) Place stones with the flat surface facing upward parallel to the slope. Place
the largest stones near the base of the slope.
3) Fill spaces between the larger stones with stones of suitable size, leaving
the surface smooth, tight, and conforming to the contour required.
4) Place the stones to create a plane surface with a maximum variation of 6
inches in 10 feet from true plane. Provide the same degree of accuracy for
warped and curved surfaces.
5) Prevent earth, sand or foreign material from filling the spaces between the
stones. After the stones are in place, thoroughly wet them, fill the spaces
between them with grout, and pack. Sweep the surface with a stiff broom
after grouting.
c. Mortaring
1) Construct riprap as shown in Figure 2. Lap courses as described for dry
placement. Before placing mortar, wet the stones thoroughly.
2) As the larger stones are placed, bed them in fresh mortar and shove
adjacent stones into contact with one another.
3) After completing the work, spread all excess mortar forced out during
placement of the stones uniformly over them to fill all voids completely.
Point up all joints roughly either with flush joints or with shallow, smooth-
raked joints as directed.
D. Block
1. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 4. Place stones on a bed excavated for the base
course. Bed the base course of stone well into the ground with the edges in contact.
Bed and place each succeeding course in even contact with the preceding course.
2. Use spalls and small stones to fill any open joints and voids in the riprap. Ensure
the finished surface presents an even, tight surface, true to the line and grades of the
typical sections.
3. When the Drawings require grouting Block stone riprap, prevent earth, sand, or
foreign material from filling the spaces between the stones. After the stones are in
place, wet them thoroughly, fill the spaces between them with grout, and pack.
Sweep the surface with a stiff broom after grouting.
E. Slab
1. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 5. Place riprap stone on the slopes within the
limits shown on the Drawings. Place stone for riprap on the bedding material to
produce a reasonably well-graded mass of riprap with the minimum practicable
percentage of voids.
2. Construct the riprap to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings or staked in the
field. A tolerance of +6 inches and -0 inch from the slope line and grades shown on
the Drawings is allowed in the finished surface of the riprap.
3. Place riprap to its full thickness in a single operation. Avoid displacing the bedding
material. Ensure that the entire mass of stones in their final position is free from
objectionable pockets of small stones and clusters of larger stones.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 37 00 - 7
RIPRAP
Page 7 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
4. Do not place riprap in layers, and do not place it by dumping it into chutes,
dumping it from the top of the slope, pushing it from the top of the slope, or any
method likely to cause segregation of the various sizes.
5. Obtain the desired distribution of the various sizes of stones throughout the mass by
selective loading of material at the quarry or other source or by other methods of
placement that will produce the specified results.
6. Rearrange individual stones by mechanical equipment or by hand if necessary to
obtain a reasonably well-graded distribution of stone sizes.
F. Special Riprap
1. Construct special riprap according to the Drawings.
3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS
Figure 1 - Large stone riprap, dry or grouted.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 37 00 - 8
RIPRAP
Page 8 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
Figure 2 - Medium stone riprap, dry or grouted.
Figure 3 - Medium stone riprap, mortared.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 37 00 - 9
RIPRAP
Page 9 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
Figure 4 – Block stone riprap, dry or grouted.
Figure 5 – Slab stone riprap
END OF SECTION
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
31 37 00 - 10
RIPRAP
Page 10 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 3.4.B. – defined compaction requirements beneath concrete rip rap
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 01 29 - 1
CONCRETE PAVING REPAIR
Page 1 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS[Insert Project Number] CPN-102575
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 32 01 29 1
CONCRETE PAVING REPAIR 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section includes: 5
1. Concrete pavement repair to include, but not limited to: 6
a. Utility cuts (water, sanitary sewer, drainage, etc.) 7
b. Warranty work 8
c. Repairs of damage caused by Contractor 9
d. Any other concrete pavement repair needed during the course of construction 10
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 11
1. None. 12
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 13
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 14
2. Division 1 - General Requirements 15
3. Section 32 01 18 - Temporary Asphalt Paving Repair 16
4. Section 32 12 16 - Asphalt Paving 17
5. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving 18
6. Section 33 05 10 - Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 19
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 20
A. Measurement and Payment 21
1. Concrete Pavement Repair 22
a. Measurement 23
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the square yard of Concrete 24
Pavement Repair for various: 25
32 01 29 - 2
CONCRETE PAVING REPAIR
Page 2 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS[Insert Project Number] CPN-102575
Revised December 20, 2012
a) Street types 1
2) Limits of repair will be based on the time of service of the existing 2
pavement. The age of the pavement will need to be determined by the 3
Engineer through coordination with the City. For pavement ages: 4
a) 10 years or less: repair entire panel 5
b) Greater than 10 years: repair to limits per Drawings 6
b. Payment 7
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 8
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the 9
unit price bid per square yard of Concrete Pavement Repair 10
c. The price bid shall include: 11
1) Shaping and fine grading the placement area 12
2) Furnishing and applying all water required 13
3) Furnishing, loading and unloading, storing, hauling and handling all 14
concrete 15
4) Furnishing, loading and unloading, storing, hauling and handling all base 16
material 17
5) Mixing, placing, finishing and curing all concrete 18
6) Furnishing and installing reinforcing steel 19
7) Furnishing all materials and placing longitudinal, warping, expansion and 20
contraction joints, including all steel dowels, dowel caps and load 21
transmission units required, wire and devices for placing, holding and 22
supporting the steel bar, load transmission units, and joint filler in the 23
proper position; for coating steel bars where required by the Drawings 24
8) Sealing joints 25
9) Monolithically poured curb 26
10) Cleanup 27
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 28
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 29
A. Permitting 30
1. Obtain Street Use Permit to make utility cuts in the street from the Transportation 31
and Public Works Department in conformance with current ordinances. 32
32 01 29 - 3
CONCRETE PAVING REPAIR
Page 3 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS[Insert Project Number] CPN-102575
Revised December 20, 2012
2. Transportation and Public Works Department will inspect paving repair after 1
construction. 2
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 3
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 4
A. Concrete Mix Design: submit for approval in accordance with Section 32 13 13. 5
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 6
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 7
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 8
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 9
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS 10
A. Weather Conditions: Place concrete as specified in Section 32 13 13. 11
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 13
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 14
2.2 MATERIALS 15
A. Embedment and Backfill: see Section 33 05 10. 16
B. Base material: Concrete base: see Section 32 13 13. 17
C. Concrete: see Section 32 13 13. 18
1. Concrete paving: Class H or Class HES. 19
2. Replace concrete to the specified thickness. 20
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 21
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 22
PART 3 - EXECUTION 23
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 24
32 01 29 - 4
CONCRETE PAVING REPAIR
Page 4 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS[Insert Project Number] CPN-102575
Revised December 20, 2012
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 1
3.3 PREPARATION 2
A. Replace a continuous section if multiple repairs are closer than 10 feet apart from edge 3
of one repair to the edge of a second repair. 4
B. If the cut is to be covered, use steel plates of sufficient strength and thickness to support 5
traffic. 6
1. Construct a transition of hot-mix or cold-mix asphalt from the top of the steel plate 7
to the existing pavement to create a smooth riding surface. 8
a. Hot-mix or cold-mix asphalt: conform to the requirements of Section 32 12 16. 9
C. Surface Preparation: mark pavement cut repairs for approval by the City. 10
3.4 INSTALLATION 11
A. Sawing 12
1. General 13
a. Saw cut perpendicular to the surface to full pavement depth. 14
b. Saw cut the edges of pavement and appurtenances damaged subsequent to 15
sawing to remove damaged areas. 16
c. Such saw cuts shall be parallel to the original saw cut and to neat straight lines. 17
2. Sawing equipment 18
a. Power-driven 19
b. Manufactured for the purpose of sawing pavement 20
c. In good operating condition 21
d. Shall not spall or facture concrete adjacent to the repair area 22
3. Repairs: In true and straight lines to dimensions shown on the Drawings 23
4. Utility Cuts 24
a. In a true and straight line on both sides of the trench 25
b. Minimum of 12 inches outside the trench walls 26
5. Prevent dust and residues from sawing from entering the atmosphere or drainage 27
facilities. 28
32 01 29 - 5
CONCRETE PAVING REPAIR
Page 5 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS[Insert Project Number] CPN-102575
Revised December 20, 2012
B. Removal 1
1. Use care in removing concrete to be repaired to prevent spalling or fracturing 2
concrete adjacent to the repair area. 3
C. Base: as specified in Drawings 4
D. Concrete Paving 5
1. Concrete placement: in accordance with Section 32 13 13. 6
2. Reinforce concrete replacement: as specified in Drawings 7
3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 8
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 9
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 10
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 11
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 12
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 13
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 14
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 15
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 16
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 17
END OF SECTION 18
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson
1.2.A – Modified Items to be included in price bid; Added blue text for clarification
of repair width on utility trench repair
2.2.C.1 – Changed to Class P to Class H
19
32 11 23 - 1
FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES
Page 1 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 32 11 23
FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Foundation course for surface course or for other base course composed of flexible
base constructed in one or more courses in conformity with the typical section.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for this Item will be by the square yard of Flexible Base Course
for various:
1) Depths
2) Types
3) Gradations
2. Payment
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price
bid per square yard of Flexible Base Course.
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Preparation and correction of subgrade
b. Furnishing of material
c. Hauling
d. Blading
e. Sprinkling
f. Compacting
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Definitions
1. RAP – Recycled Asphalt Pavement.
B. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard
published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 23 - 2
FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES
Page 2 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))
3. Texas Department of Transportation (TXDOT):
a. Tex-104-E, Determining Liquid Limits of Soils
b. Tex-106-E, Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils
c. Tex-107-E, Determining the Bar Linear Shrinkage of Soils
d. Tex-110-E, Particle Size Analysis of Soils
e. Tex-116-E, Ball Mill Method for Determining the Disintegration of Flexible
Base Material
f. Tex-117-E, Triaxial Compression for Disturbed Soils and Base Materials
g. Tex-411-A, Soundness of Aggregate Using Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium
Sulfate
h. Tex-413-A, Determining Deleterious Material in Mineral Aggregate
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Furnish uncontaminated materials of uniform quality that meet the requirements of
the Drawings and specifications.
2. Obtain materials from approved sources.
3. Notify City of changes to material sources.
4. The City may sample and test project materials at any time before compaction
throughout the duration of the project to assure specification compliance.
B. Aggregate
1. Furnish aggregate of the type and grade shown on the Drawings and conforming to
the requirements of Table 1.
2. Each source must meet Table 1 requirements for liquid limit, plastiCity index, and
wet ball mill for the grade specified.
3. Do not use additives such as but not limited to lime, cement, or fly ash to modify
aggregates to meet the requirements of Table 1, unless shown on the Drawings.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 23 - 3
FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES
Page 3 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
Table 1
Material Requirements
Property Test Method Grade 1 Grade 2
Master gradation sieve
size (% retained)
Tex-110-E
2-1/2 in. – 0
1-3/4 in. 0 0–10
7/8 in. 10–35 –
3/8 in. 30–50 –
No. 4 45–65 45–75
No. 40 70–85 60–85
Liquid limit, % max.1 Tex-104-E 35 40
PlastiCity index, max.1 Tex-106-E 10 12
Wet ball mill, % max.2
Tex-116-E
40 45
Wet ball mill, % max.
increase passing the
No. 40 sieve
20 20
Classification3
Tex-117-E
1.0 1.1–2.3
Min. compressive
strength3, psi
lateral pressure 0 psi 45 35
lateral pressure 15 psi 175 175
1. Determine plastic index in accordance with Tex-107-E (linear
shrinkage) when liquid limit is unattainable as defined in
Tex-104-E.
2. When a soundness value is required by the Drawings, test
material in accordance with Tex-411-A.
3. Meet both the classification and the minimum compressive
strength, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
4. Material Tolerances
a. The City may accept material if no more than 1 of the 5 most recent gradation
tests has an individual sieve outside the specified limits of the gradation.
b. When target grading is required by the Drawings, no single failing test may
exceed the master grading by more than 5 percentage points on sieves No. 4
and larger or 3 percentage points on sieves smaller than No. 4.
c. The City may accept material if no more than 1 of the 5 most recent plasticity
index tests is outside the specified limit. No single failing test may exceed the
allowable limit by more than 2 points.
5. Material Types
a. Do not use fillers or binders unless approved.
b. Furnish the type specified on the Drawings in accordance with the following:
1) Type A
a) Crushed stone produced and graded from oversize quarried aggregate
that originates from a single, naturally occurring source.
b) Do not use gravel or multiple sources.
2) Type B
a) Only for use as base material for temporary pavement repairs.
b) Do not exceed 20 percent RAP by weight unless shown on Drawings.
3) Type D
a) Type A material or crushed concrete.
b) Crushed concrete containing gravel will be considered Type D
material.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 23 - 4
FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES
Page 4 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
c) The City may require separate dedicated stockpiles in order to verify
compliance.
d) Crushed concrete must meet the following requirements:
(1) Table 1 for the grade specified.
(2) Recycled materials must be free from reinforcing steel and other
objectionable material and have at most 1.5 percent deleterious
material when tested in accordance with TEX-413-A.
C. Water
1. Furnish water free of industrial wastes and other objectionable matter.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General
1. Shape the subgrade or existing base to conform to the typical sections shown on the
Drawings or as directed.
2. When new base is required to be mixed with existing base:
a. Deliver, place, and spread the new flexible base in the required amount.
b. Manipulate and thoroughly mix the new base with existing material to provide
a uniform mixture to the specified depth before shaping.
B. Subgrade Compaction
1. Proof roll the roadbed before pulverizing or scarifying in accordance with the
following:
a. Proof Rolling
1) City Project Representative must be on-site during proof rolling operations.
2) Use equipment that will apply sufficient load to identify soft spots that rut
or pump.
a) Acceptable equipment includes fully loaded single-axle water truck
with a 1500 gallon capacity.
3) Make at least 2 passes with the proof roller (down and back = 1 pass).
4) Offset each trip by at most 1 tire width.
5) If an unstable or non-uniform area is found, correct the area.
b. Correct
1) Soft spots that rut or pump greater than 3/4 inch
2) Areas that are unstable or non-uniform
2. Installation of base material cannot proceed until compacted subgrade approved by
the City.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 23 - 5
FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES
Page 5 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Construct each layer uniformly, free of loose or segregated areas, and with the
required density and moisture content.
2. Provide a smooth surface that conforms to the typical sections, lines, and grades
shown on the Drawings or as directed.
3. Haul approved flexible base in clean, covered trucks.
B. Equipment
1. General
a. Provide machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper execution of the
work.
2. Rollers
a. The Contractor may use any type of roller to meet the production rates and
quality requirements of the Contract unless otherwise shown on the Drawings
or directed.
b. When specific types of equipment are required, use equipment that meets the
specified requirements.
c. Alternate Equipment.
1) Instead of the specified equipment, the Contractor may, as approved,
operate other compaction equipment that produces equivalent results.
2) Discontinue the use of the alternate equipment and furnish the specified
equipment if the desired results are not achieved.
d. City may require Contractor to substitute equipment if production rate and
quality requirements of the Contract are not met.
C. Placing
1. Spread and shape flexible base into a uniform layer by approved means the same
day as delivered unless otherwise approved.
2. Place material such that it is mixed to minimize segregation.
3. Construct layers to the thickness shown on the Drawings, while maintaining the
shape of the course.
4. Where subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches in thickness, construct in 2 or more
courses of equal thickness.
5. Minimum lift depth: 3 inches
6. Control dust by sprinkling.
7. Correct or replace segregated areas as directed.
8. Place successive base courses and finish courses using the same construction
methods required for the first course.
D. Compaction
1. General
a. Compact using density control unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
b. Multiple lifts are permitted when shown on the Drawings or approved.
c. Bring each layer to the moisture content directed. When necessary, sprinkle the
material to the extent necessary to provide not less than the required density.
d. Compact the full depth of the subbase or base to the extent necessary to remain
firm and stable under construction equipment.
2. Rolling
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 23 - 6
FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES
Page 6 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed towards the center,
overlapping on successive trips by at least 1/2 the width of the roller unit.
b. On superelevated curves, begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the
high side.
c. Offset alternate trips of the roller.
d. Operate rollers at a speed between 2 and 6 mph as directed.
e. Rework, recompact, and refinish material that fails to meet or that loses
required moisture, density, stability, or finish before the next course is placed or
the project is accepted.
f. Continue work until specification requirements are met.
g. Proof roll the compacted flexible base in accordance with the following:
1) Proof Rolling
a) City Project Representative must be on-site during proof rolling
operations.
b) Use equipment that will apply sufficient load to identify soft spots that
rut or pump.
(1) Acceptable equipment includes fully loaded single-axle water truck
with a 1500 gallon capacity.
c) Make at least 2 passes with the proof roller (down and back = 1 pass).
d) Offset each trip by at most 1 tire width.
e) If an unstable or non-uniform area is found, correct the area.
2) Correct
a) Soft spots that rut or pump greater than 3/4 inch.
b) Areas that are unstable or non-uniform.
3. Tolerances
a. Maintain the shape of the course by blading.
b. Completed surface shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical sections
shown on the Drawings to the established lines and grades.
c. For subgrade beneath paving surfaces, correct any deviation in excess of 1/4
inch in cross section in length greater than 16 feet measured longitudinally by
loosening, adding or removing material. Reshape and recompact by sprinkling
and rolling.
d. Correct all fractures, settlement or segregation immediately by scarifying the
areas affected, adding suitable material as required. Reshape and recompact by
sprinkling and rolling.
e. Should the subbase or base course, due to any reason, lose the required
stability, density and finish before the surfacing is complete, it shall be
recompacted at the sole expense of the Contractor.
4. Density Control
a. Minimum Density: 95 percent compaction as determined by ASTM D698.
b. Moisture content: minus 2 to plus 4 of optimum.
E. Finishing
1. After completing compaction, clip, skin, or tight-blade the surface with a
maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of approximately 1/4 inch.
2. Remove loosened material and dispose of it at an approved location.
3. Seal the clipped surface immediately by rolling with an appropriate size pneumatic
tire roller until a smooth surface is attained.
4. Add small increments of water as needed during rolling.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 23 - 7
FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES
Page 7 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
5. Shape and maintain the course and surface in conformity with the typical sections,
lines, and grades as shown on the Drawings or as directed.
6. In areas where surfacing is to be placed, correct grade deviations greater than 1/4
inch in 16 feet measured longitudinally or greater than 1/4 inch over the entire
width of the cross-section.
7. Correct by loosening, adding, or removing material.
8. Reshape and recompact in accordance with 3.4.C.
3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Density Test
1. City to measure density of flexible base course.
a. Notify City Project Representative when flexible base ready for density testing.
b. Spacing directed by City (1 per block minimum).
c. City Project Representative determines location of density testing.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 29 - 1
LIME TREATED BASE COURSES
Page 1 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 32 11 29
LIME TREATED BASE COURSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Treating subgrade, subbase and base courses by the pulverization, addition of lime,
mixing and compacting the mix material to the required density.
2. Item applies to the natural ground, embankment, existing pavement; base or
subbase courses placed and shall conform to the typical section, lines and grades
shown on the Drawings.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 - General Requirements
3. Section 31 23 23 - Borrow
4. Section 32 11 23 - Flexible Base Courses
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Hydrated Lime
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the ton (dry weight) of Hydrated
Lime used to prepare slurry at the job site.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per ton of Hydrated Lime.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing the material
2) All freight involved
3) All unloading, storing, and handling
2. Commercial Lime Slurry
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the ton (dry weight) as calculated
from the minimum percent dry solids content of the slurry multiplied by the
weight of the slurry in tons delivered.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per ton of Commercial Lime Slurry.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing the material
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 29 - 2
LIME TREATED BASE COURSES
Page 2 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2) All freight involved
3) All unloading, storing, and handling
3. Quicklime
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the ton (dry weight) of Quicklime.
Measurement for Quicklime in slurry form shall be measured by the ton
(dry weight) of the Quicklime used to prepare the slurry.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per ton of Quicklime.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing the material
2) All freight involved
3) All unloading, storing, and handling
4. Lime Treatment
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the square yard of surface area as
established by the widths shown on the Drawings and the lengths measured
at placement.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per square yard of Lime Treatment applied for:
a) Various depths
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Preparing the roadbed
2) Loosening, pulverizing application of lime, water content in the slurry
mixture and the mixing water
3) Mixing, shaping, sprinkling, compacting, finishing, curing and maintaining
4) Performing all manipulations required
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Definitions
1. Hydrated Lime: dry powdered material consisting of calcium hydroxide.
2. Commercial Lime Slurry: liquid mixture of hydrated lime solids and water
delivered to a project in slurry form.
3. Quicklime: dry material consisting of calcium oxide furnished in either of two
grades:
a. Grade DS – grade of “pebble” quicklime suitable for use in the preparation of
slurry for wet placing.
b. Grade S – finely graded quicklime for use only in the preparation of slurry for
wet placing.
B. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard
published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 29 - 3
LIME TREATED BASE COURSES
Page 3 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))
b. D6938, Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil
and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
3. Texas Department of Transportation (TXDOT):
a. Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing
b. Tex-140-E, Measuring Thickness of Pavement Layer
c. Tex-600-J, Sampling and Testing of Hydrated Lime, Quicklime and
Commercial Lime Slurry
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTLAS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Truck Delivered Lime
1. Each truck ticket shall bear the weight of lime measured on certified scales.
2. Submit delivery tickets, certified by supplier, that include weight with each bulk
delivery of lime to the site.
1.11 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Start lime application only when the air temperature is at least 35°F and rising or is at
least 40°F. Measure temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat.
B. Suspend application when the City determines that weather conditions are unsuitable.
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Furnish uncontaminated materials of uniform quality that meet the requirements of
the Drawings and specifications.
2. Notify the City of the proposed material sources and of changes to material sources.
3. Obtain verification from the City that the specification requirements are met before
using the sources.
4. The City may sample and test project materials at any time before compaction.
B. Lime
1. Hydrated Lime
a. pumpable suspension of solids in water
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 29 - 4
LIME TREATED BASE COURSES
Page 4 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b. solids portion of the mixture when considered as a basis of “solids content,”
shall consist of principally hydrated lime of a quality and fineness sufficient to
meet the chemical and physical requirements.
2. Dry Lime: Do not use unless approved by City.
3. Quicklime
a. Use quicklime only when specified by the City.
b. dry material consisting of essentially calcium oxide.
c. Furnished in either of two grades:
1) Grade DS
2) Grade S
4. Furnish lime that meets the following requirements
a. Chemical Requirements
Table 2
Lime Chemical Requirements
Hydrated
Lime
Commercial Lime
Slurry
Quicklime
Total “active” lime
content, percent by
weight
90.0 Min 87.0 Min
Unhydrated lime
content, percent by
weight CaO
5.0 Max 87.0 Min
“Free Water”
content, percent by
weight water
5.0 Max
b. Physical Requirements
Table 3
Lime Physical Requirements
Hydrated
Lime
Commercial Lime
Slurry
Quicklime
Wet Sieve Requirement, As
percentage by Weight
Residue:
Retained on No. 6 sieve 0.2 Max 0.2 Max 8.0 Max1
Retained on No. 30 sieve 4.0 Max 4.0 Max
Dry Sieve Requirement, As
percentage by Weight
Residue:
Retained on a 1-in sieve 0.0
Retained on a 3/4 –in sieve 10.0 Max
Retained on a No. 100
sieve
Grade Ds – 80 Min
Grade S – no limits
Retained on a No. 6 sieve 0.2 Max 0.2 Max 8.0 Max1
1 The amount total ”active” lime content, as CaO, in the material retained on the No. 6 sieve must not
exceed 2.0% by weight of the original quicklime.
c. Slurry Grades
Table 4
Lime Slurry Grades
Minimum Dry Solids Contents
by Percentage of the Slurry
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 29 - 5
LIME TREATED BASE COURSES
Page 5 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
Grade 1 31
Grade 2 35
Grade 3 46
C. Flexible Base Courses: Furnish base material that meets the requirements of Section 32
11 23, for the type and grade shown on the Drawings, before the addition of lime.
D. Water: Furnish water free of industrial wastes and other objectionable material.
E. Borrow: See Section 31 23 23.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Shape the subgrade or existing base to conform to the typical sections shown on the
Drawings or as directed.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Produce a completed course of treated material containing:
a. uniform lime mixture, free from loose or segregated areas.
b. uniform density and moisture content.
c. well bound for full depth.
d. with smooth surface and suitable for placing subsequent courses.
2. Maximum layer depth of lime treatment in single layer: 8 inches.
3. For treated subgrade exceeding 8 inches deep, pulverize, apply lime, mix, compact
and finish in equal layers not exceeding 5 inches deep.
B. Equipment
1. General: Provide machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper execution
of the work.
2. Rollers
a. The Contractor may use any type of roller to meet the production rates and
quality requirements of the Contract unless otherwise shown on the Drawings
or directed.
b. When specific types of equipment are required, use equipment that meets the
specified requirements.
c. Alternate Equipment
1) Instead of the specified equipment, the Contractor may, as approved,
operate other compaction equipment that produces equivalent results.
2) Discontinue the use of the alternate equipment and furnish the specified
equipment if the desired results are not achieved.
d. City may require Contractor to substitute equipment if production rate and
quality requirements of the Contract are not met.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 29 - 6
LIME TREATED BASE COURSES
Page 6 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3. Storage Facility
a. Store quicklime and dry hydrated lime in closed, weatherproof containers.
4. Slurry Equipment
a. Use slurry tanks equipped with agitation devices to slurry hydrated lime or
quicklime on the project or other approved location.
b. The City may approve other slurrying methods.
c. Provide a pump for agitating the slurry when the distributor truck is not
equipped with an agitator.
5. Pulverization Equipment
a. Provide pulverization equipment that:
1) Cuts and pulverizes material uniformly to the proper depth with cutters that
plane to a uniform surface over the entire width of the cut
2) Provides a visible indication of the depth of cut at all times, and uniformly
mixes the materials
C. Pulverization
1. Pulverize or scarify existing material after shaping so that 100 percent passes a 2
1/2 inch sieve.
2. If the material cannot be uniformly processed to the required depth in a single pass,
excavate and windrow the material to expose a secondary grade to achieve
processing to depth as shown in the Drawings.
D. Application of Lime
1. Uniformly apply lime as shown on the Drawings or as directed.
2. Add lime at the percentage specified in Drawings.
3. Apply lime only on an area where mixing can be completed during the same
working day.
4. Minimize dust and scattering of lime by wind. Do not apply lime when wind
conditions, in the opinion of the City, cause blowing lime to become dangerous to
traffic or objectionable to adjacent property owners.
5. Slurry Placement
a. Hydrated Lime
1) Mix Lime with water and apply slurry
2) Apply Type B, commercial lime slurry, with a lime percentage not less
applicable for grade used
3) Distribute lime at the rate shown on the Drawings
4) Make successive passes over a measured surface of roadway until the
proper moisture and lime content have been achieved.
b. Quicklime
1) Spread the residue for the Quicklime slurrying procedure uniformly over
the length of the roadway.
2) Residue is primarily inert material with little stabilizing value; however,
may contain a small amount of Quicklime particles that slake slowly. A
concentration of these particles could cause the compacted stabilized
material to swell during slaking.
E. Mixing
1. Begin mixing within 6 hours of application of lime.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 29 - 7
LIME TREATED BASE COURSES
Page 7 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. Hydrated lime exposed to the open air for 6 hours or more between application and
mixing, or that experiences excessive loss due to washing or blowing, will not be
accepted for payment.
3. Thoroughly mix the material and lime using approved equipment.
4. Mix until a homogeneous, friable mixture of material and lime is obtained, free
from all clods and lumps.
5. Do not mix greater than 1 inch deeper than the stabilization depth specified.
6. Materials containing plastic clay or other materials that are not readily mixed with
lime shall be mixed as thoroughly as possible at the time of lime application,
brought to the proper moisture content and sealed with a pneumatic roller.
7. Allow the mixture to cure for 72 hours or as directed by City.
8. When pebble grade quicklime is used, allow the mixture to cure for 2 to 4 days.
9. Sprinkle the treated materials during the mixing and curing operation to achieve
adequate hydration and proper moisture content.
10. After curing, resume mixing until a homogeneous, friable mixture is obtained.
11. After mixing, City will sample the mixture at roadway moisture and test in
accordance with Tex-101-E, Part III, to determine compliance with the gradation
requirements in Table 5.
Table 5
Gradation Requirements (Minimum % Passing)
Sieve Size Base
1-3/4 in. 100
3/4 in. 85
No. 4 60
F. Compaction
1. General
a. Begin compaction immediately after final mixing.
b. Aerate and sprinkle as necessary to provide optimum moisture content.
c. Multiple lifts are permitted when shown on the Drawings or approved.
d. Bring each layer to the moisture content directed.
2. Rolling
a. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center,
overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half the width of the roller unit.
b. On superelevated curves, begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the
high side.
c. Offset alternate trips of the roller.
d. Operate rollers at a speed between 2 and 6 MPH or as directed.
e. Rework, recompact, and refinish material that fails to meet or that loses
required moisture, density, stability, or finish before the next course is placed or
the project is accepted.
1) Continue work until specification requirements are met.
2) Rework in accordance with Maintenance item of this Section.
f. Proof roll the lime treated base course in accordance with the following:
1) Proof Rolling
a) City Project Representative must be on-site during proof rolling
operations.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 29 - 8
LIME TREATED BASE COURSES
Page 8 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b) Use equipment that will apply sufficient load to identify soft spots that
rut or pump.
(1) Acceptable equipment includes fully loaded single-axle water truck
with a 1500 gallon capacity.
c) Make at least 2 passes with the proof roller (down and back = 1 pass).
d) Offset each trip by at most 1 tire width.
e) If an unstable or non-uniform area is found, correct the area.
2) Correct
a) Soft spots that rut or pump greater than 3/4 inch.
b) Areas that are unstable or non-uniform.
3. Density Control
a. Compact until the entire depth of the mixture has achieved a uniform density of
not less than 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM
D698.
b. Moisture content: minus 2 to plus 4 optimum.
G. Maintenance
1. Maintain the completed soil lime base in good condition, satisfactory to the City as
to grade, crown and cross section until the overlaying or next course is constructed.
2. Keep surface of the compacted course moist until covered by other base or
pavement.
3. Reworking a Section
a. When a section is reworked within 72 hours after completion of compaction,
rework the section to provide the required density.
b. When a section is reworked more than 72 hours after completion of
compaction, add additional lime at 25 percent of the percentage specified.
c. Reworking includes loosening, adding material or removing unacceptable
material if necessary, mixing as directed, compacting, and finishing.
H. Finishing
1. After completing compaction of the final course, clip, skin, or tight-blade the
surface of the lime-treated material with a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a
depth of approximately 1/4 inch.
2. Remove loosened material and dispose of at an approved location.
3. Roll the clipped surface immediately with a pneumatic tire roller until a smooth
surface is attained.
4. Add small amounts of water as needed during rolling.
5. Shape and maintain the course and surface in conformity with the typical sections,
lines, and grades shown on the Drawings or as directed.
I. Curing
1. Cure for the minimum number of days shown in Table 6 and by finished pavement
type:
a. Concrete pavement
1) Sprinkle with water
2) Maintain moisture during curing
3) Do not allow equipment on the finished course during curing except as
required for sprinkling.
b. Asphalt Pavement
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 29 - 9
LIME TREATED BASE COURSES
Page 9 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) Apply an asphalt material at a rate of 0.05 to 0.20 gallon per square yard.
2) Do not allow equipment on the finished course during curing.
Table 6
Minimum Curing Requirements Before Placing Subsequent Courses1
Untreated Material Curing (Days)
PI 35 2
PI > 35 5
1. Subject to the approval of the City. Proof rolling may be required as
an indicator of adequate curing.
2. Begin paving operations or add courses within 14 calendar days of final
compaction.
3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Density Test
1. City Project Representative must be on site during density testing
2. City to measure density of lime treated base course in accordance with ASTM
D6938.
3. Spacing directed by City (1 per block minimum).
4. City Project Representative determines density testing locations.
B. Depth Test
1. In -place depth will be evaluated for each 500-foot roadway section
2. Determine in accordance with Tex-140-E in hand excavated holes.
3. For each 500-foot section, 3 phenolphthalein tests will be performed.
4. City Project Representative determines depth testing locations.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 33 - 1
CEMENT TREATED BASE COURSES
Page 1 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 32 11 33
CEMENT TREATED BASE COURSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Treating subgrade, subbase and base courses by the pulverization, addition of
cement, mixing and compacting the mix material to the required density.
2. Item applies to the natural ground, embankment, existing pavement, base or
subbase courses placed and shall conform to the typical section, lines and grades
shown on the Drawings.
B. Deviations from City of Fort Worth Standards
1. None
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 - General Requirements
3. Section 32 11 23 - Flexible Base Courses
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Cement
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the ton (dry weight).
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per ton (dry weight) of Cement.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing Cement material
2) All freight involved
3) All unloading, storing and handling
2. Cement Treatment
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the square yard of surface area.
2) The dimensions for determining the surface area are established by the
widths shown on the Drawings and the lengths measured at placement.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per square yard of Cement Treatment placed for:
a) Various depths
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Pulverizing or providing the soil material
2) Handling, hauling and spreading dry or slurry cement
3) Mixing the cement with the soil either in-place or in a mixing plant
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 33 - 2
CEMENT TREATED BASE COURSES
Page 2 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
4) Furnishing, hauling and mixing water with the soil-cement mixture
5) Spreading and shaping the mixture; compacting the mixture, including all
rolling required for compaction
6) Surface finishing
7) Water and sprinkling
8) Curing
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard
published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement
b. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))
3. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT)
a. Tex-101-E, Preparing soil and flexible base materials for testing
b. Tex-140-E, Measuring thickness of paving layers
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTLAS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Truck Delivered Cement
1. Each truck ticket shall bear the weight of cement measured on certified scales.
2. Submit delivery tickets, certified by supplier, that include weight with each bulk
delivery of cement to the site.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS
A. Start cement application only when the air temperature is at least 35 degrees F and
rising or is at least 40 degrees F.
B. Measure temperature in the shade away from artificial heat.
C. Suspend application when the City determines that weather conditions are unsuitable.
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 33 - 3
CEMENT TREATED BASE COURSES
Page 3 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Furnish uncontaminated materials of uniform quality that meet the requirements of
the Drawings and specifications.
2. Notify the City of the proposed material sources and of changes to material sources.
3. Obtain verification from the City that the specification requirements are met before
using the sources.
4. The City may sample and test project materials at any time before compaction.
B. Cement: ASTM C150 Type I, II or IP.
C. Flexible Base Courses: Furnish base material that meets the requirements of Section 32
11 23 for the type and grade shown on the Drawings, before the addition of cement.
D. Water: Furnish water free of industrial wastes and other objectionable material.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Shape existing material in accordance with applicable bid items to conform to typical
sections shown on the Drawings and as directed.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Produce a completed course of treated material containing:
a. Uniform Portland cement mixture, free from loose or segregated areas
b. Uniform density and moisture content
c. Well bound for full depth
d. With smooth surface and suitable for placing subsequent courses
2. Maximum layer depth of cement treatment in single layer: 8 inches.
3. For treated subgrade exceeding 8 inches deep, pulverize, apply cement, mix,
compact and finish in equal layers not exceeding 5 inches deep.
B. Equipment
1. Provide machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper execution of the
work.
2. Rollers
a. The Contractor may use any type of roller to meet the production rates and
quality requirements of the Contract unless otherwise shown on the Drawings
or directed.
b. When specific types of equipment are required, use equipment that meets the
specified requirements.
c. Alternate Equipment
1) Instead of the specified equipment, the Contractor may, as approved,
operate other compaction equipment that produces equivalent results.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 33 - 4
CEMENT TREATED BASE COURSES
Page 4 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2) Discontinue the use of the alternate equipment and furnish the specified
equipment if the desired results are not achieved.
d. City may require Contractor to substitute equipment if production rate and
quality requirements of the Contract are not met.
3. Slurry Equipment
a. Use slurry tanks equipped with agitation devices for cement application.
b. The City may approve other slurrying methods.
c. Provide a pump for agitating the slurry when the distributor truck is not
equipped with an agitator.
4. Pulverization Equipment
a. Provide pulverization equipment that:
1) Cuts and pulverizes material uniformly to the proper depth with cutters that
plane to a uniform surface over the entire width of the cut
2) Provides a visible indication of the depth of cut at all times
3) Uniformly mixes the materials
C. Pulverization
1. Pulverize or scarify existing material after shaping so that 100 percent by dry
weight passes a 1 inch sieve, and 80 percent by dry weight passes a No. 4 sieve
exclusive of gravel or stone retained in sieves.
2. Pulverize recycled asphalt pavement so that 100 percent by dry weight passes a 2
inch sieve, and 60 percent by dry weight passes a No. 4 sieve exclusive of gravel or
stone retained in sieves.
D. Cement Application
1. Spread by an approved dry or slurry method uniformly on the soil at the rate
specified on the Drawings
2. If a bulk cement spreader is used, position by string lines or other approved method
during spreading to insure a uniform distribution of cement.
3. Apply to an area that all the operations can be continuous and completed in daylight
within 6-hours of initial application.
4. Do not exceed the quantity of cement that permits uniform and intimate mixture of
soil and cement during dry-mixing operations
5. Do not exceed the specified optimum moisture content for the soil and cement
mixture.
6. No equipment, except that used in the spreading and mixing, allowed to pass over
the freshly spread cement until it is mixed with the soil.
E. Mixing
1. Thoroughly mix the material and cement using approved equipment.
2. Mix until a homogeneous, friable mixture of material and cement is obtained, free
from all clods and lumps.
3. Keep mixture within moisture tolerances throughout the operation.
4. Spread and shape the completed mixture in a uniform layer.
5. After mixing, the City shall sample the mixture at roadway moisture and test in
accordance with Tex 101 E, Part III, to determine compliance with the gradation
requirements in Table 1.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 33 - 5
CEMENT TREATED BASE COURSES
Page 5 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
Table 1
Gradation Requirements Minimum % Passing
Sieve Size Base
1-3/4 in. 100
3/4 in. 85
No. 4 60
F. Compaction
1. Prior to the beginning of compaction, the mixture shall be in a loose condition for
its full depth.
2. Compact material to at least 95-percent of the maximum density as determined by
ASTM D698.
3. At the start of compaction, the percentage of moisture in the mixture and in un-
pulverized soil lumps shall be less than the quantity which shall cause the soil-
cement mixture to become unstable during compaction and finishing.
4. When the uncompacted soil-cement mixture is wetted by rain so that the average
moisture content exceeds the tolerance given at the time of final compaction, the
entire section shall be reconstructed in accordance with this specification at the sole
expense of the Contractor.
5. The specified optimum moisture content and density shall be determined in the
field on the representative samples of soil-cement mixture obtained from the area
being processed.
6. Final moisture content shall be within minus-2 to plus-4-of-optimum.
7. Begin compaction after mixing and after gradation and moisture requirements have
been met.
8. Begin compaction at the bottom and continue until the entire depth of the mixture is
uniformly compacted.
9. Uniformly compact the mixture to the specified density within 2-hours.
10. After the soil and cement mixture is compacted uniformly apply water as needed
and thoroughly mix in.
11. Reshape the surface to the required lines, grades and cross section and then lightly
scarify to loosen any imprint left by the compacting or shaping equipment.
G. Maintenance
1. Maintain the soil-cement treatment in good condition from the time it first starts
work until all work shall is completed.
2. Maintenance includes immediate repairs of any defect that may occur after the
cement is applied.
3. Maintenance work shall be done by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense and
repeated as often as necessary to keep the area continuously intact.
4. Repairs are to be made in such a manner as to insure restoration of a uniform
surface for the full depth of treatment.
5. Remedy any low area of treated subgrade by scarifying the surface to a depth of at
least 2 inches, filling the area with treated material and compacting.
6. Remedy any low area of subbase or base shall by replacing the material for the full
depth of subbase or base treatment rather than adding a thin layer of stabilized
material to the completed work.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 33 - 6
CEMENT TREATED BASE COURSES
Page 6 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
H. Finishing
1. After completing compaction of the final course, clip, skin, or tight-blade the
surface of the cement-treated material with a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a
depth of approximately 1/4 inch.
2. Remove loosened material and dispose of at an approved location.
3. Roll the clipped surface immediately with a pneumatic tire roller adding small
increments of moisture as needed and until a smooth surface is attained.
4. Add small amounts of water as needed during rolling. Shape and maintain the
course and surface in conformity with the typical sections, lines, and grades shown
on the Drawings or as directed.
5. Surface compaction and finishing shall proceed in such a manner as to produce, in
not more than 2-hours, a smooth, closely knit surface, free of cracks, ridges or loose
material, conforming to the drawn grade and line shown on the Drawings.
6. After the final layer or course of the cement modified soil has been compacted, it
shall be brought to the required lines and grades in accordance with the typical
sections.
7. The completed section shall then be finished by rolling with a pneumatic tire or
other suitable roller sufficiently to create micro cracking.
I. Curing
1. General
a. Cure for at least 48 hours.
b. Maintain the moisture content during curing at no lower than 2 percentage
points below optimum.
2. Curing method depends on finished pavement type:
a. Concrete pavement:
1) Sprinkle with water
2) Maintain moisture during curing
3) Do not allow equipment on the finished course during curing except as
required for sprinkling, unless otherwise approved.
b. Asphalt Pavement:
1) Apply an asphalt material at a rate of 0.05 to 0.20 gallon per square yard.
2) Do not allow equipment on the finished course during curing
3. Continue curing until paving operations begin.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Density Test
1. City Project Representative must be on site during density testing
2. City to measure density of cement treated base course in accordance with ASTM
D6938.
3. Spacing directed by City (1 per block minimum).
4. City Project Representative determines density testing locations.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 33 - 7
CEMENT TREATED BASE COURSES
Page 7 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
B. Depth Test
1. Take minimum of one core per 500 linear feet per each direction of travel
staggering test location in each lane to determine in-place depth.
2. City Project Representative determines depth testing locations.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 37 - 1
LIQUID SOIL STABILIZER
Page 1 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Version August 21, 2015
SECTION 32 11 37
LIQUID SOIL STABILIZER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Add-mixture, cement, water, and subgrade or base (with or without asphalt
concrete pavement) in the roadway.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for this Item will be by the gallon of Liquid Treated Soil
Stabilizer.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for
at the unit price bid per gallon of Liquid Treated Soil Stabilizer.
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Furnishing all the liquid stabilizer products
b. Finishing
c. Mixing
d. Equipment
e. Curing
f. Hauling
g. Disposal
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 37 - 2
LIQUID SOIL STABILIZER
Page 2 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Version August 21, 2015
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Containers
1. Must be stored and handled in closed, weatherproof containers until
immediate distribution.
2. Must have adequate protection from theft, flooding or damage.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS
A. Soil Environment
1. Liquid Soil Stabilizer may be used in soil environments with plasticity
indexes of 20 or greater.
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS
A. City Approved Products
1. Roadbond EN 1 Soil Stabilizer or approved equivalent.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Mix Design
1. The Design Engineer will designate a cement/add-mixture content that will
produce a stabilized mixture that meets the strength requirement. The
Engineer will determine the compressive strength of the proposed materials
in accordance with Tex-120-E, Part 1.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 37 - 3
LIQUID SOIL STABILIZER
Page 3 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Version August 21, 2015
2. The mix will not include more than 50% asphalt concrete. For bidding
purposes an 8” Depth Cement Treated Base requires 0.0075 GA/SY or
128SY/GA.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Uniformly place cement dry or as a slurry. Uniformly distribute Liquid
Soil Stabilizer and apply only on an area where the mixing, compacting,
and finishing operations can be completed during the same working day.
2. Do not start treatment operation unless the air temperature is at the
minimum application temperature and rising. The temperature will be
taken in the shade and way from artificial heat. Do not apply when, in the
opinion of the Engineer, weather conditions are unsuitable.
B. Dry Placing
1. Before applying cement, sprinkle the prepared roadway with diluted add-
mixture Liquid Soil Stabilizer until the desired quantity of diluted add-
mixture Liquid Soil Stabilizer is evenly distributed over the area to be
treated. If necessary, continue to sprinkle the treated area with water until
optimum moisture content is attained. Distribute the required quantity of
dry cement with approved equipment, at a uniform rate. Minimize
scattering of cement by wind. Do not apply cement when wind conditions,
in the opinion of the Engineer, cause blowing cement to become dangerous
to traffic or objectionable t adjacent property owners.
C. Slurry Placing
1. Sprinkle the prepared roadway with diluted add-mixture Liquid Soil
Stabilizer uniformly by making successive passes over a measured section
of the roadway until the desired quantity of diluted add-mixture Liquid Soil
Stabilizer is evenly distributed over the area to be treated. Mix the
required quantity of cement with water, adjusting the amount of water in
order to account for the moisture placed on the roadway with the add-
mixture Liquid Soil Stabilizer as it relates to optimum moisture, as
approved. Produce slurry free of objectionable materials and with a
consistency that can be easily applied. Agitate the slurry continuously.
Apply slurry within 2 hours of adding water and not longer than 30
minutes after placement of the add-mixture Liquid Soil Stabilizer, and
when the roadway is at a moisture content drier than optimum. Dispense
and spread slurry uniformly by making successive passes over a measured
section of the roadway at the rate directed until the required cement content
is attained.
D. Mixing
1. Thoroughly mix the material, add-mixture Liquid Soil Stabilizer and
cement using approved equipment. Mix until a homogeneous mixture is
obtained. Sprinkle the treated materials during the mixing operation, as
directed, to maintain optimum mixing moisture. Spread and shape the
completed mixture in a uniform layer.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 37 - 4
LIQUID SOIL STABILIZER
Page 4 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Version August 21, 2015
2. The Engineer will obtain a sample of the material at roadway moisture and
remove all non-slaking aggregates retained on a 3/4-in. sieve. The
remainder of the mixture must meet the pulverization requirements of
Table 1 when tested in accordance with Tex-101-E, Part III. When shown
on the plans or approved by the engineer, the pulverization requirement
may be waived when the material contains a substantial amount of
aggregate.
E. Compaction
1. Compact the mixture in one lift using ordinary compaction or density
control, as shown on the plans. Complete compaction within 2 hours after
the application of the add-mixture Liquid Soil Stabilizer.
2. Sprinkle the treated material in accordance with Item 204, “Sprinkling”.
Adjust the moisture content of the mixture during compaction so that it is
within 2.0 percentage points of optimum as determined by Test Method
Tex-120-E, Part II. Determine the moisture content of the mixture at the
beginning and during compaction in accordance with Tex-103-E. Adjust
operations if required.
3. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed towards the center,
overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half the width of the roller
unit. On super-elevated curves, begin rolling at the low side and progress
toward the high side. Offset alternate trips of the roller. Operate rollers at
a speed between 2 and 6 miles per hour, as directed.
F. Ordinary Compaction
1. Roll with approved compaction equipment, as directed. Correct
irregularities, depressions, and weak spots immediately by scarifying the
areas affected, adding or removing treated material as required, reshaping,
and re-compacting.
G. Finishing
1. Immediately after completing compaction, clip, skin, or tight-blade the
surface of the add-mixture Liquid Soil Stabilization/cement treated
material with a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of approximately
1/4 in. Remove loosened material and dispose of at an approved location.
Roll the clipped surface immediately with a pneumatic tire roller until a
smooth surface is attained. Add small increments of water as needed
during rolling. Shape and maintain the course and surface in conformity
with the typical sections, lines and grades shown on the plans or as
directed. In areas where surfacing is to be placed, trim grade deviations
greater than 1/4 in. in cross section and 1/4 in. in 16 ft. measured
longitudinally for the entire width of the cross-section. Remove excess
material, reshape, and roll with a pneumatic tire roller. If material is more
than 1/4 in. low, correct as directed. Do not surface patch.
H. Curing
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 11 37 - 5
LIQUID SOIL STABILIZER
Page 5 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Version August 21, 2015
1. Maintain the moisture content of the finished section at no lower than 2
percentage points below optimum by sprinkling or by applying an asphalt
material at the rate of 0.05 to 0.20 gallons per square yard as directed, until
a subsequent course or pavement is placed or as otherwise directed. Do not
allow equipment on the finished course except as required to complete
curing, unless otherwise approved. At least 3 days of curing are required
before opening the finished section to traffic, unless otherwise shown on
the plans or directed.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Density Control
1. Compact to meet at least 95% of optimum density as determined in
accordance with Tex-120-E, Part II. The Engineer will determine roadway
density in accordance with Test Method Tex-115-E and will verify strength
in accordance with Tex-120-E, Part II. Remove and replace material that
does not meet density requirements and compact and test replacement
material in accordance with density control methods.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 1
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 1 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 32 13 13
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Finished pavement constructed of portland cement concrete including
monolithically poured curb on the prepared subgrade or other base course.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 - General Requirements
3. Section 32 01 29 - Concrete Paving Repair
4. Section 32 13 73 - Concrete Paving Joint Sealants
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for this Item shall be by the square yard of completed and
accepted Concrete Pavement in its final position as measured from back of curb
for various:
1) Classes
2) Thicknesses
2. Payment
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item will
be paid for at the unit price bid per square yard of Concrete Pavement.
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Shaping and fine grading the placement area
b. Furnishing and applying all water required
c. Furnishing, loading and unloading, storing, hauling and handling all concrete
ingredients including all freight and royalty involved
d. Mixing, placing, finishing and curing all concrete
e. Furnishing and installing all reinforcing steel
f. Furnishing all materials and placing longitudinal, warping, expansion, and
contraction joints, including all steel dowels, dowel caps and load transmission
units required, wire and devices for placing, holding and supporting the steel
bar, load transmission units, and joint filler material in the proper position; for
coating steel bars where required by the Drawings
g. Sealing joints
h. Monolithically poured curb
i. Cleanup
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 2
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 2 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard
published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A615/A615M, Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
b. C31, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field
c. C33, Concrete Aggregates
d. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
e. C42, Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
Beams of Concrete
f. C94/C94M, Standard Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete
g. C150, Portland Cement
h. C156, Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials
i. C172, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
j. C260, Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
k. C309, Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete, Type 2
l. C494, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete, Types “A”, “D”, “F” and “G”
m. C618, Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a Mineral
Admixture in Concrete
n. C881, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete
o. C1064, Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-
Cement Concrete
p. C1602, Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of
Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
q. D698, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort
(12,400 ft-lbf/ft3)
3. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. ACI 305.1-06 Specification for Hot Weather Concreting
b. ACI 306.1-90, Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting
c. ACI 318
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Mix Design: submit for approval. See Item 2.4.A.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 3
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 3 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Conditions
1. Place concrete when concrete temperature is between 40 and 100 degrees when
measured in accordance with ASTM C1064 at point of placement.
2. Hot Weather Concreting
a. Take immediate corrective action or cease paving when the ambient
temperature exceeds 95 degrees.
b. Concrete paving operations shall be approved by the City when the concrete
temperature exceeds 100 degrees. See Standard Specification for Hot Weather
Concreting (ACI 305.1-06).
3. Cold Weather Concreting
a. Do not place when ambient temp in shade is below 40 degrees and falling.
Concrete may be placed when ambient temp is above 35 degrees and rising or
above 40 degrees.
b. Concrete paving operations shall be approved by the City when ambient
temperature is below 40 degrees. See Standard Specification for Cold Weather
Concreting (ACI 306.1-90).
B. Time: Place concrete after sunrise and no later than shall permit the finishing of the
pavement in natural light, or as directed by the City.
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: ASTM C150.
B. Aggregates: ASTM C33.
C. Water: ASTM C1602.
D. Admixtures: When admixtures are used, conform to the appropriate specification:
1. Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete: ASTM C260.
2. Chemical Admixtures for Concrete: ASTM C494, Types “A”, “D”, “F” and “G.”
3. Fly Ash
a. Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete:
ASTM C618.
b. Fly ash may be substituted at one pound per pound of cement up to 25% of the
specified cement content when such batch design is approved by the Engineer.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 4
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 4 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
E. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A615.
F. Steel Wire Reinforcement: Not used for concrete pavement.
G. Dowels and Tie Bars
1. Dowel and tie bars: ASTM A615.
2. Dowel Caps
a. Provide dowel caps with enough range of movement to allow complete closure
of the expansion joint.
b. Caps for dowel bars shall be of the length shown on the Drawings and shall
have an internal diameter sufficient to permit the cap to freely slip over the bar.
c. In no case shall the internal diameter exceed the bar diameter by more 1/8 inch,
and one end of the cap shall be rightly closed.
3. Epoxy for Dowel and Tie Bars: ASTM C881.
a. See following table for approved producers of epoxies and adhesives
Pre-Qualified Producers of Epoxies and Adhesives
Product Name Producer
Concresive 1420 BASF
HTE-50 Hilti
T 308 + Powers Fasteners
P E 1000+ Powers Fasteners
C-6 Ramset-Redhead
Epcon G-5 Ramset-Redhead
Pro-Poxy-300 Fast Tube Unitex
Shep-Poxy TxIII CMC Construction Services
Ultrabond 1300 Tubes Adhesives Technology
Ultrabone 2300 N.S. A-22-2300
Slow Set Adhesives Technology
Dynapoxy EP-430 Pecora Corp.
EDOT Simpson Strong Tie
ET22 Simpson Strong Tie
SET 22 Simpson Strong Tie
SpecPoxy 3000FS SpecChem
b. Epoxy Use, Storage and Handling
1) Package components in airtight containers and protect from light and
moisture.
2) Include detailed instructions for the application of the material and all
safety information and warnings regarding contact with the components.
3) Epoxy label requirements
a) Resin or hardener components
b) Brand name
c) Name of manufacturer
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 5
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 5 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
d) Lot or batch number
e) Temperature range for storage
f) Date of manufacture
g) Expiration date
h) Quantity contained
4) Store epoxy and adhesive components at temperatures recommended by the
manufacturer.
5) Do not use damaged or previously opened containers and any material that
shows evidence of crystallization, lumps skinning, extreme thickening, or
settling of pigments that cannot be readily dispersed with normal agitation.
6) Follow sound environmental practices when disposing of epoxy and
adhesive wastes.
7) Dispose of all empty containers separately.
8) Dispose of epoxy by completely emptying and mixing the epoxy before
disposal
H. Reinforcement Bar Chairs
1. Reinforcement bar chairs or supports shall be of adequate strength to support the
reinforcement bars and shall not bend or break under the weight of the
reinforcement bars or Contractor’s personnel walking on the reinforcing bars.
2. Bar chairs may be made of metal (free of rust), precast mortar or concrete blocks or
plastic.
3. For approval of plastic chairs, representative samples of the plastic shall show no
visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a 5-percent solution of
sodium hydroxide for 120-hours.
4. Bar chairs may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this
specification.
I. Joint Filler
1. Joint filler is the material placed in concrete pavement and concrete structures to
allow for the expansion and contraction of the concrete.
2. Wood Boards: Used as joint filler for concrete paving.
a. Boards for expansion joint filler shall be of the required size, shape and type
indicated on the Drawings or required in the specifications.
1) Boards shall be of selected stock of redwood or cypress. The boards shall
be sound heartwood and shall be free from sapwood, knots, clustered
birdseyes, checks and splits.
2) Joint filler, boards, shall be smooth, flat and straight throughout, and shall
be sufficiently rigid to permit ease of installation.
3) Boards shall be furnished in lengths equal to the width between
longitudinal joints, and may be furnished in strips or scored sheet of the
required shape.
3. Dimensions. The thickness of the expansion joint filler shall be shown on the
Drawings; the width shall be not less than that shown on the Drawings, providing
for the top seal space.
4. Rejection. Expansion joint filler may be rejected for failure to meet any of the
requirements of this specification.
J. Joint Sealants. Provide Joint Sealants in accordance with Section 32 13 73.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 6
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 6 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
K. Curing Materials
1. Membrane-Forming Compounds.
a. Conform to the requirements of ASTM C309, Type 2, white pigmented
compound and be of such nature that it shall not produce permanent
discoloration of concrete surfaces nor react deleteriously with the concrete.
b. The compound shall produce a firm, continuous uniform moisture-impermeable
film free from pinholes and shall adhere satisfactorily to the surfaces of damp
concrete.
c. It shall, when applied to the damp concrete surface at the specified rate of
coverage, dry to touch in 1 hour and dry through in not more than 4 hours under
normal conditions suitable for concrete operations.
d. It shall adhere in a tenacious film without running off or appreciably sagging.
e. It shall not disintegrate, check, peel or crack during the required curing period.
f. The compound shall not peel or pick up under traffic and shall disappear from
the surface of the concrete by gradual disintegration.
g. The compound shall be delivered to the job site in the manufacturer's original
containers only, which shall be clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name,
the trade name of the material and a batch number or symbol with which test
samples may be correlated.
h. When tested in accordance with ASTM C156 Water Retention by Concrete
Curing Materials, the liquid membrane-forming compound shall restrict the loss
of water present in the test specimen at the time of application of the curing
compound to not more than 0.01-oz.-per-2 inches of surface.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Mix Design
1. Concrete Mix Design and Control
a. At least 10 calendar days prior to the start of concrete paving operations, the
Contractor shall submit a design of the concrete mix it proposes to use and a
full description of the source of supply of each material component.
b. The design of the concrete mix shall produce a quality concrete complying with
these specifications and shall include the following information:
1) Design Requirements and Design Summary
2) Material source
3) Dry weight of cement/cubic yard and type
4) Dry weight of fly ash/cubic yard and type, if used
5) Saturated surface dry weight of fine and coarse aggregates/cubic yard
6) Design water/cubic yard
7) Quantities, type, and name of admixtures with manufacturer's data sheets
8) Current strength tests or strength tests in accordance with ACI 318
9) Current Sieve Analysis and -200 Decantation of fine and coarse aggregates
and date of tests
10) Fineness modulus of fine aggregate
11) Specific Gravity and Absorption Values of fine and coarse aggregates
12) L.A. Abrasion of coarse aggregates
c. Once mix design approved by City, maintain intent of mix design and
maximum water to cement ratio.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 7
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 7 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
d. No concrete may be placed on the job site until the mix design has been
approved by the City.
2. Quality of Concrete
a. Consistency
1) In general, the consistency of concrete mixtures shall be such that:
a) Mortar shall cling to the coarse aggregate
b) Aggregate shall not segregate in concrete when it is transported to the
place of deposit
c) Concrete, when dropped directly from the discharge chute of the mixer,
shall flatten out at the center of the pile, but the edges of the pile shall
stand and not flow
d) Concrete and mortar shall show no free water when removed from the
mixer
e) Concrete shall slide and not flow into place when transported in metal
chutes at an angle of 30 degrees with the horizontal
f) Surface of the finished concrete shall be free from a surface film or
laitance
2) When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the
final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be
applied to the surface by hand sprayer only and be held to a minimum
amount.
3) The concrete shall be workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing
qualities and be of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated
into a homogeneous mass.
4) Excessive bleeding shall be avoided.
5) If the strength or consistency required for the class of concrete being
produced is not secured with the minimum cement specified or without
exceeding the maximum water/cement ratio, the Contractor may use, or the
City may require, an approved cement dispersing agent (water reducer); or
the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates, or aggregates with
different characteristics, or the Contractor may use additional cement in
order to produce the required results.
6) The additional cement may be permitted as a temporary measure, until
aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates
or cement dispersing agent.
7) The Contractor is solely responsible for the quality of the concrete
produced.
8) The City reserves the right to independently verify the quality of the
concrete through inspection of the batch plant, testing of the various
materials used in the concrete and by casting and testing concrete cylinders
or beams on the concrete actually incorporated in the pavement.
b. Standard Class
1) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or detailed specifications, the
standard class for concrete paving for streets and alleys is shown in the
following table:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 8
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 8 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
Standard Classes of Pavement Concrete
Class of
Concrete1
Minimum
Cementitious,
Lb./CY
28 Day Min.
Compressive,
Strength2
psi
Maximum
Water/
Cementitious,
Ratio
Course
Aggregate
Maximum
Size
inch
P 517 3600 0.49 1-1/2
H 564 4500 0.45 1-1/2
1. All exposed horizontal concrete shall have entrained-air.
2. Minimum Compressive Strength Required.
2) Machine-Laid concrete: Class P
3) Hand-Laid concrete: Class H
c. High Early Strength Concrete (HES)
1) When shown on the Drawings or allowed, provide Class HES concrete for
very early opening of pavements area or leaveouts to traffic.
2) Design class HES to meet the requirements of class specified for concrete
pavement and a minimum compressive strength of 2,600 psi in 24 hours,
unless other early strength and time requirements are shown on the
Drawings allowed.
3) No strength overdesign is required.
Standard Classes of Pavement Concrete
Class of
Concrete1
Minimum
Cementitious
Lb./CY
28 Day Min.
Compressive
Strength2
psi
Maximum
Water/
Cementitious
Ratio
Course
Aggregate
Maximum
Size,
inch
HES 564 4500 0.45 1-1/2
d. Slump
1) Slump requirements for pavement and related concrete shall be as specified
in the following table:
Concrete Pavement Slump Requirements
Concrete Use Recommended
Design
and Placement
Slump,
inch
Maximum
Acceptable
Placement
Slump,
inch
Slip-Form/Form-Riding Paving 1-1/2 3
Hand Formed Paving 4 5
Sidewalk, Curb and Gutter, Concrete
Valley Gutter and Other Miscellaneous
Concrete
4 5
2) No concrete shall be permitted with slump in excess of the maximums
shown.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 9
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 9 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3) Any concrete mix failing to meet the above consistency requirements,
although meeting the slump requirements, shall be considered
unsatisfactory, and the mix shall be changed to correct such unsatisfactory
conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment
1. All equipment necessary for the construction of this item shall be on the project.
2. The equipment shall include spreading devices (augers), internal vibration,
tamping, and surface floating necessary to finish the freshly placed concrete in such
a manner as to provide a dense and homogeneous pavement.
3. Machine-Laid Concrete Pavement
a. Fixed-Form Paver. Fixed-form paving equipment shall be provided with forms
that are uniformly supported on a very firm subbase to prevent sagging under
the weight of machine.
b. Slip-Form Paver
1) Slip-form paving equipment shall be provided with traveling side forms of
sufficient dimensions, shape and strength so as to support the concrete
laterally for a sufficient length of time during placement.
2) City may reject use of Slip-Form Paver if paver requires over-digging and
impacts trees, mailboxes or other improvements.
4. Hand-Laid Concrete Pavement
a. Machines that do not incorporate these features, such as roller screeds or
vibrating screeds, shall be considered tools to be used in hand-laid concrete
construction, as slumps, spreading methods, vibration, and other procedures are
more common to hand methods than to machine methods.
5. City may reject equipment and stop operation if equipment does not meet
requirements.
B. Concrete Mixing and Delivery
1. Transit Batching: shall not be used – onsite mixing not permitted
2. Ready Mixed Concrete
a. The concrete shall be produced in an approved method conforming to the
requirements of this specification and ASTM C94/C94M. City shall have access
ready mix to get samples of materials.
b. City shall have access to ready mix plant to obtain material samples.
c. When ready-mix concrete is used, sample concrete per ASTM C94 Alternate
Procedure 2:
1) As the mixer is being emptied, individual samples shall be taken after the
discharge of approximately 15 percent and 85 percent of the load.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 10
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 10 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2) The method of sampling shall provide that the samples are representative of
widely separated portions, but not from the very ends of the batch.
d. The mixing of each batch, after all materials are in the drum, shall continue until
it produces a thoroughly mixed concrete of uniform mass as determined by
established mixer performance ratings and inspection, or appropriate uniformity
tests as described in ASTM C94.
e. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are
placed therein for the succeeding batch.
f. Retempering or remixing shall not be permitted.
3. Delivery
a. Deliver concrete at an interval not exceeding 30 minutes or as determined by
City to prevent cold joint.
4. Delivery Tickets
a. For all operations, the manufacturer of the concrete shall, before unloading,
furnish to the purchaser with each batch of concrete at the site a delivery ticket
on which is printed, stamped, or written, the following information to determine
that the concrete was proportioned in accordance with the approved mix design:
1) Name of concrete supplier
2) Serial number of ticket
3) Date
4) Truck number
5) Name of purchaser
6) Specific designation of job (name and location)
7) Specific class, design identification and designation of the concrete in
conformance with that employed in job specifications
8) Amount of concrete in cubic yards
9) Time loaded or of first mixing of cement and aggregates
10) Water added by receiver of concrete
11) Type and amount of admixtures
C. Subgrade
1. When manipulation or treatment of subgrade is required on the Drawings, the work
shall be performed in proper sequence with the preparation of the subgrade for
pavement.
2. The roadbed shall be excavated and shaped in conformity with the typical sections
and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings or established by the City.
3. All holes, ruts and depressions shall be filled and compacted with suitable material
and, if required, the subgrade shall be thoroughly wetted and reshaped.
4. Irregularities of more than 1/2 inch., as shown by straightedge or template, shall be
corrected.
5. The subgrade shall be uniformly compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum
density as determined by ASTM D698.
6. Moisture content shall be within minus 2 percent to plus 4 percent of optimum.
7. The prepared subgrade shall be wetted down sufficiently in advance of placing the
pavement to ensure its being in a firm and moist condition.
8. Sufficient subgrade shall be prepared in advance to ensure satisfactory prosecution
of the work.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 11
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 11 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
9. The Contractor shall notify the City at least 24 hours in advance of its intention to
place concrete pavement.
10. After the specified moisture and density are achieved, the Contractor shall maintain
the subgrade moisture and density in accordance with this Section.
11. In the event that rain or other conditions may have adversely affected the condition
of the subgrade or base, additional tests may be required as directed by the City.
D. Placing and Removing Forms
1. Placing Forms
a. Forms for machine-laid concrete
1) The side forms shall be metal, of approved cross section and bracing, of a
height no less than the prescribed edge thickness of the concrete section,
and a minimum of 10 feet in length for each individual form.
2) Forms shall be of ample strength and staked with adequate number of pins
capable of resisting the pressure of concrete placed against them and the
thrust and the vibration of the construction equipment operating upon them
without appreciable springing, settling or deflection.
3) The forms shall be free from warps, bends or kinks and shall show no
variation from the true plane for face or top.
4) Forms shall be jointed neatly and tightly and set with exactness to the
established grade and alignment.
5) Forms shall be set to line and grade at least 200 feet, where practicable, in
advance of the paving operations.
6) In no case shall the base width be less than 8 inches for a form 8 inches or
more in height.
7) Forms must be in firm contact with the subgrade throughout their length
and base width.
8) If the subgrade becomes unstable, forms shall be reset, using heavy stakes
or other additional supports may be necessary to provide the required
stability.
b. Forms for hand-laid concrete
1) Forms shall extend the full depth of concrete and be a minimum of 1-1/2
inches in thickness or equivalent when wooden forms are used, or be of a
gauge that shall provide equivalent rigidity and strength when metal forms
are used.
2) For curves with a radius of less than 250 feet, acceptable flexible metal or
wood forms shall be used.
3) All forms showing a deviation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a straight line
shall be rejected.
2. Settling. When forms settle over 1/8 inch under finishing operations, paving
operations shall be stopped the forms reset to line and grade and the pavement then
brought to the required section and thickness.
3. Cleaning. Forms shall be thoroughly cleaned after each use.
4. Removal.
a. Forms shall remain in place until the concrete has taken its final set.
b. Avoid damage to the edge of the pavement when removing forms.
c. Repair damage resulting from form removal and honeycombed areas with a
mortar mix within 24 hours after form removal unless otherwise approved.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 12
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 12 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
d. Clean joint face and repair honeycombed or damaged areas within 24 hours
after a bulkhead for a transverse construction joint has been removed unless
otherwise approved.
e. When forms are removed before 72 hours after concrete placement, promptly
apply membrane curing compound to the edge of the concrete pavement.
E. Placing Reinforcing Steel, Tie, and Dowel Bars
1. General
a. When reinforcing steel tie bars, dowels, etc., are required they shall be placed
as shown on the Drawings.
b. All reinforcing steel shall be clean, free from rust in the form of loose or
objectionable scale, and of the type, size and dimensions shown on the
Drawings.
c. Reinforcing bars shall be securely wired together at the alternate intersections
and all splices and shall be securely wired at each intersection dowel and load-
transmission unit intersected.
d. All bars shall be installed in their required position as shown on the Drawings.
e. The storing of reinforcing or structural steel on completed roadway slabs
generally shall be avoided and, where permitted, such storage shall be limited
to quantities and distribution that shall not induce excessive stresses.
2. Splices
a. Provide standard reinforcement splices by lapping and tying ends.
b. Comply with ACI 318 for minimum lap of spliced bars where not specified on
the Drawings.
3. Installation of Reinforcing Steel
a. All reinforcing bars and bar mats shall be installed in the slab at the required
depth below the finished surface and supported by and securely attached to bar
chairs installed on prescribed longitudinal and transverse centers as shown by
sectional and detailed drawings on the Drawings.
b. Chairs Assembly. The chair assembly shall be similar and equal to that shown
on the Drawings and shall be approved by the City prior to extensive
fabrication.
c. After the reinforcing steel is securely installed above the subgrade as specified
in Drawings and as herein prescribed, no loading shall be imposed upon the
bar mats or individual bars before or during the placing or finishing of the
concrete.
4. Installation of Dowel Bars
a. Install through the predrilled joint filler and rigidly support in true horizontal
and vertical positions by an assembly of bar chairs and dowel baskets.
b. Dowel Baskets
1) The dowels shall be held in position exactly parallel to surface and
centerline of the slab, by a dowel basket that is left in the pavement.
2) The dowel basket shall hold each dowel in exactly the correct position so
firmly that the dowel’s position cannot be altered by concreting operations.
c. Dowel Caps
1) Install cap to allow the bar to move not less than 1-1/4 inch in either
direction.
5. Tie Bar and Dowel Placement
a. Place at mid-depth of the pavement slab, parallel to the surface.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 13
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 13 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b. Place as shown on the Drawings.
6. Epoxy for Tie and Dowel Bar Installation
1) Epoxy bars as shown on the Drawings.
2) Use only drilling operations that do not damage the surrounding operations.
3) Blow out drilled holes with compressed air.
4) Completely fill the drilled hole with approved epoxy before inserting the tie
bar into the hole.
5) Install epoxy grout and bar at least 6 inches embedded into concrete.
F. Joints
1. Joints shall be placed where shown on the Drawings or where directed by the City.
2. The plane of all joints shall make a right angle with the surface of the pavement.
3. No joints shall have an error in alignment of more than 1/2 inch at any point.
4. Joint Dimensions
a. The width of the joint shall be shown on the Drawings, creating the joint
sealant reservoir.
b. The depth of the joint shall be shown on the Drawings.
c. Dimensions of the sealant reservoir shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
d. After curing, the joint sealant shall be 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch below the pavement
surface at the center of the joint.
5. Transverse Expansion Joints
a. Expansion joints shall be installed perpendicularly to the surface and to the
centerline of the pavement at the locations shown on the Drawings, or as
approved by the City.
b. Joints shall be of the design width, and spacing shown on the Drawings, or as
approved by the City.
c. Dowel bars, shall be of the size and type shown on the Drawings, or as
approved by the City, and shall be installed at the specified spacing.
d. Support dowel bars with dowel baskets.
e. Dowels shall restrict the free opening and closing of the expansion join and
shall not make planes of weaknesses in the pavement.
f. Greased Dowels for Expansion Joints.
1) Coat dowels with a thin film of grease or other approved de-bonding
material.
2) Provide dowel caps on the lubricated end of each dowel bar.
g. Proximity to Existing Structures. When the pavement is adjacent to or around
existing structures, expansions joints shall be constructed in accordance with
the details shown on the Drawings.
6. Transverse Contraction Joints
a. Contraction or dummy joints shall be installed at the locations and at the
intervals shown on the Drawings.
b. Joints shall be of the design width, and spacing shown on the Drawings, or as
approved by the City.
c. Dowel bars, shall be of the size and type shown on the Drawings, or as
approved by the City, and shall be installed at the specified spacing.
d. Joints shall be sawed into the completed pavement surface as soon after initial
concrete set as possible so that some raveling of the concrete is observed in
order for the sawing process to prevent uncontrolled shrinkage cracking.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 14
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 14 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
e. The joints shall be constructed by sawing to a 1/4 inch width and to a depth of
1/3 inch (1/4 inch permitted if limestone aggregate used) of the actual
pavement thickness, or deeper if so indicated on the Drawings.
f. Complete sawing as soon as possible in hot weather conditions and within a
maximum of 24 hours after saw cutting begins under cool weather conditions.
g. If sharp edge joints are being obtained, the sawing process shall be sped up to
the point where some raveling is observed.
h. Damage by blade action to the slab surface and to the concrete immediately
adjacent to the joint shall be minimized.
i. Any portion of the curing membrane which has been disturbed by sawing
operations shall be restored by spraying the areas with additional curing
compound.
7. Transverse Construction Joints
a. Construction joints formed at the close of each day’s work or when the placing
of concrete has been stopped for 30-minutes or longer shall be constructed by
use of metal or wooden bulkheads cut true to the section of the finished
pavement and cleaned.
b. Wooden bulkheads shall have a thickness of not less than 2-inch stock material.
c. Longitudinal bars shall be held securely in place in a plane perpendicular to the
surface and at right angles to the centerline of the pavement.
d. Edges shall be rounded to 1/4 inch radius.
e. Any surplus concrete on the subgrade shall be removed upon the resumption of
the work.
8. Longitudinal Construction Joints
a. Longitudinal construction joints shall be of the type shown on the Drawings.
9. Joint Filler
a. Joint filler shall be as specified in 2.2.I of the size and shape shown on the
Drawings.
b. Redwood Board joints shall be used for all pavement joints except for
expansion joints that are coincident with a butt joint against existing
pavements.
c. Boards with less than 25-percent of moisture at the time of installation shall be
thoroughly wetted on the job.
d. Green lumber of much higher moisture content is desirable and acceptable.
e. The joint filler shall be appropriately drilled to admit the dowel bars when
required.
f. The bottom edge of the filler shall extend to or slightly below the bottom of the
slab. The top edge shall be held approximately 1/2 inch below the finished
surface of the pavement in order to allow the finishing operations to be
continuous.
g. The joint filler may be composed of more than one length of board in the
length of joint, but no board of a length less than 6 foot may be used unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings.
h. After the removal of the side forms, the ends of the joints at the edges of the
slab shall be carefully opened for the entire depth of the slab.
10. Joint Sealing. Routine pavement joints shall be filled consistent with paving details
and as specified in Section 32 13 73. Materials shall generally be handled and
applied according to the manufacturer’s recommendations as specified in Section
32 13 73.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 15
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 15 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
G. Placing Concrete
1. Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings, the finished pavement shall be
constructed monolithically and constructed by machined laid method unless
impractical.
2. The concrete shall be rapidly deposited on the subgrade in successive batches and
shall be distributed to the required depth and for the entire width of the pavement
by shoveling or other approved methods.
3. Any concrete not placed as herein prescribed within the time limits in the following
table will be rejected. Time begins when the water is added to the mixer.
Temperature – Time Requirements
Concrete Temperature
(at point of placement)
Max Time – minutes
(no retarding agent)
Max Time – minutes
(with retarding agent)1
Non-Agitated Concrete
All temperatures 45 45
Agitated Concrete
Above 90°F Time may be reduced by
City
75
Above 75°F thru 90°F 60 90
75°F and Below 60 120
1 Normal dosage of retarder.
4. Rakes shall not be used in handling concrete.
5. At the end of the day, or in case of unavoidable interruption or delay of more than
30 minutes or longer to prevent cold joints, a transverse construction joint shall be
placed in accordance with 3.4.F.7 of this Section.
6. Honeycombing
a. Special care shall be taken in placing and spading the concrete against the
forms and at all joints and assemblies so as to prevent honeycombing.
b. Excessive voids and honeycombing in the edge of the pavement, revealed by
the removal of the side forms, may be cause for rejection of the section of slab
in which the defect occurs.
H. Finishing
1. Machine
a. Tolerance Limits
1) While the concrete is still workable, it shall be tested for irregularities with
a 10 foot straightedge placed parallel to the centerline of the pavement so as
to bridge depressions and to touch all high spots.
2) Ordinates measured from the face of the straightedge to the surface of the
pavement shall at no place exceed 1/16 inch-per-foot from the nearest point
of contact.
3) In no case shall the maximum ordinate to a 10 foot straightedge be greater
than 1/8 inch.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 16
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 16 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
4) Any surface not within the tolerance limits shall be reworked and
refinished.
b. Edging
1) The edges of slabs and all joints requiring edging shall be carefully tooled
with an edger of the radius required by the Drawings at the time the
concrete begins to take its “set” and becomes non-workable.
2) All such work shall be left smooth and true to lines.
2. Hand
a. Hand finishing permitted only in intersections and areas inaccessible to a
finishing machine.
b. When the hand method of striking off and consolidating is permitted, the
concrete, as soon as placed, shall be approximately leveled and then struck off
with screed bar to such elevation above grade that, when consolidated and
finished, the surface of the pavement shall be at the grade elevation shown on
the Drawings.
c. A slight excess of material shall be kept in front of the cutting edge at all times.
d. The straightedge and joint finishing shall be as prescribed herein.
I. Curing
1. The curing of concrete pavement shall be thorough and continuous throughout the
entire curing period.
2. Failure to provide proper curing as herein prescribed shall be considered as
sufficient cause for immediate suspension of the paving operations.
3. The curing method as herein specified does not preclude the use of any of the other
commonly used methods of curing, and the City may approve another method of
curing if so requested by the Contractor.
4. If any selected method of curing does not afford the desired results, the City shall
have the right to order that another method of curing be instituted.
5. After removal of the side forms, the sides of the slab shall receive a like coating
before earth is banked against them.
6. The solution shall be applied, under pressure with a spray nozzle, in such a manner
as to cover the entire surfaces thoroughly and completely with a uniform film.
7. The rate of application shall be such as to ensure complete coverage and shall not
exceed 20-square-yards-per-gallon of curing compound.
8. When thoroughly dry, it shall provide a continuous and flexible membrane, free
from cracks or pinholes, and shall not disintegrate, check, peel or crack during the
curing period.
9. If for any reason the seal is broken during the curing period, it shall be immediately
repaired with additional sealing solution.
10. When tested in accordance with ASTM C156 Water Retention by Concrete Curing
Materials, the curing compound shall provide a film which shall have retained
within the test specimen a percentage of the moisture present in the specimen when
the curing compound was applied according to the following.
11. Contractor shall maintain and properly repair damage to curing materials on
exposed surfaces of concrete pavement continuously for a least 72 hours.
J. Monolithic Curbs
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 17
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 17 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Concrete for monolithic curb shall be the same as for the pavement and, if carried
back from the paving mixer, shall be placed within 20-minutes after being mixed.
2. After the concrete has been struck off and sufficiently set, the exposed surfaces
shall be thoroughly worked with a wooden flat.
3. The exposed edges shall be rounded by the use of an edging tool to the radius
indicated on the Drawings.
4. All exposed surfaces of curb shall be brushed to a smooth and uniform surface.
K. Alley Paving
1. Alley paving shall be constructed in accordance with the specifications for concrete
paving hereinbefore described, in accordance with the details shown on the
Drawings, and with the following additional provisions:
a. Alley paving shall be constructed to the typical cross sections shown on the
Drawings.
b. Transverse expansion joints of the type shown on the Drawings shall be
constructed at the property line on each end of the alley with a maximum
spacing of 600 feet.
c. Transverse contraction and dummy joints shall be placed at the spacing shown
on the Drawings.
d. Contraction and dummy joints shall be formed in such a manner that the
required joints shall be produced to the satisfaction of the City.
e. All joints shall be constructed in accordance with this specification and filled
in accordance with the requirement of Section 32 13 73.
L. Pavement Leaveouts
1. Pavement leaveouts as necessary to maintain and provide for local traffic shall be
provided at location indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the City.
2. The extent and location of each leaveout required and a suitable crossover
connection to provide for traffic movements shall be determined in the field by the
City.
3.5 REPAIR
A. Repair of concrete pavement concrete shall be consistent with the Drawings and as
specified in Section 32 01 29.
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Concrete Placement
1. Place concrete using a fully automated paving machine. Hand paving only
permitted in areas such as intersections where use of paving machine is not
practical
a. All concrete pavement not placed by hand shall be placed using a fully
automated paving machine as approved by the City.
b. Screeds will not be allowed except if approved by the City.
B. Testing of Materials
1. Samples of all materials for test shall be made at the expense of the City, unless
otherwise specified in the special provisions or in the Drawings.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 18
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 18 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. In the event the initial sampling and testing does not comply with the specifications,
all subsequent testing of the material in order to determine if the material is
acceptable shall be at the Contractor’s expense at the same rate charged by the
commercial laboratories.
3. All testing shall be in accordance with applicable ASTM Standards and concrete
testing technician must be ACI certified or equivalent.
C. Pavement Thickness Test
1. Upon completion of the work and before final acceptance and final payment shall
be made, pavement thickness test shall be made by the City.
2. The number of tests and location shall be at the discretion of the City, unless
otherwise specified in the special provisions or on the Drawings.
3. The cost for the initial pavement thickness test shall be the expense of the City.
4. In the event a deficiency in the thickness of pavement is revealed during normal
testing operations, subsequent tests necessary to isolate the deficiency shall be at
the Contractor’s expense.
5. The cost for additional coring test shall be at the same rate charged by commercial
laboratories.
6. Where the average thickness of pavement in the area found to be deficient in
thickness by more than 0.20 inch, but not more than 0.50 inch, payment shall be
made at an adjusted price as specified in the following table.
Deficiency in Thickness
Determined by Cores
Proportional Part
Of Contract Price
Inches Allowed
0.00 – 0.20 100 percent
0.21 – 0.30 80 percent
0.31 – 0.40 70 percent
0.41 – 0.50 60 percent
7. Any area of pavement found deficient in thickness by more than 0.50 inch but not
more than 0.75 inch or 1/10 of the thickness specified on the Drawings, whichever
is greater, shall be evaluated by the City.
8. If, in the judgment of the City the area of such deficiency should not be removed
and replaced, there shall be no payment for the area retained.
9. If, in the judgment of the City, the area of such deficiency warrants removal, the
area shall be removed and replaced, at the Contractor’s entire expense, with
concrete of the thickness shown on the Drawings.
10. Any area of pavement found deficient in thickness by more than 0.75 inch or more
than 1/10 of the plan thickness, whichever is greater, shall be removed and
replaced, at the Contractor’s entire expense, with concrete of the thickness shown
on the Drawings.
11. No additional payment over the contract unit price shall be made for any pavement
of a thickness exceeding that required by the Drawings.
D. Pavement Strength Test
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 19
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 19 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. During the progress of the work the City shall provide trained technicians to cast
test cylinders for conforming to ASTM C31, to maintain a check on the
compressive strengths of the concrete being placed.
2. After the cylinders have been cast, they shall remain on the job site and then
transported, moist cured, and tested by the City in accordance with ASTM C31 and
ASTM C39.
3. In each set, 1 of the cylinders shall be tested at 7 days, 2 cylinders shall be tested at
28 days, and 1 cylinder shall be held or tested at 56 days, if necessary.
4. If the 28 day test results indicate deficient strength, the Contractor may, at its option
and expense, core the pavement in question and have the cores tested by an
approved laboratory, in accordance with ASTM C42 and ACI 318 protocol, except
the average of all cores must meet 100 percent of the minimum specified strength,
with no individual core resulting in less than 90 percent of design strength, to
override the results of the cylinder tests.
5. Cylinders and/or cores must meet minimum specified strength. If cylinders do not
meet minimum specified strength, additional cores shall be taken to identify the
limits of deficient concrete pavement at the expense of the Contractor.
6. Cylinders and/or cores must meet minimum specified strength. Pavement not
meeting the minimum specified strength shall be subject to the money penalties or
removal and placement at the Contractor’s expense as show in the following table.
Percent Deficient Percent of Contract Price Allowed
Greater Than 0 percent - Not More Than 10 percent 90-percent
Greater Than 10 percent - Not More Than 15 percent 80-percent
Greater Than 15 percent 0-percent or removed and replaced at the entire cost
and expense of Contractor as directed by City
7. The amount of penalty shall be deducted from payment due to Contractor; such as
penalty deducted is to defray the cost of extra maintenance.
8. The strength requirements for structures and other concrete work are not altered by
the special provision.
9. No additional payment over the contract unit price shall be made for any pavement
of strength exceeding that required by the Drawings and/or specifications.
E. Cracked Concrete Acceptance Policy
1. If cracks exist in concrete pavement upon completion of the project, the Project
Inspector shall make a determination as to the need for action to address the
cracking as to its cause and recommended remedial work.
2. If the recommended remedial work is routing and sealing of the cracks to protect
the subgrade, the Inspector shall make the determination as to whether to rout and
seal the cracks at the time of final inspection and acceptance or at any time prior to
the end of the project maintenance period. The Contractor shall perform the routing
and sealing work as directed by the Project Inspector, at no cost to the City,
regardless of the cause of the cracking.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 20
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 20 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3. If remedial work beyond routing and sealing is determined to be necessary, the
Inspector and the Contractor will attempt to agree on the cause of the cracking. If
agreement is reached that the cracking is due to deficient materials or workmanship,
the Contractor shall perform the remedial work at no cost to the City. Remedial
work in this case shall be limited to removing and replacing the deficient work with
new material and workmanship that meets the requirements of the contract.
4. If remedial work beyond routing and sealing is determined to be necessary, and the
Inspector and the Contractor agree that the cause of the cracking is not deficient
materials or workmanship, the City may request the Contractor to provide an
estimate of the cost of the necessary remedial work and/or additional work to
address the cause of the cracking, and the Contractor will perform that work at the
agreed-upon price if the City elects to do so.
5. If remedial work is necessary, and the Inspector and the Contractor cannot agree on
the cause of the cracking, the City may hire an independent geotechnical engineer
to perform testing and analysis to determine the cause of the cracking. The
contractor will escrow 50 percent of the proposed costs of the geotechnical contract
with the City. The Contractor and the City shall use the services of a geotechnical
firm acceptable to both parties.
6. If the geotechnical engineer determines that the primary cause of the cracking is the
Contractor’s deficient material or workmanship, the remedial work will be
performed at the Contractor’s entire expense and the Contractor will also reimburse
the City for the balance of the cost of the geotechnical investigation over and above
the amount that has previously been escrowed. Remedial work in this case shall be
limited to removing and replacing the deficient work with new material and
workmanship that meets the requirements of the contract.
7. If the geotechnical engineer determines that the primary cause of the cracking is not
the Contractor’s deficient material or workmanship, the City will return the
escrowed funds to the Contractor. The Contractor, on request, will provide the City
an estimate of the costs of the necessary remedial work and/or additional work and
will perform the work at the agreed-upon price as directed by the City.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 13 - 21
CONCRETE PAVING
Page 21 of 21
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 1.2.A – Modified items to be included in price bid
05/21/2014 Doug Rademaker 2.2.D – Modified to clarify acceptable fly ash substitution in concrete paving
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 20 - 1
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS
Page 1 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 5, 2018
SECTION 32 13 20
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete sidewalks
2. Driveways
3. Barrier free ramps
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 - General Requirements
3. Section 02 41 13 - Selective Site Demolition
4. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving
5. Section 32 13 73 - Concrete Paving Joint Sealants
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Concrete Sidewalk
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the square foot of completed and
accepted Concrete Sidewalk in its final position for various:
a) Thicknesses
b) Types
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per square foot of Concrete Sidewalk.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Excavating and preparing the subgrade
2) Furnishing and placing all materials
2. Concrete Curb at Back of Sidewalk (6 to 12 inch max)
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the linear foot of completed and
accepted Concrete Curb at the Back of Sidewalk within the 6 to 12 inch curb
height at back of walk in its final position.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per linear foot of Concrete Curb at the Back of Sidewalk.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Excavating and preparing the subgrade
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 20 - 2
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS
Page 2 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 5, 2018
2) Furnishing and placing all materials, including concrete and reinforcing
steel
3) Excavation in back of “retaining” curb
4) Furnishing, placing, and compacting backfill
3. Concrete Driveway
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the square foot of completed and
accepted Concrete Driveway in its final position for various:
a) Thicknesses
b) Types
2) Dimensions will be taken from the back of the projected curb, including the
area of the curb radii and will extend to the limits specified in the Drawings.
3) Sidewalk portion of drive will be included in driveway measurement.
4) Curb on drive will be included in the driveway measurement.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per square foot of Concrete Driveway.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Excavating and preparing the subgrade
2) Furnishing and placing all materials
4. Barrier Free Ramps
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Barrier Free Ramp completed
and accepted for various:
a) Types
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per each “Barrier Free Ramp” installed.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Excavating and preparing the subgrade
2) Furnishing and placing all materials
3) Curb Ramp
4) Landing and detectable warning surface as shown on the Drawings
5) Adjacent flares or side curb
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms
1. TAS – Texas Accessibility Standards
2. TDLR – Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation
B. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. D545, Test Methods for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete
Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Types)
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 20 - 3
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS
Page 3 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 5, 2018
b. D698, Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3)
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Mix Design: submit for approval. Section 32 13 13.
B. Product Data: submit product data and sample for pre-cast detectable warning for
barrier free ramp.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Conditions: Placement of concrete shall be as specified in Section 32 13 13.
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Forms: wood or metal straight, free from warp and of a depth equal to the thickness of
the finished work.
B. Concrete: see Section 32 13 13.
1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or detailed specifications, the standard
class for concrete sidewalks, driveways and barrier free ramps is shown in the
following table:
Standard Classes of Pavement Concrete
Class of
Concrete1
Minimum
Cementitious,
Lb./CY
28 Day Min.
Compressive
Strength2
psi
Maximum
Water/
Cementitious
Ratio
Course
Aggregate
Maximum
Size,
inch
A 470 3000 0.58 1-1/2
C. Reinforcement: see Section 32 13 13.
1. Sidewalk, driveway and barrier free ramp reinforcing steel shall be #3 deformed
bars at 18 inches on-center-both-ways at the center plane of all slabs, unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings or detailed specifications.
D. Joint Filler
1. Wood Filler: see Section 32 13 13.
2. Pre-Molded Asphalt Board Filler
a. Use only in areas where not practical for wood boards.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 20 - 4
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS
Page 4 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 5, 2018
b. Pre-molded asphalt board filler: ASTM D545.
c. Install the required size and uniform thickness and as specified in Drawings.
d. Include 2 liners of 0.016 asphalt impregnated kraft paper filled with a mastic
mixture of asphalt and vegetable fiber and/or mineral filler.
E. Expansion Joint Sealant: see Section 32 13 73 where shown on the Drawings.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation
1. Excavation: Excavation required for the construction of sidewalks, driveways and
barrier free ramps shall be to the lines and grades as shown on the Drawings or as
established by the City.
2. Fine Grading
a. The Contractor shall do all necessary filling, leveling and fine grading required
to bring the subgrade to the exact grades specified and compacted to at least 90
percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D698.
b. Moisture content shall be within minus 2 to plus 4 of optimum.
c. Any over-excavation shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the City.
B. Demolition / Removal
1. Sidewalk, Driveway and/ or Barrier Free Ramp Removal: see Section 02 41 13.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of 4 inches.
2. Sidewalks constructed in driveway approach sections shall have a minimum
thickness equal to that of driveway approach or as called for by Drawings and
specifications within the limits of the driveway approach.
3. Driveways shall have a minimum thickness of 6 inches. Standard cross-slopes for
walks shall be 2 percent max in accordance with current TAS/TDLR guidelines.
The construction of the driveway approach shall include the variable height radius
curb in accordance with the Drawings.
4. All pedestrian facilities shall comply with provisions of TAS including location,
slope, width, shapes, texture and coloring. Pedestrian facilities installed by the
Contractor and not meeting TAS must be removed and replaced to meet TAS (no
separate pay).
B. Forms: Forms shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true
position during the depositing of concrete.
C. Reinforcement: see Section 32 13 13.
D. Concrete Placement: see Section 32 13 13.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 20 - 5
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS
Page 5 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 5, 2018
E. Finishing
1. Concrete sidewalks, driveways and barrier free ramps shall be finished to a true,
even surface.
2. Trowel and then brush transversely to obtain a smooth uniform brush finish.
3. Provide exposed aggregate finish if specified.
4. Edge joints and sides shall with suitable tools.
F. Joints
1. Expansion joints for sidewalks, driveways and barrier free ramps shall be formed
using redwood.
2. Expansion joints shall be placed at 40 foot intervals for 4 foot wide sidewalk and 50
foot intervals for 5 foot wide and greater sidewalk.
3. Expansion joints shall also be placed at all intersections, sidewalks with concrete
driveways, curbs, formations, other sidewalks and other adjacent old concrete work.
Similar material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding into or through
sidewalks or driveways.
4. All expansion joints shall be 1/2 inch in thickness.
5. Edges of all construction and expansion joints and outer edges of all sidewalks shall
be finished to approximately a 1/2 inch radius with a suitable finishing tool.
6. Sidewalks shall be marked at intervals equal to the width of the walk with a
marking tool.
7. When sidewalk is against the curb, expansion joints shall match those in the curb.
G. Barrier Free Ramp
1. Furnish and install brick red color pre-cast detectable warning Dome-Tile,
manufactured by StrongGo Industries or approved equal by the City.
2. Detectable warning surface shall be a minimum of 24-inch in depth in the direction
of pedestrian travel, and extend to a minimum of 48-inch along the curb ramp or
landing where the pedestrian access route enters the street.
3. Locate detectable warning surface so that the edge nearest the curb line is a
minimum of 6-inch and maximum of 8-inch from the extension of the face of the
curb.
4. Detectable warning Dome-Tile surface may be curved along the corner radius.
5. Install detectable warning surface according to manufacturer’s instructions.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 20 - 6
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS
Page 6 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 5, 2018
3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 1.2.A.3 – Measurement and Payment for Barrier Free Ramps modified to match
updated City Details
4/30/2013 F. Griffin Corrected Part 1, 1.2, A, 3, b, 1 to read; from . . . square foot of Concrete Sidewalk.
to . . .each “Barrier Free Ramp” installed.
June 5, 2018 M Owen Revised Measurement and Payment.section.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 73 - 1
CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
Page 1 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 32 13 73
CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Specification for silicone joint sealing for concrete pavement and curbs.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 - General Requirements
3. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for this Item shall be by the linear foot of Joint Sealant completed
and accepted only when specified in the Drawings to be a pay item.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item are
subsidiary to the various items bid and no other compensation will be allowed,
unless specifically specified on Drawings.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. D5893, Standard Specification for Cold Applied, Single Component,
Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete
Pavements
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Test and Evaluation Reports
1. Prior to installation, furnish certification by an independent testing laboratory that
the silicone joint sealant meets the requirements of this Section.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 73 - 2
CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
Page 2 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. Submit verifiable documentation that the manufacturer of the silicone joint sealant
has a minimum 2-year demonstrated, documented successful field performance
with concrete pavement silicone joint sealant systems.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply joint sealant when the air and pavement temperature is less than 35
degrees F
B. Concrete surface must be clean, dry and frost free.
C. Do not place sealant in an expansion-type joint if surface temperature is below 35
degrees F or above 90 degrees F.
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT
A. Materials
1. Joint Sealant: ASTM D5893.
2. Joint Filler, Backer Rod and Breaker Tape
a. The joint filler sop shall be of a closed cell expanded polyethylene foam backer
rod and polyethylene bond breaker tape of sufficient size to provide a tight seal.
b. The back rod and breaker tape shall be installed in the saw-cut joint to prevent
the joint sealant from flowing to the bottom of the joint.
c. The backer rod and breaker tape shall be compatible with the silicone joint
sealant and no bond or reaction shall occur between them.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 73 - 3
CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
Page 3 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. The silicone sealant shall be cold applied.
2. Allow concrete to cure for a minimum of 7 days to ensure it has sufficient strength
prior to sealing joints.
3. Perform joint reservoir saw cutting, cleaning, bond breaker installation, and joint
sealant placement in a continuous sequence of operations.
4. See Drawings for the various joint details with their respective dimensions.
B. Equipment
1. Provide all necessary equipment and keep equipment in a satisfactory working
condition.
2. Equipment shall be inspected by the City prior to the beginning of the work.
3. The minimum requirements for construction equipment shall be as follows:
a. Concrete Saw. The sawing equipment shall be adequate in size and power to
complete the joint sawing to the required dimensions.
b. Air Compressors. The delivered compressed air shall have a pressure in excess
of 90 psi and shall be suitable for the removal of all free water and oil from the
compressed air.
c. Extrusion Pump. The output shall be capable of supplying a sufficient volume
of sealant to the joint.
d. Injection Tool. This mechanical device shall apply the sealant uniformly into
the joint.
e. Sandblaster. The design shall be for commercial use with air compressors as
specified in this Section.
f. Backer Rod Roller and Tooling Instrument. These devices shall be clean and
free of contamination. They shall be compatible with the joint depth and width
requirements.
C. Sawing Joints: see Section 32 13 13.
D. Cleaning joints
1. Dry saw in 1 direction with reverse cutting blade then sand blast.
2. Use compressed air to remove the resulting dust from the joint.
3. Sandblast joints after complete drying.
a. Attach nozzle to a mechanical aiming device so that the sand blast will be
directed at an angle of 45 degrees and at a distance of 1 to 2 inches from the
face of the joint.
b. Sandblast both joint faces sandblasted in separate, 1 directional passes.
c. When sandblasting is complete, blow-out using compressed air.
d. The blow tube shall fit into the joints.
4. Check the blown joint for residual dust or other contamination.
a. If any dust or contamination is found, repeat sandblasting and blowing until the
joint is cleaned.
b. Do not use solvents to remove stains and contamination.
5. Place the bond breaker and sealant in the joint immediately upon cleaning.
6. Bond Breaker Rod and Tape: install in the cleaned joint prior to the application of
the joint sealant.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 13 73 - 4
CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
Page 4 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
7. Do not leave open, cleaned joints unsealed overnight.
E. Joint Sealant
1. Apply the joint sealant upon placement of the bond breaker rod and tape, using the
mechanical injection tool.
2. Do not seal joints unless they are clean and dry.
3. Remove and discard excess sealant left on the pavement surface.
a. Do not excess use to seal the joints.
4. The pavement surface shall present a clean final condition as determined by City.
5. Do not allow traffic on the fresh sealant until it becomes tack-free.
F. Approval of Joints
1. The City may request a representative of the sealant manufacturer to be present at
the job site at the beginning of the final cleaning and sealing of joints.
a. The representative shall demonstrate to the Contractor and the City the
acceptable method for sealant installation.
b. The representative shall approve the clean, dry joints before the sealing
operation commences.
3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 14 16 - 1
BRICK UNIT PAVING
Page 1 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 32 14 16
BRICK UNIT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. All labor, materials and equipment necessary to install brick pavers, set in mortar
on reinforced concrete base for:
a. New brick paving
b. Brick paving repair
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 - General Requirements
3. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Brick Paving
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the square yard of Brick Paving.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per square yard of Brick Paving completed and accepted in its
final position per Drawings.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Sample panels
2) Shaping and fine grading the roadbed
3) Furnishing and applying all water required
4) Furnishing, loading and unloading, storing, hauling, handling, mixing,
placing, finishing and curing all concrete ingredients for concrete base
material
5) Furnishing and installing all reinforcing steel for concrete base
6) Furnishing, mixing and placing all setting materials including mortar
setting bed, wet mortar joint filler and high bond mortar mix
7) Furnishing and setting all brick unit pavers
8) Sealing joints
2. Brick Paving Repair
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the square yard of Brick Paving
Repaired.
b. Payment
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 14 16 - 2
BRICK UNIT PAVING
Page 2 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per square yard of Brick Paving Repair completed and accepted in
its final position per Drawings.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Sample panels
2) Shaping and fine grading the roadbed
3) Furnishing and applying all water required
4) Furnishing, loading and unloading, storing, hauling, handling, mixing,
placing, finishing and curing all concrete ingredients for concrete base
material
5) Furnishing and installing all reinforcing steel for concrete base
6) Furnishing, mixing and placing all setting materials including mortar
setting bed, wet mortar joint filler and high bond mortar mix
7) Furnishing and setting all brick unit pavers
8) Sealing joints
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. C67, Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile
b. C144, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
c. C150, Portland Cement
d. C207, Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes
e. C902, Specification for Pedestrian and Light Traffic Paving Brick
f. C1602, Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of
Hydraulic Cement Concrete
3. The Brick Industry Association, Technical Notes
a. No. 1, Cold and Hot Weather Construction
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Permitting
1. Obtain Street Use Permit to make utility cuts in the street from the Transportation
and Public Works Department in conformance with current ordinances.
2. Transportation and Public Works Department will inspect paving repair after
construction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each manufactured product,
including certification that each product complies with specified requirements.
B. Samples
1. For material verification purposes submit the following:
a. Manufacturer’s testing certification conforming to ASTM C67 testing methods
for:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 14 16 - 3
BRICK UNIT PAVING
Page 3 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) Compressive strength, pounds per square inch
2) Absorption, 5 hour submersion in cold water
3) Absorption, 24 hour submersion in cold water
4) Maximum saturation coefficient
5) Initial rate of absorption (suction)
6) Abrasion index
7) Freeze-thaw
8) Efflorescence
b. Masonry paving unit samples for each type of masonry paving required.
Include in each set the full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in
the completed work.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Brick paver and any subcontractors shall have experience in brick paving and
their previous work will be reviewed by the City prior to start of work.
B. Sample Panel: Prior to installation of masonry paving work, fabricate sample panel
using materials, pattern and joint treatment indicated for project work, including special
features for expansion joints and contiguous work.
1. Include color range, size, texture, bond, expansion jointing, pattern, finish, and
workmanship.
2. Make 6 feet x 6 feet minimum.
3. Provide range of color, texture and workmanship to be expected in the completed
work.
4. Sample panel shall be inspected by the City. If the sample is not acceptable,
construct additional panels at no cost to the City until an acceptable panel is
constructed.
5. Obtain City’s acceptance of visual qualities of the panel before start of masonry
paving work.
6. Maintain the sample panel as the standard of minimal quality for approval of all
proposed brick pavement work required for the project. Locate sample panel near
the pavement work to facilitate comparison
7. Do not change source of brands for masonry units, setting materials, or grout during
progress of work.
8. Remove sample panel from the site at completion of project.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Brick pavers and associated installation materials shall be delivered to the
job adequately protected from damage during transit.
1. Brick pavers shall be carefully packed by the supplier for shipment with name of
manufacturer and identification of contents.
2. Pavers damaged in any manner will be rejected and replaced with new materials at
no additional cost to the City.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 14 16 - 4
BRICK UNIT PAVING
Page 4 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
B. Storage: Protect grout and mortar materials during storage and construction against
wetting by rain, snow or ground water and against soilage or intermixture with earth or
other types of materials.
1. Protect grout and mortar materials from deterioration by moisture and temperature.
2. Store in a dry location or in waterproof container.
3. Keep containers tightly closed and away from open flame. Protect liquid
components from freezing.
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Conditions
1. Normal construction: temperatures between 40 degrees and 100 degrees.
2. Cold Weather Construction: temperatures below 40 degrees
a. Comply with requirements for masonry construction in cold weather from the
BIA Technical Notes on Brick Construction, No. 1, Cold and Hot Weather
Construction, Table No. 1 as summarized in the following table:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 14 16 - 5
BRICK UNIT PAVING
Page 5 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Preparation and Construction requirements are based on ambient temperatures. Protection requirements, after
masonry is placed, are based on mean daily temperatures.
Temperature1
Preparation
Requirements
(Prior to Work)
Construction
Requirements
(Work in Progress)
Protection
Requirements
(After Masonry is
Placed)
40 degrees F to
32 degrees F
Do not lay masonry units
having either a temperature
below 20 degrees F or
containing frozen moisture,
visible ice, or snow on their
surface.
Remove visible ice and
snow from top surface of
existing foundations and
masonry to receive new
construction. Heat these
surfaces above freezing,
using methods that do not
result in damage.
Heat mixing water or sand to
produce mortar between 40
degrees F and 120 degrees
F.
Do not heat water or
aggregates used in mortar or
grout above 140 degrees F.
Heat grout materials when
their temperature is below 32
degrees F.
Completely cover newly
constructed masonry
with a weather-resistive
membrane for 24 hr after
construction.
32 degrees F to
25 degrees F
Comply with cold weather
requirements above.
Comply with cold weather
requirements above.
Maintain mortar temperature
above freezing until used in
masonry.
Heat grout materials so grout
is at a temperature between
70 degrees F and 120
degrees F during mixing and
placed at a temperature
above 70 degrees F.
Comply with cold
weather requirements
above.
25 degrees F to
20 degrees F
Comply with cold weather
requirements above.
Comply with cold weather
requirements above.
Heat masonry surfaces under
construction to 40 degrees F
and use wind breaks or
enclosures when the wind
velocity exceeds 15 mph.
Heat masonry to a minimum
of 40 degrees F prior to
grouting.
Completely cover newly
constructed masonry
with weather-resistive
insulating blankets or
equal protection for 24 hr
after completion of work.
Extend time period to 48
hr for grouted masonry,
unless the only cement
in the grout is Type III
Portland cement.
20 degrees F and
below
Comply with cold weather
requirements above.
Comply with cold weather
requirements above.
Maintain newly
constructed masonry
temperature above 32
degrees F for at least 24
hr after being completed
by using heated
enclosures, electric
heating blankets, infrared
lamps, or other
acceptable methods.
Extend time period to 48
hr for grouted masonry,
unless the only cement
in the grout is Type III
Portland cement.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 14 16 - 6
BRICK UNIT PAVING
Page 6 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3. Hot Weather Construction: temperatures above 100 degrees
a. Comply with requirements for masonry construction in hot weather from the
BIA Technical Notes on Brick Construction, No 1., Cold and Hot Weather
Construction, Table No. 1 as summarized in the following table:
1. Preparation and Construction requirements are based on ambient temperatures. Protection requirements, after
masonry is placed, are based on mean daily temperatures.
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Rigid Concrete Base: See Section 32 13 13.
B. Reinforcing Steel: Section 32 13 13
C. Paving Brick for Heavy Vehicular Traffic: Standard Solid (uncored) Paving Brick of
modular size, 2-1/4 inches x 3-5/8 inches x 7-5/8 inches except as indicated, as per
ASTM C1272, Type R, Application PX.
D. Setting Materials
1. The mortar setting bed shall consist of:
a. 1 part Portland cement - ASTM C150, Type 1
b. 1/4 part hydrated lime by volume - ASTM C207, Type 5
Temperature1
Preparation
Requirements
(Prior to Work)
Construction Requirements
(Work in Progress)
Protection
Requirements
(After Masonry is
Placed)
Above 115
degrees F or
105 degrees F
with a wind
velocity over 8
mph
Shade materials and mixing
equipment from direct
sunlight.
Comply with hot weather
requirements below.
Use cool mixing water for
mortar and grout. Ice must be
melted or removed before
water is added to other mortar
or grout materials.
Comply with hot weather
requirements below.
Comply with hot weather
requirements below.
Above 100
degrees F or
90 degrees F with
8 mph wind
Provide necessary
conditions and equipment to
produce mortar having a
temperature below 120
degrees F.
Maintain sand piles in a
damp, loose condition.
Maintain mortar and grout at a
temperature below 120
degrees F.
Flush mixer, mortar transport
container, and mortar boards
with cool water before they
come into contact with mortar
ingredients or mortar.
Maintain mortar consistency by
retempering with cool water.
Use mortar within 2 hr of initial
mixing.
Fog spray newly
constructed masonry until
damp, at least 3 times a
day until the masonry is 3
days old.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 14 16 - 7
BRICK UNIT PAVING
Page 7 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
c. 3 parts damp sand - ASTM C144 (for high-bond mortar, gradation in
accordance with additive manufacturer’s recommendations).
d. Add water to obtain stiff mix - ASTM C1602.
2. The wet mortar joint filler shall consist of:
a. 1 part Portland cement - ASTM C150, Type l
b. 3 parts dry sand - ASTM C144.
c. Add water to obtain a wet mix - ASTM C1602
3. High bond mortar mix shall consist of:
a. 1 sack Portland cement - ASTM C150, Type l
b. 50 pounds workability additive - “A” Marble Dust by Armco Steel Corporation,
Piqua Quarries, or Ute Dolomite Limestone by U.S. Lime Division of Flintkote
Corporation, or Micro Fill No. 2 by Pure Stone Company, Marble Falls, Texas
or approved equal
c. 3-1/4 cubic feet of sand - ASTM C144
d. 4 gallons of high bond additive -Sarabond Liquid Mortar Additive by the Dow
Chemical Corporation or approved equal
e. Mix with water in accordance with High Bond Additive manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Place 8-inch reinforced concrete base under proposed brick pavement.
1. Concrete base: See Section 32 13 13.
a. Design concrete mix design for a minimum compressive strength of 3,000
pounds per square inch at the age of 2 days for either type I or type III cement
2. Reinforcing Steel: Section 32 13 13
a. No. 4 bars at 18 inches on center both directions
3. Keep concrete surfaces to receive pavers dry, clean, free of oily or waxy films and
level.
4. Verify gradients and elevations of base are as indicated on Drawings.
B. Protect adjacent finished surfaces from soiling, staining, and other damage during
construction. Clean and restore any damage or stains to adjacent surfaces to equal or
better than original condition.
C. Spread and screed setting bed mixture to a true plane and limit bed mixture to an
amount that can be covered with pavers before initial set.
D. Set pavers in the patterns shown in the field with uniform tight joints (1/4-inch).
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 14 16 - 8
BRICK UNIT PAVING
Page 8 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
E. Do not use pavers with chips, cracks, or voids.
F. Set paver in 1-inch layer of neat cement paste over setting bed.
G. Tolerances: Tolerances shall be checked continuously as work progresses so that
nonconforming areas can be corrected before mortar sets.
1. Alignment tolerances: maximum 1/4 inch in 20 feet; 1/2 inch in 40 feet
2. Surface tolerance: maximum plus or minus 1/8 inch in 8 feet noncumulative
3. Alignment and surface tolerances will be checked and enforced. The Contractor
shall make provisions that brick pavers can meet these tolerances as they are
supplied. Imperfections in the brick dimensions and surfaces will not constitute as
reasons to accept inferior paving and the work will be rejected.
H. Tamp pavers into full contact with the mortar bed to a level plane. Do not set large
areas of pavers for later leveling.
I. After pavers are set and cleaned free of mortar, fill joints with mortar, completely filling
voids.
J. Remove excess dry joint filler mixture and fog surface with fine water spray.
K. Cut pavers with motor driven masonry saw with a sharp diamond blade. Exposed
broken edges will not be allowed.
L. A 7 day damp cure is required. Employ barricades to restrict traffic during the 7 day
cure period. After the 7 day damp cure period, clean the surface with stiff brush and
brick manufacturer’s recommended cleaning solution in increments not exceeding 100
square feet, leaving surface clean and free of mortar and grout stains.
M. At the end of each day, spray paved areas with a fine mist of water. Fill joints within 3
days after the pavers are set. Spray paved areas until the joints are filled.
N. Sweep and keep brick surfaces clean at all times in order to avoid penetration of cement
into the brick surface.
3.5 REPAIR
A. General
1. Remove and replace masonry paving units as directed by the City that are loose,
chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining
units as intended.
2. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original
units, with same joint treatment to eliminate evidence of replacement.
3. Pointing: during tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with
mortar or grout. Point-up joints at sealant type joints to provide a neat, uniform
appearance, properly prepared to application of sealant.
4. Cleaning: Remove excess mortar/grout from exposed brick surfaces, wash and
scrub clean.
5. Protect masonry paving installations from deterioration, discoloration or damage
during subsequent constructions and until acceptance of work, in compliance with
recommendations of installer and paving unit manufacturer.
B. Trench Repair
1. Preparation
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 14 16 - 9
BRICK UNIT PAVING
Page 9 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a. Replace a continuous section if multiple repairs are closer than 10 feet apart
from edge of one repair to the edge of a second repair.
b. Surface Preparation: mark pavement cut repairs for approval by the CITY.
2. Removal
1) Use care in removing brick pavers to be repaired to prevent damage to
brick pavers adjacent to the repair area.
3. Installation: See Article 3.4.
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 3.4.A. Modified information to match City of Fort Worth Standard Detail
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 16 13 - 1
CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS AND VALLEY GUTTERS
Page 1 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised October 05, 2016
SECTION 32 16 13
CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS AND VALLEY GUTTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete Curbs and Gutters
2. Concrete Valley Gutters
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 - General Requirements
3. Section 02 41 13 - Selective Site Demolition
4. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving
5. Section 32 13 73 - Concrete Paving Joint Sealants
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Concrete Curb and Gutter
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the linear foot of Concrete Curb and
Gutter.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per linear foot of Concrete Curb and Gutter complete and in place
by curb height.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Preparing the subgrade
2) Furnishing and placing all materials, including foundation course,
reinforcing steel, and expansion material
2. Concrete Valley Gutter
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the square yard of Concrete Valley
Gutter.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per square yard of Concrete Valley Gutter complete and in place
for:
a) Various street types
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 16 13 - 2
CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS AND VALLEY GUTTERS
Page 2 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised October 05, 2016
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Preparing the subgrade
2) Furnishing and placing all materials, including foundation course,
reinforcing steel, and expansion material
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Conditions: See Section 32 13 13.
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Forms: See Section 32 13 13.
B. Concrete:
1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or detailed specifications, the standard
class for concrete curb, gutter, and curb & gutter is shown in the following table:
Standard Classes of Pavement Concrete
Class of
Concrete
Minimum
Cementitious,
Lb./CY
28 Day Min.
Compressive
Strength
psi
Maximum
Water/
Cementitious
Ratio
Course
Aggregate
Maximum
Size,
inch
A 470 3000 0.58 1-1/2
C. Reinforcement: See Section 32 13 13.
D. Joint Filler
1. Wood Filler: see Section 32 13 13.
2. Pre-Molded Asphalt Board Filler
a. Use only in areas where not practical for wood boards
b. Pre-molded asphalt board filler: ASTM D545
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 16 13 - 3
CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS AND VALLEY GUTTERS
Page 3 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised October 05, 2016
c. Install the required size and uniform thickness and as specified in the Drawings.
d. Include two liners of 0.016 asphalt impregnated kraft paper filled with a mastic
mixture of asphalt and vegetable fiber and/or mineral filler.
E. Expansion Joint Sealant: See Section 32 13 73.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Demolition / Removal: See Section 02 41 13.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Forms
1. Extend forms the full depth of concrete.
2. Wood forms: minimum of 1-1/2 inches in thickness
3. Metal Forms: a gauge that shall provide equivalent rigidity and strength
4. Use acceptable wood or metal forms for curves with a radius of less than 250 feet.
5. All forms showing a deviation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a straight line shall be
rejected.
B. Reinforcing Steel
1. Place all necessary reinforcement for City approval prior to depositing concrete.
2. All steel must be free from paint and oil and all loose scale, rust, dirt and other
foreign substances.
3. Remove foreign substances from steel before placing.
4. Wire all bars at their intersections and at all laps or splices.
5. Lap all bar splices a minimum of 20 diameters of the bar or 12 inches, whichever is
greater.
C. Concrete Placement
1. Deposit concrete to maintain a horizontal surface.
2. Work concrete into all spaces and around any reinforcement to form a dense mass
free from voids.
3. Work coarse aggregate away from contact with the forms
4. Hand-Laid Concrete – Curb and gutter
a. Shape and compact subgrade to the lines, grades and cross section shown on the
Drawings.
b. Lightly sprinkle subgrade material immediately before concrete placement.
c. Deposit concrete into forms.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 16 13 - 4
CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS AND VALLEY GUTTERS
Page 4 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised October 05, 2016
d. Strike off with a template 1/4 to 3/8 inch less than the dimensions of the
finished curb, unless otherwise approved.
5. Machine-Laid Concrete – Curb and Gutter
a. Hand-tamp and sprinkle subgrade material before concrete placement.
b. Provide clean surfaces for concrete placement.
c. Place the concrete with approved self-propelled equipment.
1) The forming tube of the extrusion machine or the form of the slipform
machine must easily be adjustable vertically during the forward motion of
the machine to provide variable heights necessary to conform to the
established gradeline.
d. Attach a pointer or gauge to the machine so that a continual comparison can be
made between the extruded or slipform work and the grade guideline.
e. Brush finish surfaces immediately after extrusion or slipforming.
6. Hand-Laid Concrete – Concrete Valley Gutter: See Section 32 13 13.
7. Expansion joints
a. Place expansion joints in the curb and gutter at 200-foot intervals and at
intersection returns and other rigid structures.
b. Place tooled joints at 15-foot intervals or matching abutting sidewalk joints and
pavement joints to a depth of 1-1/2 inches.
c. Place expansion joints at all intersections with concrete driveways, curbs,
buildings and other curb and gutters.
d. Make expansion joints no less than 1/2 inch in thickness, extending the full
depth of the concrete.
e. Make expansion joints perpendicular and at right angles to the face of the curb.
f. Neatly trim any expansion material extending above the finished to the surface
of the finished work.
g. Make expansion joints in the curb and gutter coincide with the concrete
expansion joints.
h. Longitudinal dowels across the expansion joints in the curb and gutter are
required.
i. Install 3 No. 4 round, smooth bars, 24 inches in length, for dowels at each
expansion joint.
j. Coat 1/2 of the dowel with a bond breaker and terminate with a dowel cap that
provides a minimum of 1 inch free expansion.
k. Support dowels by an approved method.
D. Curing: see Section 32 13 13.
3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections
1. Steel reinforcement placement
2. Headed bolts and studs
3. Verification of use of required design mixture
4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing
5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 16 13 - 5
CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS AND VALLEY GUTTERS
Page 5 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised October 05, 2016
B. Concrete Tests: Perform testing of fresh concrete sample obtained according to
ASTM C172 with the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain 1 fresh concrete sample for each day's pour of each
concrete mixture exceeding 5 cubic yard, but less than 150 cubic yard, plus 1 set for
each additional 150 cubic yard or fraction thereof.
2. Slump: ASTM C143; 1 test at point of placement for each concrete sample, but not
less than 1 test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional
tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; 1 test for
each sample, but not less than 1 test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064; 1 test for each concrete sample.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31.
a. Cast and laboratory cure 3 cylinders for each fresh concrete sample.
1) Do not transport field cast cylinders until they have cured for a
minimum of 24 hours.
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39;
a. Test 1 cylinder at 7 days.
b. Test 2 cylinders at 28 days.
7. Upload test results into Buzzsaw within 48 hours of testing. Reports of
compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number,
date of concrete placement, name of concrete tester and inspector, location of
concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture
proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for
both 7- and 28-day tests.
8. Additional Tests: Additional tests of concrete shall be made when test results
indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other City
specification requirements have not been met. The Lab Services division may
conduct or request tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C42 or by other methods as directed by the Project
Manager.
a. When the strength level of the concrete for any portion of the structure, as
indicated by cylinder tests, falls below the specified requirements, provide
improved curing conditions and/or adjustments to the mix design as required to
obtain the required strength. If the average strength of the laboratory control
cylinders falls so low as to be deemed unacceptable, follow the core test
procedure set forth in ACI 301, Chapter 17. Locations of core tests shall be
approved by the Project Engineer. Core sampling and testing shall be at
Contractors expense.
b. If the results of the core tests indicate that the strength of the structure is
inadequate, any replacement, load testing, or strengthening as may be ordered
by the Project Engineer shall be provided by the Contractor without cost to the
City.
9. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
10. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not
comply with the Contract Documents.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 16 13 - 6
CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS AND VALLEY GUTTERS
Page 6 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised October 05, 2016
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 1.2.A.2. Modified payment item to vary by street type
10/05/2016 Z. Arega Added Subsection 2.2.B.1 and Subsection 3.7
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 17 23 - 1
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Page 1 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
SECTION 32 17 23 1
PAVEMENT MARKINGS 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes: 5
1. Pavement Markings 6
a. Thermoplastic, hot-applied, spray (HAS) pavement markings 7
b. Thermoplastic, hot-applied, extruded (HAE) pavement markings 8
c. Preformed polymer tape 9
d. Preformed heat-activated thermoplastic tape 10
2. Raised markers 11
3. Work zone markings 12
4. Removal of pavement markings and markers 13
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 14
1. None. 15
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 16
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 17
2. Division 1 – General Requirements 18
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 19
A. Measurement and Payment 20
1. Pavement Markings 21
a. Measurement 22
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of material placed. 23
b. Payment 24
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 25
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the 26
unit price bid per linear foot of “Pvmt Marking” installed for: 27
a) Various Widths 28
b) Various Types 29
c) Various Materials 30
d) Various Colors 31
c. The price bid shall include: 32
1) Installation of Pavement Marking 33
2) Glass beads, when required 34
3) Surface preparation 35
4) Clean-up 36
5) Testing (when required) 37
2. Legends 38
a. Measurement 39
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Legend installed. 40
b. Payment 41
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 17 23 - 2
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Page 2 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 1
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Legend” installed for: 2
a) Various types 3
b) Various applications 4
c. The price bid shall include: 5
1) Installation of Pavement Marking 6
2) Glass beads, when required 7
3) Surface preparation 8
4) Clean-up 9
5) Testing 10
3. Raised Markers 11
a. Measurement 12
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Raised Marker installed. 13
b. Payment 14
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 15
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Raised Marker” installed 16
for: 17
a) Various types 18
c. The price bid shall include: 19
1) Installation of Raised Markers 20
2) Surface preparation 21
3) Clean-up 22
4) Testing 23
4. Work Zone Tab Markers 24
a. Measurement 25
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Tab Marker installed. 26
b. Payment 27
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 28
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Tab Marker” installed for: 29
a) Various types 30
c. The price bid shall include: 31
1) Installation of Tab Work Zone Markers 32
5. Fire Lane Markings 33
a. Measurement 34
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per the linear foot. 35
b. Payment 36
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 37
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the 38
unit price bid per linear foot of “Fire Lane Marking” installed. 39
c. The price bid shall include: 40
1) Surface preparation 41
2) Clean-up 42
3) Testing 43
6. Pavement Marking Removal 44
a. Measurement 45
1) Measure for this Item shall be per linear foot. 46
b. Payment 47
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 17 23 - 3
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Page 3 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 1
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the 2
unit price bid per linear foot of “Remove Pvmt Marking” performed for: 3
a) Various widths 4
c. The price bid shall include: 5
1) Removal of Pavement Markings 6
2) Clean-up 7
7. Raised Marker Removal 8
a. Measurement 9
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Pavement Marker removed. 10
b. Payment 11
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 12
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Remove Raised Marker” 13
performed. 14
c. The price bid shall include: 15
1) Removal of each Marker 16
2) Disposal of removed materials 17
3) Clean-up 18
8. Legend Removal 19
a. Measurement 20
1) Measure for this Item shall be per each Legend removed. 21
b. Payment 22
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 23
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the 24
unit price bid per linear foot of “Remove Legend” performed for: 25
a) Various types 26
b) Various applications 27
c. The price bid shall include: 28
1) Removal of Pavement Markings 29
2) Clean-up 30
1.3 REFERENCES 31
A. Reference Standards 32
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference 33
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this 34
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 35
2. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), 2011 Edition 36
a. Part 3, Markings 37
3. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 38
a. Standard Specification for Glass Beads Used in Pavement Markings, M 247-09 39
4. Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) 40
a. 23 CFR Part 655, FHWA Docket No. FHWA-2009-0139 41
5. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) 42
a. DMS-4200, Pavement Markers (Reflectorized) 43
b. DMS-4300, Traffic Buttons 44
c. DMS-8220, Hot Applied Thermoplastic 45
d. DMS-8240, Permanent Prefabricated Pavement Markings 46
e. DMS-8241, Removable Prefabricated Pavement Markings 47
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 17 23 - 4
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Page 4 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
f. DMS-8242, Temporary Flexible-Reflective Road Marker Tabs 1
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 2
1.5 SUBMITTALS 3
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 4
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for 5
specials. 6
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 7
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 8
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 9
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 10
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 11
A. Storage and Handling Requirements 12
1. The Contractor shall secure and maintain a location to store the material in 13
accordance with Section 01 50 00. 14
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 15
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 16
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 17
2.1 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS 18
A. New Products 19
1. Refer to Drawings to determine if there are owner-supplied products for the Project. 20
2.2 MATERIALS 21
A. Manufacturers 22
1. Only the manufacturers as listed in the City’s Standard Products List will be 23
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00. 24
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 25
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a 26
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00. 27
B. Materials 28
1. Pavement Markings 29
a. Thermoplastic, hot applied, spray 30
1) Refer to Drawings and City Standard Detail Drawings for width of 31
longitudinal lines. 32
2) Product shall be especially compounded for traffic markings. 33
3) When placed on the roadway, the markings shall not be slippery when wet, 34
lift from pavement under normal weather conditions nor exhibit a tacky 35
exposed surface. 36
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 17 23 - 5
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Page 5 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
4) Cold ductility of the material shall permit normal road surface expansion 1
and contraction without chipping or cracking. 2
5) The markings shall retain their original color, dimensions and placement 3
under normal traffic conditions at road surface temperatures of 158 degrees 4
Fahrenheit and below. 5
6) Markings shall have uniform cross-section, clean edges, square ends and no 6
evidence of tracking. 7
7) The density and quality of the material shall be uniform throughout the 8
markings. 9
8) The thickness shall be uniform throughout the length and width of the 10
markings. 11
9) The markings shall be 95 percent free of holes and voids, and free of 12
blisters for a minimum of 60 days after application. 13
10) The material shall not deteriorate by contact with sodium chloride, calcium 14
chloride or other chemicals used to prevent roadway ice or because of the 15
oil content of pavement markings or from oil droppings or other effects of 16
traffic. 17
11) The material shall not prohibit adhesion of other thermoplastic markings if, 18
at some future time, new markings are placed over existing material. 19
a) New material shall bond itself to the old line in such a manner that no 20
splitting or separation takes place. 21
12) The markings placed on the roadway shall be completely retroreflective 22
both internally and externally with traffic beads and shall exhibit uniform 23
retro-directive reflectance. 24
13) Traffic beads 25
a) Manufactured from glass 26
b) Spherical in shape 27
c) Essentially free of sharp angular particles 28
d) Essentially free of particles showing cloudiness, surface scoring or 29
surface scratching 30
e) Water white in color 31
f) Applied at a uniform rate 32
g) Meet or exceed Specifications shown in AASHTO Standard 33
Specification for Glass Beads Used in Pavement Markings, AASHTO 34
Designation: M 247-09. 35
b. Thermoplastic, hot applied, extruded 36
1) Product shall be especially compounded for traffic markings 37
2) When placed on the roadway, the markings shall not be slippery when wet, 38
lift from pavement under normal weather conditions nor exhibit a tacky 39
exposed surface. 40
3) Cold ductility of the material shall permit normal road surface expansion 41
and contraction without chipping or cracking. 42
4) The markings shall retain their original color, dimensions and placement 43
under normal traffic conditions at road surface temperatures of 158 degrees 44
Fahrenheit and below. 45
5) Markings shall have uniform cross-section, clean edges, square ends and no 46
evidence of tracking. 47
6) The density and quality of the material shall be uniform throughout the 48
markings. 49
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 17 23 - 6
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Page 6 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
7) The thickness shall be uniform throughout the length and width of the 1
markings. 2
8) The markings shall be 95 percent free of holes and voids, and free of 3
blisters for a minimum of 60 days after application. 4
9) The minimum thickness of the marking, as measured above the plane 5
formed by the pavement surface, shall not be less than 1/8 inch in the center 6
of the marking and 3/32 inch at a distance of ½ inch from the edge. 7
10) Maximum thickness shall be 3/16 inch. 8
11) The material shall not deteriorate by contact with sodium chloride, calcium 9
chloride or other chemicals used to prevent roadway ice or because of the 10
oil content of pavement markings or from oil droppings or other effects of 11
traffic. 12
12) The material shall not prohibit adhesion of other thermoplastic markings if, 13
at some future time, new markings are placed over existing material. New 14
material shall bond itself to the old line in such a manner that no splitting or 15
separation takes place. 16
13) The markings placed on the roadway shall be completely retroreflective 17
both internally and externally with traffic beads and shall exhibit uniform 18
retro-directive reflectance. 19
14) Traffic beads 20
a) Manufactured from glass 21
b) Spherical in shape 22
c) Essentially free of sharp angular particles 23
d) Essentially free of particles showing cloudiness, surface scoring or 24
surface scratching 25
e) Water white in color 26
f) Applied at a uniform rate 27
g) Meet or exceed Specifications shown in AASHTO Standard 28
Specification for Glass Beads Used in Pavement Markings, AASHTO 29
Designation: M 247-09. 30
c. Preformed Polymer Tape 31
1) Material shall meet or exceed the Specifications for SWARCO Director 35, 32
3M High Performance Tape Series 3801 ES, or approved equal. 33
d. Preformed Heat-Activated Thermoplastic Tape 34
1) Material shall meet or exceed the Specifications for HOT Tape Brand 0.125 35
mil preformed thermoplastic or approved equal. 36
2. Raised Markers 37
a. Markers shall meet the requirements of the Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic 38
Control Devices. 39
b. Non-reflective markers shall be Type Y (yellow body) and Type W (white 40
body) round ceramic markers and shall meet or exceed the TxDOT 41
Specification DMS-4300. 42
c. The reflective markers shall be plastic, meet or exceed the TxDOT 43
Specification DMS-4200 for high-volume retroreflective raised markers and be 44
available in the following types: 45
1) Type I-C, white body, 1 face reflects white 46
2) Type II-A-A, yellow body, 2 faces reflect amber 47
3) Type II-C-R, white body, 1 face reflects white, the other red 48
49
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 17 23 - 7
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Page 7 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
3. Work Zone Markings 1
a. Tabs 2
1) Temporary flexible-reflective roadway marker tabs shall meet requirements 3
of TxDOT DMS-8242, “Temporary Flexible-Reflective Road Marker 4
Tabs.” 5
2) Removable markings shall not be used to simulate edge lines. 6
3) No segment of roadway open to traffic shall remain without permanent 7
pavement markings for a period greater than 14 calendar days. 8
b. Raised Markers 9
1) All raised pavement markers shall meet the requirements of DMS-4200. 10
c. Striping 11
1) Work Zone striping shall meet or exceed the TxDOT Specification DMS-12
8200. 13
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 14
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 15
A. Performance 16
1. Minimum maintained retroreflectivity levels for longitudinal markings shall meet 17
the requirements detailed in the table below for a minimum of 30 calendar days. 18
Posted Speed (mph)
≤ 30 35 – 50 ≥ 55
2-lane roads with centerline
markings only (1) n/a 100 250
All other roads (2) n/a 50 100
(1) Measured at standard 30-m geometry in units of mcd/m2/lux. 19
(2) Exceptions: 20
A. When raised reflective pavement markings (RRPMs) supplement or substitute for a 21
longitudinal line, minimum pavement marking retroreflectivity levels are not applicable as 22
long as the RRPMs are maintained so that at least 3 are visible from any position along that 23
line during nighttime conditions. 24
B. When continuous roadway lighting assures that the markings are visible, minimum 25
pavement marking retroreflectivity levels are not applicable. 26
PART 3 - EXECUTION 27
3.1 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 28
3.2 PREPARATION 29
A. Pavement Conditions 30
1. Roadway surfaces shall be free of dirt, grease, loose and/or flaking existing 31
markings and other forms of contamination. 32
2. New Portland cement concrete surfaces shall be cleaned sufficiently to remove the 33
curing membrane. 34
3. Pavement to which material is to be applied shall be completely dry. 35
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 17 23 - 8
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Page 8 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
4. Pavement shall be considered dry, if, on a sunny day after observation for 15 1
minutes, no condensation develops on the underside of a 1 square foot piece of 2
clear plastic that has been placed on the pavement and weighted on the edges. 3
5. Equipment and methods used for surface preparation shall not damage the 4
pavement or present a hazard to motorists or pedestrians. 5
3.3 INSTALLATION 6
A. General 7
1. The materials shall be applied according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. 8
2. Markings and markers shall be applied within temperature limits recommended by 9
the material manufacturer, and shall be applied on clean, dry pavement having a 10
surface temperature above 50 degrees Fahrenheit. 11
3. Markings that are not properly applied due to faulty application methods or being 12
placed in the wrong position or alignment shall be removed and replaced by the 13
Contractor at the Contractor’s expense. If the mistake is such that it would be 14
confusing or hazardous to motorists, it shall be remedied the same day of 15
notification. Notification will be made by phone and confirmed by fax. Other 16
mistakes shall be remedied within 5 days of written notification. 17
4. When markings are applied on roadways open to traffic, care will be taken to 18
ensure that proper safety precautions are followed, including the use of signs, 19
cones, barricades, flaggers, etc. 20
5. Freshly applied markings shall be protected from traffic damage and disfigurement. 21
6. Temperature of the material must be equal to the temperature of the road surface 22
before allowing traffic to travel on it. 23
B. Pavement Markings 24
1. Thermoplastic, hot applied, spray 25
a. This method shall be used to install and replace long lines – centerlines, lane 26
lines, edge lines, turn lanes, and dots. 27
b. Markings shall be applied at a 110 mil thickness. 28
c. Markings shall be applied at a 90 mil thickness when placed over existing 29
markings. 30
d. A sealer shall be used if concrete or asphalt is older than three (3) years. 31
e. Typical setting time shall be between 4 minutes and 10 minutes depending 32
upon the roadway surface temperature and the humidity factor. 33
f. Retroreflective raised markers shall be used to supplement the centerlines, lane 34
lines, and turn lanes. Refer to City Standard Detail Drawings for placement. 35
g. Minimum retroreflectivity of markings shall meet or exceed values shown in 36
subparagraph 2.4.A.1 of this Specification. 37
2. Thermoplastic, hot applied, extruded 38
a. This method shall be used to install and replace crosswalks and stop-lines. 39
b. Markings shall be applied at a 125 mil thickness. 40
c. Minimum retroreflectivity of markings shall meet or exceed values shown in 41
this Specification. 42
3. Preformed Polymer Tape 43
a. This method shall be used to install and replace crosswalks, stop-lines, and 44
legends. 45
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 17 23 - 9
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Page 9 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
b. The applied marking shall adhere to the pavement surface with no slippage or 1
lifting and have square ends, straight lines and clean edges. 2
c. Minimum retroreflectivity of markings shall meet or exceed values shown in 3
this Specification. 4
4. Preformed Heat-Activated Thermoplastic Tape 5
a. This method shall be used to install and replace crosswalks, stop-lines, and 6
legends. 7
b. The applied marking shall adhere to the pavement surface with no slippage or 8
lifting and have square ends, straight lines and clean edges. 9
c. Minimum retroreflectivity of markings shall meet or exceed values shown in 10
this Specification. 11
C. Raised Markers 12
1. All permanent raised pavement markers on Portland Cement roadways shall be 13
installed with epoxy adhesive. Bituminous adhesive is not acceptable. 14
2. All permanent raised pavement markers on new asphalt roadways may be installed 15
with epoxy or bituminous adhesive. 16
3. A chalk line, chain or equivalent shall be used during layout to ensure that 17
individual markers are properly aligned. All markers shall be placed uniformly 18
along the line to achieve a smooth continuous appearance. 19
D. Work Zone Markings 20
1. Work shall be performed with as little disruption to traffic as possible. 21
2. Install longitudinal markings on pavement surfaces before opening to traffic. 22
3. Maintain lane alignment traffic control devices and operations until markings are 23
installed. 24
4. Install markings in proper alignment in accordance with the Texas MUTCD and as 25
shown on the Drawings. 26
5. Place standard longitudinal lines no sooner than 3 calendar days after the placement 27
of a surface treatment, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 28
6. Place markings in proper alignment with the location of the final pavement 29
markings. 30
7. Do not use raised pavement markers for words, symbols, shapes, or diagonal or 31
transverse lines. 32
8. All markings shall be visible from a distance of 300 feet in daylight conditions and 33
from a distance of at least 160 feet in nighttime conditions, illuminated by low-34
beam automobile headlight. 35
9. The daytime and nighttime reflected color of the markings must be distinctly white 36
or yellow. 37
10. The markings must exhibit uniform retroreflective characteristics. 38
11. Epoxy adhesives shall not be used to work zone markings. 39
3.4 REMOVALS 40
1. Pavement Marking and Marker Removal 41
a. The industry’s best practice shall be used to remove existing pavement 42
markings and markers. 43
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 17 23 - 10
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Page 10 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
b. If the roadway is being damaged during the marker removal, Work shall be 1
halted until consultation with the City. 2
c. Removals shall be done in such a matter that color and texture contrast of the 3
pavement surface will be held to a minimum. 4
d. Repair damage to asphaltic surfaces, such as spalling, shelling, etc., greater than 5
¼ inch in depth resulting from the removal of pavement markings and markers. 6
Driveway patch asphalt emulsion may be broom applied to reseal damage to 7
asphaltic surfaces. 8
e. Dispose of markers in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations. 9
f. Use any of the following methods unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 10
1) Surface Treatment Method 11
a) Apply surface treatment at rates shown on the Drawings or as directed. 12
Place a surface treatment a minimum of 2 feet wide to cover the 13
existing marking. 14
b) Place a surface treatment, thin overlay, or microsurfacing a minimum 15
of 1 lane in width in areas where directional changes of traffic are 16
involved or in other areas as directed by the City. 17
2) Burn Method 18
a) Use an approved burning method. 19
b) For thermoplastic pavement markings or prefabricated pavement 20
markings, heat may be applied to remove the bulk of the marking 21
material prior to blast cleaning. 22
c) When using heat, avoid spalling pavement surfaces. 23
d) Sweeping or light blast cleaning may be used to remove minor residue. 24
3) Blasting Method 25
a) Use a blasting method such as water blasting, abrasive blasting, water 26
abrasive blasting, shot blasting, slurry blasting, water-injected abrasive 27
blasting, or brush blasting as approved. 28
b) Remove pavement markings on concrete surfaces by a blasting method 29
only. 30
4) Mechanical Method 31
a) Use any mechanical method except grinding. 32
b) Flail milling is acceptable in the removal of markings on asphalt and 33
concrete surfaces. 34
2. If a location is to be paved over, no additional compensation will be allowed for 35
marking or marker removal. 36
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 37
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 38
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 39
A. All lines must have clean edges, square ends, and be uniform cross-section. 40
B. The density and quality of markings shall be uniform throughout their thickness. 41
C. The applied markings shall have no more than 5 percent, by area, of holes or voids and 42
shall be free of blisters. 43
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 17 23 - 11
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Page 11 of 11
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 1
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 2
3.10 CLEANING 3
A. Contractor shall clean up and remove all loose material resulting from construction 4
operations. 5
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 6
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 7
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 8
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 9
END OF SECTION 10
11
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
11/22/13 S. Arnold Removed paint type marking, updated references, added sealer language
12
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 17 25 - 1
CURB ADDRESS PAINTING
Page 1 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Version November 4, 2013
SECTION 32 17 25
CURB ADDRESS PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Painting of house addresses on curb of driveway radiuses that are removed and
replaced as shown on the Drawings
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 1 - General Requirements.
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for this Item shall include two curb faces. Both curb faces shall
be paid for as a single bid item.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Curb Address Painting”
completed per address.
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Furnishing all labor, materials and equipment
b. Any incidentals necessary to complete Curb Address Painting
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the latest revision date
logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
1.4 – 1.12 [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, MATERIALS
A. Materials
1. All materials shall be of recent product and suitable for its intended purpose.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 17 25 - 2
CURB ADDRESS PAINTING
Page 2 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Version November 4, 2013
2. Background paint shall be 7100 Series 100% Acrylic Satin White paint
manufactured by Kwal Paint, or approved equal.
3. Lettering paint shall be 7100 Series 100% Acrylic Satin Black paint manufactured
by Kwal Paint, or approved equal.
B. Size Requirements
1. The minimum size for the background shall be 6-inches wide by 16-inches long, or
as directed in the Drawings.
2. The minimum size for letters shall be 4-inches high, or as directed in the Drawings.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation
1. Provide surface preparation in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Surface Conditions
1. Unless approved otherwise by the City, surface conditions must meet the following
minimum requirements:
a. Concrete has cured for a minimum of 28-days
b. Surface temperature greater than 50˚F and less than 95˚F
2. No work shall occur if weather conditions may harm or damage the final finished
surface.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Background Application
1. Apply the background with 3- or 4-inch roller with ½-inch nap, unless otherwise
approved by the City.
C. Letter Application
1. Apply the lettering with 1- or ½-inch artificial nylon or polyester or combination
brush and stencils, unless otherwise approved by the City.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 17 25 - 3
CURB ADDRESS PAINTING
Page 3 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Version November 4, 2013
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
11/4/2013 Fred Griffin Clarified 1.2.A.1.a – to show bid item includes two curb faces. And 1.2.A.2.a –
includes per address.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 91 19 - 1
TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND FINISHING OF PARKWAYS
Page 1 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 32 91 19
TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND FINISHING OF PARKWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Furnish and place topsoil to the depths and on the areas shown on the Drawings.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 - General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for this Item shall be by cubic yard of Topsoil in place.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price
bid per cubic yard of Topsoil.
b. All excavation required by this Item in cut sections shall be measured in
accordance with provisions for the various excavation items involved with the
provision that excavation will be measured and paid for once, regardless of the
manipulations involved.
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Furnishing Topsoil
b. Loading
c. Hauling
d. Placing
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 91 19 - 2
TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND FINISHING OF PARKWAYS
Page 2 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil
1. Use easily cultivated, fertile topsoil that:
a. Is free from objectionable material including subsoil, weeds, clay lumps, non-
soil materials, roots, stumps or stones larger than 1.5 inches
b. Has a high resistance to erosion
c. Is able to support plant growth
2. Secure topsoil from approved sources.
3. Topsoil is subject to testing by the City.
4. pH: 5.5 to 8.5.
5. Liquid Limit: 50 or less
6. Plasticity Index: 20 or less
7. Gradation: maximum of 10 percent passing No. 200 sieve
B. Water: Clean and free of industrial wastes and other substances harmful to the growth
of vegetation
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Finishing of Parkways
1. Smoothly shape parkways, shoulders, slopes, and ditches.
2. Cut parkways to finish grade prior to the placing of any improvements in or
adjacent to the roadway.
3. In the event that unsuitable material for parkways is encountered, extend the depth
of excavation in the parkways 6 inches and backfill with top soil.
4. Make standard parkway grade perpendicular to and draining to the curb line.
a. Minimum: 1/4 inch per foot
b. Maximum: 4:1
c. City may approve variations from these requirements in special cases.
5. Whenever the adjacent property is lower than the design curb grade and runoff
drains away from the street, the parkway grade must be set level with the top of the
curb.
6. The design grade from the parkway extends to the back of the walk line.
7. From that point (behind the walk), the grade may slope up or down at maximum
slope of 4:1.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 91 19 - 3
TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND FINISHING OF PARKWAYS
Page 3 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
B. Placing of Topsoil
1. Spread the topsoil to a uniform loose cover at the thickness specified.
2. Place and shape the topsoil as directed.
3. Hand rake finish a minimum of 5 feet from all flatwork.
4. Tamp the topsoil with a light roller or other suitable equipment.
3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION] [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 92 13 - 1
HYDROMULCHING, SEEDING AND SODDING
Page 1 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 32 92 13
HYDROMULCHING, SEEDING AND SODDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Furnishing and installing grass sod and permanent seeding as shown on Drawings,
or as directed.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 - General Requirements
3. Section 32 91 19 – Topsoil Placement and Finishing of Parkways
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Block Sod Placement
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the square yard of Block Sod placed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per square yard of Block Sod placed.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and placing all sod
2) Rolling and tamping
3) Watering (until established)
4) Disposal of surplus materials
2. Seeding
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by the square yard of Seed spread.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per square yard of Seed placed for various installation methods.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and placing all Seed
2) Furnishing and applying water for seed fertilizer
3) Slurry and hydraulic mulching
4) Fertilizer
5) Watering and mowing (until established)
6) Disposal of surplus materials
3. Mowing
a. Measurement
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 92 13 - 2
HYDROMULCHING, SEEDING AND SODDING
Page 2 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) Measurement for this Item shall per each.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per each.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seed
1. Vendors’ certification that seeds meet Texas State seed law including:
a. Testing and labeling for pure live seed (PLS)
b. Name and type of seed
2. All seed shall be tested in a laboratory with certified results presented to the City in
writing, prior to planting.
3. All seed to be of the previous season's crop and the date on the container shall be
within 12 months of the seeding date.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Block Sod
1. Protect from exposure to wind, sun and freezing.
2. Keep stacked sod moist.
B. Seed
1. If using native grass or wildflower seed, seed must have been harvested within 100
miles of the construction site.
2. Each species of seed shall be supplied in a separate, labeled container for
acceptance by the City.
C. Fertilizer
1. Provide fertilizer labeled with the analysis.
2. Conform to Texas fertilizer law.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 92 13 - 3
HYDROMULCHING, SEEDING AND SODDING
Page 3 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Block Sod
a. Sod Varieties (match existing if applicable)
1) "Stenotaphrum secundatum" (St. Augustine grass)
2) "Cynodon dactylon" (Common Bermudagrass)
3) "Buchloe dactyloides" (Buffalograss)
4) an approved hybrid of Common Bermudagrass
5) or an approved Zoysiagrass
b. Sod must contain stolons, leaf blades, rhizomes and roots.
c. Sod shall be alive, healthy and free of insects, disease, stones, undesirable
foreign materials and weeds and grasses deleterious to its growth or which
might affect its subsistence or hardiness when transplanted.
d. Minimum sod thickness: 3/4 inch
e. Maximum grass height: 2 inches
f. Acceptable growing beds
1) St. Augustine grass sod: clay or clay loam topsoil
2) Bermuda grasses and zoysia grasses: sand or sandy loam soils
g. Dimensions
1) Machine cut to uniform soil thickness.
2) Sod shall be of equal width and of a size that permits the sod to be lifted,
handled and rolled without breaking.
h. Broken or torn sod or sod with uneven ends shall be rejected.
2. Seed
a. General
1) Plant all seed at rates based on pure live seed (PLS)
a) Pure Live Seed (PLS) determined using the formula:
(1) Percent Pure Live Seed = Percent Purity x [(Percent Germination +
Percent Firm or Hard Seed) + 100]
2) Availability of Seed
a) Substitution of individual seed types due to lack of availability may be
permitted by the City at the time of planting.
b) Notify the City prior to bidding of difficulties locating certain species.
3) Weed seed
a) Not exceed ten percent by weight of the total of pure live seed (PLS)
and other material in the mixture
b) Seed not allowed:
(1) Johnsongrass
(2) Nutgrass seed
4) Harvest seed within 1-year prior to planting
b. Non-native Grass Seed
1) Plant between April 15 and September 10
Lbs.
PLS/Acre
Common Name Botanical Name Purity
(percent)
Germination
(percent)
25 Bermuda (unhulled) cynodon dactylon 85 90
75 Bermuda (hulled) cynodon dactylon 95 90
2) Plant between September 10 and April 15
Lbs.
PLS/Acre
Common Name Botanical Name Purity
(percent)
Germination
(percent)
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 92 13 - 4
HYDROMULCHING, SEEDING AND SODDING
Page 4 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
220 Rye Grass lolium multiflorum 85 90
75 Bermuda (unhulled) cynodon dactylon 95 90
c. Native Grass Seed
1) Plant between February 1 and October 1.
Lbs. PLS/Acre Common Name Botanical Name
1.6 Green Sprangletop Leptochloa dubia
5.5 Sideoats Grama* Bouteloua curtipendula
3.7 Little Bluestem* Schizachyrium scoparium
17.0 Buffalograss Buchloe dactyloides
1.8 Indian Grass* Sorghastrum nutans
0.5 Sand Lovegrass* Eragrostis trichodes
6.0 Big Bluestem Andropogon gerardii
8.0 Eastern Grama Tripscacum dactyloides
1.2 Blue Grama Bouteloua gracilis
1.8 Switchgrass Panicum virgatum
10.0 Prairie Wildrye* Elymus canadensis
d. Wildflower Seed
1) Plant between the following:
a) March 5 and May 31
b) September 1 and December 1
Lbs. PLS/Acre Common Name Botanical Name
3.0 Bush Sunflower Sinsia calva
5.0 Butterfly Weed Asclepias tuberosa
2.0 Clasping Coneflower* Rudbeckia amplexicaulis
3.0 Golden - Wave Coreopsis basalis
13.4 Illinois Bundleflower Desmanthus illinoensis
13.6 Partridge Pea Cassia fasciculata
2.0 Prairie Verbena Verbena bipinnatifida
8.0 Texas Yellow Star Lindheimeri texana
8.0 Winecup Callirhoe involcrata
2.0 Black-eyed Susan Rudbeckia hirta
18.0 Cutleaf Daisy Engelmannia pinnatifida
2.0 Obedient Plant Physostegia intermedia
3.0 Pitcher Sage Salvia azurea
2.0 Plains Coreopsis Coreopsis tinctoria
8.0 Scarlet Sage Salvia coccinea
*not to be planted within ten feet of a road or parking lot or within three feet of a
walkway
e. Temporary Erosion Control Seed
1) Consist of the sowing of cool season plant seeds.
3. Mulch
a. For use with conventional mechanical or hydraulic planting of seed.
b. Wood cellulose fiber produced from virgin wood or recycled paper-by-products
(waste products from paper mills or recycled newspaper).
c. No growth or germination inhibiting factors.
d. No more than ten percent moisture, air dry weight basis.
e. Additives: binder in powder form.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 92 13 - 5
HYDROMULCHING, SEEDING AND SODDING
Page 5 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
f. Form a strong moisture retaining mat.
4. Fertilizer
a. Acceptable condition for distribution
b. Applied uniformly over the planted area
c. Analysis
1) 16-20-0
2) 16-8-8
d. Fertilizer rate:
1) Not required for wildflower seeding
2) Newly established seeding areas - 100 pounds of nitrogen per acre
3) Established seeding areas - 150 pounds of nitrogen per acre
5. Topsoil: See Section 32 91 19.
6. Water: clean and free of industrial wastes or other substances harmful to the
germination of the seed or to the growth of the vegetation.
7. Soil Retention Blanket
a. "Curlex I" from American Excelsior, 900 Ave. H East, Post Office Box 5624,
Arlington, Texas 76001, 1-800-777-SOIL or approved equal.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: clear surface of all material including:
1. Stumps, stones, and other objects larger than one inch.
2. Roots, brush, wire, stakes, etc.
3. Any objects that may interfere with seeding or maintenance.
B. Tilling
1. Compacted areas: till 1 inch deep
2. Areas sloped greater than 3:1: run a tractor parallel to slope to provide less
seed/water run-off
3. Areas near trees: Do not till deeper than 1/2 inch inside "drip line" of trees.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Block Sodding
1. General
a. Place sod between curb and walk and on terraces that is the same type grass as
adjacent grass or existing lawn.
b. Plant between the average last freeze date in the spring and 6 weeks prior to the
average first freeze in the fall.
2. Installation
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 92 13 - 6
HYDROMULCHING, SEEDING AND SODDING
Page 6 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a. Plant sod specified after the area has been completed to the lines and grades
shown on the Drawings with 6 inches of topsoil.
b. Use care to retain native soil on the roots of the sod during the process of
excavating, hauling and planting.
c. Keep sod material moist from the time it is dug until planted.
d. Place sod so that the entire area designated for sodding is covered.
e. Fill voids left in the solid sodding with additional sod and tamp.
f. Roll and tamp sod so that sod is in complete contact with topsoil at a uniform
slope.
g. Peg sod with wooden pegs (or wire staple) driven through the sod block to the
firm earth in areas that may slide due to the height or slope of the surface or
nature of the soil.
3. Watering and Finishing
a. Furnish water as an ancillary cost to Contractor by means of temporary
metering / irrigation, water truck or by any other method necessary to achieve
an acceptable stand of turf as defined in 3.13.B.
b. Thoroughly water sod immediately after planted.
c. Water until established.
d. Generally, an amount of water that is equal to the average amount of rainfall
plus 1/2 inch per week should be applied until accepted. If applicable, plant
large areas by irrigation zones to ensure areas are watered as soon as they are
planted.
B. Seeding
1. General
a. Seed only those areas indicated on the Drawings and areas disturbed by
construction.
b. Mark each area to be seeded in the field prior to seeding for City approval.
2. Broadcast Seeding
a. Broadcast seed in 2 directions at right angles to each other.
b. Harrow or rake lightly to cover seed.
c. Never cover seed with more soil than twice its diameter.
d. For wildflower plantings:
1) Scalp existing grasses to 1 inch
2) Remove grass clippings, so seed can make contact with the soil.
3. Mechanically Seeding (Drilling):
a. Uniformly distribute seed over the areas shown on the Drawings or as directed.
b. All varieties of seed and fertilizer may be distributed at the same time provided
that each component is uniformly applied at the specified rate.
c. Drill seed at a depth of 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch utilizing a pasture or rangeland type
drill.
d. Drill on the contour of slopes
e. After planting roll with a roller integral to the seed drill, or a corrugated roller
of the "Cultipacker" type.
f. Roll slope areas on the contour.
4. Hydromulching
a. Mixing: Seed, mulch, fertilizer and water may be mixed provided that:
1) Mixture is uniformly suspended to form a homogenous slurry.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 92 13 - 7
HYDROMULCHING, SEEDING AND SODDING
Page 7 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2) Mixture forms a blotter-like ground cover impregnated uniformly with
grass seed.
3) Mixture is applied within 30 minutes after placed in the equipment.
b. Placing
1) Uniformly distribute in the quantity specified over the areas shown on the
Drawings or as directed.
5. Fertilizing: uniformly apply fertilizer over seeded area.
6. Watering
a. Furnish water by means of temporary metering / irrigation, water truck or by
any other method necessary to achieve an acceptable stand of turf as defined in
3.13.B.
b. Water soil to a minimum depth of 4 inches within 48 hours of seeding.
c. Water as direct by the City at least twice daily for 14 days after seeding in such
a manner as to prevent washing of the slopes or dislodgement of the seed.
d. Water until final acceptance.
e. Generally, an amount of water that is equal to the average amount of rainfall
plus 1/2 inch per week should be applied until accepted.
3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE
A. Block Sodding
1. Water and mow sod until completion and final acceptance of the Project or as
directed by the City.
2. Sod shall not be considered finally accepted until the sod has started to peg down
(roots growing into the soil) and is free from dead blocks of sod.
B. Seeding
1. Water and mow sod until completion and final acceptance of the Project or as
directed by the City.
2. Maintain the seeded area until each of the following is achieved:
a. Vegetation is evenly distributed
b. Vegetation is free from bare areas
3. Turf will be accepted once fully established.
a. Seeded area must have 100 percent growth to a height of 3 inches with 1 mow
cycle performed by the Contractor prior to consideration of acceptance by the
City.
C. Rejection
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
32 92 13 - 8
HYDROMULCHING, SEEDING AND SODDING
Page 8 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. City may reject block sod or seeded area on the basis of weed populations.
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 01 30 - 1
SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING
Page 1 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 01 30
SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Testing for sanitary sewer pipe and manholes prior to placing in service
a. Low Pressure Air Test and Deflection (Mandrel) Test
1) Excludes pipe with flow
2) Hydrostatic Testing is not allowed.
b. Vacuum Testing for sanitary sewer manholes
2. Before any newly constructed sanitary sewer pipe and manholes are placed into
service it shall be cleaned and tested.
3. Pipe testing will include low pressure air test for 60-inch pipe and smaller.
4. Pipe testing will include low pressure air test of joints for 27-inch or larger pipe.
5. Pipe testing will include deflection (mandrel) test for pipe.
6. Hydrostatic testing is not allowed.
7. Manhole testing will include vacuum test.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 03 80 00 – Modifications to Existing Concrete Structures
4. Section 33 04 50 – Cleaning of Sewer Mains
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Pipe Testing
a. Measurement
1) This Item is considered subsidiary to the sanitary sewer main (pipe)
completed in place.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnishing in accordance with this
Item are subsidiary to the unit price bid per linear foot of sanitary sewer main
(pipe) complete in place, and no other compensation will be allowed.
2. Manhole Testing
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for testing manholes shall be per each vacuum test.
b. Payment
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 01 30 - 2
SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING
Page 2 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each vacuum test completed.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Mobilization
2) Plugs
3) Clean-up
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Test and Evaluation Reports
1. All test reports generated during testing (pass and fail)
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certifications
1. Mandrel Equipment
a. If requested by City, provide Quality Assurance certification that the equipment
used has been designed and manufactured in accordance to the required
specifications.
2. Joint Testing
a. Testing Service - Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
joint evaluation tests
b. Equipment - If requested by City, provide Quality Assurance certification that
the equipment used has been designed and manufactured in accordance to the
required specifications.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 01 30 - 3
SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING
Page 3 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Low Pressure Air Test (Pipe 60 inch and smaller)
1. Clean the sewer main before testing, as outlined in Section 33 04 50.
2. Plug ends of all branches, laterals, tees, wyes, and stubs to be included in test.
B. Low Pressure Joint Air Test (Pipe 27 inch or larger)
1. Clean the sewer main before testing, as outlined in Section 33 04 50.
2. Assemble individual joint tester over each joint from within the pipe.
C. Deflection (mandrel) test (Pipe)
1. Perform as last work item before final inspection.
2. Clean the sewer main and inspect for offset and obstruction prior to testing.
3. Materials
a. Mandrel used for deflection test
1) Use of an uncertified mandrel or a mandrel altered or modified after
certification will invalidate the deflection test.
2) Mandrel requirements
a) Odd number of legs with 9 legs minimum
b) Effective length not less than its nominal diameter
c) Fabricated of rigid and nonadjustable steel
d) Fitted with pulling rings and each end
e) Stamped or engraved on some segment other than a runner indicating
the following:
(1) Pipe material specification
(2) Nominal size
(3) Mandrel outside diameter (OD)
f) Mandrel diameter must be 95 percent of inside diameter (ID) of pipe.
g) Mandrel equipment shall be suitable for the pipe material to prevent
damage to the pipe. Consult manufacturer for appropriate mandrel
equipment.
D. Vacuum test (Manhole)
1. Plug lifting holes and exterior joints.
2. Plug pipes and stubouts entering the manhole.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 01 30 - 4
SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING
Page 4 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3. Secure stubouts, manhole boots, and pipe plugs to prevent movement while vacuum
is drawn.
4. Plug pipes with drop connections beyond drop.
5. Place test head inside the frame at the top of the manhole.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Low pressure air test (Pipe 60” Inch and Smaller)
1. Install plug with inlet tap.
2. Connect air hose to inlet tap and a portable air control source.
3. After the stabilization period (3.5 psig minimum pressure) start the stop watch.
4. Determine time in seconds that is required for the internal air pressure to reach 2.5
psig. Minimum permissible pressure holding time per diameter per length of pipe
is computed from the following equation:
T = (0.0850*D*K)
Q
Where:
T = shortest time, seconds, allowed for air pressure to drop to 1.0 psig
K = 0.000419*D*L, but not less than 1.0
D = nominal pipe diameter, inches
L = length of pipe being tested (by pipe size), feet
Q = 0.0015, cubic feet per minute per square foot of internal surface
5. UNI-B-6, Table 1 provides required time for given lengths of pipe for sizes 4-inch
through 60-inch based on the equation above.
UNI-B-6, Table 1
Minimum specified time required for a 1.0 psig pressure drop for size and length of pipe
indicated for q = 0.0015
12 3 4
Pipe
Diameter
(in.)
Minimum
Time
(min:
sec}
Length for
Minimum
Time (ft)
Time for
Longer
Length (sec)
100ft 150ft 200ft 250ft 300ft 350ft 400ft 450ft
4 3:46 597 .380 L 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46
6 5:40 398 .854 L 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:42 6:24
8 7:34 298 1.520 L 7:34 7:34 7:34 7:34 7:36 8:52 10:08 11:24
10 9:26 239 2.374 L 9:26 9:26 9:26 9:53 11:52 13:51 15:49 17:48
12 11:20 199 3.418 L 11:20 11:20 11:24 14:15 17:05 19:56 22:47 25:38:00
15 14:10 159 5.342 L 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:15 26:42:00 31:09:00 35:36:00 40:04:00
18 17:00 133 7.692 L 17:00 19:13 25:38:00 32:03:00 38:27:00 44:52:00 51:16:00 57:41:00
21 19:50 114 10.470 L 19:50 26:10:00 34:54:00 43:37:00 52:21:00 61:00:00 69:48:00 78:31:00
24 22:40 99 13.674 L 22:47 34:11:00 45:34:00 56:58:00 68:22:00 79:46:00 91:10:00 102:33:00
27 25:30:00 88 17.306 L 28:51:00 43:16:00 57:41:00 72:07:00 86:32:00 100:57:00 115:22:00 129:48:00
30 28:20:00 80 21.366 L 35:37:00 53:25:00 71:13:00 89:02:00 106:50:00 124:38:00 142:26:00 160:15:00
33 31:10:00 72 25.852 L 43:05:00 64:38:00 86:10:00 107:43:00 129:16:00 150:43:00 172:21:00 193:53:00
36 34:00:00 66 30.768 L 51:17:00 76:55:00 102:34:00 128:12:00 153:50:00 179:29:00 205:07:00 230:46:00
42 39:48:00 57 41.883L 69:48:00 104:42:00 139:37:00 174:30:00 209:24:00 244:19:00 279:13:00 314:07:00
48 45:34:00 50 54.705 L 91:10:00 136:45:00 182:21:00 227:55:00 273:31:00 319:06:00 364:42:00 410:17:00
54 51:02:00 44 69.236 L 115:24:00 173:05:00 230:47:00 288:29:00 346:11:00 403:53:00 461:34:00 519:16:00
60 56:40:00 40 85.476 L 142:28:00 213:41:00 284:55:00 356:09:00 427:23:00 498:37:00 569:50:00 641:04:00
Specification Time for Length (L) Shown (min:sec)
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 01 30 - 5
SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING
Page 5 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
6. Stop test if no pressure loss has occurred during the first 25 percent of the
calculated testing time.
B. Low pressure joint air test (27 Inch or larger pipe)
1. All pipe joints, for all pipe materials, shall be tested in accordance with ASTM
C1103 as follows:
2. Equipment shall be the product of manufacturers having more than five years of
regular production of successful joint testers. Joint tester shall be as manufactured
by Cherne Industrial, Inc., of Edina, Minnesota, or approved equal.
3. Follow equipment manufacturer's recommendations when performing tests; only
experienced technicians shall perform tests.
4. The testing equipment shall be assembled and positioned over the center of the pipe
joint and the end element tubes inflated to a maximum of 25 psi.
5. Pressurize the center joint test area to 4.0 psig and allow the temperature and
pressure to stabilize at the minimum of 2.5 psig for a period of 2.0 minutes prior to
testing.
6. To test, adjust the pressure to 3.5 psig and measure the time required to decrease the
pressure from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig.
7. The joint is acceptable if the time for the pressure to drop from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig
is greater than 10 seconds.
C. Deflection (mandrel) test (Pipe)
1. For pipe 36 inches and smaller, the mandrel is pulled through the pipe by hand to
ensure that maximum allowable deflection is not exceeded.
2. Maximum percent deflection by pipe size is as follows:
Nominal Pipe Size
Inches
Percent Deflection Allowed
12 and smaller 5.0
15 through 30 4.0
Greater than 30 3.0
D. Vacuum test (Manhole)
1. Test manhole prior to coating with epoxy or other material.
2. Draw a vacuum of 10 inches of mercury and turn off the pump.
3. With the valve closed, read the level vacuum level after the required test time.
4. Minimum time required for vacuum drop of 1 inch of mercury is as follows:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 01 30 - 6
SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING
Page 6 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
Depth of
Manhole, feet
4-foot Dia
Seconds
5-foot Dia
Seconds
6-foot Dia
Seconds
8 20 26 33
10 25 33 41
12 30 39 49
14 35 45 57
16 40 52 67
18 40 59 73
** T=5 T=6.5 T=8
** For manholes over 18 feet deep, add “T” seconds as shown for each respective
diameter for each 2 feet of additional depth of manhole to the time shown for 18 foot
depth. (Example: A 30 foot deep, 4-foot diameter. Total test time would be 70
seconds. 40+6(5)=70 seconds)
5. Manhole vacuum levels observed to drop greater than 1 inch of mercury will have
failed the test.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Non-Conforming Work
1. Low pressure air test (Pipe 60 Inch and smaller)
a. Should the air test fail, find and repair leak(s) and retest.
2. Low pressure joint air test (Pipe 27 inch or larger)
a. 100 percent of all joints shall be field tested, prior to the placement of backfill
over the spring line of the pipe, after the pipe has been substantially locked in to
place by embedment. If the pipe does not pass the field air test, the joint will be
pulled and refitted or rejected and removed from the project. After full
placement of backfill and proper compaction, 100% of all joints will be tested
again, as the installation progresses. At no time shall pipe installation exceed
300 feet beyond the last joint tested.
b. No more than 2 percent of the total number of joints failing to meet the
requirements of this test shall be field repaired by joint grout injection, or band
clamps, or other method. Any joints over 2% requiring field repairs shall be
rejected and removed from the project site. Rejected pipe shall be removed
from the project. Installation shall be stopped until defective joints are repaired
or replaced.
3. Should Deflection (mandrel) test (Pipe)
a. Should the mandrel fail to pass, the pipe is considered overdeflected.
b. Uncover overdeflected pipe. Reinstall if not damaged.
c. If damaged, remove and replace.
4. Vacuum test (Manhole)
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 01 30 - 7
SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING
Page 7 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a. Should the vacuum test fail, repair suspect area and retest.
1) External repairs required for leaks at pipe connection to manhole.
a) Shall be in accordance with Section 03 80 00.
2) Leaks within the manhole structure may be repaired internally or
externally.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
8/10/2018 W. Norwood 3.4.D Require testing prior to coating manholes
9/7/2018 W. Norwood
3.3, A&B, Add individual joint testing option for 27 inch and larger with
independent testing.
3.4.A Include UNI-B-6, Table 1 for low pressure air test
4.4.B Include individual joint testing requirements
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
POST INSTALLA TION
MANHOLE VACUUM TEST FORM
Company Name :
Address:
Phone #: Cell: Work:
Coating Date: Crew Leader:
Project Name: Project #:
Contractor:
Owner:
Indicate Pass/Fail:
Location of Structure :
Manhole Pour or Placement Date:
MANHOLE INFORMATION
Line & Station #: Other:
Structure Type: (check one) 4’ DI MH TYPE A FLDW DIV BOX
5’ DI MH TYPE B FLDW DIV BOX
6’ DI MH JUNCTION BOX
7’ DI MH SPHIPHON ENTRY BOX
METERING STATION
Vacuum Test Results
Inspection Date: Repair Locations
Inspection Company:
Inspector Name:
Repair Date:
Repair Location:
Type of Repair:
Repair Materials:
Comments:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 01 31 - 1
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION
Page 1 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised March 3, 2016
SECTION 33 01 31
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Requirements and procedures for Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection of
sanitary sewer or storm sewer mains
2. For sanitary sewer projects all (existing: Pre-CCTV, proposed: Post-CCTV) main
shall be inspected.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 33 03 10 – Bypass Pumping of Existing Sewer Systems
4. Section 33 04 50 – Cleaning of Sewer Mains
5. Section 01 32 16 – Construction Progress Schedule
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Pre-CCTV Inspection
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for this Item will be by the linear foot of line televised for CCTV
Inspection performed prior to any line modification or replacement determined
from the distance recorded on the video log.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price
bid per linear foot for “Pre-CCTV Inspection”.
1) Contractor will not be paid for unaccepted video.
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Mobilization
b. Cleaning
c. Digital file
B. Post-CCTV Inspection
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for this Item will be by the linear foot of line televised for CCTV
Inspection performed following repair or installation determined from the
distance recorded on the video log.
2. Payment
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 01 31 - 2
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION
Page 2 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised March 3, 2016
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price
bid per linear foot for “Post-CCTV Inspection”.
1) Contractor will not be paid for unaccepted video.
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Mobilization
b. Cleaning
c. Digital file
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. City of Fort Worth Water Department
a. City of Fort Worth Water Department CCTV Inspection and Defect Coding
Program (CCTV Manual). The CCTV Manual is available for download on
Buzzsaw. Location: Resources\70 – Inspection Tools\Standard Construction
b. City of Fort Worth Water Department CCTV Spread Sheet Log is available for
download on Buzzsaw. Location: Resources\70 – Inspection Tools\Standard
Construction.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. Sanitary Sewer Lines
a. Meet with City of Fort Worth Water Department staff to confirm that the
appropriate equipment, software, standard templates, defect codes and defect
rankings are being used, if required.
2. Storm Sewer Lines
a. Meet with City of Fort Worth Transportation/Public Works Department staff to
confirm that the appropriate equipment, software, standard templates, defect
codes and defect rankings are being used, if required.
B. Schedule
1. Include Pre and Post CCTV schedule as part of the Construction Progress Schedule
per Section 01 32 16.
2. Include time for City review (2 weeks minimum – Notification needs to be send out
to Project Manager & Field Operation).
3. If CCTV is accepted by City, proceed with work. If rejected, coordinate with City
per Part 1.4 A.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the Engineer or the City prior to delivery.
C. If inspected with Infrastructure Technologies I.T. Software per CCTV Manual provide
video data per the CCTV Manual. Provide additional copy of video in Windows Media
Audio/Video (.wmv) format for City Inspection review.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 01 31 - 3
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION
Page 3 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised March 3, 2016
D. If inspected with other software provide video data in Windows Media Audio/Video
(.wmv) format. Provide CCTV log in EXCEL spread sheet format – The CCTV spread
sheet log can be found on Buzzsaw. Location: Resources\70 – Inspection
Tools\Standard Construction.
E. Inspection Report shall include:
1. Asset
a. Date
b. City
c. Address and/or Project Name
d. Main Number – GIS ID (If Available)
e. Upstream Manhole GIS ID (If Available)
f. Downstream Manhole GIS ID (If Available)
g. Pipe Diameter
h. Material
i. Pipe Length
j. Mapsco Location Number
k. Date Constructed
l. Pipe Wall Thickness
2. Inspection
a. Inspection Number (i.e. 1st,2nd,etc…)
b. Crew Number
c. Operator Name
d. Operator Comments
e. Reason for Inspection
f. Equipment Number
g. Camera Travel Direction (Upstream/Downstream)
h. Inspected Length (feet)
i. Work Order Number (if required)
j. City Project Number (if required)
k. City Contract Name
l. DOE/TPW Number (if required)
m. Consultant Company Name
n. Consultant Contact Name
o. Consultant Contact Phone Number
p. Contractor Company Name
q. Contractor Contact Name
r. Contractor Contact Phone Number
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Pre-CCTV submittals
1. 2 copies of CCTV video results on USB drive
2. 2 hard copies of Inspection Report and one pdf copy on USB drive
B. Additional information that may be requested by the City
1. Listing of cleaning equipment and procedures
2. Listing of flow diversion procedures if required
3. Listing of CCTV equipment
4. Listing of backup and standby equipment
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 01 31 - 4
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION
Page 4 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised March 3, 2016
5. Listing of safety precautions and traffic control measures
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Post-CCTV submittals
1. 2 copies of CCTV video results on USB drive
2. 2 Hard copies of Inspection Report. A pdf copy on USB drive shall be submitted to
the City Inspector for review prior to scheduling a project final walk through.
3. CCTV speadsheet log in EXCEL format – A blank copy of the CCTV spread sheet
log can be found on Buzzsaw. Location: Resources\70 – Inspection Tools\Standard
Construction
4. Construction Plans identifying the line segments that were videoed. Include cover
sheet, overall line layout sheet(s), and plan and profile sheet(s).
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Equipment–
1. Closed Circuit Television Camera
a. The television camera used shall be one specifically designed and constructed
for sewer inspection. Lighting for the camera shall be suitable to allow a clear
picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. The camera shall be operative in 100
percent humidity/submerged conditions. The equipment will provide a view of
the pipe ahead of the equipment and of features to the side of the equipment
through turning and rotation of the lens. The camera shall be capable of tilting
at right angles along the axis of the pipe while panning the camera lens through
a full circle about the circumference of the pipe. The lights on the camera shall
also be capable of panning 90-degrees to the axis of the pipe.
b. The radial view camera must be solid state color and have remote control of the
rotational lens. The camera shall be capable of viewing the complete
circumference of the pipe and manhole structure, including the cone-section or
corbel. The camera lens shall be an auto-iris type with remote controlled
manual override.
2. Video Capture System
a. The video and audio recordings of the sewer inspections shall be made using
digital video equipment. A video enhancer may be used in conjunction with,
but not in lieu of, the required equipment. The digital recording equipment
shall capture sewer inspection on USB drive, with each sewer segment (from
upstream manhole to downstream manhole) inspection recorded as an
individual file in Windows Media Audio/Video (.wmv) format. City has a right
to change the format from .WMV media to .MP4
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 01 31 - 5
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION
Page 5 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised March 3, 2016
b. The system shall be capable of printing pipeline inspection reports with
captured images of defects or other related significant visual information on a
standard color printer.
c. The system shall store digitized color picture images and be saved in digital
format on a USB drive.
d. The system shall be able to produce data reports to include, at a minimum, all
observation points and pertinent data. All data reports shall match the defect
severity codes outlined in the City’s CCTV manual.
e. Camera footage, date & manhole numbers shall be maintained in real time and
shall be displayed on the video monitor as well as the video character
generators illuminated footage display at the control console.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General
1. Prior to inspection obtain pipe and manhole asset identification numbers from the
plans or City to be used during inspections. Inspections performed using
identification numbers other than the plans or from assigned numbers from the City
will be rejected.
2. Inspection shall not commence until the sewer section to be televised has been
completely cleaned in conformance with Section 33 04 50. (Sewer system should
be connected to existing sewer system and should be active)
3. Inspection of newly installed sewers (not yet in service) shall not begin prior to
completion of the following:
a. Pipe testing
b. All manhole work is complete
c. Installation of all lateral services
d. Vacuum test of manholes
4. Temporary Bypass Pumping (if required) shall conform to Section 33 03 10.
B. Storm Sewer Lines
1. Coordinate with City of Fort Worth Transportation/Public Works Department for
CCTV equipment and cleaning requirements.
3.4 INSPECTION (CCTV)
A. General
1. Begin inspection immediately after cleaning of the main.
2. Move camera through the line in either direction at a moderate rate, stopping when
necessary to permit proper documentation of the main’s condition.
3. Do not move camera at a speed greater than 30 feet per minute.
4. Use manual winches, power winches, TV cable, and power rewinds that do not
obstruct the camera view, allowing for proper evaluation.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 01 31 - 6
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION
Page 6 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised March 3, 2016
5. During investigation stop camera at each defect along the main.
a. Record the nature, location and orientation of the defect or infiltration location
as specified in the CCTV Manual.
6. Pan and tilt the camera to provide additional detail at:
a. Manholes, Include condition of manhole in its entirety and interior corrosion
protection (if applicable) (Camera should pan the entire manhole from top as
well as while lowering into manhole, also show complete view of invert)
b. Service connections, Pan the Camera to get a complete overview of service
connection including zooming into service connection Include location (i.e. 3
o’clock, 9 o’clock, etc…)
c. Joints, Include comment on condition, signs of damage, etc…
d. Visible pipe defects such as cracks, broken or deformed pipe, holes, offset
joints, obstructions or debris (show as % of pipe diameter). If debris has been
found in the pipe during the post-CCTV inspection, additional cleaning is
required and pipe shall be re-televised.
e. Infiltration/Inflow locations
f. Pipe material transitions
g. Other locations that do not appear to be typical for normal pipe conditions
h. Note locations where camera is underwater and level as a % of pipe diameter.
7. Provide accurate distance measurement.
a. The meter device is to be accurate to the nearest 1/10 foot.
8. CCTV inspections are to be continuous.
a. Do not provide a single segment of main on more than 1 USB drive.
b. A single segment is defined from manhole to manhole.
B. Pre-Installation Inspection for Sewer Mains to be rehabilitated
1. Perform Pre-CCTV inspection immediately after cleaning of the main and before
rehabilitation work.
2. If, during inspection, the CCTV will not pass through the entire section of main due
to blockage or pipe defect, set up so the inspection can be performed from the
opposite manhole.
3. Provisions for repairing or replacing the impassable location are addressed in
Section 33 31 20, Section 33 31 21 and Section 33 31 22.
C. Post-Installation Inspection
1. Complete manhole installation before inspection begins.
2. Prior to inserting the camera, flush and clean the main in accordance to Section 33
04 50.
D. Documentation of CCTV Inspection
1. Sanitary Sewer Lines
a. Follow the CCTV Manual (CCTV standard manual supplied by City upon
request) for the inspection video, data logging and reporting or Part 1.5 E of
this section.
2. Storm Sewer Lines
a. Provided documentation for video, data logging, and reporting in accordance
with City of Fort Worth Transportation/Public Works Department
requirements.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 01 31 - 7
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION
Page 7 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised March 3, 2016
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING
A. See Section 33 04 50.
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson Various– Added requirements for coordination with T/PW for Storm Sewer CCTV
03/03/2016 J Kasavich Various – Alternative to CCTV Manual, modified submittal detail requirements
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 11 - 1
CORROSION CONTROL TEST STATIONS
Page 1 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 04 11
CORROSION CONTROL TEST STATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Test station materials and installation requirements, as shown on the Drawings, at:
a. Foreign pipeline crossings
b. Cased crossings
c. Below-grade pipeline electrical isolation joints
2. Required applications of corrosion control test stations include locations where
future testing is anticipated for the following reasons:
a. Testing to determine the effectiveness of the installed Cathodic Protection
systems and to allow for startup adjustments
b. Testing to determine interference effects from and on adjacent or crossing
foreign underground structures
c. Testing to determine sources and magnitude of stray DC currents and required
mitigative measures
d. Periodic monitoring to determine status of existing Cathodic Protection
systems, stray current and foreign line influence
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 33 04 12 – Magnesium Anode Cathodic Protection System
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. This Item is considered subsidiary to the Cathodic Protection construction.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item
are subsidiary to the lump sum price bid for “Cathodic Protection” for each
material of utility pipe bid, and no other compensation will be allowed.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. NACE International (NACE).
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 11 - 2
CORROSION CONTROL TEST STATIONS
Page 2 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for
specials.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Submit product data for all components of the Corrosion Control Test Stations.
Data submitted shall include:
a. Test Station
b. Wiring
c. Splicing materials
d. Thermite weld materials
e. Weld coatings
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Structure-to-soil potential data shall be submitted to the City.
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certifications
1. Provide manufacturer's certifications that all components of the corrosion control
system meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.
a. The certification shall reference the applicable Section of the Specifications and
the applicable standard details.
B. Inspection
1. The City may, at its own cost, inspect the Cathodic Protection materials prior to, or
during, installation.
C. Drawings
1. The drawings for the corrosion control test stations are diagrammatic and shall not
be scaled for exact locations, unless scales are explicitly stated on the specific
drawing.
2. Field conditions, conflicts with other utilities or mechanical and structural features
shall determine exact locations.
3. Contractor shall note other existing utilities in the area and during excavation, shall
not damage these utilities.
4. Any damaged utilities shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the City at the
Contractor's expense.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery
1. Coordinate the delivery of test station materials.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 11 - 3
CORROSION CONTROL TEST STATIONS
Page 3 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
B. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01
66 00.
C. Packaging Waste Management
1. Dispose of waste materials properly and remove from job site after installation is
complete.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Flush Mount Test Stations
1. Test stations shall consist of test wires, a terminal head and a traffic box as shown
on the Drawings.
2. The terminal head shall be a 7 terminal “Big Fink” as manufactured by Cott
Manufacturing Company or approved equal.
3. The test station shall be installed in a 24-inch x 24-inch x 6-inch concrete pad.
4. The Precast Concrete traffic box shall be a 10.25-inch diameter 3-RT with a cast
iron cover marked "CP Test" as manufactured by Brooks Products, Inc. or approved
equal.
5. Install a marker sign adjacent to all flush-mounted test stations.
B. Above-Grade Test Stations
1. At test station locations where flush mounted structures cannot be installed, or
where stated on Drawings, an above-grade test station shall be used, and placed
such that possible damage from vandalism, traffic, etc. is minimized.
2. The test station shall be a 7 terminal "Big Fink" as manufactured by Cott
Manufacturing or approved equal.
3. The “Big Fink” test station shall be mounted on a 5 foot length of 3-inch diameter
UV-resistant plastic conduit in populated locations, and mounted on a 5 foot length
of 3-inch diameter concrete filled galvanized steel conduit in low population
locations.
4. The test station shall be installed adjacent to a permanent structure, if available, for
physical protection.
a. If exposed to traffic, provide a frangible base for test station.
5. The interior of the test station conduit shall be filled with Portland cement concrete
after the installation of the test and bond wires.
6. The test station conduit shall be installed with a 24-inch x 24-inch x 6-inch concrete
pad.
C. Permanent Reference Electrodes
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 11 - 4
CORROSION CONTROL TEST STATIONS
Page 4 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. The permanent reference electrode shall be a copper sulfate Permacell Plus double
membrane ceramic cell in a geomembrane package as manufactured by Corrpro
Companies, Inc. or approved equal.
2. Equip with No. 14 AWG stranded copper wire with blue HMWPE insulation of
suitable length to attach to the terminal board of the test station.
D. Test Station Lead Wires
1. Test station lead wires of all sizes shall have TW, THW, or THHN insulation as
shown on the Drawings.
2. Insulation type shall be color coded based upon connection to underground
structures.
a. Protected pipeline: white
b. Foreign structures: red
c. Steel casings: yellow
d. Permanent reference cells: blue
e. Anode header cable: black (HMWPE)
f. Unprotected or existing pipeline: black (HMWPE)
3. Test station lead wires shall be terminated on the test station terminal board
utilizing crimped on solderless ring terminals.
4. All terminal boards shall be wired by the installer as shown on the Drawings.
E. Thermite Weld Equipment
1. Charges and Molds
a. Weld charges and mold size shall be specified by the manufacturer for the
specific surface configuration.
b. Use only the correct charges for the specific application.
c. Welding charges and molds shall be Erico, Cadweld or Continental Industries
Thermoweld.
2. Weld Coating
a. Coat weld with Stopaq CZ tape or approved equal.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 APPLICATION / INSTALLATION
1. Install test stations at each of the locations scheduled on the Drawings. At a
minimum, test stations are required at each of the following locations:
a. At all major underground metallic pipeline crossings
b. At all cased crossings and tunnels (both ends)
c. At all underground isolation flanges
d. At all magnesium anode ground bed locations
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 11 - 5
CORROSION CONTROL TEST STATIONS
Page 5 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
B. General
1. Install test stations at locations indicated on Drawings.
a. If a flush mounted test station is not feasible in a particular location, then an
above-grade test station may be used, subject to approval by the City or its
designated representative.
2. Use continuous test station lead wires without cuts or tears in the insulation.
3. Locate test stations as indicated on Drawings, as close to the pipe as possible.
a. If the pipe is installed under a road, place the test station at the curb for easy
access.
4. Attach test lead wires to the pipe by thermite welding.
5. Attach test wires to the pipe prior to backfilling.
6. Use color coded test wires as indicated on the Contract Documents.
7. Wire test station terminal board configurations as shown on the Drawings.
8. At foreign pipeline crossing test stations:
a. Notify the owners of the pipeline and obtain permission before the test leads are
connected to their pipeline.
b. The foreign pipeline owner should have a representative present.
c. Contractor shall not install lead wires or bond wires on foreign pipelines.
d. If foreign pipeline owner refuses test leads connected to their pipeline, then
document owner’s refusal and install potential test station on water main.
e. Document the owner’s contact name, phone number, email address and date of
contact.
f. Submit documentation to the City or its designated representative.
C. Flush-Mount Test Stations
1. Install as shown on the Drawings.
2. Sufficient slack shall be coiled beneath the test station to allow for soil settlement
and to prevent damage to the leads during backfilling.
a. Additional slack shall be left to allow for withdrawal of the terminal board a
minimum of 18 inches above the top of the precast concrete traffic box for test
purposes.
3. Install with permanent copper sulfate reference electrodes where indicated on the
Drawings.
a. Install permanent reference electrode approximately 6 inches from the pipe.
b. Compact native soil by hand around the electrode.
c. The balance of the backfill shall be select granular backfill material.
d. Saturate the backfilled permanent reference electrode with 5 gallons of water.
4. Set test stations installed outside areas of permanent paving materials in a Portland
cement concrete pad.
a. The concrete pad shall be a minimum of 24 inches square and no less than 6
inches thick.
D. Above-Grade Test Stations
1. Install above-grade test stations where a flush mounted test station cannot be
located.
2. Use and location of above-grade test stations shall be approved by the City or its
designated representative.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 11 - 6
CORROSION CONTROL TEST STATIONS
Page 6 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3. Locate test station adjacent to a permanent structure (e.g. a power pole), if
available, for physical protection.
4. Coil sufficient slack beneath the test station to allow for soil settlement and to
prevent damage to the leads during backfilling.
5. Pour a 24-inch x 24-inch x 6-inch concrete pad at grade around the test station
conduit.
6. Fill the interior of the 3-inch above-grade test station steel galvanized conduit with
Portland cement concrete after installation of the test stations wires.
E. Test Lead Wire Attachment
1. Attach test leads to the pipe by thermite welding directly to the pipe on steel and
ductile iron pipelines as shown on Drawings.
a. See Drawings.
2. The pipe to which the wires are to be attached shall be clean and dry.
3. When connecting directly to the pipe, use a grinding wheel to remove all coating,
mill scale, oxide, grease and dirt from an area approximately 3 inches square.
a. Grind the surface to bright metal.
4. The wires to be thermite welded to the pipe shall have approximately 1 inch of
insulation removed from each end, exposing clean, oxide-free copper for welding.
5. Using the proper size thermite weld mold as recommended by the manufacturer,
place the wire between the graphite mold and the prepared metal surface.
a. Use a copper sleeve crimped over the wire for all No. 10 AWG or smaller
wires.
6. Place the metal disk in the bottom of the mold.
7. Pour the thermite weld charge into the mold.
8. Squeeze the bottom of the cartridge to spread ignition powder over the charge.
9. Close the mold cover and ignite the starting powder with a flint gun.
10. After the exothermic reaction, remove the thermite weld mold and gently strike the
weld with a hammer to remove the weld slag.
11. Pull on the wire to assure a secure connection.
12. If the weld is not secure or the wire breaks, repeat the procedure.
13. If the weld is secure, coat all bare metal and weld metal with Stopaq CZ tape.
F. Post Installation Backfilling of Test Station – Lead Wires
1. Protect test station wires to prevent damage to the wire insulation and conductor
integrity during backfilling.
2. After completion of the backfilling of the test wires to the pipe, verify the
connection by measuring and recording a pipe-to-soil potential.
3. Replace any test wire found to have a high resistance connection.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. All test stations shall be visually inspected during the final walk through.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 11 - 7
CORROSION CONTROL TEST STATIONS
Page 7 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
B. Materials or installation work not conforming to the requirement of this Specification
shall be replaced or repaired to the City’s satisfaction.
C. Damaged or missing test station components shall be replaced by equal components.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Commissioning
1. Native state structure-to-soil potentials shall be acquired along the water main and
submitted to the City.
B. Method
1. Measure native state structure-to-soil potentials along the water line using a
portable reference electrode at the following locations:
a. Each test station
b. Above grade pipeline appurtenances
c. Test stations on foreign pipelines crossing or parallel to the water main.
2. Verify that all electrical isolation devices are operating properly including flange
isolators and casing spacers.
C. Contractor is responsible for all testing.
D. All testing is to be done by or under the supervision of certified NACE personnel.
E. Record results and submit in accordance with this Specification.
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE
A. Refer to Section 33 04 12.
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 2.2.D.2 – revised insulation color coding
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 30 - 1
TEMPORARY WATER SERVICES
Page 1 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
SECTION 33 04 30
TEMPORARY WATER SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Temporary Water Service needed to maintain service during water main
replacement project
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section
1. Fire Hydrant Meters
D. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Specification 32 12 16 – Asphalt Paving
4. Specification 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
5. Specification 33 04 40 – Cleaning and Acceptance Testing of Water Mains
6. Specification 33 12 10 – Water Services 1-inch to 2-inch
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for Temporary Water Services will be measured by:
1) Lump sum or
2) Per linear foot of Temporary Water Main for Miscellaneous Projects only
2. Payment
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
measured under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for
“Temporary Water Service” of the type specified.
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Temporary water service line
b. Connections
c. Fittings
d. Valves
e. Corporation stops
f. Temporary asphalt for crossings
g. Traffic Control
h. Disinfection
i. Removal of temporary services
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 30 - 2
TEMPORARY WATER SERVICES
Page 2 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. NSF International
a. 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects
3. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. D3035, Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR)
Based on Controlled Outside Diameter
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Scheduling
1. Provide advance notice for service interruption and meet requirements of Division
1.
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Fire Hydrant Meters
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPE, AND MATERIALS
A. Description
1. Regulatory Requirements
a. All Temporary Water Service components in contact with potable water shall
conform to the requirements of NSF 61.
B. Materials
1. Service Couplings, Fittings, and Corporation Stops
a. Conform to Section 33 12 10.
2. Service lines
a. Polyethylene tubing
b. Conform to ASTM D3035 and SDR 11
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 30 - 3
TEMPORARY WATER SERVICES
Page 3 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
3. Temporary Water Service Main
a. Galvanized steel pipe
b. Conform to Schedule 40.
4. Driveway Approach
a. Asphalt
1) Type B Asphalt in accordance with Section 32 12 16
C. Design Criteria
1. Service lines
a. ¾-inch minimum pipe size
b. Minimum flow rate of 5 GPM at a dynamic pressure of 35 psi
2. Temporary Water Service Main
a. 2-inch minimum pipe size
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install Temporary Water Services in accordance with provisions herein and in
accordance with City Standard Details.
2. Perform disinfection test of temporary water service main and water services in
accordance with Section 33 04 40.
B. Temporary Water Service Installation
1. Connect to existing water supply
a. Fire hydrant
1) Connect to fire hydrant with hydrant meter and 2-inch gate valve.
b. If a fire hydrant is not available, tap existing water main.
1) Connect to water main with 2-inch service tap and a corporation stop in
accordance with Section 33 12 10.
2) Record water usage with a hydrant meter.
3) Do not tap existing water main, unless approved by the City.
2. Water service
a. Connect ¾-inch water service to 2-inch temporary water service main.
b. Remove existing meters, tag with address and provide to City Inspector.
c. Connect ¾-inch temporary water service to existing private service.
d. Cover domestic meter box with protective guard or barricade.
C. Intersection and Driveway Approach Crossing for Temporary Water Service
1. Crossing for Temporary Water Service Main
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 30 - 4
TEMPORARY WATER SERVICES
Page 4 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
a. Cover temporary service line with sufficient asphalt to protect service line and
to provide a driveable crossing.
b. If required to bury temporary service line due to high volume traffic, or other
reasons required by the City, excavate, embed and backfill in accordance with
Section 33 05 10.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests and Inspections
1. Check each water service installation for leaks with full flow through the curb stop
at the time the main is tested in accordance with Section 33 04 40.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 40 - 1
CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS
Page 1 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 6, 2013
SECTION 33 04 40
CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. General
1. Before any newly constructed potable water mains will be permitted to be placed
into service in the Fort Worth Water Department’s Water Distribution System, it
shall be cleaned (purged) and tested, or cleaned, disinfected, and tested until the
bacteria count within the water main meets the standards established by the Fort
Worth Water Department and the requirements of Chapter 290 of the Texas
Administrative Code (TAC) established by the Texas Commission on
Environmental Quality (TCEQ).
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 33 01 31 – Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. This Item is considered subsidiary to the water main being Cleaned and Tested.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item
are subsidiary to cleaning, disinfection, hydrostatic testing, and bacteriological
testing and shall be subsidiary to the unit price bid per linear foot of water pipe
complete in place, and no other compensation will be allowed.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Water Works Association/American (AWWA):
a. C301, Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel-Cylinder Type.
b. C303, Concrete Pressure Pipe, Bar-Wrapped, Steel-Cylinder Type.
c. C651, Disinfecting Water Mains.
d. C655, Field De-Chlorination.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 40 - 2
CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS
Page 2 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 6, 2013
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals
For 24-inch and larger water mains, provide the following:
1. Cleaning Plan – Prior to the start of construction, submit a water main cleaning plan
detailing the methods and schedule, including:
a. A detailed description of cleaning procedures
b. Pigging entry and exit ports
c. Flushing procedures
d. Plans and hydraulic calculations to demonstrate adequate flushing velocities
e. Control of water
f. Disposal
2. Disinfection Plan – prior to the start of construction submit a disinfection plan
including:
a. The method mixing and introducing chlorine
b. Flushing
c. De-chlorination
d. Sampling
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 PRODUCT TYPES
A. Pigs
1. Open cell polyurethane foam body
2. Densities between 2 pounds per cubic foot up to 8 pounds per cubic foot
3. May be wrapped with polyurethane spiral bands
4. Abrasives are not permitted, unless expressly approved by the City in writing for
the particular application.
5. Must pass through a reduction up to 65 percent of the cross sectional area of the
nominal pipe diameter
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 40 - 3
CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS
Page 3 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 6, 2013
6. Pigs shall be able to traverse standard piping arrangements such as 90 degree bends,
tees, crosses, wyes, and gate valves.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION [NOT USED]
3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING
A. General
1. All water mains shall be cleaned prior to bacteriological testing.
a. Pig all 36-inch and smaller water mains.
b. Pig or manually sweep 42-inch and larger mains.
c. Flushing is only permitted when specially designated in the Drawings, or if
pigging is not practical and approved by the City.
B. Pigging Method
1. If the method of pigging is to be used, prepare the main for the installation and
removal of a pig, including:
a. Furnish all equipment, material and labor to satisfactorily expose cleaning wye,
remove cleaning wye covers, etc.
b. Where expulsion of the pig is required through a dead-ended conduit:
1) Prevent backflow of purged water into the main after passage of the pig.
2) Install a mechanical joint to provide a riser out of the trench on 12-inch and
smaller mains to prevent backwater re-entry into the main.
3) Additional excavation of the trench may be performed on mains over 12
inches, to prevent backwater re-entry into the main.
4) Flush any backflow water that inadvertently enters the main.
c. Flush short dead-end pipe sections not swabbed by a pig.
d. Once pigging is complete:
1) Pigging wyes shall remain in place unless otherwise specified in the
Contract Documents.
2) Install cleaning wye, blind flanges or mechanical joint plugs.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 40 - 4
CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS
Page 4 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 6, 2013
3) Plug and place blocking at other openings.
4) Backfill
5) Complete all appurtenant work necessary to secure the system and proceed
with disinfection.
C. Flushing Method
1. Prepare the main by installing blow-offs at appropriate locations, of sufficient sizes
and numbers, and with adequate flushing to achieve a minimum velocity in the
main of 2.5 feet per second.
a. Minimum blow-off sizes for various main sizes are as follows:
1) 4-inch through 8-inch main – ¾-inch blow-off
2) 10-inch through 12-inch main – 1-inch blow-off
3) 16-inch and greater main – 2-inch blow-off
b. Flushing shall be subject to the following limitations:
1) Limit the volume of water for flushing to 3 times the volume of the water
main.
2) Do not unlawfully discharge chlorinated water.
3) Do not damage private property.
4) Do not create a traffic hazard.
c. Once Flushing is complete:
1) Corporations stops used for flushing shall be plugged.
D. Daily main cleaning
1. Wipe joints and then inspect for proper installation.
2. Sweep each joint and keep clean during construction.
3. Install a temporary plug on all exposed mains at the end of each working day or an
extended period of work stoppage.
E. Hydrostatic Testing
1. All water main that is to be under pressure, shall be hydrostatically tested to meet
the following criteria:
a. Furnish and install corporations for proper testing of the main.
1) Furnish adequate and satisfactory equipment and supplies necessary to
make such hydrostatic tests.
2) The section of line to be tested shall be gradually filled with water,
carefully expelling the air and the specified pressure applied.
b. The City will furnish water required for the testing at its nearest City line.
c. Expel air from the pipe before applying the required test pressure.
d. Test Pressure
1) Test pressures should meet the following criteria:
a) Not less than 1.25 (187 psi minimum) times the stated working
pressure of the pipeline measured at the highest elevation along the test
section.
b) Not less than 1.5 (225 psi minimum) times the stated working pressure
at the lowest elevation of the test section.
e. Test Conditions
1) Must be at least 2 hour duration
2) Add water as necessary to sustain the required test pressure.
3) Test fire hydrants to the fire hydrant valve.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 40 - 5
CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS
Page 5 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 6, 2013
a) Leave the isolation valve on the fire hydrant lead line open during the
hydrostatic testing.
4) Test service lines to curb stop
a) Leave the corporation stop on the service line open during the
hydrostatic testing.
5) Close isolation valves for air release valves.
6) Makeup water must come from a container of fixed 55 gallon container that
does not have a water source.
f. Measure all water used in the pressure test through an approved meter, or
measure the difference in volume within a 55 gallon container.
1) Do not test against existing water distribution valves unless expressly
provided for in the Drawings, or approved by the City.
2) If the City denies approval to test against existing water distribution system
valve, then make arrangements to plug and test the pipe at no additional
cost.
2. Allowable Leakage
a. No pipe installation should be accepted if the amount of makeup water is
greater than that determined using the following formula:
In inch-pound units,
L = SD P
148,000
Where:
L = testing allowance (make up water), gallons per hour
S = length of pipe tested, ft.
D = nominal diameter of pipe, in.
P = average test pressure during the hydrostatic test, psi
b. For any pipeline that fails to pass hydrostatic test:
1) Identify the cause
2) Repair the leak
3) Restore the trench and surface
4) Retest
c. All costs associated with repairing the pipeline to pass the hydrostatic test is the
sole responsibility of the Contractor and included in the price per linear foot of
pipe.
d. If the City determines that an existing system valve is responsible for the
hydrostatic test to fail, the Contractor shall make provisions to test the pipeline
without the use of the system valve.
e. There shall be no additional payment to the Contractor if the existing valve is
unable to sustain the hydrostatic test and shall be included in the price per linear
foot of pipe.
F. Disinfection
1. General
a. Disinfection of the main shall be accomplished by the “continuous feed”
method or the “slug” method as determined by the Contractor.
b. The free chlorine amounts shown are minimums. The Contractor may require
higher rates.
1) Calcium hypochlorite granules shall be used as the source of chlorine.
c. Continuous Feed Method
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 40 - 6
CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS
Page 6 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 6, 2013
1) Apply water at a constant rate in the newly laid main.
a) Use the existing distribution system or other approved source of
supply.
2) At a point not more than 10 feet downstream from the beginning of the new
main, water entering the new main shall receive a dose of chlorine.
a) Free chlorine concentration: 50 mg/L minimum, or as required by
TCEQ, whichever is greater.
b) Chlorine applications shall not cease until the entire conduit is filled
with heavily chlorinated water.
3) Retain chlorinated water in the main for at least 24 hours.
a) Operate valves and hydrants in the section treated in order to disinfect
the appurtenances.
b) Prevent the flow of chlorinated water into mains in active service.
c) Residual at the end of the 24-hour period: 10 mg /L free chlorine,
minimum, for the treated water in all portions of the main.
4) Flush the heavily chlorinated water from the main and dispose of in a
manner and at a location accepted by the City.
5) Test the chlorine residual prior to flushing operations.
a) If the chlorine residual exceeds 4 mg/L, the water shall remain in the
new main until the chlorine residual is less the 4 mg/L.
b) The Contractor may choose to evacuate the water into water trucks, or
other approved storage facility, and treat the water with Sodium
Bisulfate, or another de-chlorination chemical, or method appropriate
for potable water and approved by the City until the chlorine residual is
reduced to 4 mg/L or less.
c) After the specified chlorine residual is obtained, the water may then be
discharged into the drainage system or utilized by the Contractor.
d. Slug Method
1) Water from the existing distribution system or other approved source of
supply shall be made to flow at a constant rate in the newly laid main.
2) At a point not more than 10 feet downstream from the beginning of the new
main, water entering the new main shall receive a dose of chlorine.
a) Free chlorine concentration: 100 mg/L minimum, or as required by
TCEQ, whichever is greater.
b) The chlorine shall be applied continuously and for a sufficient time to
develop a solid column or “slug” of chlorinated water that shall expose
all interior surfaces to the “slug” for at least 3 hours.
3) Operate the fittings and valves as the chlorinated water flows past to
disinfect the appurtenances.
4) Prevent the flow of chlorinated water into mains in active service.
5) Flush the heavily chlorinated water from the main and dispose of in a
manner and at a location accepted by the City.
6) Upon completion, test the chlorine residual remaining in the main.
a) Chlorine levels of 4 mg/l or less should be maintained.
2. Contractor Requirements
a. Furnish all equipment, material and labor to satisfactorily prepare the main for
the disinfection method approved by the City with adequate provisions for
sampling.
b. Make all necessary taps into the main to accomplish chlorination of a new line,
unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 40 - 7
CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS
Page 7 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 6, 2013
c. After satisfactory completion of the disinfection operation, as determined by
the City, remove surplus pipe at the chlorination and sampling points, plug the
remaining pipe, backfill and complete all appurtenant work necessary to secure
the main.
G. Dechlorination
1. General. All chlorinated water shall be de-chlorinated before discharge to the
environment. Chemical amounts, as listed in ANSI/AWWA C651: “Disinfecting
Water Mains”, shall be used to neutralize the residual chlorine concentrations using
de-chlorination procedures listed in ANSI/AWWA C655: “Field De-Chlorination”.
De-Chlorination shall continue until chlorine residual is non-detectable.
2. Testing. Contractor shall continuously test for the chlorine residual level
immediately downstream of the de-chlorination process, during the entire discharge
of the chlorinated water. Contractor shall periodically conduct chlorine residual
testing and check for possible fish kills at locations where discharged water enters
the existing watershed.
3. Fish Kill. If a fish kill occurs associated with the discharge of water from the
distribution system or any other construction activities:
a. The Contract shall immediately alter activities to prevent further fish kills.
b. The Contractor shall immediately notify Water Department Field Operations
Dispatch.
c. The Contractor shall coordinate with City to properly notify TCEQ.
d. Any fines assessed by the TCEQ (or local, state of federal agencies) for fish
kills shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
H. Bacteriological Testing (Water Sampling)
1. General
a. Notify the City when the main is suitable for sampling.
b. The City shall then take water samples from a suitable tap for analysis by the
City’s laboratory, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
1) No hose or fire hydrant shall be used in the collection of samples.
2. Water Sampling
a. Complete microbiological sampling prior to connecting the new main into the
existing distribution system in accordance with AWWA C651.
b. Collect samples for bacteriological analysis in sterile bottles treated with
sodium thiosulfate.
c. Collect 2 consecutive sets of acceptable samples, taken at least 24 hours apart,
from the new main.
d. Collect at least 1 set of samples from every 1,000 linear feet of the new main
(or at the next available sampling point beyond 1,000 linear feet as designated
by the City), plus 1 set from the end of the line and at least 1 set from each
branch.
e. If trench water has entered the new main during construction or, if in the
opinion of the City, excessive quantities of dirt or debris have entered the new
main, obtain bacteriological samples at intervals of approximately 200 linear
feet.
f. Obtain samples from water that has stood in the new main for at least 16 hours
after formal flushing.
3. Repetition of Sampling
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 40 - 8
CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS
Page 8 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 6, 2013
a. Unsatisfactory test results require a repeat of the disinfection process and re-
sampling as required above until a satisfactory sample is obtained.
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 3.10.E.1.e.- Added service lines to hydrostatic testing requirements
2/6/2013 D Townsend 1.3.A.2.d Added AWWA C655 Field De-Chlorination as reference
3.10.G – Added De-Chlorination Requirement
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 50 - 1
CLEANING OF SEWER MAINS
Page 1 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 04 50
CLEANING OF SEWER MAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. General
1. Before any television inspection, any sewer main shall be cleaned to remove all
debris, solids, sand, grease, grit, etc. from the sewer and manholes.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 33 01 31 – Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. This Item is considered subsidiary to the sewer main being cleaned.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item
are subsidiary to the unit price bid per linear foot of sewer pipe complete in
place, and no other compensation will be allowed.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 50 - 2
CLEANING OF SEWER MAINS
Page 2 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS
2.2 PRODUCT TYPES
A. Use only the type of cleaning material which will not create hazards to health or
property or affect treatment plant processes.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION [NOT USED]
3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING
A. General
1. All materials, equipment, and personnel necessary to complete the cleaning of the
sanitary sewer main and manholes must be present on the jobsite prior to isolating
the sewer manhole or line segment and beginning the cleaning process.
2. Maintain clean work and surrounding premises within the work limits so as to
comply with Federal, State, and local environmental and anti-pollution laws,
ordinances, codes, and regulations when cleaning and disposing of waste materials,
debris, and rubbish.
3. Keep the work and surrounding premises within work limits free of accumulations
of dirt, dust, waste materials, debris, and rubbish.
4. Suitable containers for storage of waste materials, debris, and rubbish shall be
provided until time of disposal.
a. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to secure a licensed legal dump site
for the disposal of this material.
b. Under no circumstances shall sewage or solids removed from the main or
manhole be dumped onto streets or into ditches, catch basins, storm drains, or
sanitary sewers.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 50 - 3
CLEANING OF SEWER MAINS
Page 3 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
5. The cleaning process shall remove all grease, sand, silts, solids, rags, debris, etc.
from each sewer segment, including the manhole(s).
6. Selection of cleaning equipment and the method for cleaning shall be based on the
condition of the sanitary sewer mains at the time work commences and will be
subject to approval by the City.
7. All cleaning equipment and devices shall be operated by experienced personnel.
8. Satisfactory precautions shall be taken to protect the sanitary sewer mains and
manholes from damage that might be inflicted by the improper use of the cleaning
process or equipment.
9. Any damages done to a sewer main and/or structure by the Contractor shall be
repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost and to the satisfaction of the City.
10. Cleaning shall also include the manhole wall washing by high pressure water jet.
11. The Contractor may be required to demonstrate the performance capabilities of the
cleaning equipment proposed for use on the project.
a. If the results obtained by the proposed sanitary sewer cleaning equipment are
not satisfactory, the Contractor shall use different equipment and/or
attachments, as required, to meet City satisfaction.
b. More than 1 type of equipment/attachments may be required at a location.
12. When hydraulic or high velocity cleaning equipment is used, a suitable sand trap,
weir, dam, or suction shall be constructed in the downstream manhole in such a
manner that all the solids and debris are trapped for removal.
13. Whenever hydraulically-propelled cleaning tools which depend upon water
pressure to provide their cleaning force, or any tool which retard the flow of water
in the sanitary sewer lines are used, precautions shall be taken to insure that the
water pressure created does not cause any damage or flooding to public or private
property being served by the manhole section involved.
14. Any damage of property, as a result of flooding, shall be the liability and
responsibility of the Contractor.
15. The flow of wastewater present in the sanitary sewer main shall be utilized to
provide necessary fluid for hydraulic cleaning devices whenever possible.
16. When additional quantities of water from fire hydrants are necessary to avoid delay
in normal working procedures, the water shall be conserved and not used
unnecessarily.
a. No fire hydrant shall be obstructed or used when there is a fire in the area.
b. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain the fire hydrant, water meter
and all related charges for the set-up, including the water usage bills from
respective water purveyor agency.
c. All expenses shall be considered incidental to the cleaning of the existing
sanitary sewer mains.
B. Methods
1. Hydraulic Cleaning
a. Hydraulic-propelled devices which require a head of water to operate must
utilize a collapsible dam.
b. The dam must be easily collapsible to prevent damage to the sewer main,
property, etc.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 50 - 4
CLEANING OF SEWER MAINS
Page 4 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
c. When using hydraulically-propelled devices, precautions shall be taken to
insure that the water pressure created does not cause damage or flood public or
private property.
d. Do not increase the hydraulic gradient of the sanitary sewers beyond the
elevation that could cause overflow of sewage into area waterways or laterals.
e. The flow of wastewater present in the sanitary sewer main shall be utilized to
provide necessary fluid for hydraulic cleaning devices whenever possible.
2. High-Velocity Cleaning
a. Cleaning equipment that uses a high velocity water jet for removing debris shall
be capable of producing a minimum volume of 50 gpm, with a pressure of
1,500 psi, for the sanitary sewer line and 3,500 psi for the (manhole) structure
at the pump.
1) Any variations to this pumping rate must be approved, in advance, by the
City.
2) To prevent damage to older sewer mains and property, a pressure less than
1500 psi can be used.
3) A working pressure gauge shall be used on the discharge of all high
pressure water pumps.
4) For sewers 18 inches and larger in diameter, in addition to conventional
nozzles, use a nozzle which directs the cleaning force to the bottom of the
pipe.
5) Operate the equipment so that the pressurized nozzle continues to move at
all times.
6) The pressurized nozzle shall be turned off or reduced anytime the hose is
on hold or delayed in order to prevent damage to the line.
3. Mechanical Cleaning
a. Mechanical cleaning, in addition to normal cleaning when required, shall be
with approved equipment and accessories driven by power winching devices.
b. Submit the equipment manufacturer's operational manual and guidelines to the
City, which shall be followed strictly unless modified by the City.
c. All equipment and devices shall be operated by experienced operators so that
they do not damage the pipe in the process of cleaning.
d. Buckets, scrapers, scooters, porcupines, kites, heavy duty brushes, and other
debris-removing equipment/accessories shall be used as appropriate and
necessary in the field, in conjunction with the approved power machines.
e. The use of cleaning devices such as rods, metal pigs, porcupines, root saws,
snakes, scooters, sewer balls, kites, and other approved equipment, in
conjunction with hand winching device, and/or gas, electric rod propelled
devices, shall be considered normal cleaning equipment.
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 04 50 - 5
CLEANING OF SEWER MAINS
Page 5 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 1
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 1 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
SECTION 33 05 10
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Excavation, Embedment and Backfill for:
a. Pressure Applications
1) Water Distribution or Transmission Main
2) Wastewater Force Main
3) Reclaimed Water Main
b. Gravity Applications
1) Wastewater Gravity Mains
2) Storm Sewer Pipe and Culverts
3) Storm Sewer Precast Box and Culverts
2. Including:
a. Excavation of all material encountered, including rock and unsuitable materials
b. Disposal of excess unsuitable material
c. Site specific trench safety
d. Pumping and dewatering
e. Embedment
f. Concrete encasement for utility lines
g. Backfill
h. Compaction
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 02 41 13 – Selective Site Demolition
4. Section 02 41 15 – Paving Removal
5. Section 02 41 14 – Utility Removal/Abandonment
6. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-place Concrete
7. Section 03 34 13 – Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)
8. Section 31 10 00 – Site Clearing
9. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sediment Control
10. Section 33 05 26 – Utility Markers/Locators
11. Section 34 71 13 – Traffic Control
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 2
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 2 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
1. Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill associated with the installation of an
underground utility or excavation
a. Measurement
1) This Item is considered subsidiary to the installation of the utility pipe line
as designated in the Drawings.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item are considered subsidiary to the installation of the utility pipe for the
type of embedment and backfill as indicated on the plans. No other
compensation will be allowed.
2. Imported Embedment or Backfill
a. Measurement
1) Measured by the cubic yard as delivered to the site and recorded by truck
ticket provided to the City
b. Payment
1) Imported fill shall only be paid when using materials for embedment and
backfill other than those identified in the Drawings. The work performed
and materials furnished in accordance with pre-bid item and measured as
provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid per
cubic yard of “Imported Embedment/Backfill” delivered to the Site for:
a) Various embedment/backfill materials
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing backfill or embedment as specified by this Specification
2) Hauling to the site
3) Placement and compaction of backfill or embedment
3. Concrete Encasement for Utility Lines
a. Measurement
1) Measured by the cubic yard per plan quantity.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per cubic yard of “Concrete Encasement for Utility Lines” per
plan quantity.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing, hauling, placing and finishing concrete in accordance with
Section 03 30 00
2) Clean-up
4. Ground Water Control
a. Measurement
1) Measurement shall be lump sum when a ground water control plan is
specifically required by the Contract Documents.
b. Payment
1) Payment shall be per the lump sum price bid for “Ground Water Control”
including:
a) Submittals
b) Additional Testing
c) Ground water control system installation
d) Ground water control system operations and maintenance
e) Disposal of water
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 3
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 3 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
f) Removal of ground water control system
5. Trench Safety
a. Measurement
1) Measured per linear foot of excavation for all trenches that require trench
safety in accordance with OSHA excavation safety standards (29 CFR Part
1926 Subpart P Safety and Health regulations for Construction)
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per linear foot of excavation to comply with OSHA excavation
safety standards (29 CFR Part 1926.650 Subpart P), including, but not
limited to, all submittals, labor and equipment.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Definitions
1. General – Definitions used in this section are in accordance with Terminologies
ASTM F412 and ASTM D8 and Terminology ASTM D653, unless otherwise
noted.
2. Definitions for trench width, backfill, embedment, initial backfill, pipe zone,
haunching bedding, springline, pipe zone and foundation are defined as shown in
the following schematic:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 4
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 4 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
3. Deleterious materials – Harmful materials such as clay lumps, silts and organic
material
4. Excavated Trench Depth – Distance from the surface to the bottom of the bedding
or the trench foundation
5. Final Backfill Depth
a. Unpaved Areas – The depth of the final backfill measured from the top of the
initial backfill to the surface
b. Paved Areas – The depth of the final backfill measured from the top of the
initial backfill to bottom of permanent or temporary pavement repair
B. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM Standards:
a. ASTM C33-08 Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates
b. ASTM C88-05 Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or
Magnesium Sulfate
c. ASTM C136-01 Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate
d. ASTM D448-08 Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and
Bridge Construction.
e. ASTM C535-09 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-
Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
f. ASTM D588 – Standard Test method for Moisture-Density Relations of Soil-
Cement Mixture
g. ASTM D698-07 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Stand Efforts (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 600 Kn-m/M3)).
h. ASTM 1556 Standard Test Methods for Density and Unit Weight of Soils in
Place by Sand Cone Method.
i. ASTM 2487 – 10 Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
(Unified Soil Classification System)
j. ASTM 2321-09 Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers
and Other Gravity-Flow Applications
k. ASTM D2922 – Standard Test Methods for Density of Soils and Soil
Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
l. ASTM 3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in
place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
m. ASTM D4254 - Standard Test Method for Minimum Index Density and Unit
Weight of Soils and Calculations of Relative Density
3. OSHA
a. Occupational Safety and Health Administration CFR 29, Part 1926-Safety
Regulations for Construction, Subpart P - Excavations
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. Utility Company Notification
a. Notify area utility companies at least 48 hours in advance, excluding weekends
and holidays, before starting excavation.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 5
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 5 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
b. Request the location of buried lines and cables in the vicinity of the proposed
work.
B. Sequencing
1. Sequence work for each section of the pipe installed to complete the embedment
and backfill placement on the day the pipe foundation is complete.
2. Sequence work such that proctors are complete in accordance with ASTM D698
prior to commencement of construction activities.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to construction.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Provide detailed drawings and explanation for ground water and surface water
control, if required.
2. Trench Safety Plan in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health
Administration CFR 29, Part 1926-Safety Regulations for Construction, Subpart P -
Excavations
3. Stockpiled excavation and/or backfill material
a. Provide a description of the storage of the excavated material only if the
Contract Documents do not allow storage of materials in the right-of-way of the
easement.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage
1. Within Existing Rights-of-Way (ROW)
a. Spoil, imported embedment and backfill materials may be stored within
existing ROW, easements or temporary construction easements, unless
specifically disallowed in the Contract Documents.
b. Do not block drainage ways, inlets or driveways.
c. Provide erosion control in accordance with Section 31 25 00.
d. Store materials only in areas barricaded as provided in the traffic control plans.
e. In non-paved areas, do not store material on the root zone of any trees or in
landscaped areas.
2. Designated Storage Areas
a. If the Contract Documents do not allow the storage of spoils, embedment or
backfill materials within the ROW, easement or temporary construction
easement, then secure and maintain an adequate storage location.
b. Provide an affidavit that rights have been secured to store the materials on
private property.
c. Provide erosion control in accordance with Section 31 25 00.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 6
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 6 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
d. Do not block drainage ways.
e. Only materials used for 1 working day will be allowed to be stored in the work
zone.
B. Deliveries and haul-off - Coordinate all deliveries and haul-off.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS
A. Existing Conditions
1. Any data which has been or may be provided on subsurface conditions is not
intended as a representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity between soils. It
is expressly understood that neither the City nor the Engineer will be responsible
for interpretations or conclusions drawn there from by the Contractor.
2. Data is made available for the convenience of the Contractor.
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Materials
1. Utility Sand
a. Granular and free flowing
b. Generally meets or exceeds the limits on deleterious substances per Table 1 for
fine aggregate according to ASTM C 33
c. Reasonably free of organic material
d. Gradation: sand material consisting of durable particles, free of thin or
elongated pieces, lumps of clay, loam or vegetable matter and meets the
following gradation may be used for utility sand embedment/backfill, and
graded with following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C136.
Sieve Size Percent Retained
½” 0
¼” 0-5
#4 0-10
#16 0-20
#50 20-70
#100 60-90
#200 90-100
2. Crushed Rock
a. Durable crushed rock or recycled concrete
b. Meets the gradation of ASTM D448 size numbers 56, 57 or 67
c. May be unwashed
d. Free from significant silt clay or unsuitable materials
e. Percentage of wear not more than 40 percent per ASTM C131 or C535
f. Not more than a 12 percent maximum loss when subjective to 5 cycles of
sodium sulfate soundness per ASTM C88
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 7
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 7 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
3. Fine Crushed Rock
a. Durable crushed rock
b. Meets the gradation of ASTM D448 size numbers 8 or 89
c. May be unwashed
d. Free from significant silt clay or unsuitable materials.
e. Have a percentage of wear not more than 40 percent per ASTM C131 or C535
f. Not more than a 12 percent maximum loss when subjective to 5 cycles of
sodium sulfate soundness per ASTM C88
4. Ballast Stone
a. Stone ranging from 3 inches to 6 inches in greatest dimension.
b. May be unwashed
c. Free from significant silt clay or unsuitable materials
d. Percentage of wear not more than 40 percent per ASTM C131 or C535
e. Not more than a 12 percent maximum loss when subjected to 5 cycles of
sodium sulfate soundness per ASTM C88
5. Acceptable Backfill Material
a. In -situ or imported soils classified as CL, CH, SC or GC in accordance with
ASTM D2487
b. Free from deleterious materials, boulders over 6 inches in size and organics
c. Can be placed free from voids
d. Must have 20 percent passing the number 200 sieve
6. Blended Backfill Material
a. In -situ soils classified as SP, SM, GP or GM in accordance with ASTM D2487
b. Blended with in-situ or imported acceptable backfill material to meet the
requirements of an Acceptable Backfill Material
c. Free from deleterious materials, boulders over 6 inches in size and organics
d. Must have 20 percent passing the number 200 sieve
7. Unacceptable Backfill Material
a. In -situ soils classified as ML, MH, PT, OL or OH in accordance with ASTM
D2487
8. Select Fill
a. Classified as SC or CL in accordance with ASTM D2487
b. Liquid limit less than 35
c. Plasticity index between 8 and 20
9. Cement Stabilized Sand (CSS)
a. Sand
1) Shall be clean, durable sand meeting grading requirements for fine
aggregates of ASTM C33 and the following requirements:
a) Classified as SW, SP, or SM by the United Soil Classification System
of ASTM D2487
b) Deleterious materials
(1) Clay lumps, ASTM C142, less than 0.5 percent
(2) Lightweight pieces, ASTM C123, less than 5.0 percent
(3) Organic impurities, ASTM C40, color no darker than standard
color
(4) Plasticity index of 4 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM
D4318.
b. Minimum of 4 percent cement content of Type I/II portland cement
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 8
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 8 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
c. Water
1) Potable water, free of soils, acids, alkalis, organic matter or other
deleterious substances, meeting requirements of ASTM C94
d. Mix in a stationary pug mill, weigh-batch or continuous mixing plant.
e. Strength
1) 50 to 150 psi compressive strength at 2 days in accordance with ASTM
D1633, Method A
2) 200 to 250 psi compressive strength at 28 days in accordance with ASTM
D1633, Method A
3) The maximum compressive strength in 7 days shall be 400 psi. Backfill
that exceeds the maximum compressive strength shall be removed by the
Contractor for no additional compensation.
f. Random samples of delivered product will be taken in the field at point of
delivery for each day of placement in the work area. Specimens will be
prepared in accordance with ASTM D1632.
10. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)
a. Conform to Section 03 34 13
11. Trench Geotextile Fabric
a. Soils other than ML or OH in accordance with ASTM D2487
1) Needle punch, nonwoven geotextile composed of polypropylene fibers
2) Fibers shall retain their relative position
3) Inert to biological degradation
4) Resist naturally occurring chemicals
5) UV Resistant
6) Mirafi 140N by Tencate, or approved equal
b. Soils Classified as ML or OH in accordance with ASTM D2487
1) High-tenacity monofilament polypropylene woven yarn
2) Percent open area of 8 percent to10 percent
3) Fibers shall retain their relative position
4) Inert to biological degradation
5) Resist naturally occurring chemicals
6) UV Resistant
7) Mirafi FW402 by Tencate, or approved equal
12. Concrete Encasement
a. Conform to Section 03 30 00.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions
1. Review all known, identified or marked utilities, whether public or private, prior to
excavation.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 9
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 9 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
2. Locate and protect all known, identified and marked utilities or underground
facilities as excavation progresses.
3. Notify all utility owners within the project limits 48 hours prior to beginning
excavation.
4. The information and data shown in the Drawings with respect to utilities is
approximate and based on record information or on physical appurtenances
observed within the project limits.
5. Coordinate with the Owner(s) of underground facilities.
6. Immediately notify any utility owner of damages to underground facilities resulting
from construction activities.
7. Repair any damages resulting from the construction activities.
B. Notify the City immediately of any changed condition that impacts excavation and
installation of the proposed utility.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Protection of In-Place Conditions
1. Pavement
a. Conduct activities in such a way that does not damage existing pavement that is
designated to remain.
1) Where desired to move equipment not licensed for operation on public
roads or across pavement, provide means to protect the pavement from all
damage.
b. Repair or replace any pavement damaged due to the negligence of the
contractor outside the limits designated for pavement removal at no additional
cost to the City.
2. Drainage
a. Maintain positive drainage during construction and re-establish drainage for all
swales and culverts affected by construction.
3. Trees
a. When operating outside of existing ROW, stake permanent and temporary
construction easements.
b. Restrict all construction activities to the designated easements and ROW.
c. Flag and protect all trees designated to remain in accordance with Section 31 10
00.
d. Conduct excavation, embedment and backfill in a manner such that there is no
damage to the tree canopy.
e. Prune or trim tree limbs as specifically allowed by the Drawings or as
specifically allowed by the City.
1) Pruning or trimming may only be accomplished with equipments
specifically designed for tree pruning or trimming.
f. Remove trees specifically designated to be removed in the Drawings in
accordance with Section 31 10 00.
4. Above ground Structures
a. Protect all above ground structures adjacent to the construction.
b. Remove above ground structures designated for removal in the Drawings in
accordance with Section 02 41 13
5. Traffic
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 10
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 10 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
a. Maintain existing traffic, except as modified by the traffic control plan, and in
accordance with Section 34 71 13.
b. Do not block access to driveways or alleys for extended periods of time unless:
1) Alternative access has been provided
2) Proper notification has been provided to the property owner or resident
3) It is specifically allowed in the traffic control plan
c. Use traffic rated plates to maintain access until access is restored.
6. Traffic Signal – Poles, Mast Arms, Pull boxes, Detector loops
a. Notify the City’s Traffic Services Division a minimum of 48 hours prior to any
excavation that could impact the operations of an existing traffic signal.
b. Protect all traffic signal poles, mast arms, pull boxes, traffic cabinets, conduit
and detector loops.
c. Immediately notify the City’s Traffic Services Division if any damage occurs to
any component of the traffic signal due to the contractors activities.
d. Repair any damage to the traffic signal poles, mast arms, pull boxes, traffic
cabinets, conduit and detector loops as a result of the construction activities.
7. Fences
a. Protect all fences designated to remain.
b. Leave fence in the equal or better condition as prior to construction.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Excavation
1. Excavate to a depth indicated on the Drawings.
2. Trench excavations are defined as unclassified. No additional payment shall be
granted for rock or other in-situ materials encountered in the trench.
3. Excavate to a width sufficient for laying the pipe in accordance with the Drawings
and bracing in accordance with the Excavation Safety Plan.
4. The bottom of the excavation shall be firm and free from standing water.
a. Notify the City immediately if the water and/or the in-situ soils do not provide
for a firm trench bottom.
b. The City will determine if any changes are required in the pipe foundation or
bedding.
5. Unless otherwise permitted by the Drawings or by the City, the limits of the
excavation shall not advance beyond the pipe placement so that the trench may be
backfilled in the same day.
6. Over Excavation
a. Fill over excavated areas with the specified bedding material as specified for
the specific pipe to be installed.
b. No additional payment will be made for over excavation or additional bedding
material.
7. Unacceptable Backfill Materials
a. In -situ soils classified as unacceptable backfill material shall be separated from
acceptable backfill materials.
b. If the unacceptable backfill material is to be blended in accordance with this
Specification, then store material in a suitable location until the material is
blended.
c. Remove all unacceptable material from the project site that is not intended to be
blended or modified.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 11
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 11 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
8. Rock – No additional compensation will be paid for rock excavation or other
changed field conditions.
B. Shoring, Sheeting and Bracing
1. Engage a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas to design a site
specific excavation safety system in accordance with Federal and State
requirements.
2. Excavation protection systems shall be designed according to the space limitations
as indicated in the Drawings.
3. Furnish, put in place and maintain a trench safety system in accordance with the
Excavation Safety Plan and required by Federal, State or local safety requirements.
4. If soil or water conditions are encountered that are not addressed by the current
Excavation Safety Plan, engage a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of
Texas to modify the Excavation Safety Plan and provide a revised submittal to the
City.
5. Do not allow soil, or water containing soil, to migrate through the Excavation
Safety System in sufficient quantities to adversely affect the suitability of the
Excavation Protection System. Movable bracing, shoring plates or trench boxes
used to support the sides of the trench excavation shall not:
a. Disturb the embedment located in the pipe zone or lower
b. Alter the pipe’s line and grade after the Excavation Protection System is
removed
c. Compromise the compaction of the embedment located below the spring line of
the pipe and in the haunching
C. Water Control
1. Surface Water
a. Furnish all materials and equipment and perform all incidental work required to
direct surface water away from the excavation.
2. Ground Water
a. Furnish all materials and equipment to dewater ground water by a method
which preserves the undisturbed state of the subgrade soils.
b. Do not allow the pipe to be submerged within 24 hours after placement.
c. Do not allow water to flow over concrete until it has sufficiently cured.
d. Engage a Licensed Engineer in the State of Texas to prepare a Ground Water
Control Plan if any of the following conditions are encountered:
1) A Ground Water Control Plan is specifically required by the Contract
Documents
2) If in the sole judgment of the City, ground water is so severe that an
Engineered Ground Water Control Plan is required to protect the trench or
the installation of the pipe which may include:
a) Ground water levels in the trench are unable to be maintained below
the top of the bedding
b) A firm trench bottom cannot be maintained due to ground water
c) Ground water entering the excavation undermines the stability of the
excavation.
d) Ground water entering the excavation is transporting unacceptable
quantities of soils through the Excavation Safety System.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 12
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 12 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
e. In the event that there is no bid item for a Ground Water Control and the City
requires an Engineered Ground Water Control Plan due to conditions
discovered at the site, the contractor will be eligible to submit a change order.
f. Control of ground water shall be considered subsidiary to the excavation when:
1) No Ground Water Control Plan is specifically identified and required in the
Contract Documents
g. Ground Water Control Plan installation, operation and maintenance
1) Furnish all materials and equipment necessary to implement, operate and
maintain the Ground Water Control Plan.
2) Once the excavation is complete, remove all ground water control
equipment not called to be incorporated into the work.
h. Water Disposal
1) Dispose of ground water in accordance with City policy or Ordinance.
2) Do not discharge ground water onto or across private property without
written permission.
3) Permission from the City is required prior to disposal into the Sanitary
Sewer.
4) Disposal shall not violate any Federal, State or local regulations.
D. Embedment and Pipe Placement
1. Water Lines less than, or equal to, 12 inches in diameter:
a. The entire embedment zone shall be of uniform material.
b. Utility sand shall be generally used for embedment.
c. If ground water is in sufficient quantity to cause sand to pump, then use
crushed rock as embedment.
1) If crushed rock is not specifically identified in the Contract Documents,
then crushed rock shall be paid by the pre-bid unit price.
d. Place evenly spread bedding material on a firm trench bottom.
e. Provide firm, uniform bedding.
f. Place pipe on the bedding in accordance with the alignment of the Drawings.
g. In no case shall the top of the pipe be less than 42 inches from the surface of the
proposed grade, unless specifically called for in the Drawings.
h. Place embedment, including initial backfill, to a minimum of 6 inches, but not
more than 12 inches, above the pipe.
i. Where gate valves are present, the initial backfill shall extend to 6 inches above
the elevation of the valve nut.
j. Form all blocking against undisturbed trench wall to the dimensions in the
Drawings.
k. Compact embedment and initial backfill.
l. Place marker tape on top of the initial trench backfill in accordance with
Section 33 05 26.
2. Water Lines 16-inches through 24-inches in diameter:
a. The entire embedment zone shall be of uniform material.
b. Utility sand may be used for embedment when the excavated trench depth is
less than 15 feet deep.
c. Crushed rock or fine crushed rock shall be used for embedment for excavated
trench depths 15 feet, or greater.
d. Crushed rock shall be used for embedment for steel pipe.
e. Provide trench geotextile fabric at any location where crushed rock or fine
crushed rock come into contact with utility sand
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 13
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 13 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
f. Place evenly spread bedding material on a firm trench bottom.
g. Provide firm, uniform bedding.
1) Additional bedding may be required if ground water is present in the
trench.
2) If additional crushed rock is required not specifically identified in the
Contract Documents, then crushed rock shall be paid by the pre-bid unit
price.
h. Place pipe on the bedding according to the alignment shown on the Drawings.
i. The pipe line shall be within:
1) ±3 inches of the elevation on the Drawings for 16-inch and 24-inch water
lines
j. Place and compact embedment material to adequately support haunches in
accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.
k. Place remaining embedment including initial backfill to a minimum of 6 inches,
but not more than 12 inches, above the pipe.
l. Where gate valves are present, the initial backfill shall extend to up to the valve
nut.
m. Compact the embedment and initial backfill to 95 percent Standard Proctor
ASTM D 698.
n. Density test may be performed by City to verify that the compaction of
embedment meets requirements.
o. Place trench geotextile fabric on top of the initial backfill.
p. Place marker tape on top of the trench geotextile fabric in accordance with
Section 33 05 26.
3. Water Lines 30-inches and greater in diameter
a. The entire embedment zone shall be of uniform material.
b. Crushed rock shall be used for embedment.
c. Provide trench geotextile fabric at any location where crushed rock or fine
crushed rock come into contact with utility sand.
d. Place evenly spread bedding material on a firm trench bottom.
e. Provide firm, uniform bedding.
1) Additional bedding may be required if ground water is present in the
trench.
2) If additional crushed rock is required which is not specifically identified in
the Contract Documents, then crushed rock shall be paid by the pre-bid unit
price.
f. Place pipe on the bedding according to the alignment shown on the Drawings.
g. The pipe line shall be within:
1) ±1 inch of the elevation on the Drawings for 30-inch and larger water lines
h. Place and compact embedment material to adequately support haunches in
accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.
i. For steel pipe greater than 30 inches in diameter, the initial embedment lift shall
not exceed the spring line prior to compaction.
j. Place remaining embedment, including initial backfill, to a minimum of 6
inches, but not more than 12 inches, above the pipe.
k. Where gate valves are present, the initial backfill shall extend to up to the valve
nut.
l. Compact the embedment and initial backfill to 95 percent Standard Proctor
ASTM D 698.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 14
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 14 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
m. Density test may be performed by City to verify that the compaction of
embedment meets requirements.
n. Place trench geotextile fabric on top of the initial backfill.
o. Place marker tape on top of the trench geotextile fabric in accordance with
Section 33 05 26.
4. Sanitary Sewer Lines and Storm Sewer Lines (HDPE)
a. The entire embedment zone shall be of uniform material.
b. Crushed rock shall be used for embedment.
c. Place evenly spread bedding material on a firm trench bottom.
d. Spread bedding so that lines and grades are maintained and that there are no
sags in the sanitary sewer pipe line.
e. Provide firm, uniform bedding.
1) Additional bedding may be required if ground water is present in the
trench.
2) If additional crushed rock is required which is not specifically identified in
the Contract Documents, then crushed rock shall be paid by the pre-bid unit
price.
f. Place pipe on the bedding according to the alignment shown in the Drawings.
g. The pipe line shall be within ±0.1 inches of the elevation, and be consistent
with the grade shown on the Drawings.
h. Place and compact embedment material to adequately support haunches in
accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.
i. For sewer lines greater than 30 inches in diameter, the embedment lift shall not
exceed the spring line prior to compaction.
j. Place remaining embedment including initial backfill to a minimum of 6 inches,
but not more than 12 inches, above the pipe.
k. Compact the embedment and initial backfill to 95 percent Standard Proctor
ASTM D 698.
l. Density test may be performed by City to verify that the compaction of
embedment meets requirements.
m. Place trench geotextile fabric on top of the initial backfill.
n. Place marker tape on top of the trench geotextile fabric in accordance with
Section 33 05 26.
5. Storm Sewer (RCP)
a. The bedding and the pipe zone up to the spring line shall be of uniform
material.
b. Crushed rock shall be used for embedment up to the spring line.
c. The specified backfill material may be used above the spring line.
d. Place evenly spread bedding material on a firm trench bottom.
e. Spread bedding so that lines and grades are maintained and that there are no
sags in the storm sewer pipe line.
f. Provide firm, uniform bedding.
1) Additional bedding may be required if ground water is present in the
trench.
2) If additional crushed rock is required which is not specifically identified in
the Contract Documents, then crushed rock shall be paid by the pre-bid unit
price.
g. Place pipe on the bedding according to the alignment of the Drawings.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 15
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 15 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
h. The pipe line shall be within ±0.1 inches of the elevation, and be consistent
with the grade, shown on the Drawings.
i. Place embedment material up to the spring line.
1) Place embedment to ensure that adequate support is obtained in the haunch.
j. Compact the embedment and initial backfill to 95 percent Standard Proctor
ASTM D 698.
k. Density test may be performed by City to verify that the compaction of
embedment meets requirements.
l. Place trench geotextile fabric on top of pipe and crushed rock.
6. Storm Sewer Reinforced Concrete Box
a. Crushed rock shall be used for bedding.
b. The pipe zone and the initial backfill shall be:
1) Crushed rock, or
2) Acceptable backfill material compacted to 95 percent Standard Proctor
density
c. Place evenly spread compacted bedding material on a firm trench bottom.
d. Spread bedding so that lines and grades are maintained and that there are no
sags in the storm sewer pipe line.
e. Provide firm, uniform bedding.
1) Additional bedding may be required if ground water is present in the
trench.
2) If additional crushed rock is required which is not specifically identified in
the Contract Documents, then crushed rock shall be paid by the pre-bid unit
price.
f. Fill the annular space between multiple boxes with crushed rock, CLSM
according to 03 34 13.
g. Place pipe on the bedding according to the alignment of the Drawings.
h. The pipe shall be within ±0.1 inches of the elevation, and be consistent with the
grade, shown on the Drawings.
i. Compact the embedment initial backfill to 95 percent Standard Proctor ASTM
D698.
7. Water Services (Less than 2 Inches in Diameter)
a. The entire embedment zone shall be of uniform material.
b. Utility sand shall be generally used for embedment.
c. Place evenly spread bedding material on a firm trench bottom.
d. Provide firm, uniform bedding.
e. Place pipe on the bedding according to the alignment of the Plans.
f. Compact the initial backfill to 95 percent Standard Proctor ASTM D698.
8. Sanitary Sewer Services
a. The entire embedment zone shall be of uniform material.
b. Crushed rock shall be used for embedment.
c. Place evenly spread bedding material on a firm trench bottom.
d. Spread bedding so that lines and grades are maintained and that there are no
sags in the sanitary sewer pipe line.
e. Provide firm, uniform bedding.
1) Additional bedding may be required if ground water is present in the
trench.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 16
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 16 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
2) If additional crushed rock is required which is not specifically identified in
the Contract Documents, then crushed rock shall be paid by the pre-bid unit
price.
f. Place pipe on the bedding according to the alignment of the Drawings.
g. Place remaining embedment, including initial backfill, to a minimum of 6
inches, but not more than 12 inches, above the pipe.
h. Compact the initial backfill to 95 percent Standard Proctor ASTM D698.
i. Density test may be required to verify that the compaction meets the density
requirements.
E. Trench Backfill
1. At a minimum, place backfill in such a manner that the required in-place density
and moisture content is obtained, and so that there will be no damage to the surface,
pavement or structures due to any trench settlement or trench movement.
a. Meeting the requirement herein does not relieve the responsibility to damages
associated with the Work.
2. Backfill Material
a. Final backfill depth less than 15 feet
1) Backfill with:
a) Acceptable backfill material
b) Blended backfill material, or
c) Select backfill material, CSS, or CLSM when specifically required
b. Final backfill depth 15 feet or greater: (under pavement or future pavement)
1) Backfill depth from 0 to15 feet deep
a) Backfill with:
(1) Acceptable backfill material
(2) Blended backfill material, or
(3) Select backfill material, CSS, or CLSM when specifically required
2) Backfill depth from 15 feet and greater
a) Backfill with:
(1) Select Fill
(2) CSS, or
(3) CLSM when specifically required
c. Final backfill depth 15 feet or greater: (not under pavement or future pavement)
1) Backfill with:
a) Acceptable backfill material, or
b) Blended backfill material
d. Backfill for service lines:
1) Backfill for water or sewer service lines shall be the same as the
requirement of the main that the service is connected to.
3. Required Compaction and Density
a. Final backfill (depths less than 15 feet)
1) Compact acceptable backfill material, blended backfill material or select
backfill to a minimum of 95 percent Standard Proctor per ASTM D698 at
moisture content within -2 to +5 percent of the optimum moisture.
2) CSS or CLSM requires no compaction.
b. Final backfill (depths 15 feet and greater/under existing or future pavement)
1) Compact select backfill to a minimum of 98 percent Standard Proctor per
ASTM D 698 at moisture content within -2 to +5 percent of the optimum
moisture.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 17
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 17 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
2) CSS or CLSM requires no compaction.
c. Final backfill (depths 15 feet and greater/not under existing or future pavement)
1) Compact acceptable backfill material blended backfill material, or select
backfill to a minimum of 95 percent Standard Proctor per ASTM D 698 at
moisture content within -2 to +5 percent of the optimum moisture.
4. Saturated Soils
a. If in-situ soils consistently demonstrate that they are greater than 5 percent over
optimum moisture content, the soils are considered saturated.
b. Flooding the trench or water jetting is strictly prohibited.
c. If saturated soils are identified in the Drawings or Geotechnical Report in the
Appendix, Contractor shall proceed with Work following all backfill
procedures outlined in the Drawings for areas of soil saturation greater than 5
percent.
d. If saturated soils are encountered during Work but not identified in Drawings or
Geotechnical Report in the Appendix:
1) The Contractor shall:
a) Immediately notify the City.
b) Submit a Contract Claim for Extra Work associated with direction from
City.
2) The City shall:
a) Investigate soils and determine if Work can proceed in the identified
location.
b) Direct the Contractor of changed backfill procedures associated with
the saturated soils that may include:
(1) Imported backfill
(2) A site specific backfill design
5. Placement of Backfill
a. Use only compaction equipment specifically designed for compaction of a
particular soil type and within the space and depth limitation experienced in the
trench.
b. Flooding the trench or water setting is strictly prohibited.
c. Place in loose lifts not to exceed 12 inches.
d. Compact to specified densities.
e. Compact only on top of initial backfill, undisturbed trench or previously
compacted backfill.
f. Remove any loose materials due to the movement of any trench box or shoring
or due to sloughing of the trench wall.
g. Install appropriate tracking balls for water and sanitary sewer trenches in
accordance with Section 33 05 26.
6. Backfill Means and Methods Demonstration
a. Notify the City in writing with sufficient time for the City to obtain samples
and perform standard proctor test in accordance with ASTM D698.
b. The results of the standard proctor test must be received prior to beginning
excavation.
c. Upon commencing of backfill placement for the project the Contractor shall
demonstrate means and methods to obtain the required densities.
d. Demonstrate Means and Methods for compaction including:
1) Depth of lifts for backfill which shall not exceed 12 inches
2) Method of moisture control for excessively dry or wet backfill
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 18
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 18 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
3) Placement and moving trench box, if used
4) Compaction techniques in an open trench
5) Compaction techniques around structure
e. Provide a testing trench box to provide access to the recently backfilled
material.
f. The City will provide a qualified testing lab full time during this period to
randomly test density and moisture continent.
1) The testing lab will provide results as available on the job site.
7. Varying Ground Conditions
a. Notify the City of varying ground conditions and the need for additional
proctors.
b. Request additional proctors when soil conditions change.
c. The City may acquire additional proctors at its discretion.
d. Significant changes in soil conditions will require an additional Means and
Methods demonstration.
3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests and Inspections
1. Proctors
a. The City will perform Proctors in accordance with ASTM D698.
b. Test results will generally be available to within 4 calendar days and distributed
to:
1) Contractor
2) City Project Manager
3) City Inspector
4) Engineer
c. Notify the City if the characteristic of the soil changes.
d. City will perform new proctors for varying soils:
1) When indicated in the geotechnical investigation in the Appendix
2) If notified by the Contractor
3) At the convenience of the City
e. Trenches where different soil types are present at different depths, the proctors
shall be based on the mixture of those soils.
2. Density Testing of Backfill
a. Density Tests shall be in conformance with ASTM D2922.
b. Provide a testing trench protection for trench depths in excess of 5 feet.
c. Place, move and remove testing trench protection as necessary to facilitate all
test conducted by the City.
d. For final backfill depths less than 15 feet and trenches of any depth not under
existing or future pavement:
1) The City will perform density testing twice per working day when
backfilling operations are being conducted.
2) The testing lab shall take a minimum of 3 density tests of the current lift in
the available trench.
e. For final backfill depths 15 feet and greater deep and under existing or future
pavement:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 19
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 19 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
1) The City will perform density testing twice per working day when
backfilling operations are being conducted.
2) The testing lab shall take a minimum of 3 density tests of the current lift in
the available trench.
3) The testing lab will remain onsite sufficient time to test 2 additional lifts.
f. Make the excavation available for testing.
g. The City will determine the location of the test.
h. The City testing lab will provide results to Contractor and the City’s Inspector
upon completion of the testing.
i. A formal report will be posted to the City’s Buzzsaw site within 48 hours.
j. Test reports shall include:
1) Location of test by station number
2) Time and date of test
3) Depth of testing
4) Field moisture
5) Dry density
6) Proctor identifier
7) Percent Proctor Density
3. Density of Embedment
a. Storm sewer boxes that are embedded with acceptable backfill material,
blended backfill material, cement modified backfill material or select material
will follow the same testing procedure as backfill.
b. The City may test fine crushed rock or crushed rock embedment in accordance
with ASTM D2922 or ASTM 1556.
B. Non-Conforming Work
1. All non-conforming work shall be removed and replaced.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson
1.2 – Added Item for Concrete Encasement for Utility Lines
Various Sections – Revised Depths to Include 15’ and greater
3.3.A – Additional notes for pavement protection and positive drainage.
3.4.E.2 – Added requirements for backfill of service lines.
3.4.E.5 – Added language prohibiting flooding of trench
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 10 - 20
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
Page 20 of 20
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 12, 2016
6/18/2013 D. Johnson
1.2.A.3 – Clarified measurement and payment for concrete encasement as per plan
quantity
2.2.A – Added language for concrete encasement
12/12/16 Z. Arega 2.2.A.1.d Modify gradation for sand material
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 13 - 1
FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGS-CAST IRON
Page 1 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised January 22, 2016
SECTION 33 05 13
FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGS – CAST IRON
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cast iron frame, cover and grade rings used as access ports into water, sanitary
sewer and storm drain structures such manholes or vaults
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. This Item is considered subsidiary to the structure containing the frame, cover
and grade rings.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item
are subsidiary to the unit price bid per each structure complete in place, and no
other compensation will be allowed.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM International (ASTM)
a. ASTM A48 – Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings
b. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
c. ASTM C478 - Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
3. American Association of State Highways and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
a. AASHTO M306 – Standard Specification for Drainage, Sewer, Utility and
Related Castings
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 13 - 2
FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGS-CAST IRON
Page 2 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised January 22, 2016
B. All submittals shall be approved by the Engineer or the City prior to delivery and/or
fabrication for specials.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. All castings shall be cast with:
a. Approved foundry’s name
b. Part number
c. Country of origin
2. Provide manufacturer’s:
a. Specifications
b. Load tables
c. Dimension diagrams
d. Anchor details
e. Installation instructions
B. Certificates
1. Manufacturer shall certify that all castings conform to the ASTM and AASHTO
designations.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City’s Standard Products List will be
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
B. Castings
1. Use castings for frames that conform to ASTM A48, Class 35B or better.
2. Use castings for covers that conform to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 or better.
3. Use clean casting capable of withstanding application of AASHTO HS-20 vehicle
loading with permanent deformation.
4. Covers
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 13 - 3
FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGS-CAST IRON
Page 3 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised January 22, 2016
a. Size to set flush with the frame with no larger than a 1/8 inch gap between the
frame and cover
b. Provide with 2 inch wide pick slots in lieu of pick holes.
c. Provide gasket in frame and cover.
d. Standard Dimensions
1) Sanitary Sewer
a) Provide a clear opening of 30 inches for all sanitary sewer frames and
cover assemblies unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
2) Storm Drain
a) Provide a clear opening of 22 1/2 inches for all storm drain frames,
inlets and cover assemblies unless otherwise specified in the Contract
Documents.
b) Provide a minimum clear opening of 30 inches for all storm sewer
manholes and junction structures.
e. Standard Labels
1) Water
a) Cast lid with the word “WATER” in 2-inch letters across the lid.
2) Sanitary Sewer
a) Cast lid with the word “SANITARY SEWER” in 2-inch letters across
the lid.
3) Storm Drain
a) Cast lid with the word “STORM DRAIN” in 2-inch letters across the
lid.
f. Hinge Covers
1) Provide water tight gasket on all hinged covers.
2) Water
a) Provide hinged covers for all water structures.
3) Sanitary Sewer
a) Provide hinged covers for all manholes or structures constructed over
24-inch sewer lines and larger and for manholes where rim elevations
are greater than 12 inches above the surface.
C. Grade Rings
1. Provide grade rings in sizes from 2-inch up to 8-inch.
2. Use concrete in traffic loading areas.
3. In non-traffic areas concrete or HDPE can be used.
D. Joint Sealant
1. Provide a pre-formed or trowelable bitumastic sealant in an extrudable or flat tape
form.
2. Provide sealant that is not dependant on a chemical action for its adhesive
properties or cohesive strength.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 13 - 4
FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGS-CAST IRON
Page 4 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised January 22, 2016
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Grade Rings
1. Place as shown in the water and sanitary sewer City Standard Details.
2. Clean surfaces of dirt, sand, mud or other foreign matter before placing sealant.
3. Seal each grade ring with sealant specified in this Specification and as shown on the
City Standard Details.
B. Frame and Cover
1. Water
a. For water structures install frame, cover and grade rings in accordance with
applicable City Standard Detail.
2. Sanitary Sewer
a. For sanitary sewer structures install frame, cover and grade rings in accordance
with applicable City Standard Detail.
3. Storm Drain
a. For storm drain structures install frame, cover and grade rings in accordance
with applicable City Standard Detail.
4. Hinge Cover
a. Provide hinge cover on elevated manholes, junction boxes, in the flood plain
and where specified on the Drawings.
C. Joint Sealing
1. Seal frame, grade rings and structure with specified sealant.
D. Concrete Collar
1. Provide concrete collar around all frame and cover assemblies.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 13 - 5
FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGS-CAST IRON
Page 5 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised January 22, 2016
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
6/25/2014 F. Griffin Corrected error in Part 2-2.2-B-4-d-2-a. Cover size should be 22 ½ inches rather
than 19 ¾ inches.
1/22/2016 F. Griffin Part 2-2.2-B-4-d-2-a., Cover size updated to 30 inches to match Detail 33 05 16 -
D417.
8/30/2017 W. Norwood Change specification name to add Cast Iron
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 16 - 1
CONCRETE WATER VAULTS
Page 1 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 05 16
CONCRETE WATER VAULTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete vaults to be used in water utility applications
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In -Place Concrete
4. Section 03 80 00 – Modifications to Existing Concrete Structures
5. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. This Item is considered subsidiary to Water Meter and Vault.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item are
subsidiary to the unit price bid per each “Water Meter and Vault” complete in
place and no other compensation will be allowed.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
3. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. 350, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures
and Commentary.
4. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
b. C857, Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for
Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures
c. C858, Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility
Structures
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 16 - 2
CONCRETE WATER VAULTS
Page 2 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
d. C891, Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Precast Concrete
Utility Structures.
e. C923, Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced
Concrete Manholes Structures, Pipes, and Laterals.
5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
a. 1910.23, Guarding Floor and Wall Openings and Holes
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Precast Concrete Vault
2. Connection materials
3. Pipe connections at vault walls
4. Stubs and stub plugs
5. Grade ring
6. Ladder
7. External coating material
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Meet the requirements of ACI 318.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver vault or panels (units) to project site in such quantity to assure continuity of
installation.
B. Store units at the project site in a manner which prevents cracking, distortion, staining
or other physical damage.
C. Lift units by designed lifting points or supports.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty
1. Manufacturer’s Warranty shall be in accordance with Division 1.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 16 - 3
CONCRETE WATER VAULTS
Page 3 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City’s Standard Products List will be
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
B. Performance / Design Criteria
1. Vault
a. Vault dimensions per the Drawings
b. Opening per the Drawings
c. Incorporate a sump into the base or floor of the vault.
1) Avoid conflicts with piping.
2) Do not locate directly under the access location if applicable.
d. Place floor on a minimum 2 percent slope towards the sump.
2. Water Pipe Penetrations
a. Use adjustable-linked rubber seal devices or grout, as shown in Drawings, to
provide seals around pipe penetrations.
3. Vault Access
a. Cover / Door
1) For non-traffic areas – non H-20 loading 30-inch x 36-inch steel single leaf
door, Bilco Type J model or approved equal
2) For traffic areas – 32-inch hinged ductile iron frame and cover or as shown
in manhole lid assembly in Drawings
3) With steel door, provide an automatic hold-open arm with release handle
and locking device.
4) Provide Bilco type fall protection grating under aluminum door that meets
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements or approved equal.
5) Incorporate a drain gutter with an outlet routed to the exterior of the vault
lid.
b. Ladder
1) Provide aluminum ladder by Heron Industries or approved equal.
2) Provide ladder to dimensions shown on Drawings.
C. Materials
1. Concrete for utility construction – Conform to Section 03 30 00.
2. Frame and Cover – Conform to Section 33 05 13.
3. Grade Ring – Conform to Section 33 05 13 and ASTM C 478.
4. Reinforcing Steel – Conform to Section 03 30 00.
5. Sewer Pipe Connections – Conform to ASTM C923 or ASTM C1628.
6. Adjustable-linked rubber seal devices
a. Manufactured by Link-Seal or approved equal
7. Interior Coating or Liner – Conform to Section 33 39 60.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 16 - 4
CONCRETE WATER VAULTS
Page 4 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
8. Exterior Coating
a. Coal Tar Bitumastic for below grade damp proofing
b. Dry film thickness (DFT) no less than 12 mils and no greater than 30 mils
c. Solids content is 68 percent by volume ± 2 percent.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Evaluation and Assessment
1. Verify lines and grades are in accordance to the Drawings.
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Vault
a. Perform installation in accordance to ASTM C891.
b. Construct vault to dimensions shown on Drawings.
c. Precast Sections
1) Clean bell spigot and gaskets
a) Lubricate and join
2) Minimize number of segments.
d. Vault Base
1) Place vault base on 6-inch minimum base of compacted crushed rock (per
Section 33 05 10) over undisturbed soils and grade level to elevation shown
on the Drawings.
2. Water Pipe Penetrations
a. Install adjustable-linked rubber seal devices around pipe penetrations in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.
3. Modifications and pipe penetrations into vaults shall conform to Section 03 80 00.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 16 - 5
CONCRETE WATER VAULTS
Page 5 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 2.2.B.3 – Modified vault hatch door and ladder requirements
2.2.C.6 – Modified rubber seal requirements
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 17 - 1
CONCRETE COLLARS
Page 1 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 05 17
CONCRETE COLLARS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete Collars for Manholes
2. This Item is intended for use in asphalt streets and unimproved areas – not for use
in concrete streets.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In -Place Concrete
4. Section 03 80 00 – Modifications to Existing Concrete Structures
5. Section 33 05 13 – Frame, Cover, and Grade Rings
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Manhole
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Concrete Collar”
installed.
c. The price bid will include:
1) Concrete Collar
2) Excavation
3) Forms
4) Reinforcing steel (if required)
5) Concrete
6) Backfill
7) Pavement removal
8) Hauling
9) Disposal of excess material
10) Placement and compaction of backfill
11) Clean-up
12) Additional pavement around perimeter of concrete collar as required for
rim adjustment on existing manhole.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 17 - 2
CONCRETE COLLARS
Page 2 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. D4258, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating.
b. D4259, Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, MATERIALS
A. Materials
1. Concrete – Conform to Section 03 30 00.
2. Reinforcing Steel – Conform to Section 03 21 00.
3. Frame and Cover – Conform to Section 33 05 13.
4. Grade Ring – Conform to Section 33 05 13.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Evaluation and Assessment
1. Verify lines and grades are in accordance to the Drawings.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 17 - 3
CONCRETE COLLARS
Page 3 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Final Rim Elevation
1. Install concrete grade rings for height adjustment.
a. Construct grade ring on load bearing shoulder of manhole.
b. Use sealant between rings as shown on Drawings.
2. Set frame on top of manhole or grade rings using continuous water sealant.
3. Remove debris, stones and dirt to ensure a watertight seal.
4. Do not use steel shims, wood, stones or other unspecified material to obtain the
final surface elevation of the manhole frame.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 1.1.A.2 – Blue text added to clarify where concrete collars are to be installed.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 24 - 1
INSTALLATION OF CARRIER PIPE IN CASING OR TUNNEL LINER PLATE
Page 1 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised June 19, 2013
SECTION 33 05 24 1
INSTALLATION OF CARRIER PIPE IN CASING OR TUNNEL LINER PLATE 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes: 5
1. Requirements for the installation of carrier pipe into steel casings or tunnel liner 6
plate at locations shown on the Drawings 7
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 8
1. None. 9
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 10
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the 11
Contract 12
2. Division 1 – General Requirements 13
3. Section 33 01 30 – Sewer and Manhole Testing 14
4. Section 33 11 13 - Concrete Pressure Pipe, Bar-Wrapped, Steel Cylinder Type 15
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 16
A. Measurement and Payment 17
1. Installation of Sanitary Sewer Carrier Pipe in Casing/Tunnel Liner Plate 18
a. Measurement 19
1) Measured horizontally along the surface from centerline to centerline of the 20
beginning of the casing/liner to the end of the casing/liner 21
b. Payment 22
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 23
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the 24
unit price bid per linear foot for “Sewer Carrier Pipe” complete in place for: 25
a) Various Sizes 26
c. The price bid shall include: 27
1) Furnishing and installing Sanitary Sewer Main (Pipe) in Casing/Tunnel 28
Liner Plate as specified by the Drawings 29
2) Mobilization 30
3) Grout 31
4) Casing Spacers 32
5) End seals 33
6) Excavation 34
7) Hauling 35
8) Disposal of excess material 36
9) Clean-up 37
2. Installation of Water Carrier Pipe in Casing/Tunnel Liner Plate 38
a. Measurement 39
1) Measured horizontally along the surface from centerline to centerline of the 40
beginning of the casing/liner to the end of the casing/liner Payment 41
33 05 24 - 2
INSTALLATION OF CARRIER PIPE IN CASING OR TUNNEL LINER PLATE
Page 2 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised June 19, 2013
b. Payment 1
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 2
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the 3
unit price bid per linear foot for “Water Carrier Pipe” complete in place for: 4
a) Various Sizes 5
c. The price bid shall include: 6
1) Furnishing and installing Water Main (Pipe) in Casing/Tunnel Liner Plate 7
as specified by the Drawings 8
2) Mobilization 9
3) Grout 10
4) Joint restraint 11
5) Casing Spacers 12
6) End seals 13
7) Excavation 14
8) Hauling 15
9) Disposal of excess material 16
10) Clean-up 17
1.3 REFERENCES 18
A. Definitions 19
1. Carrier Pipe: Permanent pipe for operational use that is used to convey flows 20
2. Casing: A steel pipe or tunnel liner installed by trenchless methods that supports the 21
ground and provides a stable underground excavation for installation of the carrier 22
pipe 23
B. Reference Standards 24
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference 25
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this 26
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 27
2. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) 28
a. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete 29
Specimens. 30
b. C109, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement 31
Mortars (Using 2-in or [50 mm] Cube Specimens). 32
c. D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 33
3. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): 34
a. 9001, Quality Management Systems - Requirements. 35
4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 36
a. OSHA Regulations and Standards for Underground Construction, 29 CFR Part 37
1926, Subpart S, Underground Construction and Subpart P, Excavation. 38
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 39
1.5 SUBMITTALS 40
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 41
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 42
33 05 24 - 3
INSTALLATION OF CARRIER PIPE IN CASING OR TUNNEL LINER PLATE
Page 3 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised June 19, 2013
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1
A. Product Data 2
1. Casing Isolators/Spacers 3
a. Material Data 4
2. Grout Mix 5
a. Material Data 6
B. Shop Drawings 7
1. Required for 24-inch and larger pipe installations 8
2. Submit Work Plan describing the carrier pipe installation equipment, materials and 9
construction methods to be employed. 10
3. Casing Spacers/Isolators 11
a. Detail drawings and manufacturer’s information for the casing isolators/spacers 12
that will be used. 13
1) Include dimension and component materials and documentation of 14
manufacturer’s ISO 9001:2000 certification. 15
b. Alternatives to casing spacers/isolators may be allowed by the City on a case-16
by-case basis. 17
c. For consideration of alternate method, submit a detailed description of method 18
including details. 19
4. End seal or bulkhead designs and locations for casing/liners. 20
5. Annular Space (between casing pipe and casing/tunnel liner plate) Grouting Work 21
Plan and Methods including: 22
a. Grouting methods 23
b. Details of equipment 24
c. Grouting procedures and sequences including: 25
1) Injection methods 26
2) Injection pressures 27
3) Monitoring and recording equipment 28
4) Pressure gauge calibration data 29
5) Materials 30
d. Grout mix details including: 31
1) Proportions 32
2) Admixtures including: 33
a) Manufacturer’s literature 34
b) Laboratory test data verifying the strength of the proposed grout mix 35
c) Proposed grout densities 36
d) Viscosity 37
e) Initial set time of grout 38
(1) Data for these requirements shall be derived from trial batches from 39
an approved testing laboratory. 40
e. Submit a minimum of 3 other similar projects where the proposed grout mix 41
design was used. 42
f. Submit anticipated volumes of grout to be pumped for each application and 43
reach grouted. 44
g. For pipe installations greater than 36-inches, without hold down jacks or a 45
restrained spacer, provide buoyant force calculations during grouting and 46
measures to prevent flotation. 47
33 05 24 - 4
INSTALLATION OF CARRIER PIPE IN CASING OR TUNNEL LINER PLATE
Page 4 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised June 19, 2013
1) Calculations sealed by a licensed Engineer in the State of Texas. 1
h. Description of methods and devices to prevent buckling of carrier pipe during 2
grouting of annular space, if required 3
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 4
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 5
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE 6
A. Certifications 7
1. Casing isolator/spacer manufacturer shall be certified against the provisions of 8
ISO9001:2000. 9
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 10
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 11
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 13
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 14
2.2 MATERIALS 15
A. Manufacturers 16
1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City’s Standard Products List will be 17
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00. 18
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 19
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a 20
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00. 21
3. The Casing Spacers/Isolators shall be new and the product of a manufacturer 22
regularly engaged in the manufacturing of casing spacers/isolators. 23
B. Design Criteria and Materials 24
1. Carrier pipe shall be installed within the horizontal and vertical tolerances as 25
indicated in PART 3 of this Specification, incorporating all support/insulator 26
dimensions required. 27
Diameter
(inches) Material
Specification
Reference
Water Line 6-12 DIP (Restrained) 33 11 10
16-20
DIP (Restrained)
AWWA C303 (Restrained)
33 11 10
33 11 13
24 and greater
DIP (Restrained)
AWWA C303 (Restrained)
AWWA C301 (Restrained)
33 11 10
33 11 13
33 11 15
Sanitary
Sewer Line 8-16
DIP (with Ceramic Epoxy)
PVC C900 DR14
33 11 10
33 31 20
18 and greater
DIP (with Ceramic Epoxy)
Fiberglass
33 11 10
33 31 13
33 05 24 - 5
INSTALLATION OF CARRIER PIPE IN CASING OR TUNNEL LINER PLATE
Page 5 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised June 19, 2013
2. Grout of annular space 1
a. For gravity sewer carrier pipe installation: 2
1) Fill all voids between the carrier pipe and the casing or liner with grout. 3
2) All exterior carrier pipe surfaces and all interior casing or liner surfaces 4
shall be in contact with the grout. 5
b. For water line installation: 6
1) No annular space fill will be used. 7
3. Grout Mixes 8
a. Low Density Cellular Grout (LDCC) 9
1) Annular space (between sewer carrier pipe and casing/liner) grout shall be 10
LDCC. 11
2) The LDCC shall be portland cement based grout mix with the addition of a 12
foaming agent designed for this application. 13
3) Develop 1 or more grout mixes designed to completely fill the annular 14
space based on the following requirements: 15
a) Provide adequate retardation to completely fill the annular space in 1 16
monolithic pour. 17
b) Provide less than 1 percent shrinkage by volume. 18
c) Compressive Strength 19
(1) Minimum strength of 10 psi in 24 hours, 300 psi in 28 days 20
d) Design grout mix with the proper density and use proper methods to 21
prevent floating of the carrier pipe. 22
e) Proportion grout to flow and to completely fill all voids between the 23
carrier pipe and the casing or liner. 24
4. End Seals 25
a. Provide end seals at each end of the casing or liner to contain the grout backfill 26
or to close the casing/liner ends to prevent the inflow of water or soil. 27
1) For water piping less than 24-inch diameter, use hard rubber seals, Model 28
PL Link Seal as manufactured by the Thunderline Corporation or approved 29
equal. 30
2) For water piping 24-inch diameter and greater, use pull-on, 1/8 inch thick, 31
synthetic rubber end seals, Model C, as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and 32
Insulator, Inc. or approved equal. 33
3) For sewer piping, no end seals are required since the annular space between 34
the carrier pipe and the casing will be grouted. 35
b. Design end seals to withstand the anticipated soil or grouting pressure and be 36
watertight to prevent groundwater from entering the casing. 37
5. Casing Spacers/Insulators 38
a. Provide casing spacers/insulators to support the carrier pipe during installation 39
and grouting (where grout is used). 40
1) For concrete pressure pipe, mortar bands may be allowed in lieu of casing 41
spacers/isolators. 42
2) Mortar bands shall be in accordance with Section 33 11 13. 43
b. Casing Spacers/Isolators material and properties: 44
1) Shall be minimum 14 gage 45
2) For water pipe, utilize Stainless Steel. 46
3) For sewer pipe, utilize Coated Steel. 47
4) Suitable for supporting weight of carrier pipe without deformation or 48
collapse during installation 49
33 05 24 - 6
INSTALLATION OF CARRIER PIPE IN CASING OR TUNNEL LINER PLATE
Page 6 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised June 19, 2013
c. Provide restrained-style casing spacers to hold all pipes stable during grouting 1
operations and prevent floating or movement. 2
d. Provide dielectric strength sufficient to electrically isolate each component 3
from one another and from the casing. 4
e. Design risers for appropriate loads, and, as a minimum: 5
1) Provide 10 gage steel risers 6
a) Provide stainless steel bands and risers for water installations. 7
f. Band material and criteria 8
1) Provide polyvinyl chloride inner liner with: 9
a) Minimum thickness of 0.09 inches 10
b) Durometer “A” of 85-90 hardness 11
c) Minimum dielectric strength of 58,000 volts 12
g. Runner material and criteria 13
1) Provide pressure-molded glass reinforced polymer or UHMW with: 14
a) Minimum of 2 inches in width and a minimum of 11 inches in length. 15
2) Attach to the band or riser with 3/8 inch minimum welded steel or stainless 16
steel studs. 17
3) Runner studs and nuts shall be recessed well below the wearing surface of 18
the runner 19
a) Fill recess with a corrosion inhibiting filler. 20
h. Riser height 21
1) Provide sufficient height with attached runner allow a minimum clearance 22
of 2 inches between the outside of carrier pipe bells or couplings and the 23
inside of the casing liner surface. 24
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 25
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 26
PART 3 - EXECUTION 27
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 28
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 29
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 30
3.4 INSTALLATION 31
A. General 32
1. Carrier pipe installation shall not begin until the following tasks have been 33
completed: 34
a. All required submittals have been provided, reviewed and accepted. 35
b. All casing/liner joints are watertight and no water is entering casing or liner 36
from any sources. 37
c. All contact grouting is complete. 38
d. Casing/liner alignment record drawings have been submitted and accepted by 39
City to document deviations due to casing/liner installation. 40
e. Site safety representative has prepared a code of safe practices and an 41
emergency plan in accordance with applicable requirements. 42
33 05 24 - 7
INSTALLATION OF CARRIER PIPE IN CASING OR TUNNEL LINER PLATE
Page 7 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised June 19, 2013
2. The carrier pipe shall be installed within the casings or liners between the limits 1
indicated on the Drawings, to the specified lines and grades and utilizing methods 2
which include due regard for safety of workers, adjacent structures and 3
improvements, utilities and the public. 4
B. Control of Line and Grade 5
1. Install Carrier pipe inside the steel casing within the following tolerances: 6
a. Horizontal 7
1) ± 2 inches from design line 8
b. Vertical 9
1) ±1 inch from design grade 10
2. Check line and grade set up prior to beginning carrier pipe installation. 11
3. Perform survey checks of line-and-grade of carrier pipe during installation 12
operations. 13
4. The Contractor is fully responsible for the accuracy of the installation and the 14
correction of it, as required. 15
a. Where the carrier pipe installation does not satisfy the specified tolerances, 16
correct the installation, including if necessary, redesign of the pipe or structures 17
at no additional cost to City. 18
C. Installation of Carrier Pipe 19
1. Pipe Installation 20
a. Remove all loose soil from casing or liner. 21
b. Grind smooth all rough welds at casing joints. 22
2. Installation of Casing Spacers 23
a. Provide casing spacers, insulators or other approved devices to prevent 24
flotation, movement or damage to the pipe during installation and grout backfill 25
placement. 26
b. Assemble and securely fasten casing spacers to the pipeline to be installed in 27
casings or tunnels. 28
c. Correctly assemble, evenly tighten and prevent damage during tightening of the 29
insulators and pipe insertion. 30
d. Install spacers in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 31
e. Install carrier pipe so that there is no metallic contact between the carrier pipe 32
and the casing. 33
f. Carrier pipe shall be installed without sliding or dragging it on the ground or in 34
the casing/liner in a manner that could damage the pipe or coatings. 35
1) If guide rails are allowed, place cement mortar on both sides of the rails. 36
g. Coat the casing spacer runners with a non-corrosive/environmentally safe 37
lubricant to minimize friction when installing the carrier pipe. 38
h. The carrier pipe shall be electrically isolated from the carrier pipe and from the 39
casing. 40
i. Grade the bottom of the trench adjacent to each end of the casing to provide a 41
firm, uniform and continuous support for the pipe. If the trench requires some 42
backfill to establish the final trench bottom grade, place the backfill material in 43
6-inch lifts and compact each layer. 44
j. After the casing or tunnel liner has been placed, pump dry and maintain dry 45
until the casing spacers and end seals are installed. 46
3. Insulator Spacing 47
33 05 24 - 8
INSTALLATION OF CARRIER PIPE IN CASING OR TUNNEL LINER PLATE
Page 8 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised June 19, 2013
a. Maximum distance between spacers is to be 6 feet. 1
b. For 18 and 20 foot long joints, install a minimum of 4 spacers. 2
1) Install 2 spacers within 1 foot on each side of the bell or flange. 3
2) Remaining 2 spacers shall be spaced equally. 4
c. If the casing or pipe is angled or bent, reduce the spacing. 5
d. The end spacer must be within 6 inches of the end of the casing pipe, regardless 6
of size of casing and pipe or type of spacer used. 7
e. Install spacers on PVC pipe at the insertion line to prevent over-insertion of the 8
spigot into the bell. 9
4. After installation of the carrier pipe: 10
a. Mortar inside and outside of the joints, as applicable 11
b. Verify electrical discontinuity between the water carrier pipe and tunnel liner. 12
1) If continuity exists, remedy the short, by all means necessary including 13
removing and reinstalling the carrier pipe, prior to applying cellular grout. 14
c. If hold down jacks or casing spacers are used, seal or plug the ends of the 15
casing. 16
d. If steel pipe is used and not welded prior to installation in casing/liner, welding 17
of pipe will only be allowed after grouting of annular space is complete. 18
D. Installation of End Seals 19
1. For Water Pipes 20
a. Grout end of casing/liner a minimum of 6 inches and a maximum of 12 inches. 21
b. Place pull-on synthetic rubber end seals on the pipe and pull over the end of the 22
casing. Securely fasten with stainless steel bands. 23
2. For Sewer Pipes 24
a. Grout annular space between carrier pipe and casing as indicated in this 25
Specification. 26
E. Annular Space Grouting (For Sewer Only) 27
1. Prepare pipe as necessary to prevent the pipe from floating during grouting 28
operation as necessary. 29
2. Mixing of Grout 30
a. Mix material in equipment of sufficient size to provide the desired amount of 31
grout material for each stage in a single operation. 32
1) The equipment shall be capable of mixing the grout at the required densities 33
for the approved procedure and shall be capable of changing the densities 34
as required by field conditions. 35
3. Backfill Annular Space with Grout 36
a. Prior to filling of the annular space, test the carrier pipe in accordance with 37
Section 33 01 30. 38
b. Verify the maximum allowable pressure with the carrier pipe manufacturer and 39
do not exceed this pressure. 40
c. After the installation of the carrier pipe, the remaining space (all voids) between 41
the casing/liner and the carrier shall be filled with LDCC grout. 42
1) All surfaces of the exterior carrier pipe wall and casing/liner interior shall 43
be in contact with the grout. 44
2) Grout shall be pumped through a pipe or hose. 45
3) Use grout pipes, or other appropriate materials, to avoid damage to carrier 46
pipe during grouting. 47
33 05 24 - 9
INSTALLATION OF CARRIER PIPE IN CASING OR TUNNEL LINER PLATE
Page 9 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised June 19, 2013
4. Injection of LDCC Grout 1
a. Grout injection pressure shall not exceed the carrier pipe manufacturer’s 2
approved recommendations or 5 psi (whichever is lower). 3
b. Pumping equipment shall be of a size sufficient to inject grout at a volume, 4
velocity and pressure compatible with the size/volume of the annular space. 5
c. Once grouting operations begin, grouting shall proceed uninterrupted, unless 6
grouting procedures require multiple stages. 7
d. Grout placements shall not be terminated until the estimated annular volume of 8
grout has been injected. 9
5. Block the carrier pipe during grouting to prevent flotation during grout installation. 10
6. Protect and preserve the interior surfaces of the casing from damage. 11
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 12
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 13
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL 14
A. Reports and Records required for pipe installations greater than 48-inches and longer 15
than 350 feet 16
1. Maintain and submit daily logs of grouting operations. 17
a. Include: 18
1) Grouting locations 19
2) Pressures 20
3) Volumes 21
4) Grout mix pumped 22
5) Time of pumping 23
2. Note any problems or unusual observations on logs. 24
B. Grout Strength Tests 25
1. City will perform testing for 24-hour and 28-day compressive strength tests for the 26
cylinder molds or grout cubes obtained during grouting operations. 27
2. City will perform field sampling during annular space grouting. 28
a. City will collect at least 1 set of 4 cylinder molds or grout cubes for each 100 29
cubic yards of grout injected but not less than 1 set for each grouting shift. 30
b. City will perform 24-hour and 28-day compressive strength tests per ASTM 31
C39 (cylindrical specimens) or ASTM C109 (cube specimens). 32
c. Remaining samples shall be tested as directed by City. 33
C. Safety 34
1. The Contractor is responsible for safety on the job site. 35
a. Perform all Work in accordance with the current applicable regulations of the 36
Federal, State and local agencies. 37
b. In the event of conflict, comply with the more restrictive applicable 38
requirement. 39
2. No gasoline powered equipment shall be permitted in jacking shafts and receiving 40
shafts/pits. 41
a. Diesel, electrical, hydraulic and air powered equipment is acceptable, subject to 42
applicable local, State and Federal regulations. 43
33 05 24 - 10
INSTALLATION OF CARRIER PIPE IN CASING OR TUNNEL LINER PLATE
Page 10 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised June 19, 2013
3. Methods of construction shall be such as to ensure the safety of the Work, 1
Contractor's and other employees on site and the public. 2
4. Furnish and operate a temporary ventilation system in accordance with applicable 3
safety requirements when personnel are underground. 4
a. Perform all required air and gas monitoring. 5
b. Ventilation system shall provide a sufficient supply of fresh air and maintain an 6
atmosphere free of toxic or flammable gasses in all underground work areas. 7
5. Perform all Work in accordance with all current applicable regulations and safety 8
requirements of the federal, state and local agencies. 9
a. Comply with all applicable provisions of OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926, Subpart S, 10
Underground Construction and Subpart P, Excavations. 11
b. In the event of conflict, comply with the more stringent requirements. 12
6. If personnel will enter the pipe during construction, the Contractor shall develop an 13
emergency response plan for rescuing personnel trapped underground in a shaft 14
excavation or pipe. 15
a. Keep on-site all equipment required for emergency response in accordance with 16
the agency having jurisdiction 17
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 18
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 19
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 20
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 21
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 22
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 23
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 24
END OF SECTION 25
26
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 2.2.B.1 – Modified minimum water line diameter from 8-inches to 6-inches
6/19/2013 D. Johnson
Added Blue Text for clarification
1.1.C – Added Concrete Pressure Pipe Specification reference.
2.2.B.5 – Added provisions for mortar bands on concrete pressure pipe.
3.4.C.3 – Revised language related to spacing of casing spacers to correspond to the
City’s Standard Detail.
27
33 05 26 - 1
UTILITY MARKERS/LOCATORS
Page 1 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 05 26
UTILITY MARKERS/LOCATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Buried and surface utility markers for utility construction
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for this Item will be by lump sum.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item will
be paid for at the lump sum price bid for “Utility Markers”.
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Furnishing and installing Utility Markers as specified by the Drawings
b. Mobilization
c. Pavement removal
d. Excavation
e. Hauling
f. Disposal of excess material
g. Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
h. Clean-up
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Public Works Association (AWPA):
a. Uniform Color Code.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 26 - 2
UTILITY MARKERS/LOCATORS
Page 2 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Buried Marker
2. Surface Marker
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City’s Standard Products List will be
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
3. Provide new Utility Markers/Locators from a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacturing of Utility Markers/Locators.
B. Materials
1. Buried Markers (Detectable Warning Tape)
a. Provide detectable warning tape as follows:
1) 5.0 mil overall thickness
2) Width – 3 inch minimum
3) Weight – 27.5 pounds per inch per 1,000 square feet
4) Triple Layer with:
a) Minimum thickness 0.35 mils solid aluminum foil encased in a
protective inert plastic jacket
(1) 100 percent virgin low density polyethylene
(2) Impervious to all known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents and
solvents within soil
(3) Aluminum foil visible to both sides
5) Locatable by conductive and inductive methods
6) Printing encased to avoid ink rub-off
7) Color and Legends
a) Potable water lines
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 26 - 3
UTILITY MARKERS/LOCATORS
Page 3 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
(1) Color – Blue (in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code)
(2) Legend – Caution Potable Water Line Below (repeated every 24
inches)
b) Reclaimed water lines
(1) Color – Purple (in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code)
(2) Legend – Caution Reclaimed Water Line Below (repeated every 24
inches)
c) Sewer Line
(1) Color – Green (in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code)
(2) Legend – Caution Sewer Line Below (repeated every 24 inches)
2. Surface Markers
a. Provide as follows:
1) 4-inch diameter, 6-feet minimum length, polyethylene posts, or equal
2) White posts with colored, ultraviolet resistant domes as follows:
a) Water Lines
(1) Color – Blue (in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code)
(2) Legend – Caution Potable Water Line Below
b) Reclaimed water lines
(1) Color – Purple (in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code)
(2) Legend – Caution Reclaimed Water Line Below
c) Sewer lines
(1) Color – Green (in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code)
(2) Legend – Caution Sewer Line Below
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Buried Markers (Detectable Warning Tape)
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations below natural ground
surface and directly above the utility for which it is marking.
a. Allow 18 inches minimum between utility and marker.
b. Bury to a depth of 3 feet or as close to the grade as is practical for optimum
protection and detectability.
B. Surface Markers
1. Bury a minimum of 2 feet deep, with a minimum of 4 feet above ground
2. The warning sign for all surface markers shall be 21 inches (not including post cap).
3. Where possible, place surface markers near fixed objects.
4. Place Surface Markers at the following locations:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 26 - 4
UTILITY MARKERS/LOCATORS
Page 4 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a. Buried Features
1) Place directly above a buried feature.
b. Above-Ground Features
1) Place a maximum of 2 feet away from an above-ground feature.
c. Water lines 16-inches and larger
1) Each right-of-way line (or end of casing pipe) for:
a) Highway crossings
b) Railroad crossings
2) Utility crossings such as:
a) High pressure or large diameter gas lines
b) Fiber optic lines
c) Underground electric transmission lines
d) Or other locations shown on the Drawings, or directed by the City
d. Surface markers not required for 12-inch and smaller water lines
e. For sanitary sewer lines:
1) In undeveloped areas, place marker maximum of 2 feet away from an
above-ground feature such as a manhole or combination air valve vault.
2) Place at 500-foot intervals along the pipeline.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson Removed references to Utility Marker Balls throughout.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 30 - 1
LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES
Page 1 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 05 30
LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Locating and verifying the location and elevation of the existing underground
utilities that may conflict with a facility proposed for construction by use of:
a. Exploratory Excavation
b. Vacuum Excavation
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Exploratory Excavation of Existing Utilities
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each excavation performed as
identified in the Drawings, or as directed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per each “Exploratory Excavation for Existing Utilities” specified.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Grade survey
2) Pavement removal
3) Excavation
4) Utility Location
5) Hauling
6) Disposal of excess material
7) Furnishing, placing and compaction of embedment
8) Furnishing, placing and compaction of backfill
9) Clean-up
10) Surface restoration
2. Vacuum Excavation of Existing Utilities
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each excavation performed as
identified in the Drawings, or as directed.
b. Payment
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 30 - 2
LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES
Page 2 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per each “Vacuum Excavation” specified.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Grade survey
2) Pavement removal
3) Vacuum Excavation
4) Utility Location
5) Hauling
6) Disposal of excess material
7) Furnishing, placing and compaction of embedment
8) Furnishing, placing and compaction of backfill
9) Clean-up
10) Surface restoration
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Definitions
1. Exploratory Excavation: Previously called “D-Hole” within the City, a method
used to locate existing underground utility as shown on the plans through the use of
standard excavation equipment.
2. Vacuum Excavation: Method used to locate existing underground utility as shown
on the plans through the use of geophysical prospecting equipment such as vacuum
excavation.
B. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
a. ASCE Publication CI/ASCE 38 (Standard Guideline for the Collection and
Depiction of Existing Subsurface Utility Data)
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. Coordinate with City Inspector at least 48 hours prior to commencing on site for
Exploratory Excavation of Existing Utilities.
2. Coordinate location of all other existing utilities within vicinity of excavation prior
to commencing Exploratory Excavation.
3. Coordinate staking of Exploratory Excavations with City at least 1 week prior to
commencement.
B. Sequencing
1. Exploratory Excavations shall be conducted prior to the construction of the entire
project.
C. Scheduling
1. For critical utility locations, the City may choose to be present during excavation.
2. Alter schedule for Exploratory Excavation of Existing Utilities to accommodate
City personnel.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 30 - 3
LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES
Page 3 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Report of Utility Location
1. Horizontal location of utility as surveyed
2. Vertical elevation of utility as surveyed
a. Top of utility
b. Spring line of utility
c. Existing ground
3. Material type, diameter and description of the condition of existing utility
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions
1. Verify location of existing utilities in accordance with the General Requirements,
the General Notes and the Drawings.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate with City Survey, if applicable.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Exploratory Excavation
1. Verify location of existing utility at location denoted on the Drawings, or as
directed by the City.
a. Expose utility to spring line, as necessary.
b. Excavate and Backfill Trench for the Exploratory Excavation in accordance
with Section 33 05 10.
B. Vacuum Excavation
1. Verify location of existing utility at location denoted on the Drawings, or as
directed by the City.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 05 30 - 4
LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES
Page 4 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. Designate the horizontal position of the existing underground utilities that are to be
located using geophysical prospecting equipment.
a. Acquire record documentation from and coordinate with utility companies, as
necessary to locate utility.
3. Perform excavation in general accordance with the recommended practices and
procedures described in ASCE Publication CI/ASCE 38.
C. Upon completion of the utility locating, submit a report of the findings.
D. If location of utility is in conflict with the Drawings, notify the City Project Manager
for appropriate design modifications.
E. Place embedment and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
F. Once necessary data is obtained, immediately restore surface to existing conditions to:
1. Obtain a safe and proper driving surface, if applicable
2. Ensure the safety of the general public
3. The satisfaction of the City
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson
Title- Exploratory Excavation of Utilities changed to Location of Existing Utilities
1.2 – Added Measurement of Payment for Vacuum Excavation
1.3 – Added Definitions
3.4 – Added requirements for Vacuum Excavation
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 05 - 1
BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS
Page 1 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 11 05
BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. All nuts, bolts and gaskets associated with pressurized water utility lines including:
a. T-Bolts and Nuts
b. Flange Bolts and Nuts
c. Threaded Rods
d. Push-on Gaskets
e. Mechanical Joint Gaskets
f. Flange Gaskets
g. Flange Isolation Kits
h. Petrolatum Tape Systems
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 33 04 10 – Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation
4. Section 33 11 10 – Ductile Iron Pipe
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Hydrocarbon Resistant Gaskets
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be by lump sum.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the lump sum price bid for all “Hydrocarbon
Resistant Gaskets”.
2. All Other Items
a. Measurement
1) The Items in this Section are considered subsidiary to the Item being
installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
are subsidiary to the unit price bid for the Item being installed and no other
compensation will be allowed.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 05 - 2
BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS
Page 2 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard
published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
a. PCC-1-2012 Guidelines for Pressure Boundary Bolted Flange Joint Assembly.
4. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for
High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose
Applications.
b. A194, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for
High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.
c. A242, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Carbon Structural
Steel
d. B117, Salt Spray Testing
e. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
5. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C111/A21.11, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings.
b. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service – Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In.
(100 mm Through 3,600 mm).
c. C600, Installation of Ductile-Iron Mains and Their Appurtenances.
d. M11, Steel Pipe.
e. M41, Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings.
6. Fastener Quality Act (FQA)
a. Public Law 106-34 (P.L. 106-34)
7. NSF International (NSF):
a. 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
8. Society for Protective Coating (SSPC) Surface Preparation Standards (SP):
a. SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning
b. SP3, Power Tool Cleaning
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for
specials.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS / INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Bolts and nuts for mechanical and or flange joints
2. Gaskets
B. Certificates
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 05 - 3
BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS
Page 3 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Furnish an affidavit certifying that all fasteners, excluding T-Bolts, shall conform to
the Fastener Quality Act (FQA) (P.L. 106-34).
2. Furnish an affidavit certifying that the Xylan Coating is manufactured by Whitford
Corporation, or a Whitford Corporation certified Applicator.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Manufacturers
a. Fastener manufacturing operations (bolts, nuts, gaskets and coatings) shall be
performed under the control of the manufacturer.
b. All gaskets shall meet or exceed the latest revisions NSF 61 and shall meet or
exceed the requirements of this Specification.
B. Preconstruction Testing
1. The City may, at its own cost, subject random fittings for destructive testing by an
independent laboratory for compliance with this Specification.
a. The compliance test shall be performed in the United States.
b. Any visible defects or failure to meet the quality standards herein will be
grounds for rejecting the entire order.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01
66 00.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City’s Standard Products List will be
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
B. Regulatory Requirements
1. All fasteners, excluding T-Bolts, shall conform to the Fastener Quality Act (FQA)
(P.L. 106-34). All fasteners shall meet the marking requirements set forth by this
Act.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 05 - 4
BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS
Page 4 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
C. T-Bolts and Nuts
1. Standard Xylan Coated T-bolt and Nut
a. High strength, corrosion-resistant, low-carbon weathering steel in accordance
with AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11 and ASTM A242
b. Xylan Coating in accordance with this Section
2. Stainless Steel T-bolt with Xylan Coated Stainless Steel Nut
a. Stainless Steel T-bolt and Nut in accordance with AISI 304.
b. Coat nut with Xylan in accordance with this Section.
D. Flange Bolts and Nuts
1. Stainless Steel Bolt and Xylan Coated Nut
a. Meet requirements of AWWA C207
b. Bolts: ASTM A193, Grade B8, Class 1(AISI 304 Stainless Steel, carbide
solution treated)
c. Nuts and Washers: ASTM A194, Grade 8 Nuts with AISI 304 Stainless Steel
Washers
1) Coat nut with Xylan in accordance with this Section.
E. Threaded Rods
1. Meet requirements of AWWA C207
2. Rods: ASTM A193, Grade B8, Class 1(AISI 304 Stainless Steel, carbide solution
treated)
3. Nuts and Washers: ASTM A194, Grade 8 Nuts with AISI 304 Stainless Steel
Washers
a. Coat nut with Xylan in accordance with this Section.
F. Push-on Gaskets
1. Conforming to the physical and marking requirements specified in ANSI/AWWA
C111/A21.11.
2. All gaskets shall meet or exceed the latest revisions NSF 61.
3. Rubber gaskets shall be made of vulcanized styrene butadiene rubber SBR, unless
otherwise specified in Drawings.
4. Gaskets shall be free from porous areas, foreign material and other defects that
make them unfit for intended use.
5. Gaskets shall be the size and shape required to provide an adequate compressive
force against the plain end and socket after assembly to affect a positive seal under
all combinations of joint and gasket tolerances.
G. Mechanical Joint Gaskets
1. Conforming to the physical and marking requirements specified in ANSI/AWWA
C111/A21.11.
2. All gaskets shall meet or exceed the latest revisions NSF 61.
3. Rubber gaskets shall be made of vulcanized styrene butadiene rubber SBR, unless
otherwise specified in Drawings.
4. Gaskets shall be free from porous areas, foreign material and other defects that
make them unfit for intended use.
H. Flange Gaskets
1. Class E Flanges
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 05 - 5
BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS
Page 5 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a. Full face
b. Manufactured true to shape from minimum 80 durometer SBR rubber stock of a
thickness not less than 1/8 inch
c. Virgin stock
d. Conforming to the physical and test requirements specified in AWWA/ANSI
C111/A21.11
e. All gaskets shall meet or exceed the latest revisions NSF 61.
f. Finished gaskets shall have holes punched by the manufacturer and shall match
the flange pattern in every respect.
g. Frayed cut edges are not acceptable.
h. Field cut sheet gaskets are not acceptable.
I. Hydrocarbon Resistant Gaskets
1. Furnish Viton® (Fluorocarbon) Rubber, hydrocarbon resistant gaskets, when
required.
J. Flange Isolation Kits
1. Flanges which are required by the Drawings to be Isolation Flanges shall conform
to Section 33 04 10.
2. For bolts used with isolation sleeves per Section 33 04 10, threading must extend to
bolt head with no grip to ensure sleeves fit properly.
K. Petrolatum Tape System
1. Petrolatum Tape Primer: Denso Paste, or approved equal
2. Molding and Filler mastic: Densyl Mastic, or approved equal
3. All Purpose Petrolatum Tape: Densyl Tape, or approved equal
L. Xylan Coating
a. Coat nuts and bolts with a ceramic-filled, baked on fluorocarbon resin, when
required.
b. Coated nuts and bolts shall be prepared “near white” or “white” when coated to
the coating manufacturer’s recommended thickness by a certified applicator.
c. Coating shall be of Xylan as manufactured by Whitford Corporation and
applied by Whitford Corporation or Whitford Corporation Recommended
Coater.
d. Coating shall be free from holidays and defects.
e. Coating thickness shall between 0.0007-inches and 0.0012-inches and shall be
such that the nut turns freely on the bolt.
f. Coating shall conform to the performance requirements of ASTM B117, “Salt
Spray Test” and shall include, if required, a certificate of conformance.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 05 - 6
BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS
Page 6 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Mechanical Joints
1. Assemble mechanical joints in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11
Appendix A, AWWA C600 and AWWA Manual M41.
2. Use Standard Xylan Coated T-bolts and Nuts.
a. Stainless Steel T-bolts with Xylan Coated Stainless Steel Nuts shall only be
used when specifically required in the Drawings.
B. Flanged Joints
1. Install in accordance with ASME PCC-1-2012.
2. Use Stainless Steel Bolts and Xylan Coated Nuts.
3. Wrap all buried steel flanges for AWWA C200, C301 or C303 pipe with
Petrolatum Tape System.
a. If only 1 flange in a joint is steel (AWWA C200, C301, or C303), petrolatum
tape wrapping will be required.
b. If a joint is made between two ductile iron flanges, the joint should be
polyethylene encased in accordance with Section 33 11 10.
4. Flange bolts are normally spaced evenly around the flange.
5. During assembly, tighten nuts gradually and equally using a three-pass method in
accordance with ASME PCC-1-2012.
a. For the first pass, tighten the nuts to 50 percent at diametrically opposite sides
to prevent misalignment and to ensure that all bolts carry equal loads.
b. For the second pass, tighten the nuts to 100 percent again in a diametrically
opposite pattern.
c. Allow a minimum of 1 hour to pass to provide time for settlement between
bolts and nuts and gasket relaxation.
d. Complete the third pass by checking each bolt in a clockwise pattern. Each nut
should be tightened until it will no longer turn. This step compensates for
elastic interaction and brings all bolts into parity.
6. The threads of the bolts should protrude a minimum of ½-inch from the nuts.
C. Flanged Joints with Isolation Kit
1. Flange Isolation Kits shall be installed in accordance with Section 33 04 10.
2. City will verify Isolation in accordance with Section 33 04 10.
D. Threaded Rod
1. Install as part of joint harness assembly in accordance with AWWA Manual M11.
2. Space rods evenly around the pipe.
3. During assembly, tighten nuts gradually and equally using a three-pass method in
accordance with ASME PCC-1-2012.
a. For the first pass, tighten the nuts to 50 percent at diametrically opposite sides
to prevent misalignment and to ensure that all bolts carry equal loads.
b. For the second pass, tighten the nuts to 100 percent again in a diametrically
opposite pattern.
4. The threads of the bolts should protrude a minimum of ½-inch from the nuts.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 05 - 7
BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS
Page 7 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
5. Wrap joint harness assembly with Petrolatum Tape System.
E. Petrolatum Tape System
1. Surfaces should be free from dirt, loose rust, scale or flaking coatings.
a. Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP2 or SSPC SP3.
1) High pressure wash of 3,000 to 7,000 psi is also suitable.
b. Surfaces may be damp but shall not have droplets or continuous film of water.
2. Apply a uniform, thin coat of Petrolatum Tape Primer to the entire surface by stiff
brush, gloved hand or rag at normal ambient temperatures.
3. By hand application, apply Molding and Filler Mastic to a rounded configuration to
fill irregular shapes and reduce sharp-edged surfaces.
4. Spirally wrap All Purpose Petrolatum Tape with a minimum overlap of 1 inch.
a. For severely corrosive environments, an overlap of 55 percent is recommended.
b. Press air pockets out and smooth all lap seams.
5. For additional mechanical protection, overwrap may be applied to increase impact
strength and electrical resistance.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 10 - 1
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Page 1 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 11 10
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ductile Iron Pipe 3-inch through 64-inch for potable water, wastewater and reuse
applications
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 33 01 31 – Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection
4. Section 33 04 10 – Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation
5. Section 33 04 40 – Cleaning and Acceptance Testing of Water Mains
6. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
7. Section 33 05 24 – Installation of Carrier Pipe in Casing or Tunnel Liner Plate
8. Section 33 11 05 – Bolts, Nuts, and Gaskets
9. Section 33 11 11 – Ductile Iron Fittings
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Ductile Iron Pipe
a. Measurement
1) Measured horizontally along the surface from center line to center line of
the fitting, manhole, or appurtenance
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per linear foot for “DIP” installed for:
a) Various sizes
b) Various types of backfill
c) Various linings
d) Various Depths, for miscellaneous sewer projects only
e) Various restraints
f) Various uses
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing Ductile Iron Pipe with joints as specified by the
Drawings
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 10 - 2
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Page 2 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2) Mobilization
3) Polyethylene encasement
4) Lining
5) Pavement removal
6) Excavation
7) Hauling
8) Disposal of excess material
9) Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment
10) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
11) Trench water stops
12) Thrust restraint, if required in Contract Documents
13) Bolts and nuts
14) Gaskets
15) Clean-up
16) Cleaning
17) Disinfection
18) Testing
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Definitions
1. Gland or Follower Gland
a. Non-restrained, mechanical joint fitting
2. Retainer Gland
a. Mechanically restrained mechanical joint fitting
B. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25, 125 and 250).
4. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for
High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose
Applications
b. A194, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High
Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both
c. A242, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel.
d. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi
Tensile Strength.
e. A674, Standard Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for
Water or Other Liquids.
f. B117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
g. B633, Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
Steel.
5. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 10 - 3
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Page 3 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a. C203, Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines -
Enamel and Tape - Hot Applied.
b. C600, Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances.
c. M41, Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings.
6. American Water Works Association/American National Standards Institute
(AWWA/ANSI):
a. C104/A21.4, Cement–Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings.
b. C105/A21.5, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
c. C111/A21.11, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
d. C115/A21.15, Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron
Threaded Flanges.
e. C150/A21.50, Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe.
f. C151/A21.51, Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water.
g. C600, Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances
7. NSF International (NSF):
a. 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
8. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
a. PA 2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for
specials.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS / INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Interior lining
a. If it is other than cement mortar lining in accordance with AWWA/ANSI
C104/A21.4, including:
1) Material
2) Application recommendations
3) Field touch-up procedures
2. Thrust Restraint
a. Retainer glands, thrust harnesses or any other means
3. Gaskets
a. If hydrocarbon or other special gaskets are required
B. Shop Drawings – Furnish for Ductile Iron Pipe used in the water distribution system or
for a wastewater force main for 24-inch and greater diameters, including:
1. Wall thickness design calculations sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in
Texas including:
a. Working pressure
b. Surge pressure
c. Deflection
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 10 - 4
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Page 4 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. Provide thrust restraint calculations for all fittings and valves, sealed by a Licensed
Professional Engineer in Texas, to verify the restraint lengths shown in the
Drawings.
3. Lay schedule/drawing for 24-inch and greater diameters, sealed by a Licensed
Professional Engineer in Texas including:
a. Pipe class
b. Joints type
c. Fittings
d. Stationing
e. Transitions
f. Joint deflection
C. Certificates
1. Furnish an affidavit certifying that all Ductile Iron Pipe meets the provisions of this
Section, each run of pipe furnished has met Specifications, all inspections have
been made, and that all tests have been performed in accordance with
AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51.
2. Furnish a certificate stating that buried bolts and nuts conform to ASTM B117.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Manufacturers
a. Finished pipe shall be the product of 1 manufacturer.
1) Change orders, specials, and field changes may be provided by a different
manufacturer upon City approval.
b. Pipe manufacturing operations (pipe, lining, and coatings) shall be performed
under the control of the manufacturer.
c. Ductile Iron Pipe
1) Manufactured in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51
a) Perform quality control tests and maintain results as outlined within
standard to assure compliance.
2) Subject each pipe to a hydrostatic test of not less than 500 psi for duration
of at least 10 seconds.
B. Preconstruction Testing
1. The City may, at its own cost, subject random lengths of pipe for testing by an
independent laboratory for compliance with this Specification.
a. The compliance test shall be performed in the United States.
b. Any visible defects or failure to meet the quality standards herein will be
grounds for rejecting the entire order.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Ductile Iron Pipe shall be stored and handled in accordance with the guidelines as
stated in AWWA M41.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 10 - 5
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Page 5 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01
66 00.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Only the manufacturers as listed in the City’s Standard Products List will be
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
B. Pipe
1. Pipe shall be in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11, AWWA/ANSI
C150/A21.15, and AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51.
2. All pipe shall meet the requirements of NSF 61.
3. Pipe shall have a lay length of 18 feet or 20 feet except for special fittings or
closure pieces and necessary to comply with the Drawings.
4. As a minimum the following pressures classes apply. The Drawings may specify a
higher pressure class or the pressure and deflection design criteria may also require
a higher pressure class, but in no case should they be less than the following:
Diameter
(inches)
Min Pressure Class
(psi)
3 through 12 350
14 through 20 250
24 200
30 through 64 150
5. Pipe markings shall meet the minimum requirements of AWWA/ANSI
C151/A21.51. Minimum pipe markings shall be as follows:
a. “DI” or “Ductile” shall be clearly labeled on each pipe
b. Weight, pressure class and nominal thickness of each pipe
c. Year and country pipe was cast
d. Manufacturer’s mark
6. Pressure and Deflection Design
a. Pipe design shall be based on trench conditions and design pressure class
specified in the Drawings.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 10 - 6
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Page 6 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b. Pipe shall be designed according to the methods indicated in AWWA/ANSI
C150/A21.50, AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51, and AWWA M41 for trench
construction, using the following parameters:
1) Unit Weight of Fill (w) = 130 pcf
2) Live Load = AASHTO HS 20
3) Trench Depth = 12 feet minimum, or as indicated in Drawings
4) Bedding Conditions = Type 4
5) Working Pressure (Pw) = 150 psi
6) Surge Allowance (Ps) = 100 psi
7) Design Internal Pressure (Pi) = Pw + Ps or 2:1 safety factor of the actual
working pressure plus the actual surge pressure, whichever is greater.
a) Test Pressure =
(1) No less than 1.25 minimum times the stated working pressure (187
psi minimum) of the pipeline measured at the highest elevation
along the test section.
(2) No less than 1.5 times the stated working pressure (225 psi
minimum) at the lowest elevation of the test section.
8) Maximum Calculated Deflection (Dx) = 3 percent
9) Restrained Joint Safety Factor (Sf) = 15 percent
c. Trench depths shall be verified after existing utilities are located.
1) Vertical alignment changes required because of existing utility or other
conflicts shall be accommodated by an appropriate change in pipe design
depth.
2) In no case shall pipe be installed deeper than its design allows.
7. Provisions for Thrust
a. Thrust at bends, tees, plugs or other fittings shall be mechanically restrained
joints when required by the Drawings.
b. Thrust at bends adjacent to casing pipe shall be restrained by mechanical means
through casing and for a sufficient distance each side of casing.
c. No thrust restraint contribution shall be allowed for the restrained length of
pipe within the casing.
d. Restrained joints, when required, shall be used for a sufficient distance from
each side of the bend, tee, plug, valve or other fitting to resist thrust which will
be developed at the design pressure of the pipe. For the purpose of thrust, the
following shall apply:
1) Valves shall be calculated as dead ends.
2) Design pressure shall be greater than the working pressure of the pipe or
the internal pressure (Pi) whichever is greater.
3) Restrained joints shall consist of approved mechanical restrained or push-
on restrained joints as listed in the City’s Standard Products List as shown
in Section 01 60 00.
e. The Pipe Manufacturer shall verify the length of pipe with restrained joints to
resist thrust in accordance with the Drawings, AWWA M41, and the following:
1) The weight of earth (We) shall be calculated as the weight of the projected
soil prism above the pipe, for unsaturated soil conditions.
2) Soil density = 130 pcf (maximum value to be used), for unsaturated soil
conditions
3) If indicated on the Drawings and the Geotechnical Borings that ground
water is expected, account for reduced soil density.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 10 - 7
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Page 7 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
8. Joints
a. General – Comply with AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11.
b. Push-On Joints
c. Mechanical Joints
d. Push-On Restrained Joints
1) Restraining Push-on joints by means of a special gasket
a) Only those products that are listed in Section 01 60 00
b) The working pressure rating of the restrained gasket must exceed the
test pressure of the pipe line to be installed.
c) Approved for use of restraining Ductile Iron Pipe in casing with a
carrier pipe of 4-inches to 12-inches
d) Otherwise only approved if specially listed on the Drawings
2) Push-on Restrained Joint bell and spigot
a) Only those products list in the standard products list will be allowed for
the size listed in the standard products list per Section 01 60 00.
b) Pressure rating shall exceed the working and test pressure of the pipe
line.
e. Flanged Joints – AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15, ASME B16.1, Class 125
f. Flange bolt circles and bolt holes shall match those of ASME B16.1, Class 125.
g. Field fabricated flanges are prohibited.
9. Gaskets
a. Provide Gaskets in accordance with Section 33 11 05.
10. Isolation Flanges
a. Flanges required by the drawings to be Isolation Flanges shall conform to
Section 33 04 10.
11. Bolts and Nuts
a. Mechanical Joints
1) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 11 05.
b. Flanged Ends
1) Meet requirements of AWWA C115.
a) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 11 05.
12. Flange Coatings
a. Connections to Steel Flanges
1) Buried connections with Steel Flanges shall be coated with a Petrolatum
Tape System in accordance with Section 33 11 05.
13. Ductile Iron Pipe Exterior Coatings
a. All ductile iron shall have an asphaltic coating, minimum of 1 mil thick, on the
pipe exterior, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
14. Polyethylene Encasement
a. All buried Ductile Iron Pipe shall be polyethylene encased.
b. Only manufacturers listed in the City’s Standard Products List as shown in
Section 01 60 00 will be considered acceptable.
c. Use only virgin polyethylene material.
d. Encasement for buried pipe shall be 8 mil linear low density (LLD)
polyethylene conforming to AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5 or 4 mil high density
cross-laminated (HDCL) polyethylene encasement conforming to
AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5 and ASTM A674.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 10 - 8
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Page 8 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
e. Marking: At a minimum of every 2 feet along its length, the mark the
polyethylene film with the following information:
1) Manufacturer’s name or trademark
2) Year of manufacturer
3) AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5
4) Minimum film thickness and material type
5) Applicable range of nominal diameter sizes
6) Warning – Corrosion Protection – Repair Any Damage
f. Special Markings/Colors
1) Reclaimed Water, perform one of the following:
a) Label polyethylene encasement with “RECLAIMED WATER”,
b) Provide purple polyethylene in accordance with the American Public
Works Association Uniform Color Code; or
c) Attach purple reclaimed water marker tape to the polyethylene wrap.
2) Wastewater, perform one of the following:
a) Label polyethylene encasement with “WASTEWATER”;
b) Provide green polyethylene in accordance with the American Public
Works Association Uniform Color Code; or
c) Attach green sanitary sewer marker tape to the polyethylene wrap.
g. Minimum widths
Polyethylene Tube and Sheet Sizes for Push-On Joint Pipe
Nominal Pipe Diameter
(inches)
Min. Width – Flat Tube
(inches)
Min. Width – Sheet
(inches)
3 14 28
4 14 28
6 16 32
8 20 40
10 24 48
12 27 54
14 30 60
16 34 68
18 37 74
20 41 82
24 54 108
30 67 134
36 81 162
42 81 162
48 95 190
54 108 216
60 108 216
64 121 242
15. Ductile Iron Pipe Interior Lining
a. Cement Mortar Lining
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 10 - 9
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Page 9 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) Ductile Iron Pipe for potable water shall have a cement mortar lining in
accordance with AWWA/ANSI C104/A21.04 and be acceptable according
to NSF 61.
b. Ceramic Epoxy or Epoxy Linings
1) Ductile Iron Pipe for use in wastewater applications shall be lined with a
Ceramic Epoxy or Epoxy lining as designated in the City’s Standard
Products List as shown in Section 01 60 00.
2) Apply lining at a minimum of 40 mils DFT.
3) Due to the tolerances involved, the gasket area and spigot end up to 6
inches back from the end of the spigot end must be coated with 6 mils
nominal, 10 mils maximum using a Joint Compound as supplied by the
manufacturer.
a) Apply the joint compound by brush to ensure coverage.
b) Care should be taken that the joint compound is smooth without excess
buildup in the gasket seat or on the spigot ends.
c) Coat the gasket seat and spigot ends after the application of the lining.
4) Surface preparation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
5) Check thickness using a magnetic film thickness gauge in accordance with
the method outlined in SSPC PA 2.
6) Test the interior lining of all pipe barrels for pinholes with a non-
destructive 2,500 volt test.
a) Repair any defects prior to shipment.
7) Mark each fitting with the date of application of the lining system along
with its numerical sequence of application on that date and records
maintained by the applicator of his work.
8) For all Ductile Iron Pipe in wastewater service where the pipe has been
cut, coat the exposed surface with the touch-up material as recommended
by the manufacturer.
a) The touch-up material and the lining shall be of the same manufacturer.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install pipe, fittings, specials and appurtenances as specified herein, as specified in
AWWA C600, AWWA M41 and in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2. See Section 33 11 11 for installation requirements for Ductile Iron Fittings.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 10 - 10
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Page 10 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3. Lay pipe to the lines and grades as indicated in the Drawings.
4. Excavate and backfill trenches in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
5. Embed Ductile Iron Pipe in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
6. For installation of carrier pipe within casing, see Section 33 05 24.
B. Pipe Handling
1. Haul and distribute pipe and fittings at the project site.
2. Handle piping with care to avoid damage.
a. Inspect each joint of pipe and reject or repair any damaged pipe prior to
lowering into the trench.
b. Do not handle the pipe in such a way that will damage the interior lining.
c. Use only nylon ropes, slings or other lifting devices that will not damage the
surface of the pipe for handling the pipe.
3. At the close of each operating day:
a. Keep the pipe clean and free of debris, dirt, animals and trash – during and after
the laying operation.
b. Effectively seal the open end of the pipe using a gasketed night cap.
C. Joint Making
1. Mechanical Joints
a. Bolt the follower ring into compression against the gasket with the bolts
tightened down evenly then cross torqued in accordance with AWWA C600.
b. Overstressing of bolts to compensate for poor installation practice will not be
permitted.
2. Push-on Joints
a. Install Push-on joints as defined in AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11.
b. Wipe clean the gasket seat inside the bell of all extraneous matter.
c. Place the gasket in the bell in the position prescribed by the manufacturer.
d. Apply a thin film of non-toxic vegetable soap lubricant to the inside of the
gasket and the outside of the spigot prior to entering the spigot into the bell.
e. When using a field cut plain end piece of pipe, refinish the field cut and scarf to
conform to AWWA C600.
3. Flanged Joints
a. Use erection bolts and drift pins to make flanged connections.
1) Do not use undue force or restraint on the ends of the fittings.
2) Apply even and uniform pressure to the gasket.
b. The fitting must be free to move in any direction while bolting.
1) Install flange bolts with all bolt heads faced in one direction.
4. Joint Deflection
a. Deflect the pipe only when necessary to avoid obstructions or to meet the lines
and grades and shown in the Drawings.
b. The deflection of each joint must be in accordance with AWWA C600 Table 3.
c. The maximum deflection allowed is 50 percent of that indicated in AWWA
C600.
d. The manufacturer’s recommendation may be used with the approval of the
Engineer.
D. Polyethylene Encasement Installation
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 10 - 11
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Page 11 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Preparation
a. Remove all lumps of clay, mud, cinders, etc., on pipe surface prior to
installation of polyethylene encasement.
1) Prevent soil or embedment material from becoming trapped between pipe
and polyethylene.
b. Fit polyethylene film to contour of pipe to affect a snug, but not tight encase
with minimum space between polyethylene and pipe.
1) Provide sufficient slack in contouring to prevent stretching polyethylene
where it bridges irregular surfaces such as bell-spigot interfaces, bolted
joints or fittings and to prevent damage to polyethylene due to backfilling
operations.
2) Secure overlaps and ends with adhesive tape and hold.
c. For installations below water table and/or in areas subject to tidal actions, seal
both ends of polyethylene tube with adhesive tape at joint overlap.
2. Tubular Type (Method A)
a. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 2 feet longer than pipe section.
b. Slip tube around pipe, centering it to provide 1-foot overlap on each adjacent
pipe section and bunching it accordion-fashion lengthwise until it clears pipe
ends.
c. Lower pipe into trench and make up pipe joint with preceding section of pipe.
d. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene tube.
e. After assembling pipe joint, make overlap of polyethylene tube, pull bunched
polyethylene from preceding length of pipe, slip it over end of the new length
of pipe and wrap until it overlaps joint at end of preceding length of pipe.
f. Secure overlap in place.
g. Take up slack width at top of pipe to make a snug, but not tight, fit along barrel
of pipe, securing fold at quarter points.
h. Repair cuts, tears, punctures or other damage to polyethylene.
i. Proceed with installation of next pipe in same manner.
3. Tubular Type (Method B)
a. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 1 foot shorter than pipe section.
b. Slip tube around pipe, centering it to provide 6 inches of bare pipe at each end.
c. Take up slack width at top of pipe to make a snug, but not tight, fit along barrel
of pipe, securing fold at quarter points; secure ends.
d. Before making up joint, slip 3-foot length of polyethylene tube over end of
proceeding pipe section, bunching it accordion-fashion lengthwise.
e. After completing joint, pull 3-foot length of polyethylene over joint,
overlapping polyethylene previously installed on each adjacent section of pipe
by at least 1 foot; make each end snug and secure.
4. Sheet Type
a. Cut polyethylene sheet to a length approximately 2 feet longer than piece
section.
b. Center length to provide 1-foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section, bunching
it until it clears the pipe ends.
c. Wrap polyethylene around pipe so that it circumferentially overlaps top
quadrant of pipe.
d. Secure cut edge of polyethylene sheet at intervals of approximately 3 feet.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 10 - 12
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Page 12 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
e. Lower wrapped pipe into trench and make up pipe joint with preceding section
of pipe.
f. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene.
g. After completing joint, make overlap and secure ends.
h. Repair cuts, tears, punctures or other damage to polyethylene.
i. Proceed with installation of next section of pipe in same manner.
5. Pipe-Shaped Appurtenances
a. Cover bends, reducers, offsets and other pipe-shaped appurtenances with
polyethylene in same manner as pipe and fittings.
6. Odd-Shaped Appurtenances
a. When it is not practical to wrap valves, tees, crosses, and other odd-shaped
pieces in tube, wrap with flat sheet or split length polyethylene tube by passing
sheet under appurtenances and bringing it up around body.
b. Make seams by bringing edges together, folding over twice and taping down.
c. Tape polyethylene securely in place at the valve stem and at any other
penetrations.
7. Repairs
a. Repair any cuts, tears, punctures or damage to polyethylene with adhesive tape
or with short length of polyethylene sheet or cut open tube, wrapped around
fitting to cover damaged area and secured in place.
8. Openings in Encasement
a. Provide openings for branches, service taps, blow-offs, air valves and similar
appurtenances by making an X-shaped cut in polyethylene and temporarily
folding back film.
b. After appurtenance is installed, tape slack securely to appurtenance and repair
cut, as well as other damaged area in polyethylene with tape.
c. Service taps may also be made directly through polyethylene, with any
resulting damaged areas being repaired as described above.
9. Junctions between Wrapped and Unwrapped Pipe:
a. Where polyethylene-wrapped pipe joins an adjacent pipe that is not wrapped,
extend polyethylene wrap to cover adjacent pipe for distance of at least 3 feet.
b. Secure end with circumferential turns of tape.
c. Wrap service lines of dissimilar metals with polyethylene or suitable dielectric
tape for minimum clear distance of 3 feet away from Cast or Ductile Iron Pipe.
3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION
A. Patching
1. Excessive field-patching is not permitted of lining or coating.
2. Patching of lining or coating will be allowed where area to be repaired does not
exceed 100 square inches and has no dimensions greater than 12 inches.
3. In general, there shall not be more than 1 patch on either the lining or the coating of
any 1 joint of pipe.
4. Wherever necessary to patch the pipe:
a. Make patch with cement mortar as previously specified for interior joints.
b. Do not install patched pipe until the patch has been properly and adequately
cured and approved for laying by the City.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 10 - 13
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Page 13 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
5. Promptly remove rejected pipe from the site.
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Potable Water Mains
1. Cleaning, disinfection, hydrostatic testing and bacteriological testing of water mains
a. Clean, flush, pig, disinfect, hydrostatic test and bacteriological test the water
main as specified in Section 33 04 40.
B. Wastewater Lines
1. Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection
a. Provide a Post-CCTV Inspection in accordance with Section 33 01 31.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson
1.2.A.1.b. – Updated Payment types
1.3 – Added definitions of gland types for clarity
2.2.B.9, 10, 11 and 12 – Added reference to Section 33 11 05 and removed material
specification for bolts, nuts and gaskets
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 11 - 1
DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS
Page 1 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 11 11
DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ductile Iron Fittings 3-inch through 64-inch for potable water, wastewater, and
other liquids for use with Ductile Iron Pipe and Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe
2. All mechanical joint fittings shall be mechanically restrained using restrained
wedge type retainer glands.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
4. Section 33 04 10 – Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation
5. Section 33 04 40 – Cleaning and Acceptance Testing of Water Mains
6. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
7. Section 33 11 05 – Bolts, Nuts, and Gaskets
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Ductile Iron Water Fittings with Restraint
a. Measurement
1) Shall be per ton of fittings supplied
2) Fittings weights are the sum of the various types of fittings multiplied by
the weight per fitting as listed in AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53.
3) The fitting weights listed in AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 are only allowed
for specials where an AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53 is not available, or if the
Drawings specifically call for an AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 fittings.
4) If the Contractor chooses to supply AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 (full
body) Ductile Iron Fittings in lieu of AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53
(compact) Ductile Iron Fittings at his convenience, then the weight shall be
measured in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per ton of “Ductile Iron Water Fittings with Restraint”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing Ductile Iron Water Fittings as specified by the
Drawings
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 11 - 2
DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS
Page 2 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2) Polyethylene encasement
3) Lining
4) Pavement removal
5) Excavation
6) Hauling
7) Disposal of excess material
8) Furnishing and installing bolts, nuts, and restraints
9) Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment
10) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
11) Trench water stops
12) Clean-up
13) Cleaning
14) Disinfection
15) Testing
2. Ductile Iron Sewer Fittings
a. Measurement
1) Shall be per ton of fittings supplied
2) Fittings weights are the sum of the various types of fittings multiplied by
the weight per fitting as listed in AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53.
3) The fitting weights listed in AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 are only allowed
for specials where an AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53 is not available, or if the
Drawings specifically call for an AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 fittings.
4) If the Contractor chooses to supply AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 (full
body) Ductile Iron Fittings in lieu of AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53
(compact) Ductile Iron Fittings at his convenience, then the weight shall be
measured in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per ton of “Ductile Iron Sewer Fittings”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing Ductile Iron Water Fittings as specified by the
Drawings
2) Epoxy Coating
3) Polyethylene encasement
4) Lining
5) Pavement removal
6) Excavation
7) Hauling
8) Disposal of excess material
9) Furnishing and installing bolts, nuts, and restraints
10) Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment
11) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
12) Clean-up
13) Cleaning
14) Disinfection
15) Testing
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 11 - 3
DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS
Page 3 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Definitions
1. Gland or Follower Gland
a. Non-restrained, mechanical joint fitting
2. Retainer Gland
a. Mechanically restrained mechanical joint fitting, consisting of multiple
gripping wedges incorporated into a follower gland meeting the applicable
requirements of ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10.
B. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25, 125 and 250).
3. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for
High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose
Applications
b. A194, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High
Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both
c. A242, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel.
d. A674, Standard Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for
Water or Other Liquids.
e. B117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
4. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C203, Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines -
Enamel and Tape - Hot Applied.
b. C600, Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances.
c. M41, Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings.
5. American Water Works Association/American National Standards Institute
(AWWA/ANSI):
a. C104/A21.4, Cement–Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings.
b. C105/A21.5, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
c. C110/A21.10, Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings.
d. C111/A21.11, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
e. C115/A21.15, Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron
Threaded Flanges.
f. C151/A21.51, Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water.
g. C153/A21.53, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service.
6. NSF International (NSF):
a. 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
7. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
a. PA 2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 11 - 4
DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS
Page 4 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for
specials.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS / INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Ductile Iron Fittings
a. Pressure class
b. Interior lining
c. Joint types
2. Polyethylene encasement and tape
a. Planned method of installation
b. Whether the film is linear low density or high density cross linked polyethylene
c. The thickness of the film provided
3. The interior lining, if it is other than cement mortar lining in accordance with
AWWA/ANSI C104/A21.4
a. Material
b. Application recommendations
c. Field touch-up procedures
4. Thrust Restraint
a. Retainer glands
b. Thrust harnesses
c. Any other means
5. Gaskets
a. Provide Gaskets in accordance with Section 33 11 05.
6. Isolation Flanges
a. Flanges required by the drawings to be Isolation Flanges shall conform to
Section 33 04 10.
7. Bolts and Nuts
a. Mechanical Joints
1) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 11 05.
b. Flanged Ends
1) Meet requirements of AWWA C115.
a) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 11 05.
8. Flange Coatings
a. Connections to Steel Flanges
1) Buried connections with Steel Flanges shall be coated with a Petrolatum
Tape System in accordance with Section 33 11 05.
B. Certificates
1. The manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit certifying that all Ductile Iron Fittings
meet the provisions of this Section and meet the requirements of AWWA/ANSI
C110/A21.10 or AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53.
2. Furnish a certificate stating that buried bolts and nuts conform to ASTM B117.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 11 - 5
DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS
Page 5 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Manufacturers
a. Fittings manufacturing operations (fittings, lining, and coatings) shall be
performed under the control of the manufacturer.
b. Ductile Iron Fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA/ANSI
C110/A21.10 or AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53.
1) Perform quality control tests and maintain the results as outlined in these
standards to assure compliance.
B. Preconstruction Testing
1. The City may, at its own cost, subject random fittings for destructive testing by an
independent laboratory for compliance with this Specification.
a. The compliance test shall be performed in the United States.
b. Any visible defects or failure to meet the quality standards herein will be
grounds for rejecting the entire order.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Store and handle in accordance with the guidelines as stated in AWWA M41.
2. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01
66 00.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City’s Standard Products List will be
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
B. Ductile Iron Fittings
1. Ductile Iron Fittings shall be in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10,
AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53.
2. All fittings for potable water service shall meet the requirements of NSF 61.
3. Ductile Iron Fittings, at a minimum, shall meet or exceed the pressures classes of
the pipe which the fitting is connected, unless specifically indicated in the
Drawings.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 11 - 6
DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS
Page 6 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
4. Fittings Markings
a. Meet the minimum requirements of AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51.
b. Minimum markings shall include:
1) “DI” or “Ductile” cast or metal stamped on each fitting
2) Applicable AWWA/ANSI standard for that the fitting
3) Pressure rating
4) Number of degrees for all bends
5) Nominal diameter of the openings
6) Year and country fitting was cast
7) Manufacturer’s mark
5. Joints
a. Mechanical Joints with mechanical restraint
1) Comply with AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11 and applicable parts of
ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10.
2) The retainer gland shall have the following working pressure ratings based
on size and type of pipe:
a) Ductile Iron Pipe
(1) 3-inch – 16-inch, 350 psi
(2) 18-inch – 48-inch, 250 psi
b) PVC C900 and C905
(1) 3-inch – 12-inch, 305psi
(2) 14-inch – 16-inch, 235psi
(3) 18-inch – 20-inch, 200psi
(4) 24-inch – 30 –inch 165psi
c) Ratings are for water pressure and must include a minimum safety
factor of 2 to 1 in all sizes
3) Retainer glands shall have specific designs for Ductile Iron and PVC and it
should be easy to differentiate between the 2.
4) Gland body, wedges and wedge actuating components shall be cast from
grade 65-45-12 ductile iron material in accordance with ASTM A536.
5) Mechanical joint restraint shall require conventional tools and installation
procedures per AWWA C600, while retaining full mechanical joint
deflection during assembly as well as allowing joint deflection after
assembly.
6) Proper actuation of the gripping wedges shall be ensured with torque
limiting twist off nuts.
7) A minimum of 6 wedges shall be required for 8 inch diameter PVC pipe.
b. Push-On, Restrained Joints
1) Restraining Push-on joints by means of a special gasket
a) Only those products that are listed in 01 60 00
b) The working pressure rating of the restrained gasket must exceed the
test pressure of the pipe line to be installed.
c) Approved for use of restraining Ductile Iron Pipe in casing with a
carrier pipe of 4-inches to 12-inches
d) Otherwise only approved if specially listed on the drawings
2) Push-on Restrained Joint bell and spigot
a) Only those products list in the standard products list will be allowed for
the size listed in the standard products list per Section 01 60 00
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 11 - 7
DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS
Page 7 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b) Pressure rating shall exceed the working and test pressure of the pipe
line
c. Flanged Joints
1) AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15, ASME B16.1, Class 125
2) Flange bolt circles and bolt holes shall match those of ASME B16.1, Class
125.
3) Field fabricated flanges are prohibited.
6. Gaskets
a. Provide Gaskets in accordance with Section 33 11 05.
7. Isolation Flanges
a. Flanges required by the drawings to be Isolation Flanges shall conform to
Section 33 04 10.
8. Bolts and Nuts
a. Mechanical Joints
1) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 11 05.
b. Flanged Ends
1) Meet requirements of AWWA C115.
a) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 11 05.
9. Flange Coatings
a. Connections to Steel Flanges
1) Buried connections with Steel Flanges shall be coated with a Petrolatum
Tape System in accordance with Section 33 11 05.
10. Ductile Iron Fitting Exterior Coatings
a. All Ductile Iron Fittings shall have an asphaltic coating, minimum of 1 mil
thick, on the exterior, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
11. Polyethylene Encasement
a. All buried Ductile Iron Fittings shall be polyethylene encased.
b. Only manufacturers listed in the City’s Standard Products List as shown in
Section 01 60 00 will be considered acceptable.
c. Use only virgin polyethylene material.
d. Encasement for buried fittings shall be 8 mil linear low density (LLD)
polyethylene conforming to AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5 or 4 mil high density
cross-laminated (HDCL) polyethylene encasement conforming to conforming
to AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5 and ASTM A674.
e. Marking: At a minimum of every 2 feet along its length, the mark the
polyethylene film with the following information:
1) Manufacturer’s name or trademark
2) Year of manufacturer
3) AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5
4) Minimum film thickness and material type
5) Applicable range of nominal diameter sizes
6) Warning – Corrosion Protection – Repair Any Damage
f. Special Markings/Colors
1) Reclaimed Water, perform one of the following:
a) Label polyethylene encasement with “RECLAIMED WATER”,
b) Provide purple polyethylene in accordance with the American Public
Works Association Uniform Color Code; or
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 11 - 8
DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS
Page 8 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
c) Attach purple reclaimed water marker tape to the polyethylene wrap.
2) Wastewater, perform one of the following:
a) Label polyethylene encasement with “WASTEWATER”;
b) Provide green polyethylene in accordance with the American Public
Works Association Uniform Color Code; or
c) Attach green sanitary sewer marker tape to the polyethylene wrap.
g. Minimum widths
Polyethylene Tube and Sheet Sizes for Push-On Joint Fittings
Nominal Fittings Diameter
(inches)
Min. Width – Flat Tube
(inches)
Min. Width – Sheet
(inches)
3 14 28
4 14 28
6 16 32
8 20 40
10 24 48
12 27 54
14 30 60
16 34 68
18 37 74
20 41 82
24 54 108
30 67 134
36 81 162
42 81 162
48 95 190
54 108 216
60 108 216
64 121 242
12. Ductile Iron Fittings Interior Lining
a. Cement Mortar Lining
1) Ductile Iron Fittings for potable water shall have a cement mortar lining in
accordance with AWWA/ANSI C104/A21.4 and be acceptable according to
NSF 61.
b. Ceramic Epoxy or Epoxy Linings
1) Ductile Iron Fittings for use in wastewater applications shall be lined with
a Ceramic Epoxy or Epoxy lining as designated in the Standard Products
List as shown in Section 01 60 00.
2) Apply lining at a minimum of 40 mils DFT
3) Due to the tolerances involved, the gasket area and spigot end up to 6
inches back from the end of the spigot end must be coated with 6 mils
nominal, 10 mils maximum using a Joint Compound as supplied by the
manufacturer.
a) Apply the joint compound by brush to ensure coverage.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 11 - 9
DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS
Page 9 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b) Care should be taken that the joint compound is smooth without excess
buildup in the gasket seat or on the spigot ends.
c) Coat the gasket seat and spigot ends after the application of the lining.
4) Surface preparation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
5) Check thickness using a magnetic film thickness gauge in accordance with
the method outlined in SSPC PA 2.
6) Test the interior lining of all fittings for pinholes with a non-destructive
2,500 volt test.
a) Repair any defects prior to shipment.
7) Mark each fitting with the date of application of the lining system along
with its numerical sequence of application on that date and records
maintained by the applicator of his work.
8) For all Ductile Iron Fittings in wastewater service where the fitting has
been cut, coat the exposed surface with the touch-up material as
recommended by the manufacturer.
a) The touch-up material and the lining shall be of the same manufacturer.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install fittings, specials and appurtenances as specified herein, as specified in
AWWA C600, AWWA M41, and in accordance with the fittings manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2. Lay fittings to the lines and grades as indicated in the Drawings.
3. Excavate and backfill trenches in accordance with 33 05 10.
4. Embed Ductile Iron Fittings in accordance with 33 05 10.
B. Joint Making
1. Mechanical Joints with required mechanical restraint
a. All mechanical joints require mechanical restraint.
b. Bolt the retainer gland into compression against the gasket, with the bolts
tightened down evenly then cross torqued in accordance with AWWA C600.
c. Overstressing of bolts to compensate for poor installation practice will not be
permitted.
2. Push-on Joints (restrained)
a. All push-on joints shall be restrained push-on type.
b. Install Push-on joints as defined in AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11.
c. Wipe clean the gasket seat inside the bell of all extraneous matter.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 11 - 10
DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS
Page 10 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
d. Place the gasket in the bell in the position prescribed by the manufacturer.
e. Apply a thin film of non-toxic vegetable soap lubricant to the inside of the
gasket and the outside of the spigot prior to entering the spigot into the bell.
f. When using a field cut plain end piece of pipe, refinished the field cut and scarf
to conform to AWWA M-41.
3. Flanged Joints
a. Use erection bolts and drift pins to make flanged connections.
1) Do not use undue force or restraint on the ends of the fittings.
2) Apply even and uniform pressure to the gasket.
b. The fitting must be free to move in any direction while bolting.
1) Install flange bolts with all bolt heads faced in 1 direction.
4. Joint Deflection
a. Deflect the pipe only when necessary to avoid obstructions or to meet the lines
and grades and shown in the Drawings.
b. The deflection of each joint must be in accordance with AWWA C600 Table 3.
c. The maximum deflection allowed is 50 percent of that indicated in AWWA
C600.
d. The manufacturer’s recommendation may be used with the approval of the
Engineer.
C. Polyethylene Encasement Installation
1. Preparation
a. Remove all lumps of clay, mud, cinders, etc., on fittings surface prior to
installation of polyethylene encasement.
1) Prevent soil or embedment material from becoming trapped between
fittings and polyethylene.
b. Fit polyethylene film to contour of fittings to affect a snug, but not tight encase
with minimum space between polyethylene and fittings.
1) Provide sufficient slack in contouring to prevent stretching polyethylene
where it bridges irregular surfaces such as bell-spigot interfaces, bolted
joints or fittings, and to prevent damage to polyethylene due to backfilling
operations.
2) Secure overlaps and ends with adhesive tape and hold.
c. For installations below water table and/or in areas subject to tidal actions, seal
both ends of polyethylene tube with adhesive tape at joint overlap.
2. Tubular Type (Method A)
a. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 2 feet longer than fittings
section.
b. Slip tube around fittings, centering it to provide 1 foot overlap on each adjacent
pipe section and bunching it accordion-fashion lengthwise until it clears fittings
ends.
c. Lower fittings into trench with preceding section of pipe.
d. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene tube.
e. After assembling fittings make overlap of polyethylene tube, pull bunched
polyethylene from preceding length of pipe, slip it over end of the fitting and
wrap until it overlaps joint at end of preceding length of pipe.
f. Secure overlap in place.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 11 - 11
DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS
Page 11 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
g. Take up slack width at top of fitting to make a snug, but not tight, fit along
barrel of fitting, securing fold at quarter points.
h. Repair cuts, tears, punctures or other damage to polyethylene.
i. Proceed with installation of next fitting in same manner.
3. Tubular Type (Method B)
a. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 1 foot shorter than fitting
section.
b. Slip tube around fitting, centering it to provide 6 inches of bare fitting at each
end.
c. Take up slack width at top of fitting to make a snug, but not tight, fit along
barrel of fitting, securing fold at quarter points; secure ends.
d. Before making up joint, slip 3-foot length of polyethylene tube over end of
proceeding pipe section, bunching it accordion-fashion lengthwise.
e. After completing joint, pull 3-foot length of polyethylene over joint,
overlapping polyethylene previously installed on each adjacent section of pipe
by at least 1 foot; make each end snug and secure.
4. Sheet Type
a. Cut polyethylene sheet to a length approximately 2 feet longer than piece
section.
b. Center length to provide 1-foot overlap on each fitting, bunching it until it
clears the fitting ends.
c. Wrap polyethylene around fitting so that it circumferentially overlaps top
quadrant of fitting.
d. Secure cut edge of polyethylene sheet at intervals of approximately 3 feet.
e. Lower wrapped fitting into trench with preceding section of pipe.
f. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene.
g. After completing joint, make overlap and secure ends.
h. Repair cuts, tears, punctures or other damage to polyethylene.
i. Proceed with installation of fittings in same manner.
5. Pipe-Shaped Appurtenances
a. Cover bends, reducers, offsets, and other pipe-shaped appurtenances with
polyethylene in same manner as pipe and fittings.
6. Odd-Shaped Appurtenances
a. When it is not practical to wrap valves, tees, crosses and other odd-shaped
pieces in tube, wrap with flat sheet or split length polyethylene tube by passing
sheet under appurtenances and bringing it up around body.
b. Make seams by bringing edges together, folding over twice and taping down.
c. Tape polyethylene securely in place at the valve stem and at any other
penetrations.
7. Repairs
a. Repair any cuts, tears, punctures or damage to polyethylene with adhesive tape
or with short length of polyethylene sheet or cut open tube, wrapped around
fitting to cover damaged area, and secure in place.
8. Openings in Encasement
a. Provide openings for branches, service taps, blow-offs, air valves and similar
appurtenances by making an X-shaped cut in polyethylene and temporarily
folding back film.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 11 - 12
DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS
Page 12 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b. After appurtenance is installed, tape slack securely to appurtenance and repair
cut, as well as other damaged area in polyethylene with tape.
c. Service taps may also be made directly through polyethylene, with any
resulting damaged areas being repaired as described above.
9. Junctions between Wrapped and Unwrapped Fittings
a. Where polyethylene-wrapped fitting joins an adjacent pipe that is not wrapped,
extend polyethylene wrap to cover adjacent pipe for distance of at least 3 feet.
b. Secure end with circumferential turns of tape.
c. Wrap service lines of dissimilar metals with polyethylene or suitable dielectric
tape for minimum clear distance of 3 feet away from cast or Ductile Iron
Fittings.
D. Blocking
1. Install concrete blocking in accordance with Section 03 30 00 for all bends, tees,
crosses and plugs in the pipe lines as indicated in the Drawings.
2. Place the concrete blocking so as to rest against firm undisturbed trench walls,
normal to the thrust.
3. The supporting area for each block shall be at least as great as that indicated on the
Drawings and shall be sufficient to withstand the thrust, including water hammer,
which may develop.
4. Each block shall rest on a firm, undisturbed foundation or trench bottom.
5. If the Contractor encounters soil that appears to be different than that which was
used to calculate the blocking according to the Drawings, the Contractor shall
notify the Engineer prior to the installation of the blocking.
3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION
A. Patching
1. Excessive field-patching is not permitted of lining or coating.
2. Patching of lining or coating will be allowed where area to be repaired does not
exceed 100 square inches and has no dimensions greater than 12 inches.
3. In general, there shall not be more than 1 patch on either the lining or the coating of
any fitting.
4. Wherever necessary to patch the fitting:
a. Make patch with cement mortar as previously specified for interior joints.
b. Do not install patched fitting until the patch has been properly and adequately
cured and approved for laying by the City.
c. Promptly remove rejected fittings from the site.
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Potable Water Mains
1. Cleaning, disinfection, hydrostatic testing and bacteriological testing of water mains
a. Clean, flush, pig, disinfect, hydrostatic test and bacteriological test the water
main as specified in Section 33 04 40.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 11 - 13
DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS
Page 13 of 13
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson
1.2.A.1.c – Restraints included in price bid
1.2.A.2.c – Restraints included in price bid
1.3 – Added definitions of gland types for clarity
2.2.B.5 – Removed unrestrained push-on and mechanical joints
2.2.B.6, 7, 8, and 9 – Added reference to Section 33 05 10 and 33 04 10; removed
material specifications for bolts, nuts and gaskets.
3.4 – Requirement for all mechanical and push-on joints to be restrained
3.4.D – Corrected reference
9/20/2017 W. Norwood 2.2.B.5.a.7 – Added requirement for 6 wedges on MJ Restraint for 8 inch PVC pipe
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 12 - 1
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE
Page 1 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 16, 2018
SECTION 33 11 12
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe 4-inch through 36-inch for potable water,
wastewater and reuse applications
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. 33 01 31 – Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection
4. 33 04 40 – Cleaning and Acceptance Testing of Water Mains
5. 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
6. 33 05 24 – Installation of Carrier Pipe in Casing or Tunnel Liner Plate
7. 33 11 11 – Ductile Iron Fittings
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Measured horizontally along the surface from center line to center line of the
fitting, manhole, or appurtenance
2. Payment
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price
bid per linear foot of “PVC Water Pipe” installed for:
1) Various sizes
2) Various types of backfill
b. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price
bid per linear foot of “Sewer Force Main” installed for:
1) Various sizes
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Furnishing and installing PVC Pressure Pipe with joints as specified by the
Drawings
b. Mobilization
c. Pavement removal
d. Excavation
e. Hauling
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 12 - 2
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE
Page 2 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 16, 2018
f. Disposal of excess material
g. Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment
h. Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
i. Trench water stops
j. Thrust restraint, if required by Contract Documents
k. Gaskets
l. Clean-up
m. Cleaning
n. Disinfection
o. Testing
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
3. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl-Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
b. D3139, Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using
Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
4. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C600, Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances.
b. C605, Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipes
and Fittings for Water.
c. C900, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, and Fabricated Fittings, 4 IN
through 60 IN, for Water Transmission and Distribution.
d. M23, PVC Pipe – Design and Installation.
e. M41, Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings.
5. NSF International (NSF):
a. 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects.
6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS / INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. For PVC Pressure Pipe that is used for water distribution, wastewater force mains
or wastewater gravity mains, including:
a. PVC Pressure Pipe
b. Manufacturer
c. Dimension Ratio
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 12 - 3
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE
Page 3 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 16, 2018
d. Joint Types
2. Restraint, if required in Contract Documents
a. Retainer glands
b. Thrust harnesses
c. Any other means of restraint
3. Gaskets
B. Shop Drawings: When restrained joints are required, furnish for PVC Pressure Pipe
used in the water distribution system or for a wastewater force main for 24-inch and
greater diameters, including:
1. Wall thickness design calculations sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in
Texas including:
a. Working pressure
b. Surge pressure
c. Deflection
2. Provide thrust restraint calculations for all fittings and valves, sealed by a Licensed
Professional Engineer in Texas, to verify the restraint lengths shown on the
Drawings.
3. Lay schedule / drawing for 24-inch and greater diameters sealed by a Licensed
Professional Engineer in Texas including:
a. Pipe class
b. Joints type
c. Fittings
d. Stationing
e. Transitions
f. Joint deflection
C. Certificates
1. Furnish an affidavit certifying that all PVC Pressure Pipe meets the provisions of
this Section, each run of pipe furnished has met Specifications, all inspections have
been made and that all tests have been performed in accordance with AWWA
C900.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Manufacturers
a. Finished pipe shall be the product of 1 manufacturer for each size, unless
otherwise approved by the City.
1) Change orders, specials, and field changes may be provided by a different
manufacturer upon City approval.
b. Pipe manufacturing operations shall be performed under the control of the
manufacturer.
c. All pipe furnished shall be in conformance with AWWA C900.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 12 - 4
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE
Page 4 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 16, 2018
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Store and handle in accordance with the guidelines as stated in AWWA M23.
2. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01
66 00.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Only the manufacturers as listed in the City’s Standard Products List will be
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
B. Pipe
1. Pipe shall be in accordance with AWWA C900.
2. PVC Pressure Pipe for potable water shall meet the requirements of NSF 61.
3. Pressure Pipe shall be approved by the UL.
4. Pipe shall have a lay length of 20 feet except for special fittings or closure pieces
necessary to comply with the Drawings.
5. The pipe material shall be PVC, meeting the requirements of ASTM D1784, with a
cell classification of 12454. Outside diameters must be equal to those of cast iron
and ductile iron pipes.
6. As a minimum the following Dimension Ratio’s apply:
Diameter
(inch)
Min Pressure Class
(psi)
4 through 12 DR 14
16 through 24 DR 18
7. Pipe Markings
a. Meet the minimum requirements of AWWA C900. Minimum pipe markings
shall be as follows:
1) Manufacturer’s Name or Trademark and production record
2) Nominal pipe size
3) Dimension Ratio
4) AWWA C900
5) Seal of testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 12 - 5
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE
Page 5 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 16, 2018
C. Pressure and Deflection Design
1. Pipe design shall be based on trench conditions and design pressure class specified
in the Drawings. Pipe shall be designed according to the methods indicated in
AWWA M23 for trench construction, using the following parameters:
a. Unit Weight of Fill (w) = 130 pcf
b. Live Load = AASHTO HS 20
c. Trench Depth = 12 feet minimum, or as indicated in Drawings
d. Maximum E’ = 1,000 max
e. Deflection Lag Factor = 1.0
f. Working Pressure (Pw) = 150 psi
g. Surge Allowance (Ps) = 100 psi minimum
h. Test Pressure =
1) No less than 1.25 times the stated working pressure (187 psi minimum) of
the pipeline measured at the highest elevation along the test section.
2) No less than 1.5 times the stated working pressure (225 psi minimum) at
the lowest elevation of the test section.
i. Maximum Calculated Deflection = 3 percent
j. Restrained Joint Safety Factor (SF) = 1.5
k. Maximum Joint Deflection = 50 percent of the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2. Verify trench depths after existing utilities are located.
a. Accommodate vertical alignment changes required because of existing utility or
other conflicts by an appropriate change in pipe design depth.
b. In no case shall pipe be installed deeper than its design allows.
3. Provisions for Thrust
a. Thrusts at bends, tees, plugs or other fittings shall be mechanically restrained
joints when required by the Drawings.
b. No thrust restraint contribution shall be allowed for the restrained length of
pipe within the casing.
c. Restrained joints, where required, shall be used for a sufficient distance from
each side of the bend, tee, plug, valve, or other fitting to resist thrust which will
be developed at the design pressure of the pipe. For the purpose of thrust the
following shall apply:
1) Calculate valves as dead ends.
2) Design pressure shall be greater than the pressure class of the pipe or the
internal pressure (Pi), whichever is greater.
3) Restrained joints shall consist of approved mechanical restrained or push-
on restrained joints as listed in the City’s Standard Products List as shown
in Section 01 60 00.
4) Restrained PVC pipe is not allowed for pipe greater than 12 inches.
d. The Pipe Manufacturer shall verify the length of pipe with restrained joints to
resist thrust in accordance with the Drawings and the following:
1) Calculate the weight of the earth (We) as the weight of the projected soil
prism above the pipe, for unsaturated soil conditions.
2) Soil density = 115 pcf (maximum value to be used), for unsaturated soil
conditions
3) In locations where ground water is encountered, reduce the soil density to
its buoyant weight for the backfill below the water table.
a) Reduce the coefficient of friction to 0.25.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 12 - 6
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE
Page 6 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 16, 2018
4. Joints
a. Joints shall be gasket, bell and spigot and push-on type conforming to ASTM
D3139.
b. Since each pipe manufacturer has a different design for push-on joints, gaskets
shall be part of a complete pipe section and purchased as such.
c. Lubricant must be non-toxic and NSF approved for potable water applications.
d. Push-On Restrained Joints shall only be as approved in the Standard Products
List in Section 01 60 00.
5. Detectable Markers
a. Provide detectable markers in accordance with Section 33 05 26.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install pipe, fittings, specials and appurtenances as specified herein, as specified in
AWWA C600, AWWA C605, AWWA M23 and in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Lay pipe to the lines and grades as indicated in the Drawings.
3. Excavate and backfill trenches in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
4. Embed PVC Pressure Pipe in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
5. For installation of carrier pipe within casing, see Section 33 05 24.
B. Pipe Handling
1. Haul and distribute pipe and fittings at the project site.
2. Handle piping with care to avoid damage.
a. Inspect each joint of pipe and reject or repair any damaged pipe prior to
lowering into the trench.
b. Use only nylon ropes, slings or other lifting devices that will not damage the
surface of the pipe for handling the pipe.
3. At the close of each operating day:
a. Keep the pipe clean and free of debris, dirt, animals and trash – during and after
the laying operation.
b. Effectively seal the open end of the pipe using a gasketed night cap.
C. Joint Making
1. Mechanical Joints
a. In accordance with Section 33 11 11.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 12 - 7
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE
Page 7 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 16, 2018
2. Push-on Joints
a. Install Push-On joints as defined in AWWA C900.
b. Wipe clean the gasket seat inside the bell of all extraneous matter.
c. Place the gasket in the bell in the position prescribed by the manufacturer.
d. Apply a thin film of non-toxic vegetable soap lubricant to the inside of the
gasket and the outside of the spigot prior to entering the spigot into the bell.
e. When using a field cut plain end piece of pipe, refinish the field cut to conform
to AWWA C605.
3. Joint Deflection
a. Deflect the pipe only when necessary to avoid obstructions, or to meet the lines
and grades shown in the Drawings.
b. Joint deflection shall not exceed 50 percent of the manufacturer’s
recommendation.
D. Detectable Metallic Tape Installation
1. See Section 33 05 26.
3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Potable Water Mains
1. Cleaning, disinfection, hydrostatic testing, and bacteriological testing of water
mains:
a. Clean, flush, pig, disinfect, hydrostatic test and bacteriological test the water
main as specified in Section 33 04 40.
B. Wastewater Lines
1. Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection
a. Provide a Post-CCTV Inspection in accordance with Section 33 01 31.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 11 12 - 8
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE
Page 8 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 16, 2018
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson
2.2.C.1 and 3.4.C.3 – revised maximum joint deflection requirements
3.4.C.1 – Added reference to Ductile Iron Fittings
3.4.D – Removed Marker Balls
1.1 Modified acceptable range for specification from up to 24-inch to up to 36-inch
4/1/2013 F. Griffin
Change Section 2.2 B. 5. from “The pipe material shall be PVC, meeting the
requirements of ASTM D1784, with a cell classification of 12454-B.” to “The pipe
material shall be PVC, meeting the requirements of ASTM D1784, with a cell
classification of 12454”.
11/14/2018 D.V. Magaña All references to the use of C905 are no longer applicable and are deleted.
1.3.A.4.c. – Updated to reflect C900 applicable on PVC pipe sizes 4” through 60”.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 10 - 1
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 1 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
SECTION 33 12 10
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Lead-free 1-inch to 2-inch water service lines from the water main to the right-of-
way, fittings and water meter boxes complete in place, as shown on the Drawings,
directed by the Engineer, and specified herein for:
a. New Water Service
b. New Water Service (Bored)
c. Water Meter Service Relocate
d. Private Water Service
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Products Installed but not Furnished Under this Section
1. Water meters for various sizes
D. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 33 04 40 – Cleaning and Acceptance Testing of Water Mains
4. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
5. Section 33 12 25 – Connection to Existing Water Mains
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. New Water Service
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each new “Water Service” complete
in place from the tap of the main to the installation of the meter box and
associated appurtenances where the service line is installed by open cut
construction.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per each “Water Service” installed for:
a) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing New Service Line as specified by the Drawings
2) Submitting product data
3) Tapping saddle
4) Corporation stop
5) Curb stop
33 12 10 - 2
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 2 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
6) Fittings
7) Service line installed by open cut
8) Connection to meter
9) Meter Box and Lid
10) Pavement removal
11) Excavation
12) Hauling
13) Disposal of excess material
14) Surface Restoration associated with Meter Box installation and connection,
excluding grass (seeding, sodding or hydro-mulch paid separately)
15) Clean-up
16) Disinfection
17) Testing
2. New Bored Water Service
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each new Water Service complete in
place from the tap of the main to the installation of the meter box and
associated appurtenances where the service line is installed by trenchless
method.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per each “Bored Water Service” installed for:
a) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Submitting product data
2) Tapping saddle
3) Corporation stop
4) Curb stop
5) Fittings
6) Service line installed by trenchless method
7) Connection to meter
8) Meter Box and Lid
9) Pavement removal
10) Excavation
11) Hauling
12) Disposal of excess material
13) Surface restoration associated with Meter Box installation and connection,
excluding grass (seeding, sodding or hydro-mulch paid separately)
14) Clean-up
15) Disinfection
16) Testing
3. Water Meter Service Reconnect
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Water Meter Service
Reconnect complete in place from public service line connection to private
service line connection.
b. Payment
33 12 10 - 3
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 3 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
1) The work performed in conjunction with relocation of the meter, associated
private service line, fittings and meter box 5 feet or less in any direction
from centerline of existing meter location and the materials furnished in
accordance with this Item will be paid for at the unit price bid per each
“Water Meter Service, Reconnection” installed for:
a) Various size of services
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Private service line
2) Fittings
3) Private connection to water meter
4) Connection to existing private service line
5) Cut and crimp of existing service
6) Removal and Disposal or Salvage of existing 2-inch or smaller water meter,
as directed by City
7) Pavement removal
8) Excavation
9) Hauling
10) Disposal of excess material
11) Surface restoration for area disturbed for installation of meter box,
excluding grass (seeding, sodding or hydro-mulch paid separately)
12) Clean-up
13) Cleaning
14) Disinfection
15) Testing
4. Private Water Service Relocation
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of Private Service
relocation complete in place from the meter box to a connection to the
existing service line on private property.
b. Payment
1) The work performed in conjunction with Private Service Line installation
where the meter and meter boxes are moved more than 5 feet in any
direction from centerline of existing meter location and materials furnished
in accordance with the Item and measured as provided under
“Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot of
“Private Water Service” performed for:
a) Various service sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Obtaining appropriate permit
2) Obtaining Right of Entry
3) Submitting product data
4) Private service line
5) Fittings
6) Backflow preventer, check valve, and isolation valve relocation, if
applicable
7) Connection to existing private service line
8) Pavement removal and replacement
9) Excavation
10) Hauling
11) Disposal of excess material
33 12 10 - 4
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 4 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
12) Surface restoration, excluding grass (seeding, sodding or hydro-mulch paid
separately)
13) Clean-up
14) Cleaning
15) Disinfection
16) Testing
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Definitions
1. New Service
a. Installation of new 1-inch to 2-inch Water Service Line by open cut
construction from the water main to the right-of-way, including corporation
stop, curb stop, fittings and water meter boxes complete in place, as shown on
the Drawings.
2. New Service (Bored)
a. Installation of new 1-inch to 2-inch Water Service Line by trenchless
construction method from the water main to the right-of-way, including
corporation stop, curb stop, fittings and water meter boxes complete in place, as
shown on the Drawings.
3. Meter Service Reconnection
a. Relocation and reconnection of the private service line from an existing meter
to be abandoned and a new meter installed that lies within 5 feet of the existing
meter.
4. Private Service Relocation
a. Relocation and reconnection of private service line behind the water meter
where the existing meter to be abandoned and the new meter installed is greater
than 5 feet of the existing meter. A licensed plumber is required to relocate the
private service.
5. Lead-free
a. Lead-free pipes and plumbing fittings and fixtures shall contain less than 0.25
percent lead in accordance with the reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act
(P.L. 111-380).
B. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
b. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
c. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
d. B98, Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar and Shapes.
e. C131, Standard Specification for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
f. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
g. C330, Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural
Concrete.
h. C857 (RL), Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for
Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures
33 12 10 - 5
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 5 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
i. D883, Standard Terminology Relating to Plastics.
j. D1693, Standard Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene
Plastics
3. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C700, Cold-Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case.
b. C800, Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings.
4. NSF International (NSF):
a. 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
5. Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act
a. Public Law 111-380 (P.L. 111-380)
6. General Services Administration (GSA):
a. RR-F-621E, Frames, Covers, Gratings, Steps, Sump and Catch Basin, Manhole
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Scheduling
1. Provide advance notice for service interruptions and meet requirements of Division
0 and Division 1.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data, if applicable:
1. Tapping Saddle
2. Corporation stop
3. Curb Stop
4. Service Line
5. Meter Box
6. Meter Box Lid
B. Certificates and Test Reports
1. Prior to shipment of any Water Service components, the manufacturer shall submit
the following:
a. A Certificate of Adequacy of Design stating that the components to be
furnished comply with all regulatory requirements identified in this Section
including:
1) The Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act (P.L. 111-380)
2) AWWA C800
3) NSF 61
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
33 12 10 - 6
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 6 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
1. Manufacturers
a. Water Services shall meet or exceed the latest revisions of AWWA C800, NSF
61, the Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act and shall meet or exceed the
requirements of this Specification.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Protect all parts such that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged
delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and
equipment are ready for operation.
2. Protect all equipment and parts against any damage during a prolonged period at the
site.
3. Prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being directly exposed to sunlight or
extremes in temperature.
4. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01
66 00.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Water meters for various sizes
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, AND MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City’s Standard Products List will be
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
3. The Water Services and appurtenances shall be new and the product of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of Water Services and
appurtenances having similar service and size.
B. Description
1. Regulatory Requirements
a. All materials shall conform to the Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water
Act (P.L. 111-380). This Act defines “Lead-free” for pipes and other
appurtenances to be less than 0.25 percent lead.
b. Water Services shall meet or exceed the latest revisions of AWWA C800 and
shall meet or exceed the requirements of this Specification.
c. All Water Services components in contact with potable water shall conform to
the requirements of NSF 61.
C. Materials/Design Criteria
33 12 10 - 7
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 7 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
1. Service Lines
a. Provide Type K Copper Tubing per ASTM B88.
b. Furnish in the annealed conditions, unless otherwise specified in the Contract
Documents.
2. Service Couplings
a. Fitting Ends
1) Flared Copper Tubing with thread dimensions per AWWA C800
2) Provide coupling nuts with a machined bearing skirt of a length equal to the
tubing outer diameter (O.D.).
b. Provide with hexagonal wrench grip compatible with the coupling size.
c. Provide lead-free service couplings in accordance with the Reduction of Lead
in Drinking Water Act.
3. Corporation stops
a. Provide brass castings per AWWA C800 for:
1) Bodies
2) Plugs
3) D washers
4) Bottom nuts
b. Machining and Finishing of Surfaces
1) Provide 1 ¾ inch per foot or 0.1458 inch per inch ± 0.007 inch per inch
taper of the seating surfaces for the key and body.
2) Reduce large end of the tapered surface of the key in diameter by chamfer
or turning for a distance that will bring the largest end of the seating surface
of the key into the largest diameter of the seating surface of the body.
3) Relieve taper seat in the body on the small end.
4) Extend small end of the key there-through to prevent the wearing of a
shoulder and facilitate proper seating of key.
5) Design key, key nut and washer such that if the key nut is tightened to
failure point, the stem end of the key shall not fracture.
6) Design nut and stem to withstand a turning force on the nut of at least 3
times the necessary effort to properly seat the key without failure in any
manner.
7) Port through corporation stop shall be full size to eliminate turbulence in
the flow way.
8) Design stop for rotation about the axis of the flow passageway inside the
following minimum circles in order to properly clear the tapping machine:
a) Two 7/8-inch for 1-inch corporation stops
b) Four 15/16-inch for 1 ½ -inch and 2-inch corporation stops
c. Provide lead-free corporation stops in accordance with the Reduction of Lead in
Drinking Water Act.
4. Curb Stops
a. Provide brass castings per AWWA C800.
b. Valve plugs shall be:
1) Cylinder type
2) Plug type, or
3) Ball type
c. Incorporate full flow porting.
d. Provide for full 360 degree plug rotation clockwise or counter-clockwise.
e. Overall Length
33 12 10 - 8
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 8 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
1) 3-5/16 inch + 1/8 inch for 1-inch diameter
2) 4-1/32 inch + 9.32 for 1-inch diameter
f. Cylindrical Plug Type
1) Provide O-ring seal at top and bottom.
a) O-ring at top only is acceptable if bottom of curb stop body is closed.
2) Seals shall be Buna N.
3) 1 O-ring seal shall surround the outlet port of the curb stop and act to
effectively seal in the closed position.
4) The port in the plug shall provide a straight through, full size flow way, so
shaped as to eliminate turbulence.
5) All waterways shall be smooth and free of burrs or rough areas.
6) Design the curb stop to provide ease and accuracy of operation and positive
shut-off of water.
g. Tapered Plug Type
1) Provide O-ring seal at top and bottom.
2) The tapered plug and cylindrical recess in the valve body shall be machined
to match within approved manufacturing tolerances.
3) Inlet and outlet ports shall be sealed by O-rings or combination Teflon U-
shaped seal rings backed with O-rings.
4) The port in the plug shall provide a straight through, full size flow way, so
shaped as to eliminate turbulence.
5) All waterways shall be smooth and free of burrs or rough areas.
6) Design the curb stop to provide ease and accuracy of operation and positive
shut-off of water.
h. Ball Plug Type
1) Provide double O-ring seals on the stem.
2) The ball shall seal against rubber rings mounted in the valve body at the
inlet and outlet ports.
3) The ball shall be bronze with a smooth Teflon coating.
4) The port in the plug shall provide a straight through, full size flow way, so
shaped as to eliminate turbulence.
5) All waterways shall be smooth and free of burrs or rough areas.
i. Provide lead-free curb stops in accordance with the Reduction of Lead in
Drinking Water Act.
5. Straight Adapters
a. Brass castings and threads per AWWA C800
b. Provide lead-free straight adapters in accordance with the Reduction of Lead in
Drinking Water Act.
6. Three Part Copper Unions
a. Brass castings and threads per AWWA C800
b. Provide lead-free Three Part Copper Unions in accordance with the Reduction
of Lead in Drinking Water Act.
7. Straight Meter Couplings
a. Brass castings per AWWA C800
b. Threads per AWWA C700
c. Tailpiece with outside iron pipe thread
d. Chamfer corners on threaded end of meter nut.
e. Machine inside and outside of tailpiece.
33 12 10 - 9
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 9 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
f. Provide lead-free Straight Meter Couplings in accordance with the Reduction of
Lead in Drinking Water Act.
8. Branch Connections
a. Brass castings per AWWA C800
b. Inlet and outlet connections per AWWA C800
c. Provide lead-free branch connections in accordance with the Reduction of Lead
in Drinking Water Act.
9. Service Saddles
a. Castings
1) Brass or Nylon coated ductile iron castings per AWWA C800
2) Free of porosity with sharp edges removed
3) Saddle
a) Form to fit firmly against side of maximum diameter of water main
with approximately 180 degrees wrap around.
4) Outlet
a) Design outlet boss for no thread distortion by bending moments.
b) Tapped for taper threaded corporation stop conforming to AWWA
C800.
b. Straps
1) Conform to ASTM B98.
2) Form flat to fit uniformly against the wall of the water main.
3) Shall be double straps
4) Rod diameter not less than 5/8 inch flattened to 1 inch on one side.
5) Straps shall be threaded 5/8 inch (11-NC-2A) for a distance such that ½
inch remains after clamp is fully tightened on the pipe.
6) Chamfer strap ends to protect the starting threads.
7) The threads shall be full and free from shear.
8) 4-inch and larger pipe shall be in accordance with Section 33 12 25.
c. Nuts
1) Bronze material
a) Same material as straps
2) Dimensions equal to or larger than heavy hexagon nuts
3) Tapped 5/8 inch (11-NC-2B)
d. Gaskets
1) Neoprene rubber material
2) Cemented to saddle and positioned to facilitate installation
10. Brass Flanged Angle Valve
a. For 1 ½-inch and 2-inch services
b. Brass castings per AWWA C800
c. Valve Body with integral outlet flange and inlet wrenching flat
d. Fit together key and body by turning key and reaming body
1) Key with O-ring seal seat at the upper end
2) Lap key and body seat are to conform to corporation stop requirements of
this Specification.
3) The outlet flange shall contain an O-ring seat or a uniform flat drop-in
flange gasket surface.
4) Drop-in flange gasket surface shall contain gasket retaining grooves milled
circular about the axis of the flange.
33 12 10 - 10
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 10 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
5) The size of the outlet flange and the diameter and spacing of the bolt holes
shall conform to AWWA C700.
6) The flange on 2-inch angle valves shall be double drilled to permit
connection to l ½ -inch meters.
7) The inlet port of the valve shall be tapered to conform to AWWA C800
taper pipe thread.
8) The key cap shall include a wrenching tee marked with a raised or recessed
arrow to show whether the valve is open or closed.
9) Valve Assembly (main body, key, key cap)
a) Brass material per AWWA C800
b) O-ring seal on the top of the key between the key and body seat
c) Key cap shall complete the assembly by attaching to the key by means
of a strong bronze pin with phosphor bronze spring washer(s)
depressed between the key cap and the top of the valve main body.
d) Provide with padlock wings for locking the valve in the closed position.
e) There shall be a uniform application of cold water valve grease
between the body and the key.
f) The valve shall be capable of being easily opened and stopping lugs.
g) The waterway through the valve shall be smooth and rounded for
minimum pressure loss, and shall be free of burrs or fins.
h) The valve shall be strong, well designed, neat in appearance, water-
tight and entirely adequate for the intended purpose.
i) Provide with either a high quality rubber drop-in gasket or an O-ring
seal depending on the manufacturer's flange seal surface design choice.
e. Provide lead-free brass flanged angle valves in accordance with the Reduction
of Lead in Drinking Water Act.
11. Meter Boxes shall:
a. Be constructed of:
1) Polymer, black polyethylene material as defined in ASTM D883.
a) Minimum wall thickness of 3/8-inch throughout with no blowing
agents or foaming plastics
b) Body shall be black throughout, blended at the time of manufacture,
and shall have a molded recycled emblem with a minimum of 35
percent Post Industrial/ Pre Consumer Recycled Content- verified with
a Leed Product Documentation.
c) Have a tensile strength greater than 1700 pounds per square inch (psi).
d) Smooth edges and corners and be free from sharp edges so the unit can
be handled safely without gloves.
e) Exterior free from seams or parting lines.
f) Have crush resistant ribbing along the outside of the box.
g) Have a flange around the lid opening to help prevent settling and aide
in adjustment to grade.
h) Not to be installed in roadway – designed to withstand loading in non-
deliberate and incidental traffic only.
2) Concrete
a) Frame of No. 6 gauge wire welded closed
b) Type I or Type II Portland cement, in accordance with ASTM C150,
portioned with lightweight aggregate, in accordance with ASTM C330
(1) Percentage of wear not to exceed 40 per ASTM C131
(2) Minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3,000 psi
33 12 10 - 11
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 11 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
b. Be able to withstand a minimum 15,000 pounds vertical load
c. Withstand a minimum 400 pounds sidewall load.
d. Have pipe holes measuring a minimum of 2-1/2” x 3-1/4”.
e. 1-inch Standard Meter Box (Class A)
1) For use with services utilizing 5/8-inch x ¾-inch, ¾-inch or 1-inch meter
Single or Dual service meter.
2) Polymer
a) Size: working of not less than 10 inches x 16 inches, 12 inches high
3) Concrete
a) Size: working area not less than 10-inches x 16-inches, 12 inches high
f. 2-inch Standard Meter Box (Class C)
1) For use with services utilizing 1-1/2-inch or 2-inch Single service meter.
2) Polymer
a) Size: working area not less than 14-inches x 28-inches, 12 inches high
3) Concrete
a) Size: working area not less than 15-inches x 26-1/2-inches, 12 inches
high
g. Bullhead Standard Meter Box (Class B)
1) For use with services utilizing two 5/8-inch x ¾-inch or ¾-inch or 1-inch
Single service meter.
2) Polymer
a) Size: working area not less than 15-inches x 18-inches, 12 inches high
3) Concrete
a) Size: working area not less than 15-inches x 18-inches, 12 inches high
12. Meter Box Lid
a. Meter Box Lids Shall:
1) Be solid throughout with reinforcing ribs.
2) Have City of Fort Worth ‘Molly’ logo molded into the lid.
3) Bear the Manufacturer’s IS (name or logo) and Country of Origin.
4) Be designed both with and without AMI receptacles
5) Have a molded tread-plate
6) Seat securely and evenly inside the meter box and shall not overlap the top
edge of the meter box.
7) Have a molded pick bar for use by meter reading tool.
8) Have Automated Meter Infrastructure (AMI) snap locking slide mounts for
number of meters/endpoints associated with meter box
9) Have an opening to accept the AMI end-point. Opening shall accommodate
an endpoint with a 1-7/8 inches diameter.
10) Have recessed AMI end point area, to alleviate a trip hazard, centered over
AMI slide mount. Recess area should be 4-1/2 inches in diameter and 3/8”
deep.
11) Have built-in anti-flotation devices.
b. Cast Iron or Ductile Iron
1) Lids for Concrete Meter Boxes shall be constructed out of a cast iron and
meet RRF-621 specification.
2) Shall withstand a minimum vertical load of 15,000 pounds
3) Coat castings with a bituminous emulsified asphalt unless otherwise
specified in the Contract Documents, ground smooth, and cleaned with shot
blasting, to get a uniform quality free from strength defects and distortions.
33 12 10 - 12
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 12 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
4) Dimensions shall be within industry standards of ±1/16 inch per foot.
5) Shall have a plug inserted in to the AMI receptacle to avoid water entering
through opening until the AMI receptacle is used
6) Be a minimum of 1-3/4 inches thick at reinforcing ribs.
7) Casting weights may vary ±5 percent from drawing weight per industry
standards.
c. Plastic(Composite)
1) The lid shall :
a) Constructed of Engineered Plastic as defined in ASTM D883
(1) Have a molded recycled emblem with a minimum of 50 percent
Post Consumer Recycled and 50 percent Post Industrial/ Pre
Consumer Recycled Content- verified with a Leed Product
Documentation.
(2) Be designed to fit a concrete box/cast iron box in retrofit
installations.
(3) Have a tensile strength greater than 1700 psi.
(4) Have a ‘knock-out” plug to accept the AMI end- point. Knock-out
diameter shall be 1-7/8 inch diameter. A removable plug may be
substituted for the knock-out plug.
(5) Be constructed out of a composite material blend for maximum
durability and corrosion resistance.
(6) Be black throughout with no blowing agents or foaming plastics
(7) Smooth edges and corners and be free from sharp edges so the unit
can be handled safely without gloves.
(8) Exterior free from seams or parting lines.
(9) Have a molded tread-pattern- tread dimensions shall be .188-inch x
.938-inch x .150-inch deep.
(10) Have “City of Fort Worth” molded into the lid.
(11) Have “Water Meter” molded into the lid- Font shall be standard
Fadal CNC font with 1-inch characters x .150-inch deep.
(12) Have a molded pick hole pocket- dimensions shall be 3-inch x
9/16-inch x Thru Hole with 3/16-inch 304 stainless steel rod.
(13) Have 2 pieces of ½-inch rebar located in lid pockets for
locatability as shown in Drawings.
(14) Have location capability using metal detector.
b) Domestic Manufacture Only-Made in USA molded on Lid.
c) Not to be installed in roadway or parking area
d) Be designed to withstand H-10 loading for non-deliberate and
incidental traffic only as .
e) Have ultraviolet protection.
2) 1-inch Standard Plastic Meter Box Lid (Class A)
a) For use with services utilizing 5/8-inch x ¾-inch, ¾-inch or 1-inch
meter Single or Dual service meter.
b) Size: 11-7/8-inch x 17-7/8-inch, 1-1/2 inches high
c) For use with Class A Standard Meter Box.
d) Polymer lid shall seat evenly inside meter box and shall not overlap the
top edge of the meter box.
3) 2-inch Standard Plastic Meter Box Lid (Class C)
a) For use with services utilizing 1-1/2-inch or 2-inch Single service
meter.
33 12 10 - 13
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 13 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
b) Size 27-inches x 15-1/4-inches, 1-7/8 inches high
c) For use with Class C Standard Meter Box.
d) Polymer lid shall seat evenly inside meter box and shall not overlap the
top edge of the meter box.
4) Bullhead Standard Plastic Meter Box Lid (Class B)
a) For use with services utilizing two 5/8-inch x ¾-inch or ¾-inch or 1-
inch Single service meter:
b) Size: 16-5/8-inch x 14—5/8-inch, 1-3/4 inches high
c) For use with Class B Standard Meter Box.
d) Polymer lid shall seat evenly inside meter box and shall not overlap the
top edge of the meter box.
13. Horizontal Check Valve
a. Equip 1 ½-inch and 2-inch Water Services with a horizontal check valve, with
pipe plug, only if specified in the Drawings.
b. If an existing backflow preventer is present, the Contractor is to leave it, and is
not required to provide an additional horizontal check valve.
c. Provide lead-free horizontal check valves in accordance with the Reduction of
Lead in Drinking Water Act.
14. Service Marker
a. 3 inch wide, 5 mil blue vinyl tape
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections
1. At the City’s option, the manufacturer shall be required to provide certification
records showing conformance of materials, design and testing to these
Specifications.
2. The test procedures shall conform to AWWA C800.
a. In the event that a chosen valve fails the City’s hydrostatic test, the cost of the
test shall be at the expense of the supplier.
b. Proof testing of the remainder of the valves shall be at the cost and
responsibility of the supplier.
c. These tests will be the basis of acceptance or rejection of the remainder of the
shipment by the City.
3. The City reserves the right to select products at random for testing. The failure of
materials to conform to the applicable Specification may result in the rejection of
the entire shipment.
B. Marking
1. Service saddle castings shall be clearly marked by letters and numerals cast thereon
showing:
a. Manufacturer’s name
b. Type
c. Size of Pipe
33 12 10 - 14
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 14 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS
A. A licensed plumber is required for installations on the outlet side of the service meter.
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install Water Services and appurtenances in accordance with AWWA C800.
2. Install Water Service Lines 5 feet north or east of center of lot frontage on lots 75
feet or wider, or where shown on Drawings.
3. Install Water Service Lines on lot center line on lots less than 75 feet wide, unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings.
4. Install services at a minimum depth of 36 inches below final grade/proposed top of
curb, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
5. Perform leak tests in accordance with Section 33 04 40.
6. Replace existing ¾-inch Service Lines with 1-inch new Service Line, tap, and
corporation.
7. Install replaced or relocated services with the service main tap and service line
being in line with the service meter, unless otherwise directed by the City.
8. Excavate, embed and backfill trenches in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
B. Handling
1. Haul and distribute Service Lines fittings at the project site and handle with care to
avoid damage.
a. Inspect each segment of Service Line and reject or repair any damaged pipe
prior to lowering into the trench.
b. Do not handle the pipe in such a way that will damage the pipe.
2. At the close of each operating day:
a. Keep the pipe clean and free of debris, dirt, animals and trash – during and after
the laying operation.
b. Effectively seal the open end of the pipe using a gasketed night cap.
C. Service Line Installation
1. Service Taps
a. Only ductile iron pipe may be directly tapped.
b. Install service taps and/or tap assemblies of the specified size as indicated on
the Drawings, or as specified by the Engineer.
c. Perform taps on a water system that is either uncharged or under pressure.
d. Taps consist of:
1) For Concrete Pressure Pipe or Steel Pipe
a) Standard internal pipe threaded holes in the pipe walls
(1) Made during pipe fabrication
(2) Provide tapered threaded outlet with cc threads for up to 2-inch.
33 12 10 - 15
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 15 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
(3) Provide flange outlet with flange to thread insulator adaptor kits for
4-inch and larger taps.
2) Other pipe materials
a) Bronze service clamp with a sealed, threaded port through which the
pipe wall is drilled to complete a service port
e. Tap Assemblies
1) Consist of corporation stop with iron to copper connection attached to:
a) Copper tubing terminating as shown on the City’s Standard Detail
b) May be required adjacent to gate valves
c) Install as shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
d) When required, shall be included in the unit price bid for installing gate
valve.
2) Chlorination and testing purposes
a) No separate payment will be made for taps required for testing and
chlorination.
2. Installation of Water Services
a. Install tap and Service Line in accordance with City Details.
b. Install meter box in accordance with City Details.
1) Adjustment of the Service Line to proper meter placement height shall be
considered as part of the Meter Box installation.
3. Trenching
a. Provide a trench width sufficiently wide to allow for 2 inches of granular
embedment on either side of the Service Line.
4. Bored Services
a. Services shall be bored utilizing a pilot hole having a diameter ½ inch to ¾
inches larger than the Service Line.
5. Arrangement
a. Arrange corporation stops, branches, curb stops, meter spuds, meter boxes and
other associate appurtenances as shown in the City Detail, and to the approval
of the Engineer.
6. Service Marker
a. When Meter Box is not installed immediately subsequent to service installation:
1) Mark Curb Stop with a strip of blue vinyl tape fastened to the end of the
service and extending through the backfill approximately 6 inches above
ground at the Meter Box location.
b. Installation of service taps only:
1) Attach service marker tape to the corporation stop or plug and extend
upward and normal to the main through the backfill at the adjacent trench
edge to at least 6 inches above ground to flag the tap location.
7. Corporation stops
a. Fully open corporation stop prior to backfill.
D. Removal of Existing Water Meters
1. Remove, tag and collect existing Water Service meter for pickup by the City for
reconditioning or replacement.
2. After installation of the Water Service in the proposed location and receipt of a
meter from the City inspector, install the meter.
33 12 10 - 16
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 16 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
3. Reset the meter box as necessary to be flush with existing ground or as otherwise
directed by the City.
4. All such work on the outlet side of the service meter shall be performed by a
licensed plumber.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests and Inspections
1. Check each Water Service installation for leaks and full flow through the curb stop
at the time the main is tested in accordance with Section 33 04 40.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
33 12 10 - 17
WATER SERVICES 1-INCH TO 2-INCH
Page 17 of 17
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised February 14, 2017
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson
Added Blue Text for clarification
1.2 A. – Revision to items included in price bid
Specification modified to be in accordance with the Reduction of Lead in Drinking
Water Act – All materials shall be lead free in accordance with this Act.
1.2.A.3 – Water Meter Service Relocate was renamed Water Meter Service
Reconnect
1.6.B. – added certification submittals for compliance with regulatory requirements
2/13/2013 F. Griffin
Added the phrase ‘, including grass’ to lines;
Part 1, 1.2.A.1.c.14, Part1, 1.2.A.2.c.13, Part 1, 1.2.A.2.c.13, Part 1,1.2.A.3.c.11,
Part1, 1.2.A.4.c.11
Added the phrase ‘and replacement’ to line Part 1,1.2.A.4.c.7
4/26/2013 F. Griffin
Revised lines with ‘including grass’ replacing with ‘excluding grass (seeding,
sodding or hydromulching paid separately)’
Included in Part 1, 1.2, A, 1, c, 14; Part 1, 1.2, A, 2, c, 13; Part 1, 1.2, A, 3, c, 11;
Part 1, 1.2, A, 4, 2, 11
6/19/2013 D. Johnson 1.2.A.4.c – Addition of private water service appurtenances relocation to being
included in the linear foot price of private water services
11/21/2016 W. Norwood Require meter box suitable for AMI meter. 2.2,C, 11 & 2.2,C,12
11/21/2016 W. Norwood Require service saddle with double straps. 2.2,C,9,b
2/14/17 W. Norwood 2.2, C, 9.a.3 Remove table “Fit Contour of pipe…”
2/14/17 W. Norwood 3.4, C, 1.d.(2) Remove nylon sleeve inserts, require cc threads.
33 12 11 - 1
LARGE WATER METERS
Page 1 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 12 11
LARGE WATER METERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Large Water Meter, Vault, Bypass and Appurtenances (3-inch and larger)
B. Products Installed but Not Furnished Under This Section
1. Water Meter and Strainer
C. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
D. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 03 80 00 – Modifications to Existing Concrete Structures
4. Section 33 06 16 – Concrete Water Vaults
5. Section 33 11 10 – Ductile Iron Pipe
6. Section 33 11 11 – Ductile Iron Fittings
7. Section 33 12 10 – Water Services 1-inch to 2-inch
8. Section 33 12 20 – Resilient Seated Gate Valve
9. Section 33 12 50 – Water Sample Stations
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for this Item shall be per each.
b. Measurement includes meter, vault, piping, appurtenances, and bypass line
(from upstream tee to downstream tee).
1) Piping upstream of bypass line tee is measured and paid separately as water
pipe, by size.
2) Piping downstream of bypass line tee is measured and paid separately as
water pipe, by size.
a) Any licensing requirements for plumbing installation are included in
this item’s measurement.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Water Meter and Vault”
installed for:
1) Various meter sizes
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 11 - 2
LARGE WATER METERS
Page 2 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Excavation
b. Pre-cast concrete vault and appurtenances
c. Crushed rock foundation
d. Access hatch
e. Piping and appurtenances
f. Fittings
g. Horizontal thrust blocking
h. Sample station and appurtenances
i. Flushing points and appurtenances
j. Installation of Compound Water Meter with Strainer
k. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Sump
l. Reconnection of Service
m. Backfill
n. Pavement removal
o. Hauling
p. Disposal of excess material
q. Placement and compaction of backfill
r. Plumbing Licensing requirements
s. Clean-up
t. Concrete Filled Steel Pipe Bollards as required
u. Surface restoration around perimeter of water meter vault and piping as
required.
1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED]
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Precast Concrete Vault
2. Piping
3. Sample Station
4. Isolation Valves
5. Sample Tap and appurtenances
6. Hatch
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 11 - 3
LARGE WATER METERS
Page 3 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty
1. Manufacturer’s warranty shall be in accordance with Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, MATERIALS
A. Materials
1. Precast Concrete Vault – Conform to Section 33 05 16
2. Gate Valves – Conform to Section 33 12 20
3. Ductile Iron Pipe – Conform to Section 33 11 10
4. Ductile Iron Fittings – Conform to Section 33 11 11
5. Sample Station – Conform to Section 33 12 50
6. Sample and flushing point taps – Conform to Section 33 12 10
7. Hatch – Conform to Section 33 05 16
B. Meter and Strainer
1. Furnished by City
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Evaluation and Assessment
1. Verify lines and grades are in accordance to the Drawings.
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install vault in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance
with Section 33 05 16.
B. Pipe Penetrations
1. Conform to Section 03 80 00.
C. Meter
1. Obtain meter and strainer from City Field Operations Warehouse.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 11 - 4
LARGE WATER METERS
Page 4 of 4
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 20 - 1
RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE
Page 1 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 12 20 1
RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes: 5
1. Resilient Seated (Wedge) Gate Valves 4-inch through 48-inch for use with potable 6
water mains 7
a. 24-inch and larger valves may require an integral bypass 8
2. Gate valves larger than 24-inches may be approved by the City on a case-by-case 9
basis. 10
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 11
1. None. 12
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 13
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the 14
Contract 15
2. Division 1 – General Requirements 16
3. Section 33 11 05 – Bolts, Nuts, and Gaskets 17
4. Section 33 11 10 – Ductile Iron Pipe 18
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 19
A. Measurement and Payment 20
1. Gate Valve 21
a. Measurement 22
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each. 23
b. Payment 24
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this 25
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Gate Valve” installed 26
for: 27
a) Various sizes 28
c. The price bid shall include: 29
1) Furnishing and installing Gate Valves with connections as specified in the 30
Drawings 31
2) Valve box 32
3) Extension 33
4) Extensions for valves in vaults 34
5) Valve vault and appurtenances (for 16-inch and larger gate valves) 35
6) Petrolatum tape for connections to steel flanges 36
7) 2-inch risers (for 16-inch and larger gate valves) 37
8) Isolation kits when installed with flanged connections 38
9) Polyethylene encasement 39
10) Pavement removal 40
33 12 20 - 2
RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE
Page 2 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised December 20, 2012
11) Excavation 1
12) Hauling 2
13) Disposal of excess material 3
14) Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment 4
15) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill 5
16) Clean-up 6
17) Cleaning 7
18) Disinfection 8
19) Testing 9
2. Cut-in Gate Valve 10
a. Measurement 11
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each. 12
b. Payment 13
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this 14
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Cut-in Gate Valve” 15
installed for: 16
a) Various sizes 17
c. The price bid shall include: 18
1) Furnishing and installing Gate Valves with connections as specified in the 19
Drawings 20
2) System dewatering 21
3) Connections to existing pipe materials 22
4) Valve box 23
5) Extension 24
6) Extensions for valves in vaults 25
7) Valve vault and appurtenances (for 16-inch and larger gate valves) 26
8) Petrolatum tape for connections to steel flanges 27
9) 2-inch risers (for 16-inch and larger gate valves) 28
10) Isolation kits when installed with flanged connections 29
11) Valve vault and appurtenances (for 16-inch and larger gate valves) 30
12) Polyethylene encasement 31
13) Pavement removal 32
14) Excavation 33
15) Hauling 34
16) Disposal of excess material 35
17) Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment 36
18) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill 37
19) Clean-up 38
20) Cleaning 39
21) Disinfection 40
22) Testing 41
1.3 REFERENCES 42
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms 43
1. NRS – Non Rising Stem 44
2. OS&Y – Outside Screw and Yoke 45
B. Reference Standards 46
33 12 20 - 3
RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE
Page 3 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference 1
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this 2
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 3
2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 4
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 5
a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25, 125, and 250). 6
4. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 7
5. ASTM International (ASTM): 8
a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 9
b. A242, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel. 10
c. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi 11
Tensile Strength. 12
d. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 13
e. B117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 14
f. B633, Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and 15
Steel. 16
6. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 17
a. C509, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 18
b. C515, Reduced-Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 19
c. C550, Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. 20
d. C900, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 IN 21
through 12 IN, for Water Transmission and Distribution. 22
7. American Water Works Association/American National Standards Institute 23
(AWWA/ANSI): 24
a. C105/A21.5, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. 25
b. C111/A21.11, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and 26
Fittings. 27
c. C115/A21.15, Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron 28
Threaded Flanges. 29
8. NSF International (NSF): 30
a. 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 31
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 32
1.5 SUBMITTALS 33
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 34
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 35
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 36
A. Product Data 37
1. Resilient Seated (Wedge) Gate Valve noting the pressure rating and coating system 38
supplied, including: 39
a. Dimensions, weights, material list, and detailed drawings 40
b. Joint type 41
c. Maximum torque recommended by the manufacturer for the valve size 42
2. Polyethylene encasement and tape 43
33 12 20 - 4
RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE
Page 4 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised December 20, 2012
a. Whether the film is linear low density or high density cross linked polyethylene 1
b. The thickness of the film provided 2
3. Thrust Restraint, if required by contract Documents 3
a. Retainer glands 4
b. Thrust harnesses 5
c. Any other means 6
4. Instructions for field repair of fusion bonded epoxy coating 7
5. Gaskets 8
B. Certificates 9
1. Furnish an affidavit certifying that all Resilient Seated (Wedge) Gate Valves meet 10
the provisions of this Section, each valve meets Specifications, all inspections have 11
been made and that all tests have been performed in accordance with AWWA C509 12
or AWWA C515. 13
2. Furnish a certificate stating that buried bolts and nuts conform to ASTM B117. 14
3. Furnish affidavit that Resilient Seated (Wedge) Gate Valve manufacturer has five 15
years experience manufacturing Resilient Seated Gate Valves of similar service and 16
size with experience record. 17
4. Furnish affidavit that Resilient Seated (Wedge) Gate Valve manufacturer owns or 18
controls any foreign factory/foundry that supplies valve casings and can certify that 19
the Resilient Seated (Wedge) Gate Valve manufacturer is in control of quality 20
control at the foreign factory/foundry. 21
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 22
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 23
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE 24
A. Qualifications 25
1. Manufacturers 26
a. Valves 16-inch and larger shall be the product of 1 manufacturer for each 27
project. 28
1) Change orders, specials and field changes may be provided by a different 29
manufacturer upon City approval. 30
b. For valves less than 16-inch, valves of each size shall be the product of 1 31
manufacturer, unless approved by the City. 32
1) Change orders, specials and field changes may be provided by a different 33
manufacturer upon City approval. 34
c. Valves shall meet or exceed AWWA C509 or AWWA C515. 35
d. For valves equipped with a bypass, the bypass valve must be of the same 36
manufacturer as the main valve. 37
e. Resilient Seated Gate Valves shall be new. 38
f. Resilient Seated Gate Valve Manufacturer shall not have less than 5 years of 39
successful experience manufacturing of Resilient Seated Gate Valves of similar 40
service and size, and indicated or demonstrate an experience record that is 41
satisfactory to the Engineer and City. This experience record will be thoroughly 42
investigated by the Engineer, and acceptance will be at the sole discretion of the 43
Engineer and City. 44
33 12 20 - 5
RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE
Page 5 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised December 20, 2012
g. Casings for Resilient Seated Gate Valve, such as valve body, wedge, and 1
bypass; that are not manufactured within the United States of America, shall be 2
manufactured by factories/foundries that are owned or controlled (partial 3
ownership) such that the Resilient Seated Gate Valve Manufacturer can control 4
and guarantee quality at the foreign factory/foundry. 5
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 6
A. Storage and Handling Requirements 7
1. Protect all parts so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged 8
delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and 9
equipment are ready for operation. 10
2. Protect all equipment and parts against any damage during a prolonged period at the 11
site. 12
3. Protect the finished surfaces of all exposed flanges by wooden blank flanges, 13
strongly built and securely bolted thereto. 14
4. Protect finished iron or steel surfaces not painted to prevent rust and corrosion. 15
5. Prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being directly exposed to sunlight or 16
extremes in temperature. 17
6. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01 18
66 00. 19
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 20
1.12 WARRANTY 21
A. Manufacturer Warranty 22
1. Manufacturer’s Warranty shall be in accordance with Division 1. 23
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 24
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 25
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS 26
A. Manufacturers 27
1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City’s Standard Products List will be 28
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00. 29
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 30
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a 31
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00. 32
B. Description 33
1. Regulatory Requirements 34
a. Valves shall be new and meet or exceed AWWA C509 or AWWA C515 and 35
shall meet or exceed the requirements of this Specification. 36
b. All valve components in contact with potable water shall conform to the 37
requirements of NSF 61. 38
C. Materials 39
33 12 20 - 6
RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE
Page 6 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Valve Body 1
a. Valve body: ductile iron per ASTM A536 2
b. Flanged ends: Furnish in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15. 3
c. Mechanical Joints: Furnish with outlets which conform to AWWA/ANSI 4
C111/A21.11. 5
d. Valve interior and exterior surfaces: fusion bonded epoxy coated, minimum 5 6
mils, meeting AWWA C550 requirements 7
e. Buried valves: Provide with polyethylene encasement in accordance with 8
AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5. 9
1) Polyethylene encasement: Furnish in accordance with Section 33 11 10. 10
2. Wedge (Gate) 11
a. Resilient wedge: rated at 250 psig cold water working pressure 12
b. The wedge (gate) for all valve sizes shall be 1 piece, fully encapsulated with a 13
permanently bonded EPDM rubber. 14
3. Bypass 15
a. For gate valves using a double roller, track and scrapper system, an integrally 16
cast bypass on the body of the valve is required. 17
1) Orient the bypass on the same side of the gate valve as the spur gear to 18
allow operation of both valves from the manhole opening. 19
2) The bypass shall be a minimum 4-inch in size. 20
4. Gate Valve Bolts and Nuts 21
a. Bonnet, Stuffing Box and Gear Box - Hex head bolt, and hex nut: Steel ASTM 22
A307 Gr. B, Zinc Plate per ASTM B633, SC3 for non-buried service (4-inch 23
through 12-inch valves) or as specified in 2.2.C.4.b. 24
b. Hex head bolt and hex nut: AISI 304 stainless steel for buried service (all 25
sizes) and for valves 16-inch through 36-inch (non-buried service) 26
5. Bolts and Nuts 27
a. Mechanical Joints 28
a) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 11 05. 29
b. Flanged Ends 30
1) Meet requirements of AWWA C115 or AWWA C207 depending on pipe 31
material. 32
2) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 11 05. 33
3) Flanged isolation kits shall be provided when connecting to buried steel or 34
concrete pressure pipe. Kits shall conform to Section 33 04 10. 35
6. Joints 36
a. Valves: flanged, or mechanical-joint or any combination of these as specified 37
on the Drawings or in the project Specifications 38
1) Flanged-joints: AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15, ASME B16.1, Class 125 39
a) Flange bolt circles and bolt holes shall match those of ASME B16.1, 40
Class 125. 41
b) Field fabricated flanges are prohibited. 42
2) Steel or concrete pressure pipe 43
a) Use flange-joints unless otherwise specified in the Contract 44
Documents. 45
3) Ductile Iron or PVC pressure pipe 46
a) Use mechanical joints with mechanically restrained retainer glands 47
unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. 48
33 12 20 - 7
RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE
Page 7 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised December 20, 2012
7. Operating Nuts 1
a. Supply for buried service valves 2
b. 1-15/16-inch square at the top, 2-inch at the base, and 1-3/4-inch high 3
c. Cast an arrow showing the direction of opening with the word “OPEN” on the 4
operating nut base. 5
d. To open, the operating nut shall be turned to the RIGHT (CLOCKWISE) 6
direction. Nut shall be painted red per AWWA specifications 7
e. Connect the operating nut to the shaft with a shear pin that prevents the nut 8
from transferring torque to that shaft or the gear box that exceeds the 9
manufacturer’s recommended torque. 10
f. Furnish handwheel operators for non-buried service, or when shown in the 11
Drawings. 12
8. Gearing 13
a. Gate valves that are 24 inch and larger: Equip with a spur gear. 14
b. Bevel gears for horizontally mounted valves are not allowed. 15
c. The spur gear shall be designed and supplied by the manufacturer of the valve 16
as an integral part of the gate valve. 17
9. Gaskets 18
a. Provide gaskets in accordance with Section 33 11 05. 19
2.3 ACCESSORIES 20
A. All gate valves shall have the following accessories provided as part of the gate valve 21
installation: 22
1. A keyed solid extension stem of sufficient length to bring the operating nut up to 23
within 1 foot of the surface of the ground, when the operating nut on the gate valve 24
is 3 feet or more beneath the surface of the ground. Extension Stems are: 25
a. Not required on City stock orders 26
b. Not to be bolted or attached to the valve-operating nut 27
c. To be of cold rolled steel with a cross-sectional area of 1 square inch, fitting 28
loosely enough to allow deflection 29
2. Furnish joint components such as gaskets, glands, lubricant, bolts, and nuts in 30
sufficient quantity for assembly of each joint. 31
3. Cast Iron Valve Boxes: provide for buried service gate valves, cast iron valve 32
boxes and covers 33
a. Each valve box for 4-inch through 12-inch valves shall be 2-piece, 5 ¼-inch 34
shafts, screw type, consisting of a top section and a bottom section. 35
b. Valve boxes shall be as listed in the City of Fort Worth Standard Products List 36
in attached in Section 01 60 00. 37
c. Valve box covers shall be so designed that they can be easily removed to 38
provide access to valve operating nut. 39
d. Valve box covers must be designed to stay in position and resist damage under 40
AASHTO HS 20 traffic loads. 41
e. Each cover shall be casted with the word “WATER” or “RECLAIMED” in 42
raised letters on the upper surface. 43
f. Cast iron valve boxes and covers shall conform to ASTM A48, Class 35B. 44
1) Valve box covers shall be round for potable water applications and square 45
for reclaimed water applications. 46
33 12 20 - 8
RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE
Page 8 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised December 20, 2012
g. Box extension material shall be AWWA C900 PVC or ductile iron. 1
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 4
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 5
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 6
3.4 INSTALLATION 7
A. General 8
1. All valves shall be installed in vertical position when utilized in normal pipeline 9
installation. 10
2. Valves shall be placed at line and grade as indicated on the Drawings. 11
3. Polyethylene encasement installation shall be in accordance with Section 33 11 10. 12
3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 13
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 14
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL 15
A. Field Inspections 16
1. Before acceptance of the installed valve, the City Field Operations Staff shall have 17
the opportunity to operate the valve. 18
2. The City shall be given the opportunity to inspect all buried flanges before they are 19
covered. 20
3. The Operator will be assessing the ease of access to the operating nut within the 21
valve box and ease of operating the valve from a fully closed to fully opened 22
position. 23
4. If access and operation of the valve meet the City’s criteria, then the valve will be 24
accepted as installed. 25
B. Non-Conforming Work 26
1. If access and operation of the valve or its appurtenances does not meet the City’s 27
criteria, the Contractor will remedy the situation until it meets the City’s criteria, at 28
the Contractor’s expense. 29
33 12 20 - 9
RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE
Page 9 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised December 20, 2012
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 1
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 2
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 4
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 5
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 6
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 7
8
33 12 20 - 10
RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE
Page 10 of 10
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised December 20, 2012
END OF SECTION 1
2
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson
1.1.A – Modified acceptable size range and added requirement for bypass in 30-inch
gate valves, Blue text added for exceptions
1.2 Measurement and Payment – Added Cut-In Gate Valve
1.2.A.1.c and 1.2.A.2.c – added additional items to be included in price bid
1.6.A – removed requirement for product data for bolts and nuts because it is to be
included under Section 33 11 05.
1.9.A.1 – Added requirement for bypass valve manufacturing
2.2.C. – Added requirement for 30-inch gate valves to have a bypass and bypass
material requirements; Added reference to Section 33 11 05 and removed material
specification for bolts, nuts and gaskets; Added requirement for flanged isolation
kits; Added restraint requirements for mechanical joint connections with ductile iron
or PVC pressure pipe.
2.3.3 – Modified acceptable cast iron from Class 40 to Class 35B; Added
requirements for reclaimed water applications
6/24/2014 D. Townsend
1.1.A.2 Revision - Gate valves larger than 24-inches may be approved by the City on
a case-by-case basis
1.6.B.3 Added Section. Requires Affidavit for 5 years of experience in
manufacturing RS Gate valves of similar size and type.
1.6.B.4 Added Section – Requires Affidavit on Gate Valve manufacturers ownership
in foreign factories/foundries providing components to certify on-site quality control.
1.9.A.1.f Added Section. Requirement for 5 years of experience in manufacturing
RS Gate valves of similar size and type.
1.9.A.1.g Added Section. Requirement for Gate Valve manufacturers ownership (or
control) in foreign factories/foundries providing components to certify on-site quality
control
5/6/2015 D. Townsend
1.1.A.1 Revised maximum allowable Resilient Seated (Wedge) Gate Valve from
30-inch to 48-inch
1.1.A.1.a Revised minimum size gate valve requiring bypass from 30-inch to 24-
inch.
2.2.C.3. Changed requirement for an integrally cast bypass from 30-inch and above
resilient seated gate valves to all double roller, track and scrapper system resilient
seated gate valves
2.2.C.3.2 Added the minimum size bypass shall be 4-inches.
2.2.C.7.d Added that nut shall be painted red per AWWA specifications
3
33 12 25 - 1
CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS
Page 1 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 6, 2013
SECTION 33 12 25
CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Connection to existing water mains to include, but not limited to:
a. Cutting in a tee for a branch connection
b. Extending from an existing water main
c. Installing a tapping sleeve and valve
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 33 04 40 – Cleaning and Acceptance Testing of Water Mains
4. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
5. Section 33 05 30 – Location of Existing Utilities
6. Section 33 11 05 – Bolts, Nuts, and Gaskets
7. Section 33 11 10 – Ductile Iron Pipe
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Connection to an existing unpressurized Fort Worth Water Distribution System
Main that does not require the City to take part of the water system out of service
a. Measurement
1) This Item is considered subsidiary to the water pipe being installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item are subsidiary to the unit price bid per linear foot of water pipe
complete in place, and no other compensation will be allowed.
2. Connection to an existing pressurized Fort Worth Water Distribution System Main
that requires a shutdown of some part of the water system
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each connection completed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Connection to Existing
Water Main” installed for:
a) Various sizes of existing water distribution main
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 25 - 2
CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS
Page 2 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 6, 2013
c. The price bid shall include all aspects of making the connection including, but
not limited to:
1) Preparing submittals
2) Dewatering
3) Exploratory excavation (as needed)
4) Coordination and notification
5) Remobilization
6) Temporary lighting
7) Polyethylene encasement
8) Make-up pieces
9) Linings
10) Pavement removal
11) Excavation
12) Hauling
13) Disposal of excess material
14) Clean-up
15) Cleaning
16) Disinfection
17) Testing
3. Connection to an existing pressurized Fort Worth Water Distribution System Main
by Tapping Sleeve and Valve:
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each connection completed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Tapping Sleeve and
Valve” installed for:
a) Various sizes of connecting main
b) Various sizes of existing water distribution main
c. The price bid shall include all aspects of making the connection including, but
not limited to:
1) Preparing submittals
2) Dewatering
3) Exploratory excavation (as needed)
4) Coordination and notification
5) Tapping Sleeve and Tapping Valve
6) Remobilization
7) Temporary lighting
8) Polyethylene encasement
9) Make-up pieces
10) Linings
11) Pavement removal
12) Excavation
13) Hauling
14) Disposal of excess material
15) Clean-up
16) Cleaning
17) Disinfection
18) Testing
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 25 - 3
CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS
Page 3 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 6, 2013
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125 and 250)
3. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for
High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose
Applications
c. A194, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High
Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both
d. A242, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel.
e. A283, Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength
Carbon Steel Plates.
f. A285, Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low-
and Intermediate-Tensile Strength.
g. B117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
h. D2000, Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive
Applications.
4. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C200, Steel Water Pipe - 6 IN and Larger.
b. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service – Sizes 4 IN through 144 IN.
c. C213, Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel
Water Pipelines.
d. C223, Fabricated Steel and Stainless Steel Tapping Sleeves.
5. American Water Works Association/American National Standards Institute
(AWWA/ANSI):
a. C105/A21.5, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
b. C111/A21.11, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings.
c. C115A21/15, Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile Iron or Gray-Iron
Threaded Flanges.
6. NSF International (NSF):
a. 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects.
7. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry Inc.
(MSS):
a. SP-60, Connecting flange Joint Between Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-installation Meetings
1. Required for any connections to an existing, pressurized 16-inch or larger City
water distribution system main that requires a shutdown of some part of the water
system
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 25 - 4
CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS
Page 4 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 6, 2013
2. May also be required for connections that involve shutting water service off t o
certain critical businesses
3. Schedule a pre-installation meeting a minimum of 3 weeks prior to proposed time
for the work to occur.
4. The meeting shall include the Contractor, City Inspector and City Valve Crew.
5. Review work procedures as submitted and any adjustments made for current field
conditions.
6. Verify that all valves and plugs to be used have adequate thrust restraint or
blocking.
7. Schedule a test shutdown with the City.
8. Schedule the date for the connection to the existing system.
B. Scheduling
1. Schedule work to make all connections to existing 16-inch and larger mains:
a. During the period from November through April, unless otherwise approved by
the City
b. During normal business hours from Monday through Friday, unless otherwise
approved by the City
2. Schedule City Valve Crew by 1:00 P.M. a minimum of 1 business day prior to
planned disruption to the existing water system.
a. In the event that other water system activities do not allow the existing main to
be dewatered at the requested time, schedule work to allow the connection at an
alternate time acceptable to the City.
1) If water main cannot be taken out of service at the originally requested
time, coordination will be required with the City to discuss rescheduling
and compensation for mobilization.
2) No additional payment will be provided if the schedule was altered at the
Contractor’s request.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for
specials.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data, if applicable
1. Tapping Sleeve noting the pressure rating and coating system supplied including:
a. Dimensions, weights, material list, and detailed drawings
b. Maximum torque recommended by the manufacturer for the valve by size
B. Submittals
1. Provide a detailed sequence of work for 16-inch, or larger, connections if required
by City that includes:
a. Results of exploratory excavation
b. Dewatering
c. Procedure for connecting to the existing water main
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 25 - 5
CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS
Page 5 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 6, 2013
d. Time period for completing work from when the water is shut down to when
the main is back in service
e. Testing and repressurization procedures
2. Welders that are assigned to work on connection to concrete cylinder or steel pipe
must be certified and provide Welding Certificates, upon request, in accordance
with AWWA C200.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Protect parts so that no damage or deterioration occurs during a prolonged delay
from the time of shipment until installation is completed.
2. Protect all equipment and parts against any damage during a prolonged period at the
site.
3. Protect the finished surfaces of all exposed flanges using wooden flanges, strongly
built and securely bolted thereto.
4. Protect finished iron or steel surfaces not painted to prevent rust and corrosion.
5. Prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being exposed to direct sunlight and
extremes in temperature.
6. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01
66 00.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty
1. Manufacturer’s warranty shall be in accordance with Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Only the manufacturers as listed by the City’s Standard Products List will be
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
B. Description
1. Regulatory Requirements
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 25 - 6
CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS
Page 6 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 6, 2013
a. Tapping Sleeves shall meet or exceed AWWA C223 and the requirements of
this Specification.
b. All valve components in contact with potable water shall conform to the
requirements of NSF 61.
C. Tapping Sleeve Materials
1. Body
a. Body: Carbon Steel per ASTM A283 Grade C, ASTM A285 Grade C, ASTM
A36 Steel or equal
b. Finish: fusion bonded epoxy coating to an average 12 mil thickness. Fusion
applied per AWWA C213.
c. All buried tapping sleeves shall be provided with polyethylene encasement in
accordance with AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5.
1) Polyethylene encasement shall be in accordance with Section 33 11 10.
2. Flange
a. Carbon Steel per ASTM A36 in accordance with AWWA C207 and ASME
B16.1 Class 125.
b. Recessed for tapping valve per MSS SP-60
3. Bolts and Nuts
a. Flanged Ends
1) Meet requirements of AWWA C115 or AWWA C207 depending on pipe
material.
2) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 11 05.
4. Gaskets
a. Provide gaskets in accordance with Section 33 11 05.
5. Test Plug
a. ¾-inch NPT carbon steel with square head and fusion bonded epoxy coating
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions
1. Verify by exploratory excavation, if needed, that existing water main is as depicted
in the Drawings and that the location is suitable for a connection to the existing
water main.
a. Excavate and backfill trench for the exploratory excavation in accordance with
33 05 10.
2. Verify that all equipment and materials are available on–site prior to the shutdown
of the existing main.
3. Pipe lines shall be completed, tested and authorized for connection to the existing
system in accordance with Section 33 04 40.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 25 - 7
CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS
Page 7 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 6, 2013
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Upon disruption of the existing water main, continue work until the connection is
complete and the existing water main is back in service.
B. Procedure
1. Expose the proposed connection point in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
2. Dewater the existing water line so the chlorinated water is not unlawfully
discharged.
3. Maintain the water that may bleed by existing valves or plugs during installation
within the work area to a reasonable level.
a. Control the water in such a way that it does not interfere with the proper
installation of the connection or create a discharge of chlorinated water.
4. If any discharge of chlorinated water occurs, discharged water shall be de-
chlorinated in accordance with Section 33 04 40
5. Cut and remove existing water main in order to make the connection.
6. Verify that the existing pipe line is suitable for the proposed connection.
7. Place trench foundation and bedding in accordance with 33 05 10.
8. In the event that a tapping sleeve and valve is used, the coupon from the existing
water main shall be submitted to the City.
9. Prevent embedment, backfill, soil, water or other debris form entering the pipeline.
10. Establish thrust restraint as provided for in the Drawings.
11. Clean and disinfect the pipeline associated with the connection in accordance with
Section 33 04 40.
12. Place embedment to the top of the pipe zone.
13. Request that the City Valve Crew re-pressurize the pipeline.
14. Directionally flush the connection in accordance with Section 33 04 40.
15. Request that City Valve Crew open all remaining valves.
3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 25 - 8
CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS
Page 8 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 6, 2013
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 2.2.C.3 and 4 – Added reference to Section 33 11 05 and removed bolt, nu t and
gasket material specification
2/6/2013 D. Townsend 3.4.B.4 Modified to refer to Section 33 04040
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 40 - 1
FIRE HYDRANTS
Page 1 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised January 3, 2014
SECTION 33 12 40
FIRE HYDRANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Dry-barrel fire hydrants with 51/4-inch main valve for use with potable water mains
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
4. Section 33 04 40 – Cleaning and Acceptance Testing of Water Mains
5. Section 33 11 10 – Ductile Iron Pipe
6. Section 33 11 11 – Ductile Iron Fittings
7. Section 33 11 14 – Buried Steel Pipe and Fittings
8. Section 33 12 20 – Resilient Seated (Wedge) Gate Valve
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Fire Hydrant and Extension
1) Measurement for this item shall be by the each hydrant, complete in place.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
measured under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit prices bid per each
“Fire Hydrant” installed.
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Furnishing and installing Fire Hydrants with appurtenances as specified in the
Drawings
b. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrant assembly from base to operating nut
c. Extension barrel and stem
d. Adjusting hydrant to the appropriate height
e. Painting
f. Pavement Removal
g. Excavation
h. Freight, loading, unloading and handling
i. Disposal of excess material
j. Furnish, placement and compaction of embedment
k. Furnish, placement and compaction of backfill
l. Blocking, Braces and Rest
m. Clean up
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 40 - 2
FIRE HYDRANTS
Page 2 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised January 3, 2014
n. Disinfection
o. Testing
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Definitions
1. Base: The lateral connection to the fire hydrant lead; also called a shoe
B. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C502, Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants
b. Manual of Water Supply Practices M17 (AWWA Manual M17) – Installation,
Field Testing, and Maintenance of Fire Hydrants
3. NSF International
a. 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a. 1963, Standard for Fire Hose Connections
5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
a. 246, Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service
6. Factory Mutual (FM)
a. Class Number 1510, Approval Standard for Fire Hydrant (Dry Barrel Type) for
Private Fire Service
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to construction.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrant stating:
a. Main valve opening size
b. Nozzle arrangement and sizes
c. Operating nut size
d. Operating nut operating direction
e. Working pressure rating
f. Component assembly and materials
g. Coatings and Finishes
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Manufacturers
a. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants shall be the product of 1 manufacturer.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 40 - 3
FIRE HYDRANTS
Page 3 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised January 3, 2014
1) Change orders, specials and field changes may be provided by a different
manufacturer upon City approval.
2. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants shall be in conformance with AWWA C502, UL 246 and
FM 1510.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Store and handle in accordance with the guidelines as stated in AWWA C502 and
AWWA Manual M17.
2. Protect all parts so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged
delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and
equipment are ready for operation.
3. Protect all equipment and parts against any damage during a prolonged period at the
site.
4. Protect the finished surfaces of all exposed flanges by wooden blank flanges,
strongly built and securely bolted thereto.
5. Protect finished iron or steel surfaces not painted to prevent rust and corrosion.
6. Prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being directly exposed to sunlight or
extremes in temperature.
7. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01
66 00.
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty
1. Manufacturer’s Warranty shall be in accordance with Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, AND MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City’s Standard Products List will be
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
3. The Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrant shall be new and the product of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacturing of Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants having similar
service and size.
B. Description
1. Regulatory Requirements
a. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrant shall meet or exceed the latest revisions of AWWA
C502 and shall meet or exceed the requirements of this Specification.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 40 - 4
FIRE HYDRANTS
Page 4 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised January 3, 2014
b. All Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrant components in contact with potable water shall
conform to the requirements of NSF 61.
C. Performance / Design Criteria
1. Capacities
a. Rated working pressure of 250 psi or greater
2. Design Criteria
a. Operating nut
1) Uniformly tapered square nut measuring:
a) 1 inch at the base
b) 7/8 inch at the top
2) Open by turning the operating nut to the right (clockwise)
a) Provide operating direction clearly marked with an arrow and the word
“OPEN”.
3) Provide weather shield with operating nut.
b. Main Valve
1) Minimum 51/4-inch opening
2) Compression type
a) Opening against pressure
b) Closing with pressure
c. Nozzles
1) ‘T’ shape, 3 nozzle arrangement
2) Nozzle sizes, threads and configuration in accordance with NFPA 1963
a) Hose nozzles
(1) 2 x 21/2-inch (nominal size of connection)
(a) 180 degrees apart
(b) Thread Designation 2.5-7.5 NH (NFPA 1963)
b) Pump nozzle
(1) 4-inch (nominal size of connection)
(a) Thread Designation 4-4 NH (NFPA 1963)
d. Hydrant Barrel Configuration
1) Upper barrel
2) Breakable flange and stem
a) To be installed above ground at the connection to the upper barrel
3) Extension barrel (if needed) and lower barrel
a) Extension barrel and stem
(1) Lengthen in 6-inch increments
e. Drain Valve
1) Non-corrodible material
2) Spring operated drain valves are not allowed.
D. Function
1. Drain Valve
a. Drain fire hydrant barrels when main valve is closed.
E. Materials
1. Furnish materials in accordance with AWWA C502.
2. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrant Assembly
a. Internal parts
1) Threads
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 40 - 5
FIRE HYDRANTS
Page 5 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised January 3, 2014
a) Provide operating thread designed to avoid metal such as iron or steel
threads against iron or steel parts.
2) Stem
a) Stem Nuts
(1) Provide bronze stem nuts.
(a) Grades per AWWA C502
b) Where needed, stem shall be grooved and sealed with O-rings.
3. Provide crushed rock for placement around base conforming to Section 33 05 10.
F. Finishes
1. Primer Materials
a. Furnish primer for Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants in accordance with AWWA C502.
2. Finish Materials
a. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrant
1) Exterior
a) Above grade
(1) Furnish exterior coating for above grade Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrant
assembly components in accordance with AWWA C502.
(2) Coating shall be Flynt Aluminum Paint in Silver.
b) Below grade
(1) Furnish exterior coating for below grade Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrant
assembly components in accordance with AWWA C502.
2) Interior
a) Interior coating for Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants assemblies in accordance
with AWWA C502
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Polyethylene Encasement
1. Provide polyethylene encasement in accordance with Section 33 11 10.
B. Embedment
1. Provide crushed rock and filter fabric in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections
1. Testing and inspection of Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants in accordance with AWWA
C502.
B. Markings
1. Provide each Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrant marked in accordance with AWWA C502.
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 40 - 6
FIRE HYDRANTS
Page 6 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised January 3, 2014
1. Install in accordance with AWWA Manual of Water Supply Practice M17,
manufacturer’s recommendations and as shown on the Drawings.
2. Provide vertical installation with braces, rest and blocking in accordance with City
Standard Details.
3. Excavate and backfill trenches in accordance with 33 05 10.
4. Embed Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrant assemblies in accordance with 33 05 10.
a. At the location of the weep holes, wrap barrel with polyethylene encasement
and crushed rock with filter fabric to prevent dirt and debris from entering the
fire hydrant.
5. Polyethylene encasement installation shall be in accordance with the applicable
portion of Section 33 11 10.
6. Install concrete blocking and rest in accordance with Section 03 30 00 as indicated
in the Drawings.
7. A minimum 1/3 cubic yard of crushed rock shall be placed around the base, in
accordance with AWWA Manual of Water Supply Practice M17, to allow drain
outlets to operate.
a. The crushed rock should extend 6 inches above the drain outlets and a
minimum of 1 foot on all sides of the fire hydrant base.
8. Fire hydrant lead line shall be installed with a maximum cover of 7 feet.
a. Cover is measured from the invert at the fire hydrant base, vertical to ground
elevation.
b. Fittings may be used along fire lead line to ensure minimum and maximum
cover requirements are met.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD CONTROL
A. Field Inspections
1. The Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrant and assembly shall perform as intended with no
deformation, leaking or damage of any kind for the pressure ranges indicated.
2. City inspector will issue final inspection notice to City staff.
3. City Field Operations Staff and Fire Department Staff shall have the opportunity to
inspect and operate the hydrant, to ensure that the fire hydrant was installed in
accordance with AWWA Manual of Water Supply Practice M17. This includes but
is not limited to:
a. Operation of Nozzles and operating nut are not obstructed.
b. Drain valve is not obstructed or plugged
4. Keep fire hydrant wrapped or covered to identify that it is out of service until the
water line it’s connected to is put in service.
B. Non-Conforming Work
1. If access and operation of the Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrant or its appurtenances do not
meet the criteria of the AWWA Manual of Water Supply Practice M17, the
Contractor will remedy the situation criteria, at the Contractor’s expense.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 40 - 7
FIRE HYDRANTS
Page 7 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised January 3, 2014
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE
3.14 ATTACHMENTS
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson
2.2.F.2.a.1).a).(2) Added paint manufacturer specification
2.2.C.2.c Revised pumper nozzle nominal diameter and added NFPA 1963 Thread
Designations
11/27/2013 D. Townsend
Specification Modified to be in accordance with the Reduction of Lead in Drinking
Water Act (P.L. 111-380) – All material s to be lead-free in accordance with this act.
Sections modified are 1.1.A.1, 1.9.A.2, and 2.2.E.1
Sections added are 1.3.A.2, 1.3.B.7, 1.6.B.1, 2.2.B.1.c, 2.4.B.2
1/3/2014 D. Townsend
H.R. 3588 (P.L. 113-64) signed into law 1/2/2014 waived Reduction of Lead in
Drinking Water Act (P.L. 111-380) requirement for fire hydrant. All previous
revisions related to “lead-free” requirement are now deleted including those revisions
made 11/27/2013, those being:
Sections modified are 1.1.A.1, 1.9.A.2, and 2.2.E.1
Sections added are 1.3.A.2, 1.3.B.7, 1.6.B.1, 2.2.B.1.c, 2.4.B.2
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 50 - 1
WATER SAMPLING STATIONS
Page 1 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 12 50
WATER SAMPLING STATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Water sampling stations for potable water mains
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section
1. 1-inch water service line
a. From water main to curb stop (including tap)
D. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In -Place Concrete
4. Section 33 04 40 – Cleaning and Acceptance Testing of Water Mains
5. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
6. Section 33 12 10 – Water Services 1-inch to 2-inch
7. Section 33 12 25 – Connections to Existing Water Mains
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Water Sampling Station
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Water Sampling
Station” completed in place.
c. The price bid includes:
1) Furnishing and installing Sampling Station with appurtenances as specified
in the Drawings
2) Meter box and Lid
3) Concrete support block
4) Curb stop
5) Fittings
6) Incidental 5 feet of service line
7) Pavement Removal
8) Excavation
9) Hauling
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 50 - 2
WATER SAMPLING STATIONS
Page 2 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
10) Disposal of excess material
11) Clean up
12) Disinfection
13) Testing
2. Water Sampling Station installed per City Standard Details.
a. Measurement
1) This Item is considered subsidiary to Water Meter Vault.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item are subsidiary to the unit price per each Water Meter Vault (with
Sampling Station) installed and no other compensation will be allowed.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. NSF International
a. 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to construction.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Product Data submitted in accordance with Section 33 12 10.
2. Sampling Station
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Protect all parts such that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged
delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and
equipment are ready for operation.
2. Protect all equipment and parts against any damage during a prolonged period at the
site.
3. Prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being directly exposed to sunlight or
extremes in temperature.
4. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01
66 00.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 50 - 3
WATER SAMPLING STATIONS
Page 3 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Water sampling station
1. Eclipse TM Number 88 Sampling Station, or approved equal, with 12-inch depth of
bury
2. Lockable, aluminum weather shield enclosure
3. Brass internal piping and appurtenances
4. Galvanized riser pipe
5. Brass isolation valve with ¾-inch female iron pipe inlet
6. Removable parts that require no excavation
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPE, AND MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City’s Standard Products List will be
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
3. The Water Services and appurtenances shall be new and the product of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of Water Services and
appurtenances having similar service and size.
B. Description
1. Regulatory Requirements
a. All Water Sampling Station components in contact with potable water shall
conform to the requirements of NSF 61.
C. Materials / Design Criteria
1. Water Service
a. In accordance with Section 33 12 10 include:
1) 1-inch Water Service
2) ¾-inch Water Service
3) 1-inch Corporation Stop
4) 1-inch Curb Stop
5) Fittings
6) 1-inch standard plastic meter box
2. Concrete Pad
a. In accordance with Section 03 30 00
b. Dimensions
1) 2 feet x 2 feet
2) 6 inches thick
c. Design
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 50 - 4
WATER SAMPLING STATIONS
Page 4 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) Class ‘B’ Concrete (2500 psi)
2) Reinforced with #4 Rebar
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests, Inspections and Markings
1. Conform to Section 33 12 10.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install Sampling Station in accordance with City Standard Details and Section 33
12 10 Water to include:
a. 1-inch Corporation Stop
b. 1-inch Water Service
c. 1-inch Curb Stop
d. 1-inch 90 Degree Elbow
e. 1 inch x ¾ inch Reducer
f. ¾-inch Water Service
g. Sampling Station
h. 1-inch standard plastic meter box
i. Concrete Pad
2. Where appropriate, place sampling station adjacent to power pole, elevated tank,
street sign, tree or fire hydrant
a. Typical installation on short side of street
b. When placing adjacent to fire hydrant:
1) Maintain 4-foot offset from fire hydrant and lead.
2) Do not tap fire hydrant lead line.
c. For installations adjacent to valves along large water mains, connect to existing
large valve copper riser.
1) Do not tap main, unless approved by City.
3. Excavate, embed and backfill trenches in accordance with 33 05 10.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests and Inspections
1. See Section 33 12 10.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 12 50 - 5
WATER SAMPLING STATIONS
Page 5 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson
1.2.A.1.c – 1-inch standard meter box added to price bid
2.2.C.1.a - 1-inch standard meter box added to materials list
3.4.A.1 - 1-inch standard meter box added to installation
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 31 20 - 1
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE
Page 1 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 19, 2013
SECTION 33 31 20
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe 4-inch through 27-inch for gravity sanitary sewer
applications
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 33 01 30 – Sewer and Manhole Testing
4. Section 33 01 31 – Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection
5. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
6. Section 33 05 26 – Utility Markers/Locators
7. Section 33 31 50 – Sanitary Sewer Service Connections and Service Line
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Measured horizontally along the surface from center line to center line of the
manhole or appurtenance
2. Payment
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid
per linear foot of “PVC Pipe” installed for:
1) Various sizes
2) Various Standard Dimension Ratios
3) Various embedments
4) Various depths, for miscellaneous projects only
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Furnishing and installing PVC gravity pipe with joints as specified by the
Drawings
b. Pavement removal
c. Excavation
d. Hauling
e. Disposal of excess material
f. Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment
g. Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 31 20 - 2
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE
Page 2 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 19, 2013
h. Trench water stops
i. Clean-up
j. Cleaning
k. Testing
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation (AASHTO).
3. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
b. D2412, Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading
Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading.
c. D3034, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
d. D3212, Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes
Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
e. F679, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter
Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
4. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ):
a. Title 30, Part I, Chapter 217, Subchapter C, Rule 217.53 – Pipe Design.
b. Title 30, Part I, Chapter 217, Subchapter C, Rule 217.54 – Criteria for Laying
Pipe.
c. Title 30, Part I, Chapter 217, Subchapter C, Rule 217.57 – Testing
Requirements for Installation of Gravity Collection System Pipes.
5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Product data sheet
2. Manufacturer
3. Nominal pipe diameter
4. Standard dimension ratio (SDR)
5. Cell classification
6. Laying lengths
B. Certificates
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 31 20 - 3
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE
Page 3 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 19, 2013
1. Furnish an affidavit certifying that all PVC Gravity Pipe meets the provisions of
this Section and has been air and deflection tested and meets the requirements of
ASTM D3034 and ASTM F679.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Manufacturers
a. Finished pipe shall be the product of 1 manufacturer for each size per project,
unless otherwise approved by the City.
1) Change orders, specials and field changes may be provided by a different
manufacturer upon City approval.
b. Pipe manufacturing operations shall be performed under the control of the
manufacturer.
c. All pipe furnished shall be in conformance with ASTM D3034 (4-inch through
15-inch) and ASTM F679 (18-inch through 27-inch).
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Gravity pipe shall be stored and handled in accordance with the manufacturer’s
guidelines.
2. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with
Section 01 66 00.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Only the manufacturers as listed in the City’s Standard Products List will be
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
B. Performance / Design Criteria
1. Pipe
a. Meet all requirements of TCEQ.
b. Design in accordance with ASTM D3034 for 4-inch through 15-inch SDR 26
and ASTM F679 for 18-inch through 27-inch 46PS/115PS.
c. PVC Gravity Sanitary Sewer Pipe shall be approved by the UL.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 31 20 - 4
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE
Page 4 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 19, 2013
d. Assume a standard lay length of 14 feet and 20 feet except for special fittings or
closure pieces necessary to comply with the Drawings.
e. Use green coloring for ground identification as sanitary sewer pipe.
f. PVC meeting the requirements of ASTM D1784, with a cell classification of
12454 or 12364
g. Deflection Design
1) Base pipe design on pipe stiffness, soil stiffness and load on the pipe.
2) Design pipe according to the Modified Iowa Formula as detailed by the
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association in the Handbook of PVC Pipe, using the
following parameters:
a) Unit Weight of Fill (w) = 130 pounds per cubic foot
b) Live Load = AASHTO HS 20
c) Trench Depth = 12 feet minimum, or as indicated in Drawings
d) Maximum (E’) = 1,000 max
e) Deflection Lag Factor (DL) = 1.0
f) Bedding Factor constant (K) = 0.1
g) Mean radius of the pipe (r), inches, as indicated in Drawings
h) Marston’s load per unit length (W), pounds per inch, calculate per
Drawings
i) PVC modulus of elasticity (E) = 400,000 psi
j) Moment of inertia of pipe wall per unit length, (I) = t3/12, (in4/in), per
pipe type and size
(1) Where (t) = pipe thickness, inches
k) Maximum Calculated Deflection = 5 percent
h. Pipe Flotation: If the pipe is buried in common saturated soil (about 120 pounds
per cubic foot) with at least 1½ pipe diameters of cover, pipe is generally not
subject to flotation. If shallower, check groundwater flotation potential.
Flotation will occur if:
Fb > Wp + Wf + Wd
Where: Fb = buoyant force, pound per foot
Wp = empty pipe weight, pound per foot
Wf = weight of flooded soil, pound per foot
Wd = weight of dry soil, pound per foot
Values and formulas for the above variables can be obtained from the pipe
manufacturer and site specific soil conditions.
i. Verify trench depths after existing utilities are located.
j. Accommodate vertical alignment changes required because of existing utility or
other conflicts by an appropriate change in pipe design depth.
k. In no case shall pipe be installed deeper than its design allows.
2. Minimum pipe stiffness of 46 psi at 5 percent deflection when test in accordance
with ASTM D2412.
3. Pipe markings
a. Meet the minimum requirements of ASTM D3034 and ASTM F679.
b. Minimum pipe markings shall be as follows:
1) Manufacturer’s Name or Trademark and production record
2) Nominal pipe size
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 31 20 - 5
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE
Page 5 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 19, 2013
3) PVC cell classification
4) ASTM or Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) designation
5) Seal of testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe
4. Joints
a. Joints shall be gasket, bell and spigot, push-on type conforming to
ASTM D3212.
b. Since each pipe manufacturer has a different design for push-on joints; gaskets
shall be part of a complete pipe section and purchased as such.
5. Connections
a. Only use manufactured fittings.
b. See Section 33 31 50.
6. Detectable Metallic Tape
a. See Section 33 05 26.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install pipe, specials and appurtenances as specified herein, as specified in Section
33 05 10, and in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Lay pipe to the lines and grades as indicated in the Drawings.
3. Excavate and backfill trenches in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
4. Embed PVC pipe in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
B. Pipe Handling
1. Haul and distribute pipe and fittings at the project site.
2. Handle piping with care to avoid damage.
a. Inspect each joint of pipe and reject or repair any damaged pipe prior to
lowering into the trench.
b. Use only nylon ropes, slings or other lifting devices that will not damage the
surface of the pipe for handling the pipe.
3. At the close of each operating day:
a. Keep the pipe clean and free of debris, dirt, animals and trash – during and after
the laying operation.
b. Effectively seal the open end of the pipe using a gasketed night cap.
C. Pipe Joint Installation
a. Clean dirt and foreign material from the gasketed socket and the spigot end.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 31 20 - 6
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE
Page 6 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 19, 2013
b. Assemble pipe joint by sliding the lubricated spigot end into the gasketed bell
end to the reference mark.
c. Install such that identification marking on each joint are oriented upward toward
the trench opening.
d. When making connection to manhole, use an elastomeric seal or flexible boot to
facilitate a seal.
D. Connection Installation
1. See Section 33 31 50.
E. Detectable Metallic Tape Installation
1. See Section 33 05 26.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests and Inspections
1. Video Inspection
a. Provide a Post-CCTV inspection in accordance with Section 33 01 31.
2. Air Test and Deflection (Mandrel) Test
a. Perform in accordance with Section 33 01 30.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
6/18/13 D. Johnson 2.2.B.1.b – Pipe Material Clarification
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 31 50 - 1
SANITARY SEWER SERVICE CONNECTIONS AND SERVICE LINE
Page 1 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised April 26, 2013
SECTION 33 31 50 1
SANITARY SEWER SERVICE CONNECTIONS AND SERVICE LINE 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes: 5
1. Sanitary sewer service connection, service line and 2-way cleanout from the main 6
to the right-of-way, as shown on the Drawings, directed by the Engineer and 7
specified herein for: 8
a. New Service 9
b. New Service (Bored) 10
c. Private Service Relocation 11
d. Service Reinstatement 12
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 13
1. None. 14
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 15
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 16
2. Division 1 – General Requirements 17
3. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 18
4. Section 33 11 10 – Ductile Iron Pipe 19
5. Section 33 11 11 – Ductile Iron Fittings 20
6. Section 33 31 20 – Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Gravity Sanitary Sewer Pipe 21
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 22
A. Measurement and Payment 23
1. New Sewer Service 24
a. Measurement 25
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each “Sewer Service” complete in 26
place. 27
b. Payment 28
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 29
will be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Sewer Service” installed for: 30
a) Various sizes 31
c. The price bid shall include: 32
1) Furnishing and installing New Sanitary Sewer Service Line as specified by 33
the Drawings 34
2) Pavement removal 35
3) Excavation 36
4) Hauling 37
5) Disposal of excess material 38
6) Tee connection to main 39
7) Fittings 40
8) 2-way cleanout and cap with concrete pad 41
33 31 50 - 2
SANITARY SEWER SERVICE CONNECTIONS AND SERVICE LINE
Page 2 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised April 26, 2013
9) Surface restoration, excluding grass (seeding, sodding or hydro-mulch paid 1
separately) 2
10) Furnishing, placing and compaction of embedment 3
11) Furnishing, placing and compaction of backfill 4
12) Clean-up 5
2. New Ductile Iron Sewer Service 6
a. Measurement 7
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Ductile Iron Sewer Service 8
complete in place. 9
b. Payment 10
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 11
will be paid for at the unit price bid per each “DIP Sewer Service” installed 12
for: 13
a) Various sizes 14
c. The price bid shall include: 15
1) Furnishing and installing New DIP Sanitary Sewer Service Line as 16
specified by the Drawings 17
2) Pavement removal 18
3) Excavation 19
4) Hauling 20
5) Disposal of excess material 21
6) Tee connection to main 22
7) Fittings 23
8) 2-way cleanout and cap with concrete pad 24
9) Surface restoration, excluding grass (seeding, sodding or hydro-mulch paid 25
separately) 26
10) Furnishing, placing and compaction of embedment 27
11) Furnishing, placing and compaction of backfill 28
12) Clean-up 29
3. New Bored Sewer Service 30
a. Measurement 31
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Bored Sewer Service complete 32
in place. 33
b. Payment 34
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 35
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit 36
price bid per each “Bored Sewer Service” installed for: 37
a) Various sizes 38
b) Various materials 39
c. The price shall include: 40
1) Furnishing and installing New Sanitary Sewer Service Line as specified by 41
the Drawings 42
2) Pavement removal 43
3) Excavation 44
4) Hauling 45
5) Disposal of excess material 46
6) Tee connection to main 47
7) Service Line 48
8) Fittings 49
33 31 50 - 3
SANITARY SEWER SERVICE CONNECTIONS AND SERVICE LINE
Page 3 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised April 26, 2013
9) 2-way cleanout and cap with concrete pad 1
10) Surface restoration surrounding 2-way cleanout 2
11) Furnishing, placing and compaction of embedment and backfill 3
12) Clean-up 4
4. Private Service Relocation 5
a. Measurement 6
1) Measured horizontally along the surface from center line to center line of 7
the fitting, manhole or appurtenance 8
b. Payment 9
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this 10
Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the 11
unit price bid per linear foot for “Private Sewer Service” installed for: 12
a) Various sizes 13
b) Various materials 14
c. The price shall include: 15
1) Obtaining appropriate Permit 16
2) Obtaining Right of Entry 17
3) Performing relocation as specified in the Drawings 18
4) Excavation 19
5) Hauling 20
6) Disposal of excess material 21
7) Service Line - private side by plumber 22
8) Fittings 23
9) Furnishing, placing and compaction of embedment 24
10) Furnishing, placing and compaction of backfill 25
11) Clean-up – surface restoration, excluding grass (seeding, sodding or hydro-26
mulch paid separately) 27
5. Sewer Service Reconnection 28
a. Measurement 29
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each “Sewer Service Reconnection” 30
complete in place from public service line connection to private service line 31
connection. 32
b. Payment 33
1) The work performed in conjunction with the relocation of a sewer service, 34
associated with private service line, fittings and cleanout 5 feet or less in 35
any direction from the centerline of the existing service line and the 36
materials furnished in accordance with this Item will be paid for at the unit 37
price per each “Sewer Service, Reconnection” performed for: 38
a) Various service sizes 39
c. The price bid shall include: 40
1) Private service line 41
2) Fittings 42
3) Private connection to sewer service 43
4) Pavement removal 44
5) Excavation 45
6) Hauling 46
7) Disposal of excess material 47
8) Surface restoration, excluding grass (seeding, sodding or hydro-mulch paid 48
separately) 49
33 31 50 - 4
SANITARY SEWER SERVICE CONNECTIONS AND SERVICE LINE
Page 4 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised April 26, 2013
9) 1
10) 2
11) Clean-up 3
6. 2-way Cleanout 4
a. Measurement 5
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each when only a “2-way Cleanout” 6
is installed. 7
b. Payment 8
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this 9
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “2-way Cleanout” 10
installed for: 11
a) Various sizes 12
b) Various materials 13
c. The price bid shall include: 14
1) Furnishing and installing the 2-way Cleanout and cap as specified in the 15
Drawings 16
2) Pavement removal 17
3) Concrete pad 18
4) Surface restoration, excluding grass (seeding, sodding or hydro-mulch paid 19
separately) 20
5) Hauling 21
6) Disposal of excess material 22
7) Furnishing, placing and compaction of backfill 23
8) Clean-up 24
7. Service Reinstatement 25
a. Measurement 26
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Reinstatement of Service 27
associated with the sewer main being rehabilitated by a trenchless method. 28
b. Payment 29
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this item 30
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit 31
price bid per each “Sewer Service, Reinstatement” for: 32
a) Various sizes 33
c. The price bid shall include: 34
1) Tap to existing main (if required) 35
2) Pavement removal 36
3) Excavation 37
4) Hauling 38
5) Disposal of excess material 39
6) Tee connection to main 40
7) Service line (if required) 41
8) Fittings 42
9) Furnishing, placing and compaction of embedment and backfill 43
10) Clean-up – surface restoration, excluding grass (seeding, sodding or hydro-44
mulch paid separately)references 45
B. Definitions 46
1. New Service 47
a. New service applies to the installation of a service with connection to a new or 48
existing sewer main. 49
33 31 50 - 5
SANITARY SEWER SERVICE CONNECTIONS AND SERVICE LINE
Page 5 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised April 26, 2013
b. The service materials would include service line, fittings and cleanout. 1
2. Bored Service 2
a. Bored service applies to the installation of a service with connection to a new or 3
existing sewer main including a bore under an existing road. 4
b. The service materials would include service line, fittings and cleanout. 5
3. Private Service Relocation 6
a. Private service relocation applies to the replacement of the existing sewer 7
service line on private property typically associated with the relocation of the 8
existing main. 9
b. Typical main relocation will be from a rear lot easement or alley to the street. 10
4. Service Reinstatement 11
a. Service reinstatement applies to the reconnection of an existing service to an 12
existing main that has been rehabilitated by trenchless methods such as pipe 13
enlargement (pipe bursting), slip lining or CIPP. 14
C. Reference Standards 15
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference 16
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this 17
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 18
2. ASTM International (ASTM): 19
a. ASTM D3034 Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) 20
(PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings 21
b. ASTM D1785 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic 22
Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120. 23
c. ASTM D2321 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic 24
Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications 25
d. ASTM D2412 Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading 26
Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading 27
e. ASTM D3212 Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic 28
Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals 29
3. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality 30
a. Title 30, Part I, Chapter 217, Subchapter C, Rule 217.54 – Criteria for Laying 31
Pipe and Rule 32
b. Title 30, Part I, Chapter 217, Subchapter C, 217.55 – Manholes and Related 33
Structures 34
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 35
A. Scheduling 36
1. Provide advance notice for service interruption to property owner and meet 37
requirements of Division 0. 38
1.4 SUBMITTALS 39
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 40
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 41
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 42
A. Product data shall include, if applicable: 43
1. Tee connection or saddle 44
33 31 50 - 6
SANITARY SEWER SERVICE CONNECTIONS AND SERVICE LINE
Page 6 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised April 26, 2013
2. Fittings (including type of cleanout) 1
3. Service line 2
B. Certificates 3
1. Furnish an affidavit certifying that service line and fittings meet the provisions of 4
this Section. 5
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 6
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 7
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 8
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 9
A. Storage and Handling Requirements 10
1. Gravity pipe shall be stored and handled in accordance with the manufacturer’s 11
guidelines. 12
2. Protect all parts such that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged 13
delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and 14
equipment are ready for operation. 15
3. Protect all equipment and parts against any damage during a prolonged period at the 16
site. 17
4. Prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being directly exposed to sunlight or 18
extremes in temperature. 19
5. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01 20
66 00. 21
1.10 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 22
1.11 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 23
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 24
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [NOT USED] 25
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, MATERIALS 26
A. Manufacturers 27
1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City’s Standard Products List will be 28
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00. 29
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 30
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a 31
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00. 32
3. The services and appurtenances shall be new and the product of a manufacturer 33
regularly engaged in the manufacturing of services and appurtenances having 34
similar service and size. 35
B. Materials/Design Criteria 36
1. Service Line and Fittings (including tee connections) 37
33 31 50 - 7
SANITARY SEWER SERVICE CONNECTIONS AND SERVICE LINE
Page 7 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised April 26, 2013
a. PVC pipe and fittings on public property shall be in accordance with Section 33 1
31 20. 2
b. PVC pipe and fittings on private property shall be Schedule 40 in accordance 3
with ASTM D1785. 4
c. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be coated with ceramic epoxy in accordance 5
with Section 33 11 10 and Section 33 11 11. 6
2. Service saddle 7
a. Service saddles shall only be allowed when connecting a new service to an 8
existing sanitary sewer main and shall: 9
1) Be a 1-piece prefabricated saddle, either polyethylene or PVC, with 10
neoprene gasket for seal against main 11
2) Use saddle to fit outside diameter of main 12
3) Use saddle with grooves to retain band clamps 13
4) Use at least 2 stainless steel band clamps for securing saddles to the main 14
b. Inserta tees service connections may not be used. 15
3. Cleanout 16
a. Cleanout stack material should be in accordance with City Standard Details or 17
as shown on Drawings. 18
b. For paved areas, provide a cast iron cleanout and cast iron lid. 19
c. For unpaved areas, provide PVC cleanout and polyethylene lid. 20
4. Coupling 21
a. For connections between new PVC pipe stub out and existing service line, use 22
rubber sleeve couplings with stainless steel double-band repair sleeves to 23
connect to the line. 24
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 25
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 26
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 27
3.1 INSTALLERS 28
A. A licensed plumber is required for installations of the service line on private property. 29
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 30
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 31
3.4 INSTALLATION 32
A. General 33
1. Install service line, fittings and cleanout as specified herein, as specified in Section 34
33 05 10 and in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations. 35
B. Handling 36
1. Haul and distribute service lines, fittings and cleanouts at the project site and handle 37
with care to avoid damage. 38
a. Inspect each segment of service line and reject or repair any damaged pipe 39
prior to lowering into the trench. 40
2. Do not handle the pipe in such a way that will damage the pipe. 41
33 31 50 - 8
SANITARY SEWER SERVICE CONNECTIONS AND SERVICE LINE
Page 8 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised April 26, 2013
C. Service Line 1
1. Lay service line at a minimum grade of 2 percent, as shown on City Standard 2
details, or at lines and grades as indicated in the Drawings. 3
2. If service line is installed by bore as an alternative to open cut, the cost associated 4
with open cut installation, such as pavement removal, trenching, embedment and 5
backfill and pavement patch will not be included as part of the bore installation. 6
3. Excavate and backfill trenches in accordance with 33 05 10. 7
4. Embed PVC Pipe in accordance with 33 05 10. 8
D. Cleanout 9
1. Install out of traffic areas such as driveways, streets and sidewalks whenever 10
possible. 11
a. When not possible, install cast iron cleanout stack and cap. 12
2. Install 2-way cleanout in non-paved areas in accordance with City Standard Details. 13
3. Install 2-way cleanout in paved areas in accordance with City Standard Details. 14
E. Service line connection to main 15
1. New service on new or replacement main 16
a. Determine location of service connections before main installation so the 17
service fittings can be installed during main installation. 18
b. Connect service line to main with a molded or fabricated tee fitting. 19
2. Reconnection to main after pipe enlargement 20
a. Tapping the existing main and installing a strap on tee connection may be used. 21
b. Allow the new main to recover from imposed stretch before tapping and service 22
installation. 23
1) Follow manufacturer’s recommendation for the length of time needed. 24
c. Tap main at 45 degree angle to horizontal when possible. 25
1) Avoid tapping the top of main. 26
d. Extend service line from main to property line or easement line before 27
connecting to the existing service line. 28
3. New service on existing main 29
a. Connect service line to main with a molded or fabricated tee fitting if possible. 30
b. Tapping the existing main and installing a strap on tee connection may be used. 31
F. Private Service Relocation 32
1. Requirements for the relocation of service line on private property 33
a. A licensed plumber must be used to install service line on private property. 34
b. Obtain permit from the Development Department for work on private property. 35
c. Pay for any inspection or permit fees associated with work on private property. 36
d. Verify (by Exploratory Excavation of Existing Utilities) the elevations at the 37
building cleanout and compare to data on the Drawings before beginning 38
service installation. 39
e. Submit elevation information to the City inspector. 40
f. Verify that the 2 percent slope installation requirement can be met. 41
1) If the 2 percent slope cannot be met, verify with the Engineer that line may 42
be installed at the lesser slope. 43
33 31 50 - 9
SANITARY SEWER SERVICE CONNECTIONS AND SERVICE LINE
Page 9 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN-102575
Revised April 26, 2013
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 1
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION 2
A. Service Relocation 3
1. All relocations that are not installed as designed or fail to meet the City code shall 4
be reinstalled at the Contractor’s expense. 5
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 6
A. Inspections 7
1. Private property service line requires approval by the City plumbing inspector 8
before final acceptance. 9
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 10
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 11
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 12
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 13
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 14
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 15
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 16
END OF SECTION 17
18
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson
Throughout – Deep Sewer Service was removed
1.2 – Measurement and Payment Items were revised to include relocation and
reconnection; Blue text was added for guidance in applying the bid Items; Price bid
lists revised to include clean-out caps, pads and surface restoration.
2/13/2013 F. Griffin
Added the phrase ‘, including grass’ to lines;
Part 1, 1.2.A.1.c.9, Part1, 1.2.A.2.c.9, Part 1,1.2.A.5.c.8, Part1, 1.2.A.6.c.4
Added the phrase ‘- surface restoration, including grass’ to lines;
Part 1, 1.2.A.4.c.11, Part 1, 1.2.A.7.10
Removed the phrase ‘surrounding 2-way cleanout’ from lines;
Part 1, 1.2.A.1.c.9, Part 1, 1.2.A.2.c.9, Part 1, 1.2.A.6.c.4
4/26/2013 F. Griffin
Revised lines with ‘including grass’ replacing with ‘excluding grass (seeding,
sodding or hydromulching paid separately)’
Included in Part 1, 1.2, A, 1, c, 9; Part 1, 1.2, A, 2, c, 9; Part 1, 1.2, A, 4, c, 11; Part 1,
1.2, A, 5, c, 8; Part 1, 1.2, A, 6, c, 4; Part 1, 1.2, A, 7, c, 10
19
33 39 10 - 1
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLE
Page 1 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 39 10
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sanitary Sewer Cast-in-Place Concrete Manholes
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In -Place Concrete
4. Section 03 80 00 – Modifications to Existing Concrete Structures
5. Section 33 01 30 – Sewer and Manhole Testing
6. Section 33 05 13 – Frame, Cover, and Grade Rings
7. Section 33 39 60 – Epoxy Liners for Sanitary Sewer Structures
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Manhole
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Manhole” installed for:
a) Various sizes
b) Various types
c. The price bid will include:
1) Manhole structure complete in place
2) Excavation
3) Forms
4) Concrete
5) Backfill
6) Foundation
7) Drop pipe
8) Stubs
9) Frame
10) Cover
11) Grade rings
12) Pipe connections
13) Pavement removal
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 10 - 2
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLE
Page 2 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
14) Hauling
15) Disposal of excess material
16) Placement and compaction of backfill
17) Clean-up
2. Extra Depth Manhole
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for added depth beyond 6 feet will be per vertical foot,
measured to the nearest 1/10 foot.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the
unit price bid per vertical foot for “Extra Depth Manhole” specified for:
a) Various sizes
c. The price bid will include:
1) Manhole structure complete in place
2) Excavation
3) Forms
4) Reinforcing steel (if required)
5) Concrete
6) Backfill
7) Foundation
8) Drop pipe
9) Stubs
10) Frame
11) Cover
12) Grade rings
13) Pipe connections
14) Pavement removal
15) Hauling
16) Disposal of excess material
17) Placement and compaction of backfill
18) Clean-up
3. Sanitary Sewer Junction Structure
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per each Sewer Junction Structure being
installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
lump sum bid per each “Sewer Junction Structure” location.
c. Price bid will include:
1) Junction Structure complete in place
2) Excavation
3) Forms
4) Reinforcing steel (if required)
5) Concrete
6) Backfill
7) Foundation
8) Drop pipe
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 10 - 3
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLE
Page 3 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
9) Stubs
10) Frame
11) Cover
12) Grade rings
13) Pipe connections
14) Pavement removal
15) Hauling
16) Disposal of excess material
17) Placement and compaction of backfill
18) Clean-up
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Definitions
1. Manhole Type
a. Standard Manhole (See City Standard Details)
1) Greater than 4 feet deep up to 6 feet deep
b. Standard Drop Manhole (See City Standard Details)
1) Same as Standard Manhole with external drop connection (s)
c. Type “A” Manhole (See City Standard Details)
1) Manhole set on a reinforced concrete block placed around 39-inch and
larger sewer pipe
d. Shallow Manhole (See City Standard Details)
1) Less than 4 feet deep with formed invert for sewer pipe diameters smaller
than 39-inch
2. Manhole Size
a. 4 foot diameter
1) Used with pipe ranging from 8-inch to 15-inch
b. 5 foot diameter
1) Used with pipe ranging from 18-inch to 36-inch
c. See specific manhole design on Drawings for pipes larger than 36-inch.
B. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. D4258, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating.
b. D4259, Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Drop connection materials
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 10 - 4
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLE
Page 4 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. Pipe connections at manhole walls
3. Stubs and stub plugs
4. Admixtures
5. Concrete Mix Design
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City’s Standard Products List will be
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
B. Materials
1. Concrete – Conform to Section 03 30 00.
2. Reinforcing Steel – Conform to Section 03 21 00.
3. Frame and Cover – Conform to Section 33 05 13.
4. Grade Ring – Conform to Section 33 05 13.
5. Pipe Connections
a. Pipe connections can be premolded pipe adapter, flexible locked-in boot
adapter, or integrally cast gasket channel and gasket.
6. Interior Coating or Liner – Conform to Section 33 39 60, if required.
7. Exterior Coating
a. Use Coal Tar Bitumastic for below grade damp proofing.
b. Dry film thickness shall be no less than12 mils and no greater than 30 mils.
c. Solids content is 68 percent by volume ± 2 percent.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 10 - 5
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLE
Page 5 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Evaluation and Assessment
1. Verify lines and grades are in accordance to the Drawings.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Foundation Preparation
1. Excavate 8 inches below manhole foundation.
2. Replace excavated soil with course aggregate, creating a stable base for the
manhole construction.
a. If soil conditions or ground water prevent use of course aggregate base a 2-inch
mud slab may be substituted.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Manhole
1. Construct manhole to dimensions shown on Drawings.
2. Cast manhole foundation and wall monolithically.
a. A cold joint with water stop is allowed when the manhole depth exceeds 12
feet.
b. No other joints are allowed unless shown on Drawings.
3. Place, finish and cure concrete according to Section 03 30 00.
a. Manholes must cure 3 days before backfilling around structure.
B. Pipe connection at Manhole
1. Do not construct joints of sewer pipe within wall sections of manhole.
C. Invert
1. Construct invert channels to provide a smooth waterway with no disruption of flow
at pipe-manhole connections.
2. For direction changes of mains, construct channels tangent to mains with maximum
possible radius of curvature.
a. Provide curves for side inlets.
3. Sewer pipe may be laid through the manhole and the top ½ of the pipe removed to
facilitate manhole construction.
4. For all standard manholes provide full depth invert.
5. For example, if 8-inch pipe is connected to manhole, construct the invert to full 8
inches in depth.
D. Drop Manhole Connection
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 10 - 6
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLE
Page 6 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Install drop connection when sewer line enters manhole higher than 24 inches
above the invert.
E. Final Rim Elevation
1. Install concrete grade rings for height adjustment.
a. Construct grade ring on load bearing shoulder of manhole.
b. Use sealant between rings as shown on Drawings.
2. Set frame on top of manhole or grade rings using continuous water sealant.
3. Remove debris, stones and dirt to ensure a watertight seal.
4. Do not use steel shims, wood, stones or other unspecified material to obtain the
final surface elevation of the manhole frame.
F. Internal coating
1. Internal coating application will conform to Section 33 39 60, if required by
Drawings.
G. External coating
1. Remove dirt, dust, oil and other contaminants that could interfere with adhesion of
the coating.
2. Cure for 3 days before backfilling around structure.
3. Coat the same date the forms are removed.
4. Prepare surface in accordance with ASTM D4258 and ASTM D4259.
5. Application will follow manufacturer’s recommendation.
H. Modifications and Pipe Penetrations
1. Conform to Section 03 80 00.
I. Junction Structures
1. All structures shall be installed as specified in Drawings.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests and Inspections
1. Perform vacuum test in accordance with Section 33 01 30.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 10 - 7
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLE
Page 7 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson 1.2.A.1.c. – reinforcing steel removed from items to be included in price bid
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 20 - 1
PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE
Page 1 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 39 20
PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sanitary Sewer, Water Appurtenance, or Reclaimed Water Appurtenance Precast
Concrete Manholes
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
4. Section 03 80 00 – Modifications to Existing Concrete Structures
5. Section 33 01 30 – Sewer and Manhole Testing
6. Section 33 05 13 – Frame, Cover, and Grade Rings
7. Section 33 39 60 – Epoxy Liners for Sanitary Sewer Structures
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Manhole
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each concrete manhole installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Manhole” installed for:
a) Various sizes
b) Various types
c. The price bid will include:
1) Manhole structure complete in place
2) Excavation
3) Forms
4) Reinforcing steel (if required)
5) Concrete
6) Backfill
7) Foundation
8) Drop pipe
9) Stubs
10) Frame
11) Cover
12) Grade rings
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 20 - 2
PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE
Page 2 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
13) Pipe connections
14) Pavement removal
15) Hauling
16) Disposal of excess material
17) Placement and compaction of backfill
18) Clean-up
2. Extra Depth Manhole
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for added depth beyond 6 feet will be per vertical foot,
measured to the nearest 1/10 foot.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per vertical foot for “Extra Depth Manhole” specified for:
a) Various sizes
c. The price bid will include:
1) Manhole structure complete in place
2) Excavation
3) Forms
4) Reinforcing steel (if required)
5) Concrete
6) Backfill
7) Foundation
8) Drop pipe
9) Stubs
10) Frame
11) Cover
12) Grade rings
13) Pipe connections
14) Pavement removal
15) Hauling
16) Disposal of excess material
17) Placement and compaction of backfill
18) Clean-up
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Definitions
1. Manhole Type
a. Standard Manhole (See City Standard Details)
1) Greater than 4 feet deep up to 6 feet deep
b. Standard Drop Manhole (See City Standard Details)
1) Same as Standard Manhole with external drop connection(s)
c. Type “A” Manhole (See City Standard Details)
1) Manhole set on a reinforced concrete block placed around 39-inch and
larger sewer pipe.
d. Shallow Manhole (See City Standard Details)
1) Less than four 4 deep with formed invert for sewer pipe diameters smaller
than 39-inch
2. Manhole Size
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 20 - 3
PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE
Page 3 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a. 4 foot diameter
1) Used with pipe ranging from 8-inch to 15-inch
b. 5 foot diameter
1) Used with pipe ranging from 18-inch to 36-inch
2) See specific manhole design on Drawings for pipes larger than 36-inch.
B. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. C443, Standard Specification for Joint for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using
Rubber Gaskets
b. C478, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Sections.
c. C923, Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced
Concrete Manholes Structures, Pipes, and Laterals.
d. D1187, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsion for Use as Protective
Coatings for Metal
e. D1227, Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective
Coating for Roofing
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Precast Concrete Manhole
2. Drop connection materials
3. Pipe connections at manhole walls
4. Stubs and stub plugs
5. Admixtures
6. Concrete Mix Design
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 20 - 4
PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE
Page 4 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Manufacturer’s Warranty shall be in accordance with Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, AND MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City’s Standard Products List will be
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
B. Materials
1. Precast Reinforced Concrete Sections – Conform to ASTM C478.
2. Precast Joints
a. Provide gasketed joints in accordance with ASTM C443.
b. Minimize number of segments.
c. Use long joints at the bottom and shorter joints toward the top.
d. Include manufacturer’s stamp on each section.
3. Lifting Devices
a. Manhole sections and cones may be furnished with lift lugs or lift holes.
1) If lift lugs are provided, place 180 degrees apart.
2) If lift holes are provided, place 180 degrees apart and grout during manhole
installation.
4. Frame and Cover – Conform to Section 33 05 13.
5. Grade Ring – Conform to Section 33 05 13 and ASTM C478.
6. Pipe Connections
a. Utilize either an integrally cast embedded pipe connector or a boot-type
connector installed in a circular block out opening conforming to ASTM C923.
7. Steps
a. No steps are allowed.
8. Interior Coating or Liner – Conform to Section 33 39 60.
9. Exterior Coating
a. Coat with non-fibered asphaltic emulsion in accordance with ASTM D1187
Type I and ASTM D1227 Type III Class I.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 20 - 5
PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE
Page 5 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Evaluation and Assessment
1. Verify lines and grades are in accordance to the Drawings.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Foundation Preparation
1. Excavate 8 inches below manhole foundation.
2. Replace excavated soil with course aggregate; creating a stable base for manhole
construction.
a. If soil conditions or ground water prevent use of course aggregate base a 2-inch
mud slab may be substituted.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Manhole
1. Construct manhole to dimensions shown on Drawings.
2. Precast Sections
a. Provide bell-and-spigot design incorporating a premolded joint sealing
compound for wastewater use.
b. Clean bell spigot and gaskets, lubricate and join.
c. Minimize number of segments.
d. Use long joints used at the bottom and shorter joints toward the top.
B. Invert
1. Construct invert channels to provide a smooth waterway with no disruption of flow
at pipe-manhole connections.
2. For direction changes of mains, construct channels tangent to mains with maximum
possible radius of curvature.
a. Provide curves for side inlets.
3. For all standard manholes provide full depth invert.
4. For example, if 8-inch pipe in connected to manhole construct the invert to full 8
inches in depth.
C. Drop Manhole Connection
1. Install drop connection when sewer line enters manhole higher than 24 inches
above the invert.
D. Final Rim Elevation
1. Install concrete grade rings for height adjustment.
a. Construct grade ring on load bearing shoulder of manhole.
b. Use sealant between rings as shown on Drawings.
2. Set frame on top of manhole or grade rings using continuous water sealant.
3. Remove debris, stones and dirt to ensure a watertight seal.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 20 - 6
PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE
Page 6 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
4. Do not use steel shims, wood, stones or other unspecified material to obtain the
final surface elevation of the manhole frame.
E. Internal coating
1. Internal coating application will conform to Section 33 39 60, if required by
Drawings.
F. External coating
1. Remove dirt, dust, oil and other contaminants that could interfere with adhesion of
the coating.
2. Cure manhole for 3 days before backfilling around the structure.
3. Application will follow manufacturer’s recommendation.
G. Modifications and Pipe Penetrations
1. Conform to Section 03 80 00.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests and Inspections
1. Perform vacuum test in accordance with Section 33 01 30.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
12/20/2012 D. Johnson
1.1.A.1 – Modified to include precast manholes for water and reclaimed water
applications
1.3.B.2 – Modified to include ASTM C443, D1187 and D1227 as references
2.2.B.1-3 – Modified in accordance with new ASTM references
2.2.B.10 – Modified in accordance with new ASTM references
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 60 - 1
LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES
Page 1 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised September 23, 2020
SECTION 33 39 60 1
LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SUMMARY 4
A. Section Includes : 5
1. Application of a high-build epoxy coating system (or modified polymer liner 6
system, i.e. SpectraShield) to concrete utility structures such as manholes, lift 7
station wet wells, junction boxes or other concrete facilities that may need 8
protection from corrosive materials . This covers rehabilitation of existing sanitary 9
sewer structures and newly installed sanitary sewer structures. 10
2. For sanitary sewer mains 8-inch diameter and larger, use of a structural liner 11
system, Warren Environmental System 301, ARC S1HB by A.W. Chesterton 12
Company, is acceptable. 13
3. For sanitary sewer mains 8-inch diameter and smaller, and less than 6-feet in depth, 14
use of a liner system, SpectraShield, is acceptable. 15
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 16
1. None. 17
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 18
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the 19
Contract 20
2. Division 1 – General Requirements 21
3. Section 33 01 30 – Sewer and Manhole Testing 22
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 23
A. Measurement and Payment 24
1. Manholes 25
a. Measurement 26
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per vertical foot of coating as measured 27
from 2-inches below the bottom of the removable cover (not frame) to the top 28
of the bench. This includes lining of all exposed concrete, the bench and 29
invert, thru the use of flow control de vices (i.e. temporary plug s , sand 30
bags), to temporarily block flow. However, as a last resort and with prior 31
written approval from Water Field Operations, if the flow can not be 32
blocked temporarily, then the lining would stop 3 -inches from the edge of 33
the water in the pipe. This item covers the total vertical footage for the 34
specific bid items of various manhole sizes (i.e. 4 foot diameter, 5 foot 35
diameter, Specific Manhole Designs for lines larger than 36-inch, etc.) and 36
specific types (Standard Manhole, Drop Manhole, Type “A” Manhole, 37
Shallow Manhole, including additional depth beyond 6 foot). 38
b. Payment 39
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 60 - 2
LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES
Page 2 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised September 23, 2020
1) The work performed, and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 1
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit 2
price bid per vertical foot of “Manhole Liner” applied. 3
c. The price bid shall include: 4
1) Removal of roots 5
2) Removal of existing coatings 6
3) Eliminating any leaks 7
4) Removal of steps 8
5) Repair/seal connection of the existing frame to chimney 9
6) Repair s of any cracks in the existing s tructure chimney, corbel (cone), wall, 10
bench, including any replacement of damaged rebar , pipe 11
7) Surface cleaning 12
8) Furnishing and installing Liner as specified by the Drawings 13
9) Hauling 14
10) Disposal of excess material 15
11) Site Clean -up 16
12) Manhole and Invert Cleaning 17
13) Testing 18
14) Re-Testing 19
2. Non-Manhole Structures 20
a. Measurement 21
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per square foot of area where the 22
coating is applied. 23
b. Payment 24
1) The work performed, and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 25
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the unit 26
price bid per square foot of “Structure Liner ” applied. 27
c. The price bid shall include: 28
1) Removal of roots 29
2) Removal of existing coatings 30
3) Eliminating any leaks 31
4) Removal of steps 32
5) Repair/seal connection of the existing frame to chimney 33
6) Repairs of any cracks in the existing structure chimney, corbel (cone), wall, 34
bench, including any replacement of damaged rebar, pipe 35
7) Surface cleaning 36
8) Furnishing and installing Liner as specified by the Drawing s 37
9) Hauling 38
10) Disposal of excess material 39
11) Site Clean -up 40
12) Manhole and Invert Cleaning 41
13) Testing 42
14) Re-Testing 43
1.3 REFERENCES 44
A. Reference Standards 45
1. Ref erence standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference 46
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this 47
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 48
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 60 - 3
LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES
Page 3 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised September 23, 2020
2. ASTM International (ASTM): 1
a. D543, Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical 2
Reagents. 3
b. D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics . 4
c. D695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. 5
d. D790, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and 6
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials . 7
e. D4060, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by 8
the Taber Abraser. 9
f. D4414, Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notch 10
Gages . 11
g. D7234, Stand Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion strength of Coatings on 12
Concrete Using Portable Pull-Off Adhesion Testers. 13
3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 14
4. NACE International (NACE). Published standards from the National 15
Association of Corrosion Engineers 16
5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). Employ a trench 17
safety system in accordance with Section 18
6. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, (RCRA). 19
7. The Society for Protective Coatings/NACE International (SSPC/NACE): 20
a. SP 13/NACE No. 6, Surface Preparation of Concrete. This includes 21
monitoring for hydrogen sulfide, methane, or low oxygen. Also includes 22
flow control equipment. Surface preparation equipment may include high 23
pressure water cleaning (3500 psi) and shall be suited to provide a surface 24
compatible for installation of the liner system. Surface preparation shall 25
produce a clean, abraded, and sound surface, with no evidence of loose 26
concrete, loose brick, loose mortar, oil, grease, rust, scale, other 27
contaminants or debris, and shall display a surface profile suitable for 28
application of the liner system. 29
b. SP0188, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on 30
Conductive Subs trates 31
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUI REMENTS [NOT USED] 32
1.5 SUBMITTALS 33
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 34
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 35
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTA LS 36
A. Product Data 37
1. Technical data sheet on each product used 38
2. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each product used 39
3. Copies of independent testing performed on the coating product indicating the 40
product meets the requirements as specified herein 41
4. Technical data sheet and project specific data for repair materials to be topcoated 42
with the coating product including application, cure time and surface preparation 43
procedures 44
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 60 - 4
LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES
Page 4 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised September 23, 2020
5. Material and method for repair of leaks or cracks in the structure. This 1
applies to repair work on both existing structures, manholes and new installed 2
manholes (including Developer projects) that have been identified with cracks, 3
voids, signs of infiltration, other structural defects or other related 4
construction damage. 5
B. Contractor Data 6
1. Current documentation from coating product manufacturer certifying Contractor’s 7
training (and/or licensed) as an approved installer and equipment complies with the 8
Quality Assurance requirements specified herein 9
2. 5 recent references of Contractor indicating successful application of coating 10
product(s) of the same material type as specified herein, applied by spray 11
application within the municipal wastewater environment. References shall include 12
at least the following: owner name, City inspector name and phone number, project 13
name/number, size and linear footage of sanitary sewer main, manhole diameter, 14
structure dimensions and number of each, square feet (or vertical feet) of product 15
installed, contract cost, and contract duration. Contractor must demonstrate a 16
successful history of installing the product in structures of similar size and scope 17
and update this each time the contractor applies for and renews its Prequalification 18
for the Water Department. 19
3. For Developer Projects – at the time of Contractor selection, the 20
Prequalification Statement, Section 00 45 12 shall be submitted to the City, 21
clearly indicating the contractor prequalified for installation of 22
structure/manhole liner. No other bid submittals shall be accepted that 23
include lining contractors whose prequalification term has expired or is not on 24
the active contractor list at the time of Contractor selection. If the submitted 25
forms for this project not acceptable, t he City will refer to the current active 26
contractor prequalification list, and the Contractor shall select the appropriate 27
manhole lining subcontractor based on the project scope of work. The 28
Contractor shall then provide the revised Prequalification Statement Section 29
00 45 12 for review and acceptance. 30
4. This Specification (along with the CCTV Specification) and the associated 31
submittals including the work plan, QA/QC, testing, closeout documents, etc. 32
shall be discussed as part of the Pre-Construction Agenda for each project 33
(Developer projects included). 34
5. For any project, Developer projects included - If the Contractor proceeds with 35
application of an unapproved lining product and/or using an unqualified 36
subc ontractor for lining, the City shall recommend either repair and/or 37
removal of any defective lining material and have the Contractor select an 38
approved subcontractor that can apply the approved lining materials. This 39
work shall be at no additional cost to the City. 40
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 60 - 5
LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES
Page 5 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised September 23, 2020
6. Schedule and Sequence of Construction – Considering this is a specialized 1
installation performed by only certified applicators, the schedule for this work 2
has a lead time that shall be included in the Contractor’s schedule. If the 3
Contractor does not provide written notification and/or fails to schedule the 4
subcontractor in advance, the City shall not be responsible for any additional 5
costs and/or delays caused by the Contractor. Contractor shall provide the 6
updated construction schedule and work plan (including manhole preparation, 7
repairs, lining, testing, etc.) in accordance with Section 01 32 16 at least 1 week 8
prior to start of lining activities to the City Inspector, City Project Manager, 9
Water Field Operations, and Water Capital Projects. Equipment shall be on -10
site and in working order for the testing. If the Contractor is unable to have 11
equipment ready for testing, the test date shall be rescheduled acco rdingly 12
with the Inspector. The u pdated construction schedule shall clearly indicate 13
all related construction activities at the manholes before and after lining. All 14
paving activities, including any final grade adjustments for manholes outside 15
pavement, shall be completed before Contractor begins lining work. After 16
liner installation, Contractor shall wait a minimum of 48 hours to allow the 17
liner material to fully cure before returning the system to normal service. 18
CCTV per Section 33 01 31 shall be scheduled after the lining has been 19
completed to document and confirm the manholes have been lined. 20
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 21
A. Testing Documentation 22
1. Provide test results required in Section 2.4 and Section 3.7 to City. 23
a. Include the following manhole or structure locat ion information: 24
1) Existing s anitary sewer main/lateral number. For Developer Projects, 25
provide proposed sanitary sewer line number as designated on the plans 26
and provide the existing sanitary sewer main/lateral number at 27
connection to the existing manhole (if applicable). 28
2) Station number 29
3) GIS ID number (if provided during construction). 30
b. Inspection report of each manhole/structure tested (See attached sample 31
reports to be used for Wet Film Thickness, Manhole Holiday/Spark 32
Detection, and Manhole Adhesion Test). 33
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 34
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE 35
A. Qualifications 36
1. Contractor 37
a. Be trained by, or have training approved and certified by, the coating product 38
manufacturer for the handling, mixing, application and inspection of the coating 39
product(s) to be used as specified herein 40
b. Initiate and enforce quality control procedures consistent with the coating 41
product(s) manufacturer recommendations and applicable NACE or SSPC 42
standards as referenced herein 43
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 44
A. Keep materials dry, protected from weather and stored under cover. 45
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 60 - 6
LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES
Page 6 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised September 23, 2020
B. Store coating materials between 50 degrees F and 90 degrees F. 1
C. Do not store near flame, heat or strong oxidants. 2
D. Handle coating materials according to their material safety data sheets . 3
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS 4
A. Provide c onfined space entry, flow diversion and/or bypass plans as necessary to 5
perform the specified work. Active flows shall be diverted with flow through plugs as 6
required to ensure that flow is maintained off the surfaces to be lined. 7
1.12 WARRANTY 8
A. Contractor Warranty 9
1. Contractor’s Warranty shall be in accordance with Division 0. 10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 11
2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR ] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 12
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, MATERIALS 13
A. Repair and Resurfacing Products 14
1. Compatible with the specified coating product(s) in order to bond effectively, thus 15
forming a composite system 16
2. Used and applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations 17
3. The repair and resurfacing products must meet the following: 18
a. 100 percent solids, solvent-free epoxy grout specifically formulated for epoxy 19
topcoating compatibility 20
b. Factory blended, rapid setting, high early strength, fiber reinforced, non-shrink 21
repair mortar that can be toweled or pneumatically spray applied and 22
specifically formulated to be suitable for topcoating with the specified coating 23
product used 24
B. Coating Product 25
1. Capable of being installed and curing properly within a manhole or concrete utility 26
environment 27
2. Resistant to all forms of chemical or bacteriological attack found in municipal 28
sanitary sewer systems; and, capable of adhering to typical manhole structure 29
substrates 30
3. The 100 percent solids, solvent-free ultra high-build epoxy system shall exhibit the 31
following characteristics: 32
a. Application Temperature – 50 degrees F, minimum 33
b. Thickness – 125 mils minimum for newly installed structures; 250 mils 34
minimum for rehabilitation of existing structures (Warren Environmental 35
System 301, ARC S1HB by A.W. Chesterton Company) 36
c. Color – White, Light Blue, or Beige 37
d. Compressive Strength (per ASTM D695) – 8,800 psi minimum 38
e. Tensile Strength (per ASTM D638) – 7,500 psi minimum 39
f. Hardness, Shore D (per ASTM D4541) – 70 minimum 40
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 60 - 7
LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES
Page 7 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised September 23, 2020
g. Abrasion Resistance (per ASTM D4060 CS 17F Wheel) – 80 mg loss 1
maximum 2
h. Flexural Modulus (per ASTM D790) – 400,000 psi minimum 3
i. Flexural Strength (per ASTM D790) – 12,000 psi minimum 4
j. Adhesion to Concrete, mode of failure (ASTM D4541): Substrate (concrete) 5
failure 6
k. Chemical Resistance (per ASTM D543/G20) all types of service for: 7
1) Municipal sanitary sewer environment 8
2) Sulfuric acid, 70 percent 9
3) Sodium hydroxide, 20 percent 10
4. Or, the multi-layer modified polyurea and polyurethane shall exhibit the following 11
characteristics: 12
a. Application Temperature – 50 degrees F, minimum 13
b. Thickness – 500 mils minimum (SpectraShield) 14
c. Moisture Barrier and Final Corrosion Barrier 15
1) Color – Pink 16
2) Tensile Strength (per ASTM D412) – 2550 psi minimum 17
3) Hardness, Shore D (per ASTM D2240) – 56 minimum 18
4) Abrasion Resistance (per ASTM D4060) – 20 mg loss maximum 19
5) Percent Elongation (per ASTM D412) – 269 20
d. Surfacer 21
1) Compressive Strength (per ASTM D1621) – 100 psi minimum 22
2) Density (per ASTM D1622) – 5 lbs/cu ft minimum 23
3) Shear Strength (per ASTM C273) – 230 psi minimum 24
4) Closed Cell Content (per ASTM D1940) – >95% 25
C. Coating Application Equipment 26
1. Manufacturer approved heated plural component spray equipment 27
2. Hard to reach areas, primer application and touch-up may be performed using hand 28
tools. 29
3. Applicator shall use approved specialty equipment that is adequate in size, capacity, 30
and number sufficient to accomplish the work in a timely manner. 31
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 32
2.4 SOURC E QUALITY CONTROL 33
A. Coating Thickness Testing 34
1. Film Thickness Testing for epoxy systems 35
a. Take wet film thickness gauge measurements per ASTM D4414 – Standard 36
Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notch Gages at 3 locations 37
within the manhole, 2 spaced equally apart along the wall and 1 on the bench. 38
1) Document and attest measurements and provide to the City. 39
2. Thickness Testing for modified polymer liner system 40
a. Upon installation of the Final Corrosion Barrier insert probe in to substrate for 41
depth of system measurement at 3 locations within the manhole, 2 spaced 42
equally apart along the wall and 1 on the bench. 43
3. Document all testing results and provide to the City. 44
B. Non-Conforming Work 45
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 60 - 8
LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES
Page 8 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised September 23, 2020
1. City reserves the right to require additional testing depending on the rate of failure. 1
2. City will select testing locations. 2
C. Testing Frequency 3
1. Projects with 10 or less manholes and/or structures test all. 4
2. Projects with greater than 10 manholes and/or structures, test at least 10 and test 25 5
percent of manholes and/or structures after the first 10. 6
3. City will select the manholes and/or structures to be tested. 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION 8
3.1 INSTALLERS 9
A. All installers shall be certified applicators approved by the manufacturers. Applicator 10
shall use adequate number of skilled workmen that have been trained and experienced for 11
the approved product. 12
13
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 14
3.3 PREPARATION 15
A. Manhole Preparation 16
1. Stop active flows via damming , plugging or diverting as required to ensure all 17
liquids are maintained below or away from the surfaces to be coated. 18
2. Maintain temperature of the surface to be coated between 40 and 120 degrees F. 19
3. Shield specified surfaces to avoid exposure of direct sunlight or other intense heat 20
source. 21
a. Where varying surface temperatures do exist, coating installation should be 22
scheduled when the temperature is falling versus rising. 23
B. Surface Preparation 24
1. Remove oils, roots, grease, incompatible existing coatings, waxes, form release, 25
curing compounds, efflorescence, sealers, salts or other contaminants which may 26
affect the performance and adhesion of the coating to the substrate. Remove any 27
steps found in the structure. 28
2. Remove concrete and/or mortar damaged by corrosion, chemical attack or other 29
means of degradation so that only sound substrate remains. 30
3. Surface preparation method, or c ombination of methods, that may be used include 31
high pressure water cleaning, high pressure water jetting, abrasive blasting, 32
shotblasting, grinding, scarifying, detergent water cleaning, hot water blasting and 33
others as described in SSPC SP 13/NACE No. 6. 34
4. All methods used shall be performed in a manner that provides a uniform, sound, 35
clean, neutralized, surface suitable for the specified coating product. 36
5. After completion of surface preparation, inspect for leaks, cracks, holes, exposed 37
rebar, ring and cover condition, invert condition, and inlet/outlet pipe condition. 38
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 60 - 9
LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES
Page 9 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised September 23, 2020
6. After defects in the structure have been identified, seal cracks, repair exposed rebar 1
with new rebar to match existing, repair leaks and cracks with grout or other 2
methods approved by the Manufacturer. All new rebar shall be embedded in 1 ½ 3
inch epoxy mastic. Replace/seal connection between existing frame and chimney if 4
it is found loose or not attached. 5
7. The repair materials shall be trowel or spray applied by the lining Contractor 6
utilizing proper equipment on to specified surfaces. The equipment shall be 7
specially designed to accurately ratio and apply the specified materials and 8
shall be regularly maintained and in proper working order. The repair 9
mortar and epoxy topcoat must share the same epoxy matrix to ensure a 10
bonded weld. No cementitious repair material , quick setting high strength 11
concrete with latex or curing agent additives, or quick set mortars will be 12
allowed. Proper surface preparation procedures must be followed to ensur e 13
adequate bond strength to any surface to be coated. New cement cure time is 14
at least 30 days prior to coating. The repair materials as specified in this 15
Section shall apply to both existing structures and new installed structures. 16
This includes Developer projects , in which new installed structures/manholes 17
have been identified with either cracks, voids, signs of infiltration, other 18
structural defects or other related construction damage . 19
3.4 INSTALLATION 20
A. General 21
1. Perform coating after the sewer line replacement/repairs, grade adjustments and 22
grouting are complete. 23
2. Perform application procedures per recommendations of the coating product 24
manufacturer, including environmental controls, product handling, mixing and 25
application. 26
B. Temperature 27
1. Only perform application if surface temperature is between 40 and 120 degrees F. 28
2. Make no application if freezing is expected to occur inside the manhole within 24 29
hours after application. 30
C. Coating 31
1. Spray apply per manufacturer’s recommendation at a minimum film thickness as 32
noted in Section 2.2.B. 33
2. Apply coating from bottom of manhole frame to the bench/trough, including the 34
bench/trough. 35
3. After walls are coated, remove bench covers and spray bench/trough to at least the 36
same thickness as the walls. 37
4. Apply any topcoat or additional c oats within the product’s recoat window. 38
a. Additional surface preparation is required if the recoat window is exceeded. 39
5. Allow a minimum of 3 hours of cure time or be set hard to touch before reactivating 40
flow. 41
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 60 - 10
LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES
Page 10 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised September 23, 2020
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 1
3.6 RE-INSTALLATIO N [NOT USED] 2
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3
A. Each structure will be visually inspected by the City the same day following the 4
application. 5
B. Groundwater infiltration of the system shall be zero. 6
C. All pipe connections shall be open and clear. 7
D. The inspector will chec k for deficienc ies, pinholes , voids, cracks, uncured spots, 8
delamination, and thin spots. Any deficiencies in the liner shall be marked and repaired 9
according to the procedures outlined by the Manufacturer. 10
E. If leaks are detected they will be chipped back, plugged and coated immediately with 11
protective epoxy resin coating. 12
1. Make repair 24 hours after leak detection. 13
F. Post Installation Coating Tests 14
1. After liner installation, conduct post-CCTV in accordance with Section 33 01 15
31. Video camera shall be lowered from the top of the manhole to the invert, 16
to video all lined surfaces, prior to beginning post-CCTV of the main. 17
Payment for this work is subsidiary to the cost for the post-CCTV of the main. 18
2. Holiday Detection Testing 19
a. Holiday Detection test the liner per NACE SP0188 – Discontinuity (Holiday) 20
Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates. Mark all 21
detected holidays. Repair all holidays in accordance to coating manufacturer’s 22
recommendations. 23
1) Document and attest all test results repairs m ade and provide to the 24
City (see attached sample structure/manhole report). 25
2) For example, the typica l testing requirements are 100 volts per mil to 26
12,500 volts to test 125 mils. Contractor shall mark any location that 27
shows a spark or potential for a pinhole and repair these locations per 28
manufacturer recommendations. 29
3. Adhesion Testing 30
a. Adhesion test the liner at a minimum of three locations (cone area, mid-section, 31
and bottom of the structure). For structures exceeding 6-feet add one additional 32
test for every additional 6-feet. For example: 6-foot manhole – 3 tests. 6-feet, 1-33
inch manhole thru 11-feet, 11-inch manhole – 4 tests, 12-foot manhole – 5 tests. 34
Etc… Tests performed per ASTM D7234 – Standard Test Method for Pull-Off 35
Adhesion Strength of Coatings on Concrete Using Portable Pull-Off Adhesion 36
Testers. 37
1) The adhesive used to attach the dollies shall have a tensile strength greater 38
that the liner. 39
2) Failure of the dolly adhesive is deemed a non-test and requires retesting. 40
3) 2/3rds of the pulls shall exceed 300 psi or concrete failure with more than 41
50% of the subsurface adhered to the coating. If over 1/3rd fail, additional tests 42
may be required by the City. If additional tests fail the City may require 43
removal and replacement of the liner at the contractor’s expense. 44
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 60 - 11
LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES
Page 11 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised September 23, 2020
4. A bonded third-party testing company shall perform the testing. 1
5. Or Contractor may perform tests if witnessed by representative of the coating 2
manufacturer. Coating manufacturer representative to provide certification that 3
Contractor performed tests in accordance with noted standards. 4
G. Non-Conforming Work 5
1. City reserves the right to require additional testing depending on the rate of failure. 6
2. City will select testing locations. 7
3. Repair all defects according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. 8
H. Testing Frequency 9
1. Projects with 10 or less manholes and/or structures test all. 10
2. Projects with greater than 10 manholes and/or structures, test at least 10 and test 25 11
percent of manholes and/or structures after the first 10. 12
3. City will select the manholes an d/or structures to be tested. 13
I. Test manhole for final acceptance according to Section 33 01 30. 14
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 15
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 16
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 17
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES 18
A. Provide all test results from testing per Section 2.4 and applicator certifications per 19
Section 3.1. and in accordance with Section 1.7. 20
B. Upon final completion of the work, the manufacturer and/or the testing firm will 21
provide a written certification of proper application to the City. 22
C. The certification will confirm that the deficient areas were repaired in accordance with 23
the procedure set forth in this Specification. The final report will detail the location of the 24
repairs in the structure and description of the repairs. See attached testing forms. 25
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 26
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 27
3.14 ATTACHMENTS 28
A. Pos t Installation Inspection Form – Vacuum T est 29
B. Pos t Installat ion I nspection Form – Wet Film Thickness 30
C. Post Installation Inspection Form – Holida y/Spark Detection 31
D. Post Installation Ins pection Form – Manhole Adhesion T est 32
END OF SECTION 33
34
35
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 39 60 - 12
LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES
Page 12 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised September 23, 2020
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
0 9 -2 3 -2020 J. Kasavich
Further clarification on the sizes and types of manholes under Part 1.2. Removal of
Raven Lining system and inclusion of SpectraShield and Warren Environmental
System 301, and ARC S1HB by A.W. Chesterton Company . Additional source
quality control and field quality control test requirements. Added testing forms for
Wet Film Thickness, Manhole Holiday/Spark Detection, and Manhole Adhesion
Test .
1
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
POST INSTALLA TION
MANHOLE VACUUM TEST FORM
Company Name :
Address:
Phone #: Cell: Work:
Coating Date: Crew Leader:
Project Name: Project #:
Contractor:
Owner:
Indicate Pass/Fail:
Location of Structure :
Manhole Pour or Placement Date:
MANHOLE INFORMATION
Line & Station #: Other:
Structure Type: (check one) 4’ DI MH TYPE A FLDW DIV BOX
5’ DI MH TYPE B FLDW DIV BOX
6’ DI MH JUNCTION BOX
7’ DI MH SPHIPHON ENTRY BOX
METERING STATION
Vacuum Test Results
Inspection Date: Repair Locations
Inspection Company:
Inspector Name:
Repair Date:
Repair Location:
Type of Repair:
Repair Materials:
Comments:
POST INSTALLA TION
MANHOLE LINER INSPECTION FORM
WET FILM THICKNESS
Company Name :
Address:
Phone #: Cell: Work:
Coating Date: Crew Leader:
Project Name: Project #:
Contractor:
Owner:
Thickness of Coating:
Location of Structure :
MANHOLE INFORMATION
Line & Station #: Other:
Structure Type: (check one) 4’ DI MH TYPE A FLDW DIV BOX
5’ DI MH TYPE B FLDW DIV BOX
6’ DI MH JUNCTION BOX
7’ DI MH SPHIPHON ENTRY BOX
METERING STATION
Wet Film Thickness Measurements
Wet Film Thickness Gauge per ASTM D4414 at 3 Locations Within the Manhole
Two (2) Spaced Equally Apart Along the Wall and One (1) on the Bench
Steps: Yes / No
Structure Material:
MH Depth:
MH Width:
Lining Material: Bench: Yes / No
Mil (Gauge ) 125 / 250
Invert (Sprayed) Yes / *No
Comments:
*If No, Justify
Indicate Measurements on the Diagram Above
POST INSTALLA TION
MANHOLE HOLIDAY /SPARK DETECTION TEST FORM
Company Name :
Address:
Phone #: Cell: Work:
Coating Date: Crew Leader:
Project Name: Project #:
Contractor:
Owner:
Thickness of Coating:
Location of Structure :
MANHOLE INFORMATION
Line & Station #: Other:
Structure Type: (check one) 4’ DI MH TYPE A FLDW DIV BOX
5’ DI MH TYPE B FLDW DIV BOX
6’ DI MH JUNCTION BOX
7’ DI MH SPHIPHON ENTRY BOX
METERING STATION
Holiday Detection Test Results
(NACE SP0188)
Liner Material: Indicate defect locations on drawing
Spark Tester Serial #:
Voltage Setting:
Inspection Date:
Inspection Company:
Inspector Name:
Repair Date:
Comments:
*Non -Manhole Structures may require additional sketches to
indicate testing location for all testing procedures. Include
additional sketches as needed.
POST INSTALLA TION
MANHOLE ADHESION TEST FORM
Company Name :
Address:
Phone #: Cell: Work:
Coating Date: Crew Leader:
Project Name: Project #:
Contractor:
Owner:
Thickness of Epoxy Coating:
Location of Structure :
MANHOLE INFORMATION
Line & Station #: Other:
Structure Type: (check one) 4’ DI MH TYPE A FLDW DIV BOX
5’ DI MH TYPE B FLDW DIV BOX
6’ DI MH JUNCTION BOX
7’ DI MH SPHIPHON ENTRY BOX
METERING STATION
Adhesion Test Results
(ASTM D7234)
Inspection Date: Indicate test locations on drawing
Inspection Company:
Inspector Name:
Manhole Depth:
Number of Tests:
Test Results:
Comments:
*Non -Manhole Structures may require additional sketches to
indicate testing location for all testing procedures. Include
additional sketches as needed.
33 41 10 - 1
REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS
Page 1 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
SECTION 33 41 10
REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Furnishing and installing reinforced concrete storm drain pipe and culverts,
including:
a. Pipe or box fittings
b. Connection of drain lines to curb inlets
c. All joints
d. All connections to new or existing pipe or headwalls, manholes, etc., to the
lines and grades shown on the Drawings
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 33 01 31 – Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection
4. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
5. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
6. Section 33 05 23 – Hand Tunneling
7. Section 03 34 13 - Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Reinforced Concrete Storm Drain Pipe
a. Measurement
1) Measured along the longitudinal centerline of the pipe from the initial
beginning point as shown on Drawings to the end of construction as shown
on Drawings, excluding inside diameters of any manholes encountered
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per linear foot of “RCP” installed for:
a) Various sizes
b) Various classes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing the specified diameter pipe and appurtenant
fittings
2) Mobilization
3) Pavement removal
4) Excavation
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 41 10 - 2
REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS
Page 2 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
5) Hauling
6) Disposal of excess material
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment
8) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
9) Gaskets
10) Clean-up
11) Cleaning
12) Jointing
13) Connections to all drainage structures
2. Reinforced Concrete Storm Drain Culverts
a. Measurement
1) Measured along the longitudinal centerline of the pipe from the initial
beginning point as shown on Drawings to the end of construction as shown
on Drawings, excluding inside diameters of any manholes encountered
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per linear foot of “Box Culvert” installed for:
a) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing the specified diameter pipe and appurtenant
fittings
2) Mobilization
3) Pavement removal
4) Excavation
5) Hauling
6) Disposal of excess material
7) Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment
8) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
9) Gaskets
10) Clean-up
11) Cleaning
12) Jointing
13) Connections to all drainage structures
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
a. T111, Inorganic Matter or Ash in Bituminous Materials.
3. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A185, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete.
b. A497, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,
Deformed, for Concrete.
c. C76, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and
Sewer Pipe.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 41 10 - 3
REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS
Page 3 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
d. C361, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Low-Head Pressure
Pipe.
e. C443, Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using
Rubber Gaskets.
f. C497, Standard Test Methods for Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or Tile.
g. C506, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm
Drain, and Sewer Pipe.
h. C507, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm
Drain, and Sewer Pipe.
i. C990, Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and
Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants.
j. C1433, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Monolithic Box
Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers.
k. D4, Standard Test Method for Bitumen Content.
l. D6, Standard Test Method for Loss on Heating of Oil and Asphaltic
Compounds.
m. D36, Standard Test Method for Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring-and-Ball
Apparatus).
n. D71, Standard Test Method for Relative Density of Solid Pitch and Asphalt
(Displacement Method).
o. D92, Standard Test Method for Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup
Tester.
p. D113, Standard Test Method for Ductility of Bituminous Materials.
q. D217, Standard Test Methods for Cone Penetration of Lubricating Grease.
4. TxDOT Test Procedures (Tex):
a. Tex-704-I, Making, Curing, and Testing Compression Test Specimens for
Precast Concrete
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATION SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates
1. Furnish manufacturer’s certificate of compliance that their product meets the
physical testing requirements of this Specification for the materials referenced
including, but not limited to:
a. Reinforced concrete pipe
b. Concrete box culvert
c. Jointing materials
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 41 10 - 4
REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS
Page 4 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01
66 00.
2. Keep pipe clean and fully drained during storage.
3. Transport, handle and store pipe and fittings as recommended by manufacturer.
4. Repair or replace any damaged pipe before installation per the manufacturer’s
recommendation.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS
A. Fabrication
1. Precast Reinforced Concrete Pipe
a. Provide precast storm sewer pipe that conforms to ASTM C76, ASTM C506 or
ASTM C507 for circular, arch or elliptical pipe respectively.
b. Utilize a machine made process or cast by a process that will provide uniform
placement of a mixture of cement, aggregate and water proportional to provide
a homogeneous concrete meeting the specified strength requirements.
c. Mix concrete in a central batch plant or other approved batching facility where
the quality and uniformity of the concrete is assured.
d. Do not use transit mixed concrete to manufacture precast concrete pipe.
2. Concrete Box Culvert
a. Cast-in-Place
1) Conform to Section 03 30 00.
b. Precast
1) Furnish machine made precast boxes in accordance with ASTM C1433.
2) Utilize a machine made process or cast by a process that will provide
uniform placement of a mixture of cement, aggregate, and water
proportional to provide a homogeneous concrete meeting the specified
strength requirements.
3) Concrete water to cement ratio not to exceed 0.53 by weight
4) Utilize minimum 470 pounds of cement per cubic yard of concrete unless
mix designs with lower cement content demonstrate that the quality and
performance of the sections meet the requirements of this Specification.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 41 10 - 5
REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS
Page 5 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
5) Mix concrete in a central batch plant or other approved batching facility
where the quality and uniformity of the concrete is assured.
6) Do not use transit mixed concrete to manufacture precast concrete box
culvert.
7) Utilize welded wire fabric steel reinforcement conforming to ASTM A185
or ASTM A497.
3. Jointing Materials
a. Use any of the materials described in this Section for the making of joints.
1) Furnish a manufacturer’s certificate of compliance for all jointing materials.
2) Cold Applied Preformed Plastic Gaskets/Flexible Joint Sealants
a) Provide flexible joint sealants that meet the requirements of
ASTM C990.
b) Utilize 1 continuous gasket conforming to the joint shape for each joint.
c) Plastic gasket shall be produced from blends of refined hydrocarbon
resins and plasticizing compounds reinforced with inert mineral filler
and shall contain no solvents, irritating fumes or obnoxious odors.
d) Use flexible joint sealants that do not depend on oxidizing, evaporating
or chemical action for its adhesive or cohesive strength.
e) Supply in extruded rope form of suitable cross section and size as to fill
the joint space when the pipes are joined.
f) Provide a size of the pre-formed flexible joint sealant in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations and large enough to properly
seal the joint and obtain the squeeze out as described under
construction methods.
g) The gasket joint sealer shall be protected by a suitable removable 2-
piece wrapper, and the 2-piece wrapper shall be so designed that ½ may
be removed longitudinally without disturbing the other ½ to facilitate
application as noted below.
h) The chemical composition of the gasket joint sealing compound as
shipped shall meet the requirements of Table 1 when tested in
accordance with the test methods shown.
Table 1. Sealing Compound Chemical Composition
Composition Test Method Percent by Weight
Bitumen ASTM D4 Bitumen Content 50-70
Ash-Inert Mineral Matter AASHTO T111 30-50
Volatile Matter at 325 degrees F ASTM D6 Loss on Heating of
Oil and Asphaltic Compounds
2.0 Max
i) Gasket joint sealing compound when immersed for 30 days at ambient
room temperature separately in 5 percent solution of caustic potash, a
mixture of 5 percent hydrochloric acid, a 5 percent solution of sulfuric
acid and a saturated hydrogen sulfide (H2S) solution shall show no
visible deterioration.
j) The physical properties of the gasket joint sealing compound as
shipped shall meet the requirements in Table 2 when tested in
accordance with the test methods shown.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 41 10 - 6
REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS
Page 6 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
Table 2. Sealing Compound Physical Properties
Property Test Method Typical Analysis
Specific Gravity at 77 degrees F ASTM D71 1.20 to 1.35
Ductility at 77 degrees F ASTM D113 5.0 centimeters minimum
Softening Point at 77 degrees F ASTM D36 320 degrees F minimum
Penetration
32 degrees F (300-gms) 60-seconds
ASTM D217
75 minimum
77 degrees F (150-gms) 5-seconds 50 to 120
115 degrees F (150-gms) 5-seconds 150 max
Flash Point C.O.C. ASTM D92 600 degrees F
Fire Point C.O.C 625 degrees F
3) Rubber Gaskets
a) Provide gaskets that conform to ASTM C361 or ASTM C443.
b) Meet the requirements of ASTM C443 for design of the joints and
permissible variations in dimensions.
B. Design Criteria
1. Reinforced Concrete Pipe
a. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, furnish Class III concrete pipe
with shell thickness, circumferential reinforcement and strength conforming to
the requirements of ASTM C76, ASTM C506 or ASTM C507 for circular, arch
or elliptical pipe respectively, except as modified below:
1) Manufacture pipes larger than 60-inch diameter by using 2 lines of circular
reinforcement.
2) For Class III pipes larger than 60-inch diameter, manufacturer may, at its
option, furnish pipe manufactured with either Wall "B" or Wall "C"
minimum thicknesses and the applicable minimum steel area as listed for
circular cages in Table II of ASTM C76, provided test strength
requirements for Class III pipe are satisfactorily met.
b. Jacking, Boring, or Tunneling
1) Design pipe for jacking, boring or tunneling conforming to the
requirements of Section 33 05 23.
2) When requested, provide design notes and drawings signed and sealed by a
Texas licensed professional engineer.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections
1. Reinforced Concrete Pipe
a. Acceptance of pipe will be determined by the results of the following tests:
1) Material tests required in ASTM C76, ASTM C506 or ASTM C507.
2) Absorption tests in accordance with ASTM C497.
3) 3-edge bearing tests in accordance with ASTM C497.
a) Testing Rate
(1) If tested for 0.01-inch crack only:
(a) Test 0.8 percent of pipe sections for each size included in order
(2) If tested for 0.01-inch crack and ultimate load:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 41 10 - 7
REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS
Page 7 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
(a) Test 0.2 percent of pipe sections for each size included in order
b) Pipes that have been tested only to the formation of a 0.01 inch crack
and that meet the 0.01 inch test load requirements shall be accepted for
use.
c) Failed Pipe
(1) Test 2 consecutive joints in the same mix series if a specimen fails
to meet test requirements.
(2) Entire pipe series will be rejected if 1 of the consecutive joints fails
to meet test requirements.
d) Pipes larger than 1 inch in diameter may be accepted on the basis of
material tests and inspection of completed product as an alternate to 3-
edge bearing test, at the option of the manufacturer.
(1) Acceptance of pipe will be determined by the results of the material
tests as required in ASTM C76, ASTM C506 or ASTM C507.
(a) Perform crushing tests on cores taken from barrel of completed
and cured pipe.
(b) Perform absorption tests on samples from pipe wall.
(c) Inspect finished pipe including amount and placement of
reinforcement.
(2) Manufacturer will furnish facilities and personnel for taking core
samples from pipe barrel and for determining compressive strength
of samples.
(3) Manufacturer will plug and seal core holes if samples meet strength
requirements.
(a) Plug and seal sections in a manner that the pipe section will
meet all test requirements of ASTM C76, ASTM C506 or
ASTM C507.
(b) Pipe sections plugged and sealed as described above will be
accepted for use.
4) Inspect the finished pipe to determine its conformance with the required
design.
2. Cast-in-Place Concrete Box Culvert
a. Provide test specimens that meet the requirements of Division 03.
3. Precast Box Culvert
a. Make test specimens in test cylinders at the same time and in the same manner
as the box sections they represent.
b. Make a minimum of 4 test cylinders for each day’s production run and each
mix design.
c. Cure test cylinders in the same manner and for the same times as the boxes they
represent.
d. Test the specimens in accordance with Tex-704-I.
B. Sizes and Permissible Variations
1. Reinforced Concrete Pipe
a. Ensure that variations in diameter, size, shape, wall thickness, reinforcement,
placement of reinforcement, laying length and the permissible under run of
length are in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type
of pipe as referred to previously.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 41 10 - 8
REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS
Page 8 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
b. Where rubber gasket pipe joints are to be used, the design of joints and
permissible variations in dimensions shall be in accordance with ASTM C443,
Sections 7 and 8.
2. Cast-in-Place or Precast Box Culvert
a. Ensure that precast sections of either type meet the following requirements:
1) The inside vertical and horizontal dimensions do not vary from Drawing
requirements by more than 1/2 inch or 1 percent, whichever is greater.
2) The horizontal or vertical plane at each end of the box section does not vary
from perpendicular by more than 1/2 inch or 1 percent, whichever is
greater, measured on the inside faces of the section.
3) The sides of a section at each end do not vary from being perpendicular to
the top and bottom by more than 1/2 inch or 1 percent, whichever is greater,
when measured diagonally between opposite interior corners.
b. Ensure that wall and slab thicknesses are not less than shown on the Drawings
except for occasional deficiencies not greater than 1/4 inch or 5 percent,
whichever is greater.
1) If proper jointing is not affected, thicknesses in excess of Drawing
requirements are acceptable.
c. Deviations from the above tolerances will be acceptable if the sections can be
fitted at the plant or job site and the joint opening at any point does not exceed
1 inch.
1) Use match marks for proper installation on sections that have been accepted
in this manner.
C. Workmanship and Finish
1. Reinforced Concrete Pipe
a. Ensure that pipe is substantially free from fractures, large or deep cracks and
surface roughness.
b. Ensure that ends of pipe are normal to the walls and centerline of the pipe
within the limits of variations allowed as stated previously.
2. Cast-in-Place or Precast Box Culvert
a. Fine cracks on the surface of the member that do not extend to the plane of the
nearest reinforcement are acceptable unless the cracks are numerous and
extensive.
b. Repair cracks that extend into the plane of the reinforcing steel in an approved
manner.
c. Excessive damage, honeycomb or cracking will be subject to structural review.
d. The City may accept boxes with repairs that are sound, properly finished and
cured in conformance with pertinent Specifications.
e. When fine cracks on the surface indicate poor curing practices, discontinue
further production of precast sections until corrections are made and proper
curing is provided.
D. Curing
1. Cure pipe/box in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type
of pipe as referred to above.
E. Marking
1. Reinforced Concrete Pipe
a. Clearly mark the following information on each section of pipe:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 41 10 - 9
REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS
Page 9 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
1) Class of pipe
2) ASTM designation
3) Date of manufacture
4) Identification of plant
5) Name or trademark of the manufacturer
6) Pipe to be used for jacking and boring
b. For pipe with elliptical reinforcement, in addition to above, clearly mark 1 end
of each section during the process of manufacture or immediately after with the
following:
1) The location of the top or bottom of the pipe as it should be installed,
unless the external shape of the pipe is such that the correct position of the
top and bottom is obvious
2) Mark the pipe section by indenting or painting with waterproof paint.
2. Cast-in-Place or Precast Box Culvert
a. Mark precast boxes with the following:
1) Name or trademark of the producer
2) Date of manufacture
3) Box size
4) Minimum and maximum fill heights
b. For boxes without lifting holes, mark 1 end of each box section on the inside
and outside walls to indicate the top or bottom as it will be installed.
c. Indent markings into the box section or paint them on each box with waterproof
paint.
F. Pipe/Box Rejection
1. Individual sections of pipe/box may be rejected if any of the Specification
requirements are not met or if any of the following exist:
a. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell, with the exception of a single end
crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint
b. Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning, mixing and molding
c. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture
d. Damaged ends which would prevent making a satisfactory joint
e. Any continuous crack having a surface width of 0.01 inch or more and
extending for a length of 12 inch or more
2. Mark rejected pipe/box with painted “REJECTED”.
3. Remove rejected pipe/box immediately from job site and replace with pipe/box
meeting the requirements of this Specification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 41 10 - 10
REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS
Page 10 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
1. Conform to the requirements of Section 33 05 10 for excavation and embedment for
open-cut type installation.
2. Conform to the requirements of Section 33 05 23 when jacking, boring or tunneling
methods are specified on Drawings.
3. Establish and maintain lines and grades.
B. Pipe/Box Laying – Trench Installation
1. Ensure that pipe/box and fittings are laid and jointed in firm trench bottom
conditions.
2. Start laying pipe/box on the bedding at the outlet or downstream end with the spigot
or tongue end of the pipe joint pointing downstream, and proceed toward the inlet
or upstream end with the abutting sections properly matched, true to the established
lines and grades.
3. Provide appropriate facilities for hoisting and lowering the sections of pipe/box
according to manufacturer’s recommendation.
4. Lift and lower sections of pipe/box into trench without damaging pipe or disturbing
the prepared bedding or sides of trench.
5. Carefully clean pipe/box ends before pipe is placed in trench.
6. Protect pipe/box open end to prevent entrance of earth or bedding material as each
length of pipe/box is laid.
7. Fit, match and lay pipe/box to form a smooth, uniform conduit.
8. When elliptical pipe with circular reinforcing or circular pipe with elliptical
reinforcing is used, lay the pipe in trench so that the markings for top or bottom are
not more than 5 degrees from the vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the
pipe
9. Remove and re-lay, without extra compensation, pipe/box that is not in alignment
or that shows excessive settlement after laying.
C. Multiple Barrel Box Culvert Placement
1. Fill the annular space between multiple boxes with crushed rock or CLSM
according to 03 34 13.
a. Water jetting will not be allowed between parallel boxes.
2. Start the laying of boxes on the bedding at the outlet end and proceed toward the
inlet end with the abutting sections properly matched.
3. Fit, match and lay boxes to form a smooth, uniform conduit true to the established
lines and grades.
D. Jointing
1. Cold Applied Preformed Plastic Gaskets/Flexible Joint Sealants
a. Brush-apply a suitable primer, recommended by the manufacturer of the gasket
joint sealer, to tongue and groove joint surfaces and end surfaces.
1) Ensure that surface to be primed is clean and dry when primer is applied.
2) Ensure that primer is not applied over mud, sand, dirt or sharp cement
protrusions.
3) Allow primer to dry and harden.
b. Attach plastic gasket sealer around tapered tongue or tapered groove near the
pipe joint hub or shoulder, before laying pipe in trench.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 41 10 - 11
REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS
Page 11 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
c. Remove paper wrapper from 1 side only of the 2-piece wrapper on gasket and
press it firmly to the clean, dry pipe joint surface.
1) Do not remove the outside wrapper until immediately before pushing pipe
into its final position.
d. Align the tongue correctly with the flare of the groove.
e. Remove outside wrapper on the gasket and pull or push pipe home with
sufficient force (back hoe shovel, chain hoist, ratchet hoist or winch) to cause
evidence of gasket material squeeze-out on inside or outside around complete
pipe joint circumference.
1) Remove any joint material that pushed out into the interior of pipe.
2) Ensure that pipe is pulled home in a straight line with all parts of pipe on
line and grade at all times.
f. Proceed with backfilling of pipe laid with plastic gasket joints as soon as joint
has been inspected and approved by the Engineer or Inspector.
1) Take special precautions in placing and compacting backfill to avoid
damage to joints.
g. When the atmospheric temperature is below 60 degrees F, store pre-formed
flexible joint sealants in an area warmed to above 70° degrees F or artificially
warmed to this temperature in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
1) Apply gaskets to pipe joints immediately prior to placing pipe in trench,
followed by connection to previously laid pipe.
2. Rubber Gaskets
a. Make the joint assembly according to the recommendations of the gasket
manufacturer.
b. When using rubber gaskets, make joints watertight.
c. Backfill after the joint has been inspected and approved.
E. Backfill
1. Conform to the requirements of Section 33 05 10 for backfilling pipe/box trenches.
F. Pipe fittings
1. Poured Concrete Pipe Collars
a. Provide collars for locations shown on Drawings.
b. Collar cost is considered subsidiary to bid price for furnishing and installing
reinforced concrete pipe. No extra payment will be made for installation of
concrete pipe collars shown on the Drawings.
2. Shop and Field-Fabricated Wyes, Tees, Crosses and Bends
a. Furnish and install shop or field-fabricated wyes, tees, crosses or bends as
indicated on Drawings or required by the Engineer.
b. Shop-fabricate fittings for maximum pipe size less than 24-inches in diameter
for the larger pipe.
c. Field-fabricate fittings with 24-inch or greater diameter for the larger pipe.
d. Field-fabricate fittings for box culverts.
e. Take care in fabrication that concrete walls of pipe are broken back only
enough to provide the required finished opening.
f. Join reinforcing mesh or bars by bending, twisting or spot welding to provide a
rigid connection.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 41 10 - 12
REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM DRAIN PIPE/CULVERTS
Page 12 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
g. Concrete or mortar (as specified in this segment) shall be wiped over the
reinforcing wires connecting the 2 pipe joints, compacted by light blows,
shaped to the contour of the pipe barrels, lightly brushed for finish and cured
under wet burlap.
3. Poured Concrete Pipe Plugs
a. Plug pipe ends with a fabricated unit as shown on Drawings, when conduit lines
terminate at locations with no connection to drainage structures.
b. Concrete pipe plug cost is considered subsidiary to bid price for furnishing and
installing reinforced concrete pipe. No extra payment will be made for
installation of concrete pipe plugs shown on the Drawings.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests and Inspections
1. Video Inspection
a. Perform post-construction TV inspection of all installed reinforced concrete
pipes/boxes conforming to the requirements of Section 33 01 31.
2. Ensure that pipes/boxes are installed correctly and are free of significant debris.
a. At the City’s discretion, replace any pipe/box that is determined to have
jointing problems, cracking or significant debris.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 49 10 - 1
CAST-IN-PLACE STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES
Page 1 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 49 10
CAST-IN-PLACE STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Storm drain cast-in-place concrete manholes and junction boxes
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Division 3 – Concrete
4. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
5. Section 31 23 16 – Unclassified Excavation
6. Section 31 50 00 – Excavation Support and Protection
7. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
8. Section 33 05 13 – Frame, Cover and Grade Rings
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Storm Drain Manhole Risers
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Manhole Riser complete, or
completed to the stage of construction required by Drawings.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and will be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Manhole Riser” installed
for:
a) Various Sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Mobilization
2) Excavation
3) Hauling
4) Disposal of excess materials
5) Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment
6) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
7) Manhole construction
8) Manhole frames
9) Steps
10) Ring and Cover
11) Clean-up
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 49 10 - 2
CAST-IN-PLACE STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES
Page 2 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. Storm Junction Boxes
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Junction Box complete, or
completed to the stage of construction required by Drawings.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
will be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Storm Junction Box”
installed for:
a) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Mobilization
2) Excavation
3) Hauling
4) Disposal of excess materials
5) Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment
6) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
7) Junction Box construction
8) Junction Box frames
9) Steps
10) Ring and Cover
11) Clean-up
3. Storm Junction Structure
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Junction Structure complete, or
completed to the stage of construction required by Drawings.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
will be paid for at the lump sum price bid per each “Storm Junction
Structure” location.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Mobilization
2) Excavation
3) Hauling
4) Disposal of excess materials
5) Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment
6) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
7) Junction Box construction
8) Junction Box frames
9) Steps
10) Ring and Cover
11) Clean-up
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 49 10 - 3
CAST-IN-PLACE STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES
Page 3 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
a. C478, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Sections.
b. D4101, Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion
Materials.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATION SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates
1. Furnish manufacturer’s certificate of compliance that their product meets the
physical testing requirements of this Specification for the materials referenced.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS
A. Concrete
1. Furnish concrete that conforms to the provisions of Section 03 30 00.
B. Reinforcing Steel
1. Furnish reinforcing steel that conforms to the requirements of Section 03 30 00.
C. Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers
1. Provide frames, grates, rings and covers that conform to dimensions and materials
shown on Drawings and Section 33 05 13.
2. Ensure that covers and grates fit properly into frames and seat uniformly and
solidly.
D. Steps
1. Provide polypropylene supports and steps to the shape and dimensions shown on
Drawings that meet the requirements of ASTM D4101 and ASTM C478, Section
16, “Steps and Ladders.”
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 49 10 - 4
CAST-IN-PLACE STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES
Page 4 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Perform all concrete work in accordance with Division 3.
2. Use of forms is required for all concrete walls, except where the nature of the
surrounding material is such that it can be trimmed to a smooth vertical face
a. Outside form for concrete bases supporting brick walls may be omitted with
approval from the Engineer.
3. Cast polypropylene supports and steps into concrete walls when concrete is placed
or drill and grout steps in place after concrete placement.
B. Excavation and Embedment
1. Conform to the requirements of Section 31 23 16, Section 31 50 00 and Section 33
05 10, where applicable.
C. Manholes for Precast Concrete Drain Pipes
1. Construct manholes for precast concrete pipe drains as soon as is practicable after
drain lines into or through the manhole locations are completed.
2. Neatly cut all drain pipes at the inside face of the walls of the manhole and point up
with mortar.
D. Manholes for Monolithic Drain Pipes
1. Construct bases for manholes on monolithic drain pipes either monolithically with
the drain pipe or after the pipe is constructed.
E. Manholes for Box Drains
1. Cast bases for manholes for box drains as an integral part of the drainage system.
2. Manholes may be constructed prior to backfilling or, if the Contractor so elects,
manhole opening may be temporarily covered with timber to facilitate compaction
of backfill for the pipe system as a whole with tractor equipment.
a. Perform required excavation for manhole, construct manhole and backfill in
accordance with Drawings.
3. For manholes that are over 5-feet deep, include all manhole steps required in the
wall of the box drain.
F. Junction Structures
1. All structures shall be installed as specified in Drawings.
G. Inverts
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 49 10 - 5
CAST-IN-PLACE STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES
Page 5 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Shape and route floor inverts passing out or through the manhole as shown on the
Drawings.
2. Shape by adding and shaping mortar or concrete after the base is cast or by placing
the required additional material with the base.
H. Curing
1. Cure all exposed concrete as required in Division 3.
I. Finishing
1. Finish all concrete as required in Division 3.
J. Form Removal
1. Remove concrete form as required in Division 3.
K. Placement and Treatment of Castings, Frames, and Fittings
1. Place castings, frames and fittings in positions indicated on Drawings or as directed
by Engineer, true to line and correct elevation.
2. Frames or fittings set in new concrete or mortar
a. Place and position anchors or bolts before concrete mortar is placed.
b. Do not disturb unit until mortar or concrete has set.
3. Frames or fittings placed upon previously constructed masonry
a. Bring bearing surface or masonry true to line and grade, and present an even
bearing surface, so that entire face or back of unit will come in contact with
masonry.
b. Set unit in mortar beds or anchor to masonry, as indicated on Drawings or as
directed and approved by the Engineer.
4. Ensure that units are set firm and secure.
5. Allow concrete or mortar to harden for a minimum 7 days.
6. Replace and fasten down grates or covers.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 49 10 - 6
CAST-IN-PLACE STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES
Page 6 of 6
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 49 20 - 1
CURB AND DROP INLETS
Page 1 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 33 49 20
CURB AND DROP INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Construction of inlets, complete in place or to the stage detailed
a. Including furnishing and installing frames, grates, rings and covers
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Division 3 – Concrete
4. Section 02 41 13 – Selective Site Demolition
5. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
6. Section 03 80 00 – Modifications to Existing Concrete Structures
7. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
8. Section 33 05 13 – Frame, Cover and Grade Rings
9. Section 33 05 14 – Adjusting Manholes, Inlets, Valve Boxes and Other Structures
to Grade
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for this Item shall be per each inlet complete in place.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Inlet” installed for:
1) Various types
2) Various sizes
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Furnishing and installing the specified Inlet
b. Mobilization
c. Excavation
d. Hauling
e. Disposal of excess materials
f. Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment
g. Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
h. Concrete
i. Reinforcing steel
j. Mortar
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 49 20 - 2
CURB AND DROP INLETS
Page 2 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
k. Aluminum and castings
l. Frames
m. Grates
n. Rings and covers
o. Clean-up
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. C478, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole and
Inlet Sections.
b. D4101, Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion
Materials.
c. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete.
3. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT).
a. Departmental Materials Specification (DMS):
1) 7340, Qualification Procedure for Multi-Project Fabrication Plants of
Precast Concrete Manholes and Inlets.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENT [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Precast Concrete Inlet
2. Pipe connections at inlet walls
3. Stubs and stub plugs
4. Admixtures
5. Concrete Mix Design
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 49 20 - 3
CURB AND DROP INLETS
Page 3 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS
A. Materials
1. Concrete
a. Furnish concrete that conforms to the provisions of Section 03 30 00.
2. Reinforcing Steel
a. Furnish reinforcing steel that conforms to the requirements of Section 03 30 00.
3. Mortar
a. Furnish mortar per Section 03 80 00.
4. Steps
a. Provide polypropylene supports and steps conforming to the shape and
dimensions shown on the Drawings that meet the requirements of ASTM
D4101 and ASTM C478, Section 16, “Steps and Ladders.”
5. Curing Materials
a. Curing materials shall conform to the provisions of Division 3.
6. Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers
a. Provide frames, grates, rings and covers that conform to dimensions and
materials shown on Drawings and Section 33 05 13.
b. Ensure that covers and grates fit properly into frames and seat uniformly and
solidly.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Removal
1. Remove all or portions of existing structures in accordance with Section 02 41 13.
2. Drill, dowel, and grout in accordance with Section 03 30 00.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Interface with Other Work
1. All types of inlets may be built either in 1 stage or in 2 stages, described as Stage I
and Stage II.
a. Build inlets designed to match the final roadway surface in stages.
2. Construct the Stage I portion of inlets as shown on the Drawings or as specified in
this Section.
a. Furnish and install a temporary cover as approved by the Engineer.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 49 20 - 4
CURB AND DROP INLETS
Page 4 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
3. Construct Stage II after the pavement structure is substantially complete unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
a. For Stage II, construct the remaining wall height and top of inlet and furnish
and install any frames, grates, rings and covers, manhole steps, curb beams or
collecting basins required.
B. Cast-In -Place Inlets
1. Construct cast-in-place inlets in accordance with Section 03 30 00.
a. Forms will be required for all concrete walls.
b. Outside wall forms for cast-in-place concrete may be omitted with the approval
of the Engineer if the surrounding material can be trimmed to a smooth vertical
face.
2. Cast polypropylene steps into the concrete walls when the concrete is placed, or
drill and grout steps in place after concrete placement.
C. Inlets for Precast Concrete Drain Pipes
1. Construct inlets for precast concrete drain pipes as soon as is practicable after storm
drain lines into or through the inlet locations are completed.
a. Neatly cut all pipes at the inside face of the walls of the inlet and point up with
mortar.
D. Inlets for Monolithic Drain Pipes
1. Construct bases for inlets on monolithic drain pipes either monolithically with the
storm drain or after the storm drain is constructed.
E. Inverts
1. Shape and route floor inverts passing out or through the inlet as shown on the
Drawings.
2. Shape by adding and shaping mortar or concrete after the base is cast or by placing
the required additional material with the base.
F. Finishing Complete Inlets
1. Complete inlets in accordance with the Drawings.
2. Backfill to original ground elevation in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
G. Finishing Stage I Construction
1. Complete Stage I construction by constructing the walls to the elevations shown on
the Drawings and backfilling to required elevations in accordance with Section 33
05 10.
H. Stage II Construction
1. Construct subgrade and base course or concrete pavement construction over Stage I
inlet construction, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
2. Excavate to expose the top of Stage I construction and complete the inlet in
accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications, including backfill and
cleaning of all debris from the bottom of the manhole or inlet.
I. Form Removal
1. Forms used in the construction of “Inlets” which support vertical loads will remain
in place at least 24 hours after the concrete is placed.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 49 20 - 5
CURB AND DROP INLETS
Page 5 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. Other forms shall remain in place for a minimum time 24 hours after concrete is
placed, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
J. Curing
1. Cure all exposed concrete as required in Section 03 30 00.
K. Finishing
1. Conform to Section 03 30 00.
3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Refer to Section 33 05 14.
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 49 40 - 1
STORM DRAIN HEADWALLS, WINGWALLS AND SAFETY END TREATMENTS
Page 1 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
SECTION 33 49 40
STORM DRAIN HEADWALLS, WINGWALLS AND SAFETY END TREATMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Storm drain headwalls, wingwalls, and safety end treatments
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 02 41 13 – Selective Site Demolition
4. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
5. Section 31 37 00 – Riprap
6. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
7. Section 33 41 10 – Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe/Culverts
D. Standard Details
1. Concrete Headwall - Refer to TXDOT Fort Worth District Details
2. Concrete Wingwall - Refer to TXDOT Fort Worth District Details
3. Safety End Treatment - Refer to TXDOT Fort Worth District Details
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Concrete Headwall
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each “Headwall” satisfactorily
completed as specified on the Drawings.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
will be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Headwall” installed for:
a) Various pipe sizes
b) Various types
c) Various number of pipes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Constructing, furnishing, transporting and installing the Concrete Headwall
2) Connecting to the existing structure
3) Breaking back, removing and disposing of portions of the existing structure
4) Replacing portions of the existing structure to make connections
5) Excavation
6) Hauling
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 49 40 - 2
STORM DRAIN HEADWALLS, WINGWALLS AND SAFETY END TREATMENTS
Page 2 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
7) Disposal of excess material
8) Furnishing, placing and compaction of backfill
9) Concrete, as required by Drawings
10) Reinforcing Steel, if required by Drawings
11) Corrugated metal pipe, if required by Drawings
12) Reinforced concrete pipe, if required by Drawings
13) Clean-up
2. Safety End Treatment
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each “SET” satisfactorily completed
as specified on the Drawings.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
will be paid for at the unit price bid per each “SET” installed for:
a) Various types
b) Various pipe sizes
c) Various number of pipes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Constructing, furnishing, transporting and installing the Concrete Headwall
2) Connecting to the existing structure
3) Breaking back, removing and disposing of portions of the existing structure
4) Replacing portions of the existing structure to make connections
5) Excavation
6) Hauling
7) Disposal of excess materials
8) Furnishing, placing and compaction of backfill
9) Concrete, as required by Drawings
10) Reinforcing Steel, if required by Drawings
11) Corrugated metal pipe, if required by Drawings
12) Reinforced concrete pipe, if required by Drawings
13) Clean-up
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Definitions
1. Headwalls - all walls, including wings, at the ends of single-barrel and multiple-
barrel pipe culvert structures
2. Wingwalls - all walls at the ends of single-barrel or multiple-barrel box culvert
structures
B. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Refer to Section 03 30 00.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 49 40 - 3
STORM DRAIN HEADWALLS, WINGWALLS AND SAFETY END TREATMENTS
Page 3 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements
1. Marking
a. Before shipment from the casting or fabrication yard, clearly mark the
following on each precast unit:
1) Date of manufacture
2) Name or trademark of the manufacturer
3) Type and size designation
2. Causes for Rejection
a. Precast units may be rejected for not meeting any one of the Specification
requirements.
b. Individual units may also be rejected for fractures or cracks passing through the
wall or surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture surfaces.
c. Remove rejected units from the project, and replace them with acceptable units
meeting the requirements of this Section.
B. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01
66 00.
2. Store precast units on a level surface.
3. Do not place any loads on precast concrete units until design strength is reached.
4. Do not ship units until design strength requirements have been met.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS
A. Materials
1. Concrete
a. Furnish concrete that conforms to the provisions of Section 03 30 00.
2. Reinforcing Steel
a. Furnish reinforcing steel that conforms to the requirements of Section 03 30 00.
B. Fabrication
1. Fabricate cast-in-place concrete units and precast units in accordance with
Section 03 30 00.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 49 40 - 4
STORM DRAIN HEADWALLS, WINGWALLS AND SAFETY END TREATMENTS
Page 4 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
1) Safety End Treatment will be precast for 30-inch and smaller diameters and
cast in place for greater than 30-inch diameters.
2. Fabrication Tolerances
a. Lifting Holes
1) For precast units, provide no more than 4 lifting holes in each section.
2) Lifting holes may be cast, cut into fresh concrete after form removal or
drilled.
3) Provide lifting holes large enough for adequate lifting devices based on the
size and weight of the section.
a) The maximum hole diameter is 3 inches at the inside surface of the wall
and 4 inches at the outside surface.
b) Do not cut more than 1 longitudinal wire or 2 circumferential wires per
layer of reinforcing steel when locating lift holes.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Removal
1. Remove all or portions of existing structures in accordance with Section 02 41 13.
2. Drill, dowel and grout in accordance with Section 03 30 00.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Interface with Other Work
1. Make connections to new or existing structures in accordance with the details
shown on the Drawings.
2. Furnish jointing material in accordance with Section 33 41 10, or as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Excavation, Shaping, Bedding and Backfill
a. Excavate, shape, bed and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10.
b. Take special precautions in placing and compacting the backfill to avoid any
movement or damage to the units.
c. Bed precast units on foundations of firm and stable material accurately shaped
to conform to the bases of the units.
C. Placement of Precast Units
a. Provide adequate means to lift and place the precast units.
1) Utilize sufficient number of lifting holes to ensure that the units are not
damaged during lifting.
b. Fill lifting holes with mortar or concrete and cure.
1) Precast concrete or mortar plugs may be used.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
33 49 40 - 5
STORM DRAIN HEADWALLS, WINGWALLS AND SAFETY END TREATMENTS
Page 5 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised July 1, 2011
3.5 REPAIR
A. Occasional imperfections in manufacture or accidental damage sustained during
handling may be repaired.
1. The repaired units will be acceptable if they conform to the requirements of this
Section and the repairs are sound, properly finished and cured in conformance with
pertinent Specifications.
B. Repair spalled areas around lifting holes.
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 1
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 1 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
SECTION 34 41 10
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. LED Traffic Signal Head Assemblies
2. LED Countdown Pedestrian Signal Head Assemblies
3. Pedestrian Push Button Assemblies
4. Accessible Pedestrian Signals (APS)
5. Radar Detection Equipment and Cable
6. Hybrid Vehicle Detection System and Cable
7. Vehicle Loop Detectors (Sawcut)
8. Emergency Vehicle Preemption Equipment and Cable
9. Battery Back-up (BBU) System for Signal Cabinets
10. Multi-conductor Cable
11. Power Lead-in Cable
12. Grounding Conductors
13. Ground Rod
14. Ground Boxes
15. Traffic Signal Structures
16. Foundations
17. Hardware Signal Pole Paint
18. Signal Controller
19. Controller Cabinet Assembly
20. Roadside Flashing Beacon Assembly
21. School Zone Flasher Assembly
22. Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB) Assembly
23. Louvered Back Plates
24. Powder Coating Signal Structures
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the
Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
4. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical
5. Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 2
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 2 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
6. Section 31 23 16 – Unclassified Excavation
7. Section 31 24 00 – Embankments
8. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
9. Section 33 05 30 – Location of Existing Utilities
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. LED Traffic Signal Head Assemblies
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each LED traffic signal head
assembly installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Signal Head Assmbly”
installed for:
a) Various numbers of sections
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing LED Traffic Signal Head Assembly and
appurtenances including hinge pins, lens clips, locking devices, and gaskets
2) Housing and doors
3) Detachable visors
4) LED lamp unit
5) Louvers
6) Mounting hardware
7) Aluminum, vented one- or two-piece back plates and mounting hardware
8) Cable inside the pole will be paid for separately
2. LED Countdown Pedestrian Signal Head Assemblies
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each pedestrian signal section or
each pedestrian signal retrofit module installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Ped Signal Section” or “Ped
Signal Retrofit Module” installed.
c. The price bid for “Ped Signal Section” shall include:
1) Furnishing, assembling, and installing the pedestrian signal sections
2) Housing units
3) LED countdown pedestrian units
4) Mounting attachments and completing wiring connections
5) Cable inside the pole will be paid for separately
d. The price bid for “Ped Signal Retrofit Module” shall include:
1) Furnishing, assembling, and installing the pedestrian signal sections
2) LED countdown pedestrian units
3) Mounting attachments and completing wiring connections
4) Disposal of incandescent unit
5) Cable inside the pole will be paid for separately
3. Pedestrian Push Button Assemblies
a. Measurement
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 3
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 3 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each pedestrian push button
installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Ped Push Btn Assmbly”
installed for:
a) Various mounting methods
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing Pedestrian Push Button Assemblies
2) Button housing
3) Button cap
4) LED indication
5) Push button signs
6) Switch
7) Built-in surge protection
8) Audible notification system
9) Mounting hardware
10) Cable inside the pole will be paid for separately
4. Accessible Pedestrian Signals (APS)
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each accessible pedestrian signal
station installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Accessible Pedestrian
Signal” unit of the type specified.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing, installing, and testing the Accessible Pedestrian Signal
pushbutton stations
2) Mounting hardware
3) Sign adapter
4) Pushbutton stations
5) Central control units
6) Vibrotactile arrow with high visual contrast
7) Wiring harness
8) Voice message setup
9) Configuration devices or software
10) R10-3e (L/R) signs
11) The signal conductor cable from the signal cabinet to the pushbutton
station shall be paid for under “Multi-conductor Cable”
5. Radar Detection System and Cable
a. Furnish and Install Radar Detection System
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each intersection approach
furnished and installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install
Radar Detection System” installed for:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 4
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 4 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
(1) Various types
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Furnishing, assembling and installing Radar Detection Device
b) Contact closure input file cards
c) Relays
d) Detector back plates
e) Set-up and diagnostic software including programming and testing of
all detection zones per signal plans.
f) Circuits
g) Mounting hardware
h) Cable will be paid for separately
b. Install Radar Detection System
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each intersection approach
installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Install Radar
Detection Device” for:
(1) Various types
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Scheduling pickup of material from the City
b) Pickup and transportation of material from the City to the jobsite
c) Taking precautions to ensure material is not damaged during
transportation
d) Installing Radar Presence Device
e) Installing detector back plates
f) Relays
g) Set-up and diagnostic software including programming and testing of
all detection zones per signal plans.
h) Circuits
i) Cable will be paid for separately
c. Furnish and Install Radar Detection Cable
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of radar detection
cable furnished and installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot
“Furnish/Install Radar Detection Cable” installed.
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Furnishing and installing radar detection cable
b) Making all connections to radar detection detectors and back panels
d. Install Radar Detection Cable
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of radar detection
cable installed.
2) Payment
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 5
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 5 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot “Install Radar
Detection Cable” installed.
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Scheduling pickup of material from the City
b) Pickup and transportation of material from the City to the jobsite
c) Taking precautions to ensure material is not damaged during
transportation
d) Installing radar cable
e) Making all connections to radar detectors and back panels
6. Hybrid Vehicle Detection System and Cable
a. Furnish and Install Hybrid Vehicle Detection System
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each intersection approach
furnished and installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install
Hybrid Detection”.
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Purchasing equipment and cable from City if called out in the
Drawings
b) Furnishing, installing and testing hybrid detection
c) Detector units
d) Mini-hub detector cards
e) Mounting hardware
f) Operational software
g) Communication interface panel
h) Field setup monitor
i) Setup of all detection zones per traffic signal plans. Setup must be
approved by City staff.
j) Cable will be paid for separately
b. Install Hybrid Vehicle Detection System
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each intersection approach
installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Install Hybrid
Vehicle Detection”.
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Scheduling pickup of material from the City
b) Pickup and transportation of material from the City to the jobsite
c) Taking precautions to ensure material is not damaged during
transportation
d) Installing and testing all VIVDS components
e) Setup of all detection zones per traffic signal plans. Setup must be
approved by City staff.
c. Furnish and Install Hybrid Vehicle Detection Cable
1) Measurement
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 6
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 6 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of hybrid detection
cable furnished and installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot
“Furnish/Install Hybrid Detection Cable”.
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Furnishing and installing hybrid detection cable
b) Making all connections to cameras and controller equipment
d. Install Hybrid Vehicle Detection Cable
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of hybrid detection
cable installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot “Install
Hybrid Detection Cable” installed.
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Scheduling pickup of material from the City
b) Pickup and transportation of material from the City to the jobsite
c) Taking precautions to ensure material is not damaged during
transportation
d) Installing cable
e) Making all connections to cameras and controller equipment
f) Cable inside the pole will be paid for separately
7. Vehicle Loop Detectors (Sawcut)
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item will be per linear foot of sawcut containing loop
wire.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item and
measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the unit
price bid per linear foot of “Loop Detector Cable Sawcut”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Sawcutting pavement
2) Excavation
3) Disposal of excess material
4) Backfill
5) Pavement repair associated with sawcutting
6) Sawcut wire
7) Sealant
8) Sealant placement
9) Clean-up
10) Testing
11) Conduit and loop wire from the edge of pavement to the ground box used
for vehicle loop detectors
12) The following items will be paid for separately:
a) New ground boxes
b) New loop lead in cable
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 7
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 7 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
8. Emergency Vehicle Preemption Equipment and Cable
a. Furnish and Install Preemption Detector
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Preemption Detector
furnished and installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install
Preempt Detector” for:
(1) Various types
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Furnishing, installing and testing preemption detectors
b) Card rack
c) Phase selector
d) Mounting hardware
e) Cable inside the pole will be paid for separately
b. Install Preemption Detector
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Preemption Detector
installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Install Preempt
Detector” for:
(1) Various types
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Scheduling pickup of material from the City
b) Pickup and transportation of material from the City to the jobsite
c) Taking precautions to ensure material is not damaged during
transportation
d) Installing and testing preemption detector
c. Furnish and Install Preemption Cable
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of preemption cable
furnished and installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot
“Furnish/Install Preemption Cable” installed.
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Furnishing and installing preemption cable
b) Making all connections to preemption detectors, phase selectors, and
controller
d. Install Preemption Cable
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of preemption cable
installed.
2) Payment
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 8
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 8 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot “Install
Preemption Cable” installed.
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Scheduling pickup of material from the City
b) Pickup and transportation of material from the City to the jobsite
c) Taking precautions to ensure material is not damaged during
transportation
d) Installing preemption cable
e) Making all connections to preemption detectors, phase selectors, and
controller
9. Battery Back-Up (BBU) System for Signal Cabinets
a. Furnish and Install BBU System for Signal Cabinet
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each BBU System component
furnished and installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install BBU
System” for:
(1) Various components
(2) Various types
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Furnishing, installing and testing the BBU system
b) Purchasing equipment from City if called out in the Drawings
c) Inverter/charger
d) Manual bypass switch
e) Integrated power transfer switch or automatic bypass switch
f) Batteries
g) Self-contained external mounted cabinet
h) Mounting hardware
i) Wiring, and all necessary hardware and software
b. Install BBU System for Signal Cabinet
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each BBU System installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Install BBU System”
for:
(1) Various types
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Scheduling pickup of material from the City
b) Pickup and transportation of material from the City to the jobsite
c) Taking precautions to ensure material is not damaged during
transportation
d) Installing and testing the BBU system
e) Wiring, and all necessary hardware and software
10. Multi-conductor Cable
a. Measurement
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 9
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 9 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per linear foot of “Multi-conductor Cable” installed for:
a) Various types
b) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing Multi-conductor Cable
11. Power Lead-in Cable
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of power lead-in cable
installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per linear foot of “Insulated Elec Condr” installed for:
a) Various types
b) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing Power Lead-in Cable
12. Grounding Conductors
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid per linear foot of “Bare Elec Condr” installed for:
a) Various types
b) Various sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing Grounding Conductors
13. Ground Rod
a. Measurement
1) This Item is considered subsidiary to the various Traffic Signal Structures
being installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item are subsidiary to various Traffic Signal Structures being installed and
shall be subsidiary to the unit price bid per various Traffic Signal
Structures being installed, and no other compensation will be allowed.
14. Ground Boxes
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Ground Box” installed for:
2) Various sizes
3) Various types
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 10
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 10 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing Ground Box
2) Excavation and backfill
3) Enclosures
4) Covers
5) Bolts
6) Gravel
7) Concrete apron when required
15. Traffic Signal Structures
a. Furnish and Install Pedestal and Push Button Pole Assembly
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each assembly furnished and
installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install Ped or
Push Button Pole Assmbly” furnished and installed for:
(1) Various types
(2) Various sizes
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Excavation and backfill
b) Furnishing and installing each Pedestal or Push Button Pole Assembly
c) Purchasing pedestal pole assemblies from City if called out in the
Drawings
d) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
e) Anchor bolts
f) Clean-up
b. Install Pedestal or Push Button Pole Assembly
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each assembly installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Install Ped or Push
Button Pole Assmbly” furnished and installed for:
(1) Various types
(2) Various sizes
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Scheduling pickup of material from the City
b) Pickup and transportation of material from the City to the jobsite
c) Taking precautions to ensure material is not damaged during
transportation
d) Excavation and backfill
e) Installing each Pedestal or Push Button Pole Assembly
f) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
g) Clean-up
c. Furnish and Install Signal Poles
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each signal pole furnished and
installed.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 11
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 11 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install Signal
Pole” installed for:
(1) Various types
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Excavation and backfill
b) Furnishing and installing each Signal Pole Assembly
c) Luminaire arm
d) LED fixture shall be paid for separately
e) Erecting assembly on concrete foundation
f) Furnishing and placing anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and templates
d. Install Signal Poles
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each signal pole installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Install Signal Pole”
installed for:
(1) Various types
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Scheduling pickup of material from the City
b) Pickup and transportation of material from the City to the jobsite
c) Taking precautions to ensure material is not damaged during
transportation
d) Excavation and backfill
e) Installing each Signal Pole Assembly
f) Installing luminaire arm, fixture, and lamp if specified
g) Erecting assembly on concrete foundation
h) Installing anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and templates
e. Furnish and Install Mast Arm
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Mast Arm furnished and
installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install Mast
Arm” furnished and installed for:
(1) Various length intervals
(2) Various types
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Furnishing, assembling and installing Mast Arm
b) Mounting equipment
c) Luminaire arm, if specified
d) LED fixture shall be paid for separately
e) Vibration dampers
f) Clean-up
f. Install Mast Arm
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Mast Arm installed.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 12
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 12 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Install Mast Arm”
installed for:
(1) Various length intervals
(2) Various types
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Scheduling pickup of material from the City
b) Pickup and transportation of material from the City to the jobsite
c) Taking precautions to ensure material is not damaged during
transportation
d) Assembling and installing Standard Mast Arm
e) Installing luminaire arm, fixture, and lamp if specified
f) Mounting equipment
g) Vibration dampers
h) Clean-up
16. Foundations
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Foundation” installed for:
a) Various types
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Coordination and notification
2) Exploratory excavation (as needed)
3) Excavation
4) Disposal of excess material
5) Hauling
6) Protection of the excavation
7) Forms
8) Reinforcing steel
9) Grounding rods
10) Concrete
11) Installing Foundation
12) Clean-up
13) Testing
17. Hardware Signal Pole Paint
a. Measurement
1) This Item is considered subsidiary to the various Traffic Signal Structures
being installed and painted.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item are subsidiary to various Traffic Signal Structures being installed and
painted and shall be subsidiary to the unit price bid per various Traffic
Signal Structures being installed and painted, and no other compensation
will be allowed.
18. Signal Controller
a. Furnish and Install Signal Controller
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 13
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 13 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each controller installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install Signal
Controller” installed for:
(1) Various mounting methods
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Taking precautions to ensure material is not damaged during
transportation
b) Installing the controller in the cabinet
c) Wiring
d) Testing
e) Troubleshooting
b. Install Signal Controller
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each assembly installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Controller & Cabinet”
installed for:
(1) Various mounting methods
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Scheduling pickup of material from the City
b) Pickup and transportation of material from the City to the jobsite
c) Taking precautions to ensure material is not damaged during
transportation
d) Installing the controller in the cabinet
e) Wiring
f) Testing
g) Troubleshooting
19. Controller Cabinet Assembly
a. Furnish and Install Controller Cabinet Assembly
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each assembly installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install
Controller & Cabinet Assmbly” installed for:
(1) Various mounting methods
(2) Various types
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Taking precautions to ensure material is not damaged during
transportation
b) Installing the controller cabinet assembly on the foundation or support
c) Power supply
d) Conflict monitor
e) Load switches
f) Conduit within 6” of foundation
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 14
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 14 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
g) Grounding rod
h) Wiring
i) Cable within 6” of foundation
j) Terminating
k) Testing
l) Troubleshooting
b. Install Controller Cabinet Assembly
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each assembly installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Controller & Cabinet”
installed for:
(1) Various mounting methods
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Scheduling pickup of material from the City
b) Pickup and transportation of material from the City to the jobsite
c) Taking precautions to ensure material is not damaged during
transportation
d) Installing the Controller and Cabinet Assembly on the foundation or
support
e) Conduit within 6” of foundation
f) Grounding rod
g) Wiring
h) Cable within 6” of foundation
i) Terminating
j) Testing
k) Troubleshooting
20. Roadside Flashing Beacon Assembly
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each assembly installed, relocated,
or removed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each assembly installed for:
a) Install Roadside Flashing Beacon Assembly
b) Relocate Roadside Flashing Beacon Assembly
c) Remove Roadside Flashing Beacon Assembly
d) Various applications including signal ahead, intersection ahead, stop
ahead, etc.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Installation
a) Furnishing, fabricating, galvanizing, assembling, and erecting the
roadside flashing beacon assemblies.
b) Foundations
c) Anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and templates
d) Cabinet
e) Controller
f) Flasher and interface board
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 15
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 15 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
g) Sign
h) Beacon
i) Back plate, if required
j) Solar panel, if specified
k) Solar regulator / charger, if specified
l) Batteries, if specified
m) Equipment, materials, labor, tools, and incidentals.
n) Pedestal pole base
o) Pedestal pole
p) Pole reinforcing collar
2) Relocation
a) Removing the roadside flashing beacon assembly
b) Removing existing foundations 2’ below grade
c) Installing new foundations
d) Furnishing, fabricating, and installing any new components as required
and replacing the assembly on its new foundations with all
manipulations and electrical work
e) Salvaging materials to be returned to the City
f) Disposal of unsalvageable material
g) Loading and hauling
h) Equipment, material, labor, tools, and incidentals
3) Removal
a) Removing the various roadside flashing beacon assemblies
components
b) Removing the foundations 2’ below grade
c) Storing the components to be reused or salvaged
d) Disposal of unsalvageable material
e) Backfilling and surface placement
f) Loading and hauling
g) Equipment, materials, tools, labor, and incidentals
21. School Zone Flasher Assembly
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each School Zone Flasher assembly
furnished and installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install School Zone
Flasher” furnished and installed.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Excavation and backfill
2) Foundation
3) Pedestal pole
4) Pedestal base
5) Pole reinforcing collar
6) Mounting hardware
7) Sign(s)
8) Wiring
9) Cabinet
10) Time switch
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 16
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 16 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
11) Cell modem
12) 12” polycarbonate traffic signal head
13) Solar array, if specified
14) Batteries, if specified
15) Flasher and interface circuit board
16) Photovoltaic controller
17) Power supply and timing
18) Programming
19) Erecting assembly on concrete foundation
20) Furnishing and placing anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and templates
22. Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB) Assembly
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each RRFB assembly furnished and
installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install RRFB”
installed for:
a) Various types
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Excavation and backfill
2) Foundation
3) Pole
4) LED flasher module
5) Mounting hardware
6) Sign(s)
7) Solar panel
8) Batteries
9) Wiring
10) Web-based monitoring
11) Detection system as specified in the plans
12) Wireless communication system
13) Erecting assembly on concrete foundation
14) Furnishing and placing anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and templates
23. Louvered Back Plates
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be considered subsidiary to the Signal
Head Assmbly pay items.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be considered subsidiary to the Signal Head Assmbly pay items.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Installing louvered back plate to signal heads
2) Mounting hardware (self-tapping screws)
3) Clean-up
24. Powder Coating Signal Structures
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each traffic signal structure powder
coated.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 17
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 17 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each traffic signal structure
powder coated for:
a) Various length of traffic signal poles
b) Various length of pedestal and push button poles
c) Various length of traffic signal mast arms
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Mechanically etching surfaces by brush blasting
2) Coating material
3) Delivery to and from powder coating company
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms
1. VIVDS: Video imaging vehicle detection system
2. BBU: Battery back-up system
3. LED: light emitting diode
4. APS: Accessible Pedestrian Signal
5. RRFB: Rectangular rapid flashing beacon
B. Definitions
1. Battery Back-Up (BBU) System
a. Automatic Bypass Relay
1) A unit connected between the inverter/charger, and the load, which can
automatically switch power to the controller cabinet service panel from
inverter output power to utility line power, in the event of an inverter
failure.
b. Battery Back-Up System (BBU System)
1) The battery back-up system includes but is not limited to a manual bypass
switch, automatic bypass switch or power transfer switch, inverter/charger,
batteries, wiring, external cabinet and all necessary hardware for system
operation.
c. Battery Back-Up System Software (BBU System software)
1) All software associated with operation, programming and functional
requirements of the BBU system.
d. Battery Monitoring Device
1) The device which monitors battery temperatures and charge rate of the
batteries used in the BBU system. Shall be an ambient sensor internal to
the inverter/charger.
e. Batteries
1) Standard 12V batteries wired in series with a cumulative minimum rated
capacity of 210 amp-hours.
f. Boost
1) When enabled, the BBU inverter/charger shall automatically switch into
this mode to raise the utility line voltage when it drops below a preset limit.
The limit may be user defined or use manufacturer default settings
(typically 100V AC).
g. Buck
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 18
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 18 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
1) When enabled, the unit shall automatically switch into this mode to reduce
the utility line voltage when it rises above a preset limit. The limit may be
user defined or use manufacturer default settings (typically 135V AC).
h. External Cabinet
1) The structure which houses the complete system components for the BBU
System.
i. Inverter/Charger
1) The unit which converts the DC voltage input into 120 VAC output for the
traffic signal cabinet to operate. As a minimum the inverter/charger shall
be rated for 1400 VA, 1000 watts.
j. Inverter Line Voltage
1) The power supplied from the BBU system to the traffic signal cabinet from
the BBU System inverter.
k. Manual Bypass
1) Manual switch that allows user to bypass BBU power to service system
equipment. Manual bypass switch switches utility line power directly to
cabinet.
l. Signal Operation Mode
1) A signalized intersection generating a 700W load when running in normal
operation.
m. Signal Flash Mode
1) A signalized intersection generating a 300W load when running in the flash
mode of operation.
n. Utility Line Voltage
1) The 120V AC power supplied to the BBU system
2. Back Plate
a. A thin strip of material extending outward from all sides of a signal head.
C. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Standard Testing Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM B85-57T – “Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings”
b. ASTM B26-57T – “Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand
Castings”
c. ASTM B-209-57T – “Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Sheet and Plate”
d. ASTM D-1535 – “Standard Practice for Specifying Color by the Munsell
System”
e. ASTM B-033 – “Standard Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper
Wire for Electrical Purposes”
f. ASTM B-8 – “Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper
Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft”
g. ASTM A3250-N – “High Strength Galvanized Steel Bolts”
h. ASTM A490-N – “High Strength Galvanized Steel Bolts”
i. ASTM A123 – “Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products”
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 19
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 19 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
j. ASTM A153 – “Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and
Steel Hardware”
3. Texas Manual on Uniform Control Devices (TMUTCD)
a. Part IV – Traffic Signals
4. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, 2009 Edition
a. Digits
5. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA)
a. FAA L-802-B
6. Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE):
a. Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Head – Light Emitting Diode (LED) Circular
Signal Supplemental (VTCSH), adopted June 2005.
b. Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Head Part 3: Light Emitting Diode (LED)
Arrow Traffic Signal Modules.
c. Equipment and Materials Standards, Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads
(VTCSH) Part 2: LED Vehicle Signal Modules.
d. PTCSI LED Signal Modules Draft Version of February 2009
1) Luminous intensity, uniformity and viewing angles
2) Chromaticity
7. Underwriter’s Laboratory Incorporate (UL)
a. Standard UL-651 – “Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings”
b. Standard UL-514B – “Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings
8. American Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE)
a. Section 6.1.2 ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2 – 2002, 3KV, 2 Ω
b. Section 6.1.1 ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2 – 2002, 6KV, 30Ω
c. Transient suppression
9. MIL-STD-883
a. Test Method 2007
b. Mechanical vibration
10. MIL-STD-810F
a. Procedure 1, Rain & Blowing Rain
b. Moisture resistance
11. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)
a. Section 2.1.6 NEMA TS 2-2003
b. Section 2.1.8 NEMA TS 2-2003
c. Transient voltage protection
d. Controller compatibility
12. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
a. Title 47 Sec 15 Sub. B
b. Electronic noise
13. International Municipal Signal Association (IMSA)
a. IMSA 5-1
b. IMSA 7-1
c. IMSA 20-1
14. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) / National Electric Code (NEC)
a. NFPA 70
b. Wiring
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 20
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 20 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
15. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
a. Section 8.2 IEC 1000-4-5
b. Section 8.0 IEC 1000-4-12
c. Transient suppression
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. City must approve any deviation from Specification ten (10) working days prior to
installation.
B. Preinstallation Field Inspection Meetings
1. 48 hours’ Notice of Intention to establish final location of any foundations, bases,
conduit, and detectors.
2. 48 hours’ notice to Texas811, City of Fort Worth Water and Sewer (817-871-
8275), and City of Fort Worth Traffic Signals/Street Lights/Storm Drains (817-
392-8100).
C. Scheduling
1. 48 hours advanced approval for existing traffic signal turn off of flash operation.
2. 48 hours advanced notice of placing traffic signal into operation.
3. 3 Working Days’ notice for City provided equipment pick-up.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for
specials.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data Sheets are required for:
1. Traffic signal housing, louvered back plates, visors, louvers, LED lamps, and
mounting hardware
2. Pedestrian signal housing, LED lamps, and mounting hardware
3. Pedestrian push button assemblies
4. Accessible Pedestrian Signals
5. Conduit
6. Battery back-up systems
7. Multi-conductor cable
8. Power lead-in cable
9. Ground boxes
10. Grounding conductor
11. Grounding rod
12. Concrete (Refer to Section 03 30 00)
13. Vibration dampers
14. Standard and Decorative Traffic Signal Structures
15. Roadside Flashing Beacon Assembly
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 21
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 21 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
16. School Zone Flasher Assembly
17. Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon Assembly
18. Miscellaneous items supplied
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration occurs during a
prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation.
2. Exposed anchor bolts shall be protected until pole shaft is installed.
3. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust
and corrosion.
4. Prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being exposed to direct sunlight and
extremes in temperature.
5. The Contractor shall secure and maintain a location to store the material in
accordance with Section 01 50 00.
B. Delivery and Acceptance
1. Inspect all City furnished materials prior to taking possession. Any damages after
taking possession shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
2. Arrange pick up all City furnished materials and deliver them to the Site.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty
1. Manufacturer’s warranty shall be in accordance with Division 1.
2. A 2 year warranty shall be required on all equipment furnished by the Contractor.
3. A 3 year warranty shall be required on all rectangular rapid flashing beacon
assemblies.
4. A 5 year unconditional warranty shall be required on all batteries for the battery back-
up systems furnished by the Contractor.
5. A 5 year warranty shall be required on all APS units.
6. School zone flasher
a. Each school zone flasher cabinet assembly shall be warranted to be free from
defects in material and workmanship for a period of five years from date of
shipment from the factory.
b. The 50/100 Ah battery shall be low self-discharging, leak proof, gelled
electrolyte and maintenance free intended for photo voltaic service. The
battery shall carry a prorated warranty for a minimum of two years by the
battery manufacturer.
c. The regulator shall have a warranty of five (5) years from the date of purchase.
d. Each time switch shall be warranted to be free from defects in material and
workmanship for a period of five (5) years from the date of shipment from the
factory.
B. Extended Correction Period
1. Contractor responsible for correcting any substandard workmanship and/or
materials for 24 months from the date the signal is accepted by the City.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 22
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 22 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS TO BE FURNISHED FROM THE CITY
A. Refer to Drawings and Contract Documents to determine if any Items are to be
purchased from the City and installed by the Contractor.
B. Items that the City may furnish include:
1. Signal controller
2. Controller cabinet assembly
3. Traffic signal poles
4. Traffic signal mast arms
5. Detection equipment
6. Preemption equipment
7. Signs
8. Communications equipment
2.2 ASSEMBLIES, EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, AND MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any equipment, product type, or material that is not listed in this Specification or
in TxDOT’s Material Producer List is considered a substitution and shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00 and not installed until approved.
a. http://www.txdot.gov/inside-txdot/division/construction/producer-list.html
3. If more than 1 unit of a given bid item is required, then the Contractor shall ensure
that all units are the product of 1 manufacturer, unless otherwise directed by the
Traffic Management Manager or designee. No mix or matching will be allowed.
B. Description
1. Regulatory Requirements
a. Traffic signal shall meet or exceed standards set forth by the Texas Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD), National Electric Code (NEC),
Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE), American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM), American Standards Institute (ANSI), and National
Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA).
2. It is the Contractor's responsibility to furnish all materials necessary to complete
each traffic signal installation, whether the item is specifically mentioned or not.
All unspecified materials (i.e., electrical tape, bolts, and nuts, etc.) shall meet the
requirements of the National Electrical Code.
3. All materials supplied by the Contractor shall be of new, un-depreciated stock.
C. Traffic Signal Materials
1. LED Traffic Signal Head Assemblies
a. Vehicle Signal Housings
1) The product bid shall be manufactured by one of the following
manufacturers:
a) Econolite
b) McCain
c) Other prior approved equivalent
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 23
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 23 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
2) The housing and doors of the signal head shall be made of die cast
aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM Specification B85-57T.
3) Sandcast aluminum alloy shall be used for other parts of the signal head if
in accordance with ASTM Specification B26-57T.
4) The visors shall be fabricated from aluminum sheet conforming to the
ASTM Specification B-209-57T.
5) All miscellaneous parts such as hinge pins, lens clips, locking devices, etc.
shall be made of a non-corrosive material.
6) The housing of the signal heads shall be constructed of interchangeable
sections.
7) All exterior mating surfaces shall be flat to assure waterproof and dust-
proof assembly of sections.
8) The top and bottom of the sections will have an opening approximately 2
inches in diameter to permit the entrance of 1 ½ inch pipe nipples.
9) Each section shall have serrated openings or equivalent, for providing a
positive and locked positioning of signal sections when used with serrated
mast arm or span wire mounting brackets.
10) The door and lens housing shall be equipped with a watertight and dust-
tight molded neoprene gasket.
a) The door of each signal section shall be attached to the housing in a
watertight and dust-proof manner.
b) Non-corrosive hinge pins and 2 wing screws will be furnished on each
door for opening and closing without the use of special tools.
(1) These hinges and screws shall be of such design as to allow even
gasket pressure.
11) Each signal head section shall be furnished with a detachable tunnel type
visor unless otherwise specified.
12) Visors shall be a minimum of 10 inches in length (depth) for 12 inch
signals.
a) Visors shall be attached to the door assemblies in a manner that
facilitates field removal and installation.
b) Visors shall be fabricated from aluminum and shall not form a
complete circle and shall have the bottom open, unless louvers are
required.
13) Traffic signal housing shall be furnished with LED inserts that comply
with this Specification and shall be in the standard red, amber and green
configuration as specified by the most current version of the TMUTCD.
14) A screw down type terminal block shall be provided with each signal head
for facilitating field wiring.
15) The pigtail leads from the lamp receptacles shall be connected to a
common terminal block within the head assembly.
16) Each terminal block will be at least a 6 position, 12 terminal strip securely
fastened at both ends to the signal housing.
17) The housing and outside surface of the visors shall be traffic yellow (RAL
1023) in color.
a) The inside surface of visors shall be a “Dull” or “Flat-black” color.
b) The outside surface shall have a minimum of 2 coats of baked chrome
yellow enamel (TT-C-595E1310), Munsell notation O.YP 47/15/3, per
FAA Specification L-802-B and ASTM D 1535.
b. LED traffic signal lamp unit
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 24
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 24 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
1) The product bid shall be manufactured by one of the following
manufacturers:
a) GE Lighting Solutions
b) Duralight
c) Other prior approved equivalent
2) The equipment shall conform to the applicable requirements of: the
Underwriter’s Laboratory Incorporate (UL), the American Society for
Testing and Materials (ASTM), the American Standards Institute (ANSI),
the National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA), and other
applicable standards and specifications.
3) The LED traffic signal lamp unit shall comply at a minimum with the
Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE) specification for Vehicle Traffic
Control Signal Head – Light Emitting Diode (LED) Circular Signal
Supplement (VTCSH); adopted June 2005, for circular indications and
Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Head Part 3: Light Emitting Diode (LED)
Arrow Traffic Signal Modules for arrow indications.
4) The LED shall have an “incandescent” look, using the minimum number of
LED’s that comply with the ITE specification.
5) If proper orientation of the LED unit is required for optimum performance,
a clear, durable and unmistakable marking shall be provided on each lens
as to its proper orientation (top or bottom).
6) The manufacturer’s name, serial number and other necessary identification
shall be permanently marked on the backside of the LED traffic signal
lamp unit. A label shall be placed on the unit certifying compliance to ITE
standards.
7) Documentation Requirements
a) Each LED traffic signal lamp unit shall be provided with the following
documentation:
(1) Complete and accurate installation wiring guide
(2) Contact name, address, and telephone number for the
representative, manufacturer, or distributor for warranty repair.
(3) A copy of a test report certified by an independent laboratory that
the LED traffic signal lamp model submitted meets all the
requirements of these Specifications in accordance with ITE
VTSCH Part 2.
(4) Schematic diagram for each unit, along with any necessary
installation instructions
(5) For each unit submitted, the manufacturer name, brand and model
number of LEDs used shall be provided, along with the LED
manufacturer’s recommended drive current and degradation
curves.
(6) Warranty information from manufacturer
(7) Quality assurance testing documentation
c. Signal head louvers
1) Louvers shall be provided for those signal sections indicated in the
Drawings.
2) All louvers shall be of such design as to provide visibility of the lens for
the intended lane of traffic as indicated by the Drawings and block
visibility to all other lanes.
d. Mounting hardware
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 25
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 25 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
1) Mast Arm Mount Signal Bracket, 1-Way Cable Mount
a) The product bid shall be the mast arm mount signal bracket, 1-way
cable mount, for 3 to 5 section head with 84 inches cable and 74 inches
long gusseted tube manufactured by Pelco, part no. AB-0125, or
approved equivalent.
2) Mast Arm Mount Signal Bracket, 1-Way Cable Mount, Clamp Assembly
a) The product bid shall be the mast arm clamp assembly with 84 inches
cable manufactured by Pelco, part no. AB-3009, or approved
equivalent.
3) Mast Arm Mount Signal Bracket, 2-Way Cable Mount
a) The product bid shall be the mast arm mount signal bracket, cluster
cable mount, for 5 section signal head with 84 inches cable
manufactured by Pelco, part no. AB-0138, or approved equivalent.
General Specifications are below.
4) General Specifications
a) Bracket shall be completely adjustable such that it is capable of
rotational adjustment about the bracket axis, vertical adjustment,
rotational adjustment about the mast arm and rotational adjustment
right & left from the vertical plane.
b) Bracket shall be provided with aircraft type stranded cable for
fastening the bracket to the supporting arm or structure.
c) Bracket shall be easily adjustable to fit all sizes of round, octagonal,
elliptical or other shaped structure without special tools or equipment.
d) Bracket shall attach to the signal in a clamping manner holding the
signal both top and bottom in order to assure maximum rigidity.
(1) For the 1-way cable mount, a standard bracket shall accommodate
all major signal manufacturers’ signals from a 3 section 1-way 12
inches signal through a 5 section 1-way 12 inches signal and any
combination thereof including 3M and ICC configurations.
(2) For the 2-way cable mount, a standard bracket shall accommodate
all major signal manufacturers’ signals for a 3 section 2-way 12
inches signal and any combination thereof including 3M and ICC
configurations.
e) Upper and Lower Arms
(1) Shall be cast from 319 aluminum or equivalent
(2) The lower bracket arm shall be internally threaded to
accommodate the threaded vertical support tube.
(3) The lower arm shall be furnished with ABS plastic covers, which
will slide and snap into position without the use of fasteners or
tools.
(4) All upper and lower arms shall have 72 tooth serrations cast into
the arm to assure a positive lock with signal housing and shall be
secured about their rotational axis with setscrews.
(5) Both upper and lower arms shall have a tri-bolt arrangement for
attachment to the signal housing.
(6) Opening in the lower arms shall accommodate a minimum of 3, 12
conductor 14 gauge cables.
f) Vertical Support Tube
(1) Shall be a double gusseted tube extruded from 6063-T6 aluminum
alloy or equivalent and have a cross section.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 26
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 26 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
(2) Each tube shall be complete with a vinyl closure strip and be
threaded on 1 end to accommodate the lower arm assembly.
g) Mast Arm Clamp Assembly
(1) Both male and female halves shall be cast from 713 aluminum
alloy or equivalent.
(2) The male clamp half shall be secured within the female half,
utilizing a spring steel retainer ring.
(3) Such assembly shall provide an unobstructed center of 2 3/8 inches
minimum diameter, allowing for 360 degree rotation of the clamp
assembly.
(4) There shall be no internal cross bracing assembly obstructing the
center opening.
h) Aircraft Type Stranded Cable
(1) Shall be fabricated in 1 piece with a minimum diameter of 3/16
inches either galvanized or stainless steel
(2) The cable shall be complete with 7/16 inch stainless steel clamp
screw permanently attached to each end. Each clamp screw shall
be fitted with a stainless steel hex nut, SAE flat washer and an
aluminum-bearing washer.
(3) The clamp screw shall be flattened on 2 opposite sides for wrench
accommodation. The stranded cable shall be of sufficient length to
fasten the clamp assembly to a minimum pole diameter of 8.6
inches.
i) Each bracket shall be complete with all necessary bolts, washers,
gaskets, etc. to allow assembly of the signal to the bracket and the
bracket to the mast arm.
j) All aluminum parts shall have an Alodine (or equivalent) finish. All
steel parts shall have a traffic yellow (RAL 1023) zinc di-chromate
finish.
2. LED Countdown Pedestrian Signal Head Assemblies
a. General
1) Furnish a single, self-contained module, not requiring on-site assembly for
retrofit into existing traffic signal housings as defined in TxDOT DMS-
11130, Pedestrian Signal Heads. Ensure that installation does not require
special tools.
2) Provide LED’s rated for 100,000 hours of continuous operation over a
temperature range of -40°C to +74°C.
3) Ensure modules are rated for a minimum life of 60 months.
4) Ensure modules meet all parameters of this specification throughout this
60-month period.
5) Use LEDs manufactured using aluminum-indium-gallium-phosphide
(AlInGaP) technology or other LEDs with lower susceptibility to
temperature degradation than aluminum-gallium-arsenic (AlGaAs)
technology. AlGaAs LEDs are not allowed aluminum.
b. Housing
1) The product bid shall be manufactured by one of the following
manufacturers:
a) McCain Traffic Supply
b) Other prior approved equivalent
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 27
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 27 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
2) Housings will not be provided for retrofit modules.
3) Housing units shall be new and unweathered.
4) Housing shall be in accordance with TxDOT DMS-11130.
5) The housing shall be fitted with an LED module that has an incandescent
look.
6) The housing shall be a 1-piece corrosion resistant aluminum alloy die-
casting with integrally cast top, bottom and sides that are weather proof
and dust-tight.
7) The housing shall be right and left drilled for clamshell attachment and
shall have top and bottom ports that are opened and capped and will
accommodate standard 1 ½ inches pipe.
8) The approximate size of housing (including body, door, and ears) shall be
16.0 inches H x 18.75 inches W x 8 inches D.
9) The door frame shall be a 1-piece corrosion resistant aluminum die-casting.
10) The housing shall be traffic yellow (RAL 1023).
11) The housing shall have a standard 3-position terminal block, pre-wired to
receptacles to permit easy field installation of a power supply.
12) All necessary hardware shall be provided with housing. Rivets shall be
aluminum and bolts, lock washers, screws, eyebolt assembly and pins shall
be stainless steel.
c. Mounting hardware
1) Mounting hardware shall be the clamshell mount type #4805 manufactured
by McCain, or approved equivalent.
2) Mounting hardware shall be a 2-piece, cast aluminum alloy assembly.
3) The 2 separate castings shall be joined in the final assembly by the use of
stainless steel spring pins.
4) The pole half of the assembly shall be designed to adapt to a wide range of
pole configurations (4 inch minimum diameter).
5) Unit construction shall allow band-it type mounting.
6) Band-it type mounting shall be permitted by 2 recessed slots near the top
and bottom of the pole half of the assembly.
7) The pedestrian assembly shall be capable of being mounted on the pole by
lining up the mounting pins of the pole half with the mounting ears of the
pedestrian assembly and lowering it into position.
8) 3 sets of screw terminal pairs shall be located on a terminal block in the
upper third of the head half of the clamshell assembly.
9) A closed cell neoprene sponge gasket shall be provided on the mating
surfaces of the 2 halves of the assembly to compete the rain-tight
construction.
d. Module
1) Modules shall comply with TxDOT DMS-11130.
2) Ensure retrofit modules are capable of replacing the optical unit.
3) The module lens may be a replaceable part without the need to replace the
complete module.
4) Ensure the walking person and hand icons (16 in. x 18 in. size only) are
full (not outlines).
5) Ensure the countdown digits are made up of two rows of LEDs.
6) Ensure each digit is a minimum of 7 in. in height.
7) For each nominal message bearing surface (module) size, use the
corresponding H (height) and W (width):
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 28
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 28 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
Bearing
Surface
Module
Size
Icon
Height
Icon
Width
Countdown
Height
Countdown
Width
H (16 x 18
in.) Min 7 in. 7 in. Min 9 in. 6.5 in.
8) Ensure the units do not have any attachments or options that will allow the
mode to be changed from counting the clearance cycle, to the full
walk/don’t walk cycle.
9) Provide modules that are single, self-contained devices, not requiring on-
site assembly for installation into existing traffic signal housing.
10) Ensure the power supply is designed to fit and mount inside the pedestrian
signal module.
11) Ensure the assembly and manufacturing process for the module is designed
to assure all internal LED and electronic components are adequately
supported to withstand mechanical shock and vibration from high winds
and other sources.
e. Environmental Requirements
1) Ensure the module is rated for use in the ambient operating temperature
range, measured at the exposed rear of the module, of –40°C to +74°C (–
40°F to +165°F).
2) Ensure the pedestrian module is designed to meet NEMA 250 Hose down
Test.
3) The test is to be conducted on a stand-alone unit. No protective housing
will be used.
4) Ensure the module lens is UV stabilized.
5) Ensure that the LED optical unit is dust- and moisture-proof to protect all
internal LED and electrical components.
6) Provide housing for each LED optical unit that is a sealed watertight
enclosure that prevents dirt contamination and allows for safe handling in
all weather conditions.
7) Perform moisture-resistance testing on LED signal sections in accordance
with the requirements in the latest NEMA Standard 250 for Type 4
enclosures.
8) Evidence of internal moisture after testing will be cause for rejection.
f. Signal Lens
1) Ensure the lens of the LED pedestrian and countdown signal modules are
polycarbonate UV stabilized and a minimum of 1/4 in. thick.
2) Ensure the exterior of the lens of the LED pedestrian and countdown signal
module are smooth and frosted to prevent sun phantom.
g. Module Identification
1) Each module must be permanently identified on the backside with the
manufacturer’s name, model numbers, manufactured date (minimum week
and year), and serial number.
2) Ensure the following operating characteristics are identified: nominal
voltage, power consumption, wattage and Volt-Ampere.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 29
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 29 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
h. Photometric Requirements
1) Luminance, Uniformity & Distribution
a) Ensure that for a minimum period of 60 months, the maintained
minimum luminance values for the modules under normal operating
conditions are not less than 2200 cd/m2 for the Walking Person icon
and 1400 cd/m2 for the Hand icon when measured perpendicular to the
surface of the module at nine (nine) separate points on the icon.
b) These values may decrease up to 50% of these table values beyond 15°
from the perpendicular in either to the left or right on a horizontal
plane.
c) Ensure that the luminance of the module does not exceed three times
the maintained minimum luminance of the modules.
d) Ensure that the uniformity of the walking person and hand icons’
illumination meet a ratio of not more than 1 to 5 between the minimum
and maximum luminance measurements (in Cd/m2).
2) Chromaticity
a) The standard colors for the LED Pedestrian Signal Module must be
White for the walking person and Portland Orange for the hand icon
and countdown digits on a black opaque background.
b) Furnish an optical unit that remains in accordance with the
chromaticity (color) requirements in the latest Equipment and Material
Standards of the Institute of Transportation Engineers, Chapter 3:
"Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Heads," for a minimum of 60
months over an operating temperature range of −40°F to 165°F.
i. Electrical
1) General
a) Furnish modules that are operationally compatible with traffic signal
controllers, cabinets and accessories manufactured to City
specifications.
b) Ensure that all wiring and terminal blocks meet the requirements of
Section 13.02 of the VTCSH Standard.
c) Three secured, color coded, 914 mm (36 in) long 600 V, 16 AWG
minimum, jacketed wires, conforming to the National Electrical Code,
rated for service at +105°C, are to be provided for electrical
connection.
d) Furnish LED signal modules that are designed so that there is no
noticeable light output when connected to rated voltage through an
impedance of 15 Kohm (either resistive or capacitive).
e) Furnish signal modules that are designed so that, under normal
operation, an AC voltage of no greater than 10 volts RMS shall be
developed across the unit when it is connected in series with any value
of impedance greater than 15 Kohms and for any applied AC voltage
between 95 and 135 volts RMS that is connected across this series
combination.
f) In addition, the signal module must be designed so that the voltage
across the module will reduce in value to less than 10 volts RMS
within 100 msec when the module is switched off by any solid state
switch or switch pack having an impedance of 15 Kohms or greater.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 30
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 30 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
g) Incorporate a regulated power supply engineered to electrically protect
the LEDs and maintain safe and reliable operation in each LED optical
unit.
h) Use a power supply that provides capacitor-filtered direct current (DC)
regulated current to the LEDs per the LED manufacturer specification.
Designs that operate at currents greater than the LED manufacturer's
recommended drive current will not be allowed.
i) Design the power supply so that the failure of an individual component
or any combination of components cannot cause the signal to be
illuminated after alternating current (AC) power is removed. Provide a
signal module that is equipped such that each indication (i.e. walk
symbol, hand, and countdown display) is provided with a separate
power supply.
2) Voltage Range
a) Ensure the LED modules operate from a 60 ± 3 Hertz AC line power
over a voltage range from 80 to 135 VAC RMS.
b) The current draw must be sufficient to ensure compatibility and proper
triggering and operation of load current switches and conflict monitors.
c) Nominal operating voltage for all measurements must be 120 ± 3 Volts
rms.
d) Fluctuations in line voltage over the range of 80Vac to 135Vac must
not affect luminous intensity by more than ± 10%.
e) Ensure the LED circuitry prevents flickering at less than 100 Hz over
the voltage range stated above.
f) Provide modules that are designed and constructed so that the failure of
a single LED will not result in the loss of additional LEDs.
g) There should be no illumination of the module when the applied
voltage is less than 35 VAC RMS.
h) To test for this condition the each icon must first be fully illuminated at
the nominal operating voltage.
i) The applied voltage must then be reduced to the point where there is no
illumination.
j) This point must be greater than 35 VAC RMS.
k) Turn-On and Turn-Off Time
(1) Ensure each icon of the module reaches 90% of their full
illumination (turn-on) within 75 msec of the application of the
nominal operating voltage.
(2) The modules must not be illuminated (turn-off) after 75 msec of
the removal of the nominal operating voltage.
l) For abnormal conditions when nominal voltage is applied to the unit
across the two-phase wires (rather than being applied to the phase wire
and the neutral wire) the pedestrian signal unit must default to the hand
symbol.
m) Transient Voltage Protection
(1) Ensure the module’s on-board circuitry includes voltage surge
protection to withstand high-repetition noise transients and low-
repetition high-energy transients as stated in Section 2.1.6, NEMA
Standard TS-2, 2003, or the latest version.
n) Electronic Noise
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 31
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 31 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
(1) The modules and associated on-board circuitry must meet Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Sub Part B, Section
15 regulations concerning the emission of electronic noise.
o) Power Factor (PF) and AC Harmonics
(1) Ensure the modules provide a power factor of 0.90 or greater when
operated at nominal operating voltage, and 25ºC (77ºF).
(2) Total harmonic distortion induced into an AC power line by the
module, operated at nominal operating voltage, at 25ºC (77ºF)
shall not exceed 20%.
3) Module Functions
a) Cycle
(1) The module must operate in one mode: Clearance Cycle
Countdown Mode Only.
(2) The display of the number of remaining seconds must begin only
at the beginning of the pedestrian change interval.
(3) After the countdown displays zero, the display must remain dark
until the beginning of the next countdown.
(4) Module will not have user accessible switches or controls for
modification of cycle.
(5) Ensure the countdown pedestrian signal displays the number of
seconds remaining until the termination of the pedestrian change
interval.
(6) Countdown displays must not be used during the walk interval nor
during the yellow change interval of a concurrent vehicular phase.
b) Learning Cycle
(1) Ensure that at power on, the module enters a single automatic
learning cycle.
(2) During the automatic learning cycle, the countdown display
remains dark.
c) Cycle Modification
(1) The unit re-programs itself if it detects any increase or decrease of
Pedestrian Timing.
(2) The counting unit will go blank once a change is detected and then
take one complete pedestrian cycle (with no counter during this
cycle) to adjust its buffer timer.
d) Recycling
(1) Ensure the module allows for consecutive cycles without
displaying the steady Hand icon (“Don’t Walk”) or the countdown
display.
e) Preemption
(1) Provide modules that recognize preemption events and temporarily
modify the crossing cycle accordingly.
(2) If the controller preempts during the walking man, the countdown
will follow the controller's directions and will adjust from walking
man to flashing hand.
(3) It will start to count down during the flashing hand. If the
pedestrian change interval is interrupted or shortened as a part of a
transition into a preemption sequence, the countdown pedestrian
signal display should be discontinued and go dark immediately
upon activation of the preemption transition.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 32
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 32 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
(4) The next cycle, following the preemption event, must use the
correct, initially programmed values.
f) “Don’t Walk” Steady
(1) If the controller output displays Don’t Walk steady condition and
the unit has not arrived to zero or if both the hand and man are
dark for some reason, the unit suspends any timing and the digits
will go dark.
(2) A steady UPRAISED HAND (symbolizing DONT WALK) signal
indication must be displayed during the yellow change interval and
any red clearance interval (prior to a conflicting green being
displayed).
g) Power Failures
(1) The module must maintain a consistent countdown during short
power failures (less than 1 second).
(2) A longer failure or an absence of signal greater than one (1) second
must turn off countdown display and trigger a restart system
remembering the last sequence, as it is done for the 170/2070
traffic controller.
3. Pedestrian Push Button Assemblies
a. The product bid shall be the Bulldog™ pushbutton BDLM2-Y with Bulldog
Pole Mount BDPM-X manufactured by Polara, or approved equivalent, and
shall meet the following specifications:
1) Button must be highly vandal resistant and pressure activated with
essentially no moving parts.
2) Button must be able to withstand an impact from a baseball bat or hammer.
3) Button housing must be cast aluminum powder coated traffic yellow (RAL
1023).
4) Button cap must be made of 316 stainless steel.
5) Switch must be solid state electronic Piezo switch rated for 100 million
cycles with no moving plunger or moving electrical contacts.
6) Button must have LED to give indication of button being pushed.
7) Button must give a 2 toned beep indication of button being pushed (1 tone
for push, 1 tone for release).
8) Button must have built in surge protection.
9) Button must be able to hold the call for a minimum of 5 seconds.
10) Button must operate immediately after being completely immersed in
water for 5 minutes.
11) Button must not be able to allow ice to form such that it would impede
function of button or button cap.
12) All switch electronics must be sealed within the cast aluminum housing.
13) Button must have raised ridges to protect the button from side impacts.
14) The button shall come complete with an aluminum round housing to be
mounted to the signal pole. The housing shall be cast aluminum powder
coated traffic yellow (RAL 1023).
15) R10-3e push button signs
16) All necessary pole mounting hardware shall be supplied.
4. Accessible Pedestrian Signals (APS)
a. The product bid shall be either Navigator APS™ by Polara, Pelco IntelliCross,
or approved equivalent, and shall meet the following specifications:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 33
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 33 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
1) Housing requirements
a) Provide a 2-piece cast aluminum housing unit consisting of a base
housing and a removable cover.
b) Shall be vandal proof and be powder coated to provide a high contrast
to the support structure for the visually impaired.
c) Made of corrosion-resistant material. The bolts used for mounting the
APS housing to the support structure shall be stainless steel.
d) Shall come as a two part swivel and lock system with APS button
station and mounting plate. The mounting plate must have two
elongated holes for mounting to the standard of minimum 0.300” x
0.5”. One mounting hole shall be in a vertical orientation and the
second mounting hole shall be in a horizontal orientation to allow for
drill alignment errors.
e) For ease of mounting a push button height indicator will be located on
the mounting plate to assure consistent and uniform installation.
f) The swivel and lock system shall provide a minimum of plus and
minus 15 degrees of rotation. A single security screw shall be used to
secure the APS assembly to the mounting plate for quick assembly and
disassembly.
g) The mounting plate shall provide for banding the APS assembly to a
pole with two 5/8” type steel bands.
h) The mounting plate shall provide a bend/ radius for wiring exiting from
the pole and create a natural drip loop of the wires before entering the
APS assembly.
i) Be attached to the pole with two ¼-20 screws suitable for use in tapped
holes. The mounting plate hole arrangement shall ensure that the clear
space between any two mounting holes required in the post must be at
least twice the diameter of the larger hole.
j) The size and design of the APS button shall be to allow two APS
button assemblies to be mounted adjacent on a four inch diameter pole
without need for an additional adaptor or spacer.
k) Access to wiring and programming ports is provided via a separate
compartment distinct from the main housing.
2) Ensure the internal components provide a pushbutton with all the electrical
and mechanical parts required for operation.
3) Supply housing or an adapter (saddle) that conforms to the pole shape,
fitting flush to ensure a rigid installation.
4) Supply adapters of the same material and construction as the housing.
5) Close unused openings with a weather-tight closure painted to match the
housing.
6) Provide a minimum 0.5 inch hole with an insulating bushing through the
back of the housing.
7) Ensure the manufacturers name or trademark is located on the housing.
8) The APS pushbutton shall be a solid state switch rated for at least 1 million
operations.
9) Ensure APS complies with US Access Board’s “Draft Guidelines for
Accessible Public Rights of Way” (PROWAG) Section R306.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 34
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 34 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
10) Ensure that the APS complies with and provides operation consistent with
requirements of Sections 4E.09 through 4E.13 of the 2009 Edition of the
Federal Highway Administration publication Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices.
11) Supply an APS (pushbutton station) that includes a pedestrian sign, a
pushbutton, vibrotactile arrow and an audible speaker contained in one unit
and with the following features:
a) Vibrating tactile arrow with high visual contrast.
b) Vibrotactile arrow shall be rotatable without disassembly of the APS
enclosure. The arrow shall be adjustable by 4-degree increments.
c) Tactile arrows
(1) Raised a minimum of 0.031 inches (0.8mm) from the pedestrian
detector surface
(2) Between 1.378 inches (35mm) and 1.772 inches (45mm) in length
(3) A stroke width between 10 and 15 percent of the length of the
arrow
(4) An open arrowhead at 45 degrees to the shaft and not exceeding 33
percent of the length of the shaft
(5) Be easily removable and rotatable without APS button station
disassembly
(6) Arrow affixed to the pedestrian detector face secured with security
type screws
(7) Where required a double arrow shall be provided on the pedestrian
detector
(8) Tactile arrows shall be located on the pedestrian detector, have
high visual contrast (dark on light), and shall be aligned parallel to
the direction of travel on the associated crosswalk
d) Pushbutton locator tone with a duration of 0.15 seconds or less,
repeating at 1-second intervals.
e) The pushbutton locator tones must deactivate when the traffic control
signal is operating in a flashing mode.
f) The locator tones must be intensity responsive to ambient sound and be
audible (a maximum of 5 dBA louder than ambient sound) up to 6 to12
feet from the pushbutton or to the building line whichever is less.
g) Speech walk message for the WALKING PERSON (symbolizing
WALK) indication.
h) Speech pushbutton information message.
i) Unless plans require otherwise, provide each pushbutton station with a
9” X 15” sign. Use sheet aluminum with minimum thickness of 0.080
in. for information signs for push buttons.
j) Pedestrian detector shall:
(1) Be a minimum of 2-inches (50mm) in diameter,
(2) Raised above the surrounding surface for ease of operation,
(3) The mechanism should not require more than 5 pounds (22.2 N) of
force to activate,
(4) Provide mounting for the directional tactile arrow, and
(5) Provide a slot for changing the direction of the arrow through
button rotation with a blade type screwdriver.
k) Audible tone walk indications
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 35
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 35 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
(1) Consisting of ticks repeating at 8 to 10 times per second at multiple
frequencies with a dominant component at 880 Hz ± 20%.
(2) It must provide an audible walk indication during the walk interval
only.
(3) The audible walk indication must be from the beginning of the
associated pedestrian walk phase and must have the same duration
as the pedestrian walk signal except it must be possible to limit the
accessible walk indication to the first 7 seconds of the walk
interval when the pedestrian signal rests in walk.
(4) When the accessible walk indication is limited during rest in walk
a button press during the walk interval must recall the walk
interval provided the crossing time remaining is greater than the
pedestrian change interval.
12) Operational Features of system
a) Sound verification
(1) A sound verification feature shall be employed in the APS button
to prevent incorrect or erroneous sound direction indications from
reaching pedestrians.
(2) The sound verification system shall provide independent
monitoring of the sounds and pedestrian signals and independent
control over the release of the sound to the pedestrian.
(3) The APS button internal program shall compare the digital sound
to be played directly with pedestrian signals monitored by the push
button station.
(4) This shall be accomplished by a separate microcontroller chip
located directly in each button station.
b) Distributed Intelligence
(1) The APS button stations shall operate independently and not
require a central control point for normal button operation.
(2) Button to button communication shall use existing field wiring.
(3) The APS button stations shall not use wireless (over air)
communications for any communication requirement between
buttons.
(4) If the APS features fail in one pushbutton station the button will
still operate as a button and the other station will operate as
normal.
c) Sounds
(1) The APS button station shall be capable of emitting sound cues
and voice messages during the Walk, Pedestrian Clearance, Don’t
Walk, Short and Long button presses, and on demand Train,
Emergency or Alerts requests.
(2) The APS button shall provide a playlist for combing up to four
sound cues or messages. The APS button shall provide a minimum
of eight walk sounds, four button press sounds, two pedestrian
clearance sounds, and one don’t walk sound.
d) Crossing sounds concurrent or alternating
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 36
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 36 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
(1) When buttons are used at each end of a crosswalk, the audible
“Walk” and/or “Flash Don’t Walk” (Pedestrian Clearance)
messages shall be agency configurable to emit tones that are
concurrent or alternating (when one is emitting a tone the other is
silent), for the full duration of the associated signal.
(2) The concurrent/alternating mode shall be available on both the
button and overhead beacon speakers and separately settable to
commence with the Walk signal, Pedestrian Clearance signal or
both. The concurrent or alternating sounds shall be adjustable on-
site with the programming device.
e) Audible beaconing sound during Walk
(1) The button shall provide several optional sounds for beaconing
including custom sounds/messages. This sound shall be
configurable to play through a push button speaker and/or optional
overhead speaker.
(2) The button shall provide smart detection logic to provide a way-
finding sound “on-demand”. This includes a short button press to
only activate the button Walk sound/message and a long button
press to play the walk and/or pedestrian clear sound/message
through the button AND overhead beacon speaker.
f) Ambient noise compensation
(1) A microphone shall be integrated at the button station to
automatically adjust the volume levels to compensate for the
ambient noise. Ambient noise shall be sampled prior to each sound
play.
g) Sound playback and sound pressure level settings
(1) Configuration for each sound shall be independently settable as
follows:
(a) Minimum sound level settable from 50dB to 110dB in 1dB
increments
(b) Maximum sound level settable from 50dB to 110dB in 1dB
increments
(c) Gain (above ambient) level settable from 0dB to 20dB in 1dB
increments
(d) Period (repetition rate) settable from 0.1sec to 999sec in 0.1sec
increments
(e) Playback speaker settable as; Button, Overhead (Beacon) or
both
(f) Duration of sound settable from 0sec to 999sec in 1sec
increments with default = 0 for maximum duration
(2) All sound level adjustments shall be presented in decibels (dB) and
settable in increments of 1dB. Separate sound level settings, as
above, shall be provided for short and long button press.
h) Rest in walk application
(1) Fixed walk sound time – no re-service until next walk signal
(a) During the Walk signal, if the Walk sound has completed due
to a fixed Duration setting, if no Pedestrian Clearance sound is
programmed the Don’t Walk sound shall play by default.
(b) An APS button activation shall not replay the Walk sound after
the duration has passed while the Walk signal is still active.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 37
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 37 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
(c) The APS button shall remember the activation call and at the
beginning of the Pedestrian Clearance the APS button shall
cause a contact closure to the traffic controller pedestrian input
and subsequently play the walk sound at the beginning of the
next Walk signal.
(2) Fixed walk sound time – re-service on demand
(a) If a Pedestrian Clearance sound is programmed in the APS
Button, the Walk sound shall be re- serviceable within the
Walk Signal when activated.
(b) The Pedestrian Clearance sound is to ensure that there is a
continuity of sound for pedestrian wayfinding in the crossing
should the Walk sound play and be terminated abruptly from a
signal change.
i) Adjustable long button press timing
(1) Configurable timing shall be available for the button to define how
long the button must be pressed to request a “Walk”
sound/message, played in accordance with the “long push setting”
for the sound message.
(2) This indication is defined as a “long button press”. An
acknowledgement tone shall be emitted when a “long button press”
has been detected which is different from the short button press.
The acknowledgement tone shall be customizable and contain at
least five default choices.
j) Sound without button press
(1) Configuration shall be available on the button station to allow the
Walk sound and vibration to be activated at every Walk and
Pedestrian clearance signal without push button press requirement.
k) Signal malfunction monitoring
(1) The APS button station shall directly monitor the status of the
pedestrian signal and provide signal malfunction detection should
both walk and don’t walk signals either be steady OFF, ON.
(2) In the case of a detected malfunction, the sound and vibration
functions shall be disabled until the conflict is removed for more
than approximately 1 second and the APS is in the Don’t Walk
interval.
13) Special Features (Communications Interface Unit (CUI))
a) Fault indication output to traffic controller
(1) The CIU shall monitor the health of each APS button and can be
programmed to provide a fault output to the traffic signal
controller.
(2) In the event of failure of an APS button or the CIU a contact
closure shall provide fault indication to the traffic signal controller.
b) Evening sound control
(1) The CIU shall support an “Evening Maximum” sound control
hardware input which can be connected to a traffic controller time
of day control output.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 38
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 38 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
(2) The Evening Maximum input, when active (must be settable as
voltage ‘present’ or ‘absent’), shall cause selected APS buttons to
use the Evening Maximum sound level setting for all sounds. This
control shall be independent for each sound on each button to
achieve optimal intersection sound levels.
(3) The APS button shall support a timeout for this input to guard
against a stuck condition should the CIU fail.
c) Sound inhibit control
(1) The CIU shall support an APS button “Inhibit” control hardware
input which can be connected to a traffic controller time of day
control output.
(2) The Inhibit input, when active (must be settable as voltage
‘present’ or ‘absent’), shall cause the APS buttons to Inhibit Sound
for all button speakers.
(3) The APS button shall support a timeout for this input to guard
against a stuck condition should the CIU fail.
d) Special event sounds
(1) The CIU shall support a “Special Event” sound control hardware
input which can be connected to a traffic controller or external
device event or time of day control output.
(2) The Special Event input, when active (must be settable as voltage
‘present’ or ‘absent’), shall cause selected APS buttons to use play
a Special Event sound playlist for that input.
(3) The CIU shall support configuration of up to 11 Special event type
inputs including at a minimum; 1-Train, 5-Emergency vehicle and
5-Alert messages.
e) Pre-timed intersection APS operation
(1) When APS buttons are installed at pre-timed (non-pedestrian
actuated) intersections they shall provide the same level of APS
service as if they were installed at a pedestrian actuated
intersection. An actuation at one APS button shall be transmitted to
the associated APS button on the same signal phase for proper
APS Button beaconing as may be required to assist pedestrians in
the crossing area.
(2) The CIU shall provide a minimum of four pedestrian request
outputs that can be connected to the traffic signal controller
pedestrian inputs. The CIU pedestrian request outputs shall be
configurable to mirror APS button actuations to a minimum of four
phases.
(3) The CIU pedestrian request outputs shall provide a solid-state pull
down to a TSC pedestrian input.
14) Product operating conditions
a) The APS button system shall be powered and operate from the existing
nominal 120 Vac pedestrian Don’t Walk and Walk signals only.
b) The APS button shall allow direct connection to the traffic signal
pedestrian isolator inputs. The APS system shall operating in
temperatures from -37 ºC to +74 ºC (-35ºF to +165 ºF).
15) Materials and fabrication
a) Audible Signals shall be supplied with all mounting hardware for pole
and signal head mounting.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 39
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 39 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
b) The button station shall be die cast aluminum and shall be
weatherproof and vandal proof. The approximate dimensions are
336.55 x 127 x 88.9 mm or 13.25” x 5” x 3.5” (L x W x H).
c) The button station shall be designed to adapt to mounting on a support
structure without compromising the mechanical stability and the
environmental protection.
d) The Tactile Arrow shall be integrated into the button station housing.
e) Security screws shall be incorporated in key areas to discourage
tampering or unauthorized access.
f) Existing signage shall be used or sign and mounting bracket supplied
as follows. 5x7-3/4 sign with integrated sign holder
g) 9x12 sign with sign adapter 9x15 sign with sign adapter
16) Coating
a) The button station body shall be powder coated customers requested
color.
b) The button plunger shall be powder coated silver.
c) The Tactile arrow shall be E-coated black with clear top coat.
17) Programming requirements
a) The APS System shall allow pre-configuration or onsite configuration
of the APS attributes. The APS button can be ordered with a built in
configuration to the MUTCD 2009 standards for pedestrian poles that
are 10 feet or more apart and allow setup through a simple button press
method without need of a programming device.
b) Programming device and/or software application shall be available for
configuration of all components of the APS system. The programming
device shall be compatible with Microsoft Windows 8.1, 7, Vista, XP.
c) The programmer shall allow wired and wireless programming of the
APS button and system components. It shall be possible to program
one or more APS buttons from any APS button at the intersection.
d) It shall be possible to program all push buttons from the CIU at the
traffic signal controller.
e) Wireless programming shall allow remote programming of the APS
button system within 150 feet (50m) of the traffic cabinet.
f) The programming device shall allow programming of APS button
under wired and wireless conditions for; configuration, custom sounds,
firmware, HW profiles and CIU programming.
g) The programming device shall allow storage of an unlimited number of
custom templates and intersection profiles (within the storage
capability of the PC).
h) IP based connection to the APS Button system for remote
programming and management shall be available.
18) Automatic volume adjustment in response to ambient traffic sound level
provided up to a maximum volume of 100 dBA.
19) Tone or voice volume measured at 3 ft. from the pushbutton station shall
be 2 dB minimum and 5 dB maximum above ambient noise level and shall
be responsive to ambient noise level changes.
20) The pushbutton must be Americans with Disabilities Act compliant and
activate both the walk interval and accessible pedestrian signal.
21) Actuation indicator-tone and pedestrian acknowledge light. The light shall
remain on until the next walk cycle has started.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 40
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 40 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
22) Extended button press which can be used to request a louder WALK signal
and locator tone for subsequent clearance interval.
23) Internal speaker
a) Weather-resistant speaker protected by a vandal resistant screen.
b) Nominal 15w speaker that shall provide audible feedback in the form
of various signaling sounds
c) The button housing shall provide speaker ports to direct the sound in
front and behind the button station in line with the button sign face.
d) The APS button shall provide for the installation of speaker baffles to
block sound from the front or back as may be required for special
applications.
24) Pedestrian Button Feedback
a) Have a functional pushbutton that activates the pedestrian walk signal
whenever actuated, even if the audible speech walk message, the
pushbutton information message, the pushbutton locator tone, and the
vibrating surface features are disabled.
b) Have a pushbutton that when actuated activates the pedestrian walk
signal's timing during an APS attribute failure.
25) Power Interface Module (PIM)
a) A PIM shall be used to provide a low power interface to the APS
button station (nominal 12-15 VDC).
b) The PIM shall be installed in the Pedestrian Signal head or in an
electrical box as required. The PIM shall be UL approved and bear
necessary markings.
c) The PIM shall meet NEMA TS2-2003 (or latest release)
Environmental and Electrical requirements.
26) Overhead Beaconing Capability
a) The APS button station shall have the option of driving an external
overhead (pedestrian signal or pole mounted) speaker with independent
audio amplifier and audio controls.
b) This may be used where:
(1) Crosswalks are longer than 70 feet (22m), unless they are divided
by a median that has another accessible pedestrian signal with a
locator tone;
(2) Crosswalks that are skewed;
(3) Intersections with irregular geometry, such as more than four legs;
(4) Crosswalks where audible beaconing is requested by an individual
with visual disabilities; or
(5) Other locations where a study indicates audible beaconing would
be beneficial.
c) The overhead beaconing is used to assist pedestrians with orientation
in the crossing area. Overhead beacons have been shown to improve
directional information and safety for visually impaired and sighted
pedestrians. NCHRP Document 117A: Accessible Pedestrian Signals:
A Guide to Best Practices.
27) Capable of operating at, as a minimum, up to 1000 ft (AWG #12) cable run
from signal cabinet.
28) Pushbutton station and Central control unit shall be rated for the following
temperature range:
a) Pushbutton station: -30°F to +155°F.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 41
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 41 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
b) Central Control Unit: -30°F to +165°F
29) APS units shall be operationally compatible with TS1, TS2, 170 and 2070
controllers and cabinet assemblies, currently used by the City and any other
Texas government entities.
30) Unless specified otherwise in the plans, supply a central control unit (CCU)
for the pushbutton stations that resides in the Traffic Signal Controller
Cabinet.
a) Provide a CCU capable of controlling up to 4 pedestrian phases and 12
Pushbutton stations.
b) Ensure that all inputs and outputs on the CCU have Transient Voltage
Protection.
31) If plans specify that the APS will require no additional space or wiring in
the cabinet, provide one control unit per push button station capable of
mounting in the pedestrian signal housing.
32) If a special device or software is required to configure the APS operation,
provide a minimum of one device or copy of software per signal cabinet
along with any required connectors, unless required otherwise by the plans.
33) Provide any wiring harnesses, connectors, interface cables, terminal blocks,
etc. required for connecting the pushbutton station or CCU to the traffic
signal controller assembly and making the Pushbutton stations operational.
5. Radar Detection Equipment and Cable
a. Radar presence detection
1) The product bid shall be the SmartSensor Matrix™ by Wavetronix, or
approved equivalent, and shall meet the following specifications.
2) General
a) Sensor Outputs
(1) Radar detector shall transmit real-time presence data from up to 10
lanes, depending on mounting location and lane widths.
(2) The radar detector shall support a minimum of eight detection
zones.
(3) The radar detector shall support a minimum of eight detector
channel outputs and have user-selectable channel assignments.
(4) The radar detector shall use ’OR’ or ‘AND’ logic gates to map a
single zone to multiple channel outputs, and shall have channel
output extend and delay functionality.
(5) The radar detector algorithms shall mitigate detections from
wrong-way or cross traffic.
(6) The radar detector system shall have fail-safe mode capabilities for
contact closure outputs if communication is lost. Contact closure
will occur on all programmed detector channels associated with the
interface module when the failsafe is triggered and will remain in
this state until communication is re-established between the
interface module and the radar vehicle sensor.
b) Detectable Area
(1) The radar detector shall be able to detect and report presence in
lanes with boundaries as close as 6 feet from the base of the pole
on which the detector is mounted. The detector shall be able to
detect and report presence in lanes located within the 140 feet arc
from the base of the pole on which the RPD is mounted.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 42
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 42 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
(2) The detector shall be able to detect and report presence for vehicles
within a 90 degree field of view.
(3) The detector shall be able to detect and report presence in up to 10
lanes.
(4) The detector shall be able to detect and report presence in curved
lanes and areas with islands and medians.
c) System Hardware
(1) Preassembled back plate
(a) Each detector shall have a traffic cabinet preassembled back
plate with the following:
AC/DC power conversion
Surge protection (Lightning and surge protection will be
provided for power connections and communications
links to the radar RVDS meeting or exceeding EN
61000-4-5 class specifications.)
Terminal blocks for cable landing
Communication connection points
(b) The preassembled back plate for the detector shall be a cabinet
side mount or rack mount.
(2) Contact Closure Input File Cards
(a) The detector shall use contact closure input file cards with 2 or
4 channel capabilities.
(b) The contact closure input file cards for the detector shall be
compatible with industry standard detector racks.
(3) Radar design
(a) Frequency Stability
The circuitry shall be void of any manual tuning
elements that could lead to human error and degraded
performance over time.
All transmit modulated signals shall be generated by
means of digital circuitry, such as a direct digital
synthesizer, that is referenced to a frequency source that
is at least 50 parts per million (ppm) stable over the
specified temperature range, and ages less than 6 ppm
per year.
Any upconversion of a digitally generated modulated
signal shall preserve the phase stability and frequency
stability inherent in the digitally generated signal.
The detector shall not rely on temperature compensation
circuitry to maintain transmit frequency stability.
The bandwidth of the transmit signal of the detector
shall not vary by more than 1% under all specified
operating conditions and over the expected life of the
detector.
(b) Antenna Design
The detector antennas shall be designed on printed
circuit boards.
The vertical beam width of the detector at the 6dB points
of the two-way pattern shall be 65 degrees or greater.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 43
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 43 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
The antennas shall cover a 90 degree horizontal field of
view.
The sidelobes in the RPD two-way antenna pattern shall
be -40dB or less.
(c) The detector shall transmit a signal with a bandwidth of at least
245 MHz, which provides for a resolution of 2 feet.
(d) The detector shall provide at least 8 RF channels so that
multiple units can be mounted in the same vicinity without
causing interference between them.
(e) The detector shall have a self-test that is used to verify correct
hardware functionality.
(f) The detector shall have a diagnostics mode to verify correct
system functionality.
(4) Physical Properties
(a) The detector shall not exceed 4.2 pounds in weight.
(b) The detector shall not exceed 13.2 in. by 10.6 in. by 3.3 in.
(33.5 cm x 26.9 cm x 8.4 cm) in its physical dimensions.
(c) All external parts of the detector shall be ultraviolet-resistant,
corrosion-resistant, and protected from fungus growth and
moisture deterioration.
(d) Enclosure
The detector shall be enclosed in a Lexan, Makrolon, or
other approved polycarbonate material.
The enclosure shall be classified “f1” outdoor
weatherability in accordance with UL 746C.
The detector shall be classified as watertight according
to the NEMA 250 Standard.
The detector enclosure shall conform to test criteria set
forth in the NEMA 250 standard for type 4X enclosures.
Test results shall be provided for each of the following
type 4X criteria: External Icing (NEMA 250 clause 5.6),
Hose-down (NEMA 250 clause 5.7), 4X Corrosion
Protection (NEMA 250 clause 5.10), Gasket (NEMA
250 clause 5.14).
The detector shall be able to withstand a drop of up to 5
feet without compromising its functional and structural
integrity.
The detector enclosure shall include a connector that
meets the MIL-C-26482 specification.
The MIL-C-26482 connector shall provide contacts for
all data and power connections.
(e) Power
The detector shall consume less than 10 W.
The detector shall operate with a DC input between 9
VDC and 28 VDC.
(f) Communications Ports
The detector shall have two communication ports, and
both ports shall communicate independently and
simultaneously.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 44
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 44 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
The detector shall support the upload of new firmware
into the detector’s non-volatile memory over either
communication port.
The detector shall support the user configuration of the
following: Response delay and Push port.
The communication ports shall support at least a 9600
bps baud rate.
b. Radar advanced detection
1) The product bid shall be the SmartSensor Advance™ by Wavetronix, or
approved equivalent, and shall meet the following specifications.
2) General
a) All materials furnished, assembled, fabricated, or installed under this
Item will be new, corrosion resistant, and in strict accordance with the
details shown on the plans and in this Special Specification.
b) The detector will be non-intrusive, easy to install, remotely accessible,
and provide multiple connectivity options for easy integration into
legacy systems.
(1) The detector will have a method for automatically calibrating the
detection device; this method will be executed in the detector’s
internal processor. This auto-calibration method will automatically
determine detection thresholds.
c) Sensor Performance
(1) The detector will accurately and continuously detect Estimated
Time of Arrival (ETA), speed, and range data for vehicles, or
clusters of vehicles simultaneously moving within 100 feet to 500
feet from the sensor in the selected direction of travel.
(2) The detector will be mounted in a forward-fire position, looking
into either approaching or departing traffic for the selected
direction of travel.
(3) The detector will filter the ETA data, speed data, and range data
based upon minimum and maximum constraints to produce alerts,
customizable for safe and efficient dilemma zone protection,
congestion management, and other operational goals.
(4) The detector will maintain accurate performance in all weather
conditions, including rain, freezing rain, snow, wind, dust, fog, and
changes in temperatures and light.
(5) The device will not rely on temperature compensation circuitry and
will be capable of continuous operation over and ambient
temperature range from -40° C to 75° C, and a relative humidity
range from five percent to 95 percent (non-condensing).
(6) Detector operation will continue in rain or snow up to 10 cm per
hour, and the device will not experience degraded performance
when encased in 1/2 inch of ice.
(7) Speed data will be accurate for individual vehicle measurement
when there are no adjacent vehicles traveling in the same direction.
(a) Eighty-five percent of all measurements will be within 5 mph
of truth when vehicles are not changing speed.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 45
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 45 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
(b) Speed accuracy will be verified with radar gun, by video speed
trap using the frame rate as a time reference, or equivalent
method.
(8) Range data will be accurate for individual vehicle measurement
when there are no adjacent vehicles traveling in the same direction.
(a) Eighty-five percent of all measurements will be within ten feet
of the distributed length of the vehicle when vehicles are not
changing speed. Range accuracy will be verified with: LIDAR
gun, by video using visual markers as a distance reference and
frame rate as a time reference, or equivalent method.
(9) ETA data will be accurate for individual vehicle measurements
when there are no adjacent vehicles traveling in the same direction.
(a) ETA is the estimated time of arrival as calculated by dividing
the vehicles range from the stop bar by the speed of the
vehicle.
(b) ETA is calculated for purposes of safely and efficiently
protecting vehicles within the decision dilemma zone, which is
nominally defined to exist for motorists with an ETA between
2.5 and 5.5 seconds from the stop bar who are driving faster
than 35 mph when the light turns yellow.
(c) Eighty-five percent of all measurements will be within one
second of truth for all vehicles not changing speed within the
decision dilemma zone.
(d) ETA accuracy will be verified with: LIDAR gun, or by video
using visual markers as a distance reference and frame rate as a
time reference.
d) Lightning surge protection that meets or exceeds the EN 61000-4-5
Class 4 specifications will be installed no farther than 40 feet along the
detector cable from the detector unit. To ensure the continued
operation of the detector in the presence of electrical surges, all
connections to the detector will be protected, including power, RS-232,
RS-485 communication lines and ground.
e) Communication
(1) The detector will provide two or more communication ports that
can be accessed simultaneously using any detector-supported
protocol.
(2) This will enable multiple operators to collect data from the detector
at the same time without interrupting or interfering with each
other.
(3) The detector will provide RS-232 and RS-485 serial
communication ports; each communication port will support all of
the following baud rates: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200.
(4) The RS-232 port will be full-duplex and will support true
RTS/CTS hardware handshaking for interfacing to various
communication devices.
f) Power
(1) The detector will consume less than 10 watts with a DC input
between 12 VDC and 28 VDC.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 46
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 46 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
(2) The equipment will be designed such that the failures of the
equipment will not cause the failure of any other unit of
equipment.
(3) Automatic recovery from power failure will be within 15 seconds
after resumption of power.
g) Windows® and PocketPC® -based Software
(1) The detector will also include graphical user interface software that
displays all configured zones and provides visual representation of
all detected vehicle clusters. The detected range, speed, arrival
time, and identification number will be viewable on the visual
representation of all detected vehicle clusters. The graphical
interface will operate on Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows
NT 4.0, Windows XP Pro and Windows PocketPCs equivalent to
the Dell Axim X50v. The software will automatically select the
correct baud rate.
(2) The graphical user interface will also display all configured alerts
and provide visual representation of their actuation. The operator
will have the ability to configure alerts using minimum and
maximum constraints on the detected ETA, speed, and range of
vehicles.
(3) The operator will have the ability to save the configuration
information to a file, or reload the detector configuration from a
file, using the graphical user interface software. Using the
installation software, the operator will be able to easily change the
baud rate on the sensor by selecting baud rates from a drop-down
list, as well as add response delays for the communication ports.
Additionally, the operator will have the ability to switch between
data pushing and data polling, and change the detector’s settings
for Flow Control from none to RTS/CTS and vice versa.
(4) The operator will be able to upload new firmware into the
detector’s non-volatile memory over any supported communication
channel.
h) RF Design
(1) All microwave circuitry within the detector will be designed
utilizing active control that dynamically adjusts to compensate for
temperature and age variations in component performance. This
eliminates most opportunities for human error or age degradation
in circuits that contribute to product performance. The circuitry
will be void of any manual tuning elements that could lead to
human error and degraded performance over time.
(2) All transmit modulated signals will be generated by means of
digital circuitry, such as a direct digital synthesizer, that is
referenced to a frequency source that is at least 50 ppm stable over
the specified temperature range, and ages less than six ppm per
year. Any up-conversion of a digitally generated modulated signal
will preserve the phase stability and frequency stability inherent in
the digitally generated signal. These specifications ensure that
during operation the detector strictly conforms to FCC
requirements and that the radar signal quality is maintained for
precise algorithmic quality.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 47
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 47 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
(3) The detector antennae will be designed on printed circuit boards,
eliminating the need for RF connectors and cabling that result in
decreased reliability. Printed circuit antennae are less prone to
physical damage due to their extremely low mass.
(4) The antennae parameters will meet the following criterion to
ensure quality performance:
(a) 3 dB Elevation Beam Width: > 65 degrees
(b) 3 dB Azimuth Beam Width: < 15 degrees
(c) Side Lobes: < -20 dB
i) Enclosure
(1) The detector will be enclosed in a Lexan polycarbonate, ultraviolet
resistant material and will be classified as watertight according to
the NEMA 250 Standard. The enclosure will be classified "f1"
outdoor weatherability in accordance with UL 746C.
(2) The detector will be able to withstand a drop of up to 5 feet
without compromising its functional and structural integrity.
j) Input file cards
(1) The detector manufacturer will provide an optional input file card
compatible with 170, 2070, NEMA TS1 and NEMA TS2 input file
racks. The input file card will translate per vehicle data packets or
actuation packets from the detector into corresponding contact
closure outputs. Operators will be able to assign any contact
closure output channel to any configured alert. These settings will
be saved in non-volatile memory on the input file card for
complete recovery in case of power failure.
(2) The input file card will support Dual Loop (Speed Trap)
emulation, as well as the following modes of operation:
(a) Actuation (true presence filtered by conditional alert
constraints output in real time with 2.5 ms resolution)
(b) Pulse (a single 125 ms output pulse for each vehicle)
(c) Presence (an output pulse corresponding to the duration of
each vehicle cluster in the detection zone with a resolution of
2.5 ms)
(d) Single Loop Speed (duration of the pulse corresponds directly
to the speed of the vehicle, speed (mph) = 13.64/duration in
seconds)
(3) The input file card will receive data packets over an RS-485 bus at
any of the following baud rates: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and
115200. Also, the input file card will auto-baud and auto-detect a
detector over wired and wireless communication channels that
have a maximum latency of 500 ms.
(4) The input file card will comply with the NEMA TS2-1998 Traffic
Controller Assemblies with NTCIP Requirements, Section 2.8
specification. Documentation and results of the NEMA TS2-1998
test will be provided.
(5) The input file card will also provide failsafe operation, so that in
the event of failure of communication from the sensor, a constant
call will be placed on all contact closure channels.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 48
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 48 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
(6) The input file card will comply with the EN 61000-4-5 Class 4
lightning surge protection test specification. Documentation and
results of the EN 61000-4-5 Class 4 test will be provided.
k) FCC
(1) Each detector will be Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
certified under CFR 47, Part 15, section 15.245 as a field
disturbance sensor, or section 15.249 as an intentional radiator.
This certification will be displayed on an external label on each
device according to the rules set out by the FCC.
(2) The detector will transmit in the 10.50 – 10.55 GHz or 24.00 –
24.25 GHZ frequency band and will meet the power transmission
requirements specified under sections 15.245 and 15.249 of CFR
47.
(3) The manufacturer will provide documentation proving compliance
to all FCC specifications.
c. Radar Detection Cable
1) The cable end connector shall meet the MIL-C-26482 specification and
shall be designed to interface with the appropriate MIL-C-26482
connector.
2) The connector back shell shall be an environmentally sealed shell that
offers excellent immersion capability.
3) All conductors that interface with the connector shall be encased in a single
jacket, and the outer diameter (O.D.) of this jacket shall be within the back
shell’s cable O.D. range to ensure proper sealing.
4) The back shell shall have a strain relief with enough strength to support the
cable slack under extreme weather conditions.
5) The cable shall conform to the following specifications:
6) The RS-485 conductors shall be a twisted pair.
7) The RS-485 conductors shall have nominal capacitance conductor to
conductor of less than 71pF/Ft at 1 KHz.
8) The RS-485 conductors shall have nominal conductor DC resistance of less
than 16.5 ohms/ (304.8 m) at 68°F (20°C).
9) The power conductors shall be one twisted pair with nominal conductor
DC resistance of less than 11.5 ohms/ (304.8 m) at 68°F (20°C).
10) Each wire bundle or the entire cable shall be shielded with an
aluminum/mylar shield with a drain wire.
11) The wire shall be a single continuous home-run cable with no splices
allowed and terminated only in the junction box provided by the
manufacturer and in the traffic signal cabinet at the other end.
12) The cable O.D. shall not exceed 0.4 inches.
13) The cable length shall not exceed 2000 feet for the operational baud rate of
RS-485 communications (9.6 Kbps).
14) If 12 VDC is being supplied for the detector then the cable length shall not
exceed 90 feet.
15) If 24 VDC is being supplied for the detector then the cable length shall not
exceed 500 feet.
16) Both communication and power conductors can be bundled together in the
same cable as long as the above-mentioned conditions are met.
6. Hybrid Vehicle Detection System and Cable
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 49
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 49 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
a. The product bid shall be the Iteris Vantage Vector Hybrid™ system, or
approved equivalent, and shall meet the following specifications.
b. The multi-sensor system shall utilize two different sensors of different
technologies, video imaging and radar, to detect and track licensed and
unlicensed vehicles at distances up to 600 feet.
c. The sensor system shall fuse vehicle information from the two sensors to
provide highly accurate and precise detection for special or advanced
applications.
d. The multi-sensor system shall use a primary detector rack mounted processor
to interface with the traffic control cabinet. The module shall process
information from both video imaging and radar sensors simultaneously in real-
time.
e. System configurations
1) The multi-sensor detection system (MSDS) shall consist of up to two video
cameras and radar units, detection processors (DP) capable of processing
from one to two intersection approaches, output extension modules, surge
suppressors, a setup tool and a pointing device.
2) Available system configurations
a) The MSDS will be deployed at locations where site conditions and
roadway geometry vary. The MSDS system may also be deployed at
locations where existing cabinets or equipment exist. Existing site
configurations will dictate the availability of cabinet space and MSDS
usage.
b) The proposed MSDS shall be available in various configurations to
allow maximum deployment flexibility. Each configuration shall have
an identical user interface for system setup and configuration. The
communications protocol to each configuration shall be identical and
shall be hardware platform independent. The proposed MSDS shall
have multiple configurations available for deployment as described in
Table 1.
Table 1. MSDS Configuration
Description
No. of
Multi-
Sensor
Inputs
No. Video
Outputs
Mounting
Configuration
Power Supply
Requirements
Single-Channel
Rack Mounted 1 1
Rack Mount
(Type 170 or
NEMA TS-1,
TS-2 Racks)
12 or 24 VDC
Power From
Rack
Dual-Channel
Rack Mounted 2 1
Rack Mount
(Type 170 or
NEMA TS-1,
TS-2 Racks)
12 or 24 VDC
Power From
Rack
f. System software
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 50
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 50 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
1) The system shall include software that detects vehicles in multiple lanes.
Video imaging detection zones shall be defined using only an on-board
video menu and a pointing device to place the zones on a video image. Up
to 24 video detection zones per camera view shall be available. Two
additional trigger zones for the radar sensor shall be available and be
configurable by using the same system setup menu on the DP. A separate
computer shall not be required to program the detection zones. A portable
setup tool shall be available for sensor alignment and adjustment of
camera’s field of view and focus.
g. Materials
1) Multi-Sensor Detection System Hardware
a) The MSDS hardware shall consist of the following four elements:
(1) Video imaging camera sensor
(2) Radar sensor
(3) Sensor data combiner
(4) Detection processor
b) The MSDS shall be made in the U.S.A. in compliance with FTA “Buy
America” regulations.
2) Video Imaging Camera Sensor
a) To accommodate deployment flexibility, the MSDS camera sensor
shall be compatible will all DP platforms identified in Table 1. The
MSDS camera sensor shall be supplied by the MSDS manufacturer.
b) The advanced camera enclosure shall utilize Indium Tin Oxide (ITO)
technology for the heating element of the front glass. The transparent
coating shall not impact the visual acuity and shall be optically clear.
c) Cable terminations at the data combiner for video and power shall not
require crimping or special tools.
d) The camera sensor shall allow the user to set the focus and field of
view via Wi-Fi connectivity.
e) The camera shall produce a useable video image of the bodies of
vehicles under all roadway lighting conditions, regardless of time of
day. The minimum range of scene luminance over which the camera
shall produce a useable video image shall be the minimum range from
nighttime to daytime, but not less than the range 1.0 lux to 10,000 lux.
f) The camera electronics shall include automatic gain control (AGC) to
produce a satisfactory image at night.
g) The imager luminance signal to noise ratio (S/N) shall be more than 50
dB with the automatic gain control (AGC) disabled.
h) The imager shall employ three dimensional dynamic noise reduction
(3D-DNR) to remove unwanted image noise.
i) The camera imager shall employ wide dynamic range (WDR)
technology to compensate for wide dynamic outdoor lighting
conditions. The dynamic range shall be greater than 100 dB.
j) The camera shall be digital signal processor (DSP) based and shall use
a CCD sensing element and shall output color video with resolution of
not less than 550 TV lines.
k) The camera sensor shall include an electronic shutter control based
upon average scene luminance and shall be equipped with an auto-iris
lens that operates in tandem with the electronic shutter. The electronic
shutter shall operate between the ranges of 1/1 to 1/10,000th second.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 51
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 51 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
l) The camera sensor shall utilize automatic white balance.
m) The camera sensor shall include a variable focal length lens with
variable focus that can be adjusted, without opening up the camera
housing, to suit the site geometry by means of a portable interface
device designed for that purpose and manufactured by the detection
system supplier.
n) The horizontal field of view shall be adjustable from 4.6 to 53.6
degrees. This camera configuration may be used for the majority of
detection approaches in order to minimize the setup time and spares
required by the user. The lens shall be a 12x zoom lens with a focal
length of 3.7mm to 44.0mm.
o) The lens shall also have an auto-focus feature with a manual override
to facilitate ease of setup.
p) The camera shall incorporate the use of preset positioning that store
zoom and focus positioning information. The camera shall have the
capability to recall the previously stored preset upon application of
power.
q) The camera shall be housed in a weather-tight sealed enclosure
conforming to IP-67 specifications. The housing shall allow the camera
to be rotated to allow proper alignment between the camera and the
traveled road surface.
r) The camera enclosure shall be equipped with a sunshield. The
sunshield shall include a provision for water diversion to prevent water
from flowing in the camera's field of view.
s) The camera enclosure shall be design so that the pan, tilt and rotation
of the camera assembly can be accomplished independently without
affecting the other settings.
t) The camera enclosure shall include a proportionally controlled Indium
Tin Oxide heater design that maximizes heat transfer to the lens. The
output power of the heater shall vary with temperature, to assure
proper operation of the lens functions at low temperatures and prevent
moisture condensation on the optical faceplate of the enclosure.
u) The glass face on the front of the enclosure shall have an anti-reflective
coating to minimize light and image reflections.
v) When mounted outdoors in the enclosure, the camera shall operate in a
temperature range from -34 °C to +74 °C and a humidity range from
0% RH to 100% RH. Measurement of satisfactory video shall be
based upon DP system operation.
w) The camera sensor shall acquire its power from the sensor data
combiner.
x) Recommended camera placement height shall be 18-33 feet (or 6-10
meters) above the roadway, and over the traveled way on which
vehicles are to be detected. For optimum detection the camera should
be centered above the traveled roadway. The camera shall view
approaching vehicles at a distance not to exceed 350 feet for reliable
detection (height to distance ratio of 10:100). Camera placement and
field of view (FOV) shall be unobstructed and as noted in the
installation documentation provided by the supplier.
y) The video signal shall be fully isolated from the camera enclosure and
power cabling
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 52
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 52 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
z) A weather-proof protective cover shall be provided to protect all
terminations at the camera.
3) Radar Sensor
a) The radar sensor shall operate in the 24 GHz frequency band and shall
operate on 1 of 7 available enumerated channels that is user selectable.
b) The radar detection range shall be 600 feet minimum, +/- 5%.
c) The radar sensor shall be able to track up to 20 independent objects
simultaneously.
d) Object speed detection shall be within a range of 0 to 150 miles per
hour +/- 1.0 miles per hour.
e) The radar sensor shall be able to detect vehicles in 1 to 4 traffic lanes.
f) The radar sensor shall be housed in a weather-tight sealed enclosure
conforming to IP-67 specifications. The housing shall allow the radar
to be adjusted to allow proper alignment between the sensor and the
traveled road surface.
g) When mounted outdoors in the enclosure, the radar shall operate in a
temperature range from -34 °C to +74 °C and a humidity range from
0% RH to 100% RH.
h) The radar sensor shall communicate with the sensor data combiner.
i) The radar sensor shall acquire its power from the sensor data combiner.
4) Multi-Sensor Assembly
a) Both camera and radar sensors shall be housed in an overall, single
enclosure assembly.
b) The overall size of the multi-sensor enclosure shall not exceed 14
inches x 15 inches x 17 inches.
c) The overall weight of the multi-sensor unit shall not exceed 11 pounds.
d) The effective projected area (EPA) shall not exceed 2.0 square feet.
e) The maximum power consumption for the multi-sensor assembly shall
be less than 10 watts typical, 20 watts peak.
5) Sensor Data Combiner
a) A sensor data combiner that combines sensor information from both
video and radar sensors shall be employed.
b) The sensor data combiner shall supply primary power to each sensor
unit.
c) The sensor data combiner shall facilitate digital communications
between the sensor data combiner and each of the sensor units.
d) The sensor data combiner shall get its primary power from an AC
power source using industry standard 3-conductor cabling.
e) The sensor data combiner shall communicate with the detection
processor using a single coax cable. Both video imaging and radar
data shall use the single coax cable.
f) The sensor data combiner shall also employ industry standard Wi-Fi
connectivity for remote sensor system setup using a mobile
programming device such as a netbook or tablet computer. Video
camera and radar sensor shall be able to be configured independently.
g) The sensor data signal shall be fully isolated from the mechanical
enclosure and power cabling
h) Cable terminations at the sensor data combiner shall not require
crimping tools.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 53
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 53 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
i) The sensor data combiner shall be housed in a weather-tight sealed
enclosure conforming to IP-67 specifications.
6) Detector Processor (DP)
a) Each sensor input shall accept RS170 (NTSC) or CCIR (PAL) signals
from an external video source. The interface connector shall be BNC
type and shall be located on the front of the processing unit. The
sensor input shall have the capability to be terminated into 75-ohms or
high impedance (Hi-Z) using dip switches or software control from the
user menu. The sensor input shall also facilitate the data from the
radar sensor.
b) A LED indicator shall be provided to indicate the presence of the
sensor signal. The LED shall illuminate upon valid sensor
synchronization and turn off when the presence of a valid sensor signal
is removed.
c) One video output shall be provided. The video output shall be RS170
or CCIR compliant and shall pass through the input video signal.
d) For multi-channel video input configurations, a momentary push-
button shall be provided on the front panel to cycle through each input
video channel. In the absence of a valid sensor signal, the channel
shall be skipped and the next valid sensor signal shall be switched.
The real time video output shall have the capability to show text and
graphical overlays to aid in system setup. The overlays shall display
real-time actuation of detection zones upon vehicle detection or
presence. Overlays shall be able to be turned off by the user. Control
of the overlays and sensor switching shall also be provided through the
serial communications port. The video output interface connector shall
be positive locking BNC type. Friction type (e.g. RCA type)
connectors shall not be allowed.
e) A serial communications port shall be provided on the front panel. The
serial port shall compliant with EIA232 electrical interfaces and shall
use a DB9 type connector mounted on the front panel of the DP. The
serial communications interface shall allow the user to remotely
configure the system and/or to extract calculated vehicle/roadway
information. The interface protocol shall be documented or interface
software shall be provided. The interface protocol shall support multi-
drop or point-to-multipoint communications. Each MSDS shall have
the capability to be addressable. The DP shall support data rates of
1200 bps to 230,400 bps, inclusive.
f) Open collector (contact closure) outputs shall be provided. Four (4)
open collector outputs shall be provided for the single or dual channel
rack-mount configuration. Additionally, the DP shall allow the use of
extension modules to provide up to 24 open collector contact closures
per camera input. Each open collector output shall be capable of
sinking 30 mA at 24 VDC. Open collector outputs will be used for
vehicle detection indicators as well as discrete outputs for alarm
conditions. The DP outputs shall be compatible with industry standard
detector racks assignments.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 54
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 54 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
g) Logic inputs such as delay/extend or delay inhibit shall be supported
through the appropriate detector rack connector pin or front panel
connector in the case of the I/O module. For DPs and extension
modules, 4 inputs shall be supported via detector rack interface. The
I/O module shall accommodate eight (8) inputs through a 15-pin “D”
connector.
h) Detection status LEDs shall be provided on the front panel. The LEDs
shall illuminate when a contact closure output occurs. Rack-mounted
detection processors shall have a minimum of four (4) LEDs. Rack-
mounted extension modules shall have two (2), four (4) or eight (8)
LEDs (depending upon extension module type) to indicate detection.
i) The front panel of the DP shall have detector test switches to allow the
user to manually place calls on each DP output channel. The test
switch shall be able to place either a constant call or a momentary call
depending on the position of the switch.
j) A USB mouse port shall be provided on the front panel of the rack
mount detection processing unit. The mouse port shall not require
special mouse software drivers. The mouse port shall be used as part
of system setup and configuration. A mouse shall be provided with
each detection processor.
k) Extension modules shall be connected to the DP by an 8-wire twisted-
pair cable with modular RJ45 connectors. DP and EM communications
shall be accommodated by methods using differential signals to reject
electrically coupled noise.
l) Extension modules (EM) shall be available to eliminate the need of
rewiring the detector rack, by enabling the user to plug an extension
module into the appropriate slot in the detector rack to provide
additional open collector outputs. The extension module shall be
available in both 2 and 4 channel configurations. EM configurations
shall be programmable from the DP. A separate I/O module with 32
outputs through a 37-pin “D” connector on the front panel and 8 inputs
through a 15-pin “D” connector using an external wire harness for
expanded flexibility shall also be available.
m) The DP and EM shall be specifically designed to mount in a standard
detector rack, using the edge connector to obtain power, provide
contact closure outputs and accept logic inputs (e.g. delay/extend). No
adapters shall be required to mount the DP or EM in a standard
detector rack. Detector rack rewiring shall not be required.
n) The DP shall utilize non-volatile memory technology to store on-board
firmware and operational data.
o) The DP shall enable the loading of modified or enhanced software
through the EIA232 or USB port (using a USB thumb drive) and
without modifying the DP hardware.
p) The DP and EM shall be powered by 12 or 24 volts DC. DP and EM
modules shall automatically compensate for either 12 or 24 VDC
operation. DP power consumption shall not exceed 7.5 watts. The EM
power consumption shall not exceed 3 watts.
q) The DP shall operate satisfactorily in a temperature range from -34 °C
to +74 °C and a humidity range from 0%RH to 95%RH, non-
condensing as set forth in NEMA specifications.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 55
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 55 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
r) An Edco CX-06M video surge suppresser shall be provided for each
sensor input. The surge suppresser shall be appropriately grounded to
the cabinet ground rod using 14 AWG minimum.
7) System Software
a) Detection zones shall be programmed via an on board menu displayed
on a video monitor and a pointing device connected to the DP. The
menu shall facilitate placement of detection zones and setting of zone
parameters or to view system parameters. A separate computer shall
not be required for programming detection zones or to view system
operation.
b) The DP shall store up to three different detection zone patterns in non-
volatile memory. The DP can switch to any one of the three different
detection patterns within 1 second of user request via menu selection
with the pointing device. Each configuration shall be uniquely labeled
and able to be edited by the user for identification. The currently
active configuration indicator shall be displayed on the monitor.
c) The DP shall detect vehicles in real time as they travel across each
detection zone.
d) The DP shall accept new detection patterns from an external computer
through the EIA232 port when the external computer uses the correct
communications protocol for downloading detection patterns. A
Windows™-based software designed for local or remote connection
and providing video capture, real-time detection indication and
detection zone modification capability shall be provided with the
system.
e) The DP system shall have the capability to automatically switch to any
one of the stored configurations based on the time of day which shall
be programmable by the user.
f) The DP shall send its detection patterns to an external computer
through the EIA232 port when requested when the external computer
uses the appropriate communications protocol for uploading detection
patterns.
g) The DP shall default to a safe condition, such as a constant call on each
active detection channel, in the event of unacceptable interference or
loss of the sensor signal.
h) The system shall be capable of automatically detecting a low-visibility
condition such as fog and respond by placing all effected detection
zones in a constant call mode. A user-selected alarm output shall be
active during the low-visibility condition that can be used to modify
the controller operation if connected to the appropriate controller input
modifier(s). The system shall automatically revert to normal detection
mode when the low-visibility condition no longer exists.
i) Up to 24 detection zones per camera input shall be supported and each
detection zone can be sized to suit the site and the desired vehicle
detection region.
j) The DP shall support 2 independent trigger points for radar outputs for
dilemma zone applications.
k) The DP shall provide up to 24 open collector output channels per
sensor input using one or more extension modules.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 56
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 56 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
l) A single detection zone shall be able to replace multiple inductive
loops and the detection zones shall be OR'ed as the default or may be
AND'ed together to indicate vehicle presence on a single approach of
traffic movement.
m) Placement of detection zones shall be done by using only a pointing
device, and a graphical interface built into the DP and displayed on a
video monitor, to draw the detection zones on the video image from
each video camera. No separate computer shall be required to program
the detection zones.
n) When a vehicle is detected within a detection zone, a visual indication
of the detection shall activate on the video overlay display to confirm
the detection of the vehicle for the zone.
o) Detection shall be at least 98% accurate in good weather conditions,
with slight degradation possible under adverse weather conditions (e.g.
rain, snow, or fog) which reduce visibility.
p) Detection accuracy is dependent upon site geometry, camera
placement, camera quality and detection zone location, and these
accuracy levels do not include allowances for occlusion or poor video
due to camera location or quality.
q) The DP shall provide dynamic zone reconfiguration (DZR). DZR
enables normal operation of existing detection zones when one zone is
being added or modified during the setup process. The new zone
configuration shall not go into effect until the configuration is saved by
the operator.
r) Detection zone setup shall not require site specific information such as
latitude and longitude to be entered into the system.
s) The DP shall process the video input from each camera at 30 frames
per second. Multiple camera processors shall process all video inputs
simultaneously.
t) The DP shall output a constant call during the background learning
period of no more than 3 minutes.
u) Detection zone outputs shall be configurable to allow the selection of
presence, pulse, extend, and delay outputs. Timing parameters of
pulse, extend, and delay outputs shall be user definable between 0.1 to
25.0 seconds.
v) Up to six video detection zones per sensor input shall have the
capability to count the number of vehicles detected. The count value
shall be internally stored for later retrieval through the EIA232 port.
The zone shall also have the capability to calculate and store average
speed and lane occupancy at bin intervals of 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 1
minute, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes and 60 minutes. One radar
sensor zone shall also count vehicles, calculate, and store the average
speed and lane occupancy across the approach.
w) In addition to the count type zone, the DP shall be able to calculate
and/or acquire average speed and lane occupancy using both video and
radar sensors. These values shall be stored in non-volatile memory for
later retrieval.
x) The DP shall have an “advance” zone type where detection outputs to
the traffic controller is compensated for angular occlusion and
distance.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 57
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 57 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
y) The DP shall employ color overlays on the video output.
z) The DP shall have the ability to show phase status (green, yellow, or
red) for up to 8 phases. These indications shall also be color coded.
aa) The user shall have the ability to enable or disable the display of the
phase information on the video output.
bb) The DP shall have the capability to change the characteristics of a
detection zone based on external inputs such as signal phase. Each
detection zone shall be able to switch from one zone type (i.e.
presence, extension, pulse, etc.) to another zone type based on the
signal state. For example, a zone may be a “count” zone when the
phase is green but change to a “presence” zone type when the phase is
not green.
cc) Another application would be zone type of “extension” when the signal
phase is green and then “delay” when red.
dd) For alpha numeric user inputs, the DP shall utilize a virtual keyboard
on the video overlay system to ease user input. The virtual keyboard
shall use the standard QWERTY keyboard layout.
ee) The DP shall aid the user in drawing additional detection zones by
automatically drawing and placing zones at appropriate locations with
only a single click of the mouse. The additional zone shall utilize
geometric extrapolation of the parent zone when creating the child
zone. The process shall also automatically accommodate lane marking
angles and zone overlaps.
ff) When the user wishes to modify the location of a zone, the DP shall
allow the user move a single zone, multiple zones or all zones
simultaneously.
gg) When the user wishes to modify the geometric shape of the zone, the
DP shall allow the user to change the shape by moving the zone corner
or zone sides.
hh) On screen zone identifiers shall be modifiable by the user. The user
shall be allowed to select channel output assignments, zone type, input
status, zone labels or zone numbers to be the identifier.
ii) For multiple camera input DPs, the user shall have the ability to enable
automatic video output switching. The dwell time for each sensor
input shall be user programmable.
jj) For radar sensor zones, the output can be triggered by presence of a
vehicle only or by presence of a vehicle above a user-defined speed
threshold.
7. Vehicle Detector Loops (Sawcut)
a. Detector Loop Wire
1) Use stranded copper No. 14 AWG XHHW cross-linked-thermosetting-
polyethylene insulated conductor rated for 600 volts CA for vehicle
detector loop wire.
b. Detector Lead-In Cable
1) Loop detector lead-in cable shall be a single 4 conductor No. 18 AWG,
shielded cable.
2) 1 cable shall service each loop where practical.
c. Sealant
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 58
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 58 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
1) Use sealant for the vehicle detector loops in accordance with TxDOT
DMS-6340, “Vehicle Loop Wire Sealant.”
8. Emergency Vehicle Preemption Equipment and Cable
a. The product bid shall be the Opticom™ system by Global Traffic
Technologies, or approved equal, and shall meet the following specifications.
b. Provide new, corrosion resistant materials.
c. Emergency Preemption Phase Selector
1) Shall be a plug-in two channel, dual priority, encoded signal device.
2) Shall have the capability to be installed directly into the input file of Type
170 traffic controllers equipped with priority phase selection software.
3) Shall recognize and discriminate among three distinct emitter frequency
rates via Emergency Preemption Detectors: Command Priority, Advantage
Priority and probe vehicles.
4) When Emergency Preemption Detector signals are recognized as a valid
call, the Emergency Preemption Phase Selector shall cause the signal
controller to advance to and/or hold the desired traffic signal display. This
is accomplished by utilizing Emergency Preemption Phase Selector
circuitry in conjunction with normal internal controller functions.
5) The Emergency Preemption Phase Selector shall be capable of assigning
priority traffic movement to one of two channels on a first come, first serve
basis. Each channel shall be connected to select a particular traffic
movement from those normally available within the controller.
6) Once a call is recognized, "commit to green" circuitry in the Emergency
Preemption Phase Selector shall function so that the desired green
indication will be obtained even if optical communication is lost. After
serving a priority traffic demand, the Emergency Preemption Phase
Selector shall release the controller to follow normal sequence operation.
7) The phase selector shall not change the timing of the following intervals
for any normal controller phase: minimum green, walk, pedestrian
clearance, yellow change, or red clearance.
8) Emergency Preemption Phase Selector shall also have the following
features: two auxiliary detectors per channel, compatible with encoded
signal and non-encoded emitters, computer-based interface (RS232
communications front port, and rear backplane, customizable ID code
validation), crystal controlled circuitry, optically isolated outputs, front
panel switches and diagnostic indicators for testing, and multi-function test
switch.
9) Phase selector shall be powered from AC mains and shall provide 24-volt
DC output for its associated detectors.
10) Emergency Preemption Phase Selector shall utilize solid state and relay
circuitry to interface between the Emergency Preemption Detector and the
traffic signal controller.
11) Emergency Preemption Phase Selector shall supply power to and receive
electrical signals from the Emergency Preemption Detector.
12) Emergency Preemption Phase Selector shall be tested to NEMA electrical
test specifications.
13) Emergency Preemption Phase Selector shall operate at a voltage range of
89 to 135 VAC +10% and 60Hz + 3Hz.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 59
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 59 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
14) Provide equipment that is not affected by the transient voltages, surges and
sags normally experienced on commercial power lines. It is the
Contractor's responsibility to check the local power service to determine if
any special design is needed for the equipment. Any extra cost, if required,
is subsidiary to this Item.
15) Install appropriate surge protectors in the cabinet for the Emergency
Preemption Phase Selector and Emergency Preemption Detector.
16) Provide equipment that meets the requirements of Sec. 2.1.6, “Transients,
Power Service” of the NEMA Standard TS2-1992, and/or the latest
revision.
17) Provide all wiring to the requirements of the NEC. Cut all wires to proper
length. Provide cable slacks to facilitate removal and replacement of
assemblies, panels, and modules. Do not double back any wires to take up
slack. Neatly lace wires into cable with nylon lacing or plastic straps.
Secure cables with clamps.
18) Provide diodes or other protective devices across the coils of all DC relays,
solenoids, and holding coils for transient suppression.
19) Furnish equipment with readily accessible, manually re-settable or
replaceable circuit protection devices (such as circuit breakers or fuses) for
equipment and power source protection.
20) Design the equipment such that the failures of the equipment shall not
cause the failure of any other unit of equipment.
21) Equipment furnished shall be modular in design to allow major portions to
be readily replaced in the field.
22) Emergency Preemption Phase Selector shall have mechanically key
modules of unlike functions to prevent insertion into the wrong socket or
connector.
23) Clearly identify all modules and assemblies with name, model number,
serial number, and any other pertinent information required to facilitate
equipment maintenance.
24) A card rack shall be supplied with every Emergency Preemption Phase
Selector.
a) Shall be a metallic enclosure with a dedicated card slot for one phase
selector with either two or four channel units.
b) The front panel of the card rack shall include a terminal strip for
connecting the detectors, as well as a 9-pin circular connector and
harness to connect the phase selector’s inputs and outputs.
c) The card rack shall be subsidiary to the Emergency Preemption Phase
Selector.
d. Emergency Preemption Detector
1) Furnish Emergency Preemption Detector that shall seamlessly operate with
the vehicle emitters used in the project area.
2) Detector shall transform the optical energy detected from an approaching,
vehicle mounted emitter to an electrical signal. The electrical signal shall
be transmitted along an Emergency Preemption Detector Cable to the
Emergency Preemption Phase Selector for processing.
3) Detectors shall permit a direct, unobstructed line-of-sight to vehicle
approaches.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 60
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 60 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
4) Detector shall have a cone of detection of not more than 13 degrees. The
Emergency Preemption Detector and/or Emergency Preemption Phase
Selector shall not sense a pre-emption signal from an emitter outside this
cone.
5) Detector shall have solid state circuitry and advanced electrical transient
immunity.
6) Detectors shall have a range of 200 feet and is adjustable up to 2,500 feet.
7) Detector shall operate at an electrical voltage of 24 to 28 VDC, 50 MA
minimum.
8) Detectors shall operate at a temperature range of -30 degrees F to 165
degrees F.
9) Detector shall include mounting hardware, as specified, for mast arm
mounting, span wire mounting, pole-side mounting, mounting on top of a
signal head, or mounting on top of a pipe or pedestal.
10) Detector shall have an adjustable turret configuration to accommodate
skewed approaches.
11) Detector housing shall be of light weight, durable, high-impact
polycarbonate material having stainless steel and brass fittings.
12) Detector shall operate at a humidity of 5% to 95% relative.
e. Emergency Preemption Detector Cable
1) Shall be Model 138 Opticom™ cable, or approved equivalent, and shall be
compatible with all other equipment used in this specification.
2) Cable shall be individually tinned copper strand three-conductor cable with
yellow, orange, and blue conductor wires. It shall also have a bare shield
drain wire.
3) Cable shall be AWG #20 (7x28), stranded with conductor insulation of 600
volt, 75°C (167°F).
4) Cable shall have a DC resistance not to exceed 11.0 ohms per 1000 ft.
5) The capacitance from one conductor to other 2 conductors and shield shall
not exceed 48 pf./ft.
6) Cable jacket shall be rated for 600 volts, 80 degrees C (176 degrees F), and
minimum average wall thickness of 0.045 in.
7) Finished O.D. of 0.3 in. maximum.
9. Battery back-up (BBU) System for Signal Cabinets
a. The product bid shall be the Alpha FXM 2000 model, or approved equivalent,
and shall meet the following specifications.
b. Functionality
1) Standby Mode
a) The BBU shall be provided with a standby mode.
b) The utility AC power shall be passed directly to the output.
c) The system will transfer to Backup mode at user defined, low and high
cutoff voltage level transfer points that are adjustable between 90 and
135 VAC.
d) The BBU shall automatically apply a 5VAC difference for the return
transfer points.
e) When the BBU is in Standby mode (Buck/Boost Disabled), the BBU
shall bypass the utility line power whenever the utility line voltage is
outside the transfer set points (±2 VAC).
2) Low Restore
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 61
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 61 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
a) In cases of low or absent utility line voltage, when the utility line
voltage has been restored at or above 5 VAC ±2 VAC of the low
transfer set point for more than 20 seconds, the BBU shall transfer
from Backup Mode to Utility Line Mode.
3) High Restore
a) In cases of high utility line voltage, when the utility line voltage has
been restored at or above 5 VAC ±2 VAC of the high transfer set point
for more than 20 seconds, the BBU shall transfer from Backup Mode
to Utility Line Mode.
4) Buck/Boost Line – Interactive Mode
a) The BBU shall include Buck/Boost Functionality.
b) The Buck/Boost mode shall have a minimum range of 90-150 VAC.
c) There shall not be any user definable transfer set points for the buck
boost mode.
d) Whenever Buck/Boost mode is selected, the output of the system shall
be regulated between 100-130VAC.
e) When the output of the system can no longer be maintained with this
range, the BBU shall transfer to Backup Mode.
5) Line Qualify Time
a) The BBU shall have a user definable line qualify time.
b) The user shall be able to select a minimum of three (3) possible
settings.
c) The minimum setting shall be 3, 20, and 30 seconds.
d) The default line qualify time shall be 30 seconds.
6) Battery Charger
a) The BBU shall have an integral charger.
b) The charger shall be a 3-step charger using bulk, absorption and float
charging techniques, appropriate for the battery type.
c) The integral 3-Step Charger shall use temperature compensation.
d) The charging system shall compensate over a range of 2.5-4.0mV/°C
per cell.
e) A temperature probe which plugs into the front panel of the BBU shall
be used to monitor the internal temperature of the batteries.
f) The Temperature sensor shall be of sufficient length to properly reach
the center battery and yet not too long to cause an inaccurate reading.
g) The batteries shall not be recharged whenever the battery temperature
exceeds 50°C.
h) The recharge time for the batteries from “protective low-cutoff” to 80
percent or more of full charge capacity shall not exceed 12 hours.
c. Operation
1) The BBU system shall provide the following operational modes when
operating on battery power: full operation of all traffic signal devices, flash
operation, and combination of full and flash operation.
2) The BBU shall provide a minimum of 2.0 hours of full time operation and
3.0 of flash operation for a traffic signal utilizing LED only vehicle and
pedestrian indications.
3) The BBU shall be compatible with all City cabinet and controller types;
and all cabinet components for full time operation.
4) The BBU shall provide a minimum of 1500W/1800VA@25°C active
output capacity with 85 percent minimum inverter efficiency.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 62
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 62 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
5) When operating in backup mode, the BBU output shall be
120VAC±5VAC, pure sine wave output, ≤3%THD, 60Hz ± 0.05 Hz.
6) The BBU DC system voltage shall be 48VDC.
7) The maximum transfer time allowed, from disruption of normal utility line
voltage to stabilized inverter line voltage from batteries, shall be 40
milliseconds (ms). The same maximum allowable time shall also apply
when switching from the inverter line voltage to utility-line voltage.
Transfers to and from battery operation shall not interfere with the
operation of the other equipment in the intersection.
8) The BBU and all components shall operate without performance
degradation over a temperature range of -37°C to +74°C. Additionally, all
components and parts used shall, at the minimum, be rated for this
temperature range.
9) In the event the AC service feeding the BBU is severed, or there is a utility
blackout, the AV voltage measured at the AC inputs to the BBU (line to
neutral) shall be less than 1 VAC.
10) The BBU shall have lightning surge protection compliant with IEEE/ANSI
C.62.41 and must be able to withstand 2000 volt surges applied 50 times
across line and neutral. These surges shall not cause the BBU to transfer to
Backup mode.
11) The AC input and output shall be panel mounted plug/receptacles that
allow no possibility of accidental exposure to dangerous voltages. The AC
Input shall be a male receptacle and the AC Output shall be a female
receptacle. The receptacles shall utilize some form of locking mechanism
or hold down clamps that prevent accidental disconnects.
12) The DC connection shall be a recessed one or two pieces Anderson Style
receptacle.
13) The Power Transfer relay control and the battery temperature sense inputs
shall be heavy duty panel-mounted style connectors.
14) All connections shall provide mechanically and electrically secure
connections without the use of a screwdriver. The only exception is the
Relay Terminal Block.
15) The BBU must be able to shut down in order to protect against internal
damage in the event of an overload at the output.
16) The BBU shall provide a time-of-day schedule. The time-of-day schedule
shall allow the user to schedule operational modes.
17) The BBU shall automatically change operational modes based on the time-
of-day schedule.
18) The BBU shall not switch from Flash Operation to Full Operation mode
when the remaining battery capacity is ≤40 percent.
19) The BBU shall prevent a malfunction feedback to the cabinet or from
feeding back to the utility service. In the event of BBU failure
(inverter/charger or battery) or complete battery discharge, the power
transfer relay shall revert to Normally Closed (de-energized) state where
utility line power is connected to the cabinet.
20) The BBU shall initiate an automatic shutdown when battery output reaches
42DVC.
21) The BBU shall be equipped with an integral system to prevent the battery
from destructive discharge or overcharge.
d. Power Transfer Switch
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 63
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 63 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
1) Rating
a) The BBU shall include a Power Transfer Switch rated at 120VAC/50
amps minimum.
2) Manual Bypass Switch
a) The Power Transfer Switch shall include a manual bypass switch.
Placing the manual bypass switch in “Bypass” mode shall cut AC
power to the Inverter/charger and route it directly to the traffic signal
cabinet.
b) In this condition, power to the inverter is disconnected, and battery
power from the inverter is disconnected.
c) The inverter can then be powered off without affecting normal
intersection operation.
d) With the inverter turned off, the batteries can be safely disconnected
from the inverter.
3) Indicator light
a) The Power Transfer Switch shall include a bypass indicator light that
automatically illuminates when the Manual bypass switch is in Bypass
position.
4) Status Relay
a) The Power Transfer Switch shall include a bypass status relay with
normally open, dry contacts that automatically close when the Manual
bypass switch is in Bypass position.
5) Power Transfer Relay
a) The Power Transfer Switch shall include a 50 Amp power transfer
relay controlled by the inverter to cause the Power Transfer Switch to
switch between AC power from the utility and battery power from the
inverter.
6) Integrated Switch
a) The manual bypass switch and the power transfer relay shall be
integrated together within the Power Transfer Switch allowing the
manual bypass switch to be rated at 15 Amp and to be integrated with
the bypass indicator light and bypass status relay.
7) Terminal Blocks
a) The Power Transfer Switch shall have terminal blocks capable of
accepting #6 AWG wiring with #6 AWG internal to the Power
Transfer Switch as required for 50 Amp operation.
e. Displays, Controls, Diagnostics and Maintenance
1) The BBS inverter/charger unit shall include a backlit LCD display for
viewing all status and configuration information. The screen shall be
easily viewable in both bright sunlight and in darkness.
2) Screen size
a) The screen shall be large enough to display the following information:
(1) Operating mode (standby, buck/boost)
(2) Utility input voltage
(3) BBU output voltage
(4) Charger status
(5) Percent battery charge
(6) BBU status (standby, backup, buck, boost)
(7) Any alarms and faults
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 64
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 64 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
3) The BBU inverter/charger unit shall include a keypad for configuring
system parameters and navigating system information.
4) Communications
a) The BBU shall be equipped with an industry standard RS-232 serial
connection for user configuration and management.
b) The serial port shall be an EIA-232 (DB9-Female) connector.
c) The BBU shall have an Ethernet communication interface for user
configuration and management. The Ethernet Port shall be an RJ-45,
EIA 568B Pin Out Connector.
d) The BBU shall be include remote monitoring & alarms transmission
capabilities through the Ethernet RJ45 IP Addressable Port, using
SNMP protocol. Other means of communication will be considered.
e) All BBU configuration and System menus shall be accessible and
programmable from the RS-232 and Ethernet Port.
f) The BBU shall support TCP and UDP over IP protocol
communications.
g) The BBU shall support FTP, Telnet, and HTTP.
h) The BBU shall be SNMP compliant.
5) Web-based interface
a) The BBU shall be provided with a web-based-interface for user
configuration and management through a web browser.
b) The BBU shall allow the user to do the following through the web
browser:
(1) View logs
(2) Change modes of operation
(3) Configure email alarms
(4) Adjust line qualify time
(5) Program relay contacts
(6) Configure network parameters
6) Status LEDs
a) The BBU shall have discrete status LED indications on the front of the
inverter/charger.
(1) Green output LED
(a) This LED will be ON any time that the output of the BBU is
modified, either by backup Mode or by Buck//Boost Modes.
(2) Red fault LED
(a) This LED will be ON any time that there are any faults in the
system.
(3) Yellow Alarm LED
(a) The LED will be ON any time that there are any alarms in the
system.
(4) Event log
(a) The BBU shall maintain an event log containing a minimum of
200 of the most recent events recorded by the BBU. At a
minimum, the event log shall record the following: date/time
stamp, current operating mode, what the event was.
(b) The Event log shall be viewable through the LCD display,
EIA-232 port, and the Ethernet Interfaces.
(5) Counters
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 65
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 65 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
(a) The BBU shall keep track of the following: the number of
times that the unit was in backup, buck, and boost modes.
f. Programmable Relay Contacts
1) The BBU shall provide the user six (6) programmable dry relay contacts.
As a minimum, the programmable options shall be On Battery, Low
Battery, Timer, Alarm, Fault, and Off.
2) Relay Contact Terminals
a) The relay contacts shall be made available on the front panel of the
BBS via an 18-position, screw hold-down, printed circuit board
mounted terminal block.
3) Contacts
a) Each relay shall have their own common and their own set of normally
open (NO) and normally closed (NC) terminals. The terminals for
each relay shall be oriented as NO-C-NC on the terminal block.
4) Labeling
a) The contacts on the terminal block shall be labeled 1-18, left to right.
Additionally, each set of contact shall be labeled with the NO-C-NC
designation, as well as C1…C6 from left to right. All additional
contacts on the terminal block shall be labeled as “spare”.
5) Rating
a) The relay contacts shall be rated at a minimum of 1 amp @125 VAC.
6) Display
a) When a relay is energized, it shall be displayed on the LCD screen.
7) On Battery Relay Contact
a) The dry relay contacts that are configured for “on battery” shall only
energize when the Inverter is operating in Backup Mode.
8) Time Relay Contacts
a) The BBU shall include a timer that will energize the “timer”
configured dry relay contact after the user configured time has elapsed.
b) The timer is started when the BBU enters Backup Mode.
c) The user can configure the timer from 0 – 480 minutes in 15 minute
increments.
9) Low Battery Relay Contact
a) The BBU shall have an adjustable low battery relay setting.
b) This setting shall be adjustable so that the user can set the point at
which the low battery relay contact is energized.
g. Batteries
1) Provide batteries from the same manufacturer/vendor of the BBU system.
2) Individual batteries shall be 12V.
3) Batteries shall be comprised of extreme temperature, float cycle, GEL
VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead Acid).
4) Battery amp-hour rating shall be 105 amp-hour maximum.
5) Batteries shall be easily replaced and commercially available off the shelf.
6) Battery string
a) Batteries used for the BBU shall consist of a 4 battery string with a
cumulative minimum rated capacity of 210 amp-hours
7) Batteries shall be sized and rated to operate a 700W load for 4 hours
(normal operation) followed by a 300W load for 2 hours (flash operation)
for a total of 6 hours.
8) Operating temperature
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 66
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 66 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
a) The battery system shall consist of one or more strings of extreme
temperature; float cycle GEL VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead Acid)
batteries.
b) Batteries shall be certified to operate at extreme temperatures from –
40°C to +74°C
9) Construction
a) Battery construction shall include heavy-duty, inter-cell connections
for low-impedance between cells, and heavy-duty plates to withstand
shock and vibration.
10) Top cover
a) The top cover shall use tongue and groove construction and shall be
epoxied or heat-sealed to the battery case for maximum strength and
durability.
11) Ability to function
a) The battery shall function if laid on its side without leakage of
chemicals and be so designed.
b) An integral lifting handle should be provided on the batteries for ease
of removal/installation.
12) Interconnect wiring
a) All batteries shall be provided with the appropriate interconnect wiring
and corrosion-resistant mounting trays and/or brackets appropriate for
the cabinet into which they will be installed.
h. System Housing
1) EIA Standard
a) The internal cabinet shall come with installed EIA rails.
b) All references made to EIA rail or EIA 19” rack shall conform to
Electronic Industrial Standards EIA-310-B, Racks, Panels, and
associated equipment with 10-32 “Universal Spacing” threaded holes.
c) The BBU shall be installed in an external cabinet adjacent to or
connected to the Traffic Controller cabinet
2) Inverter/Charger Mounting
a) The Inverter/Charger Unit shall be shelf or rack mounted on a standard
EIA19” rack.
3) Power Transfer Switch Mounting
a) The Power Transfer switch shall be mounted on EIA Rail.
4) Interconnect wiring
a) All interconnect wiring shall be provided and shall be UL Style 1015
CSA TEW.
5) BBU replacement
a) The BBU equipment and batteries shall be easily replaced and shall not
require and special tools for installation.
6) The BBU inverter and batteries shall be hot swappable. There shall be no
disruption to the Traffic Signal when removing the inverter or batteries for
maintenance.
7) All inverter and battery connections shall be of the quick disconnect type
for ease of maintenance.
8) All necessary installation hardware (bolts, fasteners, washers, shelf angles,
racks, etc.) shall be included.
9) Cabinet shall have a cabinet white LED light that is wired to turn on when
the cabinet door is open.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 67
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 67 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
10) The external cabinet shall be capable of housing batteries, inverter/charger
unit, power transfer switch, control panels, wiring, wiring harnesses, and
all other ancillary equipment.
11) Cabinet Types
a) TYPE 1: Pole mounted external cabinet (for 336 type cabinet
locations)
b) TYPE 2: Side mounted external cabinet - Side mounted (attached to
the side of the model 332, 336, 350i, 352i, or 357i Cabinets)
c) TYPE 3: Base mounted external cabinet - Freestanding (for all type
cabinet locations). The base mounted external cabinet shall have a
minimum 8” riser for easy cable entrance.
12) All external cabinets shall be NEMA 3R rated.
13) The external cabinet shall be ventilated through the use of louvered vents,
filter, and one thermostatically controlled fan.
a) The External fan cabinet shall be AC or DC operated from the same
line output of the Power Transfer Switch that supplies power to the
traffic controller cabinet.
b) A 2-postion terminal block shall be provided on the fan panel
14) The external cabinet shall come provided with all bolts washers, nuts,
cabinet-cabinet coupler fitting, shelves, wiring, and all other hardware
necessary for mounting and connecting the external cabinet.
i. Documentation
1) Cabinet wiring diagrams and equipment manuals must be provided for
each cabinet.
2) Detailed directions/instructions for installation, programming and
maintenance for each BBU unit must be included.
10. Multi-conductor cable
a. All cable shall be multi-conductor capable of operating at 600 volts maximum,
and suitable for use at conductor temperatures not exceeding 75 degrees C (167
degrees F).
b. Multi-conductor cable shall be either stranded IMSA 20-1, #14 AWG, stranded
copper wire.
c. The copper wire (before insulating) shall meet the requirements of the latest
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards for uncoated wire.
d. Ensure fillers are non-metallic, moisture resistant, non-wicking material.
e. Supply cables that clearly show the name of the manufacturer and the IMSA
specification number applied at approximate 2 foot intervals to the outer surface
of the jacket by indent printing.
11. Power lead-in cable
a. Power lead-in cable shall be stranded RHW copper wire and suitable for A/C
electric service.
b. The cable shall be capable of operating at 600 volts maximum and suitable for use
at conductor temperatures not exceeding 167 degrees Fahrenheit (75 degrees
Celsius).
c. Material and construction shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements
of IMSA and NEC standards.
d. Conductors shall be stranded, anneal coated copper.
e. Copper wire before insulating or stranding, shall meet the requirements of the
latest edition of ASTM B-033 (for coated wire).
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 68
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 68 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
f. Stranding shall be class B, in accordance with the latest edition of ASTM B-8.
g. Insulation shall be THHN and comply with Federal Specification A-A-59544 and
all applicable ASTM standards.
12. Grounding conductor
a. The grounding conductor shall be a #8 AWG solid copper wire.
b. The conductor shall be bonded to all ground rods.
13. Ground rod
a. Ground rod electrodes shall be copper-bonded steel being at least 5/8 inch in
diameter.
b. All ground rods shall be a minimum of 8 feet.
c. All ground rods shall be a minimum of 6 feet in ground.
14. Ground Boxes
a. All boxes shall meet all test requirements of the latest SCTE 77 “Specification
of Underground Enclosure Integrity” for Tier 22 applications.
b. Bottom edge of box or extension shall be footed with a minimum 1 ¼” flange.
c. Cover lift eye shall be molded with cover.
d. Cover lettering shall be 1” incised letters reading “Danger High Voltage Traffic
Signal.”
e. Cover shall include the City of Fort Worth logo in upper left-hand corner.
f. Cover must be secured with “Penta Head”, stainless steel, self-cleaning bolts
and nuts.
g. Provide security bolts if indicated in the Drawings.
h. The top surface of the ground box cover shall have a minimum co-efficient of
friction of 0.5.
i. Boxes shall be stackable for extra height.
j. Boxes shall be manufactured from Reinforced Polymer Concrete (RPM)
composed of borosilicate glass fiber, a catalyzed polyester resin and an aggregate.
Side walls may be reinforced polymer.
k. The size and dimensions of the required ground boxes shall be shown in
standard detail 34 41 10 – D601.
15. Traffic Signal Structures
a. Design
1) Structures shall be designed in accordance with 1994 AASHTO “Standard
Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and
Traffic Signals” for 80 MPH wind zone.
2) Refer to the City’s Standard or Decorative Traffic Signal standard detail
sheets for additional details.
b. Markings
1) All pole shafts and mast arms for this project shall be marked with the
identification numbers from the drawings to facilitate assembly of these
items in the field.
2) For Projects with multiple intersections, the pole shafts and mast arms shall
be identified by intersection.
c. Vibration dampers
1) Steel mast arms ranging above 28 feet in length shall be provided with
aluminum vibration dampers.
d. Structure Finish
1) Standard
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 69
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 69 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
a) The traffic signal poles and mast arms shall be galvanized in
accordance to ASTM A123. Each component must be completely
coated in a single dip. No double dipping will be allowed. All
miscellaneous hardware shall be galvanized per ASTM A153.
2) Decorative
a) As shown in the plans.
e. High strength galvanized steel bolts
1) The allowable working stresses for A325 bolts shall be given in the
AASHTO Streetscape Structure Specifications for Structural Joints using
ASTM A3250-N or A490-N bolts.
f. Powder Coating
1) After galvanizing, the steel and aluminum products shall be blasted to an
SSPC-SP7 commercial blast.
2) All galvanized parts shall be pre-baked to ensure all gasses are released
from the coating surface prior to powder coating.
3) Finish with 1 coat of UMC super TGIC thermosetting powder coating 3-5
mils (D.F.T.) and baked in accordance with powder manufacturer’s
recommendations.
4) Top coating is electrostatically applied and oven baked at 400 degrees
Fahrenheit and cured for a minimum of 10 minutes.
5) Top coat color shall be black (RAL 9017) unless otherwise selected by the
City.
g. Terminal block
1) Terminal shall be Pelco 12-Circuit terminal block assembly, or approved
equal. Rated at 85 AMP 600V
h. Mast arm pole shaft
1) Each traffic signal mast arm pole shall be fabricated from a 1 piece high
strength steel sheet, and shall have no more than 2 longitudinal full length
high frequency resistance welded joints and no horizontal welded joints
except at the base of the pole.
2) Welds shall have a smooth and consistent external surface appearance.
3) All welds shall be performed by an American certified structural steel
welder.
4) Traffic signal poles shall have a uniform taper.
5) Poles shall have a minimum of 50,000 PSI yield strength.
6) Cold working the steel to attain the 50,000 PSI required yield strength is
not acceptable.
7) The certifications from the vendor on the steel must indicate a minimum of
50,000 PSI yield strength after fabrication.
i. Mast arm
1) Each traffic signal mast arm shall be constructed from a 1 piece high
strength, steel sheet with guaranteed minimum yield strength of 50,000
PSI.
2) Arms over 40 feet may be 2 piece but shall arrive at the Site and City yard
as welded 1 piece.
3) The certifications from the vendor on the steel must indicate a minimum of
50,000 PSI yield strength after fabrication.
4) Cold working the steel to attain the 50,000 PSI required yield strength is
not acceptable.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 70
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 70 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
5) Mast arms shall have no more than 2 longitudinal full length high
frequency resistance welded joints.
6) Welds shall have a smooth and consistent external surface appearance.
7) All mast arms shall have a uniform taper.
j. Luminaire Arm
1) Luminaire arms shall be fabricated in accordance with the Drawings.
k. Pedestal Structures
1) Pedestal structures for mounting pedestrian signals or median-mount traffic
signals shall be furnished with a transformer base, pole cap, and all
necessary hardware for proper installation.
2) Height of pole shall be set in the Drawings, but shall not exceed 15 feet.
l. All other hardware necessary for complete installation of traffic signal
structures, i.e., simplex plates, pole caps, transformer bases, anchor bolts, etc.
shall be hot dipped galvanized and conform to the design, dimension, and
strength requirements of said items as indicated on the Drawings.
m. All hardware shall be packed on a per pole basis.
16. Foundations
a. All foundations shall be built in accordance with Section 03 30 00 and the
requirements stated in the Drawings.
17. Hardware Signal Pole Paint
a. Primer coating shall be Kwal Paint #5810 G-Prime Premium Acrylic Universal
Primer or approved equivalent. This is a 100 percent acrylic primer for all
types of surfaces, including galvanized finishes.
b. Finish coating
1) The flat finish coat shall be Kwal paint #6300 Accupro 100 percent Acrylic
Exterior Flat Finish or approved equivalent. This is a 100 percent acrylic
finish that is durable and chalk resistant.
2) The semi-gloss finish coat shall be Kwal paint #3910 Accupro 100 percent
Acrylic Exterior Semi-Gloss Finish or approved equivalent. This is a 100
percent acrylic finish that is durable and chalk resistant.
c. Finish coat colors that are permissible within the City include:
1) Black: RAL #9017
2) Pure aluminum
3) Arch brown: RAL #8019
18. Signal Controller
a. The traffic signal controller shall be Intelight ATC controller or approved
equivalent, and shall meet the specifications as shown in Specification
Attachment “B”.
b. Traffic signal controller shall be capable of running latest version of Intelight’s
Maxtime controller software and shall meet the following specifications as
shown in Specification Attachment “C”.
19. Controller Cabinet Assembly
a. The traffic signal controller cabinet shall be McCain ATC type cabinet, or
approved equivalent, and shall meet the specifications as shown in
Specification Attachment “A”.
20. Roadside Flashing Beacon Assembly
a. Provide flasher control assembly in accordance with TxDOT DMS 11160,
“Flasher Control Assembly.”
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 71
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 71 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
b. Provide pedestal pole bases in accordance with TxDOT DMS-11140, “Pedestal
Pole Base.”
c. When shown on Drawings, provide solar powered flasher controller assemblies
in accordance with TxDOT DMS 11150, “Solar Power Flasher Controller
Assembly.”
21. School Zone Flasher Assembly
a. Reverse flashing beacons shall be installed on the back side of traffic signal
mast arms at signalized intersections within the school zone.
b. Cabinet
1) The cabinet shall have a hinged panel for mounting the time switch, the
flasher and interface board, and the solar regulator. This hinged panel shall
be in front of the battery compartment. The cabinet shall be designed to
mount a time switch with dimensions of 10 3/8"h x 4 7/8"w x 4"d with the
CPC connector.
2) The cabinet shall be fabricated of .125 inch sheet aluminum. The cabinet
shall be weatherproof using a neoprene gasket and shall be supplied with a
standard #2 Corbin lock and key. The cabinet shall be of sufficient size to
house one (1) 100-amp hour battery. The outside dimensions of the
cabinet shall be a minimum of 17"h x 18.5"w x 14.75"d. The outside of
the cabinet shall be the natural aluminum finish.
3) The cabinet shall have a rain flap designed to cover the top of the cabinet
door. The rain flap shall extend the width of the cabinet and shall be 1.75”
deep. The rain flap shall have a slight down angle and extend past the door
of the cabinet when the door is closed to allow rain water to drip past the
opening of the cabinet door.
4) In order to allow battery gasses to escape, the cabinet shall be equipped
with vents on the left and right side of the cabinet. The vents shall be
covered on the inside of the cabinet with a screen to prevent insects and
other debris from entering the cabinet. The battery compartment shall have
1/2" foam on bottom, sides and back to properly insulate the battery. The
battery compartment shall be of sufficient size to house one (1) 100-amp
hour (Group 31) battery.
5) The flasher cabinet shall be supplied with appropriate hardware for
mounting to a 4 1/2" o. d. pedestal pole using Pelco SE-1100.
c. Flasher and Interface Circuit Board
1) The flasher cabinet assembly shall include a flasher and interface board. A
two (2) circuit 12VDC flasher shall be integral to the flasher and interface
board. The flasher shall be of all solid state construction and shall be rated
at a minimum of 6.0 Amps per circuit. The flasher shall utilize zero-
voltage turn-on and turn-off of current thus eliminating electromagnetic
interference.
2) The flasher and interface board shall have two terminal blocks for
connecting the wiring of the cabinet. Barrier type terminal blocks shall be
used to terminate all wires. The terminal blocks shall terminate the
following functions:
1. Solar Panel + 1. Time switch relay common
2. Solar Panel - 2. Time Switch relay normally open
3. Battery + 3. DC + power to time switch
4. Battery - 4. DC – to time switch
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 72
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 72 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
5. Confirmation light +
6. Confirmation light -
7. Load-1 from the flasher
8. Load-2 from the flasher
9. DC common from flasher
10. DC common from flasher
3) The above functions shall be clearly silk screened on the circuit board
adjacent to the appropriate terminal.
4) The flasher and interface board shall be pre-wired for connection to a solar
regulator. The wires connecting the flasher and interface board to the solar
regulator shall be a minimum of 16AWG and shall be permanently
soldered to the flasher and interface board.
5) The flasher and interface board shall be pre-wired with a 16-position, CPC
type, quick disconnect connector to accommodate a time switch. The time
switch connector shall be wired as follows:
Pin 4: Relay common
Pin 10: Relay normally open
Pin 13: DC common
Pin 15: DC +
6) The flasher and interface board shall include 3 separate fuses to protect the
solar array, the battery and the load. The fuses shall be easily replaceable
from the front of the board with the use of a standard fuse removal tool.
7) It shall be possible to configure the flasher and interface board to operate
as a 24 hour flasher with the use of standard tools.
8) The flasher cabinet shall be supplied with appropriate hardware for
mounting to a 4 1/2" o. d. pedestal pole using Pelco SE-1100.
d. Battery
1) Group 31
a) Each battery shall be Valve-Regulated, Gelled -Electrolyte, with a
nominal voltage of 12 volts and rated at 108Ah (100 hour test method).
Each battery shall conform to the following:
(1) Operating temperature range: -76°F (-60°C) to 140°F (60°C)
(2) Resistance: 4.0 Milliohms full charge
(3) Plate Alloy: Lead Calcium
(4) Vents: Pressure relief self-sealing (2PSI operation) vents
permanently attached
(5) Case: Polypropylene
(6) Terminals: Forged with opening for ¼” bolt
(7) Maximum size: L-13.0” x W-7” x H-9.75”
(8) Weight: 69.5 lbs.
(9) Non-Spillable: ICAO, IATA & DOT standards
(10) Group Size Rating: Group 31
(11) Cycle Life vs. DOD: 5000 or greater @ +25°C (77°F) BCI 2-
Hour Capacity
2) Group 22
a) Each battery shall be Valve-Regulated, Gelled-Electrolyte, with a
nominal voltage of 12 volts and rated at 58.2Ah (100 hour test
method). Each battery shall conform to the following:
(1) Operating Temperature Range: -76°F (-60°C) to 140°F (60°C)
(2) Resistance: 4.0 Milliohms full charge
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 73
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 73 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
(3) Plate Alloy: Lead Calcium
(4) Vents: Pressure relief self-sealing (2PSI operation) vents
permanently attached
(5) Case: Polypropylene
(6) Terminals: Forged with opening for 1/4" bolt
(7) Maximum Size: L-9.38" x W-5.5" x H-9.25"
(8) Weight: 37.0 lbs.
(9) Non-Spillable: ICAO, IATA & DOT Standards
(10) Group Size Rating: Group 22
(11) Cycle Life vs. DOD: 5000 or greater @ +20°C (77°F) BCI 2-
Hour Capacity
e. Photovoltaic Controller (Solar Regulator/Charger)
1) The flasher cabinet shall include a Photovoltaic Controller (Solar
Regulator/Charger) that uses Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) type
technology. The PWM controller shall be 100% solid state and be
designed for use as a battery charge regulator in photovoltaic (solar) energy
systems.
2) The PWM controller will allow maximum solar panel current to flow into
the battery throughout the battery charge cycle and once full charge is
reached; the regulator will continually allow small current pulses to
maintain a full charge. The PWM type controller shall allow a true 0 to
100% duty charging cycle without having over-current to the battery.
3) The photovoltaic controller shall have terminals to accept up to 10AWG
wire.
4) The solar regulator shall have the following LED status indications:
Charging Status LED
Color Indication Operating State
None Flickers “on” Night (LED flickers every 5 sec)
Green Solid: flickers “off” Charging (LED flickers every 5 sec)
Red Flashing Error
-Solar array current too high disconnect
-High Voltage disconnect
-High temperature disconnect
Red Solid: flicker “off” Critical error
-Temp sensor damaged (for battery
charging)
-Heat sink temp damage (for internal
heat level)
-MOSFIT damage
-Firmware error
Battery Status LEDs (3)
Led Indication Battery Status Load Status
Green 2 flash per sec Full Battery (N/U for Gel Cell) Regulator “LOAD” output good
Green 1 flash per second Final stage of charge Regulator “LOAD” output good
Green Solid Battery nearly full charge Regulator “LOAD” output good
Green 1 flash per 2 seconds maintaining full charge Regulator “LOAD” output good
Yellow Solid Battery half full state Regulator “LOAD” output good
Red 1 flash per second Battery low “LOAD” good near disconnect
Red Solid Battery state critical Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD)
(No Field Indications) LVD occurs at 11.5 VDC
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 74
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 74 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
Reconnects “LOAD” at 12.6 VDC
5) Amperage Rating
a) The amperage rating of the solar regulator shall be a minimum of
125% greater than the amperage supplied by the solar array.
b) The solar regulator shall be configurable to work with both sealed and
flooded batteries. It shall be possible to switch between sealed and
flooded with the use of simple tools or by use of switch setting.
c) Operating temperature: -40 to 60° (C)
f. Time Switch
1) This specification sets forth the minimum acceptable design requirements
for a two (2) circuit solid state time switch. It is intended for use in
industrial applications and traffic control systems, and shall be of all solid
state construction except for the 2 relay outputs. All components shall be
made available to the purchaser for servicing for five years after expiration
of the manufacturer's warranty, or shall be so identified that they may be
purchased from industrial electronics suppliers. The time switch shall use
day plan programming with the annual exception method for ease of
programming.
2) Physical
a) The time switch shall be equipped with a means for mounting to a
suitable back plane. Mounting holes that provide clearance for at least
a No. 10 screw will be acceptable.
b) The time switch shall not exceed 8 3/8"h x 4 7/8"w x 2"d without
harness and 10 3/8"h x 4 7/8"w x 2"d with harness. A case shall be
provided to protect the time switch circuitry from dust. The unit shall
fasten securely to the case and must be easily removable from the case
with the use of simple tools.
c) Interface to the power source (AC or DC) and to the controlled device
shall be provided by means of a quick disconnect connector with a 48"
mating harness. The AC and DC power inputs shall be protected with
a fuse and MOV.
3) Power Supply and Timing
a) The time switch shall operate on either 12 Volt DC +/-2VDC or an AC
power source between 95 and 135 VAC and from -30 to +74 degrees
C.
b) The AC & DC power supply shall be an integral part of the time switch
circuit board for operation in AC powered or solar DC powered
systems. A separate 12VDC power supply module, similar to those
used for calculators and battery chargers, is not acceptable.
c) No time shall be gained or lost during changeover from AC power to
the back-up system and back to AC power.
4) Programming
a) All programming shall be accomplished via a 16 key positive action
push button keyboard which is an integral part of the unit. Prompt
messages shall be displayed during the programming process to guide
the operator as the data is being entered.
b) The time of day shall be able to be set to one second.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 75
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 75 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
c) Time of day, day of week, date, year and the operation of the 2 relay
outputs shall be able to be easily set from the integral keyboard. The
functions of the keys shall be clearly marked on the keypad. Prompt
messages shall be displayed during the programming process to guide
the operator as the data is being entered. All data required to properly
set and program the unit and review the stored program shall be clearly
displayed without the use of auxiliary devices.
d) Changeover from standard time to daylight savings time or vice versa
shall be accomplished automatically. The operator shall have the
capability of entering the daylight savings time information from the
keyboard thus eliminating the need for a PROM change should the
current U.S. law change. The daylight savings time feature shall be
able to be defeated from the keyboard. Leap year compensation shall
be automatic.
e) When the user is programming the unit, the display shall provide for
verification of each piece of data prior to its being entered. Provision
shall be made for correction of any incorrect data prior to entering it. It
shall be possible to alter any individual program step without
disturbing any other step in the program.
f) When an instruction is given to turn the output/s on or off, that
instruction time shall be able to be set to one minute, and the change
shall take place at the zero second of that minute.
g) A set of clear operating instructions shall be furnished with each time
switch.
h) A software package shall be available that will allow the operator to
upload programming and download programming to the time switch
from a table top central computer or laptop. The programming shall
include all day plans, week plan, annual plans and a unique name
assigned by the operator. The software shall be able to store the
programming for an unlimited number of time switches.
5) Day Plan Programming
a) Each time switch shall have ten (10) day plans. One of the Day Plans
shall be used for holidays throughout the school year. The other nine
Day Plans shall be capable of programming 16 program steps per plan.
Each day plan program step shall include the following:
(1) Time of day in: Hours, Minutes, AM or PM
(2) ON/OFF Commands: ON, OFF
b) One day plan shall be reserved for programming a normal school day
and the other 8 day plans are programmed for any school flasher
schedule other than the normal school day such as an early out
schedule.
c) Means shall be provided to allow the operator to clear the
programming of a single Day Plan or all of the Day Plans by simple
keystrokes.
6) Week Plan Programming
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 76
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 76 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
a) Each time switch shall have a Week Plan. The Week Plan is the
normal Monday through Friday school program. The time switch shall
automatically assign Saturday and Sunday to no Day Plan, and
Monday through Friday to the Normal Day Plan. The operator shall
have the ability to reprogram any day of week in the Week Plan to any
other Day Plan.
7) Annual Plan Programming
a) The time switch shall be capable of executing thirty-six (36) separate
Annual Plans. The Annual Plan programming shall use the exception
day method where the time switch automatically runs its Week Plan
until an Annual Plan program instructs it to run a different day plan.
b) Programming for the Annual Plans shall be accomplished through the
integral keyboard. Each Annual Plan shall be programmed by entering
a Day Plan number and the beginning date (month/date/year) and the
ending date for which the time switch is to run that Day Plan. The
time switch shall be capable of running a Day Plan as short as one (1)
day or as long as six (6) months. It shall be possible to begin an
Annual Plan in one calendar year and end that same Annual Plan in the
next consecutive year.
c) It shall not be necessary to enter the Annual Plans in chronological
order.
d) Means shall be provided to allow the operator to clear all of the data in
the Annual Plans without affecting the operation of the time switch.
e) A means shall be provided to review the Annual Plans without
affecting the normal operation of the time switch. The display shall
include the Annual Plan number, the Day Plan number, and the
beginning and ending dates.
8) Program Transfer
a) It shall be possible to program any time switch, and transfer that
program to any other like time switch by means of a simple unit-to-unit
cable. Upon completion of the program transfer, an electronic check
shall be activated to insure an accurate transfer of data. In the event an
invalid transfer occurs, an error message shall be displayed alerting the
operator. The transfer cable connection shall be accessible from the
front of the time switch.
9) Manual Operation
a) The time switch shall have the capability of manually turning on or off
the two relay outputs from the integral keyboard. The manual
operation shall remain in effect until the next valid program step
occurs. At that point the time switch will release from manual control
and revert to its internal program.
b) The main display of the time switch shall indicate when the unit is
under manual control.
10) Display
a) Integral with the time switch shall be an easy to read, 2 line, 16
characters per line, alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). This
display shall provide a clear indication of the time of day
(HH:MM:SS), AM or PM, day of week, date (MM/DD/YY) and the
status of the output relays. Time shall be entered on a 12 hour format
with a clear indication of AM or PM.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 77
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 77 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
b) The operator shall be able to display the current status of the time
switch with simple keystrokes. This status screen shall include which
Day Plan and Annual Plan numbers are in effect.
c) A means shall be provided to review the program in the unit's memory,
and such means shall be integral with the time switch. Such program
review shall not affect the current operation of the time switch.
11) Back-up System
a) A means shall be provided to maintain timekeeping when the line
power source (115VAC) is not available. This back-up system shall
maintain timekeeping for not less than 7 years at 25C. Upon
resumption of the line power, the unit shall automatically resume
normal operation.
b) A means shall be provided to maintain the time switch program when
the line power source (115VAC) is not available. This back-up system
shall maintain all programmed steps intact for not less than 7 years at
25C. Upon resumption of the line power, the unit shall automatically
resume normal operation.
c) Should the timekeeping or the program of the time switch be erased
during an AC power outage, the unit shall display an indication of the
loss. The display shall be an easy to read LCD and shall be able to be
reset from the integral keyboard.
d) When the time switch is operating on the back-up system, the displays
shall be blanked and the output disabled to conserve back-up power.
12) Outputs
a) The time switch shall have two (2) single-pole, double-throw relay
output with a contact rating of at least 15 amps at 115 VAC resistive
load.
g. 12” Polycarbonate Traffic Signal Head
1) The purpose of this specification is to set forth minimum design and
operating requirements for a 12" adjustable face polycarbonate traffic
signal head which can house a 12” 12VDC LED.
2) General
a) The performance of each signal shall conform to the standard for
Adjustable Face Vehicular Traffic Control Signal Head, Technical
Report No. 1, of the Institute of Transportation Engineers, as most
recently revised.
b) The signal shall be sectional in construction, requiring one lens per
section. Sections shall be of such design and construction as to fit
together rigidly and securely, to prevent the entrance of dirt or
moisture and prevent the rotation of misalignment of the individual
sections.
3) Housing
a) The housing for the individual sections shall be injection molded from
ultraviolet and heat stabilized flame retardant permanently colored
polycarbonate resins.
b) All parts shall be clean, smooth, and free from flaws, cracks,
blowholes, and other imperfections.
c) The top and bottom of each section shall be molded with a 5
boss and reinforcing ribs.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 78
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 78 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
d) Openings in the top and bottom of the signal shall accommodate
standard bracket arms.
e) A cast boss shall be provided for mounting a 5 or 6 position terminal
strip.
4) Door
a) The doors for each section shall also be injection molded from similar
material to that used for the main section housing.
b) Two integrated hinge lugs shall be mounted to the housing with two
stainless steel hinge pins.
c) Positive latching shall be achieved with stainless steel eyebolts and
wingnut assemblies.
d) The inside of the door shall have a groove to accommodate a pliant
gasket resulting in a completely weatherproof and dustproof assembly
when the door is in the closed position.
e) The door shall be equipped with four metal threaded inserts molded in
for added strength to the visor attachment screws.
5) Visor
a) All signal head shall have a tunnel visor for each section.
b) The visor shall be one piece made of molded permanently colored
polycarbonate resins and have twist-on attaching ears.
6) Hardware
a) All screws, latching bolts, and hinge pins shall be 300 series stainless
steel to prohibit rust and corrosion.
7) Terminal Block
a) The traffic signal shall be equipped with a 2 or 3 section #12 terminal
barrier strip; one side with a quick disconnect terminal for socket leads.
The opposite set of terminals with a screw clamp terminal for field
wiring.
8) Signal Closure Kit
a) A signal closure kit will be furnished with each signal head unless
otherwise noted. The closer kit shall be designed to seal the signal
head at either top or bottom without use of special tools. The closer
cap shall be molded ABS plastic having the same color as the signal
head with UV stabilizers and having a durometer neoprene gasket.
The adapter bar used to secure the closure kit to the head shall
compensate for varying thickness of the signal heads. Two screws
shall be provided to fit any manufacturers signal.
h. Signal Mounting Hardware
1) The purpose of this specification is to set forth minimum design and
specification requirements for a signal mounting bracket assembly to attach
an 8" & 12" polycarbonate traffic signal head to a 4 1/2" pole.
2) Materials
a) The bracket shall consist of a hollow aluminum cast arm with circular
tri-bolt signal centering bosses, drilled and tapped 1/4" x 20 for
attachment of a traffic signal head and on pole end cast openings for
3/8" U-bolt.
b) All associated hardware needed to attach signal head to a 4 1/2" pole
shall be supplied with the bracket.
c) No special tools required.
d) The hollow aluminum arm shall have a 1 1/2" wire raceway.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 79
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 79 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
e) The casting shall be free of voids, pits, dents, molding sand and
excessive foundry grinding marks.
f) The exterior finish shall be free of molding fins, cracks and other
blemishes.
g) All design radii shall be smooth and intact.
h) Minimum aluminum ingot requirements:
(1) Aluminum alloy: 319
(2) Yield strength: 18
(3) Tensile strength: 27
(4) Brinell hardness: 75
(5) Elongation (% in 2”): 2%
3) Finish
a) Bracket arm: alodine finish
b) Hardware: zinc di-chromate
i. Pedestal Base
1) The pedestal base shall be 13 3/4" square and 15" high.
2) The base shall be cast aluminum with natural finish and minimum weight
of 20 lbs.
3) The pedestal base shall be fabricated from new aluminum billet with the
following minimum requirements:
a) Aluminum alloy: 319
b) Tensile strength, KSI: 34
c) Yield strength, KSI: 19
d) Elongation (% in 2"): 2.5
e) Brinell hardness: 85
f) Shearing strength, KSI: 23
4) No scrap material shall be used in the fabrication process.
5) The pedestal base shall be free of voids, pits, molding sand and excessive
foundry grinding marks.
6) All design radii shall be smooth and intact.
7) The top of the pedestal base shall be threaded to receive a 4" NPT pedestal
pole.
8) The pedestal base shall be designed to be fastened to a concrete foundation
by means of 3/4" anchor bolts located 90 degrees apart on the bottom of
the base.
9) The base shall have slots in the bottom 1 1/2" wide and 2 1/2" long
measured along the circumference of the bolt circle, allowing a proper fit
even if the bolts are placed slightly off center.
10) The base shall accommodate bolt circles from 12" to 14 1/2".
11) Each pedestal base shall be supplied with a set of 4 anchor bolts, 3/4"
diameter by 18" length, galvanized per ASTM-A-572. Each anchor bolt
shall have a hex nut and flat washer.
12) The pedestal base shall have an 8 1/2" square door opening that is free of
burrs and sharp edges.
13) Each pedestal base shall be supplied with a removable 8 1/2" square door.
The door shall be attached to the base by using one socket button head
screw at the top and two injection molded lugs with slots at bottom.
14) The door shall be injection molded ABS plastic that is free of burrs and
sharp edges and shall conform to the following minimum requirements:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 80
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 80 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
ASTM Method Value
Tensile @ yield (1/8”) D638 6,600 psi
Flexural @ yield D790 11,000 psi
Rockwell Hardness D785 101 (R Scale)
Nothched Izod D256 5 ft. lb./in.
15) The door shall have reinforcing ribs and shall have an edge thickness of
.25" and a minimum thickness of .156".
16) The door shall contain a fire retardant meeting or exceeding Underwriters
Laboratories UL94 test H.B. and ultra-violet inhibitors and stabilizers for
protection against U.V. degradation.
17) The color of the door shall be gray aluminum tone. All surfaces shall be
flat and straight without blisters, buckling or warping.
j. Pedestal Pole
1) The pedestal pole shall be 15' in length.
2) The pedestal pole shall be extruded with the following minimum
requirements:
a) Aluminum alloy: 6063-T6
b) Tensile strength, KSI: 30
c) Yield strength, KSI: 25
d) Elongation: 10%
e) Minimum wall thickness: 0.237”
f) Outside diameter: 4.5”
3) The pedestal pole shall be threaded and deburred 4" on one end only per
NPT specification.
4) The pedestal pole shall have a rough surface texture consisting of a
uniform grain pattern that is perpendicular to the axis of the pole for the
full length of the pole.
5) The pedestal pole shall be free of heat discoloration, holes, ridges, cracks
or other surface defects.
k. Pole Reinforcing Collar
1) The reinforcing collar shall be designed to reinforce a pedestal pole at the
point where the threads enter the pedestal base.
2) The reinforcing collar shall be three piece cast aluminum with the
following minimum requirements:
a) Aluminum alloy: 319
b) Tensile strength, KSI: 27
c) Yield strength, KSI: 18
d) Elongation: 2
e) Brinell Hardness: 70
f) Finish: Alodine 1200
g) Minimum wall thickness: 5/8"
h) Minimum mounted height: 4 3/8"
3) The reinforcing collar shall clamp around the top of a pedestal base with
six (6) 5/16" socket head bolts.
4) Each reinforcing collar shall be supplied with a 5/16" x 3/4" roll pin for
holding the collar securely in place. The collar shall have an opening to be
used for drilling a pilot hole for the roll pin.
l. Anchor Bolts
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 81
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 81 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
1) A set of four (4) anchor bolts shall be furnished with four (4) washers and
four (4) hex nuts.
2) The anchor bolts shall be ¾” x 18” in length as measured from inside of the
bend to the threaded end of the anchor bolt.
3) The anchor bolt shall be threaded ¾”-10NC for a minimum length of 3-¼”
inches of thread.
4) The “L” bend shall be a minimum of 3 inches as measured from the inside
of the anchor bolt shaft to the end of the bend.
5) The anchor bolt material shall conform to ASTM A-529 Grade 50
specifications, with minimum yield strength of 50 KSI and minimum
tensile strength of 70 KSI.
6) The material shall be of domestic origin (manufactured in the USA).
7) The anchor bolt shall be hot dipped galvanized per ASTM A-153 their full
length and the threads brushed or rethreaded to remove any excess
galvanize on the threads.
8) The material for the hex nuts shall conform to ASTM A-563 Grade DH
specifications.
9) The nut shall be hot dipped galvanized per ASTM A-153 and rethreaded to
remove any excess galvanize on the threads.
10) The material for the washer shall conform to ASTM F-844 specifications.
11) The washer shall be hot dipped galvanized per ASTM A-153.
12) All galvanized runs, drips, icicles and bare spots shall be properly treated.
m. Cell Modem for 2-way communications with CPR2102 or AAP22 Time
Switch
1) Frequency Band
a) Hepta-band 850/900/AWS 1700/1900/2100 MHz
2) Physical
a) The cell modem shall be housed in an aluminum enclosure with a
means for mounting. A mounting bracket shall be supplied with each
modem for attaching to a time switch.
b) The cell modem shall not exceed 3.17” H (3.816” including
connectors) x 2.45” W x 1.16” D. The cell modem shall be
approximately 8.8 ounces in weight.
3) Connectors
a) The RF antenna connector shall be a SMA female and be marked
CELL. The serial connector shall be a DB9 female and the power shall
be a 2.5mm miniature screw-on connector and both will be located on
same end.
b) SIM (Subscriber Identification Module) shall be a Mini SIM.
4) Cable Harness
a) Each cell modem shall be supplied with a cable harness with the
appropriate connectors to connect the cell modem to the time switch.
The cable harness shall connect 12 VDC power, serial data in, serial
data out and ground from the time switch to the cell modem. The DC
power shall be supplied from the time switch over this cable harness.
5) Electrical
a) The cell modem shall be capable of operating on a DC power source
between +7 to +32 VDC and shall be designed to operate from -40 to
+85 degrees C. The unit must be powered directly from the time
switch.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 82
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 82 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
b) A separate power supply module, similar to those used for calculators
and battery chargers, is not acceptable.
6) Antenna
a) Antenna configurations must be provided to insure a RSSI level
necessary for dependable communications to the remote unit. The
antenna required will be determined at the time of installation by
testing the signal strength at each individual location. Any necessary
cabling and mounting hardware will be provided.
b) An omni antenna and coax cable designed for the frequency band of
the cell network shall be supplied with the cell modem. The coax cable
shall be a minimum of 24” long with connectors necessary to connect
the antenna to the cell modem. The omni antenna shall have a nominal
impedance of 50 ohms and shall have a gain of 0 – 2 dB.
7) Indicators
a) The cell modem shall have LED indicators to display the following:
(1) Power-When the cell modem has power applied
(2) Tr- When the cell modem is in the process of transmitting data
(3) CD- When the cell modem has acquired connection to the cell
network
(4) LS- Link Status
(5) Signal- Signal strength
8) SIM Card
a) Each cell modem shall be equipped with a SIM card that is pre-
provisioned by the supplier for data through a 3G service provider.
b) The cell modem shall have a slot designed for receiving the SIM card.
The slot shall be accessible from the outside of the cell modem
enclosure and shall hold the SIM card firmly in place.
9) Cell Modem Configuration
a) The cell modem shall have the ability to receive commands from the
central computer using standard modem “AT” commands. When an
AT command is received, the modem shall respond by sending the
appropriate response to the central computer. These commands shall
allow the operator to determine or execute the following:
(1) Unattended daily validation
(2) Relay status
(3) Low battery voltage
(4) Signal strength
(5) Last download
(6) Last power-up
(7) Data acquisition command for AP22 or CPR2102 from the time
switch
b) Each cell modem shall have a serial connector that is pre-configured to
work with Model CPR2102 and Model AP22 Time Switches. The pre-
configuration of the serial port shall include the baud rate, data bits,
stop bit, parity and flow control.
22. Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB) Assembly
a. Cabinet
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 83
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 83 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
1) The cabinet shall be manufactured of 0.125” sheet aluminum. Nominal
cabinet dimensions shall be 22” H x 12.0” W x 8.0” D. The cabinet shall be
a one (1) compartment type. The cabinet shall have screen covered louvers
on each side for ventilation. On the bottom of the cabinet there shall be two
screened insect proof drain holes. The cabinet shall be weather resistant,
providing a degree of protection from falling rain or sleet and shall be
undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure.
2) The cabinet door shall be a single unit with a continuous piano hinge
riveted to the door and the cabinet. The hinge shall be an A730S,
constructed with a 304 stainless steel hinge pin. The door shall incorporate
a neoprene gasket which forms a snug weather tight seal when the door is
closed. The door lock shall be a standard Police lock.
3) Each cabinet shall be equipped with a mounting bracket for 4.5” OD pole
mounting. All necessary hardware for proper mounting shall be included.
b. Control Panel
1) The systems electronic components including a solar charge controller,
solid state flasher, countdown timer and radio shall be mounted on a
modular control panel. The control panel shall mount in the cabinet using
standoffs and a self-retaining, spring loaded thumb screw for quick and
easy removal. The solar panel input, battery input and system load output
shall be fused for short circuit and overload protection and to provide ease
of system maintenance.
2) The solar panel, beacons and battery shall be connected to the control panel
through a main wiring harness via a circular pin connector (CPC).
3) Solar Charge Controller
a) The solar charge controller shall be fully automatic charger using four
stages of charging for rapid, efficient and safe battery charging. Stage
1: Full Charge, with 100% of available solar energy. Stage 2: Pulse-
Width Modulation (PWM) constant voltage regulation to prevent
heating and excessive battery gassing. Stage 3: Float Charge, after
battery is fully recharged, reduces to a float or trickle charge with
transition dependent on battery history. Stage 4: Equalize Charge, a
boost charge that depends on elapsed time and battery history.
Flooded cells receive a vigorous equalization, sealed batteries a smaller
boost to bring uneven cells into balance and extend battery life. Gel
cells are not equalized.
b) The solar charge controller shall have a low voltage load disconnect
(LVD) of 11.4 VDC and shall automatically reconnect after LVD when
the voltage reaches 12.6 VDC. The charge controller shall have a high
voltage disconnect (HVD) of 15.3VDC. A liquid crystal display (LCD)
shall be provided on the front of the charge controller to display battery
voltage, solar charge current, and load current. In addition, colored
LED’s will indicate charging state and battery status. The green
charging LED shall be on when charging and off when not charging.
Battery status LED’s indicate battery state, showing a blinking green
LED during PWM charging, a solid green LED when battery is near
full charge, a solid amber LED indicating battery at middle capacity,
blinking red LED indicating low charge, or a solid red LED indicating
load disconnected (LVD).
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 84
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 84 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
c) A multifunction manual disconnect push button shall be provided to
allow disconnect of the Load or both Load and Solar. When the button
is pushed the red Led inside the button will light. In addition, the Load
of both the Load and Solar will display ‘OFF’ in the digital meter to
indicate the disconnected state.
d) The solar charge controller will be capable of operating in a
temperature range of -40 degrees C and +60 degrees C.
e) Wire terminations to the solar charge controller shall be accomplished
via Euro style terminations.
f) The solar charge controller shall be Morningstar Corporation’s Prostar
15 with LCD display or approved equal.
4) Solid State DC Flasher
a) The flasher shall be solid state, 2 circuit device which controls the wig-
wag and rapid flashing sequence of the yellow indications on each side
and end of the RRFB.
b) The flasher shall allow an input voltage range of 11 to 25 VDC,
support a maximum power load of 50W per output and be capable of
operating in a temperature range of -40°C and +75° C. The flasher
shall be an ELTEC FS-2B or approved equal.
5) Countdown Timer
a) The countdown timer shall be a multi-function, multi-range, multi-
voltage electronic timer with DPDT relay output and LED status
indicator. The timer shall operate upon system activation to control the
flash duration of the RRFB. The timer shall provide seven field
selectable ranges of timing providing 0.1s to 100h activation duration.
b) The timer shall conform to the following minimum specifications:
(1) Operating Voltage: 12VDC Nominal (10.2V – 14.4V)
(2) Max Power Consumption: 0.6W
(3) Repetition Accuracy: +/- 0.5%
(4) Operating Temp Range: -20° C to +60°
(5) Relay Output Rating: 10A – 250V
(6) Fixing: Plug-in Base: 11-pin
6) Wireless Communications
a) The units on each side of the road shall communicate wirelessly. No
trenching or boring is necessary. The radio transmitter and receiver
shall use Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) technology to
ensure reliable data delivery within the unlicensed Industrial, Scientific
and Medical (ISM) band.
b) The communication system radios shall conform to the following
minimum specifications:
(1) Operating Voltage: 10VDC – 30VDC
(2) Operating Current: Typ - <100mA, Max – <200mA at 12VDC
(3) Operating Frequency: 900 MHz
(4) RF Transmit Power: 1 Watt
(5) Network Identification: MAC ID Binding
(6) Antenna Impedance: 50Ω
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 85
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 85 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
c) The initiation of the signal for the flashers to commence flashing will
be by pedestrian push button. Activation from pedestrian shall trigger
the system countdown timer to operate the crossing indications for the
programmed duration. Each time a pedestrian pushes a button, the
countdown timer will reset and repeat to the preset flashing beacon
cycle.
d) The wireless communication system must be an ELTEC 730247-GW
or an approved equal.
c. Solar Panel
1) The solar panel shall be constructed of high efficiency, multi-crystal silicon
solar cells that are laminated within a pottant of ethylene vinyl acetate
(EVA) and encapsulated between a tempered glass cover plate and a back
sheet. The entire laminate shall be secured within an anodized aluminum
frame for structural strength, ease of installation, and to protect the cells
from the most severe environmental conditions. The panel shall be self-
cleaning, impact resistant, highly transmissive, tempered glass superstate.
The panel module frame shall be made of extruded, polymer coated
aluminum alloy or similar approved construction. The panel module
junction box shall be a UV resistant, weatherproof wire termination system
which handles #18 AWG - #8 AWG wiring. The typical wattage of the
solar panel shall be 40 watts. The appropriate wattage of the solar panel
shall be verified with a system sizing report based upon location and
specific system configuration and operating parameters.
2) A mounting rack for the solar panel shall be included with the solar panel.
The mounting rack shall mount to a 4 ½” OD pole.
d. Battery
1) The system battery shall be valve regulated, recombinant, starved
electrolyte, sealed lead acid absorbed glass mat (AGM) 12 volt DC battery.
The battery self-discharge rate shall be 1% per month or less (at 68 degrees
F). The battery will utilize T881 terminals. The positive terminal will be
covered with a rubber boot to protect the battery from accidental shorting.
The typical battery capacity shall be 55 amp-hours. The appropriate
battery size shall be verified with a system sizing report based upon
location and specific configuration and operating parameters.
e. Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB) Light Bar
1) The RRFB shall comply with FHWA Interim Approval Memorandum
dated July 16, 2008 and all subsequent official interpretation letters
provided as clarification. The RRFB shall contain 5 rectangular rapid-
flashing yellow indications; two on each side, and one in the end visible to
pedestrians in the cross walk. The indications facing the motorists shall be
approximately 5” wide by 2” high, and shall be yellow indications, Whelen
500 Series TIR6 50AA3ZCR, split lightheads featuring a six Super-LED
panel with a clear outer lens providing wide-angle visibility and high
intensity output. The LED used on the end of the light bar facing the
pedestrian shall be round.
2) Indications facing the motorists shall meet SAE J595 Class 1 peak
luminous output requirements. The vendor shall submit third party
certification of SAE J595 Class 1 compliance.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 86
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 86 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
3) The RRFB flash pattern with be the WW+S (Wig-Wag plus Simultaneous)
as approved by the FHWA on July 25, 2014. The beacons shall flash at a
rate of 75 flashes per minute.
4) The RRFB housing shall be constructed of 0.125” brushed sheet
aluminum. The housing shall be powder coated Federal Yellow.
5) The RRFB will be assembled and wired as a unit. The unit’s two piece
housing shall include a keyed quick disconnect plug between the wiring
harness of each side to allow for ease of installation and maintenance. The
housing shall mount to 2-3/8” or 4-1/2” OD poles with integral universal
mounting bracket and a U-bolt.
f. Night Dimming
1) Automatic night dimming may be enabled on the RRFB FS-2B flasher.
The dimming function shall employ an external photocell to detect ambient
light. The flasher shall initiate the night dimming function when detected
light conditions reach the ambient light level as defined by the Federal
Aviation Administration (FAA).
g. Pole and Base
1) The pole shall be a schedule 40 spun aluminum 4” ID (4.5” OD) x 16’ H.
The base shall be an AASHTO Certified square aluminum breakaway base,
Pelco PB-5340 or equal. A set of 4 anchor bolts shall be provided. The
anchor bolts shall be ¾” x 16” and be similar to Pelco part number PB-
5306. A two-piece aluminum pole collar assembly with standard stainless
steel fasteners shall be provided.
h. Signage
1) Two (2) W11-2 (36” x 36”) signs shall be provided for each pole location
and shall be mounted on each side of the pole just above the light bar. Two
(2) W16-7p (24” x 12”) shall be provided for each pole location. One left
pointing down arrow mounted below the light bar on one side and one right
pointing down arrow mounted below the light bar on the other side of the
pole. Signs shall be constructed using 3M diamond grade reflective
fluorescent yellow-green sheeting.
2) Back to back sign mounting hardware for mounting the signs on a 4.5” OD
pole shall be included.
i. Pedestrian Push Button
1) A pedestrian push button shall be provided to activate the flashing beacons.
The button shall be an ADA compliant push button with H-frame mount
incorporating a plaque on the push button reading ‘PUSH BUTTON TO
TURN ON WARNING LIGHTS’.
23. Louvered Back Plates
a. Material
1) Aluminum or acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS).
2) One-piece for 3- and 4-section heads
3) Two-piece for 5-section heads
b. Finishes
1) Aluminum: powder coat
2) ABS, integrally molded
c. Color(s)
1) Face: flat black
2) Back: flat black
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 87
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 87 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
d. Optional reflective tape can be added to aluminum plates when called out for in
the plans or approved prior to installation.
e. Shall be vacuum formed.
f. Aluminum plates shall be louvered.
g. ABS sheet material shall conform to ASTM D1788.
24. Powder Coating Traffic Signal Structures
a. Powder Coating
1) After galvanizing, the steel and aluminum products shall be blasted to an
SSPC-SP7 commercial blast.
2) All galvanized parts shall be pre-baked to ensure all gasses are released
from the coating surface prior to powder coating.
3) Finish with 1 coat of UMC super TGIC thermosetting powder coating 3-5
mils (D.F.T.) and baked in accordance with powder manufacturer’s
recommendations.
4) Top coating is electrostatically applied and oven baked at 400 degrees
Fahrenheit and cured for a minimum of 10 minutes.
5) Top coat color shall be black (RAL 9017) unless otherwise selected by
the City.
b. Additional Color(s)
1) Cultural District Green
2) Downtown Bronze
3) Other colors may be approved by the City.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Battery back-up system
1. The City reserves the right to do testing on BBU systems to ensure Quality
Assurance on unit before installation and random sampling of units being provided
to the City. BBU systems that fail will be taken off the City’s Qualified Products
List.
2. The City testing procedures will check compliance with all the criteria of this
Specification Section including the following:
a. Event logging for fault/alarm conditions.
b. Demonstrated use of 1 or more of the operating methods described in this
Specification.
c. Testing of ability to power a 700W load for 4 hours, transfer to flash mode and
power a 300W load for 2 additional hours, at an ambient temperature of +25
degrees Celsius.
d. Testing of all components in environmental chamber (temperature ranges from
-30 degrees Celsius to +74 degrees Celsius) following NEMA TS2 2003
standards, section 2 and Advanced Transportation Controller (ATC) Standard,
Version 5.2b, Section 9.
3. Each BBU shall be manufactured in accordance with a written manufacturer’s
Quality Assurance program. The QA program shall include, as a minimum,
specific design and production QA procedures.
4. The Inverter manufacturer shall be ISO 9001or ISO 9002 certified.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 88
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 88 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
5. The manufacturer, or an independent testing lab hired by the manufacturer, shall
perform qualification testing on BBU Systems offered to the City. Testing
procedures shall conform to testing procedures defined in the California
Department of Transportation’s Specification for Battery Backup System, Tees
Chapter 4, dated July 7, 2009. Testing data shall be submitted to the City for
review.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions
1. The Contractor shall verify by exploratory excavation, if needed, that existing
underground utilities are not in conflict with proposed foundations and conduit
bores.
a. All exploratory excavations shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 30.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection of In-Place Conditions
1. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the preservation of existing
landscaping (sod, shrubbery, trees, and etc.), sprinkler systems, and/or other private
property at the Site during the installation of the traffic signal. Damaged
landscaping, sprinkler systems, and/or other private property shall be replaced
within a reasonable time, by the Contractor at his own expense, to the satisfaction
of the Inspector.
2. No trees or shrubbery shall be cut except upon the specific authority of the Inspector.
3. Removal of mail boxes in the way of construction requires 48 hours advance notice to
the post office.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Special Techniques
1. LED Vehicle and Pedestrian Signal Head Assemblies
a. Assembly
1) Assemble individual signal sections in multi-section faces in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations to form a rigid signal face.
2) Assemble and mount signal heads as shown on the plans.
3) Close any openings in an assembled signal head with a plug of the same
material and color as the head.
4) Remove only the existing lens, reflector, and incandescent lamp when
installing a retrofit replacement LED traffic signal or pedestrian signal
lamp unit into an existing signal housing; fit the new unit securely in the
housing door; and connect the new housing unit to the existing electrical
wiring or terminal block by means of simple connectors.
b. Wiring
1) Wire each optical unit to the terminal block located in that signal section
by means of solderless wire connectors or binding screws and spade lugs.
2) Wire all sections of a multi-section signal face to the section terminal
blocks in which the traffic signal cable is terminated.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 89
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 89 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
3) Maintain the color coding on leads from the individual optical units
throughout the signal head, except for the traffic signal cable.
4) Use solderless wire connectors or binding screws and spade lugs for
connections to terminal blocks. Use binding screws and spade lugs for field
wiring.
c. Signal and pedestrian heads shall be securely tightened immediately after
signal head assembly has been installed.
d. If any signal head assembly is found to be loose or asymmetrical in any
manner, the Contractor shall be required to remove and rebuild the signal head
assembly to the satisfaction of the Inspector.
e. The Contractor shall mount signal heads level and plumb.
f. The Contractor shall position and secure the signal heads so they are visible as
stipulated, in Section 4E.05 of the 2009 MUTCD.
g. All connection screws shall be tight and snug.
h. All signal heads or parts of heads not in operation shall be covered with burlap
or fabric material until placed into operation.
i. When the signal heads become operational, all existing heads no longer
required shall be removed immediately.
j. Pedestrian head assemblies installed such that the wiring to each head shall
pass from the mast arm through the signal head bracing or attachment hardware
to the signal head.
k. No exposed cable or wiring will be permitted.
l. Installation of a pedestrian signal retrofit module into an existing pedestrian
signal housing shall only require the removal of the existing optical unit
component, i.e., lens, lamp module, gaskets, and reflector; will be weather tight
and fit securely in the housing; and shall connect directly to existing electrical
wiring.
2. Pedestrian Push Button Assemblies
a. Meet the requirements of the TMUTCD when installing push-buttons.
b. Wire the push-button according to manufacturer’s installation instructions.
c. Close unused housing openings with a weather-tight closure painted to match
the housing.
d. Verify that each button is communicating and fully functional.
e. Do not use terminal connections or splice wire leads except at approved
locations.
f. Attach wires to terminal posts with solderless terminals unless otherwise
advised by manufacturer’s recommendations.
g. Attach terminals to the wires with a ratchet-type compression crimping tool
properly sized to the wire.
h. Mount a pedestrian push button sign near each push button as shown on the
plans.
3. Accessible Pedestrian Signals (APS)
a. If a controller unit is required by the plans, integrate the pedestrian controller
unit into the traffic signal controller cabinet assembly.
b. Unless specified otherwise, wire the APS to the nearest terminal strip using
stranded No. 12 AWG XHHW wire with 600-volt insulation.
c. Do not use terminal connections or splice wire leads except in the hand holes
located in the signal pole shaft, in the signal pole base, or at locations approved
by the City.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 90
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 90 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
d. Attach wires to terminal posts with solderless terminals.
e. Attach terminals to the wires with a ratchet-type compression crimping tool
properly sized to the wire.
f. Remove any burrs or rough edges on any holes drilled for wire entry to APS
pushbuttons.
g. Ensure pushbutton stations are mounted at the proper height and orientation.
h. Provide a neat workmanship in the installation of any wiring harnesses, control
units, wiring panels, push button stations.
i. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations regarding installation and
weatherproofing.
j. Documentation
1) Each APS shall be provided with the following documentation:
2) Complete and accurate installation wiring guide.
3) Contact name, address, and telephone number for the representative,
manufacturer, or distributor for warranty repair.
4) If requested supply schematics for all electronics. One schematic diagram
shall be provided for pushbutton stations, panels, central control units or
control units, along with any necessary installation instructions.
4. Radar Detection Equipment and Cable
a. Manufacturing
1) The internal electronics of the radar detector shall utilize automation for
surface mount assembly, and shall comply with the requirements set forth
in IPC-A-610C Class 2, Acceptability of Electronic Assemblies.
2) The radar detector shall undergo a rigorous sequence of operational testing
to ensure product functionality and reliability. Testing shall include the
following:
a) Functionality testing of all internal sub-assemblies
b) Unit level burn-in testing of duration 48 hours or greater
c) Final unit functionality testing prior to shipment
3) Test results and all associated data for the above testing shall be provided
for each purchased radar detector by serial number, upon request.
b. Configuration
1) Auto-Configuration
a) The radar detector shall have a method for automatically defining
traffic lanes, stop bars and zones without requiring user intervention.
This auto-configuration process shall execute on a processor internal to
the radar detector and shall not require an external PC or other
processor.
b) The auto-configuration process shall work under normal intersection
operation and traffic conditions and may require up to ten vehicles to
pass through each lane to complete.
2) Manual Configuration
a) The auto-configuration method shall not prohibit the ability of the user
to manually adjust the radar detector configuration.
b) The radar detector shall support the configuring of lanes, stop bars and
detection zones in 1-ft. (0.3-m) increments.
3) Windows Mobile™ - Based Software
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 91
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 91 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
a) The radar detector shall include graphical user interface software that
displays all configured lanes and the current traffic pattern using a
graphical traffic representation.
b) The graphical interface shall operate on Windows Mobile, Windows
XP and Windows Vista in the .NET framework.
c) The software shall support the following functionality:
(1) Operate over a TCP/IP connection
(2) Give the operator the ability to save/back up the radar detector
configuration to a file or load/restore the radar detector
configuration from a file
(3) Allow the backed-up sensor configurations to be viewed and edited
(4) Provide zone and channel actuation display
(5) Provide a virtual connection option so that the software can be
used without connecting to an actual sensor
(6) Local or remote sensor firmware upgradability
c. Operating Conditions
1) The radar detector shall maintain 95% accuracy of performance in all
weather conditions, including rain, freezing rain, snow, wind, dust, fog and
changes in temperature and light, including direct light on sensor at dawn
and dusk.
2) The radar detector shall be capable of continuous operation over an
ambient temperature range of -40°F to 165.2°F (-40°C to 74°C).
3) The radar detector shall be capable of continuous operation over a relative
humidity range of 5% to 95% (noncondensing).
d. Testing
1) FCC
a) Each radar detector shall be Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) certified under CFR 47, Part 15, section 15.249 as an intentional
radiator.
b) The FCC certification shall be displayed on an external label on each
radar detector according to the rules set forth by the FCC.
c) The radar detector shall comply with FCC regulations under all
specified operating conditions and over the expected life of the
detector.
2) NEMA TS2-2003 Testing
a) The radar detector shall comply with the applicable standards stated in
the NEMA TS2-2003 Standard. Third party test results shall be made
available for each of the following tests:
(1) Shock pulses of 10g, 10 ms half sine wave
(2) Vibration of 0.5 Grms up to 30 Hz
(3) 300 V positive/negative pulses applied at one pulse per second at
minimum and maximum DC supply voltage
(4) Cold temperature storage at -49°F (-45°C) for 24 hours
(5) High temperature storage at 185°F (85°C) for 24 hours
(6) Low temp, low DC supply voltage at -29.2°F (-34°C) and 10.8
VDC
(7) Low temp, high DC supply voltage at -29.2°F (-34°C) and 26.5
VDC
(8) High temp, high DC supply voltage at 165.2°F (74°C) and 26.5
VDC
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 92
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 92 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
(9) High temp, low DC supply voltage at 165.2°F (74°C) and 10.8
VDC
e. Support
1) The radar detector manufacturer shall provide both training and technical
support services.
f. Documentation
1) Radar detector documentation shall include an instructional training guide
and a comprehensive user guide as well as an installer quick-reference
guide and a user quick-reference guide.
2) The radar detector manufacturer shall supply the following documentation
and test results at the time of the bid submittal:
a) FCC CFR 47 certification (frequency compliance)
b) IED 6100-4-5 class 4 test report (surge)
5. Hybrid Vehicle Detection System and Cable
a. The supplier of the video detection system must supervise the installation and
testing of the video and computer equipment. A factory certified representative
from the supplier must be on site during installation.
b. Install the detector in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations in
order to achieve the detection areas as shown on the Drawings.
c. The detector mounts shall be neat and plumb.
d. Hybrid detection cables shall be installed in the conduit system at the same
time as the other signal cables.
6. Vehicle Loop Detectors (Sawcut)
a. Detector lead-in cables shall be identified as shown on the Drawings (phase 1,
etc.) with permanent marking labels (Panduit type PLM, Thomas and Betts
type 548M standard single marker tie or equivalent) at each ground box, pole
base, and controller.
b. Complete all Work related to the installation of a particular detector loop, with
the exception of the layout task, in the same Work Day. Install loops during
off-peak traffic hours. Loop installation shall not be made during any type of
precipitation.
c. Installation of detector loops shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Lead-
in saw cuts from the street to the pull box shall maintain a maximum separation
from other loops of 12 inches (500 mm) and a minimum separation of 6 inches
(150 mm) from other lead-in saw cuts. The saw cut depth, as specified in the
Drawings shall be consistent, including the entry point into the curb. The
maximum number of wires placed in a single saw slot shall be 4 wires. Each
lead-in shall enter the curb through a separate hole.
d. 3M Loop sealant or approved equivalent shall be used to seal all loop wire
within the roadway.
e. Detector lead-in cables shall be run continuously without splices from the
curbside ground box to the controller.
f. If splices must be made, they shall be solder connected and the splice
connection shall be insulated and waterproofed with 3M DBR-6 Direct Bury
Splice Kits or approved equivalent.
g. Splices at the curbside pull boxes shall be made in the same manner.
h. Splices in detector cables must be pre-approved by the Inspector in writing.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 93
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 93 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
i. In all cases where detector loop lead-ins pass from pavement through a curb to
an existing ground box for a splice point, conduit shall be installed from the
curb entry point up into the ground box.
j. A minimum 1 inch diameter conduit shall be provided from the curb entry
point to the ground box for each loop.
k. All loop wire from the loop in the street to the ground box shall be tightly
twisted a minimum of 5 times per foot (16 times per meter) as it is placed in
the lead-in saw cut.
7. Emergency Vehicle Preemption Equipment and Cable
a. Emergency vehicle preemption system equipment required in the Drawings
will be furnished and installed by the Contractor.
b. Where practical, emergency vehicle preemption receiver units shall be
mounted to a rigid metal arm and banded to the mast arm pole upright on the
intersection corner designated on the Drawings.
c. The Inspector shall determine if the roadway sight line permits this type of
emergency vehicle preemption installation.
d. The emergency vehicle preemption receiver units shall be mounted on the mast
arms for the intersection approaches as designated on the Drawings.
e. Use stainless steel for all external screws, nuts, and locking washers; do not use
any self-tapping screws unless approved by the Engineer or City.
f. All equipment shall be installed and wired in a neat and orderly manner in
conformance with the manufacturers’ instructions.
g. Emergency Preemption Detector Cables shall be installed continuous with no
splices between the Emergency Preemption Detector and the cabinet.
h. All connections from the Emergency Preemption Phase Selector to the cabinet
wiring shall be made at the termination panel. The termination panel shall have
AC+ Lights, AC-, and a switched logic ground. The switched logic ground
feeds all the pre-empt inputs to the Emergency Preemption Phase Selector.
When switched off by the pre-emption disconnect switch, the traffic controller
shall not be affected by pre-empt calls from the optical pre-emption system. A
minimum of two test buttons shall be provided. If there are more than two pre-
empt runs, a button for each shall be installed. A chart or print out, indicating
the program steps and settings shall be provided along with the revised cabinet
wiring diagrams.
8. Battery Back-up (BBU) System for Signal Cabinets
a. Mount the BBU system as shown in the plans.
9. Multi-Conductor Cable
a. Cables shall be installed in conduit unless indicated as an "overhead" cable run.
1) All conduits must be in accordance with Section 26 05 33.
2) Conduit must be continuous, reasonably dry, completely free of debris, and
without sharp projections, edges, or short bends.
b. If required by the Inspector, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the conduit is
dry and free of debris by pulling a swab and/or mandrel through the conduit.
The conductors shall be installed in a manner so as to ensure against harmful
stretching of the conductors or damage to the insulation.
c. Installation methods shall conform to the recommendations of the cable
manufacturer.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 94
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 94 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
d. The Contractor shall furnish, at the request of the Traffic Management
Manager or designee a copy of the manufacturer's recommendations, which
shall include methods of attaching pull cable, pulling tension per conductor
size and per radius of conduit bend, and the type of lubricant to be used.
e. All cables in a given conduit run shall be pulled at the same time and the
conductors shall be assembled to form 1 loop in such a manner that the pulling
tension is equally distributed to all the cables.
f. Long, hard pulls will necessitate the use of pulling eyes.
g. For short runs, the cables may be gripped directly by the conductors by
forming them into a loop to which the pull wire or rope can be attached.
h. The insulation on each conductor shall be removed before the loop is formed.
i. The method used will depend on the anticipated maximum pulling tension in
each case.
j. In existing conduit where new cables are to replace existing cables, the existing
cables may be used to pull in the new cables.
k. At locations where new cables are to be added to existing cable runs, the
existing cables shall first be pulled out, the new cables are to be added to the
existing cables to form 1 cable pull (no slipping if any wires).
l. Installation and removal shall be done in such a way as to prevent damage to
the existing and/or new cables.
m. In the event of damage, the Contractor shall bear the responsibility of providing
the material and labor for replacement of defective cables at no extra cost to the
City.
n. All conduit runs shall be measured accurately and precisely for determining
cable lengths to be installed.
o. A conduit run measurements shall take place in the presence of the Inspector.
p. The Inspector shall record all cable measurements and include the distances on
an as-built drawing.
q. In locations where new cables are to replace existing cables, the Contractor
may use the removed cables as a measuring device to determine the lengths of
the new cables to be installed.
r. However, this does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to record
accurate measurements of all cable lengths.
s. The manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions shall not be
exceeded under any circumstances.
t. If so required by the Inspector, the Contractor shall insert a dynamometer in the
pull wire as the cables are being pulled into the conduit to demonstrate that the
maximum tensions are not being exceeded.
u. The cable shall be fed freely off the reel into the conduit without making a
reverse curve.
v. At the pulling end, the pull wire and cables shall be drawn from the conduit in
direct line with the conduit.
w. Sheaves or other suitable devices shall be used as required to reduce any
hazards to the cable during installation.
x. The cables shall be adequately lubricated to reduce friction and further
minimize possible damage.
1) Such lubricants shall not be the grease or oil type used on lead sheathed
cables, but shall be 1 of several commercially available wire pulling
compounds that are suitable for PVC sheathed cables.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 95
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 95 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
2) They shall consist of soap, talc, mica, or similar materials and shall be
designed to have no deleterious effect on the cables being used.
y. Cables shall be neatly trained to their destinations.
z. The Contractor shall adhere to the cable manufacturer's recommended values
for the minimum bending radii to which cables may be bent for permanent
training during installation.
1) These limits do not apply to conduit bends, sheaves, or other curved
surfaces around which these cables may be pulled under tension while
being installed.
2) Larger radius bends are required for such conditions.
aa. Wire and Cable
1) All wire and cable shall conform to the requirements shown in the
Drawings, except wire and cable specifically covered by other Items of this
Contract.
bb. Controller Cabinet Wiring
1) Wiring for the controller cabinet shall consist of connecting (1) signal
wires, (2) loop detector wires, (3) power wires, (4) ground wires, and (5)
pedestrian push button wires to their respective terminals in the cabinet.
2) In the controller cabinet, stranded signal conductors from the field shall be
stripped back and a solderless terminal connector (spade lug) shall be
attached by means of a crimping tool.
3) These terminal Connectors shall be inserted under the binder head screw
and tightened securely.
4) Other wiring for the controller shall be completed as shown on the wiring
diagrams and in the instructions furnished with the controller by the
manufacturer.
5) All field wiring in cabinets shall be neatly installed. Incoming cables shall
be trained to their destination and neatly laced together.
a) All spare wires shall be trimmed and neatly coiled with the ends taped.
b) Detector lead-in cables shall have their insulation jackets removed
from their terminal strip connection to the bottom of the cabinet.
6) Pedestrian push buttons shall have a ground wire that is completely
isolated and independent from all other ground wires.
a) This wire shall be connected to the designated terminal in the
controller cabinet.
b) A pedestrian isolation board shall be in place.
cc. Signal Head Wiring
1) No splicing of cable shall be allowed.
2) Conductors shall run as follows:
a) An unbroken 20-conductor cable and 1 bare #8 shall run from the
controller cabinet to each pole pier.
b) An unbroken 7 conductor, #14 AWG (or larger) cable shall run from
the signal pole base to each 5-section or 4-section signal head; an
unbroken 5 conductor, #14 AWG cable to each other 3-section; an
unbroken 4 conductor, #14 AWG cable to each pedestrian signal head.
3 conductor, #14 AWG (or larger) shall run to each pedestrian push
button or APS unit.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 96
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 96 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
c) Each cable shall be identified as referenced on the pole wiring detail
sheet provided in the Drawings with permanent marking labels
(Panduit type PLM standard single marker tie, Thomas and Betts type
548M or equivalent) at each ground box, pole base and controller.
dd. Luminaire Wiring
1) 2 #8 cables shall run from service disconnect in parallel around the
intersection as on the Drawings.
2) Luminaire wiring connection may be made in the nearest ground box to the
traffic signal pole; such connection shall be placed in a water tight seal.
a) If more than 3 wires are splice together in the traffic signal cabinet then
a Kearney connector (or approved equivalent) shall be used as
required.
3) Run 2 #8 cables from terminal panel in signal pole to luminaire.
ee. Terminals
1) The ends of all stranded wires from the controller cabinet and from the
signal heads shall be twisted at least 3 turns and wire nut applied in the
base of the signal structure.
ff. Identification of Signal Wires and Cables
1) IMSA color coded signal cable shall be used for all signal systems.
a) Colors shall be continuous from the point of origin to the point of
termination.
2) Each signal cable, detector lead-in cable and communication cable shall be
designated with permanent marking labels or (Panduit type PLM, Thomas
and Betta type 548M standard single marker type or equivalent) and color
coded tape at each pull box and in the controller cabinet.
10. Power Lead-in Cable
a. Perform work in accordance with the details shown on the plans.
11. Ground Conductors
a. Perform work in accordance with the details shown on the plans.
12. Ground Rod
a. Properly install and connect a ground rod for each controller cabinet, power
drop and signal pole pier to reduce any extraneous voltage to a safe level.
b. The ground rod shall be located so as to minimize the length of the grounding-
conductor run.
c. For pole mounted cabinets a grounding rod and grounding conductor shall be
installed at the nearest foundation or ground box.
d. All grounding circuits shall be substantial and permanent and shall be
electrically continuous with an ohms-to-ground resistance not to exceed 10
ohms when tested by volt-ohm-meter.
e. UFER grounding shall be used for illumination poles.
f. Grounding Connectors and Electrodes
1) When the location precludes driving a single ground rod to a depth of 8
feet (2.4 m), or when a multiple ground rod matrix is used to obtain the
required resistance to ground, ground rods shall be spaced at least 6 feet
apart and bonded by a minimum No. 6 AWG copper wire.
2) Connection of grounding circuits to grounding electrodes shall be by devices
which will ensure a positive, fail-safe grip between the conductor and the
electrode (such as lugs or pressure connectors).
a) No splice joint will be permitted in the grounding conductor.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 97
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 97 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
3) Each grounding rod shall be driven into the ground to a depth sufficient to
provide the required resistance (10 ohms) between electrodes and ground.
13. Ground Boxes
a. Use established industry and utility safety practices when installing or
removing ground boxes located near underground utilities. Consult with the
appropriate utility company before beginning work.
b. Fabricate and install ground boxes in accordance with the details, dimensions,
and requirements shown on the plans. Install ground box to approved line and
grade.
c. Lube bolts, clean out cover rim, and clean ground box inside and out prior to
final inspection.
d. Removal
1) Remove existing ground boxes and concrete aprons to at least 6 in. below
the conduit level. Uncover conduit to a sufficient distance so that 90 degree
bends can be removed and conduit reconnected. Clean the conduit in
accordance with Item 618, “Conduit.” Replace conduit within 5 ft. of the
ground box. Remove old conductors and install new conductors as shown
on the plans. Backfill area with material equal in composition and density
to the surrounding area. Replace surfacing material with similar material to
an equivalent condition.
14. Traffic Signal Structures
a. The Contractor shall install all traffic signal structures in accordance with the
Drawings.
1) Deviation from the Drawings because of physical obstructions, such as
overhead utilities or in appropriate mast arm length to fit a relocated
foundation, shall be worked out with the Inspector and approved prior to
installation.
2) Stake the traffic signal pole locations for verification by the City.
b. Poles shall have nuts on top and bottom of the pole base plate.
1) Anchor bolts for mast arm signal poles shall be set so that 2 are in tension
and 2 are in compression.
2) The exposed length of the anchor bolt between the top of the foundation
and the bottom of the leveling nut should not exceed one bolt diameter.
c. The traffic signal pole heights and mast arm lengths shown on the Drawings
and in the material summary are to be used for bidding purposes only.
d. Prior to fabrication, the Contractor, in cooperation with the Inspector, shall
make field measurements to determine the actual pole height necessary to
ensure a vertical clearance of 17 feet minimum and 19 feet maximum from the
roadway surface to the bottom of the lowest point on the signal head assembly
or mast arm and to determine the mast arm lengths required to mount the traffic
signal heads over the traffic lanes.
1) The masts arms shall be straight and level in the area where the signal
heads are attached.
2) These field measurements and evaluations shall be determined from the
actual field location of the pole foundations, considering all above and
below ground utilities and the existing roadway elevations and lane widths.
e. Transformer bases for pedestal poles shall be leveled and tightly secured to the
foundation before the structure is placed on the base.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 98
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 98 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
1) If shims are required for leveling, total shim height shall not exceed 1/2
inches.
2) Foundation anchor bolts shall extend a minimum of 1 inch through each
nut in the base.
f. Except as modified herein, erection of traffic signal structures shall be in
accordance with the applicable Specifications and standards of the AISC
Manual of Steel Construction.
1) Erecting equipment shall be suitable for the Work and shall be in proper
working condition.
2) Where parts cannot be assembled or fitted properly as a result of errors in
fabrication or deformation due to handling or transportation shall be
reported immediately to the Inspector.
3) Straightening of plates and angles or other shapes shall be done by
approval of the manufacturer.
4) No corrections will be allowed that will void the manufacturer's warranty.
5) A letter from the manufacturer approving the corrections shall be required
or the material may be rejected by the Inspector.
g. Use established industry and utility safety practices when working near
underground or overhead utilities. Consult with the appropriate utility
company before beginning such work.
h. Erect structures after foundation concrete has attained its design strength.
i. The steel structure frame shall be lifted as shown in the manufacturer's
specifications and all match marking shall be followed.
1) Temporary bracing shall be used wherever necessary to support all loads to
which the structure may be subjected, including equipment, operation, and
material loading.
2) Such bracing shall be left in place as long as may be required for safety.
3) The various members, after being assembled, shall be aligned and adjusted
accurately before being fastened.
4) Fastening of splices on compression members shall be done after the
abutting surfaces have been brought completely into contact.
5) No welding or bolting shall be done until the structures have been properly
aligned.
j. Bearing surfaces and surfaces which will be in permanent contact with each
other shall be cleaned before the members are assembled.
1) Bearing plates shall be set in exact position and shall have a full and even
bearing upon the concrete.
2) As erection progresses, the Work shall be bolted to take care of all dead
load, wind and erection stresses.
3) All erection bolts used in welded construction may be tightened securely
and left in place.
4) If removed, the holes shall be filled with plug welds.
k. Field bolting shall be in accordance with the requirements specified for shop
fabrication.
1) Untrue holes shall be corrected by reaming.
2) Where the surface of a bolted part has a slope of more than 1:20, a beveled
washer shall be used to compensate for the lack of parallelism.
3) Bolt heads and nuts shall be drawn tight against the Work with a suitable
wrench not less than 15 inches long.
4) Bolt heads shall be tapped with a hammer while the nut is being tightened.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 99
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 99 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
l. Field Painting of Structures
1) Surfaces where the shop coat of paint has been damaged shall be retouched
after installation.
a) The cleaning, pretreatment, and priming of welds and the areas
adjacent thereto shall be done promptly after the acceptance of the
weld.
b) Care shall be taken to properly mask signals heads, signs, pedestrian
pushbuttons and their mounting hardware to keep paint from splashing
onto these components.
c) Masking shall be removed after completion of the painting process.
d) A sufficient number of paint coatings shall be applied to each structure
to result in a uniform finish once completed.
e) All structures shall be air blasted using high pressure air to remove
peeled paint and dust prior to application of new paint.
m. Bolted parts shall fit solidly together when assembled and shall not be
separated by gaskets or any other interposed compressible material.
1) When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the bolt
heads, nuts, or washers, shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale, and
shall also be free of burrs, dirt, and other foreign material that would
prevent solid seating of the parts.
2) Each fastener shall be tightened to at least the minimum bolt tension as
recommended by the pole manufacturer using ASTM A325 or A490 bolts
for the size of fastener used.
3) Threaded bolts shall be tightened with properly calibrated wrenches or by
the "turn-of-nut" method.
4) Bolts may be installed without hardened washers when tightening takes
place by the "turn-of-bolt" method. Any bolt tightened by the calibrated
wrench method (or by torque control) shall have a hardened washer under
the element (nut or bolt head) turned in to a point not closer than 7/8 of the
bolt diameter from the center of the washer.
n. Grouting
1) The Contractor shall perform all Work required to complete the grout work
associated with installing the signal structure and furnish all supplementary
items necessary for its proper installation.
o. Where signal poles and/or mast arms exist on raised foundations that are to be
removed and installed on new foundations, the Contractor shall store these
poles, mast arms, street lights, and wiring until they can be installed on their
new foundations.
p. Vibration dampers
1) Dampers shall be installed using Astro Sign Brac or Signfix Aluminum
Channel or approved equivalent.
q. Signs
1) The Contractor shall furnish, install and relocate existing signs as shown in
the Drawings.
2) Mast-arm signs shall be mounted with Astro-sign Brac or Signfix
aluminum channel or equivalent as approved by the Engineer.
3) Metro street name signs shall be mounted level with the ground as shown
on the City’s Standard Details.
15. Foundations
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 100
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 100 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
a. All foundations shall be staked by the Contractor and approved by the
Inspector prior to excavation.
1) While staking the pole locations, the Contractor, along with the Inspector,
shall be cognizant of pedestrian needs by verifying the location of the push
buttons and the pedestrian heads.
b. Concrete foundations for signal structures shall be located so that the closest
face is a minimum of 3 feet from the face of the nearest vertical curb.
1) Before excavating foundations probe to determine the location of utilities
and structures.
2) Foundations shall be paid for once, however, payment for additional work
due to unforeseen conditions will be negotiated based on number of labor
hours and materials used.
3) Furnish all supplementary items necessary for proper foundation
installation.
c. Excavation for all foundations shall be done in accordance with lines and
depths indicated on the Drawings.
1) All loose material shall be removed from the excavation before concrete is
placed.
2) Any water shall be removed by pumping or bailing.
3) The use of explosives will not be permitted.
d. Foundations shall be constructed to the dimensions shown on the Drawings.
1) The Contractor is required to make certain that the top of the finished
foundation is level and formed.
2) Anchor bolts and conduits shall be held rigidly in place by a template until
the concrete is set.
e. A mechanical vibrator shall be used for compacting and working the concrete.
After the concrete has been placed and the top struck off, it shall be covered
with wet cotton or burlap mats or other appropriate form of curing, for not less
than 96 hours.
f. All bracing and templates for anchor bolts shall remain in place for 96 hours
after the concrete is poured.
1) During that time, the anchor bolts and conduit shall not be subjected to any
applied strain.
g. Backfill shall be tamped with mechanical tamps in 6 inches layers to the
density of the surrounding ground.
1) Where excavation is made in the roadway shoulder, the shoulder shall be
replaced with material equivalent to the original composition.
h. All excavated material, not required for backfill, shall be promptly removed
and disposed of by the Contractor, outside the limits of the Project.
1) The Work Site shall be kept clean and neat at all times.
i. No concrete shall be placed when the atmospheric temperature drops below 40
degrees Fahrenheit (temperature reading taken in the shade away from artificial
heat) unless permission to do so is given by the Inspector.
1) Refer to Section 03 30 00.
j. The City shall supply to the Contractor the controller cabinet anchor bolts and
specific cabinet templates, when the City furnishes the controller cabinet.
k. The cabinet door shall open to the north. Controller face plate shall also face
north. Field terminations shall be done on the south side of the cabinet.
l. Pole anchor bolts shall be aligned to be parallel to the tangent of the street curb
that the pole is intended to serve.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 101
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 101 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
m. Tubing used to form pole foundations shall not be visible and all exposed
concrete shall be finished with vinyl concrete patch mix to provide a smooth
quality finish with all voids filled and no aggregate exposed.
n. The cost of the Work shall be included in the unit bid price for this item.
16. Hardware Signal Pole Paint
a. Requirements for poles and railings
1) Cleaning
a) The entire surface shall be cleaned free of dirt, grime and oils before
applying the primer coat.
b) Use vinegar wash applied with a sponge or cloth over the entire
surface.
2) Sanding
a) Spot sanding may be required in order to remove flaking paint and to
provide a smooth surface.
3) Priming
a) Primer coat shall be applied with a brush or roller.
b) The entire surface shall be covered, even over existing painted or
galvanized surfaces.
c) Spraying is not permissible.
4) Finish coat
a) Finish coat shall be applied with a brush or roller.
b) The entire surface shall be covered, even over existing painted or
galvanized surfaces.
c) Spraying is not permissible.
5) Parking meter housings, luminaire heads, signal heads, photo control eyes,
pedestrian push buttons and sign faces shall be protected for paint splash.
6) Controller cabinets and circuit boxes mounted to poles shall be painted to
match the color of the pole.
7) The ambient temperature shall be 40 degrees Fahrenheit and rising and dry
conditions.
b. Requirements for traffic signal heads
1) Traffic signal heads should be cleaned by wiping it with a damp sponge or
rag to remove all the dust and dirt.
2) Lens and back plate should be masked off.
3) The outside of the traffic signal head should be painted traffic yellow (RAL
1023) and the inside of the lens visors should be painted flat black.
4) The outside of pedestrian signal head should be painted traffic yellow
(RAL 1023).
5) The ambient temperature shall be 40 degrees Fahrenheit and rising and dry
conditions.
17. Signal Controller
a. Each controller cabinet shall be modified for use at a specific intersection in
accordance with the instructions included in the Drawings.
1) Each cabinet shall be prepared and tested for on-the-street use
b. Connect all field wirings to the controller-cabinet assembly.
1) The City will assist in determining how the detector loop lead-in cables are
to be connected in the cabinet.
2) The City will program the controller, the conflict monitor, detector units,
and other equipment in the controller cabinet and turn on the traffic signals.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 102
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 102 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
c. All wiring modifications made in conjunction with preparing the cabinet for
use at a specific intersection shall be documented on the cabinet prints for that
intersection.
18. Roadside Flashing Beacon Assembly
a. Installation
1) Install in locations as shown in Drawings.
2) Stake the pole location for approval by City or Engineer.
3) Install pole, breakaway base, connectors, wiring, signal beacons, sign and
foundation as shown on the Drawings or as directed.
4) Install the flasher control assembly on the electrical service pole.
5) Install watertight breakaway electrical fuse holders in all line and neutral
conductors at breakaway base.
6) Use established industry and utility safety practices to erect assemblies
near overhead or underground utilities.
7) Consult with the appropriate utility company prior to beginning such work.
b. Relocation
1) Disconnect and isolate the electrical power supply prior to removal of the
assembly.
2) Remove existing assembly as directed.
3) Unless otherwise directed, salvage existing components such as sign,
beacons, pole, and base.
4) Repair or replace lost or damaged components as directed.
5) Relocate existing assembly to the location shown on the plans or as
directed.
6) Install existing assembly at new foundations.
7) Remove existing foundations.
8) Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials and dispose of in accordance
with federal, state, and local regulations.
c. Removal
1) Disconnect and isolate existing electrical power supplies prior to removal
of the assembly.
2) Remove existing sign panel, beacons, pole, and base from existing
assembly.
3) Store items to be reused or salvaged without damaging.
4) Store sign panels above the ground in a vertical position at locations shown
on the plans or as directed.
5) Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials and dispose of in accordance
with federal, state, and local regulations.
6) Unless otherwise shown on the plans, remove abandoned foundations,
including steel, to 2 ft. below the finished grade.
7) Backfill with material equal in composition and density to the surrounding
area, and replace any surfacing, such as asphalt pavement or concrete
riprap, with like material to equivalent condition.
19. School Zone Flasher Assembly
a. Installation
1) Install in locations as shown in Drawings.
2) Stake the pole location for approval by City or Engineer.
3) Install pole, breakaway base, connectors, wiring, signal beacons, controller,
modem, sign and foundation as shown on the Drawings or as directed.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 103
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 103 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
4) Install watertight breakaway electrical fuse holders in all line and neutral
conductors at breakaway base.
5) Use established industry and utility safety practices to erect assemblies
near overhead or underground utilities.
6) Consult with the appropriate utility company prior to beginning such work.
b. Relocation
1) Disconnect and isolate the electrical power supply prior to removal of the
assembly.
2) Remove existing assembly as directed.
3) Unless otherwise directed, salvage existing components such as sign,
beacons, pole, and base.
4) Repair or replace lost or damaged components as directed.
5) Relocate existing assembly to the location shown on the plans or as
directed.
6) Install existing assembly at new foundations.
7) Remove existing foundations.
8) Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials and dispose of in accordance
with federal, state, and local regulations.
c. Removal
1) Disconnect and isolate existing electrical power supplies prior to removal
of the assembly.
2) Remove existing sign panel, beacons, pole, and base from existing
assembly.
3) Store items to be reused or salvaged without damaging.
4) Store sign panels above the ground in a vertical position at locations shown
on the plans or as directed.
5) Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials and dispose of in accordance
with federal, state, and local regulations.
6) Unless otherwise shown on the plans, remove abandoned foundations,
including steel, to 2 ft. below the finished grade.
7) Backfill with material equal in composition and density to the surrounding
area, and replace any surfacing, such as asphalt pavement or concrete
riprap, with like material to equivalent condition.
20. Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB) Assembly
a. Installation
1) Install in locations as shown in Drawings.
2) Stake the pole location for approval by City or Engineer.
3) Install pole, breakaway base, connectors, wiring, control panel, solar panel,
battery, light bar, signage, pedestrian push button, and foundation as shown
on the Drawings or as directed.
4) Install watertight breakaway electrical fuse holders in all line and neutral
conductors at breakaway base.
5) Use established industry and utility safety practices to erect assemblies
near overhead or underground utilities.
b. Relocation
1) Disconnect and isolate the solar panels prior to removal of the assembly.
2) Remove existing assembly as directed.
3) Unless otherwise directed, salvage existing components such as sign, light
bar, solar panel, pole, and base.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 104
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 104 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
4) Repair or replace lost or damaged components as directed.
5) Relocate existing assembly to the location shown on the plans or as
directed.
6) Install existing assembly at new foundations.
7) Remove existing foundations.
8) Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials and dispose of in accordance
with federal, state, and local regulations.
c. Removal
1) Disconnect and isolate solar panel prior to removal of the assembly.
2) Remove existing sign panel, light bar, solar panel, pole, and base from
existing assembly.
3) Store items to be reused or salvaged without damaging.
4) Store sign panels above the ground in a vertical position at locations shown
on the plans or as directed.
5) Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials and dispose of in accordance
with federal, state, and local regulations.
6) Unless otherwise shown on the plans, remove abandoned foundations,
including steel, to 2 ft. below the finished grade.
7) Backfill with material equal in composition and density to the surrounding
area, and replace any surfacing, such as asphalt pavement or concrete
riprap, with like material to equivalent condition.
21. Powder Coating Traffic Signal Structures
a. All galvanized exterior surfaces shall be coated with a Urethane or Triglycidyl
Isocyanurate (TGIC) Polyester Powder to a minimum film thickness of 2.0
mils (0.002”).
b. Prior to application, the surfaces to be powder coated shall be mechanically
etched by brush blasting (Ref. SSPC-SP7) and the zinc coated substrate
preheated to 450 degrees for a minimum of one hour in a gas fired convection
oven.
c. The coating shall be electrostatically applied and cured in a gas fired
convection oven by heating the zinc coated substrate to a minimum of 350
degrees Fahrenheit and a maximum of 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
d. The thermosetting powder resin shall provide both intercoat as well as substrate
fusion adhesion that meets 5A or 5B classifications of ASTM D3359.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests and Inspections
1. Initial testing of all materials, construction items, or products incorporated in the
Work will be performed at the direction of the City.
a. Embankment construction shall conform to 31 24 00.
b. All backfill of structures shall conform to 33 05 10.
c. Excavation shall conform to 31 23 16.
2. The failure to require tests of materials by the Inspector shall in no way relieves the
Contractor of his responsibility of furnishing materials conforming to these
Specifications.
3. Tests, unless otherwise specified, shall be made in accordance with the latest methods
of the ASTM or other approved test methods.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 105
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 105 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
a. The Contractor shall provide such facilities, as the Inspector may require, for
the collecting and forwarding of samples and shall not use the materials
represented by the samples until tests have been made.
b. The Contractor shall furnish adequate samples without charge.
4. Vehicle detector loops
a. Prior to termination of the loop lead-in in the controller cabinet an installation
test shall be made by applying not less than 500 volts DC to the completed
detector loop.
1) A minimum resistance of 1 megohm shall be obtained by use of a meter.
b. After the above tests are completed and the lead-in cable has been terminated in
the cabinet, the Contractor shall assist the Inspector in determining the loop
inductance of each loop detector.
1) A detector loop analyzer shall be used to determine the total inductance of
the loop in the pavement and its associated lead-in cable as well as to
determine the percentage shift in loop inductance for various size vehicles
that actuate the detector.
5. Signal cables
a. The Traffic Management Manager or designee may require that all cables shall
be checked for insulation resistance upon installation and prior to termination.
The tests shall be made with a test set operating at a minimum of 500 volts DC
applied to the conductors.
b. Each conductor in the multi-conductor signal cables shall be tested for insulation
resistance relative to each other and to the outer covering of the cable. The
minimum acceptance value for insulation resistance shall be 1 megohm.
6. Controller cabinet
a. If the controller cabinet is to be supplied by the Contractor for this Project, the
cabinet shall be tested at a facility located within the Dallas/Fort Worth area.
b. The Contractor shall notify the Inspector or his representative a minimum of 3
Working Days prior to beginning the test period of his intent to test a cabinet or
group of cabinets.
c. At this point, the City may schedule an inspection team and notify the Contractor
of the earliest date and time the team can visit.
d. Each cabinet shall be tested with a controller unit for a minimum of 24 continuous
hours.
1) The cabinet test will include conflict monitor functions, detector unit
function and load switch operation for conformance with cabinet hardware
specifications, etc.
2) The cabinet must successfully pass all items otherwise the test is restarted
for another 24 hour period.
B. Non-Conforming Work
1. In the event that a material, construction item, product incorporated in the Work,
embankment, backfill, excavation or any other item tested, fails to satisfy the
minimum requirements of the initial test described above, appropriate prove-out tests
shall be made as directed by the Inspector to determine the extent of the failure and to
verify that corrective measures have brought the Item up to Specification
requirements.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 106
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 106 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
a. The cost of all testing necessary to determine the extent of the failure and the
adequacy of the corrective measures shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
3.5 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Inspector to have a qualified technician on the
Site when the traffic signal is placed into operation.
B. During the 30 day test period, the contractor shall be responsible for any trouble calls and
shall make all necessary action to repair the problem. The City will be responsible for
traffic signal timing operation only.
C. The Contractor shall provide a local telephone number (not subject to frequent changes)
where trouble calls are to be received on a 24-hour basis.
D. The Contractor's response time to reported calls shall be within a reasonable travel time,
but not more than 2 hours maximum.
E. Appropriate repairs shall be made within reasonable time.
1. If, after further diagnosing the problem, the qualified technician determines the
problem is in the equipment supplied by others, the Contractor shall notify the
Inspector.
F. 30 days test period will restart after completing each signal failure due to workmanship
G. No extra compensation will be allowed for fulfilling the requirements stated above.
3.6 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Prior to final acceptance by the City, the Contractor is responsible for removal,
replacement and reinstallation of any damaged material at the Contractor's expense.
B. Whenever the Work provided for and contemplated under the Contract has been found by
the Inspector to be completed to his / her satisfaction on any individual signalized
intersection, or interconnected system of signalized intersections, as shown in the
Drawings, final cleaning up of said signalized intersection has been performed and the
traffic signal equipment supplied by the or has operated continuously for a minimum of 30
days in a satisfactory manner, the Contractor will be released from further maintenance on
that particular intersection.
1. Such partial acceptance will be made in writing and shall in no way void or alter
any terms of the Contract.
2. If equipment fails, a new 30-day test period will start when the equipment has been
repaired or replaced.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Prevent any property damage to property owner's poles, fences, landscaping,
mailboxes, etc., and repair any damages.
B. Provide access to all driveways during construction.
C. Protect all underground and overhead utilities, including sprinkler systems, and repair any
damages.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 10 - 107
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 107 of 107
CITY OF FORT WORTH Insert Project Name
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. XXXXX
Revised October 12, 2015
3.8 MAINTENANCE
A. While performing Work under this Contract, the Contractor bears the sole risk of loss
for damages to or destruction of any traffic signal equipment or appurtenances, on
equipment that was not to be replaced or installed under this Contract, but which was
damaged or destroyed through the fault or negligent acts of the Contractor.
B. The Contractor shall replace such damaged or destroyed equipment, etc., at no cost to
the City, regardless of whether or not the damaged or destroyed equipment, etc., was a
part of this Contract or any warranties under this Contract.
C. The Contractor's responsibility shall cease under this paragraph upon written
acceptance of an intersection by the City.
D. The Contractor's responsibility for full operation and maintenance of all traffic signal
equipment shall begin when he starts any type of Work which effects active intersection
control at the first intersection and shall extend through the period of final Project
acceptance of each intersection.
E. This maintenance responsibility includes existing controllers/masters, existing
interconnect and cabling systems, existing signal indications, existing vehicle detectors,
new controllers/masters, new signal hardware, new cabling systems, and other hardware
elements which are considered part of either the existing or the new traffic signal system.
F. It is recognized that the City may continue to make a first response to any trouble call.
Action on such response will, however, be limited to placing the intersection on flash,
replacing load switches or detector amplifiers, erecting temporary control devices,
requesting immediate traffic control by uniformed police officer, or other such action
deemed necessary to provide a safe operation.
1. Such action will in no way relieve the Contractor of his operation and maintenance
responsibility.
G. The Contractor shall be required to notify the Inspector or Traffic Management Division at
least 24 hours in advance of any planned controlled change-outs or any other operational
procedures.
H. Battery Back-up System
1. The BBU shall provide voltmeter standard probe input-jacks (+) and (-) to read the
exact battery voltage drop at the inverter input.
2. The BBS shall be equipped with both Input and Output AC circuit breakers, and
with either a DC circuit breaker or fused battery harness.
3. All components, terminations, terminal blocks, relays, etc. shall be fully accessible.
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
11/19/2015 S. Arnold Various revisions and additions
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
0 | Page
ATTACHMENT A
CITY OF FORT WORTH
ADVANCE
TRANSPORTATION
CONTROLLER CABINET
(ATCC) SPECIFICATIONS
Page 1 of 12
Contents
ATC CABINET SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................................... 3
ATC Cabinet Requirements ....................................................................................................................... 3
Cabinet Housings ...................................................................................................................................... 3
Housing Package ................................................................................................................................... 3
Housing Construction ............................................................................................................................ 3
Material Thickness ................................................................................................................................ 3
Welds .................................................................................................................................................... 3
Aluminum Surface Protection ............................................................................................................... 4
Anti‐Graffiti Paint .................................................................................................................................. 4
Enclosure Door Frames and Door Seals ................................................................................................ 4
Gasketing .............................................................................................................................................. 4
Cage Mounting Supports ...................................................................................................................... 4
Lifting Eyes and Exterior Bolt Heads ..................................................................................................... 4
Door Latches and Locks ......................................................................................................................... 4
Latch/Lock Mechanism ......................................................................................................................... 5
Lock & Keys ........................................................................................................................................... 5
Cam ....................................................................................................................................................... 5
Housing Ventilation ............................................................................................................................... 5
Intake & Filter ....................................................................................................................................... 5
Fan ......................................................................................................................................................... 5
Hinges .................................................................................................................................................... 5
Door Catches ......................................................................................................................................... 6
Police Panel ........................................................................................................................................... 6
Rack Cage .............................................................................................................................................. 6
Clearance between Rails ....................................................................................................................... 6
Cage Connection ................................................................................................................................... 6
Cage Location ........................................................................................................................................ 6
ATC Cabinet Assemblies ............................................................................................................................ 6
General .................................................................................................................................................. 6
Output Assembly (16‐Channel) ............................................................................................................. 7
Output Assembly (32‐Channel) ............................................................................................................. 7
Field Output Termination Assembly (16‐Channel) ............................................................................... 7
Input Assembly (24‐Channel) ................................................................................................................ 7
Input Assembly (48‐Channel) ................................................................................................................ 7
Service Assembly (1‐Flasher) ................................................................................................................ 8
Service Assembly (2‐Flasher) ................................................................................................................ 8
SB1/SB2 and DC Power Bus .................................................................................................................. 8
AC Clean Power Bus .............................................................................................................................. 8
ATC Cabinet Components ........................................................................................................................ 9
Model 2202‐HV Universal High‐Density Switch Pack / Flasher Units (HDSP‐FU) ................................. 9
Model 2212‐HV Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMUip) ................................................................................... 9
Model 2220 Auxiliary Display Unit (ADU) ............................................................................................. 9
Model 2218 Serial Interface Unit (SIU2) ............................................................................................. 10
Model 2216 Cabinet Power Supply (CPS) ........................................................................................... 10
Model 2205 High‐Density Flash Transfer Relay (HDFTR) .................................................................... 10
Main Contactor ................................................................................................................................... 10
Page 2 of 12
ATCC CABINET CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE ................................................................................................ 11
General .................................................................................................................................................... 11
Output Assembly (16‐Channel): .......................................................................................................... 12
Output Assembly (32‐Channel): .......................................................................................................... 12
Field Output Termination Assembly (16‐Channel): ............................................................................ 12
Input Assembly (24‐Channel): ............................................................................................................. 12
Page 3 of 12
ATC CABINET SPECIFICATIONS
This specification describes the Advanced Transportation Controller Cabinet (ATCC) for City of Fort
Worth. The City has chosen to stop procurement of 170 cabinets any more, and instead will be procure
and implement new ATC cabinets from here on after.
As a part of the ATC Cabinet, the intention is to standardize on internal Assemblies regardless of the
specific housing configuration of the ATC Cabinet chosen. The common parts shall include: Service
Assembly (SA), Input Assembly (IA), Output Assembly (OA), AC Clean Power Bus, combo SB1/SB2 and
DC Power Bus, Field Input Termination Assembly (FITA), and Field Output Termination Assembly
(FOTA). The housing and the cage(s) shall depend on the ATC Cabinet configuration. The ATC Cabinet
Inspection and Testing Requirement shall comply with the Electrical, Environmental and Testing
Requirements of the ITS Cabinet Standard v01.02.17b.
ATC Cabinet Requirements
This section describes the functional and physical requirements of the corresponding ATC Cabinets.
Cabinet Housings
Housing Package
The housings shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Enclosure & Doors
• Gasketing
• Lifting Eyes & External Bolt Heads
• Door Latches & Locks
• Ventilation
• Cage Supports & Mounting
• Door Hinges & Catches
• Police Panel
• Aluminum Surfaces
Housing Construction
The housing shall be rainproof. It shall have front and rear doors, each equipped with a lock and handle.
The enclosure top shall be crowned to prevent standing water.
Material Thickness
The enclosure, doors, lifting eyes, gasket channels, police panel door, spacer supports and all supports
welded to the enclosure and doors shall be fabricated of 0.125 inch minimum thickness aluminum sheet.
The filter shell, filter through, fan support and police panel enclosure shall be fabricated of 0.080 inch
minimum thickness aluminum sheet. The spacer supports shall have the option to use 0.059 inch
minimum stainless steel sheet.
Welds
All exterior seams for enclosure and doors shall be continuously welded and shall be smooth. All edges
shall be filled to a radius of 0.03125 inch minimum. Exterior cabinet welds shall be done by gas Tungsten
arc TIG process only. ER5356 aluminum alloy bare welding electrodes conforming to AWS A5.10
Page 4 of 12
requirements shall be used for welding on aluminum. Procedures, welders and welding operators shall
conform to the requirements and practices in AWS B3.0 and C5.6 for aluminum. Internal cabinet welds
shall be done by gas metal arc MIG or gas Tungsten arc TIG process.
Aluminum Surface Protection
The aluminum surface protection shall be either MILL FINISH or ANTI-GRAFFITI Paint.
Anti‐Graffiti Paint
The aluminum surface shall be cleaned, etched and rinsed. The cleaning and etching procedure shall be
to immerse in inhabited alkaline cleaner at 71 degrees C for five minutes (Oakite 61A, Diversey 909 or
equivalent in mix of the 6 to 8 ounces per gallon to distilled water). Rinse in cold water. Etch in a sodium
solution at 66 degrees C for 5 minutes 90.5 ounce sodium fluoride plus 5 ounces of sodium hydroxide mix
per gallon to distilled water. Rinse in cold water.
Desmut in a 50% by volume nitric acid solution at 20 degrees C for 2 minutes. Rinse in cold water. Dry
surfaces by preheating in an oven for 15 minutes at 400 degrees F. Remove and coat the surfaces using
TCI Wheel Silver # 9811- 0110 with a minimum film build of not more than 2 mils total thickness. Place
back into preheated oven for 10 minutes minimum at 360 degrees F to gel the base coat. Remove and
coat the surfaces using TCI Anti-graffiti Clear # 9810-0231. Place back into oven and fully cure at 380
degrees F for 40 minutes.
Enclosure Door Frames and Door Seals
The enclosure door frames shall be double-flanged out on all four sides and shall have strikers to hold
tension on, and to form a firm seal between, the door gasketing and the frame. The dimension between
the door edge and the enclosure external surface when the door is closed and locked shall be 0.156 inch
(+/-0.08 inches).
Gasketing
Gasketing shall be provided on all door openings and shall be dust-tight. Gaskets shall be 0.25 inches
minimum thickness closed cell neoprene or silicone (BOYD R- 108480 or equal) and shall be
permanently bonded to the metal. A gasket top and side channels shall be provided to support the top
gasket on the door to prevent gasket gravitational fatigue.
Cage Mounting Supports
Cage mounting supports shall be provided on either side, level with the bottom edge of the door opening,
for horizontal support and bolt attachment; side cage supports provided for the bracket cage supports;
and bracket cage support attachments.
Lifting Eyes and Exterior Bolt Heads
The housing shall be provided with 2 lifting eyes for placing the cabinet on its foundation. Each eye
opening shall have a minimum diameter of 0.75 inch. Each eye shall be able to support the weight load of
1000 lbs. All bolt heads shall be tamperproof type.
Door Latches and Locks
The latching handles shall have provision for padlocking in the closed position. Each handle shall be 0.75
inch minimum diameter stainless steel with a minimum of 0.50 inch shank. The padlocking attachment
shall be placed at 4 inch from the handle shank center. An additional 4 inch minimum gripping length shall
be provided.
Page 5 of 12
Latch/Lock Mechanism
The latching mechanism shall be a three-point draw roller type. The pushrods shall be turned edgewise at
the outward supports and have a cross section of 0.25 inch thick by 0.75 inch wide minimum. Rollers
shall have a minimum diameter of 0.875 inch with nylon wheels and steel ball bearings. When the door is
closed and latched, the door shall be locked. The lock and lock support shall be rigidly mounted on the
door. The lock shall be mounted in the upper quadrant, above the handle when in its full open position. In
the locked position, the bolt throw shall extend a minimum of 0.25 inch (+/-0.03125 inches) into the latch
cam area. A seal shall be provided to prevent dust or water entry through the lock opening.
Lock & Keys
The locks shall be Corbin 2 type. One key shall be supplied with each lock. The keys shall be removable
in the locked position only. The locks shall have rectangular, spacing loaded bolts.
The bolt shall have a 0.281 inch throw and shall be 0.75 inch wide by 0.375 inch thick.
Tolerance is 0.035 inch. A swing away cover shall be placed over the key entrance to protect the lock
mechanism.
Cam
The center latch cam shall be fabricated of a minimum thickness of 0.188 inch aluminum, or 11 gauge
steel. The bolt surface shall horizontally cover the cam thickness. The cam shall be structured to only
allow the door to open when the handle is moved toward the center of the door.
Housing Ventilation
Housing ventilation shall include intake, exhaust, filtration, and continuous running fan assembly or a
thermostat controlled fan.
Intake & Filter
The louvered vent depth shall be a maximum of 0.25 inch. A removable and reusable air filter shall be
housed behind the door vents. The filter filtration area shall cover the vent opening area.
A filter shell shall be provided that fits over the filter providing mechanical support for the filter.
This shell shall be louvered to direct the incoming air downward. The shell sides and top shall be bent
over a minimum of 0.25 inch to house the filter. The filter resident in its shell shall be held firmly in place
with a bottom trough and spring loaded upper clamp. No incoming air shall bypass the filter. The bottom
filter shall be formed into a waterproof sump with drain holes to the outside housing. The filter shall be 16
inch wide by 12 inch high by 0.875 inch thick. The filter shall be an ECO-AIR Product E35S or equal. The
intake (including filter with shell) and exhaust areas shall pass a minimum of 60 cubic feet of air per
minute for housing #1; 120 cubic feet of air per minute for Housing #3; and 26 cubic feet of air per minute
for housing #2.
Fan
Each electric fan shall be equipped with ball or roller bearings and shall have a minimum capacity of 100
cubic feet of free air delivery per minute. The fan shall be mounted within the housing and protected with
a finger guard. The fan should be powered from 120 Vac.
Hinges
Stainless steel hinges (two bolts per leaf) shall be provided to bolt the enclosure to the doors.
Housing #1 and housing #3 shall have four hinges per door, and housing #2 shall have three hinges per
door. Each hinge shall be 3.5 inch minimum length and have a fixed pin. The pin ends shall be welded to
hinge and ground smooth. The pins and bolts shall be covered by the door edge and not accessible when
the door is closed. A ground strap between the door and the main cabinet housing shall be required when
120 VAC components are mounted on the door.
Page 6 of 12
Door Catches
Front and rear doors shall be provided with catches to hold the door open at both 90 and 165 (+/-
10) Degrees. The catch minimum diameter shall be 0.375 inch aluminum rods. The catches must be
capable of holding the door open at 90 degrees in a 60 mph wind acting at an angle perpendicular to the
plane of the door.
Police Panel
A police panel assembly shall be provided to allow limited control access. The panel door shall be
equipped with a lock and master police key. The front and back of the panel shall be enclosed with a rigid
metal covering so that no parts having live voltage are exposed. The panel assembly shall have a drain to
prevent water from collecting within the assembly. The drain shall be channeled to the outside. The series
35X cabinets shall have one switch provided and labeled "SIGNALS ON - OFF” and one switch provided
and labeled "FLASH / AUTO". The MANUAL CONTROL ENABLE ON-OFF switch and a receptacle for
the INTERVAL ADVANCE cord shall be provided. An INTERVAL ADVANCE cord, six feet in length, shall
be provided.
Rack Cage
A standard rack cage shall be installed inside the housing for mounting of the ATC Controller unit and
cabinet assemblies. The EIA rack portion of the cage shall consist of four continuous, adjustable
equipment mounting angles. The mounting angle nominal thickness shall be 11- gauge plated steel. The
mounting angles shall be tapped with 10-32 threads with EIA universal spacing. The mounting angle shall
comply with standard EIA-310-B and shall be supported at the top and bottom by either welded or bolted
support angles to form a cage. The mounting angles shall provide holes to mount the side panels.
Clearance between Rails
Clearance between rails for mounting assemblies shall be 17.75 inch.
Cage Connection
The cage shall be bolted to the cabinet at four points via the housing cage supports and four points via
associated spacer brackets (top and bottom).
Cage Location
The cage(s) shall be centered within the cabinet door opening(s).
ATC Cabinet Assemblies
General
This document describes the functional and physical requirements of the ATC Cabinet. The ATC Cabinet
shall adhere to the following requirements:
The Assemblies shall be completely removable from or installable in the ATC Cabinet cage
without removing any other equipment and using only a standard slotted or Phillips screwdriver.
All equipment in the ATC Cabinet shall be clearly and permanently labeled.
The marker strips shall be made of material that can be easily and legibly written on using a
pencil or ballpoint pen. Marker strips shall be located immediately below the item they are to
identify and must be clearly visible with the items installed.
Guides (top and bottom) shall be provided for assembly plug-in units. The guides shall begin 0.50
inch from the assembly front panel face.
High-voltage components (over 50 V) shall not be exposed per NEC.
Page 7 of 12
All fuses, circuit breakers, switches (except police panel switches) and indicators shall be readily
visible and accessible when the ATC Cabinet front door is open.
When servicing the ATC Cabinet the Output Assembly, Input Assembly, Cabinet Power Supply,
and Controller shall be replaceable without putting the intersection into a dark condition, i.e. Flash
mode shall be maintained.
Wire raceway shall be integrated as part of the ATC Cabinet allowing for neat internal and field
wiring.
Output Assembly 24VDC bypass switch shall provide a momentary 24VDC voltage to the HDSPs
during flash mode for troubleshooting purposes.
All Assemblies shall be modular with pluggable cabling.
Replacing the ATC Cabinet fan shall not require any tool.
Output Assembly (16‐Channel)
The Output Assembly shall be an EIA-310B rack mounted assembly. The Output Assembly shall house
eight Model 2202-HV Universal High-Density Switch Pack / Flasher Units (HDSP-FU) providing forty eight
load circuits.
One resident Model 2218 Serial Interface Unit (SIU2) shall provide interface and control.
The Output Assembly shall house a CMUip-2212-HV Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMUip), Main Contactor, Stop
Time Switch, Flash / Auto Switch, four Circuit Breakers and Momentary 24VDC Bypass Switch.
Output Assembly (32‐Channel)
The Output Assembly shall be an EIA‐310B rack mounted assembly. The Output Assembly shall house
sixteen Model 2202‐HV Universal High‐Density Switch Pack / Flasher Units (HDSP‐FU) providing ninety
six load circuits.
Two resident Model 2218 Serial Interface Units (SIU2) shall provide interface and control.
The Output Assembly shall house a CMUip-2212-HV Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMUip), the Main Contactor,
Stop Time Switch, Flash / Auto Switch, eight Circuit Breakers and Momentary 24VDC Bypass Switch.
Field Output Termination Assembly (16‐Channel)
The 16-Channel Field Output Termination Assembly shall be coupled with the 16-Channel Output
Assembly and shall house eight Model 2205 High-Density Flash Transfer Relays (HDFTR).
The HDFTR and Flash Program Blocks (FPB) shall be provided to control and select the color (red,
yellow, or dark) during ATC Cabinet Flash mode.
Transient Protectors shall be provided at the field terminals for the protection of the HDSP-FU when
requested.
Input Assembly (24‐Channel)
The Input Assembly shall be an EIA-310B rack mounted assembly providing twelve slots of
22/44 pin PCB sockets. A Model 2218 Serial Interface Unit (SIU2) shall be provided in its location mated
to a DIN 96-pin connector. The SIU2 shall provide interface and control between the ATC Controller and
the input units via system SB1/SB2. This Input Assembly shall be wired for a mix of twelve 2-channel and
4-channel devices.
Input Assembly (48‐Channel)
The Input Assembly shall be an EIA-310B rack mounted assembly providing twelve slots of 22/44 pin
PCB sockets. Two Model 2218 Serial Interface Units (SIU2) shall be provided in its location mated to a
DIN 96-pin connector. The SIU2 shall provide interface and control between the ATC Controller and the
input units via system SB1/SB2. The Input Assembly shall be capable of supporting twelve 4-channel
devices. This Input Assembly shall be wired for a mix of twelve 2-channel and 4-channel devices.
Page 8 of 12
Service Assembly (1‐Flasher)
The Service Assembly shall be modular and shall be mounted on the lower left of the EIA when viewed
from the front. It shall house: a Model 2202-HV Universal HDSP-FU, EDCO SHA-1250 or approved
equal, BBS landing wire terminals, GFCI, Convenient Outlets and Circuit Breakers.
Service Assembly (2‐Flasher)
The Service Assembly shall be modular and shall be mounted on the lower left of the EIA when viewed
from the front. It shall house: two Model 2202-HV Universal HDSP-FU, EDCO SHA-1250 or approved
equal, BBS landing wire terminals, GFCI, Convenient Outlets and Circuit Breakers.
SB1/SB2 and DC Power Bus
SB1/SB2 and DC Power Bus shall include eight DB25 connectors to interconnect the SB1/SB2
communication ports of the assemblies and controller. It shall include a termination circuit at the end of
the connections (S8) to prevent radio frequency signal reflection. SB1/SB2 and DC Power Bus shall
include one Phoenix plug block or equal to bring the DC power to the SB1/SB2 and DC Power Bus; such
power shall be distributed to the ATC Cabinet Assemblies through seven Phoenix receptacle blocks or
equal. The copper traces for the DC voltages shall support at least 10 Amps.
The SB1/SB2 and DC Power Bus shall be mounted in the EIA rails and it shall swing out to provide
access to the back of the assemblies mounted in the opposite side.
AC Clean Power Bus
The AC Clean Power Bus shall include eight single NEMA 5-15 receptacles, to provide AC clean power to
the ATC Cabinet Assemblies, the controller and Cabinet Power Supply. It shall be mounted on the EIA
rails and it shall swing out to provide access to the back of the assemblies mounted in opposite side.
Page 9 of 12
ATC Cabinet Components
Model 2202‐HV Universal High‐Density Switch Pack / Flasher Units (HDSP‐FU)
When located in the Output Assembly, the Model 2202-HV HDSP-FU shall be:
Two channels per card
o 6 outputs rated at 5 mA to 1 Amp (1-135 watts)
o Over-current protected
o Load current monitored for each output
Modular PCB-based plug-in device containing six solid-state switches
1.2” x 4.5” card format with DIN style connector
LED compatible to <2 watts
CMUip controlled output over-ride for fail-safe operation
“ID” Led for each channel driven by CMUip based trouble-shooting
Serial Bus #3 compatible
When located in the Service Assembly, the Model 2202-HV HDSP-FU shall be:
Two channels per card
o Four outputs rated at 5 mA to 2 Amps each
o Over-current protected
o Load current monitored for each output
Modular PCB-based plug-in device containing four solid-state switches
1.2” x 4.5” card format with DIN style connector
Supports CMUip Flasher Alarm function
Model 2212‐HV Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMUip)
The CMUip-2212-HV Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMUip) shall be a compact, pluggable and modular.
32 channel fully monitor output capability
Direct SB#3 communication to each HDSP-FU for field voltage and load current status
Ethernet port for diagnostics
CMUip is programmed with interchangeable Datakey
Built-in Diagnostic Wizard: The CMUip analyzes the ATC Controller output commands and
HDSP-FU field input status
o Isolates whether the cabinet fault was caused by an ATC malfunction or a failure in the
load bay or field wiring
o Identifies the faulty channel(s) and output directly
o Provides guidance on how the technician should isolate the cause of the malfunction
Model 2220 Auxiliary Display Unit (ADU)
The ADU-2220 shall be a rack mounted display module.
32 channels of RYG status plus a Blue LED for fault status provides a full view of the intersection
signal states.
The LCD menu driven display provides detailed status information from the CMUip along with an
interface to the patented EDI SmartMonitor® technology.
o The built-in Diagnostic Wizard provides a concise view of the signal states involved in the
fault, pinpoints faulty signal inputs, and provides guidance on how the technician should
isolate the cause of the malfunction.
View status, configuration settings, voltages, currents, and event logs.
Page 10 of 12
Model 2218 Serial Interface Unit (SIU2)
The Model 2218 Serial Interface Unit (SIU2) shall be modular PCB-based plug-in device.
SIU2 is housed in each Input and Output Assembly.
o The SIU2 converts serial data from the ATC Controller into parallel outputs to the
assembly.
o The SIU2 converts parallel inputs from the assembly into serial data to the ATC
Controller.
54 programmable inputs / outputs
4 opto-isolated inputs
Diagnostic monitoring software uses the front panel EIA-232 port
1.5 inch width faceplate
Model 2216 Cabinet Power Supply (CPS)
The PS-2216 Cabinet Power Supply (CPS) shall be a rack mounted and high efficiency design and shall
be either of the following:
PS2216EP-24-HV Cabinet Power Supply (48v, 24v)
PS2216-2412-HV Cabinet Power Supply (48v, 24v, 12v)
Outputs
o 1 Amp at 48 Vdc
o 5 Amps at 24 Vdc (maximum)
o 5 Amps at 12 Vdc (maximum) for PS-2216-2412 only
Power Factor corrected input
1U height with Phoenix connector or equal
Fuse and LED indicator for each output
.
Model 2205 High‐Density Flash Transfer Relay (HDFTR)
The Model 2205 High-Density Flash Transfer Relay (HDFTR) shall be:
Hermetically Sealed Cover - Moisture proof, prevents contact contamination, insect proof (fire ant,
etc.)
Dry Nitrogen Filled - Protects contacts from corrosion, prevents condensation
Metal Can - Robust design, shock/impact resistant
Solid Pins - Robust, bend proof
Ratings: 5 Amps @ 120 Vac switching, 10 Amps surge
48 Vdc coil voltage
LED indicator to display contact transfer position
Main Contactor
Input: 48 Vdc coil voltage
Output: 60 Amps @ 120Vac
Contacts: SPST-NO
Equipped with input indicator
Operation at rated current:1,000,000
Power: less than 3 Watts
Located in the Output Assembly
Page 11 of 12
ATCC CABINET CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE
General
The ATC Cabinet shall consist of Assemblies and Components needed to carry out a specific application.
ATC Cabinet versions provided here are EXAMPLES of possible configurations.
Traffic Signal Cabinet Application:
350i: 4-Door Cabinet with “P/R” Base Ground Mount
352i: 2-Door Cabinet with “332/342” Base Ground Mount
356i: 2-Door Cabinet with”336/356” Base, Adaptor Mount
ATC Cabinet Configuration Table
Modules / Assemblies 352i-ATCC 356i-ATCC 350i-ATCC
Housing #1 / Cage #1 1
Housing #2 / Cage #2 1
Housing #3 / Two Cage #1 1
Side Panel Cage #1 2 4
Side Panel Cage #2 2
Service Assembly (1-Flasher) 1 1
Service Assembly (2-Flasher) 1
AC Clean Power Bus 1 1 1
SB1 / SB2 and DC Power Bus 1 1 12
Output Assembly (16-Channel) or (32-
Channel) 1 1 1
Field Output Termination Assembly (16-
Channel) 12 1 12
Input Assembly (24-Channel) maximum
120 channels, or
Input Assembly (48-Channel) maximum
120 channels
13 1 15
13 1 13
Field Input Termination Assembly * * *
Model 2216 Cabinet Power Supply 1 1 1
Auxiliary Display Unit 1 1 1
LED - Cabinet Light Assembly 12 12 12
Drawer Assembly 1 1 12
*This is optional and depends on the end user’s discretion.
Page 12 of 12
The ATC Cabinet shall also be supplied with the following components:
Output Assembly (16‐Channel):
(1-8ea **) Model 2202-HV HDSP-FU
(1 ea) Model 2218 SIU2
(1 ea) Model 2212-HV CMUip
Output Assembly (32‐Channel):
(1-16ea **) Model 2202-HV HDSP-FU
(2 ea) Model 2218 SIU2
(1 ea) Model 2212-HV CMUip
Field Output Termination Assembly (16‐Channel):
(1-8 ea **) Model 2205 HDFTR
(1-8 ea **) Transient Protector
(16 ea) Red Flash Program Blocks
(4 ea) Yellow Flash Program Blocks
(4 ea) White Flash Program Blocks
Input Assembly (24‐Channel):
(1 ea) Model 2218 SIU2
Input Assembly (48‐Channel):
(2 ea) Model 2218 SIU2
Service Assembly (1‐Flasher):
(1 ea) Model 2202-HV HDSP-FU
(1 ea) EDCO SHA-1250 or approved equal
Service Assembly (2‐Flasher):
(2 ea) Model 2202-HV HDSP-FU
(1 ea) EDCO SHA-1250 or approved equal
** Quantity at the end user’s discretion.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
SPECIAL SPECIFICATION
ADVANCED TRANSPORTATION CONTROLLER
Attachment B
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page i
Table of Contents
SECTION 1 – GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................... 1
2070.1 Description. ........................................................................................................................... 1
2070.2 Interchangeability ................................................................................................................. 1
2070.3 Compliance............................................................................................................................ 1
2070.4 Reference Standards and Specifcations ................................................................................ 1
2070.5 Barcode ................................................................................................................................. 2
2070.6 Warranty ............................................................................................................................... 2
2070.7 Definitions. ............................................................................................................................ 2
2070.8 Assemblies and Associated Modules .................................................................................... 3
2070.9 Documentation ..................................................................................................................... 4
2070.10 Packaging .......................................................................................................................... 5
2070.11 Delivery ............................................................................................................................. 5
2070.12 Measurement and Payment ............................................................................................. 5
2070.13 Metals ............................................................................................................................... 5
2070.14 Aluminum .......................................................................................................................... 5
2070.15 Stainless Steel ................................................................................................................... 5
2070.16 Cold Rolled Steel ............................................................................................................... 5
2070.17 Plating ............................................................................................................................... 5
2070.18 Mechanical Hardware ....................................................................................................... 5
2070.19 Electrical Isolation ............................................................................................................. 5
2070.20 Equipment Grounding ....................................................................................................... 6
2070.21 Daughter Boards ............................................................................................................... 6
COMPONENTS ...................................................................................................................................... 6
2070.22 General .............................................................................................................................. 6
2070.23 Electronic Components ..................................................................................................... 6
2070.24 Capacitors.......................................................................................................................... 6
2070.25 Potentiometers ................................................................................................................. 6
2070.26 Resistors ............................................................................................................................ 7
2070.27 Semiconductor Devices ..................................................................................................... 7
2070.28 Transformers and Inductors .............................................................................................. 7
2070.29 Triacs ................................................................................................................................. 7
2070.30 Circuit Breakers and Fuses Circuit Breakers ...................................................................... 7
2070.31 Load Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Internal Switches .............................................................. 7
2070.32 Fuses.................................................................................................................................. 8
2070.33 Switches ............................................................................................................................ 8
2070.34 Terminal Blocks ................................................................................................................. 8
2070.35 Wiring, Cabling, and Harnesses ......................................................................................... 8
2070.36 Indicators and Character Displays ..................................................................................... 9
2070.37 Connectors ........................................................................................................................ 9
2070.38 Surge Protection Device .................................................................................................. 10
MECHANICAL .................................................................................................................................... 10
2070.39 Assemblies ...................................................................................................................... 10
2070.40 Locking Devices ............................................................................................................... 10
2070.41 PCB Design and Connectors ............................................................................................ 10
2070.42 Model and Serial Numbers ............................................................................................. 10
2070.43 Workmanship .................................................................................................................. 11
2070.44 Tolerances ....................................................................................................................... 11
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page ii
ENGINEERING .................................................................................................................................... 11
2070.45 Human Engineering ......................................................................................................... 11
2070.46 Design Engineering .......................................................................................................... 11
2070.47 Generated Noise ............................................................................................................. 11
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS ........................................................................................................... 11
2070.48 Design, Fabrication and Mounting. ................................................................................. 11
2070.49 Soldering ......................................................................................................................... 12
2070.50 Definitions ....................................................................................................................... 12
QUALITY CONTROL ......................................................................................................................... 13
2070.51 General ............................................................................................................................ 13
2070.52 Manufacturers’ Quality Control and Testing Certification .............................................. 13
2070.53 Components. ................................................................................................................... 13
2070.54 Subassembly, Unit or Module ......................................................................................... 13
2070.55 Pre‐delivery Repair .......................................................................................................... 13
2070.56 Electrical, Environmental and Testing Requirements ..................................................... 13
SECTION II - TYPE 2070 ATC CONTROLLER UNIT ...................................................................... 14
2070.57 Controller Unit ................................................................................................................ 14
2070.58 Unit Version Configuration ............................................................................................. 14
2070.59 Communication and Option Modules ............................................................................. 14
2070.60 Operating System & Board Support Package Requirements .......................................... 14
2070.61 Chassis ............................................................................................................................. 15
2070.62 Power Fail and Power Restoration Operation ................................................................ 15
2070.63 Power Limitations ........................................................................................................... 15
2070.64 EIA‐485 Communications Circuitry ................................................................................. 15
2070.65 EIA‐485 Line Drivers/Receivers ....................................................................................... 15
2070.66 Sockets ............................................................................................................................ 15
2070.67 Frame Address ................................................................................................................ 16
SECTION III - TYPE 2070-1C CPU Module ........................................................................................ 17
2070.68 Type 2070 – 1C Module .................................................................................................. 17
2070.69 The C13S Connector ........................................................................................................ 17
2070.70 Serial Port SP8 ................................................................................................................. 17
2070.71 LINESYNC and POWERDOWN ......................................................................................... 17
2070.72 NRESET ............................................................................................................................ 17
2070.73 Engine Board ................................................................................................................... 17
2070.74 Ethernet Ports ................................................................................................................. 17
2070.75 Network Switches ........................................................................................................... 17
2070.76 Universal Serial Bus (USB) ............................................................................................... 18
2070.77 Host Module Identification ............................................................................................. 18
2070.78 ATC Controller Board Support Package (BSP) ................................................................. 18
SECTION IV - MODEL 2070-1C CPU (Engine Board) ....................................................................... 21
2070.79 General ............................................................................................................................ 21
2070.80 Model 2070 ‐1C CPU Module Processor ......................................................................... 21
2070.81 FLASH Memory ................................................................................................................ 21
2070.82 Dynamic RAM (DRAM) .................................................................................................... 21
2070.83 Static RAM (SRAM) .......................................................................................................... 21
2070.84 Standby Power ................................................................................................................ 21
2070.85 Real‐Time Clock (RTC) ..................................................................................................... 21
2070.86 CPU_RESET ...................................................................................................................... 21
2070.87 CPU_ACTIVE .................................................................................................................... 21
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page iii
APPLICATION PROGRAM INTERFACE (API) ............................................................................ 22
2070.88 ATC API Standard ............................................................................................................ 22
2070.89 Integrated Security .......................................................................................................... 22
2070.90 Serial Communications Interface Ports ........................................................................... 22
2070.91 Serial Peripheral Interface Port ....................................................................................... 24
2070.92 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) ...................................................................................... 24
2070.93 Data Key .......................................................................................................................... 25
2070.94 Start‐Up Consideration and Sequence ............................................................................ 26
SECTION V – TYPE 2070-2 FIELD I/O MODULE ............................................................................. 27
2070.95 Type 2070‐2A Field I/O Module (FI/O) ............................................................................ 27
2070.96 Type 2070‐2B Field I/O Module (FI/O) ............................................................................ 27
2070.97 Field F/O Controller Unit (FCU) ....................................................................................... 27
2070.98 Parallel Input Port ........................................................................................................... 27
2070.99 Parallel Output Port ........................................................................................................ 27
2070.100 Output Operation ............................................................................................................ 27
OTHER MODULE CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS. ................................................................................... 28
2070.101 Maximum Capacitive Load .............................................................................................. 28
2070.102 External WDT “Enable” Shunt/Toggle Switch ................................................................. 28
2070.103 WATCHDOG Circuit ......................................................................................................... 28
2070.104 One KHz Reference ......................................................................................................... 28
2070.105 32 Bit Millisecond Counter .............................................................................................. 28
2070.106 Power Up ......................................................................................................................... 28
2070.107 Logic Switch ..................................................................................................................... 28
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS/LOGIC CIRCUITRY ................................................................... 28
2070.108 System Serial Port 5 (SP5) EIA 485 Signal........................................................................ 28
2070.109 System Serial Port 3 (SP3) EIA 485 Signal........................................................................ 29
2070.110 LINE SYNC and POWER DOWN ........................................................................................ 29
2070.111 CPU RESET and POWER UP ............................................................................................. 29
2070.112 Module 2070‐2B .............................................................................................................. 29
2070.113 Internal Isolation ............................................................................................................. 29
2070.114 Buffers ............................................................................................................................. 29
I/O FUNCTIONS. ................................................................................................................................. 29
2070.115 Inputs .............................................................................................................................. 29
2070.116 Data Filtering ................................................................................................................... 29
2070.117 Outputs ........................................................................................................................... 30
2070.118 Standard Function ........................................................................................................... 30
2070.119 CASE A ............................................................................................................................. 30
2070.120 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................ 31
2070.121 Communication Service Routine ..................................................................................... 31
2070.122 Communication Processing ............................................................................................. 31
2070.123 Input Processing .............................................................................................................. 31
DATA COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOLS. .................................................................................. 31
2070.124 Communication Protocol ................................................................................................ 31
2070.125 Frame Types .................................................................................................................... 32
2070.126 Request Module Status ................................................................................................... 32
2070.127 Status Bits ........................................................................................................................ 33
2070.128 Request Module Status ................................................................................................... 33
2070.129 MC Management ............................................................................................................ 33
2070.130 Configure Inputs Commands........................................................................................... 34
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page iv
2070.131 Poll Raw Input Data ......................................................................................................... 34
2070.132 Poll Filtered Input Data ................................................................................................... 35
2070.133 Poll Input Transition Buffer ............................................................................................. 36
2070.134 Active Input ..................................................................................................................... 37
2070.135 The Block Number byte ................................................................................................... 37
2070.136 Set Outputs ..................................................................................................................... 37
2070.137 Configure Input Tracking Functions ................................................................................ 38
2070.138 Definitions are as follows: ............................................................................................... 38
2070.139 Timestamp Value ............................................................................................................ 39
2070.140 Outputs Tracks Inputs ..................................................................................................... 39
2070.141 Number of Item ............................................................................................................... 39
2070.142 Configure Complex Output Functions ............................................................................. 39
2070.143 Configure Complex Outputs Bit Fields ............................................................................ 40
2070.144 Controlling Input Signals ................................................................................................. 41
2070.145 Number of Items ............................................................................................................. 41
2070.146 Configure Watchdog ....................................................................................................... 41
2070.147 Timeout Value ................................................................................................................. 42
2070.148 Watchdog Timeout Value ............................................................................................... 42
2070.149 Controller Identification .................................................................................................. 42
2070.150 Module Identification ..................................................................................................... 42
SECTION VI - TYPE 2070-3D FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY. ........................................................... 43
2070.151 General ............................................................................................................................ 43
2070.152 Keyboards ........................................................................................................................ 43
2070.153 Ethernet Port ................................................................................................................... 43
2070.154 FPA Layout....................................................................................................................... 43
2070.155 CPU Active Indicator ....................................................................................................... 43
2070.156 Display Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) ................................................................................ 43
2070.157 Characters and Angles of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) .................................................... 43
2070.158 Backlight .......................................................................................................................... 43
2070.159 Cursor Display ................................................................................................................. 44
2070.160 FPA Controller ................................................................................................................. 44
2070.161 FPA RESET ........................................................................................................................ 44
2070.162 Keypress .......................................................................................................................... 44
2070.163 Auto‐Repeat .................................................................................................................... 44
2070.164 AUX .................................................................................................................................. 44
2070.165 Controller Circuitry .......................................................................................................... 44
2070.166 Character Overwrite ........................................................................................................ 45
2070.167 Auto‐Wrap ....................................................................................................................... 45
2070.168 Cursor Positioning ........................................................................................................... 45
2070.169 Blinking Characters ......................................................................................................... 45
2070.170 Tab Stops ......................................................................................................................... 45
2070.171 Auto‐Scroll ....................................................................................................................... 45
2070.172 Displayable Characters .................................................................................................... 46
2070.173 Display Back Light Illuminate .......................................................................................... 46
2070.174 Command Codes ............................................................................................................. 46
2070.175 Controller Circuit ............................................................................................................. 46
2070.176 C50 ENABLE FUNCTION ................................................................................................... 46
2070.177 Front Panel ...................................................................................................................... 46
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page v
SECTION VII - TYPE 2070-3D USB FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY ................................................. 47
2070.178 General ............................................................................................................................ 47
2070.179 Universal Serial Bus (USB) ............................................................................................... 47
2070.180 Alternate Front Panel Assembly Layout .......................................................................... 47
2070.181 1C‐CPU USB ..................................................................................................................... 47
SECTION VIII - TYPE 2070-4A POWER SUPPLY MODULE. ........................................................ 48
2070.182 Model 2070‐4A Power Supply Module ........................................................................... 48
2070.183 On/Off Power Switch ...................................................................................................... 48
2070.184 Input Protection .............................................................................................................. 48
2070.185 +5VDC Standby Power .................................................................................................... 48
2070.186 Monitor Circuitry ............................................................................................................. 48
2070.187 ACFAIL/POWER DOWN ................................................................................................... 48
2070.188 Monitor Circuitry Switch ................................................................................................. 48
2070.189 60 Hz Square Wave LINESYNC ......................................................................................... 48
2070.190 LINESYNC ......................................................................................................................... 49
2070.191 Line/Load Regulation ...................................................................................................... 49
2070.192 Efficiency ......................................................................................................................... 49
2070.193 Ripple and Noise ............................................................................................................. 49
2070.194 Voltage Overshoot .......................................................................................................... 49
2070.195 Overvoltage Protection ................................................................................................... 49
2070.196 Circuit Protection ............................................................................................................ 49
2070.197 Inrush Current ................................................................................................................. 49
2070.198 Holdup Time .................................................................................................................... 49
2070.199 Remote Sense ................................................................................................................. 50
SECTION IX - UNIT CHASSIS TYPE 2070. ........................................................................................ 51
2070.200 General ............................................................................................................................ 51
2070.201 Serial Motherboard ......................................................................................................... 51
SECTION X - TYPE 2070 NEMA ........................................................................................................... 52
2070.202 ATC NEMA Standard Controller Units ............................................................................. 52
2070.203 N1C Unit Consisting ......................................................................................................... 52
2070.204 N2C Unit Consisting ......................................................................................................... 52
2070.205 Address ............................................................................................................................ 52
FIELD I/O MODULE ........................................................................................................................... 52
2070.206 2070‐2N Field I/O Module .............................................................................................. 52
2070.207 Requirements Exceptions ............................................................................................... 52
2070.208 Types ............................................................................................................................... 53
2070.209 Power .............................................................................................................................. 53
2070.210 Isolation ........................................................................................................................... 53
2070.211 FCU Output ...................................................................................................................... 53
2070.212 Connectors A, C15S pin out and functions ...................................................................... 53
2070.213 Serial Port 3 ..................................................................................................................... 53
4AN POWER SUPPLY MODULE ..................................................................................................... 54
2070.214 4AN POWER SUPPLY MODULE ........................................................................................ 54
MODEL 2070- 8 FIELD I/O MODULE ............................................................................................. 54
2070.215 2070‐9 Module ................................................................................................................ 54
2070.216 Module Front Panel ........................................................................................................ 54
2070.217 Label ................................................................................................................................ 54
2070.218 Module Power Supply ..................................................................................................... 54
2070.219 Incoming AC Power ......................................................................................................... 55
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page vi
2070.220 Module PC Boards ........................................................................................................... 55
2070.221 POWERDOWN, NRESET, and LINESYNC .......................................................................... 55
2070.222 Requirements .................................................................................................................. 55
2070.223 EIA‐232 Serial Port .......................................................................................................... 55
2070.224 HAR 2 Harness ................................................................................................................. 55
2070.225 Fault and Voltage Monitor Circuitry ............................................................................... 55
2070.226 Figures ............................................................................................................................. 56
SECTION XI - TYPE 2070 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT. ................................................................ 57
2070.227 General Notes ................................................................................................................. 57
2070.228 Type 2070‐6 A & B Async/ Modem Serial Communication Modules.............................. 57
2070.229 Type 2070‐7A Async Serial Comm Module ..................................................................... 58
SECTION XII – GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................. 59
2070.230 Terms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................ 59
APPENDIX A – ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENTAL AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS .......... 63
A1 ENVIORNMENTAL AND TEST PROCEDURES ........................................................................ 63
A2 Inspection ............................................................................................................................ 64
A3 Definitions of Design Acceptance Testing (DAT) and Production Testing. ......................... 64
A4 Environmental and Operating Requirements ..................................................................... 64
A5 Transients, Power Service. .................................................................................................. 65
A6 Nondestructive Transient Immunity. .................................................................................. 66
TEST FACILITIES .............................................................................................................................. 66
A1 Test Facilities ....................................................................................................................... 66
TEST PROCEDURE: TRANSIENTS, TEMPERATURE, VOLTAGE, AND HUMIDITY ........ 66
A1 Test A: Placement in Environmental Chamber and Check‐Out of Hook‐Up ....................... 66
A2 Test B: Transient Tests (Power Service) .............................................................................. 66
A3 Test C—Low‐Temperature Low‐Voltage Tests.................................................................... 68
A4 Test D—Low‐Temperature High‐Voltage Tests .................................................................. 69
A5 Test E—High‐Temperature High‐Voltage Tests .................................................................. 69
A6 Test F—High‐Temperature Low‐Voltage Tests ................................................................... 70
A7 Test G—Test Termination ................................................................................................... 70
A8 Test H—Appraisal of Equipment under Test ...................................................................... 70
A9 Vibration Test ...................................................................................................................... 71
A10 Shock (Impact) Test. ............................................................................................................ 72
A11 Power Interruption Tests .................................................................................................... 73
APPENDIX B – DETAILED DRAWINGS ............................................................................................ 75
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A1 of 107
SPECIAL SPECIFICATION
ADVANCED TRANSPORTATION CONTROLLER
SECTION 1 – GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
2070.1 Description.
Furnish Type 2070 Advanced Transportation Controller (ATC) unit. The Advanced
Transportation Controller (ATC) is a general purpose programmable controller that is
intended for continuous unattended operation in harsh environments.
This specification defines specific, interchangeable modules that are combined to form the
Type 2070 ATC, capable of running control software that could be provided from a variety
of providers. This specification lays out compositions for the Type 2070 ATC
configurations to be used in the City. The Type 2070 ATC is designed such that all
components are fully standardized and are therefore interchangeable.
All furnished equipment shall be new and unused. Vacuum or gaseous tubes and electro-
mechanical devices (unless specifically called out) shall not be used.
2070.2 Interchangeability
All assemblies described in this specification and their respective associated devices shall
electrically and mechanically intermate and be compatible with each other.
2070.3 Compliance.
The Supplier shall guarantee that the 2070 ATC Controller Unit facilitates application
portability by abstracting application software from the ATC hardware thereby allowing
application programs to operate on the 2070 ATC, regardless of software manufacturer. This
will be accomplished thorough a layered software architecture and open source operating
system as defined in 2070.78 of this specification.
“Burn-in” each controller unit and provide a Quality Control report as described in this
specification. The certification report shall be furnished by the manufacturer and attached to
each controller unit. The report shall indicate the dates of the “burn-in” period, number of
hours, and “burn-in” temperature, and other pertinent test information requested by the City.
2070.4 Reference Standards and Specifcations
This specification incorporates the latest approved versions of the following standards by
reference:
Advanced Transportation Controller (ATC) Standard Version 5.2b published jointly
by the American Association of State Highways and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO), the Institute on Transportation Engineers (ITE), and the National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA), January 24, 2006.
Transportation Electrical Equipment Specifications published by the State of
California, Department of Transportation (CALTRANS), dated March 12, 2009.
NEMA TS2-2003 v2.03 – Traffic Controller Assemblies with NTCIP Requirements –
Published by the National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 2003
When specifications defined in this specification differ from specifications in the above
referenced documents, this specification shall prevail.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A2 of 107
Any applicable update and/or revision approved and incorporated into these standards
and specifications shall be automatically incorporated into the City’s ATC
Specification.
2070.5 Barcode
Each Controller Unit shall have a unique barcode place on the front. The Barcode shall be
.002” Premium polyester material or approved equal. The barcode shall be 1 ½” x 3/4”. The
adhesive shall be MC59 or approved equal. Temperature range shall be –40 degrees
Fahrenheit to 250 degrees Fahrenheit. Barcode shall be Code 39. The shelf life is 12
months when stored at 72 degrees Fahrenheit and 50 percent relative humidity. The barcode
for the controller unit shall be 4.7 CPI (low density). All barcodes are guaranteed to have no
skips in sequence. All barcodes and numerals shall be subsurface printed and produce in
black.
2070.6 Warranty
The Vendor shall fully guarantee all items, equipment and materials provided under this
contract. The duration of the warranty or guarantee shall be the standard of the industry,
with a minimum period of 36 MONTHS from the date of shipment to the City. The Vendor
shall mark each device with the date of shipment and "City of Fort Worth (or purchasing
agency)." The warranty shall cover all Manufacturer's defects, including parts, labor, and
shipping costs. Any item found not in accordance with this Specification will be rejected,
and returned to Vendor at the Vendor's expense for immediate replacement.
Repair: The Manufacturer shall perform warranty repair or replacement and return
component within 30 calendar days after receiving equipment.
Extension: Following warranty repair or replacement, the warranty period (for that item or
module) shall be extended for an additional period of one (1) year.
Vendor: If the equipment Vendor is other than the Manufacturer, then the Vendor shall be
fully responsible for all warranties and requirements of this Specification.
Vendor’s Responsibility: The City will determine the supplier’s responsibility for any
controller unit assembly failure if failure occurs within the warranty period. The City will
contact the supplier with instructions on the pickup and delivery of defective controller
assembly component. The supplier shall be responsible for all shipping and related handling
charges.
2070.7 Definitions.
The Type 2070 Controller Housing defines a controller housing that is intended to fit an EIA
19 in. rack mounted form commonly found in the Type 332 and ITS family of cabinets. In
addition, A NEMA base module is defined for those NEMA TS1 and TS2 shelf mounted
applications.
Engine Board. All computational functions are concentrated on an engine board within
the ATC that meets requirements of CPU and RAM memory, FLASH memory storage,
serial ports, Ethernet interface, standardized pin out interface, clock/calendar
maintenance, and Board Support Package.
CPU Module. The CPU module consists of the main CPU, memory, software and
interfaces to the remainder of the controller. The CPU module identified in this
specification is the Type 2070-1C configuration and is intended to interface with the
“engine board” specified by the ATC AASHTO/ITE/ NEMA v5.2b Standard and this
specification.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A3 of 107
Field I/O Module. The Field I/O Module provides a mechanism for input and output
interfaces. There are two options for the Field I/O Module identified in this
specification. The Type 2070-2A Modules is intended to provide a parallel I/O interface
with the Type 332 family of cabinets using the C1S connector. The Type 2070-2B
Module is intended to provide a serial I/O interface to the ITS cabinet family and the
NEMA interface to TS1 cabinets. The Type 2070-2N is for the NEMA TS2 Type 1
cabinets.
Front Panel Assembly Module. A controller Front Panel contains a keyboard display
that comprises the user field interface. The Front Panel on the Type 2070 ATC Unit
specified shall be the Type 2070-3D Front Panel. The 2070-3D Front Panel includes
large character (16 lines of 40 characters each) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
Power Supply Module. The power supply module is used to convert 120 volt power to
voltages required to operate the electronics inside the Type 2070 ATC controller unit.
This power supply shall meet certain minimum electrical characteristics defined herein
for its intended use. The power supply shall meet certain minimum electrical
characteristics defined herein for its intended use. The Type 2070-4AN identifies the
corresponding power supplies needed to support the NEMA TS1 and TS2 standards.
This power supply has the Power-up and Power-down signals adjusted to meet NEMA
specifications.
Communications Modules. This standard includes serial and modem communication
modules. The modem communication module shall be a type 2070-6B. The Type
2070-7A communication modules are for serial communications.
NEMA Interface. This standard includes requirements for an optional module to
interface with the NEMA TS1 and NEMA TS2 Type 1 cabinets. The Type 2070-8
NEMA Field I/O Module is an external module that attaches to the bottom of the 2070
and provides for the typical “A,” “B,” and “C” NEMA connectors.
2070.8 Assemblies and Associated Modules
The 2070 ATC assemblies and associated modules to be provided include the following:
(1) Type 2070- LC Controller Unit (Type 332 Family of Cabinets)
Type 2070-1C CPU Module
Type 2070-2A Field I/O Module
Type 2070-3D Front Panel Assembly
Type 2070- 4A Power Supply
Type 2070-6B Internal Modems (Optional)
Type 2070-7A Serial MA Module (Optional)
(2) Type 2070-LCS Controller Unit (ITS Cabinets)
Type 2070-1C CPU Module)
Type 2070-2B Field I/O Module
Type 2070-3D Front Panel Assembly
Type 2070-4A Power Supply
Type 2070-6B Internal Modem (Optional)
Type 2070-7A Serial MA Module (Optional)
(3) Type 2070-N1C Controller Unit
Type 2070-1C CPU Module
Type 2070-2B Field I/O Module
Type 2070-3D Front Panel Assembly
Type 2070-4AN Power Supply Module
Type 2070-7A Serial MA Module (Optional)
Type 2070-8 NEMA Module
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A4 of 107
(4) Type 2070-N2C Controller Unit
Type 2070-1C CPU Module
Type 2070-2N Field I/O Module – this module contains 120VAC outlet
(accommodates 2070-4 line cord) and has a built-in CPU and memory emulating the
2070-8 NEMA base.
Type 2070-3D Front Panel Assembly
Type 2070-4AN Power Supply Module
Type 2070-7A Serial MA Module (Optional)
2070.9 Documentation
All documentation shall be provided in digital format on a CD and one hard copy of the
Documentation Manual shall be supplied for each item purchased up to 200 manuals per
order. The manual shall be bound in durable covers made of either 65-pound stock paper or
clear plastic. The manual shall be printed on 8-1/2 in. by 11 in. paper, with the exception
that schematics, layouts, parts lists and plan details may be on 11 in. by 17 in. sheets, with
each sheet neatly folded to 8-1/2 in. by 11 in. size. A minimum of Times New Roman or
Arial 10 point font shall be used for all manual text, excluding drawings and schematics.
Drawing text may use a smaller font size.
Manual Contents. Each manual shall include the following sections in the order listed:
Front Cover - The date, serial numbers, model numbers and revision numbers of
equipment covered by the manuals shall be printed on the front cover of the manuals.
Table of Contents
Glossary
Manufacturer Contact Information
Address
Telephone Number
Fax Number
General Email Address
General Description
General Characteristics
Installation
Adjustments
Theory of Operation
Systems Description (include block diagram).
Detailed Description of Circuit Operation.
Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance.
Trouble Analysis.
Trouble Shooting Sequence Chart.
Wave Forms.
Voltage Measurements.
Alignment Procedures.
Parts List (include circuit and board designation, part type and class, power rating,
component manufacturer, mechanical part manufacturer, data specification sheets for
special design components and original manufacturer's part number).
Electrical Interconnection Details & Drawings. Schematic and Logic Diagram
Assembly Drawings and a pictorial diagram showing physical locations and
identification of each component or part.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A5 of 107
Draft Manual. A preliminary draft of the manual shall be submitted to the City for approval
prior to final printing.
2070.10 Packaging
Each item delivered shall be individually packed in its own shipping container. When loose
Styrofoam is used for packing, the item shall be sealed in a plastic bag to prevent direct
contact with the Styrofoam.
2070.11 Delivery
Each item delivered for testing shall be complete ready for testing, and shall include
documentation manuals.
2070.12 Measurement and Payment
The work performed, materials furnished, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals will not be
measured or paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items.
2070.13 Metals
All sharp edges and corners shall be rounded and free of any burrs.
2070.14 Aluminum
Sheet shall be 15 gauge American Standard (0.060-in.) minimum thick Type 3003-H14 or
Type 5052-H32 ASTM Designation B209 aluminum alloy. Rod, Bar and Extruded shall be
Type 6061-T6, or equal.
2070.15 Stainless Steel
Sheet shall be annealed or one-quarter-hard complying with the ASTM Designation: A666
for Type 304, Grades A or B, stainless steel sheet.
2070.16 Cold Rolled Steel
Sheet, Rod, Bar and Extruded shall be Type 1018/1020.
2070.17 Plating
All cold roll steel shall be plated. All plating shall be either cadmium plating meeting the
requirements of Federal Specification QQ-P-416C, Type 2 Class l or zinc plating meeting
the requirements of ASTM B633-85 Type II SC4.
2070.18 Mechanical Hardware
All bolts, nuts, washers, screws, hinges and hinge pins shall be stainless steel unless
otherwise specified.
2070.19 Electrical Isolation
Within the circuit of any device, module, or Printed Circuit Board (PCB), electrical isolation
shall be provided between DC logic ground, equipment ground and the AC- conductor. They
shall be electrically isolated from each other by 500 MΩ, minimum, when tested at the input
terminals with 500 VDC.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A6 of 107
2070.20 Equipment Grounding
Equipment grounding practices specified in the NEMA TS2 Standard shall be followed. In
particular, all external metallic surfaces such as faceplates, chassis, and connector housing
shall be connected to the equipment ground signal input of the power supply.
2070.21 Daughter Boards
Keyboards and LCD/LED Displays are considered daughter boards. Daughter boards shall
be mechanically secured with a minimum of four spacers/metal screws. Connectors shall be
either Flat Cable or PCB Headers. Components are to be mounted under the daughter board.
COMPONENTS
2070.22 General
All components shall be of such design, fabrication, nomenclature or other identification as
to be purchased from a wholesale distributor or from the component manufacturer. When a
component is of such special design that it precludes the purchase of identical components
from any wholesale distributor or component manufacturer, one spare duplicate component
shall be furnished with each 20, or fraction thereof, components used. The electronic circuit
design shall be such that all components of the same generic type, regardless of
manufacturer, shall function equally in accordance with the specifications.
2070.23 Electronic Components
No device to be socket mounted unless specifically called out. No component to be operated
above 80% of its maximum rated voltage, current or power ratings. Digital components
shall not be operated above 3% over their nominal voltage, current or power ratings.
No component to be provided where the manufactured date is three years older than the
contract award date. The design life of all components, operating for twenty-four hours a
day and operating in their circuit application, shall be ten years or longer.
Components shall be arranged so they are easily accessible, replaceable and identifiable for
testing and maintenance. Where damage by shock or vibration exists, a clamp, fastener,
retainer, or hold-down bracket shall support the component mechanically.
The Manufacturer shall submit detailed engineering technical data on all components at the
request of the Department. The Manufacturer shall certify that the component application
meets the requirements of this standard.
2070.24 Capacitors
The DC and AC voltage ratings as well as the dissipation factor of a capacitor shall exceed
the worst-case design parameters of the circuitry by 150% except for supercaps. Supercaps
are capacitors rated less than 10 working volts DC with capacitance values greater than or
equal to 1.0F. Supercaps shall be required to meet only their stated ratings. Capacitor
encasements shall be resistant to cracking, peeling and discoloration. All capacitors shall be
insulated and shall be marked with their capacitance values and working voltages.
Electrolytic capacitors shall not be used for capacitance values of less than 1.0 µF and shall
be marked with polarity.
2070.25 Potentiometers
Potentiometers with ratings from 1 to 2 watts shall meet Military Type RV4 requirements.
Under 1 Watt potentiometers shall be used only for trimmer type function. The
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A7 of 107
potentiometer power rating shall be at least 100% greater than the maximum power
requirements of the circuit.
2070.26 Resistors
Fixed carbon film, deposited carbon, or composition-insulated resistors shall conform to the
performance requirements of Military Specifications MIL-R-11F or MIL-R-22684. All
resistors shall be insulated and be marked with their resistance values. Resistance values
shall be indicated by the EIA color codes, or stamped value. The value of the resistors shall
not vary by more than 5% between -37 degrees C and 74 degrees C.
Special ventilation or heat sinking shall be provided for all 2- watt or greater resistors. They
shall be insulated from the PCB.
2070.27 Semiconductor Devices
All transistors, integrated circuits, and diodes shall be a standard type listed by EIA and
clearly identifiable.
All metal oxide semiconductor components shall contain circuitry to protect their inputs and
outputs against damage due to high static voltages or electrical fields.
Device pin "1" locations shall be properly marked on the PCB adjacent to the pin.
2070.28 Transformers and Inductors
All power transformers and inductors shall have the manufacturer's name or logo and part
number clearly and legibly printed on the case or lamination. All transformers and inductors
shall have their windings insulated, be protected to exclude moisture, and their leads color
coded with an approved EIA color code or identified in a manner to facilitate proper
installation.
2070.29 Triacs
Each triac with a designed circuit load of greater than 0.5 Amperes at 120 VAC shall be
mounted to a heat sink with thermal conductive compound or material, in addition to being
mechanically secured.
2070.30 Circuit Breakers and Fuses Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breakers and Fuses Circuit breakers shall be listed by UL or ETL. The trip and
frame sizes shall be plainly marked (marked on the breaker by the manufacturer), and the
ampere rating visible from the front of the breaker. Contacts shall be silver alloy and
enclosed in an arc-quenching chamber. An ambient air temperature range of from -18
degrees C to 50 degrees C shall not influence overload tripping. The minimum Interrupting
Capacity shall be 5,000 amperes, RMS when the breaker is secondary to a UL approved fuse
or primary circuit breaker and both breakers in concert provide the rated capacity. For
circuit breakers 80 amperes and above, the minimum interrupting capacity shall be 10,000
amperes, RMS. Circuit breakers shall be the trip-free type with medium trip delay
characteristic (Carling switch Time Delay Curve #24 or equal).
2070.31 Load Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Internal Switches
The Load Circuit Breakers used to power Switch Packs shall have auxiliary switches. The
auxiliary switches shall “open” when the load breaker has tripped and the system will
transfer the power from the Main Contactor to the Flash or Blank condition.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A8 of 107
2070.32 Fuses
All Fuses that are resident in a bayonet style fuse holder shall have the fuse size rating
labeled on the holder or on the panel adjacent to the holder. Fuses shall be easily accessible
and removable without use of tools.
2070.33 Switches
Dual-inline-package (DIP). DIP quick snap switches shall be rated for a minimum of
30,000 operations per position at 50 mA, 30 VDC. The switch contact resistance shall be
100 milliohms maximum at 2 mA, 30 VDC. The contacts shall be gold over brass.
Logic Switches. The switch contacts shall be rated for a minimum of 1-ampere resistive load
at 120 VAC and shall be silver over brass (or equal). The switch shall be rated for a
minimum of 40,000 operations.
Power Switches. The switch contacts shall be rated for a minimum of 5 amperes resistive
load at 120 VAC or 28 VDC and be silver over brass (or equal). The switch shall be rated
for a minimum of 40,000 operations.
Power. Ratings shall be the same as CONTROL, except the contact rating shall be a
minimum of 10 amperes at 125 VAC.
2070.34 Terminal Blocks
The terminal blocks shall be barrier type, rated at20amperes and 600 VAC RMS minimum.
The terminal screws shall be 0.3125 in. minimum length nickel-plated brass binder head type
with screw inserts of the same material. Screw size is called out under the associated file,
panel or assembly.
Screw Lug and Cam Driven Connectors. Provided the connectors mate, screw lug cam
driven devices or crimp pin connectors shall be allowable if the interface is part of a harness.
For field termination, screw lug and cam driven assemblies are interchangeable for field
wiring termination, provided they both accommodate 22-gauge wire on the inputs and 22-
gauge wire on the outputs.
2070.35 Wiring, Cabling, and Harnesses
Wiring, Cabling and Harnesses shall be neat, firm and properly bundled with external
protection. They shall be tie-wrapped and routed to minimize crosstalk and electrical
interference. Each harness shall be of adequate length to allow any conductor to be
connected properly to its associated connector or termination point. Conductors within an
encased harness have no color requirements. Printed circuit motherboards are to be used
where possible to eliminate or reduce cabinet wiring.
Wiring containing AC shall be bundled separately or shielded separately from all DC logic
voltage control circuits.
Wiring shall be routed to prevent conductors from being in contact with metal edges.
Wiring shall be arranged so that any removable assembly may be removed without
disturbing conductors not associated with that assembly.
All conductors, except those that can be readily traced, shall be labeled. Labels attached to
each end of the conductor shall identify the destination of the other end of the conductor.
All conductors shall conform to MIL-W-16878E/1 or better and have a minimum of 19
strands of copper. The insulation shall be polyvinyl chloride with a minimum thickness of 10
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A9 of 107
mils or greater. Where insulation thickness is 15 mils or less, the conductor shall conform to
MIL-W-16878/17.
Conductor color identification shall be as follows:
AC- circuits – white
Equip. Ground - solid green or continuous green color with 1 or more yellow stripes
DC logic ground - continuous white with a red stripe
AC+ circuits - continuous black or black with colored stripe
DC logic ungrounded or signal - any color not specified
2070.36 Indicators and Character Displays
All indicators and character displays shall be readily visible at a radius of up to 4 feet within
the cone of visibility when the indicator is subjected to 97,000 lux (9,000 foot-candles) of
white light with the light source at 45 degrees (+/-2 degrees) to the front panel.
All indicators and character displays shall have a minimum 90 degrees cone of visibility
with its axis perpendicular to the panel on which the indicator is mounted. All indicators
shall be self-luminous. All indicators shall have a rated life of 100,000 hours minimum.
Each LED indicator shall be white or clear when off. Indicators supplied on equipment
requiring handles shall be mounted such that a horizontal clearance is provided. Liquid
Crystal Displays (LCD) shall be readable at temperatures of -20 degrees C to +70 degrees C.
All controller unit functions are required to operate at temperatures of –37 degrees C to +74
degrees C.
2070.37 Connectors
Connectors shall be keyed to prevent improper insertion of the wrong connector where
equipment damage or operator injury may result. The mating connectors shall be designated
as the connector number and male/female relationship, such as C1P (plug or PCB edge
connector) and C1S (socket).
Type T. Type T connector shall be a single row, 10 position, feed through terminal block.
The terminal block shall be a barrier type with 6-32, 0.25 in. or longer, nickel plated brass
binder head screws. Each terminal shall be permanently identified as to its function.
Plastic Circular and Type M Connectors. Pin and socket contacts for connectors shall be
beryllium copper construction subplated with 1.27 microns nickel and plated with 0.76
microns gold. Pin diameter shall be 0.0618 in. All pin and socket connectors shall use the
AMP #601105-1 or #91002-1 contact insertion tool and the AMP #305183 contact
extraction tool or equal.
Card Edge and Two Piece PCB. Edge connectors shall have bifurcated gold-plated
contacts. The PCB receptacle connector shall meet or exceed the following:
Operating Voltage: 600 VAC (RMS)
Current Rating: 5.0 Amperes
Insulation Material: Diallyl Phthalate or Thermoplastic
Insulation Resistance: 5,000 Megohms Contact
Material: Copper alloy plated with 0.00005 in. of nickel and
0.000015 in. of gold
Contact Resistance: 0.006 Ohm maximum
The two-piece PCB connector shall meet or exceed the DIN 41612.
The PCB 22/44 Connector shall have 22 independent contacts per side; dual sided with
0.156 in. contact centers.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A10 of 107
Wire Terminal. Each wire terminal shall be solderless with PVC insulation and a heavy-
duty short -locking spade type connector. Crimp terminal connectors using a Controlled-
Cycle type crimping tool.
Flat Cable. Each flat cable connector shall be designed for use with 26 AWG cable; have
dual cantilevered phosphor bronze contacts plated with 0.00015 in. of gold over 0.00005 in.
of nickel; and have a current rating of 1 Ampere minimum and an insulation resistance of 5
Megohms minimum.
PCB Header Post. Each PCB header post shall be 0.025 in. square by 0.3425 in. high from
the plane of the PCB to the end of the pin; be mounted on 0.10 in. centers; and be tempered
hard brass plated with 0.00015 in. of gold over 0.00005 in. of nickel.
PCB Header Socket. Each PCB header socket block shall be nylon or diallyl phthalate.
Each PCB header socket contact shall be removable, but crimp-connected to its conductor.
List the part number of the extraction tool recommended by its manufacturer. Each PCB
header socket contact shall be brass or phosphor bronze plated with 0.0015 in. of gold over
0.00005 in. of nickel.
2070.38 Surge Protection Device
The surge suppression device shall comply with ANSI/IEEE C62.41 (100 Kilohertz Ring
Wave, the 1.2/50 microseconds – 8/20 Combination Wave and the EFT Burst) at voltages
and currents specified at “Location Category B2” and at “Test Severity” level III (i.e. up to
4.0 Kilovolts, open-circuit).
MECHANICAL
2070.39 Assemblies
All assemblies shall be modular, easily replaceable and incorporate plug-in capability for
their associated devices or PCBs. Assemblies shall be provided with two guides for each
plug-in PCB or associated device (except relays). The guides shall extend to within 0.75 in.
from the face of either the socket or connector and front edge of the assembly. If Nylon
guides are used, attach the guides securely to the file or assembly chassis.
2070.40 Locking Devices
All screw type fasteners shall utilize locking devices or locking compounds except finger
screws, which are captive.
2070.41 PCB Design and Connectors
No components, traces, brackets or obstructions are to be within 0.125 in. of the board edge
(guide edges). The manufacturer's name or logo, model number, serial number, and circuit
issue or revision number shall appear and be readily visible on all PCBs.
2070.42 Model and Serial Numbers
The manufacturer's model number and circuit issue or revision number shall appear on the
rear panel of all equipment supplied (where such panel exists). In addition to any
assignment of model numbers by the manufacturer, the TYPE number shall be displayed on
the front panel in bold type, at least 0.25 in. high.
A permanent label shall be affixed to the inside near and center floor of the Type 2070 unit
chassis when viewed from the front. The label shall display the unit's serial number and be
permanent and easy to read.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A11 of 107
2070.43 Workmanship
Workmanship shall conform to the requirements of this specification and be in accordance
with the highest industry standards.
2070.44 Tolerances
The following tolerances shall apply, except as specifically shown on the plans or in these
specifications:
Sheet Metal +/-0.0525 in.
PCB +0 in., - 0.010 in.
Edge Guides +/-0.015 in.
*Note: These dimensional tolerances do not apply to material gauge or thickness.
ENGINEERING
2070.45 Human Engineering
Equipment. The equipment shall be engineered for simplicity, ease of operation and
maintenance.
Knobs. Knobs shall be a minimum of 0.5 in. in diameter and a minimum separation of 0.5
in. edge to edge.
PCBs. PCBs shall slide smoothly in their guides while being inserted into or removed from
the frame and fit snugly into the plug-in PCB connectors. PCBs shall require a force no less
than 5 pounds-force or greater than 50 pounds-force for insertion or removal.
2070.46 Design Engineering
The design shall be inherently temperature compensated to prevent abnormal operation. The
circuit design shall include such compensation as is necessary to overcome adverse effects
due to temperature in the specified environmental range. The design shall take into
consideration the protection of personnel from all dangerous voltages.
2070.47 Generated Noise
No item, component or subassembly is to emit an audible noise level exceeding the peak
level of 55 dBa when measured at a distance of one meter away from its surface, except as
otherwise noted. No item, component or subassembly is to emit a noise level sufficient to
interfere with processing and communication functions of the controller circuits.
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
2070.48 Design, Fabrication and Mounting.
Contacts of PCBs. All contacts on PCBs shall be plated with a minimum thickness of
0.00003 in. gold over a minimum thickness of 0.000075 in. nickel.
PCB Design. PCB design shall be such that when a component is removed and replaced, no
damage is done to the board, other components, conductive traces or tracks.
Fabrication. Fabrication of PCBs shall be in compliance with Military Specification MIL-
P-13949, except as follows:
Copper Tracks - NEMA FR-4 glass cloth base epoxy resin copper clad laminates
0.0625 in. minimum thickness shall be used. Inter-component wiring shall be by
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A12 of 107
laminated copper clad track having a minimum weight of 2.0 ounces per square foot
with adequate cross section for current to be carried. All copper tracks shall be
plated or soldered to provide complete coverage of all exposed copper tracks.
Jumper wires to external PCB components shall be from plated-through padded
holes and as short as possible.
Pits, Dents, Bows and Twists. All PCBs shall conform to Section 3.3 of Military
Specification MIL-P-13949G Grade of Pits and Dents and be of Grade B quality
(3.5.1.3) or better. The class of permissible bow or twist shall be Class C (Table V)
or better. The class of permissible warp or twist shall be Class A (Table II) or better.
NOTE: Omit Sections 4.2 through 6.6 of Military Specification MIL-P-13949G
(inclusive) except as referenced in previous sections of this specification.
Mounting. The mounting of parts and assemblies on the PCB shall conform to Military
Specification MIL-STD-275E, except as follows:
Semiconductor Devices. Semiconductor devices that dissipate more than 250
milliwatts or cause a temperature rise of 10 degrees C or more shall be mounted with
spacers, transipads or heat sinks to prevent contact with the PCB.
Residual Flux. When completed, remove all residual flux from the PCB.
Resistence. The resistance between any two isolated, independent conductor paths
shall be at least 100 Megohms when a 500 VDC potential is applied.
Coating. All PCBs shall be coated with a moisture resistant coating.
Lateral Separation. Where less than 0.25 in. lateral separation is provided between
the PCB (or the components of a PCB) and any metal surface, a 0.0625 in. (+/-
0.0005 in.) Thick Mylar (polyester) plastic cover shall be provided on the metal to
protect the PCB.
Connector Edges. Each PCB connector edge shall be chamfered at 30 degrees from board
side planes. The key slots shall also be chamfered so that the connector keys are not
extracted upon removal of board or jammed upon insertion. The key slots shall be 0.045 in.
(+/-0.005 in.) for 0.1 in. spacing and 0.055 in. (+/-0.005 in.) for 0.156 in. spacing.
2070.49 Soldering
Hand Soldering. Hand soldering shall comply with Military Specification MIL-STD-2000.
Automatic Flow Soldering. Automatic flow soldering shall be a constant speed conveyor
system with the conveyor speed set at optimum to minimize solder peaks or points.
Temperature shall be controlled to within +/- 8 degrees C of the optimum temperature. The
soldering process shall result in the complete coverage of all copper runs, joints and
terminals with solder except that which is covered by an electroplating process. Wherever
clinching is not used, provide a method of holding the components in the proper position for
the flow process.
Time-Temperature. If exposure to the temperature bath is of such a time-temperature
duration, as to come within 80% of any component's maximum specified time-temperature
exposure, that component shall be hand soldered to the PCB after the flow process has been
completed.
2070.50 Definitions
Definitions for the purpose of this section on PCBs shall be taken from MIL-P-55110D
Section 3.3 and any current addendum.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A13 of 107
QUALITY CONTROL
2070.51 General
Material in this section is considered a supplement to that provided in Appendix A. In the
case of apparent inconsistencies, the material in Appendix A of this specification shall
prevail.
2070.52 Manufacturers’ Quality Control and Testing Certification
A compliant test report that is part of the quality control procedure shall be supplied with
each delivered unit. Along with pass fail information this report shall include the quality
control procedure, test report format and the name of the tester. It should be counter-signed
by a corporate officer.
The quality control procedure shall include the following:
Design acceptance testing of all supplied components
Physical and functional testing of controller units
Environmental testing report(s) and final acceptance
Acceptance testing of all supplied components
Physical and functional testing of all modules and items
Verification of a minimum burn-in of all equipment
2070.53 Components.
All components shall be lot sampled to assure a consistent high conformance standard to the
design specification of the equipment.
2070.54 Subassembly, Unit or Module
Complete electrical, environmental and timing compliance testing shall be performed on
each module, unit, printed circuit or subassembly. Components will be tested as a complete
controller assembly. Housing, chassis, and connection terminals shall be inspected for
mechanical sturdiness, and harnessing to sockets to be electrically tested for proper wiring
sequence. The equipment shall be visually and physically inspected to assure proper
placement, mounting, and compatibility of subassemblies.
2070.55 Pre-delivery Repair
Any defects or deficiencies found by the inspection system involving mechanical structure
or wiring shall be returned through the manufacturing process or special repair process for
correction.
PCB flow soldering is allowed a second time if copper runs and joints are not satisfactorily
coated on the first run. Do not flow solder a PCB more than twice.
Hand soldering is allowed for printed circuit repair.
2070.56 Electrical, Environmental and Testing Requirements
Electrical, Environmental and Testing Requirements are provided in Appendix A of this
Specification.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A14 of 107
SECTION II - TYPE 2070 ATC CONTROLLER UNIT
2070.57 Controller Unit
The Controller Unit is composed of the Type 2070 Unit CHASSIS, modules, and assemblies
per their version.
2070.58 Unit Version Configuration
The Type 2070 Controller Unit Version defines the module composition to be delivered as
follows:
MODEL 2070 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATIONS
ASSOCIATED DEVICES LC LCS N1C N2C
2070 Unit Chassis 1 1 1 1
1C Type 2070-1C CPU Module 1 1 1 1
2A Type 2070-2A Field I/O Module 1
2B Type 2070-2B Field I/O Module 1 1
2N Type 2070 -2N Field I/O Module 1
3 Type 2070-3D Front Panel Assy. 1 1 1 1
4B Type 2070-4A Power Supply 1 1
4AN Type 2070-4AN Power Supply 1 1
8 Type 2070-8 NEMA Module 1
6B Type 2070 – 6B Comm. Module opt opt opt opt
7A Type 2070-7A Comm. Module opt opt opt opt
Notes:
1) 2070 LC and LCS are the same units using the 1C CPU Module with a 2A FIO
and 2B communication interface to drive the Type 332 and Serial cabinets,
respectively.
2) 2070N versions includes the 1C CPU Module. The communications and option
modules/assemblies must be called out separately from the unit version. The 2N
Field I/O module is designed to replace the 2070-8 NEMA Base and use the TS2
serial interface. The 2070N versions are described in SECTION X - TYPE 2070
NEMA.
2070.59 Communication and Option Modules
The communications and option modules/assemblies must be called out separately from the
unit version.
2070.60 Operating System & Board Support Package Requirements
The ATC shall use a Linux operating system (O/S) and shall include standard POSIX
libraries for application support including real-time extensions of POSIX 1003.1b. To
facilitate application level access to the ATC hardware, a Board Support Package (BSP)
shall be provided for access to hardware-specific drivers.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A15 of 107
After boot-up the ATC Linux O/S shall make available to applications, access to the low
level drivers (block, character and network) provided by the kernel (subject to current open
source requirements) or through kernel modules.
2070.61 Chassis
The CHASSIS Top and Bottom, Internal Structure Supports, Back Plane Mounting Surface,
Module Plates, Power Supply Enclosure, and Front Panel shall be made of 63-gauge
minimum aluminum sheet. The CHASSIS Side panels shall be 0.090 inches minimum
sheet.
2070.62 Power Fail and Power Restoration Operation
It is noted that the Power Failure Power Restoration operations of this unit are specific to the
requirements of the user. All associated modules are to comply with said operations.
2070.63 Power Limitations
2070 UNIT module / assembly power limitations are as follows:
Types +5VDC +12VDC
ISO
+12VDC
ser
-12 VDC
ser
2070-1C CPU 2.0A 250Ma
2070-2A FI/O 250 mA 750 mA ----- -----
2070-2B FI/O 250 mA 500 mA ----- -----
2070-3D FPA 500 mA ----- 50 mA 50 mA
2070-6 All Comm. 900 mA ----- 300 mA 300 mA
2070-7 All Comm. 250 mA ----- 50 mA 50 mA
2070.64 EIA-485 Communications Circuitry
All circuitry associated with the EIA-485 Communications links shall be capable of reliably
passing a minimum of 1.0 megabits per second.
2070.65 EIA-485 Line Drivers/Receivers
The EIA-485 Line Drivers/Receivers shall be socket mounted or surface mounted and shall
not draw more than 35 mA in active state and 20 mA in inactive state. A 100-Ohm
Termination Resistor shall be provided across each Differential Line Receiver Input. The
Motherboard’s control signals (e.g., SP1-RTS) shall be active, or asserted, when the positive
terminal (e.g., SP1-RTS+) is a lower voltage than its corresponding negative terminal (e.g.,
SP1-RTS-). A control signal is inactive when its positive terminal voltage is higher than its
negative terminal. Receive and transmit data signals shall be read as a "1" when the positive
terminal's (e.g., SP1-TXD+) voltage is higher than its corresponding negative terminal (e.g.,
SP1-TXD-). A data value is "0" when its positive terminal's (e.g., SP1-TXD+) voltage is
lower than its negative terminal (e.g., SP1-TXD-).
2070.66 Sockets
Sockets for devices (called out to be socket mounted) shall be “xx” pin AUGAT 500/800
series AG10DPC or equal.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A16 of 107
2070.67 Frame Address
SDLC. SP5 and SP3 SDLC frame address assignments (Command/Response) are as follows:
SP5 SP3
CPU 2070-1 “19” “19”
FI/O 2070-2A & 8 “20” “Not Applicable”
Manufacturer Use 128-254 128-254
CPU Broadcast to all “255” “255”
All other addresses are reserved by this standard. The SDLC response shall contain the
frame address of the Command sender.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A17 of 107
SECTION III - TYPE 2070-1C CPU Module
2070.68 Type 2070 – 1C Module
The TYPE 2070-1C CPU shall be a single board module meeting the 2X WIDE board
requirements. The module shall be furnished normally resident in MOTHERBOARD Slot
A5.
2070.69 The C13S Connector
The C13S Connector shall be a DB25S connector and shall be located on the Module 2070-
1C CPU front panel and shall contain signals for SP8, LINESYNC, NRESET,
POWERDOWN, and an isolated BIAS +5VDC as specified in the following paragraphs and
as listed in Figure A9-15 located in Appendix D if this specification. TX and RX LEDs
shall be provided as shown in Figure A9-15 in Appendix D of this specification.
2070.70 Serial Port SP8
System Serial Port 8 (SP8) shall be isolated, converted to EIA-485, and then routed to
Connector C13S. SP8 shall meet all SP2 Port requirements except where noted.
2070.71 LINESYNC and POWERDOWN
LINESYNC and POWERDOWN lines shall each be isolated, converted to EIA-485, and
then routed to connector C13S for external module use.
2070.72 NRESET
CP Reset and POWER UP lines shall be isolated, then OR’d to NRSET. NRESET shall then
be converted to EIA-485 and routed to connector C13S for external module use.
2070.73 Engine Board
The TYPE 2070-1C CPU module shall use an Engine Board compliant to the
AASHTO/ITE/NEMA ATC Standard with exceptions as defined in Section IV. The Engine
Board shall be used for execution of the application software. No other microprocessor or
memory of the 2070-1C CPU to be used for execution of the application software.
2070.74 Ethernet Ports
The ETHERNET ports of the Engine Board shall be brought out on an RJ 45 Connectors
mounted on the 2070-1C front panel. The front panel LED indicators for the two CPU
Ethernet ports shall be provided as indicated in Figure A9-15 in the Appendix.
2070.75 Network Switches
The Model 2070-1C CPU Module shall be provided with two integrated Store-and-Forward
Network Switches per the IEEE 802.3u and 802.3x specifications. One switch shall be
configured with port 1 and 2 connected to the front panel RJ-45 connectors and port 3 shall
be connected to the CPU ENET 1 port. The second switch shall be configured with port 1
connected to the front panel RJ-45, port 2 shall be connected to the CPU ENET 2 port. Port
3 shall be used to route Ethernet across the Motherboard to the “A” Connectors. DC
Grounding plane around the network connectors and lines shall be provided. Port 3 Network
Lines shall be assigned to: NetP5 TX+, TX-, RX+ and RX- respectively.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A18 of 107
2070.76 Universal Serial Bus (USB)
Except as noted in SECTION VII - TYPE 2070-3D USB FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY,
the TYPE 2070-1C CPU module shall include a USB port compliant to the
AASHTO/ITE/NEMA ATC Standard, with exceptions that the USB shall conform to
appropriate sections of the USB v3.0 specification for both hardware and software
operations. USB shall be brought out from the Engine Board to a USB Connector mounted
on the 2070-1C front panel. The USB Mass Storage device shall use the FAT file system as
configured in the latest approved version of Annex A – Minimum Linux Kernel
Configuration of the ATC AASHTO/ITE/NEMA Standard.
2070.77 Host Module Identification
The TYPE 2070-1C CPU module shall use a Host Module that provides the mechanical and
electrical interfaces to the Engine Board and Mother Board. The TYPE 2070-1C CPU
module shall implement the host module identification using the Engine Board SPI serial
port, compliant to the latest approved version of the AASHTO/ITE/NEMA ATC Standard.
2070.78 ATC Controller Board Support Package (BSP)
The BSP supplied by the manufacturer shall provide operating-system-level support for
engine board. The ATC shall use a Linux operating system (O/S) and shall include standard
POSIX libraries for application support including real-time extensions of POSIX 1003.1b.
To facilitate application level access to the ATC hardware, a Board Support Package (BSP)
shall be provided for access to hardware-specific drivers.
After boot-up the ATC Linux O/S shall make available to applications, access to the low
level drivers (block, character and network) provided by the kernel (subject to current open
source requirements) or through kernel modules.
The BSP supplied by a manufacturer shall include the following components:
1) A Linux compatible kernel that shall be configured to include, at minimum, the features
specified in the latest approved version of Annex A – Minimum Linux Kernel
Configuration of the ATC AASHTO/ITE/NEMA Standard.
2) Drivers that support all functionality defined by Section 5.3 of the ATC
AASHTO/ITE/NEMA Standard (and Section III and IV of this specification), On-Board
Resources; and Section 5.4.3 (and paragraph 2070.69 of this specification), Serial Interface
Ports, of the ATC AASHTO/ITE/NEMA Standard, and be capable of operating in an
interrupt driven environment where appropriate. Drivers for the following engine board
hardware are required:
Function Character Block Network Interrupt
/dev/sp1 Asynchronous Port X X
/dev/sp1s Synchronous Port X X
/dev/sp2 Asynchronous Port X X
/dev/sp2s Synchronous Port X X
/dev/sp3 Asynchronous Port X X
/dev/sp3s Synchronous Port X X
/dev/sp4 Asynchronous Port (Note 1) X X
/dev/sp5s Synchronous Port X X
/dev/sp6 Asynchronous Port X X
/dev/sp8 Asynchronous Port X X
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A19 of 107
Function Character Block Network Interrupt
/dev/sp8s Synchronous Port X X
Ethernet 1 X X
Ethernet 2 X X
USB X X
SPI X X
CPU Reset X
CPU Active LED X
Power Down X X
RTC X
Datakey Present X X
Flash File System X X
SRAM File System X
Notes: A Linux console shall be provided on /dev/tty4 (/dev/console) at boot-up. All
terminal outputs during boot time shall be made to that interface. All inputs are made via a
terminal program to that interface. This interface is the default stdin / stdout of Linux. The
communication parameters are initially 38400 baud, n, 8, 1. The same communication
parameters shall be used by the boot-loader in order to ensure a continuous output to the
serial terminal / console. After booting and all applications are loaded, /dev/tty4 shall be
available to applications as /dev/sp4 unless the single-user mode Linux feature has been
invoked via Ctrl-C during the boot process before control is passed to any application
programs.
See the latest approved version of Annex B – Required Device Driver Interfaces of the
ATC AASHTO/ITE/NEMA Standard for BSP-specified driver interface details.
3) Utility applications, modules, libraries and supporting data which include, but are not
limited to, the following:
Package Version* Programs Remarks
Busybox 1.00p8 [, addgroup, adduser, adjtimex, ar,
ash, basename, busybox, cat,
chgrp, chmod, chown, chroot,
clear, cmp, cp, crond, crontab, cut,
date, dd, delgroup, deluser, df,
dirname, dmesg, dos2unix,
du, echo, egrep, env, expr, false,
fgrep, find, freeramdisk, getty,
grep, gunzip, gzip, halt, head,
hexdump, hostid, hostname,
hwclock, id, ifconfig, ifdown, ifup,
inetd, init, insmod, install,
kill, killall, klogd, last, ln, logger,
login, logname, logread, ls,
lsmod, makedevs, md5sum, mesg,
mkdir, mkfifo, mknod, mktemp,
modprobe, more, mount, mv,
netstat, nslookup, passwd, patch,
pidof, ping, pivot_root, printf, ps,
pwd, rdate, reboot, renice, reset,
UNIX shell and commands
collection
http://www.busybox.net/
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A20 of 107
rm, rmdir, rmmod, route, run-parts,
rx, sed, sh, sleep, sort, start-stop-
daemon, stty, su, sulogin, sync,
sysctl, syslogd, tail, tar, tee, telnet,
telnetd, test, time, top, touch, tr,
true, tty, umount, uname, uniq,
unix2dos, unzip, uptime, usleep,
vi, wc, which, who, whoami,
xargs, yes, zcat
UclibC 0.9.27 ld.so, libc, libcrypt.so, libdl.so
libm.so, libnsl.so, libnss_dns.so,
libnss_files.so, libpthread.so,
libresolv.so, libutil.so
Uclibc Equivalent
http://www.uclibc.org/
downloads
*or higher
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A21 of 107
SECTION IV - MODEL 2070-1C CPU (Engine Board)
2070.79 General
Appendix B of this specification provides a copy of the AASHTO/ITE/NEMA ATC
Standard Annex B. Annex B specifies the device driver interfaces required by the standard.
Linux drivers are specified and no further detail is given. Each driver interface summary is
described below.
2070.80 Model 2070 -1C CPU Module Processor
The Model 2070-1C CPU Module Processor shall utilize a Freescale 32 bit MPC series
processor with PowerQUICK architecture that shall have a minimum computational
capability of 60 MIPS calculated using the Dhrystone v2.1 benchmark.
2070.81 FLASH Memory
The Model 2070-1C CPU Module shall contain a minimum of 64Mbytes of FLASH
Memory for storage of OS Software and user application.
2070.82 Dynamic RAM (DRAM)
The Model 2070-1C CPU Module shall contain a minimum of 64 Mbytes of DRAM or
equivalent volatile memory for application and OS program execution.
2070.83 Static RAM (SRAM)
The Model 2070-1C CPU Module shall contain a minimum of 1 MB minimum of SRAM
memory for non-volatile parameter storage.
2070.84 Standby Power
The Model 2070-1C CPU Module Engine Board shall provide the Standby Power required
for supporting the SRAM and RTC.
2070.85 Real-Time Clock (RTC)
The Model 2070-1C Module shall be provided with a software settable, hardware RTC that
meets the requirements of the ASHTO/ITE/NEMA ATC Standard except that in the absence
of VPRIMARY, the RTC shall operate from VSTANBY as listed in Figure A9-16 of
Appendix D of this Specification. Operating System Time shall be maintained by utilizing
the RTC and LINESYNC as defined by 2070-162 of this specification.
2070.86 CPU_RESET
A software-driven CPU_RESET Signal (Active Low) shall be provided to reset other
system devices and shall be accessible by application programs as well as by the command
line as “cpureset”. CPU_RESET shall be executed when the Controller starts up or is
rebooted using the reboot command.
2070.87 CPU_ACTIVE
An Active Low signal shall be provided to drive the Front Panel Assembly CPU_ACTIVE
LED indicator. This signal shall cause to the LED to default to ON when the controller
starts up.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A22 of 107
APPLICATION PROGRAM INTERFACE (API)
2070.88 ATC API Standard
The Model 2070-1C Module shall be fully compliant and shall be provided, upon request,
with an installed copy of the Application Program Interface (API) compliant to the latest
ASHTO/ITE/NEMA ATC API Standard.
2070.89 Integrated Security
The Model 2070-1C Module shall be implemented with integrated security support for DES,
3DES, MD-5, SHA-1, AES and ARC-4 encryption algorithms as well as a public key
accelerator and an on-chip random number generator.
2070.90 Serial Communications Interface Ports
The engine board shall provide seven serial communications ports. These ports are
described below. Each port shall be capable of operating at a completely independent bit
rate from all other ports. All interface pins shall operate at logic-levels. Input pins are
indicated by (I), output pins by (O). All ports are not expected to operate at maximum speed
simultaneously. The following communication channel loads for test purposes, with no
other activity present shall be the following:
SP1,2,8 = Continuous full-duplex, asynchronous communications at 19.2Kbps
SP4,6 = Continuous full-duplex, asynchronous communications at 38.4Kbps
SP3S = Continuous full-duplex, synchronous communications at 153.6Kbps
SP5S = Continuous full-duplex synchronous communications at 614.4Kbps
All Ethernet Ports: At 10% loading, with 3% average hits to processor per minute
No other applications or I/O activities are required to be operational during this test.
Serial Port 1 (SP1)
Principal Usage: general-purpose
Operating Modes: ASYNC / SYNC / HDLC / SDLC
Asynchronous Rates (bps): 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19.2k / 38.4k Optional:
57.6k / 115.2k
Synchronous Rates (bps): 19.2k / 38.4k / 57.6k / 76.8k / 153.6k
Interface Pins: SP1_TXD: Transmit Data (O)
SP1_RXD: Receive Data (I)
SP1_RTS: Request To Send (O)
SP1_CTS: Clear To Send (I)
SP1_CD: Carrier Detect (I)
SP1_TXC_INT: Transmit Clock Internal (O)
SP1_TXC_EXT: Transmit Clock External (I)
SP1_RXC_EXT: Receive Clock External (I)
Serial Port 2 (SP2)
Principal Usage: general-purpose
Operating Modes: ASYNC / SYNC / HDLC / SDLC
Asynchronous Rates (bps): 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19.2k / 38.4k Optional:
57.6k / 115.2k
Synchronous Rates (bps): 19.2k / 38.4k / 57.6k / 76.8k / 153.6k
Interface Pin: SP2_TXD: Transmit Data (O)
SP2_RXD: Receive Data (I)
SP2_RTS: Request To Send (O)
SP2_CTS: Clear To Send (I)
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A23 of 107
SP2_CD: Carrier Detect (I)
SP2_TXC_INT: Transmit Clock Internal (O)
SP2_TXC_EXT: Transmit Clock External (I)
SP2_RXC_EXT: Receive Clock External (I)
Serial Port 3 (SP3)
Principal Usage: in-cabinet devices
Operating Modes: ASYNC / SYNC / HDLC / SDLC
Asynchronous Rates (bps): 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19.2k / 38.4k Optional:
57.6k / 115.2k
Synchronous Rates (bps): 153.6k / 614.4k
Interface Pins: SP3_TXD: Transmit Data (O)
SP3_RXD: Receive Data (I)
SP3_RTS: Request To Send (O)
SP3_CTS: Clear To Send (I)
SP3_CD: Carrier Detect (I)
SP3_TXC_INT: Transmit Clock Internal (O)
SP3_TXC_EXT: Transmit Clock External (I)
SP3_RXC_EXT: Receive Clock External (I)
Serial Port 4 (SP4)
Principal Usage: external user-interface (console) and general purpose
Operating Modes: ASYNC
Asynchronous Rates (bps): 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19.2k / 38.4k Optional:
57.6k / 115.2k
Interface Pins: SP4_TXD: Transmit Data (O)
SP4_RXD: Receive Data (I)
Serial Port 5 (SP5)
Principal Usage: in-cabinet devices
Operating Modes: SYNC / HDLC / SDLC
Synchronous Rates (bps): 153.6k / 614.4k
Interface Pins: SP5_TXD: Transmit Data (O)
SP5_RXD: Receive Data (I)
SP5_TXC_INT: Transmit Clock Internal (O)
SP5_RXC_EXT: Receive Clock External (I)
Serial Port 6 (SP6)
Principal Usage: front panel user-interface
Operating Modes: ASYNC
Asynchronous Rates (bps): 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19.2k / 38.4k Optional:
57.6k / 115.2k
Interface Pins: SP6_TXD: Transmit Data (O)
SP6_RXD: Receive Data (I)
Serial Port 8 (SP8)
Principal Usage: general-purpose
Operating Modes: ASYNC / SYNC / HDLC / SDLC
Asynchronous Rates (bps): 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19.2k / 38.4k Optional:
57.6k / 115.2k
Synchronous Rates (bps): 19.2k / 38.4k / 57.6k / 76.8k / 153.6k
Interface Pins: SP8_TXD: Transmit Data (O)
SP8_RXD: Receive Data (I)
SP8_RTS: Request To Send (O)
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A24 of 107
SP8_CTS: Clear To Send (I)
SP8_CD: Carrier Detect (I)
SP8_TXC_INT: Transmit Clock Internal (O)
SP8_RXC_EXT: Receive Clock External (I)
2070.91 Serial Peripheral Interface Port
The engine board shall provide a synchronous Serial Peripheral Interface Port. All SPI
interface pins shall be at HCT logic-levels. Input pins are indicated by (I), output pins by
(O).
The implementation of SPI_SEL_1 is required to support DataKey operations.
The implementation of SPI_SEL_2 is required to support a host module serial EEPROM
device containing controller configuration information. The content and organization of the
information will be described in the BSP. This EEPROM device shall have the following
characteristics:
Function in a manner similar to a 25020-type (2K-bit) SPI EEPROM device
Have a minimum size of 2 Kbit organized as 256 words of 8 bits each
Provide 5V interface signals
Operate properly with up to a 2.0 MHz SPI clock
Utilize SPI Mode 0 (CPOL=0, CPHA=0)
Be write-protected (using *WP pin) whenever POWERUP is LOW
Be readable from application software during normal ATC operation
Support the following instruction set:
Instruction Description Instruction
Format
WREN Write Enable 0000 X110
WRDI Write Disable 0000 X100
RDSR Read Status Register 0000 X101
WRSR Write Status Register 0000 X001
READ Read from Memory
Array 0000 A8011
WRITE Write to Memory Array 0000 A8010
Note: A8 represents MSB address bit A8
SPI_SEL_3 is currently unimplemented and is reserved for future SPI-related expansion.
SPI_SEL_4 is manufacturer specific.
2070.92 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
Principal Usage: DataKey / serial EEPROM interface
Operating Modes: SYNC
Synchronous Rates (bps): (application-specific)
Interface Pins: SPI_MOSI: Master-Out-Slave-In (O)
SPI_MISO: Master-In-Slave-Out (I)
SPI_CLK: Clock (O)
SPI_SEL_1: Select 1 (O)
SPI_SEL_2: Select 2 (O)
SPI_SEL_3: Select 3 (O)
SPI_SEL_4: Select 4 (O)
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A25 of 107
2070.93 Data Key
Provide a DATAKEY Keyceptacle (KC4210, KC4210PCB or equal) shall be mounted on
the CPU module front panel. Power shall not be applied to the receptacle if the key is not
present.
The Manufacturer shall supply a 3.3 Volt, 8-Mb Memory Size Datakey (SFK8Mb or equal)
with each MODEL 1C CPU module. The Datakey shall be temperature rated for –40°C to
+85°C (-40°F to 185°F) operation, be blue in color, and shall be initialized to the format and
default values defined below. External capability to program the CPU Datakey shall be
provided by the Manufacturer.
When programmed, the memory on the key of header shall be organized as follows:
Bytes Description Default Values
1-2
16 bit Frame Check Sequence (FCS)
calculated as defined in clause 4.6.2 of
ISO/IEC 3309. This FCS is calculated across
bytes 3-64
3 Key Type See table below
4 Header Version 2
5-8 Latitude 0.0
9-12 Longitude 0.0
13-14 Controller ID 0xFFFF
15-16 Communication drop number 0xFFFF
17-20 IP Address 10.20.70.51
21-24 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
25-28 Default Gateway 10.20.70.254
29 Startup Override 0xFF
30-64 Reserved for Agency use All bytes set to 0xFF
65 to End User Data All bytes set to 0xFF
When programmed, Byte 3 of the header must contain the Key Type value as defined in the
following table:
Key Type Model No. Memory Size Sector Size Part Number
1 DK1000 1 KiloByte 2 Byte 611-0006-002A
2 LCK16000 16 KiloBytes 2 Byte 611-0070-008A
3 SFK2Mb 2 megabytes 64 KiloBytes 611-0089-004A
4 SFK4Mb 4 megabytes 64 KiloBytes 611-0104-002A
5 SFK8Mb 8 megabytes 64 KiloBytes 611-0132-006A
6 SFK32MB 32 megabytes 64 KiloBytes 611-0164-005A
The data format in the CPU Datakey header for the Latitude and Longitude fields shall
comply with IEEE/ANSI 754-1985 STD. All the other fields follow a Big Endian Format as
implemented by Motorola CPUs.
The Startup Override byte, not the Key Type, may be used to override the default controller
startup procedure as defined below.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A26 of 107
2070.94 Start-Up Consideration and Sequence
The engine board low-level hardware and O/S software initialization shall be completed and
application software shall be capable of exercising control of all ATC unit hardware within a
maximum of 4.5 seconds from the rise of both the POWERUP and POWERDOWN signals
to the HIGH state. In order that the startup time requirement may be verified, an application
program shall be provided by the manufacturer, as an independently-loaded software
module, which will activate the CPU_ACTIVE signal.
Start-Up Sequence. The engine board shall provide circuitry to prevent writing to the
SRAM area and to keep the processor in a RESET state any time that VPRIMARY is less
than the minimum-specified operating voltage regardless of the state of the POWERUP or
POWERDOWN signals.
The BSP supplied by the vendor shall provide operating-system-level support for the engine
board. See Paragraph 2070.60 Operating System & Board Support Package Requirements.
Startup Sequence
The BSP performs many steps starting from system reset to configure all low-level
hardware, file systems and system level drivers for such items as SP4, SP6, timers, etc.
The bootstrap code:
Initializes the microprocessor(s) internal registers
Does low level memory subsystem and peripheral initialization
Decompresses the Linux kernel, if compressed, and moves it from flash
EPROM to DRAM
Creates an initial RAM disk (initrd) if needed
Boots the kernel
The kernel then:
Parses the kernel command line if provided
Determines the processor MIPs rating (BogoMIPS)
Determines available memory and many other things
Loads compiled-in BSP drivers
Creates the RAM disk(s) from the flash EPROM image
Frees up memory used by the initial RAM disk
Starts processing the startup scripts
The startup scripts, which run before the prompt is displayed on the terminal, should then:
Install any additional time-critical BSP driver modules.
(The steps listed above must be completed within the time period specified above.)
Start time-critical user applications
Start IP stack protocol modules
Start other driver modules
Start other applications
The file /etc/inittab is the main location to put calls to startup scripts.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A27 of 107
SECTION V – TYPE 2070-2 FIELD I/O MODULE
2070.95 Type 2070-2A Field I/O Module (FI/O)
The TYPE 2070-2A MODULE consists of the Field Controller Unit; Parallel Input/Output
Ports; other Module Circuit Functions (includes muzzle switch); Serial Communication
Circuitry; Module Connectors C1S, C11S, and C12S mounted on the module front plate;
VDC Power Supply (+12VDC to +5VDC); and required resident software.
2070.96 Type 2070-2B Field I/O Module (FI/O)
The TYPE 2070-2B MODULE shall consist of the Serial Communication Circuitry, DC
Power Supply, and Module Connector C12S mounted on the module front plate only.
2070.97 Field F/O Controller Unit (FCU)
The FCU shall include a programmable microprocessor/controller unit together with all
required clocking and support circuitry. The FCU shall be provided with in-circuit re-
programmability via JTAG or BDM port. FCU shall be provided with operational software
necessary to meet housekeeping and functional requirements resident in socketed firmware.
2070.98 Parallel Input Port
The Parallel Input Ports shall provide 64 bits of input using ground-true logic. Each input
shall be read logic “1” when the input voltage at its field connector input is less than 3.5
VDC, and be read logic “0” when either the input current is less than 100 µA or the input
voltage exceeds 8.5 VDC. Each input shall have an internal pull-up to the Isolated +12 VDC
and not deliver greater than 20 Ma to a short circuit to ground. The pull-up resistance shall
not be less than 10K or more than 50 K Ohms.
2070.99 Parallel Output Port
The Parallel Output Ports shall provide 64 bits of output. Each output written as logic “1”
shall have a voltage at its field connector output of less than 4.o VDC. Each output written
as logic “0” shall provide an open circuit (1 Mega Ohm or more) at its field connector
output. Each output shall consist of an open-collector capable of driving 40 VDC minimum
and sinking 100 Ma minimum. Each output circuit shall be capable of switching from logic
“1” to “0” within 100 µs when connected to a load of 100K-Ohms minimum. Each output
circuit shall be protected from transients of 10 ±2µs duration, ±300 VDC from 1 K-Ohm
source, with a maximum rate of 1 pulse per second.
2070.100 Output Operation
Each output shall latch the data written and remain stable until either new data is written or
the active-low reset signal. Upon an active-low reset signal, each output shall latch LOGIC
“0” and retain that state until a new writing. The state of all output circuits at the time of
Power Up or in Power Down state shall be open. It shall be possible to simultaneously
assert all outputs within 100 µs of each other. An output circuit state not changed during a
new writing shall not glitch when other output circuits are updated.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A28 of 107
OTHER MODULE CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS.
2070.101 Maximum Capacitive Load
A maximum capacitive load of 100 picrofarads shall be presented to the LINESYNC input
signal. The EIA-485 compliant differential LINESYNC signals shall be derived from the
LINESYNC signal.
2070.102 External WDT “Enable” Shunt/Toggle Switch
An External WDT “Enable” Shunt/Toggle Switch shall be provided on the board. With the
jumper IN and NRESET transitions HIGH (FCU active), the FCU shall output a state change
on Output 39 Monitor Watchdog Timer Input) every 100 milliseconds for 10 seconds or due
to Set Output Command. When the shunt is missing (open), the feature will not apply. This
feature is required to operate with the Type 210 Monitor Unit only.
2070.103 WATCHDOG Circuit
An FCU Watchdog Circuit shall be provided. It shall be enabled by FIELD I/O firmware at
Power Up with a value of 100 milliseconds. Its enabled state shall be machine readable and
reported in the FI/O status byte. Once enabled, the watchdog timer shall not be disabled
without resetting the FI/O. Failure of the FI/O to reset the watchdog timer within the
prescribed timeout will result in a hardware reset.
2070.104 One KHz Reference
A synchronizable 1 KHz time reference. It shall maintain a frequency accuracy of ±0.01%
(±0.1 counts per second).
2070.105 32 Bit Millisecond Counter
A 32-bit MILLISECOND COUNTER (MC) for “time stamping” shall be provided.” Each 1
KHz reference interrupt shall increment the MC.
2070.106 Power Up
At Power Up, the FCU loss of communication timer shall indicate loss of communication
until the user program sends the Request Module Status message to reset the “E” Bit.
2070.107 Logic Switch
A LOGIC Switch shall be provided resident on the module board. The switch shall function
to disconnect Serial Port 3 (SP3) from the external world, Connector C12S. Its purpose is to
prevent multiple use of SP3. An LED shall be provided on the module front panel labeled
“SP3 ON”. If LED light ON, SP3 is active and available at C12S.
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS/LOGIC CIRCUITRY
2070.108 System Serial Port 5 (SP5) EIA 485 Signal
System Serial Port 5 (SP5) EIA-485 signal lines shall enter the Field I/O Module and be split
into two multi-drop isolated ports. Route one to the FCU and the other converted to EIA-
485, then routed to Connector C12S.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A29 of 107
2070.109 System Serial Port 3 (SP3) EIA 485 Signal
System Serial Port 3 (SP3) EIA-485 signal lines shall enter the Field I/O Module and be
isolated, converted back to EIA-485 and then routed to Connector C12S.
2070.110 LINE SYNC and POWER DOWN
LINE SYNC and POWER DOWN lines shall be split and isolated, one routed to the FCU
for shut down functions and the other changed to EIA-485; then routed to connector C12S
for external module use.
2070.111 CPU RESET and POWER UP
CPU_ RESET and POWER UP (SysReset) lines shall be isolated and “OR’d” to form
NRESET. NRESET shall be used to reset the FCU and other module devices. NRESET
shall also be converted to EIA-485 then routed to Connector C12S.
2070.112 Module 2070-2B
If the Type 2070 module is a –2B, routing to FCU does not apply.
2070.113 Internal Isolation
Isolation is between internal +5 DC / DCG#1 and +12 DC ISO / DCG #2. +12 DC ISO is
for board power and external logic.
2070.114 Buffers
Transition Buffer capable of holding a minimum of 1024 recorded entries shall be provided.
The Transition Buffer shall default to empty. There shall be two entry types: Transition and
Rollover. The inputs shall be monitored for state transition. At each transition (If the input
has been configured to report transition), a transition entry shall be added to the Transition
Buffer. The MC shall be monitored for rollover. At each rollover transition ($xxxx FFFF -
$xxxx 0000), a rollover entry shall be added to the Transition Buffer. For rollover entries,
all bits of byte 1 are set to indicate that this is a rollover entry. Transition Buffer blocks are
sent to the CPU Module upon command. Upon confirmation of their reception, the blocks
shall be removed from the Transition Buffer.
I/O FUNCTIONS.
2070.115 Inputs
Input scanning shall begin at I0 (bit 0) and proceed to the highest numbered input I63, from
LSB to MSB in increasing input number. Each complete input scan shall finish within 100
µs. Once sampled, the logic state of an input shall be held until the next input scan. Each
input shall be sampled 1,000 times per second. The time interval between samples must be 1
ms (±100 µs). If configured to report, each input that has transitioned since its last
sampling shall be identified by input number, transition state, and timestamp (at the time the
input scan began) and be added as an entry to the Transition Buffer. If multiple inputs
change state during one input sample, these transitions shall be entered into the Input
Transition Buffer by increasing input number. The MC shall be sampled within 10 µs of the
completion of the input scan.
2070.116 Data Filtering
If configured, the inputs shall be filtered by the FCU to remove signal bounce. The filtered
input signals shall then be monitored for changes as noted. The filtering parameters for each
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A30 of 107
input shall consist of Ignore Input Flag and the ON and OFF filter samples. If the Ignore
Input flag is set, no input transitions will be recorded. The ON and OFF filter samples shall
determine the number of consecutive samples an input shall be ON and OFF, respectively,
before a change of state is recognized. If the change of state is shorter than the specified
value, the change of state shall be ignored. The ON and OFF filter values shall be in the
range of 0 to 255. A filter value of 0, for either or both values, shall result in no filtering for
this input. The default values for input signals after reset shall be as follows:
Filtering Enabled
On and off filter values shall be set to 5
Transition monitoring Disabled (Timestamps are not logged)
2070.117 Outputs
Simultaneous assertion of all outputs shall occur within 100 µs. Each output shall be
capable of being individually configured in state to ON, OFF, or a state synchronized with
either phase of LINESYNC. The condition of the outputs shall only be "ON" if the FI/O
continues to receive active communications from the CPU Module. If there is no valid
communications with the CPU Module for 2.0 seconds, all outputs shall revert to the OFF
condition, and the Module Status Byte shall be updated to reflect the loss of communication
from the CPU Module.
2070.118 Standard Function
Each output shall be controlled by the data and control bits in the CPU Module Field I/O
frame protocol as follows:
Output Bit Translation
Case
Output
Data
Bit
Output
Control
Bit
Function
A 0 0 Output in the OFF state
B 1 1
Output is a square wave, synchronized to the
LINESYNC signal. When LINESYNC is ON (1), the
output is OFF, and when LINESYNC is OFF (0), the
output is ON.
C 0 1
Output is a square wave, synchronized to the
LINESYNC signal. When LINESYNC is ON (1), the
output is ON, and when LINESYNC is OFF (0), the
output is OFF
D 1 0 Output is in the ON state.
2070.119 CASE A
In Case A above, the corresponding output shall be turned OFF if previously ON and if
previously OFF remain OFF until otherwise configured. For half-cycle switching (cases B
and C), all outputs to be changed shall be changed within 50 µs after the corresponding
LINESYNC transition and shall remain in the same state during the entire half cycle. In
Case D above, the corresponding output shall be turned ON if previously OFF and if
previously ON remains ON until otherwise configured. All outputs shall neither glitch nor
change state unless configured to do so.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A31 of 107
2070.120 Interrupts
All interrupts shall be capable of asynchronous operation with respect to all processing and
all other interrupts. MILLISECOND Interrupt shall be activated by the 1 KHz reference
once per ms. A timestamp rollover flag set by MC rollover shall be cleared only on
command. LINESYNC Interrupt both the 0-1 and 1-0 transitions of the LINESYNC signal
shall generate this interrupt. The LINESYNC interrupt shall monitor the MC interrupt and
set the MC error flag if there has not been an interrupt from the 1 KHz source for 0.5
seconds (≥60 consecutive LINESYNC interrupts). The LINESYNC interrupt shall
synchronize the 1 KHz time reference with the 0-1 transition of the LINESYNC signal once
a second. A LINESYNC error flag shall be set if the LINESYNC interrupt has not
successfully executed for 0.5 seconds or longer (≥500 consecutive ms interrupts).
2070.121 Communication Service Routine
A low-level communication service routine shall be provided to handle reception,
transmission, and EIA-485 communication faults. The communication server shall
automatically:
For Transmission
Generate the opening and closing flags
Generate the CRC value
Generate the abort sequence (minimum of 8 consecutive '1' bits) when commanded
by the FCU
Provide zero bit insertion
For Receiving
Detect the opening and closing flags
Provide address comparison, generating an interrupt for messages addressed to the
Field I/O Module, and ignoring messages not addressed to the Field I/O Module
Strip out inserted zeros
Calculate the CRC value, compare it to the received value, and generate an interrupt
on an error
Generate an interrupt if an abort sequence is received
2070.122 Communication Processing
This task shall be to process the command messages received from the CPU Module,
prepare, and start the response transmission. The response message transmission shall begin
within 4 milliseconds of the receipt of the received message. Message type processing time
constraint shall not exceed 70 milliseconds per message.
2070.123 Input Processing
This task shall process the raw input data scanned in by the 1 ms interrupt routine, perform
all filtering, and maintain the transition queue entries.
DATA COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOLS.
2070.124 Communication Protocol
All communication between the CPU Module and the Field I/O shall be SDLC-compatible
command-response protocol, support 0 bit stuffing, and operate at a data rate of 614.4
kilobits per second. The CPU Module shall always initiate the communication and should
the command frame be incomplete or there is an error, no Field I/O response will be
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A32 of 107
transmitted. The amount of bytes of a command or response is dependent upon the Field I/O
Module identification.
2070.125 Frame Types
The frame type shall be determined by the value of the first byte of the message. The
command frames type values 112-127 ($70-$7F) and associated response frame type values
240-255 ($F0- $FF) are allocated to the manufacturer diagnostics. All other frame types not
called out are reserved. The command-response Frame Type values and message times shall
be as follows:
Frame Types
Module
Command
I/0 Module
Response Description
Minimum
Message
Time
Maximum
Message
Time
0-43 128-171 Reserved for NEMA TS-2
44-48 172-176 Reserved
49 177 Request Module Status 250 µs 275 µs
50 178 MC Management 222.5 µs 237.5 µs
51 179 Configure Inputs 344.5 µs 6.8750 µs
52 180 Poll Raw Input Data 317.5 µs 320 µs
53 181 Poll Filtered Input Data 317.5 µs 320 µs
54 182 Poll Input Transition Buffer 300 µs 10.25 µs
55 183 Set Outputs 405 µs 410 µs
56 184 Configure Input Tracking 340 µs 10.25 µs
57 185 Configure Complex Outputs 340 µs 6.875 µs
58 186 Configure Watchdog 222.5 µs 222.5 µs
59 187 Controller Identification 222.5 µs 222.5 µs
60 188 I/O Module Identification 222.5 µs 222.5 µs
61-62 189-190 Reserved (note below) --- ---
63 191 Poll variable length raw input
(note below) 317.5 µs 320 µs
64 192 Variable length command outputs 405 µs 410 µs
65 193 Reserved (note below) --- ---
67 195 Reserved (note below) --- ---
68-111 196-239 Reserved --- ---
112-127 240-255 Manufacture Diagnostics --- ---
Note: ITS Cabinet Monitor. Messages 61 / 189, 62 / 190, 65 / 193, are reserved for ITS
Cabinet Monitor Unit. See ITS Cabinet Monitor System Serial Bus #1 for Command and
Response Frames. Message 63 / Message 191 shall be the same as Message 52 / 180 except
Byte 2 of Message 63 response shall denote the following number of input data bytes.
Message 64 / 192 shall be the same as Message 55 / 183 except Byte 2 of the Message 64
Command shall denote the number of output data bytes, plus the following output control
bytes.
2070.126 Request Module Status
The Command shall be used to request FI/O status information response.
Command/response frames are as follows:
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A33 of 107
Request Module Status Command
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 49) 0 0110001 Byte 1
Reset Status Bits P E K R T M L W Byte 2
Request Module Status Response
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 177) 1 011000 1 Byte 1
System Status P E K R T M L W Byte 2
SCC Receive Error Count Receive Error Count Byte 3
SCC Transmit Error Count Transmit Error Count Byte 4
MC Timestamp MSB MC Timestamp MSB Byte 5
MC Timestamp NMSB MC Timestamp NMSB Byte 6
MC Timestamp NLSB MC Timestamp NLSB Byte 7
MC Timestamp LSB MC Timestamp LSB Byte 8
2070.127 Status Bits
The response status bits are defined as follows:
P Indicates FI/O hardware reset
E Indicates a communications loss of greater than 2 seconds
K Indicates the Datakey has failed or is not present
R Indicates that the SCC Receive Error count byte has rolled over
T Indicates that the SCC Transmit Error count byte has rolled over
M Indicates an error with the MC interrupt
L Indicates an error in the LINESYNC
W Indicates that the FI/O has been reset by the Watchdog
2070.128 Request Module Status
Each of these bits shall be individually reset by a “1” in the corresponding bit of any
subsequent Request Module Status frame, and the response frame shall report the current
status bits. The SCC error count bytes shall not be reset. When an SCC error count rolls
over (255-0), its corresponding roll-over flag shall be set.
2070.129 MC Management
MC MANAGEMENT frame shall be used to set the value of the MC. The 'S' bit shall return
status '0' on completion or “1” on error. The 32-bit value shall be loaded into the MC at the
next 0-1 transition of the LINESYNC signal. The frames are as follows:
MC Management Command
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 50) 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 Byte 1
New MC Timestamp MSB x x x x x x x x Byte 2
New MC Timestamp NMSB x x x x x x x x Byte 3
New MC Timestamp NLSB x x x x x x x x Byte 4
New MC Timestamp LSB x x x x x x x x Byte 5
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A34 of 107
MC Management Response
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 178) 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 Byte 1
Status 0 000000S Byte 2
2070.130 Configure Inputs Commands
The Configure Inputs command frame shall be used to change input configurations. The
command-response frames are as follows:
Configure Inputs Command
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 51) 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Byte 1
Number of Items (n) n nnnnnnn Byte 2
Item # - Byte 1 E Input Number Byte 3(I-1)+3
Item # - Byte 2 Leading edge filter (e) Byte 3(I-1)+4
Item # - Byte 3 Trailing edge filter (r) Byte 3(I-1)+5
Configure Inputs Response
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 179) 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Byte 1
Status 0 000000S Byte 2
Block field definitions shall be as follows:
E Ignore Input Flag. "1" = do not report transitions for this input, "0" = report
transitions for this input
e A one-byte leading edge filter specifying the number of consecutive input samples
which shall be "0" before the input is considered to have entered to "0" state from "1" state
(range 1 to 255, 0 = disabled)
r A one-byte trailing edge filter specifying the number of consecutive input samples
which shall be "1" before the input is considered to have entered to "1" state from "0" state
(range 1 to 255, 0 = disabled)
S return status S = '0' on completion or '1' on input error out of range
2070.131 Poll Raw Input Data
The Poll Raw Input Data frame shall be used to poll the FI/O for the current unfiltered status
of all inputs. The response frame shall contain 8 bytes (2A) or 15 bytes (2B) of information
indicating the current status of the inputs. The frames are as follows:
Poll Raw Input Data Command
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 52) 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Byte 1
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A35 of 107
Poll Raw Input Data Response (2070-2A)
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 180) 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Byte 1
Inputs I0 (lsb) to I7 (msb) x x x x x x x x Byte 2
Inputs I8 to I63 x x x x x x x x Bytes 3 to 9
Timestamp MSB x x x x x x x x Byte 10
Timestamp NMSB x x x x x x x x Byte 11
Timestamp NLSB x x x x x x x x Byte 12
Timestamp LSB x x x x x x x x Byte 13
Poll Raw Input Data Response (2070-8 via 2070-2B)
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 180) 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Byte 1
Inputs I0 (lsb) to I7 (msb) x x x x x x x x Byte 2
Inputs I8 to I119 x x x x x x x x Bytes 3 to 16
Timestamp MSB x x x x x x x x Byte 17
Timestamp NMSB x x x x x x x x Byte 18
Timestamp NLSB x x x x x x x x Byte 19
Timestamp LSB x x x x x x x x Byte 20
2070.132 Poll Filtered Input Data
The Poll Filtered Input Data frame shall be used to poll the FI/O for the current filtered
status of all inputs. The response frame shall contain 8 bytes (2A) or 15 bytes (2B) of
information indicating the current filtered status of the inputs. Raw input data shall be
provided in the response for inputs that are not configured for filtering. The frames are as
follows:
Poll Filter Input Data Command
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 53) 0 011010 1 Byte 1
Poll Filter Input Data Response (2070-2A)
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 181) 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Byte 1
Inputs I0 (lsb) to I7 (msb) x x x x x x x x Byte 2
Inputs I8 to I63 x x x x x x x x Bytes 3 to 9
Timestamp MSB x xxxxxx x Byte 10
Timestamp NMSB x xxxxxx x Byte 11
Timestamp NLSB x xxxxxx x Byte 12
Timestamp LSB x xxxxxx x Byte 13
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A36 of 107
Poll Filter Input Data Response (2070-8 via 2070-2B)
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 181) 1 011010 1 Byte 1
Inputs I0 (lsb) to I7 (msb) x xxxxxx x Byte 2
Inputs I8 to I119 x xxxxxx x Bytes 3 to 16
Timestamp MSB x xxxxxx x Byte 17
Timestamp NMSB x xxxxxx x Byte 18
Timestamp NLSB x xxxxxx x Byte 19
Timestamp LSB x xxxxxx x Byte 20
2070.133 Poll Input Transition Buffer
The Poll Input Transition Buffer frame shall poll the FI/O for the contents of the input
transition buffer. The response frame shall include a three-byte information field for each of
the input changes that have occurred since the last interrogation. The frames are as follows:
Poll Input Transition Buffer Command
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 54) 0 011011 0 Byte 1
Block Number x xxxxxx x Byte 2
Poll Input Transition Buffer Response
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 182) 1 011011 0 Byte 1
Block Number x xxxxxx x Byte 2
Number of Entries (n) x xxxxxx x Byte 3
Item # S Input Number Byte 3(I-1)+4
Item # Timestamp NLSB x xxxxxx x Byte 3(I-1)+5
Item # Timestamp LSB x xxxxxx x Byte 3(I-1)+6
Status 0 0 0 0 C F E G Byte 3(I-1)+7
Timestamp MSB X xxxxxx x Byte 3(I-1)+8
Timestamp NMSB X xxxxxx x Byte 3(I-1)+9
Timestamp NLSB X xxxxxx x Byte 3(I-1)+10
Timestamp LSB X xxxxxx x Byte 3(I-1)+11
The entry types are depicted as follows:
Input Transition Entry
Description msb lsb Byte Number
Transition Entry Identifier S Input Number 1
Timestamp NLSB x xxxxxx x 2
Timestamp LSB x xxxxxx x 3
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A37 of 107
MC Rollover Entry
Description msb lsb Byte Number
Rollover Entry Identifier 1 111111 1 1
Timestamp MSB x xxxxxx x 2
Timestamp NMSB x xxxxxx x 3
2070.134 Active Input
Each detected state transition for each active input (see configuration data) is placed in the
queue as it occurs. Bit definitions are as follows:
S Indicates the state of the input after the transition
C Indicates the 255 entry buffer limit has been exceeded
F Indicates the transition buffer limit has been exceeded
G Indicates the requested block number is out of monotonic increment sequence
E Same block number requested, E is set in response
2070.135 The Block Number byte
The Block Number byte is a monotonically increasing number incremented after each
command issued by the CPU Module. When the FI/O Module receives this command, it
shall compare the associated Block Number with the Block Number of the previously
received command. If it is the same, the previous buffer shall be re-sent to the CPU Module
and the 'E' flag set in the status response frame. If it is not equal to the previous Block
Number, the old buffer shall be purged and the next block of data sent. If the block number
is not incremented by one, the status G bit shall be set. The block number received becomes
the current number (even if out of sequence). The Block Number byte sent in the response
block shall be the same as that received in the command block. Counter rollover shall be
considered as a normal increment.
2070.136 Set Outputs
The Set Outputs frame shall be used to command the FI/O to set the Outputs according to the
data in the frame. If there is any error configuring the outputs, the 'E' flag in the response
frame shall be set to '1'. If the LINESYNC reference has been lost, the 'L' bit in the response
frame shall be set to “1”. Loss of LINESYNC reference shall also be indicated in Module
Status Response Frame. The output bytes depend upon field I/O module. These command
and response frames are as follows:
Set Outputs Command (2070-2A)
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 55) 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 Byte 1
Outputs O0 (lsb) to O7 (msb)
Data x x x x x x x x Byte 2
Outputs O8 to O63 Data x x x x x x x x Bytes 3 to 9
Outputs O0 (lsb) to O7 (msb)
Control x x x x x x x x Byte 10
Outputs O8 to O63 Control x x x x x x x x Bytes 11 to 17
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A38 of 107
Set Outputs Command (2070-8 via 2070-2B)
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 55) 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 Byte 1
Outputs O0 (lsb) to O7 (msb)
Data x x x x x x x x Byte 2
Outputs O8 to O103 Data x x x x x x x x Byte 3 to 14
Outputs O0 (lsb) to O7 (msb)
Control x x x x x x x x Byte 15
Outputs O8 to O103 Control x x x x x x x x Byte 16 to 27
Set Outputs Response
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 183) 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 Byte 1
Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 L E Byte 2
2070.137 Configure Input Tracking Functions
The Configure Input Tracking Functions frame shall be used to configure outputs to respond
to transitions on a specified input. Each Output Number identified by Item Number shall
respond as configured to the corresponding Input Number identified by the same Item
Number. Input and Output mapping shall be one to one. If a command results in more than
8 input tracking outputs being configured, the response V bit shall be set to “1” and the
command shall not be implemented. The command and response frames are as follows:
Configure Input Tracking Function Command
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 56) 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 Byte 1
Number of Items Number of Items Byte 2
Item # - Byte 1 E Output Number Byte 2(I-1)+3
Item # - Byte 2 I Input Number Byte 2(I-1)+4
Configure Input Tracking Functions Response
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 184) 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 Byte 1
Status x x x x x x x x Byte 2
Timestamp MSB x x x x x x x x Byte 3
Timestamp NMSB x x x x x x x x Byte 4
Timestamp NLSB x x x x x x x x Byte 5
Timestamp LSB x x x x x x x x Byte 6
2070.138 Definitions are as follows:
E “1” - Enable input tracking functions for this output
“0” - Disable tracking functions for this output
I “1” - The output is OFF when input is ON, On when the input is OFF
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A39 of 107
“0” - The output is ON when input is ON, OFF when input is OFF
V “1” - The max. number of 8 configurable outputs has been executed
“0” - No error
Number of Items – the number of entries in the frame. If zero, all outputs currently
configured for input tracking shall be disabled.
2070.139 Timestamp Value
The timestamp value shall be sampled prior to the response frame.
2070.140 Outputs Tracks Inputs
Outputs which track inputs shall be updated no less than once per ms. Input to output signal
propagation delay shall not exceed 2 ms.
2070.141 Number of Item
The “Number of Item” field is valid from 0 to 16 (most that is sent at one time is 8 enables
and 8 disables). If processing a command resulting in more than 8 Input Tracking functions
being enabled, none of the command shall be implemented and response message “V” bit set
to 1. If an invalid output or input number is specified for a function, the FIOM software
shall not do that function definition. It shall also not be counted toward the maximum of 8
input tracking function allowed. The rest of the message shall be processed. When an Input
Tracking function is disabled, the output is set according to the most recently received Set
Outputs Command. When an input tracking function for an output is superseded (redefined
as either another input tracking function or as a complex output function) nothing shall be
done with the output. The most recent value remains until the new function changes it.
2070.142 Configure Complex Output Functions
The configure complex output functions frame shall be used to specify a complex output for
one to eight of any of the outputs. If a Configure Complex Output Function command
results in more than eight outputs being configured, the 'V' bit in the response message shall
be set to a '1', and the command shall not be implemented. Two output forms shall be
provided: single pulse and continuous oscillation. These output forms shall be configurable
to begin immediately or on a specified input trigger and, in the case of continuous
oscillation, to continue until otherwise configured or to oscillate only while gated active by a
specified input. If the command gate bit is active, the command trigger bit shall be ignored
and the specified input shall be used as a gate signal. The command and response frames are
as follows:
Configure Complex Output Functions Command
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 57) 0 011100 1 1
Number of Items Number of Items 2
Item i - Byte 1 0 Output Number 7(i-1)+3
Item i - Byte 2 Primary Duration (MSB) 7(i-1)+4
Item i - Byte 3 Primary Duration (LSB) 7(i-1)+5
Item i - Byte 4 Secondary Duration (MSB) 7(i-1)+6
Item i - Byte 5 Secondary Duration (LSB) 7(i-1)+7
Item i - Byte 6 0 Input Number 7(i-1)+8
Item i - Byte 7 P W G E J F R L 7(i-1)+9
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A40 of 107
Configure Complex Output Functions Response
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 185) 1 011100 1 1
Status 0 000000 V 2
Timestamp (MSB) x xxxxxx x 3
Timestamp (NMSB) x xxxxxx x 4
Timestamp (NLSB) x Xxxxxx x 5
Timestamp (LSB) x Xxxxxx x 6
2070.143 Configure Complex Outputs Bit Fields
The bit fields of the command frame are defined as follows:
E '1' - Enable complex output function for this output
'0' - Disable complex output function for this output
J '1' - During the primary duration, the output shall be written as a logic '1'
During the secondary duration, the output shall be written as a logic '0'
'0' - During the primary duration, the output shall be written as a logic '0'
During the secondary duration, the output shall be written as a logic '1'
Output Number - 7-bit output number identifying outputs
Primary Duration - For single pulse operation, this shall determine the number of
“ticks” preceding the pulse. For continuous oscillation, this shall determine the
length of the inactive (first) portion of the cycle.
Secondary Duration - For single pulse operation, this shall determine the number
of ticks the pulse is active. Subsequent to the secondary duration, the output shall
return to the state set according to the most recently received Set Outputs
command. For continuous oscillation, this shall determine the length of the
active (second) portion of the cycle. 0 = hold output state until otherwise
configured.
F '1' - The trigger or gate shall be acquired subsequent to filtering the specified input.
The raw input signal shall be used if filtering is not enabled for the specified
input.
'0' - The trigger or gate shall be derived from the raw input.
R '1' - For triggered output, the output shall be triggered by an ON-to-OFF transition of
the specified input and shall be triggered immediately upon command receipt if
the input is OFF. For gated output, the output shall be active while the input is
OFF.
'0'- For triggered output, the output shall be triggered by an OFF-to-ON transition of
the specified input and shall be triggered immediately upon command receipt if
the input is ON. For gated output, the output shall be active while the input is
ON.
Input Number - 7-bit input number identifying inputs 0 Up.
P '1'- The output is configured for single-pulse operation. Once complete, the complex
output function shall be disabled.
'0' - The output is configured for continuous oscillation.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A41 of 107
W '1' - It is triggered by the specified input. Triggered complex output shall commence
within 2 ms of the associated trigger.
'0' - Operation shall begin within 2 ms of the command receipt.
G '1' - Operation shall be gated active by the specified input.
'0' - Gating is inactive.
L '1' - The LINESYNC based clock shall be used for the time ticks.
'0' - The MC shall be used for the time ticks.
V '1' - Indicates maximum number of configurable outputs is exceeded.
'0' - No error
Number of items - The number of entries in the frame. If 0, all outputs currently configured
as complex outputs shall be disabled.
2070.144 Controlling Input Signals
Controlling input signals shall be sampled at least once per ms.
2070.145 Number of Items
The “number of items” field is valid from 0 to 16. Zero means disable all Complex Output
functions. Sixteen is the maximum because the most that is sent at one time is eight enables
and eight disables. If processing a command results in more than eight Complex Output
functions being enabled, none of the command shall be implemented and the response
message “V” bit shall be set to 1. If an invalid output or input number (the “G” or “W” bits
being set to 1) is specified for a function, that function definition is not done by the FIOM
software. It shall also not be counted towards the maximum of eight Complex Output
functions allowed. The rest of the message shall be processed. When a Complex Output
function is disabled, the output is set according to the most recently received set outputs
command. When a Complex Output function for an output is superseded, that is, redefined
as whether another Complex Output function, or as an input tracking function, nothing
special is done with the output. The most recent value remains until the new function
changes it. The “G” bit (gating) set to 1 takes precedence over the “W” bit (triggering). If
gating is ON, triggering is turned OFF, regardless of the value of the “W” bit in the
command message. If a Complex Output is configured with the “G” bit set to 1 (gating) and
the “P” bit set to 0 (continuous oscillation), the output is set to OFF (0) whenever the
specified input changes state so that the oscillation should cease (output inactive). For a
single pulse operation (“G” bit set to 1), after the secondary duration completes the Complex
Output function shall be disabled, and the output shall be set according to the most recently
received set outputs command.
2070.146 Configure Watchdog
The Configure Watchdog frames shall be used to change the software watchdog timeout
value. The Command and response frames are as follows:
Configure Watchdog Command
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 58) 0 011101 0 Byte 1
Timeout Value x xXxxxx x Byte 2
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A42 of 107
Configure Watchdog Response
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 186) 1 011101 0 Byte 1
Status 0 000000 Y Byte 2
2070.147 Timeout Value
The timeout value shall be in the range between 10 to 100 ms. If the value is lower than 10,
10 shall be assumed. If the value is greater than 100, 100 shall be assumed.
2070.148 Watchdog Timeout Value
On receipt of this frame, the watchdog timeout value shall be changed to the value in the
message and the “Y” bit set. The response frame bit (Y) shall indicate a '1' if the watchdog
has been previously set and a '0' if not.
2070.149 Controller Identification
This is a legacy message command / response for FI/O modules with Datakey resident.
Upon command, a response frame containing the 128 bytes of the Datakey See previous
sections on Request Module Status for FI/O Status Bit ‘K’ definition. If “K” bit set, only the
first two bytes shall be returned. The Command and Response frames are as follows:
Controller Identification Command
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number= 59) 0 011101 1 Byte 1
Controller Identification Response
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 187) 1 011101 1 Byte 1
Status 0 000000 K Byte 2
Datakey x xxxxxx x Bytes 3 to 130
2070.150 Module Identification
The Field I/O Module Identification Command frame shall be used to request the FI/O
Identification value. A value response of "1" shall Model 332 FI/O, "2" for the NEMA TS-2
Type 2, "3" is reserved for NEMA TS 2 Type 1 FI/O and "32 to 40" are reserved for ITS
Cabinets. The command and response frames are shown as follows:
I/O Module Identification Command
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 60) 0 011110 0 Byte 1
I/O Module Identification Response
Description msb lsb Byte Number
(Type Number = 188) 1 011110 0 Byte 1
FI/O I D byte x xXxxxx x Byte 2
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A43 of 107
SECTION VI - TYPE 2070-3D FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY.
2070.151 General
The Type 2070-3D Front Panel Assembly (FPA) shall be delivered with a panel with Latch
assembly and two TSD #1 hinge attaching devices, assembly PCB, external serial port
connector (DB9), external Ethernet port (RJ45), CPU active LED indicator, and FP Harness
Interface. The FPA shall also provide the following features; FPA controller, two
keyboards, AUX switch, alarm bell and Display D as described below in Paragraph
2070.156.
2070.152 Keyboards
Provide two KEYBOARDS, one with sixteen keys for hexadecimal alphanumeric entry and
the other with twelve keys to be used for cursor control and action symbol entry. Engrave or
emboss each key with its function character. Each key shall have an actuation force between
1.764 ounce and 3.527 ounce and provide a positive tactile indication of contact closure.
Key contacts shall be hermetically sealed, have a design life of over one million operations,
be rated for the current and voltage levels used, and stabilize within 5 ms following contact
closure.
2070.153 Ethernet Port
The FPA shall include a standard pin out RJ-45 Ethernet port in place of the C50J RJ-45
serial port.
2070.154 FPA Layout
Alternate keyboard and display layouts are acceptable as approved by the City. However,
minimum size dimensions shall be maintained.
2070.155 CPU Active Indicator
The cathode of the CPU ACTIVE LED INDICATOR shall be electrically connected to the
CPU_ ACTIVE signal and be pulled up to +5 VDC.
2070.156 Display Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
The Display shall consist of a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), a backlight, and a contrast
potentiometer control. Display D shall have 16 lines of 40 characters each with minimum
dimensions of 0.104 wide by 0.167 high and either LED or EL backlight.
2070.157 Characters and Angles of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Each character shall be composed of a 5 x 7 dot matrix with an underline row or a 5 x 8 dot
matrix. The viewing angle of the LCD shall be optimized for direct (90 degrees) viewing,
±35 degrees vertical, ±45 degrees horizontal. The LCD shall have variable contrast with a
minimum ratio of 4:1. The LCD shall be capable of displaying, at any position on the
Display, any of the standard ASCII characters as well as user-defined characters.
2070.158 Backlight
The backlight shall be turned on and off by the Controller Circuitry. The backlight and
associated circuitry shall consume no power when in off state. A potentiometer shall control
the LCD contrast with clockwise rotation increasing contrast. The contrast shall depend on
the angular position of the potentiometer, which shall provide the entire contrast range of the
LCD.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A44 of 107
2070.159 Cursor Display
Cursor display shall be turned ON and OFF by command. When ON, the cursor shall be
displayed at the current cursor position. When OFF, no cursor is to be displayed. All other
cursor functions (positioning, etc.) shall remain in effect.
2070.160 FPA Controller
The FPA CONTROLLER shall function as the Front Panel Device controller interfacing
with the CPU Module.
2070.161 FPA RESET
Provide a FPA RESET Switch on the Assembly PCB. The momentary CONTROL switch
shall be logic OR'd with the CPU_RESET Line, producing a FPA RESET Output. Upon
FPA RESET being active or receipt of a valid Soft Reset display command, the following
shall occur:
Auto-repeat, blinking, auto-wrap, and auto-scroll shall be set to OFF.
Each special character shall be set to ASCII SPC (space).
The tab stops shall be set to columns 9, 17, 25, and 33.
The backlight timeout value shall be set to 6 (60 seconds).
The backlight shall be extinguished.
The display shall be cleared (all ASCII SPC).
The cursor display shall be turned off.
The FPA module shall transmit a power up string through /sp6 to the CPU. Once
power is applied to the FPA, or the FPA hardware RESET BUTTON IS PUSHED.
The string is “ESC [PU”, hex value “1B 5B 50 55”.
2070.162 Keypress
When a keypress is detected, the appropriate key code shall be transmitted to SP6-RxD. If
two or more keys are depressed simultaneously, no code is to be sent. If a key is depressed
while another key is depressed, no additional code is to be sent.
2070.163 Auto-Repeat
Auto-repeat shall be turned ON and OFF by command. When ON, the key code shall be
repeated at a rate of 5 times per second starting when the key has been depressed
continuously for 0.5 second, and shall terminate when the key is released or another key is
pressed.
2070.164 AUX
When the AUX Switch is toggled, the appropriate AUX Switch code shall be transmitted to
the CPU.
2070.165 Controller Circuitry
The controller circuitry shall be capable of composing and storing eight special graphical
characters on command, and displaying any number of these characters in combination with
the standard ASCII characters. Undefined characters shall be ignored. User-composed
characters shall be represented in the communication protocol on Figure 14 of Appendix D.
P1 represents the special character number (1-8). Pn's represent columns of pixels from left
to right. The most significant bit of each Pn represents the top pixel in a column and the
least significant bit shall represent the bottom pixel. A logic ‘1’ shall turn the pixel ON.
There shall be a minimum of 5 Pn's for 5 columns of pixels in a command code sequence
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A45 of 107
terminated by an "f." If the number of Pn’s is more than the number of columns available on
the LCD, the extra Pn's shall be ignored. P1 and all Pn's shall be in ASCII coded decimal
characters without leading zero.
2070.166 Character Overwrite
Character overwrite mode shall be the only display mode supported. A displayable character
received shall always overwrite the current cursor position on the Display. The cursor shall
automatically move right one character position on the Display after each character write
operation. When the rightmost character on a line (position 40) has been overwritten, the
cursor position shall be determined based on the current settings of the auto-wrap mode.
2070.167 Auto-Wrap
Auto-wrap shall be turned ON & OFF by command. When ON, a new line operation shall
be performed after writing to position 40. When OFF, upon reaching position 40, input
characters shall continue to overwrite position 40.
2070.168 Cursor Positioning
Cursor positioning shall be non-destructive. Cursor movement shall not affect the current
display, other than blinking the cursor momentarily and periodically hiding the character at
that cursor position.
2070.169 Blinking Characters
Blinking characters shall be supported, and be turned ON and OFF by command. When ON,
all subsequently received displayable characters shall blink at the rate of 1 Hertz with a 60%
ON / 40% OFF duty cycle. It shall be possible to display both blinking and non-blinking
characters simultaneously.
2070.170 Tab Stops
Tab stops shall be configurable at all columns. A tab stop shall be set at the current cursor
position when a SetTabStop command is received. Tab Stop(s) shall be cleared on receipt of
a ClearTabStop command. On receipt of the HT (tab) code, the cursor shall move to the
next tab stop to the right of the cursor position. If no tab stop is set to the right of the current
cursor position, the cursor shall not move.
Tab stops shall be set based only upon the column (horizontal) position of the cursor; the
row position shall be ignored. Each tab that is set shall apply to all rows of the display. In
this way, tabs shall operate similarly to a typewriter or line printer. For example, if the
cursor is positioned at column 21, row 3 when a Set Tab Stop command (ESC H) is
received, a tab stop is placed at column 21 and applies to every row of the display. If the
cursor is then positioned to column 21, row 5, and a Clear Tab Stop command (ESC 0G) is
received, the tab stop on column 21 is removed and there will be no tab stop on any row of
the display at that column position.
2070.171 Auto-Scroll
Auto-scroll shall be turned ON and OFF by command. When ON, a Line Feed or new line
operation from the bottom line shall result in the display moving up one line. When OFF, a
Line Feed or new line from the bottom line shall result in the top line clearing, and the cursor
being positioned on the top line.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A46 of 107
2070.172 Displayable Characters
Display Characters shall be refreshed from the buffer at a rate of no less than 20 times per
second.
2070.173 Display Back Light Illuminate
The Display back light shall illuminate when any key is pressed and illuminate or extinguish
by command. The backlight shall extinguish when no key is pressed for a specified time.
This time shall be program selected by command, by a number in the range 0 to 63
corresponding to that number of 10-second intervals. A value of 1 shall correspond to a
timeout interval of 10 seconds. A value of 0 shall indicate no timeout.
2070.174 Command Codes
The Command Codes shall use the following conventions:
1. Parameters and Options: Parameters are depicted in both the ASCII and hexadecimal
representations as the letter 'P' followed by a lower-case character or number. These are
interpreted as follows:
Pn: Value parameter, to be replaced by a value, using one ASCII character per digit
without leading zeros.
P1: Ordered and numbered parameter. One of a listed known parameters with a
specified order and number (Continues with P2, P3, etc.)
Px: Display column number (1-40), using one ASCII character per digit without
leading zero.
Py: Display line (1-4) one ASCII character
...: Continue the list in the same fashion
Values of 'h' (0x68) and 'l' (0x6C) are used to indicate binary operations. ‘h'
represents ON (high), 'l' represents OFF (low).
2. ASCII Representation: Individual characters are separated by spaces; these are not to
be interpreted as the space character, which is depicted by SPC.
3. Hexadecimal Representation: Characters are shown as their hexadecimal values and
will be in the range 0x00 to 0x7F (7 bits).
2070.175 Controller Circuit
The Controller Circuit shall communicate via a SP6 asynchronous serial interface. The
interface shall be configured for 38.4 kilobits per second, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no
parity.
2070.176 C50 ENABLE FUNCTION
C50 ENABLE function when grounded by C50 pins 1 and 5, shall be brought to Connectors
A1, pin B21 for the purpose of disabling the module channel 2, (SP4).
2070.177 Front Panel
The Front Panel shall include an electronic bell to signal receipt of ^G(hex07)). The bell
shall sound at 2,000 Hertz, with a minimum output rating of 85 dB at a distance of 4 feet for
350±100 ms upon receipt of ^G(hex07). Receipt of all other characters and ESC codes shall
continue during the time the bell sounds.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A47 of 107
SECTION VII - TYPE 2070-3D USB FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY
2070.178 General
The 2070-3D USB Front Panel Assembly shall meet all specification presented in Section VI
with the following additions and exceptions:
2070.179 Universal Serial Bus (USB)
The FPA shall include a minimum of 2 external Type-A USB ports on front panel.
The USP ports shall be compliant to the latest AASHTO/ITE Next Generation ATC
Standard with the exception that the USB shall conform to the appropriate sections of the
USB v3.0 specification for both hardware and software operations.
2070.180 Alternate Front Panel Assembly Layout
Alternate keyboard and display layouts are acceptable as approved by the City. However,
minimum size dimension shall be maintained.
2070.181 1C-CPU USB
To facilitate the implementation of this Alternative, the City shall allow the disabling of the
USB port on the 1C-CPU front panel. However, all wiring to implement this alternative
shall be internal to the controller unit.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A48 of 107
SECTION VIII - TYPE 2070-4A POWER SUPPLY MODULE.
2070.182 Model 2070-4A Power Supply Module
Type 2070-4B power supply modules shall be provided. Type 2070-4B Power Supply
Module shall be independent, self contained Module, vented, and cooled by convection only.
The Module shall slide into the unit’s power supply compartment from the back of the
Chassis and be attached to the Backplane Mounting Surface by its four TSD #3 Devices.
2070.183 On/Off Power Switch
An "On/Off" POWER Switch, four LED DC Power Indicators, PS Receptacle POWER
Connectors, and the Incoming AC Fuse protection shall be provided on the Module Front.
The LED DC POWER Indicators shall indicate all required DC voltages meet the following
conditions: the +5 VDC and the 12 VDC are within 5% of their nominal levels.
2070.184 Input Protection
Two 0.5-Ohm, 10-watt wire-wound power resistors with a 0.2 µH inductance (one on the
AC+ Line & on the AC- Line) shall be provided. Three 20 Joule surge arrestors between
AC+ to AC-, AC+ to EG, and AC- to EG shall be provided. A 0.68 µF capacitor shall be
placed between AC+ & AC- (between the resistor & arrestors).
2070.185 +5VDC Standby Power
+5 VDC STANDBY POWER to hold up specified circuitry during the power down period
shall be provided. It shall consist of the monitor circuitry; hold up capacitors, and charging
circuitry. A charging circuit shall be provided, that under normal operation, fully charges
and float the capacitors consistent with the manufacturers’ recommendations. The Hold Up
power requirements shall be a minimum constant drain of 600 microamperes at a range of +5
VDC to +2 VDC for over 600 minutes.
2070.186 Monitor Circuitry
MONITOR CIRCUITRY to monitor incoming AC Power for Power Failure and Restoration
and LINESYNC generation shall be provided.
2070.187 ACFAIL/POWER DOWN
The AC FAIL/POWER DOWN Output Lines shall go LOW (ground true) immediately upon
Power Failure. The Lines shall transition to HIGH within 50 ms after both Power
Restoration and supply fully recovered. The Lines shall be driven separately. The
SYSRESET/POWERUP Output Lines shall transition to LOW 525 +/-25 ms after
ACFAIL/POWER DOWN transition to LOW. The Lines shall transition to HIGH 225 +/-25
ms after Power Restoration and the supply is fully recovered. The Lines shall be driven
separately.
2070.188 Monitor Circuitry Switch
The monitor circuitry shall switch the +5 VDC Standby ON immediately upon Power
Failure and isolate (OFF) the line at Power Up.
2070.189 60 Hz Square Wave LINESYNC
The 60 Hz Square Wave LINESYNC signal shall be generated by a crystal oscillator, which
shall be synchronized to the 60-Hertz VAC incoming power line at 120 and 300 degrees. A
continuous square wave signal shall be +5 VDC amplitude, 8.333 ms half-cycle pulse
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A49 of 107
duration, and 50 +/-1% duty cycle. The output shall have drive sink capability of 16 mA. A
2 K-Ohm pull-up resistor shall be connected between the output and +5 VDC. The monitor
circuit shall compensate for missing pulses and line noise during normal operation.
2070.190 LINESYNC
The LINESYNC shall continue until SYSRESET transitions LOW and begin when
SYSRESET transitions HIGH.
Power Supply Requirements.
Voltage Minimum
Load
Maximum
Load
Load
Range
Line
Reg.
Ripple &
Noise
+5 VDC 0.0 Amp 10 Amp ±5% ±1% 50mV P-P
+12 VDC Serial 0.0 Amp 0.5 Amp ±5% ±1% 50mV P
-12 VDC Serial 0.0 Amp 0.5 Amp ±5% ±1% 50mV P
+12 VDC 0.0 Amp 1.0 Amp ±5% ±1% 50mV P
2070.191 Line/Load Regulation
The Power Supply Module shall meet Line / Load Regulation for input voltage range of 90
to 135 VAC, the maximum and minimum loads called out in the table and including ripple
noise.
2070.192 Efficiency
70% minimum.
2070.193 Ripple and Noise
Less than 0.2% rms, 1% peak to peak or 50 mV, whichever is greater.
2070.194 Voltage Overshoot
No greater than 5%, all outputs.
2070.195 Overvoltage Protection
130% V out for all outputs.
2070.196 Circuit Protection
Automatic recovery upon removal of fault.
2070.197 Inrush Current
Cold Start Inrush shall be less than 25 amperes at 115VAC.Transient Response. Output
voltage back to within 1% in less than 500 µs on a 50% Load change. Peak transient not to
exceed 5%.
2070.198 Holdup Time
The power supply shall supply 30 watts minimum for 550 ms after ACFAIL going LOW.
The supply shall be capable of holding up the Unit for two 500 ms Power Loss periods
occurring in a 1.5-second period.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A50 of 107
2070.199 Remote Sense
+5 VDC compensates 250 mV total line drop. Open sense load protection required.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A51 of 107
SECTION IX - UNIT CHASSIS TYPE 2070.
2070.200 General
The Chassis consists of the metal housing, Serial Motherboard, Back-plane Mounting
Surface, Power Supply Module Supports, slot card guides, Wiring Harnesses, and Cover
Plate(s). All external screws shall be countersunk and be Phillips flat head stainless steel
type. The housing shall be treated with clear chromate and the slot designation labeled on
the back-plane mounting surface above the upper slot card guide. The Chassis shall be
cooled by convection only. The top and bottom pieces of the housing shall be slotted for
vertical ventilation.
2070.201 Serial Motherboard
Serial Motherboard shall function as support for its connectors, A1 to A5 and FP, and as the
interface between the CPU and the dedicated modules/Front Panel carrying both serial
communications, logic, and power circuits. The PCB shall be multi-layered, with one layer
plane assigned to DC Ground. A wiring harness PS2 shall be provided between the Type
2070-4 Power Supply and the Motherboard PCB (provide strain relief). Test points shall be
provided on the FPA side of the Motherboard for PS2 lines. A wiring harness FP shall be
provided, linking the Motherboard with the FPA.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A52 of 107
SECTION X - TYPE 2070 NEMA
2070.202 ATC NEMA Standard Controller Units
This specification covers two versions of 2070 / NEMA Standard Controller Units. The
versions associate with NEMA TS1/TS2 Type 2 and NEMA TS2 Type 1 Standards. They
are as follows:
Model 2070 N1 Controller Unit (TS1/TS2 Type 2)
Model 2070 N2 Controller Unit (TS2 Type-1)
2070.203 N1C Unit Consisting
The Model 2070 N1C Controller Unit consists of:
Unit Chassis
2070- 1C CPU Module
2070-2B Field I/O Module
2070-3D Front Panel Module
2070-4NA Power Supply Module
2070-8 Field I/O Module
Optional communication modules
2070.204 N2C Unit Consisting
Unit Chassis
2070-1C CPU Module
2070-2N Field I/O Module
2070-3B Front Panel Module
2070-4AN Power Supply Module
2070.205 Address
The Serial Port 5 Frame Address for 2070-2N and 2070-8 shall be “20”.
FIELD I/O MODULE
2070.206 2070-2N Field I/O Module
The 2070-2N Field I/O Module provides a TS2 Type 1 compatible SDLC interface via 2070
Serial Port 3, AC Power to the 2070 Unit and Fault Monitor LOGIC Output via SP5 on
output O78 (similar to the 2070-8) to the NEMA TS2 Malfunction Management Unit
(MMU). The communications timeout operation shall function in a manner similar to the
2070-8 (see sections 11.4.11.6 and 11.4.11.7 for details)
2070.207 Requirements Exceptions
The Module shall meet the 2070–2A Module Requirements with the following exceptions:
No C1, C11 and C12 Connectors on the front panel of the module
No 64 inputs / 64 outputs requirements
Serial Port 5 routed to the FCU MPU Device only
Serial Port 3 shall not have a disabling switch
No Watchdog output
No Muzzle Shunt
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A53 of 107
2070.208 Types
The module shall be a 4X type board/front panel with three connectors. The connectors are
10 Pin Connector A, a NEMA 5-15 Receptacle and a Port 1 DA-15S connector labeled as
either “C15S” or “Port 1”. The Port 1 (C15S) connector shall be a 15 pin metal shell DA-15
connector with female contacts. The connector shall be equipped with latching blocks and
shall intermate with a 15 pin D type connector, Amp Incorporated part number 205206-1, or
equivalent, which is equipped with spring latches, Amp Incorporated part number 745012-1,
or equivalent.
2070.209 Power
Incoming 2070 AC Power is derived from Connector A Pin C (AC+), Pin A (AC-), and Pin
H (Equipment Ground). The power is directly routed to the NEMA 5-15 Receptacle with
equipment ground also connected to the face plate. Connector A shall intermate with a
NEMA TS2 Type 1 (MS3106( )-18-1S) cable.
2070.210 Isolation
The module shall isolate 2070 Serial Port 3 from the A3 Connector and reconvert the lines to
external EIA 485 drivers/receivers which shall be terminated at C15S Connector. The Port
shall be clocked at 153.6 Kbps.
2070.211 FCU Output
An FCU output shall drive an open collector transistor whose output shall be routed to
Connector A Pin F for use as a FAULT MONITOR Output. The transistor shall be capable
of sinking 200 mA at 30 VDC.
2070.212 Connectors A, C15S pin out and functions
Connectors A and C15S pin out and functions are as follows:
CONNECTOR A
Pin Function Pin Function Pin Function
A. AC Neutral E NA I NA
B. NA F Fault Monitor J NA
C. AC Line G DCG #2
D. NA H EG (Equip Ground)
CONNECTOR C15S:
Pin Function Pin Function Pin Function
1 SP3TXD+ 6 DCG #2 11 SP3TXC-
2 DCG #2 7 SP3RXC+ 12 EG (Equip Ground)
3 SP3TXC+ 8 DCG #2 13 SP3RXD-
4 DCG #2 9 SP3TXD- 14 NA
5 SP3RXD+ 10 Port 1 Disable 15 SP3RXC-
2070.213 Serial Port 3
Serial Port 3 shall control the TS2 BIU Units using SDLC Protocol that meets the NEMA
TS2 Type 1 Frame Command / Response Standards. SP3DCD shall be allocated to Port 1
Disable where 0 VDC input on C15S pin 10 equals DCD inactive (False). SP3DCD shall be
opto-isolated from Port 1 Disable.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A54 of 107
4AN POWER SUPPLY MODULE
2070.214 4AN POWER SUPPLY MODULE
The 2070-4N Power Supply Module supports the NEMA TS 1 and TS2 Standards. The
module is identical to the 2070-4A Power Supply Requirements except for the following:
The power cord shall have a 15 inch ± 1 inch length as measured from the panel to
the plug tips.
The AC Power Fail voltage shall be 85VAC ±2VAC.
The AC Power Restore voltage shall be 90VAC ±2VAC.
The 2070-4N (A) power supply shall have proper marking Example “2070 4N (A )”.
A permanent sticker shall be an acceptable marking method.
MODEL 2070- 8 FIELD I/O MODULE
2070.215 2070-9 Module
The Module shall consist of the Module Chassis, Module Power Supply, FCU Controller,
Parallel Input/Output Ports, Serial Communications Circuits and Module Connectors. The
Module CHASSIS shall be made of 0.06 in. minimum aluminum sheet and treated with clear
chromate. All external screws, except where called out, shall be countersunk and shall be
Phillips flat head stainless steel. The matching nuts shall be permanently captive on the
mating surfaces.
2070.216 Module Front Panel
The Module Front Panel shall be furnished with the following:
1. ON/OFF POWER Switch mounted vertically with ON in the UP position.
2. LED DC Power Indicator. The indicator shall indicate that the required + 5 VDC is
within 3% and the +24 VDC is within 8%.
3. Incoming VAC fuse protection.
4. Two DB-25S COMM connectors labeled "EX1" & "EX2."
5. Four NEMA Connectors A, B, C, & D.
2070.217 Label
A permanent Label shall be affixed to the Front Panel. The label shall display the unit's serial
number. The number shall be permanent and easy to read.
2070.218 Module Power Supply
A Module Power Supply shall be provided and located on the right side of the module as
viewed from the front. The supply shall provide the necessary module internal circuitry DC
power plus 2.0 Amperes minimum of +24 VDC for external logic, detector inputs, and
output load control. The supply shall meet the following requirements:
Input Protection. Two 0.5-Ohm, 10-watt wire-wound power resistors with a 0.2 µH
inductance (one on the AC+ Line & on the AC- Line) shall be provided. Three 20 Joule
surge arrestors between AC+ to AC-, AC+ to EG, and AC- to EG shall be provided. A 0.68
µF capacitor shall be placed between AC+ & AC- (between the resistor & arrestors).
Power Supply Requirements The Power Supply shall meet the specification as listed in
Power Requirements 2070-162 through 2070-171 Supply Requirements except Input
Protection above.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A55 of 107
Tolerances. DC Voltage tolerances shall be ±3% for 5 VDC and ±8% for 24 VDC.
2070.219 Incoming AC Power
The supplied Incoming AC Power shall be derived from Connector A Pins "p" (AC+) and
"U" (AC Neutral). External +24 VDC shall be at Connector A, Pin "B" and Connector D Pin
"NN." AC Power for the 2070 receptacle shall be tapped off from the secondary side of the
ON Switch / Fuse configuration.
2070.220 Module PC Boards
All Module PC Boards shall be mounted vertically.
2070.221 POWERDOWN, NRESET, and LINESYNC
POWERDOWN, NRESET, and LINESYNC are incoming EIA-485 differential signals and
shall be routed to the module via C12S Connector. The state of the module output ports at
the time of POWERDOWN transition to LOW State and until NRESET goes HIGH shall be
an open circuit.
2070.222 Requirements
The Module shall meet all requirements under SECTION V – TYPE 2070-2 FIELD I/O
MODULE with the following exceptions:
Parallel Ports 118 Bits of Input and 102 bits of Output shall be provided. Specification for
inputs applies except the voltage is +24 in lieu of +12, Ground False ("0") exceeds 16.0
VDC, and Ground True (“1”) is less than 8.0 VDC.
Serial Communication Circuitry The module shall interface with the 2070-2B Field I/O
module via HAR 1 Harness meeting EIA-485 Requirements. HAR 1 Harness shall be 23
lines minimum with a C12P Connector on one end and soldered with strain relief on the
other. In addition to SP5 being routed to the FCU Controller interface, the SP3 EIA-485
Signal lines shall be routed only to the EX1 Connector.
2070.223 EIA-232 Serial Port
An EIA-232 Serial Port on the FCU shall be provided with baud rate selection by Shunt of
0.3, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, & 38.4 Kbps asynchronous and shall be connected at EX1
Connector. This hardware is provided for future expansion capability and its use/protocol is
currently undefined.
2070.224 HAR 2 Harness
A 22-line minimum HAR 2 Harness shall be provided between EX2 Connector and Model
2070-6 Serial COMM Module in the 2070 UNIT. This provides two Modems or EIA-232
Interfaces between the 2070 UNIT and the outside world. The two EG (Equipment Ground)
lines within HAR 2 shall be connected between EX2 and the 2070-8 module chassis.
2070.225 Fault and Voltage Monitor Circuitry
NEMA TS1 Controller Fault and Voltage Monitor functions (outputs to cabinet monitor)
shall be provided.
OR Gates. Conceptually, two 3-input OR gates shall be provided. The gate 1 output shall be
connected to Connector A, Pin A (Fault Monitor) and gate 2 output shall be connected to
Connector A, Pin C. Any False state input shall cause a gate output False (+24VDC) state.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A56 of 107
FCU Output O78. The FCU output O78 shall normally change its state every 100 ms. A
module Watchdog circuit shall monitor the output. No state change for 2 ±0.1 seconds shall
cause the circuit output to generate a FALSE (+24 VDC) output (input to gates 1 and 2).
Should the FCU begin changing state, the Watchdog output shall return to TRUE (0 VDC)
state.
Operation. The module shall have a +5 VDC monitoring circuit which monitors the
module’s +5 VDC (±0.25). If the voltage exceeds the limits, the circuit output shall generate
a False output (input to gates 1 and 2). Normal operation shall return the output state to
TRUE state.
Microprocessor Output. The FCU microprocessor output shall be assigned to FAULT
Monitor (input to gate 1) and another output shall be assigned to VOLTAGE Monitor (input
to gate 2).
Message Outputs. CPU Port 5 Set Output Command Message Outputs O78 and O79 shall
be assigned to FAULT (O78) and VOLTAGE (O79). The bit logic state “1” shall be FCU
output FALSE.
CPU / FCU Operations. CPU / FCU operation at POWER UP shall be as follows:
1. FCU Comm Loss Flag set. FAULT and VOLTAGE MONITOR outputs set to
FALSE state.
2. CPU REQUEST MODULE STATUS COMMAND Message with “E” bit set is sent
to FCU to clear Comm Loss Flag and FCU responds to CPU with “E” bit reset.
3. Before the Comm Loss timer expires, the SET OUTPUT COMMAND data must be
sent. In that data, the 078 and 079 logically set to “0” will cause the FCU
microprocessor port pins assigned for FM and VM outputs to go to their TRUE
state. At this point, the signal outputs defined in the message will be permitted at the
output connectors. Any number of other messages may be sent between the
MODULE STATUS COMMAND and SET OUTPUTS COMMAND.
4. * If the above message sequence is not followed, Comm Loss Flag shall be set (or
remain) and VM & FM shall retain the FALSE output state.
5. Performs items 2 & 3 above User Software.
CPU/FCU Communications. A CPU / FCU Communications Loss during normal operation
shall cause all outputs to go blank (FALSE state) and shall set the Comm. Loss Flag. FM and
VM outputs shall be in FALSE state.
2070.226 Figures
The following figures are found in Appendix B:
Front View A11-1
Side View A11-2
ISO View A11-3
Field I/O Module, Connector A & B A11-4
Field I/O Module, Connector C & D A11-5
Field I/O Module, EX1 & EX2 Connectors A11-6
2070-2N Field I/O Module A11-7
*Notes: Module sheet metal tolerance shall be 0.015 inch or less.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A57 of 107
SECTION XI - TYPE 2070 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT.
2070.227 General Notes
The 2070-6x and 2070-7x modules shall provide circuitry to disable its Channel 2 and EIA-
232 control lines (TX, RX, RTS, CTS, and DCD) when a ground true state is present at
Connector A1, Pin B21 (C50 Enable). C50 Enable shall disable Channel 2 via disabling the
RS-485 signals to and from the motherboard. The disable lines shall be pulled up on these
modules.
Line drivers/receivers shall be socket mounted or surface mounted.
Isolation circuitry shall be opto- or capacitive-coupled isolation technologies. Each
module’s circuit shall be capable of reliably passing a minimum of 1.0 megabits per second.
EIA-485 drivers to the external connectors must be capable of supporting either two times
the maximum applicable baud rate for the port or 1 Mbps, whichever is less. EIA-232
drivers to the external connectors must be capable of supporting a minimum of 115,200 bits
per second.
The Communication modules shall be “Hot” swappable without damage to circuitry or
operations. A communication “glitch” occurring during insertion/removal is acceptable sine
the application program shall be able to recover/retry. Power-on and hot-swap current
surges shall not exceed a 10 ms surge at three times (3x) the maximum rating of each voltage
supply used by the module.
2070.228 Type 2070-6 A & B Async/ Modem Serial Communication Modules
Fuse Isolation. A fused isolated +5 VDC with a minimum of 100 mA power supply shall be
provided for external use.
Option – Bourns MF – MSMD020 PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) Resettable
Fuse, or approved equal, allowed.
Logic Switches. Two LOGIC switches per circuit shall be provided (faceplate mounted).
One logic switch shall be used to vertically switch between Half-Duplex (Down) and Full-
Duplex (Up). In Half-Duplex mode, the Transmit connections shall be used for both
Receive and Transmit. A MODEM Enable switch shall be provided such that when in the
UP Position shall enable MODEM and disable MODEM in the DOWN Position.
Circuitry. Two independent circuits, designated CIRCUIT #1 and CIRCUIT #2, shall be
provided. Both circuit functions shall be identical, except for their Serial Communications
Port and external connector (CIRCUIT #1 to SP1 [or SP3] and C2S Connector and
CIRCUIT #2 to SP2 [or SP4] and C20S Connector). Circuits #1 and Circuits #2, shall
optically isolate the FSK, C2 and C20 Serial Ports from the Motherboard SP EIA-495
signals. Each circuit shall provide full isolation from each other and the Model 2070
Motherboard.
Modem Requirements. Each CIRCUIT shall have a common power independent MODEM
with the following requirements:
Data Rate: Baud modulation of 300 to 1200 for Module 2070-6A and 0 to 9600 for
Module 2070-6B.
Modulation: Phase coherent frequency shift keying (FSK).
Data Format: Asynchronous, serial by bit.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A58 of 107
Line & Signal Requirements: Type 3002 voice-grade, unconditioned Tone Carrier
Frequencies (Transmit and Receive): MARK and SPACE: ±1% tolerance. The operating
band shall be (half power, -3 dB) between 1.0 KHz & 2.4 KHz for 2070-6A and 9.9 KHz &
18.9 KHz for 2070-6B.
Transmitting Output Signal Level: 0, -2, -4, -6, and -8 dB (at 1.7 KHz for 2070-6A & 14.7
KHz for 2070-6B) continuous or switch selectable.
Receiver Input Sensitivity: 0 to -40 dB.
Receiver Bandpass Filter: Shall meet the error rate requirement specified below and
provide 20 dB/octave, minimum active attenuation for all frequencies outside the operating
band.
Clear-to-Send (CTS) Delay: 11 +/-3 milliseconds.
Receive Line Signal Detect Time: 8 +/-2 milliseconds mark frequency.
Receive Line Squelch: 6.5 (+/-1) milliseconds, 0 milliseconds (OUT).
Soft Carrier Turn Off Time: 10 +/-2 milliseconds (0.9 kilohertz for 2070-6A and 7.8
kilohertz for 2070-6B). When the RTS is unasserted, the carrier shall turn off or go to soft
carrier frequency.
Modem Recovery Time: Capable of receiving data within 22 milliseconds after completion
of transmission.
Error Rate: Shall not exceed 1 bit in 100 kilobits, with a signal-to-noise ratio of 16 dB
measured with flat-weight over a 300 to 3,000 Hertz band.
Transmit Noise: Less than -50 dB across 600-ohms resistive load within the frequency
spectrum of 300 to 3,000 Hertz at maximum output.
Modem interface: EIA-232 Standards.
Control Switch: A CONTROL switch shall be provided on the module front panel to turn
ON (Up) / OFF (Down) all module power.
2070.229 Type 2070-7A Async Serial Comm Module
Circuitry. Two opto-isolated independent circuits, designated CIRCUIT #1 (Channel 1) and
CIRCUIT #2 (Channel 2), shall be provided. Their functions are identical, except for the
CPU Serial Communications Port and external connector (CIRCUIT #1 to SP1 [or SP3] and
Connector C21S and CIRCUIT #2 to SP2 [or SP4] and Connector C22S).
2070-7A. Each circuit shall convert its EIA-485 signal lines (RX, TX, RTS, CTS and DCD)
to / from board TTL Level Signals; isolate both signal and ground; and drive / receive
external EIA-232 devices via C21 / C22 Connectors. Connectors shall be DB-9S type.
LED Indicator. Each circuit signal TX and RX line shall have an LED Indicator mounted
on the front plate and labeled to function.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A59 of 107
SECTION XII – GLOSSARY
2070.230 Terms and Abbreviations
Wherever the following terms or abbreviations are used, the intent and meaning is
interpreted as follows:
A Ampere
AC Alternating Current
AC+ 120 Volts AC, 60 hertz ungrounded power source
AC- 120 Volts AC, 60 hertz grounded return to the power source
ANSI American National Standard Institute
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
Assembly A complete machine, structure or unit of a machine that was manufactured
by fitting together parts and/or modules
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWG American Wire Gage
C Celsius
C Language The ANSI C Programming Language
Cabinet An outdoor enclosure generally housing the controller unit and associated
equipment
Certificate of Compliance A certificate signed by the manufacturer of the material
or the manufacturer of assembled materials stating that the materials
involved comply in all respects with the requirements of the specifications
Channel An information path from a discrete input to a discrete output.
Component Any electrical or electronic device
Contractor The person or persons, Manufacturer, firm, partnership, corporation, vendor
or combination thereof, who have entered into a contract with the
DEPARTMENT, as party of the second part or legal representative
Controller Unit That portion of the controller assembly devoted to the operational
control of the logic decisions programmed into the assembly
CPU Central Processing Unit
CTS Clear To Send
DAT Program The DEPARTMENT’s Diagnostic and Acceptance Test Program
dB Decibel
dBa Decibels above reference noise, adjusted
DC Direct Current
DCD Data Carrier Detect (Receive Line Signal Detector)
DIN Deutsche Industry Norm
DRAM Dynamic random access memory. Random access means that the processor
can access any part of the memory or data storage space directly rather than
having to proceed sequentially from some starting place. DRAM is dynamic
in that it needs to have its storage cells refreshed or given a new electronic
charge every few milliseconds.
EG Equipment Ground
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMI Electro Magnetic Interference
EPROM Ultraviolet Erasable, Programmable, Read Only Memory Device
EEPROM Electrically Erasable, Programmable, Read Only Memory Device
Equal Connectors: comply with physical dimensions, contact material, plating and
method of connection. Devices: comply to function, pin out, electrical and
operating parameter requirements, access times and interface parameters of
the specified device
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A60 of 107
ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories, Inc.
Firmware A computer program or software stored permanently in PROM, EPROM,
ROM or semi-permanently in EEPROM
FLASH A +5 VDC powered IC Memory Device with nonvolatile, electrically
erasable, programmable, 100K read/write minimum cycles and fast access
time features
FPA Front Panel Assembly
HEX Hexadecimal
Hz Hertz
IC Integrated Circuit
I.D. Identification
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
ISO Isolated
Jumper A means of connecting/disconnecting two or more conductive by
soldering/desoldering a conductive wire or by PCB post jumper
KB Kilobytes
Keyed Means by which like connectors can be physically altered to prevent
improper insertion.
Laboratory The established laboratory of the DEPARTMENT or other laboratories
authorized by the DEPARTMENT to test materials involved in the contract
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
LOGIC Negative Logic Convention (Ground True) State
LSB Least Significant Byte
lsb Least Significant Bit
MB megabyte
MSB Most Significant Byte
msb Most Significant Bit
m Milli
MCU/MPU/ IMP Micro Controller Unit, Microprocessor Unit, or Integrated
Multiprotocol Processor
MIL Military Specifications
MODEM Modulation/Demodulation Unit
Module A functional unit that plugs into an assembly
Motherboard A printed circuit connector interface board with no active or passive
components
MOS Metal-Oxide Semiconductor
MOV Metal-Oxide Varistor
MS Military Standards
N Newton: SI unit of force
N.C. Normally closed contact
N.O. Normally open contact
NA Presently Not Assigned. Cannot be used by the Manufacturer for other
purposes
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NETA National Electrical Testing Association, Inc.
n nano
NLSB Next Least Significant Byte
nlsb Next Least Significant Bit
NMSB Next Most Significant Byte
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A61 of 107
nmsb Next Most Significant Bit
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PDA Power Distribution Assembly
PLA/PAL Programmable Array Logic Device
Power Failure A Power Failure is said to have occurred when the incoming line voltage
falls below 92 +/- 2 VAC for 50 milliseconds. See Power Conditions.
Power Restoration Power is said to be restored when the incoming line voltage equals or
exceeds 97 +/- 2 VAC for 50 milliseconds. See Power Conditions.
Power Conditions 16.7 ms (one 60 Hertz cycle) reaction period is allowed to be included
in the 50 milliseconds timing or added to (67 milliseconds duration). The
hysteresis between power failure and power restoration voltage settings
shall be a min. of 5 VAC with a threshold drift of no more than 0.2 VAC.
ppm Parts per million
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
RAM Random Access Memory
RF Radio Frequency
RMS Root-Mean-Square
ROM Read Only Memory Device
RTS Request to Send
R/W Controller Unit Read/Write Control Line
RxD Received Data
SCI Serial Communications Interface
SDLC Synchronous Data Link Control
S Logic State
s second
Second Sourced Produced by more than one Manufacturer
SRAM Static Random Access Memory Device
SW Switch
TB Terminal Block
TOD Time Of Day Clock
Triac Silicon-Controlled Rectifier which controls power bilaterally in an AC
switching circuit
TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic
Thumb Screw Device (TSD ) A retractable screw fastener with projecting stainless steel
screw, spring and natural aluminum knob finish. (TSD No.2 shall be flat
black.)
TSD No.1 - 8-32 SOUTHCO #47-62-301-20 or equal.
TSD No.2 - 8-32 SOUTHCO #47-62-301-60 or equal.
TSD No.3 - M3 SOUTHCO #47-82-101-10 or equal.
TxD Transmitted Data
u Micro
UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
VAC Voltage Alternating Current (root mean square)
VDC Voltage Direct Current
VME Versa Module Eurocard, VMEbus Standard IEEE P1014/D1.2
x Number Value
XX Manufacturer's Option
WDT Watchdog Timer: A monitoring circuit, external to the device watched,
which senses an Output Line from the device and reacts
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A62 of 107
APPENDIX A
ELECTRICAL, ENVIRONMENTAL AND TESTING
REQUIREMENTS
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A63 of 107
APPENDIX A – ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENTAL AND TESTING
REQUIREMENTS
A1 ENVIORNMENTAL AND TEST PROCEDURES
General A1.1
This section establishes the limits of the environmental and operational conditions in which the
first article ATC Controller Unit (CU) will perform. This section also defines the minimum test
procedures which may be used to demonstrate conformance of a CU with the provisions of the
specification.
Testing Software A1.2
Software shall be provided that contains a set of test programs to facilitate testing. This software
shall be capable of running individual tests or combinational tests. The combinational tests shall
include a single menu function that binds all of the tests into a single module. Tests may be run
either from the front panel or by an external serial port. These tests shall include but are not
limited to the items in the following outline:
A testing program shall contain the following:
1. Introduction to the Test
2. Installation Instructions
3. Starting the Software
4. Running Individual Tests
5. Test Suite Tree for combination tests
Individual Processor tests shall include:
1. DRAM Test
2. SRAM Test
3. FLASH Read/Write Test
4. Datakey Tests
5. USB Tests.
6. Ethernet Tests
Front Panel (when used) tests shall include:
1. Display Tests
2. Keyboard Tests.
I/O tests shall include:
1. I/O Loop Back Tests.
Asynchronous/Synchronous Communication Port tests shall include:
1. Loop Back Tests, Single Port and Port to Port.
2. Aggregate throughput tests as defined in Paragraph A1.3
Utility Function Tests:
Time of Day Functions
1. Display Time of Day (TOD) Clock
2. Set Time of Day (TOD) Clock
3. Enable Daylight Savings Time
4. Disable Daylight Savings Time
5. Line frequency tests
6. Clock accuracy tests
Ethernet Functions
1. Get Current IP Address
2. Set Current IP Address
3. Load IP Address from Datakey
4. Save IP Address from Datakey
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A64 of 107
5. Start Ethernet
Clear Error Log
Configure Continuous Tests
Start Application
Testing shall be performed either within an environmental chamber or on a bench. The controller
unit is not required to be installed within a cabinet during these tests.
These test procedures do not verify equipment performance under every possible combination of
environmental requirements covered by this standard. However, nothing in this testing profile
shall be construed as to relieve the requirement that the equipment provided must fully comply
with these standards/specifications under all environmental conditions stated herein.
Communication Loading Test. The communication channel loads for load testing A1.3
purposes, with no other activity present, shall be the following:
SP1, SP2, & SP8 = Continuous full-duplex, asynchronous communications at
19.2Kbps
SP4 & SP6 = Continuous full-duplex, asynchronous communications at 38.4Kbps
SP3S = Continuous full-duplex, synchronous communications at 153.6Kbps
SP5S = Continuous full-duplex synchronous communications at 614.4Kbps
All Ethernet Ports: At 10 percent loading, with 3 percent average hits to processor per
minute
No other applications or I/O activities are required to be operational during this test.
A2 Inspection
A visual and physical inspection of the CU shall verify mechanical, dimensional and assembly
conformance to all parts of this standard.
A3 Definitions of Design Acceptance Testing (DAT) and Production Testing.
Design Acceptance Testing (DAT) is performed on the first article ATC CU and is a part of the
pre-production process.
Production testing is performed on all units prior to their shipment to an agency.
A4 Environmental and Operating Requirements
The requirements (voltage, temperature, etc.) of this section shall apply in any combination.
Voltage and Frequency A4.1
1. Operating Voltage. The nominal voltage shall be 120 VAC, unless otherwise noted.
2. Operating Frequency. The operating frequency range shall be 60 hertz (+/-3.0
hertz), unless otherwise noted.
Temperature and Humidity. The Test Unit shall maintain all programmed functions A4.2
when the temperature and humidity ambient are within the specified limits defined
herein.
1. Ambient Temperature.
The operating ambient temperature range shall be from -37 degrees C to +74 degrees
C. The storage temperature range shall be from -45 degrees C to +85 degrees C.
The rate of change in ambient temperature shall not exceed 18 degrees C per hour,
during which the relative humidity shall not exceed 95 percent.
2. Humidity.
The relative humidity shall not exceed 95 percent non-condensing over the
temperature range of -37 degrees C to +74 degrees C.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A65 of 107
Above +46 degrees C, constant absolute humidity shall be maintained. This will
result in the relative humidity shown in Exhibit 3-1 for dynamic testing.
Table 1 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE VERSUS RELATIVE HUMIDITYAT
BAROMETRIC PRESSURES (29.92 In. Hg.) (NON-CONDENSING)
Ambient Temperature/
Dry Bulb (in degrees C)
Relative Humidity
(in percent)
Ambient Temperature/
Wet Bulb (in degrees C)
-37.0 to 1.1 10 -17.2 to 42.7
1.1 to 46.0 95 42.7
48.8 70 42.7
54.4 50 42.7
60.0 38 42.7
65.4 28 42.7
71.2 21 42.7
74.0 18 42.7
A5 Transients, Power Service.
The Test Unit shall maintain all defined functions when the independent test pulse levels
specified below occur on the alternating-current power service.
1. High-Repetition Noise Transients. The test pulses shall not exceed the following
conditions:
Amplitude: 300 Volts, both positive and negative polarity.
Peak Power: 2500 watts.
Repetition: 1 pulse approximately every other cycle moving uniformly over the full wave
in order to sweep across 360 degrees of the line cycle once every 3 seconds.
Pulse Rise Time: 1 microsecond.
Pulse Width: 10 microseconds.
This test is performed without protection in place or operational.
This test is considered to be a minimum test requirement for the Test Unit complying
with ANSI/IEEE C62.41. Regional conditions may warrant additional testing as
described in ANSI/IEEE C62.41. (Authorized Engineering Information)
2. Low Repetition High Energy Transients. The test pulses shall not exceed the following
conditions:
Amplitude: 600 Volts (+/-5 percent), both positive and negative polarity.
Energy Source: Capacitor, oil filled, 10 microfarads (+/-10 percent), internal surge
impedance less than 1 ohm.
Repetition: 1 discharge every 10 seconds.
Pulse Position: Random across 360 degrees of the line cycle.
This test is performed with protection in place and operational.
This test is considered to be a minimum test requirement for the Test Unit complying
with ANSI/IEEE C62.41. Regional conditions may warrant additional testing as
described in ANSI/IEEE C62.41. (Authorized Engineering Information)
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A66 of 107
A6 Nondestructive Transient Immunity.
The Test Unit (with protection in place and operational) shall be capable of withstanding a high
energy transient having the following characteristics repeatedly applied to the alternating current
input terminals (no other power connected to terminals) without failure of the test unit:
Amplitude: 2000 Volts (+/-5 percent), both positive and negative polarity.
Energy Source: Capacitor, oil filled, 15 microfarads (+/-10 percent), internal surge
impedance less than 1 ohm.
Repetition: Applied to the Test Unit once every 2 seconds for a maximum of three
applications for each polarity.
After the foregoing, the Test Unit shall perform all defined functions upon the
application of nominal alternating current power.
This test is considered to be a minimum test requirement for the Test Unit complying
with ANSI/IEEE C62.41 (100 Kilohertz Ring Wave, the 1.2/50 microseconds – 8/20
Combination Wave and the EFT Burst) at voltages and currents specified at “Location
Category B2” and at “Test Severity” level III (i.e. up to 4.0 Kilovolts, open-circuit).
Regional conditions may warrant additional testing as described in ANSI/IEEE C62.41.
(Authorized Engineering Information).
TEST FACILITIES
A7 Test Facilities
All instrumentation required in the test procedures, such as voltmeters, ammeters, thermocouples,
pulse timers, etc. shall be selected in accordance with good engineering practice. In all cases
where time limit tests are required, the allowance for any instrumentation errors shall be included
in the limit test.
Variable Voltage Source: A variable source capable of supplying 20 amperes from 100 VAC
to 135 VAC.
Environmental Chamber: An environmental chamber capable of attaining temperatures of -37
degrees C to +74 degrees C and relative humidity given in Table 1.
Transient Generators: Transient generators capable of supplying the transients outlined
above.
TEST PROCEDURE: TRANSIENTS, TEMPERATURE, VOLTAGE, AND HUMIDITY
A8 Test A: Placement in Environmental Chamber and Check-Out of Hook-Up
1. Place the test unit in the environmental chamber. Connect the test unit AC input circuit to a
variable voltage power transformer, voltmeter, and transient generator. The transient
generator shall be connected to the AC input circuit at a point at least 25 feet from the AC
power source and not over 10 feet from the input to the test unit.
2. Connect test switches to the appropriate terminals to simulate the various features
incorporated into the test unit. Place these switches in the proper position for desired
operation.
3. Verify the test hook-up. Adjust the variable-voltage power transformer to 120 VAC and
apply power to the test unit. Verify that the test unit goes through its prescribed startup
sequence and cycles properly in accordance with the operation determined by the positioning
of test switches.
Upon the satisfactory completion and verification of the test hook-up, proceed with Test B.
A9 Test B: Transient Tests (Power Service)
1. Program the test unit to dwell. Verify the input voltage is 120 VAC.
2. Set the transient generator to provide high-repetition noise transients as follows:
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A67 of 107
Amplitude: 300 Volts (+/-5 percent), both positive and negative polarity.
Peak Power: 2500 watts.
Repetition Rate: One pulse every other cycle moving uniformly over the full wave in
order to sweep once every 3 seconds across 360 degrees of line cycle.
Pulse Rise Time: 1 microsecond.
Pulse Width: 10 microseconds.
3. Apply the transient generator output to the AC voltage input for at least 5 minutes. Repeat
this test for at least two conditions of dwell for the test unit. The test unit shall continue to
dwell without malfunction.
4. Program the test unit to cycle through normal operations. Turn on the transient generator
(output in accordance with item 2) for 10 minutes, during which time the test unit shall
continue to cycle without malfunction.
5. Set a transient generator to provide high-repetition noise transients as follows:
Amplitude: 300 Volts (+/-5 percent), both positive and negative polarity.
Source Impedance: Not less than 1000 ohms nominal impedance.
Repetition: One pulse per second for a minimum of five pulses per selected terminal.
Pulse Rise Time: 1 microsecond.
Pulse Width: 10 microseconds.
Program the test unit to dwell. Verify the input voltage is 120 VAC.
6. Apply the transient generator (output in accordance with item 5) between logic ground and
the connecting cable termination of selected Field I/O input/output terminals of the test unit.
A representative sampling of selected input/output terminations shall be tested. The test unit
shall continue to dwell without malfunction.
7. Program the test unit to cycle. Turn on the transient generator (output in accordance with
item 5) and apply its output to the selected Field I/O input/output terminations. The test unit
shall continue to cycle without malfunction.
8. Reinstall protection and set a transient generator to provide low-repetition high-energy
transients as follows:
Amplitude: 600 Volts (+/-5 percent), both positive and negative polarity.
Energy Discharge Source: Capacitor, oil-filled, 10 microfarads.
Repetition Rate: One discharge each 10 seconds.
Pulse Position: Random across 360 degrees of line cycle.
9. Program the test unit to dwell. Verify the input voltage is 120 VAC.
10. Discharge the oil-filled 10-microfarad capacitor ten times for each polarity across the AC
voltage input. Repeat this test for at least two conditions of dwell. The test unit shall
continue to dwell without malfunction.
11. Program the test unit to cycle through normal operations. Discharge the capacitor ten times
for each polarity while the test unit is cycling, during which time the test unit shall continue
to cycle without malfunction.
12. During the preceding transient tests, the test unit shall continue its programmed functions.
The test unit shall not skip normal program intervals/steps or portions thereof when in
normal operation; place false inputs or produce false outputs while in dwell; disrupt normal
sequences in any manner; or change parameters.
13. Nondestructive Transient Immunity:
Turn off the AC power input to the test unit from the variable-voltage power source.
Apply the following high-energy transient to the AC voltage input terminals of the test
unit (no other power connected to terminals):
o Amplitude: 2000 +- 100V, both positive and negative polarity.
o Peak Power Discharge: Capacitor, oil-filled, 15 microfarads.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A68 of 107
o Maximum Repetition Rate: Applied to the Cabinet Assembly once every 2 seconds
for a maximum of three applications for each polarity.
Upon completion of the foregoing, apply 120 VAC to the test unit and verify that the test
unit goes through its prescribed startup sequence and cycles properly in accordance with
the programmed functions. The first operation of the over-current protective device
during this test is not considered a failure of the test unit.
NOTE—Tests C through G follow the profile indicated in Figure A1 to demonstrate the
ability of the test unit to function reliably under stated conditions of temperature, voltage, and
humidity.
Figure A1 – Test Profile
NOTES:
1. The rate of change in temperature shall not exceed 18 degrees C per hour
2. Humidity controls shall be set in conformance with the humidity given in Table 1 during
the temperature change between Test D and Test E.
3. If a change in both voltage and temperature are required for the next test, the voltage
shall be selected prior to the temperature change.
A10 Test C—Low-Temperature Low-Voltage Tests
1. Definition of Test Conditions
40
30
10
20
0
10
70
60
50
40
30
20
80
DCA+B F GE
(AMBIENT)120 VAC120 VAC100 VAC135 VAC135 VAC100 VACTEMPERATURE, in DEGREES CELSIUSSEE NOTES
1 AND 3
SEE NOTES
1 AND 2
SEE NOTES
1 AND 3
X
XX
XX
X
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A69 of 107
Environmental Chamber Door: Closed.
Temperature: -37 degrees C.
Low Voltage: 100 VAC.
Humidity Control: Off.
2. Test Procedure: While at room temperature, adjust the input voltage to 100 VAC and verify
that the test unit is still operable.
With the test unit cycling through normal operations, lower the test chamber to -37
degrees C at a rate not exceeding 18 degrees C per hour. Allow the test unit to cycle for a
minimum of 5 hours at -37 degrees C with the humidity controls in the off position. Then
operate the test switches as necessary to determine that all functions are operable.
Remove power from the test unit for a minimum period of 5 hours. Upon restoration of
power, the test unit shall go through its prescribed startup sequence and then resume
cycling.
With the test unit at -37 degrees C and the input voltage at 100 VAC, evaluate the
following item against the respective standards:
o Power Interruption Tests
On satisfactory completion of this test, proceed with Test D.
A11 Test D—Low-Temperature High-Voltage Tests
1. Definition of Test Conditions
Environmental Chamber Door: closed.
Low Temperature: -37 degrees C.
High Voltage: 135 VAC.
Humidity Controls: Off.
2. Test Procedure: While at -37 degrees C and with humidity controls off, adjust the input
voltage to 135 VAC and allow the test unit to cycle for 1 hour. Then operate the test switches
as necessary to determine that all functions are operable.
3. With the test unit at -37 degrees C and the input voltage at 135 VAC (humidity controls off),
evaluate the following items against the respective standards:
Power Interruption Tests
On satisfactory completion of this test, proceed to Test E.
A12 Test E—High-Temperature High-Voltage Tests
1. Definition of Test Conditions
Environmental Chamber Door: Closed.
High Temperature: +74 degrees C.
High Voltage: 135 VAC.
Humidity Controls: In accordance with the humidity given in Table 1.
2. Test Procedure - With the test unit cycling, raise the test chamber to +74 degrees C at a rate
not to exceed 18 degrees C per hour. Verify the input voltage is 135 VAC.
3. Set the humidity controls to not exceed 95 percent relative humidity over the temperature
range of +1.1 degrees C to +46 degrees C. When the temperature reaches +46 degrees C,
readjust the humidity control to maintain constant absolute humidity; +42.7 degrees C wet
bulb that results in the relative humidity shown in Table A1. Verify that the test unit
continues to cycle satisfactory during the period of temperature increase and at established
levels of relative humidity.
Allow the test unit to cycle for a minimum of 15 hours at +74 degrees C and 18 percent
relative humidity. Then operate the test switches as necessary to determine that all
functions are operable.
With the test unit at +74 degrees C and 18 percent relative humidity and the input voltage
at 135 VAC, evaluate the following items against the respective standards:
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A70 of 107
o Section ____ - Power Interruption Tests
On satisfactory completion of this test, proceed to Test F.
A13 Test F—High-Temperature Low-Voltage Tests
1. Definition of Test Conditions
Environmental Chamber Door: Closed.
High Temperature: +74 degrees C.
Low Voltage: 100 VAC.
Humidity Controls: 18 percent relative humidity and +42.7 degrees C wet bulb.
2. Test Procedure: Adjust the input voltage to 100 VAC and proceed to operate the test switches
to determine that all functions are operable. With the test unit at +74 degrees C and 18
percent relative humidity, +42.7 degrees C wet bulb, and the input voltage at 100 VAC,
evaluate the following items against the respective standards:
Power Interruption Tests
On satisfactory completion of this test, proceed to Test G.
A14 Test G—Test Termination
1. Program the test unit to cycle.
2. Adjust the input voltage to 120 VAC.
3. Set the controls on the environmental chamber to return to room temperature, +20 degrees C
(+/-5 degrees C), with the humidity controls in the off position. The rate of temperature
change shall not exceed 18 degrees C per hour.
4. Verify the test unit continues to cycle through normal operations properly.
5. Allow the test unit to stabilize at room temperature for 1 hour. Proceed to operate the test
switches to determine that all functions are operable.
A15 Test H—Appraisal of Equipment under Test
1. A failure is defined as any occurrence that results in other than normal operation of the
equipment. (See sub-section item b. below for details.) If a failure occurs, the test unit shall
be repaired or components replaced, and the test during which failure occurred shall be
restarted from its beginning.
2. The test unit is considered to have failed if any of the following occur:
If the test unit skips normal program intervals/steps or portions thereof when in normal
operation, places false inputs, presents false outputs, exhibits disruption of normal
sequence of operations, or produces changes in parameters beyond specified tolerances,
or
If the test unit fails to satisfy the requirements of Tests A to G, inclusive.
3. An analysis of the failure shall be performed and corrective action taken before the test unit is
retested in accordance with this standard. The analysis shall outline what action was taken to
preclude additional failures during the tests.
4. When the number of failures exceeds two, it shall be considered that the test unit fails to meet
these standards. The test unit may be completely retested after analysis of the failure and
necessary repairs have been made in accordance with item c.
5. Upon completion of the tests, visually inspect the test unit. If material changes are observed
which will adversely affect the life of the test unit, the cause and conditions shall be corrected
before making further tests.
6. Upon satisfactory completion of all of the tests described, test the unit in accordance with the
Vibration Test.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A71 of 107
A16 Vibration Test
Purpose of Test A16.1
This test is intended to duplicate vibrations encountered by the test unit (individual major
components) when installed at its field location.
Fasten the test unit securely to the vibration test table prior to the start of the test.
Test Equipment Requirements. A16.2
1. Vibration table with adequate table surface area to permit placement of the test unit.
2. Vibration test consists of:
Vibration in each of three mutually perpendicular planes.
Adjustment of frequency of vibration over the range from 5 hertz to 30 hertz.
Adjustment of test table excursion (double amplitude displacement) to maintain a
‘g’ value, measured at the test table, of 0.5g; as determined by the following
formula:
g = 0.0511df2
Where:
d = excursion in inches
f = frequency in hertz
Resonant Search A16.3
1. With the test unit securely fastened to the test table, set the test table for a double
amplitude displacement of 0.015 inch.
2. Cycle the test table over a search range from 5 hertz to 30 hertz and back within a
period of 12.5 minutes.
3. Conduct the resonant frequency search in each of the three mutually perpendicular
planes.
4. Note and record the resonant frequency determined from each plane.
In the event of more than on resonant frequency in a given plane, record the most
severe resonance.
If resonant frequencies appear equally severe, record each resonant frequency.
If no resonant frequency occurs for a given plane within the prescribed range, 30
hertz shall be recorded.
Endurance Test A16.4
1. Vibrate the test unit in each plane at its resonant frequency for a period of 1 hour at
amplitude resulting in 0.5g acceleration.
2. When more than one resonant frequency has been recorded, the test period of 1 hour
shall be divided equally between the resonant frequencies.
3. The total time of the endurance test shall be limited to 3 hours, 1 hour in each of three
mutually perpendicular planes.
Disposition of Equipment under Test A16.5
1. Examine the test unit to determine that no physical damage has resulted from the
vibration tests.
2. Check the test unit to determine that it is functionally operable in all modes of its
prescribed operation.
3. The test unit may be removed from the test table. Upon satisfactory completion of
the vibration test, proceed with the shock (impact) test.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A72 of 107
A17 Shock (Impact) Test.
Purpose of Test A17.1
The purpose of this test is to determine that the test unit is capable of withstanding the
shock (impact) to which it may reasonably be subjected during handling and
transportation in the process of installation, repair, and replacement. It is to be noted that
the test unit is not, at this time, in its shipping carton.
Fasten the test unit firmly to the specimen table. In each of its three planes the test, drop
the unit from a calibrated height to result in a shock force of 10g.
Test Equipment Requirements. A17.2
1. Shock (impact) test fixture equivalent to that suggested by the simplified sketch
shown in Figure 2.
2. The test table shall have a surface area sufficient to accommodate the test unit.
3. Calibrate the test table and the items tested as indicated. This shock test defines the
test shock to be 10g (+/-1g).
Measure calibration of the test equipment for these shock tests by three
accelerometers having fixed shock settings of 9g, 10g, and 11g. They shall be
Inertia Switch Incorporated ST-355, or the equivalent. Attach these devices
rigidly to the test table.
Calibration of the fixture for each item to be tested is as follows:
o Place a dummy load weighing within 10 percent of the test unit on the table.
o Reset the three accelerometers and drop the test table from a measured
height.
o Observe that the accelerometers indicate the following:
o Activate the 9g accelerometer.
o The 10g unit may or may not be actuated.
o The 11g unit shall not be actuated.
Figure 2
Shock Test Fixture
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A73 of 107
Repeat calibration test (a) and (b) adjusting the height of the drop until, on ten
successive drops, the following occurs:
o The 9g unit is actuated ten times.
o The 10g unit is actuated between four to eight times.
o The 11g unit is not actuated on any of the ten drops.
Test Procedure. A17.3
1. The calibration height of the drop for the particular item under test as determined in
Test Equipment Requirements shall be used in this procedure.
2. Secure the test unit to the test table surface so that the test unit rests on one of its
three mutually perpendicular planes.
3. Raise the test table to the calibrated height.
4. Release the test table from the calibrated height, allowing a free fall into the box of
energy absorbing material below.
5. Repeat the drop test for each of the remaining two mutually perpendicular planes,
using the same calibrated height for each drop test of the same test unit.
6. The observations of the accelerometer for the three tests of the test item are:
The 9g unit is actuated for all three tests. (Repeat the calibration if the unit is not
actuated.)
The 10g unit may or may not be actuated in these tests.
The 11g unit is not actuated on any drop. (If the unit is actuated, repeat the
calibration only if the test unit has suffered damage.)
Disposition of Test Unit. A17.4
1. Check the test unit for any physical damage resulting from the drop tests.
2. Check the test unit to determine that it is functionally operable in all modes of its
prescribed operation.
3. Satisfactory completion of all environmental tests, including the shock (impact) is
required.
A18 Power Interruption Tests
Conduct the following power interruption tests at low input voltage (100 VAC) and high input
voltage (135 VAC) at -37 degrees C, and +74 degrees C.
Short Power Interruption A18.1
While the Test Unit is cycling through normal operations, remove the input voltage for a
period of 475 milliseconds. Upon restoration of the input voltage, check to insure that the
Test Unit continues normal operation as though no power interruption has occurred.
Repeat this test three times.
Voltage Variation A18.2
All circuits of the Test Unit shall be subjected to slowly varying line voltage during
which the Test Unit shall be subjected to line voltage that is slowly lowered from a
nominal 120 VAC line voltage to 0 VAC at a rate of not greater than 2 Volts per second.
The line voltage shall then be slowly raised to 100 VAC at which point the Test Unit
shall resume normal operation without operator intervention. Perform this test at both -
37 degrees C and +74 degrees C, at a nominal 120 VAC line voltage. Repeat this test
three times.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A74 of 107
Rapid Power Interruption A18.3
Subject the Test Unit to rapid power interruption testing of the form that the power is off
for 350 milliseconds and on for 650 milliseconds for a period of 2 minutes. Perform
power interruption through electromechanical contacts of an appropriate size for the load.
During this testing, the controller shall function normally and continue normal
sequencing (operation) at the conclusion of the test. This test shall be performed at both -
37 degrees C and +74 degrees C, at a nominal 120 VAC line voltage. Repeat this test
three times.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Advanced Transportation Controller Specification
February 2012 Page A75 of 107
APPENDIX B – DETAILED DRAWINGS
List of Contents
Type 2070 Unit Chassis Front View - Figure A9-1
Type 2070 Unit Chassis Rear View - Figure A9-2
Type 2070 Unit Chassis Top View - Figure A9-3
Type 2070 Unit Chassis Motherboard - Figure A9-4
Type 2070 Unit Motherboard A Connector Pinouts - Figure A9-5
Type 2070 Unit System PCB Modules, General - Figure A9-6
Type 2070-2 Field I/O Module - Figure A9-8
Type 2070-2 Field I/O Module C1 & C11 Connectors Figure A9-9
Type 2070-3 Front Panel Assembly Figure A9-10
Type 2070-3 Front Panel Assembly, Key Codes Figure A9-11
Type 2070-3 Front Panel Assembly, Key Codes Figure A9-12
Type 2070-4 Power Supply Module - Figure A9-13
Type 2070-1C CPU Module - Figure A9-15
Type 2070 Serial Port Descriptors Defaults - Figure A9-16
Type 2070 Power Failure Reactors - Figure A9-17
Type 2070-6 Async/Modem Serial Comm Module – Figure10-5-1
Type 2070-7 Serial Comm Module – Figure10-5-2
Type 2070-N1 N1Controller Unit Front View - Figure A11-1
Type 2070-N1 N1 Controller Unit Side View - Figure A11-2
Type 2070-N1 N1 Controller Unit ISO View - Figure A11-3
Type 2070-8 Field I/O Module Connector A&B - Figure A11-4
Type 2070-8 Field I/O Module Connect C&D - Figure A11-5
Type 2070-8 Field I/O Module EX1&EX2 Connector – Figure A11-6
Type 2070-2N Field I/O Module – Figure A11-7
Source: California Department of Transportation (Caltrans), California
Transportation Electrical Equipment Specifications (TEES). March 9, 2009
February 2012 Page A76 of 107
February 2012 Page A77 of 107
February 2012 Page A78 of 107
February 2012 Page A79 of 107
February 2012 Page A80 of 107
February 2012 Page A81 of 107
February 2012 Page A82 of 107
February 2012 Page A83 of 107
February 2012 Page A84 of 107
Special Note: Alternate keyboard and display layouts are acceptable as approved by the Engineer.
However, minimum size dimensions shall be maintained.
February 2012 Page A85 of 107
February 2012 Page A86 of 107
February 2012 Page A87 of 107
February 2012 Page A88 of 107
February 2012 Page A89 of 107
February 2012 Page A90 of 107
February 2012 Page A91 of 107
February 2012 Page A92 of 107
February 2012 Page A93 of 107
February 2012 Page A94 of 107
February 2012 Page A95 of 107
February 2012 Page A96 of 107
February 2012 Page A97 of 107
February 2012 Page A98 of 107
February 2012 Page A99 of 107
February 2012 Page A100 of 107
Attachment 1
Technical Specifications
Advanced Traffic Signal Controller Software
JANUARY 2012
Attachment C
Table of Contents
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 General and Administrative ................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Intersection Information ................................................................................................................. 2
1.3 Controller Information .................................................................................................................... 2
1.4 Software Upgrades ........................................................................................................................ 2
1.5 Copy/Paste .................................................................................................................................... 3
1.6 Save Changes ............................................................................................................................... 3
1.7 Compatibility With Existing Infrastructure ...................................................................................... 3
1.8 Industry Standard Nomenclature ................................................................................................... 3
1.9 Security .......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.10 Web Browser ................................................................................................................................. 4
1.11 Daylight Savings Time ................................................................................................................... 4
2 Configuration ......................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Configuration Tables ...................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Cabinet Configuration .................................................................................................................... 5
2.3 Ring Barrier Configuration ............................................................................................................. 5
2.4 Start Up Configuration ................................................................................................................... 5
2.5 Programmed Flash Configuration .................................................................................................. 6
2.6 Manual Control Configuration ........................................................................................................ 8
3 Detection ............................................................................................................................................... 8
3.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 8
3.2 Global Detector Parameters .......................................................................................................... 9
3.3 Detector Configuration ................................................................................................................... 9
3.4 Vehicle Detector Configuration ...................................................................................................... 9
3.5 Pedestrian Detector Configuration ............................................................................................... 11
3.6 System/Count Detector Configuration ......................................................................................... 11
3.7 Detector Input Failure .................................................................................................................. 11
3.8 Remote Reset .............................................................................................................................. 11
4 Phase Parameters .............................................................................................................................. 12
4.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 12
4.2 Multiple Phase Parameter Tables ................................................................................................ 12
Table of Contents
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 ii
4.3 Phase Configuration .................................................................................................................... 12
4.4 Phase Timing Parameters ........................................................................................................... 15
4.5 Global Phase Parameters ............................................................................................................ 18
4.6 Pedestrian Operation ................................................................................................................... 19
4.7 Left Turn Operation ...................................................................................................................... 20
4.8 Right Turn Operation ................................................................................................................... 20
4.9 Pedestrian Hybrid Beacon Operation .......................................................................................... 21
4.10 Phase Sequence ......................................................................................................................... 22
5 Overlaps ............................................................................................................................................. 23
5.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 23
5.2 Overlap Configuration .................................................................................................................. 23
5.3 Overlap Timing Parameters ......................................................................................................... 25
5.4 Overlap Operations ...................................................................................................................... 26
6 Schedule ............................................................................................................................................. 28
6.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 28
6.2 Time of Day/Day of Week Schedule (TOD/DOW) ....................................................................... 28
6.3 Holiday Schedule ......................................................................................................................... 29
6.4 Seasonal Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 30
6.5 Temporary Schedule ................................................................................................................... 30
7 Coordination........................................................................................................................................ 31
7.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 31
7.2 Coordination Parameters ............................................................................................................. 31
7.3 Pedestrian Service ....................................................................................................................... 32
7.4 Pedestrian Service Parameters ................................................................................................... 34
7.5 Coordinated Operations (Use Cases) .......................................................................................... 34
8 Preemption ......................................................................................................................................... 36
8.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 36
8.2 Preempt States ............................................................................................................................ 38
8.3 Preemption Priority ...................................................................................................................... 38
8.4 Railroad Preemption .................................................................................................................... 39
8.5 Emergency Vehicle Preemption ................................................................................................... 40
8.6 Normal Preempt Configuration .................................................................................................... 40
9 Transit Priority ..................................................................................................................................... 45
9.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 45
Table of Contents
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 iii
9.2 Full Priority Operation .................................................................................................................. 46
9.3 Partial Transit Priority .................................................................................................................. 47
9.4 Bus Priority .................................................................................................................................. 52
10 Advanced Programming ..................................................................................................................... 55
10.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 55
10.2 Assignable Outputs ...................................................................................................................... 56
10.3 Assignable Inputs ........................................................................................................................ 57
11 Communications ................................................................................................................................. 58
11.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 58
11.2 Center to Field Communication ................................................................................................... 59
11.3 Peer to Peer Communication ....................................................................................................... 61
11.4 Local Wireless Remote ................................................................................................................ 62
12 Advanced Operations ......................................................................................................................... 62
12.1 Traffic Responsive Operation ...................................................................................................... 62
12.2 Queue Detection .......................................................................................................................... 63
12.3 Auxiliary Field Device Operation .................................................................................................. 65
13 Diamond Interchange Sequence ......................................................................................................... 66
13.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 66
13.2 Diamond Interchange K-Clearance .............................................................................................. 67
14 Logs .................................................................................................................................................... 72
14.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 72
14.2 General Controller Log ................................................................................................................ 72
14.3 Conflict Monitor/MMU .................................................................................................................. 72
14.4 Front Panel Log ........................................................................................................................... 72
14.5 Controller Software Log ............................................................................................................... 72
14.6 Detector Log ................................................................................................................................ 72
14.7 Vehicle Split Log .......................................................................................................................... 72
14.8 Cycle Time Log ............................................................................................................................ 73
14.9 Coordination Log ......................................................................................................................... 73
14.10 Preempt Log ............................................................................................................................ 73
14.11 Transit Priority Log ................................................................................................................... 73
14.12 Special Event Log .................................................................................................................... 74
14.13 Advanced Operation Event Log ............................................................................................... 74
15 User Interface ..................................................................................................................................... 74
Table of Contents
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 iv
15.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 74
15.2 Data Entry .................................................................................................................................... 75
15.3 Status Display .............................................................................................................................. 75
16 Miscellaneous ..................................................................................................................................... 80
16.1 Special Function/Time of Day Outputs ........................................................................................ 80
16.2 Alarms ......................................................................................................................................... 80
16.3 Diagnostics .................................................................................................................................. 81
16.4 Timing Sheets .............................................................................................................................. 81
17 Desirable Features .............................................................................................................................. 82
17.1 Vehicle Detector Configuration Desirable Features ..................................................................... 82
17.2 Vehicle Detector Timing Desirable Feature ................................................................................. 82
17.3 Smooth Preempt Configuration .................................................................................................... 82
17.4 Traffic Adaptive Operation ........................................................................................................... 86
17.5 Variable Mode of Left Turn Operation .......................................................................................... 86
17.6 Variable Lagging Left Turn Splits ................................................................................................. 91
17.7 Traffic Responsive Flash Operation ............................................................................................. 92
17.8 Cycle-By-Cycle Split Adjustments ................................................................................................ 94
17.9 Auxiliary Field Device Transition Table ........................................................................................ 96
17.10 Logs for Desirable Features .................................................................................................... 97
17.11 Intersection to Vehicle Information ........................................................................................... 98
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 1 of 100
Advanced Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
INTRODUCTION
The Cities of Fort Worth, Dallas, and Richardson Texas (the Cities) plan to transition from their existing
Model 170 local controller to the Advanced Transportation Controller (ATC). As part of the transition, the
Cities will procure new Local Controller Software that meets the existing and future needs of the Cities.
This document specifies the minimum and desirable requirements of the local controller software.
ATC SPECIAL PROVISIONS
The Cities have incorporated the ATC Standards into their ATC Special Provisions. The Cities’ ATC
Special Provisions modify and enhance the ATC Standard to meet the specific needs of the Cities. The
selected local controller software shall be fully compatible with the Cities’ ATC hardware. A copy of the
City’s ATC Special Provisions is available upon request.
CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS DOCUMENT
The Cities have defined their desired functionality for signalized intersections in its document entitled
Concept of Operation for Local Intersection Operation. This document is included in the appendix. If,
in the opinion of the selected provider, the requirements presented in this document will not provide that
functionality, it is the responsibility of the controller software provider to document and provide those
deficiencies to the Cities. The deficiencies list shall be provided to the Cities as part of the proposal.
CURRENTLY AVAILABLE SOFTWARE
The City expects that Commercially available Off-The-Shelf (COTS) software will meet, at a minimum, all of
the minimum requirements defined in this document. To be considered as COTS software, the proposed
software should be currently available and operating in the field at a minimum of 50 intersections.
CABINET TYPES
The proposed software shall be easily configurable to operate in the Type 332 family of 170 cabinets
(332/336/337), the NEMA TS1 and TS2 type 1 cabinets, and the ITS family of cabinets as defined in the
ITS Cabinet Standard v1.02.17b (or latest version).
NEMA REQUIREMENTS
Where not specifically defined in this document, the proposed local controller software shall meet or exceed
the requirements defined in Section 3 of the NEMA Standards Publication TS 2-2003 v.02.06, Traffic
Control Assemblies with NTCIP Requirements. The requirements defined in this document enhance,
expand, or are in addition to the requirements defined in the NEMA publication.
COMPLIANCE
The provided software shall be in strict adherence to the following:
Applicable National Transportation Communication for ITS Protocol (NTCIP) standards as defined
in the appendix.
The project requirements presented in this document.
If strict adherence to both conflict, compliance to the project requirements shall prevail.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 2 of 100
All Proposers must be able to demonstrate to the City’s satisfaction that their proposed controller
software is in full compliance with the provisions of this specification including all web browser interface
provisions.
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
1 GENERAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE
1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 The software shall provide a means for the user to define general information,
settings, and preferences.
1.2 INTERSECTION INFORMATION
1.2.1 The software shall support the following user defined intersection information
1.2.1.1 Intersection name
1.2.1.2 Intersection ID number
1.2.1.3 Street 1
1.2.1.4 Street 2
1.3 CONTROLLER INFORMATION
1.3.1 The software shall provide the following controller information
1.3.1.1 Current active software version
1.3.1.2 Available software upgrade
1.3.1.3 The software shall indicate that a new software version is available and
has been downloaded to the flash memory in the controller.
1.4 SOFTWARE UPGRADES
1.4.1 The City shall be automatically notified by the vendor when software upgrades
are available.
1.4.1.1 The automatic notice shall include a description of changes to the
software.
1.4.2 The software shall allow users to download upgrades to the local controller
software from a remote location.
1.4.3 The upgraded software shall reside in flash memory in the local controller unit
and not automatically replace the existing software in the controller unit.
1.4.3.1 If the software upgrade is considered minor, the user shall be able to
remotely replace the existing software while the controller is still operating
and shall not require a controller restart.
1.4.3.2 If the software upgrade is considered major, a controller restart shall be
required to replace the existing software.
1.4.3.3 A major upgrade shall not take place in the event of a power failure.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 3 of 100
1.4.3.4 The software provider shall submit their definition of minor and major
upgrades for City approval.
1.4.4 The software shall verify that the upgraded software was successfully
downloaded to the controller unit without errors.
1.5 COPY/PASTE
1.5.1 The software shall provide a copy and paste capability for user entered
parameters. The functionality shall be available for individual cells, rows,
columns, and full tables.
1.6 SAVE CHANGES
1.6.1 The software shall require the user to confirm any changes to the controller
database prior to accepting the change.
1.6.2 All changes shall become highlighted and be reviewable prior to acceptance.
1.6.3 Changes shall take effect upon confirmation by the user.
1.7 COMPATIBILITY WITH EXISTING INFRASTRUCTURE
1.7.1 A template shall be provided for the inputs and outputs of standard 332, 332A,
336S, 337, and 337S cabinets.
1.7.2 The software shall support monitoring of the existing conflict
monitor/malfunction monitor unit.
1.8 INDUSTRY STANDARD NOMENCLATURE
1.8.1 All names, labels, and other descriptions within the software shall use industry
standard, easily understood nomenclature. All nonstandard nomenclature shall
be approved by the City.
1.8.2 Any new software development shall follow industry standard software
development.
1.9 SECURITY
1.9.1 The software shall enable/deny access to the controller through user
passwords. User access and passwords shall be definable by the software
administrator. The user shall be required to change their password after an
amount of time in days defined by the system administrator.
1.9.1.1 Security levels shall include view only, access to change timing
parameters only, access to change configuration of phasing.
1.9.1.2 As security levels increase, the user will be able to access and change
more features in the software and each level shall include access to all
lower levels.
1.9.1.3 The software shall log the user ID, date and time of log-in and log-out and
any changes the user made.
1.9.1.4 The software shall automatically logout the last user after a user specified
amount of time has passed where there was no front panel activity or
activity from a remote connection.
1.9.2 The software shall provide access from approved remote equipment only.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 4 of 100
1.9.2.1 The user shall be able to enable/disable this feature.
1.9.2.2 The software shall maintain a “MAC Allow Table” containing the MAC
addresses of all approved equipment.
1.9.2.3 When the software identifies non-approved equipment, it shall query the
supervisory software (through an SNMP trap) in an attempt to validate the
equipment. If the equipment MAC address is validated, the equipment
shall be approved and the MAC address added to the MAC Allow Table.
1.9.2.4 The software local MAC Allow Table shall be regularly updated from the
Supervisory software.
1.9.2.5 Users with proper access privileges shall be able to enter an Equipment
MAC Address into the software via the front panel.
1.10 WEB BROWSER
1.10.1 The software shall provide a controller resident web server that exposes all
NTCIP object via a web interface.
1.10.1.1 Objects should be capable of being edited with Internet explorer 5 and
higher, Firefox 1.0 and higher, Safari 1.0 and higher Ethernet connected
web client browser.
1.10.1.2 There shall not be any step necessary to install extra software on the web
client browser. As long as the user’s web browser meets the specified
requirements, the user shall be able to view all the status objects and edit
all read/write parameter objects.
1.10.2 Web User interface object support
1.10.2.1 The web application shall support all the objects that users can set on the
controller using the controllers’ front panel User Interface. This shall
support all the standard NTCIP 1201:2005 and NTCIP 1202:2005 objects
and all manufacturer specific objects.
1.10.3 Status objects
1.10.3.1 The status objects should be refreshed by the web interface automatically
(without the need for the users to refresh pages in their web browser
manually). The refresh shall have a latency of less than 2/10 of a second
after a value change occurs.
1.10.4 Web server Mib parameters
1.10.4.1 A manufacturer specific NTCIP read/write object shall be used for
configuring the network port number which the web server listen to. The
Default Port number shall be 80.
1.11 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME
1.11.1 The software shall provide the capability to automatically adjust the controller
clock to reflect daylight savings time (DST). Dates and time for the start and
end of DST shall be user programmable.
1.11.2 By default, DST shall be enabled.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 5 of 100
2 CONFIGURATION
2.1 CONFIGURATION TABLES
2.1.1 The software shall provide a minimum of five (5) tables for configuring the
software.
2.2 CABINET CONFIGURATION
2.2.1 The user shall be able to select the cabinet type.
2.2.1.1 Default configuration tables shall be provided for 332, 332A, 336S, 337,
337S, and ITS model cabinets.
2.2.2 The software shall be capable of configuring the maximum number of channel
outputs or detector inputs available in the ITS model cabinets.
2.2.3 The software shall provide a minimum of 128 user definable input pins.
2.2.4 The software shall provide a minimum of 128 user definable output pins.
2.2.5 The software shall allow the user to redirect any vehicle phase, pedestrian
phase, or overlap output by changing the pin assignment.
2.3 RING BARRIER CONFIGURATION
2.3.1 The software shall allow the user to program the ring and barrier structure.
2.3.2 The software shall provide a minimum of eight (8) concurrent rings and 12
barriers.
2.3.3 The user shall be able to program one instance of every phase in the ring and
barrier sequence.
2.3.3.1 The user shall be able to program phases even if they are not permitted.
2.3.4 The user shall be able to make changes to the active ring and barrier structure
while the software is running the traffic light.
2.3.4.1 The software shall prompt the user to put the intersection into flash or
continue.
2.3.4.1.1 If the user elects to continue without putting the intersection
into flash, the software shall provide diagnostics to evaluate
the proposed changes and determine if the controller needs
to restart to implement the proposed changes.
2.3.4.1.2 If a restart is needed, the controller shall prompt the user to
put the intersection into flash to implement changes.
The user shall be able to override the software and
continue without restart.
2.3.4.1.3 If controller is not put into flash and the user leaves the
prompt screen, the changes will be lost.
2.3.4.2 The changes shall take effect when the user confirms the changes and
the local cycle timer reaches the zero point or the last barrier is crossed.
2.4 START UP CONFIGURATION
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 6 of 100
2.4.1 The user shall be able to define the initial operation of the controller upon
startup.
2.4.2 The user shall be able to select the following startup parameters:
2.4.2.1 Primary Startup Phases
2.4.2.1.1 The primary startup phases shall display solid yellow
followed by solid all-red.
2.4.2.2 Secondary Startup Phases
2.4.2.2.1 Secondary Startup phases will serve after the primary
startup phases but prior to starting normal operation.
2.4.2.2.2 The secondary startup phases shall display green
immediately after the end of the primary startup phases.
2.4.2.3 Startup Flash
2.4.2.3.1 Enabling this feature will cause the intersection to startup in
flash.
2.4.2.4 Flash Yellow
2.4.2.4.1 The selected phases shall flash yellow during programmed
flash operation. All other phases shall flash red.
2.4.2.5 Startup All-Red Clearance
2.4.2.5.1 Enabling this feature will cause the intersection to display a
steady red indication before beginning normal operation.
2.4.2.6 Vehicle Call Disable
2.4.2.6.1 The user shall be able to identify any vehicle phase that will
not receive an automatic call upon startup.
2.4.2.6.2 By default all vehicle phases shall be receive a call upon
startup.
2.4.2.7 Pedestrian Call Disable
2.4.2.7.1 The user shall be able to identify any pedestrian phase that
will not receive an automatic call upon startup.
2.4.2.7.2 By default all pedestrian phases shall be receive a call upon
startup.
2.4.3 The user shall be able to set the following startup timing parameters. When
values are entered in the startup table for these parameters, the controller will
time these values instead of the values entered for normal operations
2.4.3.1 Primary Startup (0-25.5 sec)
2.4.3.2 Secondary Startup (0-25.5 sec)
2.4.3.3 Startup minimum green (0-255 sec)
2.4.3.4 Startup Flash (0-255 sec)
2.4.3.5 Startup All Red Clearance (0-10 sec)
2.5 PROGRAMMED FLASH CONFIGURATION
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 7 of 100
2.5.1 The user shall be able to define the programmed flash operation of the
controller.
2.5.2 The controller shall not enter flash operation unless all traffic lights are red.
2.5.3 When scheduled or commanded to change to program flash operation, the
software shall place minimum recalls on the last phases before flash. After
beginning flash operation, the controller shall remove existing vehicle and
pedestrian calls and ignore all calls during flash operation.
2.5.4 The software shall end programmed flash by providing a green light for the
selected exit phase.
2.5.5 The user shall be able to select the following programmed flash parameters by
phase:
2.5.5.1 Flash Entry Phases
2.5.5.1.1 Flash entry phase will be served before the controller enters
program flash.
2.5.5.1.2 If the flash entry phases do not end at the same time, the
controller will enter flash mode during the first all-red period
after one of the phases has been served.
2.5.5.2 Flash Exit Phases
2.5.5.2.1 Flash exit phases shall serve as the startup phases following
the end of program flash.
2.5.5.2.2 If no exit phases are selected, the secondary startup phases
shall be used.
2.5.5.3 Flash Yellow
2.5.5.3.1 The selected phases shall flash yellow during programmed
flash operation. All other phases shall flash red.
2.5.5.4 Vehicle Call
2.5.5.4.1 The user shall be able to identify any vehicle phase that will
receive an automatic call when switching from program flash
to normal operation.
2.5.5.4.2 By default all vehicle phases shall not receive a call when
exiting program flash.
2.5.5.5 Pedestrian Call
2.5.5.5.1 The user shall be able to identify any pedestrian phase that
will receive an automatic call when switching from program
flash to normal operations.
2.5.5.5.2 By default all pedestrian phases shall not receive a call
when exiting program flash.
2.5.5.6 Alternate Flash Hertz
2.5.5.6.1 The selected phase shall show red when non-selected
phases are dark and vice versa.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 8 of 100
2.5.5.7 All Red Clearance Time
2.5.5.7.1 The user shall be able to select the amount of all-red time
that will be displayed following the end of program flash.
2.5.5.7.2 The duration of the all-red clearance time shall be user
definable for 0-25.5 seconds.
2.5.5.7.3 If the all-red clearance time is 0.0 seconds, the flash exit
phases shall immediately display green.
2.6 MANUAL CONTROL CONFIGURATION
2.6.1 The user shall be able to program an alternate sequence for operation during
manual control. The user shall be able to remotely apply and remove vehicle
and pedestrian calls.
2.6.2 The software shall provide an option to enable/disable manual control.
3 DETECTION
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Vehicle Detectors
3.1.1.1 The software shall support a minimum of 72 programmable vehicle
detectors per intersection.
3.1.1.2 All vehicle detectors shall be capable of collecting volume and occupancy
data.
3.1.1.2.1 Detector data shall be aggregated in 5 minute increments.
3.1.1.2.2 User shall be able to identify movements associated with
each detector.
3.1.2 Pedestrian Detectors
3.1.2.1 The software shall support a minimum of 12 programmable pedestrian
detectors per intersection.
3.1.3 System Detectors
3.1.3.1 The user shall be able to assign any detector as a system detector.
3.1.3.2 The software shall support a minimum of 16 system detectors.
3.1.4 Queue Detectors
3.1.4.1 The user shall be able to assign any detector as a queue detector.
3.1.4.2 The user shall be able to assign a minimum of eight (8) queue detectors.
3.1.5 Description
3.1.5.1 The user will be able to enter a text description of each detector. The
description field shall be at least 18 characters.
3.1.6 Multiple Detector Tables
3.1.6.1 The software shall provide a minimum of four (4) unique, user definable
detector tables.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 9 of 100
3.2 GLOBAL DETECTOR PARAMETERS
3.2.1 The software shall allow users to define the following detection parameter
values that apply to all enabled detectors.
3.2.1.1 Vehicle On Time Fail
3.2.1.1.1 The user shall be able to select the amount of time in
minutes that the detector must be in a constant on state
before it is reported failed.
3.2.1.1.2 Acceptable input value shall range from 0 to 1440 minutes.
3.2.1.2 Vehicle Off Time Fail
3.2.1.2.1 The user shall be able to select the amount of time in
minutes that the detector must be off before it is reported
failed.
3.2.1.3 Pedestrian On Time Fail
3.2.1.3.1 The user shall be able to select the amount of time in
minutes that the pedestrian detector must be in a constant
on state before it is reported failed.
3.2.1.4 Pedestrian Off Time Fail
3.2.1.4.1 Enable – the user shall select if this parameter is active in
the software.
3.2.1.4.2 The user shall be able to select the amount of time in
minutes that the pedestrian detector must be off before it is
reported failed.
3.2.1.5 Erratic Activity Fail
3.2.1.5.1 The user shall be able to select the number of actuations
(per minute) that the detector must exceed before it is
reported failed.
3.3 DETECTOR CONFIGURATION
3.3.1 The software shall be able to configure the following detector types:
3.3.1.1 Vehicle
3.3.1.2 Pedestrian
3.3.1.3 System
3.3.1.4 Queue
3.4 VEHICLE DETECTOR CONFIGURATION
3.4.1 The software shall provide the following user selected configuration
parameters for vehicle detection.
3.4.1.1 Enable
3.4.1.2 Call
3.4.1.3 Extend
3.4.1.4 Terminate
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 10 of 100
3.4.1.4.1 Detector enabled as a terminate detector shall cause the
controller to immediately end the selected phase.
3.4.1.5 Yellow Lock
3.4.1.5.1 If yellow lock is used for a left turn phase, the user shall be
able to define the permitted phases for the left turn. The
software shall not lock the call until the protected and
permitted phases for the left turn are yellow.
3.4.1.6 Red Lock
3.4.1.6.1 If red lock is used for a left turn phase, the user shall be
able to define the permitted phases for the left turn. The
software shall not lock the call until the protected and
permitted phases for the left turn are red.
3.4.1.7 Pedestrian Input
3.4.1.7.1 When enabled, the detector shall call the pedestrian phase
associated with the vehicle phases programmed for the
input.
3.4.1.8 Phase Assignment
3.4.1.8.1 The software shall allow at least eight (8) vehicle phases to
be assigned to each detector.
3.4.1.9 Overlap Assignment
3.4.1.10 Detector Disable (Type 3)
3.4.1.10.1 This parameter shall reset the phase extension timer for the
phases associated with this input until the green has been
active for the number of seconds defined by the user.
3.4.1.10.2 Once the extension timer for this detector reaches zero, the
detector shall be disabled.
3.4.1.10.3 Once a detector input is disabled it shall not become active
until the phase begins its clearance interval.
3.4.1.10.4 The phase associated with that detector.
3.4.1.11 Delay disabled when leading
3.4.1.11.1 The user shall be able to disable the detector delay for
leading left turns.
3.4.2 The software shall provide the following user definable timing parameters for
vehicle detection.
3.4.2.1 Delay
3.4.2.2 Extension
3.4.2.3 Detector Disable
3.4.2.4 Extension Time
3.4.2.5 Added Initial
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 11 of 100
3.5 PEDESTRIAN DETECTOR CONFIGURATION
3.5.1 The software shall provide the following user selected pedestrian detector
configuration parameters:
3.5.1.1 Enable
3.5.1.2 Phase Assignment
3.5.1.3 Overlap Assignment
3.6 SYSTEM/COUNT DETECTOR CONFIGURATION
3.6.1 Each detector input shall be capable of functioning as a system detector
3.6.1.1 Detectors shall accumulate volume and occupancy data on a per cycle
basis.
3.6.1.2 The user shall be able to set the time increment in minutes for the
aggregation of volume and occupancy information.
3.6.1.3 User shall be able to set the time of day/day of week to collect volume
and occupancy data.
3.6.1.4 The user can also choose to have data continuously collected.
3.7 DETECTOR INPUT FAILURE
3.7.1 In the event of a detector failure, the software shall automatically generate an
alarm and transmit the alarm to the traffic management system.
3.7.2 The software shall automatically change detector setting when a detector
linked to another detector fails.
3.7.2.1 A detector shall automatically change from call only to call and extend.
3.7.2.1.1 This shall occur when the stop detector is only used to call
the phase and the setback detector is used to call and
extend the phase. The stop detector shall change to call
and extend if the setback detector fails.
3.7.2.2 A detector shall automatically change from time before detector disable to
extend.
3.7.2.2.1 This shall occur when the stop detector has a time before
detector disable programmed and the setback detector is
used to call and extend the phase. The stop detector shall
change to call and extend if the setback detector fails.
3.7.3 The user shall be able to select any of the following modes in the event of a
detector failure:
3.7.3.1 None
3.7.3.2 Minimum Recall
3.7.3.3 Maximum 1 Recall
3.7.3.4 Maximum 2 Recall
3.7.3.5 Maximum 3 Recall
3.8 REMOTE RESET
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 12 of 100
3.8.1 The software shall allow the detectors to be reset remotely.
4 PHASE PARAMETERS
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 The software shall provide a minimum of 32 vehicular phases.
4.1.1.1 The user shall be able to label each vehicle phase in the phase
parameters table.
4.1.1.1.1 Each text label shall be at least six characters.
4.1.1.1.2 The vehicle phase label in a phase parameters table shall
remain blank until the user enters a label or copies a label
from another phase parameter table.
4.1.2 The software shall provide a minimum of 12 pedestrian phases.
4.1.2.1 The user shall be able to label each pedestrian phase in the phase
parameters table.
4.1.2.1.1 Each text label shall be at least six characters.
4.1.2.1.2 The pedestrian phase label in a phase parameters table
shall remain blank until the user enters a label or copies a
label from another phase parameter table.
4.1.3 All changes to phase parameters shall become active at the beginning of the
next local cycle or when the controller crossed the last barrier in the ring
structure.
4.1.4 The software shall provide configuration for Pedestrian Hybrid Signals as
described in Section 4.9.
4.2 MULTIPLE PHASE PARAMETER TABLES
4.2.1 The software shall provide a minimum of thirty-two (32) programmable tables
of phase parameters.
4.3 PHASE CONFIGURATION
4.3.1 The software shall allow the user to select the following phase configuration
parameters:
4.3.1.1 Vehicle Phase Enable
4.3.1.2 Pedestrian Phase Enable
4.3.1.3 Exclusive Vehicle Phases
4.3.1.4 Exclusive Pedestrian Phases
4.3.1.5 Restricted Phases (conflicting phases)
4.3.1.5.1 The user shall enter a pair of phases in a field. A
compatibility table does not meet this requirement.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 13 of 100
4.3.1.5.2 If the active phase is entered as a restricted phase and that
phase is active, it will prevent the other phases entered as
restricted phases from becoming active. The ring with the
other phase will red rest until the active phase ends.
4.3.1.5.3 If two restricted phases try to turn green at the same time
the controller shall select one phase, and then stop the other
phase from turning green.
4.3.1.6 Disable Minimum Yellow
4.3.1.6.1 When enabled the software shall be able to output yellow
times less than 3.0 seconds.
4.3.1.6.2 If this feature is not active, the controller shall output at least
a 3.0 second yellow.
4.3.1.7 Split Ring
4.3.1.7.1 When enabled, the software shall operate each ring
independently.
4.3.1.7.2 When enabled, this feature will disable any common barriers
between the active rings in the active ring-barrier
programming.
4.3.1.7.3 When enabled, the user shall be able to coordinate the rings
so barriers are crossed at the same time in the local cycle.
This shall not prevent one ring from crossing the barrier
even if other rings are not ready.
4.3.1.8 Every Other Cycle
4.3.1.8.1 The phase will be served every other cycle; in other words,
the phase will be omitted every other cycle.
4.3.1.8.2 The user shall be able to select if the phase is served during
odd or even cycles.
4.3.1.9 Minimum Recall 1
4.3.1.10 Minimum Recall 2
4.3.1.11 Maximum Recall 1
4.3.1.12 Maximum Recall 2
4.3.1.13 Maximum Recall 3
4.3.1.14 Soft Recall
4.3.1.14.1 Soft Recall provides a recall to the selected phases in the
absence of any other vehicle or pedestrian calls.
4.3.1.15 Conditional Service
4.3.1.15.1 Conditional Service allows selected phases to be served out
of the set sequence provided all the conditions below are
met:
4.3.1.15.2 A phase in the same ring is green and ready to terminate.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 14 of 100
4.3.1.15.3 A phase in another ring is green and has enough split time
or max time to serve the conditional service max time for the
conditional service phase.
4.3.1.16 Pedestrian Walk 1
4.3.1.17 Pedestrian Walk 2
4.3.1.18 Pedestrian Clearance 1
4.3.1.19 Pedestrian Clearance 2
4.3.1.20 Pedestrian Recall
4.3.1.21 Pedestrian Recycle
4.3.1.21.1 Pedestrian Recycle allows a late start or restart of
pedestrian service after start of vehicle green if there is
sufficient max green or split time remaining to completely
serve the walk and pedestrian clearance.
4.3.1.21.2 By default this shall be enabled.
4.3.1.22 Dual Entry
4.3.1.23 Walk Rest
4.3.1.24 Simultaneous Gap
4.3.1.25 Red Rest
4.3.1.26 Advanced Walk
4.3.1.27 Delay Walk
4.3.1.28 Last Car Passage
4.3.1.29 Phase recycle
4.3.1.29.1 The software shall allow vehicle and pedestrian phases to
be re-serviced in the cycle if enough time remains to provide
a minimum service.
4.3.1.29.2 The user shall be able to enable phase re-service by phase
and by coordination pattern.
4.3.1.29.3 The user shall define the second of the local cycle a re-
service may occur and the second of the local cycle a re-
service must be finished.
4.3.1.29.4 Vehicular phases shall be re-serviced, even if the pedestrian
phase cannot be re-served that cycle.
4.3.1.29.5 This feature shall allow the user to operate part of the
coordinated cycle in free mode.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 15 of 100
4.4 PHASE TIMING PARAMETERS
4.4.1 The software shall provide the following timing parameter ranges:
4.4.2 The software shall provide the following phase timing parameters.
4.4.2.1 Minimum Green 1
4.4.2.1.1 Minimum green 1 is the default value unless the users
specifies minimum green 2 in the active phase parameters
table
4.4.2.1.2 The software shall not violate a minimum green 1 unless
there is a request for priority or preemption.
4.4.2.2 Minimum Green 2
4.4.2.2.1 The software shall not violate a minimum green 2 unless
there is a request for priority or preemption.
4.4.2.3 Vehicle Extension
Parameter Range
(Seconds)
Increments
(Seconds)
Min Green 1 1-255 1
Min Green 2 1-255 1
Passage Time 0-25.5 0.1
Max Green 1 1-255 1
Max Green 2 1-255 1
Max Green 3 1-255 1
Conditional Service Max 1-255 1
Detector Disable 0-25.5 0.1
Yellow Clearance 0-25.5 0.1
All-Red Clearance 0-25.5 0.1
Walk 1 0-255 1
Walk 2 0-255 1
Pedestrian Clearance 1 0-255 1
Pedestrian Clearance 2 0-255 1
Advanced Walk 0-25.5 0.1
Delay Walk 0-25.5 0.1
Added Initial 0-25.5 0.1
Time to Reduce 1-255 1
Time Before Reduction 1-255 1
Minimum Gap 0-25.5 0.1
Variable Left Turn Time 0-25.5 0.1
Last Car Passage 0-25.5 0.1
Walk 2 Enable Time 0-255 1
Pedestrian Clearance 2 Enable Time 0-255 1
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 16 of 100
4.4.2.3.1 This is the base extension value. Any value in the detector
configuration table is added to this amount.
4.4.2.4 Maximum Green 1
4.4.2.4.1 Maximum green 1 shall be the default value if no other
Maximum value is entered.
4.4.2.5 Maximum Green 2
4.4.2.6 Maximum Green 3
4.4.2.7 Conditional Service Max
4.4.2.7.1 The maximum green time provided on a phase when timing
due to conditional service.
4.4.2.7.2 If the Conditional Service Max is 0 seconds, this max timer
shall have no effect. The active maximum green timer shall
apply.
4.4.2.7.3 This max green shall apply to the second time the phase is
served in a cycle. The active maximum green timer shall
apply to the first time the phase is served in a cycle.
4.4.2.8 Yellow Clearance
4.4.2.8.1 The user defined yellow shall not be less than 3.0 seconds.
If the user enters a yellow less than 3.0 seconds the
software will output 3.0 seconds unless the minimum yellow
time is disabled.
4.4.2.8.2 The software shall not output a yellow interval shorter than
the user defined value.
4.4.2.8.3 The software shall not display a yellow interval 0.01 seconds
longer than the user defined value.
4.4.2.9 All-Red Clearance
4.4.2.10 Walk 1
4.4.2.10.1 The software shall be capable of truncating the walk if there
is a request for priority or preemption.
4.4.2.10.2 The software shall not output a walk interval shorter than the
user defined value with the exception of a preemption event.
4.4.2.11 Walk 2
4.4.2.11.1 The software shall be capable of truncating the walk if there
is a request for priority or preemption.
4.4.2.11.2 The software shall not output a walk interval shorter than the
user defined value with the exception of a preemption event.
4.4.2.12 Pedestrian Clearance 1
4.4.2.12.1 The software shall be capable of truncating the pedestrian
clearance interval if there is a request for priority or
preemption.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 17 of 100
4.4.2.12.2 The software shall not output a pedestrian clearance interval
shorter than the user defined value with the exception of a
priority or preemption event.
4.4.2.12.3 The pedestrian clearance shall time with an overlap’s green
clearance and shall not extend the duration of the overlap
green clearance interval.
4.4.2.12.4 The software shall be capable of outputting the value of the
clearance interval to the countdown timer. It shall be
assumed the countdown timer is not learning the duration of
the pedestrian clearance; the software is providing this
value.
4.4.2.13 Pedestrian Clearance 2
4.4.2.13.1 The software shall be capable of truncating the pedestrian
clearance interval if there is a request for priority or
preemption.
4.4.2.13.2 The software shall not output a pedestrian clearance interval
shorter than the user defined value with the exception of a
priority or preemption event.
4.4.2.13.3 The pedestrian clearance shall time with an overlap’s green
clearance and shall not extend the duration of the overlap
green clearance interval.
4.4.2.13.4 The software shall be capable of outputting the value of the
clearance interval to the countdown timer. It shall be
assumed the countdown timer is not learning the duration of
the pedestrian clearance; the software is providing this
value.
4.4.2.14 Advance Walk
4.4.2.14.1 Entering a value in a cell in the table will activate this
feature.
4.4.2.14.2 The software shall not output an advanced walk if the output
is from a pedestrian overlap and the pedestrian interval is
active before the beginning of the phase.
4.4.2.14.3 The software shall begin the pedestrian phase during the
vehicle green even if advanced walk is programmed
provided ample phase green time is remaining on the
compatible vehicle phases.
4.4.2.15 Delay Walk
4.4.2.15.1 The software shall not output a delayed walk unless the
pedestrian phase is called before the vehicle phase begins.
4.4.2.15.2 The software shall not output a delayed walk if the output is
from a pedestrian overlap and the pedestrian interval is
active before the beginning of the phase.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 18 of 100
4.4.2.15.3 The software shall begin the pedestrian phase during the
vehicle green if the delayed walk is programmed. The
delayed walk shall not be provided if the pedestrian phase is
called and served during the vehicle green.
4.4.2.16 Volume Density – Added Initial
4.4.2.16.1 The software shall activate this feature when the user
defines the added initial and maximum initial green for a
phase.
4.4.2.17 Added Initial
4.4.2.18 Maximum Initial Green
4.4.2.19 Volume Density – Vehicle Extension
4.4.2.19.1 The software shall activate this feature when the user
defines the minimum vehicle extension, maximum vehicle
extension, time before reduction, and time to reduce for a
phase.
4.4.2.20 Minimum Vehicle Extension
4.4.2.21 Maximum Vehicle Extension
4.4.2.22 Time Before Reduction
4.4.2.23 Time To Reduce
4.4.2.24 Walk 2
4.4.2.24.1 If the pedestrian movement is an overlap, the software shall
call the walk 2 defined in the overlap table.
4.4.2.24.2 If this parameter is 0 seconds, thenWalk 1shall be output.
4.4.2.25 Walk 2 Enable Time
4.4.2.26 Pedestrian Clearance 2
4.4.2.26.1 If the pedestrian movement is an overlap, the software shall
call the pedestrian clearance 2 defined in the overlap table.
4.4.2.26.2 If this parameter is 0 seconds, the pedestrian clearance
shall be output.
4.4.2.27 Pedestrian Clearance 2 Enable Time
4.4.2.28 Variable Left Turn Time
4.4.2.29 Last Car Passage
4.5 GLOBAL PHASE PARAMETERS
If a phase is put on recall or walk rest in the Global Phase Parameters table, the phase shall be on
that recall or walk rest regardless of the active plan set table. The phases on recall or walk rest in the
global phase parameters table shall be combined with the phases on recall or walk rest in the plan
set tables. All recalls and walk rests programmed in the active plan set table shall apply regardless
of the programming in the Global Phase Parameters table; the Global Phase Parameters table shall
not prevent these recalls and walk rests from applying.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 19 of 100
4.5.1 The Global Phase Parameters shall always be active.
4.5.2 The user shall be able to define the following phase parameters:
4.5.2.1 Global Minimum Recall
4.5.2.1.1 The Global Minimum Recall shall apply to all plan set tables.
4.5.2.1.2 These recalls shall be applied in addition to existing
minimum recalls in the plan set table.
4.5.2.2 Global Maximum Recall
4.5.2.2.1 The Global Maximum Recall shall apply to all plan set
tables.
4.5.2.2.2 These recalls shall be applied in addition to existing
minimum recalls in the plan set table.
4.5.2.3 Global Pedestrian Recall
4.5.2.3.1 The Global Minimum Recall shall apply to all plan set tables.
4.5.2.3.2 These recalls shall be applied in addition to existing
minimum recalls in the plan set table.
4.5.2.3.3 One pedestrian service shall be provided per cycle; this
recall shall not cause the pedestrian service to recycle.
4.5.2.4 Global Walk Rest
4.5.2.4.1 The Global Walk Rest shall apply to all plan set tables.
4.5.2.4.2 These walk rest phases shall be applied in addition to the
existing walk rest phases in the plan set table.
4.6 PEDESTRIAN OPERATION
4.6.1 The user shall be able to assign the pedestrian movement to any pedestrian
channel.
4.6.2 The user shall be able to associate the pedestrian channel to one phase or
associate the pedestrian channel with many phases.
4.6.3 When a pedestrian call is received, the software shall place a call for all of the
pedestrian movements associated with that phase. The call for a pedestrian
movement shall remain until the walk light is displayed.
4.6.3.1 If the pedestrian movement is an overlap, a walk light displayed for that
pedestrian movement will remove the call no matter which phase was
active when the walk was output.
4.6.3.2 If the walk light is currently being displayed, the pedestrian call shall be
ignored.
4.6.3.3 If the pedestrian clearance is currently being displayed, the pedestrian
call shall not be ignored.
4.6.4 The software shall provide an alternative pedestrian interval when a condition,
programmed using the software’s logic functions, is met.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 20 of 100
4.6.4.1 The software must provide an alternative pedestrian walk interval when
the push button is depressed for a user defined amount of time in
seconds.
4.6.5 The software shall immediately begin clearing the active pedestrian phase if a
preemption input is received.
4.6.5.1 This shall not apply if a request for partial priority is received.
4.6.6 The software shall allow for an exclusive pedestrian service phase.
4.6.7 The software shall be capable of outputting a Walk Rest for any pedestrian
phase.
4.6.7.1 Walk Rest shall not delay the end of the compatible vehicle phase green.
4.6.8 The software shall allow for a pedestrian Barnes’ Dance interval.
4.6.8.1 All pedestrian movements will display a walk and all vehicle displays will
remain red.
4.6.8.2 Pedestrians may be allowed to cross diagonally.
4.6.9 The software shall allow the user to define the number of times a pedestrian
interval will be served for each pedestrian call.
4.6.9.1 The user defined number of times will also serve as the maximum number
of pending pedestrian calls. Additional pedestrian calls shall not exceed
this maximum.
4.6.9.2 The user shall be able to define this for each pedestrian movement.
4.7 LEFT TURN OPERATION
4.7.1 The software shall allow the user to vary the mode of left turn operation by
time of day/day of week.
4.7.2 The software shall allow the user to vary the mode of left turn operation within
a timing plan.
4.7.3 The software shall be capable of operating a flashing yellow arrow left turn
display or a flashing red arrow left turn display in protected only,
protected/permitted, and permitted only modes as defined in the Texas Manual
of Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
4.7.4 The software shall be capable of operating a five section left turn.
4.7.4.1 The software shall be capable of operating a Dallas Left Turn display. The
software shall provide the following modes of left turn operation.
4.7.4.1.1 Permitted Only
4.7.4.1.2 Protected/Permitted
4.7.4.1.3 Protected Only
4.8 RIGHT TURN OPERATION
4.8.1 The software shall allow the user to vary the mode of right turn operation by
time of day/day of week.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 21 of 100
4.8.2 The software shall allow the user to vary the mode of right turn operation
within a timing plan.
4.8.3 The software shall be capable of operating a flashing yellow arrow right turn
display or a flashing red arrow right turn display in protected only,
protected/permitted, and permitted only mode as defined in the Texas Manual
of Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
4.8.4 The software shall be capable of providing a green arrow for a right turn
movement unless the parallel pedestrian movement is called. If the parallel
pedestrian movement is active, the controller will output a flashing yellow
arrow to the right turn display during the pedestrian interval. After the
pedestrian interval is finished timing, the software shall provide a green arrow
for the right turn movement as long as the green arrow can be displayed for at
least the active minimum green for the overlap.
4.8.4.1 If the pedestrian phase will be serviced while the controller is outputting a
green arrow to the right turn display, the controller will immediately end
the green arrow by outputting a solid yellow arrow, and then a flashing
yellow arrow. The pedestrian walk shall not output until the right turn
overlap has finished clearing.
4.8.4.2 Right Turn Red Indication.
4.8.4.2.1 By default a steady red indication shall not be displayed if
the green arrow is clearing for a pedestrian movement
(green arrow, solid yellow arrow, flashing yellow arrow).
The software shall be capable of displaying the red
indication during the pedestrian interval if the user
chooses.
4.8.4.2.2 If the all-red is omitted, the flashing yellow arrow and walk
indication shall begin simultaneously immediately after the
solid yellow indication.
4.8.4.2.3 The user shall be able to enable the all-red duration interval
defined in the phase parameter table.
4.8.4.2.4 The user shall be able to enable displaying the red arrow
during the pedestrian interval for a user defined amount of
time in seconds.
This shall be distinct from the all-red clearance for that
right turn.
4.9 PEDESTRIAN HYBRID BEACON OPERATION
4.9.1 The software shall allow for full operation of a Pedestrian Hybrid Beacon as
described in the 2009 MUTCD, Chapter 4F.
4.9.2 The software shall operate the three-head vehicle indications (two red circular
indications set horizontally over one yellow circular indication) and standard
pedestrian heads.
4.9.3 The sequence for the Pedestrian Hybrid Beacon shall be as follows:
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 22 of 100
4.9.3.1 All vehicle heads shall remain dark until the pedestrian activates the
pedestrian push button. Pedestrian heads shall display a solid Don’t Walk
during times when the vehicle heads are not illuminated.
4.9.3.2 Vehicle heads shall flash yellow upon activation of the pedestrian push
button. Pedestrian heads shall display solid Don’t Walk indications.
4.9.3.3 Vehicle heads shall display a steady yellow indication. Pedestrian heads
shall display solid Don’t Walk indications. The will serve as the yellow
clearance interval.
4.9.3.4 Vehicle heads shall display a steady red indication in both red heads in
the three-head display. Pedestrian indications shall display a solid Don’t
Walk indication. This will serve as the all-red interval.
4.9.3.5 Vehicle heads shall display a steady red indication in both red heads in
the three-head display. Pedestrian indications shall display a Walk
indication. This will serve as the pedestrian walk interval.
4.9.3.6 Vehicle heads shall display alternating flashing red indications for the two
red heads in the three-head display. Pedestrian indications shall display
a Flashing Don’t Walk indication. This will serve as the pedestrian
clearance interval.
4.9.3.7 Following pedestrian clearance interval, the vehicular heads will all go
dark in the absence of any pedestrian service calls. The cycle will start
over at the next pedestrian service request.
4.9.4 The software shall operate the Pedestrian Hybrid Beacon in coordination with
adjacent traffic signals. The user shall be able to define the period in the local
cycle when the Pedestrian Hybrid Beacon may activate.
4.10 PHASE SEQUENCE
4.10.1 General
4.10.1.1 The user shall select the order of the phases.
4.10.1.2 The user shall be able to change the order of the phases without making
changes to the ring/barrier structure programmed.
4.10.1.3 The phase sequence defined in the active plan set shall not override other
special functions.
4.10.2 Pre-Signal Sequence
4.10.2.1 The software shall be able to output the following sequence:
4.10.2.1.1 Green
4.10.2.1.2 Yellow clearance
4.10.2.1.3 All-red clearance
4.10.2.1.4 Red flash – The software shall output a red flash while the
channel is not active.
4.10.2.1.5 Solid red
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 23 of 100
Once the pre-signal changes to solid red it shall remain
solid red until the pre-signal turns green; it cannot revert
to flashing red.
4.10.2.2 The pre-signal shall change to solid red after
4.10.2.2.1 A user defined after of time
4.10.2.2.2 A queue detector is active
4.10.2.3 The user shall be able to activate this sequence by time of day/day of
week.
5 OVERLAPS
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 The software shall support a minimum of 20 total overlaps.
5.1.1.1 Each of the 20 overlaps can be programmed as either a vehicle overlap or
pedestrian overlap.
5.1.2 The software shall provide a user definable text label for each overlap. The
text label shall be a minimum of 18 characters.
5.1.3 The software shall provide templates the following types of overlaps:
5.1.3.1 NTCIP normal
5.1.3.2 Dallas phasing left turn
5.1.3.3 3-Section flashing yellow arrow permissive left turn
5.1.3.4 4-Section flashing yellow arrow protective/permissive left turn
5.1.3.5 Arlington phasing left turn
5.1.3.6 3-Section flashing red arrow permissive left turn
5.1.3.7 4-Section flashing red arrow protective/permissive left turn
5.1.3.8 Right turn overlap
5.1.3.9 4-Section flashing yellow arrow protective/permissive right turn
5.1.3.10 Pedestrian overlap
5.1.3.11 Pre-signal overlap
5.1.4 The software shall allow the user to program a minimum of eight (8) overlap
tables.
5.1.4.1 A call to a pedestrian overlap shall place a call on all parent phases
associated with the pedestrian overlap.
5.2 OVERLAP CONFIGURATION
5.2.1 The software shall provide the following overlap configuration settings for each
of the 20 overlaps:
5.2.1.1 Overlap identifier
5.2.1.1.1 Identifies which overlap (1-20) is being programmed
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 24 of 100
5.2.1.2 Enable
5.2.1.3 Overlap type
5.2.1.4 Omit
5.2.1.5 Pedestrian
5.2.1.5.1 Identifies this overlap has a pedestrian movement
associated with it
5.2.1.6 Pedestrian Overlap Walk 1
5.2.1.7 Pedestrian Overlap Walk 2
5.2.1.8 Pedestrian Overlap Clearance 1
5.2.1.9 Pedestrian Overlap Clearance 2
5.2.1.10 Primary Parent Phases
5.2.1.11 Negative Parent Phases
5.2.1.11.1 Negative Parent Phases are phases that the overlap is not
allowed to time a concurrent green indication with. A
negative phase will not cause an active overlap to turn red.
5.2.1.12 Inhibit Negative Vehicle Phases
5.2.1.13 Negative Pedestrian Phases (see operational scenario 5.4.1)
5.2.1.13.1 These pedestrian phases, when active, shall prevent the
overlap from displaying a green. A pedestrian phase will be
prevented from changing to walk while the overlap is active.
5.2.1.13.2 This feature will cause the programmed overlap to
immediately begin yellow clearance if the controller is going
to immediately serve the pedestrian phase.
5.2.1.13.3 The controller shall not output a walk for the pedestrian
phase until the programmed overlap is no longer active.
5.2.1.13.4 The negative pedestrian phase will not cause an active
pedestrian phase to end.
5.2.1.14 Negative Overlaps
5.2.1.14.1 Overlap the programmed overlap is NOT allowed to time
with.
5.2.1.15 Green Omit
5.2.1.16 Overlap Suppression Phases
5.2.1.16.1 These vehicle phases, when green, will prevent the output of
the overlap green. The overlap will output green once the
phase turns yellow.
5.2.1.16.2 This feature will cause an active overlap to immediately
begin clearing.
5.2.1.17 Yellow Flash
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 25 of 100
5.2.1.17.1 Programs the overlap to flash yellow, instead of flashing red,
during programmed flash operation and startup flash
operation.
5.2.1.18 Flash-Red During Inactive
5.2.1.18.1 Enables the functionality described in 5.4.2.1.1 below.
5.2.1.19 Alternate Hertz Flash
5.2.1.19.1 Causes overlaps to flash on the alternate half cycle from
other phases and overlaps not configured for alternate flash
hertz during programmed and start up flash operation.
5.3 OVERLAP TIMING PARAMETERS
5.3.1 Minimum Green
5.3.1.1 The overlap shall not terminate while this interval is timing.
5.3.1.2 If this parameter is 0 seconds, the active minimum green for the active
compatible phase shall apply.
5.3.2 Green Extension
5.3.2.1 Maximum length of time the overlap can be extended.
5.3.3 Green Clear
5.3.3.1 Amount of time the overlap will remain green after the last parent phase
starts to terminate.
5.3.4 Yellow Clearance
5.3.4.1 The yellow clearance shall be 0.0 seconds through 25.5 seconds.
5.3.4.2 The yellow clearance programmed in the overlap table shall override the
yellow clearance programmed in the phase parameters table.
5.3.4.3 The software shall not output a yellow interval shorter than the user
defined value.
5.3.4.4 The software shall not display a yellow interval 0.1 seconds longer than
the user defined value.
5.3.5 Red Clearance
5.3.5.1 The all-red clearance shall be 0.0 seconds through 25.5 seconds.
5.3.5.2 The all-red clearance programmed in the overlap table shall override the
all-red clearance programmed in the phase parameters table.
5.3.5.3 The software shall not output an all-red interval shorter than the user
defined value.
5.3.5.4 The software shall not output an all-red interval 0.1 seconds longer than
the user defined value.
5.3.6 Pedestrian Overlap Walk 1
5.3.6.1 Length of time the walk indication will be displayed for the overlap.
5.3.6.2 The software shall be capable of truncating the walk if there is a request
for priority or preemption.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 26 of 100
5.3.6.3 The walk programmed in the overlap table shall override the walk
programmed in the phase parameter table.
5.3.7 Pedestrian Overlap Walk 2
5.3.7.1 Length of time the walk indication will be displayed for the overlap.
5.3.7.2 The software shall be capable of truncating the walk if there is a request
for priority or preemption.
5.3.7.3 The walk programmed in the overlap table shall override the walk
programmed in the phase parameter table.
5.3.8 Pedestrian Clearance 1
5.3.8.1 Length of time the pedestrian clearance will be displayed for the overlap.
5.3.8.2 The software shall be capable of truncating the pedestrian clearance
interval if there is a request for priority or preemption.
5.3.8.3 The pedestrian clearance programmed in the overlap table shall override
the pedestrian clearance programmed in the phase parameter table.
5.3.8.4 The software shall turn the input on and then off every one-half second for
the duration of the clearance interval.
5.3.8.5 The pedestrian clearance shall time with the compatible overlap’s green
clearance.
5.3.8.6 The pedestrian clearance shall not increase the length of an overlap’s
green clearance. If there is not enough time for the pedestrian interval,
the software shall delay the ending of the parent phase.
5.3.9 Pedestrian Clearance 2
5.3.9.1 Length of time the pedestrian clearance will be displayed for the overlap.
5.3.9.2 The software shall be capable of truncating the pedestrian clearance
interval if there is a request for priority or preemption.
5.3.9.3 The pedestrian clearance programmed in the overlap table shall override
the pedestrian clearance programmed in the phase parameter table.
5.3.9.4 The software shall turn the input on and then off every one-half second for
the duration of the clearance interval.
5.3.9.5 The pedestrian clearance shall time with the compatible overlap’s green
clearance.
5.3.9.6 The pedestrian clearance shall not increase the length of an overlap’s
green clearance. If there is not enough time for the pedestrian interval,
the software shall delay the ending of the parent phase.
5.3.10 Reservice
5.3.10.1 Minimum amount of red time that the overlap must display before it can
restart.
5.4 OVERLAP OPERATIONS
5.4.1 Right turn arrow overlap with pedestrian service
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 27 of 100
5.4.1.1 When a right turn overlap is in conflict with a pedestrian phase or overlap,
there shall be two possible programmable actions that can occur:
5.4.1.1.1 If a pedestrian call is received while the right turn overlap is
active, the user may select to have the right turn overlap
immediately terminate IF there is adequate time remaining to
clear the overlap and then immediately serve the pedestrian
within the parent phase time remaining without causing
transition.
5.4.1.1.2 If a pedestrian call is received while the right turn overlap is
active, the user may select to have the right turn continue for
its programmed time and the pedestrian will be served
during its next available parent’s programmed time.
5.4.2 Pre-Signal Overlap
5.4.2.1 The software shall provide the following functionality for pre-signal
overlap operation:
5.4.2.1.1 The overlap shall be capable of outputting a solid green,
solid yellow, solid red, flashing red, solid red sequence.
Green, yellow and all-red will output when the parent phases
are active; flashing red and solid red will output when the
parent phases are not active.
5.4.2.1.2 While parent phases are not active, the user shall be able to
define the number of seconds the red indications flash
before going to solid red, or shall be controlled by a queue
detector input.
5.4.2.1.3 Once the solid red is displayed the pre-signal shall display
solid red until the next green.
5.4.3 Pedestrian Overlaps
5.4.3.1 The pedestrian interval shall time with the parent phases listed in the
active overlap table. Once a pedestrian movement is programmed as an
overlap, the pedestrian walk and clearance values in the overlap table
shall be output.
5.4.3.2 If the Walk 2 Enable Time or Pedestrian Clearance 2 Enable Time is
satisfied, the Walk 2 and Pedestrian Clearance 2 programmed in the
overlap table shall be output.
5.4.3.3 The available time for the pedestrian service shall be from the beginning
of the first parent phase to the end of the last parent phase.
5.4.3.4 The pedestrian shall be serviced if a call is received while any parent
phase is active and there is enough time to clear conflicting overlaps and
serve the pedestrian before the end of the last parent phase.
5.4.3.5 The last parent phase will not be allowed to terminate until the pedestrian
clearance interval has finished. Other parent phases shall be allowed to
end early.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 28 of 100
5.4.3.6 The software shall be capable of outputting a walk rest for any pedestrian
overlap.
5.4.3.6.1 The user shall be able to select walk rest for the pedestrian
overlap.
5.4.3.6.2 This feature will ensure the walk rest time and pedestrian
clearance time fit within the parent phase times.
5.4.3.6.3 When in walk rest, the ped overlap shall run concurrently
with all vehicle parent phases without the user having to
explicitly identify walk with each parent phase.
5.4.3.7 The software shall allow the Walk 2 interval to be programmed for each
overlap.
5.4.3.7.1 The software must provide an alternative pedestrian interval
when the push button is depressed for an extended period of
time. The user will define the number of seconds required to
activate the alternative Pedestrian.
6 SCHEDULE
6.1 GENERAL
6.1.1 The software shall provide the following four schedule types:
6.1.1.1 Time of Day/Day of Week
6.1.1.2 Holiday
6.1.1.3 Seasonal
6.1.1.4 Temporary
6.1.2 The software shall automatically sort the schedule chronologically by the time
of day entry.
6.1.3 The software shall allow the enabling or disabling of any event in the schedule.
6.1.4 Each scheduled event shall completely define the current operation.
Scheduled events shall not be cumulative.
6.1.5 All schedule events shall be logged.
6.1.6 The schedule types shall be prioritized as follows (highest to lowest):
6.1.6.1 Holiday – overrides all other schedule types.
6.1.6.2 Temporary – overrides seasonal and active Time of Day/Day of Week
schedule.
6.1.6.3 Seasonal – Overrides active Time of Day/Day of Week schedule.
6.1.6.4 Active Time of Day/Day of Week.
6.2 TIME OF DAY/DAY OF WEEK SCHEDULE (TOD/DOW)
6.2.1 The software shall support at least 32 events in each schedule that can be
activated by Time of Day/Day of Week.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 29 of 100
6.2.2 The Software shall support a minimum of 16 Time of Day/Day of Week
Schedules.
6.2.3 The schedule shall allow the user to schedule, as a minimum, any of the
following operational modes:
Plan Set
Yellow Flash
All-red Flash
Free
6.2.4 Each Time of Day/Day of Week Schedule shall include the following user
defined parameters:
6.2.4.1 Enable/disable event
6.2.4.2 Event start time
6.2.4.2.1 The time of day will be in military time.
6.2.4.2.2 The user shall be able to define the hour and minute of the
event.
6.2.4.3 Day of Week
6.2.4.4 Action (i.e. Plan Set, flash, free)
6.2.4.5 Description of schedule event
6.2.4.5.1 The field will allow 48 characters for descriptive message.
6.3 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE
6.3.1 The software shall support fixed and floating holidays.
6.3.2 The user shall be able to schedule holiday events at least one year in
advance.
6.3.3 The user shall be able to define a minimum of five (5) days on either side of
the holiday as part of the holiday event.
6.3.4 The user shall be able to sort the holiday schedule by month and day
6.3.5 The holiday schedule shall provide the following user defined parameters:
6.3.5.1 Enable/disable event
6.3.5.2 Fixed holiday date
6.3.5.3 Number of days prior holiday
6.3.5.4 Number of days after holiday
6.3.5.5 Required Action (i.e. activate new TOD Schedule)
6.3.5.6 Floating holiday month
6.3.5.7 Floating holiday week
6.3.5.8 Floating holiday day
6.3.5.9 Description of schedule event
6.3.5.9.1 This field will allow a minimum of 48 characters for a
descriptive message
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 30 of 100
6.4 SEASONAL SCHEDULE
The seasonal schedule shall allow the user to disable certain events in the Time of Day/Day of Week
schedule. During the summer, when school is not in session, the City will use this feature to disable
the events in the schedule that call the signal timing plans for school.
6.4.1 The software shall allow the scheduling of a minimum of 10 seasonal events.
These events shall activate a different Time of Day/Day of Week schedule
based on the current time of the year.
6.4.2 The user shall be able to schedule seasonal events for the entire year and at
least one year in advance.
6.4.3 The seasonal schedule shall provide the following user defined parameters
6.4.3.1 Enable/disable event
6.4.3.2 Start month of seasonal schedule
6.4.3.3 Start day of seasonal schedule
6.4.3.4 End month of seasonal schedule
6.4.3.5 End day of seasonal schedule
6.4.3.6 Required Action (i.e. activate new TOD Schedule)
6.4.3.7 Description of schedule event
6.4.3.7.1 This field will allow a minimum of 48 characters
6.5 TEMPORARY SCHEDULE
6.5.1 The user shall be able to schedule events that will expire after a user defined
time period.
6.5.1.1 This feature shall be off by default.
6.5.2 Upon completion of the time period, the software shall revert back to the
default schedule and alarm the user the time period has expired.
6.5.2.1 The user shall select if the software will revert back to the default
schedule. By default the software shall revert back to the default
schedule.
6.5.2.2 The user shall select if the software will alarm the user. By default the
software shall alarm the user.
6.5.2.3 The user shall be able to extend the amount of time the temporary
schedule runs. After the extension the requirements for reverting back
and alarming the user listed above shall apply.
6.5.3 The software shall support a minimum of four (4) temporary schedule events.
These events shall activate a different Time of Day/Day of Week schedule.
6.5.4 The user shall be able to schedule any of the following operational modes:
6.5.4.1 Plan Set
6.5.4.2 Free
6.5.4.3 Yellow Flash
6.5.4.4 All-red Flash
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 31 of 100
6.5.5 Upon completion of the last time period, the user shall be able to choose if the
temporary schedule shall be deleted.
6.5.5.1 The software shall prompt the user.
6.5.6 The temporary schedule shall provide the following user defined parameters:
6.5.6.1 Start day of temporary schedule
6.5.6.2 Start Time of temporary schedule
6.5.6.3 End Day of temporary schedule
6.5.6.4 End Time of temporary schedule
6.5.6.5 Required action (i.e. activate new TOD schedule)
6.5.6.6 Description of temporary schedule
6.5.6.6.1 This field will contain a minimum of 48 characters.
7 COORDINATION
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Software shall provide a minimum of 32 locally stored timing plan sets.
7.1.1.1 The user shall be able to label each timing plan; each text label shall be
at least six characters in length.
7.1.2 The software shall not activate the coordinator on start-up until the start-up
vehicle and pedestrian phases programmed by the user have been serviced.
7.1.3 Upon entry of any phase parameter, special function, internal clock update,
coordination change, or other adjustment the coordinator shall automatically
recognize the change and activate at the beginning of the next cycle.
7.1.4 The controller shall read the coordination parameters, special function,
detector settings, and overlap changes at the same time. Detection and
overlap programming changes shall occur at the beginning of the new timing
plan.
7.1.5 The offset reference point shall be user selectable,
7.1.5.1 The user shall be able to select any of the following reference points:
7.1.5.1.1 Beginning of yellow of the coordinated phases
7.1.5.1.2 Beginning of green of the coordinated phases
7.1.5.1.3 End of all-red clearance of the coordinated phases
7.1.5.2 The default offset reference point shall be the beginning of yellow for the
coordinated phases.
7.2 COORDINATION PARAMETERS
7.2.1 The user shall be able to enter the following coordination parameters.
7.2.1.1 Cycle Length
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 32 of 100
7.2.1.1.1 If the cycle length is 0 seconds, the software shall run free
while that plan is called by the daily schedule or a manual
command. If a split is entered for any phase, the value
entered by the user shall be the active maximum green time
for that phase. If the split is zero (0) seconds, the active
maximum green shall apply.
7.2.1.2 Phase Splits
7.2.1.2.1 Nominal phase split – split time active when controller is not
in transition.
7.2.1.2.2 Minimum phase split – minimum split time allowed when
controller is transitioning.
7.2.1.2.3 Maximum phase split – maximum split time allowed when the
controller is transitioning.
7.2.1.2.4 Global percent adjustment – global feature to be used in
place of minimum and maximum split times that will allow all
active phases to be adjusted by the user defined percentage
during transition.
7.2.1.3 Offset Reference Point
7.2.1.4 Offset
7.2.1.4.1 Offset value is entered in seconds.
7.2.1.5 Coordinated Phases – user identified coordinated phases
7.2.1.6 Inhibit Maximum
7.2.1.7 Transition Type
7.2.1.7.1 The user shall enter the preferred transition mode and
number of cycles to transition.
7.2.1.7.2 Transition mode options shall include: short way, long way,
dwell and auto. Auto option shall be the controller
calculated quickest way to return to coordinated operation
whether it is short way or long way.
7.2.1.7.3 The controller shall adjust faster than the programmed
number of cycles if an adjustment less than the maximum is
required.
7.2.1.7.4 The software shall proportionally reduce or increase each
split during transition within the minimum and maximum
values set for phases if the user has defined these.
7.2.1.7.5 The transition time shall be proportionally distributed to all
phases.
7.3 PEDESTRIAN SERVICE
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 33 of 100
7.3.1 Pedestrian phases shall be serviced without entering free mode even if the
pedestrian walk and clearance interval is longer than the vehicle phase split.
When the pedestrian phase is longer, the software shall provide three options:
(1) steal time from the preceding phase, (2) steal time from the subsequent
phase, or (3) the local cycle will pause. The software shall allow the user to
use all three options at once to accommodate a pedestrian phase.
7.3.1.1 The software shall allow the user to define the amount of time in seconds
stolen from the preceding phase.
7.3.1.2 The software shall allow the user to define the amount of time in seconds
stolen from the subsequent phase.
7.3.1.3 If pedestrian adjust is enabled, the local cycle shall pause at the end of
the phase associated with the pedestrian movement for the additional
amount of time needed to finish the pedestrian clearance.
7.3.1.4 If pedestrian adjust is not enabled, the additional amount of time needed
to serve the pedestrian phase shall be stolen from the subsequent
phases. The time shall be in addition to the user defined value.
7.3.1.4.1 The pedestrian phase shall not be omitted during normal
operation. A pedestrian call shall not cause the coordinated
timing plan to fail.
7.3.1.5 If the extra time is required to serve the pedestrian phase, the amount of
time stolen from other phases shall be evenly split between the preceding
and subsequent phases unless the user did not enter a high enough
number in the stolen phase parameters.
7.3.1.5.1 If the user did not enter enough time and pedestrian adjust
is enabled, the local cycle shall pause. If pedestrian adjust
is not enabled the time shall be stolen from the subsequent
phases.
7.3.2 Pedestrian Adjust
7.3.2.1 The user shall be able to enable this feature that will pause the local cycle
until the pedestrian interval has finished if the pedestrian movement is
still active after the programmed force off for the compatible vehicle
phase. The software shall immediately begin transition by shortening the
phases remaining in that cycle.
7.3.2.2 When enabled, the local cycle shall pause for the amount of time needed
to serve the pedestrian movement less the time stolen from the preceding
phase and the subsequent phase.
7.3.3 If the pedestrian phase ends the preceding phase early, the concurrent vehicle
phase shall begin early with the pedestrian phase.
7.3.4 If the pedestrian phase is not requested until the clearance interval of the
preceding phase, the pedestrian phase will still begin with the concurrent
vehicle phase.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 34 of 100
7.3.5 If the pedestrian phase requires more time than the compatible vehicle phase,
the call for the pedestrian phase must be received before the beginning of the
concurrent vehicle phase; otherwise, the pedestrian phase shall not be served
during that green.
7.3.6 If the pedestrian phase called requires less time than the compatible vehicle
phase that is currently green and will not delay the end of the phase, the
pedestrian phase, when called, shall be requested immediately and serviced
as soon as any conflicting outputs have finished clearing.
7.4 PEDESTRIAN SERVICE PARAMETERS
7.4.1 Enable pedestrian adjust
7.4.2 Time stolen from preceding phase
7.4.2.1 This value shall be zero by default.
7.4.2.2 Entering a non-zero value shall activate this feature.
7.4.3 Time stolen from the subsequent phase
7.4.3.1 This value shall be zero by default.
7.4.3.2 Entering a non-zero value shall activate this feature.
7.5 COORDINATED OPERATIONS (USE CASES)
7.5.1 Recycle left turn – software shall recycle the leading left turn phase if all of the
following conditions are met:
7.5.1.1 The oncoming through phase has received its full minimum green time,
7.5.1.2 There is time to provide a minimum service to the left turn before the end
of the permitted period, and
7.5.1.3 There is a vehicle call for that left turn phase.
7.5.1.4 This will provide a second left turn service if more vehicles arrive within
the permitted period after the initial leading left turn service has ended.
The user shall select if this feature is enabled.
7.5.2 Backup into the leading left turn
7.5.2.1 If there is no call for the leading left turn, the software shall skip the left
turn phase and serve the oncoming through traffic.
7.5.2.2 If a call for the skipped left turn is received prior to the end of the
permitted period, the software shall serve the skipped left turn phase as
long as the oncoming through movement has received its full minimum
green time.
7.5.2.3 The user shall select if this feature is enabled.
7.5.3 Optional leading left turn – software shall provide a leading left turn phase if
all of the following conditions are met:
7.5.3.1 The minor street returns to the main street early,
7.5.3.2 There is enough time remaining in the side street split to provide a full
minimum service for the main street left turn phase, and
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 35 of 100
7.5.3.3 There is a call for the main street left turn.
7.5.3.4 The user shall select if this feature is enabled.
7.5.4 Double serve side streets – when the side street returns early to the main
street, the software shall allow the minor street phases to recycle if all of the
following conditions are met:
7.5.4.1 The main street has received its full minimum service,
7.5.4.2 There is enough time remaining in the permitted period for the minor
street to serve a full minimum vehicular service, and
7.5.4.3 There is a call for the minor street phase.
7.5.4.4 The software shall operate fully actuated during the permitted period for
the minor street and shall only serve the minor street or main street
through phases.
7.5.4.5 The main street leading left turn shall not be permitted until the minor
street phase omit has been applied because the permitted window is
about to close.
7.5.4.6 The user shall select if this feature is enabled.
7.5.5 Free mode operation within the coordinated cycle
7.5.5.1 While operating in coordinated mode, the software shall provide the
option to operate a portion of the cycle in free mode.
7.5.5.2 The user shall be able to define two (2) free mode periods within one (1)
cycle.
7.5.5.3 The user shall select the beginning of the free mode operation, the end of
the free mode operation and the phases that may be active.
7.5.5.4 At the end of the free mode period, the active phases shall force off if
they are not the first coordinated phases.
7.5.6 Optional lagging left turn
7.5.6.1 The software shall allow the user to provide a lagging left turn if the active
extension time for the oncoming through is 0.0 seconds.
7.5.6.2 The user shall enter the number of seconds the oncoming through phase
may end early.
7.5.6.3 The lagging left turn shall end the same second of the local cycle that the
oncoming through would have ended.
7.5.6.4 The user shall select if this feature is enabled.
7.5.7 Phase recycle with split phase
7.5.7.1 When a minor street is split phased, the software shall allow the user to
recycle the minor street phases before returning to the main street phases
as long as there are calls for the side street phases and there is enough
time to provide a minimum split for the phase.
7.5.7.2 Once there are no longer any calls on the minor street, the user may
choose to hold in the minor street or return to the main street phases.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 36 of 100
7.5.7.3 Once the permitted window for the minor street has ended, the controller
shall return to the main street phases.
7.5.7.4 The software shall be capable of providing this operation during two
distinct periods each cycle.
7.5.8 Optional service with split phase
7.5.8.1 When a minor street is split phase and the software is programmed to
serve only one minor street phase before returning to the main street, the
software shall allow the user to serve the other minor street phase before
returning to the main street as long as there is a call and there is enough
time to provide a minimum split for the phase.
7.5.8.2 The software shall be capable of providing this operation during two
distinct periods each cycle.
8 PREEMPTION
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 The software shall provide a minimum of 12 unique programmable preemption
sequences.
8.1.2 The software shall provide the following types of preemption:
8.1.2.1 Railroad
8.1.2.2 Emergency Vehicle
8.1.3 The user to shall be able to program any preemption sequence as a railroad or
emergency vehicle type.
8.1.4 The user shall be able to label each unique preemption sequence.
8.1.4.1 Each label shall be at least eight (8) characters in length
8.1.5 The user shall be able to delay the preemption input.
8.1.6 The software shall be able to smoothly transition from one preemption table to
another.
8.1.7 The user shall be able to input the preemption input into the logic functions
and output the result.
8.1.8 The user shall be able to activate warning lights, blank out signs, and other
auxiliary devices during a preemption sequence.
8.1.8.1 The user shall be able to turn on and off the devices using logic function
outputs.
8.1.8.2 A minimum of eight (8) special outputs shall be provided.
8.1.8.3 The user shall be able to activate each special output at any time during
the preemption event.
8.1.8.3.1 The user will be able to assign an internal logic pin to the
special output and use the output in logic statements.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 37 of 100
8.1.8.3.2 The user will be able to assign an external logic pin to the
special output to activate field equipment while the special
pin is active.
8.1.8.3.3 The user shall be able to activate an auxiliary field device
transition table.
8.1.9 The software shall automatically reset the maximum duration timer if the
preempt input goes off and then comes back on during the dwell state.
8.1.10 The software shall not recycle the preempt entry phases. If phases defined as
entry phases are green, they shall remain green
8.1.11 The software shall not recycle the return phases. If the return phases are
green, they shall remain green.
8.1.12 The active coordinated timing plan shall continue to run in the background
during the preemption event. The coordinated timing plan shall have no effect
on the signal operation while the preemption is active.
8.1.13 The user shall be able to change the mode of operation for any traffic signal
display when a preemption input is received. This function will allow the user
to change selected overlaps to red at any time during the preemption event.
8.1.14 The software shall provide multiple preemption exit options. The user shall be
able to select the exit routine for each preemption sequence. The exit options
shall include:
8.1.14.1 The user shall be able to place calls on selected phases upon exiting
preemption.
8.1.14.2 Queue Delay Recovery - The software shall support a return to the phase
with demand the longest wait time. The user shall be able to set the
priority level for each phase.
8.1.14.3 First Phase Skipped - The software shall support a return to the first
phase skipped. A skipped phase shall also include a phase that received
a minimum green immediately preceding the preempt.
8.1.14.3.1 If the phase received more than the minimum time it will not
be considered the first phase skipped.
8.1.14.4 Exit to Coordination/Normal Operation - The software shall support an
immediate return to the place in the coordinated cycle where the software
would have been had there been no preempt.
8.1.14.4.1 Once the preemption input turns off, the software shall hold
in the active phases until the software has read the
applicable coordination parameters and checked the inputs
from the detectors.
8.1.14.4.2 The software shall not recycle the clearance phases. If the
clearance phase should be active, those phases shall
remain green.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 38 of 100
8.1.14.4.3 After the preemption the overlaps will begin following the
parent phases again and shall turn green if their parent
phase is green.
8.1.14.5 Exit to Alternate Maximum Times - The software shall support return to
alternate maximum times for each vehicle phase if the software is
operating in free mode.
8.1.14.5.1 The user shall be able to designate the duration in minutes
(0 to 60) for how long to operate the alternate maximum
times. The software shall return to normal operation at the
top of the cycle following the exit to alternate maximum time
being exceeded.
8.2 PREEMPT STATES
8.2.1 The software shall report the status of the preemption sequence using the
following states:
8.2.1.1 The preemption sequence is not active.
8.2.1.2 The minimum presence timer is active.
8.2.1.3 The preempt service delay timer is active.
8.2.1.4 The preempt service is timing the Entry 1 phases.
8.2.1.5 The preempt service is timing the Entry 2 phases.
8.2.1.6 The preempt service is timing the Dwell phases.
8.2.1.7 The preempt service is timing the exit phases.
8.2.1.8 The preempt service maximum duration timer has expired.
8.3 PREEMPTION PRIORITY
8.3.1 The software shall automatically assign a high or low priority level to each
enabled preemption event based on the preemption type.
8.3.2 For each preemption type, the user shall be able to assign an equal or lower
priority to each preemption event.
8.3.3 The software shall automatically assign the high priority level to any
preemption event enabled as a railroad type.
8.3.3.1 All railroad preemption events shall have equal priority.
8.3.4 The software shall not allow an emergency vehicle preempt event to be
programmed with a higher priority than a railroad preempt.
8.3.5 The software shall automatically assign the low priority level to any preemption
event enabled as an emergency vehicle type.
8.3.5.1 By default, all emergency vehicle preemption events shall have equal
priority.
8.3.5.2 The user shall be able to program up to four (4) emergency vehicle
preemption priority levels.
8.3.6 High priority preempts shall override low priority preempts.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 39 of 100
8.3.6.1 A request for a high priority preemption event shall immediately cancel
any active low priority preemption event and begin the high priority event.
8.3.7 Low priority preempts shall be ignored until the high priority preempt
terminates.
8.3.7.1 The low priority event shall begin running in the background. Once the
inputs for high priority event terminates the high priority event
immediately end and the low priority event shall output its current state.
8.3.7.2 Any part of the high priority event that occurs after the high priority event
input terminates shall be cancelled. The software shall immediately
output the current state of the low priority preemption sequence.
8.3.8 Equal priority preempts shall be served on a first called, first served basis.
8.3.8.1 The second preemption sequence shall begin running in the background.
Once the inputs for first preemption sequence turn off the first sequence
shall immediately end and second preemption sequence shall output its
current state.
8.3.8.2 Any part of the first preemption sequence that occurs after the first
preemption input turns off will be cancelled. The software shall
immediately output the second preemption sequence.
8.4 RAILROAD PREEMPTION
8.4.1 The software shall support the configuration of the following modes of Railroad
preemption:
8.4.1.1 Normal
8.4.1.1.1 Normal preemption mode shall terminate all active vehicle
and pedestrian phases and begin the clearance phases.
8.4.1.2 Smooth
8.4.1.2.1 Smooth preemption mode shall allow the user to define each
step in the preemption sequence. During each step the user
shall be able to define which vehicle and pedestrian phases
are permitted, called and extended.
8.4.2 The software shall accept a minimum of four (4) unique inputs from the
railroad.
8.4.3 Train preemption shall be provided when the software is running programmed
all-red and yellow-red flash.When the preemption input is received, the
software shall change the phases flashing yellow to steady green and then
begin preemption.
8.4.4 The entry phase shall not terminate until the railroad gates are in the
lowered/down position.
8.4.4.1 The entry phases shall terminate based on the following user defined
options:
8.4.4.1.1 Gate active/down input from the railroad
8.4.4.1.2 Maximum clearance time input for the entry phases.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 40 of 100
8.4.5 The user shall be able to program the intersection to operate in yellow or all-
red flash during the Dwell phase interval.
8.5 EMERGENCY VEHICLE PREEMPTION
8.5.1 The software shall support the following types of emergency vehicle
preemption systems:
8.5.1.1 Line-of-sight infrared
8.5.1.2 Global Positioning Satellite (GPS)
8.5.2 The software shall accept at least six (6) unique inputs from the Emergency
Vehicle Preemption system.
8.5.2.1 The user shall be able to configure what inputs are received from the
emergency vehicle preemption system.
8.5.2.2 The inputs shall include, at a minimum, the following:
8.5.2.2.1 Direction of travel
8.5.2.2.2 Desired route
8.5.2.2.3 Vehicle ID number
8.5.2.2.4 Estimated time of arrival
8.5.3 The software shall hold in the clearance phases and overlaps until the
preemption input turns off or the maximum preemption time is exceeded.
8.5.3.1 Software shall provide a user enabled option (on or off) for software
prevention of any occurrence of a yellow trap situation.
8.5.4 The software shall provide the current traffic demand to the emergency vehicle
preemption system. The emergency vehicle preemption system will use this
information to adapt when the preemption input is provided to the software
based on current traffic conditions.
8.5.4.1 During low traffic volumes the preemption input shall be provided as the
fire or rescue vehicle is arriving at the intersection.
8.6 NORMAL PREEMPT CONFIGURATION
Normal preemption shall activate when an advance signal has been active long enough to satisfy
any delay programmed. Any minimum green, walk, and pedestrian clearance intervals defined in the
normal preempt configuration table shall be met. The Entry 1 phases will turn green for the duration
programmed, and then the Entry 2 phases will turn green for the duration programmed. Entry 1 or
Entry 2 phases shall hold until the gate input is received and they delay end of entry phases time is
satisfied. The dwell phases will begin and hold until the gate input turns off. The software shall
follow the user defined exit mode and then return to normal operation.
8.6.1 The user shall be able to select the following minimum preemption options:
8.6.1.1 Enable
8.6.1.2 Preemption type (railroad or emergency vehicle)
8.6.1.3 Preempt lock
8.6.1.3.1 Preempt lock shall be on by default
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 41 of 100
8.6.1.3.2 Disabling preempt lock shall allow the preempt call to be
cancelled prior to reaching the dwell phases.
8.6.1.4 Override Program Flash
8.6.1.4.1 By default, a preempt call shall override program flash
8.6.1.4.2 Enabling this option will cause the preempt call to not
override program flash. The user shall be able to select this
for railroad and/or emergency vehicle preemption.
8.6.1.5 Dwell Mode
8.6.1.5.1 The user shall be able to configure the way the preempt will
operate during the dwell state.
8.6.1.5.2 The dwell mode shall include the following options:
Normal – The configured dwell phases and overlaps shall
operate normally during the dwell state.
Flash – The intersection shall operate in flash during the dwell
period.
8.6.1.6 Flash Yellow Dwell
8.6.1.6.1 User selected phases shall flash yellow during flash dwell.
All other phases shall flash red.
8.6.1.6.2 User selected overlaps shall flash yellow during dwell mode.
All other overlaps shall flash red.
8.6.1.7 Maximum Duration Time Exceeded Action
8.6.1.7.1 The user shall be able to program the action that the
controller will implement when the maximum duration time is
exceeded.
8.6.1.7.2 One maximum duration timer shall be provided for railroad.
8.6.1.7.3 One maximum duration timer shall be provided for
emergency vehicles.
8.6.1.7.4 The user shall be able to program the following actions when
the maximum duration time is exceeded:
Terminate Preempt – The preempt will terminate and not
reactivate until all preempt inputs have been cleared
Flash – The intersection shall enter all-red flash operation
until all preempt inputs have been cleared.
8.6.1.8 Return Phases
8.6.1.8.1 The return phases shall run following the end of preempt.
8.6.1.8.2 These phases shall output to the overlaps. If the phases are
parents of any overlaps, the overlaps shall turn green.
8.6.1.8.3 The phases shall remain green for at least the minimum
green defined in the active phase parameters table.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 42 of 100
8.6.1.8.4 The phases shall remain green as long as there are detector
inputs for green extensions or the maximum green timer
defined in the active phase parameter table is reached.
8.6.1.8.5 If no return phases are defined, the software shall exit
preempt via the exit mode entered.
8.6.1.9 Exit Mode
8.6.1.10 Entry 1 Phases (Railroad Preempt)
8.6.1.11 Entry 2 Phases (Railroad Preempt)
8.6.1.11.1 Entry 2 phases shall be served immediately after Entry 1
Phases.
8.6.1.12 Vehicle Dwell Phases
8.6.1.13 Pedestrian Dwell – Walk Rest phases
8.6.1.13.1 These phases shall remain in walk during the dwell interval
of the preemption.
8.6.1.13.2 Pedestrian clearance shall begin immediately after the
preemption is complete.
8.6.1.14 Pedestrian Dwell – Call phases
8.6.1.14.1 These phases shall receive one pedestrian call during the
dwell interval of the preemption.
8.6.1.14.2 If it has not already begun, the pedestrian clearance shall
begin immediately after the preemption is complete.
8.6.1.15 Entry 1 Overlap Disable
8.6.1.15.1 Overlaps identified here will be omitted during the Entry 1
interval.
8.6.1.16 Entry 2 Overlap Disable
8.6.1.16.1 Overlaps identified here will be omitted during the Entry 2
interval.
8.6.1.17 Dwell Overlap Disable
8.6.1.17.1 Overlap identified here will be omitted during the Dwell
interval.
8.6.1.17.2 The overlaps listed in Entry 2 and Dwell Overlap Disable
shall remain red when the software changes from Entry 2 to
Dwell.
8.6.1.18 Dwell Yellow Overlap Flash
8.6.1.18.1 Overlaps identified here will flash yellow if the software is in
flash operation during the dwell interval.
8.6.2 The user shall be able to enter values for the following preemption timing
parameters:
8.6.2.1 Minimum Presence Time
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 43 of 100
8.6.2.1.1 The minimum presence time is the minimum time that a
preemption call shall be present/on prior to initiating a
preempt event.
8.6.2.1.2 The range for the minimum presence time shall be from 0.0
to10.0 seconds in one-tenth (1/10) second increments
8.6.2.2 Delay Time
8.6.2.2.1 The software shall delay the initiation of the preemption
event by the delay time.
8.6.2.2.2 The delay and minimum pedestrian clearance shall time
simultaneously.
8.6.2.2.3 Even if the delay time has passed, the preemption sequence
shall not begin until the minimum pedestrian clearance time
has also passed.
8.6.2.2.4 The range shall be from 0 to 255 seconds in one (1) second
increments.
8.6.2.3 Delay End of Last Entry Phase
8.6.2.3.1 The value in the amount of time that the last Entry phase will
hold green after the gate input is received.
8.6.2.3.2 A value of zero (0) seconds will terminate the last Entry
Phase immediately.
8.6.2.3.3 The range for the delay end of last entry phase shall be from
0 to 255 seconds in one (1) second increments.
8.6.2.4 Minimum Duration Time
8.6.2.4.1 This value is the minimum time that the preempt time will be
active.
8.6.2.4.2 The range for the minimum duration time shall be from 0 to
600 seconds in one (1) second increments
8.6.2.5 Maximum Duration Time
8.6.2.5.1 The value is the maximum time that the preempt input will be
considered valid.
8.6.2.5.2 The user shall be able to program what action will be taken
if the maximum duration time is exceeded.
8.6.2.5.3 An alarm shall be generated that includes the preemption
inputs, the logical names for those inputs, and a time stamp.
8.6.2.5.4 The range for the maximum duration time shall be from 0 to
600 seconds in one (1) second increments.
8.6.2.6 Minimum Start Green
8.6.2.6.1 This value is the minimum amount of time that any active
phase must be green before it can be terminated by a
preempt input.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 44 of 100
8.6.2.6.2 A value of zero (0) will terminate the active phase
immediately. The default value shall be zero (0) seconds.
8.6.2.6.3 The software shall serve the lesser of the minimum start
green or the minimum green in the active phase parameter
table.
8.6.2.6.4 The range for the minimum start green shall be from 0 to
255 seconds in one (1) second increments
8.6.2.7 Minimum Pedestrian Walk
8.6.2.7.1 This value is the minimum amount of time that any active
pedestrian walk must serve prior to being terminated by a
preempt input.
8.6.2.7.2 A value of zero (0) will terminate the active pedestrian phase
immediately. The default value shall be zero (0) seconds.
8.6.2.7.3 The software shall serve the lesser of the minimum
pedestrian walk or the pedestrian walk time in the active
phase parameter table.
8.6.2.7.4 The range for the maximum duration time shall be from 0 to
255 seconds in one (1) second increments
8.6.2.8 Minimum Pedestrian Clearance
8.6.2.8.1 This value is the minimum amount of time that any active
pedestrian clearance must serve prior to being terminated by
a preempt input.
8.6.2.8.2 A value of zero (0) will terminate the active pedestrian phase
immediately. The default value shall be zero (0) seconds.
8.6.2.8.3 The software shall serve the lesser of the minimum
pedestrian clearance or the pedestrian clearance time in the
active phase parameter table.
8.6.2.8.4 The range for the maximum duration time shall be from 0 to
255 seconds in one (1) second increments
8.6.2.9 Entry 1 Green
8.6.2.9.1 This value is the amount of time that the Entry 1 phases will
remain green.
8.6.2.9.2 A value of zero will omit the Entry 1 phase
8.6.2.9.3 The Entry 1 Green shall only be terminated early by a valid
Gate Down input from the railroad.
8.6.2.9.4 The Entry 1 Green shall override the value for minimum and
maximum times in the active phase parameter table.
8.6.2.9.5 The range for the Entry 1 green time shall be from 0.0 to 255
seconds in one (1) second increments
8.6.2.10 Entry 2 Green
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 45 of 100
8.6.2.10.1 This value is the amount of time that the Entry 2 phases will
remain green.
8.6.2.10.2 A value of zero will omit the Entry 2 phase
8.6.2.10.3 The Entry 2 Green shall only be terminated early by a valid
Gate Down input from the railroad.
8.6.2.10.4 The Entry 2 Green shall override the value for minimum and
maximum times in the active phase parameter table.
8.6.2.10.5 The range for the Entry 2 green time shall be from 0.0 to 255
seconds in one (1) second increments
8.6.2.11 Minimum Dwell Time
8.6.2.11.1 This value is the minimum amount of time that the dwell
interval will serve.
8.6.2.11.2 The Minimum Dwell time shall not terminate prior to the
completion of the minimum duration time.
8.6.2.11.3 The range for the minimum dwell time shall be from 0 to 255
seconds in one (1) second increments.
9 TRANSIT PRIORITY
9.1 GENERAL
9.1.1 The software shall operate the transit signal displays
9.1.1.1 The bar signal sequence shall be:
9.1.1.1.1 Steady Vertical Bar (Go Indication)
9.1.1.1.2 Flashing Vertical Bar (Yellow Clearance)
9.1.1.1.3 Steady Horizontal Bar (Stop Indication)
9.1.1.1.4 Flashing Horizontal Bar (Prepare to Go Indication)
9.1.1.2 The user shall be able to define the amount of time, in seconds, the bar
indications display each of the displays in the sequence.
9.1.1.3 The vertical and horizontal bar shall flash one time per second. The bars
shall be on for one-half second then off for one-half second.
9.1.1.4 The user shall define the duration of the all-red interval. Other phases
shall be prevented from turning green while the all-red interval is active.
9.1.1.5 The train bar signals shall operate independently by direction and shall
operate such that only the direction with an approaching train shall be
activated.
9.1.1.6 The bar signal sequence shall be built into the software. Using logic
parameters to output the train bar signal as described shall not meet this
requirement.
9.1.2 The user shall be able to define the following transit signal parameters
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 46 of 100
9.1.2.1 Yellow Clearance – This is the duration, in seconds, of the flashing
vertical bar.
9.1.2.2 All-Red – This is the duration, in seconds, the steady horizontal bar shall
be displayed before any conflicting phase may turn green.
9.1.2.3 Prepare To Go – This is the duration, in seconds, of the flashing
horizontal bar.
9.1.3 The software shall be able to synchronize the end of the all-red for the train
bar signal and the end of the all-red for the vehicle and pedestrian phase.
9.1.4 The software shall provide a minimum of three (3) levels of priority, in the
following order of precedence. Preemption requests shall override all priority
requests.
9.1.4.1 Full priority operation
9.1.4.2 Partial priority operation
9.1.4.3 Bus priority operation
9.1.4.4 The hierarchy of priority is full priority is the highest, followed by partial
priority and bus priority as lowest priority.
9.1.5 High priority services shall override low priority services.
9.1.5.1 A request for a high priority service event shall immediately cancel any
active low priority service event and begin the high priority event.
9.1.6 Low priority services shall be ignored until the high priority service terminates.
9.1.6.1 The low priority event shall begin running in the background. Once the
inputs for high priority event terminates, the high priority event will
immediately end and the low priority event shall output its current
state.
9.1.6.2 Any part of the high priority event that occurs after the high priority
event input terminates shall be cancelled. The software shall
immediately output the low priority event.
9.1.7 Equal priority services shall be served on a first called, first served basis.
9.1.7.1 The second priority sequence shall begin running in the background.
Once the inputs for first priority sequence turn off the first sequence
shall immediately end and second priority sequence shall output its
current state.
9.1.7.2 Any part of the first priority sequence that occurs after the first priority
input turns off will be cancelled. The software shall immediately output
the second priority sequence.
9.2 FULL PRIORITY OPERATION
The software shall utilize the functionality required in the emergency vehicle, normal or smooth
preemption section to provide full priority. The coordinated cycle will be interrupted when a full
priority input is received and can be served.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 47 of 100
Full priority operation shall fulfill the vision in the Memorandum of Understanding for the Transit
Signal Priority System Operation and Maintenance along the Downtown Dallas Transitway mall. The
software shall also provide the functionality documented in the logical diagrams for the full priority
section in the appendix.
9.2.1 Full transit priority shall be provided for median running trains when the
controller is operating in free, flashing and coordinated modes.
9.2.2 The software shall be capable of providing an exclusive train phase.
9.2.2.1 The user shall be able to select vehicle and pedestrian movements that
are compatible with the train and may be served simultaneously.
9.2.3 Full transit priority shall be provided when the software is running programmed
yellow and all-red flash.
9.2.3.1 When a request for transit service is received, the controller shall
terminate the flash operation and return to normal operation. The
software shall provide service for the train phase, and any compatible
phases. The software shall then return to flash operation.
9.2.4 In the event that the full priority operation is terminated by the timeout
parameter, the following sequence of events will occur.
9.2.4.1 The software will provide service to all other vehicular and pedestrian
movements with calls at the intersection.
9.2.4.1.1 The user shall select the phases and pedestrian movements
served and the amount of time these phases shall remain
green.
9.2.4.2 The software will restart the timeout timer.
9.2.4.3 The software will return to the full priority mode.
9.2.4.4 An event will be logged that includes the input was on too long, the logical
name for the input, and a timestamp.
9.2.5 The software shall log events and include the following information:
9.2.5.1 Time the check in was received.
9.2.5.2 Time the check-out was received.
9.2.5.3 Time the downstream track was not clear.
9.2.5.4 Time the downstream track was clear.
9.3 PARTIAL TRANSIT PRIORITY
The software shall provide early green and extended green by direction for a train. The additional
green will be used to give the train operator a better chance to make it through the signal. The
software shall continue to operate in coordination.
Partial priority operation shall fulfill the vision in the Memorandum of Understanding for the Transit
Signal Priority System Operation and Maintenance along the Downtown Dallas Transitway Mall. The
software shall also provide the functionality documented in the logical diagrams for the partial priority
section in the appendix.
9.3.1 General
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 48 of 100
9.3.1.1 The software shall allow the user to define four full sets of partial priority
parameters, one for each direction.
9.3.1.2 A request for early green and green extension shall be priority requests
and shall not be canceled by other equal or lower priority requests.
9.3.1.3 The software shall stay in coordination with adjacent intersections while
adjusting the splits to accommodate the train. When the train is not
present, the extra green time shall be provided to movements on the
intersecting roadway.
9.3.1.4 Train indications and all compatible vehicle and pedestrian indications
shall end their clearance intervals concurrently.
9.3.1.5 The software shall hold the train phase based on the length of the train.
The software shall allow the user to define different green durations
based on the length of the train.
9.3.1.6 The software shall be capable of holding a train at the signal until the
downstream track to the next holding block and the next holding block are
both clear.
9.3.1.6.1 The software shall be able to consider two and three car
trains separately. The software shall release the train when
the downstream block long enough to hold that length of
train is clear. These will be different blocks because of the
train length.
9.3.1.6.2 The software shall be able to process detector inputs from
downstream intersections and use build in or programmable
logic to determine if the next downstream block long enough
to hold the train is not occupied.
9.3.1.7 The software shall log events and include the following information:
9.3.1.7.1 Time the check in was received, by direction.
9.3.1.7.2 Time the check-out was received by direction.
9.3.1.7.3 Time downstream was not clear.
9.3.1.7.4 Time downstream was clear.
9.3.1.7.5 Time green extension was provided.
9.3.1.8 If the train crosses the check-out detector, the clearance interval shall
begin immediately.
9.3.1.8.1 The train phase shall be able to gap out and begin clearance
immediately. Other active phases shall not prevent the train
phase from beginning the clearance interval.
9.3.1.8.2 Compatible vehicle and pedestrian phases shall operate as
follows.
9.3.1.8.3 The pedestrian phase shall begin clearing, if it has not
already done so, when the train phase gaps out.
9.3.2 Partial Priority Configuration
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 49 of 100
9.3.2.1 Compatible Phases
9.3.2.1.1 User identified vehicle and pedestrian phases compatible
the train signal. They shall be active while the train signal is
active.
9.3.2.2 Check In Detectors
9.3.2.2.1 These are the detectors that call the train phase. The call
and extension shall remain active for that transit phase until
the train is checked out from the intersection.
9.3.2.3 Check Out Detectors
9.3.2.3.1 These are the detectors that end the call for the train phase.
The train phase call and extension shall immediately end
once an input is received from one of these detectors.
9.3.2.3.2 Transit phase shall begin clearing immediately regardless of
the state of any other active phases.
9.3.2.3.3 If the checkout detector is active for a user defined number
of seconds, a new call for partial priority shall be entered
because the train is still present. The train shall checkout
once that detector turns off.
9.3.2.4 Delay Timer
9.3.2.4.1 This is the amount of time in second the detector will have to
be active before the software acknowledges it is active.
9.3.2.4.2 The default value shall be zero (0).
9.3.3 Partial Priority Timing Parameters
9.3.3.1 The software shall provide a minimum of three tables with the following
timing parameters that can be selected to be operational by time of day
and day of week.
9.3.3.2 Minimum Green – the minimum amount of time, in seconds, the vertical
bar signal shall be displayed.
9.3.3.3 Maximum Green – the maximum amount of time, in seconds, the vertical
bar signal shall be displayed.
9.3.3.4 Green Extension
9.3.3.4.1 User defined amount of time, in seconds, that the green
interval can be extended beyond its maximum or split time to
accommodate the transit priority request.
9.3.3.4.2 The user shall be able to enable green extension by
direction.
9.3.3.4.3 The green extension shall not reduce the amount of time for
the next movement to the extent that the minimum green
time cannot be served or the pedestrian interval cannot be
served.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 50 of 100
9.3.3.4.4 The user may choose to allow a pedestrian movement to be
skipped to accommodate a green extension.
9.3.3.5 Early Green
9.3.3.5.1 User defined amount of time in seconds that the software
may begin a train-compatible phase early to accommodate
the priority request. The early green shall reduce the green
time for the preceding phases.
9.3.3.5.2 The user shall be able to enable early green by direction.
9.3.3.5.3 The early green shall not reduce the amount of time for the
preceding movement such that the minimum green time or
pedestrian interval cannot be provided. Walk time shall not
be truncated to meet this requirement.
9.3.3.5.4 The user may choose to allow the pedestrian movement to
be skipped to accommodate early green.
9.3.3.6 Maximum Priority Service Time
9.3.3.6.1 User defined time, in seconds, that priority can be active.
When this value is exceeded, priority requests are cancelled
and regular, programmed operation is resumed.
9.3.3.7 Lock Out Time
9.3.3.7.1 User defined time, in seconds, that priority requests are not
acknowledged due to maximum time in priority operation.
When this time has passed, priority requests will be
acknowledged, and priority operation will resume.
9.3.3.8 Countdown Timer Time
9.3.3.8.1 The user shall enter the time, in seconds, the countdown
timer will start before the beginning of the transit phase for
that direction.
9.3.4 Partial Priority Operation
9.3.4.1 The software shall automatically select whether early green or green
extension is provided. The software will decide based on the active
phase when the train priority request is received and the anticipated
arrival time of the train.
9.3.4.1.1 The user shall be able to turn early green and green
extension off by direction and by time of day/day of week.
9.3.4.2 The software shall be able to vary the amount of green provided to the
train based on the length of the train. The detection system will provide a
distinct input for each length of train.
9.3.4.2.1 The duration of the green shall vary without disrupting the
active coordinated timing plan.
9.3.4.3 The software shall be able to determine if the track ahead of the train is
clear by using detector inputs from adjacent intersections.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 51 of 100
9.3.4.4 The train shall not be allowed to enter a block if any downstream block
between the train and the next block long enough to hold that train is not
clear. The bar signal for that direction shall remain red until the track is
clear and the local cycle is at the time when that train phase is served.
9.3.4.4.1 This feature shall prevent trains from stopping in blocks that
are shorter than the train and blocking intersections.
9.3.4.4.2 This feature shall consider the length of the train in the
decision process.
9.3.4.5 The software shall provide a countdown timer output. The countdown
timer will display the amount of time remaining until the next go indication
will be displayed.
9.3.4.5.1 The software shall be able to accommodate a 50 second
countdown.
9.3.4.5.2 The countdown timer shall begin a user defined amount of
time in seconds before the go signal and provide a constant
output during the downtown interval.
9.3.4.5.3 The software shall only output the countdown timer
information if a train is detected at the immediate
intersection.
9.3.4.5.4 The end of the countdown shall coincide with the beginning
of the transit phase.
9.3.4.5.5 The software shall be capable of providing the value of the
countdown to the timer. The format of this value shall be
accepted by at least two (2) off-the-shelf countdown timer
vendors.
9.3.4.6 The software shall deny a train priority request and not provide a go
signal under the following conditions:
9.3.4.6.1 The track between the train and the next block long enough
to hold the train is not clear. This includes the block long
enough to hold the train. The train will have to stop in a
block that is too short and will block an intersection.
9.3.4.6.2 The maximum vehicle queue length on the cross street has
been exceeded.
9.3.4.7 The user shall define the mode of operation if peer to peer communication
is lost to any intersection or detection device defined by the user. The
mode of operation shall automatically return to normal operation once
communication is restored.
9.3.4.7.1 The user shall program the controller to automatically adjust
the operation of the traffic light when communication is lost.
User defined options shall includealways providing priority,
adding recalls and changing plans. The user shall be able
to vary the response by time of day.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 52 of 100
9.3.4.7.2 An alarm will be generated that includes the communication
link that failed and the time of that failure.
9.3.4.7.3 The user shall be able to select the criterion that indicates a
communication failure including the amount of time in
seconds a link is down, the number of times a link is down
over an amount of time, and other criteria standard to the
communications industry.
9.3.4.8 The user shall define the mode of operation if detection has failed at the
intersection. The software shall determine failure using the functionality
for the vehicle detectors. The user shall be able to select the detectors to
monitor. The mode of operation shall automatically return to normal
operation once the failed detector is restored.
9.3.4.8.1 The user shall program the controller to automatically adjust
the operation of the traffic light when detection fails. User
defined options shall include always providing priority,
adding recalls and changing plans. The user shall be able
to vary the response by time of day.
9.3.4.8.2 An alarm will be generated that includes the detector that
failed and the time of that failure.
9.3.4.8.3 The software shall use the criterion already defined for the
detectors to determine failure.
9.4 BUS PRIORITY
The software shall provide early green, extended green and queue jump by direction for a bus if the
bus is on a route selected by the City and DART and the bus is behind schedule. The additional
green will be used to give the bus a better chance to make it through the traffic signal. The software
shall continue to operate the intersection in coordination.
9.4.1 General
9.4.1.1 The software shall provide a minimum of three (3) tables with the
following timing parameters that can be selected to be operational by time
of day and day of week.
9.4.1.2 The software shall receive an input from separate bus priority equipment.
The software will provide the appropriate priority sequence based on the
input from the bus priority equipment or other selected inputs. The three
responses are:
9.4.1.2.1 Early green
9.4.1.2.2 Green extension
9.4.1.2.3 Queue Jump
9.4.1.3 The software shall allow the user to define six (6) full sets of partial
priority parameters, one for each direction. These shall be unique from
the train priority inputs.
9.4.1.4 The bus priority computer shall provide unique inputs for each direction
the bus may approach the intersection.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 53 of 100
9.4.1.4.1 Two separate bus priorities shall be accommodated: early
or extended green and queue jump.
9.4.1.5 The software shall ignore a bus priority request if the software is
operating the traffic light in programmed yellow flash or all-red flash.
9.4.1.6 The software shall automatically select whether early green or green
extension is provided. The software will decide based on which phases
are active when the bus priority input is received.
9.4.1.6.1 The software shall continue to provide priority at the next
opportunity in the local cycle as long as the bus priority input
is active.
9.4.1.7 The software shall log the following data related to bus priority:
9.4.1.7.1 Type of priority request, by direction with time stamp.
9.4.1.7.2 Time priority phases initiated.
9.4.1.7.3 Time priority phases ended.
9.4.1.7.4 Action taken:
Direction receiving early green
Direction receiving extended green
Direction receiving queue jump
Extend a phase
Truncate a phase
Queue jump
9.4.2 Bus Priority Configuration
9.4.2.1 Bus priority phases
9.4.2.1.1 These are the phases that will output a green indication
during the bus priority interval.
9.4.2.1.2 These phases shall remain green until:
The priority request input has terminated.
The maximum priority time has been reached.
9.4.2.2 Bus priority overlaps
9.4.2.2.1 These are the overlaps that will output a green indication
during the bus priority interval.
9.4.2.3 Queue jump phases
9.4.2.3.1 User identified phases that will output a green indication
during the queue jump interval.
9.4.2.4 Queue jump overlaps
9.4.2.4.1 These are the overlaps that will output a green indication
during the queue jump interval
9.4.2.5 Bus priority detection input
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 54 of 100
9.4.2.5.1 Detector associated with the priority request for early green
or green extension.
9.4.2.6 Queue jump detection input
9.4.2.6.1 Detector associated with the queue jump request.
9.4.2.7 Delay Time
9.4.2.7.1 The amount of time in seconds the bus priority input must be
on before the software will acknowledge the priority request.
9.4.3 Bus Priority Timing
9.4.3.1 Green Extension
9.4.3.1.1 The amount of time, in seconds, that the software may
extend the green indication for the bus phase past the
normal phase maximum or split time.This extension will
reduce the green time for the following movement served if
running in coordinated operation.
9.4.3.1.2 The green extension shall not reduce the amount of time for
the following movements such that the minimum green time
cannot be provided or the pedestrian interval cannot be
provided.
The pedestrian interval shall only limit the green extension if a
call for the pedestrian phase is active in the controller.
9.4.3.1.3 The user may choose to allow the pedestrian movement to
be skipped.
9.4.3.2 Early Green
9.4.3.2.1 The amount of time, in seconds, that the software may begin
the compatible green phase early to serve the bus. The
early green shall reduce the green time for the preceding
phases.
9.4.3.2.2 The early green shall not reduce the amount of time for the
preceding movement such that the minimum green time or
pedestrian interval cannot be provided.
9.4.3.2.3 The user may choose to allow the pedestrian movement to
be skipped.
9.4.3.2.4 The walk or pedestrian clearance shall not be truncated to
meet this requirement.
9.4.3.3 Maximum Priority Time
9.4.3.3.1 This is the maximum amount of time in minutes the bus
priority call may remain active.
9.4.3.3.2 The software shall ignore the bus priority input once the
maximum time has been exceeded until the bus priority input
changes states.
9.4.4 Bus Priority Operation
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 55 of 100
9.4.4.1 Queue Jump
9.4.4.1.1 This is a green indication provided for the bus before the
adjacent vehicles receive a green indication. The interval
allows a bus to cross the intersection and merge into the
through lane without having to yield to other vehicles.
9.4.4.1.2 If the queue jump lane is an exclusive right turn lane, the
software shall be capable of displaying a right turn arrow to
clear motorist ahead of the bus.
9.4.4.1.3 The controller shall only provide a queue jump before the
adjacent through movement. If the bus arrives during the
green and a request for a queue jump is received it shall be
ignored until the time immediately before the beginning of
green for the adjacent through movement.
If early green time is programmed, the software shall steal time
from the preceding phase and start the queue jump phase
early.
9.4.4.1.4 The user shall be able turn this feature off by time of
day/day of week.
9.4.4.1.5 Once the bus has requested a queue jump, the software
shall not provide green extension for that direction.
10 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING
10.1 GENERAL
10.1.1 The software shall support a minimum of 64 user definable logic processor
commands
10.1.2 The software shall not limit the number of items that can be linked together in
logic statements.
10.1.2.1 The software shall process the logic commands linked together every 0.1
seconds.
10.1.3 The logic commands shall support the following Boolean gating:
10.1.3.1 OR – if either function is true, the logic channel will be true.
10.1.3.2 AND – if both functions are true, the logic channel will be true.
10.1.3.3 NOT- if the first function is NOT true, the logic channel will be true the
second function is not used for this command.
10.1.3.4 XOR- if either function is true the channel is true; if both are true the
channel will be false.
10.1.3.5 NOR – If either function is true, the logic channel will be false.
10.1.3.6 NAND – if both functions are true, the logic channel will be false.
10.1.3.7 ORNOT2 – if the first function is true OR the second function is not true,
the logic channel will be true.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 56 of 100
10.1.3.8 ANDNOT2 – if the first function is true AND the second function is not
true, the logic channel will be true.
10.1.4 The logic commands shall support the following:
10.1.4.1 LATCH – once the first function is true, the logic channel will be true until
the second function is true.
10.1.4.2 DELAY AND/OR EXTEND – once the function is true, the logic channel
shall not be true until an amount of time in seconds defined by the user
has elapsed. After the function changes from true to false, the logic
channel shall remain true until an amount of time in tenths of seconds,
seconds, minutes, or hours defined by the user has elapsed.
10.1.4.2.1 The range of the delay time shall be from 0 to 25.5 tenths of
seconds, 0 to 255 seconds, or 0 to 255 minutes, 0 to 255
hours and defined separately.
10.1.4.2.2 The range of the extend time shall be from 0 to 25.5 tenths
of seconds, 0 to 255 seconds, or 0 to 255 minutes, 0 to 255
hours and defined separately.
10.2 ASSIGNABLE OUTPUTS
10.2.1 The software shall provide the ability to program the following outputs in logic
statements:
10.2.1.1 Phase green
10.2.1.2 Phase yellow
10.2.1.3 Phase red
10.2.1.4 Phase omit
10.2.1.5 Overlap green
10.2.1.6 Overlap yellow
10.2.1.7 Overlap red
10.2.1.8 Walk
10.2.1.9 Pedestrian clear
10.2.1.10 Don’t walk
10.2.1.11 Overlap walk
10.2.1.12 Overlap pedestrian clear
10.2.1.13 Overlap don’t walk
10.2.1.14 Phase on
10.2.1.15 Phase next
10.2.1.16 Phase check
10.2.1.17 Phase hold
10.2.1.18 Virtual phase green
10.2.1.19 Virtual phase yellow
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 57 of 100
10.2.1.20 Virtual phase red
10.2.1.21 LRV green
10.2.1.22 LRV yellow
10.2.1.23 LRV red
10.2.1.24 Force off
10.2.1.25 Preempt on
10.2.1.26 Preempt entry one
10.2.1.27 Preempt entry two
10.2.1.28 Preempt dwell
10.2.1.29 Preempt off
10.2.1.30 Flash
10.2.1.31 Free
10.2.1.32 Special Function
10.2.1.33 Active plan
10.2.1.34 Special output/time of day
10.3 ASSIGNABLE INPUTS
10.3.1 The software shall provide the ability include the following inputs in logic
statements:
10.3.1.1 Vehicle detector
10.3.1.2 Pedestrian detector
10.3.1.3 Overlap detector
10.3.1.4 Overlap pedestrian detector
10.3.1.5 System detector
10.3.1.6 Queue detector
10.3.1.7 LRV detector
10.3.1.8 Terminate detector
10.3.1.9 Vehicle omit
10.3.1.10 Pedestrian omit
10.3.1.11 Overlap omit
10.3.1.12 Overlap pedestrian omit
10.3.1.13 LRV Omit
10.3.1.14 Phase hold
10.3.1.15 Overlap hold
10.3.1.16 Walk hold
10.3.1.17 Overlap walk hold
10.3.1.18 Preempt train input
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 58 of 100
10.3.1.19 Preempt emergency vehicle input
10.3.1.20 Flash sense
10.3.1.21 Manual control enable
10.3.1.22 Manual control advance
10.3.1.23 Stop time
10.3.1.24 Minimum recall
10.3.1.25 External start
10.3.1.26 Walk rest modifier
10.3.1.27 External coordination enable
10.3.1.28 Plan select enable
10.3.1.29 External time set
10.3.1.30 Door open
10.3.1.31 Force off
10.3.1.32 Red rest
10.3.1.33 Max inhibit
10.3.1.34 Max 2
10.3.1.35 Max 3
10.3.1.36 Pedestrian recycle
10.3.1.37 External plan select
10.3.1.38 Master sync input
10.3.1.39 Free select input
10.3.1.40 MMU flash
10.3.1.41 Local flash
10.3.1.42 Automatic flash
10.3.1.43 Gate down
11 COMMUNICATIONS
11.1 GENERAL
11.1.1 The software shall support the following types of external communications:
11.1.1.1 Controller to Central Supervisory Software
11.1.1.2 Masterless Peer-to-Peer between local controllers
11.1.1.3 Local Wireless Remote
11.1.2 The software shall be able to accommodate communication with all these
communication types simultaneously.
11.1.3 The software shall support the following methods of communications:
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 59 of 100
11.1.3.1 The software shall support four independent FSK modems connections
operating at speeds up to 9600 Baud
11.1.3.2 The software shall support two EAI/TIA232-E connections using a 9-pin
connector for each connection.
11.1.3.3 The software shall support a minimum of two 10/100 Ethernet connections
using standard RJ-45 connectors.
11.1.4 The software shall be able to communication either half or full duplex.
11.1.5 The local controller software shall transmit gratuitous ARP packets when first
connected to an Ethernet Network
11.1.6 The local controller software shall be able to extract VLANS from a tagged
trunk of VLANS being received from the Ethernet Network.
11.2 CENTER TO FIELD COMMUNICATION
11.2.1 The user shall be able to request a download or upload to the control system
through the front panel.
11.2.1.1 The software shall display any pages that failed.
11.2.2 The local controller software shall support the following communication
patterns:
11.2.2.1 Poll-Response
11.2.2.1.1 The software shall be capable of being polled every one (1)
second.
11.2.2.2 Exception based reporting (controller initiated event driven
communication).
11.2.3 The software shall support Central to Field (C2F) communications through the
following hardware interfaces:
11.2.3.1 EIA/TIA 232-E compliant 9-pin connector
11.2.3.2 10/100 Ethernet RJ-45 connector
11.2.3.3 FSK Modem
11.2.4 The type of field to central communication shall be configurable by the user.
11.2.5 The software shall be capable of field to central communication over a 10/100
Ethernet network.
11.2.5.1 The local controller software shall include fully integrated, native support
of the Ethernet protocol. Serial tunneling over an Ethernet network is not
acceptable.
11.2.5.2 The local controller software shall support static IP and Dynamic Host
Configuration (DHCP) IP address assignment.
11.2.5.3 The configuration of the local controller software communicating over an
Ethernet network shall include the following settings:
11.2.5.3.1 Controller name
11.2.5.3.2 IP address
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 60 of 100
11.2.5.3.3 Subnet mask
11.2.5.3.4 Gateway address
11.2.5.3.5 Domain name server
11.2.5.3.6 DHCP enable
11.2.5.4 The local controller software shall support the ICMP Protocol stack to
verify communication over an IP network.
11.2.5.5 The local controller software shall support Ethernet communications over
interconnection methods including, but not limited to the following:
11.2.5.5.1 Point to point optical fiber
11.2.5.5.2 Shared multi-drop optical fiber
11.2.5.5.3 Serial strings of wireless point to point links
11.2.5.5.4 Point to multi-point wireless links
11.2.5.5.5 Wireless mesh
11.2.5.5.6 Long latency network
11.2.5.5.7 Varying latency network
11.2.5.5.8 DOCSIS modem, shared capacity technology
11.2.5.5.9 Ethernet over traffic cable
11.2.5.5.10 Ethernet over powerline
11.2.5.5.11 Ethernet over signal cable
11.2.5.5.12 Ethernet over 9-wire cable
11.2.5.5.13 Ethernet over coaxial cable
11.2.5.5.14 10BASE2 Ethernet over copper wire (twisted pair)
11.2.5.5.15 DSL and its extensions over copper wire
11.2.5.5.16 3G commercial wireless
11.2.5.5.17 4G WiMaxcommercial wireless
11.2.5.5.18 4G LTE commercial wireless
11.2.5.5.19 4G WiMaxprivate wireless
11.2.5.5.20 4G LTE private wireless
11.2.5.6 The local controller software shall support Network Time Protocol (NTP)
for setting the controller clock.
11.2.5.7 The local controller software shall support File Transfer Protocol (FTP) for
uploading and downloading files.
11.2.6 The local controller software shall be capable of field to central communication
over a serial communication network.
11.2.6.1 The local controller software shall support EIA/TIA 232-E communications
protocol standard in a serial communication network.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 61 of 100
11.2.6.2 The local controller software shall support user definable speeds over a
serial network up to 56 kbps.
11.3 PEER TO PEER COMMUNICATION
11.3.1 The local controller software shall support peer to peer communication
between local intersection controllers exclusive of a central management
system and along the most direct and reliable path allowable by the
communication topology.
11.3.2 Peer to peer communication shall operate over an Ethernet network.
11.3.3 The local controller software shall support transmission and reception of
multiple peer messages simultaneously.
11.3.4 The local controller software shall be able to transmit peer to peer messages
to a minimum of five (5) intersections in all directions from the intersection
transmitting the messages.
11.3.5 The local controller software shall be able to receive peer to peer messages
from a minimum of five (5) intersections in all directions from the intersections
receiving the message.
11.3.6 Peer intersections shall be selectable by the user.
11.3.6.1 Peer intersection will be identified by logical name
11.3.6.2 Peer intersection will be identified by IP address
11.3.6.3 The user shall be able to select any local controller input, output, or event
to initiate a peer to peer message.
11.3.7 The receipt of a peer-to peer message shall cause the receiving intersection to
apply an internal control on the receiving peer intersection.
11.3.7.1 The user shall be able to select any internal control event available in the
software.
11.3.8 The local controller software shall have a user definable communication link
timeout feature for each peer to peer message.
11.3.8.1 The timeout value shall range from 1 second to 60 seconds in one second
increments.
11.3.8.2 The use shall be able to enable/disable the timeout feature.
11.3.8.3 Idle periods during which no peer to peer messages are being transmitted
shall not cause the link to timeout.
11.3.9 The failure of a peer to peer communication link shall initiate a communication
link failure alarm.
11.3.9.1 Failure of a communication link shall cause the receiving function to be
set to a user defined fail state
11.3.9.2 When the communication keep-alive resumes, the variable set by a
remote intersection shall return to its valid condition.
11.3.9.2.1 The user may override the defined fail state condition for
each message.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 62 of 100
11.4 LOCAL WIRELESS REMOTE
11.4.1 The user shall be able to access the local controller through a Local Wireless
Remote Client using either of the following methods:
11.4.1.1 An adapter attached to the local controller
11.4.1.2 An 802.11 a/b/g/n Access Point installed in the intersection cabinet.
11.4.2 The local wireless remote client shall be available within a 200 foot radius of
the controller cabinet.
11.4.3 The local wireless remote client connection shall use secure data
communication transmissions and shall be available to approved users and
equipment only.
11.4.4 Users shall be able to utilize the local wireless remote client from approved
laptops, smartphones, touch screen tablets, or other remote devices.
11.4.5 The local wireless remote client shall support bandwidths at a minimum of a
a/b/g/n data rate connection.
12 ADVANCED OPERATIONS
12.1 TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE OPERATION
If the Proposer has an adaptive solution the City desires a presentation of the functionality and a bid.
This requirement describes a decentralized traffic responsive operation. Traffic signals will be
grouped together and a controller will be the master for the group. The other intersections will relay
system detector information to the master controller via a peer-to-peer messaging; the master
controller will determine the plan; and the master controller will command the other intersections in
the group into the plan.
12.1.1 The software shall provide the following user defined and selectable
parameters for traffic responsive operation:
12.1.1.1 Thresholds (1-10)
12.1.1.2 Activation threshold (density)
12.1.1.3 Traffic responsive detectors (1-32)
12.1.2 The software shall provide traffic responsive operation for a user defined
intersection group
12.1.2.1 The software shall allow the selection of a single controller to serve as the
traffic responsive master controller for the intersection group.
12.1.2.1.1 The master controller shall receive data from other
controllers and transmit traffic responsive commands to the
other controllers using the peer to peer communication links.
12.1.2.2 The software shall support at least 32 user selectable detectors from any
intersection within the group for traffic responsive plan selection.
12.1.2.2.1 The software shall support weighting of the detector data by
the user for each detector (K Value).
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 63 of 100
12.1.2.3 The software shall use algorithms developed by the US Department of
Transportation for Traffic-Responsive Operation.
12.1.2.4 The software shall support up to 10 user defined traffic flow thresholds for
traffic plan selection.
12.1.2.5 Traffic Responsive Operations shall automatically select timing plans
based on defined traffic flow thresholds, defined as volume plus K times
occupancy (V+KO).
12.1.2.6 Plans eligible for traffic responsive operations shall be stored in the local
controller databases.
12.1.2.7 Plans eligible for traffic responsive operation shall be identified on a time
of day/day of week basis.
12.1.2.8 The software shall compare the processed volume and occupancy value
to the threshold values and select the timing plan that most closely
matches the processed data value.
12.1.2.9 Each intersection in the group shall verify that the command was received
and the new timing plan was implemented.
12.1.2.9.1 If the plan change fails at any intersection, the group shall
revert to the local controller time of day/day of week
schedule.
12.1.2.10 Traffic responsive operation shall end
12.1.2.10.1 When the processed volume and occupancy values satisfy
the threshold value established for traffic responsive exit.
12.1.2.10.2 A manual command is received
12.1.2.10.3 Based on the time of day/day of week schedule
12.2 QUEUE DETECTION
12.2.1 The user shall be able to define eight (8) independent responses per
intersection.
12.2.2 The user shall select the time of day/days of week the queue detection feature
is active.
12.2.2.1 This shall be for each queue detector
12.2.3 In the event of a detector failure, the queue detection response associated
with that detector shall be disabled.
12.2.4 Four levels of priority shall be provided
12.2.4.1 If a queue detector with higher priority is active, lower priority queue
detectors trying to reduce the green time for the higher priority movement
shall be ignored.
12.2.4.2 When queue detectors have equal priority and are competing for green
time, the software shall ignore both queue detectors.
12.2.5 Configuration parameters for queue detection
12.2.5.1 Enable
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 64 of 100
12.2.5.1.1 Left turn or through vehicle
12.2.5.1.2 Partial priority
12.2.5.1.3 Diamond intersections
12.2.5.2 Priority
12.2.5.2.1 For each queue detection response
12.2.5.3 Maximum Time
12.2.5.3.1 User defined in seconds
12.2.5.3.2 For each queue detection response
12.2.5.3.3 Once the maximum time is reached the queue detection
response shall turn off.
12.2.5.3.4 The maximum timer shall reset when all of the detectors for
that queue detector turn off.
12.2.6 Left turn or through vehicle queue detection
12.2.6.1 The software shall add a user defined amount of green time when user
defined detector delay or occupancy trigger points are satisfied.
12.2.6.1.1 The software shall be able to add green time to a phase
12.2.6.1.2 The software shall be able to call a phase
12.2.6.2 Configuration parameters for left turn or through vehicle queue detection
12.2.6.2.1 Detectors
12.2.6.2.2 Delay trigger point in seconds from 0 to 255.
12.2.6.2.3 Occupancy trigger point in percent from 0 to 100.
12.2.6.2.4 Green time added
12.2.6.2.5 Phase(s) green time is added to
12.2.6.2.6 Phase(s) green time is subtracted from
If more than one phase is listed, the time subtracted shall be
split evenly among the phases.
These adjustments shall not fail the coordinator.
12.2.6.2.7 Call Phase(s)
12.2.7 Partial Priority Queue Detection
If the trigger points are met, the software shall ignore requests for partial priority until the
vehicle queue length decreases or the maximum queue detection timer is exceeded.
12.2.7.1 Configuration Parameters for partial priority queue detection
12.2.7.1.1 Detectors
12.2.7.1.2 Delay trigger point
12.2.7.1.3 Occupancy trigger point
12.2.8 Diamond Intersection Queue Detection
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 65 of 100
The software shall change the diamond sequence or coordinated timing plan when the
queue detectors are active.
12.2.8.1 Configuration parameters for diamond intersection queue detection
12.2.8.1.1 Detectors
12.2.8.1.2 Delay trigger point in seconds from 0 to 255
12.2.8.1.3 Occupancy trigger point in percent from 0 to 100
12.2.8.1.4 Temporary sequence
12.2.8.1.5 Temporary timing plan
12.2.8.1.6 Amount of time in minutes that temporary sequence and/or
plan remain active after initiated. Acceptable values range
from 0 to 60 minutes.
12.2.9 The software shall log and timestamp
12.2.9.1 When a queue detection response occurs
12.2.9.2 The data that triggered the response
12.2.10 In the event of detector failure an alarm with a timestamp shall be generated
and include
12.2.10.1 The detector that failed
12.3 AUXILIARY FIELD DEVICE OPERATION
12.3.1 The software shall allow the user to program the operation of auxiliary field
devices.
12.3.2 The software shall support a minimum of eight (8) different auxiliary field
device configurations per table.
12.3.3 The software shall provide a minimum of four (4) auxiliary field device tables.
12.3.4 The auxiliary field device table shall be activated by any of the following
means:
12.3.4.1 Schedule
12.3.4.2 Manual command
12.3.4.3 Logic functions
12.3.5 The user shall be able to program the following output states of the auxiliary
field devices:
12.3.5.1 Default State
12.3.5.2 Display 1
12.3.5.3 Display 2
12.3.5.4 Display 3
12.3.6 The user shall be able to repeat any state during while the auxiliary field
device table is active (i.e. Display1 -> Display 2-> Display 1).
12.3.7 Changes in the auxiliary field device state shall be user programmable by the
following means:
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 66 of 100
12.3.7.1 Time of day
12.3.7.2 Assignable input pins
13 DIAMOND INTERCHANGE SEQUENCE
13.1 GENERAL
13.1.1 A hardcoded phase sequence, approved by the city, will run.
13.1.2 The software shall be capable of running the following diamond sequences and
shall be able to run any combination for these sequences at an intersection.
The sequence will change by time of day/day of week and/or by input from
diamond interchange queue detectors.
13.1.2.1 Figure 3 - Dual Lag
13.1.2.1.1 The user shall be able to select different splits for the
lagging left turns.
13.1.2.1.2 The user shall be able to keep the left turn and adjacent
through movement green if there is a call on only one
frontage road.
13.1.2.2 Figure 4 - TTI Phasing
13.1.2.2.1 The user shall be able to select the length of the green
clearance time for the frontage roads.
13.1.2.3 Figure 6 or 7 – Lead/Lag or Lag/Lead
13.1.2.3.1 The user shall be able omit any left turn phase.
13.1.2.3.2 The user shall be able to lead and lag any left turn
movement.
13.1.2.3.3 The user shall be able to keep the left turn and adjacent
through movement green if there is a call on only one
frontage road.
13.1.3 All diamond interchange operations shall be configurable to operate in
actuated, semi-actuated, or fixed time mode.
13.1.4 The software shall smoothly transition between sequences.
13.1.4.1 The software shall not appear to skip any movement. Even if a phase is
not technically skipped, the controller shall not service an outside
movement twice without servicing all other outside movements that have
demand.
13.1.4.1.1 The outside movement may be served twice before all other
movements are served if the movement is compatible with
another outside movement being served.
13.1.4.2 The software shall not advance to the next movement, serve that next
movement, and then back up and serve the first movement again during a
sequence change.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 67 of 100
13.1.5 The software shall be capable of running the diamond sequences listed above
with right turn overlaps on the frontage roads and arterial roads.
13.1.6 The software shall be capable of running the diamond sequences listed above
with eight (8) active pedestrian channels.
13.1.6.1 Each frontage road crossing will be independent.
13.1.6.2 The arterial road crossing will be split into two independent crossings.
13.1.7 The software shall provide templates for the following traditional diamond
operations for easy programming:
13.1.7.1 Figure 3 – dual lag
13.1.7.2 Figure 4 – TTI phasing
13.1.7.3 Figure 6 – Lead/lag
13.1.7.4 Figure 7 – Lag/lead
13.2 DIAMOND INTERCHANGE K-CLEARANCE
13.2.1 General Requirements
13.2.1.1 The feature shall allow the user to skip phases in the diamond sequence
without violating a motorist’s expectation. The expected inside interval
shall be provided to the motorist even if phases are skipped.
13.2.1.2 The software shall provide an internal clearance for traffic moving from
one side of the interchange to the other, providing full passage through
the interchange even when phases are not be served due to low volumes.
13.2.1.3 Recommending the use of the user programmable logic statement defined
in the advanced programming chapter shall not meet this requirement.
13.2.1.4 The user shall be able to skip phases during coordinated operation. In no
case shall this feature cause the coordinator to fail or cause a transition.
13.2.1.5 Right turn overlaps on the frontage and arterial roadway shall continue to
operate normally when phases are skipped.
13.2.1.6 Left turn overlaps on the arterial roadway shall continue to operate
normally when phases are skipped.
13.2.2 Figure 3 Diamond Sequence
13.2.2.1 Uncoordinated Operation
13.2.2.1.1 When changing from the arterial roadway to the frontage
road, the software shall call the appropriate inside clearance
phase(s).
If there are calls on both frontage roads, both inside clearance
phases shall be provided.
If there is only a call on frontage road one, the inside clearance
phase on the other side of the diamond shall be provided.
If there is only a call on frontage road two, the inside clearance
phase on the other side of the diamond shall be provided.
13.2.2.2 Coordinated Operation
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 68 of 100
13.2.2.2.1 Arterial roadway is coordinated
When a vehicle call is received on the frontage road the
software shall determine if there is enough time to provide the
appropriate inside clearance and provide a minimum green for
the frontage road. If there is not, the software shall skip the
frontage road that cycle.
When a pedestrian call is received on the frontage road after
the force off for the arterial phases the software shall determine
if there is enough time to provide the appropriate inside
clearance and provide the minimum pedestrian service. If
there is not, the software shall skip the frontage road that cycle.
If the pedestrian call is received on the frontage road before the
force off for the arterial phases the software shall serve the
pedestrian phase.
The software shall serve the vehicle call, if there is time, even if
the pedestrian call cannot be served that cycle.
13.2.2.3 Frontage road is coordinated
13.2.2.3.1 The software shall determine if there is enough time to serve
the arterial roadway vehicle or pedestrian phase.
13.2.2.3.2 The appropriate inside clearance shall be provided even if
the pedestrian phase was programmed to steel time from the
subsequent phase.
13.2.3 Figure 6 or 7 Diamond Sequences
13.2.3.1 Uncoordinated Operation
13.2.3.1.1 When changing from the arterial roadway to the frontage
road, the software shall call the inside clearance phase.
13.2.3.1.2 If there is a call on either frontage road the inside clearance
phase, a lagging left turn for one direction, shall be
provided. The first stage of the inside clearance shall clear
vehicles traveling in the opposite direction of the lagging left
turn. Then the first frontage road shall begin triggering the
beginning of the second stage of the inside clearance. The
second stage shall clear vehicles traveling in the same
direction as the lagging left turn.
13.2.3.2 Coordinated Operation
13.2.3.2.1 The functionality described in the Uncoordinated Operation
section shall be provided without causing a transition or
coordination failure.
13.2.3.2.2 Arterial roadway is coordinated
When a vehicle call is received on the frontage road the software
shall determine if there is enough time to provide the appropriate
inside clearance and provide a minimum green for the frontage
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 69 of 100
road. If there is not, the software shall skip the frontage road that
cycle.
When a pedestrian call is received on the frontage road after the
force off for the arterial movement in the opposite direction of the
lagging left turn the software shall determine if there is enough
time to provide the appropriate inside clearance and provide the
minimum pedestrian service. If there is not, the software shall
skip the frontage road that cycle.
If the pedestrian call is received on the frontage road before the
force off for the arterial movement in the opposite direction of the
lagging left turn the software shall serve the pedestrian phase.
The software shall service the vehicle call, if there is time, even if
the pedestrian call cannot be served that cycle.
13.2.3.2.3 Frontage road is coordinated
The software shall determine if there is enough time to serve the
arterial roadway vehicle or pedestrian phase.
The appropriate inside clearance shall be provided even if the
pedestrian phase was programmed to steel time from the
subsequent phase.
13.2.4 Figure 4 Diamond Sequence
Figure 13.2.4: Figure 4 Diamond Sequence with K-clearance
K-Clearance
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 70 of 100
13.2.4.1 Uncoordinated Operation
13.2.4.1.1 When changing from Stage 1 to Stage 4 the software shall
provide the K-clearance interval.
The northbound and westbound right turn overlap shall remain
active during the K-clearance.
The northbound and westbound right turn overlap shall remain
active for an additional amount of time equal to the duration of
the Stage 3 interval.
13.2.4.1.2 When changing from Stage 1 to Stage 5 the software shall
provide the K-clearance interval.
The westbound right turn overlap shall remain active during the
K-clearance interval.
The westbound right turn overlap shall remain active during for
an additional amount of time equal to the duration of the Stage
6 interval.
The user may choose to keep the westbound right turn overlap
active during Stage 5.
The user may choose to end the westbound right turn overlap
during Stage 5.
13.2.4.1.3 When changing from Stage 2 to Stage 5 the software shall
provide the K-clearance interval.
Northbound green clearance, Stage 3, shall not be provided.
The northbound right turn overlap shall remain active during the
K-clearance.
The northbound right turn overlap shall remain active for an
additional amount of time equal to the duration of the Stage 3
interval.
The user may choose to activate the westbound right turn
overlap during the K-clearance.
If the user activates the westbound right turn overlap during the
K-clearance, the westbound right turn shall remain active
during Stage 5.
13.2.4.1.4 When changing from Stage 2 to Stage 1 the software shall
provide not provide the K-clearance interval.
Northbound green clearance, Stage 3, shall not be provided.
The northbound right turn overlap shall remain active during
Stage 1.
13.2.4.1.5 When changing from Stage 4 to Stage 1 the software shall
provide the K-clearance interval.
The southbound and eastbound right turn overlap shall remain
active during the K-clearance.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 71 of 100
The southbound and eastbound right turn overlap shall remain
active for an additional amount of time equal to the duration of
the Stage 6 interval.
13.2.4.1.6 When changing from Stage 4 to Stage 2 the software shall
provide the K-clearance interval.
The eastbound right turn overlap shall remain active during the
K-clearance interval.
The eastbound right turn overlap shall remain active for an
additional amount of time equal to the duration of the Stage 3
interval.
The user may choose to keep the eastbound right turn overlap
active during Stage 2.
The user may choose to end the eastbound right turn overlap
during Stage 2.
13.2.4.1.7 When changing from Stage 5 to Stage 2 the software shall
provide the K-clearance interval.
Southbound green clearance, Stage 6, shall not be provided.
The southbound right turn overlap shall remain active during
the K-clearance.
The southbound right turn overlap shall remain active for an
additional amount of time equal to the duration of the Stage 6
interval.
The user may choose to activate the eastbound right turn
overlap during the K-clearance.
If the user activates the eastbound right turn overlap during the
K-clearance, the eastbound right turn shall remain active during
Stage 2.
13.2.4.1.8 When changing from Stage 5 to Stage 4 the software shall
provide not provide the K-clearance interval.
Southbound green clearance, Stage 6, shall not be provided.
The southbound right turn overlap shall remain active during
Stage 4.
13.2.4.2 Coordinated Operation
13.2.4.2.1 The functionality described in the Uncoordinated Operation
section shall be provided without causing transition or
coordination failure.
13.2.4.2.2 The software shall allow the user to select the phases that
may be skipped.
13.2.4.2.3 The software shall allow the user to select the coordinated
phases. The green for these phases shall hold until the
force off point.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 72 of 100
14 LOGS
14.1 GENERAL
14.1.1 All log entries shall be stored with a military time and date stamp.
14.1.2 All logs shall be available to the traffic management system and through the
front panel of the controller.
14.1.3 Local controller will store at a minimum all events over a seven day period.
14.1.4 The log entries shall be overwritten when full. The oldest shall be overwritten
first.
14.2 GENERAL CONTROLLER LOG
14.2.1 Power – software will log each time the controller power is turned on and off.
14.2.2 External Start – software will log each time the controller receives an external
restart from either MMU or external input.
14.2.3 Manual control – software will log the start time and end time when the
controller is operated in manual control.
14.2.4 Cabinet door – software will log the start time and end time for any occurrence
of the cabinet door being open.
14.3 CONFLICT MONITOR/MMU
14.3.1 Software shall log the start and end of each recordable fault on either the
conflict monitor or MMU.
14.4 FRONT PANEL LOG
14.4.1 Software shall log all data modifications made using the front panel.
14.4.2 Software shall log the user making modifications.
14.5 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE LOG
14.5.1 The software shall record all events and actions each day.
14.5.1.1 The software shall create a file containing the events and actions and
provide the daily file to the central system.
14.5.1.2 Using the file, the user shall be able to replay each event and action by
the software that day on a test cabinet.
14.6 DETECTOR LOG
14.6.1 The software shall support detector diagnostics that allow testing vehicle and
pedestrian detectors for no activity, maximum presence, erratic output and
communication failure.
14.6.1.1 Detector failure shall generate a log event. The log will identify the
detector number and pin assigned to that detector in the log data.
14.6.1.2 Detector restoration shall generate a log event. The log will identify the
detector number and pin assigned to that detector in the log data.
14.7 VEHICLE SPLIT LOG
14.7.1 Software shall log actual vehicle split time (in seconds) for each phase.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 73 of 100
14.7.1.1 Software shall log split times in seconds during free operation.
14.7.1.2 Software shall log split times in seconds during coordinated operation.
14.7.1.3 Software will log the sum of two services if a phase is serviced twice
during one cycle. The logged event will include an identifier that signifies
the time was split into two services.
14.7.1.4 Software will log only phases that are permitted in the controller.
14.7.1.4.1 A phase that is permitted in the controller but omitted during
a certain plan will be displayed in the log with the word omit.
14.8 CYCLE TIME LOG
14.8.1 Software shall log cycle times in seconds during free operation.
14.8.2 Software shall log cycle times in seconds during coordinated operation.
14.9 COORDINATION LOG
14.9.1 Software shall log the following events related to coordination:
14.9.1.1 Change of pattern.
14.9.1.2 Start and end of transition.
14.9.1.3 Phases skipped during transition.
14.9.1.4 Coordination failure.
14.9.1.4.1 Vehicle phase that was skipped.
14.9.1.4.2 Pedestrian phase that was skipped.
14.10 PREEMPT LOG
14.10.1 Software shall log and time stamp the following events related to preempt:
14.10.1.1 Advance input start by direction.
14.10.1.2 Advance input end by direction.
14.10.1.3 Gate input start or gates down.
14.10.1.4 Gate input end of gates down.
14.10.1.5 Start and end time of preempt, including preempt identifier (preempt
number)
14.10.1.6 Start and end time, vehicle ID number, direction, serviced provided or
denied for all emergency vehicle preemption requests.
14.10.1.7 Time special inputs received.
14.11 TRANSIT PRIORITY LOG
14.11.1 Software shall log the following events related to transit priority:
14.11.1.1 Time of request for priority and priority identifier (what priority
direction/identifier requested)
14.11.1.2 Time priority operation initiated.
14.11.1.3 End time of priority including cause for end (check-out, max time
exceeded, preempt request override)
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 74 of 100
14.11.1.4 Time priority request is denied and reason for denial.
14.11.1.5 Time denied priority request is served.
14.12 SPECIAL EVENT LOG
14.12.1 Software shall log user defined special events.
14.12.1.1 Special events will be identified by input pin number.
14.12.1.2 Software shall log the start time and end time the input pin was active.
14.13 ADVANCED OPERATION EVENT LOG
14.13.1 Advanced Operations Status Screens
14.13.1.1 Traffic Responsive Operation
14.13.1.1.1 Current value of the traffic flow threshold
14.13.1.1.2 Active plan
14.13.1.1.3 Time plan started
14.13.1.1.4 Time plan ended
14.13.1.2 Queue Detection
14.13.1.2.1 Status of each queue detector
Mode of queue detector
Is the queue detector response active
Is the queue detector response overridden
14.13.1.2.2 Current value of the volume or occupancy for each queue
detector.
14.13.1.2.3 Current value of the maximum time for each queue detector
14.13.1.2.4 Times
Time queue detector response started
Time queue detector response ended
15 USER INTERFACE
15.1 GENERAL
15.1.1 The software shall provide a user interface for data entry, status monitoring,
and management of the controller unit.
15.1.1.1 All features shall be accessible and programmable using the user
interface.
15.1.2 The user interface shall be accessible from the controller’s front panel or
remote device.
15.1.2.1 The user interface shall be automatically formatted to fit the users display
screen.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 75 of 100
15.1.3 The user interface shall ONLY display parameters that are programmed,
enabled, and/or relevant to the information being displayed. Unused phases,
data parameters (i.e. phases, detectors, overlaps, etc.) will not be displayed.
15.1.4 The software shall provide a menu-driven display format for data entry and
status information.
15.1.5 All programming must be downloadable from a remote device or the traffic
management system.
15.1.6 The software shall provide an on-screen help menu.
15.2 DATA ENTRY
15.2.1 Programming displays shall be provided in menu format to assist in data entry.
All display items shall be in English language and use standard traffic
engineering nomenclature acceptable to the City.
15.2.2 The main menu shall allow the user to select major controller functions with
submenus displayed under each major function to assist the user in identifying
all entries.
15.2.2.1 The software shall provide shortcut keys for navigating the menu
structure.
15.2.2.2 The user shall be able to return to the main menu in a single keystroke.
15.2.2.3 The user shall be able to return to the previous menu with a single
keystroke.
15.2.3 The table title and column headings shall remain visible during scrolling.
15.2.3.1 The column heading shall include at minimum the phase number.
15.2.4 The user shall be able to easily navigate to the desired cell for data entry.
15.2.5 All data entries shall be highlighted until saved into the controller’s database.
15.2.6 Information not accessible to users based on security levels shall be grayed
out or omitted.
15.3 STATUS DISPLAY
15.3.1 The software shall be able to display the real time status of the controller
operation.
15.3.2 The software shall provide a display with intersection status information
including the following:
15.3.2.1 Controller Status
15.3.2.2 Ring status
15.3.2.3 Phase Status
15.3.2.4 Coordination Status
15.3.2.5 Preemption Status
15.3.2.6 Overlap Status
15.3.2.7 Detector Status
15.3.2.8 Communication Status
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 76 of 100
15.3.2.9 Cabinet Status
15.3.2.10 Alarm Status
15.3.2.11 Advanced Operation Status
15.3.3 The Controller Status display shall include the following information
15.3.3.1 Current Date and Time
15.3.3.2 Current sync status (free, coordinated, transition)
15.3.3.3 Current plan / pattern
15.3.3.4 Flash condition (controller or cabinet)
15.3.3.4.1 Yellow flash
15.3.3.4.2 All-red flash
15.3.3.5 Current time of day / day of week pattern
15.3.3.6 Current master cycle time
15.3.3.7 Current local cycle time
15.3.3.8 Current pattern cycle
15.3.3.9 Current offset time
15.3.3.10 Special Function Output
15.3.3.11 Alarm Status
15.3.4 The Ring Status display shall include the following information for each
enabled ring.
15.3.4.1 Active phase(s) on the ring including vehicle state (Red, Yellow, Green,
Next), pedestrian state (Walk, Flashing Don't Walk, Don't Walk), vehicle
and pedestrian calls.
15.3.4.2 Minimum green timer in seconds for active phase (s)
15.3.4.3 Maximum green timer in seconds for active phase(s)
15.3.4.4 Gap or passage timer in seconds for active phase(s)
15.3.4.5 Walk timer in seconds for active pedestrian phase(s)
15.3.4.6 Flashing don’t walk timer in seconds for the active pedestrian phase(s)
15.3.4.7 Yellow clearance timer in seconds for the active phase(s)
15.3.4.8 Red clearance timer in seconds for the active phase(s)
15.3.4.9 Reason for termination of the active phases: force-off, max out, gap out.
15.3.4.9.1 The reason for termination shall remain on the display until
the next time the phase turns green.
15.3.5 The Phase Status display shall include the following information for each
enabled phase.
15.3.5.1 Phase On
15.3.5.2 Vehicle Call
15.3.5.3 Pedestrian Call
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 77 of 100
15.3.5.4 Vehicle Extension
15.3.5.5 Vehicle Red
15.3.5.6 Vehicle Yellow
15.3.5.7 Vehicle Green
15.3.5.8 Pedestrian Walk
15.3.5.9 Pedestrian Clearance
15.3.5.10 Pedestrian Don’t Walk
15.3.5.11 Phase Next
15.3.6 The Coordination Status display shall include the following information
15.3.6.1 Coordination Cycle
15.3.6.2 Coordination Sync
15.3.6.3 Free Status
15.3.6.4 Pattern Status
15.3.7 The Preemption Status display shall include the following information for each
preempt sequence
15.3.7.1 Active/Not Active
15.3.7.2 Current State
15.3.7.1 Active State or Normal or Emergency Vehicle Preempt
15.3.7.1.1 Entry One
15.3.7.1.2 Entry Two
15.3.7.1.3 Dwell
15.3.7.2 Active State of Smooth Preemption
15.3.7.2.1 Active Line
15.3.8 The Overlap Status display shall include the following information for each
enabled overlap:
15.3.8.1 Overlap Red
15.3.8.2 Overlap Yellow
15.3.8.3 Overlap Green
15.3.8.4 Overlap timers (green, yellow, red)
15.3.9 The Detector Status display shall include the following information for each
enabled detector:
15.3.9.1 Active/Not Active
15.3.9.2 Vehicle Detector Alarms
15.3.9.3 Pedestrian Detector Alarms
15.3.9.4 Delay and Extension Timers
15.3.9.5 Delay and Extension inhibit
15.3.9.6 Volume
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 78 of 100
15.3.9.7 Occupancy
15.3.9.8 Failed
15.3.9.8.1 No response programmed (always off)
15.3.9.8.2 Minimum recall
15.3.9.8.3 Maximum recall (always on)
15.3.10 The Communication Status display shall include the following information:
15.3.10.1 Field to Central (i.e. system) Communication
15.3.10.1.1 Link Status
15.3.10.1.2 Send/Receive Status
15.3.10.2 Peer-to-Peer Communication
15.3.10.2.1 Peer Link Status
15.3.10.2.2 Peer Send/Receive
15.3.11 The Cabinet Status Display shall include the following information:
15.3.11.1 Cabinet Fault Status
15.3.11.2 Channel Status
15.3.11.2.1 Channel Red
15.3.11.2.2 Channel Yellow
15.3.11.2.3 Channel Green
15.3.11.3 Assignable Input Status
15.3.11.4 Assignable Output Status
15.3.12 Advanced Operations Status Screens
15.3.12.1 Traffic Responsive Operation
15.3.12.1.1 Current value of the traffic flow threshold
15.3.12.1.2 Active plan
15.3.12.1.3 Time plan started
15.3.12.1.4 Time plan ended
15.3.12.2 Variable mode of left turn operation
15.3.12.2.1 Current mode of left turn operation by left turn
15.3.12.2.2 Current value by left turn of the volume and density data
Cycle by cycle
15 minute rolling average
15.3.12.2.3 Trigger point timers by left turn
Time to be less restrictive
Time to be more restrictive
Time between mode changes
Time of last mode change by left turn
15.3.12.3 Variable lagging left turn splits
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 79 of 100
15.3.12.3.1 Current value of the calculated left turn split for each left
turn
15.3.12.4 Traffic Responsive Flash
15.3.12.4.1 Current value of the 15 minute rolling average volumes
scaled up to a one hour volume.
Main street volume
Minor street approach volume 1
Minor street approach volume 2
15.3.12.4.2 The value of the trigger point timers
Time to be less restrictive
Time to be more restrictive
Time between mode changes
15.3.12.4.3 Current mode of operation
15.3.12.4.4 Time of last mode change
15.3.12.5 Queue Detection
15.3.12.5.1 Status of each queue detector
Mode of queue detector
Is the queue detector response active
Is the queue detector response overridden
15.3.12.5.2 Current value of the volume or occupancy for each queue
detector.
15.3.12.5.3 Current value of the maximum time for each queue detector
15.3.12.5.4 Times
Time queue detector response started
Time queue detector response ended
15.3.12.6 Cycle-by-Cycle Split Adjustments
15.3.12.6.1 Current rolling average occupancies for each phase.
15.3.12.6.2 Current splits for each phase
15.3.12.6.3 Current percentage of the cycle for each phase
15.3.12.6.4 Last change in split for each phase
15.3.12.6.5 Total change in split for each phase
15.3.12.6.6 Times
Start of adjustments
End of adjustments
15.3.12.7 Auxiliary Field Device Transition Table
15.3.12.7.1 Current Output
Default
Other Output
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 80 of 100
16 MISCELLANEOUS
16.1 SPECIAL FUNCTION/TIME OF DAY OUTPUTS
16.1.1 The controller shall provide 10 user definable special function outputs.
16.1.2 All special functions shall be capable of being activated by schedule or inputs.
16.1.3 The software shall be capable of displaying the current status (on/off) of each
special function.
16.2 ALARMS
16.2.1 The software shall support a minimum of 48 pre-defined and/or user defined
alarms.
16.2.2 All alarms shall be logged.
16.2.3 The user shall be able to configure each alarm to generate a message that will
be transmitted to the Central Supervisory System.
16.2.4 The user shall be able to trigger any physical input as an alarm.
16.2.5 All Alarms shall be classified as one of the following types.
16.2.5.1 Critical
16.2.5.2 Non Critical
16.2.5.3 Detector Fault
16.2.5.4 Coordination
16.2.5.5 Communication
16.2.5.6 Preempt
16.2.6 Critical Alarms shall include, at a minimum, the following:
16.2.6.1 Power Failure (Intersection is Dark)
16.2.6.2 Stop Time
16.2.6.3 Local Flash
16.2.6.4 MMU flash
16.2.6.5 Configuration Failure
16.2.6.6 Cycle Fail
16.2.6.7 Clock Failure
16.2.6.8 Hardware Failure
16.2.7 Non Critical Alarms shall include, at a minimum, the following:
16.2.7.1 External Start
16.2.7.2 Battery Back-up is active
16.2.7.3 Cabinet Door Open
16.2.7.4 Maximum Temperature Exceeded
16.2.7.5 Fan off
16.2.7.6 Cabinet Light Out
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 81 of 100
16.2.7.7 Local Override
16.2.8 Coordination alarms shall include, at a minimum, the following:
16.2.8.1 Coordination active
16.2.8.2 Offset transitioning
16.2.8.3 Local free
16.2.8.4 Coordination alarm
16.2.8.5 Coordination fault
16.2.8.6 Cycle fault
16.2.9 Communication alarms shall include, at a minimum, the following:
16.2.9.1 System communication fail
16.2.9.2 Peer to peer fail
16.2.10 Preempt alarms shall include, at a minimum, the following:
16.2.10.1 Railroad preempt
16.2.10.2 Emergency vehicle preempt
16.2.11 Priority alarms shall include, at a minimum, the following:
16.2.11.1 Full priority
16.2.11.2 Partial priority
16.2.11.3 Bus priority
16.3 DIAGNOSTICS
16.3.1 The software shall provide the following diagnostics:
16.3.1.1 Cabinet
16.3.1.2 Configuration
16.3.1.3 Detector
16.3.1.3.1 Defined in Section 3
16.3.1.4 Cycle
16.3.1.4.1 Yellow Clearance less than 3.0
16.3.1.5 Coordination
16.3.1.5.1 Splits not equal to cycle lengths
16.3.1.5.2 Errors in shortway transition
16.3.1.5.3 Split times less than pedestrian crossing time
16.4 TIMING SHEETS
16.4.1 The software shall provide the following types of timing sheets
16.4.1.1 Full timing sheets
16.4.1.1.1 The full timing sheets shall include all database parameters
16.4.1.2 Working timing sheets
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 82 of 100
16.4.1.2.1 Working timing sheets shall include only active or used
parameters
A template shall be created for a typical intersection with
special left turn displays.
A template shall be created for a typical diamond
intersection for the Figures 3, 4, 6, and 7.
16.4.1.2.2 Working timing sheets shall be a maximum of six (6) pages
(8 ½ inches x 11 inches)
The font shall be at least aerial narrow font size 8.
16.4.1.2.3 The working time sheet shall be printable in legal size paper.
The legal size timesheet shall have additional room in the
field for noting changes.
16.4.1.2.4 The City will approve the timesheet design for each
template.
16.4.2 The user shall be able to upload the timing sheets to the central system or
remote device.
17 DESIRABLE FEATURES
17.1 VEHICLE DETECTOR CONFIGURATION DESIRABLE FEATURES
17.1.1 Variable Lagging Left Turn Splits
17.1.1.1 Add Time Detectors
17.1.1.2 Subtract Time Detectors
17.1.2 Cycle-by-Cycle Split Adjustments
17.1.2.1 Detectors will provide occupancy data for the Cycle-by-Cycle Split
Adjustments.
17.2 VEHICLE DETECTOR TIMING DESIRABLE FEATURE
17.2.1 Variable lagging left turn split add or subtract time.
17.3 SMOOTH PREEMPT CONFIGURATION
Smooth preemption is a user defined table with several intervals. The user shall be able to define
the duration of each interval. While the table is active, the software shall operate the traffic signal in
free mode within the constraints defined by the user. On each line, the user shall define the
permitted vehicle and pedestrian phases, phases that will hold green, phases that must terminate
immediately, phases that must terminate after the minimums are satisfied, vehicle and pedestrian
phases with calls, phases with soft recalls, and special outputs that are active. If the line is not a
holding line, software shall advance to the next interval once the current interval timer has expired.
The software shall still respond to inputs from the pedestrian push buttons and vehicle detection
system if they are within the constraints defined by the user for that line. The smooth preemption
table shall be able to hold at two intervals: the first will hold on the Entry interval until the gates
active input is received and the second will hold on the Dwell interval until the gates not active is
received.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 83 of 100
17.3.1 Any of the 12 unique preempt sequences shall be configurable as a smooth
preempt type.
17.3.2 The software shall allow the user to program at least 15 intervals in the smooth
preemption sequence.
17.3.3 The smooth preemption mode shall allow the preemption sequence to omit the
clearance phase under the following conditions:
17.3.3.1 Detectors are installed, functional and capable of detection vehicles on or
approaching the railroad.
17.3.3.1.1 If a detector that detects vehicles past the presignal or on
the railroad tracks fails, track clearance will always be
provided. The input for the failed input will be always on if
the detector fail mode is maximum recall.
17.3.3.1.2 The user will select which detector inputs are required to
detect motorists on the track.
17.3.3.1.3 Vehicles are detected on the railroad tracks or between the
railroad tracks and the intersection.
17.3.4 The software shall hold in the dwell phases during track clearance. The
software shall provide track clearance if either of the following conditions are
true:
17.3.4.1 A vehicle is detected between the stop bar at the railroad tracks and the
intersection
17.3.4.2 A detector monitoring the area from the stop bar to the intersection has
failed.
17.3.5 The Entry line in the smooth preemption table will allow the use to hold in the
Dwell phases. The Dwell phases shall immediately end if a vehicle is
detected. Then the Entry phases shall begin.
17.3.5.1 If track clearance is requested, the software shall hold the track clearance
phases green as long as vehicles are detected or the gate activation input
is received.
17.3.6 The user will be able to define:
17.3.6.1 Time
This is the amount of time in seconds each interval in the smooth preemption
sequence will last.
17.3.6.2 Pedestrian Call
One call will be placed for the phases entered.
17.3.6.3 Holding Phases
Once any phases entered as a holding phase become active it shall remain
green. A hold is a continuous extension.
17.3.6.3.1 The maximum green shall not end a holding phase.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 84 of 100
17.3.6.3.2 The phase shall remain green until the software advances to
a line in the preemption table that does not have the phase
listed as a holding phase.
17.3.6.4 Advance
These phases if active will immediately end.
17.3.6.4.1 Any active vehicle phase will end immediately. Minimum
green programming is ignored.
17.3.6.4.2 Any active pedestrian phase will end immediately. The
pedestrian phase will be truncated.
17.3.6.5 Force Off
These phases if active will end as soon as all minimums are met. A
pedestrian phase will be truncated.
17.3.6.5.1 Any active vehicle phase will end after the minimum green is
provided.
17.3.6.5.2 Any active pedestrian phase will end after the vehicle phase
minimum green is provided.
17.3.6.6 Call
These phases will have a constant minimum recall.
17.3.6.6.1 Other phases permitted on that line in the smooth
preemption table shall be able to receive calls from the
detectors.
17.3.6.7 Soft Recall
These phases shall have a call only if no other permitted phases on that line
in the smooth preemption table have a call.
17.3.6.8 Permit
These phases shall be able to turn green if there is a call for the phase.
17.3.6.8.1 Phase entered in the special event table shall be allowed to
turn green even if they are omitted elsewhere in the
software.
17.3.6.8.2 These phases cannot accept extensions.
17.3.6.9 Omit Vehicle Overlap
These overlaps shall begin clearing immediately once the interval is active. If
the overlap is already red, it shall remain red.
17.3.6.10 Omit Pedestrian Phase or Pedestrian Overlap
These pedestrian phases and overlap shall not be allowed to begin.
17.3.6.10.1 Any call for these pedestrian phases and overlaps will latch
and a call will be placed for the pedestrian movements once
the omits are lifted.
17.3.6.11 Special Output
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 85 of 100
These outputs shall be used to activate auxiliary devices.
17.3.6.11.1 The special output shall remain on as the software advances
to the next interval if that special output is entered in the
next interval.
17.3.7 The permitted window for a phase in the coordinated timing plan will not cause
a phase to end while smooth preemption is active.
17.3.8 The user shall be able to select the inputs that will cause the software to hold
in a certain preemption state. There shall be two holding lines: the Entry
phase line will hold during the advance railroad inputs and the Dwell phase
line will hold during the gates down input.
17.3.8.1 The first preemption input shall activate the preemption sequence. The
software shall advance through the preemption intervals to the first
holding line and remain on that line until the first input turns off.
17.3.8.1.1 The first hold will be the entry phases.
17.3.8.1.2 The time entered for the Entry line shall not count until the
hold input turns off and the software wants to advance.
17.3.8.1.3 The software shall continue to hold on the line regardless of
the state of the second input.
17.3.8.2 Once the first input turns off and the second input is active the software
shall advance to the next line in the table. If the railroad does not turn off
the first signal when the second signal turns on, the software shall provide
the logic functions to turn off the first input.
17.3.8.2.1 The second hold will be the dwell interval.
17.3.8.2.2 The time entered for the hold shall not count until the
holding input turns off and the software wants to advance.
17.3.8.2.3 The software shall continue to hold on the second holding
line until the second input turns off.
17.3.9 Preemption shall override all priorities.
17.3.10 High priority preempts shall override low priority preempts.
17.3.10.1 A request for a high priority preemption event shall immediately cancel
any active low priority preemption event and begin the high priority
event.
17.3.11 Low priority preempts shall be ignored until the high priority preempt
terminates.
17.3.11.1 The low priority event shall begin running in the background. Once the
inputs for high priority event terminates, the high priority event
immediately end and the low priority event shall output its current
state.
17.3.11.2 Any part of the high priority event that occurs after the high priority
event input terminates shall be cancelled. The software shall
immediately output the low priority event
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 86 of 100
17.3.12 Equal priority preempts shall be served on a first called, first served basis.
17.3.12.1 The second preemption sequence shall begin running in the
background. Once the inputs for first preemption sequence turn off the
first sequence shall immediately end and second preemption sequence
shall output its current state.
17.3.12.2 Any part of the first preemption sequence that occurs after the first
preemption input turns off will be cancelled. The software shall
immediately output the second preemption sequence.
17.4 TRAFFIC ADAPTIVE OPERATION
If the Proposer has an adaptive solution the City desires a presentation of the functionality and a bid.
The controller software shall not be responsible for traffic adaptive decisions. An independent traffic
adaptive computer will be installed at each intersection in the group. The traffic adaptive computer
will process detector data, communicate with other traffic adaptive computers in the group of
intersections, and provide outputs to the controller. The controller shall, using standard controller
software features, respond to inputs sent from the traffic adaptive computer. These inputs shall be
understood by the controller without any modification to the controller software.
17.4.1 A traffic adaptive system shall provide inputs to the controller software and
those inputs shall be understood by the controller software without any
modifications to the controller software.
17.4.2 The controller software shall operate in free mode while the intersection is
operating in adaptive mode. The traffic adaptive computer shall provide inputs
for the controller software.
17.4.2.1 The controller software shall allow the user to assign an input to free
mode operation. The controller software shall operate the intersection in
free mode when the input is active.
17.4.3 The user shall define sub groups of intersections within the group. Any traffic
adaptive computer or peer-to-peer communication failure shall cause the traffic
adaptive computer to cancel free mode. The controller software shall revert
back to normal operation based on the time of day/day of the week schedule.
17.4.3.1 If the controller software loses peer-to-peer communication with another
controller in the subgroup, it will exit free mode.
17.4.3.2 The controller software shall command other intersections in the subgroup
to exit free mode.
17.5 VARIABLE MODE OF LEFT TURN OPERATION
The controller software will vary the mode of left turn operation based on the current traffic volumes
and/or detector occupancy. The user will define the mode of left turn operation the controller
software can select. The user will enable this feature for each left turn by the time of day/day of
week.
17.5.1 The software shall provide this operation for at least four (4) left turns.
17.5.2 The software shall allow the user to select the times of day/days of week that
this feature is active for each left turn.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 87 of 100
17.5.3 The user shall select the modes of operation the controller software may
choose for each left turn.
17.5.3.1 Protected only
17.5.3.2 Permitted/protected
17.5.3.3 Permitted only
17.5.4 Changes in the mode of left turn operation shall occur when all of the phases
associated with a left turn are red.
17.5.5 The software shall process the following data from the detection system for
each left turn.
17.5.5.1 The left turn volume
17.5.5.2 Opposing through volume.
17.5.5.3 Opposing left turn volume.
17.5.5.4 Opposing left turn detector occupancy
17.5.5.4.1 The detector occupancy shall be the measured during the
protected and permitted green for the oncoming left turn.
17.5.6 The software shall be capable of receiving global changes to the trigger points
from the central system. The user will make a change in one master table for
a group of intersections through the central system software and download that
change to the entire group.
17.5.7 The controller software shall calculate the product of the left turn volume and
the oncoming through volume. The software shall allow the user to define
trigger points that will be the boundary between the modes of left turn
operation.
17.5.8 The controller software shall measure the oncoming left turn volume and
occupancy. The software will allow the user to define trigger points that will be
the boundary between the modes of left turn operation.
17.5.9 Trigger Points
These are the boundaries between the modes of left turn operation. If the data crosses the
boundary, the software will want to change the mode of left turn operation.
17.5.9.1 Trigger points for the product of the oncoming through and left turn
volumes.
17.5.9.1.1 The user shall be able to enter two volume trigger points
between 10,000 and 200,000.
17.5.9.1.2 One trigger point will be the boundary between protected
only and protected/permitted
17.5.9.1.3 One trigger point will be the boundary between
protected/permitted and permitted only.
17.5.9.2 Trigger points for the oncoming left turn volumes and occupancy
17.5.9.2.1 The user shall be able to define two volume trigger points
between 0 and 1000.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 88 of 100
One trigger point will be the boundary between protected only
and protected/permitted.
One trigger point will be the boundary between
protected/permitted and permitted only.
17.5.9.2.2 The user shall be able to define two occupancy trigger
points between 0 and 100 percent.
One trigger point will be the boundary between protected only
and protected/permitted.
One trigger point will be the boundary between
protected/permitted and permitted only.
17.5.9.3 The software shall provide two ways to aggregate data and compare it to
the trigger points.
17.5.9.3.1 Cycle by cycle: the data shall cross a trigger point boundary
each cycle for at least the minimum amount of time before
the software will want to change the mode of left turn
operation.
17.5.9.3.2 15 minute rolling average: the 15 minute rolling average of
the data shall cross a trigger point boundary for at least the
minimum amount of time before the software will want to
change the mode of left turn operation.
17.5.9.4 Trigger point timer
The data shall meet a trigger point for a user defined amount of time before
the software will change the mode of left turn operation. A mode of left turn
operation shall be active for a user defined minimum amount of time before
the software will change the mode of operation.
17.5.9.4.1 Minimum Time to Be Less Restrictive
This is the amount of time in minutes that the data shall be less
than the trigger point before the software can change the mode of
left turn to a mode that is less restrictive.
There shall be a timer for each calculation for each left turn.
17.5.9.4.2 Minimum Time to Be More Restrictive
This is the amount of time in minutes that the data shall be more
than the trigger point before the software can change the mode of
left turn to a mode that is more restrictive.
There shall be a timer for each calculation for each left turn.
17.5.9.4.3 Minimum Time between Mode Changes
This is the amount of time in minutes between changes in the mode
of left turn operation.
The software shall not change the mode of left turn operation
until the minimum time between mode changes has elapsed.
The timers for the minimum time to be less restrictive and the
minimum time between mode changes shall time concurrently.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 89 of 100
The timers for the minimum time to be more restrictive and the
minimum time between mode changes shall time concurrently.
If the variable mode of left turn feature is disabled by manual
override or the time of day/day of week schedule the minimum
time between mode changes timer shall not apply.
17.5.10 The user shall be able to activate the oncoming through and oncoming left
turn calculations at the same time. When both are active, the software shall
determine the desired mode of left turn operation for each calculation.
17.5.10.1 If the calculations select different modes of left turn operation, the
software shall allow the user to select the more or less restrictive mode of
left turn operation.
17.5.11 If a detector fails, the mode of left turn operation will turn off for the effected
left turn.
17.5.11.1 The left turn shall return to the mode of operation programmed in the time
of day/day of week schedule.
17.5.11.2 An alarm will be generated that includes:
17.5.11.2.1 The left turn effected
17.5.11.2.2 The mode of operation for that left turn
17.5.11.2.3 A timestamp
17.5.12 Events shall be logged and time stamped for each left turn.
17.5.12.1 When the feature turns on
17.5.12.2 When the feature turns off
17.5.12.3 Any changes in the mode of left turn operation
17.5.12.4 The raw data for each cycle used in the calculation
17.5.12.5 The calculations for each cycle
17.5.13 Configuration parameters for variable mode of left turn operation
17.5.13.1 Enable
17.5.13.1.1 By left turn
17.5.13.1.2 For all left turns
17.5.13.1.3 Selected based on time of day/day of week schedule
17.5.13.2 Enable oncoming through calculation
17.5.13.2.1 By left turn
17.5.13.2.2 For all left turns
17.5.13.2.3 Selected based on time of day/day of week schedule
17.5.13.3 Enable oncoming left turn calculation
17.5.13.3.1 By left turn
17.5.13.3.2 For all left turns
17.5.13.3.3 Selected based on time of day/day of week schedule
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 90 of 100
17.5.13.3.4 Select volume
17.5.13.3.5 Select occupancy
17.5.13.4 Data aggregation
17.5.13.4.1 Per cycle
17.5.13.4.2 Rolling average
17.5.13.4.3 Number of minutes included in the rolling average
17.5.13.5 Minimum time to become more restrictive
17.5.13.5.1 For each left turn
17.5.13.5.2 For all left turns
17.5.13.6 Minimum time to become less restrictive
17.5.13.6.1 For each left turn
17.5.13.6.2 For all left turns
17.5.13.7 Minimum time between changes in left turn operation
17.5.13.7.1 For each left turn
17.5.13.7.2 For all left turns
17.5.13.8 Mode of left turn operation when both calculations are active
17.5.13.8.1 More restrictive mode
17.5.13.8.2 Less restrictive mode
17.5.13.9 Permitted modes of left turn operation.
17.5.13.9.1 By left turn
17.5.13.9.2 For all left turns
17.5.13.9.3 Selected based on time of day/day of week schedule
17.5.13.9.4 Modes of left turn operation
Protected only
Protected/Permitted
Permitted only
17.5.13.10 Oncoming through trigger points
17.5.13.10.1 By left turn
17.5.13.10.2 For all left turns
17.5.13.10.3 Trigger point between protected only and
protected/permitted
17.5.13.10.4 Trigger point between protected/permitted and permitted
only
17.5.13.11 Oncoming left turn calculation
17.5.13.11.1 By left turn
17.5.13.11.2 For all left turns
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 91 of 100
17.5.13.11.3 Volume trigger point between protected only and
protected/permitted
17.5.13.11.4 Occupancy trigger point between protected only and
protected/permitted
17.5.13.11.5 Volume trigger point between protected/permitted and
permitted only
17.5.13.11.6 Occupancy trigger point between protected/permitted and
permitted only
17.6 VARIABLE LAGGING LEFT TURN SPLITS
The controller will vary the split for a lagging left turn when the software is operating in coordinated
mode. The split will be determined based on the traffic in the left turn lane that cycle. The beginning
of the lagging left turn phase will be moved later and the time not used by the lagging left turn will be
added to the split for the oncoming through movement.
17.6.1 The end of the left turn shall not be adjusted by this advanced operation.
17.6.1.1 Other advanced operation features may adjust the end of the lagging left
turn.
17.6.2 The software shall provide at least a minimum split if there is a call for the
lagging left turn phase.
17.6.3 The software will delay the beginning of the lagging left turn.
17.6.3.1 The software shall delay the beginning of the lagging left turn based on
the number of vehicles in the left turn lane that cycle.
17.6.3.2 The amount of time not needed for the lagging left turn split shall be
added to the green interval for the opposing through movement.
17.6.3.3 Calculating the left turn split.
17.6.3.3.1 Each vehicle entering the left turn lane will pass through a
detection point.
Each detection will add a user defined amount of time to the left
turn split up to the maximum split for the active plan.
The software shall allow the user to define these detectors for
each left turn.
Time shall be added to the left turn split regardless of the active
phases.
17.6.3.3.2 Each vehicle exiting the left turn lane will pass through a
detection point.
Each detection will subtract a user defined amount of time from
the left turn split to the active minimum green time.
The software shall allow the user to define these detectors for
each left turn.
Time shall be subtracted from the left turn split regardless of
the active phases.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 92 of 100
The software shall not subtract time from the left turn split for a
user defined amount of time in seconds after the beginning of
the left turn phase green.
17.6.3.3.3 The software will reset the calculated left turn split to zero
(0) at the beginning of green for the left turn.
The calculated left turn split shall not be less than zero (0)
seconds.
If the left turn is served more than once per cycle, the
calculated left turn split shall be reset at the beginning of each
green for the left turn.
17.6.4 The software shall provide this operation for at least four (4) left turn
movements.
17.6.5 If the left turn is not lagging, the feature shall have no effect.
17.6.6 In the event of a detector failure the programmed split will be provided.
17.6.7 In the event of a detector failure, an alarm with a timestamp will be generated
that includes.
17.6.7.1 The left turn effected
17.6.8 Configuration Parameters
17.6.8.1 Enable
17.6.8.1.1 By left turn
17.6.8.1.2 For all left turns
17.6.8.1.3 Selected based on time of day/day of week schedule
17.6.8.2 Added and Subtracted Time
This is the time in tenths of seconds added to or subtracted from the calculated left
turn split for each vehicle.
17.6.8.3 Detectors that add time
17.6.8.3.1 If the detection is associated with more than one phase, the
time will be added to the lagging left turn phase. Other
phases will not be effected.
17.6.8.4 Detectors that subtract time
17.6.8.4.1 If the detection is associated with more than one phase, the
time will be subtracted from the lagging left turn phase.
Other phases will not be effected.
17.6.8.5 Disable Subtraction Detectors
This is the amount of time in seconds after the lagging left turn phase turns green
that time will not be subtracted from the left turn split for vehicles passing through
the subtraction detection points.
17.6.8.5.1 The user shall be able to define this amount of time for each
left turn.
17.7 TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE FLASH OPERATION
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 93 of 100
17.7.1 The software will select normal operation, yellow flash, or all-red flash based
on current traffic volumes.
17.7.2 The user shall select the time of day/days of week the software may choose
the mode of operation.
17.7.3 The software will allow the user to select trigger points for the volumes.
A trigger point is the boundary between the modes of traffic signal operation. If the data
crosses the boundary, the software will want to change the mode traffic signal operation.
17.7.3.1 Three (3) sets of trigger points will be provided. One set for each of the
three (3) volume signal warrants defined the current edition of the Manual
on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
17.7.3.1.1 The software will allow the user to select the signal warrant
that will be used to determine the mode of traffic signal
operation.
17.7.3.2 The software shall allow the user to define a K value to scale the traffic
volume data collected by the data collection system.
17.7.3.2.1 Two K values shall be provided.
One for the major street volume.
One for the minor street volumes.
The K values shall range from at least 10 percent to 200
percent.
The user shall be able to vary the K values by Time of Day/
Day of Week.
17.7.3.3 The software shall allow the user to select one (1) to 60 minute rolling
average volume that shall be scaled up to one hour volume to determine if
the signal warrant is met.
17.7.3.3.1 If a signal warrant is met, the software will want to change to
normal operation.
17.7.3.3.2 If a signal warrant is not met, the software will want to
change to yellow-red or all-red flash operation.
17.7.3.4 Minimum Time before Changing To Normal Operation
This is the amount of time in minutes that the data shall be more than the
trigger point before the software shall change to normal operation.
17.7.3.5 Minimum Time before Changing To Flash Operation
This is the amount of time in minutes that the data shall be less than the
trigger point before the software shall change to flash operation.
17.7.3.6 Minimum Time between Changes
This is the amount of time in minutes between changes in the mode of traffic
light operation. The timers for minimum time before changing to normal
operation and minimum time before changing to flash operation shall time
concurrently. The software shall not change the mode of traffic light
operation until the minimum time between mode changes has elapsed.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 94 of 100
17.7.4 If a detector fails, the software will change operation based on the time of
day/day of week schedule.
17.7.4.1 The minimum time between changes must be satisfied.
17.7.5 In the event of a detector failure, an alarm with a timestamp will be generated.
17.7.5.1 The new mode of operation, which is based on the Time of Day/Day of
Week schedule shall be included.
17.7.6 Changes in the mode of traffic light operation shall be logged.
17.7.6.1 The mode of traffic light operation
17.7.6.2 The volumes for the main street
17.7.6.3 The volumes for each minor street approach
17.7.6.4 Timestamp
17.7.7 Configuration parameters for the variable mode of traffic light operation.
17.7.7.1 Enable
17.7.7.1.1 Selected based on time of day/day of week schedule
17.7.7.2 The number of lanes on the major street
17.7.7.2.1 One (1) lane
17.7.7.2.2 Two (2) or more lanes
17.7.7.3 The number of lanes on minor street approach one
17.7.7.3.1 One (1) lane
17.7.7.3.2 Two (2) or more lanes
17.7.7.4 The number of lanes on minor street approach two
17.7.7.4.1 One (1) lane
17.7.7.4.2 Two (2) or more lanes
17.7.7.5 K value for the major street
17.7.7.6 K value for the minor street
17.7.7.7 Active Signal Warrant
17.7.7.7.1 Warrant 1, Eight-Hour Vehicular Volume
17.7.7.7.2 Warrant 2, Four-Hour Vehicular Volume
17.7.7.7.3 Warrant 3, Peak Hour
17.8 CYCLE-BY-CYCLE SPLIT ADJUSTMENTS
While running coordination, the software will adjust the splits for all of the phases to balance the delay
at the intersection. In no case shall the feature cause the coordinator to fail.
17.8.1 The software shall adjust the green time for every active phase based on data
collected by the detection system.
17.8.1.1 The software shall collect the detector occupancy while the phase is
green.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 95 of 100
17.8.1.2 If there are multiple detectors for a movement the occupancies will be
averaged.
17.8.1.3 A rolling average of the occupancy data will be used to determine the
cycle-by-cycle split adjustments.
17.8.1.3.1 The software shall allow the user to select the amount of
time in minutes from at least one (1) to 30.
17.8.2 Cycle-by-cycle split adjustments shall be enabled by:
17.8.2.1 Time of day/day of week schedule
17.8.2.2 Manual command
17.8.3 The minimum occupancy, defined by the user, shall be exceeded by at least
the rolling average occupancy for one phase before the cycle-by-cycle split
adjustments feature will activate.
17.8.4 When a new plan is called, the software shall proportionally apply the current
adjustments to the new plan.
17.8.5 If there are multiple detectors for a phase, the occupancy shall be averaged
17.8.6 The software shall continue to run the active coordination plan while this
feature is active.
17.8.6.1 If time is added to the split for the coordinated movement, half of the
adjustment shall be added to the active offset.
17.8.6.2 If time is subtracted from the split for the coordinated movement, half of
the adjustment shall be subtracted from the offset.
17.8.7 Configuration parameters for Cycle-by-Cycle Split Adjustments
17.8.7.1 Enable
17.8.7.2 Detectors
17.8.7.2.1 Phase associated with that detector.
17.8.7.3 Number of cycles included in the rolling average.
17.8.7.4 Maximum Green Shift per Cycle
This is the maximum amount of green that shall be added or subtracted during an
adjustment.
17.8.7.4.1 For each phase
17.8.7.4.2 Percentage of the cycle
17.8.7.4.3 Amount of time in seconds
17.8.7.5 Maximum Total Green Add
17.8.7.5.1 For each phase
17.8.7.5.2 Percentage of the cycle
17.8.7.5.3 Amount of time in seconds
17.8.7.6 Maximum Total Green Reduction
17.8.7.6.1 For each phase
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 96 of 100
17.8.7.6.2 Percentage of the cycle
17.8.7.6.3 Amount of time in seconds
17.8.7.7 Minimum occupancy to activate cycle-by-cycle split adjustments
17.8.7.7.1 This feature shall turn off once the rolling average
occupancies for all phases are below the minimum
occupancy.
17.8.8 The software shall log and timestamp
17.8.8.1 The rolling average of the occupancy for each phase
17.8.8.2 The splits that were calculated by the software each cycle.
17.8.9 In the event of detector failure an alarm with a timestamp shall be generated
and include
17.8.9.1 The detector that failed
17.9 AUXILIARY FIELD DEVICE TRANSITION TABLE
These tables will be used to change the state of auxiliary field devices. For example if a lane control
sign needs to change from left only to through only, the user will program a time of day output to
activate the auxiliary field device output transition table. The first line of the table will output left only
to the lane control sign. The second line of the table will output left/through to the lane control sign.
The third line of the table will output through only to the lane control sign. The third line will also be
the holding line so the through only will be displayed as long as that time of day output is active.
When the time of day output turns off, the software shall move to the fourth line and output a
left/through to the lane control sign. Finally the fifth line of the table will output left only. Then
software will exit the table.
17.9.1 The software shall provide at least four (4) transition sequence tables for
auxiliary field devices.
17.9.2 The time of day outputs shall be linked to the assignable outputs table in the
logic functions.
17.9.3 The software shall be capable of using the time of day outputs to activate or
change the state of field equipment.
17.9.4 When the output turns off the software shall finish running the transition table.
17.9.5 The software shall be capable of outputting a default state to the auxiliary field
device when the transition table is not active.
17.9.6 Configuration parameters
17.9.6.1 Enable
17.9.6.2 Time
This is the amount of time in minutes that the line in the transition sequence
table shall remain active.
17.9.6.3 Output
This is the state of the auxiliary field device while this line in the transition
sequence table is active.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 97 of 100
17.9.6.3.1 The user shall be able to enter the state of the auxiliary
device in the table. The software shall output that state
when that line in the table is active.
17.9.6.4 Default Output
This is the state of the auxiliary device when the transition table is not active.
17.9.6.5 Holding Line
The table will hold on this line as long as the time of day output is on that
activated the table.
17.10 LOGS FOR DESIRABLE FEATURES
17.10.1 Variable mode of left turn operation
17.10.1.1 Current mode of left turn operation by left turn
17.10.1.2 Current value by left turn of the volume and density data
17.10.1.2.1 Cycle by cycle
17.10.1.2.2 Rolling average
17.10.1.3 The value of the trigger point timers by left turn
17.10.1.3.1 Time to be less restrictive
17.10.1.3.2 Time to be more restrictive
17.10.1.3.3 Time between mode changes
17.10.1.3.4 Time of last mode change by left turn
17.10.1.4 Variable lagging left turn splits
17.10.1.4.1 Current value of the calculated left turn split for each left
turn
17.10.2 Traffic Responsive Flash
17.10.2.1 Current value of the 15 minute rolling average volumes scaled up to a one
hour volume.
17.10.2.1.1 Main street volume
17.10.2.1.2 Minor street approach volume 1
17.10.2.1.3 Minor street approach volume 2
17.10.2.2 Trigger point timers
17.10.2.2.1 Time to be less restrictive
17.10.2.2.2 Time to be more restrictive
17.10.2.2.3 Time between mode changes
17.10.2.3 Current mode of operation
17.10.2.4 Time of last mode change
17.10.3 Cycle-by-Cycle Split Adjustments
17.10.3.1 Current rolling average occupancies for each phase.
17.10.3.2 Current splits for each phase
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 98 of 100
17.10.3.3 Current percentage of the cycle for each phase
17.10.3.4 Last change in split for each phase
17.10.3.5 Total change in split for each phase
17.10.3.6 Times
17.10.3.6.1 Start of adjustments
17.10.3.6.2 End of adjustments
17.10.4 Auxiliary Field Device Transition Table
17.10.4.1 Current Output
17.10.4.1.1 Default
17.10.4.1.2 Other Output
17.11 INTERSECTION TO VEHICLE INFORMATION
The software shall be capable of providing static and real time information directly to vehicles and to
the central system. The vendor shall assist the City in anticipating the information that will be
required. The Proposer shall coordinate with On Time Systems (Green Driver) and other emerging
Intersection to Vehicle standards so the software provides the needed static and real-time data in the
correct format.
17.11.1 Static Information
This information shall be automatically updated when changes are made in the field or the
central system database.
17.11.1.1 Is there a right turn signal per direction
17.11.1.2 Are right turns on red permitted per direction
17.11.1.3 Are left turns on red permitted per direction
17.11.1.4 Permitted phases
17.11.1.5 This information shall be provided per permitted phase
17.11.1.5.1 Direction associated with each phase
The user shall choose from the eight (8) cardinal
and intermediate directions.
17.11.1.5.2 Movement associated with each phase
17.11.1.5.3 U-turn, left, through, or right
17.11.1.5.4 Minimum recall
17.11.1.5.5 Maximum recall
17.11.1.5.6 Pedestrian recall
17.11.1.5.7 Walk rest
17.11.1.5.8 Dual entry
17.11.1.5.9 Coordinated phases
17.11.1.5.10 Red lock
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 99 of 100
17.11.1.5.11 Yellow lock
17.11.1.5.12 Red rest
17.11.1.5.13 Exclusive
17.11.1.5.14 Mode of left turn operation
17.11.1.5.15 Permitted only
17.11.1.5.16 Protected/permitted
17.11.1.5.17 Protected only
17.11.1.5.18 Yellow flash
17.11.1.5.19 Red flash
17.11.1.5.20 Pedestrian walk time
17.11.1.5.21 Pedestrian walk time 2
17.11.1.5.22 Pedestrian clearance
17.11.1.5.23 Pedestrian clearance 2
17.11.1.5.24 Minimum green
17.11.1.5.25 Minimum green 2
17.11.1.5.26 Vehicle Extension
17.11.1.5.27 Maximum green
17.11.1.5.28 Maximum green 2
17.11.1.5.29 Maximum green 3
17.11.1.5.30 Maximum initial
17.11.1.5.31 Time before reduce
17.11.1.5.32 Time to reduce
17.11.1.5.33 Reduce by
17.11.1.5.34 Maximum gap
17.11.1.5.35 Minimum gap
17.11.1.5.36 Yellow clearance
17.11.1.5.37 All-red clearance
17.11.1.5.38 Plan number
17.11.1.5.39 Force Offs
17.11.1.5.40 Splits
17.11.1.5.41 Lagging phases
17.11.2 Real-Time Information
The controller shall be capable of providing the current state of the parameters listed in this
section to a vehicle or the central system every second.
17.11.2.1 Time stamp
17.11.2.2 Local cycle timer (top-of-cycle)
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page 100 of 100
17.11.2.3 Current split per phase
17.11.2.3.1 Account for variable lagging left turn splits
17.11.2.3.2 Account for cycle-by-cycle split adjustments
17.11.2.4 Current mode of left turn operation by phase
17.11.2.4.1 Permitted only
17.11.2.4.2 Protected/permitted
17.11.2.4.3 Protected only
17.11.2.5 Current mode of signal operation
17.11.2.5.1 Normal
17.11.2.5.2 Yellow flash
17.11.2.6 Green phases
17.11.2.6.1 Amount of time in seconds phase will remain green
17.11.2.7 Yellow phases
17.11.2.8 Red phases
17.11.2.8.1 Amount of time in seconds phase will remain red
17.11.2.9 Vehicle calls
17.11.2.10 Active pedestrian phases
17.11.2.11 Pedestrian calls
17.11.2.11.1 If walk 1 or walk 2 will be provided
17.11.2.11.2 If pedestrian clearance 1 or pedestrian clearance 2 will
be provided
17.11.2.12 Current state of the overlaps – on/off
17.11.2.13 Active timing plan
17.11.2.14 Communication status (On-line status)
17.11.2.15 Operation status
17.11.2.15.1 Normal
17.11.2.15.2 Free
17.11.2.15.3 Preempt
17.11.2.15.4 Transition
17.11.2.15.5 All-red flash
17.11.2.15.6 Yellow flash
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page A-1
ATTACHMENT 1
APPENDIX A
National Transportation Communication for ITS Protocol (NTCIP) Compliance
1 GENERAL
The local controller software shall comply with all applicable NTCIP standards documents. Compliance
shall be to the currently approved or recommended version(s) of the relevant NTCIP standards on the date
of the initial acceptance of the software by the Cities.
It is the responsibility of the Offerors to demonstrate to the City’s satisfaction that their proposed
controller software is in full compliance with the provisions of this Appendix.
The controller must be able to implement all NTCIP messages called for in this Specification without any
additional vendor-specific proprietary statements.
1.1 DOCUMENTATION
The software shall be supplied with full documentation. Documentation shall include electronic and hard
copy. The electronic copy shall be provided on a CD-ROM. The documentation shall include all NTCIP
standard MIBs and extensions, developer-specific MIBs, and all SNMP/STMP data elements. All MIBs
shall be provided in American Standard Code for Information Exchange (ASCII) format using ASN.1
notation.
1.2 RE-DISTRIBUTION AND RE-USE RIGHTS
The Offeror shall not place any limitations on the re-distribution and re-use of the MIB. Cities licensed to
use the software shall be able to re-distribute and/or re-use the MIBs as required to provide the required
functionality defined in this specification.
1.3 MIB EXTENSIONS
The Offeror shall clearly define all MIB extensions. Primarily, all extensions shall be accomplished by the
following methods:
1.3.1 Extending the capabilities of existing standard features.
1.3.2 Defining new data elements or features under a developer-specific MIB
extension.
To the extent possible, the replacement of a partially complete feature with a complete custom feature shall
be avoided.
1.4 SUPPORT OF NTCIP STANDARDS, AMENDMENTS AND REVISIONS
The Offeror shall address any proposed revisions or draft amendments to the required NTCIP MIBs
available during the initial procurement stage and the impact on the proposed software’s NTCIP
compliance and/or ability to meet the functional requirements of this specification. The initial procurement
stage shall be extended from the date of release of this specification to one (1) year beyond the initial
acceptance of the software by the Cities.
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page A-2
In addition, the Offeror shall provide to the Cities for the life of the software, electronic and hard copies of
the MIB whenever changes are made due to changes to the standard, new software features, or bug fixes.
The electronic copies shall comply with the requirements in Section 1.1 Backward compatibility is required.
1.5 OBJECT RANGE VALUES
All objects required by these specifications shall support all values within their standardized ranges, unless
otherwise approved by the Project Engineer. A size, range, or enumerated listing indicated in the object's
SYNTAX field or through descriptive text in the object's DESCRIPTION field of the relevant standard
defines the ‘standardized range.
The Offeror shall prepare a table of object range values for each object In NTCIP Standards1201 and
1202 and identify any variances from the standard ranges that are required to meet this
specification.
2 NTCIP STANDARDS
The Offeror shall define an entre NTCIP stack and identify the NTCIP, or other standards that will be
required at each level to meet the specifications contained in this document. For each NTCIP standard,
Offerors shall complete a Profile Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) identifying each
required object. All mandatory objects identified in the standards shall be included in the PICS.
As a minimum, the software shall comply with the following standards:
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 NTCIP 1101 v01.12 - NTCIP Simple Transportation Management Framework
2.1.1.1 The software shall comply with Conformance Level 2
2.1.2 NCTIP 1102: 2004 – NTCIP Octet Encoding Rules (OER)
2.1.3 NTCIP 1103 v01 - NTCIP Transportation Management Protocols (TMP)
2.1.3.1 The software shall includesupport for the “Simple Fixed Message
Protocol” (SFMP)
2.1.4 NTCIP 8004 v01 - NTCIP Structure and Identification of Management
Information (SMI)
2.2 INFORMATION LEVEL
2.2.1 NTCIP 1201v03 – NTCIP Global Objects (GO) Definitions
2.2.2 NTCIP 1202:2005 – NTCIP Object Definitions for ASC
2.2.2.1 The software shall fully implement all mandatory objects of all mandatory
and optional conformance groups defined in this standard
2.3 APPLICATION LEVEL
2.3.1 NTCIP 2303:2001 v01.06 – NTCIP AP-FTP
2.3.2 NTCIP 2301: v02 - NTCIP AP-STMF
2.4 TRANSPORT LEVEL
2.4.1 NTCIP 2201:2003 - NTCIP TP-Transportation Transport Profile
2.4.2 NTCIP 2202:2001 - NTCIP TP-Internet (TCP/IP and UDP/IP) Transport Profile
2.5 SUBNETWORK LEVEL
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page A-3
2.5.1 NTCIP 2101:2001 - NTCIP SP-PMPP/RS232
2.5.2 NTCIP 2102:2003 – NTCIP SP-PMPP/FSK
2.5.3 NTCIP 2104:2003 – NTCIP SP-Ethernet
Offerors are required to identify and comply with any additional NTCIP or other standards necessary to
meet the specifications of this document.
End of Appendix A
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page B-1
ATTACHMENT 1
APPENDIX B
Compliance Matrix
Instructions:
1. Offerors shall provide a response for every requirement.
2. The presented requirements are inclusive of all subheadings and descriptions included in the
requirements document. If the proposed software does not comply with all subheadings and
descriptions of a particular requirement, the requirement shall be identified as “Partially Meets
Requirements” and the Offeror shall specify in the comments area the specific subheadings or
descriptions that are not met.
Name of Offeror:______________________________________________________________________
Name of Proposed SoftwarePackage:_____________________________________________________
Current Software Version:___________________
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software
Minimum Requirements Compliance Matrix
Minimum Requirements Meets Requirement Exceeds Requirement Partially Meets Requirements Operating in Field Requirement in Development Function not available Comments
or
Footnotes
1.0 GENERAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE
1.2 Intersection Information
1.2.1 User defined intersection information
1.3 Controller Information
1.3.1 Controller information
1.4 Software Upgrades
1.4.1 Automatic software upgrade notice
1.4.2 Remote software download
1.4.3 Software reside in flash memory
1.4.4 Software download verification
1.5 Copy/Paste
1.5.1 Copy and paste capability
1.6 Save Changes
1.6.1 Confirm changes prior to acceptance
1.6.2 Highlight changes
1.6.3 Changes activated by confirmation
1.7 Compatibility with Existing Infrastructure
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page B-2
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software
Minimum Requirements Compliance Matrix
Minimum Requirements Meets Requirement Exceeds Requirement Partially Meets Requirements Operating in Field Requirement in Development Function not available Comments
or
Footnotes
1.7.1 Standard templates for 33x cabinets
1.7.2 Compatibility with CM/MMU
1.8 Industry Standard Nomenclature
1.8.1 Industry standard nomenclature
1.8.2 Industry standard software development
1.9 Security
1.9.1 Password access
1.9.2 Remote access control
1.10 Web Browser
1.10.1 Controller resident web server
1.10.2 Web user interface object support
1.10.3 Status objects
1.10.4 Web server Mib parameters
1.11 Daylight Savings Time
1.11.1 Daylight savings time programmability
1.11.2 DST default enabled
2.0 CONFIGURATION
2.1 Configuration Tables
2.1.1 Multiple configuration tables
2.2 Cabinet Configuration
2.2.1 Selectable cabinet type
2.2.2 Configurable channels for maximum ITS
cabinet
2.2.3 User definable input pins – 128
2.2.4 User definable output pins – 128
2.2.5 Redirect outputs based on pin assignment
2.3 Ring Barrier Configuration
2.3.1 Programmable ring barrier structure
2.3.2 Minimum eight rings and 12 barriers
2.3.3 One instance of phase in ring barrier sequence
2.3.4 Ability to alter ring barrier structure while
running intersection
2.4 Start-up Configuration
2.4.1 Configurable initial operation
2.4.2 Start-up parameter configuration
2.4.3 Start-up parameter timing
2.5 Programmed Flash Operation
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page B-3
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software
Minimum Requirements Compliance Matrix
Minimum Requirements Meets Requirement Exceeds Requirement Partially Meets Requirements Operating in Field Requirement in Development Function not available Comments
or
Footnotes
2.5.1 Programmable flash operation
2.5.2 Enter program flash after all red
2.5.3 Minimum recalls entering flash operation
2.5.4 End programmed flash
2.5.5 Programmed flash parameters
2.6 Manual Control Configuration
2.6.1 Manual control alternate sequence
2.6.2 Manual control disable
3.0 DETECTION
3.1 General
3.1.1 Vehicle detectors
3.1.2 Pedestrian detectors
3.1.3 System detectors
3.1.4 Queue detectors
3.1.5 Description field
3.1.6 Four unique detector tables
3.2 Global Detector Parameters
3.2.1 Detection parameters
3.3 Detector Configuration
3.3.1 Detector type selection
3.4 Vehicle Detector Configuration
3.4.1 Vehicle detector configuration
3.4.2 Vehicle detector parameters
3.5 Pedestrian Detector Configuration
3.5.1 Pedestrian detector configuration
3.6 System/Count Detector Configuration
3.6.1 All detectors function as system detectors
3.6 Detector Input Failure
3.7.1 Detector failure alarm
3.7.2 Automated response to detector failure
3.73. Detector failure modes
3.9 Remote Reset
3.8.1 Remote reset capability
4.0 PHASE PARAMETERS
4.1 General
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page B-4
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software
Minimum Requirements Compliance Matrix
Minimum Requirements Meets Requirement Exceeds Requirement Partially Meets Requirements Operating in Field Requirement in Development Function not available Comments
or
Footnotes
4.1.1 Minimum 32 vehicular phases
4.1.2 Minimum 12 pedestrian phases
4.1.3 Phase changes become active at beginning of
local cycle
4.1.4 Pedestrian hybrid beacon operation capability
4.2 Multiple Phase Parameters Tables
4.2.1 Minimum 32 phase parameter tables
4.3 Phase Configuration
4.3.1 Phase configuration
4.4 Phase Timing Parameters
4.4.1 Phase timing parameter ranges
4.4.2 Phase timing parameters
4.5 Global Phase Parameters
4.5.1 Global phase parameters always active
4.5.2 Global phase parameters
4.6 Pedestrian Operation
4.6.1 Pedestrian movements on any pedestrian
channel
4.6.2 Pedestrian channels assignable to phase
4.6.3 Pedestrian call operation
4.6.4 Alternative pedestrian interval
4.6.5 Immediate pedestrian clearance on preempt
4.6.6 Exclusive pedestrian service
4.6.7 Walk rest operation
4.6.8 Barnes’ Dance interval
4.6.9 Number of pedestrian services per call
definable
4.7 Left Turn Operation
4.7.1 Variable left turn operation by time of day/day
of week
4.7.2 Variable left turn operation within plan
4.7.3 Left turn indications supported
4.7.4 Five section head operation
4.8 Right Turn Operation
4.8.1 Variable right turn operation by time of day/day
of week
4.8.2 Variable right turn operation within plan
4.8.3 Right turn indications supported
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page B-5
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software
Minimum Requirements Compliance Matrix
Minimum Requirements Meets Requirement Exceeds Requirement Partially Meets Requirements Operating in Field Requirement in Development Function not available Comments
or
Footnotes
4.8.4 Right turn / pedestrian operation
4.9 Pedestrian Hybrid Beacon Operation
4.9.1 Pedestrian hybrid beacon functionality
4.9.2 Pedestrian hybrid beacon indications
4.9.3 Pedestrian hybrid beacon operation
4.9.4 Pedestrian hybrid beacon system operation
4.10 Phase Sequence
4.10.1 Phase sequence general
4.10.2 Pre-signal sequence
5.0 OVERLAPS
5.1 General
5.1.1 Minimum 20 overlaps
5.1.2 User definable text label for each overlap
5.1.3 Templates for overlaps
5.1.4 Minimum eight distinct overlap tables
5.2 Overlap Configuration
5.2.1 Overlap configuration settings
5.3 Overlap Timing Parameters
5.3.1 Overlap minimum green
5.3.2 Overlap green extension
5.3.3 Overlap green clear 1
5.3.4 Overlap yellow clearance
5.3.5 Overlap red clearance
5.3.6 Overlap pedestrian walk 1
5.3.7 Overlap pedestrian walk 2
5.3.8 Overlap pedestrian clearance 1
5.3.9 Overlap pedestrian clearance 2
5.3.10 Overlap reservice
5.4 Overlap Operation
5.4.1 Right turn arrow overlap with pedestrian service
operation
5.4.2 Pre-signal overlap operation
5.4.3 Pedestrian overlap operation
6.0 SCHEDULE
6.1 General
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page B-6
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software
Minimum Requirements Compliance Matrix
Minimum Requirements Meets Requirement Exceeds Requirement Partially Meets Requirements Operating in Field Requirement in Development Function not available Comments
or
Footnotes
6.1.1 Schedule types
6.1.2 Automatic schedule sort in chronological order
6.1.3 Enable/disable function
6.1.4 Completely define operation
6.1.5 Log schedule events
6.1.6 Schedule event priority
6.2 Time of Day. Day of Week Schedule
6.2.1 Minimum 32 events per schedule
6.2.2 Minimum 16 distinct schedules
6.2.3 Schedule operational modes
6.2.4 Schedule defined parameters
6.3 Holiday Schedule
6.3.1 Fixed and floating holiday functionality
6.3.2 Schedule events minimum one year in advance
6.3.3 Schedule events five days on either side of
holiday
6.3.4 Sort schedule by month and day
6.3.5 Schedule user defined parameters
6.4 Seasonal Schedule
6.4.1 Minimum 10 seasonal events
6.4.2 Schedule seasonal events minimum one year
in advance
6.4.3 Seasonal schedule parameters
6.5 Temporary Schedule
6.5.1 Schedule expiration date for events
6.5.2 Revert to scheduled event after expiration
6.5.3 Minimum of four temporary schedule events
6.5.4 Temporary operational modes
6.5.5 User define deletion of event upon expiration
6.5.6 Temporary schedule parameters
7.0 COORDINATION
7.1 General
7.1.1 Minimum 32 locally stored timing plan sets
7.1.2 Coordinator startup after startup phases
serviced
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page B-7
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software
Minimum Requirements Compliance Matrix
Minimum Requirements Meets Requirement Exceeds Requirement Partially Meets Requirements Operating in Field Requirement in Development Function not available Comments
or
Footnotes
7.1.3 Parameter changes activated at beginning of
cycle
7.1.4 Detector and overlap changes activated at new
timing plan
7.1.5 User defined offset reference point
7.2 Coordination Parameters
7.2.1 Coordination parameters
7.3 Pedestrian Service
7.3.1 Pedestrian service operation
7.3.2 Pedestrian adjust
7.3.3 Pedestrian phase end early operation
7.3.4 Pedestrian phase call during clearance
7.3.5 Pedestrian phase call recognition for long
pedestrian service
7.3.6 Pedestrian phase call recognition for short
pedestrian service
7.4 Pedestrian Service Parameters
7.4.1 Pedestrian adjust enable
7.4.2 Time for pedestrian service taken from
preceding phase
7.4.3 Time for pedestrian service taken from
subsequent phase
7.5 Coordinated Operation (Use Cases)
7.5.1 Recycle left turn operation
7.5.2 Back up into leading left turn operation
7.5.3 Optional leading left turn operation
7.5.4 Double service for side street operation
7.5.5 Free mode operation within coordination
operation
7.5.6 Optional lagging left turn operation
7.5.7 Phase recycle with split phase operation
7.5.8 Optional service with split phase operation
8.0 PREEMPTION
8.1 General
8.1.1 Minimum 12 programmable preemption
sequences
8.1.2 Preempt types
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page B-8
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software
Minimum Requirements Compliance Matrix
Minimum Requirements Meets Requirement Exceeds Requirement Partially Meets Requirements Operating in Field Requirement in Development Function not available Comments
or
Footnotes
8.1.3 Programmable for railroad and emergency
vehicle
8.1.4 Preempt labels
8.1.5 Delay preempt input
8.1.6 Smooth transition from one preempt to another
8.1.7 Preempt inputs available as logic identifiers
8.1.8 Ability to activate auxiliary devices as part of
preempt
8.1.9 Automatic reset of maximum timer
8.1.10 Recycle entry phases prohibited
8.1.11 Recycle return phases prohibited
8.1.12 Active plan continue to run in background
during preempt
8.1.13 Preempt input ability to change mode of
operation
8.1.14 Multiple preempt exit options
8.2 Preempt States
8.2.1 Preempt states
8.3 Preemption Priority
8.3.1 Preemption priority
8.3.2 User defined priority
8.3.3 Railroad defined as high priority
8.3.4 Emergency vehicle preemption prohibited from
higher priority than rail.
8.3.5 Emergency vehicle preemption defined as
lowest preempt priority
8.3.6 High priority preempts override low priority
preempts
8.3.7 Low priority preempts ignored during high
priority preempt activity
8.3.8 Equal priority preempts served in order calls
received
8.4 Railroad Preemption
8.4.1 Railroad preempt configuration
8.4.2 Four unique inputs for railroad preemption
8.4.3 Preemption provided during flash operation
8.4.4 Entry phases not terminated until gate down
input received
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page B-9
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software
Minimum Requirements Compliance Matrix
Minimum Requirements Meets Requirement Exceeds Requirement Partially Meets Requirements Operating in Field Requirement in Development Function not available Comments
or
Footnotes
8.4.5 Flash operation allowed during dwell interval
8.5 Emergency Vehicle Preemption
8.5.1 Emergency vehicle preemption (EVP) types
8.5.2 Minimum six inputs for EVP
8.5.3 Hold phases remain active until call ends or
max time
8.5.4 EVP service based on traffic demand
8.6 Normal Preempt Configuration
8.6.1 Preemption configuration settings
8.6.2 Preemption timing parameters
9.0 TRANSIT PRIORITY
9.1 General
9.1.1 Software shall run transit signal displays
9.1.2 Transit signal display parameters
9.1.3 Transit signal display synchronized with
compatible vehicle and pedestrian phases
9.1.4 Three levels of priority operation
9.1.5 Higher priority services override lower priority
services
9.1.6 Lower priority services ignored until higher
priority services terminate
9.1.7 Equal priority services served in order calls
received
9.2 Full Priority Operation
9.2.1 Full transit priority for median running trains
9.2.2 Exclusive train phase functionality
9.2.3 Transit priority operational during programmed
flash
9.2.4 Full priority termination sequence
9.2.5 Priority events logged
9.3 Partial Transit Priority
9.3.1 Partial transit priority functionality
9.3.2 Partial transit priority configuration
9.3.3 Partial priority timing parameters
9.3.4 Partial priority operation
9.4 Bus Priority
9.4.1 Bus priority functionality
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page B-10
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software
Minimum Requirements Compliance Matrix
Minimum Requirements Meets Requirement Exceeds Requirement Partially Meets Requirements Operating in Field Requirement in Development Function not available Comments
or
Footnotes
9.4.2 Bus priority configuration
9.4.3 Bus priority timing
9.4.4 Bus priority operation
10.0 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING
10.1 General
10.1.1 Minimum 64 user definable logic commands
10.1.2 No limitation to logic statement linkages
10.1.3 Logic commands
10.1.4 Logic command functions
10.2 Assignable Outputs
10.2.1 Available assignable outputs
10.3 Assignable Inputs
10.3.1 Available assignable inputs
11.0 COMMUNICATIONS
11.1 General
11.1.1 External communication support
11.1.2 Simultaneous communication
11.1.3 Communication methods supported
11.1.4 Support half and full duplex
11.1.5 ARP packet transmission upon connection to
Ethernet
11.1.6 Ability to extract VLANS
11.2 Center to Field Communications
11.2.1 Front panel capability for upload/download
with central
11.2.2 Supported communication patterns
11.2.3 Center to Field communication interfaces
11.2.4 Configurable field to central communication
11.2.5 Capability for field to central over 10/100
Ethernet network
11.2.6 Capability for field to central over serial
network
11.3 Peer to Peer Communications
11.3.1 Peer to peer communication support
11.3.2 Peer to peer over Ethernet network
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page B-11
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software
Minimum Requirements Compliance Matrix
Minimum Requirements Meets Requirement Exceeds Requirement Partially Meets Requirements Operating in Field Requirement in Development Function not available Comments
or
Footnotes
11.3.3 Transmission and reception of multiple
messages simultaneously
11.3.4 Transmit to minimum five peers
11.3.5 Receive from minimum five peers
11.3.6 Peer intersections user selectable
11.3.7 Receipt of peer message apply local internal
control
11.3.8 Definable time out communication feature
11.3.9 Failure of peer communication generates
alarm
11.4 Local Wireless Remote
11.4.1 Remote local access methods
11.4.2 Minimum remote access range of 200 feet
11.4.3 Secure data transmission for remote access
11.4.4 Remote access devices
11.4.5 Local remote support bandwidth
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
12.1 Traffic Responsive Operation
12.1.1 Traffic responsive parameters
12.1.2 Traffic responsive operation for defined group
12.2Queue Detection
12.2.1 Minimum eight independent queue detectors
per intersection
12.2.2 Programmable by time of day/day of week
12.2.3 Detector failure will disable queue response
12.2.4 Minimum four levels of priority
12.2.5 Queue detector configuration settings
12.2.6 Left or through queue detector settings
12.2.7 Partial priority queue detection
12.2.8 Diamond intersection queue detection
12.2.9 Logged events
12.2.10 Detector failures logged
12.3Auxiliary Field Device Operation
12.3.1 Auxiliary field device operation
12.3.2 Minimum eight independent auxiliary devices
12.3.3 Minimum four independent auxiliary device
tables
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page B-12
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software
Minimum Requirements Compliance Matrix
Minimum Requirements Meets Requirement Exceeds Requirement Partially Meets Requirements Operating in Field Requirement in Development Function not available Comments
or
Footnotes
12.3.4 Auxiliary device table activation
12.3.5 Auxiliary device output states
12.3.6 Repeat states
12.3.7 Change to device state generators
13.0 DIAMOND INTERCHANGE SEQUENCE
13.1 General
13.1.1 Sequence approved by City
13.1.2 Sequence types supported
13.1.3 Functionality as actuated, semi-actuated and
fixed time
13.1.4 Smooth transition between sequences
13.1.5 Sequences support right turn overlaps
13.1.6 Sequences support eight active pedestrian
channels
13.1.7 Templates provided
13.2 Diamond Interchange K-Clearance
13.2.1 General requirements of K clearance
13.2.2 Figure 3 diamond sequence operation
13.2.3 Figure 6 or 7 diamond sequence operation
13.2.4 Figure 4 diamond sequence operation
14.0 LOGS
14.1 General
14.1.1 All log entries time stamped in military time
14.1.2 All log entries available from front panel and
central
14.1.3 Minimum log storage of seven days of events
14.1.4 Oldest entries overwritten when log full
14.2 General Controller Log
14.2.1 Power loss log
14.2.2 External start log
14.2.3 Manual control log
14.2.4 Cabinet door log
14.3 Conflict Monitor/MMU Log
14.3.1 Conflict monitor / MMU log
14.4 Front Panel Log
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page B-13
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software
Minimum Requirements Compliance Matrix
Minimum Requirements Meets Requirement Exceeds Requirement Partially Meets Requirements Operating in Field Requirement in Development Function not available Comments
or
Footnotes
14.4.1 Front panel modification log
14.4.2 User log
14.5 Controller Software Log
14.5.1 All events and actions logged daily
14.6 Detector Log
14.6.1 Detector diagnostics log
14.7 Vehicle Split Log
14.7.1 Vehicle split time log
14.8 Cycle Time Log
14.8.1 Cycle time log during free operation
14.8.2 Cycle time log during coordinated operation
14.9 Coordination log
14.9.1 Coordination log
14.10 Preempt Log
14.10.1 Preempt log
14.11 Transit Priority Log
14.11.1 Transit priority log
14.12 Special Event Log
14.12.1 Special event log
14.13 Advanced Operation Event Log
14.13.1 Advanced operation log
15.0 USER INTERFACE
15.1General
15.1.1 User interface for data entry, monitoring and
management
15.1.2 Accessible from front panel or remote device
15.1.3 Unused parameters not displayed
15.1.4 Menu driven format
15.1.5 All programming downloadable to remote or
central
15.1.6 On-screen help provided
15.2 Data Entry
15.2.1 Menu format, in English, using standard
nomenclature
15.2.2 Menu format with submenus
15.2.3 Titles and headings remain visible during
scrolling
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page B-14
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software
Minimum Requirements Compliance Matrix
Minimum Requirements Meets Requirement Exceeds Requirement Partially Meets Requirements Operating in Field Requirement in Development Function not available Comments
or
Footnotes
15.2.4 Easy of navigation
15.2.5 Data changes highlighted until saved
15.2.6 Entries unavailable based on security omitted
or obscured
15.3 Status Display
15.3.1 Real time status availability
15.3.2 Real time status displays
15.3.3 Controller status detail
15.3.4 Ring status detail
15.3.5 Phase status detail
15.3.6 Coordination status detail
15.3.7 Preemption status detail
15.3.8 Overlap status detail
15.3.9 Detector status detail
15.3.10 Communication status detail
15.3.11 Cabinet status detail
15.3.12 Advanced operation status detail
16.0 MISCELLANEOUS
16.1 Special Function/Time of Day Outputs
16.1.1 Minimum ten special function outputs
16.1.2 Special function activation
16.1.3 Special function status
16.2 Alarms
16.2.1 Minimum 48 predefined alarms
16.2.2 Alarms logged
16.2.3 Alarm messages to central configurable
16.2.4 Any physical input has alarm functionality
16.2.5 Alarm classification types
16.2.6 Critical alarm types
16.2.7 Non-critical alarm types
16.2.8 Coordination alarm types
16.2.9 Communication alarms
16.2.10 Preempt alarms
16.2.11 Priority alarms
16.3 Diagnostics
16.3.1 Diagnostic support
16.4 Timing Sheets
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
January 2012 Page B-15
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software
Minimum Requirements Compliance Matrix
Minimum Requirements Meets Requirement Exceeds Requirement Partially Meets Requirements Operating in Field Requirement in Development Function not available Comments
or
Footnotes
16.4.1 Timing sheet availability
16.4.2 Timing sheets uploadable to central or remote
device
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONALITY INLCUDED IN PROPOSED SOFTARE (DESCRIBE)
End of Appendix B
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
December2011 Page C-1
ATTACHMENT 1
APPENDIX C
Sample Timesheets
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
December2011 Page C-2
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
December2011 Page C-3
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
December2011 Page C-4
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
December2011 Page C-5
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
December2011 Page C-6
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
December2011 Page C-7
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
December2011 Page C-8
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
December2011 Page C-9
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
December2011 Page C-10
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
December2011 Page C-11
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
December2011 Page C-12
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
December2011 Page C-13
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
December2011 Page C-14
The Cities of Fort Worth and Dallas, Texas
Local Traffic Signal Controller Software Specification
December2011 Page C-15
End of Appendix C
34 41 11 - 1
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 1 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
SECTION 34 41 11
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Timber Poles
2. Span Wire
B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section
1. None
C. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section
1. None
D. Deviations from City of Fort Worth Standards
1. None
E. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 1 - General Requirements.
3. Section 33 05 30 – Location of Existing Utilities
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Timber Poles
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each timber pole of the size
specified in the plans.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to the Item shall
be paid for at the unit bid price per each “Timber Pole” installed for:
a) Various types.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Timber pole
2) Class A or C concrete backfill
3) Compression fittings
4) Thimbleye bolts
5) Square washers
6) Nuts
7) Eye nuts
8) Lift plate
9) Split bolt connector
10) Guy clamp
11) Double eye anchor rod
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 11 - 2
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 2 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
12) 8-way anchors
13) Guy spreader (if called out in Drawings)
14) All labor, tools, equipment and incidentals required to provide timber poles
as shown on the Drawings, as specified, and as required by the City.
2. Span Wire
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear feet.
b. Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to the Item
shall be paid for at the unit price per each “Span Wire” installed for:
(1) Various types
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Span wire
2) ½” black plastic straps or messenger rings
3) All labor, tools, equipment and incidentals required to provide span wire as
shown on the Drawings, as specified, and as required by the City.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard
published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM A 475, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand.
3. American National Standards Institute
a. ANSI O5.1, Wood Poles – Specifications & Dimensions
4. American Wood Protection Association
a. AWPA T1-07, Processing and Treatment Standard
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. City must approve any deviation from Specification.
B. Preinstallation Meetings
1. 48 hours’ Notice of Intention to establish final location of any timber poles.
2. 48 hours’ notice to DIG TESS, City of Fort Worth Water and Sewer (817-871-
8275), and City of Fort Worth Traffic Signals, Street Lights, and Storm Drains
(817-392-8100).
C. Scheduling
1. 48 hours’ notice of placing the temporary signal into operation.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 11 - 3
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 3 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
1. Provide shop drawings for City review prior to ordering equipment.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration occurs during a
prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation.
2. Prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being exposed to direct sunlight and
extremes in temperature.
3. The Contractor shall secure and maintain a location to store the material in
accordance with Section 01 50 00.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty
1. Manufacturer’s warranty shall be in accordance with Division 1.
B. A 2 year warranty shall be required on all equipment furnished by the Contractor.
C. Extended Correction Period
1. Contractor responsible for correcting any substandard workmanship and/or
materials for 24 months from the date the temporary signal is accepted by the City.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT / MATERIALS
A. Timber Poles
1. Use new treated southern pine timber poles in accordance with ANSI O5.1,
“Specifications and Dimensions for Wood Poles,” and the additional requirements
of this Item.
2. Use ANSI Class 5 treated timber poles for electrical services and ANSI Class 2 for
all other applications, unless otherwise shown on the plans.
3. Ensure poles are free from pith holes at the tops and butts.
4. Do not use poles that have a trimmed scar with a depth greater than 2 in., if the
diameter is 10 in. or less, or 1/5 the pole diameter at the scar location, if the
diameter is more than 10 in.
5. Provide poles that do not deviate from straightness by more than 1 in. for each 10
ft. of length.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 11 - 4
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 4 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
6. A pole may only have sweep in 1 plane and 1 direction (single sweep), provided a
straight line joining the midpoint of the pole at the butt and the midpoint of the pole
at the top does not at any intermediate point pass through the external surface of the
pole.
7. Timber poles with more than 1 complete twist of spiral grain are not acceptable.
8. Butt slivering due to felling is permitted if the distance from the outside
circumference is not less than 1/4 of the butt diameter and the height is not more
than 1 ft.
9. Use preservative treatment in accordance with AWPA T1-07.
10. Furnish poles with a minimum net retention of preservative treatment in accordance
with Table 1.
11. Mark all poles by branding in accordance with Table 2.
Table 1
Retention of Preservative Treatment
Treatment Minimum Retention
Creosote 9.0 lb./ft.3
Pentachlorophenol 0.45 lb./ft.3
ACA/CCA 0.6 lb./ft.3
Table 2
Timber Pole Markings
Marking Description of Marking
PTC Supplier’s code or trademark (for example, Pole
Treating Company).
F-01 Plant location and year of treatment (for example,
Forestville, 2001).
SPC Species and preservative code (for example, southern
pine, creosote).
5-35 Class-length (for example, Class 5, 35-ft. pole).
12. Place the bottom of the brand squarely on the face of the pole 10 ft. (plus or minus
2 in.) from the butt.
13. Furnish a treatment certification with every shipment of treated timber poles that
includes:
a. name of treating company,
b. location of treating plant,
c. applicable product standard (AWPA T1-07),
d. charge number,
e. date of treatment,
f. contents of charge (poles),
g. preservative treatment, and
h. actual preservative retention values.
B. Span Wire
1. Conform to the requirements of ASTM A 475, Utilities Grade or better, Class A
coating.
2. These requirements include, but are not limited to, the properties given in Table 1.
Furnish 7 wires per strand.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 11 - 5
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 5 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
Table 1
Dimensions and Properties
Nominal
Diameter
of Strand
Nominal
Diameter of
Coated Wires
Approx.
Weight per
1000 ft.
Minimum
Breaking
Strength
Minimum Zinc
Coating Wt.
Class A
(in.) (in.) (lb.) (lb.) (oz./sq. ft.)
3/16 0.065 80 2,400 0.50
1/4 0.080 121 4,750 0.60
9/32 0.093 164 4,600 0.70
5/16 0.109 225 6,000 0.80
3/8 0.120 273 11,500 0.85
7/16 0.145 399 18,000 0.90
1/2 0.165 517 25,000 0.90
3. Supply new material.
4. Remove drips, runs, sharp points, voids, and damage from the zinc coating.
5. Samples from each roll of each diameter of strand will be taken.
6. Replace strands failing to meet the requirements of this Item.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions
1. The Contractor shall verify by exploratory excavation, if needed, that existing
underground utilities are not in conflict with proposed timber poles.
2. All exploratory excavations shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 30.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Protection of In-Place Conditions
1. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the preservation of existing
landscaping (sod, shrubbery, trees, and etc.), sprinkler systems, and/or other private
property at the Site during the installation of the temporary traffic signal.
2. Damaged landscaping, sprinkler systems, and/or other private property shall be
replaced within a reasonable time, by the Contractor at his own expense, to the
satisfaction of the Inspector.
3. No trees or shrubbery shall be cut except upon the specific authority of the
Inspector.
4. Removal of mail boxes in the way of construction requires 48 hours advance notice
to the post office.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 11 - 6
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 6 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Timber Poles
1. Use established industry and utility safety practices while installing poles located
near overhead or underground utilities.
2. Consult with the appropriate utility company prior to beginning such work.
3. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, set the pole a minimum depth in accordance
with Table 3.
Table 3
Pole Setting Depth
Pole Length
(ft.)
Min. Setting Depth
(ft.)
25 or less 5.0
26–30 6.0
31–35 7.0
36–40 8.0
41–45 9.0
46–50 10.0
4. Locate timber poles as shown on the plans or as directed.
5. Drill holes for setting poles a minimum of 1.5 diameters of the pole butt.
6. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, set the poles plumb.
7. Backfill the holes thoroughly by tamping in 6 in. lifts.
8. After tamping to grade, place additional backfill material in a 6 in. high cone
around the pole to allow for settling.
9. Use material equal in composition and density to the surrounding area.
10. Repair surface where existing surfacing material is removed, such as asphalt
pavement or concrete riprap, with like material to equivalent condition.
B. Span Wire
1. Install strands as shown on the plans.
2. Splicing is not permitted.
3. When the strand is used as a messenger cable or span wire, ground it to the
grounding conductor at each pole.
4. Metal poles may be used as the grounding conductor.
5. Ensure a resistance less than 1 ohm from the strand to the ground rod.
3.5 [REPAIR] / [RESTORATION] [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Inspector to have a qualified technician on the
Site when the temporary traffic signal is placed into operation.
B. During the 30 day test period, the City shall be the first respond to any trouble calls.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 11 - 7
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 7 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
C. If the City determines that the repairs are the result of poor workmanship, the
Contractor shall complete the repairs.
D. The Contractor shall provide a local telephone number (not subject to frequent changes)
where trouble calls are to be received on a 24-hour basis.
E. The Contractor's response time to reported calls shall be within a reasonable travel time,
but not more than 2 hours maximum.
F. Appropriate repairs shall be made within 24 hours.
G. If, after further diagnosing the problem, the qualified technician determines the problem
is in the equipment supplied by others, the Contractor shall notify the Inspector.
H. No extra compensation will be allowed for fulfilling the requirements stated above.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Adjusting signal heads during construction shall be considered subsidiary to the traffic
control bid item.
3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Prior to final acceptance by the City, the Contractor is responsible for removal,
replacement and reinstallation of any damaged material at the Contractor's expense.
B. Whenever the Work provided for and contemplated under the Contract has been found
by the Inspector to be completed to his / her satisfaction on any individual signalized
intersection, or interconnected system of signalized intersections, as shown in the
Drawings, final cleaning up of said signalized intersection has been performed and the
traffic signal equipment supplied by the or has operated continuously for a minimum of
30 days in a satisfactory manner, the Contractor will be released from further
maintenance on that particular intersection.
C. Such partial acceptance will be made in writing and shall in no way void or alter any
terms of the Contract.
D. If equipment fails, a new 30-day test period will start when the equipment has been
repaired or replaced.
3.12 PROTECTION
A. Prevent any property damage to property owner's poles, fences, landscaping, mailboxes,
etc., and repair any damages.
B. Provide access to all driveways during construction.
C. Protect all underground and overhead utilities, including sprinkler systems, and repair
any damages.
3.13 MAINTENANCE
A. While performing Work under this Contract, the Contractor bears the sole risk of loss
for damages to or destruction of any temporary traffic signal equipment or
appurtenances, on equipment that was not to be replaced or installed under this
Contract, but which was damaged or destroyed through the fault or negligent acts of the
Contractor.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 11 - 8
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 8 of 8
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
B. The Contractor shall replace such damaged or destroyed equipment, etc., at no cost to
the City, regardless of whether or not the damaged or destroyed equipment, etc., was a
part of this Contract or any warranties under this Contract.
C. The Contractor's responsibility shall cease under this paragraph upon written acceptance
of an intersection by the City.
D. The Contractor's responsibility for full operation and maintenance of all traffic signal
equipment shall begin when he starts any type of Work which effects active intersection
control at the first intersection and shall extend through the period of final Project
acceptance of each intersection.
E. This maintenance responsibility includes existing controllers/masters, existing interconnect
and cabling systems, existing signal indications, existing vehicle detectors, new
controllers/masters, new signal hardware, new cabling systems, and other hardware
elements which are considered part of either the existing or the new traffic signal system.
F. It is recognized that the City may continue to make a first response to any trouble call.
Action on such response will, however, be limited to placing the intersection on flash,
replacing load switches or detector amplifiers, erecting temporary control devices,
requesting immediate traffic control by uniformed police officer, or other such action
deemed necessary to provide a safe operation.
1. Such action will in no way relieve the Contractor of his operation and maintenance
responsibility.
G. The Contractor shall be required to notify the Inspector or Traffic Services Division at least
24 hours in advance of any planned controlled change-outs or any other operational
procedures.
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
11/22/13 S. Arnold New specification
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 13 - 1
REMOVING TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 1 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 34 41 13
REMOVING TRAFFIC SIGNALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. The removal and salvaging of traffic signal equipment
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Dispose of Full Traffic Signal
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Traffic Signal Intersection
removed and salvaged.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the price bid for per each “Salvage Traffic Signal”
performed.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removing the following items:
a) Signal heads
b) Poles
c) Mast arms
d) Foundations
e) Ground boxes
f) Conduit
g) Cable
h) Signs
i) Electrical services
j) Amplifiers
k) Controllers
2) Returning equipment to the City, if specified
3) Excavation
4) Hauling
5) Clean-up
2. Dispose of Traffic Signal Pole and Mast Arm Assembly
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each traffic signal pole and mast
arm assembly removed and salvaged.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 13 - 2
REMOVING TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 2 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b. Payment
1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the price bid for per each “Dispose of Traffic
Signal Pole and Mast Arm Assmbly” performed.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removing the following items:
a) Signal heads
b) Poles
c) Mast arms
d) Foundations
e) Cable
f) Signs
2) Excavation
3) Hauling
4) Clean-up
5) Returning equipment to the City, if specified
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. Coordinate with Inspector 48 hours in advance of removals.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements
1. Contractor shall properly dispose of all material unless told otherwise by the
Engineer or Inspector.
2. Any salvaged materials that the City requests will be delivered by the Contractor to
the City at a location designated by the Inspector.
3. The Inspector, assisted by authorized representatives, will serve as the receiving
agent for salvage material.
B. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. The Contractor will ship and handle all salvage material (heads, poles, cabinets,
cable, signs, amplifiers, etc.) in a manner so as to prevent damage to these items.
Signal heads will be removed from poles prior to shipping.
2. All cables must be secured in controller cabinets to prevent damage during
shipment and handling.
3. All screws will be tightened into their respective slots to prevent loss during
shipping.
4. The controller and all supplemental control equipment (conflict monitors, detector
amplifiers, load switches, etc.) will be removed from the cabinet prior to cabinet
removal and given to the Inspector at the time of the signal turn-on.
5. The Inspector will identify existing damage to salvageable material and mark
damaged items in the field before they are delivered to the City yard.
a. If damage to material is the fault of the Contractor, the Contractor will have 3
Working Days to make repairs or supply like items, at the Contractor’s
expense, for damaged items.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 13 - 3
REMOVING TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Page 3 of 3
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b. If the Contractor fails to repair or replace damaged items in said time, the City
may charge the Contractor for the assessed value as determined by the Traffic
Services Manager or designee.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 REMOVALS
A. Special Techniques
1. Curbs and sidewalks
a. Secure permission from the Inspector before cutting into or removing any
walks or curbs which might be required during construction.
b. Where possible, dig under sidewalks.
1) If the Contractor chooses to remove or cut the sidewalk, the concrete must
be sawed and broken out and then restored to an equal or better condition
than the original.
2. Foundations
a. All foundations subject to removal (as indicated on the Drawings) shall be
razed to a level at least 2 feet below the ground surface.
b. If the foundation subject to removal is located within a sidewalk, the foundation
shall be removed to a depth equal to or greater than the thickness of the
walkway.
c. Once the foundation is removed, the ground surface shall be restored to
surrounding conditions.
3. Ground Boxes
a. The hole remaining from ground box removal shall be filled and the ground
surface shall be restored to surrounding conditions.
b. Any conduit elbows found within the ground box to be removed shall be cut back
to a minimum of 12 inches below the natural ground surface.
4. Signs
a. The existing stop sign panels, or any grounded mounted signs, as shown on the
Drawings, will be removed after the traffic signals are placed in flash and
before the signal is turned to full colors by City forces.
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
11/19/15 S. Arnold Various updates
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 15- 1
Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon Assemblies
Page 1 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
SECTION 34 41 15
RECTANGULAR RAPID FLASHING BEACON ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB) Assemblies
B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section
1. None
C. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section
1. None
D. Deviations from City of Fort Worth Standards
1. None.
E. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 1 - General Requirements.
3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
4. Section 33 05 30 – Location of Existing Utilities
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for this Item shall be per each.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to the Item shall be
paid for at the unit price bid per each “RRFB Assembly” installed for:
1) Various types
3. The price bid shall include:
a. Support post
b. Foundation
c. Anchor bolts
d. Signs
e. LED arrays
f. Push button assembly with instructional sign
g. Controller unit complete with all necessary equipment
h. Mounting hardware
i. Ground rod
j. Cable
k. Testing
l. All labor, tools, equipment and incidentals required to provide complete RRFB
system as shown on the Drawings, as specified, and as required by the City.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 15- 2
Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon Assemblies
Page 2 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms
1. RRFB: Rectangular rapid flashing beacon
B. Definitions
C. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard
published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. 2011 Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TxMUTCD)
3. U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, Rectangular
Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB), FHWA-SA-09-009, May 2009.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. City must approve any deviation from Specification.
B. Preinstallation Meetings
1. 48 hours’ Notice of Intention to establish final location of any foundations, bases,
conduit, and detectors.
2. 48 hours’ notice to DIG TESS, City of Fort Worth Water and Sewer (817-871-
8275), and City of Fort Worth Traffic Signals, Street Lights, and Storm Drains
(817-392-8100).
C. Scheduling
1. 48 hours’ notice of placing the RRFB into operation.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Provide shop drawings for City review prior to ordering equipment.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration occurs during a
prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation.
2. Exposed anchor bolts shall be protected until pole shaft is installed.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 15- 3
Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon Assemblies
Page 3 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
3. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust
and corrosion.
4. Prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being exposed to direct sunlight and
extremes in temperature.
5. The Contractor shall secure and maintain a location to store the material in
accordance with Section 01 50 00.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty
1. Manufacturer’s warranty shall be in accordance with Division 1.
2. A 2 year warranty shall be required on all equipment furnished by the Contractor.
B. Extended Correction Period
1. Contractor responsible for correcting any substandard workmanship and/or
materials for 24 months from the date the signal is accepted by the City.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [NOT USED]
2.2 EQUIPMENT / MATERIALS
A. General Requirements
1. RRFB shall be fully compliant with the TxMUTCD guidelines and standards, shall
be approved by the City, and shall be installed at locations indicated on the
Drawings.
2. Each RRFB shall consist of 2 rapidly and alternately flashed rectangular yellow
indications having LED array based pulsing light sources.
3. Each RRFB will be a complete assembly, consisting of indications, controller
cabinet (circuit breaker, timer or solid-state circuit boards, etc.) or any electrical
component hardware.
B. Functional Requirements
1. Each RRFB shall be AC or solar powered as shown on the Drawings.
2. Each RRFB shall be activated by push button and shall be ADA compliant, and
shall require no more than 2 pounds of pressure to activate.
3. The RRFB shall be normally dark, shall initiate operation only upon pedestrian
actuation, and shall cease operation after a predetermined time limit.
4. Each RRFB when activated shall flash the two indications in an alternating “wig-
wag” sequence, i.e., left light on then right light on.
5. Each of the two indications shall have 70 to 80 periods of flashing per minute and
shall have alternating but approximately equal periods of rapid pulsing light
emissions and dark operation. During each of its 70 to 80 flashing periods per
minute, one of the indications shall emit two rapid pulses of light and the other
indication shall emit three rapid pulses of light.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 15- 4
Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon Assemblies
Page 4 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
6. The rapid flash rate of each indication, as applied over the full on-off sequence of a
flashing period of the indication, shall not be between 5 and 30 flashes per second,
to avoid frequencies that might cause seizures.
7. The light intensity shall meet the minimum specifications of Society of Automotive
Engineers (SAE) standard J595 (Directional Flashing Optical Warning Devices for
Authorized Emergency, Maintenance, and Service Vehicles) dated January 2005.
8. All RRFBs associated with a given crosswalk (including those with an advance
crossing sign, if used) shall, when activated, simultaneously commence operation of
their alternating rapid flashing indications and shall cease operation simultaneously.
9. Where indicated on the Drawings, the RRFB shall provide bidirectional indications
to motorists approaching from both directions.
10. Where indicated on the Drawings, the RRFB shall provide a unidirectional
indication to motorists approaching from the direction specified on the Drawings.
11. Controllers shall support wireless communications to RRFBs and push buttons
using spread spectrum radio frequency, thus eliminating the need for cable
trenching. Range shall be a minimum of 500 feet.
12. LEDs shall be rated for a minimum of 10 years.
13. The duration of a predetermined period of operation of the RRFB’s following each
actuation should be based on the TxMUTCD procedures for timing of pedestrian
clearance times for pedestrian signals.
14. Beacons shall be simple to maintain and allow replacement of individual
rectangular b Light configuration shall be bi-directional for notification to motorists
approaching from either direction and lights on both ends of the RRFB shall face
into the crosswalk for notification to the pedestrians that the system is on.
15. The housing units shall also include a high intensity amber LED mounted on the
street side of the assembly, which will flash upon the receipt of an incoming digital
radio signal from either one of the assemblies. This is intended to provide
pedestrians confirmation that the assembly across the street has been activated.
16. Push Button
a. The push button shall be ADA compliant and require no more than 2lbs. of
pressure for activation. The button must be designed so that ice cannot form
such that it would impede the function of the button.
b. The pushbutton shall incorporate visual feedback to indicate the button has
been pressed and the displays are active. Once the pushbutton is pressed, the
LED must stay on for the full duration and the beacons active.
c. The pushbutton shall have transient surge protection that shall include at a
minimum, a resistor and TVS diode at the input connection. The pushbutton
assembly shall be vandal resistant designed to withstand impacts from heavy
objects. The button body must have raised ridges on all sides to protect button
cap against side impacts. The button shall be designed so that it cannot be
made to stay on. If the event the button is pressed for longer than 10 seconds, it
shall reset itself and work normally even if it is still being held in.
d. The button shall be completely sealed and the electronics shall be encapsulated
so that the button can function even after being immersed in water for an
extended period of time.
C. Mechanical Requirements
1. Each RRFB indication shall be a minimum size of 5 inches wide by 2 inches high.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 15- 5
Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon Assemblies
Page 5 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
2. Beacons shall have LED bulbs and be highly visible from a minimum of 1,000 feet
in advance of the crosswalk during the day and at least one (1) mile during the
night.
3. LEDs shall be recessed in the flash bar with an additional polycarbonate shield for
vandal resistance.
4. RRFB display cabinet shall be durable, corrosion resistant, powder-coated
aluminum.
5. All components will be capable of continuous operation over a temperature range
of -30° F to 165° F.
D. Controller
1. Enclosure
a. Controller unit shall be housed in a NEMA 4X rated, pole mounted, aluminum
cabinet with stainless steel hinge.
2. Power Options
a. Controller unit shall be provided as AC powered or solar powered as shown on
the Drawings.
b. Operating electrical power for AC-powered controller systems shall be 120V.
c. Solar-powered systems shall be designed with solar panels and batteries
capable of running the system for 30 days without sunlight.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions
1. The Contractor shall verify by exploratory excavation, if needed, that existing
underground utilities are not in conflict with proposed foundations.
2. All exploratory excavations shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 30.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection of In-Place Conditions
1. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the preservation of existing
landscaping (sod, shrubbery, trees, and etc.), sprinkler systems, and/or other private
property at the Site during the installation of the traffic signal.
2. Damaged landscaping, sprinkler systems, and/or other private property shall be
replaced within a reasonable time, by the Contractor at his own expense, to the
satisfaction of the Inspector.
3. No trees or shrubbery shall be cut except upon the specific authority of the
Inspector.
4. Removal of mail boxes in the way of construction requires 48 hours advance notice
to the post office.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 15- 6
Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon Assemblies
Page 6 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Special Techniques
1. Each RRFB shall be mounted horizontally to a standard 4 ½” diameter aluminum
pole and in accordance with dimensions and details shown on the Drawings.
2. The two RRFB indications shall be aligned horizontally, with the longer dimension
horizontal and with a minimum space between the two indications of approximately
seven inches (7 in), measured from inside edge of one indication to inside edge of
the other indication.
3. The outside edges of the RRFB indications, including any housings, shall not
project beyond the outside edges of the sign.
3.4 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.5 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Inspector to have a qualified technician on the
Site when the RRFB is placed into operation.
B. Appropriate repairs shall be made within 24 hours.
C. If, after further diagnosing the problem, the qualified technician determines the problem
is in the equipment supplied by others, the Contractor shall notify the Inspector.
D. No extra compensation will be allowed for fulfilling the requirements stated above.
3.6 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.7 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.8 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Prior to final acceptance by the City, the Contractor is responsible for removal,
replacement and reinstallation of any damaged material at the Contractor's expense.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Prevent any property damage to property owner's poles, fences, landscaping, mailboxes,
etc., and repair any damages.
B. Provide access to all driveways during construction.
C. Protect all underground and overhead utilities, including sprinkler systems, and repair
any damages.
3.10 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.11 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 15- 7
Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon Assemblies
Page 7 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
11/22/13 S. Arnold New specification
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20 - 1
ROADWAY ILLUMINATION ASSEMBLIES
Page 1 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
SECTION 34 41 20
ROADWAY ILLUMINATION ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roadway illumination assemblies
2. Roadway illumination foundations
3. Removal of roadway illumination assemblies
4. Relocation of roadway illumination assemblies
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
4. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
5. Section 33 05 30 – Location of Existing Utilities
6. Section 34 41 10 – Traffic Signals
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Roadway Illumination Assemblies
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Roadway Illumination
Assembly installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Rdwy Illum Assmbly”
installed for:
a) Various types
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing Roadway Illumination Assembly, if required
2) Assembling and installing each Roadway Illumination Assembly
3) Poles
4) Arms
5) Anchor bolts
6) Fixtures
7) Internal electrical conductors
8) Connection and mounting hardware
9) Bases
10) Lamps
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20 - 2
ROADWAY ILLUMINATION ASSEMBLIES
Page 2 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
11) Preparing submittals
12) Exploratory excavation (as needed)
13) Coordination and notification
14) Assembly and transportation of all items
15) Excavation, hauling, disposal of excess material
16) Protection of the excavation
17) Clean-up
18) Testing
2. Ornamental Illumination Assemblies
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Ornamental Assembly
installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Ornamental Assmbly”
installed for:
a) Various types
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing Ornamental Illumination Assembly, if required
2) Assembling and installing each Ornamental Assembly
3) Poles
4) Arms
5) Anchor bolts
6) Fixtures
7) Internal electrical conductors
8) Connection and mounting hardware
9) Bases
10) Lamps
11) Preparing submittals
12) Exploratory excavation (as needed)
13) Coordination and notification
14) Assembly and transportation of all items
15) Excavation, hauling, disposal of excess material
16) Protection of the excavation
17) Clean-up
18) Testing
3. Lighting Fixtures
a. When a pay item for Illumination Assembly exists:
1) Measurement
a) This Item is considered subsidiary to Illumination Assembly
installation.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item are subsidiary to the unit price bid per each “Rdwy Illum
Assmbly” or “Ornamental Assmbly” bid, and no other compensation
will be allowed.
b. When a pay item for Illumination Assembly does not exist:
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Lighting Fixture installed.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20 - 3
ROADWAY ILLUMINATION ASSEMBLIES
Page 3 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Lighting Fixture”
installed for:
(1) Various types
(2) Various power
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Furnishing Lighting Fixture, if required
b) Assembling Lighting Fixture
c) Wiring connections
d) Disposal of any unused or replaced materials
e) Clean-up
4. Roadway Illumination Foundations
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Roadway Illumination
Foundation installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Rdwy Illum Foundation”
installed for:
a) Various types
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Installing each Roadway Illumination Foundation
2) Reinforcing steel
3) Exploratory excavation (as needed)
4) Grounding rods
5) Coordination and notification
6) Excavation, hauling, disposal of excess material
7) Protection of the excavation
8) Clean-up
9) Testing
5. Contact Enclosure
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Contact Enclosure installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Contact Enclosure” installed
for:
a) Various mounting methods
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing Contact Enclosure
2) Mounting materials
3) Clean-up
6. Furnishing and Installing Wood Light Pole
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each 40’ Wood Light Pole furnished
and installed.
b. Payment
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20 - 4
ROADWAY ILLUMINATION ASSEMBLIES
Page 4 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install 40’ Wood
Light Pole”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Excavation
2) Furnishing and installing each 40’ Wood Light Pole
3) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
4) Clean-up
7. Furnishing and Installing Wood Light Pole Arm
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each 8’ Wood Light Pole Arm
furnished and installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install 8’ Wood
Light Pole Arm”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing each 8’ Wood Light Pole Arm
2) Clean-up
8. Aluminum Electrical Conductors
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of Aluminum Electrical
Conductor installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit
price bid per linear foot of “Alum Elec Conductor” installed for:
a) Various Sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing Aluminum Electrical Conductor
2) Testing
9. Conductor Reconnection
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each conductor reconnected.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Reconnect Conductor”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Reconnection of conductors using City approved method
2) Testing of connection
10. Street Light Pole Removal and Salvage
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Street Light removed and
salvaged.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Salvage Street Light Pole”
performed.
c. The price bid shall include:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20 - 5
ROADWAY ILLUMINATION ASSEMBLIES
Page 5 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) Removal and salvage of Street Light Pole
2) Maintain existing street light circuit including new ground box and
reconnection of circuits (if required by City)
3) Removal of existing street light pole foundation 2’ below grade, back fill
with like surrounding material
4) Delivery of salvaged materials to appropriate location
5) Clean-up
11. Street Light Pole Relocation
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Street Light Pole removed and
salvaged.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Relocate Street Light Pole”
performed.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and salvage of Street Light Pole
2) Delivery of salvaged materials to appropriate location
3) Replacement of pole to new location
4) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill material
5) Clean-up
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. National Electric Code (NEC)
3. Texas State Law, Article 1426C
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. Notify City at (817) 392-7738 a minimum of 7 days before beginning Work on the
Project.
2. Notify Inspector prior to pouring roadway illumination assembly foundations.
3. Coordinate with Traffic Services Inspector for pole types, template dimensions and
anchor bolts, and any questions about installing the foundations and conduit.
4. For location of City underground street luminaire cable and conduit call (817) 392-
7738 or (817) 392-8100.
5. Obtain and pay for all permits as required to Work in parkway.
B. Preinstallation Meetings
1. Attend pre-construction meeting.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings will be required for each Illumination Assembly and shall include:
1. Material Data
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20 - 6
ROADWAY ILLUMINATION ASSEMBLIES
Page 6 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
2. Pole dimensions and data
3. Luminaire arm dimensions and data
4. Attachment details
5. Fixtures
6. Base details
7. Anchor bolt data
8. Wall thickness
9. Permissible loading and allowable stress
B. Product Data submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
C. All submittals shall be approved by the Engineer or the City prior to delivery and/or
fabrication for specials.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data Sheets
1. Submit product data sheets for roadway illumination assemblies to City for
approval prior to ordering materials.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty Documentation
1. Provide manufacturer warranty information to the City.
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration occurs during a
prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation.
2. Exposed anchor bolts shall be protected until pole shaft is installed.
3. Prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being exposed to direct sunlight and
extremes in temperature.
4. The Contractor shall secure and maintain a location to store the material in
accordance with Section 01 50 00.
B. Delivery and Acceptance
1. Contactor and Inspector shall visually inspect roadway illumination assemblies
after removal to determine the condition of the hardware.
2. Contractor shall protect all salvable material during transport to City specified
storage facility.
3. Delivered material must be in the same condition after removal, as agreed upon by
Contractor and Inspector after removal.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20 - 7
ROADWAY ILLUMINATION ASSEMBLIES
Page 7 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty
1. Manufacturer’s warranty shall be in accordance with Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS TO BE PURCHASED FROM THE CITY
A. Refer to Drawings and Contract Documents to determine if any Items are to be
purchased from the City and installed by the Contractor.
B. Items eligible for purchase from the City include:
1. Roadway Illumination poles
2. Contactors
2.2 ASSEMBLIES, EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, AND MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Only the manufacturers as listed in the City’s Standard Products List will be
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
B. Description
1. Regulatory Requirements
a. All Work related to the installation of roadway illumination assemblies shall be
in compliance with the National Electric Code (NEC).
2. Roadway Illumination Assemblies
a. Poles, arms, light fixtures and lamps shall conform to City Standard Details.
b. Ornamental Assemblies
1) Refer to Drawings for ornamental pole specifications.
c. Lighting Fixtures
1) Refer to Drawings for lighting fixture specifications.
d. Foundations
1) Concrete shall conform to Section 03 30 00.
e. Wood Light Poles
1) Wood Poles for electrical service shall be ANSI Class 5 treated timber.
a) For other applications, Class 2 treated timber is allowed.
2) All treated wood poles shall be free from pith holes.
a) Trimmed scars are allowable up to a depth of 2-inches in poles up to 10
inches in diameter.
b) Scars 1/5 of the pole diameter at the scar location will be allowable for
wood poles larger than 10-inches.
3) Wood poles shall not deviate from straight more than 1 inch in 10 feet of
length.
a) Only a single sweep shall be permitted.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20 - 8
ROADWAY ILLUMINATION ASSEMBLIES
Page 8 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
b) A straight line adjoining the midpoint of the pole at the butt with the
midpoint of the pole at the top shall not at any intermediate pass
through the external surface of the pole.
c) Only a single twist of spiral grain will be permitted.
4) Butt slivering due to felling shall be permitted if the distance from the
outside circumference is not less than ¼ inch and the height is not more
than 1 foot.
5) Timber shall be treated for preservation in accordance with AWPA C4
pressure treatment methods.
a) The poles shall have the minimum net retention of preservative
treatment shown in the following table:
Treatment
Minimum Retention
(pounds per cubic foot)
Creosote 9.0
Pentachlorophenol 0.45
ACA/CCA 0.6
6) Pole Markings
7) All markings shall be in accordance with the following table:
a) The bottom brand shall be placed squarely on the face of each pole 10
feet from the butt.
Marking Description of Marking
PTC Supplier’s code or trademark (ie. Pole Treating
Company)
F-01 Plant location and year of treatment (ie. Forestville,
2001)
SPC Species and preservative code (ie. southern pine,
creosote)
5-35 Class-length (ie. Class 5, 35-foot pole)
8) A treatment certification will be required with each shipment of treated
timber poles including:
a) Name of treatment company
b) Location of treatment plant
c) Applicable product standard (AWPA C4)
d) Charge number
e) Date of treatment
f) Contents of charges (poles)
g) Preservative treatment
h) Measured preservative retention values
f. Wood Light Pole Arms
1) Refer to City Standard Detail Drawings for light pole arm specifications.
g. Aluminum Electrical Conductors
1) Refer to Drawings for conductor sizes
2) Use stranded insulated conductors that are rated for 600 volts
3) Approved for wet locations
4) Marked in accordance with UL, NEC, and CSA requirements
3. Roadway illumination pole foundations
a. Foundations shall be Class C (3000 PSI) concrete.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20 - 9
ROADWAY ILLUMINATION ASSEMBLIES
Page 9 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1) Refer to Section 03 30 00.
b. Foundation shall be 24 or 30 inches in diameter unless shown otherwise in the
Drawings.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections
1. Notify the Traffic Services Division Inspector 24 hours in advance (between 8:00
am and 5:00 pm) of all concrete pours at (817) 392-7738.
a. Inspector must be present when concrete is placed on the Project Site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions
1. Contractor shall verify by exploratory excavation, if needed, that existing
underground utilities are not in conflict with proposed foundations.
a. All exploratory excavation shall conform to Section 33 05 30.
2. Contractor shall contact the following entities at least 48 hours in advance of
excavation:
a. DIG TESS
b. City of Fort Worth Water Department
c. City of Fort Worth T/PW Department
3. No additional payment will be made for relocation of any foundations or conduit
due to location of existing utilities.
4. The Engineer may shift an assembly’s location, if necessary, to avoid conflict with
utilities.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection of In-Place Conditions
1. Contractor shall be responsible for the following at no additional cost to the City:
a. Prevent any property damage to property owner's poles, fences, shrubs,
mailboxes, etc. Any damaged property will be restored as directed by
Engineer.
b. Adjust and repair any existing landscaping and the sprinkler systems as directed
by the Engineer to allow for the placement of all roadway illumination
equipment. This shall be done in a manner equal to or better than the areas
adjacent to the damaged areas.
c. Provide access to all driveways during construction, unless authorized by the
inspector.
d. Protect all underground and overhead utilities and repair any damages.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Foundations
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20 - 10
ROADWAY ILLUMINATION ASSEMBLIES
Page 10 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
1. Dimensions shown on Drawings for locations of street light foundations, conduit
and other items may be varied to meet local conditions; subject to approval of
Engineer.
2. Foundation piers shall be drilled plumb.
3. The top of foundation shall be poured level.
4. The top 3 inches of the exposed pier (height) above finished grade shall have the
sonotube removed.
5. Anchor bolts shall extend above the top of the foundation concrete as shown on
Anchor Bolt Detail.
6. Anchor bolts, ground rod, reinforcing, and conduit shall be in place before pouring
concrete in pier foundations.
7. Pier foundations shall have 1 continuous concrete pour.
8. Foundations shall have a chamfered edge (beveled) at the top.
9. Top of foundation shall be 3 inches above the finished grade unless shown different
on Drawings.
10. Foundations in medians shall be placed in the center of the median between the 2
curbs.
11. Foundations shall not be drilled within 3 feet of a water line or fire hydrant.
12. In residential areas foundations shall be placed in the street right of way (R.O.W.)
in line with the property line between lots and at the break of the radius point of the
street curb at street intersections.
13. Foundations shall not be placed in sidewalks (or location of future sidewalks) or
sidewalk ramps.
14. No street light poles shall be placed on foundations prior to 7 days following
pouring of concrete.
B. Roadway Illumination Assemblies
1. Roadway Illumination Assemblies
a. Use established industry and utility safety practices when installing poles
located near overhead or underground utilities. Consult with the appropriate
utility company before beginning work.
b. Prevent scarring or marring of poles, mast arm, and fixtures.
c. Stake, install, and align each assembly as shown on the plans.
d. Do not use screw-in type foundations.
e. Install anchor bolts and coat anchor bolt threads.
f. Erect structures after foundation has attained its design strength as required in
Section 03 30 00.
g. Tighten anchor bolts for poles with shoe bases.
h. Do not place grout between base plate and foundation.
i. Test installed roadway illumination assembly with City inspector present.
2. Wood Light Pole
a. All light pole installations should be coordinated with all appropriate utility
companies prior to Work beginning.
b. Drill holes for setting poles shall be a minimum of 1.5 diameters of the pole
butt.
c. Poles shall be set plumb, unless otherwise specified on the Drawings.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20 - 11
ROADWAY ILLUMINATION ASSEMBLIES
Page 11 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
d. Unless otherwise shown in Drawings, poles should be set to the minimum
depths shown in the following table:
Pole Length
(feet)
Minimum Setting Depth
(feet)
≤ 25 4.5
26-30 5.0
31-35 5.5
36-40 6.0
41-45 6.5
46-50 7.0
e. Backfill the hole around the pole thoroughly by tamping 6-inch lifts of backfill
material until reaching natural grade.
1) Once grade is met, apply a last 6-inch lift in a cone shape around the pole to
allow for settling.
2) Backfill in accordance to Section 33 05 10.
f. Repair and clean-up surrounding area to a condition that is equal to or better
than its condition prior to installation.
3.4 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.5 RELOCATION AND REMOVAL
A. Relocation
1. Disconnect and remove conductors from abandoned circuits.
2. Remove abandoned circuit or ducts to a point 6 inches below final grade.
3. Reconnect conduit, ducts, conductors to be reused.
4. Replace damaged conduit, ducts, and conductors.
5. Do not use screw-in type foundations.
6. Install existing structures on new foundations.
7. Do not place grout between base plate and foundation.
8. Furnish and install new internal conductors, fused and unfused connectors, and
fixtures.
9. Test installed roadway illumination assembly with City inspector present
10. Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials and dispose of in accordance with
federal, state, and local regulations.
B. Removal
1. Remove roadway illumination assembly components in accordance with
established industry and utility safety practices.
2. Remove transformer bases from transformer base poles.
3. Remove luminaires and mast arms from the pole shaft.
4. Stockpile pole shafts, mast arms, and assembly hardware at a location designated
by the City.
5. Pole shafts, mast arms, and assembly hardware will remain City property unless
otherwise shown on the plans or directed.
6. Disconnect and remove conductors from abandoned circuits.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20 - 12
ROADWAY ILLUMINATION ASSEMBLIES
Page 12 of 12
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised December 20, 2012
7. Remove abandoned conduit and ducts to a point 6 inches below final grade.
8. Destroy existing transformer bases to prevent reuse.
9. Remove abandoned concrete foundations to a point 2 ft. below final grade.
10. Backfill the hole with material that is equal in composition and density to the
surrounding area.
11. Replace surfacing material with similar material to an equivalent condition.
12. Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials and dispose of in accordance with
federal, state, and local regulations.
3.6 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.7 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.8 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.9 CLEANING
A. Contractor shall clean up and remove all loose material resulting from construction
operations.
3.10 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.11 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.12 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.13 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 1
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 1 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
SECTION 34 41 20.01
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roadway illumination assemblies
2. Roadway illumination foundations
3. Removal of roadway illumination assemblies
4. Relocation of roadway illumination assemblies
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
4. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill
5. Section 33 05 30 – Location of Existing Utilities
6. Section 34 41 10 – Traffic Signals
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Roadway Illumination Assemblies
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Roadway Illumination Assembly
installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be
paid for at the unit price bid per each “Rdwy Illum Assmbly” installed for:
a) Various types
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing Roadway Illumination Assembly, if required
2) Assembling and installing each Roadway Illumination Assembly
3) Poles
4) Arms
5) Anchor bolts
6) Fixtures
7) Internal electrical conductors
8) Connection and mounting hardware
9) Bases
10) Lamps
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 2
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 2 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
11) Preparing submittals
12) Exploratory excavation (as needed)
13) Coordination and notification
14) Assembly and transportation of all items
15) Excavation, hauling, disposal of excess material
16) Protection of the excavation
17) Clean-up
18) Testing
2. Ornamental Illumination Assemblies
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Ornamental Assembly installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be
paid for at the unit price bid per each “Ornamental Assmbly” installed for:
a) Various types
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing Ornamental Illumination Assembly, if required
2) Assembling and installing each Ornamental Assembly
3) Poles
4) Arms
5) Anchor bolts
6) Fixtures
7) Internal electrical conductors
8) Connection and mounting hardware
9) Bases
10) Lamps
11) Preparing submittals
12) Exploratory excavation (as needed)
13) Coordination and notification
14) Assembly and transportation of all items
15) Excavation, hauling, disposal of excess material
16) Protection of the excavation
17) Clean-up
18) Testing
3. Lighting Fixtures
a. When a pay item for Illumination Assembly exists:
1) Measurement
a) This Item is considered subsidiary to Illumination Assembly installation.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item are
subsidiary to the unit price bid per each “Rdwy Illum Assmbly” or “Ornamental
Assmbly” bid, and no other compensation will be allowed.
b. When a pay item for Illumination Assembly does not exist:
1) Measurement
a) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Lighting Fixture installed.
2) Payment
a) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall
be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Lighting Fixture” installed for:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 3
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 3 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
(1) Various types
(2) Various power
3) The price bid shall include:
a) Furnishing Lighting Fixture, if required
b) Assembling Lighting Fixture
c) Wiring connections
d) Disposal of any unused or replaced materials
e) Clean-up
4. Roadway Illumination Foundations
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Roadway Illumination Foundation
installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be
paid for at the unit price bid per each “Rdwy Illum Foundation” installed for:
a) Various types
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Installing each Roadway Illumination Foundation
2) Reinforcing steel
3) Exploratory excavation (as needed)
4) Grounding rods
5) Coordination and notification
6) Excavation, hauling, disposal of excess material
7) Protection of the excavation
8) Clean-up
9) Testing
5. Contact Enclosure
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Contact Enclosure installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be
paid for at the unit price bid per each “Contact Enclosure” installed for:
a) Various mounting methods
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing Contact Enclosure
2) Mounting materials
3) Clean-up
6. Furnishing and Installing Wood Light Pole
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each 40’ Wood Light Pole furnished and
installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be
paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install 40’ Wood Light Pole”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Excavation
2) Furnishing and installing each 40’ Wood Light Pole
3) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 4
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 4 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
4) Clean-up
7. Furnishing and Installing Wood Light Pole Arm
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each 8’ Wood Light Pole Arm furnished and
installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be
paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install 8’ Wood Light Pole Arm”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing each 8’ Wood Light Pole Arm
2) Clean-up
8. Aluminum Electrical Conductors
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of Aluminum Electrical
Conductor installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid
per linear foot of “Alum Elec Conductor” installed for:
a) Various Sizes
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing Aluminum Electrical Conductor
2) Testing
9. Conductor Reconnection
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each conductor reconnected.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be
paid for at the unit price bid per each “Reconnect Conductor”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Reconnection of conductors using City approved method
2) Testing of connection
10. Street Light Pole Removal and Salvage
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Street Light removed and salvaged.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be
paid for at the unit price bid per each “Salvage Street Light Pole” performed.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and salvage of Street Light Pole
2) Maintain existing street light circuit including new ground box and reconnection of
circuits (if required by City)
3) Removal of existing street light pole foundation 2’ below grade, back fill with like
surrounding material
4) Delivery of salvaged materials to appropriate location
5) Clean-up
11. Street Light Pole Relocation
a. Measurement
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 5
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 5 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each Street Light Pole removed and
salvaged.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be
paid for at the unit price bid per each “Relocate Street Light Pole” performed.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal and salvage of Street Light Pole
2) Delivery of salvaged materials to appropriate location
3) Replacement of pole to new location
4) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill material
5) Clean-up
1.3 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
Publications are referenced within the text by their basic designation only. Versions listed shall
be superseded by updated versions as they become available.
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. C136.2-2004 (or latest), American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting
Equipment—Luminaire Voltage Classification
2. C136.10-2010 (or latest), American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting
Equipment - Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacle Physical and
Electrical Interchangeability and Testing
3. C136.15-2011 (or latest), American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting
Equipment – Luminaire Field Identification
4. C136.22-2004 (R2009 or latest), American National Standard for Roadway and Area
Lighting Equipment – Internal Labeling of Luminaires
5. C136.25-2009 (or latest), American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting
Equipment – Ingress Protection (Resistance to Dust, Solid Objects and Moisture) for
Luminaire Enclosures
6. C136.31-2010 (or latest), American National Standard for Roadway Lighting Equipment
– Luminaire Vibration
7. C136.37-2011 (or latest), American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting
Equipment - Solid State Light Sources Used in Roadway and Area Lighting
B. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
1. B117-09 (or latest), Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
2. D1654-08 (or latest), Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated
Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments
3. D523-08 (or latest), Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss
4. G154-06 (or latest), Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV
Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
C. Council of the European Union (EC)
1. RoHS Directive 2002/95/EC, on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
in electrical and electronic equipment
D. Federal Trade Commission (FTC)
1. Green Guides, 16 CFR Part 260, Guides for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims
E. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA or IES)
1. DG-4-03 (or latest), Design Guide for Roadway Lighting Maintenance
2. HB-10-11 (or latest), IES Lighting Handbook, 10th Edition
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 6
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 6 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
3. LM-50-99 (or latest), IESNA Guide for Photometric Measurement of Roadway Lighting
Installations
4. LM-61-06 (or latest), IESNA Approved Guide for Identifying Operating Factors
Influencing Measured Vs. Predicted Performance for Installed Outdoor High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Luminaires
5. LM-79-08 (or latest), IESNA Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric
Measurements of Solid-Sate Lighting Products
6. LM-80-08 (or latest), IESNA Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of
LED Light Sources
7. RP-8-00 (or latest), ANSI / IESNA American National Standard Practice for Roadway
Lighting
8. RP-16-10 (or latest), ANSI/IES Nomenclature and Definitions for Illuminating
Engineering
9. TM-3-95 (or latest), A Discussion of Appendix E - "Classification of Luminaire Lighting
Distribution," from ANSI/IESNA RP-8-83
10. TM-15-11 (or latest), Luminaire Classification System for Outdoor Luminaires
11. TM-21-11 (or latest), Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources
F. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
1. IEEE C62.41.2-2002 (or latest), IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of
Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits
2. ANSI/IEEE C62.45-2002 (or latest), IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for
Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
1. ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008 (or latest), American National Standard for the
Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products
H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1. 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC)
I. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1. 1449, Surge Protective Devices
2. 1598, Luminaires
3. 8750, Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products
J. Definitions
1. Lighting terminology used herein is defined in IES RP-16. See referenced documents for
additional definitions.
i. Exception: The term “driver” is used herein to broadly cover both drivers and
power supplies, where applicable.
ii. Clarification: The term “LED light source(s)” is used herein per IES LM-80 to
broadly cover LED package(s), module(s), and array(s).
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. Notify City at (817) 392-7738 a minimum of 7 days before beginning Work on the Project.
2. Notify Inspector prior to pouring roadway illumination assembly foundations.
3. Coordinate with Traffic Services Inspector for pole types, template dimensions and anchor
bolts, and any questions about installing the foundations and conduit.
4. For location of City underground street luminaire cable and conduit call (817) 392-7738 or
(817) 392-8100.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 7
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 7 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
5. Obtain and pay for all permits as required to Work in parkway.
B. Preinstallation Meetings
1. Attend pre-construction meeting.
1.5 LIGHTING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Energy Conservation
1. Connected Load
a. Luminaires shall have maximum nominal luminaire input wattage as specified for each
luminaire type in Appendix A.
2. Lighting Controls
a. See separate controls specification identified in section 1.2 above, if applicable.
b. See section 2.1-B below for driver control interface and performance requirements.
c. See section 2.1-K below for photocontrol receptacle requirements.
B. Photometric Requirements
1. Luminaires shall meet the general criteria provided in the body of this specification and the
particular criteria for each luminaire type defined in Appendix A.
1.6 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS FOR EACH LUMINAIRE TYPE DEFINED IN APPENDIX A
A. General submittal content shall include
1. Completed Appendix E submittal form
2. Luminaire cutsheets
3. Cutsheets for LED light sources
4. Cutsheets for LED driver(s)
a. If dimmable LED driver is specified, provide diagrams illustrating light output and
input power as a function of control signal.
5. Cutsheets for surge protection device, if applicable
6. Instructions for installation and maintenance
7. Summary of luminaire recycled content and recyclability per the FTC Green Guides,
expressed by percentage of luminaire weight
B. LM-79 luminaire photometric report(s) shall be produced by the test laboratory and include
1. Name of test laboratory
a. The test laboratory must hold National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program
(NVLAP) accreditation for the IES LM-79 test procedure or must be qualified, verified,
and recognized through the U.S. Department of Energy’s CALiPER program. For more
information, see http://ts.nist.gov/standards/scopes/eelit.htm or
www.ssl.energy.gov/test_labs.html.
2. Report number
3. Date
4. Complete luminaire catalog number
a. Provide explanation if catalog number in test report(s) does not match catalog number
of luminaire submitted
1) Clarify whether discrepancy does not affect performance, e.g., in the case of
differing luminaire housing color.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 8
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 8 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
2) If nominal performance of submitted and tested products differ, submit additional
LM-79 report(s) and derivation as indicated in Appendix C.
5. Description of luminaire, LED light source(s), and LED driver(s)
6. Goniophotometry
7. Colorimetry
C. Calculations and supporting test data per Appendix B indicating a lumen maintenance life of not
less than 50,000 operating hours
D. Computer-generated point-by-point photometric analysis of maintained photopic light levels as
per Appendix A
1. Calculations shall be for maintained values, i.e. Light Loss Factor (LLF) < 1.0, where LLF
= LLD x LDD x LATF, and
a. Lamp Lumen Depreciation (LLD)
1) Shall be 0.85 (L70) for all luminaires.
2) Shall be the percentage of initial output calculated in section 1.6-C.
b. Luminaire Dirt Depreciation (LDD) = 0.90, as per IES DG-4 for an enclosed and
gasketed roadway luminaire installed in an environment with less than 150 µg/m3
airborne particulate matter and cleaned every four years.
c. Luminaire Ambient Temperature Factor (LATF) = 1.00
2. Use of IES HB-10 mesopic multipliers
a. Shall be disallowed herein, by assuming an S/P ratio of 1.00 for all luminaires.
3. Calculation/measurement points shall be per IES RP-8.
E. Summary of Joint Electron Devices Engineering Council (JEDEC) or Japan Electronics and
Information Technology Industries (JEITA) reliability testing performed for LED packages
F. Summary of reliability testing performed for LED driver(s)
G. Written product warranty as per section 1.7 below
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty Documentation
1. Provide manufacturer warranty information to the City.
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Before approval and purchase, Supplier shall provide at the Owner’s request luminaire
sample(s) identical to product configuration(s) submitted for inspection at the Supplier’s
expense. Owner shall request IES LM-79 testing of luminaire sample(s) to verify performance
is within manufacturer-reported tolerances and Photometric reports and .ies files, per IES LM-
63. The Photometric file must match the luminaire being submitted.
B. After installation, Owner may perform IES LM-50 field measurements to verify performance
requirements outlined in Appendix A, giving consideration to measurement uncertainties
outlined in IES LM-61.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 9
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 9 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
1. Parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration occurs during a
prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation.
2. Exposed anchor bolts shall be protected until pole shaft is installed.
3. Prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being exposed to direct sunlight and extremes
in temperature.
4. The Contractor shall secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with
Section 01 50 00.
B. Delivery and Acceptance
1. Contactor and Inspector shall visually inspect roadway illumination assemblies after
removal to determine the condition of the hardware.
2. Contractor shall protect all salvable material during transport to City specified storage
facility.
3. Delivered material must be in the same condition after removal, as agreed upon by
Contractor and Inspector after removal.
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Provide a minimum ten-year warranty covering maintained integrity and functionality of
1. Luminaire housing, wiring, and connections
2. LED light source(s)
a. Negligible light output from more than 10 percent of the LED packages constitutes
luminaire failure.
3. LED driver(s)
B. Warranty period shall begin 90 days after date of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Requirements
1. Luminaires shall be as specified for each type in Appendix A.
2. Luminaire shall have an external label per ANSI C136.15
3. Luminaire shall have an internal label per ANSI C136.22 to include date of manufacture.
4. Luminaire shall be rated for a minimum of IP65 per ANSI C136.25.
5. Nominal luminaire input wattage shall account for nominal applied voltage and any
reduction in driver efficiency due to sub-optimal driver loading.
6. Luminaires shall start and operate in -20°C to +50°C ambient.
7. Electrically test fully assembled luminaires before shipment from factory
8. Effective Projected Area (EPA) and weight of the luminaire shall not exceed the values
indicated in Appendix A.
9. Luminaires shall be designed for ease of component replacement and end-of-life
disassembly.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 10
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 10 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
10. Luminaires shall be rated for the ANSI C136.31 Vibration Level indicated in Appendix A.
11. LED light source(s) and driver(s) shall be RoHS compliant.
12. Transmissive optical components shall be applied in accordance with OEM design
guidelines to ensure suitability for the thermal/mechanical/chemical environment.
13. Luminaires shall have 4 bolts for mounting to 1-1/4” to 2-3/8” Tenon arm for leveling and
securing of luminaire to tenon arm. 2-Bolt connections shall not be permitted.
14. Luminaires shall come standard with 7-pin photocontrol dimming receptacle meeting ANSI
C136.41 requirements.
B. Driver
1. Rated for minimum of 50,000 hours.
2. Shall be specified with 0-10V dimmable driver to accept input from 7-pin photocell
receptacle.
3. Rated case temperature shall be suitable for operation in the luminaire operating in the
ambient temperatures indicated in section 2.1-A above.
4. Shall accept the voltage or voltage range indicated in Appendix A at 50/60 Hz, and shall
operate normally for input voltage fluctuations of plus or minus 10 percent.
5. Shall have a minimum Power Factor (PF) of 0.90 at full input power and across specified
voltage range.
6. Control signal interface
a. Luminaire types indicated “Required” in Appendix A shall accept a control signal as
specified via separate controls specification referenced in section 1.2 above, e.g., for
dimming.
b. Luminaire types indicated “Not Required” in Appendix A need not accept a control
signal.
C. Electrical immunity
1. Luminaire shall meet the “Basic” requirements in Appendix D. Manufacturer shall indicate
on submittal form (Appendix E) whether failure of the electrical immunity system can
possibly result in disconnect of power to luminaire.
D. Electromagnetic interference
1. Shall have a maximum Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of 20% at full input power and
across specified voltage range.
2. Shall comply with FCC 47 CFR part 15 non-consumer RFI/EMI standards.
E. Electrical safety testing
1. Luminaire shall be listed for wet locations by an OSHA NRTL.
2. Luminaires shall have locality-appropriate governing mark and certification.
F. Painted or finished luminaire components exposed to the environment
1. Shall exceed a rating of six per ASTM D1654 after 1000hrs of testing per ASTM B117.
2. The coating shall exhibit no greater than 30% reduction of gloss per ASTM D523, after 500
hours of QUV testing at ASTM G154 Cycle 6.
G. Thermal management
1. Mechanical design of protruding external surfaces (heat sink fins) for shall facilitate hose-
down cleaning and discourage debris accumulation.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 11
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 11 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
2. Liquids or other moving parts shall not be permitted.
H. IES TM-15 limits for Backlight, Uplight, and Glare (BUG Ratings) shall be as specified for
each luminaire type in Appendix A.
1. Calculation of BUG Ratings shall be for initial (worst-case) values, i.e., Light Loss Factor
(LLF) = 1.0.
2. Luminaires shall not be tilted for calculations.
I. Minimum Color Rendering Index (CRI): 70.
J. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT)
1. If nominal CCT specified in Appendix A is listed in Table 1 below, measured CCT and Duv
shall be as listed in Table 1.
Table 1. Allowable CCT and Duv (adapted from NEMA C78.377)
Manufacturer-Rated
Nominal CCT (K)
Allowable LM-79 Chromaticity Values
Measured CCT (K) Measured Duv
2700 2580 to 2870 -0.006 to 0.006
3000 2870 to 3220 -0.006 to 0.006
3500 3220 to 3710 -0.006 to 0.006
4000 3710 to 4260 -0.005 to 0.007
4500 4260 to 4746 -0.005 to 0.007
5000 4745 to 5311 -0.004 to 0.008
5700 5310 to 6020 -0.004 to 0.008
6500 6020 to 7040 -0.003 to 0.009
2. If nominal CCT specified in Appendix A is not listed in Table 1, measured CCT and Duv
shall be as per the criteria for Flexible CCT defined in NEMA C78.377.
K. The following shall be in accordance with corresponding sections of ANSI C136.37
1. Wiring and grounding
a. All internal components shall be assembled and pre-wired using modular electrical
connections.
2. Mounting provisions
a. Specific configurations are indicated in Appendix A
3. Terminal blocks for incoming AC lines
4. Photocontrol receptacle
5. Latching and hinging
6. Ingress protection
2.2 PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS
A. Any manufacturer offering products that comply with the required product performance and
operation criteria may be considered.
B. Note if a field installed house side shield is available.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 12
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 12 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
2.3 MANUFACTURER SERVICES
A. Manufacturer or local sales representative shall provide installation and troubleshooting support
via telephone and/or email.
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
6/15/2015 F. Griffin Revise to LED type luminaires
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 13
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 13 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
APPENDIX A
APPLICATION-BASED SYSTEM SPECIFICATION
LUMINAIRE TYPE “A” – ARTERIAL TYPICAL
SITE PARAMETERS
ROADWAY DATA: Lane width 12 ft
Number of lanes, total on both sides of median 6
Shoulder width, drivelane to edge of pavement 5 ft
Median width 10 ft
IES pavement class. R1 R2 R3 R4
Posted speed limit ≤ 25 mph > 25 mph
SIDEWALK DATA: Sidewalk width 6 ft
Edge of sidewalk to edge of roadway pavement 4 ft
LIGHT POLE DATA: Luminaire mounting height 40 ft
Arm length, horizontal 9 ft
Luminaires per pole 2
Pole set-back from edge of pavement 5 ft
In-line pole spacing (one pole cycle) 200 ft
Layout One side Opposite Staggered Median
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA: APPLICATION
ROADWAY
PHOTOPIC
ILLUMINANCE:
Maintained average horizontal at pavement 0.9 FC
Avg:min uniformity ratio 3:1
PHOTOPIC
LUMINANCE:
Maintained average luminance n/a
Avg:min uniformity ratio n/a
Max:min uniformity ratio n/a
SIDEWALKS
PHOTOPIC
ILLUMINANCE:
Maintained average horizontal at pavement 0.2 FC
Avg:min uniformity ratio (horizontal) n/a
Maintained min. vertical illum. at 4.9 ft, in directions of travel 0.1 FC
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA: LED LUMINAIRE
INPUT POWER: Max. nominal luminaire input power 150W
NOMINAL CCT: Rated correlated color temperature 3000 K
CUTOFF CLASS: Max. nominal backlight-uplight-glare ratings FULL CUTOFF
VOLTAGE: Nominal luminaire input voltage 120-277V
FINISH: Luminaire housing finish color Gray
WEIGHT: Maximum luminaire weight 30 lb
EPA: Maximum effective projected area 0.9 ft2
MOUNTING: Mtg. method Post-top Side-arm Trunnion/yoke Swivel-tenon
Tenon nominal pipe size (NPS) 1-1/4 inches
And 2-3/8 inches
VIBRATION: ANSI test level Level 1 (normal) Level 2 (bridge/overpass)
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 14
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 14 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
DRIVER: Wireless control
compatible 350mA 530mA 700mA
Appendix B
Estimating LED Lumen Maintenance
IES TM-21 allows for extrapolation of expected lumen maintenance from available test data. The extent
of such extrapolation is limited by the duration of testing completed and the number of samples used in
the testing. The TM-21 methodology shall be used by the manufacturer to determine lamp lumen
depreciation (LLD) at end of lumen maintenance life per section 1.6-C.
The applicant may estimate lumen maintenance in one of two ways:
Option 1: Component Performance
Under this compliance path, the applicant must submit calculations per TM-21 predicting lumen
maintenance at the luminaire level using In Situ Temperature Measurement Testing (ISTMT) and
LM-80 data. To be eligible for the Component Performance option, ALL of the conditions below
must be met. If ANY of the conditions is not met, the component performance option may not
be used and the applicant must use Option 2 for compliance.
1. The LED light source(s) have been tested according to LM-80.
2. The LED drive current specified by the luminaire manufacturer is less than or equal to the
drive current specified in the LM-80 test report.
3. The LED light source(s) manufacturer prescribes/indicates a temperature measurement
point (TS) on the light source(s).
4. The TS is accessible to allow temporary attachment of a thermocouple for measurement of
in situ temperature. Access via a temporary hole in the housing, tightly resealed during
testing with putty or other flexible sealant is allowable.
5. For the hottest LED light source in the luminaire, the temperature measured at the TS
during ISTMT is less than or equal to the temperature specified in the LM-80 test report
for the corresponding drive current or higher, within the manufacturer’s specified
operating current range.
a. The ISTMT laboratory must be approved by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized
Testing Lab (NRTL), must be qualified, verified, and recognized through DOE’s
CALiPER program, or must be recognized through UL’s Data Acceptance Program.
b. The ISTMT must be conducted with the luminaire installed in the appropriate
application as defined by ANSI/UL 1598 (hardwired luminaires), with bird-fouling
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 15
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 15 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
appropriately simulated (and documented by photograph) as determined by the
manufacturer.
Option 2: Luminaire Performance
Under this compliance path, the applicant must submit TM-21 calculations based on LM-79
photometric test data for no less than three samples of the entire luminaire. Duration of
operation and interval between photometric tests shall conform to the TM-21 criteria for LED
light sources. For example, testing solely at 0 and 6000 hours of operation would not be
adequate for the purposes of extrapolation.
Between LM-79 tests, the luminaire test samples must be operated long-term in the appropriate
application as defined by ANSI/UL 1598 (hardwired luminaires). The test laboratory must hold
NVLAP accreditation for the LM-79 test procedure or must be qualified, verified, and recognized
through the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE)’s CALiPER program. The extent of allowable
extrapolation (either 5.5 or 6 times the test duration) depends on the total number of LED light
sources (no less than 10 and preferably more than 19) installed in the luminaire samples, as per
TM-21.
This compliance path poses a greater testing burden to luminaire manufacturers but
incorporates long-term testing of other components in the system, such as drivers.
Under either compliance path, values used for extrapolation shall be summarized per TM-21 Tables 1
and 2. Submitted values for lumen maintenance lifetime and the associated percentage lumen
maintenance shall be “reported” rather than “projected” as defined by TM-21. Supporting diagrams are
requested to facilitate interpretation by Owner.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 16
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 16 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
APPENDIX C
PRODUCT FAMILY TESTING
LM-79 AND ISTMT
It is recognized that due to the time and cost required for product testing, it would not be realistic to
expect manufacturers offering a multitude of unique luminaire configurations to test every possible
configuration. Therefore, the “product families” method may be utilized for LM-79 and ISTMT, whereby
manufacturers identify a set of representative products for which test data can be used to demonstrate
the accuracy of interpolated or extrapolated performance of product configurations lacking test data.
Precedent for this approach can be found in LM-80.
If the particular luminaire configuration submitted has not been tested, the performance may be
conservatively represented by test data for another luminaire configuration having:
The same intensity distribution (typically only applies to LM-79)
The same or lower nominal CCT
The same or higher nominal drive current
The same or greater number of LED light source(s)
The same or lower percentage driver loading and efficiency
The same or smaller size luminaire housing.
A more accurate estimate of performance can be obtained by linear interpolation between two or more
tests differing in terms of the six parameters listed above. For example, consider a hypothetical
luminaire offered in a single size housing, and having the following parameters:
Three intensity distributions: IES Type II, III, or IV
Three CCTs: 4000, 5000, and 6000K
Three drive currents: 350, 525, and 700 mA
Four LED quantities: 20, 40, 60, or 80 LEDs.
Table C.1 illustrates a set of tests which could allow for accurate interpolation between tested
configurations, given a single luminaire housing size and essentially constant driver efficiency; these 10
tests may provide representative data for the 108 possible product configurations. Note that
normalized intensity distribution must not be affected by the other three parameters.
Table C.1. Representative testing of a single luminaire housing size
Tests Intensity distribution CCT Drive current # of LEDs
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 17
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 17 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
(IES Type) (K) (mA)
1, 2, 3 II, III, IV 4000 700 80
4, 5 IV 5000, 6000 700 80
6, 7 IV 4000 325, 525 80
8, 9, 10 IV 4000 700 20, 40, 60
For example, the manufacturer could detail interpolation as shown in Table C.2, applying the following
multipliers to the base test #2 to model a configuration with Type III intensity distribution, 5000K CCT,
525 mA drive current, and 40 LEDs:
Ratio of test #4 lumens to test #3 lumens
Ratio of test #7 lumens to test #3 lumens
Ratio of test #9 lumens to test #3 lumens.
Table C.2. Multipliers for Test #2 to yield: Type III , 5000K, 525mA, 40 LEDs
Test # Intensity distribution
(IES Type)
CCT
(K)
Drive current
(mA)
# of LEDs Multiplier
(lumens ratio)
2 III 4000 700 80 n/a
3 IV 4000 700 80 n/a
4 IV 5000 700 80 #4 / #3
7 IV 4000 525 80 #7 / #3
9 IV 4000 700 40 #9 / #3
Interpolation between minimal LM-79 and ISTMT data is more difficult if housing size increases with
increasing wattage; it may not be clear whether the lowest-wattage configuration would be expected to
“run cooler” than the highest-wattage configuration. In these circumstances, the adequacy of
submitted data is subject to Owner approval.
At this time, the “successor” method cannot be used; luminaires tested must utilize the LED light
source(s) characterized by the submitted LM-80 report.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 18
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 18 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
APPENDIX D
ELECTRICAL IMMUNITY
Test Procedure
Electrical Immunity Tests 1, 2 and 3, as defined by their Test Specifications, shall be performed on an
entire powered and connected luminaire, including any control modules housed within the
luminaire, but excluding any control modules mounted externally, such as a NEMA socket connected
photo-control. A shorting cap should be placed across any such exterior connector.
The luminaire shall be connected to an AC power source with a configuration appropriate for
nominal operation. The AC power source shall have a minimum available short-circuit current of
200A. The luminaire shall be tested at the nominal input voltage specified in Appendix A, or at the
highest input voltage in the input voltage range specified in Appendix A.
Electrical Immunity test waveforms shall be superimposed on the input AC power line at a point
within 6 inches (15cm) of entry into the luminaire using appropriate high-voltage probes and a
series coupler/decoupler network (CDN) appropriate for each coupling mode, as defined by
ANSI/IEEE C62.45-2002. The test area for all tests shall be set up according to ANSI/IEEE C62.45-
2002, as appropriate.
Prior to electrical immunity testing a set of diagnostic measurements shall be performed, and the
results recorded to note the pre-test function of the luminaire after it has reached thermal
equilibrium. These measurements should include at a minimum:
a) For all luminaires, Real Power, Input RMS Current, Power Factor and THD at full power/light
output
b) For luminaires specified as dimmable, Real Power, Input RMS Current, Power Factor and THD at
a minimum of 4 additional dimmed levels, including the rated minimum dimmed level
Tests shall be applied in sequential order (Test 1, followed by Test 2, followed by Test 3). If a failure
occurs during Test 3, then Test 3 shall be re-applied to a secondary luminaire of identical
construction.
Following the completion of Tests 1, 2, and 3, the same set of diagnostic measurements performed
pre-test should be repeated for all tested luminaires, and the results recorded to note the post-test
function of the luminaire(s).
A luminaire must function normally and show no evidence of failure following the completion of
Test 1 + Test 2 + Test 3 (for a single tested luminaire), or the completion of Test 1 + Test 2 on a
primary luminaire and Test 3 on a secondary luminaire. Abnormal behavior during testing is
acceptable.
A luminaire failure will be deemed to have occurred if any of the following conditions exists
following the completion of testing:
a) A hard power reset is required to return to normal operation
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 19
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 19 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
b) A noticeable reduction in full light output (e.g. one or more LEDs fail to produce light, or become
unstable) is observed
c) Any of the post-test diagnostic measurements exceeds by ±5% the corresponding pre-test
diagnostic measurement.
d) The luminaire, or any component in the luminaire (including but not limited to an electrical
connector, a driver, a protection component or module) has ignited or shows evidence of
melting or other heat-induced damage. Evidence of cracking, splitting, rupturing, or smoke
damage on any component is acceptable.
Test Specifications
NOTE: L1 is typically “HOT”, L2 is typically “NEUTRAL” and PE = Protective Earth.
Test 1) Ring Wave: The luminaire shall be subjected to repetitive strikes of a “C Low Ring Wave” as
defined in IEEE C62.41.2-2002, Scenario 1, Location Category C. The test strikes shall be applied as
specified by Table D.1. Prior to testing, the ring wave generator shall be calibrated to simultaneously
meet BOTH the specified short circuit current peak and open circuit voltage peak MINIMUM
requirements. Note that this may require that the generator charging voltage be raised above the
specified level to obtain the specified current peak. Calibrated current probes/transformers designed for
measuring high-frequency currents shall be used to measure test waveform currents.
Test waveform current shapes and peaks for all strikes shall be compared to ensure uniformity
throughout each set (coupling mode + polarity/phase angle) of test strikes, and the average peak
current shall be calculated and recorded. If any individual peak current in a set exceeds by ±10% the
average, the test setup shall be checked, and the test strikes repeated.
Table D.1: 0.5 µS – 100Hz Ring Wave Specification
Parameter Test Level/Configuration
Short Circuit Current Peak 0.5 kA
Open Circuit Voltage Peak 6 kV
Source Impedance 12
Coupling Modes L1 to PE, L2 to PE, L1 to L2
Polarity and Phase Angle Positive at 90° and Negative at 270°
Test Strikes 5 for each Coupling Mode and Polarity/Phase Angle
combination
Time between Strikes 1 minute
Total Number of Strikes = 5 strikes x 4 coupling modes x 2 polarity/phase angles
= 40 total strikes
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 20
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 20 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
Test 2) Combination Wave: The luminaire shall be subjected to repetitive strikes of a “C High
Combination Wave” or “C Low Combination Wave”, as defined in IEEE C62.41.2-2002, Scenario 1,
Location Category C. The test strikes shall be applied as specified by Table D.2. The “Low” test level shall
be used for luminaires with Basic Electrical Immunity requirements, while the “High” test level shall be
used for luminaires with Elevated Electrical Immunity requirements. Prior to testing, the combination
wave generator shall be calibrated to simultaneously meet BOTH the specified short circuit current peak
and open circuit voltage peak MINIMUM requirements. Note that this may require that the generator
charging voltage be raised above the specified level to obtain the specified current peak. Calibrated
current probes/transformers designed for measuring high-frequency currents shall be used to measure
test waveform currents.
Test waveform current shapes and peaks for all strikes shall be compared to ensure uniformity
throughout each set (coupling mode + polarity/phase angle) of test strikes, and the average peak
current shall be calculated and recorded. If any individual peak current in a set exceeds by ±10% the
average, the test setup shall be checked, and the test strikes repeated.
Table D.2: 1.2/50µS – 8/20 µS Combination Wave Specification
Parameter Test Level/ Configuration
1.2/50 µS Open Circuit Voltage Peak Low: 6 kV High: 10kV
8/20 µS Short Circuit Current Peak Low: 3 kA High: 10kA
Source Impedance 2
Coupling Modes L1 to PE, L2 to PE, L1 to L2
Polarity and Phase Angle Positive at 90° and Negative at 270°
Test Strikes 5 for each Coupling Mode and Polarity/Phase Angle
combination
Time Between Strikes 1 minute
Total Number of Strikes = 5 strikes x 4 coupling modes x 2 polarity/phase angles
= 40 total strikes
Test 3) Electrical Fast Transient (EFT): The luminaire shall be subjected to “Electrical Fast Transient
Bursts”, as defined in IEEE C62.41.2 -2002. The test area shall be set up according to IEEE C62.45-2002.
The bursts shall be applied as specified by Table D.3. Direct coupling is required; the use of a coupling
clamp is not allowed.
Table D.3: Electrical Fast Transient (EFT) Specification
Parameter Test Level/ Configuration
Open Circuit Voltage Peak 3 kV
Burst Repetition Rate 2.5 kHz
Burst Duration 15 mS
Burst Period 300 mS
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 21
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 21 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
Coupling Modes L1 to PE, L2 to PE, L1 to L2
Polarity Positive and Negative
Test Duration 1 minute for each Coupling Mode and Polarity combination
Total Test Duration = 1 minute x 7 coupling modes x 2 polarities
= 14 minutes
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 20.01 - 22
ARTERIAL LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRES
Page 22 of 22
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised June 15, 2015
APPENDIX E
PRODUCT SUBMITTAL FORM
Luminaire Type1
Manufacturer
Model number
Housing finish color
Tenon nominal pipe size (inches)
Nominal luminaire weight (lb)
Nominal luminaire EPA (ft2)
Nominal input voltage (V)
ANSI vibration test level Level 1 (Normal) Level 2 (bridge/overpass)
Nominal BUG Ratings
Make/model of LED light source(s)
Make/model of LED driver(s)
Dimmability Dimmable Not dimmable
Control signal interface
Upon electrical immunity system failure Possible disconnect No possible disconnect
Thermal management Moving parts No moving parts
Lumen maintenance testing duration (hr)
Reported lumen maintenance life (hr) 2
Warranty period (yr)
Parameter Nominal value Tolerance (%)
Initial photopic output (lm)
Maintained photopic output (lm)
Lamp lumen depreciation
Initial input power (W)
Maintained input power (W)
Initial LED drive current (mA)
Maintained LED drive current (mA)
Drive current used
In-situ LED Tc (°C)
CCT (K)
Additional product description
1 See Appendix A, and attach supporting documentation as required.
2 Value shall be no less than as specified in section 1.6-C, and shall not exceed six times the testing duration
indicated in the row above. Value shall be consistent with values submitted in the rows below for maintained ligh t
output, maintained input power, and maintained drive current.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 30 - 1
ALUMINUM SIGNS AND SIGN POSTS
Page 1 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 12, 2013
SECTION 34 41 30
ALUMINUM SIGNS AND SIGN POSTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum signs installed on mast arms, signal poles, or steel posts.
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Furnishing and Installing Mast Arm or Signal Pole Mounted Aluminum Signs
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each sign installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install Alum Sign
Mast Arm Mount” installed for:
a) Various types
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Fabricating the aluminum sign
2) Treatment of sign panels required before application of background
materials
3) Application of the background materials and messages to the sign panels
4) Furnishing and fabricating frames, windbeams, stiffeners, or required joint
backing strips
5) Furnishing bolts, rivets, screws, fasteners, clamps, brackets, and sign
support connections
6) Assembling and erecting the signs
7) Preparing and cleaning the signs
2. Installing Mast Arm or Signal/Street Light Pole Mounted Aluminum Signs
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each sign installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid for each “Install Alum Sign Mast Arm
Mount” installed.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Installing each Aluminum Sign
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 30 - 2
ALUMINUM SIGNS AND SIGN POSTS
Page 2 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 12, 2013
2) Furnishing and fabricating frames, windbeams, stiffeners, or required joint
backing strips
3) Furnishing bolts, rivets, screws, fasteners, clamps, brackets, and sign
support connections
4) Assembling and erecting the signs
5) Preparing and cleaning the signs
3. Furnishing and Installing Ground Mounted Aluminum Sign and Post Assemblies
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each assembly furnished and
installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid for each “Furnish/Install Alum Sign
Ground Mount” installed for:
a) Various types
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Fabrication of signs and posts
2) Treatment of sign panels required before application of background
materials
3) Application of the background materials and messages to the sign panels
4) Scheduling utility line locates
5) Furnishing and fabricating frames, windbeams, stiffeners, or required joint
backing strips
6) Furnishing bolts, rivets, screws, fasteners, clamps, brackets, and sign
support connections
7) Assembling and erecting the signs and posts
8) Preparing and cleaning the signs
4. Installing Ground Mounted Aluminum Sign and Post Assemblies
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each assembly installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid for each “Install Alum Sign Ground
Mount” installed.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Scheduling utility line locates
2) Assembling and erecting the signs and posts
3) Preparing and cleaning the signs
5. Furnishing and Installing Aluminum Signs Mounted on Existing Poles
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each sign furnished and installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Furnish/Install Alum Sign
Ex. Pole Mount” furnished and installed.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Furnishing and installing the aluminum sign
2) Furnishing and fabricating frames, windbeams, stiffeners, or required joint
backing strips
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 30 - 3
ALUMINUM SIGNS AND SIGN POSTS
Page 3 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 12, 2013
3) Furnishing bolts, rivets, screws, fasteners, clamps, brackets, and sign
support connections
4) Assembling and erecting the signs
5) Preparing and cleaning the signs
6. Installing Aluminum Signs Mounted on Existing Poles
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each sign installed.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Install Alum Sign Ex. Pole
Mount” installed.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Fabricating the aluminum sign
2) Furnishing and fabricating frames, windbeams, stiffeners, or required joint
backing strips
3) Furnishing bolts, rivets, screws, fasteners, clamps, brackets, and sign
support connections
4) Assembling and erecting the signs
5) Preparing and cleaning the signs
7. Removal of Signs
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each sign panel removed, each sign
panel and post removed, and each sign panel and post removed and
reinstalled.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Remove Sign” for:
a) Various types
b) Various configurations
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Removal of sign panel and post
2) Removal of sign panel
3) Backfill
4) Excavation
5) Returning materials to the City as specified in the plans
6) Cleaning sign panel if sign is to be reinstalled
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. American Standard Testing Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM B209-07– “Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate”.
b. ASTM D4956 – 09e1 – “Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for
Traffic Control”.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 30 - 4
ALUMINUM SIGNS AND SIGN POSTS
Page 4 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 12, 2013
c. ASTM A1011 / A1011- 10 – “Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,
Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-
Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength”.
d. ASTM B117-09 – “Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog)
Apparatus”.
e. AASHTO M 120-08 – “Standard Specification for Zinc”.
3. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
4. Item 644, Small Roadside Sign Supports and Assemblies, Texas Department of
Transportation, Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of
Highways, Streets, and Bridges.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for
specials.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Submit 5 sets of sign shop drawings to City Traffic Services Department for
approval prior to fabrication.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements
1. Signs and parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration
occurs during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation.
2. The Contractor shall secure and maintain a location to store the material in
accordance with Section 01 50 00.
B. Storage and Handling
1. Ship, handle, and store completed sign blanks and completed signs so that corners,
edges, and faces are not damaged.
2. Damage to the sign face that is not visible when viewed at a distance of 50 feet,
night and day, will be acceptable.
3. Replace unacceptable signs.
4. Store all finished signs off the ground and in a vertical position until erected.
5. Store finished signs 60 inches x 60 inches or smaller in a weatherproof building.
6. Larger signs may be stored outside.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 30 - 5
ALUMINUM SIGNS AND SIGN POSTS
Page 5 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 12, 2013
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS TO BE PURCHASED FROM THE CITY
A. Refer to Drawings and Contract Documents to determine if any Items are to be
purchased from the City and installed by the Contractor.
B. Items eligible for purchase from the City include:
1. Aluminum Signs
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers
1. Only the manufacturers as listed in the City’s Standard Products List will be
considered as shown in Section 01 60 00.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a
substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
B. Sign blanks
1. Sign blanks shall be new, unweathered, milled, rolled and finished aluminum alloy
meeting Specifications for 5052H38 as outlined in ASTM B 209 – 02a.
2. Sign blanks shall be free of buckle, crevice, warp, dent, cockles, burrs, corrosion,
dirt, grease, oil, white rust, fingerprints and/or other irregularities.
3. Sign blanks shall be degreased and etched according to industry standards and shall
have an alodined finish applied per MIL-C5541 Class 1A.
4. The thickness of each sign blank shall be uniform throughout.
C. Sign sheeting
1. Acrylic overlay film
a. This film shall be applied to Type I, Type II, Type IV, Type IX, and other
retroreflective sheeting for permanent signing.
b. The film shall be equal to or better than 3M Scotchlite ElectroCut Film Series
1170.
c. Film shall be:
1) Durable
2) Transparent
3) Acrylic
4) Electronic-cuttable
5) Coated with a transparent, pressure sensitive adhesive
6) Have a removable synthetic liner – paper liner is not acceptable
d. Film colors can include yellow, green, blue, brown, red, and orange.
2. Non-reflective vinyl film
a. This film shall be applied to Type IV, Type XI (DG3) retroreflective sheeting
for permanent signing. The film shall be equal to or better than 3M Scotchcal
ElectroCut Film Series 7725.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 30 - 6
ALUMINUM SIGNS AND SIGN POSTS
Page 6 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 12, 2013
b. Film shall be:
1) Durable
2) 2 mil opaque cast vinyl
3) Coated with a transparent, pressure-sensitive adhesive
4) Have a removable synthetic liner – paper line is not acceptable
c. Film colors can include yellow, green, blue, brown, red, and orange.
3. High intensity prismatic retroreflective sheeting with adhesive backing shall:
a. Be combined with other components for permanent signing
b. Typically be an unmetallized microprismatic lens retroreflective element
material
c. Have a smooth outer surface that essentially has the property of the
retroreflector over its entire surface
1) The adhesive backing shall be pressure-sensitive, require no heat, solvent or
other preparation for the adhesion to smooth, clean surfaces.
d. Be equal to or better than 3M Series 3930
e. Be of colors including white, yellow, green, red, blue, and brown
4. Super-high efficiency full cube retroreflective sheeting with pressure sensitive
adhesive shall:
a. Be combined with other components for permanent signing
b. Be a super-high efficiency, full cube retroreflective sheeting having the highest
retroreflectivity characteristics at medium and short road distances.
c. Typically be a microprismatic retroreflective element material
d. Have a smooth outer surface that essentially has the property of retroreflector
over its entire surface
1) The adhesive backing shall be pressure-sensitive, require no heat, solvent or
other preparation for adhesion to smooth, clean surfaces.
e. Be equal to or better than 3M Series 4000
f. Be of colors including white, yellow, green, red, blue, brown, fluorescent
yellow, fluorescent yellow green, and fluorescent orange
D. Telescoping Steel Sign Post
1. Posts and anchors shall conform to the Standard Specifications for Hot Rolled
Carbon Sheet Steel, Structural Quality ASTM designation A1011 / A1011- 10.
2. Posts and anchors shall carry minimum certifiable 60,000 psi yield strength.
3. All posts and anchors shall be manufactured from raw steel, formed and welded on
the corner prior to receiving a triple coat protection of inline hot-dipped, galvanized
zinc per AASHTO M-120-08 (0.8 ounces per square foot) followed by a chromate
conversion coating and a cross-linked polyurethane acrylic exterior coating.
4. The interior shall receive a double coat of zinc based organic coating, tested in
accordance with ASTM B-117-09.
E. Hardware
1. Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or dichromate-sealed aluminum for bolts, nuts,
washers, lock washers, screws, and other sign assembly hardware.
2. Use plastic or nylon washers to avoid tearing the reflective sheeting.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 30 - 7
ALUMINUM SIGNS AND SIGN POSTS
Page 7 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 12, 2013
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED]
3.4 FABRICATION
A. Sign blanks
1. Furnish sign blanks to the sizes and shapes shown on the Drawings and that are free
of buckles, warps, burrs, dents, cockles, or other defects.
2. Do not splice individual extruded aluminum panel.
3. Complete the fabrication of sign blanks, including the cutting and drilling or
punching of holes, before cleaning and degreasing.
4. After cleaning and degreasing, ensure that the substrate does not come into contact
with grease, oils, or other contaminants before the application of the reflective
sheeting.
B. Sign sheeting
1. Use reflective sheeting from the same manufacturer for the entire face of a sign.
2. Apply sheeting to sign blanks in conformance with the recommended procedures of
the sheeting manufacturer.
3. Clean and prepare the outside surface of extruded aluminum flanges in the same
manner as the sign panel face.
4. Minimize the number of splices in the sheeting.
5. Overlap the lap-splices by at least 1/4 inch.
6. Provide a 1-foot minimum dimension for any piece of sheeting.
7. Do not splice sheeting for signs fabricated with transparent screen inks or colored
transparent films.
C. Sign messages
1. Fabricate sign messages to the sizes, types, and colors shown on the Drawings.
2. Use sign message material from the same manufacturer for the entire message of a
sign.
3. Ensure that the screened messages have clean, sharp edges and exhibit uniform
color and reflectivity.
4. Prevent runs, sags, and voids.
D. Telescoping steel sign posts
1. Permissible variation in straightness is 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
2. Tolerances are on the outside size.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 30 - 8
ALUMINUM SIGNS AND SIGN POSTS
Page 8 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 12, 2013
Measurements for outside dimensions shall be made at least 2 inches from end of
tube.
Nominal Outside
Dimensions
(inches)
Outside Tolerance
at all Side Corners
(inches)
1 ½ X 1 ½ ±0.006
1 ¾ X 1 ¾ ±0.008
2 X 2 ±0.008
2 ¼ X 2 ¼ ±0.010
2 ½ X 2 ½ ±0.010
3. Permissible variation in wall thickness is plus 0.011 inches, minus 0.008 inches.
4. Measured in the center of the flat side tolerance is ± 0.01 inch applied to the
specific size determined at the corner.
5. Squareness of Sides and Twist
Nominal
Outside
Dimensions
(inches)
Squareness
Tolerance
(inches)
Twist Permissible in 3
inches Lengths
(inches)
1 ½ X 1 ½ ±0.009 0.050
1 ¾ X 1 ¾ ±0.010 0.062
2 X 2 ±0.012 0.062
2 ¼ X 2 ¼ ±0.014 0.062
2 ½ X 2 ½ ±0.015 0.075
6. All top posts must be capable of fracturing at the point of connection with a single
anchor, when impacted, in such a manner that the piece inside of the anchor can be
removed so as to allow the anchor to receive a new top post.
7. The shape of all posts and anchors shall be square and straight with smooth tubing
welded in one corner with a tolerance that permits telescoping of the next larger or
small size, in ¼-inch increments.
8. All anchors shall be 12 gauge with holes that are fully perforated 7/16-inch
diameter on 1-inch centers for at least the top 4 inches of the anchor while being
truly aligned in the center of the section.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 30 - 9
ALUMINUM SIGNS AND SIGN POSTS
Page 9 of 9
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 12, 2013
9. All top posts shall be 14 gauge with holes that are die embossed knockouts on 1-
inch centers for the entire length of the post and truly aligned in the center of
section.
3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLEANING
A. Wash completed signs with a biodegradable cleaning solution acceptable to the
manufacturers of the sheeting, colored transparent film, and screen ink to remove
grease, oil, dirt, smears, streaks, finger marks, and other foreign material.
B. Wash again before final inspection after erection.
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
11/22/13 S. Arnold Changes to vinyl film, added sign removal bid item
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 50 - 1
SINGLE-MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Page 1 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
SECTION 34 41 50
SINGLE-MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Furnish, install and test Single-Mode Fiber Optic (SMFO) Cable.
B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section
1. None
C. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section
1. None
D. Deviations from City of Fort Worth Standards
1. None
E. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 1 - General Requirements.
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Measurement
a. Measurement for this Item shall be per linear foot of Single Mode Fiber Optic
cable furnished, installed and tested.
2. Payment
a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for as the unit price
bid for “Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable” of the type specified.
b. Price is full compensation for furnishing and installing SMFO and all labor,
tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms
1. SMFO – Single-Mode Fiber Optic
2. PE – Polyethylene
B. Definitions
1. None
C. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard
published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 50 - 2
SINGLE-MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Page 2 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
2. National Electric Code (NEC)
a. Article 770 – Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways
3. American National Standards Institute/Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
a. ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 – Standard for Optical Fiber Outside Plant
Communications Cable
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. City must approve any deviation from Specification ten (10) working days prior to
installation.
B. Preinstallation Meetings
1. None
C. Sequencing
1. None
D. Scheduling
1. None
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements
1. None
B. Storage and Handling Requirements
1. Cable shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration occurs during
a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation.
2. The Contractor shall secure and maintain a location to store the material in
accordance with Section 01 50 00.
C. Packaging Waste Management
1. None
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 50 - 3
SINGLE-MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Page 3 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty
1. Manufacturer’s warranty shall be in accordance with Division 1.
2. A 2 year warranty shall be required on all equipment furnished by the Contractor.
B. Special Warranty
1. None
C. Extended Correction Period
1. None
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 MATERIALS / SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers
1. Manufacturer List
a. Corning Optical Communications, LLC or approved equal.
a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections.
2. Substitution Limitations
a. Any equipment, product type, or material that is not listed in this Specification
is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 25 00 and not installed until approved.
3. Product Options
a. ALTOS® LiteTM Loose Tube, Gel-Free, Single-Jacket, Single-Armored Cable,
96 F, Single-mode (OS2) or approved equal.
1) Part Number 096EUC-T4100D20
2) Bundles including 2, 12, 24, 48, 96 and 144.
B. Description
1. Regulatory Requirements
a. Provide new materials that confirm to the details as shown on plans, the
requirements of this Item and NEC requirements.
2. Sustainability Characteristics
a. None
C. Performance / Design Criteria
1. General Characteristics
a. Furnish and place a SMFO cable of type and size shown on the plans or as
directed by the Engineer.
b. Provide a loose tube, armored, single-mode (OS2) fiber optic cable that is
suitable for aerial, direct buried, and duct applications installed in an outdoor
environment.
2. Temperature Range
a. Provide a SMFO cable that conforms to the following temperature
requirements without degradation of material properties:
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 50 - 4
SINGLE-MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Page 4 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
1) Storage Temperature Range: -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to 158°F)
2) Installation Range: -30°C to 70°C (-22°F to 158°F)
3) Operation Temperature Range: -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to 158°F)
3. Cable Design
a. Provide a SMFO cable that is designed to the following requirements:
1) Dielectric central element,
2) 2, 12, 24, 48, 96 or 144 fiber count,
3) Blue, orange, green, brown, slate, white, red, black, yellow, violet, rose,
aqua fiber coloring,
4) Twelve (12) Fibers per tube,
5) Blue, orange, green brown slate, white, red, black buffer tube color coding,
6) 2.5 mm (0.1 in) buffer tube diameter,
7) Water-swellable tape,
8) Two (2) ripcords,
9) Corrugated steel tape armor,
10) Polyethylene (PE) outer jacket material,
11) Black outer jacket color, and
12) Twelve (12) Maximum fibers per tube.
b. Provide a SMFO cable that conforms with the following mechanical
characteristics:
1) Maximum short-term tensile strength: 2700 N (600 lbf)
2) Maximum long-term tensile strength: 890 N (200 lbf)
3) Weight: 162 kg/km (109 lb/1000 ft)
4) Nominal outer diameter: 13.8 mm (0.54 in)
5) Minimum bending radius installation: 207 mm (8.1 in)
6) Minimum bending radius operation: 138 mm (5.4 in)
c. Provide a SMFO cable that conforms to the following chemical characteristics:
1) Free of hazardous substances according to RoHS 2002/95/EG.
d. Provide a SMFO cable that conforms to the following optical characteristics:
1) Single-mode (OS2),
2) Fiber category G.652.D,
3) Fiber code E,
4) Performance Option Code 00,
5) Wavelengths 1310 nm / 1383 nm / 1550 nm, and
6) Maximum attenuation 0.35 dB/km / 0.35 dB/km / 0.25 dB/km
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections
1. Performance testing for all materials not previously tested and approved may be
required.
2. If technical data is not considered adequate for approval, the City may require
material testing by an independent testing laboratory.
3. The contract period will not be extended for time lost or delays caused by testing
prior to final approval of any items.
B. Non-Conforming Work
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 50 - 5
SINGLE-MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Page 5 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
1. Failure to conform to the requirements of any test will be counted as a defect and
the materials will be rejected.
2. Rejected materials may be offered again for retest provided all non-compliances
have been corrected and retested by an independent testing laboratory.
C. Manufacturer Services
1. Carefully examine each SMFO system component to verify that the materials,
design, construction, markings, and workmanship comply with the requirements of
its specification.
D. Coordination of Other Tests and Inspections
1. None
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED]
3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.3 PREPARATION
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Special Techniques
1. Refer to manufacturer recommendations for sheath removal.
2. Refer to manufacturer recommendations for lashed aerial installation methods.
3. Installation in multi-duct conduit
a. Installation methods shall conform to the recommendations of the fiber optic
cable manufacturer.
b. Ensure multi-duct conduit is continuous, reasonably dry, completely free of
debris, and without sharp projections, edges, or short bends.
c. If required by the Inspector, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the conduit is
dry and free of debris by pulling a swab and/or mandrel through the conduit.
d. The Contractor shall furnish, at the request of the Traffic Management
Manager or designee a copy of the manufacturer's recommendations, which
shall include methods of attaching pull cable, pulling tension per conductor
size and per radius of conduit bend, and the type of lubricant to be used.
e. Installation and removal shall be done in such a way as to prevent damage to
the existing and/or new cables.
f. In the event of damage, the Contractor shall bear the responsibility of providing
the material and labor for replacement of defective cables at no extra cost to the
City.
g. All conduit runs shall be measured accurately and precisely for determining
cable lengths to be installed. All conduit run measurements shall take place in
the presence of the Inspector.
h. The Inspector shall record all cable measurements and include the distances on
an as-built drawing.
i. In locations where new cables are to replace existing cables, the Contractor
may use the removed cables as a measuring device to determine the lengths of
the new cables to be installed.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 50 - 6
SINGLE-MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Page 6 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
j. The manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions shall not be
exceeded under any circumstances.
k. If so required by the Inspector, the Contractor shall insert a dynamometer in the
pull wire as the cables are being pulled into the conduit to demonstrate that the
maximum tensions are not being exceeded.
l. The cable shall be fed freely off the reel into the conduit without making a
reverse curve.
m. At the pulling end, the pull wire and cables shall be drawn from the conduit in
direct line with the conduit.
n. Sheaves or other suitable devices shall be used as required to reduce any
hazards to the cable during installation.
o. The cables shall be adequately lubricated to reduce friction and further
minimize possible damage.
1) Such lubricants shall not be the grease or oil type used on lead sheathed
cables, but shall be one of several commercially available wire pulling
compounds that are suitable for PVC sheathed cables.
2) They shall consist of soap, talc, mica, or similar materials and shall be
designed to have no deleterious effect on the cables being used.
p. The Contractor shall adhere to the cable manufacturer's recommended values
for the minimum bending radii to which cables may be bent for permanent
training during installation.
1) These limits do not apply to conduit bends, sheaves, or other curved
surfaces around which these cables may be pulled under tension while
being installed.
2) Larger radius bends are required for such conditions.
B. Interface with Other Work
1. None
C. Systems Integration
1. None
D. Tolerances
1. None
3.5 [REPAIR] / [RESTORATION] [NONE]
3.6 RE-INSTALLATION
A. Prior to final acceptance by the City, the Contractor is responsible for removal,
replacement and reinstallation of any damaged material at the Contractor's expense.
3.7 SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests and Inspections
1. Initial testing of all materials, construction items, or products incorporated in the
Work will be performed at the direction of the City.
2. The failure to require tests of materials by the Inspector shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility of furnishing materials conforming to these
Specifications.
3. Tests, unless otherwise specified, shall be made in accordance with the latest methods
of the ASTM or other approved test methods.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 41 50 - 7
SINGLE-MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Page 7 of 7
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised February 26, 2016
a. The Contractor shall provide such facilities, as the Inspector may require, for
the collecting and forwarding of samples and shall not use the materials
represented by the samples until tests have been made.
b. The Contractor shall furnish adequate samples without charge.
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NONE]
3.9 ADJUSTING [NONE]
3.10 CLEANING [NONE]
3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Prior to final acceptance by the City, the Contractor is responsible for removal,
replacement and reinstallation of any damaged material at the Contractor's expense.
B. Whenever the Work provided for and contemplated under the Contract has been found by
the Inspector to be completed to his / her satisfaction, as shown in the Drawings, final
cleaning up has been performed and equipment supplied by the contractor has operated
continuously for a minimum of 30 days in a satisfactory manner, the Contractor will be
released from further maintenance on that particular intersection.
1. Such partial acceptance will be made in writing and shall in no way void or alter
any terms of the Contract.
2. If equipment fails, a new 30-day test period will start when the equipment has been
repaired or replaced.
3.12 PROTECTION [NONE]
3.13 MAINTENANCE
A. While performing Work under this Contract, the Contractor bears the sole risk of loss
for damages to or destruction of any equipment or appurtenances, on equipment that
was not to be replaced or installed under this Contract, but which was damaged or
destroyed through the fault or negligent acts of the Contractor.
B. The Contractor shall replace such damaged or destroyed equipment, etc., at no cost to
the City, regardless of whether or not the damaged or destroyed equipment, etc., was a
part of this Contract or any warranties under this Contract.
C. The Contractor's responsibility shall cease under this paragraph upon written
acceptance of an intersection by the City.
3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NONE]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 71 13 - 1
TRAFFIC CONTROL
Page 1 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
SECTION 34 71 13
TRAFFIC CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Installation of Traffic Control Devices and preparation of Traffic Control Plans
B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification
1. None.
C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract
2. Division 1 – General Requirements
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Measurement and Payment
1. Installation of Traffic Control Devices
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for Traffic Control Devices shall be per month for the Project
duration.
a) A month is defined as 30 calendar days.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the
unit price bid for “Traffic Control”.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Traffic Control implementation
2) Installation
3) Maintenance
4) Adjustments
5) Replacements
6) Removal
7) Police assistance during peak hours
2. Portable Message Signs
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item shall be per week for the duration of use.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance to this Item and
measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid for at the unit
price bid per week for “Portable Message Sign” rental.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Delivery of Portable Message Sign to Site
2) Message updating
3) Sign movement throughout construction
4) Return of the Portable Message Sign post-construction
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 71 13 - 2
TRAFFIC CONTROL
Page 2 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
3. Preparation of Traffic Control Plan Details
a. Measurement
1) Measurement for this Item be per each Traffic Control Detail prepared.
b. Payment
1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each “Traffic Control Detail”
prepared.
c. The price bid shall include:
1) Preparing the Traffic Control Plan Details for closures of 24 hours or
longer
2) Adherence to City and Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
(TMUTCD)
3) Obtaining the signature and seal of a licensed Texas Professional Engineer
4) Incorporation of City comments
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference
standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this
Specification, unless a date is specifically cited.
2. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD).
3. Item 502, Barricades, Signs, and Traffic Handling of the Texas Department of
Transportation, Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of
Highways, Streets, and Bridges.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. Contact Traffic Services Division (817-392-7738) a minimum of 48 hours prior to
implementing Traffic Control within 500 feet of a traffic signal.
B. Sequencing
1. Any deviations to the Traffic Control Plan included in the Drawings must be first
approved by the City and design Engineer before implementation.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide the City with a current list of qualified flaggers before beginning flagging
activities. Use only flaggers on the qualified list.
B. Obtain a Street Use Permit from the Street Management Section of the Traffic
Engineering Division, 311 W. 10th Street. The Traffic Control Plan (TCP) for the
Project shall be as detailed on the Traffic Control Plan Detail sheets of the Drawing set.
A copy of this Traffic Control Plan shall be submitted with the Street Use Permit.
C. Traffic Control Plans shall be signed and sealed by a licensed Texas Professional
Engineer.
D. Contractor shall prepare Traffic Control Plans if required by the Drawings or
Specifications. The Contractor will be responsible for having a licensed Texas
Professional Engineer sign and seal the Traffic Control Plan sheets.
E. Lane closures 24 hours or longer shall require a site-specific traffic control plan.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 71 13 - 3
TRAFFIC CONTROL
Page 3 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
F. Contractor responsible for having a licensed Texas Professional Engineer sign and seal
changes to the Traffic Control Plan(s) developed by the Design Engineer.
G. Design Engineer will furnish standard details for Traffic Control.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED]
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED]
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED]
1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED]
1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED]
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED]
2.2 ASSEMBLIES AND MATERIALS
A. Description
1. Regulatory Requirements
a. Provide Traffic Control Devices that conform to details shown on the
Drawings, the TMUTCD, and TxDOT’s Compliant Work Zone Traffic Control
Device List (CWZTCDL).
2. Materials
a. Traffic Control Devices must meet all reflectivity requirements included in the
TMUTCD and TxDOT Specifications – Item 502 at all times during
construction.
b. Electronic message boards shall be provided in accordance with the TMUTCD.
2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED]
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION [NOT USED]
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection of In-Place Conditions
1. Protect existing traffic signal equipment.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Follow the Traffic Control Plan (TCP) and install Traffic Control Devices as shown on
the Drawings and as directed.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 71 13 - 4
TRAFFIC CONTROL
Page 4 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
B. Install Traffic Control Devices straight and plumb.
C. Do not make changes to the location of any device or implement any other changes to
the Traffic Control Plan without the approval of the Engineer.
1. Minor adjustments to meet field constructability and visibility are allowed.
D. Maintain Traffic Control Devices by taking corrective action as soon as possible.
1. Corrective action includes but is not limited to cleaning, replacing, straightening,
covering, or removing Devices.
2. Maintain the Devices such that they are properly positioned, spaced, and legible,
and that retroreflective characteristics meet requirements during darkness and rain.
E. If the Inspector discovers that the Contractor has failed to comply with applicable federal
and state laws (by failing to furnish the necessary flagmen, warning devices, barricades,
lights, signs, or other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property), the
Inspector may order such additional precautionary measures be taken to protect persons
and property.
F. Subject to the approval of the Inspector, portions of this Project, which are not affected by
or in conflict with the proposed method of handling traffic or utility adjustments, can be
constructed during any phase.
G. Barricades and signs shall be placed in such a manner as to not interfere with the sight
distance of drivers entering the highway from driveways or side streets.
H. To facilitate shifting, barricades and signs used in lane closures or traffic staging may
be erected and mounted on portable supports.
1. The support design is subject to the approval of the Engineer.
I. Lane closures shall be in accordance with the approved Traffic Control Plans.
J. If at any time the existing traffic signals become inoperable as a result of construction
operations, the Contractor shall provide portable stop signs with 2 orange flags, as
approved by the Engineer, to be used for Traffic Control.
K. Contractor shall make arrangements for police assistance to direct traffic if traffic signal
turn-ons, street light pole installation, or other construction will be done during peak traffic
times (AM: 7 am – 9 am, PM: 4 pm - 6 pm).
L. Flaggers
1. Provide a Contractor representative who has been certified as a flagging instructor
through courses offered by the Texas Engineering Extension Service, the American
Traffic Safety Services Association, the National Safety Council, or other approved
organizations.
a. Provide the certificate indicating course completion when requested.
b. This representative is responsible for training and assuring that all flaggers are
qualified to perform flagging duties.
2. A qualified flagger must be independently certified by 1 of the organizations listed
above or trained by the Contractor’s certified flagging instructor.
3. Flaggers must be courteous and able to effectively communicate with the public.
4. When directing traffic, flaggers must use standard attire, flags, signs, and signals
and follow the flagging procedures set forth in the TMUTCD.
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575
34 71 13 - 5
TRAFFIC CONTROL
Page 5 of 5
CITY OF FORT WORTH [Insert Project Name]
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS [Insert Project Number]
Revised November 22, 2013
5. Provide and maintain flaggers at such points and for such periods of time as may be
required to provide for the safety and convenience of public travel and Contractor’s
personnel, and as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
a. These flaggers shall be located at each end of the lane closure.
M. Removal
1. Upon completion of Work, remove from the Site all barricades, signs, cones, lights
and other Traffic Control Devices used for work-zone traffic handling in a timely
manner, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
3.4 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED]
3.5 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED]
3.6 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED]
3.7 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED]
3.8 ADJUSTING [NOT USED]
3.9 CLEANING [NOT USED]
3.10 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED]
3.11 PROTECTION [NOT USED]
3.12 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED]
3.13 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
Revision Log
DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE
11/22/13 S. Arnold Added police assistance, requirement for when a site specific TCP is required
Altamesa Boulevard Extension for 46 Ranch Addition
CPN-102575